Byfa (MDX)

@
ACURA
MDX
Servic e Manual 2007
Generallnforrnation
Chassis and Paint Codes ........................ .......... 1-2
Identification Number Locations ........ ............ 1-3
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-4
Under-hood Emission Control Label ............... 1-7
Lift and Support Points .................... ...... .......... 1-8
ToW'ing .............................................................. 1-9
Parts Marking .................................................... 1-10
Precautions for Super Handling All Wheel
Drive System ..................... ......... 1-10
I General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
Vehicle Identification Number
2HN Y02 8 2 * 7 H 500001
II111III
a b cdefgh
il. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle
2NH: Honda of Canada Mfg.,
Honda Canada Inc.,
Acura Multipurpose passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
YD2: Acura MDX/J37 A 1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
USA models
2:MDX
3: TECH
4: TECH with Rear Entertainment System
5: SPORT
8: SPORT with Rear Entertainment System
Canada Model
2:MDX
5: TECH
8: ELITE
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
7:'07
g. Factory Code
H: Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada
h. Serial Number
1-2
000001-: Canada models
500001-: USA models
Vehicle Identification Number.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification and Paint
Code.
Vehlclo Identification Number,
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
CJOCJ __ O
., ....
PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
En ine Number
J37A1 - 1000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J37A1: 3.7 L SOHC V1ECSequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number"
BYFA - 9000001
II
a b
a. Transmission Type
.. BYFA: 5-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
B-533M Steel Blue Metallic
G-525M Aberdeen Green Metallic
NH-578 Taffeta White
NH-671P ~ e n White Pearl
NH-689M Billet Silver Metallic
NH-705M Nimbus GrClY.. Metallic
NH-707 Formal Black
R-529P Dark Cherry Pearl
YR-545M Desert Rock Metallic
INTERIOR
COLOR CODE
PAINT CODE
USA Canada
models models
0 0
0 0
0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0
BACK
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Transmission Number
Engine Number
1-3
BACK
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:
HIGHER ROLLOVER
RISK WARNING
USA models
SRSWARNING
INFOMATION
STEERING COLUMN ~ ~ 7 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ - ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
NOTICE ,
MONITOR NOTICE
Steering Wheel:
CABLE REEL CAUTION
1-4
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
SRS INFORMATION
USA models
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG WARNING TAG
(CHILD SEAT)
USA models
SIDEAIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
FRONT SEAT BELT
TENSIONER CAUTION
Rear Passenger's Compartment:
ROOF SIDE
MODULE DANGER
BACK
SRSWARNING
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
RADIATOR
INFOMATION
RADIATOR CAP DANGER
SERVICE INFOMATION
(Under-hood Emission
Controllnfomation)
BATTERY DANGER
TIRE INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION
Located on driver's and passenger's
doorjamb (not shown)
1-5
BACK
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group Identification
Example:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 REQULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR NEW
LEY II ULEV LIGHT-DUTVTRUCKS.
7HN 0.7
7HNXR0163BBY
OBO .. CERTIFIED
LOADED 11M TESTING OF THIS VEHICLE MUST BE CONDUCTED
ON A FOURWHEEl DRIVE SPEED SYNCHRONIZED DYNAMOMETER.
OTHERWISE, A NONLOADED TEST PROCEDURE MUST BE
PERFORMED.
FEDERAL in CANADA

RVE-AOO
ACURA
HONDA MOTOR CO . LTD.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV" ULEV LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS.
1-6
Test Group and Evaporative Family
Test Group:
7 HNX T 03.7 XKR
IIIII
ab cd
a. Model Year
7: '07
e
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
T:LDT
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
XKR
Evaporative Family:
7 HNX R 0163 BBY
IIIII
abc d e
a. Model Year
7: '07
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
BACK
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components
such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed
from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can
change causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
Vehicle Lift
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's
front support points (B) and rear support points (C).
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle
gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the
vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift
blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use
safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
gearshift lever in the P position.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C) and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
4. Position the safety stands under the support points
and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
1-7 BACK
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle with just a rope or chain. Itis very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle
on the back of a truck. This is the only way of
transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is
equipped with front tie down hook slots (A), and rear tie
down hook slots (8).
The tie down hook slots can be used secure the vehicle
to the truck.
Front:
A
Rear:
1-8
Towing Hook Installation
The detachable front towing hook is for towing very
short distance, such as freeing the car. The hook
mounts to the anchor in the front and rear bumper.
INOTICEI
To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing
hook for straight flat ground towing only. Do not
tow on an angle.
The tow hook should not be used to tow the
vehicle onto a flat-bed. Do not use itas a tie
down.
1. Remove the cover (A) from the front bumper.
Front bumper:
Rear bumper:
2. Remove the towing hook placed behind a cover
under the cargo area.
3. Screw in the towing hook (8), and tighten it
securely by hand.
BACK
Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground. Never tow the vehicle with wheel lift
equipment.
Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal
cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle is unacceptable.
The only recommended way oftowing the vehicle is on
a flat-bed truck.
INOTICEI
Towing the vehicle with only two wheels on the
ground will damage parts ofthe SH-AWD system. If
the vehicle is damaged, it should be towed on a flat-
bed truck or trailer .
Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
1-9
BACK
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are
marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These
labels should not be removed. The original engine or
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the
replacement engine or transmission.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking
labels during body repair. Mask the labels before
repairing the part.
1-10
Precautions for Super Handling All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
This vehicle is equipped with the Super Handling All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) system. The SH-AWD system
distributes driving torque between the front and rear
wheels when accelerating and when wheel spin occurs.
The SH-AWD system does not have a manual switch to
disable the AWD system. Whenever service work
requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the
engine, always lift up and support the vehicle so all four
wheels are off the ground.
BACK
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block ...................... .................................. 2-4
Engine .Lubrication .................. : ............................. 2-5
Cooling System ...................................................... 2-5
Fuel. and Emissions ............................................... 2-5
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential .... 2-6
. Rear Differential ........................................... . ~ ...... 2-15
Steering ............................................................... ; ... 2-15
Suspension ..... ;...................................................... 2-15
Brakes ............ . ........................................... ......... 2-16
Air Conditioning ..... ; .............................................. 2-16
Design Specifications
Dimensions ....... ; .................................................. 2-17
Weight (USA) .... .. .................................. ; ............... 2-17
Weight (CANADA) ................................................. 2-17
Engine .................................................................... 2-17
Starter .................................................................... 2-17
Automatic Transmission ...................................... 2-17
Steering .................................................................. 2-18
Suspension ............................................................ 2-18
Tires ........................................................................ 2-18
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-18
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-18
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-18
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-19
Body Specifications .............................................. 2-20
E EI t
I
ngme ec rica
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage
12V
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Spark plug Type
NGK: IZFR6K11
.!'
DENSO: SKJ200R-M11
Gap 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) --
Ignition timing At idle In N or P position 102BTOC
Check the red mark
Drive belt Tension Autoctensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5 Vand 130A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 'f (20 'C) 2.3 -2.7 k Q
Slip ring 0.0. 14.2-14.4 mm(0.56-0.57 in.) 13.8 mm (0.54 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 2.94-3.53 N (0.30-0.36 kgf, 0.66-0.80 Ibf)
Starter Output 1.8kW
Commutator mica depth 0.50-0.90' mm (0.020-0.035 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator 0.0. 28.9-29.0 mm (1.138-1.142 in.) 28.0 mm (1.102 in.)
Brush length 15.0-16.0 mm (0.59-0.63 in.) 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 22.3"':""27.3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00-6.13Ibf)
E ngme A ssem bl IV
Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm', 144 psi) --
Check the engine with the starter Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) --
cranking variation
2-2
BACK
c r d ;ylln er H d ea
Head Warpage
-- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height
120.95-121.05 mm (4.7618-4.7657 in.) --
Camshaft End play
0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Total runout
0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 35.112 mm (1.3823 in.) --
Intake, mid 36.394 mm (1.4328 in.) --
Intake, 35.112 mm (1.3823 in.) --
, ' secondary
Exhaust 36.389 mm (1.4326 in.) --
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) --
"
Exhaust 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75-47.55 mm (1.841-1.872 in.) 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Valve spring Free length Intake 51.48 mm (2.027 in.) --
Exhaust 51.05 mm (2.010 in.) --
Valve guide 1.0. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171-0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.) --
Exhaust 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in.) --
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010...,.0.0026 in.) 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
2-3
BACK
E BI k ngme oc
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit
Block Warpage of deck
0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. --
Bore diameter
90.000-90.015 mm (3.5433-3.5439in.) --
Piston Skirt 0.0. at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from
89.893-89.996 mm (3.5426-3.5431 in.) --
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder 0.004-0.032 mm (0.0001-0.0013 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Ring groove width Top ..
'1.240-1.255 mm (0.0488-0.0494 in.) 1.27 mm (0.050 in.)
Second 1.220-1.235 mm (0.0480-0.0486 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in.) 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top "', 0.055-0.085 mm (0.0022-0.0033 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second 0.030-0.060 mm (0.0012-0.0024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.30-0.40 mm (0.012-0.016 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648 in.) 21.954 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm . 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in.) \. 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
., Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652 in.) --
Large-end bore diameter 60.0 mm (2.36 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71.976-72.000 mm (2.8337-2.8346 in.) --
Rod journal diameter 56.976-57.000 mm (2.2431-2.2441 in.) --
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0 0 ~ 5 mm (0.0010 in.) max. 0.030 mm (0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance .,0.019-0.045 mm (0.0007-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
2-4
BACK
E Lb nglne u flcatlon
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New ServIce Umlt
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 5.0 i.. (5.3 US qt)
. Oil change. 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
including filter
Oil change. 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.03-0.09 mm (0.002-0.004 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10-0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (O.OOS in.)
Pump housing-to-outar rotor axial 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.1
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm'.10 psi)
176 'F (80 "C) At 3.000 rpm 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm'. 71 psi)
c r 00 Ing S t iys em
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine. Engine overhaul 9.21 (2.43 US gal)
heater. hoses. and reservoir) Coolant change 7.3 L 11.93 US gal)
Use Acura Long Life Antifreeze!
Coolant Type 2
Coolant reservoir Coolant capacity 0.7L (0.19 US gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm'. 14-18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169-176'F (76 -eO "C)
Fully open 194'F (90 "C)
Valve lift atfully open 10.0 mm (0.39 in.) min.
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel pressure Pressure with regulator vacuum hose 390-440 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm'. 57-64 psi)
regulator disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 79.5 L (21.0 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed without load In N or P position 71050rpm
Idle speed with high electrical load In N or P position 71050rpm
(AIC switch ON. temperature set to
Max Cool. blower fan on High. rear
window defogger ON. and headlights
on high beam)
2-5
BACK
Sta,ndards and Service Limits
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential
Item' Measurement' Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.8 L (3.0 US qt)
transmission fluid Use Acura ATF-Z1 Overhaul 7.9 L (8.3 US qt)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm 960-1,050 kPa 910 kPa
iri N or P position (9.8-10.7 kgf/cm', 139-152 psi) (9.3 kgf/cm', 132 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm' 920-1,000 kPa 870kPa
-
' ,
in D position (9.4-10.1 kgf/cm', 133-145 psi) (8.9 kgf/cm', 126 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880kPa
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880 kPa
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880 kPa
in M position (9.5-10.3 kgf/cm', 135-147 psi) (9.0 kgf/cm', 128 psi)
2nd gear
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm ,930-1,010 kPa 880kPa
','
1st gear
1st-hold clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 750-840 kPa 700kPa
1st gear
Torque converter Stall speed 1,950 rpm 1,800-2,100 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground
;
Clutch Clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance 1st -- 1.15-1.35mm
(0.045-0.053 in.)
-,
2nd -- 1.05-1.25 mm
(0.041-0.049 in.)
" ' 3rd -- 0.9-1.1 mm
(0.035-0.043 in.)
4th
-- 0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
5th -'-- 0;75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
1st-hold -- 0.6-1.0mm
(0.024-0.039 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 68.3 mli1 (2.69 in.) 66.3 mm (2.61 in.)
2nd 48.3 mm (1.90 in.) 46.3 mm (1.82 in.)
3rd 52.0 mm (2.05 in.) 50.0 mm (1.97 in.)
4th 37.4 mm (1.47 in.) 35.5 mm (1.39 in.)
5th 53.7 mm (2.11 in.) 51.7 mm (2.64 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
2nd 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) When discolored
3rd 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) When discolored
4th 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
5th 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
1st-hold 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) , When discolored
1st clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
Mark 5 3.5 mm (0.138 in.) When discolored
1st-hold clutch plate B thickness 5.0 mm (0.197 in.) When discolored
2-6
BACK
Clutch (cont'd) 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch end plate Mark 1 2.,1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Stator shaft 1.0. at needle bearing contact area Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in.) When worn or
side damaged
ATF pump side 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) --
1.0. at mainshaft sealing ring contact 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
area
ATFpump Gear-to-body thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.008-0.010 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.003-0.005 in.) --
Driven gear 1.0. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525 in.) When worn or
damaged
Driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.990 mm (0.5504-0.5508 in.) When worn or
damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.90-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.4 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and -- -- When worn or
pawl damaged
Regulator valve Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516 in.) --
body Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Mainshaft sealing ring contact 1.0. 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
Main valve body Intermediary shaft sealing ring contact 35.000-35.025 mm (1.3780-1.3789 in.) 35.05 mm (1.3799 in.)
1.0.
ATF guide collar Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.1437 in.)
1.0.
Mainshaft Diameter at stator shaft needle bearing 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055 in.) When worn or
contact area damaged
5th gear collar diameter at needle 39.981-39.991 mm (1.5741-1.5744 in.) When worn or
bearing contact area damaged
5th gear collar length 48.7-48.8 mm (1.917-1.921 in.) --
5th gear collar flange thickness 4.5-4.7 mm (0.177-0.185 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear 1.0. 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear axial clearance 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.90-1.96 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
(cont'd)
2-7
BACK
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential (cont'd)
Countershaft Diameter at bearing contact area Torque'converter 40.505-40.515 mm (1.5947-1.5951 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
5th gear 34.975-34.991 mm (1.3770-1.3776 in.) When worn or damaged
Diameter of 2nd gear at needle 61.975-61.991 mm (2.2400-2.2406 in.) When worn or damaged
bearing contact area
Reverse gear collar 0.0. 39.979-40.000 mm (1.5740-1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse selector hub 0.0. 55.885-55.900 mm (2.200-2.201 in.) When worn or damaged
Cotter thickness 4th gear 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
2nd gear 7.74-7.52 mm (0.295-0.296 in.) --
1.0. of gears 5th gear 41.000-41.016 mm (1.6142-1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
Idler gear 70.000-70.019 mm (2.7559-2.7567 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 2nd gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) --
5th gear 0.12-0.27 mm (0.0047-0.0106 in.) --
Idler gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) --
Reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in.) --
61 mm washer thickness A 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.) When worn or damaged
B 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) When worn or damaged
0 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) When worn or damaged
E 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) When worn or damaged
F 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) When worn or damaged
G 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) When worn or damaged
50.8 mm washer thickness A 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.) When worn or damaged
H 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.) When worn or damaged
I 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.) When worn or damaged
.'
J 2.09 mm (0;0823 in.) When worn or damaged
K 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.) When worn or damaged
L 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.) When worn or damaged
M 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.) When worn or damaged
N 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.) When worn or damaged
p
2.21 mm (0.0870 in.) When worn or damaged
Q 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.) When worn or damaged
R 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.) When worn or damaged
S 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.) When worn or damaged
T 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.) When worn or damaged
U 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.) When worn or damaged
V 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.) When worn or damaged
W 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.) When worn or damaged
X 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.) When worn or damaged
Z 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.) When worn or damaged
AA 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.) When worn or damaged
35 x 47 mm thrust washer 5.97-6.00 mm (0.2350-0.2362 in.) When worn or damaged
thickness
2-8
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification
Standard or New
Service Limit
Secondary shaft Diameter at bearing contact area 2nd gear
43.986-43.999 mm (1.7317-1.7322 in.) When worn or damaged
Torque converter
housing bearing
Torque converter 28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257-1.1263 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
(shaft end side)
Diameter of 1st gear collar at
needle bearing contact area
1.0. of gears 1st gear 44.000-44.013 mm (1.7323-1.7328 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 1st gear 0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in.) --
2nd gear 0.060-0.228 mm (0.0024-0.0090 in.)
--
52 mm thrust washer thickness M 2.405 mm (0.095 in.) When worn or damaged
J 2.480 mm (0.098 in.) When worn or damaged
A 2.705 mm (0.106 in.) When worn or damaged
1st gear collar length 63.3-63.4 mm (2.4921-2.4961 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.91-1.97 mm (0.075-0.078 in.) 1.86 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
ATF feed pipe 0.0. 1st clutch 11.47-11.48 mm (0.4516-0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
1st-hold clutch 5.97-5.98 mm (0.2350-0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
Feed pipe bushing 1.0. 1st clutch 11.518-11.530 mm (0.4535-0.4539 in.) 11.545 mm (0.4545 in.)
1st-hold clutch 6.018-6.030 mm (0.2369-0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
(cont'd)
2-9
BACK
Standard or New Service Limit
Secondary shaft 65mm thrust shim thickness OA 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
When worn or damaged
(cont'd)
A 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
B 0.88 mm (0.035 in.)
C 0.92 mm (0.036 in.)
D 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
E 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
F. 1.04 mm (0.041 in.)
G 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
p
y
Z 1.84 mm (0.072 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 1.92 mm (0.076 in.) When worn or damaged
AC ~ 9 6 mm (0.077 in.) When worn or damaged
AD 2.00 mm (0.079 in.) When worn or damaged
AE 2.04 mm (0.080 in.) When worn or damaged
AF 2.08 mm (0.082 in.) When worn or damaged
AG 2.12 mm (0.083 in.) When worn or damaged
AH 2.16 mm (0.085 in.) When worn or damaged
AI 2.20 mm (0.087 in.) When worn or damaged
AJ 2.24 mm (0.088 in.) When worn or damaged
AK 2.28 mm (0.090 in.) When worn or damaged
AL 2.32 mm (0.091 in.) When worn or damaged
2-10
BACK
Item
Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Intermediary 1.0. of 3rd gear . 36.000 36.016mm When worn or damaged
shaft
., (1.4173-1.4179 in.)
Axial clearance of 3rd gear
0.005-0.045 mm
(0.0002-0.0018 in.)
Cotter thickness
2.99-3.02 mm
(0.1177-0.1189 in.)
Sealing ring thickness
1.89-1.95 mm 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
(0.0744-0.0768 in.)
Sealing ring groove width
2.025-2.060 mm 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
(0.080-0.081 in.)
53 mm splined washer thickness A 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.) When worn or damaged
. " C 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.) When worn or damaged
D 4.055 mm (0.1596 in.) When worn or damaged
26.5 mm washer thickness A 1.05 mm (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse idler Gear shaft O.D. 13.99-14.00 mm When worn or damaged
gear (0.5508-0.5512 in.)
I.D. oftransmission housing of gear 14.006-14.024 mm --
shaft contact area (0.5514-0.5521 in.)
1.0. 18.007-18.020 mm When worn or damaged
(0.7089-0.7094 in.)
Axial clearance 0.07-0.38 mm --
(0.003-0.015 in.)
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97-1.05 mm --
housing (0.038-0.041 in.)
Holder side 0.97-1.05 mm --
(0.038-0.041 in.)
(cont'd)
2-11
BACK
Standard or New
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coil
Main valve body Torque converter check valve spring
1.1 mm 8.6mm 35.0mm 12.6
spring (see page
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.378 in.)
14-347) Lock-up shift valve spring
1.0mm 6.6mm 35.5mm 18.2
(0.039 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.398 in.)
Shift valve E spring
0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Shift valve A spring 0.9mm 6.6mm 50.5mm 23.3
(0.035 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.988 in.)
Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4mm 33.5mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.9mm 9.6mm 30.2mm 8.4
(0.035 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.189 in.)
Lubrication control valve spring 0.9mm 8.7mm 25.0mm 7.2
(0.035 in.) (0.343 in.) (0.984 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6mm 6.6mm 30.8mm 11.1
(0.024 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.213 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.0mm 9.6mm 28.1 mm 7.7
(0.039 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.106 in.)
Secondary valve CPC valve C spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
body spring (0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
(see page Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
14-349) (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.8mm 6.1 mm 24.4mm 14.6
(0.031 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.961 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Reverse control valve spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Regulator valve 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 41.4mm 5.5
body spring (0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (1.630 in.)
(see page Coolant check valve spring 0.9mm 6.7mm 31.5mm 14.2
14-350) (0.035 in.) (0.264 in.) (1.240 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
0.8mm 6.6mm 44.3mm 25.5
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.744 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.4mm 8.8mm 44.0mm 12.0
(0.055 in.) (0.346 in.) (1.732 in.)
Regulator valve spring A 1.85mm 14.7 mm 86.9mm 16.2
(0.073 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.421 in.)
Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4mm 30.3mm 2.1
(0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
2-12
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Stal)dard or New
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coil
Accumulator 4th accumulator spring 3.3mm 19.6mm 39.1 mm 5.8
body spring
(0.130 in.) (0.772 in.) (1.539 in.)
(see page 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 53.4mm 7.5
14-351)
(0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.102 in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.3mm 19.6mm 60.8mm 9.7
(0.091 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.394 in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.5mm 12.8mm 46.0mm 9.5
(0.098 in.) (0.504 in.) (1.811 in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.4mm 19.6mm 65.5mm 12.0
(0.094 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.579 in.)
5th accumulator spring B 2.4mm 13.2mm 50.5mm 10.1
(0.094 in.) (0.520 in.) (1.988 in.)
1st-hold accumulator spring 2.0mm 13.1 mm 42.9mm 9.8
(0.079 in.) (0.516 in.) (1.689 in.)
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit
AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.000-18.025 mm --
carrier (0.7087-0.7096 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.013-0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0005-0.0021 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 30.025-30.055 mm --
(1.182-1.183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.096 mm 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.126 mm --
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 3.9-5.1 Nm Adjust
(preload) (40-52 kgfcm, 35-45 Ibfin.)
For used bearing 3.6-4.8Nm Adjust
(37-49 kgfcm, 32-43Ibfin.)
AfT differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm --
pinion gear (0.002-0.006 in.)
1.0. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
(cont'd)
2-13
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification ' Standard or New Service Limit
Transfer output Diameter at bearing contact area Transmission 21.977-21.990 mm 21.92 mm (0.8630 in.)
shaft
housing side (0.8652-0.8657 in.)
Torque converter 40.002-40.018 mm 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
housing side (1.5749-1.5755 in.)
Axial clearance 0-0.39 mm (0-0.015 in.) --
28.5 mm thrust washer thickness A 1.82 mm (0.0717 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.86 mm (0.0732 in,) When worn or damaged
L 2.04 mm (0.0803 in.)
,
M 2.06 mm (0.0811 in.) , When worn or damaged
N 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.) When worn or damaged "
P 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.) When worn or damaged
y
2:30 mm (0.0906 in.) When worn or damaged
'Z 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.) When worn or damaged
Transfer Capacity Fluid change 0.43 L (0.45 us qt)
assembly fluid Hypoid gear oil SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 Overhaul 0.45 L (0.48 us qt)
viscosity, API classified GL40r GL5
only
Transfer Diameter oftransfer hypoid drive gear/ Transfer cover 50.002-50.018 mm 49.95 mm (1.9665 in.)
assembly shaft assembly at tapered roller side (1.9686-1.9692 in.)
bearing contact area Transfer gear 24.987-25.000 mm 24.93 mm (0.9815 in.)
side (0.9837-0.9843 in.)
Diameter oftransfer output shaft Transfer gear 40.002-40.018 mm 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller bearing side (1.5749-1.5755 in.)
contact area Companion 31.975-31.988 mm 31.92 mm (1.2567 in.)
flange side (1.2589-1.2594 in.)
Transfer gear backlash 0.06-0.16 mm Adjust
(0.002-0.006 in.)
Tapered roller bearing total starting 2.64-4.23 Nm Adjust
torque (preload) (26.9-43.1 kgfcm,
23.3-37.4Ibfin.)
2-14
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear differential Capacity Fluid change 2.53 L (2.67 US qt)
fluid Use Acura A TF-Z1 Overhaul 2.77 L (2.93 US qt)
St eermg
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New' Service Limit
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.) --
edge with engine running
Starting load measured at outside 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf) If higher, check
edge with engine running gearbox and pump
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 155
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm', 1,290-1.370 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Reservoir 0.34 L (0.36 US qt)
fluid Use Acura Power Steering Fluid capacity
System overhaul 1.03 L (1.09 US qt)
s uspenslon
1
Service Limit
Wheel alignment Camber
-,
Front -0030'1
Rear -0 30 '45 ,
Caster Front " 412'35'
Total Toe-in Front 02 mm (00.08 in.)
Rear 22 mm (0.080.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 38 12 '20
Outside wheel 31 44' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0-0.3 mm (0-0.Q1 in.) 1 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-0.3 mm (0-0.Q1 in.) 11.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
2-15
BACK
"r
Brakes
Parking brake Number of clicks when pedal pressed 9 to 11 clicks
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force
(reference)
Drum 1.0 210.0-210.1 mm (8.268-8.272 in.) 211.0 mm (8.307 in.)
Shoe lining thickness
,','
3.9 mm (0.15 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 178 mm (7 in.)
Free play 1-5 mm (0.04-0.20 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to push rod clearance Omm(Oin.)
Brake disc . Thickness Front 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.) 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Rear 10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in.) . 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Runout -- 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism -- 0.D15 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Thickness Front 10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 9.6-10.2 mm (0.38-0.40 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
A" C dOt"
Ir on I lomng
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system Dual 600-650 g (20.3-22.0 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DENSO NO-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 35 mL (11/6 floz)
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3 floz)
(front)
.
Evaporator (rear) 30 mL (1 fIoz)
Each line and 10 mL (1/3 floz)
hose
Compressor 125-137 mL (42/9-4518 floz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 'f (20 'C) 3.9 --4.3 Q
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in.)
2-16
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length
4,844 mm (190.7 in.)
,
Overall width
1,954 mm (77.0 in.)
Overall height
1,733 mm (68.2 in.)
Wheelbase
2,750 mm (108.3 in,)
Track Front 1,720 mm (67.7 in.)
Rear 1,715 mm (67.5 in.)
Ground clearance
207 mm (8.15 in.)
Seating capacity Seven (7)
WEIGHT (USA) Gross Vehicle Weight 5,2921bs
Rating (GVWR)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight 2,700 kg
(CANADA) Rating (GVWR)
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement 60 V6-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 90.0 x 96.0 mm (3.54 x 3.78 in.)
Displacement 3,664 cm' (mL) (224 cu in.)
Compression ratio 11.0
Valve train Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Ignition system DLI (Distributorless Ignition)
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 58.4 L (61.7 US qt)/minute
Water pump At 6,000 rpm 172 L (182 US qt)lminute
displacement
Fuel required Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane
Number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.8kW
Nominal voltage 12V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise as viewed from gear end
AUTOMATIC Type BYFA Electronically-controlled automatic, 5-speed forward,
TRANSMISSION 1 reverse
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.697
2nd 1.606
3rd 1.071
4th 0.766
5th 0.538
Reverse 1.888
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.533
(cont'd)
2-17
BACK
STEERING Type
Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
Gear ratio 47.4
Overall ratio 17.0
Turns,lock-to-lock 3.29
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent multi-link with trailing arm, stabilizer, coil
spring
Shock absorber front and Without active damper system Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
rear With active damper system Magent rheological variable active damper
TIRES Size of front and rear tires P255/55R18104H
Size of spare tire T165/80D17 104M
WHEEL Camber Front -0 30'
ALIGNMENT Rear -0 30'
Caster Front 4 12'
Total Toe-in Front Omm(Oin.)
Rear 2 mm (0.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 38 12'
Outside wheel 31 44'
SAl at camber (kingpin 1248'
axis)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Foot type mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 63.5 cm' (9.84 sq in.) x2
(swept area) Rear 25.3 cm' (3.92 sq in.) x2
Parking brake shoe 60.2 cm' (9.33 sq in.) x2
friction surface area
AIR Cooling capacity Front' 3,506 kcal/h (13,910 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Rear 1,728 kcal/h (6,860 BTU/h)
.
Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 177 mL/rev. (10.8 cu in./rev.)
Maximum speed 8,400 rpm
Lubricant capacity 125 mL (4 2/9 f/oz)
Lubricant type ND-OIL 8 (DEN SO)
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type' Corrugated fin
Blower Type Stabilized swirling flow
Motor input (Front) 245 W/12 V
Motor input (Rear) 115W/12V
Speed control (Front) Infinite variable
Speed control (Rear) Infinite variable
Maximum capacity (Front) 525 m'/h (18,510 cu ft/h)
Maximum capacity (Rear) 275 m'/h (9,695 cu ft/h)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power consumption at 35 W maximum at 12 V
68'f (20 OC)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Quantity (Dual) 600-650 g (20.3-22.0 fI oz)
2-"8
BACK
.' '
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V-76 AH/20 HR, 65 AH/5 HR
RATINGS Fuses Main under-hood fuse/relay box 120 A, 60 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A
Under-hood fuse/relay box 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15A, 10A 7.5A
Under-dash fuse/relay box 30 A,20 A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A
Rearfuse/relay box 40A,30A,20A,10A,7.5A
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V-60W
Headlight low beam 12 V-35 W (HID)
Daytime running light 12V-60W
Front turn signal lights 12 V-24 CP
Front side turn signal lights LED
Front parking lights 12V-3CP
Front side marker light 12V-3CP
Fog light 12V-55W
Rear turn signaLiights 12V-21W
Brake/taillights LED/LED
Rear side market light 12V-3CP
High mount brake light LED
Back-up lights 12V-18W
License plate lights 12V-3CP
Ceiling light 12V-8W
Cargo area light 12V-5W
-
Front map lighL 12V.,...5W
- .
Rear map light 12V-6.2W
Ambient light LED
Vanity mirror lights 12V-2W
Glove box light 12V-3.4W
Door coutesy light 12V-2CP
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights 14 V-':"1.4 W, 10 V-0.6 W
2-19 BACK
Desi'gn Specifications
Body Specifications
1,720 mm (67.7 in.'
..
1,954 mm (77.0 in.'
..
2,750 mm (108.3 in.'
..
4,844 mm (190.7 in.'
1,715 mm (67.5 in.'
.. ..
2-20 BACK
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information ..................................................... 3-4
Maintenance Main Items ............................................. 3-7
Maintenance Sub Items ............................................... 3-8
I
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work procedures (such as
Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
Item Lubrication Points Lubricant
A Engine Acura Motor Oil:
American Honda PIN 08798-9023A (5W-20),
Honda Canada PIN CA66806 (5W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container as shown below. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE viscosity: See chart below.
B Automatic transmission Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1): .
American Honda PIN 08200-9001A,
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
Always use Acura ATF-Z1. Using a non-Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
C Transfer assembly Hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5
Use a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or
GL5 only.
Viscosity SAE 90: above 0 'f (-18 'C)
SAE 80W-90: below 0 'f (""';18 'C)
0 Rear differential Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
American Honda PIN 08200-9001A,
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
E Brake system (including VSA lines) Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid: PIN 08798-9008A
Always use Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid.
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
F Brake booster clevis Multipurpose grease
G Battery terminals
H Fuel fill door
I Hood hinges and hood latch
J Door hinges: upper and lower
K Tailgate hinges
L Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots Honda Silicone Grease: PIN 08C30-B0234M
M Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid
Acura Power Steering Fluid: PIN 08206-9002A
Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and
poor steering in cold weather.
N Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-
A01) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
0 Cooling system Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Recommended Engine Oil
Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
-I
I
If1 I I

-20 0 20 40 60 80 100'F
I I I I I I I
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40'C
3-2
BACK
NOTE:
Lubricate the following areas using the recommended lubricants and fluids .
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
M c D
o
K
A
B
L
F
J J
L H
3-3
BACK
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Multi-Information Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the multi-information display. Based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the MDX's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the codes for other scheduled maintenance items
needing service.
3-4
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
BACK
Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a
percentage on the multi-information display.
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release
the Sel/Reset Button repeatedly until the engine oil
life displays.
A
I
OIL LIFE 100%
002300
2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 6 % to 15 %, the
remaining engine oil life and other scheduled
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed.
The maintenance system message "SERVICE DUE
SOON" (A) also come on. To cancel the message,
press the Info Button. The display continues to
show the remaining engine oil life (B) and the
message indicator (C) until it is reset .
Complete list of maintenance main items (D)
(see page 3-7) .
Complete list of maintenance sub items (E)
(see page 3-8).
SERVICE
DUE SOON
A123456
,,---8
OIL LIFE 15%
SERVICE A 123456
c----+-(J)
E
3. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the
maintenal)ce system message "SERVICE DUE
NOW" is displayed along with the same
maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance
system message display is cancelled, a "SERVICE"
message appears.
SERVICE
DUE NOW
A123456
4. When the ignition switcll is in the ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the
maintenance'system "SERVICE PAST
DUE" is along with the same
maintenance item codets).
SERVICE
PAST DUE
A123456
(cont'd)
3-5
BACK
','
Maintenance Minder
General Information (cont'd)
5. If the i'ridicated maintenance is not done, the
"SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative
mileage, for example "-10," on the display. Ifthe
negative mileage is between 0 and the
message, is displayed for only a few seconds when
the ighition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.
The negative mileage (A) remains displayed after
the vehicle is driven [l"lore 10 miles (for USA
models) or 10 aftl;lr 0 % oil
life is and the display cannot dancelled.
This mii'intenance Item(s)
shouldl1ave been done hlorethan 10 miles (or
10 km) ago.""'"

-,

, ,',
... "
,1.. 't "I ....
;'1:', .
3-6
Resetting the Maintenance-Information
Display
NOTE:
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
The engine oi/life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently only with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) position.
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the Info
,button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the Sel/Reset button repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
4. Press and hold the Sel/Reset button for about 10
seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
NOTE:
If you are resetting the display when the engine
oil life is more than 15, %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring s.ervice are done
before resetting the display .
To cancel the "OIL LIFE, RESET" mode, press the
Info b,utton repeatedly until t!:le :'CANCEL"
indicator is displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
button.
5. Press Info button repeatedly until the "RESET"
indicator is displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
button.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and
the engine oil life will resetto "100 %."
_.}R
.!..!....-!..!.
BACK
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
NOTE:
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
I d' . A B 1 2 3'f h
Adiust the va ves urlng services , , , or I t ey are nOIsy.
Symbol Maintenance Main Items
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-6).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-7).
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt).
Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-3).
Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).
N umber of clicks (9 to 11 when the parking brake pedal is Qressed with 294 N (30 kgf,66 Ibf) of force.
Inspecttie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-9).
Check rack grease and steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA (see page 19-35).
Check the master and VSA modulator for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
Engine coolant (see page 10-6) .
. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 14-265).
Rear differential fluid (see page 15-69).
Power steering fluid (see page 17-13).
Brake fluid (see page 19-9).
Windshield washer fluid.
Inspect exhaust system (see page 9-9)'.
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines (see page 11-334)', and connections (see page 11-336)'.
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: Accordmg to state and federal regulations, failure to do the mamtenance Items marked With an asterisk ( * ) will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
3-7
BACK
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Sub Items
Number
Maintenance Sub Items
1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-364).
Ifthe vehicle is regularly driven in dusty conditions, replace v r ~ 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-114).
Replace the filter at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) intervals ifthe vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas
that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and cooling/climate control system is less than
normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-33).
Look for cracks and damage, and inspect auto tensioner; no adjustment is needed.
3 Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-266) and transfer fluid (see page 14-268).
Automatic transmission fluid capacity: 2.8 L (3.0 US qt), use Acura ATF-Z1.
Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt), use hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5.
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-24).
Use IZFR5K11 (NGK) or SKJ20DR-M11 (DENSO).
Replace timing belt (see page 6-20). If the vehicle is regularly driven in very high temperatures (over
110 'f, 43 "C), or in very low temperatures (under -20 'f, --29 "C), replace every 60,000 miles (USA)/
100,000 km (Canada) and inspect water pump (see page 10-5).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-8).
Otherwise adjust only if noisy.
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6).
Capacity (including the reserve tank): 7.3 L (1.93 US gal), use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2.
6 Replace rear differential fluid (see page 15-69).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the maintenance minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven in these conditions, have
the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Capacity: Clutch chambers 2.53 L (2.67 US qt), use Acura ATF-Z1.
3-8
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side
airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual.
Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or Side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or roll rate sensor when the ignition
switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a
collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
BACK
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ............................ 4-2
Starting System
Component Location Index .... 4-3
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index ...................................... 4-4
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-5
Starter System Circuit
Troubleshooting ................... 4-6
Starter Solenoid Test ............... 4-8
Starter Performance Test ........ 4-9
Starter Removal and
Installation ............................ 4-10
Starter Overhaul ...................... 4-11
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-19
Ignition Timing Inspection ...... 4-20
Ignition Coil Removal/
Installation ............................ 4-21
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit
Spark Plug Inspection .............. 4-24
Charging System
Index ...................................... 4-26
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-27
Charging System Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-28
Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Alternator Control Circuit
Drive Belt Inspection ............... 4-33
Drive Belt Replacement ........... 4-33
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Inspection ............................. 4-34
Replacement ......................... 4-35
Tensioner Pulley
Replacement ......................... 4-35
Alternator Removal and
Installation ............................ 4-36
Alternator Overhaul ................. 4-39
Cruise Control
Index ...................................... 4-44
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-46
Cruise Control Input Test ........ 4-47
Cruise Control Combination
Switch Test/Replacement .... 4-49
Engine Mount Control System
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-51
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-52
r--:'III

Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description atv
Q) 07146-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
CD 07149-0010000 Handle driver 1
I
Q)
4-2 BACK
Starting System
Component Location Index
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Test, page 14-315 .
Replacement, page 14-316
STARTER
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6
Solenoid Test, page 4-8
Performance Test, page 4-9
Removal and Installation, page 4-10
Overhaul, page 4-11
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
r:-:'I
I.!!;J
STARTER CUT RELAY 2
Test, page 22-77
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
FUSH HOLDER 1
(YEL and L T BLU wires)
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
FUSH HOLDER 2
(PNK and BRN wires)
4-3 BACK
, ! I
Starting System
.' ,
1, .
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engine does not start 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground at G101
(does not crank) 2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-76).
3. Check the starter (see page 4-6).
4. Check starter cut relay 1 and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-77).
5. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-315).
6. Check the iQnition switch or wire (see page 22-79).
Engine cranks, but does 1. , Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
not start 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-334).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-345).
5. Check the throttle body (see page 11-362).
6. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
7. Check for a damaged or broken timinQ belt.
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-334).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see paQe 11-345).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-76).
3. Check the starterfor binding (see page 4-11).
4. Check for excessive drag in the enQine.
MID message check 1. Check for a blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary
starting system
under-dash fuse holder 2 below the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
2. Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1.
3. Check for a faulty starter cut relay 2.
4. Check for open in the BRN wire between starter cut
relav 1 and starter cut relay 2.
4-4
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No.1 (120A) No.3 (50 Al
BlK lTBLU
AUXIUARY
UNDERDASH
FUSE HOLDER 2
_ L I ~ -- BRN
WHT
STARtER
CUT
-t.:-----"- I RELAYI
STARTER
CUT
r;-----lJ RELAY2
10-
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
5 (Closed : P or Nl
I
G101
PNK
4-5
BACK
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
o Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 'f
(15 and 38 "C) during this procedure.
o After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will
continue to stop the fuel injectors from functioning.
o The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
1. Hook up the following equipment:
o Ammeter, 0-400 A
o Voltmeter, 0-20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt)
2. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
5. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS
OFF on the HDS.
4-6
6. Setthe parking brake, then with the shift lever in
the N or P position, turn the ignition switch to
START (III).
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Check the battery condition. Check the electrical
connections at the battery, the negative battery
cable to the body, the engine ground cables, and
the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try
cranking the engine again.
Does the starter orank the engine?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the
problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO-Check these items:
o If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to
step 8.
o If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 10.
o If the starter does not disengage from the torque
converter ring gear when you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
and check for the following:
- Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
clutch
BACK
8. Make sure the shift lever is in the N or P position,
then disconnect the connector from the starter
solenoid S terminal. Connect a jumper from the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid S terminal.
5
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Remove the starter, and repair or replace it as
necessary .
9. Check the following items in the order listed until
you find the problem:
A blown STS (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
dash fuse holder 1 located below the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
A blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
dash fuse holder 2 located below the driver's
Check for an open or short in the WHT wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and
the main under-hood fuse box.
Check for an open or short in the BRN wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 2, the
PCM and the starter cut relay 1.
Check for an open or short in the WHT wire, BLK/
WHT wire, and connectors between the starter
cut relay 2 and the starter.
Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-79).
Check for a faulty transmission range switch and
connector (see page 14-315).
Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1 and the
starter cut relay 2 (see page 22-77).

10. While cranking the engine, check the cranking
voltage and the current draw.
Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to
8.0 V and is the current draw less than or equal to
375A?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check for the following:
Drag in the starter armature
Shorted armature winding
Excessive drag in the engine
11. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check for the following:
Open circuit in starter armature commutator
segments
Excessiv{tly worn starter brushes
Open circuit in the starter brushes
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
Faulty drive. gear clutch
12. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
13. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel ALL
INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
4-7
BACK
Starting System
Starter Solenoid Test
1. Make suteyou have the anti-theft codes for the
audio system and navigation y s t ~ (if equipped).
Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Remove the battery and battery base (see step 12
on page 5-3).
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,
then disconnect the positive cable.
4. Disconnectthe positive starter cable (A), S terminal
connector (B), and motor cable (C).
c
M
8x1.25mm
9.0Nm
(0.9 kgf'm, 7.0 Ibfft)
5. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the
S terminal and the armature housing (ground) (D).
There should be continuity.
If there is continuity, go to step 6.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
6. Check the pull-in coil for'continuity between the
S terminal and the M terminal. There' should be
continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
Ifthere is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
4-8
7. Reconnect the starter cable, S terminal connector,
and motor cable.
8. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then
connect the negative cable.
9. Install the battery and battery base (see step 56 on
page 5-21).
10. Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
11. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
navigation system (if equipped).
12. Set the clock.
BACK
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal.
2. Make a connection o ~ this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge
as used on the vehicle).
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave
the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
(> 8
12V
BATTERY
s
3. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
4. Disconnect the battery from theM terminal. If the
pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil ofthe
solenoid is working properly.
12V
BATTERY
M
s
r--:'I
~
5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. Ifthe
pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
12V
BATTERY
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal.
s
8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown in the
diagram, and confirm that the motor starts and
keeps rotating.
12V
BATTERY
9. Ifthe electric current meets the specification when
the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
working properly.
Specification
Electric Current: 90 A or less
4-9
BACK
Starting System
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
audio system and navigation system (if equipped).
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).
on page 5-3).
5. Remove the harness clamp (A).
6. Disconnect the positive starter cable (8) from the 8
terminal, then disconnect the connector (C) from
the S terminal.
7. Remove the two bolts holding the starter.
4-10
Installation
1. Install the starter (A) using a new gasket (8), then
install the harness clamp (C), and positive starter
cable (D) and S terminal connector (E). Make sure
the crimped side of the 8 terminal is facing out,
away from the starter.
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfttl
8x1.25mm
9.0 Nm 10.9 kgf.m, 7.0 Ibfttl
2. Install the battery base and battery (see step 56 on
page 5-21).
3. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).
5. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
properly.
(see page 17-28).
8. Set the clock.
BACK
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly IReassembly'
END COVER

(Apply molybdenum
disulfide.)

(Apply molybdenum
disulfide.)
IDLER GEAR
ARMATURE
HOUSING
PLANETARY GEAR
"' I
"'I'f'de)
. mdlsu I . . (Apply molybdenu ..
r--:'I

g
.... / (Apply molybdenum
r d;,ulftd . ,
'9

Q IDLER GEAR SHAFT
. )
I bdenum disulfide. (Applymo y
(cont'd)
4-11
BACK
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Brush Holder Removal
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
2. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal, and
remove the end cover.
3. Place a plastic pipe with an outside diameter of
29.4 mm (1.16 in.) on the armature.
o
4. Move the brush holder (A) up to the pipe (B) while
holding the pipe so the brushes do not pop out
from the holder.
4-12
Armature Inspection and Test
5. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is
dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a
lathe to the following specifications, or recondition
with :1* 500 or :1* 600 sandpaper (B).
BACK
8. Check the commutator diameter. Ifthe diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 28.90-29.00 mm (1.138-1.142 in.)
Service Limit: 28.00 mm (1.102 in.)
9. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
Ifthe commutator runout is within the service
limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max.

I.:!..I
10. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (8),
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth
11. Check for continuity between the segments of the
commutator. Ifthere is an open circuit between any
segments, replace the armature .
(cont'd)
4-13
BACK
Starting System
12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
13. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between
the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B),
and between the commutator and the armature
shaft (C). Ifthere is continuity, replace the armature.
4-14
Starter Brush Inspection
14. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Starter Brush Holder Test
15. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and
(-) brush (B). Ifthere is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
A
B
BACK
Brush Spring Inspection
16. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact with the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (8) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If it is not within the standard, replace
the brush holder assembly.
Spring Tension
Standard (New): 22.3-27.3 N
, (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00-6.13Ibf)
c
Planetary Gear Inspection
17. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal gear (8).
Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
A
B
Overrunning Clutch Inspection
18. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
Replace it, if it does not slide smoothly.
19. Hold the drive gear (8), and turn the overrunning
clutch in the direction shown to make sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the overrunning clutch locks
in the opposite direction. If it does not lock, replace
the overrunning clutch assembly.
20. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring
gear. Replace it if the starter drive gear teeth are
damaged.
(cont'd)
4-15
BACK
Starting System
Starter Reassembly
21. When you replace the brush holder or the armature
housing, you need to seat the new brushes. Slip a
strip of :1* 500 or :1* 600 sandpaper, with the grit side
up, between the commutator and each brush, and
smoothly turn the armature. The contact surface of
the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as
the commutator.
22. Pry back each with a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about
halfway out of its holder. Release the spring to hold
it in place.
23. Push each brush down until it seats against the
commutator, then release the spring against the
end of the brush.
4-16
24. Install the armature housing (A) and armature (8)
by aligning the slotted point (e) to the projection (D).
D
25. Install the armature into the housing.
26. Place the brush holder assembly on the armature,
then move the brush holder (A) down to the
armature.
BACK
27. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.
r--:'I

4-17
BACK
'.
Ignition System
t .
4 ~ 8
v
SPARK PLUG
Inspection, page 4-24
IGNITION COIL RELA V
(In the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-78
IGNITION COIL
v
Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-20
Removal/Installation, page 4-21
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER HDOD RJSE BOX UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
SATrERY I I
C)
'----+, ___ __ N_O._31_30_AI--J C2 NO,91ISAI
r .

PCM
IGPLS6 IGPLSS IGPLS4 IGPLS3
BI2 BI1 B23 B22
BRN rvHT BLK/RED BRN WHT BLU
,....I-o-IG_PLS6 ____ --cr-,3 I IGPLSS 3 I IGPLS4 3 I IGPLS3
t--1--4H--
J
BLI<
..JL.
GIOI
I
+--1--4\ I--
L

--..l

_.1<_
ICM : Control Module
I I
+-+--111--
LW
T T
-'"-
IGPLS2
830
BLU/IlED
3 I IGPLS2 '.
T
..JL.
IGNITION
COIL
RELAY

IGPLSI MRLY
B29 A6
VELJGRN
3 I IGPLSI
ICM I
t--1--4\ I--
LW
i
..JL.

ES H6
G N WHT
I
C'O'
10
B T
IGNmON
COILS
SPARK
PLUGS
4-19
BACK
Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it
doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-223).
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose and
repair the cause before inspecting the ignition
timing.
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
no load (in park or Neutral) until the radiator fan-
comes on, then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Connect the timing light to the service loop.
4-20
9. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing
belt cover. Check the ignition timing under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear window
defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
Ignition Timing:
10 02 0 BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in Park or
Neutral
1 0. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,
check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK,
update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
ignition system works properly, replace the original
PCM (see page 11-244).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
BACK
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation
1. Remove the engine cover (A).
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector (A), then
remove the ignition coils (8).
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of
removal.
Ignition .Coil Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting
r--:'I

1. Check the No.8 (15 A) fuse and No.9 (15 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,
locate and repair the short in the circuit between
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the ignition
coils .
2. Remove the relay control module from the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-78).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the relay control module in the
under-hood fuse/relay box .
3. Measure the voltage between the relay control
module connector C terminal No.2 and body
ground.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE 2P CONNECTOR C
=
Wire side offemale terminals
Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wire between relay control
module connector C terminal No.2 and the main
under-hood fuse box .
(cont'd)
4-21
BACK
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the relay control
module connector H terminal No.6 and No.1
ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR H
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
1
2
31----'
No.1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the relay
control module connector H terminal No.6 and
ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3
4-22
5. Check for continuity between the relay control
module connector E terminal No.5 and body
ground.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR E
.Q
Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between the relay
control module connector E terminal No.5 and the
powertrain control module (PCM) (A6) .
NO-Go to step 6.
and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate,
9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from
damage.
10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
BACK
11. Check for continuity between relay control module
connector E terminal No.5 and PCM connector
terminal A6.
RELA V CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR E
Terminal side of male terminals
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at the relay control
module connector E and the PCM (A6) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the relay
control module connector E terminal No.5 and the
PCM (A6) .
r--:'I

4-23
BACK
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs and inspect the electrodes
and the ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
- Advanced ignition timing
- Loose spark plug
- Plug heat range too hot
- Insufficient cooling
Fouled plugs may be caused by:
- Retarded ignition timing
- Oil in combustion chamber
-Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
electrodes
Worn or deformed
{
.Improper gap
Oil-fouling
iT
. Carbon deposits

Cracked center
electrode insulator
2. Ifthe spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,
clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
4-24
3. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs;
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification .
Electrode Gap
A
4. Replace the plug at the specified interval, if the
center electrode is rounded (A). Use.only the listed
spark plugs.
Spark Plugs
NGK: IZFR6K11
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to
the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head, finger-tight. Torque them to 18 Nm
(1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft).
BACK
Charging System
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX .
(Has built-in ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT)
AUTO-TENSIONER
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(In the module)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY

.I.!:!.I
Test, page 22-76
DRIVE BELT
ALTERNATOR
Removal and Installation, page 4-36
Overhaul, page 4-39
4-25
BACK
Charging System
Charging system Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator does not come (see page 4-28).
on with the ignition
switch ON (II)
Charging system 1. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator stays on (see page 4-28).
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-33).
3. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-34).
Battery discharged 1. Check for a poor connection and for open or shorted
wire(s) in the charging system.
2. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw
with the ignition switch OFF, and the key removed. The
multiplex control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn
off (sleep mode) for some models.
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-33).
4. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-34).
5. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-30).
6. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
7. Test the battery (see page 22-76).
Battery overcharged 1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-30).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-76).
4-26 BACK
Circuit Diagram
BAnERY
No.1 1120 AI
A2
ALlERNATOR
IGNmON svirrcH
\J)-t-- WHT ___ .;..3 ___ -

Al
A3
B
-1
RECT1FIER
.

4
FR
r-

.",
IGI HOT in ON IIlIand
STARTIDQ
A12
A6
3 2
L C
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
PNK
A6
VEL
C6
A7
1
IG
I
...JL.
r--:'I

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No. 21
(7.5 AI
VEL
4-27 BACK
Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
Does the charging system indicator come on?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
2,000 rpmfor 1 minute.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-30) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-315).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-337) .
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-39) .
NO-Go to step 7.
4-28
(see page 11-223).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C42 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
Ir
'1
11 I 2 3 4151617 8 9110 I
11 12 1/ 1/115 1617118 19 20 21
~ 1/
1/ 24 X 25X 26 27 28
1/ 1/ 1/ 32133 341/1/ 3788 39
140 41 4Z 43144145146 47 461491
~ ' : T L IWHT/BlUI
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
alternator and the PCM .
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a k.nown-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .
BACK
function procedure (see page 22-315).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES-Go to step 15.
22-337) .
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.3 and
body ground with a jumper wire.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
L
2
(WHT/BLU) 3
4
JUMPER WIRE
=
Wire side of ferriale terminals
Does the charging system indicator come on?
NO-Go to step 19.
r--:'I
I..:!J
19. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page
11-3).
from damage.
=
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or. substitute a known-
NO-Repair open in the wire between the
4-29
BACK
Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and
the battery is fully charged (see page 22-76).
2. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).
3. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
LOAD ADJUSTER
(CARBON PILE)
FIELD
SELECTOR
INDUCTIVE
PICKUP
I
FULL FIELD TESTER
LEAD (BLU)
____ VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
LEAD (BLK)
/
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
LEAD (RED)

NEGATIVE
TERMINAL
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE
TERMINAL
CABLE (RED)
BTERMINAL
3,000 rpm, with no load, until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
5. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
Is the voltage over 15.1 V?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36) or rear
housing assembly (see page 4-39) .
NO-Goto step 6.
4-30
6. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
7. Turn off all the accessories. Select the charging test
on the tester.
8. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the
ammeter.
9. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal wire
of the alternator so the arrow points away from the
alternator.
10. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
YES-Go to alternator control circuit
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
voltage drops between 12-13.5 V.
Is the amperage 87.5 A or more?
YES-The charging system is OK .
NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
replace the alternator (see page 4-36).
NO-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or
BACK
~
~
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
(see page 11-223).
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose and
repair the cause before continuing with this test.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator.
6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high
beam.
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P
connector terminal No.2 and the positive terminal
of the battery.
BATTERY
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
C(WHT/GRN)
Is there less than 1 V?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
from damage.
Ir 11
-' 1 1
2 3 4151617 8 191101
11 12
/ /116 16 17118 1920 21
17 / 24>< 26X 2627 28
1/ / IV 32133 34VV 3738 39
, 140 I 41 42 43144145146 47/461491
~ T (WHT/GRN)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
from damage.
(cont'd)
4-31
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal C43 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI
Ir II
.I 1 2 3 4 1 5 I 6 7 8 I 9 110 I
111 12 VV 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Terminal side of
VV 24 X 25 X 26 27 2B female terminal
VV V 32 33 34VV 37 38 39
140 141 42 43144145 46 471481491
ALTC
(WHT/GRNI ..c:::l &vHT /GRNI
1 21-
ALTERNATOR
3 4 4P CONNECTOR
4-32
BACK
Drive Belt Inspection
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is
cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within
the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the
standard range, replace the drive belt (see page
4-33).
___ B __
Drive Belt Replacement
Special Tools Required
r:-:'I
I!:!..I
Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or ,equivalent,
commercially available
1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) using the belt tension
release tool to relieve tension from the drive belt
(B), then remove the drive belt.
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
4-33
BACK
Charging System
Drive Belt Inspection
Belttension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then make sure to
turn the AlC switch OFF.
2. With the engine OFF, check the position of the auto-
tensioner indicator's pointer (A). Start the engine,
then check the position again with the engine idling.
Ifthe position ofthe indicator moves orfluctuates a
lot, replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.
If you hear any abnormal noise, replace the auto-
tensioner pulley.
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-33).
5. Move the autoctensioner within its limit using the
belt tension release tool in the direction shown.
Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and
without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does
not move smoothly or you hear abnormal noise, ,
replace the auto-tensioner.
4-34
6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using a 10 mm bolt
(B),8 r'nm bolt (C), and a vise (D) as shown. Do not
clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
c
8. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.
Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than the
specified value, replace the auto-tensioner.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:
50.5 Nm (5.15 kgfm, 37.2Ibfft)
BACK
Replacement
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 31 on page 5-5).
3. Remove the auto-tensioner.

10 x 1.5 mm 22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16Ibftt)
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm, 33 Ibftt)
4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of
removal.

TensionerPulley Replacement
1. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
2. Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and
remove the tensioner pulley (B).
A
10x 1.5 mm
80 Nm 18.2 kgfm, 59 Ib!:..,tt)
----
3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of
removal.
4-35
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Removal and:ln$tal.lation
Removal
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the .
5. Remove the Ale suction line from brackets (A).
A
6. Remove the coolant reservoir (A), then remove
power steering fluid reservoir (B) from the bracket.
7. Remove the harness bracket (A), then disconnect
the Ale compressor clutch connector (B).
8. Disconnect the alternator connector (e) and the
BLK wire (D) from the alternator.
9. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and alternator
bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the
alternator.
BACK
Installation
1. Install the alternator, and tighten the mounting bolt
(A) and bracket mounting bolt (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
45Nm
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfft)
B
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibfft)
2. Connect the alternator connector (A), BlK wire (B)
to the alternator.
8x 1.25 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
3. Install the harness bracket (C), then connect the AlC
compressor clutch connector (0).
r--:'I
I.!:!.I
4. Install the power steering fluid reservoir (A) to the
bracket, then install the coolant reservoir (B).
5. Install the AlC suction line to the brackets (A).
A
(cont'd)
4-37
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the drive belt (see page 4-33).
7. Install the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).
(see page 17-28).
navigation system (if equipped). '
11. Set the clock.
4-38
BACK
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
REAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
PULLEY
ROTOR

I.!:!.I
(cant'd)
4-39
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Handle driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
this procedure.
Alternator Disassembly
1. Test the alternator an9 regulator before you
remove them (see page 4-28).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the
pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (8). If necessary, use an impact
wrench.
/
4. Remove the three flange nuts.
4-40
5. Remove the end cover (A) and the insulator (8) .
6. Remove the brush holder.
BACK
7. Remove the four bolts, then removethe rear
housing assembly (A) and washer (8).
B
8. If you are not replacing t!le front bearing, go to
step 13. Remove the rotor .fJ:'()m the drive end.
housing.
9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring; and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
seizure marks .
If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor
assembly .
If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and
hammer.
(cont'd)
4-4',
BACK
,Cbargi'ng System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
12. With a hammer,'driver handle, and attachment,
install a newfrontbearing in the drive "end housing.
Alternator Brush Inspection
13. Measure the, length of both brushe,s (A) with a
vernier caliper (B).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder assembly.
If the brush length is OK, go to step 14.
',.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
4-42
A
Rotor Slip Ring Test
14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
Ifthere is continuity, go to step 15.
If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
assembly.
B
15. Check for continuitybetweeri each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the 'r'otorshaft (C):
If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, and go to step 16.
If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
16. Assemble the alternator in the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
rings.
If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
110 Nm (11.2 kgf.m, 81.0 Ibfft) when you
reinstall it.
BACK
Cruise Control
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Test, page 22-214
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-6
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
r--:'I
I!!!..I
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL COMBINATION SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 4-49
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
Test, page 14-315
Cruise Control Input Test, page 4-47
4-43
BACK
Cruise Control
Cruise control cannot be 1." Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs.
set 2. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box, and the No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay. box.
3. Do the cruise control inputtest (seepage 4-47).
4. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to
test the switch.
5. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-49).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Faulty gauge control
butthe cruise control 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). module
main switch indicator 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
does not come on 4-49).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). module
indicator does not come
on
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Open circuit, loose or
decelerate or accelerate 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to disconnected
accordingly when the set! test the switch. terminals:
decel or resume/accel 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). YELJREO or
switch is pressed . 4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT GRN/BLK wire
4-49).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Short to power in BRN
cancel when the brake 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment wire
pedal is pressed (see page 19-6).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Short to ground in PNK
cancel when the cruise 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). wire
control main switch is 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
turned off 4-49).
Set speed ~ o s not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Open circuit, loose or
cancel when the cancel 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to disconnected
switch is pressed test the switch. terminals:
3. Do the crl;lise control input test (see page 4-47). YELJREOor
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT GRN/BLK wire
4-49).
4-44
BACK
Symptom
Set speed will not 1.
resume when the 2.
resume/accel switch is
pressed (with the cruise 3.
control main switch
turned on, and set speed 4.
temporarily canceled by 5.
Rressing the brake pedal)
Diagnostic procedure
Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs.
Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment
(see page 19-6).
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to
test the switch.
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47).
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-49).

Also check for
Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/BLK wire
Faulty brake pedal
position switch
4-45
BACK
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
BRAICE
PEDAL
POSmoN
SWITCH
I'CM
MAlNUNDEJl.llOODfUSE BOX

No.3-'
I50AJ
WItT WHT
$-
SWITCH
BAT
IGI
IGI HDTln ONIIQ
6 .nd STARr lID)
UNDSI.oASH
IUSEJIIELAY
BOX
WItT
WItT YEL
LTGRN BRN
A7
E5
GRN
III
GRN
C2
E14
BLU
A29
UNlJEll.HOOD
fUSEJRELAY
BOX
HI
ORN
LTGRN
7
HORN
AS
-1:1G
'2:R/Bl
7
1_ ---- --- --- --- ---- ---- --- ___
.
.
,
--- -- --- --- - - -- - --- - - -- - --- --- --'"
GRN/YEL RED/BLK
11
CRUIlECON11lOl.INDICATOR
GAUGE CONtROL MODULE
M1U.Y ETCSRLY
5V 12V
Ne A11'fWD ETCSM- VCC5 TPSA TPS8 SG5
B38 Cl8 B18 B17 B26 B33
BLU BLU/YEL BW GRN BLU RED/BLK IEDIBLU GRN
7 7
t;J

0U1PUTSHAfT TRANSMISSION
1=

ICOUNml SHAF1) RANGE SWITCH
SIEEDSENSGR
4-46
BACK
Cruise Control Input Test

I!:!..I
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshootthe DLC
circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired resutt Possible cause if resutt is not obtained
tested
Cruise control Cruise control CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW Faulty cruise control combination switch
main switch main switch should indicate ON when the An open in the wire between the gauge
signal ON and OFF cruise control main switch is control module and the cruise control
turned on and OFF when the combination switch
cruise control main switch is A wire shorted to ground between the
turned off. gauge control module and the cruise
control main switch
An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and the
,
ground
Brake switch Cruise control CRUISE BRAKE SW should Faulty brake pedal position switch
signal main switch indicate OFF when the brake Blown No. 10 (18 A) fuse in the
ON, brake pedal is pressed and ON under-dash fuse/relay box
pedal pressed, should be indicated when the An open in the wire between the PCM
then released brake pedal is released. and the brake pedal position switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
Set switch Set/decel CRUISE CONTROL SET SW Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal switch pressed should indicate ON when the An open in the wire between the gauge
and released set/decel switch is pressed control module and the cruise control
and OFF when the set/decel combination switch
switch is released. A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and ground
Resume Resume/accel CRUISE CONTROL RESUME Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal switch pressed SW should indicate ON when An open in the wire between the gauge
and released the resume switch is pressed control module and the cruise control
and OFF when the resume combination switch
switch is released. A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
(cont'd)
4-47
BACK
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test (cont'd)
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
tested
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL CANCEL. Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and SW should indicate ON when
released the cancel switch is pressed
and OFF when the cancel
switch is released.
Cruise control Start the CRUISE INDICATOR should Faulty gauge control module
indicator engine, turn indicate ON when the cruise
signal the cruise control is set and OFF when
control main the cruise control is cancelled.
switch on, and
drive the
vehicle to
above 25 mph
(40. km/h). Set
and cancel the
cruise control
Transmission Shift in D SHIFTfTRANS RANGE SW Faulty transmission range switch
range switch position should indicate ON in D, D3 An open in the wire between the PCM
signal and OFF in P, R, N. and the transmission range switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
Poor ground G101
4-48
BACK

Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) in the SRS
before doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-137).
2. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
3. Remove the six screws, then remove the cruise
control combination switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
Ifthere is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
input test, check and repair the wire harness on
the switch circuit .
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
1\
Terminal
\
3 4 5 6 7
Position
Cruise control
0- -0
main switch (ON)
Cruise control
main switch (OFF)
Set/decel
0 -0
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel
,... ,...
(PRESSED)
...., ....,
Cancel
....,
t..;;...
k:)
....,
(PRESSED)
BACK
n g i n ~ Mount Control System
4-50
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Troubleshooting. page 4-52
FRONT ENGINE MOUNT
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDERHOOD FUSE BOX
BATTERY
No.1 (120AJ NO.3150AJ
BLUIVEL
t
C10l 12
BLU
JGNmON
SWITCH
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
ENGINE MOUNT
V
CONTROL SOLENOID
ALVE
4-51 BACK
Troubleshooting
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg Snap-on YA4000A or
equivalent, commercially available
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
when idling.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle (see page 11-310).
2. Raise the engine speed from idling to 2,000 rpm.
3. Check the MOUNT CTRL SOL in the PGM-FI DATA
LIST with the Honda Diagnostic Systel\l (HDS).
Is ON indicated at idling and OFF indicated at
2,000 rpm?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Update the powertrain control module (PCM)
if it does not have the latest software (see page
11-7), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then recheck. If the engine mount control
system works properly, and the PCM was updated,
the troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was
substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244) .
4. Disconnect the engine mount control solenoid
valve 2P connector from the engine mount control
solenoid valve.
4-52
6. Measure the voltage between engine mount
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine
mount control solenoid valve 2P connector
terminal No.2 and No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box .
BACK
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2, with the engine at idle.
IG 1
(BLK/YEL)
MCS
(BLU/VEL)
'------I':/..l-----'
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM (A 12)
and the engine mount control solenoid valve 2P
connector. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if it
does not have the latest software (see page 11-7),
or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
and recheck. If the engi ne mount control system
works properly, and the PCM was updated, the
troubleshooting.is complete. If the PCM was
11-244) .
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2.
IG 1
(BLK/YEL)
MCS
(BLU/VEL)
'------I ':/.. l-------.J
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM (A 12) and the engine mount control
solenoid valve. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if
it does not have the latest software (see page 11-7),
or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
and recheck. If the engine mount control system
works properly, and the PCM was updated, the
troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe PCM was
11-244) .
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
4-53 BACK
Troubleshooting (cont' d)
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) that is closest to
the solenoid connector from the engine mount
control solenoid valve (8), and connect a
commercially available vacuum pump/gauge,
0-30 in.Hg, to the hose. Apply about 20 in.Hg of
vacuum, and wait for 20 seconds.
Do the engine mount hold vacuum?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Either the vacuum hose or one of the engine
mount has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed .
4-54
11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
with and without vacuum applied?
YES-Go to step 12,
NO-Replace the front engine mount .
12. Connect a commercially available vacuum pump/
gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the engine mount control
solenoid valve (A) that is closest to the solenoid
connector.
Is there manifold vacuum at idle, and a decrease
in manifold vacuum when you raise the engine
speed above 1,000 rpm?
YES-The system is OK .
NO-Replace the engine mount control solenoid
valve .
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assem bly
Engine Removal ........................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ........................................................ 5-12
Engine Mount Replacement ........................................ 5-23
Cylinder -Head .............................................. , ..... 6-1
Engine Block .................................................... 7-1
Engine Lubrication .... .................. .... ................. 8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System ............. 9-1
I
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO
Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566
Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031
These special tools are available through the American
Honda Tool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring,
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Remove the support struts from the engine hood.
Move the engine hood to a vertical position, then
reinstall the support strut as shown.
2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-330).
3. Drain the power steering system fluid, then plug
the fluid reservoir and return hose (see page 17-13).
4. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
5-2
7. Remove the battery.
8. Remove the engine cover.
9. Remove the breather pipe (A), then remove the air
intake duct (B).
BACK
11. Remove the main under-hood fuse box (A), then 13. Remove the positive starter cable (A).
remove the harness clamps (B).
/ B
12. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the
battery base (B).
A
14. Remove the shift cable (see page 14-309).
15. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-338).
(cont'd)
5-3
BACK
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (8).
17. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector (e).
19. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
20. Make a reference mark (8) across the steering joint
and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Remove the
steering joint bolt (e), and loosen the steering joint
bolt (D), then disconnect the steering joint from the
steering gearbox pinion shaft (E).
5-4
21. Remove the alternator cable (A) from the main
under-hood fuse I:)ox.
A
22. Remove the coolant reservoir from the bracket.
23. Remove the bracket (A), then remove the
powertrain control module (peM) cover (8).
BACK
24. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect
the two PCM connectors (B) and engine wire
harness connector (C).
26. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump inlet hose
(A) and PIS pump outlet hose (B) from the PIS
pump, then plug the PIS lines and PIS pump.
27. Remove the PIS hose clamp (C) from the cylinder
head cover.
28. Remove the radiator cap.
29. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
30. Remove the front wheels.
31. Remove the splash shield.
32. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
33. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
(see page 14-303).
34. Drain the n g i n ~ oil (see page 8-6).
35. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
(cont'd)
5 .. 5
BACK
Engine Assembly
36. Remove exhaust pipe A.
37. Separate the stabilizer links from the dampers
(see page 18-20).
38. Separate the tie-rod end ball joints from the.
knuckles (see step 4 on page 18-15).
39. With active damper system: Remove the
suspension stroke sensors from the lower arms.
40. Separate the knuckles from the lower arms (see
step 7 on page 18-15).
41. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all
precision-finished surfaces with new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
42. Remove the propeller shaft from the transfer shaft
flange (see page 16-39).
43. Remove the transfer assembly (see page 14-270).
5-6
44. Remove the PIS hose (A), then plug the line and
hose.
45. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
BACK
46. Remove the transmission lower mount bolts (A)
and ground cable (8).
47. Remove the rear mount bolts (A), and power
steering line bracket (8).
48. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
49. Disconnect the Ale compressor clutch connector
(A), then remove the Ale compressor (8) without
disconnecting the Ale hoses.
50. Remove the heater hoses.
c
(cont'd)
5-7
BACK
Engine Assembly
51. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (8).
52. Remove the ATF cooler hoses from the
transmission, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and
lines.
5-8
53. Remove the radiator (see page 10-10).
54. Remove the connector bracket from the front
cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach
the engine balancer bar front arm.
55. Remove the bracket from the rear cylinder head;
use the bracket bolt hole to attach the engine
balancer bar rear arm.
BACK
56. Remove the service caps (A) for the front damper
flange nuts from the cowl cover (B). Position the
engine hanger adapters (VSB02e000031) with the
"FRONT"mark facing forward over the damper
flange nuts.
57. Install the engine hanger balance bar(VSB02e
000019); attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with a spacer (B) and 10 x 1.25 mm
bolt (e), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
head with 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (E).
58. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to
the vehicle, and attach the hook to the slotted hole
in the engine hanger balance bar. Tighten the wing
nut (F) by hand to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
60. Disconnect the front engine mount control solenoid
valve tube (A), then remove the front engine mount
bolts (B).
B
61. With active damper system: Disconnect the front
suspension stroke sensor connectors (A), then
remove the harness clamps (B).
(cont'd)
5-9
BACK
Engine Assembly
62. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the
marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (e).
63. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable
arms (B) ofthe front subframe adapter (EQS02
BMDXSBO) to its center plate.
EOS02BMDXSBO
~
B ~
A
5 ~ 1
64. Lineup the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on
the corner of the jack base, then attach the front
subframe adapter (A) to the jack base with the bolts
(B) that came with the jack. Tighten all bolts
securely.
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
B
A
EOS02BMDXSBO
65. Raise the jack to vehicle height, then attach the
front subframe adapter to the front subframe using
the subframe stiffener mounting bolts (e) and bolt
holes.
66. Remove the six 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) securing the
subframe stiffeners (B), the four subframe
mounting bolts (e), and the stiffeners, then lower
the front subframe (D).
BACK
67. Lower the vehicle and attach a chain hoist (A) to the
engine hook (B) and transmission hook (C). Lift up
on the engine/transmission until it's securely
supported by the chain hoist, and remove the
engine support hanger from the engine and vehicle.
B
68. Remove the mounting bolts from the upper half of
the side engine mount bracket.
69. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
electrical wiring.
70. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about 150
mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and
electrical wiring are disconnected and free from the
engine/transmission;then lower it all the way.
71. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/
transmission.
72. Raise the vehicle all the way on the lift, and remove
the engine/transmission from under the vehicle.
5-11
BACK
En'gine Assembly
Engine Installation
Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566 '
Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
Engine hanger adapter setVSB02C000031
These special tools,areavailable through the American Honda Tool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
1. Install the engine mount bracket and accessory brackets, and tighten their bolts to the specified torque.
5-12
10x1.25mm
44Nm
(4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)
AIC COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
12x1.25mm
88Nm
" (9.!> kgfm, 65 Ibfft)
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
44Nm
10x1.25mm
38Nm
(3.9 kgf'm, 28 Ibfft)
Replace.
BACK
2. Position. the engine/transmission underthe.vehicle.
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully
lower the vehicle until the engine.andtransmission
are properly positioned in the engine compartment.
Make sure the vehicle is not resting on any part of
the engine or transmission. Lift and support the
engine with a chain hoist (A), and carefully raise the
engine/transmission into place.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in
the sequence given in the following steps. Failure
to follow this sequence may cause excessive noise
and vibration, and reduce engine mount life.
engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000031) with the
"FRONT"mark facing forward over the damper
flange u t s ~
4. Install the engine hanger balance bar (VSB02C
bolt (C), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
in the engine hanger balance bar. Tighten the wing
nut (F) by hand to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
(cont'd)
5-13
BACK
Engin.e Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
6. Install new mounting bolts into the upper half of
the side engine mount bracket. Tighten the bolts to
the specified torque.
7. Remove the chain hoist, then raise the vehicle on
the lift to full height.
8. Using the subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXSBO) and
a jack, raise the front subframe upto the body.
c
C
12x 1.25 mm
74Nm
(7.5 kgfm,
54Ibfft)
E
E /! /
B D
B 117Nm
14 x 1.5 mm (11.9 kgfm, 86.1 Ibfft)
103 Nm (10.5 kgfm, 75.9Ibfft)
Replace.
9. Loosely install the new front subframe mounting
bolts (four) (B), the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (six) (C) (D),
and the stiffeners (E).
5-14
10. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
(B) with the body, then tighten the bolts on the front
subframe to the specified torque.
B
11. Remove the and front subframe adapter.
12. With active damper system: Connect the front
suspension stroke sensor connectors (A), then
install the harness clamps (B).
BACK
13. Tighten the transmission lower mount bolts (A) and
ground cable (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28 Ibfftl
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
6x1.0mm ,
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl
14. Tighten the rear mount bolts (A) and power
steering line bracket (B).
10x 1.25 mm
42Nm
(4.3 kgfm, 31 Ibfftl
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
A
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
15. Tighten the front mount bolts (A), then connect the
front engine mount control solenoid valve tube (B).
A
12x 1.25mm
38Nm
(3,9 kgfm, 28 Ibfftl
Replace.
B
17. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket, then retighten them to
10x 1.25mm
44Nm
Replace.
18. Remove the engine support hanger and engine
hanger balance bar.
(cont'd)
5-15
BACK
Engine' Assembly
19. Install the AlC compressor (A), then connect the
AlC compressor clutch connector (8).
20. Install the radiator (see page 10-10).
21. Raise the vehicle on the Hftlo full height.
22. Install the power steering (PIS) hose (A).
5-16
23. Connect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
24. Install the transfer assembly (see page 14-21'2).
25. Install the propeller shaft on transfer shaft flange
(see page 16-39).
26. Wipe the driveshaft clean. Install a new set ring on
the end of each driveshaft, then install the
driveshafts. Make sure each ring "clicks" into place
in the differential and intermediate shaft.
27. Connect the suspension lower arms to the knuckles
(see step 9 on page 18-18).
28. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints to the knuckles
29. Connectthe stabilizer links (see page 18-20).
30. With active damper system: Connect the suspension
stroke sensors to the lower arms.
BACK
31. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets (B) and
new self-locking nuts (C).
c ~
10x 1.25 mm
33Nm
Replace.
8x1.25mm
22Nm
C
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
(5.5kgfm,
40Ibfft)
Replace.
32. Install the front subframe stiffener using new bolts.
~ 1 0 x 1.25 mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm, 40 Ibfft)
Replace.
33. Install the splash shield.
34. Install the front wheels.
36. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (B).
(cont'd)
5-17
BACK
Engine Assembly
37. Install the heater hoses.
c
38. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler
hoses to the transmission, and secure the hoses
with the clamps.
NOTE: Check the installation location of the clamps
(see page 14-302).
5-18
39. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder
head.
10x 1.25mm
45 Nm 14.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)
40. Install the bracket to the rear cylinder head.
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
BACK
41. Install the power steering (PIS) pump outlet hose
(A) with a new O-ring (8), and install the PIS pump
inlet hose (C).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibf.ft)
42. Install the PIS hose clamp (D) to the cylinder head
cover.
44. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A) and engine wire harness connector
(8), then install the harness clamps (C).
45. Install thePC;M cover (A), then install the bracket
(8).
46. Install the coolant reservoir to the bracket.
47. Install the alternator cable (A) to the main under-
hood fuse box.
A
(cont'd)
5-19
BACK
Engine Assembly
48. Align the reference mark (A) on the steering joint
and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Connect the
steering joint (8) to the steering gearbox pinion
shaft (C). Tighten the steering joint bolt.
8x 1.25mm
28Nm
(2.9 kgf.m, 21 Ibfttl
49. Install the steering joint cover (D).
50. Install the steering wheel (seepage 17-24).
51. Install the br;:tke booster vacuum hose (A) and
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (8).
52. Connectthe evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (C).
5-20
53. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-340),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (8).
54. Install the shift cable (see page 14-309).
55. Install the positve starter cable (A).
A
8x1.25mm
9.0Nm
(0.9 kgfm, 7.0 Ibftt)
BACK
56. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
clamps (8).
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfttl
~
57. Install the harness clamps (A), then install the main
under-hood fuse box (8).
58. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).
59. Install the air intake duct (A), then install. the
breather pipe (8).
60. Install the engine cover.
(cont'd)
5 ~ 2 1
BACK
Engine Assembly
61. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
62. Install the service caps on the cowl cover.
63. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
64. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
65. Check for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
(do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for u e l l e k ~ at any point in the fuel line.
66. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-6).
67. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-266).
68. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see step 10 on page 10-7).
69. Install the return hose to the power steering fluid
reservoir. Refill the power steering system fluid
(see page 17-13).
70. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
71. Inspectthe idle speed (see page 11-310).
72. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
(see page 17-28).
74. Do the headlight intial position learning procedure
(see page 22-231).
76. Set the clock.
BACK
Engine Mount Replacement
10x 1.25mm
38Nm
12x1.25mm
54Nm
12x 1.25mm
74Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
38Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
54 Nm FRONT MOUNT
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
42Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
54Nm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
74Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
38Nm
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
42Nm
10x1.25mm
38Nm
5-23
BACK
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools .................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................. 6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test ................................................. 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment ....................................... 6-8
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-11
Timing Belt Inspection ................................................. 6-13
Timing Belt Removal .................................................... 6-13
Timing Belt Installation ................................................ 6-16
Timing Belt Replacement ............................................ 6-20
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement ............................. 6-24
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement ....................... 6-25
Cylinder Head Cover Removal .................................... 6-26
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-27
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-29
Camshaft Replacement ................................................ 6-32
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-34
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................ 6-35
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection ............................... 6-36
Camshaft Inspection .................................................... 6-38
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ..................... 6-41
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-42
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-42
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-43
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-45
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation ................. 6-47
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal,
and Pulley Installation .............................................. 6-48
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-49
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ........................ 6-54
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 6-54
BACK
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descrip'tion Qtv
CD 07 AAJ-PNAA 101 AirPresslire Regulator 1
07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
CD 07 JAB-001 020A Holder Handle 1
@ 07 MAB-PY30 1 OA Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
07 PAD-OO 1 0000 Stem Seal Driver 1
(j) 07 PAF-0030 100 Camshaft Oil Seal Driver 1
I
07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1
070AJ-0030100 VTEC Air Stopper 1
@
07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 rnm 1
07757-PJ1010A ValveSpi-ing Compressor Attachment 1
. ,
d
I) B ~
/
r
CD CD
@
e
p
/

(j)

@

6-2 BACK
REAR UPPER COVER
PULLEY BOLT
Replacement,
page 6-11
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Replacement,
page 6-11
TIMING BELT ADJUSTER
Replacement,
page 6-24
RUBBER SEALS
/
TIMING BELT
Removal, page 6-13
Installation, page 6-16
TIMING BELT
GUIDE PLATE
Installation, step 10 on page 6-18
SIDE ENGINE MOUNT
BRACKET
RUBBER SEALS
TIMING BELT
DRIVE PULLEY
Replacement,
page 6-25
(cant'd)
6-3
BACK
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
CYLINDER HEAD COVERS
Removal, page 6-26

"jAD COVER GASKET
OIL CONTROL ORIFICES
6-4
HEAD COVER
GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
DOWEL PINS
BACK
VALVE COTTERS ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
VTEC Rocker Arm Test,
page 6-7
SPRING RETAINER /
INTAKE VALVE .
--::
INTAKEVALVESEAl.
..

INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-41
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
page 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-35
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
. page 6-36
O-RING
CAMSHAFT
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-29
INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-41
6-5
BACK
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After the inspection, you must reset the
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM
will continue to stop the fuel injectors from functioning.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
2. Turn the ignition switchOFF.
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3) .
. c.
4. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (II).
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, thEm ALL INJECTORS
OFF function on the HDS.
8. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
9. Remove the six spark plugs.
10. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole.
6-6
11. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the
starter motor and measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm
2
, 135 psi)
12. Measure the compre$sion on the remaining
cylinders.
Maximum Variation:
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
13. If the compression is not within specifications,
check the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
Damaged or worn valves and seats
Damaged cylinder head gasket
Damaged or worn piston rings
Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
14. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the ALL
INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS.
BACK
VTEC Rocker ,Arm Test
-VTEC air adapter07VAJ-P8A010A .
- VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100
-Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then
turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
3. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
4. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see
5. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No.1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (8) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
- If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 6.
- If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the
rocker arm pistons in the mid and primary rocker
arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs
replacing, replace the mid, primary, and
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and
retest.
c A
6. Repeat step 5 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 7.
7. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa
(7.0 kgf/cm2, 100 psi).
8. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
9. Remove the No.1 and No.6 intake rocker shaft
mounting bolts, then install the VTEC air adapter
and VTEC air stopper, and connect the air pressure
regulator as shown.
FRONT:
REAR:
07AAJ-PNAA101
070AJ-0030100
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the
specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
440-540 kPa (4.5-5.5 kgf/cm
2
, 64-78 psi)
NOTE: If the rocker arm pistons do not move after
applying air pressure; move the primary or
secondary rocker arm up and down manually.
(cont'd)
6-7
BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
11. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
mid rocker arm (e) does not move when pushed
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
12. Remove the special tools.
13. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 24 Nm (2.4 kgfm,
17 Ibfft)
14. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-27).
15. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
6-8
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head
temperature is less than 100 "F (38 "C).
2. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
3. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDe).
Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with
the No.1 piston TDe mark (B) on the front camshaft
pulley.
B
BACK
4. Select the correct thickness feeler .gauge for the
valves you're going to check.
Valve Clearance
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.)
Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
REAR:
No.1
No.1
FRONT:
No.4
No.4
EXHAUST
No.2
No.2
INTAKE
No.5
No.5
EXHAUST
No.3
No.3
No.6
No.6
5. Insert the feeler 9aoge (A) between the adjusting
screw and the end of the valve stem on No.1
cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel
a slight amount of drag.
6. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (8) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
A
7xO.75mm
20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 14 Ibfttl
B
7. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
(cont'd)
6-9
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
8. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No.4 piston
TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
B
9. Check and, if necessary, adjustthe valve clearance
on No.4 cylinder.
B.
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.2 cylinder.
6-10
(A) on the front upper cover witMhe No.5 piston
B ,
on No.5 cylinder.
B
on No.3 cylinder.
BACK
TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
B
on No.6 cylinder.
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and,
Installation
Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A
Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially
available 19 mm socket
Removal
1. Remove the right front wheel.
4. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
A
07 JAB-001 020A
/
C
07JAA001020A
(or commercially available)
5. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket
(C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft
pulley.
(cont'd)
6-11
BACK
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys
crankshaft (8), bolt (C), and washer (0). Lubricate
with new engine oil as shown.
X: Remove any oil
Q:Clean
.: Lubricate with new engine oil
A
/ A 'A'
:" ..
----ggg
,\0' c
r
:: ......
6-12
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt.
00 not use an impactwrench.
-1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (8). Torque the bolt to 65 N
m (6.5 kgfm, 47 Ibfft) with a torque wrench
and heavy duty 19 mm socket (C).
-2 Mark the bolt head (0) and crankshaft pulley (E)
as shown, then ti.ghten the bolt an additional
60
0
(The mark bolt head lines up with
the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
C
07 JAA-001 020A
(or commercially available)
o
E
5. Install the right front wheel.
BACK
Timing Belt Inspection
2. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
4-35).
3. Remove the front upper cover.
----6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm. 8.7 Ibfttl
4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant
contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked. or is
contaminated with oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil
or solvent that gets on the belt.
Timing Belt Removal
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
B
A
2. Check that the No.1 piston top dead center (TOC)
mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the
pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
pulley mark.
A
(cont'd)
6-13
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
4-35).
5. For ease of removing the side engine mount,
support the engine with a jack and wood block
'under the oil pan.
6. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the
upper half of the side engine mount bracket (8).
7. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (8).
6-14
8. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right
front wheel.
10. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-11).
11. Remove the lower cover.
BACK
12. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the
battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
13. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold
the timing belt adjuster in its current position.
Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench.
14. Remove the timing belt guide plate (A).
15. Remove the lower half of the side engine mount
bracket.
16. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (8),
then remove the timing belt. Discard the idler
pulley bolt.
6-15
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation
NOTE: The following is the installation procedure for a
used belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the
timing belt replacement procedure (see page 6-20).
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide
plate, and the upper and lower covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center
(TOC) by aligning the TOC mark (A) on the tooth of
the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (8) on
the oil pump.
A
6-16
3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TOC by aligning the
TOC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
pointers (8) on the back covers.
FRONT:
o
REAR:
BACK
4. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
come off.
5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing
belt cannot be installed, do the timing belt
replacement procedure (see page 6-20).
6. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise
sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the timing belt when installing it.
-1 Drive pulley (A)
-2 Idler pulley (8)
-a Front camshaft pulley (e)
-4 Water pump pulley (D)
-6 Rear camshaft pulley (E)
-6 Adjusting pulley (F)
E
F
7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10x 1.25mm
45Nm
c
8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
9. Install the lower half ofthe side engine mount
bracket.
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl
-----

-::;..----10 x 1.25 mm
45Nm
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfftl
(cont'd)
6-17
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
11. Install the lower cover.
~
6x1.0mm
12Nm
6-18
12. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the
pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up with the pointer (B).
B
A
BACK
16. Check the camshaft pulley marks.
pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TOC, go to
step 17 .
Ifthe camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 16.
FRONT:
REAR:
17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount
bracket, and tighten the new mounting bolts (A),
then tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (B).
B
12x 1.25 mm
54Nm
A
10x1.25mm
R e . ~
(5.5 ... \40 "'"/ift",,) f ) .
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
C
18. Install the ground cable (C).
19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
BACK
t'-" ,
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement
NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of
a new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer
to the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-16).
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
the oil pump.
A
6-20
4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TOC by aligning the
TOC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
pointers (8) on the back covers.
FRONT:
REAR:
BACK
7. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the
auto-tensioner.
8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-
tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) pin through the
housing and the rod.' .
NOTE: The compression pressure should not
exceed 9,800 N (1,000kgf, 2,200 Ibf).
9. Install the auto-tensioner.
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place.
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibfft)
\
10. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold
the timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not
use a wrench.
11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
come off.
12. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise
sequence starting with the drive pulley.
-1 Drive pulley (A)
-.2 Idler pulley (B)
-a Front camshaft pulley (C)
-4 Water pump pulley (D)
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E)
-6 Adjusting pulley (F)
E
c
(cont'd)
6-21
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10x1.25mm
45Nm
14. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner.

6-22
16. Install the lowerhalf ofthe1side engine mount
bracket.
6x1.0mm
.12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
------

45Nm
17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
BACK
18. Install the lower cover.

6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (8).
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl
20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
21. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the
pulleys.
22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up with the pointer (8).
A
23. Check the camshaft pulley marks.
pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TOC, go to
step 24 .
Ifthe camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 3
through 22.
FRONT:
REAR:
(cont'd)
6-23 BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
24. Install the upper half ofthe side engine mount
bracket, and tighten the new mounting bolts (A),
then tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (8).
B
12x 1.25mm
54Nm
A
10xi.25mm
R . P ~
'5.5 k",\40 'bf.tt/,,), ____ .1/ .0
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2kgfm,
8.7Ibftt)
25. Install the ground cable (e).
26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
30. Do the crankshaft position (eKP) pattern clear/eKP
6-24
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt
adjuster (8) and collar (e).
5. Replace the timing belt auto-tensioner and timing
belt (see page 6-20).
BACK
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see "
2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
(see page 11-242).
3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley (A) and key (B).
4. Inspect the timing belt drive pulley and key for
damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the
timing belt drive pulley.
5. Install the new timing belt drive pulley.
6. Install the CKP sensor (see page 11-242).
7. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
8. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn
procedure (see page 11-4).
6-25 BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
3. Remove the dipstick.
4. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the harness
holder, and disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor connector (B), front secondary heated
oxygen sensor (secondary H02S) connector (e),
exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector (D)
and engine coolant temperature (EeT) sensor 1
connector (E).
D
c
5. Disconnect the three injector connectors from the
injectors on the rear side cylinder head.
6. Remove the power steering hose bracket mounting
bolt (A), the harness holder mounting bolts (B), and
the engine ground cable bolt (e).
7. Remove the engine ground cable (D) and breather
hose (E).
BACK
8. Remove the cylinder head cover.
FRONT:
REAR:
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
1. Check the spark plug seals and head cover' gasket
for damage and deterioration. If any seal or gasket
is damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove ofthe cylinder cover.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of
the cylinder head cover (8). Make sure the head
cover gasket is seated securely.
4. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a
shop toweL
(cont'd)
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder ,Head Cover Installation ,(cont'd)
5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the cylinder head cover (B).
FRONT:
REAR:
, _____ c
6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
6-28
7. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final
step tighten all bolts, in sequence, 12Nm (1.2 kgf.m,
8.7 Ibf.ft).

8. Tighten the harness holdermounting bolts (A) and
the power steering hose bracket mounting bolt (B).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
A
6x1.0mm
9. Install the engine ground cable (C) and breather
hose (0).
BACK
10. Connectthe three injector connectors.
11. Tighten the two bolts (A) securing the harness
holder, and connect the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector (B), exhaust
gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector (C), front
secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary H02S)
connector (D) and front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
connector (E).
A
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfft)
E/r
D
12. Install the dipstick.
c
13. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4 ~ 2 1 .
B
Cylinder Head Removal
NOTE:
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops belQw 100."F
(38 OC) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
6. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump (A), and PIS
hose clamp (B).
B
(cont'd)
6-29 BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal.(cont'd)
7. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36).
11. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (B).
12. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-338).
6-30
13. Remove the two nuts securing the purge joint.
14. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
Six injector connectors
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
Two air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors
Two secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connectors
15. Remove the front warm up three way catalytic
converter (front WU-lWC) (see page 11-370) and
rear warm up three way catalytic converter (rear
WU-lWC) (see page 11-371).
BACK
16. Remove the connector bracketfrom the front
cylinder head.
17. Remove the bracketfrom the rear cylinder head.
18. Remove the fuel rails (see page 11-312).
19. Remove the water passage (see page 10-9) ..
20. Remove the front and rear camshaft pulleys (A) and
back covers (8).
21. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
22. Remove the. cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a
time; repeat the sequence until all the bolts are
loosened.
23. Remove the cylinder head.
6 ~ 3
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Replacement
Front
3. Remove the battery and battery box.
5. Remove the upper radiator hose.
6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
(see page 11-388).
8. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34).
9. Remove the front camshaft pulley.
6-32
10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (8).
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16lbfft}
11. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.
Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil
to the journals and cam lobes.
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft
pulley mounting bolt, then install the front
camshaft pulley (see step 11 on page 6-49).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly; then tighten the
mounting bolts (see step 8 on page 6-48).
15. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
16. Install the upper radiator hose.
17. Install the battery and battery box. Clean the
battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper,
then assemble them and apply grease to prevent
corrosion.
18. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the
air out from the system (see step 10 on page 10-7).
(see page 17-28).
22. Set the clock.
BACK
Rear
1. Remove the intake ma nifold (see page 9-3).
2. Remove the two nuts securing the purge joint.
3. Remove the brake lines from the master cylinder
(see page 19-18).
6. Remove the rear camshaft pulley.
7. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (8).
8x 1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
8. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.
Always use a new O-ring (e). Apply new engine oil
to the journals and cam lobes.
pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 11 on page 6-49).
10. Install the rocker arm assembly, then tighten the
mounting bolts (see step 8 on page 6-48).
13. Install the brake lines (see page 19-18) and do the
brake system bleeding procedure (see page 19-9).
14. Do the eKP pattern clear/eKP pattern learn
6-33
BACK
.... ,.
"
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-29).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-38).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure
along the edges, and three ways across the center.
If warpageis',less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),
cylinder h.ead resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.);resurface the cylinder head.
Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
Cylinder Head Height
Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm
(4.7618-4.7657 in.)
6-34
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
3. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).
A
A
4. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
-1 Loosen the rocker shaft mounting bolts two
turns at a time, to prevent damaging the valves
or rocker arm assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
CD @

@

BACK
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly IReassembly
NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-36).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply new engine oil to any contact points.
When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm
assembly.
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARMB
~
e
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
[Q] 0 0 [Q] [Q] 0 0 [Q] [Q] 0 0 [Q]
e
e e
rwM
B
1
A
SPRING
[Q]o o [Q] 0 o [Q] 0
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
Letter B is stamped
on rocker arm.
Letter A is stamped
on rocker arm.
e
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
/
e
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM A
\
6-35
BACK
Cyl,inder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-35).
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
6-36
5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
(0.0010-0.0026 in.)
Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)'
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
(0.0010-0.0030 in.)
Inspect rocker arm
face for wear.
6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the
clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the
rocker shaft and all rocker arms that are beyond the
service limit. If any intake rocker arm needs
replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that
set (primary, mid, and secondary).
BACK
VTEC Rocker Arms
7. Inspect the rocker arm synchronizing pistons (A).
Push them manually. If they do not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the pistons when
reassembling .
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (8),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
B
8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-35).
9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-48).
6-37
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
2. Remove the rocker arms (see page 6-34).
3. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and
flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 24 Nm (2.4 kgfm, 17Ibfft)
6-38
4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
5. Zero.the dial indicator against the end of the
camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
camshaft.
Camshaft End Play.
(0.002-0.008 in.)
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out
the camshaft (8).
A
BACK
7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted,
scored, or excessively worn.
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
10. Clean the camshaft bearing sIJrfaces in the cylinder
head. Measure the inside diameter of each
camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-
round condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within the
service limit, go to step 12. .
If the camshaft-to;holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 11.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance
(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
(cont'd)
6-39
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
11. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
on V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
Ifthe total runout is beyond the serVice limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil
clearance. Ifthe oil clearance is still out of
tolerance, replace the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout
6-40
12. Measure the cam lobe height.
C L b H . h S d d (N am 0 e elgl t tan ar ew:
INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 35.112 mm 36.389 mm
(1.3824 in.) (1.4326 in.)
MID 36.394 mm
(1.4328 in.)
SEC 35.112 mm
(1.3824 in.)
PRI: Primary
IN: Intake
MID: Mid
EX: Exhaust
SEC: Secondary
T/B: Timing Belt
SEC MID PRI
FRONT BANK
EX IN EX
+-T/B
PRI MID SEC
REAR BANK
EX IN EX
+-T/B
BACK
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Valve spring compressor attachment
07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are
removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
3. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and
valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and
remove the valve cotters.
4. Remove the valve spring compressor, valve spring
compressor attachment, spring.retainer, and.spring.
5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
6. Remove the valve seal.
7. Remove the valve spring seat and valve.
6-41
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-41).
2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 35.90-36.10 mm
(1.413-1.421 in.)
B Standard (New): 116.55-117.15 mm
(4.589-4.612 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm
(1.177-1.185 in.)
B Standard (New): 113.90-114.50 mm
(4.484-4.508 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm
(0.2146"'-0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
t
A
+
6-42
...... 1------- B ------..., ... 1
C
I\'------'---'+ __ -,..,-,l
U
If t
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-41).
2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm
(0.39.in.), then measure the guide-to-stem
clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the
stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
method).
If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
recheck it using a new valve.
If the measurement is now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
If the measurement with a new valve still
exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
(0.004-0.006 in.)
3. Subtract the valve stem 0.0. (measured with a
micrometer) from the valve guide 1.0. (me'asured
with an inside micrometer or ball gauge).
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
(0.0008-0.0018 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide .Clearance
(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
BACK
Valve Guide Replacement
Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100
Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page
6-42).
2. As illustrated, use.a commercially available
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter ofthe valve In most cases, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
A 5.3mm I
I (0.21 in.' t
['L-I
1- r;.m.JI !
10.Smm
(0.42 in.'
3. Selectthe proper replacement guides, and chill
them in the freezer section ofa refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300 Of (150 "C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 Of (150 "C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm
(0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. "fold the air hammer directly in line with the
valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
the camshaft side of the head.
7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a
8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you
could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a
time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
6-43
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
camshaft side ofthe head; use the valve guide
driver to drive the guide to the specified installed
height(A) of the guide (B) . lf you have all 12 guides
to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0;850 in.)
6-44
10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
cutting oil.
11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
valve guide bore.
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
drawing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-42).
Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without being stuck.
BACK
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page
6-42). If the valve guides are worn, replace them
(see page 6-43) before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
3. Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough
material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30 cutter
and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat). Check
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.
67.5 0 (intake seat)
60 0 (exhaust seat)
5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 cutter
to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width
Standard (New): 1 2 5 ~ 1 5 5 mm (0.049-0.061 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
A
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut with the 67.5 cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat) to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45
cutter to restore seat width .
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45 cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with
the 45 cutter.
(cont'd)
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
and measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height
(1.841-1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height
(1.838-1.869 in.)
Service Limit: 47.73 mm 1 ~ 8 7 9 in.)
9. If the valve stem installed height is beyond the
service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
head; the valve seat in the head is too deep.
6 .. 46
BACK
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Stem seal driver 07 PAD-OO 1 0000
Valve spring compressor attachment
07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install
the valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal
driver (8).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring
(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
)
E c
B
07PAD-0010000
NOTE: Use 5.5 mm side.
5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
toward the cylinder head.
6. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and
valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and
install the valve cotters.
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and valve
spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three
times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
stem.
6-47
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the
camshaft oil seal.
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 -1.5 mm
(0.02-0.06 in.) below the surface of the
cylinder head.
FRONT:
8x1.2Smm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
o
-----
c
REAR:
8x 1.2Smm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibfft)

'" C
---WIJJ/JU-
E
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
6-48
5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow
dowel pins (F).
6. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
7. Ifthe rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-35).
8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the
sequence as shown to ensure that the rockers do
not bind on the valves.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and
flange ofthe exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 24 Nm (2.4 kgf.m,17Ibf.ft)
CD

10. Install the front injector base and rear injector base.
Always use a neW gasket (see page 9-7).
BACK
pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (8),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).
8x 1.2Smm
22Nm
12.2 \61 ... 81
'A
12x 1.2Smm
91 Nm (9.2 kgfm, 68 Ibftt)
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with
new O-rings (8).
~ D
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head
gaskets (0).
the oil pump.
A
(cont'd)
6-49
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
6. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDG by aligning the
TDG marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
pointers (B) on the back covers.
FRONT:
REAR:
7. Putthe cylinder head onto the engine block.
6-50
8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point B.
B 50 mm 12.0 in.)
A 45 mm 11.8 in.)
9. If either diameter is less than 11.3 mm (0.44 in.),
replace the cylinder head bolt.
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
11. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to
30 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibfft). Use a beam-type
torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque
wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the
first step.
BACK
12. After torquing, tighten all cylinder head bolts in two
steps (90 0 per step). If you are using a new cylinder
head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90 o.
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
16. Install the water passage (see page 10-9).
17. Install the front warm up three way catalytic
converter (front WU-TWC) (see page 11-370) and
rear warm up three way catalytic converter (rear
WlJ-TWC) (see page 11-371).
18. Install the fuel rails (see page 11-312).
19. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder
head.
10x1.25mm
(cont'd)
6-51
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
20. Install the bracket to the rear cylinder head.
8x 1.2Smm
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m. 16Ibfft)
21. Install the purge joint.
6x1.0mm
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm.
8.7Ibfft)
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
6-52
22; Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-340),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (8).
23. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and
install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head.
Six injector connectors
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
Two air fuel ratio (NF) sensor connectors
Two secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connectors
BACK
24. Install the upper radiator, hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (8).
26. Install the alternator (see page 4-37).
27. Install the power steering (PIS) pump (A) and PIS
hose bracket (8). '
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
B
8x1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16lbfft)
29. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals then
connect them to the battery. Apply grease to the
battery terminals to prevent corrosion.
30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are. installed correctly.
31. Check for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
(do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuel leaks at any point in the fuel line.
air from the cooling .system with the heater valve
open (see step 10 on page 10-7).
34. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-310).
(see page 17-28).
38. Set the clock.
6-53
BACK
,Cylinder Head
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In
Car
Camshaft oil seal driver 07 PAF-0030 1 00
2. Remove the camshaft pulley and back cover (see
step 20 on page 6-31). :
3. Remove the camshaft oil seaL
4. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
5. Apply a light coatof mUltipurpose grease to the lip
of the camshaft oil seal.
6. Using the special tool (A), washer (B), and a 12 x 75
x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the camshaft oil seal
(D) about 0.5-1.5 mm (0.02-0.06 in.) below the
surface of the cylinder head.
B
A
07PAF-0030100
pulley mounting bolt. Install the back cover, then
install the camshaft pulley (see step 11 on page
6-49).
6-54
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt (A), always use
a new washer (B).
FRONT:
B
R\"

"'A 28x 1.5 mm
80Nm
(!J.O kgf'm, 58 Ibfft)
REAR:
A
16x 1.5 mm
40Nm
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................... 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-9
Oil Pan Removal ........................................................... 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal .................................. 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-15
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-18
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-21
Crankshaft and Piston Installation .............................. 7-23
Oil Pan Installation ....................................................... 7-28
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ... 7-30
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car ...................................................... 7-30
Drain Bolt Installation ................................................... 7-31
BACK
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty
CD 070AD-RCAA 100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
070AD-RCAA200 Driver Attachment, 106 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
I

CD
7-2
BACK
PULLEY END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Installation,
step 2 on page 8-13
Installation-in car,
page 7-30
OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-10
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
FILTER
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOIDI
OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
. TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Installation,
step 23 on page 7-26
Installation-in car,
page 7-30
~ \
\ DRIVE PlA1UOLl
WASHER
AfT DRIVE PLATE
(cont'd)
7-3
BACK
Engine Block
7-4
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil Clearance, page 7-7
Selection, page 7-8
DOWEL PINS
DRAIN BOLT

CRANKSHAFT
/
End Play, page 7-6
Runout, page 7-15
Out-of-Round, page 7-14
Removal, page 7-12

THRUST WASHERS
---OIL JET BOLTS
-----OIL JETS
Do not reuse oil jet,
after removing it.
DRAIN BOLT
BACK
PISTON PIN
Removal
Inspectio'rfage 7-18
Installatio page 7-19
, n. page 7-20
/
J

Oil Cleara
Selection npce. page 7-9
age 7-10
CONNECTI
f""NECTING R BEARING g; ROD
nspection. step ?J> BOLTS
on page 7-24
, ,'I,:'
',';' ,

RINGS '
eplacem ,ent. page 7-21
I,
BLOCK
w;"nder Bore I
arpage page 7-15
page 7-15
'5
BACK
, .
. :r;
Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-11).
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 10 on page 7-12).
3. Measure the connecting 'rod end play with a feeler
gauge (A) between the (B) and
crankshaft (e). ' ',' '
Connecting Rod End Piay ,
Service Limit:, (0.018 in.)
..
B
4. If the connecting rod end :play is,out-of-tolerance,
install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page '
7-12).
':' j
, .... '
7-6
5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play
6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust
washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance,
replace crankshaft (see page 7-12).
BACK
Crankshaft Main Bearing
Main Bearing. Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the main bearing caps and bearing halves
(see page 7-12) ..
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a
clean shop towel;
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still.in the vehicle when you
bolt the main cap down tocheck the clearance, the
weight of the crankshaft anc;l drive plate will flatten
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time. '
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the
bearing cap bolts to 74 N'm (7.5 kgf.rri,
and the bearing cap side bolts to 49 Nm (5.0 kgf'm,
36 Ibfft) in the proper sequence (see step 22 on
page
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges .
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the
widest part ofthe plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
(0.0007:-0.0018 ill.)
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
ofthe bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
adjust clearance. , ,
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger .or smaller bearing (the
color listed above OJ below that one), and check
again.lf the proper clearance cannotbe obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller be.arings,
replace the crankshaft and start over (see page
7-12).
(cont'd)
7-7
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Main Bearing Selection
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the
block as a code for the size of each of the fou r ma i n
journal bores.
Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft
(codes for main journal size), to choose the correct
Ifthe codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
7-8
Bearing Identification
Color coda is on the
edge ofthe bearing
10rl
20rll
3 or III
40rlill
50rllill
60rllllll
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
jourmil (Thicker)
------I ... Larger crank bore
---I ... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Red!
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Pink Yellow
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow!
Yellow Green
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Yellow Green
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Brown
Green Brown
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown!
Brown Black
NOTE: When using bearing halves
of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
the top or bottom.
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
No.1 JOURNAL
(Pulley end)
No.4 JOURNAL
(Transmission end)
BACK
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half
(see page 7-12). .
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
with a clean sho.p towel.
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal.
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and to-rque the
bolts.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges. . .
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque: .
20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 14Ibf.lt) + 90 0
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half al'Jd measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal:OilClearance
Standard (New): 0.020-0.044 mm ."
(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a
new, complete bearing with the same color code,
and recheck theclearante. Do not file, shim, or
scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
7. Ifthe plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannotbe
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
.. bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over
(see page 7-12).
(cont'd)
7-9
BACK
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Rod Bearing Selection
Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges, from 0
to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.)
increments, depending on the size of its big end bore.
It's then stamped with a number or bar (1,2,3, or 4/1, II,
III, or 1111) indicating the range. You may find any ,
combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/1, II, III, or 1111 in any engine.
Normal Bore Size: 60.0 mm (2.36 in.) .
Inspectthe connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of
each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end.
Use them, and the letters or bars stamped on the crank
(codes for rod journal size) to choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
7-10
Half of the number or bar
is stamped on bearing cap
and the other half is
stamped on rod.
Bearing Identification
Color code is on the
edge ofthe bearing
Aorl
Borll
Cor III
Dorllli
Eorlllll.
Forllllli
Smaller
rod
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
1 ~ . Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow!
Yellow Green
Pink!'
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Yellow Green
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Brown
Green Brown
Green
Green!
Brown
BrownJ
Brown Black
Green!
Brown
BrownJ
Black
Brown Black
NOTE: When using bearing halves
of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
the top or bottom.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
(Letters or Bars)
No.1 JOURNAL
(Pulley end)
No.6 JOURNAL
(Transmission end)
BACK
Oil Pan Removal
1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to
step 6.
3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-6).
5. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 36 on page 5-6).
6. Remove the rear warm up three way catalytic
converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket.
7. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four
bolts (8) securing the transmission.
8. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
9. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan
from the block in the places shown.
10. Remove the oil pan.
7-11
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-2).
2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-275).
3. Remove the drive plate.
4. Remove the cylinder heads (see page 6-29).
(see page 11-242).
6. Remove the timing belt drive pulley from the
crankshaft.
7. Remove the oil pan (see page 7 -11).
8. Remove the engine block end cover.
9. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
assembly.
7-12
10. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil
pump (C).
BACK
11. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the
crank pin at bottom dead center (BOC) for each
cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod
assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take
care not to damage the crank pin or cylinder with
the connecting rod.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
x
12. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/
bearings in order.
13. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
connecting rods, and set them aside with their
respective caps.
14. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,
reinstall the cap on the rod.
15. To avoid mix-up during reassembly, mark each
piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
16. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and bearing cap side
bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.
(cont'd)
7-13
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
(cont'd)
17. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
side bolts (8), then remove the bearing cap (C).
18. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engineblock, being
carefui not to damage the journals. .
, '
A
19. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine
block in the proper order.
7-14
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block
(see page 7-12).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe
cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Check the keyway and threads.
4. Measure out-of -round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in'two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round
EB
o
o
o
1.+ L
Iff'
5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper
BACK
Straightness
6. Place the engine block on the surface plate.
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No.1 and
No.4 journal ofthe engine block.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the engine block.
9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals.
Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions.
The difference between measurements on each
journal must not be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout
Block and PistonbAlspection
1. Remove the piston from 1he engine block (see page
7-12).
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks;
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm
(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
Piston Diameter
(3.5426-3.5431 iri.)
SKIRT
~ I ~ DIAMETER
16.0mm
(0.63 in.1
(cont'd)
7-15
BACK
Engine'/ Block
Block and Piston ,Inspection (,cont' d)
4. Measure wear and taper'in direction Xand Y at.
three levels in each cylinder as shown.
Cylinder. Bore Size ' '""
(3;5433-3.5439 in.)
6 mm (0.2 in.)
l
... '. First Measurement
Second Measurement
Measurement
7-16
5. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as.
shown.
Engine Block Warpage
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
BACK
6. Calculate the difference between cylil1der bore
diameter and piston diameter. If the clearance is
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
and cylinder bore for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
(0.0002-0.0013 in.)
Service Limit: 0.08mm (0.003 in.)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
7-17
BACK
:.,
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-12).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings
(A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
A
B
3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of the
piston. Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore.
Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go
flying or get lost. Wear eye protection.
A
7 ~ 8
4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to
about 158 "F (70 "e), then remove the piston pin.
BACK
Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting
rod when they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the
piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
Standard (New): -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
. ("""',0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Service Limit: ". 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance
(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
Service Limit: . 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
(cont'd)
7-19
BACK
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A) only on one side.
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in
the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 Of (70 "C).
7-20
4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (8)
with the embossed marks (C) on the same side.
Install the piston pin (D).
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the piston pin.
c
c
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
BACK
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Removethe piston fror:nthe engine block (see page
7-12).
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (8).
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a
squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner
with a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade, if necessary. The top ring and second ring
grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in;) wide, and the oil ring
groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ringgroQves, or cut the ring
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool. .
NOTE: Ifthe piston is to.be separated from the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 1 5 ~ 2 mm (0.6-0.8 in.). from the
bottom. ,
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (8) with a feeler
gauge:
If the gap is too small,check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on
page 7-16).
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
, .', (0.012-0.016 in.)
Service Limit: . 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second Ring:
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Oil Ring:
(0.008-0.028 in.)
(cont'd)
7-21
BACK
:.,,' ',:
Engine, Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring,(A)hasa 1E
mark and the second ring (B) has a 2E mark. 'The
manufacturing marks (e) must be facing upward.
Piston Ring Dimensions:
7-22
C
Top Ring' (Standard)
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
,B: 1,2 mm (Q.05. in.)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
",', '.
7. After installing a new set ofrings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearance:
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0022-0.0033 in.)
Second Ring Clearance.
Standard (Newr:O.030-0.060 mm
in.)
8. Rotate the rings intheir.grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
OIL RING GAP
"
....
TOP RING GAP and
SPACER RING GAP
About90
SECOND RING GAP
OIL RING GAP
PISTON PIN
BACK
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-9).
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-7).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and
connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main
bearings and rod bearings.
5. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block.
A
6. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust
washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the
No.3 journal.
7. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (8) with
the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
engine.
0
N
0 0
Y-
.- _._.
0
'"
0
10x80 mm
...,.
0
E
10x60mm
8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges, then loosely install the bearing cap bolts
(D) and bearing cap side bolts (E).
(cont'd)
7-23
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
9. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for
the cylinder you are installing the piston in.
10. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore.
11. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/
connecting rod assembly, and check that the
bearing is securely in place.
12. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with
the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the
engine.
A
13 .. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the
cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a
hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring
compressor (B) to prevent the rings from
expanding before entering the cylinder bore.
14. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-24
15. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
3Smm
(1.38in.1
20mm
(0.79 in.1
A
16. Calculate the difference in diameter between point
A and point B.
Point A-Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
17. Ifthe difference in diameter is out oftolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
BACK
18. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap,
then install the cap.
19. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges. Torque the bolts (8) to 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm,
14Ibfft).
20. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (8) as
shown.
B
Ot
21. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90 ").
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 15 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
22. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing
cap side bolts to the specified torque in the
sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence
again to measure the bolts are properly torqued.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
11 x 1.5 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
n ~ ~ ~
17.5 kgfm, 54lbfttl 15.0 kgfm, 36lbfttl
~ \ ~ ~
(cont'd)
7-25
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
23. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
24. Drive the new crankshaft oil seal until the driver
attachment bottoms on the engine block end cover.
25. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the engine
block end cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt
holes.
26. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
surfaces.
7-26
27. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the engine block end cover.
Install the component within 5 minutes of applying
the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket PIN 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes .
Iftoo much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
28. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (8), and the
engine block end cover (C) on the engine block.
29. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
BACK
30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see
31. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil
pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
33. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,
block mating surface ofthe oil pump. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
. gasket.
NOTE:
If too much time has passed after applying the
34. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply oil to the
new a-ring (A).
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl 12 Nm
) f /E ,,/m.8.71bf.
ft
l
F . . . ~ 0 -0 /"
35. Install the dowel pins (8), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
37. Install the baffle plate (0), then install the oil screen
(E) with new a-ring (F).
38. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
assembly (A), with a new rocker arm oil control
solenoid filter (8).
(cont'd)
7-27
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
(cont'd)
39. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28).
40. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
(see page 11-242).
41. Install the cylinder heads (see page 6-49).
42. Install the drive plate.
43. Install the transmission (see page 14-287).
44. Install the engine assembly (see page 5-12).
NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, after assembly it is necessary
to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches
normal operating temperature, then continue to
run it for about 15 minutes.
7-28
Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan
mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
mating surface ofthe engine block. Install the
gasket.
NOTE:
liquid gasket,. remove the old liquid gasket and
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
4. Install the oil pan on the engine block.
BACK
5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final
step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft).
NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes
before filling the engine with oil.
Q) (j)
6. Tighten the four bolts (A) securing the transmission,
then install the torque converter cover (8).
A
12x 1.25 mm
7. Install the rear warm up three way catalytic
converter (rear WU-lWC) bracket.
8x1.25mm
22Nm
8. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following
steps.
9. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets and new
self-locking nuts (see step 31 on page 5-17).
10. Install the splash shield (see step 33 on page 5-17).
11. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-6).
7-29
BACK
. ..
Engine Block
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car
Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA100
1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor,
timing belt, and timing belt drive pulley (see page
6-25).
2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of mUltipurpose grease to the
5. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not
distorted.
6. Install the timing belt drive pulley, timing belt, and
CKP sensor (see page 6-25).
7-30
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil
Seal Installation - In Car
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200
1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-275) and
the drive plate.
2. Remove the transmission end cral")kshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of mUltipurpose grease to the
5. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft oil
seal until the driver attachment bottoms against the
engine block end cover. Align the hole in the driver
attachment with the pin on the crankshaft.
070AD-RCAA200
6. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7. Install the drive plate, and the transmission
(see page 14-287).
BACK
Drain Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the drain bolt, always use a new
washer.
~ ~ ~ m m
9.8Nm
28x1.0mm
80Nm
7-31
BACK
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Component Location Index ~ ....................................... 8-3
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 8-4
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-5
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ............................... 8-5
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-6
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-6
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-7
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement ................................ 8-8
Oil Jet Replacement ..................................................... 8-9
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection .................................................. 8-9
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-10
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
CD 07HAA-PJ70100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
07 OAD-RCAA 100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
I
CD
8-2
BACK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
FILTER
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
~
OIL FILTER
Replacement,
page 8-7
OIL FILTER
FEED PIPE
Replacement,
page 8-8
OIL PUMP
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Test page 8-5 6
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-
O-RING
OIL SCREEN
Removal, page 8-11
O-RINGS OIL CONTROL
ORIFICES
~ ~ i ~ G
""
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-11
8-3
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Check for a loose engine oil fill cap, oil drain
bolt, or oil filter.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-42) or
worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-42).
4 . Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s)
. '
(see page 7-21).
5. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-15).
Low oil pressure indicator does not 1. Do the ~ u g control module self-diagnostic An open in the
come on with the ignition switch function (see page 22-315). wire between the
ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-5). gauge control
module and the oil
pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays on 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic ground between
function (see page 22-315). the gauge control
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-5). module and the oil
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-6). pressure switch.
5. Check the oil filter for clogging.
S. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve.
8. Testthe oil pump (see page 8-12).
8-4
BACK
Oil Pressure Switch TeSt ',r"'>', ,,'
1. Remove the BLUNEL wire (A) frOm the:engineoir
pressure switch (B).
I' ;'
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal
(e) and the engine (ground). There should be no
continuity with the engine stopped. There should
be continuity with the engine running';'
. .'
...... ,'

Oil Pressure Switch,:Replaee1fteld
. ,1. the oil pr(:)ssure'swittShconriector;:then
remove the oil :. " , ' ,
18Nm
11.8 kgfm, 13 Ibfftl

""
-'1 '':.:: :/
/-
2. RemoveanyOld Iiquid'gaskeffromtAe switch and
. , switch mOimtirilg,hole:' ",;I.:: , .. \
. (' , . i . . !.'., ; ..
3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the
oilpres8ure sWitch then install the oil
pressure switch, ;. .. "
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause
liquid gasketto enterthe'oil passage or the snd of
the new oil pressure switch. . " "
f'f' " L ... ,:. ' " 1,:; I .
".' "I I . .
" Jr.' " l \.>.1.,.
: I. : ,I' .;- , : I .. :J" . "'. .
; '; ",I 1 I
'. "., .
", '"
BACK
Lubrication
OilP.reS$ure .Test ..
Ifthelow stays on with the engine
running, check the engine oil level. If the. oil level is
correct:
1. Remove the engine oil pressure install
an oil pressure gauge (A) ..
2. Start;the e,ngine.Shutitoff irnmediatelylfthe" .
gauge registers no oil pressure. Rep!:lir the problem
before continuing.
, ,
3. AIIQwtheengineto reach
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
; ,...t. I "
Engine Oil Temperature: ,176 "F (80' "C) ".'
Engine Oil Pressure: .' .. i' ,', ., ,
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm
2
, 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm
2
, 71 psi) min.
4. If oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these
items:
8-6'
Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page
8-10).
Check the oil screen for clogging.
Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-12).
Engine Oil Replacement
1. Warm up th.;t engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A)( and drain the engine oil.
/:.?'
B 39N.m
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
.,Capacity
At Oil Change:
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
At Oil Change including Filter:
4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
BACK
(see page 11-223).
8. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
9. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
the HDS.
10. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
the HDS.
11. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the
HDS.
NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time
with the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE
OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead.
12. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
13. Resetthe multi-information display (see page 3-6).
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100
1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.
2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the'oil filter seating surface of the engine.
3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then
apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
system.
4. Install the oil filter by hand.
5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise with the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening Torque: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
07HAA-PJ70100
(cont'd)
8-7
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
(cont'd)
6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ..... to .................... )
are printed around the outside of the filter, you can
use the following procedure to tighten the filter .
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the block, and note which number or mark is at
the bottom
Tighten the filter' by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if mark ..... is at the bottom when the
seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the
mark .................... comes around to the bottom.
Mark when rubber seal
is seated.
8
Mark after tightening.
Number or 1 2 3 4
Mark when or or or or
rubber seal
..... .......... ..... .......... ..... ...............
is seated
Number or 4, 1 2 3
Mark after or or. or or
tightenina .................... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..........
7. After'installation, fill the engine with oil up to the
specified level, run the engine for more than
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
8-8
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
.. 1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-7).
2. Remove the oi I filter feed pipe.
3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil
filter feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench,
then tighten the other nut.
___ --"7'A
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 Nm (5.0 kgf.m,
36 Ibfft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter
feed pipe.
BACK
Oil Jet Replacement
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block
(see page 7-12).
2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove and
discard oil jet (8).
A
--16N.m
Apply new engine oil
3. Carefully install the new oil jet and tighten the oil
jet bolt.
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-23).
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
1. Remove the oil jet bolt (see page 8-9).
2. Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows.
Make sure that a 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) diameter drill
will go through the oil intake (0.7 mm [0.03 in.]
diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves
smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 mm
(0.16 in.)
Check the oil jet bolt operation with an air nozzle.
It should take at least 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi)
to unseatthe check ball.
A
8-9
BACK
En
glne Lubrication
Oil Pum 0 p verhaul
Exploded V lew

CRANKSHAFT I
OIL SEAL
Replace
/J
in the freely A
Replace if it
SPRING

O-RING
Replace.
14.0 kgf.m, 29 Ibfftl
8-10

2Nm
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR

to S. y IIqu!d gasket
e matmg
the engine bl surface of
when
BACK
Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA 100
Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566
Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000024A
HondaTool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
Removal
3. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and PIS
line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-29).
engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000024A) with the
"FRONT" mark facing forward over the damper
flange nuts.
the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the engine
hanger (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and
support the engine.
AAR-T -12566
(see page 11-242).
assembly (see step 9 on page 7-12).
9. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
10. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil
pump (B).
(cont'd)
8-11
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection
1. Remove the screws from the pump then
separate the housing and cover.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.04-0.16 rom
(0.002-0.006 in.)
A
3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
the rotors (A) and pump housing (8). Ifthe housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
(0.001-0.003 in.)
8-12
4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (8).
If the housing-to-outerrotor radial clearance
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump
assembly.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
(0.004-0.007 in.)
B
5. Inspect both rotors and pump housing for scoring
or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.
6. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing
screws, then install the oil pump cover.
7. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
BACK
Installation
1. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump.
2. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the oil seal driver
bottoms on the pump.
070AD-RCAA 100
3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil
pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
4. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
block mating surface ofthe oil pump. Install the
gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
6. Grease the lip oftheoil seal, and apply oil to the
new a-ring (A).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm

C
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
/
7. Install the dowel pins (8), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
9. Install the oil screen (D) with new a-ring (E).
10. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
assembly, with a new rocker arm oil control
solenoid filter (see step 38 on page 7-27).
11. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28) .
12. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
(see page 11-242).
14. Remove the engine support hanger, and engine
hanger adapters.
(cont'd)
8-13
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
16. Install the power steering (PIS) pump and PIS line
bracket (see step 27 on page 6-53).
18. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
8-14
BACK
,Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and ExhaustSystem
Intake Manifold .Removal and Installation ... ~ ............. 9-2'
Injector Base Removal and Installation ................ ; ..... 9-7
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-9
BACK
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
J
6 X1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m. 8.7Ibfft)
UPPER COVER
/ Replace if it is cracked or ifthe
I
,J\,\.", GASKET <a
-:; .}.
INTAKE MANIFOLD .... '
9-2
Replace intake manifold as \
an assembly only if it is cracked "
., .... metin ...... IF .
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0 kgf.m. 7.2Ibfft)
GASKET
Replace.
/ mating surface is damaged.
.! 8x 1.2l1 mm
. 22 Nn'I'(2.2 16Ibfft)
kgfm. 8.7 Ibfft)

, , (EGR)PIPE

RECIRCULATION
. GASKET
Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm
12Nm
THROTTLE
BODY
1'7m. ,1-7 ... ftl
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
FRONT INJECTOR BASE
BACK
Removal
2. Remove the breather pipe (A), then remove the
intake air duct (B).
A
3. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
hose (A), brake boostervacuum hose (B), vacuum
hose (C), and disconnect the intake manifold tuning
(lMT) actuator connector (D).
4. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
hose (A), and disconnect the EVAP canister purge
valve connector (B), throttle actuator connector (C),
and manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector (D).
A
5. Remove and plug the water bypass hoses (E).
(cont'd)
9-3
BACK
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and nuts
sequentially in two or three steps, then remove the
upper cover.
(j) @
CD
@
9-4
7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and
nuts sequentially in two or three steps, then
remove the intake manifold.
(j)

BACK
Installation
1. Install the gasket on the injector base.
2. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and
nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use
a new intake manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 Nm (2.2kgfm, 16 Ibftt)
CD @ (j)
3. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts
sequentially in two or three steps. Always use a
new gasket.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibftt)
@ (j)
CD
4. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
hose (A) and water bypass hoses (B).
A
5. Connect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor connector (C), throttle actuator connector
(D) and EVAP canister purge valve connector (E).
(cont'd)
9-5
BACK
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose
(A), brake booster vacuum hose (8), vacuum hose
(C) and connectthe intake manifold tuning (IMT)
actuator connector (0).
7. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
breather pipe (8).
B
9-6
8. Install the engine cover.
9. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
10. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and
connectors are installed correctly.
air from the cooling system with heater valve open
(see step 100npage 10-7).
BACK
Injector Base Removal and Installation
Removal
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and power
steering line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-29).
4. Remove the injectors (see page 11-236).
5. Remove the harness bracket mount bolt (A) and the
knock sensor connector (8).
6. Remove the injector base mount bolts/nuts (A),
then remove the front injector base (8) and rear
injector base (C).
Installation
1. Install the front injector base (A) and rear injector
base (8) with new gaskets (C), and tighten the bolts/
nuts (D). ina crisscross pattern in two or three steps,
beginning with the inner nuts.
NOTE: Front injector base gasket is different from
rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket types.
c
D
. 8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
2. Install the knock sensor connector (A) and harness
bracket mount bolt (8).
B
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
(cont'd)
9-7
BACK
Injector Base Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Install the injectors (see page 11-236).
5. Install PIS pump and PIS line bracket (see step 27
on page 6-53).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate
the starter. After the fuel pump runs about 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises.
Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel
leaks.
9-8
BACK
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
GASKETS
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
Replace.
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
o 0
11 ......

V--, Replace.
, THREE WAY
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
9-9
BACK
BACK
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-3
RadiatorTest ................................................................. 10-3
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-4
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-4
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-5
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-5
Coolant Check ............................................................... 10-6
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-6
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-8
Water Passage Replacement ....................................... 10-9
Radiator and Fan Replacement ................................... 10-10
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-15
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting .. , 10-16
I
Cooling System
RADIATOR CAP
Test,page 10-3
10-2
RADIATOR
Test, page 10-3
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
WATER PUMP
WATER PASSAGE
THERMOSTAT
Test, page 10-4
BACK
Radiator Cap Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A). Wet its seal with
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially
available pressure tester (8).
B
2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95-
1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)
to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.
BACK
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B).
A
B
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to
No.2 terminal and ground to No.1 terminal.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly.
replace it (see page 10-10).
10-4
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is in the stuck open position
at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
_____ B
A
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a
thermometer. Note the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is
fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts Opening: 169-176"F (76 -80 'CI
Fully Open: 194 "F (90 "C)
BACK
Water Pump Inspection
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise.
Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly,
replace the water pump (see page 10-5).
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may
see a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed
holes (A). This is normal.
Water Pump Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 1 0-6).
3. Remove the timing belt adjuster (see page 6-24).
4. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five
bolts.
6x1.0mm
12Nm
~ ~
A
5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating
surface of the engine block.
6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (8) in the
reverse order of removal.
8. Install the timing belt adjuster (see page 6-24).
10. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed
the air from the cooling system (see step 10 on
page 10-7).
10-5
BACK
CooUng System
Coolant Check
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN
mark (B).
B
2. Ifthe coolant level in the cpolant reservoir is at or
below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it
between the MIN and MAX marks, then inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
10-6
Coolant Replacement
1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition
switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
4. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
5. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B)
located atthe rear ofthe engine block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
B
9.8Nm
6. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain
bolt. Remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
8. Install the splash shield (see step 33 on page 5-17).
BACK
9. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
10. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with
Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2(P/N
OL999-9001 ).
11. Pour Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2 (P/N o L999-900 1 ). Using a non-Acura
coolant can result in corrosion, causing the
cooling system to malfunction or fail.
Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do
not add water.
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant
reservoir capacity of 0.7 L (0.19 US gal)):
At Coolant Change: 7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 9.2 L (2.43 US gal)
12. Loosely install the radiator cap.
13. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
14. If the maintenance minder required to replace the
engine coolant, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-6), .and this procedure is complete. If
the maintenance minder did not require to replace
the engine coolant, go to step 13.
(see page 11-223).
the HDS.
the HDS.
21. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the
HDS.
22. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2,
if needed.
23. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
',again, and check for leaks.
25. Reset the multi-information display (see page 3-6).
10-7 BACK
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
1. Make sure you have the codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped) . Make sure the
ignition switch is OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative cable.from the battery first, then disconnecUhe positive cable.
3. Remove the air intake duct (see step 9 on page 5-2):
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page
5. Remove the thermostatcover, then remove the thermostat.
_____ THERMOSTAT
" . '-.'
6x1.0mm .. .
________ 12 Nm .
(1.2 kgf.m, 8. 7Ibfft) .
g
6. Install the new thermostat with a new rubber seal in the reverse order of removal.
7. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion. .
8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system (see step 10 on, 10-7).
10. Do the steering column position memorization (see page 17-28).
11. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped).
12. Set the clock.
10-8
BACK
Water Passage Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped). Make sure the
ignition switch is OFF ..
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the air intake duct (see step 9 on page 5-2).
5. Remove the upper hose, lower radiator hose, heater hoses, and water bypass hoses from the water
passage. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector and the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector.
6. Remove thewater passage.
O-RING
Replace.

RECIRCULATION
IEGRIVALVE
/
ENGINECOOLANT
TEMPERATURE IECTI
SENSOR 1
. 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
!/
O-RING
Replace.
/8x1.25mm
/ 22N'm
7. Install the water passage in the reverse order of removal.
8. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system (see step 10 on page 10-7).
11. Do the steering column position memorization (see page 17-28).
12. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped).
13. Setthe clock.
10-9 BACK
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement
NOTE:
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Also, be sure that they do not contact any other
wiring or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti"theft codes for the
on page 5-3).
5. Remove the front grille cover, then remove the
front grille.
10-10
6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), harness
clamp (B), engine coolanttemperature (ECT) sensor
2 subharness connector (C) and coolant reservoir hose
(D).
B
8. Remove the upper radiator hose.
BACK
9. Disconnect the hose clamps (A) and remove the
ATF cooler hoses (8), then plug the line and hoses.
C
6x1.0mm
B 7.1 Nm (0.72 kgfm, 5.2Ibfft)
B
C D
6x 1.0 mm
7.1 Nm (0.72 kgf.m, 5.2 Ibfft)
10. Remove the ATF cooler pipe mount bolts (e), then
remove the ATF cooler pipe (D).
11. Remove the lower radiator hose (A) and disconnect
the EeT sensor 2 connector (8) and loosen the two
bolts (e).
C
6x 1.0mm
7.1 Nm (0.72 kgfm, 5.2 Ibfft)
12. Disconnectthe hood latch switch connector (A),
clamps (8), then remove the hood latch (e).
F
6x1.0mm
7.1Nm
(0.72 kgfm, 5.2 Ibfft)
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
'l i
~ ~ ~ ~
F
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm 7.1 Nm
(1.0 kgt.m, 7.2Ibfft) (0.72 kgtm, 5.2Ibtft)
13. Remove the bulkhead bracket (D), and radiator and
Ale condenser mount upper bracket/cushion (E),
then remove the fan shroud mount bolts (F).
(cont'd)
10-11
BACK
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)
14. Displace the fan shrouds to the engine side, then
pull up the radiator assembly (A).
10-12
15. Remove the fan shroud assembly.
16. Install the radiator and fans in the reverse order of
removal.
17. Install the bulkhead bracket in the reverse order of
removal. Apply body paintto the bulkhead bracket
mounting bolts.
18. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
19. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the
airfrom the system (see step 10 on page 10-7).
20. Fill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-266).
21. Adjustthe engine hood latch (see page 20-194).
22. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
(see page 17"28).
25. Set the clock.
BACK
Fan Controls
FAN CONTROL RELAY
Test, page 22-77
AIC CONDENSER FAN
ASSEMBLY
Motor Test, page' 0-4
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
A/CCONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-77
',1. -
, RADIATOR FAN RELAY
T e ~ t page 22-77
,;.
: '" . I
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
Motor Test; page,' 0-4
ENGiNE COdLANT
, TEMPERATURE (Ect) "
SENSOR 2
'- i
-,"
Replacement, page "-239 Replacement, page "-239
10-13
BACK
,;,.,'.
,.,'
".,;
r;.
Fan:CQhtrols
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure
Engine overheats 1. coolant level.
2. Check for engine coolant leaks (from gaskets,
" ,
O-rings, etc.).
3: Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the radiator
and condenser.
4. Check for coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
6. Inspectthe fan motors (see page 10-4) orfan
relays (see page 22-77).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. I nspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
10. Check for clogged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
11. Checkfor a clogged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan runs at low speed, Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
but it does not run at high speed (see page 10-16).
when the engine coolant
temperature is above 206 "F
(97 "C)
With the AlC off and the engine Remove the fan control relay, and test.
coolant temperature at206 "F ., If the relay is faulty, replace it.
(97 "C) or below, the Ale If the relay is OK, check for a short in the wire
condenser fan runs at high speed between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No.1
and the radiator fan does not run. and condenser fan motor 2P connector terminal
When the engine coolant No.1.
(97 "C), both fans run at high
sReed
The radiator fan runs at high Check for a short in the wire between radiator fan
speed with the ignition switch ON relay 4P socketterminal No.3 andPCM connector
(II), the AlC off, and the engine terminal Aq;
coolant temperature below 204 "F "
I
(95 "C)
,'.
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for a short in the wire between AlC condenser
condenser fan run at low speed fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector
with the ignition switch ON (1) terminarA4.
and the AlC off
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Radiator and AlC condenser fans low speed circuit
condenser fan do not run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-94).
speed with the AlC on
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fans high speed circuit
run at all. The radiator fan does troubleshooting (see page 21-98)"
not run at low speed, but it runs at
high speed . '.,'
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for an open inthe wire between radiator fan'
condenser fan do not run at high
,. ,
relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector
speed when the engine coolant terminal A5.
(97 "C)
10-14
Also check for
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
,Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDERHOOD FUSE BOX
BATTERY
'1 :IG
'2:R/B1
'3: R/B3
No. 1(120 A) No.3 '2 (30 AI
+ )---+--<:n...o-...... ....-cruc=---------+-GRN---___
.. ,."'.
UNDERHooD
FUSE/RElAY BOX
No. 16 (30 AI
D
No.3 '1(50 AI
No.3 '3
(GOAl
No. 15(30AI RADIATOR
FAN DIODE
.
ORN
+
GRN
A4
C2
UNDERHOOD
FUSE RElAY BOX
..... ----+---- ORN .. ---PUR---t----t---.....
PUR
BRN
BLI<
1
G301
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
It-------
BLU
BLI<

G201

bld FAN DIODE
LTBLU
FAN
CONTROL
RElAY
GRN

RED---....
PUR----,
5V
ENGINE COOlANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1
A4 A6
FANL MRLY
SG2 SG4
C16 A2J
GRN PUR

GRN BLU

ENGINE COOlANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECTI SENSOR 2
PCM
10-15 BACK
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No.7 (7.5A), No.8 (15A) and No.16
(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse{s) and recheck .
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay .
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the RED wire between radiator
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and the No.3
fuse in the main under-hood fuse box .
10-16
4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
ffi=J JUMPER WIRE

Does the radiator fan run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the BRN wire between radiator
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No.2 .
6. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
2
=
YES-Repair open in the PUR wire between
radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and the
powertrain control module (PCM) (A5) .
NO-Repair open in the PUR wire between radiator
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and the under-
hood fuse/relay box .
BACK
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Special Tools ................................................... 11-2 Precautions .................................................. 11-336
General Troubleshooting Information ........ 11-3 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......................... 11-10 Removal ....................................................... 11-338
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 11-14 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
System Description ........................................ 11-16 Installation ................................................... 11-340
How to Set Readiness Codes ........................ 11-66 Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation ............ 11-343
PGM-FI System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ......... 11-345
Fuel Filter Replacement ................................. 11-345
Component Location Index .......................... 11-69 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-71 Replacement ............................................... 11-346
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting ..................... 11-208 Fuel Tank Replacement ................................. 11-347
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 11-222 Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation ................. 11-348
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting ......................... 11-223 Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement .... 11-349
Injector Replacement ..................................... 11-236 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test ...................... 11-350
MAP Sensor Replacement ............................. 11-238 Low Fuel Indicator Test .................................. 11-351
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ......... 11-238
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ........................... 11-239
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ........................... 11-239
AlF Sensor Replacement ............................... 11-240
Secondary H02S Replacement ..................... 11-241
Intake Air System I'ii1
Component Location Index ........................... 11-352 1
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-353
Throttle Body Test .......................................... 11-362
CKP Sensor Replacement .............................. 11-242 Throttle Body Cleaning .................................. 11-363
CMP Sensor Replacement ............................. 11-242 Air Cleaner Removal/Installation .................. 11-363
Knock Sensor Replacement .......................... 11-243 Air Cleaner Element
PCM Replacement .......................................... 11-244 Inspection/Replacement ............................ 11-364
Resonator Removal/Installation .................... 11-365
Electronic Throttle Control System IMT Actuator Replacement ............................ 11-365
Component Location Index ........................... 11-246 Throttle Body Removal/Installation .............. 11-366
APP Sensor Signal Inspection ....................... 11-285 Catalytic Converter System
Accelerator Pedal Module Component Location Index ........................... 11-367
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-286 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-368
VTEC
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation ........... 11-370
Under-Floor TWC Removal/Installation ....... 11-372
Component Location Index ........................... 11-287
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-288 EGRSystem
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Test ................. 11-298 Component Location Index ........................... 11-373
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Replacement .... 11-299 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-374
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch EGR Valve Replacement ................................ 11-388
Removal/Installation ....................................... 11-299
Idle Control System
PCVSystem
Component Location Index ........................... 11-300 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-390
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-301 PCV Valve Inspection ..................................... 11-391
AlC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting .............. 11-304 PCV Valve Replacement ................................ 11-391
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-305 EVAPSystem
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Component Location Index ........................... 11-392
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-306 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-393
Brake Pedal Position Switch Fuel Cap Warning Message System
Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ................. 11-308 Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-421
Idle Speed Inspection ..................................... 11-310 FTPSensor Replacement .............................. 11-423
PCM Idle Learn Procedure ............................. 11-311 EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Fuel Supply System
Replacement ............................................... 11-423
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Component Location Index ........................... 11-312 Replacement ............................................... 11-424
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-314 EVAP Canister Replacement ......................... 11-425
Fuel Pressure Relieving ................................. 11-330 EVAP Canister Filter Replacement ................ 11-426
Fuel Pressure Test .......................................... 11-333
Fuel Tank Draining ......................................... 11-333
Fuel Line Inspection ....................................... 11-334
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
CD
07 AAA-SOXA 100 Fuel Sender Wrench 1

07 AAJ-S6MA 150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 1
CD
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
@-1 07406-0020201 AfT Pressure Hose 1
@-2 07406-0070301 AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
@-3 07MAJ-PY 4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
@-4 07MAJ-PY 40120 AfT Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
(J) 07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
I
CD

@-1, @-2, @-3, @-4
(J)
11-2
BACK
General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose pins at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Some DTCs or symptoms can be caused by a
combination of PCM software and specific driving
habits. Periodically, new PCM software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check
online for the latest software or service information.
related to the DTCs or symptoms you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts
"Open" and "short" are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won't work at all. With complex electronics
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something
works, but not the way it's supposed to.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
System)
H the MIL (maHunction indicator lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for
15-20 seconds (see page 11-66).
2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
of the dashboard.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM
and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to DLC
Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and
begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
The HDS can read the DTCs, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, current data, and other
powertrain control module (PCM) data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-222).
If the MIL did not stay on
If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting ..
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
PCM.
(cont'd)
11-3
BACK
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
HDSClear Command
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the
system even if there is no electrical power such as
when the battery negative terminal or No. 81GP (15 A)
fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed
parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR
COMMAND" ofthe HDS, if parts are replaced.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet
this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP
pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC
codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness
codes. This must be done with the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes,
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and
all specific data to correct the system except CKP
pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared,
you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP
pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data.
This command is for repair of a misfire or theCKP
sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,
be aware that there is only one setting for clearingthe
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP
pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, youthen need to do these procedures, in
this order: PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311);
CKP pattern learn procedure;
Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page
11-66).
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait for
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS from the DLC.
11-4
PCM Reset
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
30 seconds.
HDS from the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP)
Pattern Learn
Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver'S side of the dashboard.
and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT
MENU with the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and follow the screen prompts.
BACK
Learn Procedure (without the HOS)
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the
transmission in D position.
3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the
transmission in D position.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.
If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start,
you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the
HDS.
(cont'd)
11-5
BACK
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Connectors
NOTE:
The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function.
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without
jumping the SCS line first, can damage the PCM .
PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=D.
B=D., C=O) embosed on them for identification.
2. Remove the bracket (D), then free the AlC discharge
line (E) from the clip (F) and remove the AlC suction
line mounting bracket bolt (G).
F
0
E
B
3. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect the PCM
connector A, B, and C.
11-6
4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is made at the
PCM connector, use the measurement hole (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to
a commercially available digital multi meter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).
[CJ

@)
/
B
6. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal
test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
tips into the terminals.
INOTICEI
For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
BACK
Updating the PCM
o Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
o Honda interface module (HIM)
o HDS pockettester
NOTE:
o Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM
during troubleshooting procedures.
o Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
o Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.
o Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the
ignition switch ON.
o To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC,
power windows, door locks, etc.) during the update.
o To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
o You cannot update a PCM with a program it already
has. It will only accept a new program.
o High temperature in the engine compartment might
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine has been running before this procedure,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment.
o If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent PCM damage.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON-(II), but ddnot start the
engine.
2. Connect thEr HDS to the data Ii nk connector (DLC)
(Allocated under the driver's side of the' dashboard.
i:
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223). If
. you are returning from-the DLC circuit
troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5 and clean the
throttle body after updating the PCM.
4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS. --
5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts with the HDS.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION
CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system (USA, Canada
models), then select the update mode, and follow
the screen prompts to update the PCM.
(cont'd)
~ 7
BACK
, ~ , ;
7. IfthesoftWareinthe P,CMistheiatest, disconnect
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to tile
procedure that you were doing. If the software in
the PCMis not the latest, follow the instructions on
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI ,
system or the AfT system, make sure you update
both.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to
cool the PCM, follow the screen prompts. If you run
into a problem (programming takes over
15minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D or
immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.)
during the update procedure, follow these steps to
minimize the chance of damaging the PCM:
o Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position.
o Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger). '
o Shut down the HDS.
o Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
o Reboot the HDS.
o Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
; ,'update procedure again. ""
8. USA, Canada models: If the TPPOSITION CHECK
failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page
11-363).' '
,'\.
10. Do the CKP learn procedure.
... , ... , ....
Substituting the PCM
o Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
o Honda interface module (HIM)
o HDS pocket tester
NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute
a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
1. Connect the HDS to the data lirik connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
"
/',"
7 ~
A
2. Turnthe ignition switch ON (11).
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see, page 11-223). If
you are returning fromDLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip step 4 to 9, then clean the throttle body after
substituting the PCM (see page 11-363).
4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION
CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
BACK
line mounting bracket bolt (G).
connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A=D, B=.6.., C=O) embosed on them for
identification.
10. Remove the bolts (I), then remove the PCM (J).
11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
12. Open the SCS with the HDS.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not
Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because
the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM;
ignore it, and continue this procedure.
14. USA, Canada models: Manually input the VIN to
the PCM with the HDS.
15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
18. Resetthe PCMwith the HDS.
19. USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK
failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page
11-363).
21. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
as:
PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
finished.
FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
11-9
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTe Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ") Detection
P0101 (50) 0 Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see paae 11-71)
P0102 (50) Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paae 11-73)
P0103 (50) -- Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see paae 11-76)
P0107 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-78)
P0108 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Hiah ON (see page 11-80)
P0111 (10) 0 Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Ranae/Performance Problem ON (see DaDe 11-83)
P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltaae ON (see Daae 11-84)
P0113 (10) Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Hiah Voltaae ON (see paae 11-86)
P0116 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-89)
Problem
P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paDe 11-90)
P0118 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Hiah Voltaae ON (see paae 11-92)
P0122 (7) Throttle Position !TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paae 11-247)
P0123 (7) Throttle Position !TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON (see paae 11-249)
P0125 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow Response ON (see paae 11-95)
P0128 (87) 0 Cooling System Malfunction ON (see page 11-96)
P0133 (157) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response ON (see page 11-98)
P0134 (151) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-99)
Malfunction
P0135 (151) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-102)
Malfunction
P0137 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltaae
Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltaae
Sensor 2 Circuit Slow Response
P0141 (163) Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-112)
Sensor 2 Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0153 (158) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (A!F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Slow ON (see page 11-98)
ResDonse
P0154 (152) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-99)
Malfunction
P0155 (152) -- Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-102)
Malfunction
P0157 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltaae
Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage
Sensor 2 Circuit Slow Response
P0161 (164) -- Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-112)
Sensor 2 Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (153) 0 Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel SYstem Too Lean ON (see paae 11-116)
P0172 (153) 0 Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel SYstem Too Rich ON (see paae 11-116)
P0174 (154) 0 Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean ON (see paae 11-116)
P0175 (154) 0 Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich ON (see page 11-116)
P0222 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-252)
P0223 (7) -- Throttle Position !TP) Sensor B Circuit Hiah Voltage ON (see page 11-254)
P0300 (77) 0 Random Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-118)
and any
combination ot
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304(74)
P0305 (75)
P0306(76) .
NOTE: The aboye DTCs are indIcated when the PGM-FI system IS selected In the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. Ifthe MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
1'1-10
BACK
DTC Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(M(L indication "1 Detection
P030l (711 0 No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-1211
P0302 (721 0 No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-1211
P0303(731 0 No.3 CYlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0304(74) 0 No.4 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0305 (75) 0 No.5 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0306J761 0 No.6 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0325 (23) -- Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see oaoe 11-130)
P0335 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A No Sional ON (see oaoe 11-133)
P0339 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A Circuit Intermittent Interruotion ON (see oaoe 11-136)
P0340 (9) -- Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor No Signal ON (see page 11-137)
P0344 (9) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 11-140)
P0385 (54) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B No Signal ON (seeMge 11-133)
P0389 (54) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B Circuit Intermittent Interruotion ON (see oaoe 11-136)
P0401 (80) 0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow ON (see oaoe 11-374)
P0404 (12) .0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-376)
Problem
P0406 (12) -- Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High ON (see page 11-379)

P0420 (165) 0 Rear Bank Catalvst Svstem Efficiencv Below Threshold (Bank 1) ON (see oaoe 11-368)
P0430 (166) 0 Front Bank Catalvst Svstem Efficiencv Below Threshold (Bank 2) ON (see paoe 11-368)
P0443 (92) -- Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-393)
P0451 (91) 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-397)
P0452 (91) 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-398)
P0453 (911 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-401)
P0455 (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Large Leak Detected ON (see page 11-404)
P0456 (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected ON (see page 11-404)
P0457 (90) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose OFF (see page 11-407)

P0461 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance OFF (see page 11-314)
Problem
P0462 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Unit) Circuit Low Voltaoe OFF 11-315)
P0463 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Sendil'llt Unit) Circuit High OFF (seeMge 11-317)
P0496 (92) 0 Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Svstem Hioh Flow ON (see oaoe 11-409)
P0497 (90) 0 Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Svstem Low Flow ON (see oaoe 11410)
P0498 (117) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Control Circuit ON (see page 11-414)
Low Voltage
P0499 (117) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Control Circuit ON (see page 11-417)
High Voltage
P0506 (14) 0 Idle Control System RPM Lower than Expected ON (see page 11-3011
P0507 (14) 0 Idle Control System RPM Higher than Expected ON (see page 11-303)
P050A(167) 0 Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem ON (seepage 11-141)
P050B (167) 0 Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance Problem ON (see page 11-143)
P0562 (34) -- Charging SYstem Low Voltage OFF (seepage 11-146)
P0563 (34) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected OFF (see page 11-147)
Voltaoe
P0602 (196) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Error ON (see oaoe 11-150)
P060A (131) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (AfT System) Internal Control Module ON (see page 11-150)
Malfunction
P0615 (198) -- Starter Cut Relav STRLDCircuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-1511
P0627 (165) -- Fuel Pump Control Module System Malfunction ON (see page 11-320)
P062F (131) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive ON (see page 11-153)
Memory (KAM) Error
P0630 (139) -- VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON (see page lF153)
P0685 (135) 0 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit ON (see page 11-155)
Malfunction
NOTE: The above DTCs are mdlcated when the PGM-FI system IS selected m the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. Ifthe MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs .
1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
* 2: The D indicator and the MIL may come on at the same time.
(cont'd)
11-11
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
are system
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs .
1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
11-12
BACK
DTC Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ") Detection
P2251 (155) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-192)
Voltaoe
P2252 (155) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltaoe
P2254 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio(NF) Sensor.(Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-192)
Voltaoe
P2255 (156) -- Front Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltage
P2270 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
P2271 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
P2272 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Sional Stuck Lean
P2273 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Sional Stuck Rich
P2279 (109) 0 Intake Air System Leak ON (see paoe 11-390)
P2413 (12) 0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction ON (see paoe 11-381)
P2422 (117) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Close Malfunction ON (see paoe 11-418)
P2610 (132) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Power Off Timer Malfunction ON (see page 11-197)
P2646 (22) -- Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-288)
P2647 (22) -- Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-291)
P2648 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-294)
P2649 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-296)
P2AOO (157) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Rangel ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
P2A03 (158) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Rangel ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
U0028 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) ON (see paoe 11-199)
U0114 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-SH-AWD Control OFF (see page 11-200)
Unit)
U0122 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-VSA Modulator- OFF (see page 11-203)
Control Unit)
U0155 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control ON (see page 11-205)
Module)
U0300 (131) -- PGM-FI System and AfT System Program Version Mismatch ON (see page 11-207)
NOTE: The above follOWing DTCs are Indicated when the PGM-FI system IS selected In the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
11-13
BACK
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no.
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
. Diagnostic procedure Also check for
El)gine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-76). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-9). No ignition spark
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Broken timing belt
Contaminated fuel
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-222).
(MIL comes on and stays on,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set)
MIL comes on and stays on, Troubleshootthe MIL circuit (seepage 11-222).
or nevercomes onat all, no
DTCsset
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system.
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
, '
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer
<
Jumped timing
immediately belt
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, Intake air leaks
immobilizer indicator stays Contaminated fuel
on or flashes) Weak spark
Engine is hard to start, 1. Test the battery (see page .22-76). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) , 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). Intake air leaks
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363). Contaminated fuel
Weak spark
.<
Restricted exhaust
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Correct valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idlespeed (see page 11-310). adjustment
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363). Fuel contamination
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Intake vacuum leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-362).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Intake vacuum leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit Correct valve
is below specification without (see page 11-305). adjustment
load 2. Troubleshoot the AlC signal circuit (see page 11-304).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit Intake vacuum leaks
is above specification without (see page 11-305).
load 2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-285).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Troubleshoot the alternator AlC signal circuit
(see page 11-304).
4. Troubleshoot the power steering switch signal circuit
(see page 11-306).
11-14
BACK
Symptom Diagnostic procedure . Also check for
After warming up, idle speed 1. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Power steering
drops when steering wheel is 2. Troubleshootthe PSP switch signal circuit (see page system
turning 11-306).
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) 3. 00 the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
Low power Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). Low compression
(MIL works OK; no OTCs set) Incorrect camshaft
timing
Incorrect engine oil
level
Restricted exhaust
Fuel contamination
Engine stalls 1. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). Faulty harness and
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310). sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
circuit (see page 11-308). Fuel contamination
Oifficultto refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between nozzle.
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank. Filler neck
..
3 . Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. restriction
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-347). Fuel tank vapor
control valve
Fuel overflows during 1. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. Malfunctioning gas
refueling 2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-347). station filling nozzle.
(No OTCs set)
HOS does not communicate Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
with the PCM or the vehicle
Fuel cap warning message Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system
comes on and stays on (see page 11-421).
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set)
11-15
BACK
System Description
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
ThePCM detects a signal failure from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC in
erasable memory (RAM). Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle (for DTC
P0457, the DTC is set in the beginning ofthe third drive cycle). When a DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by sending a command to the gauge control module .
One Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM stores a DTC for the
failure and turns on the MIL immediately .
Two Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occUrs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Temporary DTC for the failure. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second
drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC in erasable memory and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitutes a pre-programmed value that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be stored and
the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the PCM turn on the MIL by sending a command to the gauge control
module to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all
readiness codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the PCM stays on (up to 15 minutes). If the PCM connector is disconnected
during this time, the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable from the battery or
jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
11-16
BACK
PCM Electrical Connections
"V
ELD

11<1
"--"

AlC COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY

'W
<!l

-'-
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
-
-

rw
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
1.
Lor- -
-
r'
w
AIN UNDER-HOOD M
F
CD
USE/RELAY BOX:
I No. 31G MAIN
(50 AI
No. 3 R/B1
(30 AI
No. 11 +B STOP &
HORN (15AI
No.1 BATIERY
(120 AI

5 No.4 +B BACKUP/
ACC MAIN(40 AI
NDER-HOOD U
F
@
USE/RELAY BOX:
6 No. 91GN COIL +
(15A)
7 No. 81GP (15 AI (j)
@
@
@
No. 11 A/F SENSOR
(AFHT+I
3 No. +B FAN TIMER
(7.5 AI
No. 10 THROTILE
ACTUATOR CONTROL
(DBW+U15AI
NDER-DASH U
F
@
USE/RELAY BOX:
8 No. 19 FUEL PUMP
(20 AI
9 No. 18 ACG no AI
10 No. 10 IGN SOL (15 AI
UXILIARY UNDER-DASH
USE HOLDER 1
liSTS (7.5 A)
A
F

.lJ..
-

C D E F
'--- B31GP
B421G1
A10 ELD
A13 ACC
ASFANH
A1VBSOL2
A4FANL

IGNITION COIL
RELAY
:::::::t
1
-I
(j)
J.V'
'W,

PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)

10-1
t::11
PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 1
10-1
fW'I

__>1

IG2//+
B
@)
'-0-- r-- H'
ST
IGNITION
B
SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
@t
@
-l

@)
'w..,
PGMFI
PCM

SUBRELAY
IMOFPRA11
PG1 B40
@
roJ

PG2B1

MRLYA6
:>--- ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL
SUBRLY A40
SYSTEM
(ETCS) CONTROL
ETCSRLY A29
RELAY
@
PGMETCSC1

STSA31
'W
IG1ETCSC4
I

IG2
CUT RELAY
./
(cant'd)
11-17
BACK
System Description (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
r
./
C MAP SENSOR
No.1 INJECTOR
VCC1 B36

r
vv
B41NJ1 MAPB35
SG1 B34
No.2 INJECTOR
roo
B81NJ2
N
VCC2C12
No.3 INJECTOR
r'w
B71NJ3 SG2C16

No. 4 INJECTOR
roo
B61NJ4
No. 5 INJECTOR
rw
B51NJ5
No. 6 INJECTOR
ECTSENSOR 1
r'
w
ECT1 C32

B91NJ6
'''''
CMPSENSOR
R S
KNOCK SENSOR
KSC47

-.---- ----_._-
B46CMP
--
EGRPC34
B45CKPA

'00,
EGRC10
EGRVALVE
-

n"""

ECT SENSOR 2
B44CKPB
ECT2A21
,---
>-- VCC6C11
I
CKPSENSOR IMTMB19
AlB
,.
'--
V W
IMT+C48
IMT-C49
IMT
./ ACTUATOR
X
11-18
BACK
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE

EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
r r rw
SOLENOID VALVE

ALTERNATOR

@
0"- T
S
P
PARK
LUG

T
S
P LUG
0- T
S
P
PARK
LUG
0- T
S
P
PARK
LUG
0- T
S
P
PARK
LUG
0- T
S
P
PARK
LUG
'-

ICM
No.1 IGNITION COIL

ICM
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
t--Ilr

ICM
No.3 IGNITION COIL

ICM
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
t--Ilr

ICM
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
t--Ilr

ICM
No. 6 IGNITION COIL
E J
C40PCS
A22VSV
A12MCS
B2VBSOL
C42ALTL
C44ALTF
C43ALTC

I
B29IGPLS1
I
830IGPLS2
I
B22IGPLS3
I
B231GPLS4
I
B11IGPLS5
I
I
B121GPLS6
I
... l...
Q K
VSB1 B13
---------------------- ----- ----- ------------
'1
VCENTB1 B15
tJ IPB1831
1
I
AFSHTCB1 C6
REAR A/F SENSOR
(BANK 1, SENSOR 1
VSB2B14
----------------------
........
----- ----- ------------
'1
tJ
T
VCENTB2B24
IPB2B32
-.J
I
AFSHTCB2C8
FRONT A/F SENSOR
(BANK2,SENSOR 11
SH02SB1 B25
---------------------- ----- ----- ------------ -,
S02SHTCB1 C5
T
,
REAR SECONDARY H02
(BANK 1, SENSOR 21
SH02SB2B16
-----------------1---- ------------ ------------
S
S02SHTCB2 C7
FRONT SECONDARY HO 2S
IBANK 2, SENSOR 21
W T V
po.
F
po.
LG1 C41
..!.
LG2B41
..!.
-
- ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
___ w_
VTPSWB20
'J
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
VTS839

-
.-'
(cont'd)
11-19
BACK
.' ~ .
FTPSENSOR
~
H
=r?f
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
A39FTP
BKSWA8 --:oJ
~
BKSWNCA7
-------- I
Z V"
VSSOUTA30
To
NAVIGATION UNIT
I
A48CANH
I ~
------------------------------- ------.-.
A49CANL ---_._ .... _ .. _ ..... _ .... _.
---
.........
E
-
,
To
S-NETSVA46 ~
IMMOBIUZER UNIT
DATAuNK
A44WEN
CONNECTOR
A32SCS
LG3A41
To
I
IMMOBIUZER UNIT
~
PSPSWITCH
-
-
PSPSWA38
-------- I
-4-
v-
-
C4S0PSW
1
-
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
-
t:'
Z
TPSENSOR
B18VCCS
B[h
An
B17TPSA
VCC3A24
~ B26TPSB APSAA18
B33SGS SG3A26
I
I
~ B
~
C2ETCSM+ VCC4A25
C3ETCSM- APSBA19
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
APPSENSOR
SG4A27
THROTTLE
BODY
11-20
BACK
".,-

ATFTC33
...
l "'
A16ATPP
ATFTEMPERATURESENSOR
M
C25ATPR
1 I
II
SHAC20
T I
-'-
'-
R
C26ATPN
SHIFT SOLENOID

VALVE A -
r-
C17 ATPD
r

SHBC28
T
---
I
-'-

r--
C46ATPD3
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEB -
SHCC39
j
1
, uu
J
-'-
C19ATPRVS
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC -
C18ATPFWD 1 I
SHDCS
rolf'
T I
J..
1
SHIFT SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION
VALVED -
RANGE SWITCH
-
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
A/TCLUTC
PRESSURE SWITCH
LSAC21

PRESSURE
--
CONTROL
H
...
C370P4SW
.lJ....
SOLENOID
.1.
VALVE A
-
3RDCLUTCH
LSBB10

A/TCLUTC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH
CONTROL
.lJ....
SOLENOID
--
VALVEB
...
C380P3SW
J..
T
LSCB21

A/TCLUTC
PRESSURE
- 2ND CLUTCH CONTROL
TRANSMISSION FLUID
.lJ....
SOLENOID
PRESSURE SWITCH
VALVEC
H
H
-- 1
-
...
C270PZSW
J..
A47SMODE
-
I
,.....c-..
k
A36SUP

NMB37

A37SDN

INPUT SHAFT
IMAINSHAFT)
SHIFT LEVER
SPEED SENSOR
-
To ....
AZSLS

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
NCB38

I SG6C15
OUTPUT SHAFT
IATSENSOR ICOUNTERSHAFT)
-
SPEED SENSOR
AZ1IAT

I
I
AZOVG+
'-----'
A9VG-
MAFSENSOR
V
(cant'd)
11-21
BACK
STARTER CUT
RELAY 2
To STARTER
~
MOTOR
il!V
~
B
STARTER CUT
RELAY 1
Lol
rw
AUXILIARY UNDERDASH
FUSE HOLDER 2
CDSTRLD (7.5 A)
L M
AA
./
FPCDA42
FPCA43
A3STRLY
A28STRLD
IBARO ,I SENSOR
(Built Into the
PCM)
,
A
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL MODULE
.....
- -
10
FUEL PUMP
/ r ~ ~ ~
PCM A (O)(49P)
111 2 3 4151617 8 9110'-
111 f213 VVI16VI18 19201211
122 V 24 ><125IX 26 271281
129 30 31 321/1/1/36 37361391
1140 41 42 43144VI46 47 461491
~
11-22
PCM B (.6.)(49P)
J 1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9110 '-
111 1213 14115116117118 19 201211
~ 122 2324 ><.1251>< 26VVI
129 30 31 32133134135136 37361391
140 41 42 VI 44 I 45J45 / //
L...--..I
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
PCM C (O)(49P)
J 1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9 110 I
111 12V /115116117118191201211
VV 24 ><.1251>< 261271281
~ 1/1/1/321331341/1/37361391
140 41 42 43144145146 47 46 49
L...--..I
BACK
Vacuum Hose Routing
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
ilL ACfUATOfI
.,
FRONT OF VEHICLE
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
(cont'd)
11-23
BACK
Vacuum Distribution
@
~ ~
+
ENGINE
COOLANT
CD FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 2 (BANK 2, SENSOR 1) @ AIR CLEANER

ATMOSPHERE
(j)

REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 (BANK 1, SENSOR 1) @ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
FRONT SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 POSITION SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2) POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
REAR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 @ FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 1, SENSOR 2) CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 2)
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR @ REAR WARM UP THREE WAY
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1 CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 1)
(j) MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/ @ UNDER-FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
KNOCK SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
THROTTLE BODY @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SHUT
@ INJECTOR VALVE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
@ FUEL FILTER @ FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
@ FUEL PUMP @ INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (lMT) VALVE
@ FUEL TANK RESONATOR
11-24
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (49P)
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
1 WHT VBSOL2 (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve
2 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed and accelerator released: about 0 V
3 LTGRN STRL.(STARTER RELAY) Drives starter cut relay 2 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
4 WHT FANL(RADIATOR FAN Drives condenser fan relay With condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With condenser fan stopped: battery voltage
5 PUR FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stoDDed: battery voltaae
6 GRN MRL YIPGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) power source for the DTC With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
memory)
7 BRN BKSWNC(BRAKEPEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage.
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
8 LTGRN BKSW (BREAK PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brakep!!dal pressed: battQry voltage
(cont'd)
11-25
BACK
number
9 BLK VG- (MASS AIR FLOW Ground for MAF sensor
(MAF) SENSOR -SIDE) signal
10 ORN ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) (deoendina on electrical load)
11 BRN IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 o V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
FUEL PUMP RELAY) (II) then battery voltaae
12 BLU MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve About idle: battery voltage
VALVE)
13 RED ACC (AIC CLUTCH RELAY) Drives AlC clutch relay With compressor ON: about 0 V
With comoressor OFF: battery voltaae
16 GRN ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P position:
POSITION) battery voltage
18 PUR APSA(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 1.0 V
11-26
BACK
number
19 LTGRN APSB(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: abOut 2.3 v
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 0.5 V
20 RED VG+ (MASS AIR FLOW Detects MAF sensor signal At idle: about 1.1 1.6 V (between VG+ terminal
(MAF) SENSOR +SIDE) and VG- terminal)
21 PUR ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.BV
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (depending on engine coolant temperature)
(ECn SENSOR 2)
22 LTGRN VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
24 RED VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
25 ORN VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaae
26 WHT SG3 (SENSOR GROUND> Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
27 GRN SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
(cont'd)
11-27
BACK
Terminal side offemale terminals
number
28 PNK STRLD Detects starter cut relav 2 With starter ON: batterv voltaae
29 BLU ETCSRL Y (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay
RELAY)
30 BLU VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED Sends output shaft Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT) (countershaft) speed sensor
sianal
31 LTBLU STS (STARTER SWITCH Detects starter switch signal With starter switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL> With starter switch OFF: about 0 V
32 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With the service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) abootOV
With the service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
36 BLU SUP (UPSHIFT SWITCH) Detects upshift switch In M position and shift lever pushed toward upshift
signal position: about 0 V
In M positio'n and shift lever in N position:
batterv voltaoe
37 GRN SON (DOWNSHIFT SWITH) Detects downshift switch In M position and shift lever pushed toward
signal downshift position: about 0 V
In M position and shift lever in N position:
batterv voltaae
11-28
BACK
.. ; ,Terminal side of female terminals
Terminal Wire color Terminal name . Description Signal
. ,
number
"
38 PNK PSPSW'(POWER STEERING Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
PRESSURE SWITCH position: about 0 V
-
SIGNAL)
,.
At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
.I battery voltage
39 LTGRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With 'ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR removed: about 2.5 V
40 RED SUBRLY (PGM-FI
SUBRELAY)
Drives PGM-FI subrelay Wrthignition (II): aboutO V
41 BRN LG3 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less. than 1.0 V at all time
42 LTBLU FPCD (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
CONTROL MODULE diagnosis At idle: about 10.0 V
DIAGNOSIS)
43 PNK FPC (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON: pulses
CONTROL) signal With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
44 GRY WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
46 LTGRN S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION FOR communication signal With ignition switch OFF: about 5.0 V
IMMOBILIZER)
(cont'd)
BACK
,'0, :0v.': .. "
Emissions Systems
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (49P). '
,
Tenninel Wirecolori j'" Terminal name Description Signal .'
number
47 PU.R'
, , SMODE (SEQUENTIAL Detects sequential In M position:a:bout O. V .
SPORT SHIFT MODE) sportshift mode switch In any position ,other than M position:
:;,:' .,= ' sianal batterY voltaae
48 WHT CANH(CAN. ., Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
. COMMUNICATION SIGNAL sigl'lal ;
HIGH)
49 RED, ,CANL(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
LOW)'
",
iii .
',I !'
i('
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (.6.) (49P)
number
1 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
2 BlK/YEl VBSOl (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON {II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve
3 YEL/BlK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
4 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No.1 injector At idle: duty controlled
5 BlK/RED INJ5 iNo. 5 INJECTOR) Drives No.5 iniector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 VEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No.4 iniector
7 BlU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No.3 iniector
8 RED INJ2 (No.2 INJECTOR) Drives No.2 iniector
9 WHT/BLU INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR) Drives No.6 iniector
10 BRN/WHT LSB (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control,solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B) .
(cont'd)
11-31
BACK
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 v.
Terminel Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
11 BLK/RED IGPLS5 (No. 5 IGNITION Drives No.5 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COILPULSEI With engine running: pulses
12 BRN/WHT IGPLS6 (No. 6 IGNITION Drives No.6 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
13 BLU VSB1 (VS CELL + BANK 1) Detects the rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 3.4 4.8 V
(BANK 1, sensor 1) VS SELL
signal
14 RED/BLU VSB2 (VS CELL + BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With fully warmed up engine running:
(BANK 1, sensor 1) VS SELL about 3.4-4.8 V
signal
15 RED VCENTB1 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine running:
GROUND BANK 1) for rear A/F sensor (BANK about 3.4-3.8 V
1 sensor 1)
16 WHT SH02SB2 (FRONT Detects front secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 2, sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (FRONT signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
2 SENSOR 2)
17 RDE/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V
POSITION ITP) SENSOR A) With throttle fullv closed: about 0.9 V
11-32
BACK
number
18 BLU ' VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switchON (II): about 5.0 V
v o l t ~
-,
19 WHT/BLK IMTM (INTAKE MANIFOLD Detects IMT valve position With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
TUNING (lMT) VALVE With engine speed above 3,800 rpm: about 5.0 V
MONITOR)
20 BLU/WHT VTPSW (ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil With engine at low speed: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch With engine at high speed: battery voltaae
21 GRN/RED LSC (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With 'ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
22 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No.3 IGNITION Drives No.3 ignition coil With ignition slivitch ON (II): about 0 V
COILPULSEI With engine running: pulses
23 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No.4 ignition coil
COILPULSEI
24 RED/WHT VCENTB2 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine at idle:
GROUND BANK 2) for front NF sensor (Bank 2, about 3;4-4,8 V
sensor 1) , '.
. ..
(cont'd)
11-33
BACK
Fuel 'and Emissions Systems
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 v.
Terminal Wire color . Terminal name Description Signal
number
25 GRN SH02SB1 (REAR Detects rear secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 1, sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (REAR signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
1 SENSOR2)
26 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V
29 YEL/GRN IGPLS1 (No.1 IGNITION Drives No.1 ignition coil With ignition sWitch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
30 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No.2 IGNITION Drives No.2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
31 GRN IPB1 (lPCELL+ BANK 1) Detects rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0-5.6 V
(Bank 1 sensor 1) oumo cell
32 GRN/RED IPB2 (lP CELL + BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0-5.6 V
(Bank 2 sensor 1) oumo cell
33 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
34 GRNIWHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
35 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
11-34
BACK
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about about 12 V.
number
36 YELJRED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference Ignition switch ON: about 5.0 V
voltage
37 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine at idling in N position: about 2.5 V
SENSOR) signals
38 BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels rotated
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor by hand: pulses
SENSOR) signal
39 GRN/YEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid
40 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
41 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
42 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
44 BLU/RED CKPB (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor B signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
B)
45 BLU CKPA (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor A signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
A)
46 YEL CMP (CAMSHAFT Detect CMP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR)
(cont'd)
11-35
BACK
Fuel'and Emissions Systems
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (49P)
number
1 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) circuit
2 BLU ETCSM+ (THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator With ignition'switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR +SIDE)
3 GRN ETCSM- (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR -SIDE) ,
4 YEL/GRN IG1ETCS (IGNITION Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
5 BLK/WHT S02SHTCB1 (REAR Drives rear secondary With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 1, With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR(REAR sensor 2) duty controlled
SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
6 BLK/WHT AFSHTCB1 (REAR AIR FUEL Drives rear A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
RAITO (REAR A/F) SENSOR heater (Bank 1, sensor 1) , With fully warmed up engine running: about 0 V or
HEATER CONTROL BANK pulses
1 SENSOR 1)
11-36
BACK
number
7 GRN/RED S02SHTCB2 (FRONT Drives front secondary With ignition switch ON (Ill: battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 2, With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR sensor 2) duty controlled
(SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
8 GRN/WHT AFSHTCB2 (FRONT AIR Drives front A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (Ill: battery voltage
FUEL RATIO (FRONT A/F) heater (Bank 2, sensor 1) With fully warmed up engine running: about 0 V or
SENSOR HEATER pulses
CONTROL BANK 2,
SENSOR 1)
9 GRN/RED SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in N position, and in D position
VALVED) D during no lock-up condition: about 0 V
With engine running in P and R positions, and in D
position during no lock-up condition:
battery voltage
10 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operating: about 0 V
VALVE)
11 YEL/BLU VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaae
12 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (Ill: about 5.0 V
voltaae
15 GRNIYEL SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
(cont'd)
11-37
BACK
Terminal side affemale terminals
number
16 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
17 YELJGRN ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D position:
input battlill' voltage
18 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and D3 positions: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D/D3 switch D, D3 position signal In 'any position other than D and D3 positions:
POSITION) batterv voltaae
19 RED/WHT ATPRVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In p, R, N positions: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch P, R, N position In any position other than P, R, N positions:
POSITION) signal input batterY voltaae
20 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in D3 position, and D position
VALVE A) A (in 1st, 2nd, or 5th gears): battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N positions, and D
position (in 3rd and 4th gears): about 0 V
21 RED LSA (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid va lYe A
SOLENOIDVALVEA)
24 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (IAT) (depending on intake air temperature)
SENSOR)
25 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R position:
input battery voltaae
11-38
BACK
',-;\.', , .. ,
'. ,
,
number
26 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: about 0 V
'.
"
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N position:
input batterv voltaae. ;
27 BLU/BLK' OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch Witl\ ignitionswitch ON.(II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch inout With 2nd clutch oressura: about 0 V
28 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in p, R, N, D3 positions, and D
VALVE B) B -
position (in 1st, 2nd; or 3rd gears): battery voltage
,
With engine running in D position (in 4th and 5th
gears): about 0 V .. ..
32 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (depending on engine coolant temperature)
(ECT) SENSOR 1)
33 BLUIVEL ~ T T (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects AFT temperature' With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2-4.0 V (about
.. . SENSOR) signal 1.8 V at operating temperature) (depending on ATF
temperature) .
34 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS' Drives EGR valve position With engine running: about 1.2-3.0 V (depending
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal on 'EGR valve lift)
VALVE POSITION'SENSOR)
)
37 BLUIVEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Witho.ut 4th clutch pressure: about 5.0V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch inout With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
(cont'd)
11-39
BACK
:-:1:

, , ",' ,
F.UC;d.hd Emissions Systems
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (49P)"
Terminal side of,female terminals
number
38 BLU!WHT OP3SW (3M CLUTCH ,Detects,3rd clutch
.
With ignitionswitch ON (II):
,
, TRANSMISSION FLUID ;. transmission fluid pressure Without3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch il'lQut With 3rd about 0 V
39 GRN SHC (SHIF.lSOLENOID . Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in o position (in 1st, 3rd, and
VALVEC)- .C I" <1 5th gears}: battery voltage
, , With engine running in P, R, N, 03 positions, and 0
.-, . , position (in 2nd and 4th gears): about 0 V
40 REDNEL PCS (I;VAPORATIYE Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant below 140 'f
EMISSION (EVAP) valve (60 'C): battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) With engine running, engine coolant above 140 'f
\ (60 'C): duty controlled
41 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
42.: \, WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (Iff: about 0 V
, . -SIGNAL)
"
With eflgine running: battlillL voltage
43 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed up engine running battery
,CONTROL) sianal voitqge on electrical load)
44 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATORFR Detects alternator FR signal With engine' running: about 0 5.0 V (depending on
SIGNAL) electrical load}
45 BULNEL ' OPSW(OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SWITCH) signal With engine running:. battery voltage
11-40
BACK
number
46 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission switch In D3 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3) D3 signal input In any position other than D3 position:
battery voltaae
47 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor sianal With enaine knockina: Dulses
48 WHT/BLU IMT+ (INTAKE MANIFOLD Drives IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (lMT) ACTUATOR
+SIDE)
49 WHT/RED IMT- (INTAKE MANIFOLD Drives IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (lMT) ACTUATOR
-SIDE)
(cont'd)
11-41
BACK
PGM-FI System
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a
sequential multiport fuel injection system.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
AlC system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the AlC mode. .
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor
The AlF sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
AlF sensor is installed upstream ofthe TWC, and sends
signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel
injection accordingly ..
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel
injection discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor input is used by the PCM to determine
ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank
angle is abnormal.
MAGNET
11-42
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for
fuel injection of each cylinder, as well as detecting
engine misfire.
CKP
SENSOR A
CKP SENSOR SUBHARNESS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1/Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2
ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The decreases as the
engine coolant temperature increases.
TERMINAL THERMISTER
O-RING
Ignition Timing Control
The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration
The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detects long
term malfunctions in the fuel system and sets a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
BACK
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to
minimize knock.
TERMINAL
PIEZO CERAMIC
ELEMENT
DIAPHRAGM
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
to Readiness Codes) .;.
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
Ifthe vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has
been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part
of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete,
the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be
finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, One or more readiness codes are not
set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or
run the engine as described in the procedures (see page
11-66).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
O-RING
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature
(lAT) Sensor
The mass airflow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
(lAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is
located in the ihtake air passage. The resistance ofthe
hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air
temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF
sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set
temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the
comrol ci'rcuit, then output to the PCM.
HOT WIRE
IATSENSOR
(THERMISTOR)
(cont'd)
11-43
BACK
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
This sensor detects countershaft speed.
.1 :
TERMINAL
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)
The secondary H025 detects the,:oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way
catalytic converter (WU-TWC)., andseods signals to the
PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor I ~ s an internal
he,ater, The PCM compares the H025 output with the,
A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency; The
secondary H025 is on the WU-TWC.
HEATER
11-44
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
Electronic Throttle Control System
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.
Idle control: When the;e,ngine is idling, the PCM
controls the throttle a'qtuatbr to maintain the proper idle
speed according to engi'ne loads.
Acceleration contr<;)I: WheQ;the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending
on the acceleratorpedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to
maintain the set speed when cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise
control actuator.
,Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the PCM.
BACK
Throttle Body , "
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the
throttle plate.
Idle Control System
THROTTLE VA(VE

THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR AlB and
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
When the engine is cold, theA/Gcompressor is on, the
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
power load is high,orthe alternator is
rCM controls current to the throttle
actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. ,',
Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position switbh signals the PCM when
the brake pedal is pressed.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power
steering load is high. "
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Cutoff Control
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cutoff
control also occurs when the engine speed exceeds
6,600 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle
valve, to protect the engine from over-rewing. When
the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine
speeds over 5,000 rpm. Engine speed of fuel cut is
lower on a cold engine.
Fuel Pump Control
When the' ignition switch is turned on, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay2 which feeds current to the fuel
pump control module. The PCM sends a .signal to the
fuel pump control module to operate the fuel pump for
2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
engine running, the fuel pump speed is controlled in
four levels by the fuel pump control module. The PCM
decides the fuel pump speed by.the calculation of the
injector activation time and engine speed and sends a
operation command signal to the fuel pump control
module. This operation made ppssible to decrease fuel
pump noise at low engine speed.
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the PCM,
power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main'
relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply
power'to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition
switch is tur'ned ON (11), and when the engine is
cranking or running.
(cont'd)
11-45
BACK
Catalytic Converter System
Warm Up/Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWCI
and Under-Floor Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWCI
The WU-TWCrrwCconverts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO); and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), nitrogen (N2), and
water vapor.
WU-TWC
t#
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
TWC
,
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
11-46
HOUSING.
WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYST REAR
(Bank 1) ..
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system ..
EGRValve
The EGR valy,e .Iowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
... : BLOW-BY VAPOR
:FRESHAIR
\
BREATHER PIPE
BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged from the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 "F
(60 "e), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
OUT
...
MOVING
CORE
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM during the EVAP leak
check.
SENSOR UNIT
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
The EVAP canister ventshutvalve controls the venting
of the EVAPcanister.
VALVE
O-RING
(cont'd)
BACK
System Description (co nt' d)
Fuel Cap Warning Message
The PCM will detect a loose or missing fuel fill capas an
evaporative system leak, and alerts the driver by ,
showing a warning message in the gauge display.
First drive cycle
The first time a leak is detected a "TIGHTEN FUEL CAP"
message in the gauge display (A). To scroll to another
message, press the select/reset,button. The "TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP" message willapp'ear.each time you restart
the engine until the system u ~ n s the message off. Turn
the engine off then replace ortightenthe fuel fill cap
until it clicks at least once. The message should go off
after several days of normal driving after the.fuel fill
cap has been tightened or replaced.
11-48
..
Shows ''TIGHTEN FUEL CAP"
in the multi-information displav
A
To make_,themessagego off (with the HOS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
To make the message go off (without the
HOS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. The message should go off after several days
normal driving .
BACK
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
The electronic.throttlecontrolsystem consists ofthethrottle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor AlB, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor AlB, electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
J-------<:::r--- RED
f---1J-- PUR
,------,..r--WHT
f---1J-- ORN
LTGRN
J-------<:::r--- GRN
BLK
..L
PCM
From
0-----..... ETCS CONTROL
RELAY
/'1---, VARIOUS
~ S N S O R S
BLU
GRN
o
o
THROTTLE
BODY
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
TP SENSOR A
TPSENSORB
(cont'd)
11-49
BACK
Intake Manifold Tuning (lMT) Valve System
Engine power is adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator. When the valve is closed,
there is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve is open, there is high torque at high engine speed.
The intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator contains a sensor that detects the IMT valve position and sends it to
the PCM.
IMTVALVE
11-50
BACK
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory contains the ideal EGR valve position for
various operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift, and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares
it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the two,
the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
EGRVAlVE
POSITION
SENSOR
-
YEl/BLU
GRN/YEl
WHT/BlK
EGRVAlVE
\
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
PCM
VARIOUS
SENSORS
BlK
BLU/RED 1
-
(cont'd)
11-51
BACK
Fuel:and Emissions Systems
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The,EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is ..
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned .
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever engine coolant
temperature is above 140 "F (60 "C)
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds thefueLvapor
to the EVAP canister.
, . FTPSENSOR r----f--....{II'-- ORN---

r-----.'----'TI'--LT GRN
EVAP CANISTER GRN---
PCM
VARIOUS
SENSORS VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK
VAPOR
RECIRCULATION
TUBE

/
FUEL FILL
CAP
11-52

ATMOSPHERE
RED/
VEL
EVAP
CANISTER
PURGE
VALVE
BLK
1
No. 18ACG (10A)
L-. __ BLK/VEL --......... FUSE (in the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BACK
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM
5V
12V
836
VCC1
SG1
C32
ECT1
C10
EGR
C45
OPSW
C16
SG2
VEL/RED --r-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_"1+-+-________

!: 8
24P
MAP SENSOR
11 JUNCTION
J;" """" . ...........

r---------------- ..
ECTSENSOR1
1
r-
VEL/BLU VEL/BLU
3
8
24P
JUNCTION
2
.. CONNECT OR
-
WHT/BLK
EGRVALVE
POsmON
SENSOR
VEL/BLU
3
.. g].
1
WHT/BLK
GRN/VEL
4
BLU/RED BLU/RED
BLICI
6
VEL/
.. cr-
BLU
EGRVALVE

BLU/VEL BLU /VEL ......!..(P;:- a
I
1
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH _.
GRN/VEL
D E F G H
(cont'd)
11-53
BACK
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
11-54
C20
SHA
,BLU/VEL
3 -
RED
..t
VALVE A _
C28
GRN/WHT,
SHB

;VALVEB -
2
C39
SHC
GRN

C9
SHD
GRN/RED
--RED
LSA
B10
BRN/W
HT
B21
r:L==S=-C--GRN/
RED
C27
OP2SW
BLU/BLK
C37
BLU/VEL
OP4SW
C38
OP3SW
BLU/WHT
C33
BLU/VEL
ATFT
------------GRN/RED ------l
-
24P
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
I , ,
I I
22 13 14 15
,!
- ,
,.
... .....
G101
..t
VALVEC -
VEL
s:JEtth
VALVED
::: -----..:::'-1[0]
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A

BLK
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B

BLK
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
----------------------BLU/BLK -..!.{
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
----------------------BLU/VEL ---L( --o-+--..
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
----------------------BLU/WHT ---L(
1
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

L-------GRN/VEL
ATFTEMPERATURE
SENSOR
BACK

-
1-
B4

INJ1

I--
88
INJ2
B7
r--;; INJ3
B6
r--;; INJ4
B5
f---h INJ5
'.
B9

INJ6
T
.... B3
....
IGP
T 837
NM
T B38
1_ NC
J;"""
] C15
SG6
'-
BRN
RED
BlU
"
VEL
BLK! RED.
WHT /BLU
,
VE l/BLK
VEl/BlK
BRN
VEl/BlK
RED
VEl/BlK
BlU
,VEl/BlK
VEL
,
VEl/BlK
BLK/RED
VEl/BlK
WHT/BlU
11
10
9
8
7
6
3
.---
No.1 INJECTOR
No. 2 INJECTOR
No; 3 INJECTOR
No. 4 INJECTOR
No.5 INJECTOR
No. 6 INJECTOR
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
VEl/BlK.!...
VEl/BlK..!...
VEl/BlK...L.
VEl/BlK.l....
'---
[OJ rr==G, '.",n.",
RED
TdJ

......
BLU
GR
__
N/VEl --------------------
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
(cont'd)
11-55
BACK
F'uel and Emissions Systems
PCM Circuit Diagram (cant' d)
ION
24P
JUNCT
ECTOr
...,B:;:29::'-__ VEL/
'IGPLS1
GRN
B30
1-:'=G=PLS:-::::2--
BLU
IRED,
1-:822 =.:-:::: __ . WHT
IGPLS3
,/BLU'
B23
BRN
Io=B;.;1..;.1___ BLK
IGPLS5
IRED
B12
BRN
B1
--BLK
/WHT
..
24
I I I
23 2021
"!..!:-
'G1()1
I I I
22 19h
,
,
..
.,
,.
_
_
cr-
WHT
C101
... -"
C
.......
.-'.
VEL/GRN 1 I-Q---o.+-__ .-'To
BLK/SHT 3
BLK 2
No. 1IGN,mON COIL
Q---':>+---"'To
SPARK
PLUG
No. 21GNmON COIL

SPARK
PLUG
No.3 IG,NIT/ON COIL
BRN 1
3
BLK . 2
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT
BLK/RED Q ______ ..
SPARK

No. 5 IGNITION COIL
Q---':>+---+'I',o
C
SPARK
PLUG
No. 61GNmON COIL

I
G101
19 24P
BLK ; JUNCTION
BLK 20 'CONNECTOR
BLK 22 ,
BLK/WHT
24
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
RED/BLU 'm RE,D/BLU 48 0 I 11
KNOCK SENSOR =
o
11-56
BACK
VEL
BLU,
BLU/REO

GAN,<a
BLU/WHT ------!f -
BRN/VEL

ITCH
BRN/VEL

o 24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
CKP SENSOR A/B
(cont'd)
11-57
BACK
Fuel",ilild Emissions Systems
1.1-58
EVAP CANISTER
u65
RED/YEL ------------------------REDIVEL
. c10f

-----------ll 12
JMCS
BLUIVEL
...---BLKlYEL

2
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
1-------1 ]:'SOL BLK/YEL
6
5
4
24P
',JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

ENGINE MOUNT
R

...... --BLK/YEL 1
H
C
ff42;;'---WHT/BLU -----------------------WHT/BLU 3
ALn
j.;C44;;:;',.....-WHT/RED WHT/RED 4
ALTF
WHT/GRN 2
ALTC
Q
C6
AFSHTCB1 BLK/WHT _-+ __ -..1
C8
AFSHTCB2 GRN/WHT --+---,
C5
S02SHTCB1 BLK/WHT --+----.
C7
GRN/RED --r-
.............................................. BLU ......

6
5

2
,..--------WHT/BLK
ALTERNATOR
REAR A/F SENSOR
(BANK 1. SENSOR 11
B13
vsaf - -- .BLU "".
831 ............

B15
. .................................. RED/BLU .. .

VCENTB1 RED ----1-4-+----..1
B14
V582 ... RED/BLU ........ ,." .. ,."."" .. ..!.h-."" . "" "" ."., ."., ."., ""' ""' "' .
...-------WHT/BLK
832 CD !T FRONT A/F SENSOR
(PB2 GRN/RED (BANK 2. SENSOR 11
;:--- "" .,.,j.""."".10-: .. """ .. ,....,." .. "" .. ". .. ""."" .. "" .. "" .. "" .. "'" ..
REAR SECONDARY H02S
(BANK 1. SENSOR 21
... "" .. ""."" .. "" .. .,.; ....... "' .. +.,." .. ,." .. "" .. "" .. ". .. "" .. ""."" .. "" .. ."., .. ."., .. "" .. ""' .. "' .. "' .. "' .. "' .. ,." .. ,." .. ,." .. "" .. """' ............. """'"',.",.,,,.,"",,.""=-EE;
C101 l....!! r-@FRONTSECONDARYH02S
--.Jir--1J3 14 (BANK 2. SENSOR 21
I ...... __ .:.:!17:...j
_____ 15""1 CONNECTOR
WHT/BLK -1!
r-'""
-
BACK

A18

2

VCC4
12P
JUNCTION I I
CONNECTOR 10 112 11 1

---------;:::;:::;=;----t"-----------LT GRN ____
111111
CONNECTOR 12111 5 ' 6 I
----------' L---+-----------GRN ______
A
B
,.
V
APP SENSOR A/B
B18
-------------------------. BLU
2
............................ BLU .... -.-.....
vccs
B17
HTP=SA:-------- RED/BLK ------------+--------------- RED/BLK
826
i'iT=P=-SB=-------- RED/BLU ------------+------------------ RED/BLU
B33 4
865-------------------- GRN
---... -............ GRN .
C2
J
l-:g=CS=M::"+'i'""""----- BLU
1-:. GRN

____________ __
::----------- PUR
ECT2
TPSENSOR
THROTTLE BODY
ECT SENSOR 2
WHT/BLK J t
H

L-----+-------------------WHT/BLK
GRN/VEL
-------------------------------WHT/BLU
t?::::=---------WHT/RED -------------------------------WHT/RED
3
2
5
4
IMT
ACTUATOR
(cant'd)

BACK
1-.... --111---1 ] A 16
ATPP
GRN
::---WHT
ATPR
=:-_ RED/B
ATPN
LK
YEL/G
ATPD
RED
ATPD3
RN
C19
ATPRVS RED/W
HT
C18 BLU/Y
EL
ATPFWD
A47
SMODE
PUR
A36
BLU
SUP
A37
SDN
GRN
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

13 14
I
P
C101
5 I
...!.J
C201
...,....
28
30
31
-
4
C101
T
PNK
rb T C207
PNK
1
G503
B LU/w
LU/B
WHT
ED/B
EL/G
RED
HT
B LK
R LK
V RN
R
B
HT ED/W
LU/YE
BLK
L
PUR
BLU
GRN
BLK
10
r-
4
3
8
2
7
9
6
5
3
7
8
2

i-i-6,
-R ,
-"Nrc> '"

...
t-- .

'--
'-
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH
---
,
,
SHIFT LEVER
A46
S.NET5V LTGRN ---------------------- To IMMOBILIZER UNIT
11-60
BACK
1-:
A38
==--PNK -------------------------pBNLKK ---l..f21
.. PSPSW t::::::::::U
r ' PSP SWITCH
G202
C201
A2

...... ----YEL -1..{
SLS
A30
VSSOUT
BLU
A39
LTGRN
FTP
A22
LTGRN
VSV
C201
TI27
Y
A41
, BRN
LG3
F
C101
-
8
2
-'-
A20

____ BLK
VG-
VG+
J
C24

...

C204
3
12
GRN
18
7
PUR
2
S

To
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
NAVIGATION UNIT
...
LTGRN 2
GRN 3
FTPSENSOR

PUR 2,

GRN/YEL
RED/YEL,
RED/GRN
BLK/RED
BLK/YEL
EVAP
CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE
To IMMOBILl2ER
UNIT
2
3
IATSENSOR"
l--'"'I7'lfll:-....".: ..
MAFSENSOR
(cont'd)
11-61
BACK
ORN
1 -
---
GRY
-2-

---!..

--!...
-
ECTOR
___ WHT
FANL
C206
LTBL
1
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
.ORN.
4PCONN ECTOR
rtJ

'PUR

YEL

2PCONN
'------.;....-------------PU.R
__ RED ------------------RED
A(:C
4
ECTOR
=:1
4PCONN ECTOR
A5 PUR ______ ....,
FANH ...
As
MRLY GRN ----------,
A29
ETCSRLY BLU ----.,
PUR
.-II--ORN
=:1
__ --,
SUBRLY
4PCONN ECTOR
UNDER-ROOD
YBOX:
CD No.7' +B FAN TIMER(7.5 Al
No. 81GP (15 Al
No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROLJDBW+) (15 Al
No. 11 A/F SENSOR
(AFHT+I (15 AI
No.9 IGN COIL + (15 AI
'----ORN

'------BLU
C206 3 14P CON
rijl
'-------RED

4
ECTOR
6 -
---
---L
---1!.
.......!!.
-
NECTOR
--L[

2P CONNECTOR

UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
i
.'

CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
<D
E]
' ....

.,
I
-
PGMFIMAIN
RELAY 1
,.

f0-
E]

r-r-
ETCS CONTROL
RELAY
i-r-
E]
A/C COMPRESSOR

CLUTCH RELAY
-
PGMFISUB
RELAY
E]

I-
RADIATOR IGNITION
FAN RELAY COIL RELAY
....
.,
I
BACK
_____ LT GRN
AB
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
BKSW
A7

Brake pedal pressed: closed
WHT Brake pedal released: open .
L---:--+-+-YEL 3 _______ Brake pedal pressed: open
..... -------ir-------ir-+_ BRN 4 Brake pedal released: closed
YEL
C207
r-...... ORN
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
GRN (i)

..... ----------WHT

_ .. -"_ .. _ .. _ .. _._ .. _ .. r-:._ .. _. :;,
C101
___ -I A1 BRN
C201
r-,...---YEL

fBLK

:it ELD r_r-_ @ ;
.. _ .. _ .. -".. .. _ .. _ .. J
3P CONNECTOR
G302
.,
L
7P
CONNECTOR UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
-IHh L++-H-f---[ .. T [
@
L-____

..... _____ '--_.,
.
STARTER CUT RELAY 2* ' 33

::;
1 GRN L-__ -++. C202 CONNECTOR
5 LTGRN---!I=12 WHT
, 3 PNK ----\J: 11 . BRN----!!..t.
IG2CUTRELAY . C304 .r
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX: 16P CONNECTOR
I
No- 3 R/B1 (30 Al VEL
2 No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 Al . "T BLU 16
3 No. 31G1 MAIN (50 AI... r5."
4 No.4 +B BACKUP/ACC MAIN (40 Al
5 No.1 BATTERY (120 Al AI 6PCONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX: ::::[
i
NO. 30 A/C (10AI L-+-..... +-_. -WHT 4
7 No. 18 ACG (10 Al
8 No. 19 FUEL PUMP(20 Al r--------,
9 No. 10 IGN SOL (15 Al 6P CONNECTOR
No. 21 METER (7.5 Al
I No.7 BACKUP (10 Al GRN
6
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 1 "'-__ ---:--WHT 2
@STS (7.5 Al r
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 2
@STRLD (7.5 Al
*: AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BOX A
IGNmON SWITCH
IG1 HOlin ON (II)
and START (III)
7P CONNECTOR
..
r--
(j)
U
@

r-
@

I-r-r-
I-r-
. PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
r-
(FUEL PUMP)
r--
f0-
r-
(cont'd)
11-63
BACK
C204
A42
FPCD
_
PNK ---..I
A32
SCS
A44
WEN
12P
JUNCTION
C0J:jlTOR jD
1 2 C206
.... 5[ .... 1-""
n
GRY
1
... __ ...;....
_ 7 i}-GRY
C201
WHT
BRN
I
El
L-YEL
r
BLK
WHT
G604
RED
6
FP+
7
FP-
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL MODULE
AE 0
12P L.. ____ :::j{ P
JUNCTION 12P
CONNECTOR . JUNCTION CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP
n n

f.L
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
78
6
__ 10_8 _
_ WHT WHT 16
9
BRN ---:s:,::c,=="s-i
A48
CANH
A49
CANL
RED ---f-------...,
12

3 4
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
12P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
7 8
D

CANL RED ---+-----..... _--f-+--....J
L..----1---1
LTBLU ------.
11 ... 64
6

14

7
LT BLU
BLK
f
BLK
G503
LTBLU _________ -J
5
20P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
To IMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
To AUDIO UNIT
BACK
12P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
l2P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
7 WHT ---..
T RED T
WHT LTBLU
,....----WHT 3
CANH
...----RED 2
CANL D
9 WHT I T WTHT T
8 RED RED
I I
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
RED -Ir--I-H...I1 .---'---------4--I--J-.....J
WHT A12
CANH
RED -+---+ ...

7 ++-_-+++-1 ..........
12P
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
I rTl rTl I 13 c...E....
71819112 3 !J
WHT I WHT
RED
...---RED
CANH
A6
C605
,....--+-'+--WHT 4
CANH
,....1---4--RED
2
CANL
8 U RED C304
I
9 WHT
10 9 RED 38
...... CANL
12 WHT + __ ++--1-++-+-_....1 -LT BLU 15
D
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
D
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR
o
5
RED VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
RED ---t-++-I-'
2 RED ---4-++-I--I-.J
3 RED
RED-
L--------RED
A16
CANL
W",-
A12 RED-
CANL
..... --------WHT A6
CANH D
ACURAUNK CONTROL
UNIT IXM RECEIVER)
l2P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
SRSUNIT
CANH WHT
0
10
20
CANL
5
RED
K-UNE LTBL
U-
i....
-- --
WHT RED
I I
I
---
I
I T pOi
I , PL
l1
3
j
j8 17 9j
i
T
WHTj I j RED
j
i
I SH-AWD CONTROL
UNIT
j j
!
i LTBL
: : ! !
U
._ ..
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
_________________ ...J IL ______ J IL ____ -
f-
WHT-
RED
*2
1.---- -- -- - ---------
iO WHT
I CANL RED ______________________________ -.J LTBLU
! 3
- K-LINE -
I ACTIVE DAMPING
L..SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-,._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _.,_.
--,
*1: With Navigation system
*2: With Active damping system
11-65
BACK
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication
(In relation to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has
been reset, these readiness codes are reset to
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete.
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes from
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing.
11-66
Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
Code
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
procedure.
All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset with the HDS.
Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
The readiness code will not switch to complete until
all the enable criteria are met.
If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
complete until you correct the fault.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 "F (70 "C) or more.
IAT SENSOR at 20 "F ( -7 "C) or more.
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,
check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System Monitor and Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery
is disconnected, ifthe DTCs have been cleared, or if the
Enable Criteria
Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
Engine at idle.
ECT SENSOR 1 and 2 between 176 "F (80 "C) and
212"F (100 'C).
MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
VSS 0 mph (0 km/h).
IAT SENSOR between 32 "F (0 "C) and 212 "F (100 'C).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
3. Select EVAPTEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the
EVAPTESTMENU.
If the result is normal, readiness is complete .
If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one
or more of the enable criteria were probably not
met; repeat the procedure.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
Readiness Code
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
procedure .
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 "F (60 'C) or more.
Procedure
2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. Durihg the
drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS .
If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST Menu. Check the ECT in the ALL DATA
LIST with the HDS. If the ECT is less than 140 "F
(60 'C), run the engine until it is more than 140 "F
(60 "C), then repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
11-67
BACK
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor
Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery
is disconnected, ifthe DTCs have been cleared, or ifthe
Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
2. Ifthe readiness code is still not set to complete,
check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available
because misfiring is continuously monitored.
Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter
holds at its current value, if the throttle position
changes more than a predetermined value, or if
driving conditions fall outside the range of any
related enable criteria.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available
because the fuel system is continuously monitored
during closed loop operation.
Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and
Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-68
EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
NOTE:
Do notturnthe ignition switch off during the
procedure.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 "F (80 "C) or more.
Procedure
1. Connectthe HDS to the DLC.
3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in
D position, at 50-62 mph (80-100 km/h) or above
for more than 10 seconds.
4. With the transmission in D position, decelerate
from 62 mph (100 km/h) or above by completely
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
engine is stopped during this procedure, go to
step 3 and do the procedure again.
5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTC's MENU with theHDS.
If it is passed, readiness is complete.
If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
BACK
PGM-FI System
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
Includes:
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
PGM-FI SUBRELA Y
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information,
page 11-3
Update, page 11-7
Substitution, page 11-8
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR
INJECTORS
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 2
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1
KNOCK SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR
(cant'd)
11-69
BACK
PG'M-FI System
Component Location Index (co nt' d)
FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F)
SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
"'-70
STARTER CUT
RELAY 2

PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 2
REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F)
SENSOR (BANK 1, SENSOR 1)
REAR SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
Replacement,
page 11-241
FRONT SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
General Troubleshooting Information,
STARTER CUT page 11-3
RELAY 1 Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-223
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTe P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) .
If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored
at the same time as DTC P01 01, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0101.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these
parts:
PCV hose
Intake air duct
Air cleaner
Purge (PCS) line
Brake booster hose
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go
to step 16.
2. Check for damage or looseness at the air duct in
the air cleaner.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reconnect or replace the air duct in the air
cleaner, then go to step 14.
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page
11-364), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Check theMAF SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the
HDS .
Is there about 0.2 gm!s' or 0.5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO...,....Go to step 12.
7. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and
3,000 rpm.
8. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. ..'
Does the reading change?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 12. ,.
....
9. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on,
then let it idle.
10. Test-drive theVehicle fOr several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED,'
VSS
MAP SENSOR
MAFSENSOR '
- .. , .
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the
DTCs MENUwiththe HDS.
Does the screenindicate FAILED? , ,
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 10 and recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK
P G M ~ I System
OTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-238).
17. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
MAP SENSOR
MAFSENSOR
18. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCswith the HDS.
Is DTC P0101 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAF sensor and the PCM, then go
to step;1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBDSTATUS forDTC POJ01 in the
DTCs MENUwiththeHDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete: lfany other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated .in step 18,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the PCMj then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.
11-72
BACK
DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3 ..
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the MAF sensor and the PCM .
3. Check the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the MAF
sensor and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse. Also replace
the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector.
7. Measure voltage between MAFsensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 18
ACG (10 A) fuse and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 20.
9. Measure resistance between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.3 and body
ground.
=
Is there 190-210kQ?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
11-73
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal A20 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
VG+(RED)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A20) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-74
13. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.3 and PCM
connector termihal A20.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR SP. CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A20) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21.
BACK
14. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IATsensor
(see page 11-238).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
17. Clear the OTC with the HOS.
2,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral).
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is ore P0102 i(ldicated?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor
(see page 11-238), then go to step 20.
23. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
24. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
Is ore PO 102 indicated?
terminals at the MAF sensor/IATsensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated OTC's troubleshooting .
good PCM (see page 11-8).
Is ore P0102 indicated?
terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM(see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
11-75
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage
troubleshooting information (see page 11"3).
2. Check the MAF SENSOR inthe DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 202 gm/s, or 4.89 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the systern is OK at this
at the MAF sensor and the PCM .
connector.
11-76
7'. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.4 and PCM
connector terminal A9.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire. between the PCM (A9)
and the MAF sensor, then go to step 15.
BACK
8. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P). ' ,
9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminals No.3 and No.4 with a jumper wire.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR SP CONNECTOR
',. I
'I', ','
VG+ (RED/GRN) VG- (BLK/RED)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of terminals
11. Clear the OTC with the HOS:
12. Check for Temporary OTCsor OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTC PO 103 indicated? .'
YES-Go to 20.
NO":'" Go to step'13.
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IATsensor (see page
11-238).
15. Reconnect allconnectprs.! '
17. Resetthe PCM with the HOS.
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with th,e HOS.
Is DTCP0103 indicated?,
YES-Check for pOOr connections or loose
PCM, then go to step ,..
N07"'"Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .
., software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
23. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs yvith the HOS.
Is DTOP0103 indicated?
PCM.lfthe,PCM was updated"substitute akr:1own-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
, " ..
NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
original PCM (see page 11-2.44). If any other
--t'o
11-77
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTCP0107: MAP Sensor CircuitL.:ow Voltage
troubleshooting infor'mation (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch 0N (II).
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor
less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO...,. I nterm itte nt failure, the system is OK at this
at the MAP sensor and thePCM .
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. '
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the
HDS.'
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor
less indicated? ' ' ,
YES-Gotd step 1 2 ~
NO-Go to step 7.
~ , I
7. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
mfuJ
VCC1 (VEL/RED) ~ SG1 (GRN/WHT)
11-78
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 8.
9. Jump the SCS line wit!l the HDS.
10. Disconnect PCM connector.S (49P).
terminal B36 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.1.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in thewirebetween the PCM
(B36) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
BACK
14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
15. Check for continuity between MAP .sensor 3P
connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
=
(835) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-238).
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC PD107 indicated?
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
terminals atthe MAP sensor and the PCM.lfthe
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
. '. ' .. '
11-79
BACK
PGM:-FI System
DTCP0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
troubleshooting information (see.page 11-3).
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS ..
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated?
step 3.
atthe MAP sensor and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2
and No. '3 with a jumper wire.

" ,". 1.2 3
MAP (GRN/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
HDS.
4.49 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18.
11-80
8. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P

VCC1 (VEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES- Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
terminal 834 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3.
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
Q
YES-Go to step 25.
terminal 835 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.2.
MAP SENSOR 3PCONNECTOR
A.
1 12131
I MAP (GRN/RED)
Ir 11
-' 1
2. 3 4161617 8 19110 L
Q
111 12. 13 14116116 17118 1920 211
Izz 2.324 ><126 ><
zsV /I
J29 30 31 32.L33] 34 36]36 3736 391
1401 41 42. /1441 4>148 V
VVI
I MAP (GRN/RED)
YES-Go to step 25.
open in the wire between the PCM
(cont'd)
11-81
BACK
PGM-FI System
Is DTC P010B indicated?
to step 1.
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
11-82
BACK
DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1/2 and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor.
Are the connections and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go
to step 15.
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-238).
3. Allow the IAT sensor to cool to ambient
temperature.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
cleaner.
7. Note the value ofthe IAT SENSOR quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR to the
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 of
(3 OC) or more?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor from the 5P
connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/
IAT sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a few seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
cleaner.
12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the IAT SENSOR change 58 of (32C) or
more?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
at the IAT sensor and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 13.
11-238).
17. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
11-83
BACK
PGM-FI System
Ole P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
HDS.
/s about 356 of (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
connector.
HDS.
/s about 356 of (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Goto step 11.
11-84
10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
ground.
=
/s there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the IAT
sensor and the PCM (C24), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11-238).
/s DTC P0112 indicated?
terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
BACK
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM
jr
11-85
BACK
".
PGM-FI System
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
HDS.
Is about -40 OF (-40C) or less, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
connector.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT (RED/YEll
JUMPER WIRE
11-86
HDS.
Is about -40F (-40C) or tess, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8. ,
NO-Go to step 20.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF,
9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.
11. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5PCONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
BACK
terminal C16 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector terminal No.1.
YES-Go to step 27.
(C16) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 22.
17. Jump.the SCS line with the HDS.
terminal C24 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
YES-Go to step 27.
(C24) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 22 ...
(cont'd)
11-87
BACK
',. '
"
PGM-F'I System
11-238).
"::;"" I' ,', .
26. Check for Temporary OTCsor OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTC P0113 indicated?
YES-Check fot poor connections 'or loose
PCM, then g<> to step 1.
: . . , .
indicated OTC's trQubleshooting
11,-88
" ; ~
BACK
Ole P0116: ECl Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 176 of (80C) or more, or 0.78 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 inthe DATA LIST
with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 OF (10 C) or
more?
YES-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
7. Tl.Irn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 of (10OC) or
more?
at EeT sensor1 and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239).
15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure.(see page 11 .. 311).
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
11-89
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe P0117: EeT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
1 .. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
HDS.
Is about 356 OF (180 "C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
4. Disconnect theECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), ,
HOS. ,'1'
Is about 356 OF (180 "C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
11-90
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT
sensor 1 and the PCM (C32), then goto step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
step 1.
BACK
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
11-91
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High
Voltage
HDS.
Is about - 40 OF ( -40C) or less, or 4.92 V or
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2 with a jumper wire.

ECn (RED/WHTI U SG2 (GRN/YEl)
JUMPER WIRE
HDS.
Is about -40 OF (-40C) or less, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
11-92
9. Remove the jumper wire.
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
BACK
terminal C16 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector
terminal No.2.
YES-Go to step 27.
(C16) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
:! I:
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF;,",',,;
17. Jump theSCSline with the HDS;:c
18. Disconnect PCM connector'C (49P)."
19. Check for continuity between PCMconnector
terminal C32 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector
terminal No.1.;, '
-ECT SEN$OR:12P CONNECTOR, '
Wire side of female
-"PCM CONNECTORC (49PI
,.l
. :!li
L-____ -l ECT1 (RED/WHTI
YES-Go to step 27.
in the wire between thePCM'
(C32) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
,,',
"
" :.'
I', "
','. -
:','1
(cont'd)
BACK
21. Replace ECT sensor 1 (seepage
22. Reconnect aU connectors .. -
23. Turn the ignition switch, ON (II).
26. Check for TemporarY DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
" '.'.' .. , ;)';-,
Is OTC P0118indicated?
,. :-:1 .",
terminals at.ECT sensor 1 and PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshootirig any other
indicated DTC's-troubleshooting..'
27. Reconnectallconnectors.
28. Update the PCM if it does not havetheJatest .'
BACK
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow
Response
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot) record alUreeze data
1. Start the. engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or
more.
HDS.
Is about 10 of (-12C) or less, or 4.45 V or more
indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Allow the engine to cool to 104 "F (40 "C) or less.
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle.
6. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
49 "F (27 "C) or more from the recorded
temperature.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
8. Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded
temperature.
Did ECT SENSOR 2 change 17 of (9.5 pC) or
more?
YES-Intermittent failure;the system is OK atthis
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4). If the
thermostat is OK, go to step 9. If you replaced the
thermostat, go to step ,11.
10. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239),
14. Allow the engine to cool to the ambient
temperature.
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 minutes.
Is DTC PO 125 indicated?
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
NO-Go to step 17.
DTCs MENU.with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.
11-95
BACK
PGM .. ,FI System
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Turn the blower switch OFF.
4. Turn the AlC switch OFF.
5. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it OFF?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step
6.
6. Check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator fan keep running?
YES-Check for symptoms in the cooling system. If
the cooling system is OK, go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
104"F (40 "C) or less.
8. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
10. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
49 "F (27 "C) or more from the recorded
temperature.
HDS.
11-96
12. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
Did temperature rise 17 of (9.5 C) or more?
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
to step 13.
between 21 "F (-6 "C) and 104 "F (40 "C).
17. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph
(24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Is Drc P0128 indicated?
PCM. then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
BACK
softwa re (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
between 21 "F (-6 'C) and 104 "F (40 "C).
23. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph
Is DTC PO 128 indicated?
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 21. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0128 in the
OTCs MENU with the HOS.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 24,
go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). then
go to step 21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 21.
11-97
BACK
PGM-FI System
OlC P0133: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response
OTC P0153: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
NOTE:
If DTC P0139 and/or P0159 ' is stored at the same time
as DTC P0133 and/or P0153', troubleshoot DTC P0139
and/or P0159' first, then recheck for DTC P0133 and/
or P0153'.
Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 'F (70 "C)
Transmission in D position
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
26-81 mph (41-130 km/h)
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-240).
11-98
above 158 'F (70 "C)
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
26-81 mph (41-130 km/h)
Is DTC P0133 and/or PO 153' indicated?
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 12.
BACK
DTC P0134: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
DTC P0154: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
NOTE:
If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 ' is stored at the same time
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154', troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254' first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154' .
Information marked with an asterisk (') applies to the
3. Start the engine, then let it idle 1 minute.
Is DTe PO 134 and/or P0154' indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM .
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
6P connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal B13 (B14)'.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR
r--
1 2
/
4 5 6
VSB1 (BLU) I I VSB2 (RED/BLU)


VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
Ilr ,I
J 1 I 2 3 4161617 8 9110 I.
111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24
.><J26L>< 26/
VI
129 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
140 I 41 42 /144146146 / VVI
YES-Go to step 10.
(B13 (B14) ') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 14.
(cont'd)
11-99
BACK
PGM-FI System
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 6P CONNECTOR
. 1 2
456
VSB1(BLUI
VSB2 (RED/BLUI*
'Y
=
Js there about 0.2 V or Jess?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13;'
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 11 (see page
11-2401.
11-100
Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154' indicated?
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the
NO-Go to step 19 .
19. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or
(Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result comes on.
23. Start the engine, then let it idle 1 minute.
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the
NO-Go to step 25.
BACK
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
subrelay), and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
step 23.
11-101
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P0135: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies to the
Is OTe P0135 and/or P0155' indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM .
S. Check these fuses:
No. 11 A/F sensor (AFHT+) (15 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
No.3 R/B 1 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
No.7 +B FAN TIMER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box
Are any of the above fuses blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensors, the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
subrelay), then replace the blown fuse(s), and go to
step 23.
NO-Goto step 7.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector.
11-102
8. At the sensor side, measure resistance between A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector terminals No.1 and
No.2.
Is there 2.5- 3.2 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 21.
9. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
each terminal at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connector and body ground.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 116P CONNECTOR
Q
=
- - -
- - -
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
10. At the sensor side, check for conti'nuity between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminals No.1
and No. '4; No. 1 and No.,5, No.1 and No.6
individually.
A/F SENSOR ISENSOR 1) 6PCONI\IECTOR
" ." '," r' I
Terminal side of male ter""inals
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step,11.
terminal C6 (C8) and body ground. .. .. 1\
PCM CONNECTOR C I49P)
AFSHTCB1 IBLK/WHT) AFSHTCB2 IGRN/WHn*
n n
(C6 (C8)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
step 22.
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity betwee'nA/F sensor (Sensor 1)
terminal C6 (C8) .
. ..'... , '. ' ' ;1 ,
A/F 1),6P
AFSHTCB1 IBLK/WHT) AFSHTCB2 IGRNfWHT)*
rW-
",", ",
1 2 V>
Q
'4 5 .6
n
..
Wire side offemale,terminals
C 149P),
AFSHTCB1IBLK/WHTI I ' 1 AFSHTCB2'IGRN /WHT)*
II II
LI,l 2 3 . 4'1 6 16,1 7 8 9110'1
111 121/ 1/110116117118 19201211' '

V
24
><1261>< 26 271281
V V ./I 321 331 34!yv 37381391
1
1\40 41 42 43144146148 47 481491
(C6 (C8)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
step 22.
(cont'd)
BACK
.
, :'" '
15. Disconnecttheunder-hood fuse/relay box9p
connector. "
16. Check for continuitybetween A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
6P No.' 1 aneiunder-hood fuse/
relay bo>t9Pconnector No.9.,
A/F SENSOR IS"ENSOR 116P CONNECTOR:
+B IWHT/BLK)
Q
wi'ifj'side ;()ffiimsle terminals
. UNDER.HOOQ ,PUSE/RELA Y BOX9PCONNECTOR
+BIPUR)

9
Wire pf "
" ,',".'.' .. : I, ,,"1 ,,'
; '.' t '..;., '
, ",
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between theA/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the under-hood fuse/relay
box, then go to.step22. ,,',"' .. '
, ,:.

17. Disconnect PCMconnectorA(49P) .. /
,1'.",[, ..
18. Disconnect the 14P
connector.
,.
19. Check for continuity petween under-hoo,d fusel
terminal No. 13' and PCM
PCM CONNECTOR A 149PI I
l'ermirial side 'offemalEi terminals
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14P CONNECTOR
7
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Repair open in,thewire between the PCM
(A40) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to
step 22.'" 1. ..',,'.
,\, , i
':';-':,;
:-.'" .
" :'/
i "
BACK
20. Test the PGM-FI subrelay in the under-hood fuse/
relay box (see page 22-77).
Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK?
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace the relay control module (under-hood
fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71), then go to step 22.
11-240).
26 .. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P013S and/or P01SS indicated?
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the
NO-Go to step 27.
subrelay) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
28. Reconnectall connectors.
Is DTC P013S and/or P01SS indicated?
terminals atthe A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the
was substituted, goto step 1.
NO-Go to step 31.
subrelay) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
11-105
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-106
12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SH02SB1 (GRN)
SH02SB2 (WHT)* ......... 1..,.........2 .....
3 4
Q
=
(B25 (B16)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 23.
14. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-241).
BACK
above 158 'f (70 "C)
Engine speed at 1,500-3,000 rpm
Drive 1 minute or more
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 22.
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
above 158 'f (70 "C)
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then go to step 25. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 25.
11-107
BACK
'PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
OlC P0138: Rear SecondaryH02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
OlCP0158: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk ( .) applies to the
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (hi
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .
6. Disconnect the sEicondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sehsor2) 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with ajumper wire.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4Ft CONNECTOR
JUMF'ER WIRE
1 2
(GRN) 3 4 SG2 (GRN/YEl)
SH02SB2 (WHT)*
L...-..J..--.;.I
11-108
YES-Go to step 10 .
NO-GO'to step ,19.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No.1 to body ground with a, jumper VIIire.
SECONDARY H02S(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SH02SB1 (GRN)
SH02SB2 (WHTI*
1 2
3.4
JUMPER WIRE
'., Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 15.
(C16) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 21.
BACK
terminal 825 (816)' and body ground.
n
=
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI
SH02SB1 (GRNI SH02SB2 (WHTI*
Ir
111 2 3 41 617 8 91101
111 1213 14116 617118 1920 211
r22 2324 X 25'5< 2617 171
I
129 3031 32133 3436136 3736 391
1140 41 42 1/144146146 1/ 1/1/1

YES-Go to step 29.
Q
(825 (816)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 21.
11-241).
above 158"F (70."C)
the PCM, then. go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.
28. Monitor the 08D STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or
(cont'd)
11-109
BACK
PGM-FI System
30. Update the pcM if it does not have the latest
31. Start the engine, then let it idlewithout load (in
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Transmission in 0 position
32. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 34.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTCP0138 and/or
Does the screen indicate 'PASSED?
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then go to step 32. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 32.
11-110
BACK
DTC P0139: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
DTC P0159: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
NOTE:
Engine coolanttemperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph
(56-88 km/h)
Drive 5 minutes or more
5. Monitor theOBD STATUS for DTC P013.9 and/or
YES-Go to step 6.
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
11-241).
12 .. Test-drive onderthese conditions:
Engine coolant temperature above 176 "F (80 "C)
(56-88 km/h)
Drive 5 minutes or more
Is DTC P0139 and/or P0159* indicated?
NO-Go to step 14.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs we're indicated in step 13,
a result comes on. If the Screen indicates OUT OF
11-111
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P0141: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
OTC P0161: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk ( ") applies to the
Is DTC P0141 and/or P0161 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood
fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM .
6. Check these fuses:
No. 11 A/F sensor (AFHT +) (15 A) fuse in the
No.3 R/B 1 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
No.7 +B FAN TIMER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box
Are any of the fuses blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensors, the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
subrelay) and the fuse, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
11-112
8. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 21 4P CONNECTOR
Is there 5.4- 6.6 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. At the secondary H02S (sensor 2) side, check for
continuity between body ground and secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No.3 and
No.4 individually.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 214P CONNECTOR
Q Q
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
11. Discon nect PCM connector C. (49P).
terminal C5 (C7)' and body ground.
S02SHTCB1 (BLK/WHT) S02SHTCB2 (GRN/RED)*
12 12
= =
(C5 (C7)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 13.
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.3 and PCM
connector terminal C5 (C7).
1 2
3 4
S02SHTCB2 (GRN/RED)*
YES-Go to step 14.
(C5 (C7)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
go to step 21.
(cont'd)
11-113
BACK
PGM-FI System
14. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
connector.
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.4 and under-
hood fuse/relay box 9P connector No.9.
1 2
3 4
Wire side of female terminals Q
9P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 16.
secondary H02S(Sensor 2) and the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.
11-114
17. Disconnectthe under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector.
18. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/
relay box 14P connector terminal No. 13 and PCM
14P CONNECTOR
7
YES-Go to step 19.
Q
step 21.
BACK
19. Test the PGM-FI subrelay in the under-hood fuse/
Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK?
YES-Go to step 27.
fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71). then go to step 21.
11-241).
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and
NO-Go to step 26.
26. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0141 and/or
P0161' in the OTCs MENU with the HOS.
H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box
(PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 30.
30. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0141 'and/or
P0161 , in the OTCs MENU with the HOS.
H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box
(PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes on.
11-115
BACK
P G M ~ I System
OTe P0171: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System
Too Lean
OTe P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System
Too Rich
OTe P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System
Too Lean
OTe P0175: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System
Too Rich
NOTE:
If some of the OTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as OTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or
P0175, troubleshoot those OTCs first, then recheck for
P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175.
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129:Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133,P0153,P1172,P1174,P2195,P2197,P2237,
P2238,P2240,P2241,P2243,P2245,P2247,P2249,
P2251,P2252,P2254,P2255,P2AOO,P2A03:Airfuel
ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135,P0154, P0155: Airfuel ratio (A/F) sensor
(Sensor 1) heater
P0137,P0138,P0139,P0157,P0158,P0159,P2270,
P2271, P2272, P2273: Secoodary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P2646, P2647-, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401, P0404,P0406,P2413: Exhaust gas '
recirculation (EGR) system
P2279: Intake air leakage
11-116
Is the fuel pressure OK?
YES-If you are troubleshooting OTC P0171 or
P0174, go to step 2. If you are troubleshooting OTC
P0172 or P0175, check the valve clearances, and
adjust if necessary. Ifthe valve clearances are OK,
replace the injectors (see page 11-236), then go to
step 2.
NO-Check these items:
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-345), then go to
step 2.
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the
fuel lines for restrictions, then go to step 2.
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Drive at a steady speed between, 15 -75 mph
NOTE: OTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 may
take up to 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using
the HOS, monitor the long term fuel trim (L T FUEL
TRIM) or the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE).
If the long term fuel trim/air fuel feed back average
stays within 0.84-1.18, there is noproblem at this
time.
BACK
Is DTe P0171, P0172, P0174, or P0175
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
the PCM.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then step
2.
9. Check the fuel quality.
Is the fuel quality OK?
YES-Replace the injectors (see page 11-236), then
goto step 2.
NO-Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333), replace
the fuel, then go to step 2.
11-117
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTe P0300: Random Misfire and Any
Combination of the Following:
OTe P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201
AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY 40120
Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
NOTE:
If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection
of increased emissions during two consecutive
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300
(and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will
be stored.
If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of
P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on.
Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them
were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s)
(Because parts can sometimes fail without setting
DTC's you should also do a physical inspection ofthe
below systems.):
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF)
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171,P0172,P0174,P0175:Fuelsystem
P0335, P0339, P0385, P0389: Crankshaft position
(CKP) sensor NB
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P0340, P0344: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401,P0404,P0406,P2413:Exhaustgas
recirculation (EGR) system
11-118
1 .. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, let it idle until a
CONDITION, wait for several minutes,then recheck .
5. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LlSTfor 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
BACK
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS forDTC P0301, P0302,
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, goto step 8. If
a result comes on. If the Screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION; go to step 6 and recheck.
8. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE,CYL3
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE,CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE,
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system isOK at this
time .
10. Check the fuel quality. '.
Is the quality good?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Drain the tank, and fill it with a known-good
fuel, then go to step 20.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-24). If the spark
plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
RELTP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
with the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE,
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 20.
Is the fuel pressure OK?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-345), then go to
step 20.
If the'pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed lines, and the fuel filter. If they are
OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page
(cont'd)
11-119
BACK
PGM-FI System
16. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch in the pressure
gauge adapter (B).
A
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal with a new O-ring.
07MAJ-PY4011A and
22Nm
12.2 kgfm,
16lbfft)
O'40""0Z0201 ., ,
07MAJ-PY40120 \
\
...... / .
. ...-.. - .. - 07406-0070301
07ZAJ-S5AA200
17. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
radiator fan comes on.
19. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000
and 2,000 rpm. Keep the measuring time as short
as possible (less than 1 minute) because the engine
is running without load.
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgflcrri',
7 psi)?
YES-Remove the oil pressure gauge, and reinstall
the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go to step
20.
NO-Inspect the VTEC system (see page 6-7), then
go to step 20.
11-120
20. Turn 'the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
24; Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes inthe
'ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
26. Check for Temp0rary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0300 and any combination of DTC P0301,

indicated?
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
PCM, then go to DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
P0305, or P0306 (see page 11"121) troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 27.
with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
connection or loose terminals at the ignitions coil,
the injector, and the PCM, then go to step1. Ifthe
result comes on. Ifthe screen indicates OUT OF
BACK
DTC P0301: o ~ '1 Cytinder Misfire Detected"
DTC P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
,j
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot; record all freeze data
1. Turn the 'ignition switch ON (II) ..
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load for
2 minutes (in Park or neutral).
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P030S in the DTCs MENU,.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 9.
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck.
5. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE,CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYLS MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step S.
.. !'iii
S. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P030S in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 9.
CONDITION, go to step S.
8. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3'
CYLS MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,.
YES-Go to step 9.
time. Check the fuel and ignition system circuit
connectors for loose wires or poor connections .
10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem
cylinder with one from another cylinder.
(cont'd)
BACK
PGM-FI System
range ofthese recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
with the HDS.
Does CYLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Intermittent failure due to poor contact at the
ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time).
Make sure that the ignition coil connectors are
secure
14. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the. misfire occur in the cylinder where the
ignition coil was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
with the one from another cylinder.
11-122
18. TeSt.,drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV(calculated load value)
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Intermittent failure due to.spark plug fouling
(no misfire at this time)
20: Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
spark plug was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step
53.
NO-Go to step 21. .
22. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder.
BACK
24. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
2
3 IG (BLK/WHT)
=
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to
step 53.
26. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
2 GND(BLK)
3
Q
=
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil, G101, then go to step 53.
27. Jump the SCS linewith the HDS.
29. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM DTC PCM
CYLINDER TERMINAL
No.1 P0301 B29
No.2 P0302 B30
No.3 P0303 B22
No.4 P0304 B23
No.5 P0305 B11
No.6 P0306
B12 .
IGPLS1 (VEL/GRN)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)
- - -
- - -
WIRE
COLOR
YELJGRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
and the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
NO-Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
11-123
BACK
PGM-FI System
30. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition
coil 3P connector terminal No.1 and the
appropriate PCM connectorterminal of the
problem cylinder (see table).
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 B29 YEL/GRN
No.2 P0302 B30 BlU/RED
No.3 P0303 B22 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 B23 BRN
No.5 P0305 B11 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 B12 BRN/WHT
IGPLS
'---'
1
2
-
QQQ
3
-
Wire side offemaleterminals
IGPLS5 (BLK/REDI
II II
IGPLS3 LI 1 2 3 14161617 8 9110 L
(WHT/BLUI 111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
122 2324
><.1261>< 26/1
VI.
29 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
IGPLS1 140 41 421/144146146 ,,/ VVI
(YEL/GRNI
11-124
I P L S ~
1
-
2
r---
QQQ
3
'---
IGPLS& (BRN/WHTI
II II
IGPLS4 -' 1
2 3 4161617 8 9110 I
(BRNI 111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
122 2324
.><J261>< 26/1 VI
29 30 31 32133134136136 3736
391
IGPLS2
140 41 42 1/44146146 / 1/1/1
(BLU/REDI
YES-Go to step 31.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
BACK
33. Measure voltage between body ground and the
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
CYLINDER . TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 84 8RN
No.2 P0302 88 RED
No.3 P0303 87 8LU
No.4 P0304 a6' VEL
No.5 P0305 85 8lK/RED
No.6 P0306 89 WHT/8lU
PCM CONNECTOR B I49PI
INJ61WHT /BLUI
= - =
=
Terminal side of female termirials
YES-Go to step 41.
NO-Go to step 34.
35. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the
problem cylinder.
36. Turn'the ignition switch ON (II).
37. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector
terminal No.1 and body ground.
INJECTOR 2PCONNECTOR
~ .. IIYEL/BLKI
':i.
-= . .
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Repair open. in the wire between the injector
and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main relay
1), then go to step 51.
(cont'd)
11-125
BACK
PROBLEM DTC ReM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 " P0301 B4 BRN
No.2 P0302 B8;. RED
No.3 P0303 B7 BlU
No.4 P0304 .B6 VEL
No.5 P0305 B5 BlK/RED
No.6 P0306 B9 WHT/BlU
PCM CONNECTQR B (49P)
Q
=
and the injector, then go to step 53.
NO-Go to step 40.
11-126
40. Check for continuity between appropriate injector
2P connector terminal No.2 and the appropriate
PCM connector terminal ofthe problem cylinder
(see table).
PROBLEM DTC PCM
CYLINDER TERMINAL
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
P0301 . B4
P0302 ,B8
P0303 B7
P0304 B6 .
P0305 B5
P0306 B9
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ
PCM .CONNECTOR B (49PI .
INJ4 (YEll
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED'
BlU
YEL
BlK/RED
WHT/BlU
terminals at the injector and under-hood fuse/relay
box (PGM-FI main relay 1), then go to step 41.
the injector, then go to step 53.
BACK
41. Measure resistance between injector 2P oonnector
terminals No.1 and No.2.
~
G P ~ N J
Is there 10-13 Q ?
YES-Go to step 42.
NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-236), then
go to step 53.
42. Exchange the injectorfrom the problem cylinder
with the one from another cylinder. Also check the
injector fuel inlet screen for debris, and clean if
needed.
43. Reconnect all connectors, and install the intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
45. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
or neutral) for 2 minutes.
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Intermittent failure due to poor contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
injector..
49. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
. injector was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-236),
then go to step 53.
NO-Go to step 50.
51. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-6).
Did the engine pass both tests?
YES-Go to step 52.
NO-Repair the engine, then go to step 53.
(cont'd)
11-127
BACK
PGM-FI System
52. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7).
Did the engine pass the test?
YES-Go to step 61.
NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm, then go to step
53.
57. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAH POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306 indicated?
terminals atthe ignition coil, the injector, and the
NO-Go to step 60.
11-128
60. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306 indicated?
NO-Go to step 65.
BACK
65. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
with the HDS.
Temporary DTCs orDTCs were indicated in step 64,
the injector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 63.
11-129
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction
4. Hold the engine speed at 3,000-4,000 rpm for at
least 10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 6.
at the knock sensor and the PCM .
8. Disconnect the knock sensor subharness 1 P
connector.
11-130
terminal C47 and body ground. '
=
(C47) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to
step 19.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Connect the knock sensor subharness 1 P connector
terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
KNOCKSENSORSUBHARNESS1PCONNECTOR
ERs (RED/BLUI
lJUMPER WIRE
=
BACK
YES-Go to step 13.
(C47) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to
step 19.
13. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3), and the
injector base (see page 9-7).
14. Disconnect the knock sensor 1 P connector.
15. Check for continuity between the knock sensor
subharness 1 P connectorterminal and body
ground.
KNOCK SENSOR SUBHARNESS 1P CONNECTOR
fS IRED,BLU)
YES-Repair short in the knock sensor subharness,
then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Check for an open in the knock sensor subharness.
Is the harness OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the knock sensor sUbharness,
then go to step 19.
17. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-243).
18. Install the injector base (see page 9-7), and the
intake manifold (see page 9-2).
21. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
least 10 seconds.
terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM, then go
to step.26.
NO-Go to step 25.
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
(cont'd)
11-131
BACK
PGM-FI System
good PCM (see page 11-8). .
least 10 seconds.
PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 30.
the injector, and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
go to step 28. If the PCM was su bstituted, go to step
step 28.
11-132
BACK
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor A No Signal
DTC P0385: CKP Sensor B No Signal
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies to
CKP sensor B.
YES-Go to step 5.
at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM .
6. Disconnect CKP sensor AlB 6P connector (see page
11-242).
8. Measure voltage between CKP sensor AlB 6P
connector terminal No.6 (No.3)' and body ground.
CKP SENSOR AlB 6P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between CKP sensor
AlB and the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1), then go to step 18.
9. Measure voltage between CKP sensor AlB 6P
connector terminal No.5 (No.2)' and body ground.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-133
BACK
P G M ~ I System
10. Measure voltage between CKPsensor NB 6P
. connector terminals No.4 (No.1)' and No.6'
(No.3)'.
LG (BRN/YEL)*
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open inthe wire between CKP sensor
NB and G101, then go to step 18.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF ..
13, Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11-134
terminal B45 (B44) , and CKP sensor NB 6P
connector No.5 (No.2) .
YES-Go to step 15.
(B45 (B44)') and CKP sensor NB, then go to
step 18.
BACK
15. Check forcontinuity'between PCM connector
terminal B45 (B44)' and body ground.
(B45 (B44)') and CKP sensor AlB, then go to
step 18. "
NO-Go to step 25.
17. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-242).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. '
terminals at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated; go to the
"
software (see page 11-7), ot substitute a known'-
27. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCswith the HDS.
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0385*indicated?
terminals at CKp sensorAlBand.the PCM.lfthe
(see rec'heck.lfthe PCMwas
origin'al PCM (see page 11:.244); If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs arefndibated,'go to the
1'1,-135
BACK
System
OTCP0339;CKP Sensor A Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
OTC P0389: CKP Sensor B Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
NOTE:
anyon-board ,snapshot, and review the general,
Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to
CKP sensor B.
3. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 minutes in the range of
. these recorded freeze data param!'lters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
4. Checkfo'r Temporary DTCs orDTCswith the HDS.
Is DTC P0339 and/or P0389indicate.d?
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for. poor connections or loose terminals
at CKp'sensQr AlB and thePCM .
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these
connectors and terminals:
CKP sensor AlB
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect the connectors or terminals, then
goto step 9.

6. Check for damage to the CKP sensor AlB pulse
plate on the timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25).
Is there damage?
YES-Replace the CKP sensor AlB pulse plate/
timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25), then go to
step 9.
NO-Go to step
8. Replace CKP sensor AlB (see page 11-242).
10. Reset the PCM with the HDS .
these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
15. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCs with the HDS.
terminals at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
BACK
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor No Signal
Is OTe P0340 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the CMP sensor and the PCM .
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).
8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP
sensor and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1), then go to step 18.
CMPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP
sensor and G 1 01, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-137
BACK
PGM-FI System
terminal 846 and CMP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.1.
A
1 1213
iCMP(YEl)
Ir II
11 2 3 4L6J6J7 8 9 ~ 1 0 J
Q
111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24
><1261>< 26 VI VI
129 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
140 41 42 /144I46J46
L lLJLL
I CMP(YEl)
YES-Go to step 15.
(846) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
11-138
15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P
CMPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
=
(846) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 26.
17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-242).
BACK
terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If thePCM was
11-139
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe P0344: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
YES-Go to step 5.
at the CMP sensor and the PCM .
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these
connectors and terminals:
CMPsensor
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect or repair the connectors or
terminals, then go to step 9.
11-140
6. Check for damage to the CMP sensor pulse
projection on the front camshaft pulley (see page
11-242).
Is there damage?
YES-Replace the front camshaft pulley (see page
NO.....,Goto step 7.
8. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-242).
9. Tum the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Test.drivethevehicle for 10 minutes in the range of
. ENGINE SPEED '.
VSS
15. Check fOT Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
BACK
DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control
System Performance Problem
and any n ~ b o r d snapshot, and review the general
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than
P050A indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the
intake air duct.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 20.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove
the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 'f (50 'C) or less.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
YES-Go to step 10.
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
VALVE normal?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366),
then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-141
BACK
PGM-FI System
12. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED inthe DATA LI ST with
the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds.
13. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS;
Is there about 8 ~ 1 2 gmls or about 1.70 V?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
15. -Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).-
18. Note the value of IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
19. Compare the value ofthe IAT SENSOR and the
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 OF
(3C) or more?
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IATsensor
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the
throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363), then go to step 20.
If there is damage in the throttle bore, replace the
throttle body (see page 11-366), then go to step 20.
1 is 122"F (50 "C) or less.
24. Check forTemporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
IsDTC P050A indicated?
terminals atthe throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated instep 24,
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go
to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates EXECUTING, let
the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 20.
BACK
DTe P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing
Performance Problem
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than
P050B indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the
intake air duct.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 25.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Isit OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove
the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Letthe engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
YES-Go to step 10.
Is the ignition timing OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-242) and the timing belt drive pulley (see page
6-25).
Is the CKP sensor and/or the CKP sensor pulser
plate damaged?
YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-242)
and/or the timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25),
then go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 31.
(cont'd)
11-143
BACK
PGM-FI System
12. Oothe ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HOS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
VALVE normal?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366),
then go to step 25.
14. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with
the HOS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds.
15. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HOS.
Is there about 9.8 -12 gm/s or about 170 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
17. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
18. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
19. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
21. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them
on the engine.
23. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HOS.
11-144
24. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 OF (3C)
from the ambient temperature?
YES- Replace the sensor that differed more than
5.4"F (3 "C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 25.
NO-Check and repair any problems with the
following items, then go to step 25.
Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
VTEC system
Engine oil
AlC system
Power steering
27. Letthe engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
2, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 30.
BACK
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B inthe
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. Ifthe screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go.to step 27 ..
1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute
a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
32. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 35.
35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
TemporaryDTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 34,
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 32. Ifthe PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 32.
11-145
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTe P0562: Charging System Low Voltage
NOTE:
If any high currenHoad accessories are installed, this
DTC can be set.
If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
4. Check under these conditions:
NCon
Temperature control at maximum cool
Blower fan at maximum speed
Headlights on high beam
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
Is orc P0562 indicated?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), then
goto step 7.
at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-76) .
11-146
NCon
neutral) for 1 minute.
terminals at the alternator and the main under-
hood fuse box, then go to step 1.
BACK
DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit
Unexpected Voltage
4. Wait 10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 7.
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main relay 1)
and the No. SIGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the PCM .
S. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
10. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
A6 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A I49PI
MRLYIGRNI
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 11.
connector.
(cont'd)
11-147
BACK
System
MRLV (GRN)
Q
=
Terminal side offemaleterminals
(A6) and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main
relay 1), then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 18.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).
11-148
14. Disconnect PCM connectorS (49P).
83 and bo'dy.ground.
llGP (VEL/BLK)

J 1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9110 I.
l11 1213 1920 211
122 2324
><J25/.>< 26 VI VI,
129 30 31 32133134135136 3736
39
1
140 41 42
JLl44 J 45J 46 IL JLJL1
'Y
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 18.
16. Disconnectthe under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
connector.
BACK
83 and body ground.
/s there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the PCM (83) and under-hood fuse/relay box
(PGM-FI main relay 1), then go to step 19 ..
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 in the under-hood fuse/
relay box (see page 22-77)
/s PGM-F/ main relay 10K?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace relay control module (under-hood
23. Wait 10 seconds.
terminals at under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
terminals at under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
11-149
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P0602: PCM Programming Error
NOTE:
This DTC is indicated when a PCM update is not
completed.
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while' updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before
completion, the PCM can be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (see. page 11-7).
YES-Replace the original PCM (see.page 11-244).

NO-The update is complete .
1 1 ~ 1 5
OTC P060A: PCM (AfT system) Internal
Control Module Malfunction
Is DTC P060A indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
Is DTC P060A indicated?
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NQ-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
BACK
Dle P0615:Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit
Malfunction
Is DTe P0615 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM .
6. Check the STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
dash fuse holder 2.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2, then go to step
12.
9. Remove starter cut relay 1 (A) from auxiliary
under-dash relay box A.
A
10. Connect starter cut relay 1 4P connector terminal
No.2 to body ground with ajumper wire.
STARTER CUT RELA V 1 4P CONNECTOR
=
(cont'd)
11-151
BACK
PGM-FI System
PCM CONNECTOR A (49PI
YES-Go to step 17.
STRLD
(PNKI
.Q
(A28) and starter cut relay 1, then go to step 12.
terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
11-152
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the peM, then
go to step 1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
BACK
DTC P062F: PCM Internal Control Module
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
Is DTC P062F indicated?
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
.. !'a
DTC P0630:NIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 ~ 3 .
This DTC is stored only when the PCM does not have
the VIN information olthe vehicle. Use the HDS to
input the missing VIN information,
1. Turn the ignition switch ON '(II).
2. Check the VIN with the HDS.
Does theHDS show the vehicle's VIN?
YES-Go to step 5. .j
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN to the PCM with'the HDS.
Does the screen show COMPLETE?" ,
YES-Go to step 5.:
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for P062F (see page
11-153) .
NO-Go to step 9.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 5 seconds.
(cont'd)
11,-153
BACK
YES-Go to step.9.
NO-Intermittent failure, the'system is OK at this
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting .
9. Update the PCM if it'does not have.the latest "
good PCM (see page 11-8k
YES-If the PCM was updated; substitute a known-
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other '
indicated DTC's troubleshooting
~ 5 4
BACK
DTC P0685: PCM Power Control Circuit!
Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 11"3) .
If the problem does not return after clearing the DTC,
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
terminals at the IGP line connectors before you
replace the PCM.
YES-Go to step 4.
troubleshooting .
software {see page 11-7), or substitute a.known-
DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of
Range High
YES-Go to step 4.
troubleshooting .
11-155
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
NOTE:
If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P1116.
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same
time?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
HDS.
Is about 129 OF (54C) or less, or 1.54 V or more
indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239), then
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
11-156
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239) .
9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature .
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do
not install it on the engine.
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5,4 OF
(3C) or more?
go to step 27.
BACK
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA-LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 118 of (48C) or less, or 1.75 V or more
indicated? -
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS.
Is about 131F (55 OC) or less, or 1.50 V or more
indicated?
YES-Replace ECTsensor 2 (see page 11-239), then
go to step 27:
NO-Go to step 19.
21. Remove ECTsensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
on the engine.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1, and ECT
SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
26. Compare thevalue of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
SENSOR 2and the ambienttemperature,
individually.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 of
(3 OC) from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensorthafdiffered mbrethan
5.4 (3 'C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.
time. Check for poor connections'or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then
reconnect all connectors, and refill the cooling
system (see page 10-6) .
27; Turn the ignition switch ON (IIY;
terminals at ECT se'nsor1,ECT sensor2, and the
TemporaryDT.cs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
11-157
BACK
System
OTe P1128: MAP S-ensor Signal Lower Than
Expected,
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the generaL
troubleshooting information, (see page 11-3).,
1. Inspect the air cleaner element (see page 11-364).
Is it OK?,
YES':""'"Go to step 2.,
NO-Clean or replace the air cleaner element
(see page 11-364) .
. - ].'
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).,
3. Check the MAP'SENSOR inthe DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there less thar154.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406mmHg)
or 1.61 V held for more than 5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 4.
3,000.rpm without load On Park or, neutral) until the
fan come's on, then let it idle.
Engine- coolant temperature (ECr SENSOR 1)
above 158 'f (70i "C), !
Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm
Vehicle speed accelerated from 16-31 mph
(25-50 km/h) under halfthrottle
YES-Go to step 8.
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
11-158
radiatorfan comes on, then let it idle.
above 158 'f (70 "C)
" Transmission in D position
Vehicle speed accelerated from 16-31 mph
(25-50 km/h) under halfthrottle
, terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 16.
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
BACK
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher than
Expected
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Are there any vacuum leaks?
YES-Repair or replace the part(s) with vacuum
leaks, then go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 2.
HDS.
Is there more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg,
277 mmHg) or 1.14 V held for more than
5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Drive at a steady speed between 55-75 mph
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 2 seconds.
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC Pl129 in the
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
(cont'd)
11-159
BACK
PGM-FI System
13. Test-drive underthese conditions:
above 158 "F (70 "C)
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
fully closed) for 2 seconds.
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 15.
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
11-160
BACK
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High
NOTE:
Information marked with an asterisk ( 'j applies to the
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P117 4 .
in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
failure, the system is OK at this time, Check for
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
11-240).
11. Check forTemporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
[sDTe P1172 and/or P1174' indicated?
then go to step 1 .
NO-Go to step 12.
screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
11-161
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTe P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS ..
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
at the ELD and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDs.
11-162
=
(A10) and the ELD, then goto step 13.
NO-Go to step 20.
12. Replace the left side engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-24).
18. Turn on the headlights.
BACK
terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
software (see page 11-7), 'or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8). . .
23. Turn on the headlights.
terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM. If the PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 22. If the PCM was
11-163
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al\ freeze data
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
at the ELD and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
6. Measure voltage between ELD 3P connector
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 181G
ACG (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ELD, then go to step 13.
~ 6 4
terminal A10 and ELD 3P connector terminal No.3.
ELD 3P CON!\IECTOR
Terminlll side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
(A10)"and the ELD, then go to step 13.
BACK
11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
ELD 3P CONNECTOR

NDIBLKI
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ELD and
G302, then go to step 13.
12. Replace the left side engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-24).
YES-Go to step 18.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HOS.
terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM. If the PCM
11-165
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage
NOTE:
If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
AlC switch off
Headlights off
neutral) 1 minute.
Is DrC P1549 indicated?
goto step 7.
at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse
box .
AlC switch off
Headlights off
neutral) 1 minute.
11-166
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCswith the HDS.
terminals at the alternator and the main under-
hood fuse box, then go to step 1.
BACK
DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit:
Low Voltage
AlC switch on
neutral) 1 minute:
6. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P16BB indicated?:
YES-Go to step 7.
at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box,
and check the battery periqrmance (see page
22-76) .
the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box
(+B line).
YES-Go to step 8.
step 9.
... r.
8. Check for an open in the wire betweeAthe .
alternator and main under:hood fuse box at the
starter subharness.
Is the harness OK?
go to.step 9.
alternator and the main under-hood 'fuse box, then
go to step 9.
AlC switch on
'/ ..
neutral) 1 ,
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
terminals at the alternator and the main"under-
hood fuse box, then go to step 1 .
. Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, goto the
11-167
BACK
'"
OTC P16BC:Alternator FR Terminal Circuit!
IGP Circuit Low Voltage
1. Check for poor connections at the alternator 4P
connector.
Are the connectionsOK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 18.
AlC switch on
neutral) 1 minute.
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
YES-Go to step ,8.
time. Check for poor .connections or loose terminals
at the alternator ... '.
11-168
11. Measure voltage between alternator 4Pconnector
IG1.
(BLK/YE l) r-'-1--.--'2--'
3 4
YES-Go to step 12.
alternator (lG1 line) and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse
in under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 17 .
12. Measure voltage between. alternator 4P connector
1 2 ALTF
3 4 (WHT/RED)
=
Is there about 5 V?
go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 13.
BACK
16. Check for continuity between alternator 4P
connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal C44.
II
1 2
3
4
I ALTF (WHT/REDI
Ir II
111 2 3 4151617 8 19110 I
Q
111 12V V115116117118 19201211
V V 24><.1251>< 26271281
IV IV IV 32133I34VV 37361391
140 41 42 43144 45146 471461491
I ALTF (WHT/REDI
YES-Go to step 25.
(C44) and the alternator, then go to step 17.
AlC switch on
neutral) 1 minute.
terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
(cont'd)
11-169
BACK
PGM-FI System
AlC switch on
neutral) 1 minute.
terminals at the alternator and the PCM. If the PCM
complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
11-170
BACK
DTC P16BD: Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction
troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ~
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS and wait 5 seconds.
Is OTe P16BO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
at starter cut relay 2 and the PCM .
4. Replace starter cut relay 2.
Is OTe P16BO indicated?
go to step 1.
DTC P16BE: Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction
Is OTe P16BE indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM .
4. Replace starter cut relay 1.
7. Check for Temporary OTCs or DTCs with the HOS.
Is OTe P16BE indicated?
go to step 1.
11-171
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTe P16BF: Starter CutRelay STRLY Circuit
Malfunction
Is DTC P16BF indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM .
5. Jump the SCS line with the HOS.
6. Remove starter cut relay 1 and starter cut relay 2.
7. Oisconnect PCM connector A (49P).
STRL V (L T GRN)
Q
=
(A3) and starter cut relay 1 or starter cut relay 2,
then go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 14.
11-172
terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2,
a nd the PCM, then go to step 1.
. terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2,
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the PCM was
11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
BACK
DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
NOTE:
Before y.ou troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
P2183.
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES-Go to step 2.
step 27.
time?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
HDS.
Is about 131F (55 "C) or less, or 1.50 V or more
indicated?
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
not install it on the engine.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS .
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 OF (3 "C) or
more?
go to step 27.
HDS.
Is about 118F (48C) or less, or 1.75 V or more
indicated? -;
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Letthe engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS.
Is about 131F (55 C) or less, or 1.50 V or more
indicated?
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
11-173
BACK
PGM .. FI System
21. Remove ECTsensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT
sensor 2 (seepage 1.1-239) ..
on the engine.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 arid ECT
SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensor differ more than 5.4 OF
(3C) from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than
5.4 (3 "C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then
reconnect all connectors, and refill the cooling
system (see page 10-6) ..
11-174
BACK
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage
HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT
sensor 2 and the PCM (A21), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
step 1.
(cont'd)
11-175
BACK
PGM-FI System
substituted, go.to step 1.
11-176
BACK
OTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High
Voltage
HDS.
Is about -40 of (-40C) or less, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure; the system is OK at this
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No.1

ECT2 (BLU) U SG4 (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
HDS.
Is about - 40 OF ( -40C) or less, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P
connector.
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-177
BACK
PGM-FI System
terminal A27 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector
terminal No.2.
YES-Go to step 27.
(A27) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
11-178
terminal A21 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector
terminal No.1.
YES-Go to step 27.
(A21) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
BACK
terminals at ECT sensor 2 andthe PCM, then go to
step 1.
terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
11-179
BACK
P G M ~ I System
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
NOTE:
If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel, and clear the DTC
with the HDS.
If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176 or a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138 or
P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time as DTC
P2195 (P2197)', troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
recheck for DTC P2195 (P2197)'.
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the AlF sensor loose or disconnected from the
exhaust pipe?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 2.
4. Start the engine, then let it idle.
then go to step 13.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .
11-180
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-240).
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS;
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 12.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. III
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
BACK
13. Update the PCM if it does not:have the latest
14. Start the engine, then let it idle for 2 minutes.
'-'.'
Is DTe P2195 and/or P2197* indicated?
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known"good
PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 14. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 16.
P2197" in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
NOTE:
If DTC POl 07, P0108, Pl128, and/or Pl129 are stored
at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about
2.9 Vat sea level indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
PCM, replace the originalPCM (see page 11-244) .
Engine coolanttemperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 1= (70 OC)
Throttle position between 17 degrees and
33 degrees for 3 seconds
time .
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 7. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
5.
(cont'd)
11-.181
BACK
PGM-F'I System
7. Check the condition of the air cleaner element.
Is the air cleaner element OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the air cleaner element (see page
11-364),
good PCM (see page 11-8),
above 158 'f (70 "C)
'. Transmission in 0 position
Throttle position between 17 degrees and
33 degrees for 3 seconds
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 11.lfthe
PCM was substituted, goto step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
11-182
14. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
BACK
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record'alUreeze data
troubleshooti'ng information (see page 11-3).
the HDS.
Is about 53 kPa (15.6in):'g,397 mmHg), or 1.58 V
or less indicated? C
YES-Go to 3.
time .
3. Update the PCM if itdoes not have the latest
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted in step 3, go to
step 1.
complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
troubleshooting .
DTC P2229: BARD Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data'
the HDS.
4.49 V, or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
time .
software (see page or substitute a known- .
YES-Check for poor connections ,or loose
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, .
recheck. If the PCM was substituted in step 3, go to
step 1.
. 'complete; If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
troubleshooting .
BACK
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2240: Front AlFSensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check forTempofary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is OTe P2237 and/or P2240' indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .
11-184
6P connector terminal No.5 to and PCM connector
terminal B31(B32)' .
.Q
1 2l(
456
IPB1(GRNI IIIPB2(GRN/REDI*
LLI 2 3 819(101.
111 1213141161161171181920 211
L 22 23 28lL.1LJ
30 31 37 36 391
1140 41141 '144146146I/VVI
IPB1 (GRNII
YES-Go to step 10.
.Q
(B31 (B32)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 14.
BACK
12. Measure voltage between'A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
4
=
Is there about 0.2 V or less?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-240).
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS forDTC P2237 and/or
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting;.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
11-185
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P 3 8 ~ Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage '
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). '
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system. is OK at this
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 'and the PCM .
s. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconne'ct the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector.
11-186
to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
4
=
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-240).
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
P2241 , in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
24, Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or
P2241 , in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
11-187
BACK
PGM-FI System
OlC P2243: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage
OlC P2247: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
Is ore P2243 and/or P2247* indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
S. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11-188
SP connector terminal No.6 and PCM connector
roo--
1 2
V
4 5 6
VCENTB2 (REDIWHT)*I I VCENTB1 (RED)


VCEN TB2 (REDIWHT)* VCENTB1 (RED)
J'
"
J 1 12 41 6 I 6 17 8 I 9110 L
111 12 1 14116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24 Xl26L>< 26 VI VI
I
129 30 31 32133134136136 3738 391
140 I 41 421/144146146 / 1/1/1
'-----'
YES-Go to step 10.
to step 14.
BACK
12. Measure voltage between A!F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)6P CONNECTOR
2
4 5
Y.
=
VCENTB1 (RED)
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)*
Is there about 0.2 V or less?'
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page "
11-240).
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T indicated?
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 'and/or '
P2247 in the DTCsMENU with the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step "8,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshootiAg .
NO-If the r e ~ m indicates FAILED, check for poor
connecti,ons or loose terminals at the A/F sensor,
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
until a result comes on. ' "
21. Reconnect all connectors.,
22. Upclate the PCM ifitdoes,not have the latest
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T indicated?
terminalsatthe A/Fsensor (Sensor 1)and the PCM.
If the PCMwas updated, substitute a known-good
NO-Go to step 24.
24. MonitortheOBD STATUSforiDTC P2243 and/or
P224T in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
1,1'-189
BACK
<I'.
8GM-FI System
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: '
front bank (Bank 2);' , "
2. Clear the DTC with the'HDS ..
3. Start the engine. Hold the 'engine speed at
radiator fan comes on,thenlet it idle 2 minutes.
IsDTC P2245 andlorP2249* indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittentfailure"thesystem is OK atthis
time. Check for poor connections or: loose terminals
attheA/F sensor (Sensor1tand the PCM .
7. Disconnect the AlF sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
ii,
11,'-190
VCENTB1 (RED)
=
Q
=
(B15 (B24) ') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
connectorterminal No.6 and body ground.
1 2
456
"Y
=
VCENTB1 (RED)
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (seepage
11-240).
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
P2249' in the DTCsMENU with h HDS.
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
11-191
BACK
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 is stored at the same time
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154 0, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154 '.
Information marked with an asterisk ( 0) applies to the
Is DTe P2251 and/or P2254' indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
11-192
r--
1 2
V
4 5 6
VSB1 (BLU) I I VSB2 (RED/BLU)


VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
Ilf "11
J 1 I 2 3 4161617 8 9jWI.
111 12 131 4116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24 ><1261>< 26 Vi VI
129 30 31 32133(34136136 3736 391
140 1 41 42 VI44I46I46 V 'VVI

YES-Go to step 10.
to step 14.
BACK
3,000 rpm without load (in .Park or neutral) until the
1 2
456
VSB1 (BLUI
VSB2 (RED/BLUI*
':i..
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step .13.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor1) (see page 11-240).
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 indicated?
NO-Go to step 24.
11-193
BACK
PGM-FI System
Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)
III
-II
U1 2 3 4161617 8 I 9 110 I
111 1213 14116116117J18 1920 21J
122 2324
><1261>< 28V VI
129 30 31 32133134136136 3738 391
1140 41 42 1/144146148 1/ 1/1/1
.Q .Q
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side offemale terminals
radiator fan comes on, then let it idJe 2 minutes.
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255" indicated?
YES-Go to. step 5.
11-194
to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
2
456
VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
'Y.
=
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-240).
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255" indicated?
terminals atthe A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
NO-Go to step 24.
11-195
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe P2270: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
DTe P2271: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
DTe P2272: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
DTe P2273: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (seepage 11-3).
above 158 'f (70 "C)
(56-88 km/h)
P2272 , , and/or P2273 , in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
11-241).
11-196
above 158 "F (70 "C)
(56-88 km/h)
13. Check for Temporary DTCsorDTCs with the HDS.
Is DTe P2270, P2271, P2272', and/or P227S'
indicated?
terminals atthe secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
NO-Go to step 14.
P2272', and/or P2273' in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
go to the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .
BACK
DTC P2610: PCM Internal Power Off Timer
Malfunction
YES-Go to step 4.
troubleshooting .
11-197
BACK
PG.M-FI System
DTC P2AOO: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
NOTE:
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Vehicle speed between 25-55 mph (40-
88 km/h) for 5 minutes.
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) for 4 seconds.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AOO and/or
P2A03 in the DTCs MEN U with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate FA/LED?
YES-Go to step 6.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If it is EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. Ifthe screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
recheck.
11-198
11-240).
10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311) .
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Vehicle speed between 25-55 mph (40-
88 km/h) for 5 minutes.
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) for 4 seconds.
/s DTe P2AOO and/or P2AOS' indicated?
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AOO and/or
P2A03 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
BACK
DTC U0028: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
Is DTC U0028 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
NO-If the PCM was updated, troobleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, g(jto the
11-199
BACK
-'.,,;,:
System
OTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-
SH-AWD Control Unit)
NOTE:
If DTC U0028 is stored at the same time as DTC
U0114, troubleshoot DTC U0028 first, then recheck
for DTC U0114.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module, the SH-AWD control
unit, and the PCM .
4. Check for DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Is SH-AWD system DTC 41 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 8.
6. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector.
11-200
7 . Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
20P connector terminals No.1 0 and No. 20' .
SH-AWDCONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71), then go to step 15 and
recheck. If DTC U0114 is not indicated, replacethe
original SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71), then
go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in thewire between the SH-AWD
control unit (No. 10 (No. 20)") and the PCM (A48
(A49)'), then go to step 15.
*: CANL line
8. Check for a poor connections at the SH-AWD
control unit 20P connector and 8P connector.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 15.
BACK
12. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit 20P
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check the No. 20 SVTM-4, ARC, ODS (7.5 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is
OK, repair open in the wire between the No. 20
STVM-4, ARC, ODS (7.5 A) fuse and the SH-AWD
control unit, then go to step 15.
14. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
20P connector terminals No.9 and body ground,
and between SH-AWDcontrol unit 8P connector
terminal No.2 and No.3 and body ground
individually.
=
Q
YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71), then go to step 15 and
recheck. If DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the
original SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71), then
go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD
control unit and body ground (G603), then go to
step 15.
(cont'd)
11-201
BACK
PGM-FI System
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs in the OTCs
MENU with the HOS.
terminals at the gauge control module, the
SH-AWO control unit, and the PCM, then go to step
1.
Temporary OTCs or OTCs indicated, go to the
11-202 BACK
DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA
Modulator-Control Unit)
NOTE:
If OTC U0028 is stored at the same time as OTC
U0122, troubleshoot OTC U0028 first, then recheck
for OTC U0122.
Is orc U0122 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module, the VSA modulator-
control unit, and the PCM .
4. Check for OTCs.in the OTCs MENU with the HOS.
Is VSA orc 86 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 8.
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminals No. 38' and
No. 39.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
e 8 101112 16
282980 383940
YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-102), then go to step 15
and recheck. If OTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit (No. 39 (No. 38)') and the
PCM (A48 (A49)'), then go to step 15.
*: CANL line
8. Check for a poor connection at the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connection(s), then go to step 15.
(cont'd)
11-203
BACK
P G M ~ I System
10. Oisconnectthe VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
12. Measure voltage between VSA modulator-control
unit 46P connector terminal No. 40 and body
ground.
8 8 10 II 12 16
2120 8888
IG1 (ORN)
':i.
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check the No. 29 VSA (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between the No. 29 VSA (10 A) fuse and
the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to step 15.
11-204
14. Check for contim.iitybetween VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminals No. 43 and
No. 46 and body ground.
control unit (see page 19-102), then go to step 15
and recheck. If OTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
modulator-control unit and body ground (G303),
then go to step 15.
15. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs in the OTCs
MENU with the HOS.
Is OTe U0122 indicated?
terminals atthe gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
BACK
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge
Control Module)
YES-Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module and the PCM .
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
Is DTC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-334) .
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-337).
8. Disconnect gauge control module connector A
(12P).
10. Connect gauge control module connector terminal
A 12 to body ground with a jumper wire.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)
CANH(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
terminal A48 and.body ground.
YES,-Go to step 12.
(A48) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
(cont'd)
11-205
BACK
PGM-FI System
12. Connect gauge control module connector terminal
A6 to body ground with a jumperwire.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR 'A (12P)
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
Tetminal side of female terminals
YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control
module (see page 22-337), then go to step 14 and
recheck. If DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace the
original gauge controlrhodule (see
then go to step 14.
(A49) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
11,-206
Is OTe U0155 indicated?
terminals at the gauge control module and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
BACK
DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and AfT System
Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before
completion, the PCM will be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (PGM-FI system)
(see page 11-7).
2. Do the PCM update procedure (AfT system)
(see page 14-8).
3. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs withthe HOS.
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .

NO-The update is complete .
11-207
BACK
PG;M-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1)
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies
to the CANL line.
3. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P), then disconnect
the HDS.
4. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals A48 and A49.
Is there about 333- 408 Q ?
YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (Part 2)
NO-Go to step 5.
(12P) (see page 22-337).
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page
24-152).
11-208
8 .. Disconnect the TPMS unit 20P connector (see page
18-162).
9. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-100).
10. Disconnect the.steering angle sensor 5P connector
(see page 19-99).
11. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
(see page 15-71).
12. With active damper system: Disconnect the active
damper control unit 14P connector (see page
18-118).
13. With AcuraLink: Disconnect the AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) (seepage
23-96).
.. terminals A48 and A49.
YES-Repair short in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A48 and A49' .
NO-Go to step 15.
BACK
15. Connect PCM connector terminal A48 to body
. ground with a jumper wire.
CANH(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
=
16. Check for continuity between gauge control
module connector terminal A 12 and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 17.
(A48) and the gauge control module .
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 39 and
body ground.
CANH(WHT)
.Q
=
YES-Go to step 18.
(A48) and the VSA modulator-control unit .
18. Check for cdntinuity between SRS unit connector
terminal A 11 and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
CANH ~ ~ ~ ; : J
(WHT) b
.Q
YES-Go to step 19.
(A48) and the SRS unit .
(cont'd)
11-209
BACK
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1) (cont'd)
19. Check.for continuity between TPMS control unit
20Pconnector terminal No.1 and body ground.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
Q
=
YES-Go to step 20.
(A48) and the TPMS control unit .
20. Check for continuity between yaw rate-Iateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector
ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 21.
(A48) and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor .
11-210
21. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 22.
(A48) and the steering angle sensor .
BACK
20P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
Q
=
YES-
With active damper system: Go to step 23.
Without active damper system: Go to step 24.
(A48) and the SH-AWD control unit .
23. Check for continuity between active damper control
unit 14P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR B (14P)
Q
=
YES-
With AcuraLink: Go to step 24.
Without AcuraLink: Go to step 25.
(A48) and active damper control unit .
24. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector terminal A6 and body
ground.
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR A (20P)

1 2 3 4
V
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Q
=
YES-Go to step 25.
(A48) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .
(cont'd)
11-211
BACK
PGM-FI System
25. Remove the jumper wire from PCM connector A
(49P).
26. Connect PCM connector terminal A49 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
CANL(RED)
JUMPER WIRE
=
module connector terminal A6 and body ground.
Q
=
YES-Go to step 28.
(49P) and the gauge control module .
11-212
control unit 46P connector terminal No .. 38 and
body ground.
16
888840
CANL(RED)
=
YES--:Go to step. 29.
(46P) and the VSA modulator-control unit. III
29. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector
terminal A12and body ground.
Q
=
CANL(RED)
YES-Go to step 30.
(49P) and the SRS unit..
BACK
30. Check for continuity between TPMScontrol unit
=
YES-Go to step 31.
(A49) and the TPMS control unit .
31. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral!
CANL (RED)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 32.
(A49) and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
.riiJ
, ;'
32. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 33.
(A49) and the steering angle sensor .
(cont'd)
11-213
BACK
PGM-FI System
20P connector tElrminal No. 20 and body ground.
, SH-AWD CONTROL IJNIT 20P ,CONNECTOR
CANL(RED)
=
YES-
With active damper system: Go to step 34.
Without active damper system: Go to step 35.
(A49) and the SH-AWD control unit .
unit 14P connector terminal No.8 and body ground.
CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-
(A49) and active damper control unit .
11-214
35. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector terminal A16 and
body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
.----.
1 2 3 .4
V
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CANLIREDI
=
YES-Go to step 36.
(A49) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .
BACK
36. Reconnect the gauge control module 12P connector.
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?
YES-Go to step 38.-
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control
module (see page 22-337). If the HDS identifies the
, vehicle, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-337) . ,-
(12P).
connector.
40. Measure betwean PCM connector
terminals A48 and A49. '
Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ? ,
YES-Go to step 41.
a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit(see page 19-102).lfthe HDS identifies
the ve/)icle"replace the original VSA modulator-
control unit(see page 19-102) .
connector.
42. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
(cont'd)
"'-215
BACK
P G M ~ I System
. Terminal side of female terminals
Is there about 2.34-2.86kQ?
YES-Go to step 44.
NO-Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page
24-152). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace
the original SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
11-216
44. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
45. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20Pconnector.
terminals A48 and A49 ..
Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ?
YES-Go to step 47 . , .
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-162). Ifthe HDS identifies the vehicle,
replace the original TPMS control unit (see page
18-162);.
BACK
47. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
48. Reconnect SH-AWD control unit 20P connector;
Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ?
YES-Go to step 50.
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71). If the HDS identifies the
vehicle, replace the original SH-AWD control unit
(see page 15-71) ..
51. Reconnectthe active damper control unit14P
connector.
Is thereabout 2.34-2.86 kQ?
YES-Go to step 53.
NO-Substitute a known-good active damper
control unit (see page 18-118). Ifthe HDS identifies
the vehicle, replace the original active damper
control unit (see page 18-118) .
(cont'd)
11-217
BACK
','
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part
1) (cont'd)
53. Disconnect the active damper control unit 14P
connector.
54. Reconnect Acur'aLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector A (20P).
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?
NO-Substitute a known-good AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-96). Ifthe HDS
identifies the vehicle, replace the original
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) (see page
23-96) .
11-218
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part
2)
1. Disconnect the gauge control module connector A
(12P) (see page 22-337).
3. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page
24-152).
4. Disconnect. TPMS control unit connector A (20P)
(see page 18-162).
acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-100).
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector
(see page 19-99).
7. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector A
(20P) (see page 15-71).
8. With active damper system: Disconnect the active
damper control unit 14P connector (see page
18-118).
9. With AcuraLink: Disconnect the AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) (see page
23-96).
BACK
=
YES-Repair short in the wire betweenPCM
connector terminal A48 and the gauge control
module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS
unit, the TPMS control unit, the yaw rate-Iateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor, the steering angle
sensor, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper
control unit (with active damper system), the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver (with
AcuraLink)) or the DLC .
NO-Go to step 11.
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A49 and the gauge control
module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS
unit, the TPMS control unit, the yaw rate-Iateral/
,Iongitudinal'acceleration sensor, the steering angle
sensor, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper
control unit (with active damper system), the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver (with
AcuraLink)) or the DLC .
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
11-219
BACK
PGM-FI System
13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
(12P).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HOS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-337) .
NO-Go to step 16.
17. Reconnect gauge control module connector A (12P).
connector.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Go to step 20.
connector.
22. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
NO-Go to step 24.
1 1 ~ 2 2
25. Reconnect the SRS unit connector A (28P).
26. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector A (20P).
YES-Replace TPMS control unit (see page 18-162).

NO-Go to step 28.
29. Reconnect the TPMS control unit connector A (28P).
acceleration sensor 4P connector.
BACK
31. Turn the ignition sWitch'ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify I ] e vehic'e?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (see page 19-100) .
NO-Go to step 32.
33. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
34. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page
19-99).
NO-Go to step 36.
36. Turn the ignition switch OFF;
37. Reconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
(20P)
YES-Replace the SH-AWD control unit (see page
15-71) .
NO-Go to step 40.
41. Reconnect the SH-AWD 'control unit 20P connector.
42. Disconnect the active damper control unit 14P
connector.
Odes the HDS identify the vehicle?
YES--Replace the ,active damper control unit
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 44.
45. Reconnect the active damper control unit.
46. Disconnect AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector A (20P).
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? "
YES-Replace the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .
NO-Update the PCM if it does not havethe'latest
1 1 ~ 2 2 1
BACK
.,
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll) ...
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-315).
Does the MIL indicator flash?
YES-Go to step 3;' .
module, and recheck. Ifthe MIL circuit is OK,
replace the original.gauge control module .
(see page 22-337) .
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see,page 11-3),
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LlSTwith.the HDS.
Is a short. indicated?
YES-.Go to step 5; ,.
software or substitute a known-
6. Disconnect PCM connector A (.49P), then disconnect
the HDS.

=
(A32) and the SRS unit, theDLC .
BACK
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure the HDS and the DLC cable of the
HDS is normal.
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to
the DLC.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 21.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
system with the HDS ...
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the SRS
indicator.
Does the SRS indicator stay on?
YES-Go to the SRS system's general
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA
indicator.
Does the VSA indicator stay on?
YES-Go to the VSA system's general
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
immobilizer indicator.
Does the immobifizer indicator stay on or flash?
YES-Go to the immobilizer system's
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator stay on?
YES-Go to the SH-AWD system's general
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-223
BACK
PGM-FI System
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
22-315) to make sure the gauge is known-good. If
the function test is OK, go to step 14.
14. Check for 8-CAN system DTCs without the HDS
(see page 22-81).
Are any 8-CAN DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 15.
17. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7
and body ground.
.Q
=
Is there 5 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 19.
~ 2 2 4
18. Continue to check for continuity between DLC
terminal No.7 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
SRS unit connector A (28P)
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
Audio unit 17P connector
SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
Active damper control unit 14P connector
TPMS control unit 20P connector
MICU connector P (30P)
Does continuity go away when one of the above
components is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it
was disconnected .
NO-Repair short in the wire between the DLC (K-
line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, the
immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, the
SH-AWD control unit, the active damper control
unit, or the TPMS control unit .
BACK
19. Connect DLC terminal No.7 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE
=
20. Check for continuity between body ground and
these connector terminals:
Connector Terminal
SRS unit A (28P) No. 24 (L T BLU)
VSA modulator-control unit No. 15 (LTBLU)
46P
Immobilizer-keyless control No.5 (L T BLU)
unit 7P
Audio unit 17P No.6 (L T BLU)
SH-AWD control unit 20P No.5 (L T BLU)
Active damper control unit No.3 (L T BLU)
14P
TPMS control unit 20P No.7 (L T BLU)
MICU 30P No.6 (L T BLU)
Is there continuity between the DLC terminal and
each of the terminals in the chart?
YES-Replace the unit that does not communicate
with the HDS .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the DLC (K-
line) and the appropriate connector .
22-315) to make sure the gauge is known-good. If
the function test is OK, go to step 22.
22. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS
(see page 22-81).
YES-Go to step 35.
NO-Go to step 23.
25. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 16 and the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box .
(confd)
11-225
BACK
PGM-FI System
26. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.4 and
No. 16.
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No.4 and G503 .
27. Connectthe HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
31. Connect DLC terminal No.6 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE
=
11-226
=
YES-Go to step 33.
(A48) and DLC terminal No.6 .
33. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE
=
BACK
=
(A49) and DLCterminal No. 14 .
35. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-208) .
NO-Go to step 36.
37. Check the No. 31G1 MAIN (50 A) fuse in the main
under-hood fuse box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the No.3
IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the
wire is OK, go to step 38.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the No. 31G1
MAIN (50 A) fuse and the main under-hood fuse
box. Also replace the No. 31G1 MAIN (50 A) fuse .
(cont'd)
11-227
BACK
PGM-FI System
38. Inspect the No.8 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 39.
39. Remove the blown No. 81GP (15 A) fuse from the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
terminal 83 and body ground.
IGP (YEL/BLK)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 43.
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).
Also replace the No. 81GP (15 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box .
11 .. 228
43. Disconnect each of the components or connectors
below, one at a time, and check for continuity
between PCM connector terminal 83 and body
ground. '
PGM-FI main relay 2
Each injector 2P connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensOr 3P connector
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 6P connector
Under-hood fuse/relay box 9P connector
YES- Replace the component that made the short
to body ground go away when disconnected. If the
item is the PCM, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244). Also replace the No. 81GP (15 A) fuse .
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (83)
and the PGM-FI mainrelay 2, the injector, the CKP
sensor, or the under-hood huse/relay box. AlsO
replace the No, 8 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box .
BACK
44. Inspect the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 51.
NO-Go to step 45.
45. Remove the blown No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
=
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and update the PCM
if it does not have the latest software (see page
11-7), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good PCM, replace the original
PCM (see page 11-244) .
49. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-
dash fuse/relay box.
G
(cont'd)
11-229
BACK
PGM-FI System
terminal B42 and body ground.
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the No. 19
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42),
between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and
PGM-FI main relay 2, or between the No. 19 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit.
Also replace the No. 19FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box .
NO-Go to step 51.
52. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P) and B (49P).
11-230
54. Measure voltage between PCM connectorterminal
B42 and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 55.
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42) .
A6 and body ground.
MRLY(GRN)
=
YES-Go to step 59.
NO-Go to step 56.
BACK
57. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box14P
connector.
terminal A6 and under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector terminC!1 No.5.
14P CONNECTOR
Q
MRLY(GRN)
.--or-L-r--'l
4 .5 6
7
YES-
Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A6)
and the under-hood fuse/relay box .
;r,
60. DisconnecUhe under-hood fuse/relay box9P
connector.
61. Check for contin!Jity!:>etyveen PCM connector
terminal 83 and. under-hoodfLise/relay box 9P
connector terminal Nq. 1.
PCM (;ONNECTOR A (49P)
,---------,
Q
,UNDER-HOOD FUSE/REI.A Y BOX 9P CONNECTOR
Wire t;lde'of female terminals
YES-Go to step 62.
NO-Repair open inthe wire between the PCM (83)
and the under-hoc)tHuse/relay box .
62. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 in the under-hood fuse/
relay box (see page 22-77).' ;.. .
"
Is PGM-FI main 10K?
YES-Go to step 63.
fuse/relay box) (see page
(cont'd)
11':'231
BACK
PGM-FI System
64. Checldor continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals A41, B1, B40, B41, C1,
and C41 individually.
PCM CONNEctORS
. , \
A (49P)
Bl49P)
=
C(49P) ",.'
Terminalside of female 'terminals
.' ,
YES-Go to step 65.
(A41, B1, B40, B41, C1, C41) and G101 .
~ 2 3 2
YES-Go to step 66.
NO-Go to step 67.
66. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal B36 and body ground, while
MAP sensor3P connector
Output shaft (co,untershaft) speed sensor 3P
connector
was disconnected .
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B36) and the MAP sensor, the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor .
BACK
=
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES-Go to step 68.
NO-Go to step 69.
connector terminal C12 and body ground, while
EGR valve 6P connector
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P
connector
was disconnected .
(C12) and the EGR valve or the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor .
=
YES-Go to step 70.
NO-Go to step 71.
connector terminal A24 and body ground, while
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
(A24) and APP sensor A..
NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-286) .
(cont'd)
11-233
BACK
PGM-FI System
YES-Go to step 72.
NO-Go to step 73.
connector terminal A25 and body ground, while
disconnecting these connectors one ata time.
APP sensor 6P connector
FTP sensor 3P connector
Does continuity go away when One ofthe above
was disconnected .
(A25) and the APP sensor 8 or the FTP sensor .
11-234
VCC5 (BLU)
YES-Go to step 74.
NO-Go to step 75.
Q
=
connector terminal 818 and body ground, while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector .
(818) and the throttle body .
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366) .
BACK
VCC6
(VEL/BLU)
.Q
=
Terminal side of female termin'als
YES-Go to step 76.
connector terminal C11 and body ground, while
disconnecting the IMT actuator.
(C11) and the IMT actuator .
NO-Replace the IMT actuator (see page 11-365) .
11.;.235
BACK
'! !,
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
A
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (B).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the injector clip (E) from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injectors from the rails.
11-236
BACK
8. Coat the new O-ring (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (8) into the fuel rail (C).
A
B
E
9. Install the injector clip (D).
10. Coat the new injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil.
11. Install the injectors in the injector base.
12. Install the fuel rail mounting bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Connectthe quick-connect fitting (see page 11-340).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
16. Install the intake manifold.
11;.237
BACK
PGM-FI System
MAP Sensor Replacement
2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
A
3. Remove the screw (8).
4. Remove the MAP sensor (C).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (D).
11-238
MAF Sensor IIAT Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnectthe MAF sensor/IAT senor 5P connector
. (A).
A
2. Remove the screw (8).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT senor (C).
BACK
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
3. Remove the main under-hood fuse/relay box.
4. Disconnect the EeT sensor 1 2P connector (A).
c
5. Remove EeT sensor 1 (B).
with a new O-ring (e), then refill the radiator with
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
3. Disconnect the EeT sensor 2' 2P connector (A).
c
4. Remove EeT sensor 2 (B).
with a new O-ring (e), then refill the radiator with
11-239
BACK
PGM-FI System
A/F Sensor Replacement
02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools
93750, or equivalent, commercially available
Front Bank (Bank 2)
1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor 6P connector (A),
then remove the A/F sensor (8).
11-240
Rear Bank(,Bankt)
1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor 6P connector (A),
then remove the rear A/F sensor (8).
B
44Nm
14.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfttl
BACK
Secondary. H02S Replacement
02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools
93750, or equivalent, commercially available
Front Bank (Bank 2)
1. Disconnect the front secondaryH02S 4P connector
(A), then remove the front secondary H02S (8).
B
44Nm
(4.5 kgfm,
33Ibfft)
Rear Bank (Bank 1)
1. Disconnect the rear secondary H02S 4P connector
(A), then remove the rear secondary H02S (8).
11-241
BACK
PGM-FI System
CMP Sensor Replacement
2. Remove the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor
pulse plate) (A).
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
A
92 Nm (9.2 kgf.m, 67 Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (8), then
remove the back cover (C).
4. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover.
~ 4 N m
Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
11-242
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the drive belt, then remove the belt (see page 4-33).
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-11).
3. Remove the upper and lower front covers from the
engine (see page 6-13).
4. Remove the CKP sensor (A) from the oil pump.
BACK
Knock Sensor Replacement
2. Remove the injector rails and the injector base
(see page 9-7).
3. Disconnect the knock sensor 1 P connector (A), then
remove the knock sensor (B).
~ 2 4 3
BACK
PGM-FI System
PCM Replacement
NOTE:
Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software
version.
If you are replacing the PCM after substituting a
known-good PCM, reinstall the original PCM, then do
this procedure.
USA, Canada models: During the procedure, is any
READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail,
note the failure, then continue.
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
DLC circuittroubleshooting (see page 11-223). If
you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip steps 4 through 9,18 through 23, and 26
through 28, and do the following procedures after
replacing the PCM;
USA, Canada models: Replace the engine oil
(see page 8-6) and the engine oil filter (see page
8-7).
USA, Canada models: Replace the ATF (see page
14-266).
USA, Canada models: Clean the throttle body
(see page 11-363).
11-244
4. USA, Canada models: Selectthe PGM-FI system
with the HDS.
5. USA, Canada models: Selectthe INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION
CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this
procedure.
7. usA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE PCM
MENU, then select READ DATA and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE:
USA, Canada models: Doing this step copies
(READS) the engine oil life data from the original
PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into
the newPCM.
USA, Canada models: If READ DATA indicates
FAILED, continue with this procedure.
8. USA, Canada models: Select the NT system with
the HDS.
9. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE TCM/
PCM MENU, then select READ DATA and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE:
USA, Canada models: Doing this step copies
(READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM
so you can later download (WRITES) it into the
newPCM.
USA, Canada models: If READ DATA indicates
FAILED, continue with this procedure.
BACK
line mounting bracket bolt (G). "
connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A=D, B=.6., C=Q) embossed on them for
identification. .
14. Remove the bolts (I), then remove the PCM (J) ..
17. USA, Canada models: Manually input the VIN to
the PCM with the HDS.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not
Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because
the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM;
ignore it, and continue this procedure.
18. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA (engine oil
life) failed in step 7, go to step 21. Otherwise, go to
step 19.
19. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system
with the HDS.
... riiJ
.20., USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE PCM
, MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the WRITE DATA
indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
21. USA, Canada models: Ifthe READ DATA (ATF life)
failed in step 9, go to step 24. Otherwise go to step
22.
22. USA, Canada models: 'Select the AfT SYSTEM with
the HDS.
23. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE TCM/
PCM MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow
the screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the WRITE DATA
indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
24. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.
25. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
26. USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION CHECK
failed in step 6 clean the throttle body (see page
27. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in
step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 20, replace
the engine oil (see page 8-6) and engine oil filter
28. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in
step 9 orthe WRITE DATA failed in step 25, replace
the ATF (see page 14-266), then go to step 29.
29. Select PGM-FI system and reset the PCM with the
HDS.
software (see page 11-7).
11-245
BACK
Eleetftonic Throttle Control System
,I
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-7 .
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION lAPP) SENSOR
Signal Inspection, page 11-286
11-246
ONDER-HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX
Includes:
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL RELAY
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL MODULE
(Contains THROTTLE ACTUATOR and
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR)
ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor ACircuitLow Voltage
NOTE: 8eforeyou troubleshoot, record all freeze data
troubleshooting information(see page 11-3).
3. CheckTP SENSOR A in ,the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
at the throttle body and the PCM .
Are DTC PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector ....
7. Jump theSCS line with the HDS.
9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity,?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (817), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
10. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
11. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No.2 and body ground. ,
THROTTLE BODY6P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
~ 2 4 7
BACK
Ole Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal 818 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.2.
YES,.-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire the throttle

17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).
19. Turn the ignition swiichON (II).
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated,substitute a known-good PCM
BACK
Dle P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High VOltage
2. Clear the DTCwith;the HDS .
3. CheckTP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 4.
at the throttle body and the PCM
Are DTC PO 123 and P0223 indicated at the same
time?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5.
connector tern1inal No.1 and body ground.
Wir.. side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V? .'
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignitiorrswitch OFF.
(cont'd)
11-249
BACK
ElectliQnic Throttle Control System
12. Check for continuity betweenPCM
terminal B1J and throttle.
terminal No.1.
THROTTLE BODY6P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of femaie termirials ..
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire the throttle,
body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 20.
''-250
14 .. DisconneqUhe throttle.pody 6P connector.
16. Disconnect PCM connectorB (49P).
terminal B33 and throttle body 6P connector
terlTlh'lal No . .4.'
/'\.
1 12 31'41 516
I SG5(GRN)
PCM CONNECTORB (49P)
If .1
Q
LI 1 2 3 4161617 819110L
111 1213 14 16116117116 1920 211
122 2324
><1261>< 26 Vi /I
129 3031 32 38134136136 3736 391
1140 41 1144146146 42V 1/ VVI
SG5(GRN)
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM(B33), then go to step 20.
BACK
Is OTC PO 123 indicated?
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM
f
then go
to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any oth.er
substituted, go to t ~ 1.
.i
11-251
BACK
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage
3. CheckTP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
Are Dre PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.
11-252
9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (B26), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
13. Disconnect PCM'connector 8 (49P).
14. Disconnect the throttle 6P connector.
15. Check for continuity betweenPCM connector
terminal No.2.
Terminal side offemaleterminals
YES-Go to step 23.
17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11,366);
18. Reconnect all connectors.'.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). '
21. Dothe RCM idle learn procedure (seepage 11-311).
terminals at the throttle body. and the PCM,then go
to step 1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are go to the
24. Update the PCM if it does not;have the latest
Is DTe;, P0222 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose ., I
11'-253
BACK
Elttctronic Throttle Control System
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) ..
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO..-lntermittent failure, the.system is OK at this
4. Check for Temporary. DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
time?
YES-Go
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the-ignition switch Of;F.
S. Disconnect the throttle body SP connector.
11-254
8. Measure voltage between throttle body SP
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK
terminal No.3.
Q
TPSB (RED/BLUI
YES-Go to step 25.
terminal No.4.
A
112 3141516
.--_____ --', SG5 (GRNI
Q
If "11
.I 1 2 3 4 I 5.1 6 1 7 8 9 110 I.
11111213141151161171181920211
122 23 24 XJ25/X 26/1/1
129130 31 3233134135136 37 36 391
1140 41 42 1/11441451461/ 1/1/1
'--____ --' SG5 (GRNI
YES-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
11-255
BACK
to step 1.
11-256
BACK
DTC P1658: ETCS Control Relay ON
Malfunction
the HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK?
at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS control
relay) and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Test the ETCS control relay in the under-hood fuse/
ETGS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect PCM connectorA (49P).
connector.
=
(A29) and the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
1.1-257
BACK
Electro'nic Throttle Control System
connector.
C4 and body ground.
=
YES-Repair short to powerinthe wire between
the PCM (C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box
(ETCS control relay), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 19.
11-258
terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
BACK
OTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF
Malfunction
Is DrG P1659 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS control
relay) and the PCM .
5. Check the No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
(DBW+) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 14.
6. Test the ETCS control relay in the under-hood fuse/
Is the ErGS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
connector.
(cont'd)
11-259
BACK
relay box 9P connector terminal No.7 and PCM
connector terminal C4.
Q
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX 9P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C4)
and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step
21.
11-260
12. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector.
relay box 14P connector terminal No. 14 and PCM
PCM CONNECTOR A. (49P)
ETCSRL Y (BLU)
14P CONNECTOR
7
. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 27.
Q
step 21.
BACK
connector.
=
(C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to
step 21.
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P connector,
and replace the No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL (DBW+) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
C4 and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the right side engine compartment
wire harness. Also replace the No. 10 THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL (DBW+) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.
20 .. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
11-261
BACK
terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
PCM, then goto step 1.
terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute' a known-
11-262
BACK
DTC P1683: ThrottleValve Default Position
Spring Performance Problem
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
radiator fan' comes on,then let it idle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle
body.
... !'i.iJ
9. Push tlie throttle valve closed as shown.
10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YES--Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
then go to step 12 and recheck.lfDTC P1683 is
indicated, go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 11.
15. Turn the ignitionswitchOFF,and wait 10 seconds.
to step 1.
11-263
BACK
:#1',",'
Throttle Control System
OTC P1684:ThrottleValve RetumSpring
Performance Problem
ACAUTION
is activated.
troubleshooting information(see page 11-3).
radiator fan comes on, then let iti,dle. '
YES-Go to step 7.
body.
'I i'
11-264
9. Push the throttle valve open as, shown.
10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1684 is
NO-Go to step 11.
to step 1.
BACK
DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction
ACAUTION
is activated.
the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicl,e for several minutes in the
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
APP SENSOR A
YES-Go to step 7.
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363) .
body.
the HDS.
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
then go to step 21 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
NO-Go to step 13.
17. Connectthrottle body 6P connector terminals No.5
ETCSM- (GRN) ETCSM+ (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-265
BACK
, , .
. , '
terminals C2 and C3.
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3),' then go to step 20.
11-266
, range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VS'S
APP SENSOR A
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and go to
step 1.
Temporary OTCs or DTCs are indicated, goto the
28. Check for Temporary OTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
BACK
DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Rangel
Performance Problem
Is there about 1.0 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 15.
5. At the throttle body side, measure resistance
between throttle body 6P connector terminals No.5
and No.6 with the throttle fully closed.
Is there about 1.0 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair short in thewires between the PCM
connector terminals C3 (ETCSM-line) and C4
(ETCSM+line), then go to step 7.
(cont'd)
11-267
BACK
13. Slowly press the accelerator pedarto the floor.
to step 1.
good PCM (see page 11-8) ..
17. Check for TemporaryDTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTCP2118 indicated? .
YES-Check for poor connections .or loose
11-268
BACK
DTe P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
Circuit Low Voltage
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) ..
2. CheckAPP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
at APP sensor A and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
APPSENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
(A 18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.1 to
APP SENSOR6P CONNECTOR
=
APSA(PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-269
BACK
APSA(PUR)
YES-Go to step 13.
Q
=
(A 18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.1
APSA(PUR) VCC3 (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
11-270
16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there about 0.2 V or less? .
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 22.
=
VCC3 (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
=
YES-Go to step 30.
(A24) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-286).
terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
11-271
BACK
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
Circuit High Voltage
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3 ..
at APP sensor A and the PCM .
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
11-272
APPSENSOR6PCONNECTOR
=
SG3(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
=
YES-Go to step 19.
(A26) and APP sensor A, then go to step 14.
BACK
11-286).
terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
indicated OTC's troubleshooting
terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
11-273
BACK
DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
Circuit Low Voltage
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
at APP sensor B and the PCM .
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
11-274
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
=
(A19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 11.
=
APSB ILT GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
APSB (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 13.
.Q
=
(A 19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.4
APSB (L T GRN) VCC4(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
16. CheckAPP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 22.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF .
VCC4(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
=
(cont'd)
11-275
BACK
=
YES-Go to step 30.
(A25) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
11-286).
terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
11-276
good PCM,(see page 11-8).
terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK
DTC P2128: APP Sensor 8 (TP Sensor E)
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
APP sensor B and the PCM .
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
SG4(GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 19.
(A27) and APP sensor B, then go to step 1.4.
(cont'd)
11-277
BACK
11-286).
16. Reset the .PCM with the HDS.
terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM
11-278
BACK
DTC P2135: TP Sensor AlB Voltage Incorrect
Correlation
ACAUTION
will seriously injure your' fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
' ....
body.
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
you clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to the fully
closed position?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
terminals B17 and B26.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
11-279
BACK
Throttle Control System
terminals 817 and 826.
817 (TPSA line) and the 826 (TPS8 line), then go to
step 17.
NO-Go to step 15.
to step 1.
11-280
22. -Beconnect.all connectors.
, software {see pag&"11-7),or substitute a known-
good PCM '(see page 11-8).
substituted, go tp step 1.
original PCM {see page 11-24:4>. If any other
BACK
DTC P2138: APP Sensor NB (TP Sensor DIE)
Incorrect Voltage Correlation
2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
YES-Go to step 5.
at APP sensor and the PCM .
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
Are they the same voltage?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 11.
terminals A 18 and A 19.
, Terminal side of female terminals
terminals (A18, A19), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 21.
11-286).
(cont'd)
BACK
terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and go to
step 1.
Temporary OTCs or O"rCs are indicated, go to the
indicated OTC's troubleshooting."
terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM. If the
indicated OTC's troubleshooting
11-282
BACK
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System
Idle Position Not Learned
ACAUTION
is activated.
NOTE:
If DTC P2135 is stored atthe same time as DTC P2176,
P2176.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 6.
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363) .
body.
10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
doing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed
position?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.
Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 18.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No.5
ETCSM- (GRN) ETCSM+ (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-283
BACK
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 20.
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF .....
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait
10 seconds.
11-284
to step 1.
BACK
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE:
This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures.
Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this
procedure.
Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-286).
A
4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS .
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK .
If it is not 0 %, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute
a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to
step 5.
5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pfessed;
then check the APP SENSOR in the DATAUST with
the HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %,replace the accelerator pedal
module (see page 11 then go to step 1.

BACK
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor6P connector (A).
A
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (8).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
3. Insta" the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-286
BACK
VTEC
Update, page 11-7
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
11-287
BACK
c,'
VTEC,
OTe Troubleshooting
OTe P2646: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Circuit Low Voltage
Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201
AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY 4011A
AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY 40120
Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 19.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker
arm oil control solenoid, and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 5.
11-288
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is ON indicated?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A),
install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch on the oil pressure
gauge adapter (B).
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal with a new O-ring.
A
22Nm
12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
074060020201 or
07MAJPV4011Aand
07MAJPV40120
,
\
/ \
..-"--"--" 074060070301
07ZAJ-S5AA200
the HDS.
BACK
13. Check the oil pressure.
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa
(4.0 kgflcrrf, 56.9 psi)?
YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
NO-Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK. Replace
the rocker arm oil control solenoid (see page
VTPSW (BLU/WHTI
If 11
-' 1 2 3 4 I 6 I 6 I 7 8 9 110 L
111 1213141161161171181920 211
122 23 24 ><1261>< 26/V1
129 30 31 32133134136136 :f1 38 391
J40 41 42 VI44I46L46 / VVI
.Q
=
(820) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then
go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 25.
the HDS.
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
NO-Go to step 24.
24. Monitor the 080 STATUS for DTC P2646 in the
TemporaryDTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
(cont'd)
11-289
BACK
VTEC
27. Do the VTECTEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
NO-Go to step 29.
pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
to step 1.lfthe screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
11-290
BACK
DTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 16.
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and the
PCM .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Check the result of step 4.
VTEC Switch Failure
VTEC Switch Open
VTEC Switch SIG Line Open
VTEC Switch GND Line Open
Is the test result any of the above?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK,
replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch side, check for
continuity between rocker arm oil pressure switch
2P connector terminals No.1 and. No.2.
2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
10. Measure voltage between rocker arm oil pressure
switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the rocker
arm oil pressure switch and G101, then go to step
15.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-291
BACK
VTEC
terminal 820 and rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
2P CONNECTOR
1-----1 VTPSW
(BLU/WHT)
VTPSW (BLU/WHT) .--------'
YES-Go to step 21.
(820) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then
go to step 15.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose .
NO-Go to step 20.
11-292
20 .. Monitorthe,08D STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the HDS.
NO-Go to step 25.
BACK
Temporary DTCs or DTCswere indicated in step 24,
pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
11-293
BACK
VTEC
DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid
Circuit Low Voltage
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the
PCM .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 P
connector.
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 P connector
terminal and the solenoid valve body.
1 P CONNECTOR
=
Is there 14- 30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 10.
11-294
II Jl
Ll1
2 3 51617
111 1213 14115116117118 19 20 21
l22
23 24
26L
L
129 30 31 32ja3 36 3736 39
1140 41 42 VI44I45I46 V
'[/1
VTS (GRN/VEL)
.Q
Is there contiiwity?
(B39) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then
go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 18.
10. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(see page 11-299).
the HDS.
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
17. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P2648 in the
control solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the HDS.
terminals atthe rocker arm oil control solenoid and
NO-Go to step 22.
22. MonitortheOBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the
control solenoid and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
11-295
BACK
VTE.C
DTC P2649:Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) ...
3. Start the engine .. Hold the engine speed at
YES-Go to step 5.
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the
PCM .
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 P
connector.
7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 P connector
terminal and the solenoid valve body.
1 P CONNECTOR
=
Is there 14-30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
11-296
8. Jump the SCS line With the HDS.
terminal B39and the rocker arm oil control
solenoid 1 P connector terminal.
1 P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 19.
(B39) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then
go to step 12.
BACK
11. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(see page 11-299).
NO-Go to step 18.
Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indi.cated in step 17,
control solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 22.
control solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-297
BACK
VTEC
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid
connector.
2. Measure resistance between the rocker arm oil
control solenoid 1 P connector terminal (A) and
body ground .
If the resistance is as specified, go to step 3 .
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the
rocker arm oil control solenoid.
Resistance: 14-30 Q
11-298
assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the
rocker arm oil control solenoid filter (B) for a
restriction. If there is a restriction, replace the
rocker arm oil control solenoid filter, the engine oil
filter, and the engine oil.
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
4. If the filter is not restricted, remove the rocker arm
oil control solenoid (A), and push the valve (B) with
your finger to check its movement. If the valve
moves freely, it is normal; check the engine oil
pressure (see page 8-6). If the valve binds or sticks,
replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
assembly.
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)

A
B
BACK
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid
Replacement
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid
connector (A).
c
2. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (8).
with a new O-ring (C).
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (A), then remove the rocker arm oil
pressure switch (8).
22N'm
(2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
11-299
BACK
Idle .Control System
Update, page 11-7
Replacement, page 11-244 AIC COMPRESSOR
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-306
ALTERNATOR
FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting,
page 11-305
11-300
BACK
Ole Troubleshooting
OTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower
Than Expected
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 20 seconds.
4. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with
the HDS:
above 158 "F (70 "C)
Intake air temperature (lAT SENSOR) above 32 "F
(0 "C)
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
FSS is CLOSED
5. Monitor the aBO STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine
idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore.
/s there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore?
YES-Ifthere is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go
to step 13. Ifthere is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 12.
NO-Check the AlC system or power steering
system, then go to step 10.
8. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
9. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore.
/s there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore?
YES"'-/fthere is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go
to step 13. Ifthere is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 12.
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, blower motor, or AlC; change the gear
position,
11. Monitor the aBO STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
orcs MENU with the HDS.

NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check the AlC
system and/or power steering system, then go to
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a result comes
on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go
to step 10 and recheck.
(cont'd)
11-301
BACK
Idle Control System
12., Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).
16. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with
the HDS:
above 158 'f (70 "C)
Intake air temperature (lAT SENSOR) above 32 'f
(0 "C)
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
FSS is CLOSED
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
NO-Go to step 18.
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF CONDITION,
11-302
BACK
DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher
Than Expected
YES-Go to step 5.
result comes on. Ifthe screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions
(electrical, AlC, gear position, etc.), then go to
step 3.
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCVvalve
PCV hose
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Are there any leaks?
YES-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go
to step 6.
NO-Go to step 6.
Is DTC POS07 indicated?
NO-Go to step 11.
Temporary OTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
11-303
BACK
Idle Control System
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the AlC switch on.
4. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the AlC pressure switch circuit
5. Check the AlC system.
Does the Ale system operate?
YES-The air conditioning system circuit is OK .
NO-Go to step 6.
8. Activate the AlC CLUTCH in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor
clutch?
YES--Do the AlC system test (see page 21-134).
NO-Go to step 9.
11-304
13.' Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A 13
to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
ACC(RED)
If II
11 I 2 3 4151617 8 19110 I.
111 1213 /1/1161/116 19201211
122 1/ 24 XJ25IX 28271281
129 30 31 32VVVI36 37361391
.140 I 41 42 43144VI46 471481491
'----'
JUMPER WIRE
_ ....
=
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor
clutch?
at the AlC cl utch relay and the PCM. If the
connections are OK, check the AlC clutch relay
(see page 22-77), repair open in the wire between
the PCM (A 13) and the AlC clutch relay and the
other AlC systems.
BACK
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR inthe DATA LIST with
the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the
headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES-The alternator signal circuit is OK .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
PCM connector terminal C44.
=
(C44) and the alternator .
11-305
BACK
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14.
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position.
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?
YES-The PSP switch signal circuit is OK .
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?
YES-Replace the PSP switch .
NO-Go to step 10.
11-306
13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
Q
=
(A38) and the PSP switch .
NO:--Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
HDS.
Does it change to ON?
YES-Replace the PSP switch .
NO-Go to step 18.
19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P
connector.
terminal A38 and PSP switch 2P connector terminal
No.1.
I----l PSPSW (PNKI
Q
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP
switch and the PCM (A38) .
23. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
=
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP
switch and G202 .
11-307
BACK
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Does it indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6) .
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE
SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON?
YES-The brake pedal position switch signal circuit
(BKSW line) is OK .
NO-Go to step 4.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P
connector.
11-308
S. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal AS and body ground.
Q
=
(AS) and the No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 A) fuse.
Replace the No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 A)
fuse .
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the No. 11 +8 STOP &
HORN (15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position
switch (see page 19-6) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A8)
and the brake pedal position switch .
11-309
BACK
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE:
Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
- The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been
reported on, and there are no OTCs.
-Ignition timing
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCVsystem
Apply the parking brake.
1. Oisconnectthe evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector.
2. Connect the HOS to the data link connector (OLC)
4. Make sure the HOS communicates with the PCM
OLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
11-310
5. Start the engine. Hold the 'engine speed at
6. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
conditioner off.
Idle speed should be:
71050 rpm (in Park or neUtral)
7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
load (NC switch ON, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan on high, and headlights on high beam).
Idle speed should be:
71050 rpm (in Park or neutral)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,
dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
If the idle speed is still not within specification, go
to symptom troubleshooting.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve
connector.
BACK
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can
learn the engine idle characteristics.
00 the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of
these actions:
Replace PCM.
ResetPCM.
Update PCM.
Clean or replace the throttle body.
NOTE: Erasing OTCs with the HOS does not require you
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (AlC, audio, lights, etc.)
are off.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait iseconds.
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 'f (90 "C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the
throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include
its running time in the 5 minutes.
11-311
BACK
Fuel Supply System
FUEL
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
Precautions, page 11-336
Removal, page 11-338
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
11-312
FUEL TANK i .,
Draining, page 11-333
,FILL CAP
FUEL FILL PIPE
Removal/Installation,
page 11-348
FUEL TANK UNIT
page 11-343
FUEL PUMP
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING Replacement, page 11-346
Precautions, page 11-336 FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Removal, page 11-338 ' Test, page 11-350
Installation, page 11-340 Replacement, page 11-346
FUEL VAPOR LINE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
FUEL FILTER
BACK
Update, page 11-7
/ FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE
/ ! Rep'e ..... ",. pe.e 11-349
11-313
BACK
";t.
Fuel S.upply System
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem . .
NOTE:
Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, this DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-350).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module .
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
5. Check for Temporary. DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
gauge control module, then go to step 1.
11-314
BACK
DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
YES-Go to step 4.
time; Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit .
5. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-156).
6. Remove the access panel from the floor.
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
YES-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit
NO-Go to step 11.
22-337).
13. Disconnectthe gauge control module 12P
connector.
14. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
lORN) ..--'1L...,-J2'-,
3 4
Q
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the gauge
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
17. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
(cont'd)
11-315
BACK
Fuel Supply System
OTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Set the float (A) to the E position;
E
O.Bin.
(19.1 mm) r------'--....;:;....-----'
21. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the fuel gauge move to the empty position?
YES-Go to step 29.
gauge control module, then go to step 1.
11-316
gauge control module. If the PCM was updated,
BACK
DTCP0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit .
8. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.3
to body ground with a jumper wire.
r--l.
1 2
3
4
GND
JUM
-'-
(LTGRN)
PER WIRE
.. riiJ
9. Remove the gauge control. module (see page
22-337).
10. Disconnect the gauge control module 24P
connector.
module 24P connector terminal No. 15 and body
ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 24P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
(cont'd)
11-317
BACK
Fuel' Supply System
12. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.1
SIGNAL
lORN) ........... ...,........-,
1 2
3 4
JUMPER WIRI;
=
module 12P connector terminal No. 11 and body
ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A 112P)
YES-Go to step 14.
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
1,'-318
14. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 5P
connector.
16. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-350).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
17. Connectthe fuel tank unit 4P connector.
19. Turnthe ignition switch ON (II).
21. Set the float (A) to the F position.
F
8.4 in.
1214.2mm)
A
22. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?
YES-Go to step 30.
BACK
to step 1.
gauge control module. If the PCM was updated,
11-319
BACK
fdel Supply System
DTC P0627: Fuel Pump Control Module
System Malfunction
3. Turn the ignition switch to the start (III) position.
NOTE: This vehicle has an auto control mode
starting system. It keeps the starter motor running
after the ignition switch is released for 15 seconds,
or until the engine starts.
YES-Go to step 5.
at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI main
relay 2, the fuel tank unit, and the PCM .
6. Check the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in under-
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also
replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, then go
to step 73.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
11.-320
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between fuel pump control module 10P
connector terminals No.3 and No.8 within
2 seconds.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76), then
remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-
BACK
11. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (see page 22-77).
Is PGM-FI main relay 2 OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step
73.
13. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 14.
connector.
16. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
IGP
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-321
BACK
Fuel Supply System
relay box 9P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX 9P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Replace the relay control module (under-
hood fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71), then go to
step 74.
NO-
Repair open in the wire between the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the under-dash fuse/relay box,
then go to step 74 .
If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
11-322
18. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P
PGMFI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
PGMFI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
IG1
FUEL PUMP
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
voltage between fuel pump control module 10P
connector terminal No.3 and body ground within
2 seconds.
=
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-
Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the fuel pump control module,
If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
IMOFPR
2
JUMPER WIRE
terminal A 11 and body ground.
Q
=
IMOFPR (BRN)
YES-Go to step 79.
(A 11) and PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step 73.
(cont'd)
11-323
BACK
Fuel Supply System
28. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
32. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check for
sound from the fuel pump within 2 seconds.
Does the fuel pump operate?
YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Go to step 53.
connector. "
. .
35. Check for continuity petween fuel pump control
module 10P connector terminal No.4 and body
ground. .
=
YES-Go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 39.
11-324
terminal A42and body ground.
(A42) and the fuel pump control module, then go to
step 73.
NO-Go to step 79.
41. Connect fuel pump control module 10Pconnector
terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper, wire.
FPCD (L T BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
=
BACK
=
YES-Go to step 43.
step 73.
43. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel pump
control module 10P connector.
connector and PCM connector A (49P).
46. Measure voltage between fuel pump control
ground.
=
Is there about 8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 47.
NO-Replace the fuel pump control module
48. Remove the second row seat (see page
51. Disconnectthe fuel pump control module 10P
connector.
(cont'd)

BACK
Fuel Supply System
52. Check for continuity between fuel pump control
ground.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel tank
unit, then go to step 73.
NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control
recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the
original fuel pump control module (see page
11-349), then go to step 73. If DTC P0627 is
11-326
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 56.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (GND line) and G604, then go
to step 73.
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 57.
NO-Go to step 60.
BACK
59 .. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A43 and body ground. .
=
step 73.
NO-Go to step 79.
connector.
voltage between PCM connector terminal A43 and
body ground within 2 seconds.
=
YES-Go to step 62.
NO-Replace the fuel pump control module
(see page 11-349),then go to step 73. ;
63. Remove the second row,seat(see page. 20-156).
64. Remove the access panel from the fl.oor.
, .
67. Connect between fuel tank unit 4P connector
1 2 FP+ (WHT)
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
(cont'd)
11-327
BACK
,I,
. ;!-.
Fuel Supply System
module10Pconnectorterminai No.6 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 69.
pump control module (FP+ line)and the fuel tank
69. Connect between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire,
11-328
1 2
3 4
FP- (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
=
module 1 OP connector terminal No.7 and body
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 71.
pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel tank
71. Reconnectthe fuel pump control module 10P
connector.
BACK
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No.2 and body ground within 2 seconds.
=
YES-Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343),
then go to step 73.
NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control
recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the
original fuel pump control module (see page
11-349), then go to step 73. If DTC P0627 is
terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2, the fuel tank unit, and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2, the fuel pump, and the PCM. If the
11-329
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment.
With the HOS
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped).
,'-330
7. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
the fuel tank.
9. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select
Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
until it stalls.
NOTE:
Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump .
A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11-4).
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
BACK
14. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
clean it if needed.
15. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A).
16. Disconnectthe quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
Do not use tools.
If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
c
E
17. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check
it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-339).
18. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
do this: .
Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
the navigation system (if equipped) .
Set the clock.
Without the HOS
equipped).
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-
G
3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
them.
(cont'd)
11-331
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
5. Remove the fuel fill cap.
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
clean it if needed.
fitting (A).
A
11-332
10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
Do not use tools.
new one.
E
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check
it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-339).
do this:
Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
the navigation system (if equipped).
Set the clock.
BACK
Fuel Pressure Test
o Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040008
o Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07 AAJ-S6MA 150
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel
pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge.
o If the engine starts, go to step 5.
o If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to
the fuel fifJer port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned on.
o If the pump runs, go to step 5.
o If the pump does not run, refer to the DTC
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should
be 390-440 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm
2
, 57-64 psi).
o If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
o If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-345) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-345), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
Fuel Tank Draining
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container
suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. ReinstafJ the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
11-333
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
11-334
Make sure the connections are
secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
BACK
Check all clamps, and retighten if necessary.
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
To FUEL
RAIL
A:
There should be
no clearance.
TOP

BASE GASKET
Replace.
FUEL TANK UNIT LOCKNUT
Rep,lace.

Make sure that the clamp is
in position within the lever
end of it the range shown.
11-335
BACK
.;..
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (8), (e), (0), (E),
(F), (G), (H), (I), (J) connect the fuel feed hose (K) to the
fuel feed hose (L), the fuel feed hose to the fuel feed line
(M), the fuel feed line to the fuel feed tube (N), the fuel
feed tube to the fuel tank unit (0), the breather tube (P)
to the breather pipe (Q), the breather pipe to the
breather tube (R), the breather tube to the breather pipe
(S), the EVAP canister (T) to the fuel vapor tube (U), the
fuel vapor tube to the fuel vapor line (V), the fuel vent
tube (W) and the vent shut float tube (X). When
removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit,
fuel tank or breather tube, it is necessary to disconnect
or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel that was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact
with electrolyte or something similar.
When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them
if they are damaged.
M
A
11-336
D
o
R
Q
E
F
BACK
J
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel rail.
replacing the fuel line.
replacing the fuel pump.
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
replacing the EVAP canister.
replacing the breather pipe.
it has been removed from the line.
it is damaged.
Place Manufacturer
A Tokai
B Tokai
C TI Automotive
D TI Automotive
E Tokai
F Tokai
G Tokai
H TI Automotive
I TI Automotive
J Tokai
Retainer Line
color diameter
Blue green 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
Blue green 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
Gray 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
Blue 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
Orange 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
Orange 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
Natural 0.47 in.
(12 mm)
Blue 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
Natural 0.47 in.
(12 mm)
White 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
11-337
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
(see page 11-336).
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,
and clean them if needed.
A
11-338
A
A
A
A
A
BACK
A
fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other
parts. Do not use tools.
new one.
D
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage.
If it is dirty, clean it.
If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump,
fuel filter, or fuel feed line.
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and line ends
with plastic bags (A).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel feed line.
it has been removed from the line.
it is damaged.
11-339
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
(see page 11-336).
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
A
B
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) ifthe
retainer is damaged, or after:
replacing the fuel feed line.
removing the retainer from the line.
Use the same manufacturer retainer and the
same size retainer when the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-336).
11-340
A
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
the mating line.
A
BACK
A
A
A
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (S) with the
connector grooves (e). Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of
new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer
Connection to new fuel line
TI Automotive-made
1"-"-"-"-'
i
Tokai-made
Reconnection to existing retainer
(cont'd)
11-341
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
5. When you are reconnecting the connector with the
old retainer, make sure the connection is secure
and the tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check
visually and also by pulling the connector (B).
When you are replacing the fuel line with a new
one, make sure you remove the ring pull (C)
upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure
the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try
to remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
A
Connection to new fuel line
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and
turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about
2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two
or three times, and check that there is no leakage in
the fuel supply system.
11-342
BACK
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation
Fuel sender wrench 07 AAA-SOXA 100
Removal
4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
A
B
c
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (8).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) from the
fuel tank unit.
7. Using the fuel sender wrench, loosen the locknut
(A).
8. Remove the locknut (A), locknut plate (8), and fuel
tank unit (C).
(cont'd)
11-343
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd),
Installation
1. Install a new base gasket (A) and locknut plate (B)
on the fuel tank (C).

....--F
B
2. Insert the fuel tank unit (D) into the fuel tank. Be
careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
3. Align the marks (E) on the tank and the fuel tank
unit, then tighten a new locknut (F) by hand.
NOTE:
After tightening, make sure the marks are aligned.
Check the circumference of the base gasket
visually or by hand and be sure that it is not
pinched.
Do not coat the base gasket with the engine oil.
After installation, check the base gasket visually
or by hand to be sure it is not pinched.
11-344
4. Using the fuel sender wrench, tighten the fuel tank
unit locknut (A).
A
70Nm
17.1 kgfm,51Ibfftl
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (A).
A
6. Install the access panel (B) to the floor.
7. Install the second row seat (see page 20-156).
BACK
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Replacement
2. Remove the bracket (A).
3. Remove the clip (B).
4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C).
with new O-rings (D).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil. Do
not use any other type of oil or fluid.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Fuel Filter Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
11-333), after making sure that the fuel pump and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
When connecting the wire harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
are firmly locked into place .
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of
removal with new O-rings (D). When installing the
fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the
fuel tank (see page 11-344).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil.
11-345
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump/Fuel GaugeSending Unit Replacement
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A)
from the fuel tank unit (B).
c
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank .
When connecting the wire harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the connectors (C) is
firmly locked into place .
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
notto bend or twist itexcessively.
When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 1 J-344).
11-346
BACK
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333).
2. Jack up the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
3. Remove the exhaust pipe (see page 9-9).
4. Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-38), and support it with jackstands.
5. Remove the fuel tank guard (A) and fuel tank protector (8).
6. Loosen the clamp (C), and disconnect the tube (D).
7. Open the clamp (E).
8. Disconnect the hoses (F). Slide back the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull to avoid damaging them.
9. Disconnect the hose (G).
10. Place a jack or other support under the tank (H).
11. Remove the strap bolts and the straps (I).
12. Remove the fuel tank.
11-347
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
2. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333).
4. Remove the rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
5. Disconnect the fuel fill tube (A) and the quick-connector fittings (B).
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfft)
-------------
I
c
6. Remove the fuel fill pipe (e).
11-348
BACK
Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement
1. Remove the cargo floor lid (see step 1 on page
20-90).
2. On models with active suspension, remove.the
active damper control unit (see page 18-118).
3. Disconnect the fuel pump control module
connector (A).
B
4. Remove the fuel pump control module (B).
11-349
BACK
: "h
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-318).
1. Check the No. 21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box before testing.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs (see page
22-3).
If no problem is found, go to step 3 .
If DTC B 1175 (see page 22-328) or B 1176
(see page 22-329) is indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.
5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
B
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
1 1 ~ 3 5
7. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminals No.1 and No.3 with the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
voltage.
If the voltage is OK, go to step 8 .
If the. voltage is not as specified, check for:
- a short in the YELjBLK wire to ground.
- an open in the YELjBLK or BLK wire .
9. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank
(see page 11-343).
BACK
10. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminals No.1 and No.3 with the float
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2
(HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-346).
Float F 1/2 LOW E
Position 8.4 in. 5.9 in. 2.0 in. 0.8 in.
(214.2 mm) (149.4 mm) (50.8 mm) (19.1 mm)
Resistance 19to 203.3 to 516.4 to 772 to
(Q) 21 213.3 629 788
Terminal side of
male terminals
F
E
11. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
12. Remove the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the
under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
14. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates
"F" with the float at F.
Ifthe pointer ofthe fuel gauge does not indicate
"F", replace the gauge assembly.
If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch
is OFF, regardless ofthe fuelleve/.
Remove the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the
under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it
may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to
indicate the correct fuelleve/.
Low Fuellndicato.r Test
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-315).
If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-337).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
11-350).
11-351
BACK
InfakeAir System
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-7
11-352
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-362
Cleaning, page 11-363
AIR CLEANER
Element Inspection/Replacement,
page 11-364
RESONATOR
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
Ole P1077: IMT Valve Stuck in High RPM
Position
NOTE: Before you trouble!;lhoot, record all freeze data
3. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load (in
4. Start the engine, and hold the engine speed above
3,800 rpm.
5. Check the IMTVALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 35.
6. Check the IMTVALVE SW in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
at the IMT actuator and the PCM .
7. Let the engine idle, then turn the ignition switch
OFF.
8. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.
10. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
(C11) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
11. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-353
BACK
Intake Air System
terminal C16 and IMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.2.
Q
YES-Go to step 20.
18. Disconnect PCM connector 8.(49P).
11-354
terminal 819 and IMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.3.
Q
. IMTM (WHT /BLKI .----___ -----l
YES-Go to step 34.
(819) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
BACK
=
NO-Goto step 21.
terminal No.5.
YES-Go to step 22.
=
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
11-355
BACK
Intake Air System
terminal C49 andlMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.4.
Q
YES-Go to step 24.
24. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-365).
11-356
25. Move the IMT valve by hand.
Does it move smoothly?
YES-Substitute a known-good IMTactuator
(see page 11-365), then go to step 26 and recheck. If
DTC P1078 is not indicated, replace the IMT
actuator (see page 11-365), then go to step 26. If
DTC P1078 is indicated, go to step 35.
NO-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
9-3), and repair the stuck valve. If necessary,
replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2), then go
to step 26.
31. Start the engine, and hold the engine speed at
3,800 rpm for 10 seconds, then let it idle.
terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 33.
BACK
33. Manitar the OBD STATUS far DTC P1077 in the
YES-Traubleshaating is camplete. If any ather
Temparary DTCs arDTCs were indicated in step 32,
go. to. the indicated DTC's traubleshaating .
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check far paar
cannectians ar laase terminals at the IMT actuatar
and the PCM, then go. to. step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go. to. step 31.
34. Recannect all cannectars.
35. Update the PCM if it daes nat have the latest
saftware (see page 11-7), ar substitute a knawn-
gaad PCM (see page 11-8).
36. Start the engine, and then let it idle withaut laad (in
Park ar neutral) until the radiatar fan cames an.
37. Start the engine, and hald the engine speed at
3,800 rpm far 10 secands, then let it idle.
38. Check far Temparary DTCs ar DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check far paar cannectians ar loase
terminals at the IMT actuatar and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a knawn-gaad PCM
(see page 11-8), then go. to. step 37. If the PCM was
substituted, go. to. step 1.
NO-Go. to. step 39.
39. Manitarthe OBD STATUS far DTC P1077 in the
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshoating is
ariginal PCM (see page 1 1 ~ 2 4 4 . If any ather
go. to. the indicated DTC's traubleshaating .
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check far paar
cannectians ar laase terminals at the IMT actuatar
knawn-gaad PCM (see page 11-8), then go. to. step
37. If the PCM was substituted, go. to. step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go. to. step 37.
11.,357
BACK
Intake Air System
OTC P1078: IMT Valve Stuck in Low RPM
Position
4. Check the IMT VALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 29.
the HDS.
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
at the IMT actuator and the PCM .
7. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.
the HDS.
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
11-358
PCM. CONNECTOR B (49P)
IMTM (WHT IBLK)
'11
J 1 2 3 4151 6 I 7 8 9110 I.
111 1213 14115116117118 1920 211
122 2324
.><J25LX 26/
VI
129 3031 32133134135135 3738 391
140 41 42 1/144145146 / 1/1/1
Q
=
(B19) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 30.
=
NO-Go to step 18.
BACK
terminal No.5.
Q
YES-Go to step 19.
(C48) arid the IMTactuator, then go to step 23.
=
YES-Repair short inthe wire between the PCM
NO-Go to step 20.
terminal No.4.
Q
(cont'd)
11-359
BACK
Intake Air System
YES-Go to step 21.
21. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-365).
22. Move the.IMT valve by hand.
Does it move smoothly?
YES-Substitute a known-good IMT actuator
(see page 11-365), then go to step 23 and recheck. If
DTC P1077 rsnot indicated, replace the IMT
actuator (see page 11-365), then go to step 23. If
DTC P1077 is indicated, go to step31.
NO-Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 1
on page 9-3), and repair the stuck valve. If
necessary, replace the intake manifold (see page
23. Reconnect all connectors ..
25. Reset the PCM with theHDS.
11 .. 360
terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 28.
28. Monitor theOBD STATUS for DTC P1078 in the
connections or loose terminalsat the IMT actuator
and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
BACK
terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 33.
connections or loose terminals at the IMT actuator
result comes on.
11-361
BACK
hltakeAir System
Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. The reading should be below 4.3 deg. If it
is not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
11 .. 362
Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
3. Make sure theHDScommunicates with the PCM
DLC circuittroubleshooting (see page 11-223).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
5. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
BACK
Throttle Body Cleaning

is activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air
cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-363).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-366).
3. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and
inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
o Remove the throttle body to clean it.
o Be careful notto pinch your fingers.
o To avoid removing the molybdenum do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A) .
Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner
directly on the throttle body .
Use Acura genuine throttle plate and induction
cleaner.
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-366).
5. Reset the PCM with the HDS (see page 11-4).
2 seconds.
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation
connector (A).
2. Remove the bolts (B).
3. Remove the air cleaner (C).
11-363
BACK
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A).
A
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air
cleaner housing (C).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or
clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace
the air cleaner element.
NOTE: Do not use compressed airto clean the air
cleaner element.
4. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air
cleaner housing.
6. If the maintenance minder required to the air
cleaner element, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-4) and this procedure is complete. Ifthe
maintenance minder did not require to replace the
air cleaner element, go to step 8.
11-364
7, the, HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
'(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
the HDS.
the HDS.
13. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the
HDS.
BACK
Resonator Removal/Installation
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codE!s for the audio
system and the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-363).
3. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-188).
5. Remove the left side headlight (see page 22-205).
6. Remove the clips (A) and cover (B).
. / I !
D
c
7. Remove the bolts (C), and resonator (D).
do this:
Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system
and the navigation system (if equipped) .
Set the clock.
10. Adjustthe headlight to local requirements
(see page 22-204).
(see page 17-28).
IMTActuator Replacement .
1. Remove the en,gi'ne cover (seE) step 1 .on page 9-3k
. -" ,,'
2. Disconnect the IMT actuator.5P connector(A).
D
3. Remove the bolts (B) and the IMT actuator (C).
with a new O-ring (D) .
11-365
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers.if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing the throttle body, begin at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body temporarily, begin
at step 4.
. ,
1. Connect the HDS while the engine is stopped.
3. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
4. Disconnectthe MAP sensor connector (A).
F ~
E
5. Remove the intake air duct (8).
6. Disconnect the throttle body connector (C).
7. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D).
8. Remove the throttle body (E).
9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (F).
NOTE:
Do the PCM idle learn procedure after the throttle body has been replaced (see page 11-311) .
Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page 10-6).
11-366
BACK
FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU TWC)
(BANK 2)
Update, page 11-7
UNDERFLOOR THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
REAR WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WUTWC)
(BANK 1)
Removal/installation, page 11-370
11-367
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC P0420: Rear Bank Catalyst System
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
OTC P0430: FrontBank Catalyst System
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
NOTE:
If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0420 and/or P0430', troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0420 and/or
P0430.
P0137,P0138,P0157,P0158,P2270,P2271,P2272',
P2273': Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
Poor quality fuel can cause these DTCs.
above 158 'f (70 'C)
(72-120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more
Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 1 minute or more with cruise control set
~ 3 6 8
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 4 and recheck.
6. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
YES-Go to step 8.
9. Replace the WU-TWC:
For DTC P0420, replace the rear WU-TWC
(Bank1) (see page 11-371) .
For DTC P0430, replace the front WU-TWC
(Bank 2) (see page 11-370).
BACK
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, continually
changing the vehicle speed.
15. Check the CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 (B2)' in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the condition OK?
YES-Go to step 16.
above 158 'f (70 'C)
(72-120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more
Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 1 minute or more with cruise control set.
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
YES-Go to step 18.
18. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
terminals at the secondary H02S (sensor 2) and the
NO-Go to step 20.
11-369
BACK
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
FRONT
1. Remove the radiator and A/C condenser fan assemblies (see page 10-10).
2. Disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and front secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connector.
3. Carefully remove the front WU-TWC.
FRONT
WU-TWC
FRONT A/F SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
44Nm
SELF-LOCKING NUT
8x1.25mm
31 Nm
Replace.
FRONT SECONDARY
H02S (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
44Nm
COVER
~
~ 6 x 1 0 m m
12Nm
4. Carefully install the front WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.
11-370
BACK
REAR
1. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-9).
2. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-21).
3. Disconnect the rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and the rear secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary
H02S) connector.
4. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket, then remove the rear WU-TWC.
REAR A/F SENSOR
(BANK 1, SENSOR 11
44Nm
SELF-LOCKING NUT
8x1.25mm
31Nm
Replace.
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
COVER
REAR SECONDARY
H02S (BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
44Nm
REAR
WU-TWC
COVER
5. Install the rear WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.
11-371
BACK
Under-floor TWC Removal/Installation
1. Remove the under-floor TWC (A).
- - - - I - ~ . D
~ ~ ~ 33Nm
~ ~ ~ (3.4 kgf.m,
'f. 25Ibfft)
B
2. Remove the converter cover (B).
with new gaskets (C) and new self-locking nuts (0).
11-372
BACK
EGRSystem
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCMI
Update, page 11-7
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGRI VALVE
11-373
BACK
EGRSystem
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
above 158 'f (70 "C)
Vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, and
engine speed between 1,100 rpm and 3,000 rpm
fully closed) for 5 seconds
YES-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
9-3), clean the intake manifold, and EGR ports with
throttle plate and induction cleaner, then go to step
9.
8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
11 ... 374
above 158 'f (70 "C)
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 15.
NO-Go to step 14.
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
BACK
above 158 'f (70 "C)
17. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS.
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 18.
known-good PCM (see page 1.1-8), then go to step
16.lfthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe
11-375
BACK
EGRSystem
DTC P0404: EGR Control Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve
with throttle plate and induction cleaner .
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
7. Atthe sensor side, measure resistance between
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
Is there 100 kQ or more?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 8.
11-376
8. Measure re$istance between EGR valve 6P
connector terminals Np. 1 and No.3.
Terminal side Of male terminals
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
4
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101, then go to step 26.
BACK
Q
=
(C10) and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 13.
terminal C10 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal
No.4.
YES-Go to step 14.
14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
15. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate
and induction cleaner.
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
17. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
18. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES--Go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 24.
the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-377
BACK
EGRSystem
step 34.
NO-Go to step 33.
comes on.lfthe screen indicates OUT OF
the HDS.
11-378
(see page 11-8), then go to step 35. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 38.
35. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETI:D, go to step 35.
BACK
DTC P0406: EGR Valve Position Sensor
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 4.88 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
at the EGR valve and the PCM .
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
No.2.
. . EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
r+.-SG2 (GRN/VELI
1 2 3
.Q
4
/
6
SGZ (GRN/VEL)
If II
J 1 2 3 41.6 617 8 9110 I
111 12V /116 16117118 191 201211
~
V
24
X 261>< 261 271281 I
V 1/ 1/ 32133 341/V 371 381391
140 41 42 43144146146 47 461491
YES-Go to step 18.
valve and the PCM (C16), then go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-379
BACK
EGRSystem
step 1.
18. Reconnect all connect8rs.
19. Update the PCM+f'it does not have the latest
good PCM ~ e e page 11-8).
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or T ~ s with the HDS.
11-380
BACK
DTC P2413: EGR System Malfunction .
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. (11).
3,000 rpm without load (in Park o-r neutral) until the
radiator fan' comes on, then let it idle.
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the EGR valve and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition, switch OFF.' "
S. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).
7. Check the EGRVLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 21.
9. Disconnect the EGR valve SP connector.
11. Measure voltage between EG.R valve SP connector
'j .
Is there about 5 V? .
YES-Go to step i6.
NO-Go to t e p 1 2 ..
(cont'd)
11-381
BACK
E'GRSystem
12. Turn the ignition sWitch OFF.
terminal C12 and EGRva]ve 6P connector terminal
No.3.
Q
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI.
l...-__ ----, VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
YES-Go to step 52.
valve and the PCM (C12), then go to step 44.
11-382
17. Jumpthe SCS lihe with the HDS.
18. Disconnect PCMconnector C (49P).
YES-Repair short inthe wire between the PCM
NO-Go to step 20.
BACK
No.1.
EGRP (WHT IBlK)
Q
YES-Go to step 21.
23. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
YES-Go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-383
BACK
EGRSystem
24. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
EGRVALVE 6PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 25.
11-384
EGR (BLU/RED)
Q
=
Is there continl)ity?
YES-Repair short in thewire between the PCM
NO-Go to step 28.
BACK
No.4.
YES-Go to step 29.
29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
YES-Go to step 30.
valve and G101, then go to step 44.
30. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).
31. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve
6P connector terminal No.4 with a jumper wire.
(cont'd)
11.-385
BACK
EGRSystem
32. Start the engine and let it idlei then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No.6 with a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run rough?
YES-Go to step 51.
NO-Go to step 33.
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port at the passage
inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and
induction cleaner.
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
40. Do the PCMidie learn procedure (see page 11-311).
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Go to step 42.
11 .. 386
the HDS.
step 1.
NO-Go to step 50.
connections or loose terminals atthe EGR valve
BACK
the HDS.
NO-Go to step 54.
11-387
BACK
EGRSystem
EGR Valve Replacement
2. Remove the main under-hood fuse box.
3. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector (A).
c
4. Remove the EGR valve (8).
with a new gasket (e).
11-388
BACK
PCVSystem
Update, page 11-7
PCVVALVE
11-389
BACK
PCVSystem
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake Air System Leak
NOTE:
P2279.
1. Check for vacuum leaks .at these parts:
PCV valve
PCV hose
Purge (PCS) line
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair or replace any damaged parts, then go
to step 4.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 1 minute.
YES-Check the camshaft timing (see page 6-16),
then go to step 4.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 2 and
recheck.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 1 minute.
11 .. 390
YES-Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the
PCV hose, the purge (PCS) line, the throttle body,
the intake manifold, and the brake booster hose,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
BACK
PCV Valve Inspection
2. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (8), and
connections for leaks or restrictions.
3. At idle, listen to the PCV valve (A) with a
stethoscope as you lightly pinch the PCV hose (8)
with your fingers or pliers several times. Each time
the hose is pinched, the valve should click.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
B
PCV Valve Replacement
2. Remove the bolt (A).
NOTE: Take care not to spill oil on the hot exhaust
manifold.
c
3. Remove the PCV valve (8).
NOTE:
When installing a new PCV valve, make sure the
O-rings (C) are in place .
When installing a used PCV valve, use new
O-rings.
11-391
BACK
EVAPSystem
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-7
11-392
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI
CANISTER FILTER
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: Evap Canister Purge Valve Circuit
Malfunction
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available
YES-Go to step 5.
at the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM .
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow the engine
to cool below 140 'f (60 'l::).
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge
joint (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose.
Is there vacuum?
YES-Go to step 8 ...
NO-Go to step 14.
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
11-393
BACK
EVAPSystem
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
EVAP CANISTER P ~ R G VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
PCS (RED/YEll
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to
step 24.
NO-Go to step 30.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
11-394
17. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge
=
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step
24.
BACK
terminal C40 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P
,--______ -' PCS (RED/YEL)
YES-Go to step 22.
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to
step 24.
22. At the valve side, measure resistance between
EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals
No.1 and No.2.
Is there about 33 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Go to step 23.
23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-423).
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
11-395
BACK
EVAPSystem
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 33.
11-396
connections or loose terminals at the EVAPcanister
purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
BACK
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
NOTE:
If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTCP0451,
P0451.
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the PCM.lfthe screen indicates NOT
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-423).
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Is DTCP0451 indicated?
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1 .
NO-Go to step 12.
connections or loose terminals atthe FTP sensor
11-397
BACK
EVAPSystem
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
troubleshooting information (seepage 11-3);
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (-2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or
0.3 V or less indicated?
YES-Gotostep 10.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
YES-Go to step 10.
sensor and the PCM. Ifthe screen indicates NOT
11-398
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.15 in.Hg, 54.7 mmHg), or
4.90 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 15.
BACK
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.1 to
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC4(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
YES-Go to step 32.
(A25) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
22. Disconnect PCM connector A(49P).
23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
=
NO-Go to step 32.
25. Replace the FTPsensor (see page 11-423).
(cont'd)
11-399
BACK
EVAP;System
Is DTC P0452 indicated? '.
YES-Check far poor connections or loose
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 31.
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
result comes on.
terminals at the FTPsensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 34.
11-400
result comes on.
BACK
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
HDS.
/s about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2

FTP (LT GRN) U SG4 (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
HDS.
/s about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 26.
15. Measure voltage between FTPsensor3Pconnector

VCC4 (ORN) LwJ SG4 (GRN)
/s there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-401
BACK
EVAPSystem
SG4(GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
YES-Go to step 34.
11-402
FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
FTP(LTGRN)
JUMPER WIRE
=
FTP
GRN)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 34.
BACK
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-423).
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 33.
result comes on.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 37.
connections or .Ioose terminals at the FTP sensor
result comes on.
11-403
BACK
EVAPSystem
DTC P0455: EVAP System Very Large Leak
Detected
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak
Detected
INOTICEI
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure.
Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
NOTE:
Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible,
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to
the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank), just before
starting these procedures.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "TIGHTEN
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight,
then it clicks.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 22.
11-404
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the
fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 6.
BACK
8. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel
tank vapor recirculation tube.
/s the tube OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-
Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page
9. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube
(A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
A
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from
the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a T-fitting (C) from the
vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge,
0-30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose'(A) as shown.
11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads
1.90 V --'2.0 kPa (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
13. Monitor the FTPSENSOR in the DATA LlSTfor
1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V 0.3 kPa
(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
':1. .. 405
BACK
EVAP,System
14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HOS.
15. Oisconnectthe fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP
canister vent shut valve (B), and plug the EVAP
canister vent shut valve port (C).
16. Apply vacuumto the EVAP system until the FTP
reads 1.90 V -2.0 kPa (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg).
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LlST.for
1 minute with the HOS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V 0.3 kPa
(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 18 ..
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve,
then go to step 21.
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
Is the line OK?
YES-Replace these parts, then go to step 21:
FTP sensor O-ring
EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
EVAP canister
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge
hose, then go to step 21.
11-406
19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HOS.
20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
Fuel fill pipe
Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK?
YES-Check the fuel tank unit base gasket
(see page 11-343), and check the fuel tank, then go
to step 21.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go
to step 21.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 26.
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
Is OTe P0455 and/or P0456 indicated?
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister
purge valve, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
BACK
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel
Fill Cap Loose or Missing
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight,
then it clicks.
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Oothe EVAP FUNCTION TEST inthe INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-424).
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
10. Select EVAPCVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
Does the valve operate?
YES-Check the routing ofthe EVAP canister vent
tube, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
11-407
BACK
EVAPSystem
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-424).
15. Reset the PCMwith the HDS.
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 23.
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve. ,
11-408
21. Do the PCM idle. learn procedure (see page 11-311).
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
, .YES-Go to step 23.
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
termina.ls at theFTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
BACK
OTC P0496: EVAPSystem High Purge Flow
3. 00 the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-423).
9. 00 the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
then go to step 1.
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister
purge valve, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
11-409
BACK
EVAP'System
DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow
Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hgj 07JAZ-001000B
3. Select EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
at the FTP sensor and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
the EVAP canister purge line between the throttle
body and the EVAP canister.
Is the line OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge
line, then go to step 23.
11-410
5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (B).
A
B
BACK
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge
line (at the EVAP canister side), and connect the
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown.
07JAZ-0010008
7. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose.
8. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (8). Connect the T-fitting (C)
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/
gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose (D) as shown.
B
07 JAZ-001 0008
11. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose.
13. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose
between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 23.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
(cont'd)
11-411
BACK
E\I AP System
14. Connectthe vacuum pump/gauge;'0-30 in.Hg, to
the vacuum hose (A) as shown.
Is there vacuum?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose
between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
throttle body, then goto step 23.
17. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector
connected (see page 11-423).
11-412
18. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum pump/
gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, and the vacuum pump to the
FTP sensor (B) as shown.
07JAZ-001000B
\
19. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
20. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
BACK
21. Check the FTPSENSQR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the value change?
YES-Check for debris or blockage at the EVAP
canister port, then go to t ~ p 23.
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Replace the FTPsens()r (see page 11-423).
23. Reconnect all hose.
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete .
at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
~ 4 3
BACK
EVAPSystem
DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Control Circuit Low Voltage
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 4.
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM .
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
~ 4 4
9.:Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
YE,S,-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EvAp
canister vent shut valve and the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI relay), then g'o to step 18. '
11. At the valve side,' measure resistance between
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
Is there about 25- 30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
VSV
(LTGRN)
Q
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go
to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
VSV(LTGRN}
JUMPER WIRE
=
VSV
(LTGRN)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 24.
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go
to step 18.
17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-424).
(cont'd)
11-415
BACK
EVAPSystem
with the HDS.
terminals atthe EVAP canister vent shut valve and
24. Update thePCM if it does not have the latest
softWare (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
with the HDS.
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
11-416
BACK
Control Circuit High Voltage
with the HDS.
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
TemporaryDTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting ..
BACK
EVAPSystem
DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Circuit Rangel
Performance Problem
Close Malfunction
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
5. Check the FTP SE NSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
Park on neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
YES-Go to step 10.
sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
11-418
12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-424).
13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
with the HDS.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
Does the valve operate?
YES-Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint, then
install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to
step 23.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
BACK
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (B).
18. Check the FTPSENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air
tube or vent, then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 19.
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister
with its connector connected (see page 11-423).
A
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP
canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
step 23.
NO-Replace the FTPsensor(seepage 11-423),
then 'go to step 23.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (If).
26. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Is OTe P1454 and/or P2422 indicated?
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.
P2422 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
11-419
BACK
EVAPSystem
OlC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow
Malfunction
NOTE:
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
troubleshooting for DTC P0496 andP0497 using
freeze data from P145C.
If DTC P0497 and P145C stored at the same time,
check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP canister
purge valve and the EVAP canister, and EVAP
canister purge valve closed stuck.
If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P145C, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for P145C.
P0496, P0497: EVAP system purge flow
11-420
BACK
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 -30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B
When the fuel fill cap warning message does not go off
after fuel fill cap tightened, or the message turned on
frequently, do this troubleshooting procedure.
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 after it's tight, then it
clicks.
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap orthe fuel fill pipe
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
6. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel cap message come on?
YES-Go to step 7.
time .
(cont'd)
11-421
BACK
EVAPSystem
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from th.e EVAP
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment.
Connect the T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge
and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the
vacuum hose (D) as shown.
9. Apply vacuum to the hose about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg,
15 mmHg).
11-422
11. Select the EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Release the vacuum immediately?
YES-Check for vacuum hose blockage between
the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
canister, then go to step 12.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
17. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel fill cap message come on?
YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete .
BACK
FTP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A).
22Nm
12.2 kgfm. 16lbfft)
2. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector (A) and
tube (8).
3. Remove the FTP sensor (C).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A) and EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector (8).
2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve and the
bracket (C).
A
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (A) from the
bracket (8).
11-423
BACK
EVAPSystem
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-425).
2. Pry the lock tabs outward (A), then remove the
EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with oil.
11-424
BACK
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank guard (A).
I ~ ~ ~ ~
~ 6
22Nm
12.2 kgf.m, 16lbfft)
2. Remove the hoses (A), the FTP sensor 3P connector
(8), and the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector (e).
A B
3. Remove the bolts (D).
4. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (E).
A
o
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket (A).
11-425
BACK
EVAPSystem
EVAP Canister Filter Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A).
A
!
B
, ~ 9 8 N m
V" (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
2. Remove the EVAP canister filter and bracket (8).
3. Remove the EVAP canister filter (A) from the
bracket (8).
_____ 9.8 Nm
~ (1.0kgfm,
~ 7.2 Ibf.ft)
I
B
11-426
BACK
Transaxle
Automatic Transmission .................................. 14-1
Rear Differential ................................................ 15-1
Driveline/Axle ................................................... 16-1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is
required)
The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub,a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included inthis Service Manual,. ,
Items marked with an asterisk( ","j on the cont,ants page inciude or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions andtools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura, dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, whiyh could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work s\1ould be done by an Acura dealer.
collision, or the airbags may deploy. "
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related componentsare located in the steering
in the roofside, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
I
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools: ................... ; ..... ........................ 14-2
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-4
DTCTroubleshooting Index .......................... 14-11
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-15
System Description ........................................ 14-28
Road Test .......................................................... 14-235
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-.237
Pressure Test .............................................. : ... 14-238
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement ...... 14-242
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement ... , ........................................... 14-242
AfT Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve A
Test ............................................................... 14-246
Replacement ............... : ............................... 14-252
Solenoid Valve B
Test ............................................................... 14-249
Replacement ............................................... 14-252
. Solenoid Valve C
. ,,'> . Test ............................................................... 14-254
Replacement ............................................... 14-257
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor
Replacement ............................................... 14-259
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
Replacement ............................................... 14-260
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement .................................. 14-261
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ....... 14-264
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-265
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-266
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement ........ 14-268
Transfer Assembly Inspection ...................... 14-269
Transfer Assembly Removal ......................... 14-270
Transfer Assembly Installation ..................... 14-272
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement .......... 14-274
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-275
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-287
ATF Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 14-300
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ..................... 14-302
ATF Cooler Replacement ............................... 14-303
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-304
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-305
Shift Lever Knob Replacement ..................... 14-305
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-306
Shift Lever Bracket Base Replacement ........ 14-307
Shift Lever Boot Replacement ...................... 14-308
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-309
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-311
Transmission Disassembly ........................... 14-333
Transmission Reassembly ............................ 14-401
AfT Gear Position Indicator
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-314
Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-315
Transmission Range Switch
Replacement ............................................... 14-316
Transmission Gear Selection Switch
Test ............................................................... 14-319
Replacement ................................. ' .............. 14-319 .
AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Light Harness Replacement .: ................. 14-320
. AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel'
Light Bulb Replacement ......................... 14-320
AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Replacement ............................................ 14-308
AfT Interlock System
. Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-322
Shift Lock System Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-323
* Key Interlock System Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-328
Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-330
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-330
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion
Replacement ............................................... 14-331
Shift Lock Release Replacement ................... 14-331
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-332
Park Pin Switch Replacement ....................... 14-332
Transmission Housing
Reverse Idler Gear
Removal/Installation .................................. 14-339
Reverse Idler Gear Disassembly/
Inspection/Reassembly .............................. 14-339
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
Removal ....................................................... 14-340
Installation ................................................... 14-340
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap,
Feed Pipe Replacement .............................. 14-341
ATF Filter Removal/lnspection/
Installation ................................................... 14-341
Mainshaft Bearing
Removal ....................................................... 14-342
Installation ................................................... 14-342
Intermediary Shaft Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-343
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-343
Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-344
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement ............................................... 14-344
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-345
Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-346
Main Valve Body Disassembly, .
Inspection, and Reassembly ................... ,. 14-347
ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-348
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly,' .
Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... : 14-349
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-350
Accumulator Body Disassembly,
Shift Solenoid Valve
Removal and Installation ........................... 14-352
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Replacement ............................................... 14-353
Countershaft Bearing Replacement ............. 14-354
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ....... 14-355
Replacement ............................................... 1 4 ~ 3 5 7
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-358
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-359
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement ................. 14-360
Countershaft Disassembly ............................ 14-361
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear
Axial Clearance Inspection ........................ 14-363
Countershaft Reassembly ............................. 14-365
Secondary Shaft Disassembly ...................... 14-367
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection .................................................... 14-370
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection ............ 14-372
1st Clutch Hub Replacement ......................... 14-373
Secondary Shaft Reassembly ....................... 14-374
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-375
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly,
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Removal ....................................................... 14-380
Installation ................................................... 14-380
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection .................................................... 14-381
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-383
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-384
Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-389
Clutch Wave-Plate Phase Difference
Inspection .................................................... 14-390
Clutch Clearance Inspection .......................... 14-391
Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-396
AfT Differential
Component location Index .............. ............. 14-412
Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-412
Differential Carrier" Final Driven Gear, and
Transfer Drive Gear Replacement ............. 14-413
Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-414
Oil Seal Replacement ................................... 14-415
Carrier Bearing Outer Race .
Replacement ............................................... 14-416
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection .............. : 14-418
Transfer Output Shaft
Component Location Index ........... : ............... 14-421
Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Replacement ......................... :.: ................... 14-421
Oil Seal Replacement ..................... : ............... 14-422
Transmission Housing Bearing
Replacement .............................. ................ 14-423
Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............. ................. 14-424
Transfer Assembly
Inspection ....................................... .' ................. 14-425
Disassembly .......... : ..... \.................................... 14-426
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-429
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear)
Bearing Removal/Installation .................... 14-430
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing
Outer Race Replacement ........................... 14-431
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing
Outer Race Removal/Installation ............... 14-433
Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement .......... 14-434
Reassembly ..................................................... 14-435
BACK
Special Tools
CD
07GAB-PF50101 Mainshaft Holder 1
07GAD-PG40100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07GAD-SD40101 Attachment,78 x 90 mm 1
<D 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
07HAD-SG00100 Attachment, 83 mm
. 1
@ 07JAD-PH80101 , ,Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
(j) 07JAD-SH30100
,
i' . Attachment, 65 mm . 1
07 LAD-PW5060 1
. ,
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1

07LAE-PX40100
..
I .
Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
> 07MAD-PR90100 Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 1
07MAF-SP0011A
' , . -,';'
Tapered Bearing Race Installer A 1
';
@ 07MAF-SP0013A Installer Shaft 1
@ 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 3
@ 07MAJ.-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose Adapter 3
@ 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
@ 07XAA-002010A Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 1
07XAB-0010101
,
Companion Fiange Holder 1
@ 07ZAE-PRPO 1 00 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
I
'"
" .
"
@ 070AG-SJAA 1 OS Frame Positi,oning Guide Pin 1
> 070AJ-0020101 Preload Inspection Tool 1
may also be used to substitute one of 07 LAE-PX40 1 00.

,e.
, ,
@

CD <D

@

;;@:>6

8
@ (j)
>
0

Q
0

@ @ @ @

/
r
@

@ @
>
14-2 BACK
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Cltv
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 AfT Clutch Pressure Gauge Set/Panel 1
@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm 1
@ 07741-0010201 Sliding Hammer Weight 1
077 46-0010200 Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
077 46-00 1 0500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
077 46-00 10600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
@) 077 46-0030 100 Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 1
077 46-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm 1.0. 1
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@) 07936-1660101 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 12 mm 1
@ 07936-3710100 Bearing Remover Shaft Handle 1
@ 07936-3710600 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 20 mm 1

07936-8890300 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 30 mm 1
07936-GE00100 Bearing Remover Shaft, 10 mm 1
@ 07936-GE00200 Bearing Remover Head, 10 mm 1
@ 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A must be used with commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer.
~
[ ~ ~ ~ J
~
~

@
@@@
@)
S
~

@ @) @ @
~

fJ

@ @
14-3 BACK
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D
indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (8) will usually
blink.
B
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located behind the
driver's dashboard lower cover), it will indicate the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch
is turned ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected.
14-4
Ifthe D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), select NT system,
and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and NT DTCs,
and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the
fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more NT DTCs, and no problems were
detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the
PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, a nd then recheck for a DTC. If the NT DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC
Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or
the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the
sequence listed, until you find the problem.
BACK
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode
(retrieving the flash codes)
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to
retrieve the P-code.
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge
assembly (8) will usually blink.
B
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the
HDS to the DLC (A) (located behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover). Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
select SCS mode, then the D indicator will indicate flash
the DTC.
If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this
procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode,
then observe the D indicator in the gauge assembly.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short
blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series
of long and short blinks. One long blink equals
10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks
together to determine the code.
Example: DTC 1-1
Short blink (once)
O ~ ~ __________ _
Example: DTC 15-5
Long blink Short blinks (five)
lfUliiJ1Jl_
10 + 5 =
15
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and AfT DTCs.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the
fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more
AfT DTCs, and no problems were detected in the
fuel and emissions circuit ofthe PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
data, and then recheck for DTC. If the AfT DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont'd)
14-5
BACK
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Connectors
NOTE: The PCM overwrite data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 15 minutes after the. ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Connect the HDS to the .oLC (A), and jump the SCS
line with the HDS.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the
DTC troubleshooting, with a commercially
available digital multimeter, patch cords, and pin
probes at PCM harness connectors.
3. Remove the bracket (A), then free the AlC discharge
line from the clip (8). Remove the AlC suction line
mounting bracket bolt (C), then remove the PCM
cover (D) and disconnect PCM connectors (E).
c
B
14-6
4. Check the connector inspection port (A) size, and
select a suitable pin probe.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminal to a
digital multi meter (8), and connect the other side of
the patch cord terminals to a commercially
available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool
No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
c
6. Gently slide the pin probe into the inspection port
at the connector terminal side. Always use the
inspection port. Do not slide the probe into the
connector terminals.
I NOTICE I
For accurate result, always use the pin
probe (male).
To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
BACK
Clear AfT DTCs Procedures
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
OBDStatus
The OBD status shows the current system status of:
each DTC and all ofthe parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
PASSED: On board diagnosis is succesSfully finished.
FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
How to Enda Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped;
2. Turn the ,ignition switch :OFF.
30 seconds.
HDS from the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311 )'.
! .
6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it
. up to normal operating temperature (the. radiator
fan comes on).
7. To verify that the, problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
(50 km/h) or. under the same conditions as those
indicated by the r e e ~ e data.
',1
(cont'd)
14-7
BACK
..... ,
' .. : .
PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing
Honda diagnosis system (HDS) TDSGD2200
Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570
HDS pockettesterTDSS3557011401
Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
Use this procedure when you have to update the PCM
during troubleshooting procedures.
How to Update the PCM
NOTE:
Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.
Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there isa problem with the updatei leave the .
ignition switch ON. '
To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC;
power windows, moonroof, door locks, and whatnot)
during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
You cannot update a PCM with a program it already
has. It will only accept a new program.
High temperature in the engine compartment might
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine has been running before this procedure,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent PCM damage.
14-8
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not start the
engine.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-223). If you are returning from the
DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and
clean the throttle body after you update the PCM
(see page 11-363).
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnosis system, then select the
update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
update the PCM.
BACK
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you Were doing. If the software in
the PCM is notthe latest, follow the instructions on
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI
system or the AfT system, make sure you update
both.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to
cool the PCM,foliow the instructions on the screen.
If you run into a problem during the update
procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes,
status bar goes over 1000/0, D or immobilizer light
flashes, HDS tablet freezes, and whatnot), follow
these steps to minimize the chance of damaging
the PCM:
o Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
o Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
o Shut down the HDS.
o Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
o Reboot the HDS.
o Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. If the
TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-363).
10. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
How to Substitute the PCM
equipped).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-223). If you are returning from the
DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 to 6, and
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-363).
6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS;
CHECK, and follow the HDSscreen prompts.
NOTE: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
(cont'd)
14-9
BACK
A\ltomatic Transmission
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery,
10. Remove the bracket (E), then free the AlC discharge
line from the clip (F). AlC suction line
mounting bracket bolt (G).
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
\
E
16. Selectthe.lMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enterthe immobilizer codeusJng the PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to the engine.
19 .. Selectthe ETCS TEST, thenselectthe TPPOSITION
CHECK, and follow,the HDSscreen prompts. Ifthe
TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body
(see. page 11-363).
20. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page .11-311).
, .
21. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock.
(see page 17-28).
G 24. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
B
11. Remove the PCM cover (D), disconnect PCM
connectors A, B,and C, and remove the mounting
bolts, then remove the PCM.
12. Install the PCM and pattery cables in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE:. If DTC P0630"VIN not Programmed.or
Mismatch" will be because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
14. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
software.
14-10
(see page 22-259).
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze dataandreview,General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) before you
troubleshoot.
Ole' 111
0 MIL Detection Item, Page
Indicator
0
P0107 (12-7) Blinks OFFor Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-84)
ON'I31
low voltage input
P0108 (12-8) Blinks OFFor Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-85)
ON'I31
high voltage input
P0335 (88-2) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A no signal (see page 14-86)
ON'I31
P0339 (88-6) Blinks OFFor Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A intermittent (see page 14-87)
ON'I31
interruption
P0340 (126-2) Blinks OFFor Camshaft position (CMP) sensor no signal (see page 14-88)
ON',I31
P0344 (126-6) Blinks OFFor Camshaft position (CMP) sensor intermittent (see page 14-89)
ON'(3)
interruption
P0385 (125-2) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CMP) sensor B no signal (see page 14-90)
ON'I31
P0389 (125-6) Blinks OFFor Crankshaft position (CMP) sensor B intermittent (see page 14-91)
ON'I31
interruPtion
P062F (0-7) Blinks OFF or Powertrain control module (PCM) internal control (see page 14-92)
ON'(3)
module keep alive memory (KAM) error
P0705 (5-2) '121 Blinks ON Transmission range switch (see page 14-93)
(multiple shift-position input)
P0706 (6-2) '121 OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see paQe 14-99)
P0711 (28-5)' 121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (range/performance) (see page 14-103)
P0712 (28-3)'121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (short) (see page 14-104)
P0713 (28-4),121 Blinks OFF ATFtemperature sensor (open) (see paQe 14-106)
P0716 (15-5)'121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-109)
(ranQe/performance)
P0717 (15-3)'121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-109)
(no siQnal input)
P0718 (15-6)'121
Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-115)
(intermittent failure)
P0721 (9-5)'121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-120)

P0722 (9-3) '121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-120)
(no signal input)
P0723 (9-6)' 121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-126)
(intermittent failure)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
before the - (hyphen) is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is connected
to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous with the AfT DTC.
(cont'd)
14-11
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) before you
troubleshoot.
DTe'"1 0 MIL, Detection Item Page
Indicator
a
P0731 (64-1) Blinks OFF 1st gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-131)
P0732 (64-2) Blinks OFF 2nd gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-132)
P0733 (64-3) Blinks OFF 3rd gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-133)
P0734 (64-4) Blinks OFF 4th gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-134)
P0735 (64-5) Blinks OFF 5th gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-135)
P0741 (40-3) OFF OFF Torque converter clutch circuit performance or (see page 14-136)
stuck OFF
P0746 (76-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-137)
stuck OFF
P0747 (76-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-138)
stuck ON
P0751 (70-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck OFF (see page 14-139)
P0752 (70-4) Blinks, ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck ON (see page 14-140)
P0756 (71-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck OFF (see page 14-141)
P0757 (71-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON (see page 14-142)
P0761 (72-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck OFF (see page 14-143)
P0762 (72-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON (see page 14-144)
P0766 (73-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck OFF (see page 14-145)
P0767 (73-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck ON (see page 14-146)
P0776 (77-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch preSsure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-147)
stuck OFF
P0777 (77-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-148)
stuck ON
P0796 (78-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-149)
stuck OFF
I
P0797 (78-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-150)
stuck ON
P0812 (65-2)'121 Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP R switch (see page 14-151)
P0815 (24_2)'121
Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch upshift (see page 14-154)
switch (short or stuck ON)
P0816 (24-6)'121 Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch downshift (see page 14-156)
switch (short or stuck ON)
NOTE:
transmission.
14-12
BACK
troubleshoot.
Ole-I" 0 MIL Detection Item Page
Indicator
to
P0842 (25-3) -12' Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-158)
(short or stuck ON)
P0843 (25-4) -12' Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-160)
(open or stuck OFF)
P0847 (26-3) -12}
Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-163)
(short or stuck ON)
P0848 (26-4) -12' Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-165)
(open or stuck OFF)
P0872 (27-3)'12' Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-168)
(short or stuck ON)
P0873 (27-4) -12,
Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-170)
-
(open or stuck OFF)
P0957 (27-4) -12,
Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-173)
(short or stuck ON)
P0958 (24-4) -12,
Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-175)
(short or stuck OFF)
P0962 (16_3)-12)
Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-178)
(open/short)
P0963 (16-4) -12}
Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-182)
P0966 (23-3) -12' Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-184)
(open/short)
P0967 (23-4) -12' Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-188)
P0970 (29-3) -12,
Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-190)
(open/short)
P0971 (29-4) -12,
Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-194)
NOTE: '
transmission.
(cont'd)
14-13
BACK
troubleshoot.
DTC'(l)
D MIL Detection Item Page
Indicator
to
P0973 (7-3) '(2)
Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (short) (see page 14-196)
P0974 (7-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (open) (see page 14-199)
P0976 (8-3)' (2)
Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (short) (see page 14-202)
P0977 (8-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (open) (see page 14-206)
P0979 (22-3)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (short) (see page 14-209)
P0980 (22-4)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (open) (see page 14-213)
P0982 (60-3)' (2) . Blinks ON Shift solenbid valve D (short) (see page 14-216)
P0983 (60-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D (open) (see page 14-219)
P16CO (99-1)'12) OFF ON PCM AfT control system incomplete update (see page 14-222)
P1717 (62-1)'12) Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP RVS switch (see page 14-223)
(open or short)
P1743 (45-11) Blinks OFF Hydraulic control system (see page 14-226)
(Shift valve E stuck OFF)
(Shift valve E stuck ON)
(Servo control valve or servo valve stuck OFF)
P1780 (49-1) Blinks OFF Shift control system .(transmission default mode) (see page 14-229)
P2122 (20-3) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (see page 14-230)
(throttle position sensor D) circuit low voltage
P2123 (20-4) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (see page 14-231)
(throttle position sensor D) circuit high voltage
U0028 (107-1) Blinks OFF or F-CAN malfunction (F-CAN bus OFF) (see page 14-232)
ON ,(3)
U0122 (107-4) Blinks OFFor F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-233)
ON '(3)
(PCM-to-VSA modulator-control unit)
U0155 (107-3) Blinks OFF or F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-234)
ON'(3).
(PCM-to-gauge control module)
NOTE:
* (1): TheDTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous with the AfT DTC.
14-14
BACK
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When yeu turn the .... F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
ignitien switch ON Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
(11), the 0 indicater PCM defective Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
cemesen and centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
stays en in all shift 22-317).
lever pesitiens, er Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
it never cemes en medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
at all functien (see page 22-315).
AfT gear pesitien F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
indicater dees net Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
ceme en while the PCM defective Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
shift lever is in that Transmissien range switch centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
pesitien defective 22-317).
Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
medule by gauge centre I medule self-diagnestic
. ~ functio.n (see page 22-315).
Inspect the transmissien range switch (see page
..
14-315) .
M indicater dees F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer c:heck the F-CAN cemmunicatien I.ine fer a DTC
net ceme en in M Gauge centrol medule defective (see page 22-325).
pesitien PCM defective Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
22-317).
Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centre I
medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
functien (see page 22-315).
Inspect the transmissien gear selectien switch
(see page 14-319).
Shift indicater F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
dees net werk in Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
sequential PCM defective Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
spertshift mede centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
22-317).
Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
functien (see page 22-315).
Inspect the transmissien gear selectien switch
(see page 14-319).
(cent'd)
14-15
BACK
i.'
, ~ , '
'.
Auto'matic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Shift"lever cannot Accelerator pedal position sensor Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
be moved from P circuit
. ,
(see page 14-323) .
while you are Accelerator pedal position sensor Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
pressing on the defective Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
brake pedal Brake pedal position switch circuit 14-315).
Brake pedal position switch
'.
defective
Shift lock solenoid ,defective
Shift lock solenoid control circuit
Shift lock solenoid mechanism
Throttle body defective
Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened .
Ignition switch Interlock control system circuit Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-328).
from ACC (I) to Park pin switch stuck ON Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
LOCK (0) (key is Transrnission range switch ATP P 14-315).
pushed in, shift line opened
lever in P)
HOS does not OLC circuit Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
communicate with
the PCM or the
vehicle
14-16
BACK
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
move in any gear adjustment necessary, clean theATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between shift cable Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
and transmission or body is the transmission control lever.
worn Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn orbinding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
worn noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged Check the line pressure.
7. Foreign.material in separator Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
plate orifice clogged, find the damaged components that
8. Mainshaft worn or damaged caused the debris.
9. Countershaft worn or damaged Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
10. Final gears worn or damaged the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
11. Park mechanism defective differential assembly,. replace. the ATF strainer,
12. Drive plate worn or damaged and thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean
13. Torque converter worn or the cooler and lines. Replace the torque
damaged converter.
14. Tra nsm ission-to-engi ne Be careful not to damage the torque converter
assembly error housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
15. Axle disengaged You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
: damage.
Vehicle moves in R, 1. 1st accumulator defective Check the 1st and 5th clutch pressures.
but not in D, D3, or 2. Idler gears wOrn or damaged Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
1st in M 3. 1st clutch defective clutch assembly for wear and damage.
4. 5th clutch defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top disc clea ra nce. If the clea ra nce is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
(cont'd)
14-17
BACK
Vehicle moves in 1st gear one-way clutch defective Check the 1st clutch pressure .
M and R, but not in 1st gears worn or damaged Inspect the 1st gears and one-way clutch for wear
DorD3 1st clutch defective and damage .
Inspect the 1st clutch for wear and damage.
Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
a set. Ifthe wave-plate height is out oftolerance,
Vehicle moves in D, 1st-hold clutch defective Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
D3, 2nd in M, and Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
R, but notin 1st in clutch assembly for wear and damage.
M Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
Vehicle moves in D, 1. 2nd accumulator defective Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
D3, 1st in M, and R, 2. 2nd clutch defective Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch
but notin 2nd in M assembly for wear and damage.
Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
14-18
BACK
Vehicle moves in 0, 1. Shift fork shaft stuck Check the 5th clutch pressure.
03, and M, but not 2. 5th accumulator defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
in R 3. 5th clutch defective fork shaft.
4. Reverse gears worn or damaged Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers,
5. Reverse idler gear shaft/holder and inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of
worn or damaged the countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and the reverse
selector ifthey are worn or damaged. Ifthe
transmission makes clicking, grinding, or
whirring noises, also replace the mainshaft 5th
gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th
gear.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainerfor
to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
starting off in 0, adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
03, and R 3. Torque converter one-way clutch Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
defective the transmission control lever.
4. Stator shaft defective Check the line pressure.
5. ATF pump worn or binding Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe strainer is
6. Regulator valve,stuck or spring clogged, find the damaged components that
worn caused the debris.
7. ATF strainer clogged Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
8. Torque converter check valve converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
defective The symptom is mostly an rpm-related ticking
9. Shift valve E defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
proper tools.
(cont'd)
14-19
BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. 1st accumulator defective Check the 1st clutch pressure.
flares when 2. 1st clutch defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in 0, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
03, and R; stall wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
speed high in 0 to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
and 03 tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
Poor acceleration; 1st-hold clutch defective Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
flares when Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
starting off in 0, clutch assembly for wear and damage.
03, and R; stall Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in 1st in valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
M wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate .
Poor acceleration; 2nd accumulator defective Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
flares when 2nd clutch defective Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch
starting off in 0, assembly for wear and damage.
03, and R; stall Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in 2nd valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
inM wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
14-20
BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
flares when adjustment the transmission control lever.
starting off in 0, 2. 5th accumulator defective Check the 5th clutch pressure.
03, and R; stall 3. 5th clutch defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in R valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
a set. Ifthewave-plate height is out oftolerance,
Poor acceleration; 1. Engine output low Replace the torque converter.
flares when 2. Torque converter clutch piston
starting off in 0, defective
03, and R; stall
speed low
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
vibration 2. Engine output low Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
3. Torque converter clutch piston lines for leakage and loose connections. If
defective necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
Replace the torque converter.
(cont'd)
14-21
BACK
Symptom Probable cause(s)
~ .
Notes
Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF . Check the ATF level, and drain theATF if
2. ATF temperature sensor necessary.
defective Check all clutch pressures.
3. 'Foreign material in separator Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
4. Relief valve defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
5. Lubrication control valve to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
6. 1st-hold clutch defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
7. 1 st cI utch defective wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
8. 2nd clutch defective worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
9. 3rd clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
10. 4th clutch defective replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
11. 5th clutch defective OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
12. Clutch end plate clearance
incorrect
13. Needle bearing seized up, worn,
or damaged
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. Shift solenoid valve B defective connectors.
D or D3,or 3. Shift solenoid valve C defective Inspect the O-ring', and check the shift solenoid
excessive shock 4. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure ..
when shifting . solenoid valve C defective Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
5. Shift cable broken or out of valve body gasket andATF feed pipes for wear
adjustment and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
6. Connection between shift cable solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
and transmission or body is Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
worn the transmission control lever.
7. ATF temperature sensor Check the 1st clutch pressure.
defective Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
8. CPC valve C defective clogged, find the damaged components that
9. Foreign material in separator caused the debris.
plate orifice Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
10. Shift valve A defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
11. Shift valve D defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
12. Shift valve E defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
13. ATF strainer clogged tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
14. 1st accumulator defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
15. 2nd accumulator defective wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
16. 1st check ball stuck worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
17. 1st clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
18. Clutch end plate clearance replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
incorrect OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
14-22
BACK
Symptom Probable causels) Notes
Late shift after 1. AfT clutch pressure control Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to solenoid valve C defective connectors.
R, or excessive 2. Shift cable broken or out of Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
shock when adjustment valve for seizure.
shifting 3. Connection between shift cable Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
and transmission or body is worn valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. ATF temperature sensor defective and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
5. Reverse CPC valve defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
6. Foreign material in separator Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
plate orifice the transmission control lever.
7. ATF strainer clogged Check the 5th clutch pressure.
8. 5th clutch defective Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
9. Clutch end plate clearance clogged, find the damaged components that
incorrect caused the debris.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end p l t e ~
Transmission does 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not shift sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
Excessive shock or 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on all sensor defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed
downshifts sensor defective
3. ATF temperature sensor defective
4. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
(cont'd)
14-23 BACK
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective Check fora stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 1-2 2. Shift solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshift or 2-1 3. Shift solenoid valve C defective Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
downshift 4. AfT clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
solenoid valve A defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
solenoid valve B defective Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6 .. . AfT clutch pressure control fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
solenoid valve C defective clogged, remove itand clean the connector.
7. 2nd olutchtransmission fluid Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
pressure switch defective Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
8. CPC valve A defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
9. CPC valve B defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
10. CPC valve C defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
11. Shift valve C defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
12. Shift valve D defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
. 13. Foreign material in separator wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
plate orifice worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
14. 2nd accumulator defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out oftolerance,
15. 2nd clutch defective replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
16. Clutch end plate clearance OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
incorrect
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 2-3 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
upshift or 3-2 solenoid valve A defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift 3. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve B defective Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
4. AfT clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
solenoid valve C defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. 3rd clutch transmission fluid solenoid valve is stuck, inspectthe CPC valves.
pressure switch defective Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6. Shift fork shaft stuck fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
7. CPC valve A defective clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
8. CPC valve B defective Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
9. Foreign material in separator Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
10. Servo control valve defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
11. Lock-up shift valve defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
12. 2nd accumulator defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
13. 3rd accumulator defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
14. 2nd check ball stuck wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
15. 2nd clutch defective worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
16. 3rd clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
17. Clutch end plate clearance replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
incorrect OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
14-24 BACK
Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 3-4 solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshift or 4-3 2. AfT clutch pressure control Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoiq
downshift solenoid valve B defective valve for seizure. ~ .
3. AfT clutch pressure control Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve Cdefective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. 4th clutch transmission fluid and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
pressure switch defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6. Foreign material in separator fluid pressure switch connector. Ifthe orifice is
plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
7. Servo control valve defective Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
8. 3rd accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
9. 4th accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
10. 3rd clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
11. 4th clutch defective to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
12. Clutch end plate clearance ' tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
incorrect wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are ..
replace the wave-plate. Ifthe discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 4-5 solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshift or 5-4 2. A/tclutch pressure control .'. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift solenoid valve B defective valve for seizure. '
,.
3. AfT clutch pressure control Inspectthe AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve C defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. Foreign material in separator and damage, If the AfT clutch pressure control
plate orifice solenoid valve is stucki inspect the CPC valves.
5. 4th accumulator defective Checkthe 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
6. 5th accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston, cI!,Jtch piston check
7. 4th clutch defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
8. 5th clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
9. Clutch end plate h ~ r n c e to-top disc clearance. If the clearance iSQut of
incorrect tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
(cont'd)
14-25
BACK
y m ~ o m Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from 1. ATF pumpworn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. ATF strainer clogged converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever 3. Idler gears worn or damaged The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions 4. Bearings on mainshaft, noise or a high pitched squeak.
cbuntershaft, secondary shaft, Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
and intermediary shaft worn or clogged, find the damaged components that
damaged caused the debris:
5. . Thrust washer seized up, llliorn, or Be careful not to damage the torque converter
damaged housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the niain valve body. This will result
,
proper tools. '
Vehicle does not' Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate above' defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in all 1. ATF pumpworn or binding Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
shift lever 2. Torque converter worn or Check the stall speed.
positions damaged Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe ATF
3. Drive plate defective or strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
transmission misassembled aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. Ifthe ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for the
contamination is found, replace the torque
converter.
Shift' lever does 1. Transmission range switch Check for a storedDTC, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
adjustment transmission rantje switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
4. . Manual valve defective Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
5 Selector control shaft worn or the transmission control lever.
. damaged
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
not shift into P adjustment the transmission control lever.
2. Connection between shift cable Check the park pawl, control shaft, and park lever
and transmission or body is worn link for wear and damage. Check if the control
3. Park mechanism defective shaft lever pin is disengage from the manual
4. Secondary ,shaft 2nd gear worn or valve guide.
damaged
Torque converter 1. Torque converter clutch piston Replace the torque converter.
clutch does not defective Check the lock-up control valves.
disengage 2. Lock-up control valve defective
3. Lock-up timing valve defective
14-26 BACK
Torque converter 1. Torque converter clutch piston Replace the torque converter.
clutch does not defective Check the lock-up control valves.
operate smoothly 2. Torque converter check valve
defective
3. Lock-up control valve defective
Torque converter 1 ..
Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
clutch does not adjustment the transmission control shaft.
engage 2. Connection between shift cable Replace the torque converter.
and transmission or body is worn Check the lock-up control valves.
3. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
4. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
5; Torque converter check valve
defective
6. Lock-up control valve defective
AfT gear position 1. Transmission range switch Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
positions adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work
Engine does not Engine rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
14-27 BACK
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission isa combination of a three-element torque converter and a four-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides five forward speeds and reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Shafts, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which mesheswith the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, the secondary shaft, and the intermediary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine
crankshaft. The mainshaft includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and reverse (reverse gear is
integral with the 5th gear). The countershaft includes gears for the final drive, 2nd, idler, 1st, 4th, 5th, and reverse (the
final drive gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includesthe 1st, 1st-hold, and 2nd clutches, and
gears for park, 2nd, idler, and 1st. The intermediary shaft includes the 3rd clutch, and gears for 3rd and 4th. The
countershaft 5th gear and the counters haft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its left end, providing 5th
gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector is moved. The gears on the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
intermediary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain conditions of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, and/or to the secondary shaft,
intermediary shaft, then to the countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in
the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve,
the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valves A, 8, E, CPC valve A, the relief valve, the servo
control valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve, the lubrication control valve,;;the lubrication check valve,
and the ATF pump gears. The secondary valve body contains shift valves C, D, CPC valves 8 and C, the reverse CPC
valve, and the reverse control valve. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the cooler check valve, the
lock-up control valve, and the 3rd accumulator. The accumulator body contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th
accumulators, shift solenoid valves A, 8, C, and D. Fluid from the regulator valve passes through the manual valve to
the various control valves. All the clutch receive fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, 8, C and D, and automatic transmission (AfT) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A, 8, and C, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located
throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send
hydraulic pressure to the clutches. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C control the CPC valves
A and 8, and reverse CPC valve to shift smoothly between lower and higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one ofthe
clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
14-28 BACK
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in the D3
position. The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the
torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates
at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and
volume of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D
pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, the lock-up
control valve, and the lock-up timing valve control the amount of the lock-up conditions. Shift solenoid valve Dis
located on the accumulator body in the transmission, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is mounted on
the transmission housing.
Gear Selection
The shift lever has five positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear range with
automatic shift and sequential sportshift in M (sequential sportshift mode) position, and D3: DRIVE 1 st through 3rd
gear range with automatic shift.
Position
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on secondary shaft. All
clutches are released.
R:REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 5th
clutch engaged.
N:NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D:DRIVE Automatic General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th,
(1st through 5th) shift depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
M: Manual gear shift driving; vehicle can start off in 1st gear, and does not upshift
Sequential automatically. Vehicle can also start off in 2nd gear, and does not upshift and
sportshift downshift automatically. Downshifts automatically to 1st on deceleration to
mode stoP. The 10ck-uQmechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
D3: DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and
(1st through 3rd) down-hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd,
depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 2nd and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates
in 2nd and 3rd gears.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (AIT) Gear Position Indicator
The AfT gear position indicator in the gauge control module (located between speedometer and tachometer) shows
which shift lever position has been selected without having look down at the console.
Shift Indicator and M indicator
When the shift lever is shifted into the M (sequential sportshift mode) position, the M indicator next to the D indicator
comes on, and the shift indicator at the bottom of the tachometer displays the gear selected.
Transfer Assemblv
The transfer assembly consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer output shaft in the
transmission, the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear), the transfer shaft, the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the
companion flange. The transfer assembly is on the rear side of the transmission, beside the differential. The transfer
drive gear on the differential drives the transfer output shaft in the transmission. The transfer output shaft in the
transmission is connected to the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) by splines. Power is transmitted from the transfer
drive gear on the differential to the rear differential via the transfer assembly and the propeller shaft.
14-29
BACK
Clutches and Gears
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduc.ed into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise; when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
Transmission Cutaway View
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
REVERSE IDLER
GEAR SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
5TH CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
JIC---- MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
mrnr"--_ COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
14-30'
REVERSE
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR
DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
PARK GEAR
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
BACK
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the left end of the secondary shaft. The 'Ist clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
1st-hold Clutch
The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold in 1st gear in the M position. The 1st-hold clutch is located in the 1st
clutch drum, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the right end of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd'gear, and is located at the end of the intermediary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the intermediary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back tothe 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit
connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft
by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1st-hold clutch hub, with the 1st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way
clutch locks when power is transmitted from the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch
and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in the D position, and in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd
gear ranges in the D3.
However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in the D or D3
position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft causes the one-way clutch
to free-wheel with the 1st clutch still engaged.
(cont'd)
14-31
BACK
Clutches and Gears (cont'd)
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
o 4th gear is engages/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
o 5th gear is engaged/disengages with the mainshaftby the 5th clutch.
o Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft. by the 5th clutch.
o 3rd gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
o Final gear is integral with the countershaft.
o 1st gear, 2nd gear, and 4th gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
o 5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse
gear engage with the countershaft.
o Idler gear is located over the 2nd gear, and rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
o 1st gear is engaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch and the one-way clutch when accelerating, and 1st
gear is disengaged from the 1st clutch at the one-way clutch when decelerating .. 1st gear is engaged with the
secondary shaft by the 1st-hold clutch when decelerating for engine braking.
o 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
o Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
o Park gear is integral with the 2nd gear.
Gears on the intermediary shaft:
o 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the intermediary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
o 4th gear is splined with the. intermediary shaft.
14-32 BACK
Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear, secondary shaft 2nd gear, and countershaft 2nd gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the mainshaft drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the intermediary shaft 3rd gear, but
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. In this position, the
position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from the 0 or R position:
When shifted from the 0 position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 5th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 5th gear engages with the countershaft .
When shifted from the R position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-33
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
D and D3 Positions
In the D and D3 positions, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D
position; and 1st, 2nd, and,3rd gears in the D3 position according to conditions such as the balance between the
accelerator pedal opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
In 1st gear
Hydraulic pressure is appliedto the 1st clutch; then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1 st gear drives the countershaft 1 st gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
14-34
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR ~
~
ONEWAY CLUTCH
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
\ ~ - ~ OUTPUT SHAFT
IHYPOID GEAR)
BACK
In 2nd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven'gear and the transfer drive gear.
o The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT
~ ~ TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
___ - TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
14-35
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 3rd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the intermediary shaft 3rd gear with the
intermediary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the intermediary shaft 4th gear via the intermediary shaft 3rd gear and the 3rd clutch.
o The intermediary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft via the mainshaft 4th gear.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
o The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1 st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1 st gear,
power from 1 st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
14-36
3RDCLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
~ TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
___ -TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
IHYPOID GEAR)
BACK
In 4th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
__ --FINAL DRIVE GEAR
__ - TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEARI
(cont'd)
14-37
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 5th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever in the D position.
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
5TH CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
14-38
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
IHVPOID GEAR)
BACK
Acceleration in 1st gear in M (sequential sportshift mode) position
In 1st gear in the M (sequential sportshift mode) position, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-
hold clutch. The power flow when accelerating is as follows:
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft. idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1 st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st
gear with the secondary shaft.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINS HAFT
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
"'"""' __ --TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
14-39
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
Deceleration in 1st gear in M (sequential sportshift mode) position
The power flow in 1st gear inthe M (sequential sportshift mode) position when decelerating is as follows:
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch.
Rolling resistance from the roadsurface goes through the front wheels to the final driven gear, then to the
countershaft idler gear.
The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
The force conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft idler gear. As
a result, engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
14-40
'.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
BACK
RPosition
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the R position.
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
The rotation direction of the countershaft is changed by the reverse idlefgear.
REVERSE IDLER GEAR 5TH CLUTCH
__ --TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
1lI. ___ -- OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-41
BACK
Auto,matic Transmission
Electronic Control System
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists ofthe powertraincontrol module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
Functional Diagram
The PCM receives input signals from the sensorsiswitches, and other control units, processes data, and O\ltputs
signals for the engine control system and AfT control system. The AfT control system includes shift control, clutch
pressure control, and lock-up control. The PCM switches the shift solenoid,v,alves and the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves to control shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal,

Accelerator Pedal Position

PGM-FI Control System
Sensor Signal
Throttle Position Sensor

Signal (ETCS)
J

Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal

,.
Barometric Pressure

Sensor Signal
A/T Control System
Manifold Absolute

Pressure Sensor Signal
Shift Solenoid Valve A
ATF Temperature

Shift Control
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Sensor Signal

Grade Logic Control

Shift-Hold Control
t
,
SH-AWD Control Unit

Sequential Sportshift
Shift Solenoid ValveC
Signal Control

Cruise Control
Shift Solenoid Valve D
VSA Modulator-control

Downshift -. Autometic
Unit Signal
5-speed
and
Reverse
rp
----. A/T Clutch Pressure
'Ii ----. "
I
Control Solenoid yalve A
I
Transmission
'iii
.(;
Range Switch ----.
Clutch Pressure A/T Clutch Pressure
Signal
1> ----.
Control
I
Control Solenoid Valve B
I
li3 ----.
f
AfT Clutch Pressure
""- Control Solenoid Valve C
l Transmission Gear

Lock-up
Lock-up
Selection Switch Signal
ON/OFF
Lock-up
Input Shaft (Mainshaft)
r--.
AfT Gear Position '--+
Speed Sensor Signal
Indicator
Condition
Indicator Control D Indicator
Output Shaft (Countershaft)
r--.
Shift Indicator
Speed Sensor Signal

M
r--.
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
I
I Pressure Switch Signal
Shift Lock Control " Shift Lock Solenoid
I
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
J--. Pressure Switch Signal
r--.
Self-diagnosis/
.
Vehicle Speed Signal
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Fail-safe Function
Pressure Switch Signal Communication and
.
Data Link Connector
Output function
Brake Pedal Position
r--.
Switch Signal
14-42
BACK
Electronic Control System Component Locations
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)

/ hl PARK PIN SWITCH
SHIFT LOCK ----TRANSMISSION GEAR
SOLENOID SELECTION SWITCH
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEB
(cont'd)
14-43
BACK
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D to control shifting transmission gear.
There are two types of shift solenoid valves:
Shift solenoid valves A and D use the ON-OPEN/OFF-CLOSE type; the shift solenoid valve opens the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and closes the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF .
Shift solenoid valves Band C use the ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN type; the shift solenoid valve closes the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and opens the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are shown in the table.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves
A B C D
D and D3 Shifting from the N position OFF ON OFF OFF
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF OFF orON
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON OFF orON
D Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th ON OFF OFF OFF orON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
Shifting gears between 4th and 5th OFF OFF ON OFF orON
Stays in 5th OFF ON ON OFForON
M 1st OFF ON ON OFF orON
2nd ON ON OFF OFF or ON
3rd ON OFF ON OFF or ON
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
5th OFF ON ON OFF or ON
N Neutral OFF ON OFF OFF
R . Shifting from the P and N positions OFF ON OFF ON
Stays in reverse ON ON OFF ON
Reverse inhibit control OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF ON
14-44
BACK
Shift Control Grade Logic Control
The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D and D3 positions. The PCM compares
actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle position sensor, the
engine coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the
shift lever position signal, ,to, control shifting while the, vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
PCM
I Engine RPM Signal
I
I
,I Engine RPM Control
J
I Transmission Range
Shift Position
Switch Signal
Control
I Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor +l Failsafe Control
Signal
I
Actual rr-
I Throttle Position +!:Drivin
g
Sensor Signal
I
r- Shift Position I-
IRead of ATF I
I Output Shaft I
ITemperature I
l!;
Shift Solenoid Valve A
(Countershaft)
Comparison
~
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Speed Sensor Signal I
Master Target of
with
-
Shift Solenoid Valve C
I
Shifting Position
Signals
Shift Solenoid Valve 0
~ u t Shaft I
( ainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal I
lEon?!
,-,
Selection of
I ATFTemperature
I
Shifting mode
Sensor SIgnal
I
Grade Logic Control
-
?
I Barometric Pressure Calculation of
Sensor Signal :: Gradient
I Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
~
~
" "
Correction of Engine
Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal Data
I Brake Pedal Position r
Switch Signal
Correction of Cruise
I
Control Sienal Data
I VSA Modulator- byDowns ift
control Unit Signal
I
Request Signal
(cont'd)
14-45
BACK
Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCMdetermines that the vehicle is climbing a hill inthe 0 and 03 positions,the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to' prevent the transmission from 'frequently shifting between
2nd and3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, sothe vehicle can run smooth and
have more power when needed.
NOTE:Shift commands stored inthe PCMbetween 2nd and3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and5th gears, enable the PCMto automatically select the most suitable gear accordinq to the magnitude of agradient.
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
1000/0
Q
C
S
CD
C.
e
CD
~
~
50
o
_._._._.- : HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
---- : FLAT ROAD MODE
. - - - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
_.._to_to_to. : MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
Vehicle speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control
When the PCMdetermines that the vehicle is going down ahill inthe 0 and 03 positions, the shift-up speedfrom 4th
to 5th gear, 3rd to 4th gear, andfrom 2ndto 3rd (when the throttle lsclosed) becomes faster than the set speedforflat
road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas. This, incombination with engine braking
from the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There arethree descending
modes with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas, and2nd gear driving areas according to the
magnitude of agradient stored inthe PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th or 4th gear andyou are decelerating while
applying the brakes on asteep hill, the transmission will downshift to alower gear. When you accelerate, the
transmission will then return to a higher gear.
100%
Q
C
s
CD
c.
e
CD
i
.c
....
14-46
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
50
----- : FLAT ROAD MODE
. - - - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
_.._ .._ .._to. : MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
.. : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
1ST
o
Vehicle speed
BACK
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number oftimes the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 3rd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
Shift-Hold Control
When negotiating winding roads, the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when
decelerating at the entrance of a corner, Shift-Hold Control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) ratio as it
negotiates the corner and accelerates out.
When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the PCM will extend the engagement time of 3rd gear and
4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears. This allows the driver to
have more control for both acceleration and deceleration. ,
The PCM monitors the average change in vehicle speed and throttle over time. When these values exceed those for,
normal driving conditions, the shift-up from,3rd to 4th gear and 4th to 5th gear is delayed. This gives more control
over power, and engine braking when the driver is driving aggressively around winding roads. The transmission will
resume the normal shift-up pattern after the PCM determines that normal driving has resumed.
Nf : Throttle and brakes applied ..
Operation pattern of
accelerator
Shift pattern of
conventional
automatic transmission
m ......... m ...
, . ................ -ff: ........................... crr::oJ
11t4. .............. .
ON
3rd
4 h
__
Shift pattern of _..:.:.;=--______________
Shift-Hold Control 3rd .
automatic transmission
(cont'd)
14-47
BACK
Shift Control.; Sequential Sportshift Mode
The MDX transmission is provided a sequential sportshift mode in the D position. In the D position, the transmission
has two shifting modes; the automatic shift mode and the sequential sportshift mode. In the automatic shift mode
used for general driving, the transmission upshifts and downshifts automatically from 1st through 5th gear. In the
automatic shift mode, the shift indicator and the M indicator in the gauge control module do not come on.
The transmission is switched to the sequential sportshift mode by moving the shift lever into the M position from the
D, the automatic shift mode is canceled and the sequential sportshift mode comes into operation. The shift indicator
displays the number of the selected gear,and the M indicator'comes on. In the sequential sportshift mode, the driver
can shift up and down manually froh11stthrough 5th gear byusing the shift lever, much like a manual transmission,
and the transmission must be shifted up and down by using the shift lever. However, the transmission cannot
downshift'aridstays in the current gear ifthe shift lever is pulled while the vehicle is coasting at a speed that would
cause the engine to overcrev by downshifting the transmission, and the shift indicator blinks the number ofthe
selected gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate
speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number ofthe selected gear, the transmission downshifts and the shift
indicator displays the selected gear. The transmission also cannot upshift and stays in the current gear if the shift lever
is pushed while driving below an appropriate upshifting speed, the shift indicator blinks the number of the selected
gear several times, then returns to the nurTlber ofthe current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches the an appropriate
upshift speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number of the selected gear, the transmission upshifts and the
shift indicator displays the selected gear.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st gear automatically. The transmission can
be shifted to 2nd gear by pushing the shift lever while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle can start off in 2nd gear.
The sequential sportshift mode is canceled when moving the shift lever to any position other than M.
14-48
BACK
Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, performs processing data, and outputs current
to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valvesA,.s, and C.
PCM
\ Input Shaft
I
(Mainshaft)
I
Speed Sensor Signal Actual
Driving
\ Output Shaft
I
Shift
Position
(Countershaft)
I
Speed Sensor Signal
I Decision of I
I Accelerator Pedal
I
Shifting Mode
Position Sensor
I
Signal
+ I I Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
I
Current
AIT Clutch Pressure
Master Target of
--.
Controlling Current feedback
Control Solenoid
Valve A, B, and C
I Manifold Absolute r-
Pressure Sensor Signal
l-M::-r
I
I Engine RPM Signal
Correction of
I
Engine Torque
I Barometric Pressure
Signal Data I
Sensor Signal
I
I 2nd Clutch
Correction of
Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Pressure
Pressure Switch Signal
Application
Timing
l3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Correction of
Engine Coolant
14th Clutch I
Temperature
Transmission Fluid
Sensor Signal Data
Pressure Switch Signal I
I Engine Coolant
I
Correction of ATF
Temperature
I
Temperature
Sensor Signal
Sensor Data
I I ATFTemperature
Sensor Signal
I
(cont'd)
14-49
BACK
Lock-up Control
The shift solenoid valve D controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valve D and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C ON, the condition of
lock-up starts. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C regulates and applies hydraulic pressure to the lock-up
control valve to control the volume of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in the D3
position.
PCM
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
I Engine Coolant
'I Temperature Control
I h i f t i n ~ Position
I Contro
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Gradient Control
f+
by Magnitude
'-
Transmission Range I
Failsafe Control
Switch Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal Actual
r+
Driving
~
..... Shift
Throttle Position
Position
Sensor Signal
~ f-+
Master Target
of Controlling
Current
Lock-up Control
Output Shaft
!
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Driving
Lock-up ON/OFF
Control
I Shift Solenoid Shift
f---+ Lockup Condition
Position ValveD
Input Shaft
Information
Control
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal Current
Feedback
A/TClutch
Engine RPM Signal
Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve C
Correction of
_I Lockup Condition ATF Temperature I ATF
Sensor Signal
I
Temperature I Learning Control
Sensor Data
14-50
BACK
PCM AfT Control System Electrical Connections
KiNmONSWITCH
ATTERY
+

1G1
1G1HOTinONlill

,mlSTARTIIIIJ

BRAKE PEDAl
-<f"'......r
I'OSIIlONSWIItH
-<::f"'
BRAKElIGHTS ---l
I
L
PGM-A MAIN RElAY #1
I
I
DATAlINKCONNECTOR
I
I
GAUGE CONTROLMODUlE
CANContJOlier

Sequential
I
=
A/TIndIca1orDriver
-
$$
Driver
@
I 0:0

P
TRANSMISSION
R
RANGE
SWITCH N
!
D
D3
TRANSMISSIONGfARSElECI10N SWIlCH
S-MODE SWITCH
SHIFTSWITCH
-
liT
,
2 3
101
1'
8
9 '0
1"1"
13 'VI'. VI'
,aj20j2'
I22V
2.Xj20
IX
28127j2a
29 30 31SZV V38 373338
... , 42 .. 44
V"
.7 48 49
AI49PI 0
PCM
B42
1G1
B2
VB SOL
Al
VBS012
SHlFTlOCK

SLS
I
M
BKSW
B3
IGP
A32
scs
A48
CANH
A49
CANL
A16
ATPP
C25
ATPR
C26
ATPN
C17
ATPD
C46
ATPD3
C1S
ATPFWD
C19
ATPRVS
A47
S-MOOE
A36
S-UP
A3T
S-ON
PCM HamessCoM_T.rmlnallDcatlons
1234156178910
1"1" 13 "1"1'.1"1" "1
20
1"1
L22J23 2' X 25 X 28
2930313233343536373839
... , 42 IV .. 45 .. vl/l/
BI49P1 Il
Tenninalside offemaJetenninals
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURECONtROL
LSA
C21
SOlENOIDVAlVE A
AffClUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
LSB
810
SOlENOIDVAlVE B
00'
AffClUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
LSC
B21
SOlENOIDVAlVE C
00'
liT
SHA
C20
SHIFTSOlENOIDVAlVE A
SHB
C28
SHIFTSOlENOIDVAlVE 8
SHC
C39
SHIFT SOlENOIDVAlVE C
SHIFT SOlENOIDVAlVE D
SHD
C9
liT
VCCl
B36
838 I
OUTPUTSHAFT
NC
I
ICOUNlBlSHAFIl
SG5
Cli SPEEDSENSOR
835 1
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE '
MAP
J
PRESSURE IMAPI
SGl
B34 SENSOR
Am
C33
ATflEMPERATURE
,---I
SENSOR
VCC2
C12
B37 I
INPUTSHAFT
MN
I
IMAINSHAfT)
SG2
C16 SPEEDSENSOR

EGRP
C34
-
EGRVAlVE
EGR
Cl0 POSII1ONSENSOR
fr
2ND ClUTCHTRANSMISSION
cn A.UID PRESSURE SWITCH
OP2SW
?h-
3RDClUTCHTRANSMISSION
OP3SW
C9 A.UID PRESSURE SWITCH
4TH ClUTCHTRANSMISSION
?h-
C20 I A.UIDPRESSURE SWITCH
OP4SW
?h-
PGl
B40
PG2
81
LGl
C41
LGZ
841
liT
II, 2 3 I_ I
I'
91'01
I" "V
'91201"1
1/24
X" X
26 27 28
V 323334 I/VI
37 38 39
II ..
., 42
"44
.... 47 48 49
CI49PI 0
(cont'd)
14-51
BACK
PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
11 I 2 3 4151617 8 9
1101 111
2 3 4151617 8 9 101 111
2 3
4151 6 17 8 9
10
1
1112
13VV 16,1118 192021 1112 1314115 1617118 92021 1112
1/115 1617118 92021
221 24X 25X
2627 2B 2223 24X 25X 26
1 I II
24X 25 IX
2627 2B
2930 3132V
V
,1136
3736 39 2930 3132133 3435136
3736 39
II /
32
133 34 ,IV
373639
140 41 42 43 I 44 VI 46 47 461491 l40
41 421/144145146 1/ /1/1 1401 41 42 43144145146 4748 491
A(49P)D B(49P) L::,. C(49P) 0
PCM CONNECTOR A (49PI D
number
Al WHT VB SOL2 (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
A2 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed and accelerator released: About 0 V
A8 LTGRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Batterv voltage
A16 GRN ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the P position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P: Battery voltage
POSITION) .'
A32 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) AboutOV
With service check signal opened: About 5.0 V
A36 BLU S-UP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission gear In the M position:
GEAR SELECTION SWITCH selection switch upshift Shift lever pushed toward upshift position: About
UPSHIFT SWITCH) switch signal OV
Shift lever in neutral position: BattE!ry voltage
A37 GRN S-DN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission gear In the M position:
GEAR SELECTION SWITCH selection switch downshift Shift lever pushed toward downshift position:
DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) switch signal About 0 V
Shift lever in neutral position: Batterv voltaae
A47 PUR S-MODE (SEQUENTIAL Detects transmission gear In M position: About 0 V
SPORTSHIFT MODE) selection switch S mode In any position other than M: Battery voltage
switch signal .
A48 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
HIGH)
A49 RED CAN L(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
LOW)
14-52
BACK
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) L::,.
number
B1 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
B2 BlK/YEl VB SOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
B3 VEL/BlK IGP (POWER SOURCE FOR Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
PCM) circuit With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
B10 BRN/WHT lS B (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
B21 GRN/RED lS C (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C .
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B34 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around less than 1.0 V at all times
B35 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: About 1.0 V depending on engine speed
(MAP) SENSOR)
B36 VEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
B37 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor 5.0V
SENSOR) signal With engine running in N position: About 2.5 V
B38 BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0V
SENSOR) signal With drivina: Pulses
B40 BlK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
.
circuit
841 BRN/YEl lG2 (lOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
B42 BlK/YEl IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
.1 With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
(cont'd)
14-53
BACK
PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
111 12 3 4151el7 8 91101
111213W16!11819 20 21
22V 241>< 25X 26 27 2B
29 30 31 32V V Vi36 37 38 39
1140 141 42 43144VI46 47 481491
A (49P) D
11\11
2 3
41 51e1 7
1 11 1213

2223 24l)<:::
251><
Iz9
30 31 32133 34 35136
11401
41
42VI44I45I 46
B (49P) b.
8 9 11 oj
920 21
26V
V
37 3839
V I/VI
11112 34151617 8 91101
I 92021
ILIL 25lX 26 27 2B
ILILIL 373839
Li40141 42 43144J45[46 47 46149\
C(49P) 0
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 0
number
C9 GRN/RED SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In N position, In D and D3 positions during no lock-
VALVED) valve D up condition: About 0 V
In P and R positions, and D and D3 positions during
10ck-l!Q. condition:
C10 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUSTGAS Drives EGR valve With EGRoperating: Duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) with EGR not operating: About 0 V
VALVE)
C12 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
Withjgnition switch OFF: About 0 V
C16 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor Qround Less than 1.0 V at all times
C17 YEL/GRN ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
POSITION) input
C18 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and D3 positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D AND S) switch D and D3 signal In any position other than D and D3: Battery voltage
input
C19 RED/WHT ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P, R, and N positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch P, R, and N position In any position other than P, R, and N: Battery
POSITION) signals voltage
C20 BLU/yEL SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In R position, and 2nd and 3rd in D and D3
VALVE A) valve A positions: Battery voltage
In P and N positions, 1st in D and D3 positions, and
4th and 5th in D About 0 V
C21 RED LS A (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
C25 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch R position signal In any position other than R: Battery voltage
POSITION)
14-54
BACK
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 0
number
C26 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the N position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N switch N position signal In any position other than N: Battery voltage
POSITION)
C27 BLU/BLK OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch sianal With 2nd clutch pressure: About 0 V
C28 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In P, R, and N positions, and 1st and 2nd in 0 and 0
VALVE B) valve B 3 positions, and 5th in 0 position: Battery voltage
In 3rd in 0 and 03 positions, and 4th in 0 position:
About 0 V
C33 BLU/YEL ATFT(ATFTEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.2-4.0 V
SENSOR} sensor signal depending on ATF temperature
With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
C34 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: 1.2-3.0 V depending on EGR
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal valve lift
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
C37 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 4th clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch sianal With 4th clutch pressure: About 0 V
C38 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
C39 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In 1st and 3rd in 0 and 03 positions, and 5th in 0
VALVE C) valveC position: Battery voltage
In P, R, and N positions, 2nd in 0 and 03 positions,
and 4th in 0 position: About 0 V
C41 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
C46 RED ATP 03 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 03 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 03) switch 03 sianal input In any position other than 03: Batterv voltaae
14-55
BACK
Hydraulic Controls.
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the end of the torque converter which is attached to the
engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the .main valve body to the
manual valve, directing pressure to eai:'h of the clutches. Shift solenoid valves A,B', Cand D are mounted on the
accumulator body. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission housing.
ACCUMULATOR BODY
.0
/
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
14-56
____ AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
____ CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
---AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
. . . ______ . SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
_____ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

1.-..-+-- SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

BACK
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valve A,
shift valve B, shift valve D, shift valve E, CPC valve C, the relief valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve,
the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main
valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
LUBRICATION
CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body
LUBRICATION
CHECK VALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE'
TORQUE CONVERTERCHECK VALVE
/ MANUAL VALVE,'
/ SHIFTVALVEE
SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
MODULATOR VALVE
SERVO CPC VALVE A MAIN VALVE BODY
CONTROL VALVE
The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
cooler check valve, the lock-up control valve, the servo valve, and the 3rd accumulator.
o
COOLER CHECK VALVE
o
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
SERVO VALVE/SHIFT FORK SHAFT
(cont'd)
14-57
BACK
Auto:matic Transmission
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out tothe torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under
spring force. According ro the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes.
and the amount of fluid from B' through the torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the
line pressure.
VALVE
ORIFICE
REGULATOR VALVE
From ATF PUMP
To TORQUE CONVERTER
t
j
To LUBRICATION
t VALVE SPRING
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are provided by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
14-58
STATOR SHAFT
REGULATOR VALVE O ~
/ TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR
STATOR SHAFT ARM
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
BACK
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body is on the main valve body. The secondary valve body contain shift valve C, shift valve D,
CPC valve B, CPC valve C, the reverse control valve, and the reverse CPC valve.
SHIFT VALVE D
REVERSE CPC VALVE
SHIFTVALVEC
CPCVALVEB
REVERSE CONTROL VALVE SECONDARY VALVE BODY
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the secondary valve body, and contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
The 3rd accumulator is in the regulator valve body.
o
3RD ACCUMULATOR
\)
\j
1ST-HOLD ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
2ND ACCUMULATOR
1ST ACCUMULATOR
14-59
BACK
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve and lock-up control valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The
torque converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, 8, C, and D ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid
pressure to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve,
and switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8
and C. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to CPC
valves A and 8, and reverse CPC valve.
When shifting between gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one
of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of CPC pressure
and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and CPC pressure is released. Engaging the clutch with
line pressure mode happens when shifting is completed.
H d r P lye rau IC ressurea e 0 or use In e lye rau IC circuit tth P rtf "thhd r
Port Hydraulic Pressure Port Hydraulic Pressure
1 Line SC Shift solenoid valve C
2 Line
- SC'
Shift solenoid valve C
3 Line SD Shift solenoid valve D
3' Line 10 1st clutch
3" Reverse CPC or Line 15 1st-hold clutch
3A Line 20 2nd clutch
38 Reverse CPC 30 3rd clutch
4 Line 40 4th clutch
4' Line 50 5th clutch
4" Line 51 5th clutch
4A CPCA 56 AfT clutchm-essure control solenoid valve A
48 CPC8 57 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8
4C CPCC 5R AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8
5A CPCA 58 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
58 CPC A or Line 90 Torque converter
5C CPC 8 or Line 90' Tor'gue converter
5D CPC 8 91 Torque converter
5E CPCC 91' Torque converter
5F CPCC 92 Torque converter
5G CPCC 93 ATF cooler
5H CPC 8ar Line 94 Torque converter
5J CPC 8 or Line 95 Lubrication ..
5K CPCA or Line 95' Lubrication
5L CPCAor Line 96 Torque converter
5M Line 99 Suction
5N CPCC X Drain
6 Modulator HX High position drain
SA Shift solenoid valve A AX Air drain
S8 Shift solenoid valve 8 -- --
14-60
BACK
N Position
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions ofthe shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA); shift valve A stays on the
left side.
Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure (58); shift valve 8 and shift
valve E stay on the left side.
Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift
valve D move to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve D is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD).
Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows
to the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The manual valve covers the port leading pressure to the clutches,
and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-61
BACK
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
o and 03 Positions: 1st gear shifting from the N position
When shifting to the' D position or S position from the N position, the condition of the shift solenoid valves remain the
same as in the N position. The manual valve is moved to the D position, and uncovers the port of line pressure (4)
leading to CPC valves A and C. The PCM controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and C, AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) flows to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) flows to the CPC valve C. CPC valves A and C regulate line pressure (4), line pressure (4)
becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at the CPC valve C, and becomes CPC A pressure at CPC valve A. CPC C pressure (4C)
becomes 1st clutch pressure. (10) at shift valve D, and 1st clutch pressure flows to the 1st clutch. CPC A pressure (4A)
becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B via shift valves A and C. The 1st clutch and 2nd clutch engage gently
with the CPCpressure mode.
NOTE: When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-62 BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure
(SC) to shift valve C, and shift valve 0 via shift valve E. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve B
remains ON. Shift valves C and 0 are moved to the left side, shift valve 0 switches the port of line pressure (4) and
CPC C pressure (4C) leading to the 1st clutch, and shift valveC switches the port of CPC A pressure (5A) releasing 2nd
clutch pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve 0, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st
clutch is engaged securely with the line pressure mode.
(cont'd)
14-63
BACK
D and D3 Positions: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves Band
C remain ON. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the port of CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd
clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes
CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 2nd clutch
pressure (20) at shift valve B. The 2nd clutch is engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but
no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-64
BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valve C uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch. CPC A pressure (5B) (5K)
changes to line pressure (5B) (5K) and 2nd clutch pressure (20) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is
engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-
way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-65
BACK
D and D3 Positions: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B
remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A)
leading to the 2nd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. The
PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valverB pressure (57) is appliedto
CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B pressure (4B). CPC B
pressure flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the CPC pressure mode. The
1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-66 BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF, and shift solenoid valve B uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve B
pressure (SB) to shift valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and C remain ON. Shift valve B is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (5C), CPC B pressure (5J) leading to the 3rd clutch, and 2nd clutch pressure (20)
releasing 2nd clutch pressure. CPC B pressure (5J) changes to line pressure (5J) and 3r.d clutch pressure (30) is
changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also
engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-67
BACK
o Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed ofthe vehicle reaches the programmed value,thePCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift
solenoid valve C uncovers the port.of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A
remains ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure (4) and CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC A pressure
(4A) leading to the 4th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch p r s s u r ~ control solenoid
valve B pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes
CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A,and becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd clutch pressure (30) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is
engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because ofthe one-
way clutch.
14-68
BACK
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and shift solenoid valve A covers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure
(SA) to the shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves 8 and C remain OFF. The shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch
the port of pressure (58), CPC A pressure (5A) (5L) leading to the 4th clutch, and 3rd clutch pressure (30) releasing 3rd
clutch pressure. CPC A pressure (5L) changes to line pressure (5L) and 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to line
pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no
power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-69
BACK
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A remains
OFF, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
(4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 4th clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B)
leading to the 5th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B
pressure (4B). CPC B pressure (4B) flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (51)
at shift valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the
CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-70
BACK
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve 8 ON, and shift solenoid valve 8 covers the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure
(S8) to shift valve 8. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve C remains ON. Shift valve 8 is
moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (5H), CPC 8 pressure (50) leading to the 5th clutch, and 4th
clutch pressure (40) releasing 4th clutch pressure. CPC 8 pressure (5H) changes to line pressure (5H) and 5th olutch
pressure (51) (50) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st
clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
14-71 BACK
I, .JP-
Driving in 1st gear (engaged with 1st and 1st-hold clutches) in the sequential sportshift mode
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve B pressure (SB); shift valve B and shift
Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift
valve 0 stay on the left side.
Shift solenoid valve 0 is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO).
Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10)'at shift valve 0, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is
engaged. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) is applied to CPC valve C,via the lock-upshift valve. CPC valve C regulates line pressure (4), and
line pressure (4) becomes CPC C pressure (4C). CPC C pressure (4C) flows to shift valve B via shift valves 0, E, and C,
and becomes 1sthold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve B. 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1st-hold
clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch is engaged.
14-72
BACK
R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
valve E stay on the left side;
valve D move to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve D is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the R position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure(3) also flows to the reverse CPC valve,
and becomes reverse CPC pressure (3B) (3"). Reverse CPC pressure (3") becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at the
manual valve, and 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch is engaged with reverse CPC pressure
mode.
(cont'd)
14-73
BACK
R Position: Driving in reverse gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to
the right side to switch the port of line pressure (3') and reverse CPC pressure (3B) leading to the 5th clutch. Line
pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the servo valve and shift valve A, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at
the manual valve. The 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged with the line
pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control
When the: R position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at a speed over 6 mph (10km/h), the PCM
commands shift solenoid valve 0 to remain OFF so that shift solenoid valve o pressure (SO) is not applied to the
reverse control valve. Line pressure (3) stops.at the reverse control valve, and is not applied to the servo valve. No
power is transmitted to the reverse direction.
14-74 BACK
P Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
valve 0 move to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve 0 is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the P position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) atthe manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the
reverse CPC valve and shift valve A, and stops at the manual valve. Hydraulic pressure is not applied the clutches.
14-75
BACK
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism ofthe torque converter clutch operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in
2nd and 3rd gears in the D3 position. The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a
fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes
place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM
optimizes the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift
solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C, the lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve control the amount of lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up is ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
I Power flow I
The power flows by way of:
Engine
l
Drive plate
l
Torque converter cover
l
Torque converter clutch piston
l
Damper spring
l
Turbine
l
Mainshaft
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH PISTON
TORQUE CONVERTER
COVER
DAMPER SPRING
TURBINE
To ATF cooler
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; the torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
I Power flow I
The power flows by way of:
Engine
l
Drive plate
l
Torque converter cover.
l
Pump
l
Turbine
l
Mainshaft
14-76
TORQUE CONVERTER
COVER
TURBINE
MAl NSHAFT
PUMP
BACK
No Lock-up
The PCM commands shift solenoid valve D to remain OFF, and shift solenoid valve D covers the port of shift solenoid
valve D pressure (SD) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side, and uncovers the port
leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side'of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) from
regulator valve becomes torque converter pressure (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side of the
torque converter to disengage the torque converter clutch. The torque converter clutch is OFF.
ll3lllll,II---- --UNEPRESSURE (11
(cont'd)
14-77
BACK
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve 0 ON, and shift
solenoid valve 0 uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift
valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right side of the
torque converter to engage the torque converter clutch. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-
up timing valve. When AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is low, torque converter pressure
(91) from the lock-up timing valve is low. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially. AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C pressure (58) increases, and the lock-up timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port
leading torque converter pressure to high. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure
from the right side of the torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
____ UNE PRESSURE (1)
----A/TCLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE C PRESSURE 158)
14-78
BACK
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58). AfT clutch pressure ,control solenoid valve C pressure (58)
is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valveaod lock-up timing valve
are moved to the left side. Torque,converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter, the
lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve uncovers the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right
side of the torque Torque converter back press\Jre is released fully, and torque converter clutch is engaged
fully.
'i: .. ,.
11t:l1-1.1---- __ UNE PRESSURE (1)
.'",
__ AfT CLUTCH pRESSURE CONTROL VALVE C PRESSURE (58)
1:4-79 BACK
Shift Lever Mechanism
The shift lever has five positions; P, R, N, 0, and 03 positions. The 0 position has two modes; automatic shift mode
and sequential sportshift mode with the shift lever moved to the M position. The shift lever shifts out of the P position
and into the R position with pressing the shift lever button, and the shift lever shifts into the 03 position from the 0
with pressing the shift lever button. The shift lever is engaged with the shift lever link in the P, R, N, 0, and 03
positions. This unit shifts the transmission using the shift cable connected between the shift lever link and the
transmission control shaft.
In the M position, the shift lever is disengaged from the shift lever link, and the shift lever can be used to shift gears
manually between 1 st though 5th, much like a manual transmission.
SHIFT LEVER BUTTON

SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
SHIFT LEVER LINK
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH
14-80
BACK
Shift Lever Mechanism in M Position
When the shift lever shifts to the M position, the shift lever is disengaged from the shift lever link/shift lever pivot, and
the shift lever link lock pops up to engage with the shift lever bracket base; the shift lever link and shifting position in
the transmission are held in the D position. The shift lever link lock is spring loaded, it pops up in the M position, and
does not engage the shift lever link in any position except M.
SHIFT LEVER
LINK LOCK
SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT LEVER L1NKI
SHIFT LEVER PIYOT
The shift lever fits into the M position by using a detent plunger with a spring. When shifting to upshift and downshift
position, the ~ t e n t plunger is depressed by the detent bracket wall, and detent plunger spring puts the shift lever back
into the neutral position. The detent plunger also works in the P position.
DETENT PLUNGER
DETENT SPRING
14-81
BACK
Circuit Diagram - PCM AfT Control System
UNDER-HOODRJSEJRELAY BOX UNDER-DASHRJSEJRELAY BOX
BATTtHY
No.1 1120 AI NoJllGlf50AI
BAT ill
No.l0IlSAI
+
No.lil10Al
IGNITION SWITCH
-0'"'
No.lll1SAI No.1S 120 AI
-"""
"""
I
No211l.5A1

POWERlllAINCONTROL
MODULE IPCMI
TOr
ill
-r- vaSOl
I vaSOL2

-------

=:=
ATPFWO
AfT
GEAR
ATPD3
POSITION
ATPD
INDICATOR -@----
DRIVER
=::
ATPN
CIRCUIT
ATPR
ATPP
CAN
I
CONTROllER DIMMING CIRCUIT
A48 CANH
SEQUENIIAl.
-m
W
SPORTSHIFT
MODESHIFT
0:0 INDICATOR CANl
CIRCUIT
WHT J.
"F F-CAN rr

TRANSCEIVER

SG A2
PO
n..
BLK BIJ(
K
1
-
SHIFT
LOCK G501
A2 SLS
,l' S-MODE
SOLENOID BLK ---I 2 PNK -j}-- PNK
7
BRAKE PEDAL
POSmON SWITCH

WHT----- lTGAN V lTGRN
Ai BKSW
l
S-DN
WHT
t
MUlTJPLEXJNTEGRATEO
V-
CONTROL UNIT IMICUI
-
PCMHamessConnectorTermlnaI Locatfons
,
2 3

7

"
,
2 3

7

,
"
111213 1/,.
VI"
192021
"'2
13141516 1718 192021
22V 24 X 25
X
26 21 28 2223 24 X 25 X 2
2930 3132V 1/38 37383B 1291.. 31 32133 34 3638 31 38 39
.... 424344 / .. 41 48 49 .... 421/44 ....
1/1/1/
AI48PIO BI48PJ "
TermJnol side
14-82
IloI2
B2
Al
C1S
Cli
C46
Cll
C26
C25
A16
All
A3S
A:iI
WHT
VEL
eRN
BIJ({YEl
BIJ(fYEL
WHT
RED/WHT
BLU/YEL
RED
YEL/GRN
REDIBIX
STARTER
CUTRELAY

+
J
.il
BLK
WHT
P 1
11
TRANSMISSION
PUR
BLU
GRN
ST
RANGE SWITCH
TRANSMISSIONGEAR
SELECTION SWITCH
S-MODE
S-UP
=:t :-:l::
GRN : BLU/YEl

G503
,
2 3 . 5

7

"
,',2[/ 1518 1716 192021
V
24X25
X
26Z128
1/1, 1/ 321333'1/ 37383B
.. .. 424344 .... 47 48 49
CI48P1 0
BACK
DATAUIiX

A32
CONNECTOR
IDlCI
[gt.-
B36
OUlM'SHAFT
2 BLU
B38
ICOUNlBlSIfAFTJ
SPEEDSENSOR
. 3 GRN/YEL
el5
[}-
MANIFOLD
2 GRN/I!EII
B36
ABSOLUlE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3 GRN/WHT
B34

C33
ATf
tEMPERATURE
PNJ(---1 ' SENSOR
-
el2
INPUTSHAFT
2 RED
B37
IMAINSIfAFTJ
SPEEDSENSOR
3 GRN/YEL
C16
YELJBLU
WlfTJBU(
EGRVALVE
POSIIION
GRN/YEL
SENSOR
BLU/PIiD

Glo,
BLK
B40
BLK
81
BRN/YEL
C41
BRN/YEL
841
Glo,
11,1 3 I.

1 8

1
",213 1/1 611 18
" 20 211
22 24X 25
><
282128
2930 31321/
.. ., 3839
40" 42 43 .. 1/ .. 47 48 49
AIISP) 0
POWER11!AIN CONTROL
MODULE IPCMI
ToSV
To12V
SCS LSA CZl
VCC1
LSB Bl0
NC
SG6
LSC 821
MAP
SG1
Am
OI'ZSW CZI
OP3SW C38
vccz
NM
SGZ
OI'4SW C31
SHA czo
SHB CZ8
PGl SHC C39
PG2
LGI SHD C9
LGZ
PCMIIamess Connector T "",lnalloca1lons
,

3 . 5
.-r,

,.
I"
1213
"1"1'
171'8 '.20121
2223 24 X 25 "><
2930 31 32 33 34 ,. .. 373839
40 ., 421/ 44 45 48 1/1/1/
811SPI '"
BLUJBU(
BLU/WHT
BLU/YEL
BLU/YEL
GRN/WHT
GRN
GRNIRED

PRESSURE
CONTROl
2 SOLENOID
BLK VALVEA

PIIESSURE
CONTROL
2 SOLENOID
BLK VALVEB
....
PRESSURE
CONTROl
2 SOLENOID
BLK VALVEC
2NOa.UTCH llIANSMISSlON
RlJID PllfSSURE SWITCH
Gl0l
B
3RD a.UTCH TRANSMISSION
B
4l1t a.UTCH TRANSMISSION
RlJIDPRESSURE SWITC1t
B
31--RED
4 I-- ORN
2 I-- GRN
ll--va
12345678910
1"I12V 11>.". ,,1,8,.201.,
24 ">< 25 X 28 XI 28
40 4' 42 43 44 46 46 47 48 49
CI4SP) 0
1
1
1
14-83
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Input
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
3. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is ore P0107 iildicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0107 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-78) .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whetherDTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is ore PO 107 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections and loose
(see page 14-9), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was;
substituted, go to step 1. .
NO-Go to step 8.
14-84
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0107 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate PASSED?
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting .
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
and the, PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If,the HDS
result comes on.
BACK
DTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage Input
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4), .
1. Clear the DrC with the HDS ..
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then tlJrnit OrN(l1)
again.
3. Check whether DTC P0108. is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with theHDS.
Is DTC P010B indicatedjn the PGM-Flsystem?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P01Q8 in ,the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
NO-Go to step 8.
Does the result indicatePASSED?
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troublesho,Oting is
troubleshooti ng .
NO-If theHDS. indicates FAILED, check for poor
ponnections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
result comes on.
14-85
BACK
DTC P0335: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
A No Signal
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a\l freeze data
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). .
3. Check whether DTCP0335 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data ih PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTe P0335 indicated in the PGM-Flsystem?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
terminals at the CKP sensor A and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
14-86
8. Monitor the OBD STATUSforP0335 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the CKP
sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
BACK
A Intermittent Interruption
Troubleshooting Information (see page 1 4 ~ 4 .
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with. the HDS.
Is DTe P0339 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
terminals at the CKP sensor A and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
troubleshooting .
sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-87
BACK
A'utomatic Transmission
DTCP0340: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
No signal
. Is DTC P0340indicated in the PGM-FI system?
V S ~ Troubleshoot for DTC P0340'in the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
NO-Go to step 8.
14-88
R Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0340 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
. NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
result comes on.
BACK
DTC P0344: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Intermittent Interruption
3. Check whether DTC P0344 is indicated inthe DTCs/
Is Dre P0344 indicated in the PGM-Fl system?
NO-Go to step 4.
Is Dre P0344 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
Is Dre P0344 indicated?
NO-Go to step 8.
R Monitor the OBD STATUSforP0344 inthe DTCs/
. Does the result indicate PASSED?
YES-Ifthe PCMwas updated, troubleshooting is
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
result comes on.
14-89
BACK
Autorliatic Transmission
DTCP0385:Crranksha:ft Position (CKP).Sensor
B No signal. ..,
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freezedata
Troubleshodting Information
1. Cleartne DTC with the HDS.
3. Check whether DTC P0385 is indicated inthe DTCs/
, .,'."
Is DTO P0385iridicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0385in the;PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
terminals at the CKP sensor B and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for P0385 in the DTCs/
troublesh()oting.. ..
. NO-If theHDS indicates FAILED,check for poor
sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
. the HDSindicates NOT COMP,,"ETED, keep idliAg
BACK
B Intermittent Interruption
3. Check whether. DTC P0389 is indicated in the DTCs/
Is DTe P0389 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
terminals at the CKP sensor B and the PCM. If the
(see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 8.
troubleshooting .
sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
14-91
BACK
DTCP062F: Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive
Memory (KAM) Error
2. Check whether DTC P062F is indicated in the DTCs/
Is DTC P062F indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P062F in the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check whether DTC P062F is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
4. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not
5. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
terminals atthe PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 6.
14-92
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P062F in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
troubleshooting .
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. Ifthe
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
BACK
DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) .
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position, and monitor the OBD STATUS for
P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu
for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 4.
time. Check for an intermittent short in the wire
between the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
5. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-315).
Is the switch OK?
YES-With the switch connector disconnected, go
to step 6.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch
7. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.4 and No.5.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
~
NO (BLKI
I
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 8;
ATPP(GRN)
Q
=
connector terminal A 16 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 49.
NO-Go to step 12.
(confd)
14-93 BACK
12. Check fer centinuity between transmissien range
switch cennecter terminal No.5 and bedy greund.
GNDIBLKI
1 234 5
678910
Q
YES-Ge te step 43.
NO-Repair .open in the wire between transmissien
range switch cennecter terminal Ne. 6 and greund
(G101), .or repair peer ground (G101), then ge te
step 49.
14,94
13. Measure the veltage between transmissien range
switch cennecter terminals Ne. 3 and Ne. 5.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITC"! CONNECTOR
GND IBLKI
(;:;=:::;=l,J.,--.J-,
9 10
YES-Ge te step 18.
NO-Ge te step 14.
16. Discennect PCM cennector C (49P).
17. Check for centinuity between PCM connecter
terminal C25 and body greund.
PCM CONNECTOR C 149PI
=
YES-Repair shert in the wire between PCM
connecter terminal C25 and the transmissien range
switch, then ge te step 49.
NO-Ge te step 43.
BACK
GND(BlK)
123
678
ATP N (RED/BlK) '--___ -'
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 19.
=
connector terminal C26 and the transmission range
NO-Go to step 43.
GND(BlKI
6 7
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 43.
(cont'd)
14-95
BACK
GND(BLK)
2 3
6 7 8
ATP D3 (RED) L-_____ -'
YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Go to step 29.
=
NO-Go to step 43.
14-96
GND(BLK)
234 5
7 8 9 10
'-__ --' ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)
Wire side of.female terminals
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 34.
ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)
.Q
=
NO-Go to step 43.
BACK
1 2 3
678
ATP RVS (RED/WHT) L.-__ ----'
YES-Go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 39.
ATP RVS (RED/WHT)
Q
=
NO-Go to step 43.
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
terminals at the transmission range switch and the
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM
NO-Go to step 48.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
COMPLETED, return to step 45 and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-97
BACK
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
Is DTC P070S indicated?
YES-Replace the transmission range switch
(see page 14-316), then return to step 49 and
recheck.
NO-Go to step 53.
DTCswere indicated on step 52, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting .
transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to the step 50 and recheck.
14-98
BACK
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit
NOTE:
any on-board,snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4k
and cannot be caused:by in the
transm ission.
1. Clea r the DTC with the HDS.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely
supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
3. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches
25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down and stop the
wheels.
YES-Go to step 5.
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
3 and recheck.
6. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-315).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
7. Install the transmission range switch correctly, and
adjust the shift cable (see page 14-311).
8. Clear the DTe with the HDS .
25 mph (40 km/h), then slowdown and stop the
wheels.
YES- Go to step 11.
9 and recheck.
11. Shift to the D position, and verify the ATP FWD and
ATP D inputs with the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is ATP FWD and ATP 0 ON?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
12. Shift to the D3 position, and verify the ATF FWD
and ATP D3 inputs with the HDS in the AfT data list.
IsATP FWD and ATP 03 ON?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 16.
(coni'd)
14-99
BACK
the 0 position until the vehicle speed reaches
wheels.
YES-Go to step 16.
14 and recheck.
14-100
17. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
18. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
GND(BLK)
1 234 5
6 7 8 9 10.
Q
=
YES-Go to step 19.
transmission range switch and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 30.
BACK
r;::;::::;:::=:Jr---r--.,.J..:,GND (BLK)
234 5
7 8 9 10
'--_---' ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 21.
transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal C18, then go to step 30.
GND(BLK)
r;:;=:;::tJ.--,-,...L,
6 7
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 22.
GND (BLK)
~ .
1 2 3
6 7 8 9 10
ATP 03 (RED) '---_____ -'
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
14-101
BACK
have the latest software (see page 14-8) ,or
supported, and allow all four whe'els to rotate freely.
wheels.
YES-Check for, poor connections and loose -
NO-Go to step 29.
troubleshooting .
transmission range switch and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
14-102
supported, and alloll)l all four wheels to rotate freely.
wheels.
34. Check for DTC(s.) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
NO-Go to step 35.
DTCs were indicated on step 34, go to the illdicated
DTC's troubleshooting.. '
connections and loose the
return to step 31 and recheck.
BACK
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature
Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Check the ATFtemperature with the HDS in theA{f
data list.
Does the ATF temperature exceed the ambient-air
temperature? ..
YES-Record the ATF temperature. Leave the
engine off for more than 30 minutes, and go to step
2.
NO-Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-237) three times. Go to
step 2 after stall speed testing.
2. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature change?
YES-Leave the engine off for more than
30 minutes, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS.
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient-air
temperature?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as ambient-air temperature, then
go to step 4.
4. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR with the HDS.
Does the AT F temperature read about the same as
the ECT SENSOR?
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A{f
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
NO-Go to step 8.
Freeze Data in A{f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTCs were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting
connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 6 and recheck.
14-103 BACK
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor
Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the
HDS in the AfT data list.
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor
less?
YES-Go to step 2.
time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT
wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM .
2. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
at the transmission end cover.
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the
HDS.
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor
less?
YES-Go to step 4.
14-104
6. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P) .
7. Check for continuity between ATF temperature
sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground .
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
cITP.
4TFr ,OLU/YEW
=
connector terminal C33 and ATF temperature
sensor connector terminal No.2, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK
NO-Go to step 12.
troubleshooting .
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
13. Clear the DTC with theHDS.
NO-Goto step. 16 ..
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
14 and recheck.
14-105
BACK
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor
Circuit
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General.
transmission.
1. Check the ATFTEMP SENSOR voltage with the
Does theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage exceed
4.93 V?
YES.-Go to step 2.
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .
at the transmission end cover.
5. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature
sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
cITP.
41FT lBLU/YEl)
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-106
6. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature
sensor connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
~ SG21GRN/VEl) ~ T T lBLU/YEl)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
(seepage 14-264), then go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C16 and the ATF temperature
sensor connector, then go to step 16.
BACK
terminal C33 and ATF temperature sensor
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
ATFT
(BlU/YElI
L--_---<Q}--_------'
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals
PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 11.
connector terminal C33 and the ATF temperature
sensor, then go to step 16.
11. Connect all connectors.
substitute a k n o w n ~ g o o PCM (see page 14-9).
was substituted, go to step 1 ..
NO-Go to step 15.
original PCM (see page .11-244). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 14, goto the indicated DTC's
, troubleshooting .
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(cont'd)
14-107
BACK
16. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
19. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data.in AfT
PCM, then go to step 1 ..
NO-Go to step 20.
DTC's troubleshooting
connectioAsand loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 18 and recheck;
14-108
BACK
DIC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DIC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor,Circuit (No Signal
Input)
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record aU f ~ e e i e d t and
anyon-board snapshot, and review General .
transmission.
3. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-259). If the sensor
was installed improperly, correct the problem, then
go to step 37.
the D position, and hold the vehicle at speeds over
30 mph (48km/h) for more than 10 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheel.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connectors. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
7. Jump the SCSline with the HDS.
8. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals B41, C41 and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 38.
(cont'd)
14-109
BACK
10. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector.
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.1
and body ground.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 14 ..
14-110
terminal C12 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.1.
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAfT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
.--------{Q}-------,
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 17.
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Terminal side of
female terminals
connector terminal C12 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 38.
BACK
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
NO-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
to step 33.
20. Check for continuity between input shaft
and body ground. .
~
M I R E I
connector terminal B37 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 38.
NO-Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
14-111
BACK
21. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P) ..
sensor connector terminal No.3 ..
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
.----'-{QJ-------,SG2
SG2
(GRN/YELl
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 23.
(GRN/YEL)
Terminal side of
female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal C16"then go to step 38.
14-112
23. Connect PCM connectors B (49P.) and C (49P).
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No.2 and N o ~ 3 ..
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 26.
BACK
terminal B37 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 33.
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
connector terminal B37 and the input shaft
29. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
31. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (see page 14-259), then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33.
(cont'd)
14-113
BACK
Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated?
YES-lfthePCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 37.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
1.4-114
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 41.
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
BACK
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed
Sensor Intermittent Failure
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot; and review General
and cannot be caused by a mec.hanical problem in the
transmission. .. .... . ,
YES-Go to step 4.
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM.lfthe HDSindicates NOTCOMPLETED, return
sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6.
connector.
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes .in.the D
YES-Go tostep 9.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (49P)
'11 2 8 4 I 6 I 6 I 7 6 9 10 I
92021
X. 26IXf2e / /I
f29f8c 81 89
1140 41 42VI44I46I46 / '1
IBAN/VEl)
=
C (49P)
11 2 3 4 I 616 I 7 6 9 10 I
920211
x 1251 X IZll Z7l261
361891
1140 41 42 48144146146 4746 491

=
YES-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
14-115
BACK
13. Connect PCM connectors 8 (49P) C (49P).
sensor connector.
and body ground.
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 17 ..
NO-Go to step 26.
19. Check for continuity between input shaft
and body ground.
~
M R E D l
=
connector terminal 837 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 35.
NO-Go to step 20.
BACK
20. Connect PCM connector 6 (49P).
and body ground.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFTI
~
M I R E I
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (see page 14-259), then go to step 35.
NO-Go to step 23.
terminal 837 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 30.
INPUT SHAft
(MAINSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
NM(REDI
Wire side of
female terminals
NO--,Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal 837 and the input shaft
(cont'd)
14-117
BACK
',-!; .
Autom"atic Transmission
27. Disconnect PCM conn'ector C (49P).
sensor connectorterminal No.1.
INPUT SHAFf
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
,-----{Qf-------,
VCC2
(VEl/BLU)
Wire side-of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 29.
VCC2 (VEL/BLU)
Terminal side of
-female terminals
NO-Repairopenin'the wire between PCM
connector terminal C12 ahd the input shaft
14-118
Q
=
VCC2(VEL/BLU) -
terminals atthe input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the cohnections' areOK,go
to step 30.
BACK
Is DTC P0718 indicated'l
NO-Go to step 34.
troubleshooting .
(mains haft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
NO-Go to step 38.
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
14-119
BACK
Autom,atic Transmission
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No
Signal Input)
NOTE:
transmission.
3. Check for proper output shaft (counters haft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-260). Ifthe sensor
is installed improperly, correct problem, then go to
step 38.
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in theD position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES-Go to step 6.
PCM and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-120
and body ground .
PCM CONN\:CTORS
YES-Go to step 10.
connector terminals B41, C41 and.ground (G101),
BACK
10. Connect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P).
11. Disconnect the outputshaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
13. Measure the voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No.1 and body ground.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 14.
terminal 836 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 17.
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
VCC1 (VEL/RED)
Wire side of
female terminals
connector terminal 836 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 38.
(cont'd)
14-121
BACK
=
connector terminal B36 and the output shaft
terminals at the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
to step 33.
14-122
20. Check for continuity between output shaft

r1J.>IC I"LUI
=
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 38.
NO-Go to step 21.
BACK
terminal C15 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
SG6 (GRN/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 23.
SG6 (GRN/YEL)
Terminal side of
female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
PCM connector terminal C15, then go to step 38.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No.2 and No.3.
~ Ne IBLUI ~ 6 lORN/YEU
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 26.
(cont'd)
14-123 BACK
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 33.
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
14-124
29. Connect the output shaft (counter'shaft) speed
sensor connector.
31. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the 0 position
. with engine speed 2,000 rpm orhigherfor more
32. Monitorthe 080 STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor (see page 14-260), then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33.
BACK
35. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
NO-Go to step 37.
troubleshooting ..
connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
39. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
NO-Go to step 41.
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
14-125 BACK
OTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure
NOTE:
transmission.
1. Clear the DTCwith the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-:-Intermittentfailure, the. system is OKat this
time. Check for poor connections and loose
sensor and thePCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6.
14-126
6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
recheck.
11. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P).
terminals 841. and body ground, and between C44
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
= =
YES-Go to step 13.
connector terminals 841, C41 and ground (G101),
BACK
sensor connector.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERS HAFT)
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 26.
19. Check for continuity between output shaft
'
23
NC (BLU)
.Q
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 35.
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
14-127 BACK
Aut()matic Transmission
OTe Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
20. Connect PCM connector 8 (49P).
21. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (II).
(countershaft) speedsensor connector terminal
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFTI
1
23
. NC(BLUI
':i.
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor (see page 14-260), then go to step 35.
NO-Go to step 23.
14-128
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 30.
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
BACK
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 29.
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
sensor and the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
to step 30.
(cont'd)
14-129
BACK
30. Reconnectall connectors.
NO-Go to step 34.
YES.....,. If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
troubleshooting .
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
14-130
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.,
NO-Go to step 38.
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK
DTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
temperature (the r d i t o ~ fan comes on).
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a
'strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material?
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 9.
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266),
then go to step 4.
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the line pressure within the service limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve,
or replace the transmission, then go to step 9.
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 1st clutch pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves Band C are stuck. Repair these
valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 9.
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
data, or drive in 1st gear in the M position at speeds
over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down
and stop the wheels.
YES-Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the
time.lfthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
data, or drive in 1st gear in the M position at speeds
over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 secor:lds. Slow down
and stop the wheels.
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
and recheck. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-131 BACK
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
Is the line pressure within the. service limits?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair
these valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 9.
data, or drive in 2nd gear in the M position at
speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels.
14-132
YES-Repair,the 2nd clutch, or replace the
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
data, or drive in 2nd gear in the M position at
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK
DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair
data, or drive in 3rd gear in the M position at
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu fora pass/fail.
YES-Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the
to step7 and recheck.
data, or drive in 3rd gear in the M position at
14-133
BACK
DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th
temperature (the radiator fan comes' on).
_.J. "
, Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and 0 are stuck. Repair
data, or drive in 4th gear in the M position at
14-134
8. Monitor. the OBD STATUS for P0734 in the DTCs/'
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/faiL
Does the result indicate FAILED? . ,
YES-Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
BACK
OTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair the ATFpump and the regulator valve,
5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within the service
limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair
these valves and the hydraulic circuit, replace the
speeds over 10 mph (16 km/hl for 20 seconds. Slow
YES-Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the
10. Test-drive the-vehicle for several minutes under the
NO-Ifthe HDSindicates FAILED, return to step 1
14-135 BACK
DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch
Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF
Does the. strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
5. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
operates with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
6. Run the engine until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 176 Of (80 "C).
7. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
Is the result NORMAL?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
14-136
8. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road with a steady
throttle at 60 mph (100 km/h) for 30 seconds.
YES-Repair the faulty torque converter clutch
mechanism, torque converter clutch hydraulic
circuit, lock-up shift valve, or lock-up control valve,
10. InspectAfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C (see page 14-254).
Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related to the
lock-up shift valve, lock-up control valve, and
lock-up timing valve, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 11.
NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C (see page 14-257), then go to step 11.
same conditions as those'indicated by the freeze
data.
BACK
OTC P0746:A(T Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
temperature (the radiatorfan comes on).
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the Dposition
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
time. If the HDS indicates NOTCOMPLETED, return
replaced, go to step 11. .
10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-246).
Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve A (see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
down to a stop.
14-137
BACK
DTC P0747: AfT Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
1. Warm up the. engine to normal operating
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0747 in theDTCs/
. Does the result indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 8.
14-138
valve A (see page 14-246).
Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
11. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
. YES-Troubleshooting is complete .
BACK
DTC P0751: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
Troubleshooting Information (see page 1 4 ~ 4 .
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0751 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8;
to step 5 and recheck;
9. Choose ShiftSolenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
through a" five gears at speeds over 12 mph
down to a stop.
14-139
BACK
DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
Does the strainer have metal.debris or excessive
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again .in the D position
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow.
down to a stop.
7. Monitortt'Je OBD STATUS forP0752 in the.DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
to step. 5 and recheck.
14-140
9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
14-242); then go to step 13.
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
down to a stop.
BACK
Ole P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve 8 Stuck OFF
3. Drain the ATF (see-step 5 on page 14-266) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for me-tal debris or
Does the strainer a V ~ metal debris or excessive
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBD STATUS for P0756 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step.8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
16. Monitor tbe aBO STATUS for P0756 in the OTCs/
14-141
BACK
OTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266)through a
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
14-142
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
BACK
DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
strainer.lnspectthe strainer for metal debris or
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
more than 20 seconds,then .slow down to a stop.
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
down to a stop.
14-143
BACK
DTC P0762: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
clutch material?
NO-Replace the ATF(see step 7 on page 14-266),
then go to step 4.
(20 km/h) for more tMn 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0762 inthe DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
time. If the HDS. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step.5 and recheck.
14-144
9. Choose Shift Solenoid C inthe Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
14-242), then go to step 13.,
five gears atspeedsover 12 mph (20 km/h) for
. through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds; then slow
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
down to a stop.
BACK
DTC P0766: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
time. Ifthe HDSindicates NOT COMPLETED, return
9. Choose Shift Solenoid D'in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve 0
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 0 (see page
more than 2o..seconds,then slow down to a stop.
down to a stop.
FreezeData in AfT ModeMenu for a pass/fail.
YES-Repair shift valve 0, or replace the
down to a stop.
14-145
BACK
Ole P0767: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
14-146
9. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve D, or replace the
down to a stop.
BACK
Ole P0776: NT Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
3. Drain theATF (see step 5,on page 14-266) through a
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0776 in the DTCs!
YES-Go to step 8;
. " '
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS;
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B
pressurecpntrol solenoid valve B with the HDS.
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
by the test result, but if tha.HDS has not determined
1 O.lnspectAfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B (see page 14-249).
Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
, NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B(see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
12. Test-drive the vehicle in theD position throughall
down to a stop.
return to step 12 and recheck .
4 ~ 4 7
BACK
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8.
14-.148
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
by the test reSUlt, but ifthe HDS has not determined
valve B (see page 14-249).
Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve B (see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
down to a stop.
BACK
Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
through all five Qearsat speeds over 12 mph
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for P0796 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
by the test result, but if the HDShas not determined
the cause ofthe failure, go to step 10. If any part is
Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
down to a stop.
14-149
BACK
Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
and an/dn-board snapshot, and review General'
temperature (the radiator fan 'comes on).
3. D(ain thEi ATF (see step 5 onpage14-266) through a
strainer. Inspectthe strainer for metal debris or
clutch material?
YES-'-Replace the then go to step 11.
then go to step 4,
five gears at speeds over:12 mph (20 km/h) for
through alHive gears at speeds over 12 mph
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds', then slow
down to a stop. "
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0797 in the DTCs/.
Freeze Data in A/TMode Menu for a pass/faiL,'
YES-Go to step 8.
14-150
- in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
, . ('
to step 9and recheck.
Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 11.
valve C(see page 14-257),then go to step 11.
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20km/h) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow,down to a stop.
down to a stop.
BACK
DTC P0812: Open in Transmission Range
Switch ATP R Switch Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Shift to the R position, and verify the AfT R SWITCH
signal with the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is the AfT R SWITCH ON?
time .
NO-Go to step 3.
connector .
switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground .
GND (BLK)
1 2 345
6 7 8 9 10
Q
=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No.5 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 14.
(cont'd)
14-151 BACK
Auto:matic Transmission
switch connector terminals No.3 and o ~ 5.
. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
7 8 9 10
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 8.
14-152
8. Check for continuity between transrnission range
switch connector terminals No.3 and No.5 while
the shift lever is in each position.
. Tl:tANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
. Is there continuity while the shift lever is in the P,
R, and N positions, and no continuity while the
shift lever is in the D and D3?
PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 9.
BACK
9. Reconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
11. Test-drive the vehicle. in the R position at speeds
below 3mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds,
then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds
over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
12. Check for DTC(s)in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
NO-Go to step 13.
troubleshooting .
transmission range switch and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
15. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds
below 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds,
then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds
over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for P0812 in the DTCs/
DTC's troubleshooting ..
14-153 BACK
DTC P0815: Short in Transmission Gear
Selection Switch Upshift Switch Circuit, or
Transmission Gear Selection Switch Upshift
Switch Stuck ON
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Shift to the P position.
3. Verify the transmission gear selection switch
upshift switch signal input with the HDS in the AfT
data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
time. Check the S-UP (BLU) wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the transmission gear
selection switch and the PCM .
5. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/
park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel
light connector at the shift lever bracket.
upshift switch signal input with the HDS in the AfT
data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the transmission gear selection
switch (see page 14-319), then go to step 19.
14-154
11. Check for continuity between transmission gear
selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
indicator panel light connector terminal No.7 and
body ground.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH/
PARK PIN SWITCH/AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
4
=
connector terminal A36 and the transmission gear
selection switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
14. Start the engine in the P position, waitfor more
than 10 seconds, then shift to the M position.
15. Push the shift lever toward the upshift position (+)
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or
more.
16. Pull the shift lever toward the downshift position
(-) slowly, and release it; repeatthis test 10 times
or more.
NO-Go to step 18.
troubleshooting .
transmission gear selection switch and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
20. Start the engine in the P position, wait for more
more.
(-) slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times
or more.
terminals at the transmission gear selection switch
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD status for P0815 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT M()de. Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission gear selection switch and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-155
BACK
Selection Switch Downshift Switch Circuit, or
Transmission Gear Selection Switch
Downshift Switch Stuck ON
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record a" freeze data and
transmission.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (").
downshift switch signal input with the HDS in the
Aff data list.
Is DOWNSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
time. Check the S-DN (GRN) wire for an intermittent
selection switch and PCM .
park pin switch/Aff gear position indicator panel
downshift switch signal input with the HDS in the
Aff data list.
Is DOWNSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
14-156
selection switch/park pin switch/Aff gear position
body ground.
4
=
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between
PCM connector terminal A37 and the transmission
gear selection switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
13. Update the Aff software in the PCM ifit does not
more.
(-) slowly, and release it; repeatthis test 10 times
or more.
17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in Aff
NO-Go to step 18.
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
troubleshooting .
NO-lftheHDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
more.
(-) slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times
or more.
NO-Go to step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD status for P0816 in the DTCs/
14-157
BACK
DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck
ON
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 2nd gear.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
4. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and
drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels ..
YES...,.Go to step 6.
time. Check the OP2SW wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If
4 and recheck.
14-158
7 .. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector.
HDS in the AfT data list .
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
. pressure switch (see page 14-261), then go to step
19.
NO-Go to step 10.
=
Terminal !>ide of female terminals
connector terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
BACK
NO-Go to step 18.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
. YES-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 22.
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM,
14-159
BACK
DTC P0843: Open in2nd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
OFF
freeze data and anyon-board snapshot, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) ...
3. Shift the shift lever into the M position while
pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 2nd gear by
pushing the shift lever to upshift position, and
verify with the HDS in the AfT data list that the
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 2nd.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-160
5. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear inthe M position for
drive in 3rd geador more than 5 seconds. Slow
YES-Go to step 7.
terminals atthe 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM.lfthe HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
BACK
8. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
10. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector
terminal and body ground.
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-261), then go to step
20.
NO-Go to step 11.
terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector terminal.
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP2SW
(BLU/BLK)
'-------{Q)-----'
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
are OK, go to step 15.
connector terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch
20.
(cont'd)
14-161
BACK
drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. SIow
NO-Go to step 19.
troubleshooting .
14-162
, "
NO-Go to step 23.
BACK
Ole P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
ON
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 3rd gear.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
operating temperature'(the radiator fan comes on).
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and
. drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels:
YES-Go to step 6.
short to ground between the 3rd clutch
4 and recheck.
7. Disconnectthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
19.
NO-Go to step 10.
connector terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
14-163
BACK
Auto,matic Transmission
15. Update the AfT software in the PCM if. it does not
drive in 4th gear for more than5 seconds. Slow
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS ,for P0847 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
14-164
21. Check for DTC(s) intheDTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
N O ~ o to step 22.
DTC's troubleshooting;.
NO-:-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
BACK
DTC P0848: Open in3rd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
OFF
Troubleshooting ,Information (see page 14.4).
3. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position, and
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 3rd.
Is the Srd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
YES-Go to step 7.
atthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
(cont'd)
14'165
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
10. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
20.
NO-Go to step 11.
14-166
11. Turn the, ignition switch OFF.
14. Check for continuity betwe.en PCM connector
terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
PCM CONNECTOR C I49P)
OP3SW IBLU/WHT)
Terminal side of
female terminals
3RDCLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP3SW
IBLU/WHT)
Wire side of
female terminals
pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe connections
connector terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch
20.
BACK
16. Update the AfT" software in the PCM if it does not
18. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT"
NO-Go to step 19.
Freeze Data in AfT" Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
troubleshooting .
22. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT"
IsDTCP0848 indicated?
NO-Go to step 23.
Freeze Data in AfT" Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT,
14-167 BACK
DTC P0872: Short in 4th Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
ON '
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 4th gear.
Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes, on).
4. Drive the vehicle in 4th gearilil the M position,for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear,and
drive in 5th'gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
YES-Go to step 6.
short to ground between the 4th clutch
4 and recheck.
14-168
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. "
7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure ' switch connector.
9. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
19.
NO-Go to step 10.
side of female termina'is
connector terminal C37 and the 4th clutch
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
BACK
15. Update the A!f software in the PCM if it does not
16. Drivethev.ehicle in 4th gear in theM position for
17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A!f
NO-Go to step 18.
Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
substituted, go to step 1.lfthe HDS indicates NOT
20. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position for
terminals at the 4th clutch transmission fluid
NO-Go to step 22.
Does the result indicate PASSED?'
1-4-169
BACK
OTC P0873: Open in 4th Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
OFF
operating temperature (the radiator fan, come.s on).
3. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position, and
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 4th.
4. Check the,4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-170
5. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the Mposition for
YES-Go to step 7.
at the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
BACK
8. Disconnectthe 4th clutch transmission fluid
10. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-263),'then go to step
20.
NO-Go to step 11.
12. 'Jump the SCSline'with the HDS.'
terminal C37 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid
Terminal side of
female terminals
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
QP4SW
(BLU/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
terminals atthe 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
connector terminal C37 and the 4th clutch
transmission fluid presSure switch, then go to step
20.
(cont'd)
14-1l1
BACK
16. Update the AfT software in theP.CM i.f it does not
more than 5 seconds, them upshift to 5th gear, and
goo<;l PCM (see page 14-9), then 'recheck. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 19.
troubleshooting
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
14-172
20. Clear the DTC with the HDS ..
down and stop the wl:leels.
terminals at the 4th clutch transmission fluid
NO-Go to step 23.
connections and .Ioose terminals at the 4th clutch
BACK
Selection Switch Circuit, or Transmission
Gear Selection Switch Stuck ON
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).,
transmission.
sequential sportshift mode switch signal input with
the HDS in the A/T,data list.
Is sequential sportshift mode switch ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
time. Check the S-MODE wire for an intermittent
selection switch and the PCM
7. Verify the transmission gear, switch
the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
body ground.
IND,ICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
=
selection switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step,12.
(cont'd)
14-173 BACK
Auto'matic Transmission
12. Reconnect all connect()rs.
14. Start the engine in the Pposition, wait for more
15. Push the shift lever toward upshift position (+)
more.
16. Pull the shift fever toward downshift "position (-)
more.
NO-Go to step 18.
troubleshooting .
14-174
slowly, and release it; repeatthis test10times or
more.
22. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position ("'-)
more.
and thePCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
DTC'stroubleshooting.. "
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED; check for poor
then go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
BACK
DTC P0958: Open in Transmission Gear
Selection Switch Circuit, or Transmission
Gear Selection Switch Stuck OFF
NOTE:
and cannot be caused by a.mechanical problem in the
transmission.
2. Shift to the M position.
the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is sequential sportshift mode switch OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
and the PCM .
light connector at the shift lever bracket .
indicator light harness connector terminals No.2
and No.3.
Is there continuity while the shift lever is in the M
position, and no continuity when the shift lever is
in any position other than M?
YES-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
14-175
BACK
8. Measure the voltage between transmission gear
selection silVitch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
indicator light connector terminal No.3 and body
ground.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH!
PARK PIN SWITCH! AfT GEAR POSITION
=
YES-Repair open in the wire between
transmission gear selection switch/park pin switch/
AfT gear position indicator panel light connector
and ground (G503), or repair poor ground (G503),
then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 9.
14-176
terminal A47 and transmission gear selection
switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator
panel light connector terminal No.3.
Terminal side of
female terminals
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH!
PARK PIN SWITCH!
A!T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM
indicator panel light connector, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
BACK
more.
17. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position (-)
more.
Is DTC P0958
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0958 in theDTCs/
troubleshooting .
20. Clear theDTC with the HDS.
22. Push the. shift lever toward upshift position (+)
slowly, and release it; repeatthistest 10times or
more ..
23. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position (-)
more.
NO-Go to. step 25:
connections and loose terminals aUhe
.. then go to step;1.' IftheHDS indicates NOT
BACK
DTC P0962: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. Choose Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 1.0 A
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-'178
7. Disconnectthe AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 .
AIT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
BACK
9. Check for continuitybetween AfT olutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
cITM,' ~ ~ (BlK)
~
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
step 24.
11. Measure the voltage between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminals No.1
and No.'2.
~ LS A (RED) ~ N D (alX)
, Wire side of female terminals
Is there momentarily battery voltage when the
ignition switch is turned ON (II)? .
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Check for open or short in the wire between
PCM connector terminal C21 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A, ifthe wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
14-179
BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch
14. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C(49P).
15. Turn the)gnition switcl) ON (II).
16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals B2 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
SOL (BlK/YEL)
';i
II B (49P) C (49P)
11 2 3 4151611 8 9 101 11 2 3 4151811 8 9 101
111 20 21, 111 12V 920 211
j22 j2.l24
XI25IX 126VVI V V 124 XI25IX 26 211 2BI
j2!l 373639
V VV 1
37
361
39
1
1140 4142 Vl44I45I48V VI 140 4142 43144145148 4148 491
I lG2 (BRN/YEl) I lG1 (BRN/YEl)
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
14 .. 180
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
=
YES-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse in the under-
the wire between PCM connector terminal B2 and
the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 24.
or repair poor ground (G101), then goto step 24.
BACK
substitute a known-goodPCM (se,e page 14-9).
NO-Go to step 23.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
26. Check for DTC(s) inthe DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT,
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
OTCs were indicated on step 26, go to the indicated
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
14-181
BACK
Ole P0963: Problem in' AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A
NOTE:
transmission.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3 ...
3. Choose Clutch Pressure ControHLinear) Solenoid A
. in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/f clutch
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
7. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
4 ~ 8 2
pressure control solenoid valve A connector
terminals No.1 and No.2. '
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9 ..
valve A (see page 14"252); then go to step 15.
9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
. and body ground.
AIT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
1
2 .
.' .. ~ N D (BLK) .
Q '.
. -' .
=
YES-Go to step 10.
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
step 15.
BACK
10. Reconnect the NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
13. Check for DTC(s) inthe DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
NO-Go to step 14.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at NT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
terminals at NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
connections and loose terminals at NT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
14-183
BACK
.j' j
OTC P0966: Problem i-nA/TClutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE:
and cannot be caused by amechanical problem in the
transmission.
YES""":'Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear)Solenoid B
inthe MiscelianeousTest Menu, andtest AlTCiutch
pressure control solenoid-valve B with the HDS.
. Is theresult NORMAL?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 1.0 A
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
4 ~ 8 4
valve B connector.
pressure control solenoid valve B connector
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9 .
-' NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
BACK
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
1
2
., GND (BLK)
Q .
=
YES-Go to step 10.
pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
step 24.
control solenoid valve B connector terminals No.1
and No; 2.
~ LS B IBRN/WHT) N IBLKI
Wire side.of female terminals
ignition switch is turned ON (II)?
YES-Go to step 19.
PCM connector terminal B10 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B, if the wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
14-185
BACK
terminals B2 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
!YYll SOL (BLK/YEL) y..
II B (49P)
11 2 3 4151617 8 9 101
11112 92021 9201211
J2.2J2B 2A X/25IX 26 //1 26 27128J
J29 30 81 37 36 39 lIIL V 2138\84VIL 37 36139J
140 41 421/1441451461/ 1/1 140 4142 43144145146 4746 491
L---II LG2 (BRN/YEl) I LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
14-'186
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
=
=
YES-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse inthe under-
BACK
good PCM (see page 14-9), then Ifthe PCM
NO-Go to step 23.
troubleshooti ng .
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
DTCs were indicated. on step 26, go to the indicated
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
BACK
Control Solenoid Valve B
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page .
transmission.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
valve B connector.
14-188
pressure control solenoid valve B connector
Terminal side of male terminals '
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2
and body ground.

YES-Go to step 10.
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 15.
BACK
10. Reconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B connector.
substitute a known-good PCM(see page 14-9).
NO-Go to step 14.
troubleshooting .
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
17. Check for DTC(s)in the DTCs/Freeze Data hAfT
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any.other
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
14-189
BACK
Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General,
transmission.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
in the MiscelianeousTest Menuiand test A{f clutch
pressure control solenoid valve'C with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command A{f
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 1.0 A
with the HDS.
Freeze Data in A{f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.
terminals at A{f clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-190
7. Disconnect the A{f clutch pressure control solenoid
valveC connector.
8. Measure the resistance between A{f clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C connector
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace NT clutch pressure control solenoid
BACK
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2
and body ground.

YES-Go to step 10.
step 24.
control solenoid valve C connector terminals No.1
and No.2.

LS C ,GRNIRED' ,BU(]
ignition switch is turned ON (/I)?
YES-Go to step 19.
PCM connector terminal 821 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C, if the wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
14-191 BACK
14. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P).
terminals 82 and 841 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
SOL (BLK/VEL)
II B (49P)
1112 341616178 9101
111121314116116117118 92021
J22 23 24XlzsIX 2eV /I
\2lI 30 31 32133134\36\36 lfT 36 39
1140 41 42 V\44I461 48 / 1
,-------,I LG2 (BRN/VELI
'::/..r---------,
C (49P)
111 2 3 4161817 8 91101
\1112V V115116117118 920211
I/V 24IXI26IX 2627281

1140 41 42 43144146148 47 481M11
1 LG1 (BRN/VELI
Terminal side of female terminals-
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
14-192
terminals 841 and body ground, and between C41
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(49P)
I L 1 2 3 4 I 61617 8 9 10J
11112 20 21
122 28 24 X126\X 28vvl
\29\& 31 32133134136I36lfT 36 39
1140 41 42VI44I46I48V ." '1

=
C (49P)
III 2 3 4\61e17 8 9101
111112V v11611el17118 920211
VV 24 X126\X 26 27 281
WV 32133I34W lfT 36 391
1140 41 42 43144146148 47 481M11

=
YES,-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse in the under-
the wire between PCM connector terminal 82 and
BACK
NO-Go to step 23.
troubleshooting .
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
14-193
BACK
Control Solenoid Valve C
NOTE:
any on-board.snapshot, and review General
transmission.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
valve C connector.
14-194
pressure control solenoid valve C connector
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
~
N D I L K I
YES-Go to step 10.
step 15.
BACK
10. Reconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector.
have the latest software (seepage 14-8), or
was substituted, go to step'1.
NO-Go to step 14.
troubleshooting .
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
14-195
BACK
DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A
Circuit
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). "
transmission.
3. Check that DTC' P0973 recurs.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
time. Check the SH A wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve A and the
PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
14-196
10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals C20 and C41 or B41.
PCM CONNECTORS
.---------{Q
B (49P)
111 2 3 4 I 51 617 6 9 10]
20 21
2A XJ25JXI2E VVI
1291311 81 2Iaala4j3513E 36 39
114ll 41 4ZVI44I46I48I/ '1
,---------,I LG2 (BRN/VEl)
SH A (BLU/VEl)-@-
C (49P)
III 2 3 4151617 8 IS 1101
11112VVi15116117118 920211
VVj24XJ25JX 26271281
Wl/I32laala4lN 36 391
14ll 41 42 43144146148 47 48 4911
I LG1 (BRN/VEl)
Terminl;ll side of female terminals
Is there less than 12 Q ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 19. '
BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.
terminals C20 andC41 orB41.
PCM CONNECTORS
.---------{Q
BI49P)
112 8 4161al7 8 9101
9(2c: 21
122(23 Z4iX.126IX(2EV /
(29(30 31
140141421/1441461461/ 'I
,-------,I LG2 IBRN/VEL)
SH A IBLU/YELI-@-
C149P)
1\1 2 a 4161al7 8 1101
9120(211
I; I2A X 121>1 X 1Z1I28I
VIJ V 182(aa1a41/(/ 137 (saIagl
1140 41 42 48144146148 47 481491
'LG1 IBRN/YEL)
connector terminal C20 and the shift solenoid
harness connector, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve A OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift
solenoid harness (see page 14-242), then go to step
18.
terminals A 1 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal A1 and
connector terminals 841, C41 and ground (G 1 01),
(cont'd)
14-197
BACK
position through all five gears ..
NO-Go to step 23.
troubleshooting
connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
valve A and the PCM. IfthePCMwas updated,
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,. return to step
21 and recheck.
25. Test-drive the vehic.le for several minutes. in the D
terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
BACK
DTe P0974: Open,in Shift Solenoid Valve A
Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. Ifthe HDS
recheck.
terminals C20 and C41 or B41 .
PCM CONNECTORS
.----------{Q
BI49PI
111 2 8 4151817 8 9 101
92021
I22I2I!I2A '><: 26IXI2E I/VI
1291& 31
1140 41 421/1441461481/ '1
L------li LG2 IBRN/YELI
SH A IBLU/YELI-@--
CI49PI
111 2 34151817 8 101
20 211
rl x
1/11
1140 41 42148144146148 48 491
l LG1 IBRN/YELI
Is there 12-25 Q?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
14..;199
BACK
terminal C20 and shift solenoid harness connector
terminal No.3.
PCM CONNECTOR ,C (49P)
SH A (BLU/YELI
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
SHA
(BLU/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
14-200
13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-242).
14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
harness connector terminal No.3 and the shift
solenoid valve A connector terminal.
SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminals
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
NO-Replace the shift solenoid harness (see page
BACK
NO-Go to step 19 .
. '
troubleshooting .
valve A and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-201
BACK
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B
Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
3. Check thatDTC P0976 recurs.
YES-Go to step 7.
. NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
time. Check the SH B wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve B and the
PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
14-202
9. DisconnectPCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
PCM CONNECTORS
B(49PI C (49PI
111 2 3 4161617 8 9 1101 111 2 3 4161617 8 9 10]
1111 213 4 6 6 ~ 7 8 92021 111 12V /116116117118 92021
122
23204
Xi
26
1X
26V
VI V V
204
Xi
26
1X
26
1211
I2S
3081 32133134136/36 373639
V vV 32133I34W 13736
142 1140 4 VI44I46I46 V '[,'1 1140 4142 43144146146 4746
'I
LG2 (BRN/VELI
~
Q
SHB GRN WHT /
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 18.
BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector ..
terminals C28 and C41 or 841.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (49P)
111 2 3 4161617 6 91101
92021
j22j2J1Z4.xJ26lX26lLlLI
/29/3C 31 82133134/36138 3 as 89
1140 41 42VI44I46I46V ." '1
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
C (49P)
111 2 3 4161617 6 9 101
11112V 92021
1/ IZ4 X (2! X 2621128
WV82I33/34WI37 as
1140 41 42 43144146146 47 46 191

'---------{Q SH B GRN/WHT
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve 8 (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve B OK?
YES-Gato step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 8 or the shift
23.
PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
14-203
BACK
terminals 841 and body grouhd, and between C41
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
=
=
dash fuse/relay box, and check the PGM-FI main
relay 1.lfthe fuse and relay are OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal 83 and
the under-dash fuse/relay box via the main relay,
then go to step 23.
19. Update the AfT software in the PCM ifit does not
Is DTCP0976 indicated?
goodPCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Monitor the 08D STATUS for P0976 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
valve 8 andthe PCM.lfthe PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14"9), then
20 and recheck.
BACK
terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,
then go to step 1. .
NO-Go to step 26.
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.lf the HDS
recheck.
14-205 BACK
... ' .
DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B
Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-206
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS;
PCM CONNECTORS
B(49P)
1112 34161811 89101
I" 12 13 9 20 21
Z4iX.1261X 28V /1
1291& 31 371811 39
1<10141.o12VI44I-46I048/ 'I
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
C(49P)
11123416181189101
III 92021
VVlZ4lX.1261X

11<10 41 .012 431441-461048 'iT 48 91

'----------{Q SH B GRN/WHT
Is there 12-25 Q ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
terminal No.4.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
.--------1 Ql-----.
SH B (GRN/WHTI
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
SH B (GRN/WHTI
Wire side of
female terminals
14-242).
solenoid valve B connector terminal.
SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B CONNECTOR
'---iQ}-------l
Terminal side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
(cont'd)
14-207 BACK
NO-Go to step 19.
original PCM (see page 11-244).lfany other DTCs
troubleshooting .
valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
14-2G8
21. Test-drive the vehiclefor several minutes in the D
terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
BACK
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C
Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
time. Check the SH C wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve C and the
8. Jumpthe SCS linewith the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connectprs B (49P) and C (49P).
B(49P)
PCM CONNECTORS
C(49P)
; 11 23 41 6T 617 B 9 10 r
111i121314li5liB1i7118 92021
\2$124 X\26rx 281/111
/291& 31 32\33\34136\311 lSi 3B 39
1140 41 42I/144r46l48 1/ 1/1/1
LG2 (BRN/VEL)
rTl 2 3 4T51617 B 9101
2 5 ~ 6117118 920121
1/1/\24 X 126IX 28 27\
W1/I32133I24Vl1 ~ ~ 3 9
1140 41 42 43144146148 47 48 \91
~
L-___ ----4Q}-_--::---=_----l
SHC(GRN)
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
14-209
BACK
PCM CONNECTORS
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve C OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift
23.
14-210
PCM CONNECTORS
(YEL/BLK)
B(49P)
I L 1 2 3 4151617 8 9 1'!J
111121314115116117118 92021
241XJ25(2<; 281L1/1

114014142VI44I45I45V 'I
,--------,I LG2 (BRN/YELI
'Y.. )---------,
C(49P)
ILl 2 3 4151617 8 91'!J
9 20
ltV 24 X!25IXl28fZTI2IlI

U40J41 42 47 46
l LG1 (BRN/YELI
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16.
BACK
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
= =
dash fuse/relay box, and check the PGM-FI main
relay 1. If the fuse and relay are OK, repair open in
the under-dash fuse/relay box via the main relay,
then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 22.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu fora pass/fail.
complete. If the PCM was sl,lpstituted, replace the
troubleshooting .
valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
20 and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-211
BACK
Alitomatic Transmission
terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 26.
"alve 0 and the PCM,thengo to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOTCOMPLETED, returnto step 24 and
recheck.
14 .. 212
BACK
DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C
Circuit
NOTE:
This code i.s caused by an electrical circuit problem
transmission.
3. Check that OTC P0980 recurs.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
8. Jump the SCSline with the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) andC (49P) .
10. Measure the resistance between PCMconnector
PCM CONNECTORS
B(49P)
111 2 3 4151617 8 9 101
92021
J2212.!1Z4lXi25LX 25VVI
1291& 81 37 38 39
11<10 41 42//1441451481/ 'I
LG2 (BRN/VEl)
C(49P)
111 12 3 4151617 6 9 101
92021
VVZ4IXJ251X12B27J
W VJ32133[34V11137 33 39
11<1014142 43144145148 4748 191

Is there 12-25 Q ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK
12. Check for continuity betweenPCMconnector .'
terminal No.2.
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
S ~ I T SOLENOID
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
14-214
14-242).
solenoid valve C connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID '
VALVE C CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
SOLENOID .HARNESS
CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
BACK
16. Update the Aff software in the PCM if it does not
was substituted, go to step 1 ..
NO-Go to step 19.
troubleshooting .
valve C and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-215
BACK
OTe P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D
Circuit
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (seepage 14-4) ..
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO'7""Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve Dwith the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
time. Check the SH D wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve D and the
14-216
9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P) .
PCM CONNECTORS
.----------1Q
B(49P)
111 123 4 Isl617 8 9110 I
111121314115116117118 92021
122\21 24 XI26IX 28V!/
\29 30 31 32133184135\38 '61 38 39
114014142V\44I45I46/VL 1
L-----li LG2 (BRN/YEL)
SH D (GRN/RED)-@-
C(49P) II
YES-:-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 19.
BACK
PCM CONNECTORS
.---------{Q
B(49P)
111 2 3 4 J 61611 8 9110 I
92021
J22 23 2A Xi2SiX
j29 30 31 2133j34136j36 31 36 39
1140 41 421/144146146 / 'L 'I
,------,I LG2 (BRN/YEl)
SH D (GRN/REi(-
C (49P) II '-"
111 2 3 4 161 6 J7 8 9110 I
920211
VV 2AlXJ2SJX 26 211261
391
1140 41 42 43144146146 41 461491
1 LG1 (BRN/YEl)
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve D OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D or the shift
24.
terminals A 1 and 841 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL2 (WHT)
-II
A (49P) B(49P) C(49P)

12846878910

12346678810

1284&878910

11 8 '118 9 21 11 2 Wf16 8 8 9 21 112 21
LX 1"'1
.,42
1<81" 1 .. 47 .... 4142 'I ....... >41 42 .. ..... 474849
'::f..
I LG2 (BRN/YEL)

YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
terminals 841 and body ground, and between C41
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
=
the wire between PCM connector terminal A 1 and
(cont'd)
14-217
BACK
NO-Go to step 23.
troubleshooting . '
valve D and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was su bstituted, go to step 1. If
21 and recheck.
14-218
terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
valve D and thePCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
BACK
DTe P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D
Circuit
NOTE:
anyon-board 'snapshot, and review General
transmission.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 7.
at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
10. Measure the resistance between PCM con'nector
PCM CONNECTORS

B(49P)
111 234161617 89101
92021
241'Xl261X12E 1/111
1291& 31 32133134I36jae 38 38
1140 41 4217l44T46148V 1/ 1/1
T LG2 (BRN/YEL)
L-_-'
SH 0
C(49P) , II
1112 34161617 8 9101
920211
1/1/ 24JX 1261>< 28 21128J
381391
I r40 41 42 4sT44146148 47 48 491
-r LG1 (BRN/YELl
Is there 12-25 Q ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
14-219
BACK
terminal No. 1.
Terminal side of .
female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
SHIFT SOLENOID.
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
SH D (GRN/RED)
Wire side of
female terminals
14-220
13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (seepage
14-242).
solenoid valve D connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminals
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
BACK
NO-Go to step 19.
troubleshooting .
valve 0 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
terminals at shift solenoid valve 0 and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
valve 0 and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
14-221
BACK
DTC P16CO: PCM AfT Control System
Incomplete Updated
NOTE:
This code is indicated when PCM updating is
incomplete.
1. Update the AfT software in the PCM (see page 14-8).
2. Check whether the DTC P16CO is indicated in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC P16CO indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .

NO-PCM updating is complete .
14-222
BACK
OTC P1717: Open in Transmission Range
Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit
NOTE:
transmission.
2. Shift to the R position, and check the A/T R SWITCH
signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the AlT R SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 3 ..
NO-Check for proper transmission range switch
installation (see page 14-315), adjust the shift cable
(see page 14-311), then recheck .
3. Check the REVERSE SWITCH signal with the HDS.
Is the REVERSE SWITCH ON?
time .
NO-Go to step 4.
connector .
GND(BLK)
234 5
6 7 8910
Q
=
YES-Go to step 7.
step 15.
(cont'd)
14-223
BACK
123
678
ATP RVS (RED/WHT) '-----__ _
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
14-224
9. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.9
terminals at the transmission range switch.
1 2 3
678
ATPRVS '--__ -----l
Is there continuity when the shift lever is in the P,
R, and N positions, and no continuity when the
shift lever is in the D and D3 positions?
YES.,....Check for poor connections and loose
PCM. Ifthe connections are OK, go to step 10.
BACK
10. Reconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
12. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
the P and R positions, then into the N position.
NO-Go to step 14.
troubleshooting .
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
16. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
the P and R positions, then into the N position.
NO-Go to step 18.
14-225
BACK
DTC P1743: Problem in Shift Control System;
Shift Valve E Stuck OFF
clutch material?
NO.,-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266),
then go to step 4.
position through all five gears, then slow down to a
stop.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
the D position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
YIES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body
(see page 14-347), replace the main valve body, or
replace the transmission, then go to step 8.
14-226
stop.
down to a stop.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P17 43 in the DTCs/
BACK
DTe P1744: Problem in Shift Control System;
Shift Valve E Stuck ON
2. Make sure thatthe transmission is filled to the
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
stop.
down to a stop.
YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body
(see page 14-347), replace the main valve body, or
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS:
stop.
down to a stop.
14-227 BACK
DTC P1745: Problem in Shift Control System;
Servo Control Valve Stuck OFF or Servo
Control Valve Stuck ON
clutch material?
then go to step 4.
stop.
down to a stop.
YES-Repair the servo control valve in the main
valve body (see page 14-347), servo valve in the
regulator valve body (see page 14-350), or replace
the main valve body, regulator valve body, or
14-228
. position through all five gears, then slow down to a
stop.
down to a stop.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P17 45 in the DTCs/
BACK
OTC P1780: Problem in Shift Control System
stop.
the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
4. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneous with
the code P1780.
NOTE: DTC P1780 means there is one or more AfT
DTCs about the shift control system.
Are there other DTCs?
YES-Troubleshoot a problem as indicated by the
DTC .
NO-Go to step 5.
have'the latest software (see page 14-8), or
stop.
the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
8. Check forDTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Is DTC P1780indicated?
NO-Go to step 9.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
14-229
BACK
DTC P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit
Low Voltage Input
Is DTC P2122 indicated in th.e PGM-FI system?
System (see page 11-269) ..
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time
14-230
Is DTC P2122indicated?
NO-Go to step 8.
troubleshooting
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
BACK
DTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit
High Voltage Input
Is DTC P2123 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshootfor DTC P2123 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-272)
NO-Go to step 4.
Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
time .
5. Update the A!f software in the PCM if it does not
NO-Go to step 8.
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the accelerator
pedal position sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK
DTC U0028: F-CAN Communication Circuit
Error (F-CAN Bus OFF)
3. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/
Is DTe U0028 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC U0028 in the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 4.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS;
Is DTe U0028 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
14-232
have the latest software (see page 14-8); or
good PCM (see page 14-9), thEm recheck.lfthe PCM
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the. OBD STATUS for U0028 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals-at the PCM and
the connectors on the F-CAN circuit. If the PCM was
14-9), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
BACK
DTC U0122: Lost Communication with VSA
Modulator-Control Unit
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General' .'.
3. Check whether DTC U0122 is indicated in theDTCs/
Is DTC U0122 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC U0122 in the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
have the latest software (see page 14-8); or
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0122 in the DTCs/
troubleshooting .
connections and loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit the PCM. If the PCM was
9. Check the communication line between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the gauge control
module with the HDS.
Is there malfunction in the F-CAN line between the
VSA modulator-control unit and gauge control
module?
YES-Repair open in the wires between the VSA
modulator-control unit connector and the CAN
communication lines .
NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-102), then recheck. Ifthe
VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original
VSA modulator-control unit
14-233
BACK
DTC U0155: Lost Communication with Gauge
Control Module
3. Checkwhether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/
Is DTC U0155 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
VES-Troubleshootfor DTC U0155 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-205) ..
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether the DTC U0155 is indicated in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC U0155 indicated? '
VIES-Go to step 5.
time .
14-234
Mode Menu with theHDS.
. VES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0155 inthe DTCs/
VES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
troubleshooting .
NO-Ifthe. HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the gl:\uge
control module and the PCM.lfthe PCM was
BACK
Road Test
temperature (the. radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Start the engine, then shift to the D position while
pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator
pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should
not stall.
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions.
4. Connect the HDS to the DLe (A), and go to the AfT
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the
11-223).
5. Prepare the HPS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
(refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if
needed):
. Select High Speed icon.
Select these parameters:
- VSS veh speed
- Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
- InputShaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
- RPM engine speed
- Relative TP Sensor
- APP Sensor A
- ATF Temp sensor
- Battery voltage
- Shift control
- Brake Switch
Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
aboveO.8V.
Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
Set the trigger point to -30 seconds.
6. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to
do the test, press OK on the HDS.
7. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the
APP Sensor A reads 0.8 V. Maintain a steady
throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear,
then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
8. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded
or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 7.
9. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.25 V. Test-drive
the vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS,
accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads
2.25 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear (or reasonable
speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
10. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded
or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 9.
11. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to
the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the
transmission shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
(cont'd)
14-235
BACK
Road Test (cont'd)
12. Review each snapshot individually, and compare
the Shift Command, the APP Sensor A voltage, and
the Vehicle Speed to the table below.
U hft D P .,
IpS I : osition
!
, .
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
O.8V
.
1st-+2nd 9-:-13 mph (14-21 km/hf
2nd-+3rd (27-34km/h)
3rd-+4th 25-31 mph (40...,...50 km/h)
4th-+5th 40-48 mph (64-77 km/h)
Lock-up ON 47-53 mph (76-85 km/h)
2.25 V
1st-+2nd 22-26 mph (35-42 km/h)
2nd-+3rd 45-53 mph (72-85 km/h)
3rd-+4th 70""::'78 mph. (113,-126 km/h)
4th-+5th 99,-109 mph (159,175 km/h)
Lock-up ON 100-110 mph (161--'-177 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
r
4.5 V
1st-+2nd 36-42 mph (58-.68 km/h)
2nd-+3rd 65-73 mph (105-117km/h)
3rd-+4th 99-109 mph (159-175 km/h)
14-236
Downshift D Position (reference)
Accelerator pedal position sensor v.oltage:
0.8 V
Lock-up OFF 44-50 mph (71-80 km/h)
5th-+4th 35-41 mph (56-66 km/h)
4th-O:3rd, 17-21 mph (27-34 km/h)
3rd-+2nd 7-11 mph(11-18 km/h)
2.25 V
Lock-up OFF 65-73mph (105-117 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
Accelerator-pedal position sensor voltage:
4.5 V
5th--4th 128-140 mph (206-225 km/h)
4th-+3rd 78-88 mph (126-142 km/h)
3rd-+2nd 54-58 mph (87-93 km/h)
3rd-+1st 26-32 mph (42-51 km/h)
13. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in the sequential
sportshift mode in the M position, then downshift
to 2nd gear. The vehicle should immediately begin
to slow down from engine braking.
14. Shift to the R position, accelerate from a stop at full
throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage.
15. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16 degrees),
apply the brake, and shift into the P position.
Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle,
when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on
the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
BACK
Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the
proper level (see page 14-265).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
3. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A), and go to the AfT
data list. If the HOS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Make sure the AlC switch OFF.
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
shift to the 0 position.
6. Firmly press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not
move the shift lever while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in
the R position.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds
ata time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
Stall speed should be the same in the 0 and R
positions.
Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:
Specification: 1,950 rpm
Service Limit: 1,800-2,100 rpm
8. Ifthe measurements are out ofthe service limit, the
possible problems and probable causes are listed
in the table.
Problem Probable causes
Stall speed rpm high ATF pump output
in the OaAd R low
positions Regulator valve stuck
Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 5th clutch
in the R position
Stall speed rpm low Engine output low
in the 0 and R Engine throttle valve
positions closed
Torque converter
one-way clutch
slipping
14-237
BACK
Pressure Test
AfT clutch pressure gauge set
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY401'20
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the
proper level (see page 14-265).
2. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported.
3. Allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
4. Remove the transmission undercover (A) and
splash shield (B).
14-238
B
a ~ : : : : = " " " 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
5. Remove the damper from the front subframe.
8x 1.25mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
~
6. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A), and go to the AfT
data list. If the HOS does not communicate with the
11-223).
BACK
7. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure
inspection hole (A). Do not allow dust or other
foreign particles to enter the hole while connecting
the gauge.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
GAUGE SETW/PANEL
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
AfT PRESSURE
HOSE, 2,210 mm
07MAJ-PV4011A
AfT PRESSURE
HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PV40120
9. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure
inspection port (A) in the P or N position while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if
measurements are made in the shift lever position
other than P or N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure
Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
(9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.2 kgf/cm2,
140-146 psi) 130 psi)
10. Turn the. engine off, then disconnect the oil
pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
port.
11. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure
inspection port with a new sealing washer, and
tighten the bolt to 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft). Do
not reuse the old sealing washer.
12. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch
pressure inspection port (B) and the 1st-hold clutch
pressure inspection port (C).
13. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct,
and connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd
clutch pressure inspection port (D). Then
temporarily install the air cleaner housing and
intake air duct.
D
(cont'd)
14-239
BACK
Pressure Test (cont'd)
14. Start the engine, and shift into the M position.
15. Shift into 1st gear, and measure the 1st clutch
pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port
(8) and 1 st-hold clutch pressure at the 1 t ~ h o l
clutch pressure inspection port (C) while holding
. the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
16. Upshift to 2nd gear by pushing the shift lever, and
measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch
pressure inspection port (D) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
1st clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(8) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi)
(D)
1st-hold 680-760kPa 630 kPa
clutch (C) (6.9-7.7 kgf/cm2, (6.4 kgf/cm2,
98-110 psi) 91 psi)
17. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner housing
and intake air duct, then disconnect the oil pressure
gauges from the 1st clutch pressure, 1st-hold clutch
pressure, and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports.
18. Install the sea Ii ng 'bolts in the 1st clutch pressure,
1st-clutch hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch
pressure inspection. ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm,
" 13 Ibfft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
19. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
14-240
20. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch
pressure inspection port (E) and the 5th clutch
pressure inspection port (G).
21. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch
pressure inspection port (F).
F
BACK
22. Cancel the transmission 2nd-hold control mode
with the HDS; choose Pressure Assistance Mode in
the Miscellaneous Test Menu of the AfT Mode
Menu.
23. Start the engine, and shift to the D3 position.
24. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch
pressure inspection port (D) while holding the
25. Shift to the D position, and measure the 4th clutch
pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection port
(E) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
26. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch
pressure inspection port (F) while holding the
3rd clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(E) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
4th clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi)
(F)
5th clutch
(G)
27. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the
brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating.
28. Shift to the R position, then release the brake pedal.
Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and measure
the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure
inspection port (G).
5th clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(G) in R (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
140-148 psi) 130 psi)
29. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil
pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressure inspection ports.
30. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch pressure inspection ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm,
13 Ibfft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
31. If the measurements are out of the service limit, the
possible problems and probable causes are listed
in the table.
Problem Probable causes
No or low line Torque converter
pressure ATF pump
Regulator valve
Torque converter
check valve
Clogged ATF strainer
No or low 1st clutch 1st clutch
pressure O-rings
No or low 2nd clutch 2nd clutch
pressure O-rings
No or low 3rd clutch 3rd clutch
pressure O-rings
No or low 4th clutch 4th clutch
pressure O-rings
No or low 5th clutch 5th clutch
pressure O-rings
No or low 5th clutch Servo valve
pressure in the R 5th clutch
position O-rings
No or low 1st-hold 1st-hold clutch
clutch pressure O-rings
32. Install the damper on the front subframe.
33. Install the splash shield and transmission
undercover.
14-241
BACK
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement
2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B,C, and D in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
11-223).
3. Check that shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D
operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be
heard.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK.
The test is complete, disconnect the HDS .
If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and
test the solenoid valves.
equipped).
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,
then disconnect the positive terminal.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
7. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its
bracket, and remove the bracket from the battery
base.
8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
9. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket.
14-242
10. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibf.ft)
~
11. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin
(C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E).
12. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift
cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page
14-309).
BACK
connector (A), input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector (8), output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (e), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D), and ATF
temperature sensor connector (E).
14. Remove the harness clamp (F) from the clamp
bracket (G).
valve A connector (A), AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve 8 connector (8), and shift solenoid
harness connector (e).
.bl.":'---{--- B
r----o
/
6X1.0mm
12Nm
o 11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf.ft)
E
16. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D),
and disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (E).
17. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and 8, ATF pipes (e), and gasket (D).
6x 1.0 mm
18. Replace the gasket and O-rings (E) with new ones
when installing the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and 8.
19. Remove the solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins
(8), and gasket (e).
A
6x 1.0 mm
20. Replace the gasket with new one when installing
the solenoid valve cover.
(cont'd)
14-243
BACK
'.;'
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
(cont'd)
21. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid
valve A. shift solenoid valve 8, shift solenoid valve
C, and shift solenoid valve D.
c
22. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve
between the connector terminal and body ground.
Standard: 12-25 Q
If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 25
and replace shift solenoid valve.
If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
23 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
23. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
terminal to the body ground, and connect another
jumper wire from t.he positive battery terminal to
each solenoid valve terminal individually.
If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24 and
replace the shift solenoid harness.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 25 and
replace shift solenoid valve.
14-244
24. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A),
and replace it. Install a new O-ring (8) on the shift
solenoid harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go to
step 31.
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
(1.2kgf.m,
8.7Ibfft)
25. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves.
E
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
BACK
26. Install new O-rings (twQ O-rings per solenoid valve)
(E) on the reused solenoid valves.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new
O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the
O-rings provided on it.
27. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator
body.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the
connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be
sure to hold the solenoid valve body.
28. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by
body.
29. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve A.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid
valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve A, it may damage the hydraulic control
system.
30. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
body.
31. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
32. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins,
and a new gasket.
33. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the
solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes with
their filter side into the transmission housing.
Install the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
34. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
and B.
35. Secure the harness cover with the bolt.
36. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
37. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable e n ~ and
attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
insert the control pin into the control lever hole
through the shift cable end, and secure the control
pin with the spring clip/washer.
38. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
39. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
41. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery
base, and install the subfuse box on its bracket.
42. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and
battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
45. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-259).
14-245 BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
11-223).
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
with the HDS.
If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.
Disconnect the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, follow the
instructions on the HDS.
If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does
not determine the cause, go.to step 4.
equipped).
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and .
base.
14-246
valve A connector.
11. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3-10 Q
If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
(see page 14-252).
12.
terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal
No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
No.1.
If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 13.
BACK
(A).
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
~ e
control lever (E).
cable end for a proper fitand wear. Ifthe bushing is
14-309).
connector (B), output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (C), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
G
D
~ F
bracket (G).
solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
1 .... _--8
""'---0
/
6X1.0mm
12Nm
o 11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf.ft)
E
(cont'd)
14-247
BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test (cont'd)
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and
O-rings (E).
6x1.Omm
21. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for
contamination.
terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector terminal No.2, and connect
another jumper wire from the positive battery
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
A
14-248
23. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check
valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AlTclutch pressure control solenoid valve
Aand B.
24. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
and B.
securely.
synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid, Valve B Test
11-223).
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
with the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS.
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
equipped).
base.
valve B connector.
B resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3-10 Q
If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
(see page 14-252).
12.
terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal
No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
No.1.
parts.
(cont'd)
14-249
BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont'd)
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm

control lever (E).
cable end for a proper fit and wear; If the bushing is
14-309).
14-250
, A-
bracket (G).
.! .. rr---f-- B
;
6X1.0mm
12Nm
o
E
BACK
O-rings (E).
A,B
6x1.0mm
contamination.
valve B connector terminal No.2, and connect
terminal to the. connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
23. Disconnect one of the jumperwires and check
valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. Ifthe valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
Aand B.
the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
and B.
securely.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14-251 BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement
equipped).
4. Remove the under-hood subfuse boxfrom its
base.
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
~ @
control lever (E).
14-309).
14-252
10. Disconnectthe transmission range switch
. L I ~ G
c
bracket (G).
BACK
O-rings (E).
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
15. Check the fluid passage of the AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve for dustor dirt, and clean the
passage.
17. Install AfT clutch presslJre control solenoid valve A
and B.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean,
then connect the connectors securely.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14 .. 253
BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
11-223).
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
with the HDS.
Disconnect the HDS.
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
equipped).
base.
4 ~ 2 5 4
valve C connector.
C resistance at the connector terminals.
Standard: 3-10 Q
Iftlie resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
(see page 14-257).
12.
terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal
No; 2, and connect another jumper wire from the
No.1.
parts.
BACK
13. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C.
14. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and
gasket.
contamination.
valve C connector terminal No.2, and connect
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
0*0

o 0
17. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check
valve movement atthe fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or ifthe solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C.
the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-255
BACK
Alitomatic Transmission
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont'd)
19. Installthe 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
filter end into its mounting hole (B).
A
20. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint
pipe (B) between the top (C) of the pipe and
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
14-256
21. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission
housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(B) with the filter end into the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl 0

22. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
23. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
24. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
connect the connector securely.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid ValveCReplacement
equipped).
base.
valve C connector.
8. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C.
9. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and
gasket.
10. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage
of the solenoid valve body and transmission
housing.
11. Installthe 8 x53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
filter end into its mounting hole (8).
A
12. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint
pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
(cont'd)
14-257
BACK
A'Utomatic Transmission
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement (cont'd)
13. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission
housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(8) with the filter end into the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft) 0

14. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
15. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14-258 BACK
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
splash shield (B).
B

9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.21bf.ftl
8x1.2Smm
22Nm

4. Disconnectthe inputshaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (A).
A B
5. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.
undercover.
14-259
BACK
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
splash shield (8).
B
x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.21bJ.ft)
8x1.2Smm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)

1'4-260
sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(counters haft) speed sensor (A) and sensor washer
(8).
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibfft)

c
5. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (8), then install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
sensor washer;
undercover.
BACK
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
equipped).
base.
7. Disconnectthe 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
A
20Nm
(2.0 kgfm, 14lbfftl

8. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (B),
and tighten the switch.
9. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign
particles inside the connector.
10. Connect the connector securely.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14-261
BACK
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
2. Remove the transmission undercover. (A) and
splash shield (B).
A
~ l W ~ = ~ 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ftl
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl
~
14-262
4. Disconnectthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid
B
A
20Nm'
(2.0 kgfm, 14lbfftl
5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid
undercover.
BACK
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ..
equipped).
base.
7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
8. Install the new 4th clutch transmission fluid
base, and install the subfuse box oh its bracket.
terminals.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14-263
BACK
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
splash shield (8).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.tt)
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
transmission fluid (ATF).
A
18x1.5mm
49Nm
15.0 kgf.m, 36 Ibftt)
B
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer
(8).
(A), then remove the connector from the connector
bracket (8).
B
A
D
c
F
E
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibf.tt)
6. Remove the harness clamp (C) from its bracket (D).
7. Remove the ATF temperature sensor (E), and
replace the sensor.
8. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new ATF
temperature sensor, and install the ATF
temperature sensor.
9. Check the connector for rust; dirt, or oil. Connect
the connector securely, and install it on its bracket.
10. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
11. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 7 on page
14-266).
undercover ..
BACK
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up
longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to
come on twice.
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (8).
6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid
leaks at the transmission, and hose and line joints.
If a problem is found, fix it before filling the
transmission.
NOTE: Ifthe vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
below the lower mark:
Transmission damage will result.
Vehicle does not move in any gear.
Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when
starting off in the D and R positions.
The engine vibrates at idle.
7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
to proper level (see step 5 on page 14-266).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep
forward while in the N position, or have shifting
problems.
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with the ATF
through the dipstick guide tube opening (A) to
bring the fluid level midway between the upper
mark and lower mark of the dipstick. Do not fill past
the upper mark. Always use Acura ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
9. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide tube.
14-265 BACK
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn
the engine off.
4. Remove the transmission undercover.
5. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug (A), and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a cooler cleaning is done, refer to ATF
Cooler Cleaning (see page 14-300).
A
18x1.5mm
49Nm
(5.0 kgfm. 36 Ibfttl B
(B).
1,4-266
7.' Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A). Always use Acura ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.8,L (3.0 US qt) at change
7.9 L (8.3 US qt) at overhaul
8. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing
washer (C).
BACK
9. Remove the dipstick (A).
B
c
10. Make sure the fluid level is between the upper mark
(B) and lower mark (C) on the dipstick.
11. Install the transmission undercover.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)
12. Ifthe maintenance minder required to replace the
ATF, resetthe maintenance minder (see page 3-6),
and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance
minder did not require to replace the ATF, go to
step 10 and reset the ATF life with the HDS.
13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the
BODY ELECTRICAL. Ifthe HDS does not
communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC
the HDS.
15. Select RESET inthe MAINTENANCE MINDER with
the HDS.
16. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and
reset the ATF life with the HDS.
14-267
BACK
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
engine off.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
5. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the transfer
fluid (hypoid gear oil).
A
20x1.5mm
(B).
14-268
7. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B).
A
20x1.5mm

s. Refill the transfer assembly with the recommended
fluid (hypoid gear oil) through the filler hole (e)
until the fluid flows out. Use an SAE 90 or SAE
SOW-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4
or GL5 only.
Viscosity:
SAE 90: Above 0 Of ( -18 'Cl
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 Of (-18 'Cl
Transfer Fluid (Hypoid Gear Oil) Capacity:
0.43 L (0.45 US qtl at fluid change
9. Install the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
BACK
Transfer Assembly Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported
securely.
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
10x 1.25mm ,
C
4. separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion
flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
D B C
6. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.)
7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-435).
8. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of
the transfer assembly and transmission.
9. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly,
remove the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
10. Check for fluid leaks between the transfer
companion flange and transfer oil seal.
11. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly from
the transmission, and replace the transfer oil seal
and O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear). If oil seal and O-ring replacement is required,
you will need to check and adjust the transfer gear
tooth contact, transfer gear backlash, the tapered
roller bearing starting torque, and the total starting
torque (see page 14-435). Do not replace the oil seal
with the transfer assembly on the transmission.
14-269
BACK
Transfer Assembly Removal
securely.
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
A
18x 1.5 mm
49Nm
(5.0 kgfm, 36 Ibfft) B
(8).
14-270
7. Remove the exhaust pipe A.
BACK
8. Remove the bolt securing. the transfer breather
hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose
(8) from the breather pipe (C) on the transfer
assembly.
shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (C).
c
10. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange.
11. Remove the transfer assembly from the
transmission.
14-271
BACK
Transfer Assembly Installation
1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly
contacts the transmission with solvent, and dry
with compressed air. Then apply transmission fluid
to the contact area.
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and
install the transfer assembly (8) on the
transmission.
14-272
3. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
companion flange (8) by aligning the reference
mark (C).
./"'" 10 x 1.25 mm
[:jj
B
4. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on
the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
breather hose (8) over the breather pipe (C) with
the dot (D) facing out.
6x 1.0mm
12Nm

BACK
5. Install the exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking
nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (e) (0).
8x 1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2kgfm,
16Ibfft)
10x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
(5.5kgfm,
40Ibfft)
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
Replace.
33 Nm (3.4kgfrn, 25Ibfft)
Replace.
6. Install the front subframe stiffener with the new
mounting bolts.
10x 1.25mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
7. Refill the transfer with transfer fluid (hypoid gear
oil), if necessary (see page 14-268).
14-266).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfmi7.2Ibfft)
14-273 BACK
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement
securely.
2. Remove the transfer breather (A) from its bracket
(B).
A
3. Remove the breather hose clamp (A) from the hose
. clamp (B), and remove the hose clamp (C) from the
vacuum hose (D).
D
4. Remove the harness clamp (E) on the breather
hose from the engine harness (F).
14-274
5. Disconnect the breather hose (A) from the transfer
breather pipe (B), and remove the breather hose
from the hose clamp (C).
6. Install the breather hose over the breather pipe
with the dot (D) facing out, and install the hose on
the hose clamp at the dot (E).
7. Install the breather hose clamp on the hose clamp,
and install the hose clamp on the vacuum hose at
the mark.
8. Install the harness clamp on the engine harness.
9. Install the transfer breather on its bracket.
BACK
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required . "
Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566
Engine hanger balancer bar VSB02C00001.9
NOTE:
surfaces.
Special tool Reds engine support hanger AAR-T12566
must be used with the side engine mount installed:
equipped).
2. Disconnect the support strut from the pivot ball on
both sides (bolted to the hood). Raise and secure
the hood in a vertical position. Remove the left side
pivot ball and install it into the lowerthreaded hole,
then reattach the support strut.
NOTE: Do not attempt to close the hood with the
support strut in the vertical position; it will damage
the support strut and the hood.
3. Set the wheels inthe straight ahead position, and
lock the steering wheel.
4. Drain the power steering system fluid from the
reservoir (see page 17-13).
5. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect
the negative terminal from the battery, then
disconnect the positive terminal from the battery.
7. Remove the intake manifold cover, intake air duct,
and air cleaner housing.
base.
10. Remove the front bulkhead cover.

' ..
11. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely'
supported.
12. Remove the transmission undercover and splash
shield.
A
18x1.5mm
49Nm
B
(B).
15. Disconnectthe steering joint (see page 17-25).
(cont'd)
BACK
Autom'atic Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the power steering pump outlet line (A)
from the power steering pump, and remove the
hose clamp bolt (8).
B
17. Disconnect the transmission breather hose (A) from
the breather pipe (8) at the transmission housing.
18. Disconnect the vacuum hose (C) from the vacuum
line (D), and remove the vacuum line bolt.
14-276
19. Disconnect the starter cables (A) from the starter,
and remove the harness clamp (8) from the clamp
bracket (C).
20. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector (D).
21. Remove the dipstick, then remove the starter (A)
and gasket (8).
.'
BACK
(A).
.
9.8Nm
, (1.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibf.ft)

23. Remove the spring clip/washer (8) and control pin
(C). then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E).
loose or worn. replace the shift cable (see page
14-309).
25. Disconnect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid
. valve A connector (A). Aff clutch pressure control
solenoid valve 8 connector (8). and 4th clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C).
and remove the harness cover mounting bolt (D).
c
26. Disconnect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector (A).
27. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (8).
(cont'd)
BACK
t,.,-
28. Disconriectthe'transmission range switch
connector (A), and remove the harness clamp (8)
from theclamp bracket(C);
29. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF "
cooler lines (8). Turn the ends of the cooler hoses
up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the
cooler hoses and lines.
~ . . - - - - - - B
14-278
30. Diseonnectthe input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor connector (8), ATF temperature
sensor connector (e), an'd 3rd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch connector (D).
31. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (A), and remove the
vacuum line bolt (8).
B "
BACK
32. Remove the bolt securing the engine mount control
solenoid valve mounting bracket.
33. Remove the connector bracket from the engine
front cylinder head; use the bracket bolt holeto
attach engine hanger balancer bar front arm.
34. Remove the transfer breather bracket from the
engine rear cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole
to attach engine hanger balancer bar rear arm.
engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000031) over the
damper flange nuts.
VSB02C000031
-----
(cont'd)
BACK
36. Install the engine balance bar (VS802C000019);
attach the front arm (A) to the front cylinder head
with a spacer and the 10 mm bolt, and attach the
rear arm (8) to the rear cylinder head with the
8 mm bolt.
37. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T12566) to
in the engine balance bar. Tighten the wing nut (C)
by hand, and to lift and support the engine.
38. Remove the front mount stop (A) and front mount
bolt (8).
14-280
40. Remove the exhaust pipe A and its mount (8).
BACK
41. Disconnect the headlight adjuster leveling sensor
connector (A) on both lower arms, and remove the
harness clamps (8) from the front subframe for
model equipped with the headlight adjuster
leveling system.
42. Remove the lock pins (A) and castle nuts (8), and
separate the lower arms (e) from the knuckles (D)
(see stepS on page 18-15).
J
43. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (E) in the top of the ball
joint pin (F), and remove the nuts (G), then separate
the stabilizer link (H).
44. Remove the cotter pins (I) and nuts (J), and
separate the tie-rod end ball joints (K) from the
knuckles (see step 5 on page 18-15).
45. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather
hose bracket (A), and disconnectthe breather hose
(8) from the breather pipe (e) on the transfer
assembly.
shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (e), and
separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange.
c
(cont'd)
14-281
BACK
47. Remove the transfer assembly from the
transmission.
48. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
remove the drive plate bolts (8) (8) while rotating
the crankshaft pulley.
14-282
49. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
50 .. Loosen the hose clamp bolt, then disconnect the
power steering fluid hose from the fluid line atthe
left front of the subframe.
BACK
51. Remove the transmission lower mount bolt.
52. Remove the four rear mount bracket bolts.
53. Remove the bolt securing the power steering fluid
line clamp bracket (A) on the rear mount bracket,
and turn the bracket away from the rear mount
bracket.
arms (B) of the front subframe adapter
(EQS02BMDXSBO) to its center plate.
NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with a
commercially available transmission jack.
(cont'd)
14-283
BACK
55. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on
the corner of the jack base, then attach the adapter
(EQS02BMDXBO) to the jack base with the bolts (A)
that came with the jack. Tighten the bolts securely.
B------
10 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
15.5 kgfm,
40lbf.ttl
A
EOS02BMDXBO
56. Raise the jack to the vehicle height, then attach the
adapter to the front subframe using the subframe
stiffener mounting bolts (B) and bolt holes.
14-284
57. Remove the six bolts securing the front stiffeners
(A) and rear stiffeners (B), and four bolts securing
the front subframe (C), and lower the front
subframe.
58. Remove the transmission lower mount (A).
59. Remove the transmission ground terminal (B).
BACK
60. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and
the intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over driveshaft ends.
61. Remove the exhaust manifold bracket (A) and heat
shield (8).
62. Remove the intermediate shaft (C). Coat all
precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil,
then put the plastic bags over intermediate shaft
ends.
63. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting
bolts.
64. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting
bolts.
(cont'd)
14-285
BACK
;,
65. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) from the
front mount bracket (8), and remove the mount
bracket.
66. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolt
(C) using a socket 22 mm in length.
67. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting
bolts.
68. Place a jack under the transmission.
69. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut
of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear its end
from the side frame.
14-286
70. Slide the transmission away from the engine to
remove it from the vehicle.
71. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
72. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (8) from the
engine crankshaft, and replace the drive plate
whenever the transmission is removed from the
engine.
BACK
Transmission Installation
Frame positioning guide pin 070AG-SJAA10S
Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566
Engine hanger balancer bar VSB02C000019
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
1. Clean the ATF cooler (see page 14-300).
2. Install the new drive plate and washer on the
engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a
crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
12x 1.0mm
3. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)
with the new O-ring (C).
4. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 mm dowel
pin (E) in the torque converter housing.
5. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise it to
engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, and install
the lower transmission housing mounting bolts.
12.x1.25mm
(cont'd)
14-287
BACK
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the rear transmission housing mounting
bolts.
8. Install the upper transmission housing mounting
bolts.
12x 1.25 mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm;47 Ibftt)
14-288
9. Install the transmission housing mounting bolt (A).
/
10X1.25mm
38Nm
(3.9 kgf.m, 28 Ibftt)
Replace.
12x 1.25mm
64Nm
C
I
(6.5 kgfm, 47 Ibftt)
B
10. Install the front mount bracket (8) with the new
mounting bolts.
11. Secure the harness clamp bracket (C) with the bolt.
BACK
12. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft
(8).
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2kgfm.
16Ibfft)
8x1.25mm
26 Nm (2.6 kgfm. 20 Ibfft)
13. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Apply ATF to
intermediate shaft splines (C), then install the
intermediate shaft, be sure not to allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
14. Install the exhaust manifold bracket (D) and heat
shield (E).
15. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (8).
16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry
with compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
the side gear.
17. Apply the recommended grease to the right
driveshaft inboard-joint splines.
18. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate
shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully
engage the intermediate shaft set ring.
(conrd)
14-289
BACK
19. Install the transmission lower mount (A).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
20. Install the transmission ground cable (B).
21. Support the front subframe (A) with the front
subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXBO) and a jack, and
lift it up to the body.
EQS02BMDXBO
14-290
22. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts:
front (A), rear (B), rear stiffeners (e) and mounting
bolts (D), and front stiffeners (E) and mounting
bolts (F).
D
A
14x1.5mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.

B
14x1.5mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
D
12x1.25mm
117Nm
(11.9 kgfm,
86Ibfft)
BACK
23. Loosely-tighten the right rear subframe mounting
bolt (A); insert the frame positioning guide pin
(070AG-SJAA10S) through the positioning hole (B)
on the rear stiffener, through the positioning hole
(C) on the subframe, and into the positioning hole
(0) on the body, then tighten the subframe
mounting bolt.
070AG-SJAA 10S
A
14x 1.5 mm
103 Nm (10.5 kgf.m, 75.9 Ibfftl
D
12x 1.25mm
117Nm
(11.9 kgfm,
86lbfftl
24. Loosely tighten the left rear subframe mounting
bolt in the same manner in step 23.
25. Loosely tighten the right and left front subframe
mounting bolts.
26. Loosen the right rear mounting bolt, then tighten
the bolt to the specified torque.
27. Tighten the left rear mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
28. Tighten the right and left front mounting bolts to
29. Check that the positioning holes and slot are
aligned using the frame positioning guide pin.
30. Tighten the rear and front stiffener mounting bolts
to the specified torque.
31. Remove the jack and front subframe adapter.
32. Install the two mount braCket bolts (A) on the rear
of the bracket, and install the new bolts (B) on the
front.

10x1.25mm
42Nm
(4.3 kgfm,
31lbfftl
B
10x 1.25 mm
42Nm
(4.3 kgfm,
31lbfftl
Replace.
33. Install the new transmission lower mount bolt.
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont'd)

BACK
34. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A)
with eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolt to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
B
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibf.ftl
35. Install the torque converter cover (C).
36. Connect the power steering fluid hose (A) to the
line (B), and secure the hose with its hose clamp (C).
14-292
37. Turn the power steering fluid line clamp. bracket (A)
to seat on, the rear mount bracket (B), and secure
the bracket on the rear mount bracket.
B
x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgf.rri, 8.7 Ibfftl
I
38. Connect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
BACK
39. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and
install the transfer assembly (8) on the
transmission.
40. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on
the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
breather hose (8) over the breather pipe (e) with
the dot (D) facing out. .
41. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
companion flange (8) by aligning the reference
mark (e).
.../10x1.25mm
~ 72 Nm (7.3 kgfm, 53Ibftt)
rsl
B
42. Install the ball joints on each lower arm (A) to each
knuckle (8) with new castle nuts (e), and secure the
castle nuts with the lock pins (D).
c ~
14x1.5mm B
88-98Nm
(9.0:-10.0 kgfm,
65-72.3Ibfttl A
I
J
12 x 1.25 mm
I
~
43. Install the nuts (E) to the ball joint pins(F) on each
stabilizer link (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H) in
the top of the ball joint pins, and tighten the nuts to
44. Install the tie-rod end ball joints (I) to each knuckle
with the nuts (J) and new cotter pins (K).
(cont'd)
14-293 BACK
45. Connect the headlight adjuster leveling sensor
connector (A) on both lower arms" and install the
harness clamps (B) on the front subframe for
model equipped with the headlight adjuster
leveling system.
46. Install the exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking
nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (C) (D).
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
14-294
10x 1.25mm
e
I
10x 1.25mm
54Nm
(5.5 kgfm,
40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
54Nm
Replace.
Replace.
47 . Install the front subframe stiffener .with the new
mounting bolts. ,
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
48. Install the new front mount bolt, and install the
front mount stop (A) with new nuts and vacuum
hose clamp (B).
10x 1.25mm
54Nm
(5.5 kgfm,
40Ibfft)
Replace.
12x 1.25 mm\
74Nm
(7.5 kgfm,
54lbfftl

B

@ 74Ntn
(7.5 kgfm,
54Ibfft)
Replace.
49. Remove the engine support hanger, engine support
hanger stands, and engine balancer bar.
BACK
50. Install the connector bracket on the engine front
cylinder head.
51. Install the transfer breather bracket on the engine
rear cylinder head, and connect the breather hose
over the breather pipe.
8x1.25mm
52. Securing the engine mount control solenoid valve
mounting bracket (A) with the bolt.
6x1.0mm .
12 Nm 1 ~ 2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
53. Connect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector (A), and secure the vacuum line
(B) with the bolt.
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf'm, 7.2Ibfft)
A
(cont'd)
1 4 ~ 2 9 5 BACK
Autonlatic Transmission
connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) .speed
sensor connector (B), ATF temperature sensor
connector (C), and 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D). Do not allow water,
fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign particles to enter
any of the connectors.
55. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses,with the clips (C)
(see page 14-302).
4 ~ 2 9 6
56. Connect the transmission range switch connector
(A), and install the harness clamp (B) on the clamp
bracket (C).
57. Secure the harness cover (A) with the bolts.
58. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector.
BACK
59. Secure the harness cover (A) with the bolt.
-M."=--+--- C
/""I---A
;
6X1.0mm
12Nm
Q
o
60. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector (8), AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B connector (C), and 4th clutch
transmission pressure switch connector (0).
61. Apply molybdenum grease tothe bore hole ofthe
synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B),
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
(C), then insert the control pin (0) into the control
lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure
the control pin with the spring clip/washer (E).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm

62. Secure the shift cable bracket (F) with the nuts.
(cont'd)
14-297
BACK
:,': .
,
63. Install the starter (A) and new gasket (8) (see page
. 4-10).
12x1.25mm
74Nm
(7.5 kgfm, 54 Ibf.ft)
B
64. Install the starter cables. (A), and install the harness
clamp (8) on the clamp bracket (C).
9Nm
A
65. Connect the solenoid harness connector (D).
14-298
66. Install the transmission breather hose (A) over the
breather pipe (8) with the dot (C) facing up.
67. Secure the vacuum line (D) with the bolt, and
connect the vacuum hose (E) to the line.
68. Install the power steering pump outlet line (A) with
the new O-ring (8) to the pump, and secure the
hose clamp (C) with the bolt.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf.ft)

c
69. Connect the steering joint (see page 17-27).
BACK
70. Refill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to
the upper level line.
14-266).
73. Install the air cleaner housing, intake air duct, and
intake manifold cover.
battery hold-down bracket, then connect the
battery terminals.
76. Install the bulkhead cover.
77. Install the splash (A) and transmission
undercover (8).
B

9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
79. Set the parking brake, run the engine at fast idle,
and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock
several times to bleed airfrom the system. Recheck
the fluid level, and refill if necessary.
80. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all positions three times.
Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
81. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment
(see page 18-5).
82. Check the ATF level (see page 14-265).
83. Perform the road test (see page 14-235).
the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock .
. ".
85.00 the power steering column position
memorization (see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
14-299 BACK
ATF Cooler Cleaning
ATF cooler cleaner GHTTTCF6H
Magnetic nonbypass spinon filter GTHGNBP2
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured
automatic transmission, you mustthoroughly clean the
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission
failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1
delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and
protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
AWARNING
Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result
in burns and other serious injuries .
Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow all instructions in this
manual.
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill.
Use only Acura ATF-Z1; do not use any additives.
R / FILLER/BREATHER
// TUBE TANK
14-300
2; Plug.fhe cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
electrical outlet.
INOTICEI
Make sure the outlet has no other appliances
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler
cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;
you could damage the unit.
BLUE HOSE
110V
ELECTRICAL

. SHOP
AIRLINE
3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
when the temperature gauge reads 140 to 150 "F.)
NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEATtoggie
switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too
low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
procedure) ..
4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach
them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner.
BACK
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the
line that normally goes to the external filter on the
transmission).
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line.
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to
125 psi) to the air purge valve.
I NOTICE I
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way
check valve to keep ATF from entering your
shop's air system. Do not remove or replace
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if
your coupler is not compatible.
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
valve open.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
from the filler/breather tube vents.
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR
toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
ATF, then close the valve.
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line.
11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
valve open.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
from the filler/breather tube vents.
13. With the air purge valve. open, flip the MOTOR
toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve.
14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
cooler lines.
15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF
cooler inlet and outlet lines.
18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner
working properly:
Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters
once a year or when you notice a restriction in the
ATFflow.
Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty.
HEATER
TANK
14-301 BACK
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
1. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (A) over the ATF cooler
lines (8) until the hose ends contact with the bulge
(C) ofthe ATF cooler line, and secure the hoses
with the clips (D) at 2-4 mm (0.1-0.2 in.) (E) from
the hose end.
B C
2. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose (F) over the ATF
cooler outlet line (G) at the transmission until the
hose end contacts with the bulge (H) ofthe ATF
cooler line. Secure the hose with the clip (I) facing
tab (J) up at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (K) from the
hose end.
3. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (L) over the ATF cooler
lines (M) until the hose ends contact with the bulge
(N) of the ATF cooler line, and secure the hoses
with the clips (0) at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (P) from
the hose end.
14-302
BACK
ATF Cooler Replacement
securely.
splash shield (B).
A
~ ~ ~ = = = ..... 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ftl
3. Remove the front bulkhead cover, and remove the
front bumper (see page 20-188).
4. Remove the hose clamp (A), and remove the ATF
cooler inlet hose (B) and outlet hose (C) from the
hose clamps (D), then disconnect the hoses from
the ATF cooler lines.
c
A
5. Remove the power steering fluid hose clamp (A)
from the ATF cooler mounting bracket.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
6. Remove the ATF cooler (B), and replace it. Install
the new ATF cooler.
7. Install the power steering fluid hose clamp on the
bracket.
8. Slide the ATF cooler inlet hose over the ATF cooler
line until the hose end contacts with the bulge, and
secure the hose with the clip at 6-8 mm
(0.2-0.3 in.) from the hose end.
9. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose over the ATF
cooler line until the hose end contacts with the
bulge, and secure the hose with the clip at 2-4 mm
(0.1-0.2 in.) from the hose end.
10. Secure the cooler hoses with the hose clamps at
the marks on the hoses.
11. Install the hose clamp atthe mark.
12. Install the front bumper (see page 20-188), and
install the front bulkhead cover.
undercover.
14. Check the ATF level (see page 14-265).
14-303
BACK
Shift Lever Removal
1. Remove passenger's center console trim (see step
6 on page 20-107).
2. Remove the beverage holder inner case (see step
10 on page 20-108).
3. Shift the transmission into the R position.
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
5. Press the holder lock release (A), and pull out the
socket holder (8) to remove the shift cable (C) from
the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove the
shift cable.by pulling the shift cable guide (E) and
damper (F).
F
6. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
14-304
7. Disassemble the center console by removing the
following:
Console a rmrest (see page 20-112)
Center console latch panel (see page 20-113)
Center console panel (see page 20-113)
Center console beverage holder (see page
20-114)
Center console box (see page 20-115)
8. Remove the shift lever assembly from the console
frame.
BACK
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly on the console
frame.
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 161bf.ftl
2. Assemble the center console by installing the
following:
Center console box (see page 20-115)
Center console beverage holder (see page
20-114)
Center console panel (see page 20-113)
Center console latch panel (see page 20-113)
Console armrest (see page 20-112)
3. Install the center console (see page 20-107).
4. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust
the shift cable (see step 6 on page 14-31.1).
5. Install the beverage holder inner case (see step 10
on page 20-108).
6. Install the passenger's center console trim (see
Shift Lever Knob Replacement
1. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the
shift lever knob cover.
2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the shift lever
knob (B).
3Nm
(0.3 kgfm, 2lbfftl
3. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
screw threads.
4. Install the new shift lever knob, and secure it with
the screws.
5. Slide the shift lever boot ring over the shift lever
knob until it snaps on.
14 .. 305 BACK
Shift Lever Disassembly IReassembly
Apply silicon grease to movable joints of the shift lock mechanism and shift lever.
SCREW 5 x 0.8 mm
3 Nm (0.3 kgfm, 2 Ibf.ft)
Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
14-306
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
~
SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK PLUNGER
SOLENOID STOP CUSHION SPRING
ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH
/
SHIFT LEVER ROD
~
SILICONE GREASE
&l
\
~ : ~ ~ W C K
STOP
SHIFT LOCK ~
SOLENOID ~
PLUNGER SILICONE GREASE
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
"SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
BACK
Shift Lever Bracket Base Replacement
NOTE: Refer to the Shlft Le.ver Disassembly!
Reassembly (see page 14-306) during the following
procedures.
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304).
3. Remove the screws (A), and remove the shift lever
knob (8).
B
3Nm
(0.3 kgfm, 2 Ibfft)
4. Remove the AfT gear positi.on indicator panel light
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the
indicator panel from the shift lever bracket base.
5. Remove the shift lock release.
6. Remove the shift lock solenoid and harness
connector.
7. Remove the shift lock stop and stop cushion as an
assembly.
8. Replace the shift lever bracket base.
9. Apply silicone grease to mounting pin of the shift
lock stop, and install the shift lock stop and stop
cushion over the pin.
10. Apply silicone grease to joint of the shift lock
solenoid plunger and shift lock stop.
11. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger
spring in the shiftlock solenoid.
, .f
12. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of
the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
theshift lever securely. ',' ,
13. Install the shift lock release.
14. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel light
bulb in its socket.
15. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel on the
shift lever bracket ,base, and install the indicator
panel light socket in the indicator panel.
screw threads, install the'shift lever knob, and
secure it with the screws.
18. Install the shift lever (see page 14-305).
1 4 ~ 3 7
BACK
'-,
.,,'
'.
Shift Lever Boot and AIT Gear Positionlndicator'PanelReplacement
3. Remove the screws (A), and, remove the shift lever
knob (8).
B
3Nm
(0.3 kgfm, 2Ibf,ft)
4. Remove the AfT gear position indicator panel light
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the
indicator panel from the shift lever bracket base.
14-308
5. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lever boot
using a screwdriver. "
6. Replace the shift lever boot or AfT gear position
indicator panel, and install the boot in the indicator
panel.
7. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel on the
shift lever bracket base, and install the indicator
panel light socket in the indicator panel.
screw threads, install the shift lever knob, and
secure it with the screws.
BACK
Shift Cable Replacement
securely.
6 on page 20-107).
10 on page 20-108).;
socket holder (8) to remove the shift cable (C) from
the shift lever bracket base (D).
equipped).
10. Remove the subfuse box from its
base.
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm

control lever (E).
15. Remove the heat shield under the shift cable
grommet.
(cont'd)
14-.309
BACK
;"t
;
Transmission
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
16. Removethe drain hose clamp (A) from the shift
cable bracket (8).
17. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket.
18. Removethe shift cable grommet (e), and pull out
the shift cable (D).
19. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole (E), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not
bend the shift cable excessively.
20. Install the shift cable Dtacket, and install the drain
hose clamp on the bracket.
21. Install the heat shield.
,
26. Install the under-hood subfllse box on the battery
base, and install the subfuse boxan its bracket.
14-310
terminals.
28. Install the shift cable on the shift cable, and adjust
the shift cable (see step 6 on page 14-311).
(see page 17-28):
(see page 22-259).
BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment
6 on page 20-107).
10 on page 20-108).
socket holder (B) to remove the shift cable (C) from
the shift lever bracket base.(O). Do not remove the
shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (E) and
damper (F).
F
6. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift
position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B)
and damper (C) to adjust the shift cable.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
R position indicator comes on.
9. Place the shift lever in the R position, then insert
tapered tip 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the
positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base,
through the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever,
and into the positioning small hole (D) on the shift
lever bracket base. The shift lever is secured in the
R position.
c
(cont'd)
14-311
BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
10. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8)
with the slotin the bracket base (C), then slide the
holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D)
over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its.square
hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of
the stud. Push the holder until it snaps securely in
place. Do not install the shift cable by holding the
shift cable guide (H) and damper (I).
11. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (8).
Properly Installed:
@I)=
I
A
Improperly Installed:
T
\
B
Cable end rides on the bottom
ofthe mounting stud.
14-312
12. Ifimproperlyinstalled, remove the shift cable from
the bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do
not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud
while the shift cable is on the bracket base.
13. Install and tighten the nut.
8x1.25mm

14. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and verify that the AfT gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
switch.
16. Shift to the P position, and check that the shift lock
works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
verify that the shift lever releases, and also check
that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to
the P position.
17. Install the beverage holder inner case (see step 10
on page 20-108).
18. Install the passenger's center console trim (see
BACK
AIT Gear Position Indicator
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
MINDICATOR
SHIFT INDICATOR
F-CAN Communication Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-325
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-315
Communication Line Check, page 22-317
DATA LINK .. ,.., ~ I J
CONNECTOR D ~
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT HARNESS
PANEL LIGHT BULB
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH
Test, page 14-319
~
----------- I ~ ~
~ ,
r - ~ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Test, page 14-315
14-313
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/llELAY BOX UNDEII-DASH RJSE/RELAY BOX
No.III20AI NolIIG1I5OAl
__ -t __ ____ --f---------Mrr---------------------'
14-314
IGNmON SWITCH
L..::::::
NO.':::::;;:::::8 110 AI
No.19I2OAl
CAN
CONTROLLER
T05V
IGI
VBSDL
VBSOL2
ATPRVS
ATPFWD
ATPD3
ATPD
ATPN
ATPR
ATPP
B42
B2
AI
CI9
CI8
C46
cn
C26
C25
AI6

DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
IDLCI
A/TGEAR
POSmON
INDICATOR

so P2
I'G
G501
<J---- BRN ----ij--- BRN __
,----------- BLK __ ---=:B40"-<f'-I'G=-''--,
,-_______ BLK __
BRN/YEL ---,
BRN/YEL
mill
S-MDDE
L1
S
-
UP
S-DN
TRANSMISSIONRANGE SWITCH
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH t>--
FUSE/RELAY BOX LTBLU
No.22 17.5 AI
GAUGE CONTROL <1- RED
MODULEB2
1.47
"'1"'
Al6
BLU---I BLU
Al7
GRN---I GRN
..r- BLK
G503
PCMHarness Connector Terminal locations
'" '1_1'1' .1 9 1'0
1"1" 13 'VI"VI'. '**'
I
22
V" XI" X ,**.
129130 31 "WVI" 37I'sj3o
.041 42 "1"1/1" " ... 0
AI49P) 0
, I' , '1'1'1'
8 9 10
1"1" 13 "1"1"1"1'. 19 201"1
122123
"Xi"IX "VL'I
1'0130
31 "1"1"1'01>'
37 381391
"1
41
"VI"I"I" VI/I/
BI49P1 "
Terminal sideof femaletennlnals
, I '
,
I I
1" "V '1"1'6
V V" Xi"
V VV "1"1"
11"1
" "
43 144
CI49P) 0
STARTEII
CUT RELAY
.1.11
BLK
I-- RED/BLK A{fGEAR
POsmON
INDICATOR
I-- RED/BLK PANEL
S-MODE
I--ORN --+--0
S-UP
I-- BLU/WHT
I-- BLU/YEL
I-- BLK
TRANSMISSIONGEAR
SELECTIONSWITCH
6
1'
a I 9 10
17 1'8
'"1>01>'
X 26
1"1
28
VVI 37
1"1
39
"I"
41
14849
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Test
equipped).
base.
connector.
8. Check for continuity between terminals at the
switch connector. There should be continuity
between the terminals in the following table for
each switch position.
Transmission Range Switch Connector
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
- D R P GND
T
D3 N
ATP ATP
FWD RVS NP
P
0
k)
Q
~
R
0
r"""\
D '-J
N
0 0
ro-
-0
D
0 0-
k)
D3
0
~
k)
9. Transmission range switch test has finished ifthe
test results are OK.
Ifthere is no continuity between any terminals,
check that the transmission range switch
installation. If the switch installation is OK, replace
the switch (see page 14-316).
14-315
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Replacement '
equipped).
base.
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
~
control lever (E).
14-309).
14-316
10. Disconnectthe transmission range switch
connector.
11. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (A) on the
control lever (8), and remove the nut (C), lock
washer, spring washer (D) and control lever.
12. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (E) on the
transmission range switch (F), hold the control
shaft (G) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen the
locknut (H).
13. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove
the transmission range switch (two bolts).
14. Set the new transmission range switch (A) to the N
position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the N position, and the control shaft hole (8) aligns
with the N position line (C).
N
c
B
BACK
15. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning
the control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench.
16. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently
over the control shaft (8), and install the bolts
loosely.
17. Install the new lock washer (A) over the control
shaft (8) with aligning the projection (e) of the lock
washer with the N positioning line (D) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
(cont'd)
14-31.7
BACK
AfT Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
18. Push the locknut againstthe transmission housing
to seat the transmission range switch into the
control shaft, and tighten the locknut (A) to 12 Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft) while holding the controLshaft
(B) with a 6.0 mm wrench (C), then bend the lock
tabs (D) of the lock washer against the locknut.
D
c
19. Tighten the bolts (E) to 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
securing the transmission range switch.
20. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), lock
washer (C), and locknut (D) on the control shaft (E).
16Nm
11.6 kgfm, 12Ibfft)
14-318
21. Check the connectors for rust; dirt, or oil, clean,
then connect the connector securely.
22. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole ofthe
attach the shift cable end to the o n t ~ o l lever, then
25. Install the air cleanerhousing and intake air duct.
terminals.
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
position indicator.
29. Check that the engine will start in the P and N
positions, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
30. Check that the back-up lights come on when the
shift lever is in the R position.
31. Allow the all four wheels to rotate freely, then start
the engine, and check the shift lever operation.
(see page 17-28).
(see page 22-259).
BACK
Transmission Gear Selection
Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 5
on page 20-107).
park pin switch/AIT gear position indicator panel
light harness connector.
3. Check for continuity between connector terminals
No.3 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is in
the M position, and no continuity when the shift
lever is in any position other than M.
No.7 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is
pushed toward the upshift position (+), and no
continuity with the shift lever released to the
neutral position.
No.8 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is
pulled toward the downshift position (-), and no
continuity with the shift lever released to the
neutral position.
6. If the switch fails to work properly, replace the
transmission gear selection switch and shift lever
bracket base as an assembly (see page 14-307). The
transmission gear selection switch, park pin switch,
and AIT gear position indicator panel light harness
are not available separately from the shift lever
bracket base.
7. Install the driver's center console trim (see step 5
on page 20-107).
Transmission Gear Selection
Switch Replacement
NOTE: The transmission gear selection switch is not
available separately from the shift lever bracket base;
replace the transmission gear selection switch
(including park pin switch and AIT gear position
indicator panel light harness) and select lever bracket
base as an assembly.
Replace the transmission gear selection switch and
shift lever bracket base assembly (see page 14-307).
14-319
BACK
AIT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Light Harness Replacement
NOTE: The AfT gear position indicator panel light
harness is not available from separately the shift lever
bracket base; replace the AfT gear position indicator
panel light harness (including transmission gear
selection switch and park pin switch) and select lever
bracket base as an assembly.
Replace the AfT gear position indicator panel light
harness and shift lever bracket base assembly
(see page 14-307).
14-320
AIT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Light Bulb Replacement
2. Remove the AfT gear position indicator panel light
. socket from the indicator panel.
3. Remove the indicator panel light bulb from the
socket, and replace the bulb with a new one.
4. Install the new bulb in the socket, and install the
socket in the indicator panel.
BACK
AIT Interlock System
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Shift Lock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-323
Test, page 14-330
SHIFT LOCK STOP
SHIFT LOCK STOP CUSHION
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
PARK PIN SWITCH
Key InterlockLock System Circuit
Test, page 14-332
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock Lock System Circuit
14-321
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HODD RJS/RB.AY BOX
No,1111SAl

No,1U20Al NoJ(lGllSOAl
BAT
IGNmON SWITCH
IGl

GAUGECONlllOL MDDULE
A7 VEL
CAN
CONIlIOLLER
AfT
GEAR
POSmoN
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
__ _ .----"".. DATAUNX
BRN BRN ----v
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSmON
SWITCH

PUR ------------''-1

'---'=4"""---- ORN ------"-1 I

ACCELERATOR
PEDAL
POsmON
SENSOR
T
MIT
LTGRN
LTGRN
SHIFT
LOC1(
SOLENOID
rm
-IJ:= YEL GSOl
2 -{j
BLI( -I PNK r-- PNK --...:..:..-==----"
B44 PGl
RED/WHT -----------,
BLU/YEL ---------,

GRN GRN

BLK---tM
PARK
PIN '
SWITCH BLK ---t 1
--,
KEY
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
IGNmoN
KEY
SWITCH
14-322
I LTBLU
B41 LG2

G503 Gl0l

MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
CONlllOL
UNITIMICUI
ATPP
----<:J UNDER-DASH
PUR fUSE/RELAYBOX
No.3Z110AI
[g:'
BRN ----------IKEYSOL
[C,
PNK

G502
11' , 3 4 I 5.1 6J 7 'l.JloJ
I" 12 13VVL16UI'6 19
["V 2. X 25 X 26 27126
129 30 31 32VVVI'6 '7 ,&[>_
II" ., .. 43144JLI" 471" ..
AI4SPI 0
BKSW
12345878910
" 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
222324 X 25 X 26
1
29
1
3031 32
1
33
1"1"1"" 381391
.. ., "1/ 44 461/1/1/1
BI4SPI b
Terminal sidaof female terminals
I T MIT
GRN BLU/BLK
1
,
3 .

7

10
" 12 1616 17 1a 192021
Z4X 25 X '62"8
VII V 321,,134
VlLI
37138 [39
... , .. 43 44 .... 47 48 49
CI49P1 0
STARTER
CUTRELAY
ill
BLI(
LTGRN
BACK
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting ..
1. Connect the HOS to the OLC.
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test i'n the
Misce"aneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HOS.
NOTE: If the HOS does not comrtlUhicate with the
11-223).
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Remove driver's center console trim (see step 5 on
page 20-107).
4. Oisconnectthe shift lock solenoid connector.
6. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
connector terminal No.1 and body ground ..
SHIFT LOCK SOLENO,D CONNECTOR
.; ,.
cfm
i'IYEl'
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for a blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between the shift lock
solenoid connector terminal No.1 and the under-
7. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and press
the brake pedal. Do not press the accelerator.
8. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
connector terminals No.1 and No.2 while pressing
the brake pedal.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
1G1lVELI l.> .UHPNI<]
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
14-323
BACK
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd),
9. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No.1 and No.2. The shift lever must be in the P
position.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
~
IG1IYEU ~ S IPNO'
connector terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid .
NO-Check the shift lock mechanism. If the
mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-330) .
14-324
11. JumptheSCS line with the HDS.
terminal A2and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No.2.
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CONNECTOR
SLS(PNK)
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Substitute a knoyvn-good PCM (see page
14-9) and recheck.. '
connector terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid .
BACK
14. Press the brake pedal.
Are the brake lights ON?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair faulty brake light circuit .
terminalA8 and body ground while pressing the
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released.
PCM CONNECTOR A 149PI
Is there battery voltage while the brake pedal is
pressed, and no voltage when the pedal is
released?
YES-Go to step 20; !
NO-Go to step 19.
terminal A8 and brake pedal position switch 4P
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
BK SW II.. i GRNI
Wire side of ..
female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR A 149Pl
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-9) and recheck .
connector terminal A8 and the brake pedal position
switch .
(cont'd)
14-325
BACK
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. ConnectPCM connector A (49P).
connector.
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
~
NO (BLK)
I
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 24.
14-326
26. Check for continuity betweenPCM connector
ATPP(GRN)
.0.,
=
switch connector.. .
NO-Go to step 27.
terminal A 16 and transmission range switch
TRANSMISSION RANGE PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
SWITCH CONNECTOR
,------{.o.l-------,
ATP P (BLU/BLK) I
ATP P (GRN)
I 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 28.
11 2 3 415 617 691101
1111213/VI 6VI16 9 20 211
I V ~ X 25IX 6 ~ 6 J
J29 30 31 2V /VJ36 37 361391
J40 41 42 43J44VI46 47 46 49L
Terminal side of
female terminals
switch connector .
BACK
GND(BLKI
1 234 5
6 7 8 9 10
.Q
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-91 and recheck .
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101) .
29. Test the transmission range switch (see page
14-315).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 30.
(see page 14-316) .
30. Connect the HOS to the OLC .
31. Check the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 in the
data list with the HOS. 00 not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening
11 % and above, or the sensor 1 voltage 0.90 V
and above?
YES-Check the throttle body (see page 11-362) .
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9)
and recheck .
14-327
BACK
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
doing repair or service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC()). The shift lever
must be in the P position.
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to the
LOCK (0) position.
Can the ignition switch be turned the LOCK (0)
position?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock
assembly (see page 17-29) .
5. Shift the shift lever into any position other than P.
6. Check for continuity between steering lock
assembly connector terminal No.3 and body
ground.
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair a short in the wire between key
interlock solenoid and the MICU .
NO-Go to step 7.
14-328
7. Remove driver's center console trim (see step 5 on
page 20-107).
8. Disconnect transmission gear selection switch/park
pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel light
connector;
body ground.
PARK PIN SWITCH/A/T GEAR POSITION
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between
transmission gear selection switch/park pin switch/
AfT gear position indicator panel light connector
terminal No.4 and the MICU .
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
10. Shift the shift lever into the P position.
selection switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position
indicator panel light connector terminals No.1 and
No.4. Do not push the shift lever button.
YES-Replace the park pin switch (see page 14-332)
and shift lever bracket base (see page 14-307). The
park pin switch, transmission gear selection switch,
and A/T gear position indicator panel light harness
are not available separately from the shift lever
bracket base .
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Disconnectthe multiplex integrated control unit
30P connector.
14. Measure the voltage between multiplex integrated
body ground.
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
30P CONNECTOR
=
Is there battery voltage when the shift lever is in
any position other than the P position, and no
voltage when the shift lever is in the P position?
YES-Substitute aknown"90od multiplex
integrated control unit (MICU) and recheck .
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between the
MICU and the transmission range switch .
4 ~ 3 2 9 BACK
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
1. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A).
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HOS.
NOTE: If the HOS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see pag.e
11-223).
3. Check that the shift lever can be moved out ofthe P
position when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move the
shift lever back in the P position, and make sure it
locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF.
4. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift
lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,
perform shift lock system troubleshooting
(see page 14-323).
14-330
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
2. Remove the shift lock release (A).
3. Remove the shift lock solenoid (B) and harness
connector (C), and replace the shift lock solenoid.
4. Apply silicone grease to joint of the new shift lock
solenoid plunger (0) and shift lock stop (E).
5. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger
spring (F) in the shift lock solenoid.
6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the
joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip
of the shift lock stop, then push the shift lock
solenoid into the shift lever bracket base securely.
7. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift
lever bracket base.
BACK
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop
Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
2. Remove the shift lock stop (A) and stop cushion (B),
and replace the shift lock stop or stop cushion.
3. Install the shift lock stop cushion on the shift lock
stop.
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (e) on the shift
lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop
overthe pin.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
Shift Lock Release Replacement
2. Remove the shift lock release, and replace it.
14-331 BACK
Park Pin Switch Test
on page 20-107).
light connector.
3. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and check
for continuity between transmission gear selection
switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator
panel light connector terminals No.1 and No.4.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity
between connector terminals No.1 and No.4.
5. If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch and shift lever bracket base as an
assembly (see page 14-307). The park pin switch,
transmission gear selection switch, and AfT gear
position indicator panel light harness are not
available separately from the shift lever bracket
base.
6. Install the driver's center console trim (see step 5
on page 20-107).
14-332
Park Pin Switch Replacement
NOTE: The park pin switch is not available separately
from the shift lever bracket base; replace the park pin
switch (including the transmission gear selection switch
and AfT gear position indicator panel light harness) and
select lever bracket base as an assembly.
Replace the park pin switch and shift lever bracket base
assembly (see page 14-307).
BACK
Transmission Disassembly
Mainshaft holder set 07GAB-PF50101
1. Remove the ATF dipstick (D) and the dipstick tube (E).
W V
G
D
c
2. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B (six bolts), ATF feed pipes (F) (three), O-rings (three),
and gasket.
3. Remove the solenoid valve cover (G) (seven bolts), dowel pins (two), and gasket.
4. Disconnect the solenoid valve connectors, then remove the solenoid harness connector (H).
5. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (four bolts), ATF feed pipes (I) (three), O-rings (two), and
gasket.
6. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (J) on the control lever (K), and remove the nut, lock washer, spring washer,
and control lever.
(cont'd)
14-333 BACK
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
7. Pry up the lock tabs of the lock washer (K) on the
transmission range switch (L), hold the selector
control shaft (M) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen
the locknut (N).
8. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove
the transmission range switch (two bolts).
9. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
(0), output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (P),
and sensor washer (Q).
10. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector
from the connector bracket (R) and the harness
clamp from the clamp bracket, then remove the
ATF temperature sensor (5).
11. Remove the connector bracket (R) and 6.0 mm bolt
(T), then remove the line bolts (U), ATF cooler lines
(V), and sealing washers (W).
12. Remove the end cover (X) (three bolts), snap ring
cap (V) (two bolts), sealing plug (Z), and washer
(AA).
13. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (88) and sealing washer.
14. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (CC) and sealing washer.
15. Removethe 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (DD) and sealing washer.
16. Remove the transmission ground terminal (EE).
17. Slip the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101
14-334
18. Cut the lock tab (A) of the mainshaft locknut (8)
using a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
19. Remove the locknut (A) from the mainshaft (8).
20. Pry the lock washer (C), and remove it.
BACK
21. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) (23 bolts), special bolt (8), transmission hanger (C), and
ground terminals bracket (D).
6x 1.0mm
~
J ~
p
w
x
L
K
R
(cont'd)
14-335 BACK
22. While expanding the snap ring ofthe countershaft
bearing using the snap ring pliers, lift the
transmission housing.
23. Release the pliers( and. remove the transmission
housing (E), two dowel pins (F), and gasket.
24. Remove the ATF feed pipes (G) (four) from the
accumulator body.
25. Remove the ATF feed pipes (H) (two) from the
torque converter housing.
26. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft.
27. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (I) on the shift
fork (J), then remove the bolt and lock washer.
28. Unlock the detent spring from the detent arm.
14-336
29. Remove the park pawl stop (K), park pawl (L), pawl
spring (M), and pawl shaft (N).
30. Remove the mainshaft (0), countershaft (P), shift
fork (J), and secondary shaft (Q) together, and
remove the needle bearing (R) from the torque
converter housing.
J
R
31. Remove the selector control shaft and park lever
link (S).
32. Remove the baffle plate (T).
33. Remove the differential assembly (U).
34. Remove the transfer output shaft (V).
35. Remove the baffle plate (W).
36. Remove the intermediary shaft (X).
BACK
37. Remove the ATF . . . stramer (A) (one bolt).
(cont'd)
14-337
BACK
38. Remove the accumulator body (8) (11 bolts), dowel
pins (two), detent arm (C), arm shaft (D), and
separator plate (E).
39. Remove the ATF feed pipe (F) from the main valve
body.
40. Remove the secondary valve body (G) (one bolt),
dowel pins (two), and separator plate (H). Do not let
the check balls (I) (two) fall out.
41. Remove the regulator valve body (J) (seven bolts),
stator shaft (K), stator shaft stop (L), dowel pins
(two), and separator plate (M).
42. Remove the main valve body (N) (8 mm: three bolts,
6 mm: seven bolts). Do not let the lubrication check
valve (0) fall out.
43. Remove the torque converter check valve (P) and
valve spring (Q).
44. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (R), then
remove the ATF pump gears (5).
45. Remove the dowel pins (two) and main separator
plate (T).
46. Remove the ATF passage pipe (U).
47. Remove the ATF magnet (V), clean it, then reinstall.
48. Remove the O-ring (W) from the ATF strainer, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
49. Remove the O-ring (X) from the stator shaft, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
14-338
50. Clean the inlet opening (A) ofthe ATF strainer (8)
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is good condition and that inlet opening is not
clogged.
A
51. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace if it is clogged or
damaged.
BACK
Rever$e Idler ,Gear Removal!
Installation ,,'
. 1. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly (A) from
the transmission housing.
8x1.25mm
26Nm
12.7 kgfm, 20 Ibfft)
2. Install the reverse idler gear assembly with the two
dowel pins (8) in the transmission housing.
Reverse Disassemblyl
Inspection/Reassembly
1. Remove snap r.ifl9 then remove the thr!Jst
washer (8), reverse idler gear (C), needle bearings
(0), and thrust washer (E) from the reverse idler
,.gearsha:fl/holder (F). . . '.
2. Inspect the reverse idler gear and gear shaft for
excessive wear and damage.
3. Inspect the needle bearings for galling and rough
movement.
4. Install the thrust washer and needle bearings over
the gear shaft.
5. Install the reverse idler gear in the direction shown.
6. Install the thrust washer, then install the snap ring
to secure the idler gear.
14-339
BACK
Tran$mission Housing
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
Removal
1. Coverthe tip of the ,1 st-holdclutch ATF feedpipe
. with 'a shop rag. ; ';)':"
2. Apply air pressure to the ATF feed pipe hole ofthe
1st-hold clutch pressure circuit, and remove the
ATF feed pipe cap from the transmission housing.
14-340
Secondary Shaft ATF'Feed Pipe Cap
Installation
1. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF feed pipe cap
(8).
2. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission
housing. Do not pinch the O-rings.
BACK
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pip,e Cap,
Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the pipe cap from the
transmission housing (see page 14-340).
2. Remove the snap ring (A) from the feed pipe cap
(B), then remove the feed pipe guide (C), O-rings
(0) (E), and 1st clutch ATF feed pipe (F).
__ -D
H
F
3. Replace the 1st clutch ATF feed pipe or 1st-hold
ch,ltch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe cap assembly.
The 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe
cap is not available separately.
4. Install the new O-ring (0) over the 1 st clutch ATF
feed pipe, then install the feed pipe over the 1st-
hold clutch ATF feed pipe (G) while aligning the
feed pipe tabs (H). with the guide in the cap.
5. Install the new O-ring (E) in the cap and feed pipe
guide, then secure the guide with the ring.
ATF Filter ,Removal/Inspection/
Installation
1. Remove the three 6.0 mm bolts securing the ATF
filter cover (A) and ATF pipe (B).
F , .
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibf.ft)
E , "
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
2. Remove the ATF pipe from the ATF filter cover, and
remove the ATF filter (C) from the cover.
3. Clean the ATF filter, then check that it is in good
condition, and is not clogged. Replace the ATF filter
if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Install the ATF filter with the new O-ring (0) in the
filter cover, and, install the ATF pipe in the cover,
then install them in the transmission housing.
5. Secure the ATF filter cover with the two bolts (E),
then secure the ATF pipe with the bolt (F).
14-341
BACK
Tran'smission Housing
Mainshaft -
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 '
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing, expand the snap
ring with the snap ring pliers, then pusl1 ,the bearing
out. Do not remove the snap ring unless'
necessary to ihe groovefl'1 the housing.
f

, ..
" i
14-342
, MainshaftBearing Installation '
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm
1. Install the bearing in the direction shown.
07NDA-PX40100
2. Expand the snap ring with the snap ring pliers, and
insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
3. Release the pliers"then push the bearing down into
housing until the snap rlhg snaps in place around it.
4. After installing the bearing, verify that the snap ring
(A) is seated in the bearing' and housing groove,
'and that the ring end gap (B)'is :0-7 mm (0""'0.28 in.).
B
BACK
Replacement
Bearing remover shaft set, 20 mm 07936-3710600
Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100
Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the
transmission housing using the bearing remover
shaft set (20 mm), the bearing shaft handle, and the
sliding hammer weight.
07936-3710100
07741-0010201
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the
transmission housing using the driver and the
attachment (37 x 40 mm).
07749-0010000
Park Lever Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100
Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the
head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
and the sliding hammer weight.
07936-GE00100
transmission housing using the driver and the
14-343
BACK
Selector CQntrol Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100
Bearing remOver head, 10mm 07936-GE00200
Driver 077 49-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 rnm07746-0010800
1. Remove the control shaft bearing from the
head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10mm),
and the sliding hammer weight.
07936-GE00200

2. Install the new bearing in the transmission housing
using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000
14-344
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
2. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing
using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or
more ofthe valves in a valve body do not slide
smoothly in their bores. Use this procedure to free the
valves.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for
about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half ofthe ATF-soaked #600 paper and
insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist
the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore
tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper
as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest.
If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-345
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence
shown forthe main valve body (see page 14-347),
secondary valve body (see page 14-349), regulator
valve body (see page 14-350), and accumulator
body (see page 14-351). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body, then secure the valve cap with
the valve cap clip.
3. Install the valve (A) and valve spring (8) in the valve
body. Push the valve spring in with a screwdriver,
then install the spring seat (C).
14-346
BACK
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all passages.
2. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-345).
4. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
5. Replace the filter with new one, and install it and the lubrication check valve inthe direction shown.
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
LUBRICATION
CHECK VALVE
RELIEF VALVE'
K \
J}
I
\
\J H
LOCK-UP 6
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE

B MANUAL
V\ALVE
\J
SHIFT
VALVEE
,
/.
E

MODULATOR
VALVE
TIMING VALVE 1
LUBRICATION \J G
MAIN VALVE BODY
SHIFT
VALVEB
CONTROL VALVE \J
SERVO
CONTROL VALVE CPC VALVE A
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
A Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 34.3 (1.350) 10.1
B Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
C Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
D Shift valve A spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.6 (0.260) 50.5 (1.988) 23.3
E Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
F Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
G CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
H Servo control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 9.6 (0.378) 30.2 (1.189) 8.4
I Lubrication control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 8.7 (0.343) 25.0 (0.984) 7.2
J Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 6.6 (0.260) 30.9 (1.217) 11.1
K Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 28.1 (1.106) 7.7
14-347
BACK
Valve Body
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B),
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main
valve body (0). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved
and chamfered side facing up.
14-348
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
gear (A) and driven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear:
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0050 in.)
A
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (0).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)
Clearance: . .
Service Limit: 0.Q7 mm (0.003 in.)
c
D
BACK
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check baHs.
3. Inspect the secondary valve body for scoring and damage.
CHECK BALL
REVERSE
CONTROL VALVE
F",,)
@ ~ ; /
\J
Valve Springs
A CPC valve C spring
B Shift valve 0 spring
C Reverse CPC valve spring
0 Shift valve C spring
E CPC valve B spring
F Reverse control valve sprino
SHIFT VALVE C
i1D
~
/ ~ ~
~ CpCVALVE.
E
SECONDARY VALVE BODY
Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
0.8 (0.031) 6.1 (0.240) 24.4 (0.961) 14.6
0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
14-349
BACK
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow outall passages.
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into the valve body,
and tighten the stop bolt.
7. Install the servo valve with the new O-ring, and 3rd accumulator piston with the new O-ring.
ACCUMULATOR COVER
------... occ-
e
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibfttl
VALVE SPRING CAP
3RD ACCUMULATOR A
PISTON ""-
B
COOLER CHECK VALVE
------

Replace.
6x1.0mm ___
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfttl
E1 / .----- VALVE CAP
I:)
\ SLEEVE
SERVO VALVE/
SHIFT FORK SHAFT

/
O-RING
Replace.
Valve Springs
A 3rd accumulator spring
B Cooler check valve spring
C Lock-up control valve spring
D Regulator valve spring B
E Regulator valve spring A
F Stator reaction sprinQ
14-350
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
C
AIR CHECK VALVES
20 Nm (2.0 kgfm,14Ibf.ttl
"'- SEALING WASHER
. ""- Replace.
REGULATOR VALVE

F
SPRING CAP
Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length
3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 41.4 (1.630)
0.9 (0.035) 6.7 (0.264) 31.5 (1.240)
0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689)
0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 44.3 (1.744)
1.4 (0.055) 8.8 (0.346) 44.0 (1.732)
1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 86.9 (3.421)
5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3 (1.193)
No. of Coils
5.5
14.2
14.2
25.5
12.0
16.2
2.1
BACK
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Inspect the accumulator body for scoring and damage.
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones.
SPRING SEAT
O-RING
Replace.
______ SNAP RING
CAP
A

4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
:/
1ST-HOLD ACCUMULATOR PISTON
E---: 1
1 :

: I ___ B
F _____
U
lITH
O-RING /
Replace.
1 :--
2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON
C A ____ O-RING
SNAP RING
Replace.
0-0 .

___ 1ST ACCUMULATQR PISTON
.--O-RING
Replace.
0---SNAP RING
Valve Springs Standard: (New)-Unit mm (in.)
A 4th accumulator spring 3.3 (0.130) 19.6 (0.772) 39.1 (1.539) 5.8
B 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 53.4 (2.102) 7.5
C 1st accumulator spring A 2.3 (0.091) 19.6 (0.772) 60.8 (2.394) 9.5
D 1st accumulator spring B 2.5 (0.098) 12.8 (0.504) 46.0 (1.811) 9.5
E 5th accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 19.6 (0.772) 65.5 (2.579) 12.0
F 5th accumulator spring B 2.6 (0.102) 13.2 (0.520) 50.5 (1.988) 10.1
G 1st-hold accumulator sprinQ 2.0 (0.079) 13.1 (0.516) 42.9 (1.689) 9.8
14-351
BACK
Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to
remove and install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold
the solenoid valve body.
1. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body.
2. Install the new O-rings (E) on each solenoid valves.
NOTE: If you are installing a new solenoid valve, it
comes with new O-rings already installed.
3. Install shift solenoid valve 0 (black connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
4. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
14-352
5. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
position the mounting bracket on top ofthe bracket
of shift solenoid valve A.
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid
valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve A, it may damage to hydraulic control system.
6. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the
mounting bracket contacts the accumulator body.
BACK
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal using
the adjustable bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a
commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in
the housing using the driver and the attachment
(62x68 mm).
3. Install the new oil seal flush to the housing using
the driver and the attachment (72 x 75 mm).
14-353
BACK
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Adjustable bearirig puller, 25-40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
1. Remove the countershaft bearing from the torque
converter housing using the adjustable bearing
puller (25-'40 mm) and a commercially available
3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A) into the housing,
then install the new bearing (B) in the direction
shown.
B
14-354
3. Install the bearing (A) in the housing using the
driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm); install
bearing outer notch-cut (B) in depth (e) of
0-0.03 mm (0-0.001 in.) below the housing
surface (D).
07749-0010000
07NAD-PX40100
BACK
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A)
and bearing set plate (B).
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing from the
torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
3. Remove the ATF guide collar from the torque
converter housing.
4. Remove the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm secondary shaft
bearing from the torque converter housing using
the bearing remover shaft set (30 mm), the bearing
remover shaft handle, and the sliding hammer
weight.
(cont'd)
14-355
BACK
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm bearing into the torque
converter housing using the driver and the
077 46-0010200
6. Install the new a-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar
(8), then install the guide collar in the torque
converter housing.
14-356
7. Install the bearing in the direction shown in the
housing using the driver and the attachment
(62x68 mm).
07746-0010500
8. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the set
plate mounting surface, then install the set plate (A)
by aligning it with the bearing groove.
9. Install the new lock washer (8) and bolt, then bend
the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
BACK
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 077 49-0010000
Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the
torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A), then install the new
bearing (B) in the housing.
3. Drive the bearing into the housing using the driver
and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
14-357
BACK
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement
Sliding hammer weight 077 41-0010201
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 97746-0010800
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the
torque converter housing using the bearing
remover shaft set (12 mm) and the sliding hammer
weight.
07741-0010201
07936-1660101
(22 x24 mm).
077 49-001 0000 077 46-0010800
14-358
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the thrust needle bearing (A), mainshaft
5th gear (B), needle bearing (C), thrust needle
bearing (D), mainshaft 5th gear collar (E), 4th/5th
clutch (F), and O-rings (G) from the mainshaft (H).
B
.....____K

---J
2. Inspect the condition ofthe sealing rings (I). Ifthe
sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged,
remove the set ring (J) and needle bearing (K),
and replace the sealing rings with new ones.
3. Inspectthethrust needle bearing and needle
bearing for wear and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Inspect the 4th gear for wear and damage, and
inspect the 4th gear bearing for wear and rough
rotation.
6. Replace the mainshaft 4th gear (L) if the 4th gear is
worn or damaged, or the bearing is worn or
damaged.
7. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and
excessive wear.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
9. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring
damage, install the new O-rings on the mainshaft,
then remove the tape.
10. Install the 4th/5th clutch.
11. Install the mainshaft 5th gear collar, thrust needle
bearing, needle bearing, mainshaft 5th gear, and
thrust needle bearing .
14-359
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the mainshaft 4th gear (A) with the press.
Place a shaft protector (B) between the press and
maiJ"lshaft (e) to prevent damaging the mainshaft.
"4-360
2. Slide the new mainshaft 4th gear (A) over the
mainshaft (B), then press it into place using the
driver (40 mm I.D.) and the press.
hmo,o,
BACK
Countershaft 0" -""""""--------
Isassembly
Exploded V' lew
LOCKNU
167 N.m (FLANGE NUT
( 7.0 kgfm, 1231bf.ftl
eft-hand th
. I reads
NEEDLEBEARINj-e

WASHER
REVERSE R.pl.".
R SELECTOR ""
BALL BEARING
6 ASHER,
mm
'@ IDLER GEAR
/
COUNTERSHAFT
COTTERS, 40.5 mm
(cont'd)
14-361
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure.
1. Cut the locktab (A) off the countershaft locknut (8)
using a chisel (C).
countershaft.
2. Hold the countershaft with a wrench and a vise
securely, loosen the locknut, and remove, it. The
locknut has left-hand threads.
14-362
3. Place the countershaft 5th gear (A) on press bases
(8), and place a shaft protector (C) between the
countershaft (D) and the press to prevent damaging
the countershaft.
4. Press the countershaft out of the press-fitted
bearing (E) and the press-fitted reverse selector
hub, and remove the countershaft while holding
the underside of the countershaft. The countershaft
falls down when pressing the countershaft out of
the press-fitted reverse selector hub. Some reverse
selector hubs are not press-fitted, and the
countershaft falls down when pressing the
countershaft out of press-fitted bearing.
5. Remove the remaining parts from the countershaft.
6. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough
movement.
excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
8. Check the idler gear axial clearance and 4th gear
axial clearance (see page 14-363).
BACK
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install the 40.5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (8), thrust
needle bearing (C), needle bearing (D), idler gear
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G),
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J),
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown.
2. Insert a feeler gauge blade (A) as thick as possible
between the 50.8 mm collar (8) and 50.8 mm
washer (C).
/ \
B C
------A
3. Set the dial indicator (A) on the idler gear (8).
4. Measure the idler gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving the idler gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.)
5. Ifthe measurement is outof standard, remove the
61 mm washer and measure its thickness.
(cont'd)
14-363
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Select and install anew washer, then recheck the
clearance.
WASHER 61 mm ,
No. Part Number Thickness
A 90582-RJF-TOO 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
B 90583-RJF-TOO 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.)
e 90584-RJF-TOO 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.)
0 90585-RJ F-TOO . 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.)
E 90586-RJF-TOO 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.)
F 90587 -RJF-TOO 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.)
G 90588-RJ F-TOO 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the 50.8 mm collar
(A) and the 50.8 mm washer (B) with a feeler gauge
(e) in at least three places. Use the average as the
actual clearance.
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.)
I \
A B
-------c
14-364
50.8 mm washer and measure its thickness.
9. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
clearance.
WASHER 50.8mm ,
A 90519-RJ F-TOO 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.)
B 90520-RJF-TOO. 1.93 mm (0.0760 in.)
e 90521-RJ F-TOO 1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
0 90522-RJF-TOO 1.97 mm (0.0776 in.)
E 90523-RJ F-TOO 1.99 mm (0.0783 in.)
F 90524-RJF-TOO 2.01 mm (0.0791 in.)
G 90525-RJ F-TOO 2.03 mm (0.0799 in.)
H 90526-RJF-TOO 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
I 90527 -RJ F-TOO 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.)
J 90528-RJ F-TOO 2.09 mm (0.0823 in.)
K 90529-RJ F-TOO 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
L 90530-RJ F-TOO 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.)
M 90531-RJ F-TOO 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.)
N 90532-RJF-TOO 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.)
0 90533-RJ F-TOO 2.19 mm (0.0862 in.)
p
90534-RJ F-TOO 2.21 mm (0.0870 in.)
Q 90535-RJ F-TOO 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.)
R 90536-RJ F-TOO 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
S 90537 -RJ F-TOO 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.)
T 90538-RJ F-TOO 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)
U 90539-RJ F-TOO 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)
V 90540-RJ F-TOO 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.)
W 90541-RJ F-TOO 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
X 90542-RJF-TOO 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)
y
90543-RJ F-TOO 2.39 mm (0.0941 in.)
Z 90544-RJ F-TOO 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)
AA 90545-RJ F-TOO 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.)
AB 90546-RJ F-TOO 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)
BACK
Countershaft Reassembly
Driver, 40 mm I.D, 07746-0030100
1. Install the 40.5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (8), thrust
needle bearing (e), needle bearing (D), idler gear
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G),
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J),
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown.
2. Install the thrust washer (P), needle bearing (Q) and
5th gear (R).
3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
counters haft (8), then press it into place using the
driver (40 mm I. D.) and the press.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
fitted, and can be installed without using the
special tool and a press.
4. Install the reverse selector, reverse gear collar,
needle bearing, and reverse gear over the reverse
selector hub.
(cont'd)
14-365
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Install the ball bearing (A) over the countershaft,
then press it into place using the driver (40 mm 1.0.)
and the press.
:11-07746-0030100

6. Install the conical spring washer (A) in the direction
shown, and install the new locknut (8).
1,4.366
7. Hold the countershaft securely with a wrench and a
vise, and tighten the locknut to 167 Nm
(17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft).
NOTE:
Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
The locknut has left-hand threads.
8. Stake the locknut into its shaft in depth (A) of
0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch
(8).
BACK
Secondary Sh aft Disassembly
Exploded View
NEEDLE DI:A>RINln
THRUST NEEDLE
"\NG
___ 2ND GEARI
PARK GEAR
~
@l 2ND CLUTCH
~ SNAPRING,32mm
SEALING RINGS 29 , mm
LOCKNUT .
178 N.m 1 (FLANGE NUT)
Replace. ( 8.2 kgfm; 132 Ibfft)
Left-hand th d " rea s
~ L ~ I ~ _ E R
SECONDARY SHAFT
C
1STI1ST-HOLD
, LUTCH
1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH HUB
(cont'd)
14-367
BACK
,of 'I, ,,'
"'r,'
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the secondary shaft locknut
(8) using a chisel (C).
secondary shaft ..
2. Pl.ace a V-block (A) on a vise (8), and put the
secondary shaft (C) on the ~ b l o c k and vise.
B
3. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the 1st clutch
guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 mm) with the
vise to hold the secondary shaft. Loosen the
locknut, and remove it. Remove any burrs from
splines on the shaft and splined washer.
14-368
4. Place the idler gear (A) on press bases (8), and
place a shaft protector (C) between the secondary
shaft (0) and the press to prevent damaging the
secondary shaft.
5. Press the secondary shaft out of the press-fitted
bearing (E), and remove the secondary shaft while
holding the underside of the secondary shaft. The
secondary shaft falls down when pressing the
secondary shaft out of the press-fitted bearing.
6. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch, 52 mm washer,
thrust needle bearing, 1st gear assembly, needle
bearings, 1st gear collar, thrust needle bearing, and
idler gear.
7. Remove the 32 mm snap ring, and remove the 2nd
clutch, splined washer, thrust needle bearing,
needle bearing, 2nd gear/park gear, and thrust
needle bearing.
BACK
8. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough
movement.
NOTE: The needle bearing (A) on the 1st gear collar
contains the only two no-roller cavities (8); this is
normal.
B
10. Check the 1st gear axial clearance (see page
14-370), 1st gear one-way clutch (see page 14-372),
and secondary shaft installation height (see page
14-377).
14-369
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300
1. Install the idler gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B),
1st gear collar (e), needle bearing (D), 1st gear
assembly (E), thrust needle bearing (F), 52 mm
washer (G), and 1st/1st-hold clutch (H) on the
secondary shaft (I). Install the idler gear and 52 mm
washer in the direction shown. Do not install the
O-rings during inspection.
F
E
14-370
2. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold
clutch guide using the driver (40 mm I.D.), the
attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press .
07746-0030100
A
B
3. Install the splined washer with the marked side up
over the ball bearing in the same manner as
installing the ball bearing using the driver (40 mm
I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
4. Install the old locknut and tighten it to 29 Nm
(3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibfft).
5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 1 st clutch hub (B).
BACK
6. Measure the 1st gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving the 1st gear. Use the
Standard: 0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in.)
washer and measure its difference.

WASHER 52mm ,
A 90502-RWE-000 2.705 mm (0.107 in.)
B 90503-RWE-000 2.680 mm (0.106 in.)
C 90504-RWE-000 2.655 mm (0.105 in.)
D. '90505-RWE-000 2.630 mm (0.104 in.)
E' 90506-RWE-000 2.605 mm (0.103 in.)
F 90507 -RWE-OOO 2.580 mm (0.102 in.)
G 90508-RWE-000 2.555 mm (0.101 in.)
H 90509-RWE-000 2.530 mm (0.100 in.)
I 90510-RWE-000 2.505 mm (0.099 in.)
J 90511-RWE-000 2.480 mm (0.098 in.)
K 90512-RWE-000 2.455 mm (0.097 in.)
L 90513-RWE-000 2.430 mm (0.096 in.)
M 90514-RWE-00O 2.405 mm (0.095 in.)
14-371
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
1 st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection
1. Hold the 1 st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1 st
gear (8) in the direction shown to be sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the 1st gear locks in the
opposite direction.
c
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way
clutch, replace the 1st clutch hub (C). The 1st gear
one-way clutch is not available separately from the
1st clutch hub.
3. Also check the 1st gear and the 1st-hold clutch hub
for wear and damage. Ifthe 1st gear and 1st-hold
clutch hub are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged part, refer to 1st Clutch Hub Replacement
(see page 14-373).
14-372
BACK
1st Clutch Hub Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07947-6340500
Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
1. Remove the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) from 1st gear
(B) using the driver, the driver attachment, and the
press.
~ ' " O " 0 0 0 '
07947-6340500
c
2. Remove the 1st clutch hub (C) from 1st gear.
3. Install the new 1st clutch hub (A) over 1st gear (B),
and install the 1st-hold clutch hub (C) in 1st gear.
4. Install the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) in 1st gear (B)
using the driver, the attachment (78 x 90 mm), and
the press.
~ " " ' " ' '
14-373
BACK
Shafts, and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Driver attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearings (8), 2nd gear/park gear (C), thrust needle
bearing (D), and splined washer (E) in the direction
shown on the secondary shaft (F).
F
A
~ _____
2. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
new O-rings (G) in the 2nd clutch O-ring grooves,
then remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damaging to the O-rings, be
sure to install the O-rings after installing the
splined washer.
3. Install the 2nd clutch (H) on the secondary shaft,
and secure the 2nd clutch with the snap ring (I).
14-374
4. Install the idler gear (A) in the direction shown,
thrust needle bearing (8), 1st gear collar (C), needle
bearing (D), 1st gear assembly (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 52 mm washer (G) in the direction
shown on the secondary shaft (H).
NOTE: The needle bearing contains the only two
no-roller cavities (I); this is normal.
K
new O-rings (J) in 1st/1st-hold clutch O-ring
grooves, then remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damaging to the O-rings, be
sure to install the O-rings after installing the 1st
gear collar and 52 mm washer.
6. Install the 1st/1st-hold clutch (K).
BACK
7. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold
clutch guide (8) using the driver (40 mm 1.0.), the
driver attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
~ 4 ' 0 3 0 1
A
B
8. Install the new splined washer (A) with the marked
side (8) up over the ball bearing using the driver
(40 mm I.D.), the driver attachment (30 mm 1.0.),
and the press.
B
9. Install the new locknut.
10. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (8), and put the
secondary shaft (e) on the V-block and vise.
o
11. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the top of the
1st clutch guide, and secure the wrench
(40 x 42 mm) with the vise to hold the secondary
shaft. Tighten the locknutto 178 Nm (18.2 kgfm,
132Ibfft) with the torque wrench (D).
NOTE:
Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench .
The locknut has left-hand threads.
(cont'd)
14-375
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
12. Stake the locknut to a depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm
(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (8).
14-376
BACK
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A) in the torque
converter housing (8) in the direction shown, and
install the secondary shaft assembly (C).
2. Install the new gasket (A) on the torque converter
housing.
Secondary Shaft Cutaway View
0--.----"...-'9
B
c
A
3. Measure the height (8) of the secondary shaft
installation between the surface (C)ofthe gasket
and the top ofthe ball bearing outer race (D), then
note the measurement.
(cont'd)
14-377
BACK

Shafts'"and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Installation Height. Inspection/ Adjustment (co nt' d)
4. Remove the 65 mm thrust shim (A) from the
transmission housing, and measure its thickness.
A
5. Calculate the thickness of the 65 mm thrust shim
using the formula.
Formula:
65 mm Thrust Shim Thickness
.. = Secondary Shaft-Installation Height Standard
- Measurement
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Standard:
228.04-228.13 mm (8.9779-8.9815 in.)

6. Select the 65 mm thrust shim from the following
table.
THRUST SHIM 65 mm ,
OA 90460-RDK-000 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
A 90461-RDK-010 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
B 90462-RDK-010 0.88 mm (0.035 in.)
C 90463-R DK -010 0.92 mm (0.036 in.)
D 90464-RDK-010 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
E 90465-RDK-010 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
F 90466-RDK-010 1.04 mm (0.041 in.)
G 90467-RDK-010 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
H 90468-RDK-010 1.12 mm (0.044 in.)
I 90469-RDK-010 1.16 mm (0.046 in.)
J 90470-RDK-010 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
K 90471-RDK-010 1.24 mm (0.049 in.)
L 90472-RDK-010 1.28 mm (0.050 in.)
M 90473-RDK-010 1.32 mm (0.052 in.)
N 90474-RDK-010 1.36 mm (0.054 in.)
0 90475-RDK-010 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
p
90476-RDK-010 1.44 mm (0.057 in.)
Q 90477-RDK-010 1.48 mm (0.058 in.)
R 90478-RDK-010 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
S 90479-RDK-010 1.56 mm (0.061 in.)
T 90480-R DK -010 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
U 90481-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
V 90482-RDK-000 1.68 mm (0.066 in.)
W 90483-RDK-000 1.72 mm (0.068 in.)
X 90484-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
y
90485-RDK-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
Z 90486-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.072 in.)
AA 90487 -RDK-OOO 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
AB 90488-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.076 in.)
AC 90489-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
AD 90490-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
AE 90491-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.080 in.)
AF 90492-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
AG 90493-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
AH 90494-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.085 in.)
AI 90495-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
AJ 90496-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
AK 90497-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.090 in.)
AL 90498-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.091 in.)
7. Install the thrust shim in the transmission housing.
BACK
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the 26.5 mm washer, snap ring, cotter
retainer, and cotters from the third shaft.
BEARING
NEEDLE
BEARING

53mm
Selective part
-----3RD CLUTCH
--------O-RING
Replace.
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
SEALING RINGS,
35mm
2. Remove the intermediary shaft 4th gear using the
press (see page 14-380), and disassemble the shaft
and gears.
3. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough
movement.
5. Check the sealing rings for excessive wear and
damage.
6. Check the 3rd gear axial clearance (see page
14-381), and intermediary shaft installation height
(see page 14-383). .
7. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines
with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the
shaft and gears.
9. Install the press-fitted 4th gear using the driver
(40 mm I.D.) and the press (see page 14-380) in the
direction shown.
14-379
BACK
Shafts'and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft'4th Gear
Removal
1. Place 4th gear (A) on press bases (B), and place a
shaft protector (C) between the intermediary shaft
(D) and the press to prevent damaging the
intermediary shaft.
2. Press the intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted
4th gear, and remove of the intermediary shaft
while holding the underside the intermediary shaft.
The intermediary shaft falls down when pressing
the intermediary shaft out ofthe press-fitted gear.
3. Remove the remaining parts from the intermediary
shaft.
14-380
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Installation
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
new O-rings in the 3rd clutch O-ring grooves, then
remove the tape.
2. Install the 3rd clutch, 53 mm splined washer, thrust
needle bearing, needle bearing, 3rd gear, thrust
needle bearing on the intermediary shaft.
3. Install 4th gear (A) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
the press.
4. Install the 19.8 mm cotters, cotter retainer, and
snap ring.
5. Install the 26.5 mm washer on the top ofthe
intermediary shaft.
BACK
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
Driver, 40 mm J.D. 07746-0030100
1. Install the 3rd clutch (A), 53 mm splined washer (8),
thrust needle bearing (e), needle bearing (D), 3rd
gear (E), and thrust needle bearing (F) on the
Intermediary shaft (G). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection.
2. Install 4th gear (H) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
the press.
3. Install the cotters (I), cotter retainer (J), and snap
ring (K).
4. Set the dial indicator (A) on 4th gear (8).
(cont'd)
14-381
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
5. Measure the 4th gear axial clearance in at least
three places while moving 4th gear. Use the
Standard: 0.005-0.045 111m (0.0002-0.0018 in.)
splined washer and measure its'thickness.
7. Select and install a new splined washer, then
recheck the clearance.
SPLINED WASHER, 53 mm
A 90546-RDK-000 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.)
B 90547-RDK-000 4.015 mm (0.1581 in.)
C 90548-RDK-000 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.)
D 90549-RDK-000 4.055 mm (0.1596 in.)
E 90550-RDK-000 4.075 mm (0.1604 in.)
F 90551-RDK-000 4.095 mm (0.1612 in.)
G 90552-RDK-000 4.115 mm (0.1620 in.)
H 90553-RDK-000 4.135 mm (0.1628 in.)
I 90554-RDK-000 4.155 mm (0.1636 in.)
J 90555-RDK-000 4.175 mm (0.1644 in.)
K 90556-RDK-000 4.195 mm (0.1652 in.)
L 90557-RDK-000 4.215 mm (0.1659 in.)
M 90558-RDK-000 4.235 mm (0.1667 in.)
N 90559-RDK-000 4.255 mm (0.1675 in.)
BACK
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height Inspectionl Adjustment
1. Install the intermediary shaft (A) in the torque
converter housing, and install the 26.5 mm washer
(8) on the intermediary shaft.
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height:
Standard:
137.285-137.385 mm (5.40491-5.40885 in.'
F
D
E
Intermediary Shaft Cutaway View
Ir-.... ~ F
c
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter
housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the intermediary shaft
installation between the surface (E) ofthe gasket
and the surface of the 26.5 mm washer (F).
26.5 mm washer and measure its thickness.
installation height.
WASHER 26 5 mm ,
A 90564-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
8 90565-RDK-000 1.13 mm (0.044 in.)
C 90566-RDK-000 1.21 mm (0.048 in.)
D 90567 -RDK-OOO 1.29 mm (0.051 in.)
E 90568-RDK-000 1.37 mm (0.054 in.)
F 90569-RDK-000 1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
G 90570-RDK-000 1.53 mm (0.060 in.)
H 90571-R DK-OOO 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
I 90572-RDK-000 1.69 mm (0.067 in.)
J 90573-RDK-000 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
K 90574-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
L 90575-RDK-000 1.93 mm (0.076 in.)
M 90576-RDK-000 2.01 mm (0.079 in.)
N 90577 -RDK-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
14-383
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07LAE-PX40100 or 07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
1. Remove the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver. (B).
B
14-384
2. Remove the 1st clutch end plate (A), 1st clutch discs
(B) (5), 1st clutch wave-plates (C) (5), disc spring (D),
1st-hold clutch plate B (E), 1st-hold clutch discs (F)
(3), 1st-hold clutch wave-plates (G) (2), and 1st-hold
clutch flat-plate (H) from the 1st/1st-hold clutch
drum (I).
3. Make reference marks on the clutch wave-plates.
BACK
4. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (7),
clutch wave-plates (C) (3), and clutch flat-plates (0)
(4) from the 2nd clutch drum (E).
{ ~ ~ n C
clutch wave-plates (C) (3), and clutch flat-plates (0)
(3) from the 3rd clutch drum (E).
clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (0) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 4th clutch drum (F).
clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (0) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 5th clutch drum (F).
F
A
B
C
C
o
o
o
(cont'd)
14-385
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
12. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
07LAE-PX40100
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
13. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment
(A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
A
B
14-386
14. If either end of the clutch spring compressor
attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
that is unsupported by the return spring, the
retainer may be damaged.
15. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on
the spring retainer (B) ofthe 3rd and 5th clutches so
the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (C).
BACK
attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
17. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
be removed.
18. Remove the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
19. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments
20. Remove the snap ring (A), spring retainer (8), and
return spring (C).
(cont'd)
14-387
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
21. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply
air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the
piston. Place a finger tip on the other passage while
applying air pressure.
22. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the
clutch drum (8), and remove the O-rings from the
1st clutch piston.
14-388
23. Remove the 1st-hold clutch piston (A)from the 1st
clutch piston (8), and remove the O-rings from the
1st-hold clutch piston.
24. Remove the clutch piston, and remove the O-rings
from the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pistons.
BACK
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect the clutch pistons and clutch piston check
valves (A).
A
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged,
replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. Ifthespring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Inspect the clutch discs, clutch plates, and clutch
end plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs:
Standard Thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Flat-plates and Clutch Wave-plates
Standard Thickness:
1st clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
1st-hold clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
3rd clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
4th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
5th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
6. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace
them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced,
inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
7. If any plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,
replace the dama,ged plate with a new plate, and
inspect the other wave-plates for a phase
difference. Ifthe clutch plate is replaced, inspect
the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
8. If the clutch end plate is worn, damaged, or
discolored, inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc
clearance, then replace the clutch end plate.
14-389
BACK
Shafts:and Clutches
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate,
and set a dial indicator (B) on the wave-plate.
c
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference ofthe
wave-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the wave-plate.
3. Measure the phase differences of 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd,
and 3rd clutch wave-plates.
-1 Rotate the clutch wave-plate a bout 60-degrees
while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at
the top of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always
rotate it by holding its circumference.
-2 Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads
the phase difference of the wave-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:
1st clutch: 0.17-0.30 mm (0.007-0.012 in.)
1st-hold
clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
-a Rotate the wave-plate a bout 60-degrees. The
dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
phase difference, and zero the dial indicator.
-4 Measure the phase difference at the other two
tops of the wave-plate by following steps -1
thru -3.
14-390
4. Measure the phase differences of 4th and 5th clutch
wave-plates.
-1 Rotate the clutch wave-plate 5-tooth or 4-tooth
while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at
the top of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always
rotate it by holding its circumference.
-2 Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads
the phase difference of the wave-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:
4th clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
5th clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
-a Rotate the wave-plate 5-tooth or 4-tooth. The
dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
phase difference, and zero the dial indicator.
. -4 Measure the phase difference at the other two
tops of the wave-plate by following steps -1
thru -3.
5. If the two values of the three measurements are
within the standard, the wave-plate is OK. If the two
values of the three measurements are out of the
standard, replace the wave-plate.
BACK
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100
1. Inspect the clutch piston, discs, plates, and end
plate for wear and damage (see page 14-389), and
inspect the clutch wave-plate phase difference
(see page 14-390), if necessary.
2. Install the 1st-hold Clutch piston in the 1st clutch
piston, and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A)
in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (B). Do not install
the O-rings on the .clutch pistons during inspection.
-----8
3. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately
install the clutch discs (B) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch
wave-plates (C) (2), then install the 1st-hold clutch
plate B (D) with the flat side down in the direction
shown.
4. Measure the 1st-hold clutch plate B-to-top-disc
clearance with a feeler gauge (A) while pressing the
1st-hold clutch plate B down. Take measurements
in at least three places, and use the average as the
actual.clearance.
1st-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top-Disc Clearance:
Service Limit: 0.6-1.0 mm (0.024-0.039 in.)
5. If the clearance is out of standard, replace the 1st-
hold clutch plates and discs as a set, and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-391
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Install the disc spring (A) on the 1st-hold clutch
plate 8 in the'direction shown. Starting with the 1st
clutch wave-plate, alternately installthe wave-
plates (8) (5) and discs (e) (5) in the 1st clutch drum
(D), then install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat
side down.
A
7. Install the clutch pistons in the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and
5th clutch drums. Do not install the O-rings on the
clutch pistons during inspection.
14-392
8. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
wave-plates (D) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
clutch-end-plate (E) w,th the flat side down on the
top disc.
9. Starting with the 3rd clutch flat-plate, alternately
3rd clutch drim (e), and alternately install the wave-
plates (D) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the clutch-end-
plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
BACK
10. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (8)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
and discs (0) (3), and alternately install the wave-
plates (E) (2) and discs (0) (2). Install the clutch-end-
plate (F) with the flat side down on the top disc.
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
B
12. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
the clutch-end-plate.
13. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch-end-plate (8).
14. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch-end-plate
lifted up to the snap ring (e).
(cont'd)
14-393
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
15. Release the clutch-end-plate to lower the clutch-
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor
attachment on the end-plate (A).
07ZAE-PRP0100
E
16. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with
150-160 N (15-16 kgf, 33-35Ibf) (B) using a
force gauge, and read the dial indicator (e).
17. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between
the clutch-end-plate and top disc (E). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the
Clutch End-Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Service Limit:
1st clutch: 1.15-1.35 mm(0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.05-1.25 mm (0.041-0.049 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.9-1.1 mm (0.035-0.043 in.)
4th clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.)
5th ,clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.)
14-394
18. Ifthe clearance is out ofthe service limit, select a
new clutch-end-plate from the following table.
1ST CLUTCH END PLATES
Plate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22551-RDK-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
2 22552:..RDK-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
3 22553-RDK-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
4 22554-RDK-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
5 22555-RDK-003 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
6 22556-RDK-003 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
7 22557 -RDK-003 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
8 22558-RDK-003 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
9 22559-RDK-003 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
PI,ate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22561-RDK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22562-RDK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22563-RDK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22564-RDK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-RDK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22566-RDK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22567 -RDK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22568-RDK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22569-RDK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
BACK
3RD CLUTCH END PLATES
No.
1 22591-RYF-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22592-RYF-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22593-RYF-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22594-RYF-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22595-RYF-003. 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22596-RYF-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22597 -RYF-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22598-RYF-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22599-RYF-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END PLATES
No.
1 22571-RYF-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22573-RYF-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22574-RYF-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22575-RYF-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22576-RYF-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22577 -RYF-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22578-RYF-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22579-RYF-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
19. Install the new clutch-end-plate, and recheck the
clearance. If the thickest clutch-end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.
14-395
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07 LAE-PX40 1 00 or 07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a
minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st-hold clutch
piston (B), and install the 1st-hold clutch piston in
the 1st clutch piston (C).
A
4 ~ 3 9 6
3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st clutch piston
(B), and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston in the
1st/1st-hold clutch drum (C) while applying
pressure and rotating to ensure proper seating. Do
not pinch the O-ring.
----
. C
4. Install the O-rings (A) on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th
clutch piston (B).
A
5. Install the clutch pistons in the clutch drums (C)
while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
BACK
6. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),
and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer.
C
B
A
7. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
-----------
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
8. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment
(A) is adjusted to have full contact with the. spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
B
attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
that is unsupported by the return spring, the
retainer may be damaged.
(cont'd)
14-397
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on
the spring retainer (B) ofthe 3rd and 5th clutches so
the clutoh spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (e).
A
B
c
11. If either endofthe clutch spring compressor
attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
14-398
12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
be installed.
13. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
14. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments
BACK
15. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately
install the clutch discs (8) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch
wave-plates (e) (2) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum
(0), then install the 1st-hold clutch plate 8 (E) with
the flat side down in the direction shown.
16. Install the disc spring (F) on the 1st-hold clutch
plate 8 in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st
clutch wave-plate, alternately install the wave-
plates (G) (5) and discs (H) (5), then install the
clutch-end-plate (I) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
17. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the flat-plates (Al (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
wave-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
18. Starting with the 3rd clutch flat-plate, alternately
3rd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
wave-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
(cont'd)
14-399
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
B
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
14-400
21. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
the clutch-end-plate.
BACK
Transmission Reassembly
Exploded View
Bolt Tightening Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfftl
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 Nm 11.8 kgfm, 13.lbfftl
6x1.0mm,
11 Bolts
CHECK BALLS,
Two Balls
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
\
ORING
Replace.
ATF PASSAGE PIPE
6x 1.0 mm, One Bolt
o 6 x mm, Seven Bolts
/ REGULATORVA[VE BODY
ORING
Replace.

ATF PUMP DRIVEN
. GEAR SHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
(cont'd)
14-401
BACK
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tool Required
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and
installed in the torque converter housing. Clean
and install the ATF magnet, if necessary.
2. Install the main separator plate and the two dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), and.
ATF pump driven gear shaft (C). Install the ATF
pump driven gea.r with its grooved and chamfered
side facing down.
A
3. Install the torque converter check valve spring and
valve in the torque converter housing.
4. Install the main valve body (seven 6 mm bolts and
three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive
gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating
direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (C)
moves ,smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction.
14-402
5. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driveh
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torques, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF
pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a
seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
gear shaft.
6. Install the lubrication check valve, cooler check
valve and cooler check valve spring in the main
valve body. Install the lubrication check valve in the
direction shown in the exploded view.
7. Install the secondary separator plate and the two
dowel pins on the main valve body, and install the
secondary valve body (one bolt).
8. Install the two check balls in the secondary valve
body.
9. Install the accumulator separator plate and the two
dowel pins on the secondary valve body.
10. Position the detent arm on the accumulator
separator plate, and install the detent arm shaft into
the detent arm through the separator plates to the
main valve body.
11. Install the 8 x 62 mm ATF feed pipes in the main
valve body, and install the accumulator body
(11 bolts).
12. Install the regulator separator plate and the two
dowel pins on the main valve body.
13. Install the stator shaft with the new O-ring, and
install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
14. Install the stator shaft stop in the main valve body.
15. Install the ATF strainer with the new O-ring (two
bolts).
16. Install the ATF passage pipe (one bolt) in the torque
converter housing.
BACK
17. Install the intermediary shaft (A) into the main
valve body, and install the 26.5 mm washer (B) on
the top of the intermediary shaft.
18. Install the transfer output shaft (C) in the torque
converter housing, and instali the thrust shim (O)
on the top of the transfer output shaft.
19. Install the differential assembly (E) in the torque
converter housing.
20. Install the baffle plate (F), and make sure the
differential is clear ofthe baffle plate.
21. Install the baffle plate (G), and make sure the
intermediary shaft is clear of the baffle plate.
22. Install the selector control shaft and the park lever
link (H).
23. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and
secondary shaft.
24. Install the needle bearing (A) on the secondary
shaft roller bearing in the torque converter housing.
c
B
A
25. Turn the shift fork shaft (B) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole of the shift fork.
26. Engage the shift fork (C) with the reverse selector
on the countershaft, and join the mainshaft (0),
countershaft (E), and secondary shaft (F), then
install them in the torque converter housing and
shift fork on the shift fork shaft.
(cont'd)
14-403
BACK
Transmission
27. Secure the shift fork (A) to the shift fork shaft with
the lock bolt and the neW lock washer (B), then
bend the lock tab of the lock washer againstthe
bolt head.
6x1.0mm
14 Nm (1.4 kgfm, 10 Iblftl
28. Install the park pawl shaft (A), pawl spring (B), park
pawl (e), and park pawl stop (0);
14-404
29. Align the control lever pin with the manual valve
guide.
30. Hook the detent arm spring to the detent arm.
BACK
31. Install the 8 x 85 mm ATF feed pipe (A), the
8 x 151.5 mm pipes (8), and the 8 x 40 mm pipe (C)
in the accumulator body.
___ A
B-.;:,-__ _
32. Install the 8 x 57.5 mm ATF feed pipe (A) and the
10 x 123 mm pipe (8) in the torque converter
housing.
33. Install the two dowel pins (A) and the new gasket
(8) on the torque converter housing (C).
B
c
34. Place the transmission housing (D) on the torque
converter housing.
35. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent
damage to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the
reverse idler gear with reverse gears by rotating
the idler gear using the screwdriver.
(cont'd)
14-405
BACK
36. While expanding the snap ring of the countershaft
bearing using snap ring pliers, install the
transmission housing onto the bearing part-way.
Then release the snap ring pliers, and push down
on the housing until it bottoms and the snap ring
snaps into place in the transmission housing snap
ring groove.
37. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts
(21 bolts) and the bolt (A) along with the
transmission hanger (8) and the transmission
ground terminal bracket (C), and tighten the bolts in
two or more steps in a criss-cross pattern to 44 Nm
A
B
10x1.25mm
44Nm
\ (4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)
10x 1.25mm
D
10x 1.25mm
Two Bolts
21 Bolts
38. Install and tighten the two mounting bolts (D) to
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ibfft). Keep the mounting
bolts free of grease or oil.
14-406
39. Install and tighten the special bolt (E) to 64 Nm
40. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101
41. Install the new lock washer (A) with the marked
side (8) up over the mainshaft (C), and apply ATF to
surfaces of the lock washer and old locknut (D).
A
B
42. Install the old locknut, and tighten it to seat the lock
washer to 178 Nm (18.2 kgfm, 132 I bfft) , then
remove the old locknut.
BACK
43. Install the new locknut and tighten it to 176 Nm
(18.2 kgfm, 132 Ibfft), then stake the locknutto a
depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a
3.5 mm punch (B).
44. Install the end cover (A), dowel pin (B), and new
O-ring (C).
F
49Nm
(5.0 kg'm, 36 Ib'ftl
A
B
45. Install the snap ring cap (D) with the new O-ring (E).
46. Apply thread lock sealant to the threads of the
sealing plug (F), and install the sealing plug and the
new sealing washer (G).
47. Install the new O-ring (E) on the solenoid harness
connector (F).
o
48. Route the solenoid harness through the
transmission housing, and install the solenoid
harness connector.
49. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
VEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
50. Secure the solenoid harness connector with the
bolt on the transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-407
BACK
51. Install the solenoid valve cover (A) with the two
dowel pins (B) and the new gasket (C), and secure it
with the seven bolts.
6x 1 .. 0 mm
12Nm
(1.2kgfm,
8.7Ibf.ft)
B
A
52. Place the new gasket (A) on the solenoid valve
cover, then install the 8 x 105.8 mm ATF feed pipes
(B) and the 8 x 58.3 mm pipes (C) with their filter
side into the transmission housing.
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
E
53. Install the new O-rings (0) over the ATF feed pipes,
and install the NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 (E).
14-408
54. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
filter side into its mounting hole (B).
A
55. Check the height (A) ofthe 8 x 53 mm ATF joint
pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and the
solenoid valve body mounting surface (0). The
7 mm (0.3 in.), install the pipe securely until it stops
the accumulator body.
B
BACK
56. Install thenew gasket (A) on the transmission
housing. Install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF pipe (B) with
the filter end in the transmission housing, and
install the 8 x 25.5 mm ATF pipe (0).
B
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfttl
57. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
58. Install the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C.
59. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning
the selector control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench.
60. Set the transmission range switch (A) to the N
position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the N position, and the selector control shaft hole
(B) aligns with the N positioning line (C).
c
,
61. Install the transmission range switch gently over
the selector control shaft (0), and install the bolts
loosely.
62. Install the new lock washer (A) over the selector
control shaft (B) by aligning the projection (C) ofthe
lock washer with the N positioning line (0) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
o
c
F
12Nm
I
VA
B
(cont'd)
14-409
BACK
63. Push the locknut againstthe transmission housing
to seat the range switch into the selector control
shaft, and tighten the locknut to 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7 Ibfft) while holding the selector control shaft
with a 6 mm wrench, then bend the lock tabs
against the locknut.
64. Tighten the range switch mounting bolts to 12 Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft).
65. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (8), lock
washer (C), and locknut (0) on the selector control
shaft (E).

C (1.6 kgf.m; 12 Ibfft)
------""'ro
O ____ A
E
14-410
66. Install the new O-ring (A) on the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (8), and install the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)

67. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (0), and install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
sensor washer (E).
68. Install the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (8). Tighten
the switch with the metal part.
A
/20N.m
Q (2.0 kgfm, 14Ibfft)
BACK
69. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten
the switch with the metal part.
6x1.0mm -
/
G
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
o F /6x1.0mm
H 12Nm
o / E '" B 11.2 kgfm,
'\ '" W 8.7Ibfft)
G
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
'A
\
20N.m
12.0 kgfm,
14Ibfft)
B
70. Install the ATF cooler lines (C) with the new sealing
washers (D) and the line bolts (E).
71. Install the connector bracket (F), and secure the
ATF lines with the 6.0 mm bolts (G) on the
transmission housing.
72. Install the ATF temperature sensor (H) with the new
O-ring (I). Install the connector on the connector
bracket and the harness clamp on the bracket.
73. Install the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten
the switch by the metal part.
A
20Nm
12.0 kgfm, 14Ibfft)
74. Install the ATF dipstick tube (A) with the new O-ring
(B).
10x 1.25mm
\
a
75. Install the ATF dipstick (C) in its tube.
76. Install the transmission ground terminal (D).
14-411
BACK
All Differential
____ THRUST SHIM, 85 mm
Preload
page 14-418
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
0 ______
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
page 14-412
------
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
------ CARRIER BEARING
)\.\l\-;="""'I11k.. Replacement, page 14-414
14-412
----- BEARING OUTER RACE
Backlash Inspection
1. Remove the final driven gear and transfer drive
gear from the differential carrier.
2. Install both axles into the differential assembly (A)
and place the axles on V-blocks (B).
B
3. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (e) with a
dial indicator (D).
4. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the
differential carrier.
5. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear
on the differential carrier (see page 14-413).
BACK
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Replacement
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
the carrier is replaced.
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive
gear (8) from the differential carrier (e).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
-=--126N.m
" 112.8 kgfm, 92.6Ibfft)
, 14 Bolts
A
-@)
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Install the bolts through the differential carrier to
the transfer drive gear.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern.
BACK
AIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement.
Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 07MAO-PR90100
NOTE:
The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
set.
Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever the
bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially
available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepper adapter (0).
c
D
14-414
2. Install the new carrier bearing using the attachment
(45 x 55 mm) and the press.
NOTE:
Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
Use the small end of the attachment
(45 x 55 mm),to install the bearings.
Press the bearing on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearing and the
differential carrier.
:IJ.-
o
BACK
Oil Seal Replacement
Driver 077 49-0010000
Oil seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40100
Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter
housing.
3. Install the new oil seal flush to the transmission
housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
attachment.
4. Install the new oil seal to the torque converter
housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
attachment.
14-415
BACK
AlT. Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools, Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new onewhenever the
outer race is replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the
outer race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (8), and
85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 "F
(100 "C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heatthe
housing more than 212 "F (100 "C).
14-416
2. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A), spacer (8), and
outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).
A
3. Using the driver and the attachment (83 mm), drive
the outer race securely in the housing so there is no
clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
07749-0010000
07HAD-SG00100
BACK
4. Remove the plate (A), and remove the bearing
outer race (8) and spacer (C)from the torque
converter housing (D).
5. Install the spacer and the new outer race in the
torque converter housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the
(78x80 mm).
07NAD-PX40100
7. Install the plate over the outer race in the torque
converter housing.
14-417
BACK
AIT,Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100
Preload inspection tool 070AJ-0020101
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
bearing outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the
bearing preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (B), and
85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 'f
(100 'C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the
housing more than 212 'f (100 'C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
o
~
B---
A
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer
race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
14-418
4. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A) in the
transmission housing (B). If you replace the 85 mm
thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
shim as the old one.
5. Install the spacer (C), and the bearing outer race (D)
in the transmission housing.
6. Drive the outer race securely in the housing using
the driver and the attachment (83 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
07749-0010000 07HAD-SG00100
BACK
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque
converter housing (8), and install the gasket (e) and
the two dowel pins (D) on the housing.
8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the
mounting bolts (24 bolts) with the transmission
hangers (F) and the ground terminal bracket (G),
then tighten the bolts.
9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
to seat the bearings.
10. Measure the starting torque ofthe differential
assembly with the preload inspection tool, a torque
wrench (A), and a socket (8). Measure the starting
torque at normal room temperature in both
directions.
Standard
New bearings:
3.9-5.1 Nm (40-52 kgfcm, 35-45 Ibfin.)
Reused bearings:
3.6-4.8 Nm (37-49 kgf.cm, 32-43lbfin.)
070AJ-0020101
thrust shim and measure its thickness.
(cont'd)
14-419
BACK
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
12. Select a new thrust shim. To increase the starting
torque, increase thickness of the thrust shim. To
decrease the starting torque, decrease the
thickness of the thrust shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease the starting torque about 0.5-0.6 Nm
(5-6 kgfcm, 4-5 Ibfin.).
THRUST SHIM 85 mm ,
A 41440-RGR-000 1.350 mm (0.0531 in.)
B 41441-RGR-000 1.375 mm (0.0541 in.)
C 41442-RG R-OOO 1.400 mm (0.0551 in.)
D 41443-RGR-000 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.)
E 41444-RGR-000 1.450 mm (0.0571 in.)
F 41445-RGR-000 1.475 mm (0.0581 in.)
G 41446-RGR-000 1.500 mm (0.0591 in.)
H 41447-RGR-000 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
I 41448-RGR-000 1.550 mm (0.0610 in.)
J 41449-RGR-000 1.575 mm (0.0620 in.)
K 41450-RGR-000 1.600 mm (0.0630 in.)
L 41451-RGR-000 1.625 mm (0.0640 in.)
M 41452-RGR-000 1.650 mm (0.0650 in.)
N 41453-RGR-000 1.675 mm (0.0659 in.)
0 41454-RG R-OOO 1.700 mm (0.0669 in.)
p
41455-RGR-000 1.725 mm (0.0679 in.)
Q 41456-RG R-OOO 1.750 mm (0.0689 in.)
R 41457-RGR-000 1.775 mm (0.0699 in.)
S 41458-RGR-000 1.800 mm (0.0709 in.)
T 41459-RGR-000 1.825 mm (0.0719 in.)
U 41460-RGR-000 1.850 mm (0.0728 in.)
V 41461-RGR-000 1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
W 41462-RGR-000 1.900 mm (0.0748 in.)
X 41463-RGR-000 1.925 mm (0.0758 in.)
y
41464-RGR-000 1.950 mm (0.0768 in.)
Z 41465-RGR-000 1.975 mm (0.0778 in.)
14-420
THRUST SHIM 85 mm (cont'd) ,
AA 41466-RG R-OOO 2.000 mm(0.0787 in.)
AB 41467-RGR-000 2.025 mm (0.0797 in.)
AC 41468-RGR-000 2.050 mm(0.0807 in.)
AD 41469-RGR-000 2.075 mm (0.0817 in.)
AE 41470-RGR-000 2.100 mm (0.0827 in.)
AF. 41471-RGR-000 2.125 rrim (0.0837 in.)
AG 41472-RGR-000 2.150 mm (0.0846 in.)
AH 41473-RGR-000 2.175 mm (0.0856 in.)
AI 41474-RGR-000 2.200 mm (0.0866 in.)
AJ 41475-RGR-000 2.225 mm (0.0876 in.)
AK 41476-RGR-000 2.250 mm (0.0886 in.)
AL 41477-RGR-000 2.275 mm (0.0896 in.)
AM 41478-RGR-000 2.300 mm (0.0906 in.)
AN 41479-RGR-000 2.325 mm (0.0915 in.)
AO 41480-RGR-000 2.350 mm (0.0925 in.)
13. Install the new thrust shim, then recheck the
starting torque.
BACK
___ THRUST SHIM, 28.5 mm
Adjust Installation Height,
a page 14-424

OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT
SHAFT BEARING
Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) with a
commercially available puller (8), bearing
separator (C), and shaft protector (D). Place a shaft
protector between the transfer output shaft and the
puller to prevent damaging the shaft.
2. Install the new bearing on the transfer output shaft
with the using the driver (40 mm 1.0.) and the press.

14-421
BACK
Oil Seal Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100
1. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter
housing.
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the torque converter
(65mm).
14-422
BACK
Transmission Housing Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749c0010000
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) from
the transmission housing (8) by heating the
housing to about 212 'f (100"Cl with a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the housing more than 212 'f (100 "C).
2. Install the new bearing in the housing in the
direction shown .
3. Drive the new bearing until it bottoms in the
(72x75 mm).
077490010600
14-423
BACK
Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
NOTE: If the transfer output shaft, transfer output shaft
bearing, transfer output shaft transmission housing
bearing, transmission housing, or torque converter
housing were replaced, adjust the transfer output shaft
installation height with the 28.5 mm thrust shim.
1. Install the transfer output shaft (A) in the torque
converter housing, and install the 28.5 mm thrust
shim (8) on the top of the shaft. If you replace the
28.5 mm thrust shim with a new one, use the same
thickness shim as the old one.
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter
housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the transfer output shaft
installation between the surface (E) of the gasket
and the top (F) of the 28.5 mm thrust shim in at
least three places. Use the average as the actual
height.
Standard: 46.31-46.35 mm (1.823-1.825 in.)
Transfer Output Shaft Cutaway View
E ----..------------.1
D
14-424
28.5 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck
the installation height.
THRUST SHIM 28 5 mm ,
A 29031-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.0717 in.)
8 29032-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
C 29033-RDK-000 1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
D 29034-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.0740 in.)
E 29035-RDK-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
F 29036-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.0756 in.)
G 29037-RDK-000 1.94 mm (0.0764 in.)
H 29038-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 in.)
I 29039-RDK-000 1.98 mm (0.0780 in.)
J 29040-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)
K 29041-RDK-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 in.)
L 29042-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.0803 in.)
M 29043-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.0811 in.)
N 29044-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.)
a 29045-RDK-000 2.10 mm (0.0827 in.)
p
29046-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.)
Q 29047-RDK-000 2.14 mm (0.0843 in.)
R 29048-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.0850 in.)
S 29049-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.0858 in.)
T 29050-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
U 29051-RDK-000 2.22 mm (0.0874 in.)
V 29052-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.0882 in.)
W 29053-RDK-000 2.26 mm (0.0890 in.)
X 29054-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.0898 in.)
y
29055-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)
Z 29056-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.)
AA 29057-RDK-000 2.34 mm (0.0921 in.)
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
Transfer Gear Backlash Measurement
1. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion
flange (8); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (0).
o c
2. Measure the transfer gear' backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.02-0.06 in.'
Total Starting Torque Measurement
3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (8)
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
B
o
4. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat
the tapered roller bearings.
5. Measure the starting torque at the companion
flange (C) with a torque wrench (0) and a socket (E).
Standard: 2.64-4.23 Nm
(26.9-43.1 kgfcm, 23.3-37.4Ibfin.)
6. If the measurements are out of standard,
disassemble the transfer assembly and repair it.
14-425
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly
Exploded View
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
OUTER RACE
COMPANION FLANGE
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING
TRANSFER
SPACER
BEARING
[
TAPERED ROLLER
TRA:;"ROUTPUT
- SHAFT (HYPOID GEAR)
'" THRUST SHIM, 40 mm
\
Selective part
o TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
OUTER RACE
THRUST WASHER
CONICAL SPRING \
WASHER
Replace.
\3
'J \ TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
\) OUTER RACE
/
1 OIL SEAL
BACK-UP Replace.
LOCKNUT,
22x1.25mm
Replace.
14-426
BACK
Companion flange holder 07XAB-0010101
1. Remove the transfer cover (A) from the transfer
housing (B).
B
2. Remove the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C), 25 mm thrust shim (D), and tapered
roller bearing (E).
3. Remove the O-ring (F) from the cover.
4. Drain the transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil) from the
transfer housing.
5. Cut the lock tab on the locknut using a chisel.
6. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
vise.
7. Install the companion flange holder on the
companion flange, then loose the locknut.
8. Remove the companion flange holder.
(cont'd)
14-427
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly (cont'd)
9. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (8),
back-up ring (e), O-ring (D), and companion flange
(E) from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (F).
B
10. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A)
from the transfer housing (8), then remove the
thrust washer (e) and transfer spacer (D) from the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
14-428
11. Remove the oil seal (A) and tapered roller bearing
(8) from the transfer housing (e).
BACK
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the
transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
attachment (42 x 47 mm), bearing separator (C) and
the press.
07746-0010300
2. Install the new tapered roller bearing (A) on the
transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
attachment (42 x 47 mm), the attachment
(40 x 50 mm), and the press.
07749-0010000 I

07746-0010300
B
Sectional View
14-429
BACK
Tra,nsfer Assembly
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear) Bearing Removal/Installation
Driver, 40 mm I.D.07746-0030100
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) with a
bearing$eparator (C) and the press. Place a shaft
protector (D) between the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) and the press to prevent damaging
the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
14-430
2. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) over the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) .
" ....... '00 l
3. Install the tapered roller bearing (C) over the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) using the driver
(40 mm I. D.) and the press.
BACK
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer
- Driver 07749-0010000
- Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
- Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100
- Tapered bearing race installer A 07MAF-SP0011A
-Installer shaft 07MAF-SP0013A
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever
the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 52 mm bearing outer race (A), 75 mm
outer race (B), and 65 mm outer race (C) from the
transfer housing (D).
NOTE: Some bearing outer races (52 mm, 65 mm,
and 75 mm) are press-fitted in the housing and
must be removed by heating the housing.
2. Remove the press-fitted bearing outer race (A) from
the transfer housing (B) by heating the,housing to
about 212 "F (100 "C) with aheatgun:{C). Do not
,heat the housing rtlore than 212"F (100 "C).
3. Install the 52 mm bearing outer race (A) until it
bottoms in the transfer housing (B) using the driver
and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
B

(cont'd)

BACK
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Housing Tapered RoUer Bearing Outer Race .Replacement .(cont'd)
. 4. Install the75 mm bearing outer race (A) and 65 mm
.. bearing outer race (B) in the transfer housing (C),
set the attachme'nt(65 mm) and the tapered
bearing race installer A over the races, and install
the installer shaft through the attachment and
installer.
07MAFSP0011A t:?
\
A-----.,. \) /
07JAD-SH30100
\
07MAFSPOO,13A
5. Tighten the installer shaft nut (A) to install the races
(B) (C) into the transfer housing (D) securely.
A c B
A 07MAF.SP0013A
\
07MAF$P0011A

BACK
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Removal/Installation
Driver 077 49-0010000
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever
the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm
thrust shim (8) from the transfer cover (C). If the
bearing outer race is press-fitted, remove the outer
race by heating the cover to about 212"F (100 "C)
with a heat gun (D). Do not heat the housing more
than 212"F (100 "C).
2. Install the 80 mm thrust shim (A) and bearing outer
race (8) in the transfer cover (C) .
3. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the
driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
f- 07749-0010000
/
07NAD-PX40100
14-433
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer cover.
14-434
2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transfer cover (B)
in height (C) of 0-1 mm (0-0.04 in.) above the
cover surface using the driver and attachment
(65 mm).
BACK
Reassembly
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Driver 07749-0010000
Companion flange-holder 07XAB-0010101
NOTE:
While reassembling the transfer assembly:
- Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact.
- Measure and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
- Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting
torque.
Coat all parts with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil)
during reassembly.
Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing
outer race as a set if either part is replaced.
Replace the transfer hypoid drive gear and the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) as a set if either
part is replaced.
1. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) is replaced. Calculate the
thickness of the 40 mm thrust shim using the
formula below, and select the shim from the
following table.
FORMULA: A/100-BI100+C : X
A: Number on the existing transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear)
B: Number on the replacement transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear)
C: Thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim
X: Thickness needed for the replacement 40 mm
thrust shim
NOTE: The number on the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) is shown in 1/100 mm.
EXAMPLE
A: Existing transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
Number: +2
B: Replacement transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
Number: -1
C: Existing 40 mm thrust shim
thickness: 1.05 mm
X: Replacement 40 mm thrust shim thickness
X: AI100-BI100+C
: 21100-(-111100+1.05
: 0.02+0.01+1.05: 1.08 (mm)
Select No. M 40 mm thrust shim of 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
A B
THRUST SHIM 40 mm ,
Shim Part Number Thickness
No.
A 29361-RDK-000 0.72 mm (0.028 in.)
B 29362-RDK-000 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
C 29363-RDK-000 0.78 mm (0.031 in.)
D 29364-RDK-000 0.81 mm (0.032 in.)
E 29365-RDK-000 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
F 29366-RDK-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
G 29367-RDK-000 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
H 29368-RDK-000 0.93 mm (0.037 in.)
I 29369-RDK-000 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
J 29370-RDK-000 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
K 29371-RDK-000 1.02 mm (0.040 in.)
L 29372-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
M 29373-RDK-000 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
N 29374-RDK-000 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
0 29375-RDK-000 1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
2. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the tapered roller
bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) is
replaced. Measure the thickness of the replacement
bearing and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim by the
amount of difference in bearing thickness, and
select the replacement 40 mm thrust shim.
(cont'd)
14-435
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear) (8), then install the
tapered roller bearing (C) using the driver (40 mm
1.0.) and the press.
077 46-0030100
~
B
Sectional View
4. Place the tapered roller bearing (A) on the bearing
outer race of the companion flange side of the
transfer housing, and install the new oil seal (8).
14-436
5. Drive the oil seal securely in the transfer housing
using the driver and the attachment (65 mm).
I- 07749-0010000
/
07JAD-SH30100
6. Install the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A) in
the transfer housing (8). Do not install the transfer
spacer and thrust washer on the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear).
BACK
7. Install the companion flange (A), conical spring
washer (B) in the direction shown, and locknut (C)
on the transfer outputshaft (hypoid gear) (D). Do
not install the O-ring and back-up ring.
A
C \
D
B
vise.
companion flange.
10. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 Nm
(11.7-17.4 kgfcm, 10.2-15.1 Ibfin.). Do not stake
the locknut in this step.
12. Apply Prussian Blue to both sides of the transfer
hypoid drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
13. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust
shim (B), and transfer drive gear/shaft assembly (C)
in the transfer housing (D).
c ~
~ .
A . . . O ~
Q
14. Install the transfer cover (E) and secure the cover
with the bolts. Do not install the O-ring on the
transfer cover.
15. Rotate the companion flange in both directions
until the transfer gears rotate one full turn in both
directions.
(cont'd)
14-437
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
16. Set adial indicator (A) on the transfer companion
flange (B); position dial indicatbrtip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
17. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.02-0.06 in.)
18. Remove the transfer cover, transfer hypoid drive
gear/shaft assembly, and check the transfer hypoid
drive gear tooth contact pattern.
CORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
INCORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
TOECONTACT

FLANK CONTACT
FACE CONTACT
14-438
19. Ifthe backlash measurement is out of standard,
adjust the backlash with the 40 mm thrust shim and
recheck. Do not use more than two 40 mm thrust
shims to adjust the backlash.
20. If the transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust
the tooth contact with the 25 mm, 40 mm, or 80 mm
thrust shim. Do not use more than two of each
thrust shim to adjust the tooth contact.
Toe Contact
Use a thicker 40 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) away from the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
toward the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) to
adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Reduce the thickness of the 25 mm thrust shim.
- Increase the thickness of the 80 mm thrust
shim by the amount you reduced the thickness
of the 25 mm thrust shim.
Heel Contact
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) toward the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
away from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
to adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Increase the thickness of the 25 mm thrust
shim.
- Reduce the thickness of the 80 mm thrust shim
by the amount you increased the thickness of
the 25 mm thrust shim.
Flank Contact
transfer hypoid drive gear away from the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Flank contact must be
adjusted within the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. If the backlash exceeds the limits,
adjust as described under Heel Contact.
Face Contact
Use a thinner 25 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer hypoid drive gear toward the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Face contact must be
adjusted within the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. If the backlash exceeds the limits,
adjust as described under Toe Contact.
BACK
THRUST SHIM 25 mm ,
No.
1.70 29411-P1C-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
1.73 29412-P1 C-OOO 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
1.76 29413-P1 C-OOO 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
1.79 29414-P1 C-OOO 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
1.82 29415-P1 C-OOO 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
1.85 29416-P 1 C-OOO 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
1.88 29417 -P1 C-OOO 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
1.91 29418-P1 C-OOO 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
1.94 29419-P1 C-OOO 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
1.97 29420-P1 C-OOO 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
2.00 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
2.03 29422-P1 C-OOO 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
2.06 29423-P1 C-OOO 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
2.09 29424-P1 C-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
2.12 29425-P1 C-OOO 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
2.15 29426-P1 C-OOO 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
2.18 29427 -P1 C-OOO 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
2.21 29428-P1 C-OOO 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
2.24 29429-P1 C-OOO 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
21. Remove the transfer cover (A), transfer hypoid
drive gear/shaft assembly (B), 25 mm thrust shim
(C), and tapered roller bearing (D) from the transfer
housing (E) after adjusting the transfer gear
backlash or transfer gear tooth contact.
A
vise.
companion flange, then loose the locknut.
25. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B),
and companion flange (C) from the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) (D).
C
A \
D
B
26. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
from the transfer housing.
(cont'd)
14-439
BACK
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
27. Install the thrust washer (A) and the new transfer
spacer (B)on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear) (C) in the direction shown, and install them in
the transfer housing (D).
28. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) with transfer fluid (hypoid gear
oil).
29. Install the companion flange (A), new O-ring (B),
back-up ring (C), new conical spring washer (D),
and new locknut (E) on the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) (F). Install the conical spring washer
in the direction shown.
D
14-440
vise.
companion flange.
32. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 Nm
(11.7-17.4 kgfcm, 10.2-15.1 Ibfin.).
Tightening Torque:
108-294Nm
(11.0-30.0 kgfm, 79.6-217Ibfft)
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 Nm
(11.7-17.4 kgfcm, 10.2-15.1Ibfin.)
NOTE:
Rotate the companion flange several turns to
seat the tapered roller bearings, then measure
the starting torque.
Ifthe starting torque exceeds 1.71 Nm
(17.4 kgfcm, 15.1Ibfin), replace the transfer
spacer and reassemble the parts. Do not adjust
the torque with the locknut loose.
If the tightening torque exceeds 294 Nm
(30.0 kgfm, 217 Ibfft), replace the transfer spacer
and reassemble the parts.
BACK
34. Stake the locknut into the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) in depth (A) of 0.7-1.2 mm
(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B).
35. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust
shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).
36. Temporarily install the transfer cover (E) without
the O-ring, and secure the cover with the bolts.
37. Secure thetransfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
with soft jaws. To prevent'damage to the transfer
vise.
B
D
38. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat
the tapered roller bearings.
39. Measure the starting torque at the companion
flange (C) with a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Standard: 2.64-4.23 Nm
(26.9-43.1 kgfcm, 23.3-37.4Ibf.in.)
40. Remove the transfer cover from the transfer
housing.
41. If the measurement is within the standard, go to
step 47.
(cont'd)
14-441
BACK
,'Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
42. If the measurement. is out 0f standard, remove the
outer race (A) and.80 mm thrust shim (B)
from the transfer covei' (e); If the bearing outer race
is press-fitted, remove the outer race by heating the
cover to about 212 "F (100 "C) with a heat gun (D).
Do not heatthe housing more than 212 "F (100 "C).
o
C ----------
, ' ,
, '
14-442
43. Measure the thickness of the 75 mm thrustshim,
and select the new 75 mm thrust shim.
THRUST SHIM 80 mm ,
No.
A 41401-RDK-000 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
B 41402-RDK-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
e 41403-RDK-000 1.58 mm (0.062 in.)
0 41404-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
E 41405-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
F 41406-RDK-000 1.67 mm (0.066 in.)
G 41407-RDK-000 1,70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 41408-RDK-000 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
I 41409-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
J 41410-RDK-000 1.79,mm (0.070 in.)
K 41411-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
L 41412-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
M 41413-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
N 41414-RDK-000 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
0 41415-RDK-OOO 1.94 mm(0.076 in.)'
p
41416-RDK-000 1.97mrn (0.078 in.)
Q 41417-RDK-000 2.00 mm(0.079,in.)
R 41418-RDK-000 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
S 41419-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
T 41420-RDK-000 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
U 41421-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
V 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
W 41423-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
X 41424-RDK-000 2.21 m'm (0.087 in.)
y
41425-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
Z 41426-RDK-000 2.27 mm (0.089 in.)
AA 41427-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
AB 41428-RDK-OOO 2.33 mm (0.092 in.)
Ae 41429-RDK-000 2.36 mm (0.093 in.)
AD 41430-RDK-000 2.39 mm (0.094 in.)
AE 41431-RDK-000 2.42 mm (0.095 in.)
AF 41432-RDK-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
AG 41433-RDK-000 2.48 mm (0.098 in.)
AH 41434-RDK-000 2.5,1 mm (0.099 in.)
AI 41435-RDK-000 2.54 mm (0.100 in.)
AJ 41436-R DK-OOO 2.57 mm (0.101 in.)
AK 41437-RDK-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
AL 41438-RDK-000 2.63 mm (0.104 in.)
AM 41439-RDK-000 2.66 mm (0.105 in.)
BACK
44. Install the 80 mm thrust shim (A) and bearing outer
race (8) in the transfer cover (C). If you heated the
cover, let it cool to room temperature before
installing the thrust shim.
45. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the
driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
07749-0010000

46. After replacing the 80 mm thrust shim, recheck and
make sure that the total staring torque is within the
specification.
47. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer cover (8),
then install the transfer cover on the transfer
housing (C).
48. Remove the filler plug (A), then refill the transfer
assembly with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil). Use a
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil,
API classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity:
SAE 90: Above 0 "F ( -18 'C)
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 "F (-18 'C)
Hypoid Gear Oil Capacity: 0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
49. Install the filler plug with the new sealing washer
(8).
14-443
BACK
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential
Special Tools ................................................................. 15-2
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 15-4
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque Memorization ... 15-7
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Neutral Position Memorization ................................ 15-7
SH-AWD Control Unit Initialization ............................. 15-8
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 15-9
System Description ...................................................... 15-11
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 15-20
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 15-22
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 15-66
SH-AWD Function Test ................................................ 15-68
Rear Differential Fluid
Inspection and Replacement ................................... 15-69
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor
Replacement ........................................................ ..... 15-70
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement ........................... 15-71
SH-AWD Relay Replacement ...................................... 15-71
Rear Differential Mount Replacement ........................ 15-72
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose
Replacement .............................. .......................... ..... 15-73
Rear Differential Removal ............................................ 15-74
Rear Differential Installation ........................................ 15-75
Rear Differential Disassembly/Reassembly ............... 15-77
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement ............................. 15-78
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement ................................. 15-86
Center Case Replacement ............................................ 15-87
Side Case Replacement ............................................... 15-89
BACK
Rear Differential
Special Tools
CD 070AD-STK0110 Oil Seal Driver A 1
070AD-STK0120 Oil Seal Driver B 1
070AD-STK0130 Oil Seal Driver C 1
070AJ-SJAA 130' Nut, 14 x 1.5 mm 5
070AJ-SJAA 112' Adapter, Torque Wrench 1
@ 07SAZ-001000A Backprove set 2
(j)
07XAB-001A101 Companion Flange Holder 1
07 AAD-S3VA 100 Driveshaft remover 1
07747-0010100 Fork Seal Driver Weight
.
1
* Part of Adapter, Torque Wrench Set, 070AJ-SJAA102
15-2
BACK
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSAI
MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT'
SH-AWD INDICATOR
ACCELERATION SENSOR
Neutral Position Memorization,
page 15-7
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
Initialization, page 15-8
SH-AWD RELAY
Test, page 22-77
Replacement,page 15-71
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
Inspection and Replacement,
page 15-69
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque
Memorization, page 15-7
Removal, page 15-74
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 15-77
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-78
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-86
Center Case Replacement, page 15-87
Side Case Replacement, page 15-89
15-3
BACK
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Indicator
The SH-AWD indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the AWD system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
When you use high-powered wireless equipment such as a CB or Ham radio in the vehicle.
When you keep spinning the rear wheels while the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, snow, etc.
When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 10 volt.
After the SH-AWD indicator comes on, it stays on until you turn the ignition switch off.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
The SH-AWD control unit can memorize up to eight different DTCs. The system displays the DTCs by blinking the
SH-AWD indicator. Multiple DTCs are displayed in the order they occurred, beginning with the most recent.
If the same DTC is detected more than once, the most recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the
same problem is detected more than once, it is memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs are not cleared
when the battery is disconnected or the SH-AWD control unit is disconnected.
If there is a problem in the central processing unit (CPU) ofthe SH-AWD control unit, the SH-AWD indicator comes
on, but no DTC is memorized.
Self-diagnosis
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:
Turns the SH-AWD indicator on.
Memorizes the DTC.
Stops AWD control and puts the vehicle back in FWD.
Reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions when the abnormality was detected.
15-4
BACK
How to Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs)
When the SH-AWO control unit senses an abnormality
in the input or output systems, the SH-AWO indicator in
the gauge assembly will usually come on, and the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), the 05 indicator, and!
or the ABS indicator may also come on.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to
the data link connector (OLC) (A) behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover.
2. turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the
prompts on the HOS to display the OTC(s) on the
screen. After determining the OTC(s), refer to the
OTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HOS help menu for specific
instruction.
3. Ifthere are fuel and emission OTCs, AfT OTCs, and
VSA system OTC's at the same time, troubleshoot
the fuel and emission OTCs first.
4. After recording the OTCs, clear all OTCs.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in AWO
mode, and check for OTCs. If the OTC returns, refer
to the OTC Troubleshooting. If the OTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem within
the circuit. Make sure all connectors and terminals
in the circuit are tight.
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the SH-AWD
Control Unit
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
1. Remove the left side trim panel cover (see page
20-92).
2. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box
(see page 20-90).
3. Remove the SH-AWO control unit (A).
4. Inspect the circuit on the SH-AWO control unit
according to the OTC Troubleshooting using the
special tools and a digital multi meter or an analog
circuit tester.
B
07SAZ-001000A
5. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to the
multimeter or an analog circuit tester (C). Using the
wire insulator as a guide for the contoured-tip of
the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in
contact with the terminal end of the wires.
(cont'd)
15-5
BACK
Rear Differential
Updating the SH-AWD Control Unit
Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
Honda interface module (HIM)
HDS pocket tester
NOTE:
Use this procedure when you need to update the
SH-AWD control unit in a troubleshooting procedure.
Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
Before you update the SH-AWD control unit, make
sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged.
Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the
ignition switch ON.
To prevent SH-AWD control unit damage, do not
operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system,
brakes, Ale, power windows, moonroof, door locks,
etc.) during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do an
SH-AWD control unit update whenever the SH-AWD
control unit is substituted or replaced.
You cannot update an SH-AWD control unit with a
program it already has. It wi" only accept a new
program.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or
switch in the ON (") position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLe). This will
prevent SH-AWD control unit damage.
15-6
1. Select the update program, and follow the screen
prompts to update the SH-AWD control unit.
2. If the software in theSH-AWD control unit is the
latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLe, and
go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the
software in theSH-AWD control unit is not the
latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
3. Do the SH-AWD control unit initialization (see page
15-8).
4. Do the SH-AWD differential clutch torque
memorization (see page 15-7).
5. Do the yaw rate - lateral/longitudinal acceleration
neutral position memorization (see page 15-7).
BACK
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque
Memorization
Whenever the side clutch set is replaced, the differential
clutch torque memorization must be done.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
the 16P DLC (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), go to the
miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/differential
torque and follow the prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific
instructions.
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Neutral Position
Memorization
Whenever the yaw rate sensor or the lateral
acceleration sensor is replaced, its neutral position
memorization must be done.
the 16P DLC (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), go to the
miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/all sensor
and follow the prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific
instructions.
15-7
BACK
Rear ,Differential
SH-AWD Control Unit Initialization
Whenever the SH-AWO control unit is replaced, it must
initialized.
the 16P OLe (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), go to the
miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/all sensor
and follow the prompts on the HOS screen.
NOTE: See the HOS help menu for specific
instructions.
15-8
BACK
DTC' SH-AWD Detection Item Page
Indicator
Light
12-1 ON Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
15-1 ON Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
16-3 ON Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position Incorrect (see page 15-23)
33-2 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-24)
33-3 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-24)
41-1 ON Lost of Communication with Power Control Module (PCM) (see page 15-24)
41-2 ON Lost of Communication with VSA (see page 15-26)
41-4 ON Lost of Communication with AfT Control Unit (see page 15-27)
41-5 ON Lost-of Communication with Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal (see page 15.29)
Acceleration Sensor
41-6 ON Lost of Communication with Steering Angle Sensor (seepage 15-30)
42-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor (Shortto power) (see page 15-31)
42-2 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor (Open/GND Short) (see page 15-32)
43-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction (see page 15-35)
44-11 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (see page 15-36)
44-12 ON SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON (see page 15-37)
44-32 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supplv Stuck ON (see page 15-38)
44-41 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Stuck OFF (see page 15-38)
44-50 ON . SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Stuck Voltage Low (see page 15-39)
49-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line Open) (see page 15-41)
52-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-42)
53-1 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-45)
53-2 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-47)
53-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-45)
56-3 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-49)
57-1 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-52)
57-2 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-54)
57-3 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see j)age 15-52)
76-1 ON Rear Differential FluidOverheats (see page 15-56)
77-1 ON Communication Error with the Power Control Module (PCM) (see page 15-57)
77-2 ON Communication Error with the VSA Modulator-Control Unit (see page 15-57)
77-4 ON Communication Error with the Automatic-Transmission Control (see page 15-58)
Unit
77-5 ON Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-59)
77-6 ON Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-59)
78-xx ON SH-AWD Control Unit Self-diagnostic Malfunction (see page 15-60)
81-1 ON Left Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-60)
82-1 ON Right Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-63)
91-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Programming Error (see page 15-65)
*: DTCs are indicated by the SH-AWD indicator when the 16P data link connector (DLC) IS connected to the HDS.
15-9
BACK
Rear Differential
NOTE: Most problems in the unit are to be diagnosed by identifying noises from the gears or bearings. Care should be
t f dff . I . h h f h d
aken during diaanosis not to con use I erentla nOIses WIt t ose rom ot er rJvetraJn components.
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
The SH-AWD indicator does not Symptom troubleshooting (see page
ao off, and no DTCs are stored 15-66).
The SH-AWD indicator does not Symptom troubleshooting (see page
come on 15-67).
Gear or bearing noises o Fluid level too low.
,.
o Add fluid
o Incorrect or worn out fluid o Drain and fill the differential
o Damaged or chipped gears. o -Replace the differential carrier
o Side case clearance incorrect. assembly
o Incorrect tire size (rolling o Side case clearance adjustment
circumference).
Rear differential overheats o Fluid level too low. ,-, o Add fluid
o Incorrect fluid type. o Drain and fill the differential
Rear differential leaks fluid o Fluid level too high. o Lower to proper level
o Clogged breather hose. ,0 Clean or replace
,0 Worn or damaged oil seal. o Replace the sealing washer
o Damaged sealing washer. o Replace the oil seal
o Loose mounting bolts or inadequate o Recheck torque or apply sealant
sealing.
Rear differential screeches, o Fluid level too low. o Add fluid
whines, moans, or squeaks o Incorrect or worn out-fluid o Drain and fill the differential
o Incorrect tire rolling circumference. o Adjust tire pressure or replace
o Damaged oil pump. tires
o Replace the differential carrier
assembly
Noise during acceleration, or o Incorrect of side case clearance. o Pre-load adjustment.
when accelerating from a full o Incorrect of pre-load. o Side case clearance adjustment
stop o Incorrect of backlash of hypoid gear. o Replace the differential carrier
o Damaged or chipped gears. assembly
o Incorrect tire size (rolling
circumference).
HDS does not communicate Troubleshooting DLC circuit (see page
with the SH-AWD control unit or 11-223).
the vehicle
15-10
BACK
System Description
SH-AWD System
Outline
This vehicle is equipped with a Super Handling All-wheel Drive (SH-AWD) rear differential system. This system uses
electromagnetic clutches and the SH-AWD control unitto control front to rear torque distribution and independent left
to right rear torque distribution. This allows the system to function as a limited slip differential and as a torque
distribution system to improve standing start performance, straight-line stability, climbing, and.comering ability.
SH-AWD features include
Independent torque distribution to the front and rear wheels, and to the left and right wheels for neutral handling
when cornering.
Controls differential (inside/outside) wheel speed in a turn to increase cornering stability.
Limited slip differential function for better acceleration.
Operation
When driving in a straight line, the front and rear wheels are traveling at the same speed. In a normal turn, the
distance traveled by the front wheels is longer than that of the rear wheels. The SH-AWD system monitors the speed
of the front wheels, and increases torque to the outside rear wheel proportionally. This improves stability and steering
response, and on slippery surfaces it provides improved traction ofthe 4-wheel drive system.
FRONT WHEEL RADIUS
TURNING MOMENT
DIRECT ELECTROMAGNETIC
CLUTCH SYSTEM
t
REAR WHEEL RADIUS
(cont'd)
15-11
BACK
Rear Differential
Construction
1. The differential assembly has a conventional hypoid ring and pinion gear set.
2. The direct electromagnetic clutch system consists ofthe coils, the planetary gear sets, and the multi-plate clutches
that are installed in the side cases on either side of the differential carrier. When driving straight ahead, both rear
wheels rotate atthe same speed. When turning, c.urrent is applied to the appropriate outside wheel main coil to
engage the clutch. The amount of current passed through the electromagnetic clutch controls the amount of
driving force to the outside wheel.
RIGHT SIDE COIL
HVPOID RING GEAR
15-12
BACK
SH-AWD 4WD Control System
Control System
The SH-AWDcontrol system consists of a SH-AWD control unit, the PCM, the VSA modulator-control unit, along with
various sensors and switches that detect the steering angle, the lateral G force, the yaw, and the vehicle speed. A fluid
temperature sensor is located on in the rear differential. The control units exchange information via the F-CAN
communication lines. The SH-AWD control unit has a self-diagnostic function. If a malfunction is detected, the SH-
AWD control unit turns on the SH-AWD indicator in the gauge assembly and the system goes into fail-safe mode.
When in fail-safe m o e ~ the vehicle disables the SH-AWD differential. The vehicle defaults to front wheel drive,
reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions.
Driving Force Control
The driving force control distributes the power based on the driver's inputs. It distributes torque to the front and rear
wheels based on the throttle opening and the available engine torque output. When turning, torque is applied to the
rear wheels independently based on the lateral G input and the direction of the turn. This generates an inward yaw
movement to help steer the vehicle around the turn.
Steering angle sensor 1---...... --
Yaw rate-lateral,
Longitudinal
acceleration sensor
PCM
Left clutch
Right clutch
(cont'd)
15-13
BACK
Rear',Differential
Electromagnetic Clutch System
Construction
The electromagnetic clutch system is incorporated into the side case assemblies on both sides of the differential case.
The system consists of the mUlti-plate clutches, the planetary gears, the pressure guides, the solenoid coil assembly
(the search coil and,the main coil), the armature assembly (the slider and the armature), and the yoke.
Components Purpose
-'
Multi-plate clutches' Convert thrust into torque, absorb whe,el speed differences
Planetary Qears MaQnify and convey clutch torQue
--
Pressure guides Reduce fluctuations in pressure
Search coils Detect magnetic flux
Main coils Generates magnetic fields
Slider ,Centers the armature
,
Armature Generates magnetic flux to generate thrJ,lst
Yoke Generates maQnetic flux to clamping force
PRESSURE GUIDE
MAIN COIL
YOKE
ARMATURE
15-14
BACK
Operation
The SH-AWD control unit receives inputs from the PCM and the VSA modulator-control unit on the driving conditions
via the F-CAN. The SH-AWD control unit sends signals to the main coils, which engage the electromagnetic clutches
that connect the planetary gear set. This increases the torque applied to the rear wheels. The amount of current sent to
the clutch is continuously varied as driv.ing conditions change.
t
FRONT
(Propeller shaft)
WHEN THERE IS NO THRUST
MULTI-PLATE CLUTCHES
YOKE
WHEN THRUST IS GENERATED
MAIN COIL
ARMATURE
(cont'd)
15-15
BACK
Rear Differential
Search Coil Detection System
As the clutch discs wear, the air gap between the pressure guides and the multi-plate clutches increases. The increase
in air gap changes the magnetic field generated by the main coil and the yoke. The search coil detects these changes
in the magnetic field. The SH-AWD control unit uses predetermined maps to compensate for the changes to maintain
precise control and smooth clutch engagement.
THRUST
SEARCH COIL
YOKE
15-16
...
AIR GAP
ARMATURE
BACK
Electric Control System
SH-AWD Control Unit Electrical Connections
BATlSIY
+
DATA
lOA
lOA
YAWRATE-LA1ERALI
LONIlIIIJDINAL
At:CBEJIAlIONSiNSOR
VIA
MODUlATOR
CONIROL
lIM!
1M
CONNECJIIR
K-LIiE
WEN
SH-AWDCON11IOlUNII

PWR
No.9PDAI
I8IIIvIeI
IllayIlOl
SH-AWD
RELAY
H .... : ___ ---T:_-_- --,
CLUTQI
EI.ECIROMAGNE1I
COlI.
r-1 ....
CLUTQI
I lCI.
10M DD'IERENTIAL
TOl R.UID

L _______ ______ _
(cont'd)
15-17
BACK
; ,"
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for,the SH-AWD control system.
Do the SH-AWD inputs and outputs test with the SH-AWD connectors connected.
SH-AWD Control Unit Connector Terminal Locations
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring'
number color , Conditions/Terminal Voltage
A1 BlK lFH Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A3 BlU RFH Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A5 lTBLU K-LiNE Communication line SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): 0 v or battery
control voltage
A7 GRN IG1 Power supply for SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
control unit
A8 GRN TOl Detects differential fluid With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2 V to 4.7 V
temperature sensor (negative) (Depending on ATF temperature)
A9 BlK lG1 Unit ground With ignition switch ON (11):0 V
A10 WHT CANH F-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
'.
3.5V
A11 RED lFl Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(negative)
A12 RED RFl Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(negative)
A17 ORN FSR Drives SH-AWD relay With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or battery
voltage
A18 WHT TOH Power supply for differential With ignition switch ON (II): about 4.7 V to 5 V
fluid temperature sensor
A19 GRY WEN Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
A20 RED CANl F-CAN Communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
1.5V
15-1,8
BACK
.' ..
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for SH-Awqclonfrol system.
Do the SH-AWD inputs and outputs test with the SH-AWD connectors connected.
SH-AwPControl Unit ConneCittir Terrilinal
Sl8PI
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring
number color Conditions/Terminal Voltage
B1 WHT PWR Power supply for SH-AWO With engine running: battery voltage
actuator
B2 BLK PG Actuator ground With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
B3 BLK LG2 Unit ground With'ignition switch ON (II): OV .
B4 RED LCH Drives left clutch With clutch off: 0 V
;
electromagnetic coil (positivEt). With clutch on: batteryvoltage
B5 BLU LCL Drives left clutch With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
electromagnetic coil (negative)
B6 ORN RCH Drives right clutch With clutch off: 0 V
electromag'netic coil.,(positive) With clutch on: battery voltage
B7 GRY RCL Drives right clutch With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
., . , .... electromagnetic coil (negative) ". ' .

BACK
Rear Differential
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD RISE BOX
NojRlSE
No.3IRR F/BII60 AI
-v GRN RED
UNDER-DASH
. IGNmON SWITCH RlSE/RELAY BOX
TTERY
No.lIBATJ 1120 AI No.3 061 150 AI
+
-v
REARRISEI
---&--
B17 A2 RELAY BOX
WHT PNK
IGI
BLK
1
G603 G604
as B33
BLK GRN ORN WHT
"
B2 A7 A17 Bl
SH-AWDCONlR9LUNIT
PG 101 FSR PWR
lir
~
,fA
A
H
..
CANH .CANL K-UNE WEN
AID A20 A5 A19
WHT RED
RED WHT RED WHT RED WHT WHT RED WHT RED WHT RED LTBLU GRY
I A6 I A12 12 14 12 13 139 138 1A46 lAG
~
14 15
CONTROL
ABSOLUTE YAW RATE- VSA POWERTRAIN
I \
MODULE
STEERING LATERAL! MODULATOR- CONTROL DATA UNK CONNECTOR
SH-AWD
ANGLE LONGITUDINAL CONTROL MODULE
INDICATOR
SENSOR ACCELERATION UNIT IPCM)
SENSOR
15-20
BACK
IFTCLUTCH
ElCTROMAGNETIC
COIL
IA
I
RED 8LK
LEFT SOINOID
I I
4P CONNECTOR
I
\z \1
RED 8LU
C613 I
1
15 Is
RED 8LU
84 85
LCH LCL
PWR
L[
J
I
~ t
A
tL
PWR
&
C613
RIGHT SOINOID
4P CONNECTOR
RCH RCL
86 87
ORN GRY
\1 \9
I
I I
ORN GRY
Iz II
I
I \
RED 8LK
lJI
RIGHT CLUTCH
ElCTROMAGNETIC
COIL
RFH RFL
A3 AIZ
8LU RED
\17 \11
I I
8LU RED
14 13
RIGHT
SEARCH COIL
IFT
SEARCH COIL
AI
8LUIVEL GRN/WHT
I I
I
\4 \3
8LK RED
114
122
8LK RED
AI All
LFH LFL
?
TOH TOL
AIS AS
WHT GRN
\Z \10
I I
I
WHT GRN
U
~
GRN 8LU
g
DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
8LK
1
latre.r
dIfferential)
I
1
16
8LK
1
-
-
G651
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
Jr
LGI LGZ
AS 83
8LK 8LK
G603
15-21
BACK
Rear.Differential
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC 12-1, 12-2, 12-3: Lateral Acceleration
Sensor Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are any Lateral acceleration sensor orcs
indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. Drive in a
left and right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph
(20 km/h) and check the LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the sensor value change when turning?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71) .
4. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
5. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there O.1G or less?
time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
NO-Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration neutral position memorization
(see page 15-7). If the DTC returns, replace the
SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71) .
15-22
OTC 15-1: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Malfunction
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. When
accelerating, check the LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Does the sensor Value change when acceleration?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
5. Check the LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 0.1 G or less?
YES-Go to step 6.
(see page 15-7).lfthe DTC returns, replace the
6. Test-drive the vehicle for 2 minutes in a vehicle
speed is kept constant at 19 mph (30 km/h).
Is orc 15-1 indicated?
BACK
DTC 16-3: Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position Incorrect
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information {see page 15-4h .:
Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Check for installation df the steering angle sensor.
Are any steering angle. sensor DrCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR.in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
When the steering wheels is turned slowly, does
the value change?
YES-Go to step 5.
recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWDcontrol unit,
unit (see page 15-71)
5. Test-drive the vehide in a straight line at 19 mph
(30 km/h) or more.
6. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and center the
steering wheel.
7. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
It is Within 25 deg of center?
NO-Do the steering angle sensor center point
writing (see page 19-100). Ifthe DTC returns,
replace theSH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).

15-23
BACK
Rear Differential
DTC 33-2, 33-3: Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction
Are any yaw rate sensor OTCs indicated? .
YES-Go to the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 3. '
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. Drive in a
left and right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph
(20 km/h) and check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the
Does the sensor value change when turning?
YES-Go to step 4.
recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
5. Check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is there 3.5 degls or less?
(see page 15-7). Ifthe DTC returns, replace the
15-24
DTC 41-1: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
Communication With Power Control Module
(PCM))
troubleshooti'rlginformation (seepage 15-4).
1. Turn the, ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FIDTC's indicated?
YES-Go to,the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 3.
Is OTC 41-1 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check for intermittent open between the
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals A 10 and
A20 and the PCM connectorterminals A48 and
'A49 .
BACK
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
damage.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). .,
9. Connect PCM connector terminals A 48 and A 49 to
body ground with jumper wires.
111128416161769101
11112 181/V116V116 19 201211
I22V 24 ><1261>< 26 271261
129180 81 32lasVVlqu 87 asl8l1
II 40 I 41 42 48 I 44.1/146 47 46 49 I
'----'
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
-'---
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
unit (see page 15-71.) .
NO-Repair open in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and the PCM .
15-25
BACK
Rear Differential
DTC 41-2:F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
Communication withVSA)
2. Check for PGM-FI DTC's with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FI DrCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
Is DrC 41-2 indicated?
YES-"'Go to step 6.
time. Check for intermittent open between SH-AWD
control unit connector terminals A 10 and A20 and
terminals No. 38 and No: 39 ..
damage.
15-26
connector.
9. Connect VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminals No. 38 and No. 39 to body ground with
jumper wires.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT46P CONNECTOR
= =
BACK
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and the VSA modulator-
control unit..
Communication With AfT Control Unit)
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with theHDS.
Are there any PGM-FI DTC's indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC witH the HDS.
Is DTC 41-4 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A 10
and A20 and the PCM (49P) connector terminals
No. A48 and A49.
(cont'd)
15-27
BACK
Rear Differential
damage.
8. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P).
9. Connect PCM connector terminals A 48 and A 49 to
body ground with a jumper wires.
11112 S 4151617691101
111112 13/1/1161/116 19 2!1 21
I22V 24 ><.1251>< 26 27 26
129130 S1 S2lssVVI'l6 37 as 89
1140 I 41 42 <IS 1441/146 47 46 1491
'-----'
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
_'--L...
(20P).
15-28
11; Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and PCM .
BACK
Communication With Yaw Rate-Lateral!
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor)
Are any yaw rate rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor DrCs or F-CAN indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
Is DrC 41-5 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals A 10 and
A20 and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (4P) connector terminals No.3
and No.2 .
damage.
9. Connect yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor 4P connector terminals No: 3 and No.2 to
body ground with jumper wires.
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
=
10. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector
A (20P).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the
SH-AWD control unit and the yaw rate-lateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor .
15-29
BACK
,I: :.
Rea'r Differential
DTC'41-6: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
Communication with Steering Angle Sensor)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review,the general
Are any steering angleseOsor DrCs of F-CAN
indica.ted?: '
NO-Go to step 3.
'; "
5. Check for Dl'Cswiththe HDS.
Is Drc 41-6 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-:-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
I
time ..
6. Turn the ,gritiol1sWltch OFF:
7. Jumpthe'SCS line with the HDS.
damage.
8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
. ':'"
, . ';
1.5-30
9. Connect stee6ng angle sensor 5P connector
terminals No; 4 and No.2 to body ground with a
jumper wires.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWDcontrol unit
YES':" Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
recheck (see page 15-71).:lfthe symptom/indication
SH-AWD control unit and the steering angle
sensor .
BACK
DTC 42-1: Differential Fluid Temperature
Sensor (Short to Power)
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been driven, allow the rear
differential to cool for about an hour or more before
doing this troubleshooting procedure.
YES-Go to t ~ 4.
time .
5. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector and SH-AWD control unit
connector A (20P).
6. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid
temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
TOL(GRN) TOH(WHT)
Wire side of male terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between rear
differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Connectthe rear differential fluid temperature
S. Measure the differential housing temperature with
an infrared temperature gauge near the mounting
location ofthe rear differential fluid temperature
sensor. The temperature should be below 176 "F
(SO"C) before proceeding to the next step.
9. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals and AS and A 1S.
Is there 260 Q or more?
substitute a known-good SH-AWDcontrol unit and
goes away with the updated SH-AWD c.ontrol unit,
troubleshootingjs complete. If the symptom/
control unit, replace the origin.al SH-AWD control
unit (seepage 15-71) .
NO-Replace the rear differential temperature
sensor (see page 15-70) .
15-31
BACK
Rear Differential
OTe 422: Differential Fluid Temperature
Sensor (Open/GND Short)
3. Raise the vehicle, make sure it is securely
4. Start the engine and turn the VSA off (the light on
35 mph (56 km/h) and keep running for 10 minutes,
then slow down and stop the wheels.
YES-Go to step 6.
time .
8. Connect SH-AWD control unit connector terminal
A 18 to body groundwith jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE
=
15-32
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2 to
body ground.
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
TOH (WHT)
=
YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD
control unit connector A and the rear differential
fluid temperature sensor connector .
BACK
11. Connect SH-AWD control unit connector terminal
A8 to body ground with jumper wire.
=
temperature sensor 2P connector No.1 to body
ground.
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
connector terminals A9 and A 18.
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD
NO-Go to step 14.
connector terminals A8 and A9.
NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
15-33
BACK
Rear Differential
15. Reconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector and SH-AWD control unit
connector A (20P).
. , .
Is there 12.67 kQ or less?
troubleshooting is. complete. If the symptom/
NO...."Replace the rear differential fluid temperature
15-34
BACK
DTC 43-1: Differential Fluid Temperature
Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Is DTC 42-1 or 42-2 indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Letthe engine idle 1 minutes.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for 5 minute.
YES-Go to step 8.
time .
temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No.1
andNo.2.
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
TOL(GRN) TOH(WHT)
YES-Repair short in the wire between rear
differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
NO-Go to step 12.
13. Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
known-good SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).
15. Letthe engine idle 1.
YES-Replace the rear differential fluid
temperature sensor (see page 15-70) .
NO-Replace the original SH-AWD control unit
(see page 15-71) .
15-35
BACK
Rear Differential
Dle 44-11: SH-AWD Control Unit
Is DTe 44-11 indicated?
unit (seepage 15-71) .
time .
15-36 BACK
DTC 44-12: SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
6. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), then
test the SH-AWD relay (see page 22-77) .
Is the SH-AWD relay OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71) .

9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal A 17 and body ground.
SHAWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
the SH-AWD control unit and SH-AWD relay (FSR
line) .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P).
connector terminals B1 and B2.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
the SH-AWD control unit and SH-AWD relay (PWR
line) .
15-37
BACK
, .'.
Rear Differential
DTC 44-32: SH-AWD Control Unit Power
Supply Stuck ON
time .
15-38
Supply Stuck OFF
time .
BACK
Supply Voltage Low
1. Make sure the battery is fully changed and the
charging system is working properly.
- 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Check these fuse:
No.3 (RR F/B) (60 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse/relay box .
No.9 (30 A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the blown fuses and recheck. If the
No.3 (60 A) and No.9 (30 A) fuses blows again,
repair short to ground in the wire between the fuse
and the SH-AWD relay, then replace the fuse and
recheck .
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS ...
YES-Go to step 7.
time .
s. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), then
testthe SH-AWD relay (see page 22-77) .
Is the SH-AWD relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71).

9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD relay 4P
.SHAWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.1
fuse in the under-hood fuse relay box and the
SH-AWD relay .
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
and connector B (SP).
connector terminal B1 and SH-AWD relay 4P
SHAWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SHAWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
YES-Go to step 12.
control unit connector B and the SH-AWD relay
connector .
(cont'd)
15-39
BACK
Rear Differential
connector terminal A 17 and SH-AWD relay 4P
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
2
Is there continuity?,.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between S H ~ W D
control unit connector A and the SH-AWD relay
connector .
15-40
13. Check for continuity between SH-AWD relay 4P
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
GND
Q
=
YES-Go to step 14.
relay and body ground .
14. Check for continuity betweenSH-AWD relay4P
connector terminals No.1 and No. 3 to body
ground (G604).
SHAWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Is there battery continuity?
relay and body ground .
NO-Check for loose connector terminals at the
SH-AWD control unit. If the connections are OK,
update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
known-good SH-AWD control unitand recheck
(see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication goes
away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
BACK
DTC 491: SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line
Open)
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
4. Check for voltage between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal B2 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
Is there less than 0.5 V?
control unit connector B and body ground or poor
ground (G603) .
15-41
BACK
Real' D,ifferential
DTC 52-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil
Current Malfunction
3. Do the clutch function test with the HDS (see page
15-68).
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
=
YES-Go to step 6.
ground (G603) .
15-42
8. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control
unit connector terminals B4 and B5. Disconnect the
left solenoid 4P connector, then check for
continuity between left solenoid 4P connector
JUMPER WIRE
LEFT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
LCL (BLU)
YES-Go to step 9.
SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic coil..
9. Removethe jumper wire from the SH-AWD control
unit connector terminals B4 and B5.
BACK
connector terminals 82 and 84, then check for
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 85.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)
YES-Repair short to ground or short to the ground
wire between the SH-AWD control unit and the left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
NO-Go to step 12.
connector terminals 84 and 85.
, SH"AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)
. YES-Repair short in the wires between the SH-
. AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic .
NO-Go to step 12.
12. u ~ n t h e ignition switch ON (II).
13. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control. unit
Is there more than 0.5 V?
YES-Repair short to power in the wires between
the SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic .
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
15-43
BACK
Rear Differential
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORB (BP)
the SH-AWD control unit 'connector terminal 84 and
left clutch electromagnetic coil .
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit and recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/
indication goes away with the updated SH-AWD
control unit, replace the rear differential left side
case .
15-44
BACK
DTC 53-1, 53-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic
Coil Malfunction
15-68).
Is DTC 53-1 or 53-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector.
7. Connect a jumper wire between left solenoid 4P
=
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 9.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P
10. Connect a jumper wire between left solenoid 4P
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
(cont'd)
15-45
BACK
Rear Differential
11. Check for continuity between.SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal 84 and body grQund.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B IBP)
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wires betw!;len the
12. Remove the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P
15. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 'f
(20 'C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 'f (20 'C), drive
the vehicle to warm up the rear differential until the
fluid temperature becomes above 68 'f (20 'C).
15-46
17. Disconnect the left solenoid 4Pconnector ..
18. Measure the resistance between left solenoid 4P
t r = = r . = ' ~ LCH (BLK)
Is there 1.8Q or more?
YES-Replace the rear differential left side case
(see page 15-89) .
NO-Update the $H-AWD control unit if it does not
recheck (see page 15-71) . .lfthesymptom/indication
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom!
BACK
DTC 53-2: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil
(Short)
15-68).
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8PI
YES-Repair short in the wires between SH-AWD
control unit connector terminals B4 and B5 .
NO-Go to step 8.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
=
SH-AWD control unit connector terminal B4 and left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
15-47
BACK
Rear Differential
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 "F
(20 "C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 "C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 "C).
15. Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector.
16. Measure resistance between left solenoid 4P
Is there 0.45 Q or less?
(see page 15-89) .
15-48
BACK
Ole 56-3: Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil
Current Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the. general
15-68).
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
connector terminals B2 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR B (8P)
=
YES-Go to step 6.
ground (G603) .
unit connector terminals B6 and B7. Disconnect the
right solenoid 4P connector, then check for
continuity between right solenoid 4P connector
SH-AWD CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR B (8P)
JUMPER WIRE
RIGHT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the right clutch electromagnetic
coil..
9. Remove the jumper wire from SH-AWD control unit
(cont'd)
15-49
BACK
Rear Differential
connector terminals 82 and 86, then check for
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 87. .
,i!'
YES-Repair short to ground or short to the ground
wire between the SH-AWD control unit and theright
clutch electromagnetic coil.
1,:,1
NO-Go to step 11.
15-50
YES-Repair short in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
connectorterminals B2 and B7.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
NO-Go to step 14.
. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
the SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 86 and
right clutch electromagnetic coil..
15-51
BACK
Rear Differential
DTC57-1, 57-3: Right Clutch Electromagnetic:
Coil Malfunction
NOTE: Before you review the genl:lral
15-68).
Is Dre 57-1 or 57-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittentfailure; the system is OK at this
time.. ,.
.,
6. Disconnect SH-AWD'controlunit connector B (8P)
and the right solenoid 4P connector.
7, Connect a jumper wire' between right so'lenoid4P
r-
JUMPER WIRE
=
15-52
=
YES-Go to step 9.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the right solenoid 4P
10. Connect a jumper wire between right solenoid 4P
JUMPER WIRE
=
BACK
connector terminal 86 and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair. open in the wires between the
12. Remove the jumper wire from the right solenoid 4P
16. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
17. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P
Is there 1.8 Q or more?
YES-Replace the rear differential right side case
(see page 15-89) .
15-53
BACK
Rear. Differential
DTC 57-2: Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil
(Short)
NOTE: 8efore you troubleshoot, review the general
15-68).
Is OTe 57-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector 8 (8P)
and the right solenoid 4P connector.
control unit connector terminals 86 and 87 .
NO-Go to step 8.
15-54
connector terminal 86 and body ground.
=
the SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 86 and
right clutch electromagnetic coil..
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
(20 'C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 'C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 'C).
14; Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2. '
RCL(BLK) t!'==F",,\\ RCH (RED)
Is there 0.45 Q or less?
(see page 15-89) .
15-55
BACK
Rear Differential
DTC 76-1: Rear Differential Fluid Overheats
NOTE:
When the temperature ofthe rear differential fluid is
abnormally high, the SH-AWD indicator comes on.
This is not necessarily a problem, but DTC 76-1 will
be stored.
Check the rear differential fluid level (see page 15-69).
If it's low, refill it, clear the DTC, and recheck.
Are any VSA System OTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h).
6. Check for WHEEL SPEED in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are aI/ wheel speed the same?
time .
NO-Goto step 7.
15-56
8. Check for rear brake drag.
Are the rear brakes OK?
YES-Update theSH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page or
unit (see page15-71) .
NO-Repairthe rear brakes(see 19-4) .
BACK
DTC 77-1: Communication Error with the
Power Control Module (PCM)
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
5. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are any PGM-F I system orcs indicated?
DTC 77-2: Communication Error with the VSA
Modulator:..Control Unit
YES-Go to step 5.
NO--:-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time .
Are any VSA system DrCs indicated?
substitute a known-goodSH-AWD control unitand
troubleshooting is complete.lfthe symptoml
control ,unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
15-57
BACK
Rear Differential
77-4: Communication Error with the
Automatic-Transmission Control Unit
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
5. Check for DTCs inthe AfT system with the HDS.
Are any AlT system OTCs indicated?
substitute a known-goodSH-AWD control unit and
15-58
BACK
DTC 77-5: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
Are any yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
OTCs indicated?
DTC 77-6: Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
Are any steering angle sensor OTCs indicated?
15-59
BACK
Rear Differential
OTC 78-xx: SH-AWD Control Unit Self-
Diagnostic Malfunction
Is OTe 78-xx indicated?
have the latest software (see page 15"6), or
indication goes away with. a known-good SH-AWD
NO.,...lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time .
15-60
DTC 81-1: Left Search Coil Sensor
Malfunction
connector terminals A 1 and A 11.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
3 .. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
BACK
connector terminals A 1 and A 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
connector terminal A 1 and body ground.
.Q
=
control unit connector terminal A 1 and body
ground .
SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connections are OK, update the SH-AWD control
unit if it does not have the latest software (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit and recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/
control unit, troubleshooting is complete. If the
SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
6. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWDcontrol
unit connector terminals A 1 and A 11. Disconnect
the left solenoid 4P connector, then check for
continuity between Ieft solenoid 4P connector
JUMPER WIRE
LFL (RED)
(see page 15-89) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between left solenoid
4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4 .
(cont'd)
15-61
BACK
Rear Differential
7. ,Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector.
8. Check for continuity between left solenoid 4P
lEFT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
lFl (RED) lFH (BlK)
control unit connector A and the left search coil
connector .
NO-Replace the rear differential left side case
(see page 15-89).. .
15-62
BACK
DTC 82-1: Right Search Coil Sensor
Malfunction
SHAWD CONmOL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120P)
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 'f
step. If the temperature is below 68 'f (20 "C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 'f (20 "C).
connector terminals A3 and A12.
SH-AWD CONmOL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120P)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
connector terminal A3 and body ground.
=
control unit connector terminal A3 and body
ground .
SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connections are OK, update the SH-AWD control
unit if it does not have the latest software (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit and recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/
control unit, troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe
SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
(cont'd)
15-63
BACK
Rear Differential
unit connector terminals A3 and A12. Disconnect
the right solenoid 4P connector, then check for
continuity between right solenoid 4P connector
JUMPER WIRE
RFL(RED)
(see page 15-89) .
NO-Repair open in the wires between right
solenoid 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4 .
15-64
8. Check for continuity between right solenoid 4P
connectorterminals No.3 and No.4.
RFL (RED) 1--1-----1 RFH (BLU)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wires between
SH-AWD control unit connector A and the right
search coil sensor connector .
NO-Replace the rear differential right side case
(see page 15-89) .
BACK
DTC 91-1: SH-AWD Control Unit
Programming Error
NOTE:
DTC 91-1 is stored when the SH-AWD system update
is not completed.
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the SH-AWD system. If you turn the ignition switch
OFF before completion, the SH-AWD system can be
damaged.
1. Do the SH-AWD system update procedure
(see page 15-6).
NO-Update is complete.
15 .. 65
BACK
Rear Differential
The SH-AWO indicator does not go off, and
no OTCs are stored
NOTE:
Make sure the No.3 (RR F/B) (60A) fuse in the main
under-hood fuse box is OK.
Make sure the No.9 (30A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay
box is OK.
Make sure there are on loose connector terminals at
the SH-AWD control unit.
Make sure charging system is OK.
Make sure the PGM-FI system and the AfT system is
not in the middle of updating.
1. Testthe battery (see page 22-76). Charge or replace
the battery if necessary.
2. Check the COMPLETE MEMORIZATION in the
Does the data list show "complete"?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the SH-AWD system memorization
procedure (see page 15-7), then go to step 3.
Are any steering angle sensor DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
15-66
5. Check the SH-AWD indicator value with the HDS.
Is the SH-AWD indicator value OFF?
YES-Go to the gauge control system DTC
BACK
The SH-AWD indicator does not come on
2. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on and go off?
time .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
and B (8P).
6. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on?
NO-Go to the gauge control system
15-67
BACK
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Function Test
Adapter, torque wrench 070AJ-SJAA 112
Nut, 14x 1.5 mm 070AJ-SJAA130
Direct Electromagnetic Clutch Test
NOTE:
No DTC was detected.
The shift lever is in N.
The SH-AWD control unit had been initialized.
The tire pressures are at the specified value.
Tire size and were are the same between the left and
right tires.
2. Check that the differential fluid temperature is over
68 "F (20 "C) with the HDS. If it is below 68 "F
(20 "C), raise the temperature by driving the vehicle
in circles or by constantly turning.
3. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported.
4. Remove the rear wheels.
5. Install the adapter, torque wrench (A) and the nut
(8) on the rear wheel hub.
A
070AJ-SJAA 112
I
~ ~ ~
~
B--------
070AJ-SJAA 130
15-68
6. Do the direct electromagnetic clutch test with the
HDS. Go to Miscellaneous test menu/functional,
select tests/direct electromagnetic clutch test, then
follow the screen prompts.
7. Install a torque wrench on the. special tool as
shown on the HDS. Write down the torque value
while slowly rotating the rear hub with the torque
wrench as shown. (Turn the hub no more than
90 degrees in 7 to 10 seconds).
NOTE: Use a torque wrench capable of measuring
up to 80 kgm (580 Ibfft) such as a commercially
available Snap-on torque wrench TE352FUE.
8. Enter the torque value into the HDS, and wait for
the test to finish.
Ifthe result shows the clutch driving force is
normal, the clutch assembly is OK.
If the result shows the clutch driving force is
abnormal, replace the differential fluid; and
retest. Ifthe result still shows the clutch driving
force is abnormal, replace the right and left
differential side case (see page 15-89).
BACK
Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement
Inspection
ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Use solvent and a brush to wash any oil and dirt off
the differential fluid inspection oil filter plugs.
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer
(8), then check the condition of the fluid, and make
sure the fluid is at the proper level (C).
c
/
4. The fluid level must reach up the bottom of the
filler plug hole. If it is below the hole, add the
recommended fluid until it runs out, then reinstall
the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
Replacement
ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer
(8).
Fluid Capacity
2.53 L {2.67 US qt) at fluid change
2.77 L (2.93 US qt) at overhaul
Recommended fluid: Honda ATF-Z1
3. Remove the drain plug (C) and the sealing washer
(D), and drain the fluid.
(D).
5. Add fluid until it reaches the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
6. Reinstall the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
15-69
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
2. Remove the differential fluid temperature sensor
cover (A) and the differential fluid temperature
sensor harness stay (B), then disconnect the
. differential fluid temperature sensor connector (e).
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(D).
4. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor with
a new O-ring (E) in the reverse order of removal.
5. Refill the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
15-70
BACK
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: The SH-AWD control unit must be initialized
(see page 15-8). after replacement, other wise the
SH-AWD system will not function.
1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover
(see page 20-92).
2. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box
(see page 20-90).
3. Remove the SH-AWD control unit (A).
4. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connectors (B).
5. Install the SH-AWD control unit in the reverse order
of removal.
SH-AWD Relay Replacement
1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover
(see page 20-92).
2. Remove the SH-AWD relay (A).
A
3. Install the SH-AWD relay in the reverse order of
removal.
15-71
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential.Mount Replacement
15-72
14x1.5mm
74Nm
17.5 kgfm. 53.5 Ibfftl
Replace.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
MOUNTING RUBBER
------ 10x 1.25 mm
38Nm
13.9 kgfm. 28 Ibfftl
FRONT MOUNTING BRACKETS
14x1.5mm
85Nm
18.7 kgfm.
63lbfftl
Replace.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL
RUBBER MOUNT
BACK
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose Replacement
1. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box (see page 20-90).
2. Remove the breather hose clips (A), then disconnect the breather hose (8).
E
c
A
3. Remove the breather box clips (e) and the breather box (D).
4. Install the breather box then connect the breather hose and the breather hose clips.
5. Align the point mark (E) on the breather hose as shown.
6. Make sure that all the hoses are properly routed, clipped into place, and not pinched.
7. Install the cargo floor lid and the cargo box (see page 20-90).
15-73
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Removal
Driveshaft remover 07 AAD-S3VAOOO
1. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
2. Remove the exhaust pipe (A).
!
A
3. Remove the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26).
shaft (8) and rear differential companion flange (e).
Separate the propeller shaft from the rear
differential.
B
NOTE: Suspend the propeller shaft with an
appropriate size wire.
c
15-74
5. Place the transmission jack (A) under the rear
differential (8).
6. Using the driveshaft remover (e) and the hammer,
and disconnect the left rear inboard joint (D) from
the rear differential.
C
D 07AADS3VAOOO
E
7. Remove the rear differential mounting bolts (E).
8. Lower the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack, then remove the left rear
driveshaft inboard joint from the rear differential.
NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness
and the tube.
9. Disconnect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector
(A) and the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector (8), then remove the harness
clip (e).
E
10. Disconnect the breather tube (D) from the breather
pipe (E).
BACK
11. Slowly lower the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack.
NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness.
12. Disconnect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (A),
then remove the harness clips (B).
A
B
I
c
13. Disconnect the ground cable (C) from the rear
differential.
14. Lower the rear differential on the transmission jack.
Rear Differential Installation
1. Raise the rear differential with the transmission
jack.
2. Ifthe original differential is being reinstalled,
replace the set rings.
3. Raise the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack.
4. Connect the ground cable (A) to the rear differential.
6x 1.0 mm B
12.0Nm C

A
5. Connect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (B),
then install the harness clips (C).
6. Raise the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack.
7. Connect the breather tube (A) to the breather pipe
(B) and the clip (C).
E
B
8. Connect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector (D)
and the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
2P connector (E), then install the harness clip (F).
(cont'd)
15-75
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Installation (co nt' d)
9. Install the left rear driveshaft inboard joint(A) to
the rear differential.
D
14x1.5mm
85Nm
18.7 kgfm,
63lbfftl
Replace.
A
C
10x 1.25mm
38Nm
B
14x1.5mm
85'Nm
18.7 kgfm,
63lbfftl
Replace.
10. Raise the rear differential to the mounting level,
then hand tighten the new rear differential rear
mounting bolts (B) and rear differential front
mounting bracket bolts (C);
11. Loosen the differential front mounting bolts (D).
12. Tighten the new rear differential rear mounting bolt
then tighten the rear differential front mounting
bracket bolts.
13. Tighten the rear differential front mounting bolts.
15-76
14. Attach the propeller shaft (A) to the rear differential
(B) by aligning the reference marks (C) you made
during the removal procedure.
10x1.25mm ~
72Nm ~
17.3 kgf.m,
53 Ibfftl _ ~ = ' ' ' ' '
A
B
15. Install the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26).
16. Install the new exhaust pipe gasket (A) and exhaust
pipe (B).
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
15.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibfftl
Replace.
18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 18-5).
A
BACK
Rear Differential Disassembly IReassembly
B
A
\
@
A
CD REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FRONT MOUNTING BRACKETS
DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
evO-RING
Replace.
DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR COVER
FILLER PLUG
47 Nm /4.8 kgf.m, 35 Ibf.ftl
CD DRAIN PLUG
47 Nm /4.8 kgfm, 35 Ibfttl
SEALING WASHER
Replace.
@

I
\ ~
A
REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET A
@ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET B
REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET C
@ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET D
A:6x 1.0mm
12.0 Nm /1.2 kgfm, 8.9Ibfttl
B:14x1.5mm
85 Nm /8.7 kgfm, 63 Ibfttl
Replace.
15-77
BACK
Rear Differential
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement
Companion flange holder 07XAB-001A 101
Oil seal driver C 070AD-STK0130
Fork seal driver weight 07747-0010100
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-74).
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting
brackets (A) from the rear differential (B).
A
3. Remove the differential oil temperature sensor
cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), O-ring
(C), and rear differential harness bracket (D).
15-78
4. Remove the left side case (A), the right side case (B),
the four 10 x 12 mm dowel pins (C).
A
5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the bearing
set plate (B) and the 83 mm shim (C).
BACK
6. Remove the six mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the
differential housing assembly (8) and dowel pins
(C).
A
B
7. Remove the ring gear assembly (A), bearing outer
races (8), 75 mm shim (C), and the 8 x 14 mm
dowel pins (0).
B
8. Raise the locknut tab (A) from the groove ofthe
input shaft, making sure that the tab completely
clears the groove to prevent damaging the input
shaft.
A
9. Install the companion flange holder (A) on the
companion flange. Loosen the 27 mm locknut (left-
hand threads).
(cont'd)
15-79 BACK
Rear Differential
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement (cont'd)
10. Loosen the locknut (A) clockwise so that its tab (8)
comes out from the groove (e) in the inputshaft.
B
11. Tighten the locknut (A) until its tab (8) aligns with
the groove (e).
12. Remove any dirt from inside ofthe groove in the
input shaft, then loosen the locknut.
15-80
13. Remove the 27 mm locknut (A), the 27 mm spring
washer (8), the 28 mm back-up ring (e), and the
28 mm O-ring (D).
14. Make a reference mark (A) across the input shaft
(8) and companion flange (e), then remove the
companion flange.
o ~
BACK
15. Remove the drive pinion (A), pinion spacer (B) and
the thrust washer (C)by tapping on the drive pinion
with a plastic hammer.
NOTE: Support it by hand nottodamage the drive
pinion.
16. Remove the front case oil seal (A) with a
commercially available tool.
NOTE: Remove the oil seal with care so you do not
damage the inside surface of the differential carrier
seal surface.
17. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearing (A), then
install the new front case oil seal (8) with the oil
seal driver C and fork seal driver weight (0).
18., Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearing (A), then
install the drive pinion (B), pinion spacer (C) and
the thrust washer (0) into the differential carrier (E).
NOTE: Be sure to install the pinion spacer in the
direction shown.
B
(cont'd)
15-81
BACK
Rear Differential
19. Install the companion flange (A) on the input shaft
(8) by aligning the reference mark (C),
______ A
20. Apply ATF to the new 28 mm O-ring (A), then install
the new 28 mm O-ring, the 28 mm backup ring (8),
the 27 mm spring washer (C), and the new 27 mm
10cknut(D).
o
15-82
21. Install the companion flange holder (A) to the
companion flange, then tighten the locknut (Ieft-
hand threads).
A
07XAB-001A101
22. Rotate the drive pinion several times to assure
proper tapered roller bearing contact. Measure the
drive pinion turning torque .
If the drive pinion turning torque exceeds the
standard, replace the pinion spacer .
If the drive pinion turning torque is less than the
standard, adjust by tightening the locknut a little
at a time, but keep the torque within 186-
353 Nm (19.0-36.0 kgfm, 137-260 Ibfft). Ifthis
is not possible, replace the pinion spacer.
Turning Torque:
93.2-181.4 Nm
(9.5-18.5 kgf.cm, 69.0-134.0 Ibfin)
BACK
23. Stake the locknut tab (A) into the groove in the
. input shaft.
24. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearings, then
Install the ring gear assembly (A); bearing outer
races (8), 75 mm shim (e) and the 8 x 14 mm dowel
pins (0).
B
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
B
25. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces .
Apply liquid gasket (P/N08718-0001) to the sealing
surface. Make sure you seal the entire
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil
leakage.
NOTE:
You must assemble the housings within do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
the sealing surface must be cleaned, and the
liquid gasket reapplied.
Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after
assembly before filling the differential with fluid.
Remove the overflowing liquid gasket, when
joining side case.
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken
line and around all bolt holes.
(cont'd)
15-83
BACK
Rear Differential
26. Install the dowel pins (A), the differential housing
assembly (8) and the six mounting bolts (C).
C
10x 1.25mm
44Nm
(4.5 kgfm,
32lbfftl
B
27. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps.
28. Install the 83 mm shim (A), the bearing set plate (8)
and the six mounting bolts (C).
NOTE: Install the bearing set plate, check to
identification marks (0).
c
ax 1.25mm
27Nm (2.a kgfm, 20 Ibfftl
I
29. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps.
15-84
o
30. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces.
Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the sealing
leakage.
NOTE:
You must assemble the housings with you do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
liquid gasket reapplied .
Left side case/right side case
.._._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken
BACK
31. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
differential right side case (8), the rear differential
left side case (e) and the mounting bolts (0).
D
8x1.2Smm
27Nm
(2.8 kgfm, 20 Ibfttl
/'
D
8x 1.25 mm
27Nm
(2.8 kgfm,
201bfttl
. .
32. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
33. Install the differential fluid temperature s ~ s o r
cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor
(B), new O-ring (e), and rear differential harness
bracket (0).
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfttl
34. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets
(A) from the rear differential (B).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (e)
horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
differential front mounting bracket bolts (0).
D
14x 1.5 mm
8SNm
Replace.
35. Install the rear differential (see page 15-75).
15-85
BACK
Rear' Differential
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement
Special TOQlsRequired
Oil seal driver A 070AD-STK0110
Oil seal driver B 070AD-STK0120
Fork seal driver weight 077 47 -0010100
2. Remove the 40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (A) with a
commercially available tool.
A
3. Remove the thrust washer.
4. Cut a slit at each position (4 place, 90 degrees
apart) (A) on the 34.7 x 54 x ,9 mm oil seal (B), then
install 6 mm screw (C) (PIN 93901-16580) into the
oil seal at each location. Remove the oil seal with
pliers (D) and screw driver (E) as shown.
NOTE: Do not thread the 6 mm screws into the oil
seal more than 5 mm (0.197 in.)
15-86
5. Install the new 34.7 x54 x 9 mm oil seal (A) into the
rear differential side case (B) with the fork seal
driver weight (C) and oil seal driver A (D).
B
D
070AD-STK0110 A
6. Install the thrust washer (A), then install the new
40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (B) with the fork seal
driver weight (C) and oil seal driver B (D).
BACK
Center Case Replacement
brackets (A) from the rear differential (8).
A
(8), O-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket
(0).
4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A), the
rear differential right side case (8), the 10 x 12 mm
dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case
(0).
5. Replace the rear differential center case.
(cont'd)
15-87
BACK
Rear Differential
Center Case Replacement (cont'd)
Apply liquid gasket (P/N08718-0001) to the sealing
leakage.
NOTE:
You must assemble the housings with you do in
5 minutes afterapplying the liquid gasket. If not,
liquid gasket reapplied .
Allow it to cure at least ;30 minutes after
1.5-88
differential right side case (8), the rear differential
left side case (C) and the mounting bolts (D) on to
the rear differential center case (E).
D
8x1.25mm'
27Nm
(2.8 kgfm, 20 Ibf,ftl
/
D
8x1.25mm
27Nm
(2.8kgfm.
20lbfftl

in several steps.
9. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor
(8), new O-ring (C), and rear differential harness
bracket (D).
6x1.0mm
12N'm
(1.2 kgf.m.
8.7Ibfftl
---
BACK
(A) from the rear differential (B).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C)
differential front mounting bracket bolts (D).
D
14x1.5mm
85Nm
18.7 kgfm, 63 Ibftt)
Replace.
Side Case Replacement
brackets (A) from the rear differential (B).
(B), O-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket
(D).
(cont'd)
15-89
BACK
Rear Differential
Side Case Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the
rear differential right side case (8), the 10 x 12 mm
dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case
(D).
5. Replace the rear differential left side case or the
differential right side case.
6. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (8), and
the 60.2 mm shim (C) from the rear differential side
case (D).
15-90
7. Measure distance CD between the end of the rear
differential side case (A) and 60.2 mm shim contact
area of planetary gear (8) with a straight edge (C)
and depth gauge (D). Measure at three locations,
and average the reading.
NOTE:
Carry out the measurement at normal room
temperature.
Clean all the parts thoroughly before measure.
o
B
8. Measure distance between theerid ofthe rear
differential center case (A) and ring gear contact
area oftapar roller bearing (8) with a straight edge
(C) and depth gauge (D). Measure at three locations,
and average the reading.
NOTE:
temperature.
o
A
B
BACK
9. Measure the distance @between the needle
bearing (A) and tapper roller bearing contact area
ohing gear (B) with a depth gauge (C). Measure at
three locations, and average the reading.
NOTE:
temperature .
A
B
Shim Selection Formula
10. Select the proper 60.2 mm shim from the table.
Follow the example below, and use the
measurements you made in steps 7 to 9.
(Basic Formula)
CD+-(+0.19) = shim thickness
0.19 mm (0.007 in.): "
middle ofthe clearance standard.
Clearance Standard:
0.14-:0.24 mm (0.006-0.009 in.)
(For example)
CD = 6.12mm (0.241 in.)
= 15.3 mm (0.602 in.)
= 19.5 mm (0.770 'in.)
6.12+15.3-(19.5+0.19) = 1.73 mm
Select the 1 ;70 mm shim from the table.
6O.2mmShim
Part Number Thickness
A 48701-RWG-000 1.10 mm (0.043 in.)
B 48702-RWG-000 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
C 48703-RWG-000 1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
0 48704-RWG-000 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
E 48705-RWG-000 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
F 48706-RWG-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
G 48707 -RWG-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 48708-RWG-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
I '
48709-RWG-000 1.90 mm (0.075 in.)
J 48710-RWG-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
K 48711-RWG-000 2.10 mm (0.083 in.)
L 48712-RWG-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
(cont'd)
15-91
BACK
, ~ l
Rear Differential
11. Place one strip of plastigage (A) on 60.2 mm shim
contact area of planetary gear (B). Install the
60.2 mm shim (C), needle bearing (0) and the ring
gear (E). Measure at three locations, and average
the reading.
NOTE:
Carry out the, measurement at normal' room
temperature .
Clean all the parts thoroughly e f ~ r e measure.
15-92
differential right side case (B) or the rear.,
differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
(0).
D
8x1.25mm
ZlNm
12.8 kgfm, 20 Ibfft)
in several steps.
14. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the
rear differential right side case (B), the 10 x 12 mm
dowel pins (e) from the rear differential center case
(0).
B
BACK
15. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (8), and
the 60.2 mm shim (C) from the rear differential side
case (0).
16. Measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Clearance Standard:
0.14-0.24 mm (0.006-0.009 in.)
17. Ifthe clearance is more than the standard, go to
step 7. Ifthe clearance measured in step 16 is
within the standard, go to step 18.
-"
18. Install the 60.2 mm shim (A), needle bearing (8)
and the ring gear (C) onto the rear differential side
case (0).
(cont'd)
15-93
BACK
" <" I "
Rear 'Differential
Apply liquid gasket (P/N.08718-0001) to the sealing
leakage.
NOTE: ..
You must assemble the housings within do in
5.,minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
. the sealing s.urface must and the
liquid gasket reapplied. ;
15-94
20. Install the 8 x 12mm dowel pins (A), the rear
differential right side case (8) or the rear '
differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
(D) onto the rear differential center case (E).
o
8x 1.25 mm
27Nm
/'
o
8x1.25mm
27Nm
(2.8kgfm,
20Ibfft)

21. Tighten the, mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
22. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor
(8), new O-ring (C), and rear differential harness
bracket (D).
6x1.0mm
B 12Nm
;.
11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibfftl
-------
BACK
(A) from the rear differential (8).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C)
differential front mounting bracket bolts (D).
o
14x 1.5mm
85Nm
Replace.
15-95
BACK
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
I
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2
Driveshaft Inspection ..... : ............................................. 16-4
Front Driveshaft Removal ............................................ 16-4
Boot.Band Removal ........................................................ 16-6
Front Driveshaft Disassembly ..................................... 16-8
Boot Band Installation .................................................. 16-11
Front Driveshaft Reassembly ...................................... 16-14
Front Driveshaft Installation ........................................ 16-19
Intermediate Shaft Removal ........................................ 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ............... ................. 16-21
Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Removal ............................................. 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly ...................................... 16-29
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly ....................................... 16-31
Rear Driveshaft Installation ......................................... 16-35
Propeller Shaft Inspection ........................................... 16-37
Propeller Shaft Removal .............................................. 16-38
Propeller Shaft Installation .......................................... 16-39
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools
CD 07 AAD-S3VAOOO Driveshaft Remover 1
07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07 LAF-S M 40300 Support Base Attachment 1
@)
07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
@
07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 1
@
07XAC-001030A Threaded Adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 1
CD 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
077 49-0010000 Driver 1
07946-MBOOOOO Inner Handle, 30 mm '
" . :"'1 '".' L
1
@
07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1

9
, .
I
.' . . .

@) @,@
0
CD
@

, ,.
16-2
BACK
BOOT BAND
Removal, page 16-6
Installation, page 16"'1
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
Removal, page 16-21
Disassembly, page 16-21
FRONT DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-4
REAR DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-26
PROPELLER SHAFT
Removal, page 16-38
16-3
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshaft Inspection
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot
(8) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands.
D
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the
splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose.
3. Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted, bent, or
cracked; if it is, replace it.
16-4
Front Driveshaft Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the front
wheels (see page 1-7).
l
B
I
2. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (8),
then remove, and discard the nut.
3. If you need to remove the left driveshaft, drain the
transmission fluid (see page 14-266). It is not
necessary-to drain the transmission fluid when the
right drives haft is removed.
4. Remove the suspension stroke sensor (with active
damper system) (see page 22-229).
BACK
5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut.
c
6. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle (e) with the
special tool (see page 18-11).
NOTE:
To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball
joint thread protector onto the threads of the ball
joint .
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the remover.
7. Disconnect the driveshaft outboard joint from the
front wheel hub using a plastic hammer.
8. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the
driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub.
(cont'd)
16-5
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Front Driveshaft Removal (cont"d)
10. Pry (left driveshaft)/tap (right driveshaft) the
inboard joint(A), and remove the driveshaftfrom
the differential case or bearing support as an
assembly. Do not pull on the driveshaft (B); the
inboard joint may come apart. Pull the driveshaft
straight outto avoid damaging the differential oil
seal or the intermediate shaft outer seal.
Left drivesh,ft
A
Right driveshaft
B
Boot Band Removal
NOTE: When removing the boot bands, be careful not
to damage the boot and dynamic damper.
Welded Type
1. Cut the boot band (A), then remove the boot band.
A
Double Loop Type
1. Lift up the band end (A), then push it intothe clip
(B), then remove the boot band.
A
BACK
Low Profile Type
1. Pinch the boot band using a commercially available
boot band pliers (A), then remove the boot band.
Ear Clamp Type
1. Lift up the three tabs (A) with a screwdriver, then
remove the boot band.
Locking Tab Type
; :;.
1. Pry up the locking tab (A) with a screwdriver, and
lift up the end of the band, then remove the boot
band.
BACK
Axle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly
Threaded adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001030A
Inboard Joint Side
1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint.
2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6).
3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
(e) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
in the inboard joint. Then remove and place the
inboard joint on a shop towel (D). Be careful not to
drop the rollers when separating them from the
inboard joint.
c
A
4. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (e) to
identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers.
5. Remove the circlip (D).
6. Mark the spider and driveshaft (E) to identify the
position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
BACK
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape
(A) to prevent damage to the boot.
9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage
the boot.
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
Outboard Joint Side
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6).
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
..
(cont'd)
16-9
BACK
DriveUnel Axle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same
level as of the outboard joint rim (C).
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with
a shop towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded
adapter (B) and a commercially available 5/8"-18
UNF slide hammer (C).
B
07XAC-001030A

7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
16-10
C
8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the drives haft.
A
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape
(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to
damage the boot.
BACK
Boot Band Installation
Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially
available
Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-3591 0 or equivalent,
commercially available 'i"
Double Loop Type
1. Fit the boot ends onto the drives haft and the
inboard joint, then install the neW double loop band
(A) onto the boot,
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (B) twice. Make sure the loop faces
forwards on the driveshaft, towards the front of the
vehicle.
2. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
3. Mark a position (A) on the band 10-14 mm
(0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
B
A
4. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of a commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
winding mandrel (B) .
c
5. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot
band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
6. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
90 degrees
r
(cont'd)
16-11
BACK
Oriveline/ Axle
Boot Band Installation (cont'd)
7. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the. excess
free end of the band to leave a 5-10 mm
. (0.2-0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip.
8. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a
hammer.
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything on the vehicle and thatthe band does
not move .
Clean any.grease remaining on the surrounding
surfaces.
A
16-12
Ear Clamp Type
1. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
commercially available boot band pliers Kent-
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (8).
2. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion
of the band. If the clearance is not within
specifications, close the ear portion of the band
tighter.
Front Driveshaft
A: 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
B: 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) MAX.
Rear Driveshaft
A: 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
B: 6.0 mm(0.24 in.) MAX.
A
B
BACK
Locking Tab Type
1. Install a new locking tab type boot band on the
inboard joint side of the inboard boot. Fold down
the locking tabs.
2. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to flatten
them.
Low Profile Type
1. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(8), then hook the tab portion (C) of the band.
c
2. Close the hook portion of the band with
commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs portion (8) of the band.
16-13
BACK
Otiveline/ Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
SET RING
INBOARD JoiNT
ROLLER
.I
j
j
.:.. ........
......... .
Right driveshaft ................ j
. . ...... .:
INBOARD BOOT

Use the grease included
in the inboard boot set.
Q in the inboard boot set.
OUTBOARD BOOT (TPE)
16-14
LOW PROFILE BANDS
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
EAR CLAMP BANDS
Replace.

in the outboard boot set.
BACK
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging to the inboard boot.
2. Install the inboard boot onto the drives haft, then
remove the vinyl tape. Be.careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
of the driveshaft.
B
4. Install the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.
Rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high
shoulders facing outward, and note these items:
Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on
the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made .
Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
(cont'd)
16-15
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new inboard boot set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 190-210 9 (6.7-7.4 oz)

7. Fit the inboardjointonto the driveshaft, and note
these-items:
Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers.
Hold the drives haft so the inboard joint is
pointing up to prevent itfrom falling off.
16-16
A
8. Adjust the inboard joint so the rollers are in the
middle of the joint, bleed the excess air from the
boot, then adjust the driveshaft length to the figure
as shown. Doing this prevents a vacuum ortoo
much air in the boot, preventing it from
compressing or extending properly.
Right driveshaft: 570-575 mm (22.44-22.64 in.1
Left driveshaft: 571-576 mm (22.48-22.68 in.1
, 9. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the new low profile band
or the new double loop band onto the boot
(see page 16-11).
10. Repeat step 9 for the ba nd on the other end of the
boot, then go to step 11.
11. Install the new set ring (A).
A
b
BACK
Outboard Joint Side
damaging to the outboard boot.
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard
boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot.
3. Install the new stop ring (A) in the driveshaft
groove (B).
A
4. Pack about half of the grease included in the new
outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole inthe
outboard joint. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the
outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (e) is close to
the joint.
A
5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a
height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do
not use a hammer as excessive force may damage
the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the
threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
(cont'd)
16-17
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you
made with the outboard joint end (8).
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint
grease included in the new outboard boot set.
Grease quantity (total)
Outboard joint: 115-135 9 (4.0-4.7 oz)

16-18
A
8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the groove of the
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents a vacuum
or too much air in the boot, preventing it from
Right driveshaft: 570-575 mm(22.44-22.64 in. I
Left driveshaft: 571-576 mm (22.48-22.68 in.1
9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (C).
10. Install the new ear clamp band onto the boot
(see page 16-11).
B
11. Repeat step 10 for the band on the other end of the
boot.
BACK
Front Driveshaft Installation
1. Apply grease to the contact area (A) of the outboard
joint and front wheel bearing.
NOTE: Failing to apply grease may cause excessive
noise and vibration.
A
2. Install a new set ring (A) in the set ring groove (B)
of the driveshaft (left driveshaft).
A

3. Apply 2.0-3.0 g (0.07...,...0.10 oz) of grease to the
entire splined surface (A) of the right driveshaft.
After applying grease, remove the grease from the
splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and
from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed
from the intermediate shaft.
A
B
4. Clean the,areas where the driveshaft contacts the
differential thoroughly with brake cleaner, and dry
with compressed air. Do notwashthe rubber parts
with inboard end (A).ofthe
driveshaft into the differential (B) or intermediate
shaft (C) until the set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
A
I D
I' ..
E
B
A
D
I

om ..
I
c
E
(cont'd)
16-19
BACK
0,
Drlve:.linel Axle
Front Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the splash shield'(see step 32 on page 5-17).
6. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B).
B
7. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be
careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe
ofUhe grease before tightening the nut at the ball
joint. Torque the new castle nut (0) to the lower
torque specification, then tighten it only far enough
to alignthe slot with the ball joint pin hole. 00 not
align thetnutby loosening it.
NOTE: Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged
or cracked.
____
, 93Nm
, (9.5 kgfm,
69Ibfft)
A
8. Install the new lock pin (E) into the pin hole as
shown.
9. Install the suspension stroke sensor (with active
damper system) (see page 22-229).
16-20
10. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
front wheel, then install the front wheel with the
wheel nuts.
12. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
13. Tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut
with the vehicle's weight on the damper.
14. Refill the transmission with recommended fluid
(see page 14-266).
15. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the transmission fluid (see page 14-266).
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4).
3. Remove the exhaust pipe A (see step 7 on page
14-270.).
4. Remove the exhaust pipe bracket (A).
5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and two dowel bolts (8).
6. Remove the intermediate shaft (C) from the
differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
until it is clear of the differential to prevent
damaging to the differential oil seal.
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Special o o l ~ Required
Driver 077 49-0010000
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-SD90100
Attachmenti ,42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
1. Remove the heat shfeld.
2. Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal (A) from
the bearing support (8).
3. Remove the set ring (C) and external snap ring (D).
(cont'd)
BACK
Driveline/ Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the .
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the support
base attachment (C), support base (0) and a press.
Be careful not to damage the beanng support ring
(E) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
5. Remove the internal snap ring.
"6-22
6. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
bearing support (B) using the support base
attachment (C), support base (0), driver (E),
attachment (F) and a press.
BACK
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT,RING
\
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
'@
/
INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT BEARING
Replace.
DOWEL BOLTS
10x1.25mm
39Nm
..
FLANGE BOLTS
10x1.25mm
39Nm
(4.0 kgfm,29 Ibfft)
OUTER SEAL
Replace .
Pack the interior of the outer seal.
(cont'd)
16-23
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Driver 07749-0010000
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-SD90100
Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 07947-4630100
this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry
them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
I ,'I
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (8) using the driver (C), oil seal
driver attachment (D) and a press.
PRESS
~ 7 7 4 9 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ..
3. Install, then seat the internal snap ring in the
groove of the bearing support.
16-24
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
bearing (8) using the fork seal driver (C) and a
press.
5. Install, then seat the external snap ring (A) in the
groove of the intermediate shaft (8).
B
A
BACK
6. Install the outer seal (A) into the bearing support (8)
using the fork seal driver (e), support base
attachment (0), support base (E) and a press.
C
07947-4630100
PRESS
...
Pack the interior
~ o f t h e outer seal.
D
07LAF-SM40300
E
07965-5D90100
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
8x1.25mm
8. Install the set ring.
o
16-25
BACK
, ::11
D'riveline/ Axle
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Use solvent or brake cleaner to thoroughly clean
the areas where the intermediate shaft (A) contacts
the transmission (differential) and dry with
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontally to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal.
10x1.25mm
39Nm
8x 1.25mm
C
39Nm
(4.0kgfm,
29Ibfft)
2. Install the flange bolt (B), two dowel bolts (C), and
exhaust pipe bracket (0).
3. Install the exhaust pipe A (see step 5 on page
14-273).
4. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-19).
5. Refill the transmission with recommended fluid
(see page 14-266).
Rear Driveshaft Removal
Oriveshaft remover 07 AAO-S3VAOOO
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-Sl0A202
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear
wheels.
2. lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove and discard the nut.
A
3. Remove the VSA rear wheel sensor (A) and harness
clip (B).
BACK
4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut.
D
07MACSL0A202
/
5. Separate the ball joint from the upper arm (C) with
the ball joint remover (D) (see page 18-11).
6. Remove the special self-locking nut (B), washer and
flange bolt (C), then remove the lower arm A.
7. Place a transmission jack under lower armB and
remove the flange bolt (A) ..
8. While pulling the knuckle outward, use a plastic
hammer to lightly tap on the rear driveshaft
outboard joint disconnecting it from the rear wheel
hub.
(cont'd)
16-27
BACK
DriveUnel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
9. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, then remove the rear
driveshaft outboard joint (8).
NOTE: When removing the outboard joint, continue
supporting both the knuckle and lower arm with the
transmission jack. Make sure not to over extend the
brake hose. .
10. Using the driveshaft remover (A) and the hammer,
pry out the inboard joint (8) from the rear
differential (e).
B
1.6-28
11. Remove the rear driveshaft.
BACK
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly
Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001 020A
Inboard Joint Side
the boot (see page 16-6).
2. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
(e) to identify the locations of the rollers and the
grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the
inboard joint and place it on a shop towel (D). Be
careful not to drop the rollers when separating
them from the inboard joint.
c
A
3. Remove the circlip (A).
D
o
~
~ B
c
4. Make a mark on the spider (B) and driveshaft (e) to
identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
5. Remove the spider and rollers using a
commercially available bearing remover (D).
6. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft (A) with vinyl
tape (B) to prevent damaging to the boot.
7. Remove the inboard boot (e) and ear clamp type
boot band (D). Be careful not to damage the boot
(see page 16-6).
(cont'd)
16-29
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Outboard Joint Side
the boot (see page 16-6).
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
~
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same
level as the outboard joint end (C).
16-30
5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise with a shop
towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded
adapter (B) and a commercially available 5/8"-18
UNF slide hammer (C).
B
07XAC-001020A
C
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the driveshaft (B).
A
BACK
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
CIRCLIP
OUTBOARD BOOT
LOW PROFILE BAND
SPIDER AND
ROLLERS
INBOARD BOOT

EAR CLAMP BAND
Replace.
LOW PROFILE BAND
TOO.

(cant'd)
16-31
BACK
"
"
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Inner handle, 30 mm 07946-MBOOOOO
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
damage to the inboard boot.
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and inboard
damage the inboard boot.
3. Install the spider and rollers (A) onto the driveshaft
by aligning the marks (B) you made, install it using
the inner handle (e).
C
07946-MBOOOOO
A
B
4. Install the circlip (D) into the driveshaft groove.
Rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated.
16-32. I:
5. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new inboard boot set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 120-140 9 (4.2-4.9 oz)

Use the grease included in the
inboard boot set.
6. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note
these items:
Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers .
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is
pointing up to prevent it from falling off.
A
7. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the new boot band onto
the boot(see page 16-11).
8. Repeat step 8 for the band on the other end of the
boot.
BACK
Outboard Joint Side
damaging to the outboard boot.
2. Install a new ear clamp band (B) and the outboard
damage the outboard boot.
3. Install a new stop ring (A) in the driveshaft groove
(B).
A
\
\)
4. Pack about half of the grease included in the new
joint boot set into the driveshaft hole in outboard
joint. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard
joint (B) until the stop ring (e) is closed.
5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and joint, andtap them on a .hard surface.
Do not use a hammer as excessive force may
damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage
the threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
(cont'd)
,6-33
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you
made with the outboard joint end (8).
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint
grease included in the new outboard boot set.
Grease quantity (total)
Outboard joint: 85-105 g (3.0-3.7 oz)

16-34
8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as
shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends ofthe boots seat in the groove ofthe
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents a vacuum
or too much air in the boot, preventing itfrom
Left driveshaft: 592.5-593.5 mm
(23.33-23.37 in.)
Right driveshaft: 621.5-622.5 mm
(24.47-24.51 in.)
9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (C).
10. Install the new low profile band and ear clamp
band onto the boot (see page 16-11).
B
11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat step 10.
BACK
Rear Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are
free from dirt or dust.
1. Apply 1.5-2.0 g (0.05-0.07 oz) of grease to the
whole splined surface (A). After applying grease,
remove the grease from the splined grooves at
intervals of 2-3 splines and from the set ring
groove (B) so that air can bleed from the differential.
A
B
2. Seat a new set ring in the set ring groove ofthe
differential.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the
differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) until the set ring (C) locks in the
groove (D).
c B
4. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, and install the rear
driveshaft outboard joint (B) into the rear hub.
NOTE: When installing the outboard joint continue
supporting both the knuckle and lower arm with the
transmission jack. Make sure not to over extend the
brake hose.
5. Install the flange bolt (A) onto lower arm (B).
B
A
14x 1.5 mm
113 Nm
111.5 kgfm,
83lbftt}
(cont'd)
16-35
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the lower armA.
A
7. Install the upper arm (A). Be careful not to damage
the ball joint boot (B). Wipe off the grease before
tightening the nut at the ball joint.
8. Torque the new castle nut (C) to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the nut by loosening it.
NOTE: Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged
or cracked.
16-36
9. Install the VSA rear wheel sensor (A) and harness
clip (B).
---6x1.0mm
9.3Nm
10. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
B
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the drives haft.
A
24x 1.5 mm
245Nm
125.0 kgfm, 1811bfftl
14x 1.5 mm
127 Nm
(13.0 kgfm,
94lbfftl
i
l t b ~
IlG$
11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
rear wheel, then install the rear wheel with the
wheel nuts.
12. Turn the rear wheel by hand, and make sure there
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
13. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Propeller Shaft Inspection
Universal Joint and Boots
1. Shift the transmission to the N position.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
3. Check the center support bearing (A) for excessive
play or rattle. If the center support has excessive
play or rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
B
A
4. Check the rubber portion of the mount (B) for
damage and deterioration. Ifthe rubber portion is
damaged or deteriorated, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
5. Check the universal joints for excessive play or
rattle. Ifthe universal joints have excessive play or
rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Propeller Shaft Runout
6. Install a dial indicator with its needle on the center
of No.1 propeller shaft or No.2 propeller shaft.
7. Turn the other propeller shaft slowly and check the
runout. Repeat this procedure for the other
propeller shaft.
No.1 Propeller Shaft Runout
No.2 Propeller Shaft Runout
8. If the runout on either propeller shaft exceeds the
service limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
16-37
BACK
':,'i""
DrilleUne/ Axle
Propeller Shaft Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the propeller shaft protector.
3. Make a reference mark (A) acro'5s the No.1
propeller shaft (8) and transfer companion flange
(e).
4. Separate the No.1 propeller shaft from the transfer
assembly.
16-38
5. Remove the center support bearing mounting bolts.
6. Make a reference mark (A) across the No.2
propeller shaft (8) and rear differential companion
flange (C).
B
7. Separate the No.2 propeller shaft from the rear
differential, then remove the propeller shaft.
BACK
Propeller Shaft Installation
1. If you are installing a new propeller shaft, go to
step 2.
If you reinstalling the original propeller shaft, go to
step 3.
2. Install the new propeller shaft (A) onto the rear
differential (B), by aligning the reference mark (e)
on the new propeller shaft with the factory
reference mark (D) on the companion flange (E). Do
not use the marks you made on the companion
from the removal procedure. If there are no factory
marks on the companion flange, go to step 4.
B
A
\
3. Reinstall the No.2 propeller shaft (A) to the rear
differential (B) by aligning the reference marks (e)
you made during the removal procedure.
c
4. Attach the No.2 propeller shaft to the rear
differential with new mounting bolts. Tighten the
bolt to the specified torque.
5. Install the center support bearing mounting bolts.
Make sure you use new bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
6. Install the No.1 propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer
companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
mark (e). Make sure you use new mounting bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
16-39
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Propeller Shaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the propeller shaft protector.
8x 1.25mm
8. If you installed a new propeller shaft, test drive the
vehicle at 55 mph (88 kph) and check for noise or
vibration .
If there is no noise or vibration, the repair is
complete .
If there is a noise or vibration, go to step 9.
9. Remove the mounting bolts from the propeller
shaft at the rear differential companion flange.
Note the current alignment of the propeller shaft to
rear differential companion flange.
10. Rotate the propeller shaft 180 degrees from its
current alignment with the rear differential
companion flange.
11. Install new mounting bolts and tighten them to the
specified torque.
16-40
BACK
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-8
Power Assist Check ...................................................... 17-8
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-9
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-10
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 ................................................... 17-11
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-12
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-13
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement ................................. 17-14
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-15
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-16
* Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-22
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-23
* Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-24
* Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-25
Steering Column Position Memorization ................... 17-28
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Inspection .............. 17-29
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-29
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-30
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-31
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-39
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-52
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement .......................... 17-58
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement ....... .............. 17-59
Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number DescrIPtion Oty
CD 07LAG-SM40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide ' 1
07LAG-SM40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07MAA-SL00200 Locknut Wrench, 43 mm 1
0 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07RAK-S040122 PIS Joint Adapter (Hose) 1
07VAK-P8A011A PIS Joint Adapter (Pump) 1
(j)
07VAK-P8A012B PIS Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 1
07ZAB-S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
070GD-001 01 00 Driver Handle, 480 mm 1
@
07406-0010001 or 07406-001 OOOA PIS Pressure Gauge 1
or 07406-001A101

077 46-001()300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@
077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07946-MJ00201 Driver Head 1
@ 07946-1870100 Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 1
@
07965-SA50500 Front Hub Dis/assembly Tool 1
tJ ..

Ss
CD 0

(j)

@
tJ

@ @ @ @
17-2
BACK
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-12
Fluid Replacement, page 17-13
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-14
POWER STEERING PUMP
Drive Belt Inspection, page 4-33
Drive Belt Replacement, page 4-33
Pump Pressure Test .
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-10 "
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-001000A or 07406-001A 101,
page 17-11
Pump Replacement, page 17-15
Pump Overhaul, page 17-16
POWER STEERING GEARBOX
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-30
Removal, page 17-31
Overhaul, page 17-39
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-58
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-59
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Replacement, page ~ 4 1 3 7
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-22
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 17-23 '
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation,
page 17-25
Position Memorization,
page 17-28
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Inspection,
page 17-29 .
Steering Lock Replacement,
page 17-29
17-3
BACK
Power Steering
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order liste
d 1 untl you In t e cause. f d h
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for
Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6). Modified
suspension
Damaged
suspension
Tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Assist (excessively Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30). Front wheel
light steering at high alignment
speed) (see page 18-5)
Shock or vibration 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
when the steering 2. Check the drive belt for slippage (see page 4-33).
wheel is turned to 3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
full lock 001000.1 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
001AH)1 (see page 17-11).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-39).
Steering wheel will 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation.
not return smoothly 2. Check the ball joints for binding.
3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-40).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
steering 2. Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-310).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to air entering
inlet side of pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system (see page 17-14).
6. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-40).
Steering wheel kicks 1. Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
back during wide 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
turns 0010001 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
001A101 (see page 17-11).
Humming noise from 1. Check when the noise occurs: Pump pressure
the power steering Ifthe noise is heard 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in
system cold weather, this is normal.
If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle
stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission converter noise.
4. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on inlet
side of pump.
5. Check for particle contamination of fluid and restricted filter in
the reservoir.
Power steering rack 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
rattle or chattering Tighten or replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
column wobbles, replace the steering column assembly
(see page 17-25).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley:
If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 33 on page 17-21).
Ifthe pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-15).
17-4
BACK
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for
Hissing from the Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level Air in the PIS fluid
power steering and check for leaks (see page 17-13).
system/foaming fluid Check the reservoir for leaks.
Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into
the suction side of the system (see page 17-12).
Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Noise from the Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to PIS pump
power steering pump another like vehicle (pump noise for 2-3 minutes after starting pressure
the engine in cold weather is normal). Air in the PIS
Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page fluid
17-15).
. ..
Squeaking from the Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
power steering pump
Fluid leaks from the Fluid leaks from the top ofthe valve body unit. Replace the valve
steering gearbox 'body unit (see page 17-39).
Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal
on the pinion shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox
side.
Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder
end seal on the cylinder side.
Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt.
Replace the valvebodY'unit (see page 17-39).
Fluid leaks from the steering damping valve covers on the valve
body unit. Replace the valve housing.
Fluid leaks from the Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts). Tighten
power steering line the connection and retest (see page 17-14).
Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder lines. Replace the cylinder
line (see page 17-14).
Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts). Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, the line, or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from the Fluid leaks from the front oil seal. Replace the front oil seal.
power steering pump Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing. Replace the
leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-12), and if necessary replace
the power steering pump (see page 17-15).
Fluid leaks from the Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because fluid level is too
power steering high. Drain the reservoir to the proper level. If the fluid is aerated
reservoir check for an air leak on the inlet side of pump.
Fluid leaks from reservoir. Check for the reservoir for cracks and
replace as necessary.
Fluid leaks from the Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the
power steering pump fitting O-ring.
outlet hose Fluid leaks at the swagged joint. Replace the pump outlet hose.
(high-pressure)
Fluid leaks from the Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly.
power steering pump Replace or repair as necessary.
inlet hose
(low-pressure)
17-5
BACK
Power 'Steering
Hard Steering
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-8).
Is the initial turning load more than 29 N (3.0 kgf,
6.6Ibf) ?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Power assist is OK .
2. Connect the PIS joint adapter (pump), PIS joint
adapter (hose), and PIS pressure gauge TIN 07406-
0010001 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or
TIN 07406-001A101 (see page 17-11) to the pump.
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump
at idle.
Is the pressure 1,470 kPa(15kgflprrf,213 psi) or
less?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle.
Is the pressure 8,920- 9,420 kPa (91- 96 kgflcrrf,
1,290- 1,370 psi) or more? ,
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
17-6
5. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in
both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1.12Ibf) of each other?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-::Go to step 11.
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure
gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning
the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the
right.
Is the pressure 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgflcrrr.,
. 1,290- 1,370 psi) or more?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-::Faulty steering gearbox .
7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-30), and retest.
Is the steering OK?
YES-Repair is completed .
NO-Faulty steering gearbox .
8. Check the outlet and return hoses and lines
between the pump and the steering gearbox for
clogging and deformation.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES-Repair or replace the lines,.
NO-Faulty valve body unit .
BACK
9. Disassemble the pump (see page 17-16).
10. Check the flow control valve for smooth movement
and leaks (see step 13 on page 17-18).
Is the flow control valve OK?
YES-Faulty pump assembly .
NO-Faulty flow control valve .
11. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page
17-14).
Are any of the lines deformed?
YES-Replace the deformed line .
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (too tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
too tight?
YES-Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack
guide .
NO-Faulty valve body unit .
17-7
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Rotational Play
Check
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel
left and right without moving the front wheels.
Ifthe play is within the limit, the steering gearbox
and linkages are OK.
If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-30). Ifthe play is still excessive after
rack guide adjustment, inspectthe steering
linkage and steering gearbox (see page 17-9).
Rotational play: 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
17-8
Power Assist Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page
17-13).
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
the fluid .
3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Ifthe scale reads no more than the specification,
the steering gearbox and pump are OK .
If the scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-6).
Initial turning load: 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
BACK
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect for loose mounting hardware.
GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHIONS .
Inspect for deterioration.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
STEERING JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolt,
or faulty movement.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT
Inspect for faulty movement
and damage.
BALL JOINT BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
17-9
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 074060010001
PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
PIS pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine
whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox.
17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the
pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
6x1.0mm
11 Nm
(1.1 kgf.m,
S.O Ibfft)

g
S.O Ibfft)
07VAK-PSA012B
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
to the PIS joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint
adapter (pump).
17-10
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
A
B
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
7. Start the engine and let it idle.
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several
times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 "F (70 "C).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
(15 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi).
If it reads high, check for:
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and the steering gearbox.
Clogged valve body unit.
10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure
control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
INOTICEI
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be
damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the
pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm2,
1,290-1,370 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
BACK
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-001000A or T/N07406-001A'101
PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
PIS pressure gauge 07406-001000A
or07406-001A101
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine
whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox.
17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the
pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
07RAK-S040122
A
6x 1.0mm
11 Nm
11.1 kgfm,
8.0Ibf.ft)
6x1.0mm
11 Nm
(1.1 kgfm,
8.0Ibf.ft)
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
to the PIS joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint
adapter (pump).
5. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.
6. Start the engine and let it idle.
7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several
times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158"F (70 "C).
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
(15 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi).
If it reads high, check for:
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and the steering gearbox .
Clogged valve body unit.
9. let the engine idle, and gradually close the shut-off
valve and immediately read the pressure.
I NOTICE I
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be
damaged by over-heating.
10. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the
pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm
2
,
1,290-1,370 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-11
BACK
Power Steering
Fluid Leakage InspeCtion
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, inlet and outlet fittings.
L
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT.
Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference, and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting, and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints, and connections.
BACK
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Acura
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause
increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE: If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the
reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the
reservoir if necessary.
System capacity:
1.03 L (1.09 US. qt) at disassembly
Reservoir capacity:
0.34 L (0.36 US. qt)
A
1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the
reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to
drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid
on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at
once ..
NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If
the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the
reservoir.
B
c
A
2. Connecta hose (B) of suitable diameter to the
disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-Iock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary.
Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored,
repeat the procedure as necessary.
17-13
BACK
Power Steering
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown .
Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary .
Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A)
HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.10-0.22 in.)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.10-0.22 in.)
2.0-4.0mm
. (.0.08-0.16 in.)
RETURN HOSE
6 x 1.0 mm POWER STEERING
11 Nm PRESSURE SWITCH
(1.1 kgfm, 8.0 Ibfft) 12 Nm
PUMP OUTLET HOSE (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
PUMP INLET HOSE
CYLINDER LINES
A
INLET LINE
16x1.Smm
42Nm
(4.3 kgfm, 31 Ibfft) RETURN LINE JOINT
16x1.Smm
28Nm
CYLINDER LINES
13 Nm 11.3 kgf.m, 9.4Ibfft)
RETURN HOSE
A
RETURN LINE
A A
17-14
BACK
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir
(see page 17-13).
4. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley
(see page 4-33).
5. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, and AlC
compressor with several shop towels to protect
them from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect
the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C)
from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to
spill the fluid on the .. body or parts. Wipe off any
spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel
with the pump removed.
6. Remove the pump mounting bolts (E).
7. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape
to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
8. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose
onto the new pump with a new O-ring (F).
9. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with
the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
10. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
11. Install the drive belt (A).
Note these items during belt installation:
Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on
the pulleys (B).
Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
auto-tensioner, alternator, AlC compressor, and
drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
A
B
12. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
17-13).
17-15
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
PULLEY NUT
64Nm
17-16
15.2x2.4mm
ORING
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
\
*ROTOR
PUMP COVER
SEAL
Replace.
*SNAPRING
j ;BVALVE
*PUMP HOUSING
8x 1.25 mm
20Nm
(2.0 kgfm, 14lbfftl
V
51 x 2.4 mm ORING
Replace.
6x1.0mm
11 Nm
(1.1 kgfm,
8.0Ibf.ftl
BACK
Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 07946-1870100
Driver 07749-0010000
Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100
Disassembly
1. Drain the fluid from the pump (see page 17-13).
2. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-15).
3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with
soft jaws (B), then hold the pulley (e) with the
pulley holder (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and
pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
A-___
4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.
5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex
wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, the flow
control valve and spring.
6. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
7. Remove the outer side plate, cam ring, rotor, vanes,
side plate and O-rings.
8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the subvalve
from the pump housing.
9. Remove the snap ring, then remove the pump
driveshaft by tapping the shaft end with a plastic
hammer.
10. Remove the pump seal from the pump housing.
(cont'd)
17-17
BACK
PowerSteering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection
11. Check the flow. control valve for wear, burrs, and
other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
o
12. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the
pump housing for scratches and wear.
13. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 14; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve (A) is
not available separately.
A
17-18
14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow
control valve in a container of power steering fluid
or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
If air bubbles leak through the valve at Jess than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm
2
, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
available separately.
If the flow control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
B
15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A) and
install a new one (B).
B
"'
A
"'
16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the
Exploded View. If any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
BACK
Reassembly
17. Align the pin (A) ofthe subvalve (8) with the oil
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the
subvalve into place, then install the snap ring (0).
18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing (8) by hand first,
then drive it in using the driver and attachment
until there is no step at the top of the pump seal,
and the seal is fully seated in the pump housing.
07749-0010000
19. Position the pump driveshaft (A) in the pump
housing, then press it in with the appropriate size
socket wrench (8) as shown.
B
20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its beveled
edge facing out.
(cont'd)
17-19
BACK

Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
21.eoat the new pump cdver seal '(A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in"the
pump cover (B).
. '
22. Install the outer side plate (e) over the two roll pins
(O)"with its arrow marks stamped (E) facing down.
23. Set the cam ring (A) over the two roll pins with the
".".marks facing down .. "',
17-20
24. Install the rotor (A) to the pump cover (B) with its .
"." mark (e) facing up.
E
25. Set the 10 vanes (0) in the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (E) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
26. eoatthe new 15.2 mm O-ring (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
side plate (B).
D
E
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (e) by aligning
the roll pin set holes (0) in the side plate with the
roll pins (E).
BACK
28. Coat the new 51 mm O-ring ,(A) with ,power steering
fluid, and position it inthe bottom ofthe pump
housing.
8x1.2Smm
20Nm
(2.0 kgfm, 14Ibftt)
B _____
A
i
"-\ i.
29. Install the pump cover assembly (B) in the pump
housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque
alternating in two or more steps.
30. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
housing.
31. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C)with power
steering fluid, and install it on the flow control
valve cap (0), then install the cap on the pump
housing. Tighten it to the specified torque.
32. Coatthenew 13
c
mmO-ring (A) with power steering
fluid, and install. it on the. inlet joint UU. Install the
inlet joint on the pump
33. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
.. . B
----64Nm
(6.5 kgfm, 47 Ibftt)
34. Hold the pulley with the pulley holder, and tighten
the pulley nut to the specified torque.
35. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen the four
flange bolts on the cover, then retighten them in
same manner as in step 29. Turn the pump again
by hand.
17-21
BACK
PowerSteering
Steering Wheel Removal
SRScomponents are located in this area. Review the
doing repairs or service.
equipped).
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then
disconnect the negCitive cable from the battery.
3. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove
the driver'sairbag from the steering wheel
(see page 24-13?).
4. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A).
5. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (8).
17-22
6. Install a commercially available steering wheel
puller (A) on the steering wheel (8). Free the
steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
Note these items when removing the steering
wheel:
Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
hub more tha.n five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
bolt.
A
o
7. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the
steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the
steering column.
BACK
Steering Wheel Disassembly IReassembly
HFL
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCH
(If equipped)
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
/
STEERING WHEEL
REAR COVER
MUL TIINFORMATION
SWITCH
Iff equipped)
CORD GUIDE
SEL/RESET
SWITCH
/
- , . ~ ~ '
COVER
~
~
ACCESS PANEL
17-23
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point
straight up.
B A
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal
cancelling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure
the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of
the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal cancelling
sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering
column shaft when installing the steering wheel.
c
A
B D
17-24
3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to
the specified torque. Connect the cable reel
subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire
harness is routed and fastened properly.
A
39Nm
(4.0 kgfm,
29Ibfft)
4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the
system is operating properly (see page 24-137).
5. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,
and do these tasks:
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
o Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
o Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
BACK
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Reviewthe
SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and the
Removal
equipped).
2. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position,
and to the full telescopic out position.
disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and the
steering wheel (see page 17-22).
5. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-120).
'6. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
(cont'd)
17-25
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the. upper column cover (see page 20-129), and disconnect the connectors from the power tilt/telescopic
switch (A) (see page 22-488).
F
8x1.2Smm
28Nm
8x1.2Smm
16Nm
11.6 kgfm, 12lbfftl
8. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly (8).
9. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the three screws (e).
c
10. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the steering column.
11. Disconnect the connectors (D) from the tilt/telescopic motors.
12. Disconnect the connectors from the tilt/telescopic control unit (E).
13. Remove the steering joint bolts (F), then disconnect the steering joint (G) from the pinion shaft and the steering
column shaft.
14. Remove the steering column (H) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
15. Remove the center guide (I) (if equipped) from the top of the pinion shaft, and discard it. The center guide is for
factory assembly use only.
17-26
BACK
Installation
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
Take care not to let the sliding plates (A) fall out
of position during column installation.
Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by
any parts.
Make sure that there is no gap (8) between
bracket (C), sliding plates, and absorbing plate
(D) once column is mounted in place and fixing
bolts and nuts are tightened.
o
B
A
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
3. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (8) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
upper joint bolt (D).
4. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (E) within
the angle.
5. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (8) around the pinion shaft then loosely
install the lower joint bolt (C).
8x 1.2Smm
28Nm
12.9 kgfm,
21Ibfft)
A
(cont'd)
17-27
BACK
;
Power, Steering
Steering Column Removal and
Installation (cont'd)
6. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower
joint bolt to the specified torque.
7. Tighten the upper joint bolt to the specified torque.
8. Install the steering joint cover (A).
9. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
and do these tasks:
off.
work properly.
o Make sure the steering ~ l switches work
properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered .
Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
17-28
Steering Column Position
Memorization
NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the power tilt and
telescopic steering wheel system needs to be reset
when you reconnect the battery.
1. Insert the built-in key into the ignition switch, and
remove it.
2. The steering wheel automatically moves fully in
and up to let you know the system is reset.
BACK
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic
Inspection
Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the
steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive
play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the sliding capsules (C) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism
for movement and damage.
Check the absorbing plates (0) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
A
B c
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove the steering column (seepage 17-25).
2. Center-punch each ofthe two shear bolts, and drill
their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
careful not to damage the switch body and steering
column when removing the shear bolts.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear.bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper
operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
o
A
I
FlW)\\\\\\\m
/
B
8. Register the immobilizer-keyless control unit
(see page 22-410), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
17-29
BACK
Power Steering
Rack Guide Adjustment
Locknut wrench, 43 mm 07MAA-SL00200
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the
locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
(A), and apply new sealant (Loctite 565) to the
middle of the threads (B). Loosely install the rack
guide screw on the steering gearbox.
\
B
17-30
4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 Nm
(2.5 kgfm, 18Ibfft), then loosen it.
15 05
A
B
69Nm
(7.0 kgfm,
51lbfft)
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm
(0.4 kgfm, 4 Ibfft), then back it off to the specified
angle ..
Specified return angle: 15 05 0
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,
and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully
seated.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B), and
hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see page
17-8) and the power assist (see page 17-8).
BACK
Steering Gearbox Removal
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO *
Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 *
Engine support hanger, A and Reds
AAR-T-12566 *
Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 *
Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
Note these items during removal:
Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
the valve body unit, it's lines, and the end ofthe
steering gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
Lower the front subframe from the body and remove
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe.
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-13).
equipped).
disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety
stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
(see page 20-120).
8. Remove steering joint cover (A).
9. Remove the steering joint bolts, disconnect the
steering joint by moving the steering joint (A)
toward the column.
A
(cont'd)
17-31
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the center guide (A)(if equipped),and
discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly
use only.
11. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft
(B).
12. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-363).
engine hanger adapters (VSB02e000031) with the
"FRONT" mark facing forward over the damper
flange nuts.
17-32
14. Install the engine hanger balancer bar (VSB02e
bolt (e), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
VSB02C000031
in the engine hanger balancer bar. Tighten the wing
nut (F) by hand to lift and support the enginel
transmission.
BACK
16. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A), and
disconnect the return hose (B).
B
A
17. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut (e), and disconnect the
inlet line (D).
18. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 12 mm nut (B),
and loosen the nut.
B
07MAC-SL0A202
19. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
20. Disconnect the lower arm ball joints (see page
18-17).
21. Disconnect the stabilizer links (A) from the lower
arm on the right and left sides (see page 18-20).
22. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219)
and the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
23. Remove the front subframe stiffener plate (A).
A
(cont'd)
17-33
BACK
Power Steering
24. Remove exhaust pipe B (see page 9-9).
25. Remove the propeller shaft and propeller shaft
protectors (see page 16-38).
26. Remove the inlet line clamp bolts (A).
27. Remove the rear mount stop (A) from the rear
engine mount.
17-34
A
28. Remove the rear engine mount (A) from the base
bracket, and move it aside.
29. Removethe base bracket (A) from the front
subframe.
A
BACK
30. Remove the ground cable bolt (A) from the
transmission.
A
31. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the
marks (B) on the edge ofthe front subframe (C).
c
arms (B) of the front subframe adapter to its center
plate.
EQS02BMDXSBO
-----------
B
r-=:
33. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on
the corner of the jack base, then attach the front
subframe adapter (A) to the jack base with the bolts
(B) that camewith the jack. Tighten all bolts

c------
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
B
\
A
EQS02BMDXSBO
34. Raise the jack to vehicle height, then attach the
front subframe adapter to the front subframe using
the subframe stiffener mounting bolts (C) and bolt
holes.
35. Support the front subframe securely by raising the
transmission jack.
(cont'd)
17-35
BACK
Power Steering
36. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the front
subframe front brackets (B).
37. Loosen the special bolts (C) on the front subframe
front brackets so they are about 40.mm (19/16 in.)
from the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
special bolts more than necessary.
38. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the front
subframe rear brackets (B).
B
39. Loosen the special bolts (C) on the front subframe
rear brackets so they are about 40 mm (19/16 in.)
from the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
special bolts more than necessary.
17-36
40. Lower the transmission jack slowly until the front
subframe has dropped about 40 mm (19/16 in.).
41. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the left side of
the steering gearbox.
A
42. Remove the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) from the
left side of the front subframe.
A
BACK
43. Remove the mounting bolts from the right side of
the steering gearbox, then remove the mounting
bracket (A) and cushion (8).
B
44. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) toward the
driver's side until the pinion shaft clears the
wheelwell opening on the frame.
45. Remove the steering gearbox through the
wheelwell opening on the driver's side.
46. Remove the pinion shaft grommet 8 from the top of
the valve housing.
B
(cont'd)
17-37
BACK
Power Steering
47. Replace the pinion shaft grommet A if necessa'ry.
48. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure
that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox
mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the
front subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once.
17-38
BACK
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
o
CIRCLIP
FLARE NUTS
13Nm
/
CYLINDER END SEAL
I' I 7'''' ""'NG
.. / Replace.
/
RACK moP / /00
RACK BUSHING
PISTON SEAL RING
Replace.
RETURN LINE JOINT
28Nm
(2.9kgfm,
21Ibfft)
DAMPER VALVE
25Nm
(2.5kgfm,
18Ibfft)
STEERING RACK
-=--
FLANGE BOLTS
18Nm
11.8 kgf.m, 13Ibfft)
Replace.

LOCKNUT
, \ RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
RACK GUIDE

25N.1J'!
---........ (2.5 kgfm, 18 Ibfft)
END PLUG
59Nm
/@
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
(cont'd)
17-39
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
Driver handle, 480 mm 070GD-0010100
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Driver head ..
Piston seal ring guide
Piston seal ringsiiing tool OiLAG-SM40200
Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
NOTE: Re'er to the Exploded View as needed during the
Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B).
Pull the boots away from the ends of the steering
gearbox.
17-40
3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering
rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends
(e) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
rack surface with the wrench.
5. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
BACK
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (8).
7. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox housing.
8. Remove the cylinder lines from the steering
gearbox.
NOTE: Use a second wrench when loosening the
cylinder lines to avoid damage to the fittings on the
steering gearbox. Do not loosen the A and 8
connectors.
9. Remove the damper valves (C) and O"rings (D)
from the steering gearbox.
NOTE: Do not loosen the A and 8 connectors.
B
10. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly
moving the steering rack back and forth.
11. Remove the end plug (A) from the gearbox housing,
then remove the nut (8) from the pinion shaft end.
A
(cont'd)
17-41
BACK
Power Steering
12. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut (A), and remove the
return line joint (8).
B
13. Remove the two flange bolts, the valve body unit
(A), and gasket (8) from the steering gearbox .
. Check that the valve turns smoothly by turning the
pinion shaft. If any play or roughness is felt, replace
the valve body unit with a new part. Do not try to
disassemble the valve body unit.
14. Slide the steering rack all the way towards the
valve body end of the gearbox housing.
17-42
15. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the
end (8) of the circlip (C) sticks out from the hole (D)
in the cylinder housing. Then turn it clockwise to
remove the circlip.
c
A
16. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (8), and
steering rack (C) from the steering gearbox.
BACK
17. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B)
from the rack bushing (C).
~
18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside ofthe seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
19. Insert the driver handle and driver head, and
carefully place them on the cylinder end seal (A) as
shown. Make sure that the driver head is securely
positioned on the cylinder end seal.
07946-MJ00201
20. Install the bearing separator (B) on the gearbox
housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the
gearbox housing points upward, then push out the
cylinder end seal by pressing on the end ofthe
driver handle and driver head.
(cont'd)
17-43
BACK
Power Steering
21. Remove the steering gearbox from the press, and
set a driver extension (A) on the driver handle.
Place the steering gearbox in a press, then remove
the cylinder end seal (8) from the gearbox housing
by pressing on the end of the extension.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end
seal:
Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool;
striking the tool would break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox.
Press
..
A
B
17-44
Reassembly
22. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering
fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (8) on the ring guide, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, make sure you contract
the seal ring using the sizing tool.
Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
i
~ G ~ ' 0 0
B
24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
BACK
25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
piston seal ring sizing tool with power steering fluid,
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over
the piston seal ring.
A
g
07LAG-SM40200
26. Move the sizing tool back and forth several times to
make sure the piston seal ring fits snugly in the
piston.
27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped
portion.
28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not to damage the lip of the seal with the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
A
29. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
(cont'd)
17-45
BACK
Power Steering
30. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the steering rack
teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox
housing. Be careful not to damage the inner
surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges.
31. Insert an appropriate sized deep socket (A) onto the
steering rack as shown.
Press
32. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
17-46
34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so that there is no stepped portion.
35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (B) using the driver and attachment.
07749-0010000
07746-0010300
A
B
36. Coatthe new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
BACK
37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with
the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the
piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.
38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
hole (8) is aligned with the slot (C) on the cylinder
housing.
A
40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (8) of
the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop
counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in
the rack stop.
B
(cont'd)
17-47 BACK
Power Steering
41. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the bearings (A) in
the gearbox housing, and install the valve body
unit (8) and new gasket (e) by engaging the gears.
Note the valve body unit installation position
(direction of line connections). Then loosely install
the two flange bolts.
17-48
18Nm
11.8 kgf.m,
13Ibfft)
42. Install the new self-locking nut (A) onto the pinion
shaft end, and tighten to the specified torque.
B
59Nm
/
A
25Nm
(2.5 kgfm, 18Ibfft)
43. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.
44. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) all the way around
the threads on the end plug (8), install the end plug
onto the gearbox housing, and tighten it to the
specified torque.
45. After tightening, use a drift to stake (A) the end plug
shoulder against the gearbox housing.
BACK
46. Install the return line joint (A), and tighten the
16 mm flare nut (B).
28Nm
47. Coat the new O-rings (A) with power steering fluid,
then install the damper valves (B).
25Nm
(2.5kgfm,
18Ibfft)
B
25Nm
(2.5 kgfm,
18lbfftl
48. Install the damper valve to the steering gearbox.
49. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new
.. O-rings with power steering fluid, then install the
lines.
Note these items during reassembly:
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material .
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
NOTE: Use a second wrench when tightening the
cylinder lines to avoid damaging the fittings on the
steering gearbox.
13Nm
50. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of
the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing.
51. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) to the middle of the
threads ofthe rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (C), rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
(cont'd)
17-49
BACK
Power Steering
52. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-30). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
53. Install the new stop washer (A) and lock washer (B).
Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (D).
Install the rack end (E) while holding the lock
washer in place. Repeat this step for the other side
of the rack.
E
88Nm
o
54. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack
with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends. Be
careful notto damage the rack surface with the
wrench ..
55. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots
on the rack end joint housing.
A
17-50
56. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the circumference of
the rack end joint housing (A).
\
~
IPIN 08798-90131
57. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
59. Clean off any grease or contamination from the
boot installation surfaces (A) on the gearbox
housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack ends with
the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end on the
housing properly.
o
60. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (D) of the rack end.
BACK
61. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (8) of the band.
62. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a
commercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (8).
63. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
17-51
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure
that no power steering fluid is on the mating
surface of the steering gearbox and front subframe.
To prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from
loosening after the installation, remove any power
steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt
holes.
2. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft
(A).
3. Install the pinion shaft grommet B on the top of the
valve housing.
4. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front
subframe and body from the driver's side.
17-52
5. Careful'ly move the steering gearbox (A) toward the
passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the
wheelwell opening on the body.
6. Continue moving the gearbox toward the
passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in
position.
BACK
7. Install the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) on the left
side of the front subframe, and tighten the bolts
and nut to the specified torque.
"Y
10x 1.25mm
A
10x 1.25 mm
38Nm
(3.9kgfm,
28Ibfft)
8. Loosely install the new mounting bolts (A) on the
left side of the steering gearbox.
A
12x 1.25 mm
50Nm
(5.1 kgfm,
37Ibfft)
Replace.
9. Position thEl c!Jtout (A) on the.mounting:cushion (8)
as shown, and install it on the right side of the
steering gearbox.
"FRONT
A
c
B
10. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (e) over the
mounting cushion, and loosely install the mounting
bolts.
11. Tighten the mounting bolts on the both sides of the
steering gearbox to specified torque alternately in
two or more steps.
(cont'd)
17-53
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
12. Carefully raise the front subframe with the
subframe adapter and the transmission jack or the
powertrain lift until the subfrarl1e is it position.
13. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
(8) with the body.
B
14. Install the front subframe front brackets (A) with
mounting bolts (8) and the new special bolts (C),
and tighten to the specified torque.
17-54
B
12 x 1.25 mm
74Nm
(7.5 kgfm,
54lbfft)
A
C
14x1.5mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm,
75.9 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
15. Install the front subframe rear brackets (A) with
mounting bolts (8) and the new special bolts (C),
and tighten to the specified torque.
C
14x1.5mm
103Nm
Replace.
A
B
12 x 1.25 mm
117 Nm
16. Lower the transmission jack supporting the front
subframe.
17. Install the ground cable bolt (A) to the transmission.
A
38Nm
(3.9kgfm,
28lbfft)
BACK
18. Install the base bracket (A) with new mounting
bolts (8) and mounting bolts (C), and tighten to the
specified torque.
B
10x 1.25mm
42Nm
14.3 kgfm,
31lbfftl
Replace.
A
C
10x 1.25mm
42Nm
14.3 kgfm,
31lbfftl
19. Install the rear engine mount (A) with new
mounting bolts (8), and tighten to the specified
torque.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
38Nm
13.9 kgfm,
28lbfftl
Replace.
B
10x 1.25mm
54Nm
15.5 kgfm,
40lbfftl
Replace.
A
20. Install the rear mount stop (A) with new mounting
nuts (8), and tighten to the specified torque.
B
12x 1.25mm
74Nm
17.5 kgfm,
54lbfftl
Replace.
A
21. Install the inlet line clamp bolts (A), and tighten to
22. Install exhaust pipe 8 (see page 9-9).
23. Install the propeller shaft and propeller shaft
protectors (see page 16-39).
(cont'd)
17-55
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
24. Install the front subframe stiffener plate (A) with
new mounting bolts (B), and tighten to the specified
torque.
B A
lOx 1.25 mm
54Nm
(5.5 kgfm. 40 Ibftt)
Replace.
25. Install the front undercover (see page 20-219) and
the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
26. Connect the stabilizer links (A) to the lower arm
(see page 18-20).
27. Connectthe lower arm ball joints (see page 18-17).
17-56
28. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball
joint tapered section and threads. Reconnect the
tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the
12 mm nut (B) and tighten it.
29. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown.
30. Remove the engine support hanger. the hanger
balance bar. and the hanger adapter set.
31. Connect the return hose (A) securely. and tighten
the adjustable hose clamp (B) (see page 17-14).
D
16xl.5mm
42Nm
(4.3 kgfm. 31 Ibftt)
A
32. Connect the inlet line (C). and tighten the 16 mm
flare nut (D) to the specified torque.
B
BACK
34. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (8) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
upper joint bolt (D).
o
8x1.2Smm
A
c
B
35. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (E) within
the angle.
36. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (8) around the pinion shaft then loosely
install the joint bolt (C).
A
C
8x1.2Smm
28Nm
(2.9kgfm,
21Ibfft)
37. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower
joint bolt to the specified torque.
38. Tighten the upper joint bolt (D) to the specified
torque.
39. Install the steering joint cover (A).
40. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
41. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
and do these tasks:
off.
work properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
(see page 17-28).
43. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
airfrom the system (see page 17-13).
44. After installation, do these checks.
o Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-12).
o Do the front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
o Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
serrations, then adjust the front toe by turning
the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
17-57
BACK
Power Steering
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-SA50500
1. Disconnect the i e ~ r o ball joint from the knuckle
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
mUltipurpose grease.
5. Pack the interior of a new boot (8) and lip (C) with
fresh mUltipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) ofthe ball pin .
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
17-58
6. Install a new boot (A) using the front hub dis/
assembly tool. The boot must not have a gap at the
boot installation sections (8). After installing the
boot, checkthe ball pin tapered section for grease
contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see
BACK
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31).
2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange
part of the gearbox housing with a washer (8), a
10 x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and a 10 mm nut (D) as
shown.
A
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the
nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount
cushion (E).
4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange
part of the gearbox housing with a washer, a flange
bolt, and a nut as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the
nut until the mount cushion edges (8) contact the
gearbox flange surface.
7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-52).
17-59
BACK
BACK
Suspension.
Front and Rear Suspension
Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement ............................................. 18-10
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-11
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-12
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-16
Lower Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-17
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-20
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-20
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-21
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................................... 18-24
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-29
\1
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-34
Upper Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-34
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation ............................. 18-36
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation ............................. 18-37
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation .............................. 18-39
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-40
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-41
Damper Replacement .................................................. 18-42
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation ................... 18-45
Active Damper System ........ ....... ........ ............. 18-49
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-123
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description aty
Q)
07 GAF-SD40200 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
07 MAC-SLOA102 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1
CD 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
071AF-S3VAOOO Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
Q)
,CD

18-2
BACK
Front Suspension
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-20
LOWER ARM
The illustration shows without active damper system.
WHEEL BOLT
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-21
Disassem bly/I nspectio n/
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
(cant'd)
18-3
BACK
Rear Suspension
LOWERARMB
page 18-37

LOWER ARM A
page 18-36
TRAILING ARM
page 18-39
KNUCKLEI
HUB BEARING UNIT
The illustration shows without active damper system.
18-4
DAMPER
Removal, page 18-42
Insepction, page 18-43
SPRING I
BUMP STOP
Removal, page 18-46
UPPER ARM
page 18-34
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-40
BACK
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front
toe, and rear toe. However, each ofthese adjustments
are related to each other. For example, when" you adjust
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber
or toe.
Pre-Alignment Checks
For proper inspection and adjustment ofthe wheel
alignment, do these checks:
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Check the tire size and pressure.
Tire size:
Front/Rear: P255/55R18104H
Tire pressure:
Front/Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm
2
, 32 psi), cold
4. Check the runout ofthe wheels and tires (see page
18-9).
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a tire with
your hands, and move it up and down and right and
left to check for wobbling.)
6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to
settle the suspension.
Caster Inspection
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Check the caster angle.
Caster angle: 4
0
12' 35 '
If the measurement is within specifications, measure
the camber angle.
If the measurement is not within specifications, check
for bent or damaged suspension components.
(cont'd)
18-5
BACK
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection
Use commercially avai.lable computerized four wheel
Check the camber angle.
Camber angle:
Front: -0 30 '1
Rear: -0 30' 45'
If the measurement for the front camber is outside
the specification, go to front camber adjustment.
If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the
specification, check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-6
Front Camber Adjustment
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page '-7).
3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) and bolts, and
adjust the camber angle by moving the bottom of
the damper within the range of the damper pinch
bolt free play.
8+
A
18x1.5mm
211 Nm
121.5 kgfm,
156Ibfft)
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified
torque.
5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the
vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the
vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the
suspension.
6. Measure the camber angle .
Ifthe measurement is within specification,
measure the toe-in .
Ifthe measurement is not within specification,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
BACK
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a
steering wheel holder tool.
2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight
ahead.
Front toe-in: O2 mm (OO.08 in.)
If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe
inspection/adjustment.
3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the
flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a
wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe
is within specifications.
B
A
14x 1.5 mm
4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts.
Reposition the rack-end boot if it is twisted or
displaced.
5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment.
Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement.
2. Check the toe.
Rear toe-in: 22 mm (O.08O.08 in.)
If adjustment is required, go to step 3 .
If no adjustment is required, remove the
alignment equipment.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the trailing arm (B),
and remove the self-locking nut (C).
B
C
14x1.5mm
132 Nm (13.5 kgfm, 97.6Ibfft)
Replace.
A
4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and
lightly tighten it.
NOTE:
Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it
has been loosened.
Reassemble the adjusting bolt and camplate with
the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt
until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the new self-locking nut while holding the
adjusting bolt.
(cont'd)
18-7
BACK
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Turning Angle Inspection
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
brake, and measure the turning angle of both.
wheels.
Turning angle:
Inward wheel: 38 012' 2 0
Outward wheel: 31 044' (reference)
2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-8
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the wheels.
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts.
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
brake disc securely against the hub.
Front
~ ~ ~ ~ w ~ 14x 1.5 mm
Rear
127 Nm
(13.0kgfm, 94.0 Ibfft)
14x 1.5 mm
127 Nm
(13.0 kgfm, 94.0 Ibfft)
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against
the hub flange.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc
inward and outward.
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than
the standard, replace the wheel bearing.
BACK
Wheel Runout Inspection
NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn
the back side of the wheel slowly by hand.
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial
runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Standard: 0-0.3 mm (0-0.01 in.)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and
measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard: 0-0.3 mm (0-0.01 in.)
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8),
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
disc and the inside ofthe wheel are clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification
but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.
18-9
BACK
Wheel Bolt Replacement
I NOTICE I
Do not use a hammer or.air or electric impact
tools to remove and install the wheel bolts .
Be careful notto damage the threads ofthe
wheel bolts.
1. Remove the front or rear hub bearing unit: front
(see page 18-13), rear (see page 18-30).
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using
a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic
press attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
NOTE: Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean
the mating surface on the bolt and the hub.
Press
c
1,8-10
3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hubwhile
aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with .
the wheel bolt.
NOTE:
Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the
threaded section of the nut.
Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until
the wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
5. Install the front or rear hub bearing unit: front
(see page 18-13), rear (see page 18-30).
NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the
specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the hub or hub bearing unit as an assembly.
BACK
Ball Joint Removal
Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAeSLOA102
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAeSLOA202
I NOTICE I
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of
the ball joint connection to disconnect it.
07MACSLOA 102 or 07MACSL0A202
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads oftheball joint
(B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin
end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball
joint pin.
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas
shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and
prevent damage to the pressure bolt, (B) threads.
07MAC-SLOA102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball
joint remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully,
making sure not to damage the ball joint boot.
Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
(B).
NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (e) securely to a
suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten
it to a brake line or wire harness.
B
I
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the
head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown
to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the
ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole.
If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on
the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the
nutfrom the end ofthe ball joint pin, and pull the
ball joint out of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the
ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
18-11
BACK
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View
FLANGE NUT
Replace;
18-12
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm '
DAMPER PINCHBOL T
Replace.
18x1'.5mm
211 Nm
(21.5 kgfm, 156Ibfft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and
damage.
SPINDLE UNIT
Replace.
26x1.5mm
328Nm
(33.5 kgfm. 242 Ibfft)
"71
6x1.0mm
9.8N.m
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
Apply a smali amount of engine oil
to the seating surface of the nut.
BACK
Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07 MAe-s LOA 102
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAe-SLOA202
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
1. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel.
/
A
14x1.5mm
127 Nm
(13.0 kgf.m, 94.0 Ibftt)
3. Remove the brake hose (A).
A
/Sx1.25mm
,- 22Nm
,C,>II\TI\---<llII!'JJI (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibf.tt)
B
14x 1.5mm
137 Nm
(14.0 kgf.m, 101 Ibftt)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts
(B), and remove the caliper assembly (e) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively.

5. Remove the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut
(B) .
6. Remove the flat screws (A).
B
/
26X1.5mm
328Nm
.
(33.5 kgfm,
. 242 Ibftt)
Replace.
A
A------
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibftt)
7. Release the brake disc (B) from the hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub. Screw
two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (e) into the brake disc to
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90
degrees to prevent the brake disc from binding.
(cont'd)
18-13
BACK
Fronf Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the splash
guard (B) from the knuckle.
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm
(10.0 kgfm, 72.3 Ibfft) .
9. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
18-14
10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
o Use a new spindle nut, apply a small amount of
engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After
tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder against the driveshaft.
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the
matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and
the inside ofthe brake disc.
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Knuckle Replacement
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
2. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (8).
Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfttl
A
3. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint,
then remove the nut (8).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
B
12x1.25mm
54Nm
15.5 kgfm,
40lbfttl
07MAC-SL0A202
4. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle
using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
5. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint pin (8), then remove the nut (C).
B
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after
tightening new castle nut.
A
Ie
@;;i;;=/ 14 x 2.0 mm
103-113 Nm
110.5-11.5 kgfm,
75.9-83.2 Ibfttl
Replace.
07MAC-SLOA102
o
071AF-S3VAOOO
6. Install the ball joint thread protector (D).
7. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
8. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and flange nuts
(8) from the damper, then remove the knuckle (C).
NOTE: During installation, install new damper
pinch bolts and new flange nuts.
A
18x 1.5 mm
211 Nm
121.5 kgfm,
1561bfttl
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-15
BACK
Front :Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit
Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items:
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the knuckle.
o Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion ofthe ball joint pin, thelbwer
arm connecting hole, the threaded section and
rfiating surface ofthe castle nut.
o First install all the components and lightly tighten
the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
torque values.
o Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the.slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
o Before installing the brake.disc, clean the mating
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
surface ofthe brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
18-16
Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 07GAF-SD40200
1. Remove the lower arm (see page 18-17).
2. Remove the boot.
3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with
grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-Iower
arm mating surfaces (B).
B
4. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin
(C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
5, Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it
gently to force out any air.
6. Pressthe boot with the hub dis/assembly tool until
the. bottom seats on the lower arm (A) all the way
around.
Press
07GAF-SD40200

A
7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
8. Install the lower arm (see page 18-17),
BACK
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Ball joint remover, 32 mm
Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VAOOO
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support itwith
2. Remove the front wheel.
suspension stroke sensor (A) from the lower arm
(B).
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
B
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfttl
4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint, then remove the nut (B) .
tightening new castle nut.
14x2.0mm
103-113 Nm
(10.5-11.5 kgf.m,
75.9-83.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
C
071AF-S3VAOOO
5. Install the ball joint thread protector (C).
6. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle
using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11), then
remove the lower ball joint.
7. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt and the 10
mm flange bolt, then remove the lower arm (A)
from the front subframe.
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolts during
reassembly.
16x1.5mm
162Nm
(16.5 kgfm,
119Ibfft)
Replace.
A
14x1.5mm
93Nm
(9.5kgf.m,
69Ibfft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-17
BACK
Front Suspension
lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the lower arm stops (A).
NOTE: During installation, align the slot (B) on the
lower arm stop with the lug portion (C) on the lower
arm bushing. .
B
c
18-18
9. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the knuckle.
Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion ofthe ball joint pin, the knuckle
connecting hole, the threaded section, and
mating surface of the castle nut.
First install allthe components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
10. With active damper system/Left side: Do the
headlight initial position learning procedure
(see page 22-231).
BACK
Bushing Replacement
1. Remove the self-locking nut (A), then remove the
bushing with bracket (B).
A
16x1.5mm
162Nm
(16.5 kgfm, 1191bfftl
Replace.
2. Align the angle of the lower arm (A) and the tab
portion (B) ofthe bushing.
3. Install a new self-locking nut, then tighten the
flange nut to the specified torque value.
8 ~ 9
BACK
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) while holding the
respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then
remove the stabilizer link (D).
12x 1.25 mm
78Nm
(8.0kgfm,
581bfftl
c
F
A
12x1.25mm
78Nm
E
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (E) and
the damper (F) with the joint pins set at the center
oftheir range of movement.
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (G). Align
the stabilizer link with the paint mark facing inward.
5. Install the flange nuts, and lightly tighten them.
6. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
7. Tighten the flange nuts to the specified torque
values while holding the respective joint pin with a
hex wrench.
8. Test-drive the vehicle.
18-20
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support,it with
3. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
bar (see page 18-20).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D) from the front subframe (E) .
. . . . . . - - - - - ~ O x 1.25 mm
39Nm
~ O kgfm, 29lbfftl
l - - i i ~ ~ B
E
5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
Note the right and left direction ofthe stabilizer
bar.
Align the paint marks (F) on the stabilizer bar
with the sides of the bushings.
Note the fore/aft direction ofthe bushing.
Refer to the stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-20).
Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and
the inside of the wheel, then install the front
wheel.
BACK
Damper ISpring Removal and Installation
NOTE: Except where called out, the illustrations show
without active damper system.
Removal
3. With active damper system: Disconnect the damper
coil connector (A), and remove the flange bolt (B),
and the harness clip (e).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage or contaminate the
damper coil connector.
c
4. Remove the wheel sensor harness (A) and the
brake hose (B) from the damper (e). Do not
disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
8x 1.25 mm
A
5. Remove theflange nut (A), while holding the joint
pin (B) with a hex wrench (e), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) from the damper.
c
A
12 x 1.25 mm
6. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and flange nuts
(B) from the damper ..
(cont'd)
18-21
BACK
Front Suspension
Damper ISpring Removal and Installation (co nt' d)
7. Remove the cover (A) and the service caps (B).
8. Remove the flange nuts (C) from the top of the
damper.
9. Remove the damper assembly (0).
NOTE:
The damper springs are different, left and right.
Mark the springs Land R before you continue .
Be careful not to damage the body.
18-22
Installation
1. Install the damper assembly (A) on to the frame.
Note the direction of the damper mounting base as
shown.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
7
FRONT
t
Without active
damper system
B
10x1.25mm
59Nm
16.0kgfm,
43lbfftl
Replace.
FRONT
t
With active
damper system
2. Loosely install the new flange nuts (B) to the top of
the damper.
NOTE: Install the cover (C) and the service caps (0)
after tightening the flange nuts to the specified
torque value.
BACK
3. Loosely install new damper pinch bolts (A) and new
flange nuts (B) to the damper (C).
\
A
18x 1.5 mm
211 Nm
(21.5 kgfm,
1561bfft)
Replace.
4. Connect the stabilizer link (A) to the damper (B),
and loosely install new flange nut (C), while holding
the joint pin (D) with the hex wrench (E).
E
o
B
C
12x 1.25 mm
78Nm
(8.0 kgfm,
581bfft)
5. Raise the front suspension with a floor jack to load
the suspension with the vehicle's weight.
6. Tighten the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts
to the specified torque value.
7. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque value.
8. Install the cover and the service caps.
9. Install the wheel sensor harness (A) and the brake
hose (B) to the damper (C).
.01.
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2kgfm,
16lbfft)

c
A
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
10. With active damper system: Connect the damper
coil connector (A), and install the flange bolt (B),
and the harness clip (C).
damper coil connecter.
./
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm,

A
c
11. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
12. With active damper system/Left side: Start the
engine, then make sure there are no active damper
systemDTCs with the HDS (see page 18-53).
DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS, then make sure the all four damper units
function normally.
18-23
BACK
,', , ,":)
Fronf,Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View-Without active damper system
18-24
, I
DAMPER MOUN, TIN"G, WASHER SELF-LOCKING NUT

12x1.25mm
" , 76Nm
, @\ (7.7 kgfm, 56 Ibfft)
, Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE 0
BUMP STop SLEEVE

BUMP STOP
0' , "/ Check for weakness and damage.
DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING
'/ Check for any play or
o /UPPER .... NGSEAT
'
and damage.
SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION

Check for deterioration
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened
compression and damage.
LOWER SPRING SEAT
Check for deterioration and damage.
..
DAMPER UNIT '
/,
' Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
, and smooth operation.
BACK
Exploded View-With active damper system
DAMPER MOUNTING WASI1ER
DUST COVER SLEEVE
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened
compression and damage.
LOWER SPRING SEAT
Check for deterioration and damage.
..SELF-LOCKING NUT

71Nm .
.. (7.2 kgfm, 52 Ibfft)
. . Replace. .
DUST COVER END
.. DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING
Check for any play or roughness.
UPPER SPRING SEAT
e UPPER SP.,NG MOUNTING CUSHION
. Check for deterioration and damage.

. DAMPER UNIT
./ Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
/ and smooth operation.
(cont'd)
18 .. 25
BACK

Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
NOTE:
When compressing the damper spring, use a
commercially available strut spring compressor
(Bra nick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent)
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Except where called out, the illustrations shown are
without active damper system.
Disassembly
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the nut
(A) while holding the damper shaft with a hex
wrench or TORX wrench (B). Do not compress the
damper spring more than necessary to remove the
nut.
B
A
Without active
damper system
12x1.25mm
With active
damper system
14x1.5mm
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring
compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown inthe Exploded View.
18-26
Inspection
1. Reassemble all parts, except for the upper spring
mounting cushion, the bump stop, and the damper
spring .
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
during these tests.
BACK
Reassembly
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring
mounting cushion (8), then align the upper end (C)
of the damper spring with the cushion stop (0) or
the cushion end (E).
Without active damper system
D
With active damper system
B
A
2. Install the tab (A) on the lower spring cushion (8) in
the locating hole (C) on the damper unit (0).
A
c
A
~
c
3. Align the lower end (E) of the spring with the
stepped part (F) of the lower spring seat.
(cont'd)
18-27
BACK
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Align the angle ofthe stud bolt (A) on the damper
mounting base (B) and the damper bracket (e) as
shown.
Left: Right:
Left: Right:
FRONT FRONT
B
18-28
5. Compress the damper spring.
6. Install all the parts except the damper mounting
washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit
(A) by referring to the Exploded View.
7. Install the damper mounting washer (A) and a new
self-locking nut (B).
D
A
B
Without active
damper system
12x 1.25mm
76Nm
17.7 kgf.m,
56Ibfft)
Replace.
With active
damper system
14x1.5mm
71 Nm
17.2kgfm,
52Ibfft)
Replace.
8. Hold the damper shaft (C) using a hex wrench or
TORX wrench (O), and tighten the new self-locking
nut to the specified torque value.
BACK
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm
(10.0 kgf.m, 72.3 Ibfftl
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE DISC/DRUM
Check for wear and rust.
SPINDLE NUT
Replace.
24x1.5mm
245Nm
(25.0 kgfm, 181 Ibf.ftl

Apply a small amount of
engine oil to the seating surface
ofthe nut.
(cont'd)
18-29
BACK
Rear ,Suspension
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel.
14x1.5mm
127Nm
3. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts
(A), and remove the caliper assembly (B) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twistthe brake hose
excessively.
18-30
A
12x 1.25mm
88Nm
(9.0kgf.m,
65lbfft)
4. Remove the two washers (A).
5. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
B
24x 1.5mm
245Nm
(25.0 kgfm,
181Ibfft)
Replace.
A
BACK
6. Remove the two 6 x 1.0 mm screws (A) attaching
the disc/drum to the hub bearing unit. Release the
parking brake, and remove the brake disc/drum
from the hub bearing unit.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to back-off the parking brake
adjuster nut (B) to remove the disc/drum from
the hub bearing unit (see step 5 on page 19-8).
If the brake disc/drum has clung to the h ~
bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C)
into the brake disc/drum to push it away from the
hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a
time to prevent cocking the brake disc/drum.
After installation, check the parking brake, and
adjust it necessary (see page 19-7).
7. Remove the hub bearing unit (A).
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm
A
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
A
8. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
9. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake disc/drum.
surface of the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
(cont'd)
18-31
BACK
Rear Suspension
Knuckle Replacement
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
2. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolts (A)
from the knuckle.
Ii:
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm
(10.0 kgf.m,
72.3 Ibfft)
A
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2kgfm,
16Ibfft)
3. Remove the flange nuts (B), then remove the
backing plate (C).
4. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B).
Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
6x1.0mm
B
18-32
joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin and
nut after tightening the nut as shown.
B
12x1.2Smm
59-69Nm
(6.0-7.0 kgfm,
43-51Ibfft)
6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the
18-11).
7. Remove the self-locking nut (B), washer, and flange
bolt (C), then remove the lower arm A.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and the new
flange bolt, during reassembly.
C
14x1.5mm
93Nm
Replace.
\1

B
14x1.5mm
123Nm
Replace.
A
BACK
8. Remove the flange nuts (A), and separate the
knuckle from the trailing arm (B).
NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly.
A
12x1.25 mm
64.Nm 16.5kgfm, 47 Ibfft)
Replace.

cC
9. Place a floor jack under lower arm B, and remove
the flange bolt(A), then remove the knuckle (C);
NOTE: Use the new flange bolt during reassembly.
A
14x1.5mm
113 Nm
Replace.
10. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
o Before connecting the ball joint to the knuckle,
degrease the threaded section and tapered
portion of the ball joint pin, the connecting hole,
and the threaded section and mating surface of
the castle nut.
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
torque values.
surface on the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
necessary (see pag,e 18-5).
18-33
BACK
Rear Suspension
Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Ball joint boot clip guide 07GAG-SD40700
1. Remove the boot clip and the boot.
2. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with
grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-knuckle
mating surfaces (B).
3. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin
(C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
4. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it
gently to force out any air.
5. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt (A)
until its base is just above the groove around the
bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (B) over the
tool and into position on the boot.
6. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
exposed portion ofthe ball joint pin.
18-34
Upper Arm Removal/Installation
Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SLOA102
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B. Raise
the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
B
suspension stroke sensor from the upper arm (B)
(see page 22-229).
BACK
joint, then remove the nut (B).
tightening the castle nut.
07MAC-SL0A202
~
/ 12x1.25mm
A 59-69Nm
(6.0-7.0 kgfm,
43-51 Ibfftl
6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the
18-11).
7. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the vehicle, and
remove the upper arm (B).
NOTE: Use new flange bolt during reassembly.
A
14x 1.5 mm
93Nm
Replace.
8. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
o Before connecting the ball joint to the knuckle,
degrease the threaded section and tapered
portion ofthe ball joint pin, the connecting hole,
and the threaded section and mating surface of
the castle nut.
the flange bolt and the castle nut, then raise the
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
o Refer to the stroke and stroke/headlight leveling
sensor replacement to install the stroke sensor to
the upper arm (see page 22-229).
the wheel.
o Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust if
9. With active damper system: Do the memorizing
rear suspension full rebound position (see page
18-54).
headlight initial position learning procedure
(see page 22-231).
18-35
BACK
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B. Raise
the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
B
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) from the trailing arm.
NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly.
/
14x 1.5 mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm, 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
18-36
5. Remove the flange bolt (B) from the vehicle.
NOTE: Use a new flange bolt during assembly.
C
14x 1.5 mm
123Nm
112.5 kgfm,
90.4 Ibfft)
Replace.
/
B
14x1.5mm
93Nm
19.5 kgfm,
69Ibfft)
Replace.
o
A
6. Remove the self-locking nut (C) and the washer (D)
from the knuckle, then remove the lower arm A.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during
reassembly.
7. Install the lower arm A in the reverse order of
the wheel.
BACK
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation
3. Remove the muffler hanger (A).
A
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the
respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench, then
remove the stabilizer link from the lower arm B.
A
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Position the floor jack under the lower arm B.
Raise the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
'\
B
C
14x1.5mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the
damper.
7. Remove the flange bolt (C) from the knuckle.
8. Lower the floor jack gradually.
9. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B).
(cont'd)
18-37
BACK
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and adjusting bolt
(C), then remove the lower arm B.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and a new
adjusting bolt during reassembly.
C
Replace.
18-38
A
14x1.5mm
132Nm
Replace.
11. Install the lower arm B in the reverse order of
First install all the suspension components, and
lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a
floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the
before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque values.
Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
the adjusting cam with the marked positions
when tightening.
mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the
inside ofthe brake disc/drum.
BACK
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation
3. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the
trailing arm (B).
C 8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm. 16 Ibfttl
4. Disconnect the brake line (C) from the brake hose
(D), then remove the retaining clip (E).
5. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the
parking brake lever (see page 19-30).
6. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the trailing arm
(B).
NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly.
A
12x 1.25 mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm. 47 Ibfttl
Replace.
7. Remove the flange bolts (A) from thetrailing arm,
then remove the trailing arm.
NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly.
A
14x 1.5 mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm. 75.9 Ibfttl
Replace.
8. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of
First install all the suspension components, and
lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a
floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the
before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque values.
mating surface ofthe hub bearing unit and the
inside ofthe brake disc/drum.
the wheel.
Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line, and bleed the brake system
(see page 19-9). Check for a leak at the brake line
to the brake hose, and retighten it if necessary.
18-39
BACK
Rear Suspension
Stabilizer link Removal/Installation
2. Remove the center cap and the rear wheel.
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut
(8) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
o
c
A
10x1.25mm
37 Nm (3.S kgfm, 27 Ibftt)
Replace.
------..
~
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and
lower arm (G) with the joint pins set at the center of
their range of movement.
NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a yellow paint
mark (H), while the right stabilizer link has a white
mark. Align the paint mark to the outside.
18-40
5. Install a new self-locking nut and a new flange nut,
and lightly tighten them.
6. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum
and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
7. Tighten the self-locking nut and flange nut to the
specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
9. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking
nut again to the specified torque value.
BACK
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
3. Remove the spare tire from the vehicle.
4. Remove the spare tire support bracket (A).
A

9.& Nm (1.0 7.2Ibfftl
5. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
bar (see page 18-40).
6. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
holders (8), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D) from the front suspension
subframe (E).
NOTE: Align the paint marks (F) on the stabilizer
bar with the sides of the bushings during
reassembly.
c
E
A
&x1.25mm
22Nm
I
7. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
Note the fore/aft direction of the bushing holders.
Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-40).
Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc/drum
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
18-41
BACK
e ~ r Suspension
Damper Replacement
Removal
3. With active damper system: Disconnect the damper
coil connector (A).
damper coil connector;
4. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B.
compress.
respective joint pin (e) with a hex wrench, then
18-42
A
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
-----8
damper.
7. Remove the flange bolt (B) from the knuckle.
8. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the top of the
damper.
A
12x 1.25mm
Replace.
9. Lower the floor jack gradually, then remove the
damper (B) from the vehicle.
BACK
Inspection
1. Push on the damper as shown.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas. is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
during these tests.
Installation
1. Position the damper (A) between the body and the
lower arm B.
C
12x1.2Smm
64Nm
(6.S kgf'm, 47 Ibfttl
Replace.
2. Loosely install a new flange bolt (C) to the top of
the damper.
3. Loosely install the new flange bolt (A) to the bottom
of the damper.
A
12x1.2Smm
64Nm
(6.Skgfm,
47lbfttl
Replace.
~
B
14x1.Smm
113Nm
111.S kgfm, 83.2 Ibfttl
Replace.
4. Loosely install a new flange bolt (B) to the knuckle.
(cont'd)
18-43
BACK
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the stabilizer link on the lower arm B, then
loosely install a new flange nut (A).
A
10 x 1.25 mm
49Nm
(5.0 kgfm,
36Ibfft)
Replace.
6. Raise the floor jack until the hole in the trailing arm
aligns with the hole in the damper.
7. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque
values.
8. Tighten the flange nut to the specified torque value,
while holding the respective joint pin with a hex
wrench.
18-44
9. With active damper system: Connect the damper
coil connector (A).
damper coil connector.
wheel.
11. With active damper system: Do the memorizing
rear suspension full rebound position (see page
18-54).
12. With active damper system: Start the engine, then
make sure there are no active damper system DTCs
with the HDS (see page 18-53).
13. With active damper system: Do the DAMPER
FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, then
make sure the all four damper units function
normally.
BACK
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation
Exploded View
~
_____ BUMP STOP
~ Check for vveakness
and damage.
10x1.25mm
~ _____ 59 Nm
I ~ (6.0 kgfm, 43lbfft)
~ S ~ ~ U m
~ Check for deterioration
~ and damage.
SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION
g /'" Chook 1o. doterio.atio,
~ / and damage.
SPRING
~ Check for vveakened compression
and damage.
SPRING LOWER SEAT
~ Ch.ok 1o. doterio.at;o,
and damage.
(cant'd)
18-45
BACK
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Removal
3. Remove the muffler hanger (A).
respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench, then
18-46
A
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Position the floor jack under the lower arm B.
compress.
'\
B
C
14x1.5mm
Replace.
damper.
7. Remove the flange bolt (C) from the knuckle.
8. Lower the floor jack gradually.
9. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B).
BACK
10. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the body,
and remove the bump stop (B), the spring guide (e),
and the spring mounting cushion (D) if necessary.
Installation
1. Install the bump stop (A), the spring guide (B), and
the mounting cushion (e), then tighten the flange
bolt (D) to the specified torque value if removed.
D
10x1.25mm
59Nm
(6.0kgf.m,
43lbfftl
2. Install the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (e).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring
seat with lower arm B as shown.
(cont'd)
18-47
BACK
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B.'
B
12x1.2Smm
64Nm
(6.Skgfm,
47Ibfft)
Replace.
14x1.Smm
113Nm
(11.S kgf.m,
83.2 Ibfft)
Replace.
4. Slowly raise the floor jack until you can align the
bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm B and the
knuckle and install the new flange bolts.
18-48
5. Install the stabilizer link on the lower arm B, then
loosely install the new flange nut (A).
A
10x1.2Smm
49Nm
(S.O kgfm,
36Ibfft)
Replace.
-----B
6. Raise the floor jack until the hole in the trailing arm
aligns with the hole in the damper.
7. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque
values.
8. Tighten the flange nut to the specified torque
values, while holding the respective joint pin with a
hex wrench.
9. Install the muffler hanger (A).
A
A
10. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc/drum
wheel.
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension 18-2
Front ............................................. 18-12
Rear Suspension .... ........ ...... ....... ........ ...... ........ 18-29
Active Damper System
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 18-51 .
Memorizing Rear Suspension
Full Rebound Position .............................................. 18-54
Circuit Diagram ............................................................ 18-64
DTC Troubleshooting .................................................. 18-69
Active Damper Control Unit Replacement ................. 18-118
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Replacement ................ 18-119
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Inspection .................... 18-120
Active Damper System Switch Test .............. ; ............ 18-121
\1
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-123
BACK
I.
RIGHTFRONT SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
RIGHTFRONT DAMPER COIL
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation,
page 18-21
18-50
FRONT VERTICAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH
Test, page 18-121
RIGHT-REAR VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
Repla(:ement, page 18-119
RIGHT REAR DAMPER COIL
Damper Replacement, page 18-42
LEFT REAR VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
. Replacement, page 18-118
LEFTREAR DAMPER COIL
Damper Replacement,
page 18-42
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
RIGHTREAR SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
LEFTFRONT DAMPER COIL
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation,
page 18-21
LEFT FRONT SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
BACK
System Indicator
This system has an active damper system indicator (A).
A B
When the active damper system is working correctly,
the active damper system indicator comes on after
turning the ignition switch ON (11), and it goes off when
the engine is started.
The indicator will stay on until the ignition switch is
turned OFF, or until the problem goes away (system
returns to norma!), the indicator will then go off.
NOTE: The damper system mode is controlled by the
active damper system switch and is indicated on the
MID (multi-information display).
The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
most recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
Therefore, when the same problem is detected
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
not in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore,
the memorized DTCs cannot be cancelled by
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified
procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned ON (II) and until the active damper system
indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When the system detects a problem, it will go into fail
safe mode which turns off the active damper function.
When in this mode, handling characteristics are
limited, and the vehicle speed should be reduced to
60 mph (96 km/h) or less, and driven no more than
200 miles (321 km).
Mode Select Switch
The system has two damping modes. Comfort and
sport mode. Modes are changed using the mode
selector switch.
Active Damper System Damper Units
The active damper system has four individual damper
units, one on each suspension corner. These dampers
function same as conventional dampers, but they
should only be replaced as a single unit when indicated
by a DTC. Do not replace the dampers units as a set.
(cont'd)
18-51
BACK
How to Troubleshoot DTCs
DTC troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
ofthe problem is still present and the active damper
system indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
procedure for a code that has been cleared and does
not reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
1. Question the client about the conditions that were
present when the problem occurred, such as speed,
turning, road conditions, and which mode the
active damper system was selected. Try to
duplicated the DTC by test-driving the vehicle
under the same conditions.
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI, AfT, and VSA system
related to F-CAN stored at the same time.
Troubleshoot these codes first, before
troubleshooting the active damper system.
3. After troubleshooting, or repairs are done, clear the
DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
the active damper system indicator does not come
on.
18-52
The term "Intermittent failure"means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the active
damper system indicator does not come on, check for
poor connections or loose terminals at all connectors
related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the
indicator was on but then went out, the original
problem may have been intermittent.
BACK
How to Retrieve DTCs and Freeze Data with
the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System)
1. Ifthe active damper system indicator stays on,
connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
and the active damper system control unit. If it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Check for and note any stored DTCs. Also check the
on-board snapshot data, and download any data
found. Then refer to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, snapshot,
current data, and other system data .
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu on
the HDS.
How to Clear DTCs
the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II.).
and the active damper system control unit. If it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
onthe HDS.
18-53
BACK
. .-,
Damper System
Memorizing Rear Suspension Full Rebound Position
Do the rear suspension full rebound position
memorizing whenever you do any of these actions:
Replace the active damper control unit.
Replace the rear damper unit.
Replace the rear suspension stroke sensor.
In the specific DTC troublesho.oting.
the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
and the active damper control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check for DTCs and make sure no DTC is indicated.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the Help
menu that came with the HDS.
18-54
safety stands in the proper locations (see page
NOTE: Verify the rear tires are suspended off the
ground.
7. Make sure the rea r suspension stroke sensors are
installed correctly, and the linkages are properly
connected (see page 22-229).
9. Follow the screen prompts on the HDS to memorize
the rear suspension full rebound position.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the Help
menu that came with the HDS.
BACK

OTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detection Item Active Note
Damper
System
Indicator
1-1 Front vertical acceleration sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-69)
1-2 RiQht-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit hiQh voltaQe ON . (see paQe 18-69)
1-3 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit high voltage ON (seepage 18-69)
1-4 Front vertical acceleration sensor rallge/performance problem ON (see j:>age 18-71)
1-5 Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor range/performance problem ON (see page 18-71)
1-6 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor range/performance problem ON (see 18-71)
1-7 Front vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
1-8 Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
1-9 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
2-1 Right-front suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-75)
2-2 Left-front suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-77)
2-3 Right-rear suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-75)
2-4 Left-rear suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-79)
2-5 Right-frontlright-rear suspension stroke sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-81)
problem
2-6 Left-frontlleft-rear suspension stroke sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-81)
problem
2-8 RiQht-front suspension stroke sensor siQnal circuit low voltaQe ON (see QajJe 18-82)
2-9 Left-front suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-84)
2-A RiQht-rear suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-82)
Left-rear suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON . (see page 18-87)
2-C Right-rear/left-rear suspension stroke sensor incorrect correlation ON (see page 18-90)
3-1 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-91)
problem (yaw rate signal-lateral acceleration signal incorrect
correlation)
3-3 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction (lateral ON (see page 18-91)
acceleration sensor)
3-4 Wheel speed signal malfunction (from VSA modulator-control unit ON (see page 18-92)
by F-CAN)
3-6 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction (yaw ON (see page 18-91)
rate sensor)
3-7 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor range/performance ON (seepage 18-91)
problem (wheel speed signal-longitudinal acceleration signal
incorrect correlation)
3-9 Yaw acceleration sensor malfunction ON (see page 18-91)
(longitudinal acceleration sensor)
....
3-A Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction ON (see page 18-91)
5-1 Active damper control unit internal right-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-2 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-3 Active damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-4 Active damper control unit internal left-rear damper coil drive circuit ON (see page 18-93)
stuck ON
(cont'd)
18-55
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC Detection Item Active Note
Damper
System
Indicator
5-5 .Active damper control unit internal right-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-94)
circuit stuck OFF
5-6, Active.damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-94)
ci(cuit stuck OFF ..
5-7 Active damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive
circuitstuck OFF
ON (see page 18-94)
stuck'OFF
circuit current lower than expected
6-2 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-97)
circuit ,current lowerthan expected
6-3 Active.damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive ON (see page 18-97)
circuit current lower than expected
current lower than expected
,
circuit current higher than expected
66 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-99)
circuit current higher than expected "
. '
..
6 ~ 7 Active damper control unit internal right-rear dampercoil drive ON (see page 18-99)
circuit current higher-than expected
current higher than expected
6-9 Active damper control unit power source circuit (+8) low voltage ON (see page18-102)
7-1 .Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7-2 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7 ~ ' Active damper control' unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7-6 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction (fail safe relay ON (see page 18-104)
stuckON) "
7-9 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction'
.,'
ON (see page 18-105)
8-2 Sensor reference voltage malfunction (SVCC line) ON (see page 18-107)
8-3 SensoHeference voltage malfunction (HVCC line) ON (see page 18-108)
8-5 F-CAN malfunction (active damper control unit lost communication ON (see page 18-110)
with yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor)
8-6 F-CAN malfunction (active damper control unit lost communication ON (see page 18-111)
with VSA modulator-control unit)
14-1' Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-7 : Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-A Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-8 Active damper control unit power supply circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-113)
14-C Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
18-56
BACK
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic troubJe c o d ~ (OTC) with the HOS. If there is no
OTC d h d' . d f h . h r d '1 f d h , ot e lagnostlc proce ure or t e symptom, In t e sequence Iste , until you In t e cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure
HOS does not communicate with the active Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223)
damper control unit or the vehicle
Active damper system indicator does not 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
come on 2. Substitute a known-good active damper control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original active damper control
Active damper system indicator does.not 1. Start the engine
go off, and no OTCs are stored 2. Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-114)
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
Active damper system switch does not SymptomTroubleshooting (see page 18-116)
work (damper mode cannot be selected)
Active damper system switch lamp blinks 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
2. Substitute a known-good active damper control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original active damper control.
18-57
BACK
System Description
Active Damper Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (20P)
c;---)
1 2
/
4
V
6
V
8
V
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
IV
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal
number Terminals Conditions Voltage
1 RED CRLH Left-rear damper 1-11 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
2 GRN CRRH Right-rear damper 2-12 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
4 BLK CFLH Left-front damper 4-14 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
6 RED CFRH Right-front damper 6-16 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
8 GRN IG1 IG1 power supply 8-GND Ignition switch Battery voltage
ON (II)
10 LTBLU VB Battery power 10-GND At all times Battery voltage
supply
18-58
BACK
11 WHT CRLL Left-rear damper 1-11 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
12 VEL CRRL Right-rear damper 2-12 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
13 ORN RRST Detects right-rear 13-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
14 WHT CFLL Left-front damper 4-14 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
15 PUR FLST Detests left-front 15-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
.stroke sensor
signal
16 BLU CFRL Right-front damper 6-16 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
17 BLU FRST Detects right-front 17-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
18 BLK LG Ground for the 18-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
logic circuit
19 BLK PG Ground for the 19-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
damper coil drive
(cont'd)
18-59
BACK
Active,Damper System
Active Damper Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (14P)
c;--;>
1
1/
3 4,

6 7
8
V
10 11 12
/
14
1 WHT CANH CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
3 LTBLU K-LiNE Communication 3-GND HDS not About 5 V
with HDS connected
4 PNK SVCC Supply power to 4-GND Ignition switch About 5 V
the sensors ON (II)
6 PNK HVCC Supply power to 6-GND Ignition switch About 5 V
the sensor and the ON (II)
other unit
7 LTBLU RLST Detects left-rear 7-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
8 RED CAN L CAN
-- -- --
communication
circuit
10 LTGRN RLG Detects left-rear 10-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration upand down
sensor signal
11 GRV SG G rou nd for the 11-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
sensors
12 BRN RRG Detects right-rear 12-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration up and down
sensor signal
14 VEL FCG Detects front 14-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration up and down
sensor signal
18-60
BACK
Active Damper System Controls
The active damper control unit continuously monitors inputs from various sensors and the mode select switch. The
control unit will adjust each damper's force by controlling current to them.
The active damper system requires a special damper that is capable of quick response and action. This allows them to
respond quickly for changes in conditions.
Active dan;'lper system damping character
./:J Sporty .
V . (lay weight on handling)
Comfort
Piston speed'
Sporty
(lay weight on handling)
Comfort
Damping force
(absolute)
(cont'd)
18-61
BACK
System Communication
The active damper system has an active damper control unit; four quick-reacting damper units with internal damper
coil, three vertical acceleration sensors, four suspension stroke sensors, a mode select switch, and an active damper
system indicator. In addition, the active damper system receives signals from the VSA system,the PCM, and relates
information with the headlight leveling control system.
The active damper control unit performs an arithmetical operation from various vehicle conditions pitching, roll, bump,
vehicle speed, and driver's mode selection, then selects the most suitable damping characteristics or setting.
18-62
, .. _ .. _ .. _ .. - .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ,
i VSAsys em !
I
Yaw rate-Iaterall !
Headlight
leveling
control unit
. longitudinal VSA .
I I
1
acceleration m'!dulator-control Wheel speed !
PCM . sensor Unit sensors
i i
too ____ J
Damper
unit

stroke
00
J

Vertical
acceleration

senso
I
r
1
n
Suspension
stroke
:::'--p

H
'-../
Damper
unit

I
Vertical
acceleration
sensor
'.,
Damper
unit
Gauge control module
Indicator (LED and suspensio'
multi-information stroke
d .. ;': ; 00
,
ii Active damper i; [ )I=>
Hi system switch ';i.
I'.: .. ?<:...... ? ."' ..:::?'C.
I:ji)
Vertical
acceleration
sensor

Suspension
stroke
sensor

f

Active damper
control unit
)I::> H
'-../
Damper
unit
(j) Active damper
system mode select
signal.
Vertical acceleration
sensor signal.
Suspension stroke
position signal.
Active damper
system damper
operate signal.
@ Indicator drive
signal.
@ VSA function signal.
wheel speed signal.
(j) Yaw rate.laterall
longitudinal
acceleration sensor
signal.
Vehicle speed
signal.
BACK
MRF (Magneto Rheological Fluid) in the Damper Unit
Variable suspension damping force is achieved by controlling the intensity of magnetic flux in the damper piston. The
orientation of iron particles suspended in the damper oil is changed as the fluid flows through the magnetic field,
thereby changing the effective viscosity of the fluid. The amount of change in the fluid's behavior is proportional to the
amount of electrical current supplied to the windings in the piston.
CURRENT _ ....
w.;;;:"""""r-r----I
OFF (without current)
ON (with current)
Magnetic field lines
Laminar flow
(parabolic velocity profile)
Plug (shear stress > yield stress)
Shear layer (shear. stress < yield stress)
18-63
BACK
Active' Damper System
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+ MAIN UNDER.HOOD
FUSE BOX
No.1 No.3 IGNITION SWIT CH
6
(120 A, (50 A,
"\.D---CT\.P--+---WHT PNK
IG1 HOT In ON (II, and START (III, ,
No.5
(30 A'
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
.... _____ --1I-:A-:: 1:;0 ____ LTBLU
VB
.... ____
IG1
SVCC vee
B1
CANH
BB
CANL
MPER ACTIVEDA
SYSTEMS WITCH
.
WHT
RED
2
4
5
3
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
I

A6
YAW RATELATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
SENSOR
I

B3
KLlNE
LTBLU
A1B
BLK
LG
A19

PG
';
G302 G401
18-64
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 21(7.5 A'

YEL
LTBLU ---<J +B
RED
PUR
RED
WHT
RED
WHT
RED
G503
h
X34

hFB

WHT
RED
WHT
RED
WHT
RED
BLK
BLK

B2 POWER CIRCUIT
B19
ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
A3
A12
A6
PCM
A4B

A49
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR (DLC,
6
14
7
5
4
BACK
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
A6
RED
CFRH
A16
CFRL
BLU
A4
BLK
CFLH
A14
CFLL
WHT
A2
GRN
CRRH
A12
CRRL
VEL
A1
RED
CRLH
A11
CRLL
WHT
B4
PNK
SVCC
B11
GRV
SG
B14
FCG
VEL
B12
r.R==R===G:---- BRN
B10

PNK

GRV PNK

DAMPER COIL
WHT
'.M",",.'
BLK
2
DAMPER COIL
WHT

BLK
2
DAMPER COIL
WHT
__
BLK
2
DAMPER COIL
WHT

BLK
2
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
ORN
1
Front
GRV
2
3
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSO R
PNK
1
Right-rear
2
GRV
3
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
PNK
1
Left-rear
GRV
2
3
(cont'd)
18-65
BACK
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
1-..... _--1 ___ BLU
FRST
__ ___ PNK
HVCC
1-..... _--1 ___ PUR
FLST
A13
ORN
B7
1-..... ---1 LT BLU
___ : 12V
-0- :5V
18-66
rr
GRY PNK
ORN
GRY
PNK
PUR
BLU
PNK
GRY
PUR
LTBLU
LTGRN
RED
LTBLU
BLU
PUR
PNK
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
7
12
6
13
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
Right-front
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
Left-front
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
Right-rear
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
Left-rear
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT

1

J.

BACK
h
t:::
CONNECTOR X (39P)
~ ....----.
L.......J
V/2131 [I]
15V/7V/ 191101111
l i ~ 1
1121/1
[EJQTI
116117VV\201
I,...,
illJ
0&320341351
t:
[g[]
13613711381/1
In
CONNECTOR F (14P)
6
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
16P CONNECTOR
DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR
SUSPENSION STROKE
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR A (20P)
CONNECTOR A (12P)
CONNECTOR B (14P)
CONNECTOR B (24P)
(cont'd)
18-67
BACK
YAW RATELATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
VSA MODULATORCONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Ir 11
1 1 2 314151617 819110 I.
~
11 12 13
I/V
16 1/118 19 20 21
22
/
24
><
25
><
26 27 28

~
29 30 31 321/ 1/ 1/136 37 38 39 \-
140 41 42 143144VI46 471481491
18-68
BACK
OTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1-1: Front Vertical Acceleration Sensor
DTC 1-2: Right-rear Vertical Acceleration
Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC 1-3: Left-rear Vertical Acceleration
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
Is OTe 1-1, 1-2, or 1-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for
poor or loose connections between the vertical
acceleration sensor and the active damper control
unit..
7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector 8
(14P).
appropriate active damper control unit connector 8
(14P) terminal (see table).
DTC Active Damper Control Unit
Connector Terminal
1-1 No. 14
1-2 No. 12
1-3 No. 10
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
= = =
the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and the
active damper control unit .
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
18-69
BACK
11. Reconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P).
12. Do the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor
inspection (see page 18-120).
DTC Appropriate Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
1-1 Front
1-2 Right-rear
1-3 Left-rear
Is the vertical acceleration sensor indicate OK?
YES-Replace the active damper control unit
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 13.
14. Disconnect the appropriate vertical acceleration
Acceleration Sensor.
1-1 Front
1-2 Right-rear
1-3 Left-rear
18-70
15. Disconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P).
16. Check for continuity between the appropriate
vertical acceleration sensor terminals No.1 and
No.3.
DTC 1-1
DTC 1-2
FRONT VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

svee FCG (YEU
RIGHT-REAR VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

svee (BRN]
DTC 1-3
LEFT-REAR VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

svee III GRN]
appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and the
active damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
unit connector B(14P).terminal No. 11 and
appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P
connector terminal No.2 (see table).
Acceleration Sensor
1-1 Front
1-2 Right-rear
1-3 Left-rear
SENSOR3P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration
active damper contro) unit .
DTC 1-4: Front Vertical Acceleration Sensor
Range/Performance Problem
DTC 1.:.5: Right-rear Vertical Acceleration
Sensor Range/Performance Problem
Sensor Range/Performance Problem
Acceleration Sensor
1-4 Front
1-5 Right-rear
1-6 Left-rear
Is the vertical acceleration sensor indicate OK?
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration
18-71
BACK
DTC 1-7: FrontVertical Acceleration Sensor
Circuit Low Voltage
DTC 1-8: Right-rearVertical Acceleration
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switth ON (II).
Is DTC 1-7, 1-8, or 1-9 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
acceleration sensor and the active damper control
unit .
Acceleration Sensor
1-7 Front
1-8 Right-rear
1-9 Left-rear
8. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A
(20P) and connector B (14P).
18-72
appropriate active damper control unit connector B
DTC Active Damper Control
Unit Connector Terminal
1-7 No. 14
1-8 No. 12
1-9 No. 10
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 114P)
= = =
between the appropriate vertical acceleration
sensor and the active dampe(control unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect the appropriate vertical acceleration
sensor 3P connector ..
Acceleration Sensor
1-7 Front
1-8 Right-rear
1-9 Left-rear
vertical acceleration sensor terminals No.2 and No.3.
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR FRONT
~ R N ~ N ~ L
appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and
the active damper control unit .
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate active
damper control unit connector B (14P) terminal and
the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P
DTC Active Damper Appropriate
Control Unit Vertical
Connector Acceleration
Terminal Sensor
1-7 No.14 Front
1-8 No. 12 Right-rear
1-9 No. 10 Left-rear
LEFT-REAR
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
unit connector B (14P) terminal No.4 and
DTC
1-7
1-8
1-9
Appropriate Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
Front
Right-rear
Left-rear
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR FRONT
YES-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
18-73
BACK
14. Reconnect active damper control unit connector A
(20P) and connector B (14P).
16. Measure voltage between body ground and
Acceleration Sensor
1-7 Front
1-8 Right-rear
1-9 Left-rear
FRONT REAR
= =
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration
NO-Replace the active damper control unit
(see page 18-118) .
18-74
BACK
DTC 2-1: Right-front Suspension Stroke
DTC 2-3: Right-rear Suspension Stroke,
Is DTC 2-1, or 2-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the suspensiOn
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit..
(20P).
appropriate active damper control unit connector A
2-1 No. 17
2-3 No. 13
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
the appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
18-75
BACK
11. Reconnect active damper cqntrol unit connector
A (20P).
12. Remove the appropriate suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor
connector.
DTC Appropriate Suspension
Stroke Sensor
2-1 Right-front
2-3 RiQht-rear
14. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RF), or (RR)
in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with
the HDS while moving the suspension stroke
sensor arm through a complete stroke. Compare
the voltage/rotation angle between the chart and
the measurements.
NOTE: The voltage should increase (decrease)
within 90 degrees ofthe sensor arm rotation
from the first voltage change point.
4.5
Suspension stroke sensor specified
voltage/rotationangle chart
Range of sensor arm rotation 1
Sensor
output Voltage change
wr:', tP::::\::::n::::t ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ___ _
o
Rotation angle (degree)
Is the voltage as specified?
YES-Substitute a known-good active damper
control unit and retest. If the DTC goes away,
replace the original active damper control unit (see
page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Disconnect the appropriate suspension stroke
Stroke Sensor
2-1 Right-front
2-3 Right-rear
18-76
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminals
No.1 and No.2.
SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
FRONT
~
P ~
~ N
REAR
~
P ~
~ U
appropriate suspsnesion stroke sensor and
the active damper control unit.
NO-Go to step 18.
unit connector 8 (14P) terminal No. 11 and
appropriate suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3 (see table).
Stroke Sensor
2-1 Right-front
2-3 Right-rear
RIGHT-REAR RIGHTFRONT
YES-Replace the appropriate suspension stroke
appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the
BACK
DTC 2-2: Left-front Suspension Stroke Sensor
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the suspension
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit .
(20P).
8. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit
connector (16P).
10. Measure voltage between body ground and active
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal
No. 15.
the left-front suspension stroke sensor, the
headlight leveling control unit, and the active
damper control unit.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
18-77
BACK
12. Reconnect active damper control unit connector A
(20P) and the headlight leveling control unit
connector (16P).
13. Remove the left- front suspension stroke sensor
(see page.22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor
connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, do the headlight
initial position learning procedure (see page
22-229).
15. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (LF) in the
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the
HDS while moving the suspension stroke sensor
arm through a complete stroke. Compare the
voltage/rotation angle between the chart and the
measurements.
NOTE: The voltage increase (decrease) within 90
degrees of the sensor arm rotation from the first
voltage change point.
voltage/rotation angle chart
Range of sensor arm rotation:
4.5 ................................................ .
Sensor
output
voltage
(V)
0.5 t t ~ ~ ~ .. L; __
o
page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 16.
18-78
(20P).
18. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P
connector.
19. Disconnect the left-front suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
20. Check for continuity between headlight leveling
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12 and left-
front suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3.
HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT SUSPNSION STROKE
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Wire side of femaleterminals
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-front
suspension stroke sensor and the headlight
leveling control unit .
BACK
21. Check for continuity between the left-front
No.1 and No.2.
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION STROKE
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wires between the left-
front suspension stroke sensor and the active
damper control unit .
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Check for continuity betweEBl the No.9 terminal of
the headlight leveling control unit connector (16P)
and body ground.
HEADUGHT LEVEUNG CONTROL
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Replace the left-front suspension stroke
headlight leveling control unit and body ground
(G401) .
DTC 2-4: Left-rear Suspension Stroke Sensor
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittentfailure atthistime. Check for
7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector B
. (14P).
connector (16P).
damper control unit connector B (14P) terminal
No.7.
RLST (L T BLU)
=
the left-rear suspension stroke sensor, the
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
18-79
BACK
Active, Damper System
12. Reconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P) and the headlight leveling.controlunit
connector (16P).
13. Remove the left- rear suspension stroke sensor
connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, do the headlight
22-229).
15. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (LR) in the
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the
HDS while moving the suspension stroke sensor
arm through a complete stroke. Compare the
voltage/rotation angle between the chart and the
measurements.
within 90 degrees of the sensor arm rotation from
the first voltage change point.
4.5
Sensor
output
yoltage
(V)
Suspension stroke sensor speCified
Yoltage/rotation angle chart
o. '
Voltage change
1
~
0.5 : ..
o
page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 16.
18-80
17. Disconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P).
18. Disconnectthe headlight leveling control unit 16P
connector.
19. Disconnectthe left-rear suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
control unit 16P connector terminal No.4 and left-
rear suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3.
LEFT-REAR SUSPNSION STROKE
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-rear
leveling control unit..
BACK
21. Check for continuity between the left-rear
No.1 and No.2.
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wires between the left-
rear suspension stroke sensor and the active
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Check for continuity betweerethe No.9 terminal of
the headlight leveling control unit connector (16P)
and body ground.
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Replace the left-front suspension stroke
headlight leveling control unit and body ground
(G401) .
DTC 2-5: Right-front/Right-rear Suspension
Stroke Sensor Range/Performance Problem
DTC 2-6: Left-front/Left-rear Suspension
Stroke Sensor Range/Performance Problem
2. Remove the appropriate suspension stroke sensor
connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting for the left side
suspension stroke sensor, do the headlight initial
position learning procedure (see page 22-229).
DTC AppropriateSuspension
Stroke Sensor
2-5 Rl9.ht-front and Right-rear
2-6 Left-front and Left-rear
4. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RF), (LF),
(RR), or (LR) in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
DATA LIST with the HDS while moving the
suspension stroke sensor arm through a complete
stroke. Compare the voltage/rotation angle
between the chart and the measurements.
Range of sensor arm rotation.
4.5 ................................................. 'r----
Sensor
.. :L; ___ _
o
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Replace the suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229) .
18-81
BACK
DTC2-8: Right-front Suspension Stroke
Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage
DTC 2-A: Right-rear Suspension Stroke
Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: If DTC 8-2 is stored at the same time as DTC
2-8 and DTC 2-A, troubleshoot DTC 8-2 first, then
recheck for DTC 2-8 and 2-A.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS,
Is DTe 2-8, or 2-A indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or-loose connections between the suspension
7. Disconnect the appropriate suspension stroke
Stroke Sensor
2-8 Right-front
2-A Right-rear
(20P).
18-82
2-8 No. 17
2-A No.13
=
between the appropriate suspension stroke sensor
and the active damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
10. Check for continuity between appropriate
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminal
No.2 and the appropriate active damper control
unit connector A (20P) terminal (see table).
Control Unit Suspension
Connector Stroke
Terminal Sensor
2-8 No. 17 Right-front
2-A No. 13 Right-rear
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PI
RIGHT-REAR RIGHTFRONT
YES-Go to step 11.
suspension strok sensor terminals No.2 and
No.3.
RIGHTFRONT RIGHTREAR

NO-Go to step 12.
unit connector B (14P) terminal No.4 and
terminal No.1 (see table).
DTC Suspension
Stroke Sensor
2-8 Right-front
2-A Right-rear
RIGHT FRONT RIGHTREAR
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
YES-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
18-83
BACK
13. Reconnect active damper control unit connector B
(14P).
15. Measure voltage between body ground and
terminal No.1.
Stroke Sensor
2-8 Right-front
2-A Right-rear
RIGHT-REAR RIGHT-FRONT
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229) .
(see page 18-118) .
18-84
DTC 2-9: Left-front Suspension Stroke Sensor
Signal Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: If DTC 8-3 is stored at the same time as DTe
2-9, troubleshoot DTC 8-3 first, then recheck for
DTC 2-9.
2. Clear theDTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
3P connector.
(20P).
connector (16P). .
BACK
active damper control unit connector A (20P)
terminal No. 15.
YES-Repair short to body in the wire between the
left-front suspension stroke sensor and the active
NO-Go to step 11.
suspension stroke sensor terminals No.2 and
No.3.
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for continuity between left-front suspension
stroke sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and
active damper control unit connector A (20P)
terminal No. 15.
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
suspension stroke sensor and the active damper
control unit .
(cont'd)
18-85
BACK
(14P).
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 13 and left-
terminal No.1, and between active damper control
unit connector B (14P) terminal No.6 and left-front
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminal
No.1 individually.
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
HVCC(PNK)
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 15.
leveling control unit, or between active damper
control unit and the left-front suspension stroke
sensor .
18-86
15. Reconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P
connector.
17. Measure voltage between body ground and left-
terminal No.1.
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
(see page 22-229) .
NO-Check the headlight leveling control system. If
necessary, substitute a known-good headlight
BACK
DTe 2-8: Left-rear Suspension Stroke Sensor
Signal Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: If DTC 8-3 is stored at the same time as DTC
2-8, troubleshoot DTC 8-3 first, then recheck for DTC
2-B.
/s DTC 2:8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit..
connector.
8. Disconnect the left-rear suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
(14P).
10. Check for continuity e t w e ~ n body ground and
active damper control unit connector B (14P)
terminal No.7.
RLST (L T BLU)
Q
=
Wire'side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the left-rear suspension stroke sensor, the
(cont'd)
18-87
BACK
11. Check for continuity between left-rear suspension
stroke sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and
terminal No.7.
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
YES-Go'to step 12.
suspension stroke sensor, and the active damper
control unit .
suspension stroke sensor terminals No.2 and
No.3.
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
~
~ U ~
QGRN
NO-Go to step 13.
18-88
control unit 16P connector terminal No.5 and left"
terminal No.1.
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
, YES-Go to step 14.
leveling control unit .
BACK
14. Reconnectthe headlight leveling control unit 16P
connector.
16. Measure voltage between body ground and left-
terminal No.1.
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
(see page 22-229) .
NO-Check the headlight leveling control system. If
necessary, substitute a known-good headlight
18-89
BACK
OTC 2-C: Right-rear/Left-rear Suspension
Stroke Sensor Incorrect Correlation
2. Check that the right-rear and left-rear suspension
stroke sensors are properly mounted (see page
22-229), and check for bent to damaged sensor
links.
NOTE: After troubleshooting for the left side
suspension stroke sensor, do the headlight initial
position learning procedure (see page 22-231).
Are they OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall or replace the appropriate
suspension stroke sensor, or linkage (see page
22-229) .
3. Remove the right-rear and left-rear suspension
stroke sensors (see page 22-229). Do not
disconnect the sensor connector.
18-90
5. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RR), or (LR)
the HDS while moving the suspension stroke
sensor arm through a complete stroke. Compare
the voltage/rotation angle between the chart and
the measurements.
4.5
Sensor
..
. L: ___ _
o
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Replace the suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229) .
BACK
Acceleration Sensor Range/Performance
Problem (Yaw Rate Signal-Lateral
Acceleration Signal Incorrect Correlation)
DTC 3-3: Yaw Rate-Lateral/LongitLidinal
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (Lateral
Acceleration Sensor)
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (Yaw Rate
Sensor)
Acceleration Sensor Range/Performance
Problem (Wheel Speed Signeal-Longitudinal
Acceleration Signal Incorrect Correlation)
(Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor)
DTC 3-A: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
NOTE: If OTC 8-6 is stored at the same time,
troubleshoot OTC 8-6 first.
4. Test-drive the vehicle around a corner for 2
seconds or more.
5. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTC 3-1,3-3,3-6,3-7,3-9, or 3-A indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the yaw rate-
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
6. Check for VSA system OTCs with the HOS
(see page 19-43).
Is any OTC indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated VSA system OTC's
troubleshooting
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral!
longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
12. Test-drive the vehicle around a corner for 2
seconds or more.
Is OTC'3-1, 3-3, 3-6, 3-7, 3-9, or 3-A indicated?
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral!
logitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100) .
18-91
BACK
DTC 3-4: Wheel Speed Signal Malfunction
(from VSA Modulator-control Unit by F-CAN)
NOTE: If DTC 8-6 is stored at the same time,
troubleshoot DTC 8-6 first.
4. Test-drive the vehicle around corners at 10 mph
(15 kim) or more.'
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the VSA
medulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit.. '
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the DTS (see page
19-43).
Is any DTC indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated VSA system DTC's
troubleShooting .
NO-Go to step 7.
18-92
8. Substitute a konwn-good active damper control
unit (see page 18-118).
12. Test-drive the vehicle around corners at 10 mph
(15 kim) or more.
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Replace the original active damper control
BACK
DTC 5-1: Active Damper Control Unit Internal
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
ON
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck ON
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
ON
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck ON
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
DTC 14-1: Active Damper Control Unit
DTC 14-A: Active Damper Control Unit
DTC 14-C: Active Damper Control Unit
Is DTC 5-1,5-2,5-3,5-4,7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5,
14-1, 14-2, 14-5, 14-6, 14-7, 14-8, 14-A, or 14-C
indicated?
(see page 18-118) .
poor or loose connections at the active damper
control unit.
18-93
BACK
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
OFF
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
OFF
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
OFF
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck OFF
2. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil 2P
connector, then reconnect the com'lector.
DTC Appropriate Damper Coil
5-5 Right-front
5-6 Left-front
5-7 Right-rear
5-8 Left-rear
7. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
HDS.
Is OTe 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, or 5-8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
poor or loose connections between the damper coil
and the active damper control unit .
18-94
(20P).
12. Measure voltage between body groLind and the
(20P) 'terminal.
Connector Terminal
5-5 No.6
5-6 No.4
5-7 No.2
5-8 No.1
=
the appropriate damper coil and the active damper
NO-Go to step 13.
BACK
14. Measure resistance between the appropriate active
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminals
(see table).
. Connector Terminal
5-5 No.6 No. 16
5-6 No.4 No.14
5-7 No.2 No. 12
5-8 No.1 No.11
Q
CRRL(YEL) CFLL(WHT)
Is the resistance between 0.6- 2.0 Q ?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the active
damper control unit connector A (20P). Ifthe
terminals are OK, replace the active damper control
unit (see page 18-118), then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 15.
connector.
5-5 Right-front
5-6 Left-front
5-7 Right-rear
5-8 Left-rear
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal and
the appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminal
No.1 (see table).
Control Unit Damper Coil
Connector
Terminal
5-5 No.6 Right-front
5-6 No.4 Left-front
5-7 No.2 Right-rear
5-8 No.1 Left-rear
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the damper
coil and the active damper control unit, then go to
step 19.
(cont'd)
18-95
BACK
No.2 (see table).
Control Unit Damper Coil
Connector
Terminal
5-5 No. 16 Right-front
5-6 No.14 Left-front
5-7 No. 12 Right-rear
5-8 No.11 Left-rear

BLK BLK BLK BLK
Q
CRRL (YEll
YES-Go to step 18.
step 20.
18 .. 96
18. On the damper, check for continuity betweem the
appropriate damper coil terminals No.1 and No.2.
DTC Appropriate Damp_er Coil
5-5 Right-front
5-6 Left-front
5-7 Right-rear
5-8 Left-rear
YES-Repair open in the wire (CFRL, CFLL, CRRL,
or CRLL line) between the damper coil and active
damper control unit, then go to step 19.
NO-Replace the appropriate damper unit: Front
(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42) then go to
step 20.
19. Turn the.ignition switch OFF.
HDS.
Is any OTe indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. III
BACK
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Lower Than Expected
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Lower Than Expected
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Lower Than Expected
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Lower Than Expected
connector, then reconnect the connector.
6-1 Right-front
6-2 Left-front
6-3 Right-rear
6-4 Left-rear
HDS.
Is DTe 6-1,6-2,6-3, or 6-4 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
poor or lose connections between the damper coil
10. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil2P
connector.
DTC Damper Coil
6-1 Right-front
6-2 Left-front
6-3 Right-rear
6-4 Left-rear
11. On the damper, measure the resistance between
the appropriate damper coil terminals No.1 and
No.2.
Is the resistance between 0.6 - 2.0 Q ?
YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wires
between the damper coil and the active damper
(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42) then go to
step 12.
(cont'd)
18-97
BACK
HDS.
18-98
BACK
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Higher Than Expected
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
connector, then reconnect the connector.
6-5 Right-front
6-6 Left-front
6-7 Right-rear
6-8 Left-rear
HDS.
Is DTC 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, or 6-8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
poor or loose connections between the damper
coil and the active damper control unit .
(20P).
11. Measure resistance between the appropriate active
(see table).
DlC Active Damper Control Unit
Connector Terminal
6-5 No.6 No.16
6-6 No.4 No.14
6-7 No.2 No.12
6-8 No.1 No.11
CRRH(GRN)
Q
CRRL(VEL) CFLL(WHT)
Is the resistance between 0.6-2.09. ?
NO-Go to step 12.
connector.
6-5 Right-front
6-6 Left-front
6-7 Right-rear
6-8 Left-rear
(cont'd)
18-99
BACK
appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminals
No.1 and No.2 individually (see table).
DTC Damper Coil
Sign/Terminal Sign/Terminal
6-5 CFRH/No.1 CFRL/No.2
6-6 CFLH/No.1 CFLL/No.2
6-7 CRRH/No.1 CRRL/No.2
6-8 CRLH/No.1 CRLL/No.2
Is there cqntinuity?
between the appropriate damper coil and active
damper control unit, then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 14.
18-100
No.1 (see table).
DTC Active Damper Appropriate Damper
Control Unit Coil
Connector Terminal
6-5 No.6 Right-front
6-6 No.4 . Left-front
6-7 No.2 Right-rear
6-8 No.1 Left-rear
YES-Go to step 15.
step 16.
BACK
damper coil 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2
(see table).
DTC DamJler Coil
Sign/Terminal Sign/Terminal
6-5 CFRH/No.1 CFRLJNo.2
6-6 CFLH/No.1 CFLLJNo.2
6-7 CRRH/No.1 CRRLJNo.2
6-8 CRLH/No.1 CRLLJNo.2
appropriate damper coil and the active damper
(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42), then go to
step 16.
DAMPER SYSTEM.lNSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.'.
18-101
BACK
DTC 6-9: Active Damper Control Unit Power
Source Circuit (+8) Low Voltage
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds;
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the main under-
hood fuse box and the active damper control unit.
Check for a loose or poor ground at G302 and
G401 .
7. Check the No.5 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for short to ground in the LT BLU wire
between the main under-hood fuse box and the
active damper control unit, then replace the fuse .
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 8.
18-102
8. Measure voltage between active damper control
unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 10 and No 18.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120PI
VB ILT BLUI
NO-Repair open in the wire between the active
damper control unit and the No.5 (30 A) fuse in the
main under-hood fuse box, or an open or poor
connection between active damper control unit
connector A terminal No. 18 and body ground
(G302), then go to step 9.
BACK
HDS.
18-103
BACK
Act i v.e Damper System
DTC 76: Active Damper Control Unit Internal
Circuit Malfunction (Fail Safe Relay Stuck On)
NOTE: The fail safe relay is built into the active damper
control unit.
2. Check that the all four damper coil 2P connectors
are properly connected.
Are the connectors OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reconnect and check the connectors, then go
to step 12.
YES-Go to step 8.
(20P).
18-104
10. Check for continuity between the active damper
control unit connector A (20P) terminals
individually.
.Q
CRRL(YEL)
YES-Check for poor or loose connections in the
active damper control unit, clean body ground
terminals G302 and G401. If the connections and
the terminal are OK, replace the active damper
control unit (see page 18-118), then go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the damper
coil and active damper control unit, then go to
step 11.
HDS.
16. Check for DTC's with the HDS.
BACK
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If DTC 5-5, DTC 5-6, DTC 5-7, or DTC 5-8 stored at
the same time as DTC 7-9; troubleshoot DTC 5-5, DTC
5-6, DTC 5-7, or DTC 5-8 first, then recheck for DTC 7-9.
YES-Go to step 6.
(20P).
control unit connector A (20P) terminals
individually.
NO-Go to step 9.
connector.
(cont'd)
18-105
BACK
ActiveDamper System
10. On the damper, check for continuity between
damper coil 2P connect or terminals No.1
and No.2 for all four dampers.
YES-Repair open in the wire between the damper
coil and active damper control unit, then go to
step 11.
NO-Replace the damper unit: Front (see page
18-24), rear (see page 18-42), then go to step 11.
18-106
HDS.
Is any ore indicated?
BACK
DTC 8-2: Sensor Reference Voltage
Malfunction (SVCC Line)
YES-Go to step 6.
acceleration sensor, the suspension stroke sensor,
8. Disconnect the right-front suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the right-front suspension stroke
13. Disconnect the right-rear suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the right-rear suspension stroke
18. Disconnect the front vertical acceleration sensor 3P
connector.
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Replace the front vertical acceleration sensor
(see page 18-119) .
23. Disconnect the right-rear vertical acceleration
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the right-rear vertical acceleration
28. Disconnect the left-rear vertical acceleration sensor
3P connector.
YES-Go to step 31.
NO-Replace the left-rear vertical acceleration
(cont'd)
18-107
BACK
System
(14P).
terminal No.4.
SVCC(PNK)
Q
=
between the right-front/right-rear suspension
stroke sensors, the front/right-rear/left-rear vertical
acceleration sensors, and the active damper control
unit..
NO-Go to step 34.
unit connector B (14P) terminals No.4 and No. 11.
SVCC(PNK)
SG(GRY)
YES-Repair short in the wires .
(see page 18-118) .
18-108
DTC 8-3: Sensor Reference Voltage
Malfunction (HVCC Line)
YES-Go to step 6.
stroke sensor, the headlight leveling control unit,
connector.
3P connector.
(14P) connector.
BACK
terminal No.6.
HVCC(PNK)
Q
between the left-front suspension stroke sensor,
the headlight leveling control unit, and the active
damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between the headlight leveling
control unit connector (16P) terminal No. 13 and
terminals No.4 and No. 12 individually.
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short between the wires .
NO-Go to step 12.
14. Check the HVCC VOLTAGE in the ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 4.36 V or more indicated?
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Substitute a known-good headlight leveling control
unit.
(see page 18-118) .
NO-Replace the original headlight leveling control
unit .
18-109
BACK
DTC 8-5: F-CAN Malfunction (Active Damper
Control Unit Lost Communication with Yaw
Rate-lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor)
2. Clear the active damper system, and VSA system
DTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the yaw rate-
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS
(see page 19-43).
Are any VSA system OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated VSA DTC's
troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Wait 30 seconds or more.
(14P) connector.
18-110
control unit connector B (14P) terminals and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P
connector terminals individually (see table).
Sign Active Damper Yaw Rate-lateral
Control Unit ILongitudinal
Connector Acceleration
Terminal Sensor Terminal
CAN L No.8 No.2
CANH No.1 No.3
.Q
CANH
(WHT)
ACCELERATION SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-
BACK
12. Substitute a known-good active damper control
NO-Replace the original active damper control
DTC 8-6: F-CAN Malfunction (Active Damper
Control Unit Lost Communication with VSA
Modulator-control Unit)
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit .
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS
(see page 19-43).
Are any VSA system orcs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting,
then go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Wait 30 seconds or more.
connector.
(14P) connector.
(cont'd)
18-111
BACK
11. Check for continuity between the active damper'
terminals individually (see table).
Sign Active Damper VSA Modulator-
Control Unit control Unit
Connector Terminal
Terminal
CAN L No.8 No. 38
CANH No.1 No. 39
8 8 101112
:182830 84
16
1I1388940
YES-Go to step 12
modulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit..
18-112
12. Substitute a known-good active damper control
YES-Replacement the VSA modulatorccontrol unit
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Replacement the original active damper
BACK
DTC 14-8: Active Damper Control Unit Power
Supply Circuit Malfunction
3. Start the engine, and raise the engine speed to
2,000 rpm.
4. Check and note IG1 VOLTAGE in the ACTIVE
DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS within
40 seconds after starting the engine.
Was there within 9.:r 17.5 V for 30 seconds
continuously?
YES-Go to step 9
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Wait 40 seconds.
6. Start the engine, then raise the engine speed to
2,000 rpms.
7. Measure voltage between active damper
control unit connector A (20P) terminal No.8
and terminal No. 18.
IG1 (GRN)
YES-If the voltage is above 17.5 V, check the
battery (see page 22-76) and troubleshoot the
alternator regulator circuit (see page 4-30), then
go to step 8. If the voltage is normal, replace
the active damper control unit (see page 18-118).
NO-Repair poor connection between under-dash
fuse/relay box connector F (14P) terminal No.8,
and active damper control unit connector A (20P)
terminal No.8, or poor ground at G302 and G401,
then go to step 8.
HDS.
18-113
BACK
Active damper system indicator does not go
off, and no DTCs are stored
NOTE: Check for gauges DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-3). If gauges DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those
DTCs first.
1. Check for the communication between the vehicle
and the HDS.
Is there communication with al/ vehicle systems?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the gauge
control module connector A (12P). If necessary,
substitute a known-good gauge control module,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 22-337) .
NO-If the HDS does not communicate with all the
systems of the vehicle, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-223). If the HDS does not
communicate with only the active damper control
unit, go to step 2.
3. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse
/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Install the No.20 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. If
the fuse continues to blow, check for short to body
ground in the wire between the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse
18-114
No.8, and No. 10.
IG1 (GRN)
=
YES-Go to step 6.
damper control unit and the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box or between the
active damper control unit and the under-dash
fuse/relay box .
BACK
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal
No. 18 and No. 19 individually.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
damper control unit and body ground (G401 or
G302) .
(12P).
(20P).
gauge control module connector A (12P) terminals
individually (see table).
Sign Active Damper Gauge Control
Control Unit Module Terminal
Connector
Terminal
CAN L No.8 No.6
CANH No.1 No.12
Q
YES-Check for loose terminals in the active
damper control unit connectors A (20P)/B (14P). If
necessary, substitute a known-good active damper
control unit, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original active damper control unit (see page
18-118) .
control module and the active damper control
unit .
18-115
BACK
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Active damper system switch does not work
(damper mode cannot be selected)
2. Check for the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH
the HDS when pushing the active damper system
switch.
Does the indicator change from ON (OFF) to OFF
(ON)?
YES-Check for loose tei-minals in the gauge
control module connector B (24P). If necessary,
substitute a known-good gauge control :module,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
NO-Go to step 3.
/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the blown fuse .
5. Disconnect gauge control module connector B
(24P).
7. Push the active damper system switch, and turn it
ON.
18-116
8. Measure voltage between body ground and gauge
control module 'connector B (24P) terminal No. 19.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B 124P)
=
YES-Check for loose terminals in the gauge
control module connector B (24P). If necessarY,
substitute a known-good gauge control module,
thEm recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK
10. Disconnect active damper system switch 5P
connector.
11. Check the active damper system switch (see page
18-121).
Is the active damper system switch OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the active damper system switch
(see page 18-121) .
damper system switch 5P connector terminal No.2.
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 14.
under-dash fuse/relay box and the active damper
switch .
14. Check for continuity between gauge control module
connector B (24P) terminal No. 19 and the active
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (24P)
YES-Go to step 15.
control modulator and the active damper system
switch .
=
the gauge control module and the active damper
system switch .
NO-Check for loose terminals in the active
damper control unit connectors A (20P)/B (14P). If
necessary, substitute a known-good active damper
control unit, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original active damper control unit (see page
18-118) .
18-117
BACK
Active Damper Control Unit Replacement
2. Remove the cargo rear trim panel (see page 20-90).
3. Remove the mounting bolts ,and move the active
damper control unit (A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibf.ftl
4. Disconnect the active damper control unit
connectors (B).
5. Install the active damper control unit in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Do not pinch the wire harnesses between
the frame and the active damper control unit.
6. Do the memorizing rear suspension full rebound
position (see page 18-54).
7. Start the engine, then make sure there are no active
damper system DTCs with the HDS (see page
18-53).
HDS, then make sure the all four damper units
function normally.
9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the active
damper system indicator does not come on
(see page 18-51).
18-118
BACK
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE: This vehicle has one front vertical acceleration
sensor, and two rear vertical acceleration sensors on
both right and left sides.
Front
(see page 20-120).
3. Remove the TPMS control unit (see page 18-162).
4. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and move the
vertical acceleration sensor (A).
5. Disconnect the vertical acceleration sensor
connector (8).
6. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the
(see page 18-51).
Rear
2. Remove the appropriate side of the rear side trim
panel (see page 20-92).
3. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and move the
vertical acceleration sensor (A).
NOTE: The illustration shows the left side of the
vehicle, the right side is similar.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
4. Disconnect the vertical acceleration sensor
connector (8).
5. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the
(see page 18-51).
18-119
BACK
. .
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Inspectio'n
2. Remove the vertical acceleration sensor (see page
18-119). Do not disconnect the sensor connector.
(see page 18-53).
5. With the HDS, check the VERTICAL_S VOLTAGE (F),
(RR), or (LR) in the active damper system DATA
LIST at a "normal", "lay down", and "top down"
each sensor positions by moving it (see table).
NORMAL POSITION
UPPER
t
LAY DOWN POSITION
UPPER
t ~ ~
TOP DOWN POSITION
UPPER
,t
Sensor position Specified voltage
Normal 2.2-2.8 V
Lay down 3.2-3.8 V
Top down 4.2-4.8 V
1 8 ~ 1 2 0
6. Ifthe voltages shown on the HDS are within the
specified voltage in the all positions, the sensor is
OK. If the voltages are out of specification in only
one position, the sensor is fault.
8. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the proper
position (see page 18-119).
BACK
Active Damper System Switch Test
3. Push out the active damper system switch (A) from
the back of center console.
4. Disconnect the active damper system switch
connector (8).
system switch terminals in each switch position
according to the table.
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
SWITCH 5P CONNECTTOR
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
6. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the
illumination bulb or the switch.
18-121
BACK
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension ............................. 18-2
Front Suspension ............................................. 18-12
Rear Suspension ............................................... 18-29
Active Damper System .. .................................. 18-49
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor 10 ................... 18-128
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 18-136
DTC Troubleshooting ............................................... ... 18-139
TPMS Control Unit Replacement ................................ 18-162
Initiator Replacement ................................................... 18-163
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement ............................ 18-164
BACK
I
TPMS
. ::
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
Replacement,
page 18-164
RIGHT-FRONT
INITIATOR
Replacement,
page 18-163
LEFT-FRONT INITIATOR
18-124
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
LEFT-REAR INITIATOR
Replacement,
page 18-163
BACK
General Troubleshooting
System Indicator Location.
The system hass!x indicators.
The low pressure indicator (A)
The TPMS indicator (B)
The right-front (RF) til;e indicator (C)
The left-front (LF) tire indicator (D)
The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (E)
The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (F)
A
How TPMS Works
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has six
indicators: four tire indicators (on the multi-information
display), a low pressure indicator (LED indicator), and a
TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display).
When the TPMS control unit detects low pressure in a
tire, or a problem in the system, it turns on the
appropriate indicator(s).
If low tire pressure is detected, the low pressure
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s) come
on.
If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS
indicator comes on.
If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on.
Ifthe system is OK, the low pressure indieator: should
come on when you turn the ignition switch ON (11), and
then go off 2 seconds later. If it doesn't, there is a
problem with the system.
If the system detects low pressure in any of the four
tires, the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire
indicator(s) will come on, and the control unit will set
one or more of these codes:
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17. When the tire pressure returns to
normal, the control unit will turn off the indicators and
store the DTC(s). However, if the control unit detects a
problem in the system during an indication. of low tire
pressure, it will turn off the low pressure indicator and
tire indicators, store the DTC(s), and turn on the TPMS
indicator.
NOTE: Tire pressures will increase slightly as the
temperature in the tires rises during driving at highway
speeds. Pressures will also increase or decrease
slightly with changes in outside air temperature.
A temperature change of about 18 of (10C) will change
tire pressure by about 10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the
temperature drops, tire pressure could decrease just
enough to turn on the low pressure indicator and tire
indicator(s), but later as tire temperature increases, the
tire pressure could increase enough to turn them off. To
resolve a complaint of such intermittent indications,
confirm and clear the stored DTC(s) and check the tire
pressures. Then explain to the customer how
temperature changes can affect the system, especially
when tire pressures are near the low end ofthe TPMS
normal range - 168 to 220 kPa (1.7 to kgf/cm2, 24 to
32 psi).
If a problem detected in the system, most DTCs will
cause the TPMS indicatortocome on and stay on until
the system returns to normal. If DTC 45, 61, 63, 65, 67,
81,83, or 85 is set, the TPMS indicator will go off only
when the ignition switch is turned off.
If a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, and the flat
tire is stored in the trunk area or the cabin, the low
pressure indicator will stay on, but the appropriate tire
indicator will go off. This prevents the client from
thinking there is a problem with the spare tire. When
the flat tire is taken out of the vehicle for repair, the
TPMS indicator will come on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38)
because the system is no longer receiving the signal
from the tire's transmitter.
(cont'd)
18-125 BACK
TPMS
Problems That Are Not System Faults
o Tire Sealant
Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each
wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the
correcttire pressure, which sets a DTC 11, 13, 15, or
17 even though the system is normal.
o Cold Weather
When the weather is extremely cold - about -40 'f
(-40 "C) or colder -the output of the lithium battery
in each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31,
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal.
o Non-TPMS Wheels
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made
for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive
mark; do not use any other type of wheel.
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)is Set
o When the system detects a problem, the TPMS
control unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode,
andwill not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
o If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails; the
TPMS indicator will come on, but no DTC will be set.
o The memory can hold all the DTCs that could
possibly be set. However, when the same DTC is
detected more than once, the most recent one
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of
each type is stored.
o DTCsare indicated in ascending order, not in the
order they occurred.
o Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting
the battery. To clear a DTC, connectthe HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and follow the screen prompts.
18-126
DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of .
the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is
still on. (NOTE: The TPMS indicator comes on for DTCs
11,13,15, and 17 only if the low tire pressure indication
is false, caused by a problem in the system.) Do not use
a troubleshooting procedure unless the system has set
the DTC listed for it.
1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when
the indicator came on, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out ifthe
customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
since the indicator came on.
2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-
drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-
drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come on.
4. Check for other unit DTCs which are connected via
F-CAN.lfthere are DTCs that are related to F-CAN,
the most likely cause was that the ignition switch
was turned ON (II) with the TPMS control unit
connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check for
PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and troubleshoot those
first.
BACK
How to Retrieve DTCs
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
ofthe dashboard.
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
How to Clear .DTCs
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
dash on the driver's side of the dashboard.
onthe HDS.
instructions.
18-127
BACK
,z
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor 10
Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor 10
When a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor 10
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct
10, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at least 10 ft
(3 m) from any other TPMS pressure sensor not
installed on that vehicle.
Memorizing a Sensor 10 Automatically
After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure
sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
IDs will be memorized automatically.
NOTE:
When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HOS
to memorize IDs .
After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in
all four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire indicators come on.
18-128
Memorize the 10 with the HOS
The HOS can memorize the 10 of a new tire pressure
sensor or a previously memorized 10.
the data link connector (OLC) (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HOS communicates with thevehicle
troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Memorize the 10 of the tire pressure sensor by
following the screen prompts on the HOS.
NOTE:
See the HOS Help menu for specific instructions.
When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the
HOS to memorize IDs.
After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure
in all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting
11 Right-front low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
13 Left-front low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
15 Right-rear low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
17 Left-rear low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
21 Right-front abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
22 Left-front abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
23 Right-rear abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
24 Left-rear abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 1 8 ~ 1 4 0
31 Right-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
32 Right-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
33 Left-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
34 Left-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
35 Right-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
36 Right-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
37 Left-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
38 Left-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
41 Abnormal signal reception error (see page 18-145)
45 Initiator circuit short detection (see page 18-146)
51 Right-front initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
53 Left-front initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
55 Right-rear initialization status of TPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
57 Left-rear initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
61 Right-front initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
63 Left-front initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
65 Right-rear initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
67 Left-rear initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
81 TPMS control unit failure check (see page 18-155)
83 No VSP signal (see page 18-155)
85 CAN data error (see page 18-156)
91 Right-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
93 Left-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
95 Right-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
97 Left-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
18-129
BACK
TPMS
HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223)
TPMS control unit or the vehicle
Low pressure indicator does not come on, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-158)
and no DTCs are stored
Low pressure indicator does not go off, SymptomTroubleshooting (see page 18-159)
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-159)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-160)
DTCs are stored
18-130
BACK
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector
number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
1 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends the -- Ignition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal high) signal
4 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the 4-GND At all times Less than 0.1 V
TPMS control unit
5 GRV LF LFSIG. Sends the signal to 5-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(LFlow the left-front 16 seconds after
frequency initiator turning the
signal) ignition switch
ON (II)
With ignition Less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
6 LTGRN RF LFSIG. Sends the signal to 6-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(RF low the right-front 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
7 LTBLU K-UNE (Data link Communications -- -- --
connector) with the HDS
8 VEL IG1 (Ignition Power source for 8-GND Ignition switch Battery voltage
switch 1) activating the ON (II)
system Ignition switch Less than 0.1 V
OFF
10 WHT +B (Battery Power source for 10-GND At all times Battery voltage
positive) the TPMS control
unit
(cont'd)
18-131
BACK
TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector (cont'd)
number' (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
11 RED CAN L(CAN Sends the
-.-
Ignition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal low) signal
15 LTBLU LFGND Ground for the 15-GND Ignition switch Less than 0.1 V
(LFlow initiators ON (II)
frequency
ground)
16 PNK LR LF SIG. Sends the signal to 16-GND For the first 5- Pulses 0-2V
(LR low the left-rear 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
17 GRY RR LF SIG. Sends the signal to 17-GND For the first 5- Pulses 0-2V
(RR low the right-rear 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
20 BRN LF PWR. Power source for 20-GND For 5 seconds About7V
(LF low the initiators with ignition
frequency switch ON (II)
power) After 5 seconds
--
with ignition
switch ON (II)
18-132
BACK
System Structure
Whenever the engine is running, the TPMScontrol unit continuously monitors all four tires and the system. If it detects
low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator. If it
detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator. '
Initiators
Mounted on each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below it.
Control unit
Mounted on the brake pedal bracket, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals from them to
verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals from the transmitters in the tire
pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low pressure indicator (LED indicator), four tire indicators (on the
multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display)
that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. When two or more tire pressures are low, the low pressure
indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the system
scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns onthe correct tire indicator.
Initiator
(low frequency)
-------
Tire Pressure Sensor
(sensor-transmitter)
Wheel
(TPMStype)
-------
/
Wheel
(TPMStype)
Vehicle
Gauge Control Module
Initiator
Indicators
(LED and multi-
information
display drive)
Control Unit
(with radio
frequency antenna)
Initiator
(low frequency) (low frequency)
Initiator
(low frequency)
~ i r e Pressure Sensor
Wheel
(TPMStype)
~ i r e Pressure Sensor
Wheel
(TPMStype)
(cont'd)
18-133
BACK
TPMS "
Tire pressure sensor
Each sensor is an integrated unit made up ofthe tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the .insideofthe wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information to the.
control unit once every eo. seconds. When the TPMS control unit receives tire.pressure of less than 175 kPa
(1.8 kgf/cm2, 25 psi), the control unit then turns on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s) indicator.
When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi), the transmitter sends tire pressure to
the control unit, and then the control unit turns the indicators off.
Wheels
The TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. The original equipment wheels have a
''TPMS'' stamp (A) on the back of the wheel and counterweights (B) cast into the opposite side of the spoke to balance
the weightof the tire pressure sensor (C).
NOTE: The vehicle is equipped with either wheel as shown.
~ .. - .. - .. - .. """"
. ~ c
A
B
".--.. - .. _ .. - ..........
( ~ c
B
18-134
BACK
System Communication
When the vehicle is running, a RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is continuously transmitted from each tire
pressure sensor to the control unit.
When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the initiators send a LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
Each tire pressure sensor has its own 10 to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit receives only those specific signals.
An 10 can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every time the
ignition is turned ON (11), the control unit asks each initiator for a sensor 10. The initiators then transmit the sensor
IDs, and the control unit receives and memorizes them. The control unit then knows which 10 belongs to each tire
location. This recurring 10 confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and the front initiators. Misalignment of the
control unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
Initiator
(Low Frequency Initiatorl
(Sensor-transmitter)
18-135
BACK
TPMS
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
No. 2 (40 Al
PUR
IGNmON SWrrCH
No.1 (120 A) No.3 (50 A)
~
--cT\. WHT PNK
IG1 HOTIn ON II and S () TART (III)
ri
POWER CIRCUrr
-
LOW PRESSURE INDICATOR
~
INDICATOR
~
DRIVER
CIRcurr
-
,J,.
@ TPMS INDICATOR
@ LFTIRE INDICATOR
@ RF TIRE INDICATOR
@ LR TIRE INDICATOR
@ RR TIRE INDICATOR
n
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
PCM
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
18-136
B2
A6
A12
A6
~
- 6
14
5
4
-
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.1 (7.5 A)
No. 21 (7.5 Al
-,X23
,..J
WHT----
i
C3
,..J
YEL -----
WHT -----.. -----WHT -----
RED -----+-.. ---RED -----
WHT
RED
WHT
RED
LTBLU
BLK
~ = = v
G503
BACK
--------------------------------------------------WHT
----------------------------------------------------VEL
--------------------------------------------------WHT
-------------------------------------------------------RED
INITIATOR
LEFT-FRONT 1
BRN BRN
LFPWR.
I LFSIGNAL r
2
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
3
GRV
LTBLU
LFGND
INITIATOR
RIGHT-FRONT 1
BRN
LFPWR.
[ LFSIGNAL
r
2
DRIVER L
CIRCUIT
3
TGRN
LTBLU
LFGND
INITIATOR
LEFT-REAR 1
BRN
LFPWR.
I LFSIGNAL r
2
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
3
PNK
LTBLU
LFGND
INITIATOR
RIGHT-REAR 1
BRN
LFPWR.
I LFSIGNAL r
2
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
3
GRV
LTBLU L TBLU
LFGND
------------------------------------------------------LTBLU
!r---------BLK
G401
10
+B
8
IG1
1
CANH
11
CANL
20
LFPWR.
5
LFLFSIG.
6
RFLFSIG.
16
LRLFSIG.
17
RRLFSIG.
15
LFGND
7
K-UNE
4
GND
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
-cl
7Jr
~
CAN
CONTROLLER
-
~
W
T
~ r t
....... : 12V
-0- :5V
~
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
tt
I
(cont'd)
18-137
BACK
TPMS
18-138
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELA V BOX
CONNECTOR C (12P)
CONNECTOR A (12P)
In
t:.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELA V BOX
CONNECTOR X (39P)
s-L ~
L--J
1/12131 [I]
151/17VI 191101111
I : 2 ~ I ji
l23l
j
116117VI/1201 IZIZI
1,-,
[ill
VVVI321/134135 1
t:.
1281
1
36
1
37
1
1381/1
U\
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
If II
1 1 1 2 314151617 8 1 9 110 I.
11 12 13
1/1/
16 /118 19 20 21
22
V
24
X
25
><
26 27 28
I
,-.
29 30 31 32V / /136 37 38 39
II-
140J 41 42 !43144VI46 471481491
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Low Tire Pressure
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit
will set one or more of these DTCs, and turn on the low
pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s).
If the low pressure and tire indicators come on due to
true low tire pressure, and the customer corrects it
before bringing the vehicle in, the DTCs will have been
stored, but all the indicators will be off.
2. Check which tire indicator is on.
NOTE: If no tire indicators are on, retrieve the DTCs
with the HDS.
Ole Tire location
11 Right-front
13 Left-front
15 Right-rear
17 Left-rear
4. Check the pressure of the indicated tire.
Is there 175 kPa (1.8 kgflcrrr, 25 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Check for and repair the cause of air loss, and then
inflate the tire (see page 18-5).
Do the tire indicators go off within one minute?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
with the HDS .
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Check the, tire pressure of the appropriate tire with
the HDS.
NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for
sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate
the tire 1/4 turn, thenturn the ignition switch ON (II),
and try again. If not defined is still shown, repeat
the procedure in the previous'sentence until
NORMAL is shown.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HOS within
40 kPa (0.4 kgflcrrr, 6 psi) of the actual tire
pressure?
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-162), and recheck .
NO-Check that the tire-pressure sensor is properly
mounted. Replace the appropriate tire pressure
18-139
BACK
TPMS
OTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Abnormally High Tire
Sensor Temperature
1. Make sure the tires have cooled down.
3. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature
of the tir,es can be caused by:
Excessive braking
Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires
only)
Leaving the vehicle running while parked
Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
OTC Tire location'
21 Right-front
22 Left-front
23 . Right-rear
24 Left-rear.
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one
minute?
with the HDS .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Read the internal temperature of the tire with the
HDS.
the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (II),
the procedure in the previous sentence until
NORMAL is shown.
Is 176 of (80C) or more indicated?
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-164) .
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
18-140
OTC 31, 33, 35, 37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low
Battery Voltage
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is -40 'f ( -40 "C) or less. Note that
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient
temperatureiis -4 'f (-20 "C) or more.
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one
minute?
with the HDS .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the FR, FL, RR, or RL in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS.
NOTE: Ifthe HDS screen shows not defined for
NORMAL is shown.
OTC Tire location
31 Right-front
33 Left-front
35 Right-rear
37 Left-rear
Is LOW indicated?
(see page 18-164) .
BACK
DTC 32, 34, 36, 38:Tire Pressure Sensor
Transmitting Failure
NOTE:
Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with the
RF signal from the sensors when turning the ignition
switch ON (II).
Vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at 15 mph
(24 km/h) or more for DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 to set.
1. Check the indicated location to make sure the
wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor.
DTC Tire location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel.
3. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-128).
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
Is DTC 85 indicated?
YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
18-156) .
11. With the HDS,check the indicated tire for the tire
sensor status changing to normal.
the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (11),
and try again. If the status does not change to
normal, repeatthe procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
DTC Tire location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one fu/l turn of the
tire?
with the HDS .
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
1.8-141
BACK
TPMS
13. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle ..
14. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-128).
17. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal
pressure sensor signal.
NORMAL is shown.
DTC Tire location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the
tire?
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
customer's wheel (see page 18-164) .
NO-Go to step 18.
19. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.
DTC Initiator location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
18-142
21. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No.1.
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
~ - - ' - ' - RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN)
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the appropriate initiator .
BACK
20P connector terminal No. 15 and appropriate
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (L T BLUI
RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 23.
23. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal and
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No.2
(see table).
DTC
32
34
36
38
TPMS control Initiator location
unit terminal
No.6 Right-front
No.5 Left-front
No. 17 Right-rear
No.16 Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
18-143
BACK
TPMS
appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector
terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit terminal
32 No.6
34 No.5
36 No. 17
38 No. 16
TPMS CONmOL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. IGRYI RF LF SIG. IL T GRNI
.Q .Q
=
= = =
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator .
NO-Go to step 25.
18-144
32 No.6
34 No.5
36 No. 17
38 No.16
LF LF SIG. IGRYI RF LF SIG. IL T GRNI
= = = =
the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator .
NO-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-163) .
BACK
Ole 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with
the RF signal from the sensors when turning the
ignition switch ON (II).
1. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the
TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor.
Is each wheel a TPMS type with a tire pressure
sensor mounted on the vehicle?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Install known-good TPMS wheel(s).
3. To memorize the sensor ID(s), drive the vehicle
above 15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds,
or memorize the ID(s) with the HDS (see page
18-128).
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON I I ) ~
YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
18-156) .
11. CheckTPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, RR sensor
status changing to "NORMAL".
NORMAL is shown.
tire?
with the HDS .
18-145
BACK
TPMS
OTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition
switch ON (II) again.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time .
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.
18-146
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
=
between the TPMS control unit and the initiators .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. On each individual initiator, check for continuity
between body ground and initiator 3P connector
terminal No.1.
NOTE: Check the initiators when mounted on the
vehicle.
=
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-163) .
BACK
20P connector terminals No. 15and No. 20.
LF GND LF PWR. IBRNI
ILTBLUI
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 15.
12. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.
20P connector terminals No. 15 and No. 20.
LF GND LF PWR. IBRNI
ILTBLUI
YES-Repair short in the wire between TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminals No. 15 (LF
GND line) and No. 20 (LF PWR. line) .
NO-Go to step 14.
14. On the initiator side, check for continuity between
all four initiator 3P connector terminals No.1 and
No.3 individually.
18-163) .
16. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 15.
the TPMS control unit and the initiators .
18-147
BACK
TPMS
DTC 51, 53, 55, 57: Initialization Status of
TPMS Control Unit is Not Completed
NOTE: These OTCs will only set during initialization with
the HOS.
1. Check the OTC indicated to the tire location to
make sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire
pressure sensor.
OTC Tire location
51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel.
3. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above
memorize the 10 with the HOS (see page 18-128).
18-148
6. With the HOS, check the indicated tire for the
normal sensor signal.
NOTE: If the HOS screen shows not defined for
and try again. If nqt defined is still shown, repeat
NORMAL is shown.
OTC Tire location
51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
tire?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the OTC
with the HOS .
NO-Go to step 12.
8. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle.
9. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above
memorize the 10 with the HOS(see page 18-128).
BACK
12. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal
pressure sensor signal.
NORMAL is shown.
DTC .Tire location
51 RiQht-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
tire?
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
customer's wheel (see page 18-164) .
NO-Go to step 13.
OTC Initiator location
51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
LFPWR.
(BRN)
Q
""=!,==':...., RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN)
YES-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
18-149
BACK
TPMS
51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (L T BLU)
RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 18.
18-150
(see table).
DTC
51
53
55
57
unit terminal
No.6 Right-front
No.5 Left-front
No. 17 Right-rear
No. 16 Left-rear
Wi're side of female terminals
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 19.
BACK
51 No.6
53 No.5
55 No. 17
57 No. 16
LF LF SIG. IGRVI RF LF SIG. IL T GRNI
Q Q
= = = =
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator .
NO-Goto step 20.
51 No.6
53 No.5
55 No. 17
57 No. 16
LF LF SIG. IGRVI RF LF SIG. IL T GRNI
= =
the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator .
NO-Repair the appropriate initiator (see page
18-163) .
18-151
BACK
TPMS
DTC 61, 63, 65, 67: Initiator Circuit Open
Detection
4. Check for DTCs with theHDS, and note the
indicated DTC(s).
Is DTC 61,63,65, and/or 67 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
61 Right-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
18-152
DlC Initiator location
61 Right-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
Q
1 2 3 RIGHT-

,-,--,--=...L;;,.I RIGHT-FRONT
LF PWR. (BRN)
YES-Go to step 9.
BACK
61 Riaht-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (L T BLU)
RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 10.
(see table).
DTC
61
63
65
67
unit terminal
No.6 Right-front
No.5 Left-front
No. 17 Right-rear
No.16 Left-rear
LEFTFRONT RIGHTFRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
LEFTREAR RIGHTREAR
YES-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
18-153
BACK
TPMS'
11. Check for noted DTC(s) in step 4.
Were DTC 61,63,65, and 67 indicated at the
same time?
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Swap a known-good initiator with the initiator
indicated by the DTC (see page 18-163).
61 Right-front ,"
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
.. ,
67 Left-rear
15. Clear the DTC withthe HDS.
18-154
17. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and compare the
indicated DTC with the noted DTC(s) in step 4.
61 Right-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
Does the indicated DTC change between the
initiators that were rep/aced in step 12?
18-163) .
BACK
OTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure (RAMI
ROM/ADC/EEPROM/ALU) Check
NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this OTC. Make
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
again.
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-162) .
OTC 83: No VSP Signal
NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems OTCs with
the HOS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to OTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
18-156) .
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Check the VSP in the TPMS OATA LIST with the
HOS.
connections at the TPMScontrol unit. If necessary,
(see page 18-162), and recheck
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check the speedometer.
Does the speedometer register speed?
18-162) .
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
and retest. If no codes are shown, replace the
original PCM .
BACK
TPMS
OTe 85: CAN Data Error
NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems DTCs with
the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
4. Wait about 5 seconds.
Is ore 85 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
Does the speedometer work?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 7.
Does the speedometer work?
NO-Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reconnect
all connectors, then check and troubleshoot the fuel
and emissions systems (see page 11-3) .
18-156
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit
20P connector terminals and the PCM connector A
(49P) terminals individually (see table).
Terminal TPMS control PCMA
name unit terminal terminal
CAN L No.11 No. 49
CANH No.1 No. 48
CANH(WHT)
.Q .Q
PCM CONNECTOR A(49P)
CAN H (WHT) CAN L (RED)
control unit and the PCM .
BACK
DTC 91, 93, 95, 97: Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
again.
4. Wait about 1 minute.
NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate
wheel is shown.
DTC Tire location
91 Right-front
93 Left-front
95 Right-rear
97 Left-rear
Is DTC 91,93,95 or 97 indicated?
(see page 18-164) .
18-157
BACK
TPMS
Low pressure indicator does not come on,
2. Check the low pressure indicator for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then go off?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 7.
4. Check the pressure in all four tires.
Is the tire pressure 175 kPa (1.B kgflcrrf, 25 psi)
or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS, and compare with measured actual
tire pressure.
the appropriate tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
switch ON (11), and try again. If not defined is still
shown, repeat the procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within
40 kPa (0.4 kgflcrrf, 6 psi) of the actual tire
pressure?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the tire pressure sensor (see page
18-164) .
18-158
7. Wait about 5 seconds with the ignition switcfl
turned ON (II).
8. Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-3).
Is any gauge DTC indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated gauge DTC .
NO-Go to step 9.
11. Measure voltage between TPMS control unit 20P
GNDIBLK)
IG11YELI
the TPMS control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
BACK
Low pressure indicator does not go off, and
no DTCs are stored
4. Check the low pressure indicator for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
18-162) .
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-3). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (seepage
22-337), and recheck .
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
DTCs are stored
2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
YES-The system is OK at this time .
module (see page 22-3). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page
18-159
BACK
TPMS
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
are stored
NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-3). If gauges DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those
DTCsfirst.
2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Replace the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck .
5. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Replace the No. 21 0.5 A) fuse, and
recheck .
18-160
6. Measure,voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.
+B(WHT)
YES-Go to step 7.
control unit and the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
control unit 20P connector terminal No.8.
IG1 (YEll
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
BACK
control unit 20P connector terminal No.4.
GND(BLK)
=
Is there o. 1 V or more? '
YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G401) .
module (see page 22-3). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections atthe TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control (see page
18-161
BACK
TPMS'
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
communication with the initiators and the tire pressure
sensors.
(see page 20-120).
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A).
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located on the
brake pedal bracket.
D
B
6x1.0mm
3. Remove the flange bolt (8) from the brake pedal
bracket.
4. Remove the TPMS control unit (C) from the bracket
(D).
18-162
5. Remove the TPMS control unit (A) from the bracket
(8).
NOTE: While separating the TPMS control unit
from the bracket, release the hook (e) on the TPMS
control unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver (D), and
push up to release it from the bracket.
6. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly
installed. You will hear a click when the TPMS
control unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
7. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs (see page 18-128). Do not memorize the
IDs automatically.
BACK
Initiator Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not
bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
with the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor.
Front
3. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-217).
4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
5. Remove the initiator (8) from the inner side of the
wheelwell.
6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
Rear
3. Remove the rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
J
A
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
~
5. Remove the initiator (8) from the inner side of the
wheelwell.
6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
18-163
BACK
"'
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve cap and the valve core, and
let the tire deflate.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the
bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
I NOTICE I
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire
pressure sensor:
Do the outside of the wheel first.
Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem (8) is 90 degrees from the bead
breaker (C) as shown.
Do not position the bead breaker of the tire
changer too close to the rim.
____ A
18-164
5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (8) are next to the valve stem (C) and will move
away from it when the machine starts. Then
remove the tire from the wheel.
6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and washer (8),
then remove the tire pressure sensor with valve
stem (C) from the wheel.
BACK
7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A),
from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
o The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel;
make sure you remove it.
o Always use a new valve stem grommet
whenever the tire pressure sensor has been
removed from the wheel. When only removing a
tire from the wheel, replace the valve stem
grommet if it is possible.
A
Installation
NOTE:
o Use only wheels that have a "TPMS" stamp (A) on
them.
o This vehicle may be equipped with either type 1 or
type 2 wheels.
TYPE 1
A
TYPE 2
A
(cont'd)
18-165
BACK
J.
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel.
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer
(B) to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut
(D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is
resting on the wheel.
WHEEL CENTER
"'OUTSIDE
D
4Nm
(0.4 kgfm. 3 Ibf.ft)
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque
while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Do not use air or electric impact tools to
tighten a valve stem nut.
18-166
4. Lube the tire bead, and position the wheel so the
tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
valve stem (C) and will move away from it when
the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
wheel.
5. Inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat
the tire bead to the rim, then adjust the tire
pressure (see page 18-5).
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is uniformly seated
on both sides of the rim.
6. Check the valve stem nut tightening torque, then
install the valve stem cap.
7. Check and adjustthe wheel balance, then install the
wheels on the vehicle. Torque the wheels to
specifications.
8. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.
9. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure
sensor ID(s) (see page 18-128).
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components
Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test .............................. 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ................................................................ 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment ................. 19-7
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram .................... 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ........... 19-12
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-16
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-17
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-18
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-19
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-20
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment ......... 19-21
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-22
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ............ 19-23
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-26
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-27
Parking Brake Inspection ............................................. 19-28
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement ............................... 19-30
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in ........................... 19-33
Brake Pedal Replacement ............................................ 19-34
Brake Hose and Line Inspection .................................. 19-35
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-36
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-38
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System Components .... ......... .......... ...... ....... 19-41
Special Tools
CD 07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
070AB-SJA0100 Booster Piston Holder 1
CD
I
19-2
BACK
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Bleeding,
page 19-9
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE BOOSTER
Test, page 19-20
Push rod Clearance Adjustment, page 19-21
FRONT BRAKE
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
Circuit Diagram, page 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-11
PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE HOSE and LINE
Brake Hose
. PARKING BRAKE
Inspection,
page 19-28
Shoe Replacement,
page 19-30
Shoe Lining
Break-in,
page 19-33
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-26
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-27
Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-7
Cable Replacement, page 19-38
Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-12
Disc Inspection, page 19-16
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-17
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal
Position Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
19-3
BACK
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
C omponent Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seat at reservoir cap. This is a
Reservoir or reservoir grommets. sign offluid contamination.
Line joints.
Between mastercvlinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damaae.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
Piston seal.
Banjo bolt connections.
Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit Line joints.
Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the Ale switch. Allow the engine to warm up to normal
operating temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it. ..
3. With the transmission in P or N position, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure needed
to keep an AfT-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure .
If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK .
If the measurement increases more than 10 mm(3/8 in.),replace the master cylinder.
19-4
BACK
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal
NOTE: Make sure thatthe caliper pins are installed
correctly.
The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are
different. If the pins are installed in the wrong location,
it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear,
and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin
location (see page 19-17).
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test-
drive.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift,
and spin all four wheels by hand.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Look for other causes of the pad wear, high
pedal, or vehicle vibration .
3. Turn the engine off, press the brake pedal several
times to deplete the vacuum in the brake booster,
and then spin the wheels again to check for brake
drag.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-22) .
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and
separate the master cylinder from the booster, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-6) .
5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. Ifthe brake fluid is OK, replace
the master cylinder (see page 19-18) .
6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin
the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. Ifthe brake fluid is OK,
disassemble and repair the caliper on the wheel(s)
with brake drag .
NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines.
If all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102) .
BACK
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A)
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no
longer touching the brake pedal.
A
D
2. Pull backthe carpet andfind the cutout (8) in the
insulator. Measure the pedal height (C) at the
center of the pedal pad (D) to the floor without the
insulator.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):
178 mm (7 in.)
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the
pushrod (8) in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the push rod pressed.
19-6
Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
4. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the
brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully
pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (8) on
the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45
0
clockwise
to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to
0.7 mm (0.028 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure
the brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
5. Check the brake pedal free play.
BACK
Pedal Free Play
1. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the
brake pedal pad (8) by pushing the brake pedal by
hand. If the brake pedal free play is out of
specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch
(C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it
may result in brake drag.
Free play: 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
c
B
Parking Brake Inspection and
Adjustment
Inspection
1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N (30 kgf,
66 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
parking brake pedal should be locked within the
specified number of clicks.
Pedal locked clicks: 9 to 11
I
\ I
\ '
, [
\ \ .
'\ fr' ,/"/
,-
\-...\,-
A
Pressed with
294N
(30 Kgf, 661bf)
Ii
2. Adjust the parking brake if the pedal clicks are not
within the specification.
NOTE: Minor parking brake pedal adjustments
(1 to 2 clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut
(see parking brake minor adjustment, page 19-8).
If a larger adjustment is required, follow the major
adjustment procedure using the adjuster nut at the
parking brake drum (see parking brake major
adjustment, page 19-8).
After installing new parking brake shoes and/or
new brake disc/drum, make sure you drive the
vehicle for "break-in" (see page 19-33).
(cont'd)
19-7
BACK
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont'd)
Minor Adjustment
2. Fully release the parking brake pedal.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click.
4. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
are turned.
A
5. Release the parking brake pedal fully, and check
that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
6. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied
when the parking brake pedal is pressed all the way.
19-8
Major Adjustment (to be done when
replacing parking brake shoes and after
lining surface break-in)
2. Fully release the parking brake pedal.
3. Back off the parking brake adjusting nut (A) in the
parking brake pedal.
A
5. Remove the access plug (A).
B C
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster nut (B) with a
flat-tip screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against
the parking brake drum. Then back off the adjuster
10 clicks, and install the access plug.
wheels.
8. Do the minor adjustment procedure.
BACK
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Acura
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container.
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion
and shorten the life of the system.
Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may
not be compatible. .
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each
brake circuit. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A)
is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
B
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal
several times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front
brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in
the sequence shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
Front Right @RearRight
CD Front Left @RearLeft
4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed
screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air
to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
screw securely.
Front
B
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm, 7 Ibf.ftl
---A
/
Rear
~
\
5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until
there are no air bubbles are in the fluid.
19-9
BACK
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
19-10
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT
B9
ORN
BRAKEA.UID
, LEVEL SWITCH
CLOSED: Roat down
OPEN: Roat up
I
G302
A12
WHT----t
A6
RED----t
Bl0
ORN
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
, CLOSED: Pariling brake applied
OPEN: Pariling brake released
VSA MODULATOR
CONTROL UNIT
lEBO INDICATOR)
BACK
Parking Brake Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABSNSA indicator and the brake
system indicator come on at the same time, check the
VSA system first (see page 19-43).
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A)
from the parking brake switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal
(C) and body ground .
With the parking brake pedal pressed, there
should be continuity .
With the parking brake pedal released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the fluid
level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module test
(see page 22-315).
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)
with the float in the down position and in the up
position.
NOTE:
Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.
With the float down, there should be continuity.
Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (A). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.
If both the ABSNSA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA
system first (see page 19-43).
Ifthe parking brake switch and fluid level switch are
OK, but the brake system indicator does not function,
do the gauge control module test (see page 22-315).
A
19-11
BACK
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Brake caliper piston compressor 07 AAE-SEPA 101
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health.
Avoid breathing dust particles .
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection
19-12
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in.'
Inner pad
B
Outer pad
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
BACK
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
6. Remove the pad retainers (A).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in proper positions.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (8) A
up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
10x 1.25 mm
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (8).
7. Clean the caliper bracket (8) thoroughly; remove
any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
8. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and
cracks (see page 19-16).
9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the discs and pads.
(cont'd)
19-13
BACK
Co.nventional Brake Components
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
10. Mountthe brake caliper piston compressor (A) on
the caliper body (B).
A
07AAE-SEPA101
B
11. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
brake fluid might overflow from the master ..
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
12. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
19-14
13. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (PIN
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the
back of the brake pads (8) and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shims and brake pads;
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste
off the brake discs and brake pads.
A
14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
BACK
15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-35).
19-15
BACK
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-13).
4. Inspectthe brake disc surface for damage and
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and
remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B),
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque
to hold the brake disc securely against the hub.
B
14x1.5mm
127Nm
(13.0 kgf.m. 94.0 Ibfttl
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as
shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish
the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The
Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing
Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by
Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation.
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-13) .
A new brake disc should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.).
19-16
Thickness and Parallelism
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 0 apart and
10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This isthe maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car
brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way
Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc
Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
for this operation.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it. Remove the following
items:
Front brake caliper bracket (see step 4 on page
18-13) .
Front brake disc (see step 6 on page 18-13).
BACK
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
Avoid breathing dust particles.
o Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
o Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
o To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
o Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
o Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
o Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
o Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
o Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
o When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
o Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
o Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
o Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
o Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled .
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Honda silicone grease (PIN 08C30-B0234M)
WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner pad with
O
its wealndicator upward.
@ OUTER PAD SHIM A

"", OUTER PAD SHIM B
(J
w,,';;;'::. Ii; 'd CALlPE\ PIN B
INNER PAD SHIM A v\j 'if /'
BRAKE PADS )
BANJO BOLT BRAKE BLEEDER SCREW
14xl.5mm

(14.0 kgf.m,
1011bfftl
35 Nm HOSE 9 N.m
(3.6 kgf.m,} (09 kgf
261bf ftl . m,
7lbfftl

SEALING WASHERS Q) i::'
Replace. /

CALIPER PIN A
CALIPER
BRACKET
RETAINER
PISTON
- d PISTON BOOT LOWER PAD RETAINER

\
72Nm
(7.3 kgf.m, 53lbfftl
"'-0 / Replace.
'--0 @
\
Clo SNAP RING
CALIPER BODY Replace.
PISTON SEAL
Replace.

19-17
BACK
Master Cylinder Replacement
I NOTICE I
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
Be careful not to damage or deform the brake
lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel
or equivalent.
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (see page
11-364).
2. Remove the reservoir cap and the brake fluid from
the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector
(A).
A
B
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibf.ft)
4. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master
cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with rags or shop towels.
5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D).
6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster
(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
lines when removing the master cylinder.
7. Remove the O-ring (F) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: Replace the O-ring whenever the master
cylinder is removed.
19-18
8. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of
Check the brake booster push rod clearance
(see page 19-21).
Coat the new O-ring with silicone oil (Shin-Etsu
KF 54).
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
9. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
10. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
BACK
Master Cylinder Inspection
1. Inspect and note these items:
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free
of dirt and other foreign particles.
Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
with a new part if necessary.
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to
contaminate the brake fluid.
RESERVOIR CAP
Check for blockage
of vent holes.
STRAINER ~
Remove
accumulated J
sediment.
R S R V O I R ~
Check for damage. ~ \
RESERVOIR
SEAL
Check for
damage and
deterioration.
MASTER
CYLINDER
Check for leaks,
rust, and damage.
19-19
BACK
Brake Booster Test
Functional Test
1. With the engine off, press the brake pedal several
times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press
the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is
bypassing internally, or the brake system is leaking.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page 19-35).
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the
brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does
not vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not
vary while pressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal
height rises, go to step 6. If it does not rise, go to
step 2.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn
the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press
the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on
each consecutive application? If it rises, the booster
is OK. If it does not, go to step 3.
19-20
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at
the booster. The check valve is built into the hose.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
check valve is not working properly. Replace the
brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
retest. If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to
the brake booster.
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
vacuum hose between the check valve and the
booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds.
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise .
Ifthe pedal position does not vary, inspectthe
seal between the master cylinder and booster. If
the seal is OK, replace the brake booster .
If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly.
BACK
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment
Booster piston holder 070AB-SJA0100
NOTE:
Brake booster pushrod to piston clearance must be
checked and readjusted before installing a new
master cylinder.
The master cylinder assembly comes with a tool that
must be used to adjust the clearance between the
brake booster push rod and the master cylinder piston.
Use only the tool that comes with the new master
cylinder to check the push rod clearance. Do not use
any other tool.
Make sure to discard the tool supplied with the
master cylinder after its use.
The brake booster must be installed on the vehicle
before doing the push rod clearance adjustment.
If the booster is removed, check the push rod length
(A) as shown. Ifthe length is incorrect, loosen the
push rod locknut (B), and turn the yoke (C) in or out to
adjust.
A
116 mm 14.6 in.)
B
26Nm
12.7 kgfm, 20 Ibftt)
1. Measure the clearance between the plate (A)
supplied with master cylinder and brake booster
pushrod (B). Make sure that the tool is lying flat
against the surface (C) of the brake booster, and
that the tip of the tool contacts the push rod. If the
tool will not lie flat (D) or there is a gap IE) between
the tool and the push rod, go to step 2 to adjust the
push rod in or out.
Omm 10 in.)
2. If the clearance is incorrect, use the booster piston
holder to hold the push rod (A) and turn the
adjusting screw (B) clockwise to inward or
counterclockwise to outward.
070AB-SJA0100
\
A
B
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-19).
19-21
BACK
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-363).
2. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-18).
3. Remove the brake lines (A) from the VSA
modulator-control unit (B).
c
A
22Nm
12.2 kgfm,
16lbfftl
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (C)
from the brake booster.
(see page 20-120).
6. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B), then
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal.
C B ~
8x1.25mm _ ~
13Nm ~
11.3 kgfm,
9 . \ ~
~
7. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).
19'-22
8. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine
compartment.
I NOTICE I
Be careful not to damage the booster
surfaces and threads of the booster stud
bolts .
Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines.
9. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of
Adjust the pushrod clearance before installing
the brake booster (see page 19-21).
Install the master cylinder after installing the
brake booster (see page 19-18).
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
BACK
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required ,
Brake caliper piston compressor07AAE-SEPA101
ACAUTION
health .
cleaner.
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 9.6-10.2 mm (0.38""'0.40 in.)
B
A
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.
and the inside ofthe wheel, then install the rear
wheels.
Replacement
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B)
up out ofthe way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B).
(cont'd)
19-23
BACK
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the pad retainers (A).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in their proper positions.
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove
any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
8. Inspect the brake disc/drum, and check for damage
and cracks (see page 19-26).
9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the discs and pads.
19-24
10. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on
the caliper body (B).
B
A
07 AA.E-SEPA 101
11. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
12. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
BACK
13. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the
back of the brake pads (8), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shims and brake pads.
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste
off the brake discs and brake pads.
14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
A
8x 1.0 mm
wheels.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications ofthe brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-35).
19-25
BACK
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum surface for damage
and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum thoroughly,
and remove all rust.
5. Install suitable flat.washers (A) and wheel nuts (B),
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque
to hold the brake disc/drum securely against the
hub.
B
14x 1.5 mm
127Nm
11.3.0 kgf.m, 94.0 Ibf.ftl
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum
as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:
Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.l
7. Ifthe brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit,
refinish the brake disc/drum with an on-car brake
lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way
Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc
Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
for this operation.
Max. refinishing limit: 9.0 mm (0.35 in. I
NOTE:
If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-30) .
A new brake disc/drum should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.).
19-26
Thickness and Parallelism
2. Remove the rear wheels ..
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum
thickness at eight points, about 45 0 apart and
10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc/drum. Replace the brake disc/drum if the
smallest measurement is less than the max.
refinishing limit.
Brake disc/drum thickness:
Standard: 10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in. I
Max. refinishing limit: 9.0 mm (0.35 in.l
Brake disc/drum parallelism:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in.l max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
for parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum with an
on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by
Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake
Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are
approved for this operation.
NOTE: If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service
limit for refinishing, replace it. Remove the
following items:
Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page
18-30) .
Rear brake disc/drum (see step 6 on page 18-31).
BACK
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul

Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use. an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these. items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Honda silicone grease (PIN
PIN BOOT
Replace.

ax 1.0mm
37Nm
(3.a kgfm, 27 Ibfft)
BLEED SCREW
9Nm
PISTON

INNERPAD&

PISTON SEAL
I/) Replace. SNAP RING
12x1.2Smm
88Nm
Replace.

UPPER PAD
RETAINER

OUTER PAD SHIM
WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner brake pad
with its wea r
indicator downward.

RETAINER
., CAUPER BRACKET
19-27
BACK
Parking Brake Inspection
ACAUTION
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the following items:
Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page .
FLANGE NUT
12x1.25mm
98.1 Nm
BACKING PLATE
Check for deformation.
/

TENSION PIN
BRAKE SHOE BOSSES
Check for deep
grooves and rust.
BRAKE SHOE
If brake shoes are
to be reused, mark
and reassemble in
the same position.
U-CLIP
Replace.
/
WAVE WASHER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
,,! / Ma<ked loft and right
STRUT
RETAINER SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
RETAINER
Install securely
on tension pin.

CONNECTING ROD A
\
LOWEll RETURN SPRING
Check for weakness
ADJUSTER NUT and damage.
Check ratchet teeth
for wear and damage.
CONNECTING ROD B
UPPER RETURN SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
19-28
BACK
4. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking,
glazing, wear, and contamination.
c
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (8).
Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness.
Parking brake lining thickness:
Standard: 3.9 mm (0.15 in.)
6. If the parking brake lining thickness is less than the
service limit, replace all the parking brake shoes as
a set (see page 19-30).
7. Check the hub (C) for smooth operation. If it
requires servicing, replace the hub bearing unit
(see page 18-30).
8. Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake
drum with inside vernier calipers.
Parking brake drum inside diameter:
Standard: 210.0-210.1 mm
(8.268-8.272 in.)
9. If the inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
more than service limit, replace the brake disci
drum.
10. Check the parking brake disc/drum for scoring,
grooves, and cracks.
wheels.
19-29
BACK
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
ACAUTION
health .
cleaner.
Disassembly
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the
following items:
Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page
18-30)
4. Disconnect and remove the upper return
springs (A).
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the
respective retainer (8) and turning the pin.
A
B
A
19-30
A
6. Remove the strut (A).
7. Lower the parking brake shoe assembly.
8. Remove the forward brake shoe (A) and the
adjuster assembly (8) by removing the lower return
spring (e) .
A
c
BACK
9. Remove the rearward brake shoe by disconnecting
the parking brake cable (A) from the parking brake
lever (B).
B
10. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and
parking brake lever (C) from the brake shoe (0).
Reassembly
1. Apply Molykote Plastilube # 2 grease to the sliding
surface of the pivot pin (A) of the rearward brake
shoe (B).
2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and wave washer
(0) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip
(E).
o Install the wave washer with its convex side
facing out.
o Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever from coming off the brake shoe.
3. Connect the parking brake cable (A) to the parking
brake lever (B). Apply Plastilube # 2 grease to the
cable contact surface (C) on the backing plate.
B
(cont'd)
19-31
BACK
I',
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply a thin coat of Plastilube # 2 grease to the
shoe ends and strut ends (A), sliding surfaces (B),
and opposite edges of the parking brake shoe (C) as
shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep the grease off
the brake linings.
Greasing symbols:
... Brake shoe ends and strut ends
:: -0 Opposite edge of the shoe
c::>- Sliding surface
5. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B),
and the retainer (C) on the rearward brake shoe (0).
Make sure the tension pin does not contactthe
parking brake lever.
D
A
19-32
6. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster nut
(C).
NOTE:
Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A
and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then
coat them with rubber grease .
Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the
adjuster nut.
A
7. Position the brake shoe adjuster assembly (0) on
the parking brake shoes.
8. Hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking
brake shoes.
9. Install the rod spring (A) to the strut (B) first. Then
install the strut on the parking brake shoes.
B
BACK
10. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B),
and the retainer (C) on the forward brake shoe (D).
A
11. Install the forward upper return spring (A) as
shown.
12. Install the rearward upper return spring (B) as
shown.
B
13. Install the rear brake disc/drum and the rear brake
caliper bracket in the reverse order of removal.
14. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page
19-8).
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
NOTE:
Do the brake lining surface break-in when replacing
shoes with new brake linings and/or new rear brake
disc/drum .
Check the number of parking brake lever clicks.
Adjust the parking brake before lining surface break-
in (see page 19-8) .
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Release the parking brake pedal.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 5 clicks.
4. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at about
31 mph (50 km/h).
5. Stop the vehicle, and release the parking brake for
5-10 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 two more times.
7. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment
(see page 19-7).
19-33
BACK
BrakePedal Replacement
driver's dashboard Ur'ldercover
(see page 20-120);
3. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch
connector (A), and remove the harness clips.
4. Remove the lock pin (8) and joint pin (C).
5. Remove the harness and connector clips.
6. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)
and nuts (E).
7. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch
adjustment (see page 19-6).
19-34
BACK
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note
Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 Nm (3.5 kafm, 25 Ibfft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 Nm (0.9 kafm, 7 Ibfft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 Ibfft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 Nm (0.9 kafm, 7 Ibfft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 Nm (1.5 kafm, 11 Ibfft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,16Ibfft) Flare nut
(12 mm nut)
Brake line 15 Nm (1.5 kgfm, 11 Ibfft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
B
c
B
A
C A
19-35
BACK
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE:
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or
equivalent material.
Removal - Front
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose
(B), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
B
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the
brake hose (B) from the caliper.
B
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then
remove the brake hose.
19-36
Installation - Front
1. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
C
10x1.0mm
34Nm
(3.5 kgfm, 25
. /:x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2kgf.m,
16Ibfft)
A
2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the
banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
3. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose
(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.

10x1.0mm
15Nm
(1.5 kgf.m.
11 Ibf._ftl'-----:::=.--It:
B
4. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake
system (see page 19-9).
5. Do the following checks:
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
6. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
BACK
Removal- Rear
2. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the brake hoses
(8), then remove the brake hose clips (C).
o
3. Remove the front side brake hose (D).
4. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the
brake hose from the caliper.
5. Remove the rear side brake hose (8).
B
A
Installation - Rear
1. Connect the rear side brake hose to the caliper with
the banjo bolt (A) and new sealing washers (8).
A
10x1.0mm
34Nm
2. Install new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hoses
(8) on the brackets, then connect the brake lines (C).
Do not twist the brake hoses.
C
10x1.0mm
15Nm
(1.5kgf.m,
11lbfft)
3. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake
system (see page 19-9).
4. Do the following checks:
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
wheel.
19-37
BACK
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
19-38
PARKING
1 N m BRAKE PARKING BRAKE
(0.1 kgfm, 1 Ibf.ft) SWITCH. ___ PEDAL ASSEMBL V
~
~ /PARKINGBRAKE
8 x 1 25 mm Multipurpose CABLE A
22 N:m (Sliding surface) Check for
12.2 kgf.m.l. ~ i !,"tty movomeot.
----/1-- 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
LEFT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
\
6.x1.0 mm
9.8Nm
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
RIGHT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
BACK
NOTE:
The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature failure.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut
(see page 19-8).
2. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect
the parking brake cable from the parking brake
lever (see page 19-30).
3. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts
from the backing plate (A).
4. Pull the parking brake cable (B) and remove it from
the backing plate.
5. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items:
Be careful not to bend or distort the cable .
Connect the parking brake cable to the brake
lever, and install the parking brake shoes and
drum (see page 19-31).
Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8).
Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then
adjust it again.
19-39
BACK
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................... 19-1
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Components
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-58
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................ ............ 19-96
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement ......................... 19-99
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point Writing ............. 19-100
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
. Sensor Replacement ................................................ 19-100
VSA Off Switch Test ..................................................... 19-101
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation ......................................... 19-102
@VSA
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-104
VSA System Components
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Replac;ement, page 19-104
HUB BEARING UNIT .
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and
Installation,
page 19-102
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
ACCELERATION SENSOR
19-42
RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
BACK
System Indicator
This system has four indicators and one warning:
ABS indicator (A)
Brake system indicator (B)
VSA indicator (C)
VSA activation indicator (D)
Trailer stability assist warning (E)
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the
appropriate indicators on or warning indicate.
Depending on the failure, the VSA modulator-control
unit determines which indicators are turned on or
warning indicate.
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (11),
then goes off.
ABS Indicator
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
Brake System Indicator
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low.
VSA Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on, when VSA function is lost.
VSA Activation Indicator
The VSA activation indicator blinks, when the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
comes on, when the VSA is turned OFF by using the
VSA OFF switch, or the VSAfunction is lost. The VSA
activation indicator is on until the steering angle sensor
center point writing is done (see page 19-100).
Trailer Stability Assist Warning
Trailer stability assist warning comes on, when brake
light relay has malfunctioned or when VSA function is
lost.
ABS, VSA Indicators, and Trailer Stability Assist
Warning go off
Each indicator or warning will go off after a problem
goes away, but the timing which the VSA modulator-
control unit turns off the indicators or warning varies
between DTCs.
DTC 61, 62:
The indicators go off automatically when the system
returns to normal.
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17,21',22,25,26,27,31,32,33,34,
35,36,37,38,45,46,47,48,54,59,65,66,67,68,69,
72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 81, 84,91,92, or 97' ':
The indicators stay on until the ignition switch is
turned OFF whether or not the system returns to
normal.
* : There are some cases that the indicators stay on
until the vehicle is driven after the system returns to
normal.
* *: There are some cases that the indicators go off
automatically when the system returns to normal.
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18,51,52, or 53:
The indicators stay on until the vehicle is driven after
the system returns to normal.
(cont'd)
19-43
BACK
VSASystem Components
The memory can hold up to 10 DTCs. However, when
the same DTC is detected more than once, the more
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore,
When the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is
memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are indicated intheorder they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore,
the memorized DTCs cannot be cancelled by
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified
procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA
indicators go off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When the system detects. a problem, theVSA
modulator-control unit shifts to the fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing a kickback
at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-
control unit is functioning.
The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump
motor operation during regular diagnosis when the
vehicle is driven over 10 mph (15 km/h) and at
19 mph (30 km/h) the first time after the ignition
switch is turned ON (II). You may hear the motor
operate at this time and feel some vibration, but it is
normal.
Brake Fluid Replacementl Air Bleeding
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without
the VSA system (see page 19-9).
19-44
The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
of the problem is still present and the ABS, VSA
indicators, and/or trailer stability assist warning are still
on. Following a troubleshooting procedure for a code
that has been cleared but does not reset can result in
incorrect diagnosis.
1. Question the client about the conditions when the
problem occurred, i'Jnd try to reproduce the same
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
ABS, VSA indicators, and/or trailer stability assist
warning came on, such as during activation, after
activation, when the vehicle was traveling at a
certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the client
demonstrate the concern.
2. When the ABS, VSA indicators, ortrailer stability
assist warning does not come on during the test-
drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the
DTC, check for loose connectors, poor contact of
the terminals, etc. before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
the ABS, VSA indicators, and trailer stability assist
warning do not come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other control unit DTCs which
connected viaF-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
ignition switch was turned ON (II) with the VSA
modulator-control unit connector disconnected.
Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions, and
VSA codes, first., Be sure to troubleshoot those first.
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. Ifthe
i ndicator(s) of the system does not come on, check for
loose connectors or poor contacts in the terminals
related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the
indicators were on, but then went out, the original
problem may have been intermittent.
BACK
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
System)
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard.
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the on-board snapshot data, and
download any data found. Then refer to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and do the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
The HDS can read the DTC, the current data, and
other system data .
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HDS.
How to Retrieve DTCs
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC troubleshooting.
How to Clear DTCs
onthe HDS.
19-45
BACK
DTC Detection Item ASS Brake VSA VSA Trailer Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation Stability
Indicator Indicator Assist
Warnina
11 Right-front wheel sensor ON ON or OFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
(open/short to body ground/short to
power)
12 Right-front wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
13 Left-front wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
power)
14 Left-front wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(ele'ctrical noise/intermittent interruotion)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
power)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noiselintermittent interruotion)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor ON ON or OFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
oower)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
21 Difference in wheel speed ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-67)
22 Currentflow into wheel sensor input ON ,OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-68)
amplifier
25 Yaw rate sensor (sensor unit) OFF 'OFF ON ON ON s e e p a ~ e 19-68)
26 Lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor OFF OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-68)
(sensor unit)
27 Steering angle sensor (hardware) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oaae 19-69)
31 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaae 19-69)
36 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-69)
37 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-69)
38 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON JseepaJle 19-69t
*: Brake system IndIcator turns ON when three or more wheel sensors fall.
19-46
BACK
DTe Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Trailer Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation Stability
Indicator Indicator Assist
Warning
45 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see p g ~ 19-70)
46 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
47 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
48 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON Jsee oaoe 19-701
51 Motor Locked ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
52 Motor stuck OFF ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-711
53 Motor stuck ON ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-73)
54 Valve relav ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-74)
59 BRKDIAG high OFF OFF OFF OFF ON (see page 19-75)
61 IG1 voltage low ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-771
62 IG1 voltage high ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-78)
65 VSA pressure sensor (hardware) ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-78)
66 VSA pressure sensor (software) ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-79)
67 Brake pedal position switch stuck ON OFF OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-80)
(hardware)
68 Brake pedal position switch stuck OFF ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-81)
(software)
69 BRKDIAG low OFF OFF OFF OFF ON (see oage 19-83)
72 Steering angle sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oage 19-87)
73 Yaw rate sensor (Dower suoolv) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see ~ e 19-88)
74 Yaw rate sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-891
(joint failure)
(software)
81 Central processing unit (CPU) ON orOFF ON orOFF ONorOFF ON orOFF ON or OFF (see page 19-91)
84 Steering angle sensor No center point OFF OFF ON orOFF ON ON (see page 19-91)
writing
91 F-CAN communication OFF OFF ON ON ON or OFF (see page 19-92)
92 F-CAN svstem (bus-off) ON orOFF ON or OFF ON orOFF ON orOFF ONorOFF (see page 19-94)
97 VSAsvstem ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-95)
.: Brake system mdlcator turns ON when three or more wheel sensors fall.
19-47
BACK
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator- Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(bulb check) (see page 22-315).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 1. Do the Steering Angle Sensor center point writing
are stored procedure.
2. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-96).
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-315).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
indicator do not come on at the same time (see page 22-315).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair
indicator do not go off at the same time those first.
2. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-97).
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-315).
19-48
BACK
System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 46P Connector
L ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ I L
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control
number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Result
6 ORN BRKDIAG Detects brake light 6-GND Trailer stability assist brake Battery
relay operated or brake pedal voltage
pressed
8 GRV RR-GND Detects right-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
10 RED RL-GND Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
11 VEL RL+B Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
12 ORN FL+B Detects left-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
15 LT K-LiNE Communicates with -- -- --
BLU HDS
(cont'd)
19-49
BACK
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs-and Outputs for 46P Connector (cont'd)
L ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ I L
Terminal - Wire Terminal-. Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control
number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Result
28 PNK FR-GND Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
29 GRN FR+B Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
30 IT RR+B Detects right-rear -- -- --
BLU wheel sensor signal
34 GRY Fl-GND Detects left-front
-- --
wheel sensor signal
37 YEl BRK LAMP Drives the brake light 37-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
relay voltage
38 RED CANol F-CAN
--
-- --
communication
circuit
39 WHT CAN-H F-CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
40 ORN IG1 Power source for 40-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
activating the system voltage
43 BRN GND2 Ground for the VSA 43-GND At all times Continuity to
modulator-control ground
unit
44 IT +BSOl Power source for the 44-GND At all times Battery
GRN valve relay voltage
45 RED +BMOT Power source for the 45-GND At all times Battery
motor relay voltage
46 BlK GND1 Ground for the pump 46-GND Atal! times Continuity to
motor ground
19-50
BACK
System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel sensors, the steering angle sensor, and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. TheVSA
modulator-control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TeS, VSA, TSA, and brake assist with the brake pressure of each wheel
and the engine torque.
VSA PARKING
BRAKE BRAKE
FLUID PEDAL
OFF BRAKE
LEVEL PosmON
SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH
I I I T
I
PCM
l
..
""'
.VSA off switch signal
..

VSA control enable/disable

-Throttle open angle signal
<Engine revolutfon signal
position signal
dicator drive signal I YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
I
switch signal
er request signal ACCELERATION
SENSOR
-Yaw rate signal
I
WHEEL SENSOR
I olateral/longitudlnal acceleratfon signal
I F
ERING
ANGLE
I
Wheel rotation pulse signal
SENSOR
r SHAWD l r TPMS l
CONTROL CONTROL
UNIT UNIT
1---
:t
J
torque control request

lowpressu
.control mode signal signal
'II

,.
re
I
CONTROL UNIT
I
-SOlenoid control Brake pressure VSA MODULATOR
-Mo1or control signal CONTROL UNIT
I
MODULATOR UNIT
I
Communication via F-CAN
(cont'd)
19-51
BACK
ABS Features
Anti-lock control
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability ofthe vehicle is reducedifthe frontwheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
Main Control
SLIP RATE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the vehicle
speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the
wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
CONTROL UNIT
r"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. - .. ,
L.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ..J
19-52
BACK
EBO Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance with the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel sensor signals, the control unit uses
the modulator to control the rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel speed,
the VSA modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator.
As the rear wheel speed increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit increases
the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very rapidly.
While this is happening, kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.
REAR WHEEL
BRAKE PRESSURE
TCS Features
WithoutEBD
With EBD under HEAVY LOAD
at REAR WHEELS
With EBD under LIGHT LOAD
at REAR WHEELS
FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends an engine torque control request to the PCM to slow the spinning
wheel and keep traction.
DRIVING POWER
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAKE FORCE
I
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
(cont'd)
19-53
BACK
VSA System Features
Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
Understeer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear inside wheels
Controls the engine torque when accelerating
19-54
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite
to the turning direction
The brake increases the yaw rate toward
the turning direction
The throttle control effect:
reduces vehicle speed
increases cornering force
BACK
Brake Assist Features
Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake
system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
If during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
threshold in less than a certain amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Brake Pedal
Effort Reduced
: ~
Pressure
Panic Stop with Brake Assist
I
I
I
I
I Panic Stop without Brake Assist I
Pressure ~ .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
Threshold h...,.....,...,.....,"""';::;;1<-+ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
Time
Threshold
Normal Stop
Time
(cont'd)
19-55
BACK
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the VSA NO (normally open)
solenoid valve, the VSA NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the pump, the pump motor, and the
damping chamber.
The hydraulic control has three modes of ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Pressure adding mode is a combination of at TCS, VSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
Mode
Pressure
intensifying
mode
Pressure
retaining
mode
Pressure
reducing
mode
Pressure
intensifying
mode (VSA)
i
i
FL
i IN
i
i
i
i
RR
MASTER CYUNDER
RL FR
MODULATOR UNIT
i '
, RESERVOIR RESERVOIR I
1.._--------------_ .. _-----------------------------------________________________ -'
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMAU Y OPEN)
OUT: OUTLET SOLENO)D VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
VSANO VSANC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid
Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
open closed open closed Master cylinderfluid is pumped out to
the caliper.
open closed closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
and outlet valves.
open closed closed open Caliper fluid flows through the
outlet valve to the reservoir.
The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to
the master cylinder'.
closed open open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
by pump with motor through VSA
NC valve to the caliper.
Caliper fluid pressure exceed
master
..
*: The motor Will continue running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control IS finished with the first
pressure reducing mode.
19-56
BACK
Trailer Stability Assist Features
While towing a trailer, factors, such as a lane change, inappropriate tongue weight, and crosswind, can cause trailer
sway. This may also cause the vehicle to sway. The trailer stability assist helps stabilize the vehicle, using the same
system as VSA (VSA modulator-control unit and sensors). With signals from each sensor, the trailer stability assist
detects when trailer sway affects the vehicle, and then reduces vehicle speed while stabilizing the vehicle. The rear
brake lights automatically turn on when the trailer stability assist activates.
Without
Trailer
Stability
Assist
With
Trailer
Stability
Assist
Vehicle yaw rate
,
Increase vehicle yaw rate. ..' I,
, ,.,'
Trailer :.'
col)frdt""".:" ';';:'." "';s:/'
;",'/:'." ", h'
.. " .'.'
" .<" .!)
, .. ;'{P J Control complete
19-57
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDEJI.HOODRISE BOX
BAmRV
No. 1212llAl

No. 2 140 AI
No. 11120 AI No. 3 AI
No. 11 115 AI
@
ABSINDICATOR
@
VSA INDICATOR
@
VSAACTIVA1l0N INDICATOR
@

MULTJ.lNFORMAll0N
DiSPlAY
19-58
LTGRN
RED
IGNmON SWITCH

WHT PNK
IGI
IGI HOTIn ON lUI
and START nlll
BRAKE PEDALPOSmON Swm:tI
CIosod: Brakepedalpnssed

WHT - LTGRN
RED
RED
r
BLK
G501
UNDERDASH
RJSE/R8.AY BOX
AS
YAW RATE-IATERALJ
LONGIIUDINAL
ACCELERA110N SENSOR
X20
C5
ORN
WHT------'-...,
RED-'----...,

G506
LTGRN
RED
ORN
GRN
WHT
LTGRN
WHT

REO
PCM
ORN
ORN

:-------+-+
AS LTGRN
LTBLU -------
DATA LiNK
CONNECTORIDLeI
6
WHT
14
REO
BRAKE FLUID PARKING
LEVEL SWITCH BRAKESWITCH LTBLU
Closed: Lowfluid Closed: Parking
16
<J +B
WHT
BLK
BLK
BLK
G302 G503
BACK
LTGAN 1===71
-_'_ -_ -_ '_-_ -_ -_ -:_ -_ -_ -_ -_ -_ -_ -_-_ -_ -_ RED
----- RED
ORN
------GRN
ORN
tJ
"
4 ,
WIlT
-----" 2 "
RED
1
IlK
!
6
G5II6
ORN

WIlT
-----
RED-----
LTBLU
12
r
ORN
FltB
34
GRY
Fl-GND
29
mHSENSOR r
GAN
IIItB
28
PNK

30
r
LTBLU
RAtB
B
GRY
-
46
IlK
GNUI
BRN
G303
IIll

ifi-
il
.:12Y
-o-:5Y
i
i
I
i
\tCi
(cant'd)
19-59
BACK
UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (12P)
YAW RATELATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR

UNDERDASH FUSE/RElAY BOX CONNECTOR X (39P)
I,
I:-
[!]
15 1717 171 EEE1
GJZI
00
1,611717171201
0
vl/I/132IZI3413SI
0
Lr\
I 36 I 37
II:!!JZI
lPCONNECTOR
I,
I:-
5P CONNECTOR
1,121/14161
VSA OFF SWITCH
5P CONNECTOR
L,f52m
6
J
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
tr
WHEEL SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (24P)
DATA UNK CONNECTOR (DLC) PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) BRAKE UGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
19-60
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short
to Body Ground/Short to Power)
Is ore 22 indicated with ore 11, 13, 15, and/or
17 at the same time?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 3.
again.
Is ore 11, 13, 15, and/or 17 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector. Check for a loose
connection at G303. Refer to intermittent failures
7. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
Are their connections OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Reconnect the connector and retest..
8. Check that the appropriate wheel sensor is properly
mounted (see page 19-104).
DTC ~ ~ i a t e Wheel Sensor
11 Right-front
13 Left-front
15 Right-rear
17 Left-rear
Is the wheel sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Reinstall the wheel sensor, and check the
mounting position (see page 19-104) .
connector.
(cont'd)
19-61
BACK
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
respectively (see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal
+8 GND
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
No. 29 No. 28
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 12 No. 34
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No. 30 No.8
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No.11 No. 10
RL-GND (RED) RL +B (VEl)

RR-GND (GRV) FL +B (ORN)
8 8 101112 16
=
Is there 0.1 V or more?
the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel sensor .
NO-Go to step 13.
19-62
DTC Terminal
+8 GND
No.29 No. 28
No.12 No. 34
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No.10
FL-GND (GRV)
RR +B (L T BLU)
FR+B(GRN)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
15 .. Disconnectthe appropriate wheel sensor 2P
connector.
=
DTC Appropriate Terminal
+8 GND
No. 29 No. 28
No. 12 No. 34
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No. 10
RL-GND (RED) RL +B (VEL)
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
RR-GND (GRV) FL +B (ORN)
6 8
FL-GND (GRV)
RR +B (L T BLU)
FR +B (GRN)
Q
-=- -=
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor .
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor
(see page 19-104) .
17. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel
sensor +B and GND terminals (see table), then
measure the resistance between the same
terminals and reverse the positive and negative
. tester probes.
DTC . Appropriate Terminal
+8 GND
No. 29 No. 28
No. 12 No. 34
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No. 10
FR +B (GRN)
RR +B (LT BLU)
FL-GND (GRV)
Is the resistance infinity (ohmmeter may read OL)
in both directions?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
19-63
BACK
18 .. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P
connector.
19. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
between appropriate wheel sensor 2P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2, then measure resistance
between the same terminals and reverse the
positive and negative tester probes.
WHEEL SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
'-----{QI----'
Terminal side of. male terminals
Is the resistance infinity (ohmmeter may read OL)
in both directions?
YES-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor
(see page 19-104) .
appropriate wheel sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit .
'9-64
20. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
continuity between the same terminals and reverse
the positive and negative tester probes.
DTe AppropriateTerminal
+8 GND
11 (Right-front) , FR+B: FR-GND:
No. 29 No. 28
No.12 No. 34
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No. 10
Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a
loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-102) and retest .
BACK
21. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P
connector.
22. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
continuity between the same terminals and reverse
the positive and negative tester probes.
OTC Appropriate Terminal
+8 GNO
No. 29 No. 28
No. 12 No. 34
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No.10
Fl-GND (GRYI
Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Repair short in the wires between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the appropriate wheel
sensor .
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor
(see page 19-104) .
19-65
BACK
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical
Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
NOTE:
If the ABS and other indicators come on because of
electrical noise, the indicators will go off when you
test-drive the vehicle speed at 10 mph (15 km/h) or
more and the noise is gone.
An incorrectly installed wheel bearing can cause one
of these DTCs.
2. Check the appropriate wheel sensor and inspect the
magnetic encoder on the appropriate hub bearing
for debris: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page
18-29).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor and
Magnetic Encoder
12 Right-front
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear
Are they installed correctly in good condition, and
free of debris?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor, hub bearing unit, and recheck by test-
driving .
3. Substitute an appropriate known-good wheel
sensor (see page 19-104).
6. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.
19-66
Is DTC 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
YES-Go to step 8 ..
NO-Replace the original wheel sensor (see page
19-104) .
9. Substitute an appropriate known-good hub bearing
unit: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page 18-29).
Is DTC 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
NO-Replace the original hub bearing unit:
Front: Replace the original front hub bearing unit
(see page 18-12) .
Rear: Replace the original rear hub bearing unit
(see page 18-29) .
BACK
DTC 21: Difference in Wheel Speed
NOTE: A wheel bearing that is installed backwards can
cause this OTC. .
1. Check all four tires for size, inflation, and wear.
Are all four tires the correct size, properly inflated,
and worn evenly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Install the correct tires, a known-good set of
tires, or set the tires to the correct pressure, and
retest by test-driving .
3. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPO in the VSA
OAT A LIST with the HOS.
Are all four the same indicated value?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reinstall or replace the wheel sensor(s)
(see page 19-104), and recheck by test-driving .
4. Check all magnetic encoders on the hub bearing
units: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page 18-29).
Are they installed correctly and in good condition?
NO-Replace the hub bearing unit(s), and recheck
by test-driving:
Front: Replace the front hub bearing unit
(see page 18-12) .
Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-29) .
19-67
BACK
DTC 22: Current Flow into Wheel Sensor
Input Amplifier
3, Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
Is OTC 22 indicated?
YES-Do the OTC 11, 13, 15, and/or 17
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
control unit 46P connector. Check for a loose
connection at G303. Refer to intermittent failures
19-68
DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor (Sensor Unit)
DTC 26: Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor (Sensor Unit)
NOTE: These code(s) will set after a test drive if the
sensor is installed incorrectly.
Is OTC 91 or 92 indicated with OTC25 or 26 at
the same time?
YES-Do the OTC 91 or 92 troubleshooting: OTC 91
(see page 19-92), OTC 92 (see page 19-94) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-Iateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor.
5. Clear the OTC with the HOS ..
6. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph
(30 km/h) or more, and go a distance of 985 ft
(300 m) or more.
Is OTe 25 or 26 indicated?
19-102) and retest..
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-Iateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor..
BACK
DlC 27: Steering Angle Sensor (Hardware)
Is DTC 91 or 92 indicated with DTC 27 at the
same time?
YES-Do the DTC 91 or 92 troubleshooting: DTC 91
(see page 19-92), DTC 92 (see page 19-94) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the steering angle sensor installation.
Is the steering angle sensor installed correctly?
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor, then do
the steering angle sensor center point write
procedure .
NO-Reinstall the steering angle sensor correctly
(see page 19-99), then do the steering angle sensor
center point writing procedure .
DlC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: ABS
Solenoid
again.
Is DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37, and/or 38
indicated?
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for a loose connection at G303 .
19-69
BACK
DTC 45, 46, 47,48: VSA Solenoid
again.
Is DTC 45,46,47, and/or 48 indicated?
(see page 19-102) .
19-70
DTC 51: Motor Locked
(15 km/h) or more, with the engine speed at
2,500 rpm or higher.
YES-Inspect G303for loose or poor connection,
then replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-102) .
BACK
DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
2. Check the No.2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.
connector.
body ground.
=
between the No.2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
NO-Install a new No.2 (40 A) fuse, then go to
step 6.
connector.
6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.2
(40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and
the VSA modulator-control unit .
(cont'd)
19-71
BACK
connector.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
loose connection at G303. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-44) .
19-72
BACK
DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON
Is the pump motor running?
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Go to step 2.
connector.
body ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
modulator-control unit and body ground (G303) .
connector.
19-73
BACK
DTC 54: Valve Relay
2. Check the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 3.
connector.
body ground.
=
between the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
NO-Install a new No. 12 (20 A) fuse, then go to
step 6.
19-7.4
connector.
body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
BACK
connector.
again.
YES-Check for loose terminals between terminal
No. 20 of the driver's under-dash fuselrelay box
connector X (38P) and in the VSA modulator-control
unit 46P connector. Check for a loose connection at
G303. If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102) and
retest .
DTC 59: BRKDIAG High
2. Check the brake lights without pressing the brake
pedal.
Are the brake fights on?
YES-Replace the brake light relay .
NO-Go to step 3.
pedal.
Are the brake fights on?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
connector.
(cont'd)
19-75
BACK
pedal.
Are the brake lights on?
YES-Go to step 9.
10. Press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more.
Is OTe 59 indicated?
YES-Go to step 12.
12. Measure the voltage between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground with the headlights OFF and ON.
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Disconnect the taillight assemblies one at a
time and recheck. If the voltage is OK, check the
taillight ground connection and then replace the
faulty taillight .
19-76
15. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P), and the
brake pedal position switch 4P connector.
16. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
connector A (49P) terminal No.8.
BKSW (L T GRN)
.--....L,.-L..L...,
YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-244) .
the brake pedal position switch .
BACK
DTC 61: IG1 Voltage Low
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Test the battery and connections.
Are the battery and battery connections OK?
YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery
terminals, and alllG1 circuit connections between
the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminal No. 40 and the under-dash fuse/relay box
No. 29 (10A) fuse. If the connections are good, go to
the Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Troubleshooting (see page 4-30) .
NO-Replace or charge the battery (see page
22-76), or repair the connections .
19-77
BACK
vsA System Components
DTC 62: IG1 Voltage High
NOTE: An overcharging a alternator can cause this DTC.
Is orc 62 indicated?
YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery
terminals. Check for a loose connection at G303. If
the connections are good, go to the Alternator and
Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 4-30) .

19-78
DTC 65: VSA Pressure Sensor (Hardware)
again.
(see page 1 9 ~ 1 0 2 .
BACK
DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Software)
Is OTe 91 or 92 indicated with OTe 66 at the
same time?
(see page 19-92), DTC 92 ~ e e page 19-94) .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnectthe brake pedal position switch 4P .
connector.
5. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-214).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6) .
9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No.8 and body ground.
=
Is there 0.1 V or more when the brake pedal is
released?
the brake pedal position switch and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-244).
14. Test-drive the vehicle at 8 mph (12 km/h) for
60 seconds or more.
modulator-control-unit 46P connector. Check for a
19-102), and retest..
NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .
19-79
BACK
DTe 67: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck
ON (Hardware)
Is DTC 91 or 92 indicated with DTC 67 at the
same time?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST
with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,
and OFF when the pedal is released?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) for
60 seconds or more.
19-80
connector.
22-214).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs,
and troubleshoot those DTCs first, if no fuel and
emissions DTCs are found troubleshoot the brake
pedal position switch signal circuit (see page
11-308) .
(see page 19-6) .
BACK
DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck
OFF (Software)
2. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box.
/s the fuse OK?
YES-Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is
blown, check for a short to body ground in the
brake pedal position switch circuit..
connector.
4. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position
switch 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Short the SCS line withthe HDS.
7. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
connector A (49P) terminal No.8.
BKSW (L T GRN)
YES-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
19-81
BACK
22-214).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
(see page 19-6) .
9. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-244).
10. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal slowly
and hard.
NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11
c
244) .
19-82
BACK
DTC 69: BRKDIAG Low
again.
4. After the VSA indicator goes off, press the brake
pedal for 3 seconds or more.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 19.
7. Remove the brake light relay.
connector.
9. Check for continuity between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and the
brake light relay 5P connector No.4.
.Q
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the brake light relay .
(cont'd)
19-83
BACK
. connector.
11. Check for continuity between the VSA mOOlJlator-
control unit 46P connector terminal No.6 and the
Q
BRK DIAG (ORN)
6 6 101112 16
2980
YES-Go to step 12.
modulator-control unit and the brake light relay .
19-84
12. Substitute a known-good brake light relay .
13. Connect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
again.
17. After the VSA indicator goes off, press the brake
pedal for 3 seconds or more.
modulator-control unit 46Pconnector. Check for a
NO-Replace the original brake light relay .
BACK
20. Remove the brake light relay.
connector.
23. Connect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector terminal No. 37 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
8 8 1 11
BRK LAMP (YEll
JUMPER WIRE
pedal.
Are the brake lights on?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 29.
26. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 37 and the
8 8 1 11
.--_______ -' BRK LAMP (YEll
Q
YES-Go to step 27.
(cont'd)
19-85
BACK
28. Measure the voltage between brake light relay 5P
connector terminal No. 5.and body ground.
=
YES-Replace the brake light relay .
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the brake light relay .
19-86
control unit 46P connector terminal No.6 and the
Q
BRK DIAG lORN)
16
BACK
DTC 72: Steering Angle Sensor (Software)
Is OTe 91 or 92 indicated with OTe 72 at the
same time?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Put the vehicle on a level surface, and center the
steering wheel spokes.
4. Check STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST
with the HDS.
With steering wheel in the straight ahead position,
is STEERING ANGLE within 5
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check for installation of the steering angle
sensor. If installation is good, do the steering angle
sensor center point writing (see page 19-100) .
5. Check for wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Is the wheel alignment within the specification?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified,
and adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and
recheck by test-driving the vehicle .
8. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-102) .
NO- system is OK at this time .
19-87
BACK
DTC 73: Yaw Rate Sensor (Power Supply)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF..'
2. Disconnect the yaw rate-Iateral/longitudi'nal
4. Measure the voltage between body ground and
yaW rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P
connector terminal No.1. .
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor .
19-88
BACK
DTC 74: Yaw Rate Sensor (Software)
NOTE: Driving on an extremely angled road can cause
this DTC.
Is OTe 97 indicated with OTe 74 at the same
time?
YES-Do the DTC 97 troubleshooting (see page
19-95) .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check that the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor is properly mounted (see page
19-100).
Is the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor, and recheck by test-driving .
5. Put the vehicle on a level surface.
7. Check the YAW RATE S in the VSA DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is it indicated within 5/s?
YES-Go to step 8.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
is the vehicle has been driven on an extremely
angled road. The system is OK at this time .
12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-Iateral/
YES-Check for loose terminal in the VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-102) and retest .
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-Iateral/

19-89
BACK
Sensor (Joint Failure)
Sensor (Software)
NOTE: Driving on an extremely angled road can cause
this DTC.
Is DTC 97 indicated with DTC 75 or 76 at the
same time?
19-95) .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check that the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor is properly mounted (see page
19-100).
Is the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor, and recheck by test-driving .
5. Put the vehicle on a level surface.
7. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in
the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it indicated within 1 m/s?
YES-Go to step 8.
19-90
Is DTC 75 or 76 indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
is the vehicle has been driven on an extremely
angled road. The system is OK at this time .
12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral!
(see page 19-102) .
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral!

BACK
OTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
again.
(see page 19-102) .
time. Check for loose terminals in the VSA
loose connection at G303 .
OTC 84: Steering Angle Sensor No Center
Point Writing
Are any orcs indicated with orc 84 at the same
time?
YES-Troubleshoot any other OTCs, and recheck .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. 00 the steering angle sensor center point writing
with the HOS (see page 19-100).
again.
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page
19-99), then do the steering angle sensor center
point writing (see page 19-100) .
time. Check for loose terminals between the
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
19-91
BACK
DTC 91: F-CAN Communication
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs. Ifthere are DTCs
present, troubleshoot them first.
again.
Is DTC 92 indicated with DTC 91 at the same
time?
19-94) .
NO-If only DTC 91 is indicated, go to step 5. If no
DTCs are indicated, intermittentfailure, the system
is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals
between the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector; the PCM
connector A (49P), and the VSA modulator-control
G303. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-44).
6. Shortthe SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the PCMconnector A (49P).
connector.
19-92
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 38, and
No. 39 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 49,
and No. 48 respectively.
--'
CAN-L (RED) I
I, 8 8 lOll ~
~ J I
I"
~
I CAN-H (WHT)
@ Q
1111 12 3 4161617 8 19 110 I.
l
1112
18iLlL 11 1Li18 1920 21
zzv Z4X zsX
2827
28 I
.....
2930 31 S2JL [L1Li36
3736 89 'r-
11
40
1
41 42 43144VI46 471461491
"'-----'
l
CAN-H (WHT) CAN-L (RED)
YES-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnectthe yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
BACK
12. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-Iateral/
ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNE;CTOR
=
/5 there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 13.
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor .
14. Check for continuity between yaw rate-Iateral/
=
YES-Go to step 15.
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and body
ground (G506) .
16. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the YAW RATE S in
the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while driving in
corners.
Are there 0 /5 indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Check the fuel and emissions DTCs (see page
11-3), and troubleshoot the indicated DTC .
No. 39 and yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.2,
and No.3 respectively.
VSA modulator-control unit .
19-93
BACK
DTC 92: F-CAN System (Bus-off)
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs. If there are DTCs
present, troubleshoot them first.
again.
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose terminals between the PCM
connector A (49P), and the VSA modulator-control
G303. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-44) .
connector.
19-94
No. 39 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 49,
and No. 48 respectively.
CAN-L (RED) I
M
I(
e 8 101112 6
~ J

CANH(WHT)
@ Q
III 12
3 4161617 819110L
1112 13 /1/ 131/118 19 20 21
zzv Z4X 26X
262728
'- 2930 31321/ /1/136
373639
r-
11
40
1
41 42 431441/146 471461491
l.....--.....J
I
CANH (WHT) CAN-L (RED)
BACK
DTC 97: VSA System
1. Check the brake system for leaks or mechanical
problems.
Is the brake system OK? (No brake fluid leakage,
no air trapped in the brake system, no brake pads
worn out.)
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the brake system, then recheck .
4. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line. Accelerate
the vehicle up to 6 mph (10 km/h), and stop, then
accelerate up to 6 mph (10 km/h).
Is DTe 97 indicated?
19-95
BACK
VSA, System Components
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and
no DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA
activation indicator.
Does VSA activation indicator go off within
2 seconds?
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector.
4. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-101).
Is the VSA OFF switch OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page
19-101) .
22-337).
6. Disconnect gauge control module connector
B (24P).
19-96
7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair short to body ground between the
gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch .
module, then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is OK,
replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-337) .
BACK
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and
VSA indicator do not go off at the same time
2. Check the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Install a new No. 29 (10 A) fuse, and
recheck .
connector.
body ground.
6 8 101112
80
Y..
=
IG1 (ORN)
YES-Go to step 6.
VSA modulator-control unit..
7. Check for.continuity between VSA modulator-
body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 8.
modulator-control unit and body ground (G303) .
(12P).
(cont'd)
19-97
BACK
No. 39 and gauge control module connector A (12P)
No.6, and No. 12 respectively.
VSA MODULATOR.CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
19-98
BACK
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-129) and the cable reel (see page 24-149).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see step 9 on page 17-26).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (8).
A
5. Replace the combination switch body assembly (e).
6. Install the combination switch in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body .
When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position (see page 24-150).
19-99
BACK
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point
Writing
NOTE: Before doing the steering angle sensor center
point writing, place the vehicle on a flat level surface,
and turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead
position while moving the vehicle.
the data link connector (DLe) (A) underthe driver's
side ofthe dashboard.
troubleshoot the DLe circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Do the steering angle sensor center point writing in
the VSA ADJUSTMENT menu with the HDS.
instructions.
6. Verify DTe 84 clears and does not return. If DTe 84
is indicated, do the appropriate troubleshooting.
19-100
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
Do not use power tools.
on page 20-107).
acceleration sensor 4P connector (A).
6x1.0mm

4. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and remove the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
(B).
6. Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
neutral position memorization (see page 15-7).
BACK
VSA Off Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover
(see page 20-119).
2. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) from the back of
the instrument panel.
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (8).
4. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch
5P connector terminal No.1 and No.2. There
should be continuity when the switch is pressed,
and no continuity when the switch is released.
5. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch
5P connector terminal No.4 and No.5. There
should be continuity at all times.
19-101
BACK
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water;'
Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevenUhe brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner box (see page 11-363).
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (A) by pulling up the lock (B); the connector disconnects
itself.
G
E
I 1 5 N m
____ (1.5 kgf.m, 11 Ibfft)
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
I
4. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit.
J
8Nm
(0.8 kgf.m, 6Ibfft)
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (e) and to the right-front (D), the left-rear (E), the right-rear
(F), and the left-front (G) brake systems.
5. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body.
6. Remove the locknuts (J), then remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
NOTE: During installation, install a new bushing (K) and new grommets (L). Otherwise, unwanted noise and
vibration may be transmitted to the vehicle.
19-102
BACK
Installation
1. Install the new bushing and new grommets. (Otherwise, unwanted noise and vibration may be transmitted to the
vehicle.)
2. Install the VSA modulator-control unit on the bracket, then install new locknuts.
3. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit.
4. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts with the specified torque.
5. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
6. Lower the lock of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
7. Reinstall the air cleaner box (see page 11-363).
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9. Do the steering angle center point write procedure (see page 19-100).
10. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, the VSA indicators, and the trailer stability assist warning goes off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS, the VSA indicators, and the trailer stability assist warning do not
come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into
the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-9).
19-103
BACK
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Remove the clip (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B).
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm

I --'-----"\
3. Remove the bolts and the wheel sensor (e).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires .
If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
come on.
19-104
BACK
Rear
2. Disconnect the wheel sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel sensor (B).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires .
If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
come on.
19-105
BACK
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Uf body maintenance is required)
or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
collision, orthe airbags may deploy.
BACK
Body
Doors Interior Trim
Component Location Index-Front Door .... 20-2 Component Location Index ....................... 20-75
Component Location Index-Rear Door ..... 20-5
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-8
Trim Removal/Installation-Door Areas ..... 20-76
* Trim Removal/lristallation-Pillar Areas ..... 20-86
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement .... 20-12 Trim Removal/Installation-Cargo Area ..... 20-90
Front Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-14 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Glass and Regulator -Rear Side Area ....................................... 20-92
Replacement ............................................ 20-16 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Sash Inner Trim -Tailgate Area .......................................... 20-96
Replacement ............................................ 20-18 Sunvisor Removal/Installation .................. 20-98
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Grab Handle Removal/Installation ............ 20-99
Replacement ............................................ 20-18 * Headliner Removal/Installation ................. 20-101
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip * Carpet Replacement ................................... 20-105
Replacement ............................................ 20-19
Front Door Outer Molding Consoles
Replacement ............................................ 20-20 * Center Console Removal/Installation ....... 20-107
Front Door Weatherstrip Center Console Rear Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-20 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-110
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement .... 20-21 Center Console Rear Trim
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ...... 20-22 Disassembly/Reassembly ..................... : 20-110
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ..... 20-26 Console Armrest Removal/Installation ..... 20-112
Rear Door Latch Replacement ................... 20-28 Center Console Latch Panel.
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation ............................... 20-113
Replacement ............................................ 20-30
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim .
Center Console Beverage Holder
Replacement ............................................ 20-114
Replacement ............................................ 20-32 Center Console Box Replacement ............ 20-115
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Center Console Side Pocket
Replacement ............................................ 20-33 Replacement ............................................ 20-116
Rear Door Rear Sash Outer Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-34 Dashboard
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Driver's Outer Dashboard Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-34 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-117
Rear Door Outer Molding Replacement ... 20-35 Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ...... 20-36 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-118
Rear Door Side Sill Seal Replacement ...... 20-37 Instrument Fascia Removal/Installation ... 20-118
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ... 20-38 Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Front and Rear Door Position Removal/Installation ............................... 20-119
I
Adjustment .............................................. 20-39
. Front and Rear Door Striker
Adjustment .............................................. 20-41
Mirrors
Driver's Dashboard Undercover
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-120
Center Upper Panel
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/
Component Location Index ....................... 20-42 Installation ............................................... 20-121
Power Mirror Replacement ....................... 20-43 Center Pocket Removal/Installation .......... 20-123
Mirror Holder Replacement ....................... 20-43 Passenger's Dashboard Trim
Rearview Mirror Replacement .................. 20-44 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-123
Glass
Glove Box Lock Cylinder Replacement .... 20-124
* Glove Box Removal/Installation ................ 20-125
Component Location Index ....................... 20-46 * Glove Box Striker Replacement ................ 20-126
Windshield Replacement ........................... 20-48 Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Rear Window Replacement ....................... 20-53 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-127
Quarter Glass Replacement ....................... 20-57 Dashboard Side Vent Removal/
Installation ............................................... 20-127
Moonroof Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal/
Component Location Index ....................... 20-63 Installation ............................................... 20-128
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 20-64 Front Defogger Vent Trim Removal/
Glass Height Adjustment ........................... 20-65 Installation ............................................... 20-128
Glass Replacement ..................................... 20-65 Column Cover Removal/Installation ......... 20-129
Wind Deflector Replacement ..................... 20-66 * Dashboard Replacement ........................... 20-130
Drain Channel Replacement ...................... 20-66 * Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Sunshade Replacement ............................. 20-67 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-134
Motor Replacement .................................... 20-69
* Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ........ 20-69
Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Assembly Replacement .......................... 20-72
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ... 20-74
Seats Fuel Fill Door
Component Location Index ....................... 20-139 Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement ......... 20-201
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Fuel Fill Door Replacement ........................ 20-202
Inspection ................................................ 20-140
* Front Seat Removal/Installation ................ 20-141 Exterior Trim
* Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly ....... 20-144 Front Bulkhead Cover Replacement ......... 20-203
* Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/ Front Grille Replacement ........................... 20-203
Reassembly ............................................. 20-146 Cowl Cover Replacement ........................... 20-205
* Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement .... 20-148 A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement ............ 20-206
* Front Seat Lumbar Support Roof Rail Replacement ............................... 20-207
Replacement .................................... , ........ 2 0 ~ 1 4 9 Roof Molding Replacement ....................... 20-208
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement ........ 20-150 Side Sill Panel Replacement ...................... 20-212
* Front Seat Cushion Cover Tailgate Spoiler Him Replacement .......... 20-213
Replacement ............................................ 20-154 Rear License Trim Replacement ............... 20-214
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation ... 20-156 Rear Gutter Cover Replacement ............... 20-215
Second Row Seat Emblem/Sticker Replacement ................... 20-216
Disassembly/Reassembly ....................... 20-158
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Fenderwell
Replacement ............................................ 20-165 Front Inner Fender Replacement .............. 20-217
Second Row Seat-back Recline
Cable Replacement ................................. 20-167
Splash Shield Replacement ....................... 20-218
Front UnQercover Replacement ................ 20-219
Third Row Seat Access Cable Front Strake Replacement ......................... 20-219
Replacement ............................................ 20-167
Second Row Seat Armrest .
Replacement ............................................ 20-168
Front Fender Fairing Replacement ........... 20-220
Left Front Splash Guard Reinforcement
Replacement ............... : ......... 20-220
Second Row Seat Armrest
Beverage Holder Replacement .............. 20-169
Rear Fender Cover Replacement .............. 20-221
Rear Strake Replacement .......................... 20-222
Second Row Seat Armrest Panel Rear Air Outlet Replacement ..................... 20-222
Replacement ............................................ 20-170
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement ..... 20-171, Openers
Second Row Seat Armrest Cover Component Location Index ....................... 20-223
Replacement ............................................ 20-178 Hood Opener Cable Replacement ............. 20-224
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation ....... 20-179 Hood Latch Replacement ........................... 20-225
Third Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly .20-180 Hood Release Handle Replacement .......... 20-226
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement .......... 20-181 Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement .............. 20-226
Third Row Seat Pivot Replacement .......... 20-182 Fuel Fill Door Actuator Replacement ........ 20-227
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Tailgate Latch Replacement ...................... 20-228
Replacement ............................................ 20-183
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Frame
Replacement ..................................... , .. .... 20-184 Spare Tire Hoist Replacement ................... 20-231
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement : ........ 20-184 Spare Tire Support Bracket ..
Bumpers
Replacement ................ : ................ .' .......... 20-231
Rear Wheelhouse Gusset Replacement .. , 20-232
Front Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-188 Cargo Lid Support Replacement ............... 20-232
Front Bumper Skid Trim Replacement ..... 20-190 Subframe Replacement ............................. 20-233
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ........... 20-190 Frame Repair Chart .................................... 20-236
Rear Bumper Skid Trim Replacement ...... 20-192
Rear Bumper Air Spoiler Replacement .... 20-193
Rear Bumper Reflector Replacement ....... 20-193
Hood
Hood Adjustment ....................................... 20-194
Hood Support Strut Replacement ............. 20-195
Hood Seal Replacement ............................. 20-196
Hood Insulator Replacement ..................... 20-196
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment ................................... 20-197
Tailgate Support Strut Replacement ........ 20-198
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement ......... 20-199
I
Doors
Compone Front Door nt Location Index-
POWER DOOR
lOCK SWITCH LASS INNER
I
SEAT D .
MEMOR W

iB" .Ji)

R
GRIP
Wo \!1 .. .
\
- PANEL. ., ...
. . IlGATE DOORval/lnstaliatlon, pag POWERTA . Remo AR
MREST COVER SWITCH e models)
(forsom. .
. P .... _.
COURTESY LIGHT .
& OR

.. POWER DO
/ / LOCK SWITCH
&j & ... . ARMREST
/
POWER WINDOW SWITCH /
WOOD TRIM ff!; SWITCH PANEL
/ SWITCH
POWER WINDOW
/
DOORGRIP COVER
SWITCH PANEL
ONTROl MUlTIPlEXC
UNIT
20-2
BACK
PLASTIC COVER
SPEAKER
DOOR SIDE SILL SEAL
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
DOOR SASH INNER TRIM
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIM
DOOR GLASS
/
DOOR OUTER MOLDING
OUTER WETHERSTRIP
, Replacement, page 20-19
~ ~ f I I
~
HINGE
(cont'd)
20-3
BACK
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
IMMOBILIZER and
SECURITY LABEL
/
GLASS
Adjustment, page 20-38
<'1',
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement,
page 20-12
SPACER
OUTER HANDLE

()Ilm 0
STRIKER
PROTECTER
Q DOOR CYLINDER
(Driver's)
LATCH CABLE RETAINER

/ ef aIIJ/ -
LATCH PROTECTER
LATCH
INNER HANDLE
INNER HANDLE CAP
20-4
BACK
Component Location Index - Rear Door
DOOR GLASS
INNER WEATHERSTRIP

WOOD TRIM
ARMREST
Z
ARMREST COVER

\
COURTEST UGHT
DOOR GRIP COVER
SWITCH PANEL
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
DOOR PANEL
page 20-22
(cont'd)
20-5
BACK
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door (cont'd)
PLASTIC COVER
20-6
DOOR SASH INNER TRIM
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
SPEAKER
DOOR REAR SASH OUTER TRIM
ADAPTER
BACK
o
/
REAR LOWER CHANNEL
STRIKER
CHILD LOCK CAP
GLASS RUN CHANNEL

GLASS
OUTER HANDLE
/
Replacement,
. page 20-26
JiQ
OUTER HANDLE
SPACER
INNER HANDLE CAP
20-7
BACK
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177 A or equivalent,
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool
set to avoid damage when removing components.
1. Using a trim tool, push on the upper hook (A) and
pivot the inner handle cap (B) on the bottom hooks
(e), then remove the cap and the screw securing
the inner handle (0).
Fastener Locations

20-8
2. Pry out the bottom edge of the grip cover (A) at the
notches with the trim tool to detach the clips and to
release the hooks (B). Then remove the cover .
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
B
B
BACK
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,
release the clips with a commercially available
trim pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-a Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The inner handle cable (8) and latch
cable (C) are connected to the inner handle (D).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 11

5. While holding,the door panel (A) away from the
door, remove the inner handle (8) from the door
panel by detaching the clips.
Fastener Locations
6. Disconnect the door subharness connector (A) and
power mirror switch connector (8), then remove
the door panel (C).
A
(cont'd)
20-9
BACK
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the latch cable fastener (A) from the inner
handle (B), and then disconnect the latch cable (C)
from the cable fastener (D). Disconnect the inner
handle cable (E) from the cable fastener (F), then
remove the inner handle.
NOTE: Check if the cable fasteners are damaged or
stress-whitened.
8. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A),
and on the driver's side, disconnect the power door
lock switch connector (B) and the seat position
memory switch connector (C).
C B A
20-10
9. Remove the screws, then remove the grip(A),
armrest assembly (B), armrest cover (C), and the
wood trim (D) from the door panel (E).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 17
BACK
10. Remove the screws (A, 8), then separate the
armrest (e), the power window switch panel (0),
and the power window switch (E).
Fastener Locations
B
B
11. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with new ones.
o Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
o The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (8) with the latch in the unlocked
position as shown.
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely.
o Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
47 mm 11.9 in.) B
20-11
BACK
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Raise the glass fully.
2. Remove the door panel (see page
3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
(A).
B
4. Remove the plug cap (8), then remove the plastic
cover (C), as needed.
NOTE: Remove the glue from the door surface. If
the plastic cover is damaged or torn, replace it.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle.
A
Replace.
20-12
6. With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle
'rod (A). '
A
A-:::::':
)
7. Driver's side: Pull side flanges (A) ofthe
retainer (8) outward, and pull the middle flange
portion (C) -of the outer casing cover (D) out, then
disconnect the cylinder cable (E) from the latch.
BACK
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
Fastener Location
~ : Bolt, 1
~
9. Remove the maintenance cap (A). Remove the bolt
securing the outer handle protector (8), then
remove the protector by releasing the hook (C).
Fastener Location
~ : Bolt, 1
~ I A
~ ~ ~ - - -
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
c
10. If necessary, cut a slot in each screwhead ofthe
special screws with a saw, remove the special
screws with a flat-tip screwdriver, then separate the
door cylinder (A) and outer handle protector (8). If
the retainer (C) is damaged, release the hooks (D),
and replace it.
NOTE: If removed, the special screws must be
replaced.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
D
11. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the
handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
(cont'd)
20-13
BACK
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle
12. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
(B), then replace it with a new one.
Replace.
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged
in properly, and that the cylinder cable and the
outer handle rod are connected securely.
Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks
operate properly.
Make sure the door handle works properly.
When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed .
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
20-14
Front Door Latch Replacement
2. Remove the door panel and inner handle (see page
20-8).
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-12).
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-12).
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer
handle (see step 6 on page 20-12).
6. Disconnect the cylinder cable from the latch (see
7. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and
remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it downward.
Fastener Location
~ Bolt, 1
~
6x1.0mm
8Nm
B
(0.8 kgfm, 6 Ibfft)
A
BACK
8. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C),
then remove the latch through the hole in the door.
Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D);
latch cable (E), and inner handle cable (F).
Fastener Locations
A Screw, 3 Screw, 1
@mmID t-
A
6x1.0mm
6Nm
(0.6 kgfm, 4' Ibfft)
F
9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
(A) by releasing the hook (B).
Fastener Location

tpxcmm> I
A
B
10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) from the latch (C).
A
B
(cont'd)
20-15
BACK
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged
in properly, and that the cylinder cable and the
outer handle rod are connected securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
20-16
Front Door Glass and Regulator
Replacement
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
(A), and remove the plug caps (8).
3. Pass the cables (C) and the harnesses (D) through
the slits (E) in the plastic cover (F),then remove the
plastic cover.
4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass
out through the window slot. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibfft)
BACK
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (8).
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Bolt, 4 D ~ : Bolt, 2
(Silver) (Black) .
C D
~
~
AUfu/
~ c O
C
6x 1.0 mm
6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
of removal, and note these items:
Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-38).
Do the power window control unit reset
Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
Make sure the power door locks, windows and
power mirror operate properly.
20-17
BACK
Doors
Front Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips fastening the
front door sash inner trim (A).
Fastener Locations
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to
release the hooks (8, C) from the door,glass
opening flange of the door sash.
4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with new ones .
Push the hooks and clips into place securely.
20-18
Front Door Sash Outer Trim
Replacement
1. Lower the glass fully.'
2. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
-1 Pull back the door weatherstrip (8), then
remove the screw.
-2 Pull the trim up to release the hook (C) from the
door. Take care not to damage the door glass
outer weatherstrip (D).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

B
make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in
the door sash securely.
BACK
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE:
If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it with '8 new one because it will bend.
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to scratch the door.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components.
2. Remove the screw from the rear edge of the door.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 2
~
3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer
weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (8) catches the inside edge of the window
slot.
4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A)
away from the door, then pull the front end of it out
from under the power mirror (8).
5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of
removal.
20-19
BACK
Doors
Front Door Outer Molding
Replacement
NOTE:
If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with
a new one because it will bend during removal.
1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-43).
2. Remove the door outer molding (A):
-1 Push out the rear clip (B).
-2 While removing the upper edge ofthe door
outer molding from the edge ofthe sash, cut
the double-sided adhesive tape (C) with a
utility knife, then remove the molding.
B
c
3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive
tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Install new door outer molding in the reverse order
Push the clip and the adhesive portions into place
securely.
Make sure the upper and lower sides of the
molding are catching the edges of the sash
properly.
20-20
Front Door Weatherstrip
Replacement
NOTE: .
Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A Bolt. 1 B 1>: Clip. 28. C 1>: Clip. 2
(Left: Pink) (White)
@= :t
WOOI
~ I
D 1>: Clip. 1
~ I
E
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door
weatherstrip (E).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
the door checker mounting bolt before
installation .
BACK
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door .
Use a'clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 12
iii
"A
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of
Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
Push the clips into place securely.
20-21
BACK
Doors,;,
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation
Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent,
1. Using a trim tool, push on the upper hook (A) and
pivot the inner handle cap (B) on the bottom hooks
(e), then remove the cap and the screws securing
the inner handle (0).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2

20-22
D
2. Pry out the bottom edge of the grip cover (A) at the
notches with the trim tool to detach the clips and to
release the hooks (B). Then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations

Om I
A B
B
BACK
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,
release the clips with a commercially available
trim pad remover. .
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-3 Stating at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The inner handle cable (B) and latch
cable (C) are connected to the inner handle (D).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or the
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 11
JiJ
5. While holding the door panel (A) away from the
door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door
panel by detaching the clips.
Fastener Locations
6. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A)
and courtesy light connector (B), detach the
harness clips (C), then remove the door panel (D).
(cont'd)
20-23
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the latch cable fastener (A) from the inner
handle (B), and then disconnectthe latch cable (C)
from the cable fastener (D). Disconnect the inner
handle cable (E) from the cable fastener (F), then
remove the inner handle.
NOTE: Check if the cable fasteners are damaged or
stress-whitened.
20-24
8. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then
remove the wood trim (B), the door grip (C),
armrest cover (D) and the armrest assembly (E)
from the door panel (F).
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 17
~
A
A
~
B
BACK
9. Remove the screws (A, B) and release the pins (C),
then separate the armrest (0), the power window
switch panel (E), and the power window switch (F).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 3 B : Screw, 3
10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
replace themwith new ones.
Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) with the latch in the unlocked
position as shown.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely.
Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
47 mm 11.9 in.)
20-25
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement
3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (8).
4. Remove the rear plug cap (e), then remove the
plastic cover (D), as needed.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A).
20-26
A
Replace.
6. Remove the maintenance cap (A) with a clip
remover, then disconnect the outer handle rod (8)
from the outer handle (e).
7. Remove the screws (A, 8) securing the latch (e),
then lower it.
Fastener Locations
mnn t- I
BACK
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
Fastener Location
~ : Bolt, 1
~
I
~ _ 0 -::-'
~ ~
~ ~ A
--Sx1.0mm
9. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle
protector (A), then remove the protector by
releasing the hook (8).
Fastener Location
~ : Bolt, 1
@)ni
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
B
10. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the
handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
11. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
(8), then replace it with a new one.
Replace.
12. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Make sure the door locks operate properly.
Make sure the door handle works properly.
20-27
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-26).
4. Remove the screws (A, 8) securing the latch (C),
then lower it.
Fastener Locations
@mlmD I
\
5. Detach the rod fastener {see step 5 on page 20-26).
6. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer
handle (see step 6 on page 20-26).
20-28
7. Remove the bolt, then remove the collar (A) from
the rear lower channel (8).
Fastener Location
8. Remove the latch (A) out from between the rear
lower channel (8) and the door. Take care not to
bend the outer handle rod (C), latch cable (D), and
inner handle cable (E).
B
BACK
9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
(A) by releasing the hook (8).
Fastener Location
1
Omrmrol
A
I
B
10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (8) from the latch (e).
note these items:
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
20-29
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands,
2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove
the plug caps (C).
F
3. Pass the cables (D) and the harnesses (E) through
the slits (F) in the plastic cover (H), then remove it.
4. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Release the glass from
the holder (B), then remove it from the regulator (C),
and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 2
@1I1111)) I
20-30'
-:":::===:::=:79l.. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
5. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed.
Loosen the nut (B), and'remove the bolt (C) and
collar (D) from the rear lower channel (E).
Fastener Locations
B : Nut, 1 C ~ : Bolt, 1
) $=mm I
BACK
6. Pull the rear lower channel (A) forward, then
remove the nut portion (8) from the door. Release
the channel from the glass (C), then pull the
channel upward to remove it through the window
slot. Take care not to scratch the door.
B
7. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass
run channel (8).
8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
the door.
9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (8).
Fas1ener Locations

(Silver)
@mm
D Bolt, 2
0):1
6x1.Omm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
6x1.Omm
9.8Nm
(1.Okgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
10. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
(cont'd)
20-31
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator
11. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
12. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
Adjustthe position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-38).
Do the power window control unit reset
Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles .
.. When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
20-32
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement
NOTE:
avoid damage when removing components .
rear door sash inner trim (A).
Fastener Locations
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to
release the hooks (8) from the door glass opening
flange of the door sash.
note these items:
Push the hooks and clips into place securely.
BACK
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement
1. Lower the glass fully.
door weatherstrip (A) from the door sash outer trim
(8).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 5

B
3. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
...!J Pull back the door weatherstrip (8), then
remove the screw.
-2 Pull the trim up to release the hooks (e) from
the door. Take care not to damage the door
glass outer weatherstrip (D).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

C
D
note these items:
o Make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in
replace them with newones.
o Push the clips into place securely.
20-33
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Rear Sash Outer Trim
Replacement
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Remove the door rear sash outer trim (A).
-1 Pull back the door weatherstrip (B), then
remove the screw.
-:2 Pull the trim up to release the hooks (C) from
the door. Take care not to damage the door
glass outer weatherstrip (D).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~
c
E
make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in
20-34
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip
Replacement
NOTE:
If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it with a new one because it will bend.
2. Remove the screws from both side edges of the
door.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer
weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window
slot.
BACK
4. Remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (A).
A

5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of
removal.
Rear Door Outer Molding
Replacement
NOTE:
If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with
a new one because it will bend during removal.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
1. Release the rear clip (A).
B
B
c
I
2. While removing the upper edge of the door outer
molding (8) from the edge of the sash, cut the
double-sided adhesive tape (e) with a utility knife,
release the front clip (D), then remove the molding.
3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive
tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Install a new door outer molding in the reverse
Push the clips and the adhesive portions into
place securely .
Make sure the upper and lower sides of the
molding are catching the edges ofthe sash
properly.
20-35
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE:
1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B [> : Clip, 34
(Left: Yellow)
D [>: Clip, 1
(Black)

E [>: Clip, 1
I
C [> : Clip, 5
(White)
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door
weatherstrip (F).
20-36
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
the door checker mounting bolt before
installation.
BACK
Rear Door Side Sill Seal Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door .
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip. 8
j[J
.2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of
20-37
BACK
[loors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Check the weatherstrip and glass run channel for Rear
damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Remove these items:
Door panel:
- Front door (see page 20-8)
- Rear door (see page 20-22)
Plastic cover:
- Front door (see step 3 on page 20-16)
- Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-30)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Front
c
20-38
B
6x1.0mm
c
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft)
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten
the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run
channel (B) evenly.
BACK
7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
o Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).
o Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (8).
o Do not use a nozzle.
o Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door (C).
12 mm (1/2 in.)

A

I 0.5 m (19 in.)

300 mm (12 in.)
8. Attach the plastic cover, making sure it is sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water, then
install the door panel:
o Front door (see page 20-8)
o Rear door (see page 20-22)
Front and Rear Door Position
Adjustment
NOTE: Check for a fl,ush fit with the body, then check for
equal gaps betWeeh:the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body
edges are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
o Pad a floor jack (8) with shop towels (C), then use
the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
o On the front door: Remove the front inner fender
(see page 20-217). Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (D) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
o On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
Front door
D
8x 1.25 mm
30Nm
D
8x1.25mm
F
8x 1.25 mm
30Nm
(3.1 kgfm,22 Ibfft)
F
8x1.25mm
30Nm
(3.1 kgfm,22 Ibfft)
30 Nm (3.1 kgfm,22 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-39
BACK
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment (cont'd)
Rear door
A
E
8x1.2Smm
30Nm
F
8x 1.25 mm
30Nm
(, ... gl.m.",,] IIC-------_
F
E
8x1.2Smm
8x1.2Smm
30 Nm
30 Nm (3.1 kgf.m, 22 Ibfft)
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with
the adjusting bolts (PIN 90102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly,
and move the door up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it's
flush with the body.
20-40
4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
rear of the doors flush with the body.
5. Apply touch-Up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,
and around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
BACK
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (8).
c
B
8x 1.25mm
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the
striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (e). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door
against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
20-41
BACK
Mirrors
MIRROR HOLDER
Without automatic dimming mirror
20-42
REARVIEW MIRROR
POWER MIRROR
/ Replacement, page 20-43
With automatic dimming mirror

J COVER BASE

UPPER COVER
\ MIRROR HARNESS
" COVER

REARVIEW MIRROR
BACK
Power Mirror Replacement
1. Lower the door glass fully.
'Front door panel (see page 20-8)
Front door sash inner trim (see page 20-18)
3. While holding the mirror (A), pull back the door
weatherstrip (8) as needed, then remove the nuts.
Fastener Locations
.:Nut,3

4. Remove the mirror (A). Take care not to scratch the
door.
5. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal.
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE: When prying with a flat-tipped screwdriver,
wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Adjustthe mirror fully to the upward position .
2. Insert a long, thin flat-tipped screwdriver under the
mirror holder (A). Slide the tip of the screwdriver
between the mirror holder and the actuator (8).
A
3. Quickly twist the screwdriver to separate the mirror
holder from the mirror actuator.
4. Insert the screwdriver further under the mirror
holder and twist it again.
NOTE: Do not pry up on the mirror holder to
separate the two parts, as this can cause either the
mirror glass or actuator to break.
(cont'd)
20-43 BACK
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement (cont'd)
5. Separate the mirror holder (A) from the actuator (B).
Disconnect the mirror defogger connectors (C)
from the heater pad terminals.
D
E
6. Reconnect the mirror defogger connector.
D
7. Align the tabs (D) on the mirror holder so they line
up on each side of the actuator tabs (E). Carefully
push on the mirror holder until it locks into place.
8. Check the operation of the actuator.
20-44
Rearview Mirror Replacement
Without automatic dimming mirror
1. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90 0.
2. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the
bottom of the windshield to detach it from the
spring (B) in the mount (C).
3. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.
4. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of
removal.
BACK
With automatic dimming mirror
1. Disconnect the connector (A).
c
2. Slide the mirror harness upper cover (B) forward,
then remove the mirror harness cover (e) from the
mirror base (D).
3. Using a T20 TORX bit, loosen the screw, then slide
the rearview mirror (A) rearward and off the mount
(B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

6x 1.Omm
4Nm
10.4 kgfm, 3 Ibfft)
4. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX
screw, and apply medium strength type liquid
thread lock to it.
o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
20-45
BACK
Glass
WINDSHIELD
UPPER FASTENER, 2
(SeH-adhesive-type, glass side)
(Required for replacement or reinstallation)
~
~ Q
REAR WIPER SEAL
20-46
l ~ R
DASHBOARD SEAL
LOWER RUBBER DAM '
/
REARWINDOW
LOWER RUBBER DAM
FASTENER,4
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
(Required for replacement or
reinstallation)
BACK
FRONT SEAL
QUARTER GLASS
ULEV STICKER
20-47
BACK
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
with a piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat.
When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for
cutting the adhesive. For details, follow the
instructions of the tool manufacturer.
Cowl cover (see page 20-205)
Rearview mirror
- Without automatic dimming mirror (see page
20-44).
- With automatic dimming mirror (see page
20-45).
A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-78)
Roof moldings (see page 20-208)
2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge ofthe
windshield (8). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make
alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner
(see page 20-101). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
it.
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside
the vehicle atthe corner portion ofthe windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
20-48
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the windshield (8) as possible to
prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
(C) around the entire windshield.
c
Cutting positions .
7. Carefully remove the windshield.
BACK
S. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a
thickness of about 2 mm (O.OS in.) on the bonding
surface around the entire windshield opening
flange:
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the
body.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
keep oil, grease and water from getting on the
clean surface.
10. Ifthe old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty
knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the clips the
rubber dam, and the dashboard seal from the
windshield. Clean the inside face and the edge of
the windshield with isopropyl alcohol where new
adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding
surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease.
11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), lower rubber dam
(B), and clips (C) with adhesive tape to the inside
face ofthe windshield (D) as shown:
Be sure the rubber dam and clips line up with the
alignment marks (E) .
Be sure the convex portion (F) of the left and right
clips toward left.
Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
Rubber dams adhesive tape:
Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Clips adhesive tape:
Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
E
F
11 mm
(0.43 in.' B

I
o
InSa'de B---.,.

32mm
(1.31 in.'
32mm
(1.31 in.'
27.Smm
(1.08 in.'
12mm
(0.47 in.'
\
1
62.Smm
(2.46 in.'
1S2.Smm
(6.0 in.'
(cont'd)
20-49
BACK
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12. Attach the dashboard seal (A) with adhesive tape to
the inside surface of the windshield (B) as shown.
13. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the
upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to
touch the windshield where adhesive will be
applied.
Molding adhesive tape:Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
A
20-50
14. Attach the molding upper seal (A) with adhesive
tape to the inside surface of the molding (B) as
shown.
_ :Apply primer here.
Inside
15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the
edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the
windshield where adhesive will be applied.
16. Remove the windshield.
BACK
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
Apply glass primer to the molding.
Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed
up.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from primed surfaces.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
11 mm
(0.43 in.) B
~ ~ s : ~ e
A/
11mm ~ c
(0.43 in.)
Inside / ---A
B,
11 mm
(0.43 in.)
"'A
18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Letthe
primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
Do not apply body primer to any remaining
original adhesive on the flange.
Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
primer sponges.
_ :Apply body primer to exposed paint as shown.
19. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the
adhesive cartridge as shown.
8 mm (0.31 in.)
(cont'd)
20-51
BACK
G'lass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
around the edge of the windshield (B) between the
dams (C) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the
adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass
primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
2 mm (0.08 in.)
,+Ir- A
l::.:rn.) ~
H
8 mm (0.31 in.)
2mm
A ~
T
d

B
B
20-52
21. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly
push on the windshield until its edges are fully
seated on the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an
hour until the adhesive is dry.
22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
23. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas,
and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant.
Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
windshield installation. Ifthe vehicle has to be used
within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
things for 2 to 3 days: ' '
Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .
Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
BACK
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines
and terminals.
Tailgate spoiler trim (see page 20-213)
Tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-96)
Rear window wiper motor (see page 22-306)
2. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors
(A).
A
3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make
alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
edges of the tailgate. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the
corner portion of the rear window. Push the piano
wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a
piece of wood.
5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the rear window (8) as possible to
prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut
through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear
window.
Cutting positions
6. Carefully remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
20-53
BACK
l a ~ s s
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
7. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire rear window
opening flange:
00 not scrape down to the painted surface of the
bonding.
Remove the fasteners from the tailgate.
8. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a sponge
keep oil, grease and water from getting on the
surface.
9. If a new rear window is to be installed, install the
rear wiper seal (A) to the rear window (B) with its
alignment mark (C) being aligned with the mark (0)
on the rear window.
=======:====l\
B
10. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, check for
a damaged rear wiper seal, and replace it with a
new one.
11. Ifthe old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fasteners and the rubber dams from the rear
window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the
rear window with alcohol where new adhesive is to
be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept
free of water, oil and grease.
20-54
12. Attach the rubber dam (A), fasteners (B, C), and
spacer (0) with adhesive tape to the inside face of
the rear window (E) as shown. Before installing the
rubber dam, apply primer to the area where the
adhesive tape will be applied to the inside face of
the rear window:
Be sure the fasteners and rubber dam line up
with alignment marks (F) .
Be careful not to touch the rear window where
Rubber dam adhesive tape:
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Fasteners adhesive tape:
Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.)
Spacer adhesive tape:
Width 6.5 mm (0.26 in.)
~ :Apply primer here.
F
,
E' E ~
4mm ~ A / F C
(0.18 in.) (0.18 in.) A
BACK
13. Attach the fasteners (A, B) with adhesive tape to the
tailgate as shown.
Fasteners adhesive tape:
Fastener Locations
A [> : Fastener, 2 B [>: Fastener, 2
1]
14. Set the rear window (A) in the opening, and center
it. Make alignment marks (B) across the rear
window and body with a grease pencil at the four
points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear
window where adhesive will be applied.
B A
15. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
the rear window (A) along the edge of the rubber
dam (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with
gauze or cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (e) on the rear window as a
guide, apply the glass primer to both side
portions of the rear window.
Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
and do notget body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials; away
from the primed surface.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
4mm

___ /A
12mm / 12mm
(0.47 in.' (0.47 in.'
Inside
I

12mm
(0.47 in.' '"
/ A
B
(cont'd)
20-55
BACK
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
primer to any exposed paint around the flange
where new adhesive will be applied. Let the body
Be careful not to mix up glass and body primer
sponges.
_ :Apply body primer to any exposed paint as shown.
20mm
(0.79 in.) 20mm
(0.79 in.)
17. Cut a "v" in the endofthe nozzle (A) on the
8 mm (0.31 in.)
20-56
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) on the
rear window (B) around the edge of the lower
rubber dam (C) as shown. With the printed dots (D)
on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive
to both side portions of the quarter glass.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
2 mm (0.08 in.)
-+1- A
13mm
(0.51 in.) ..
f-j
8 mm (0.31 in.)
Inside
6mm
(0.24 in.) /B
A/
I
i B
2mm /
(0.08in.) ;/
C
c
BACK
19. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks you
made in step 14, and set it down on the adhesive.
Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an
hour until the adhesive is dry.
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel
dampened with alcohol.
rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, and let the rear window dry, then seal with
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
things for 2 to 3 days:
Quarter Glass Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.
1. Remove the quarter pillar trim (see page 20-85).
2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
edges ofthe body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push
a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap
each end around a piece of wood.
3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the
quarter glass (8). If necessary, cut the front seal
with a utility knife.
(cont'd)
20-57
BACK
Glass'
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
4. Carefully cut through the adhesive (A) at the rear
corner portion ofthe quarter glass (8) with a utility
knife. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano
wire (C) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold
the piano wire as close to the quarter glass as
possible to prevent damage to the body, and
carefully cut through the adhesive around the
entire quarter glass:
If the quarter glass will be reinstalled, take care
not to damage the molding (D);
Ifthe molding is damaged, replace the quarter
glass, molding, and clips (E) as an assembly.
If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass
can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to
step 9).
C E
From inside
Cutting positions
5. Carefully remove the quarter glass.
20-58
C
6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire quarter glass
opening flange:
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
bonding.
Remove the clips and fastener from the body.
keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the
surface.
8. Ifthe old quarter glass will be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, any
broken clips from the quarter glass. Clean the
inside face and the edge of the quarter glass with
isopropyl ,alcohol where new adhesive will be
applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free
of water, oil, and grease.
BACK
9. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and
either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light
coat of primer, then apply butyl tape (A) to the
molding (B) as shown. Attach the clip (C) with
adhesive tape to the inside face of the quarter glass
(D):
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
adhesive will be applied .
Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape.
Clip adhesive tape: Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
D ~
B ~ t A
D ~
Inside
300mm
(11.8 in.)
14mm C
(0.55 in.)
______ A
D
10. Attach the front seal (A) with adhesive tape (B) onto
the molding (C).
Seal adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
_ :Apply primer here .
(cont'd)
20-59
BACK
Glass
11. If the old quarteJ glass will be reinstalled (and
either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body
holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the
quarter glass upright in the opening, and make
alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and
body with a grease pencil at the three points shown.
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
12. Remove the quarter glass.
20-60
13. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B)
as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
cheesecloth:
With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D)
as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front
portion of the quarter glass.
Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass,
and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the
quarter glass is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from primed surfaces.
_ :Apply body primer here.
12mm
(0.47 in.' 5
" 1 mm
_ X (0.59 in.'
"mm ,In.,d. ~ ~
(0.47 in.' ..... """" D!iJ fIl
s/ / ,IS" LfI'A
D
BACK
primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
8e careful not to mix up the body and glass
primer sponges.
_ :Apply glass primer to exposed paint as shown.
15. Cut a "V" in the end ofthe nozzle (A) on the
8 mm (0.31 in.'
20mm
(0.79 in.'
to ensure continuous delivery. Putthe cartridge in a
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
around the edge of the front seal (8) and molding
(C) as shown. With the glass primer (D) you applied
in step 13 on the quarter glass (E) as a guide, apply
the adhesive to the upper and lower corner
portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive
within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer.
Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
2 mm (0.08 in.'
-H-
13mm I ~ A
(0.51 in.' Ii
h-i
8 mm (0.31 in.'
A
D
(cont'd)
20-61
BACK
Glass
17. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (8)
over the opening, align the.clips or the alignment
marks (e) made in step 11 ,and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for an hour
until the adhesive is dry.
B
surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
things for 2 to 3 days:
20-62
BACK
Moonroof
WIND DEFLECTOR
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-65
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check,
page 20-74

DRAIN CHANNEL
4fIlP -
_ Replacement,
. _______ page 20-72
. I STOP DRAIN CHANNEL ROD
/ I 'if .------ SUNSHADE REAR STOP
GLASS BRACKET 4Jl df)
page 20-72 ...----- DRAIN TUBE
Replacement, ____ REAR MIDDLE
CABLE REAR DRAIN TUBE
Replacement, F Replacement,

FRONT DRAIN TUBE
MOTOR

REAR DRAIN TUBE
20-63
BACK
Moonroof
Water leaks from moon roof 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or drain
channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise from moonroof Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
Motor noise from moon roof 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Moonroof glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.
and motor does not turn (glass 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
can be moved with 5 mm 3. Check for a run down battery.
hexagonal wrench) 4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
Moonroof glass does not stop at 1. Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
proper flush closed position 2. Check glass height adjustment.
Moonroof glass moves in a Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
jerking motion (moves 40 mm
(1.57 in.), stops for 0.4 seconds,
and repeats)
During auto close operation, Check for dirt and debris in the track. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
moon roof glass reverses when 22-357).
no object is trapped
Moonroof glass moves, but Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
there is no AUTO function
20-64
BACK
Glass Height Adjustment
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass
weatherstrip (8), to within 0+1/-1 mm (0+0.04/
-0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following
adjustment:
1. Remove the bracket cover.
2. With a T25 TORX bit, loosen the bolts on each side,
and adjust the glass (A).
Fastener Locations
Bolt, 2
Qmmi
d Front
3. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side.
Glass Replacement
1. Tilt the glass all the way up.
2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
3. Pry out the cap (A), remove the screw (8), release
the hooks (C), and remove the bracket cover (D).
Repeat on opposite side. Use a T25 TORX bit to
remove the bolts (E) from the glass brackets (F) on
both sides.
Fastener Locations
B Screw. 2 E Bolt. 4
Q)mm
1
6X1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibf.ftl
--------'E LJa

4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not
damage the roof panel.
5. Install the glass in the reverse order of removal,
the glass mounting bolts before reinstallation.
Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-357).
Adjust the glass height alignment.
6. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the
moon roof into the moonroof frame, and exit
through the drains.
20-65
BACK
Moonroof
Wind Deflector Replacement
1. Open the glass fully.
2. Disconnect the deflector springs (A) from the
bushings (8) on both sides.
3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
A
4. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.
5. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-357).
20-66
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove the glass (see page 20-65).
2. Move both glass brackets (A) to the position where
the moonroof normally pivots down, and remove
the screws securing the drain channel (8).
A
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
Omi
B
3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (8)
ofthe drain channel slider by pulling the drain
channel forward.
BACK
4. Remove the drain channel (A).
5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,
Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a
faint click is heard .
Check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-65).
6. Reset the rrioonroof control unit (see page 22-357).
7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-66).
2. Slide the sunshade all the way forward.
3. Disconnect both drain channel rods (A) from both
glass brackets (B) by pulling the front of them
inside, then remove the rods from both drain
channel sliders (C) by lifting them up.
4. Slide both drain channel sliders (A) forward until!
they contact both glass brackets (B).
A
B
(cont'd)
20-67
BACK
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the screws, then remove both sunshade
slider spacers (A).
Fastener Locations
A
6. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (8). Do not damage the
sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4

A
B
7. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
20-68
8. Remove the sunshade (A).
9. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and
both rear sunshade base sliders (8).
10. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,
and check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-65).
11. Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
spray.
BACK
Motor Replacement
Roof console (see page 22-239)
Roof console bezel (see step 2 on page 20-101)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the
connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove
the motor (8).
Fastener Locations
6x1.0mm
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-357).
Check the motor operation.
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
Headliner (see page 20-101)
Moonroof glass (see page 20-65)
With rear entertainment system: Rear controller
and display (see page 23-215)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the
motor connector (A), and detach the moonroofwire
harness connector (8) from the moonroof frame.
B
3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A).
A--___
(cont'd)
20-69
BACK
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement (cont'd)
4. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the
bolts and release the rear middle drain tube clip (8),
then remove the frame.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 8

6x1.Omm
9.8Nm
Front Drain Tube
A
Front door sill trim (see page 20-76)
Kick panel (see page 20-76)
Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-120)
Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-127)
6. Passenger's side: Remove the glove box damper
from the pivot on the glove box (see step 3 on page
20-125). While holding the glove box, release the
glove box stop on each side from the dashboard by
pushing them in, then lower the glove box (see step
6 on page 20-126).
20-70
7. Driver's side: Remove the bolts, then move the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A) as needed.
Fastener Locations
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
8. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, tie
a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull
the front drain tube (8) down out of the A-pillar.
Leave the string in the pillar to use when
reinstalling the drain tube.
BACK
Rear Drain Tube
Rear side trim panel (see page 20-92)
Left side: Subwoofer box (see page 23-94)
10. Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (A),
then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar.
Leave the string in the pillar to use when
reinstalling the drain tube.
11. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order
Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
and drain valves using compressed air .
When installing, tie the string that was left in the
pillar to the top end of the new drain tube and
pull it up into the roof.
Check the frame seal.
Clean the surface of the frame.
properly.
When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
After all parts are installed, including the
headliner, reset the moonroof control unit
(see page 22-357).
Adjust the glass height alignment (see page
20-65).
Upward
r
B
spray.
20-71
BACK
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-69).
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
Sunshade (see page 20-67)
Moonroof motor (see page 20-69)
3. Disconnect and remove the rear middle drain tube
(A).
A
4. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the
screw securing the sunshade rear stop (A), and
remove it from the frame (B). Release the rear hook
of the slide stop (e) by pushing it forward, and
pivot the stop up.
Fastener Location
20-72
5. Remove the slide stop (A) and the drain channel
slider (B).
6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link
lifter (B) back, then slide the glass bracket back with
the link lifter.
BACK
7. Slide the glass bracket (A) along with the cable (B)
back, then remove them from the frame (e).
8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse
Damaged parts should be replaced.
Apply molybdenum grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows.
Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both
link lifters are parallel, and in the tilt-up position.
Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame
and glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-74).
After reinstalling the motor reset the moonroof
control unit (see page 22-357).
/
..
..
20-73
BACK
Moonroof
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-101).
2. Closing force check:
With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (8), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
o Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to
stop it.
o Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing force: 200-290 N (20-30 kgf, 44-66Ibf)
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the
moonroof motor (see page 20-69), then check:
o The gear teeth and the inner cable for breakage
and damage. Ifthe gear teeth are broken, replace
the motor. If the inner cable is damaged, remove
the frame (see page 20-69), and replace the cable
(see page 20-72).
o Do the moonroof control unit input test (see page
22-354). If the motor fails to run or doesn't turn
smoothly, replace it.
o The opening drag. Go to step 4.
20-74
4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
required to open the glass using a spring scale (8)
as shown.
5. Ifthe load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
o The side clearance and glass height adjustment
(see page 20-65) .
For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
6. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-357)
after reinstalling the moonroof motor.
BACK
Interior Trim
GRAB HANDLE
page 20-99
KICK PANEL
page 20-76
FRONT DOOR
SILL TRIM
page 20-76
FRONT SIDE
OUTER TRIM
page 20-76
SUNVISOR
HEADLINER
A-PILLAR TRIM
FRONT DOOR OPENING SEAL
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING SEAL
QUARTER PILLAR TRIM
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
page 20-92
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM
page 20-92
TAILGATE TRIM PANEL
page 20-96
TAILGATE UPPER TRIM
page 20-96
REAR TRIM PANEL
page 20-90
CARGO FLOOR LID
CARGO REAR TRIM PANEL
TOOL SET HOLDER
REAR SIDE OUTER TRIM
Removal/lnstallation, page 20-77
REAR DOOR SILL TRIM
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
20-75
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Front Door Sill Area
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (8) from the kick
panel (C) and 8-pi.llar lower trim (D), and pull the
front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F), then remove it from the front door
opening seal (G).
Fastener Locations
F 1>: Clip, 4
~ Y
A
C
B
2. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (H) up to
detach the clips (I), then remove the trim.
20-76
3. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick
panel (8).
-1 Pull out the door opening seal (C) as needed
from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door
opening flange.
-2 Remove the clip (E).
-a Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the
clip (F), then remove it.
Driver's
Fastener Locations
E I> : Clip, 1 F 1>: Clip, 1
1i ofY'1
C
Passenger's
Fastener Locations
E I> : Clip, 1 F 1>: Clip, 1
(Gray)
BACK
4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) from the
trim hooks (8) and around the front door opening
flange, then remove the seal.
5. Install thetrim in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Rear Door Sill Area
NOTE:
1. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (8) from the 8-pillar
lower trim (e) and rear side trim panel (D), and pull
the rear door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F, G), then remove it from the rear door
opening seal (H).
Fastener Locations
F [>: Clip, 2 G [> : Clip, 1 J [>: Clip, 3
~ .. ~ I
E
A
2. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (I) up to
detach the clips (J), then remove the trim.
(cont'd)
20-77
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door
Areas (cont'd)
3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the
trim hooks (8) and around the rear door opening
flange, then remove the seal.
.B ......... --- \
" .. .. II \\
I
I I
I
note these items:
o Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
20-78
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar
Areas
A-pillar Trim
NOTE:
o Follow the A-pillar trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbags to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
o Put on gloves to protect your hands .
Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
o The upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) consists of a
resin grommet (8) and a metal pin (e). The groove (0)
in the grommet secures it to the body panel (E). The
shoulder (F) on the grommet is broken during
removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
when the trim is reinstalled.
A
D
F
-----E
BACK
1. Pull the front door opening seal away from the
A-pillar as needed (see' step 4 on page 20-77).
2. Hit the surface of the A-pillar trim (A) with a rubber
mallet. The clip is located under the top of the A-
pillar trim near the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark
(B). Hitting the trim surface breaks the shoulder (C)
on the grommet (D) and pushes the pin (E)"and
grommet againstthe body (F).
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one
when the A-pillar trim is reinstalled.
B
,..
'\S\
D
._-+
3. Pull the top of the A-pillar trim (A) back by hand to
remove the pin (a) from the grommet (C) remaining
in the body (D).
NOTE: The edge of the headliner (E) lies betWeen
the A-pillar trim and the guide bracket (F) of the
trim. The A-pillar trim shouldn't be pulled out too
far at a time, or the guide bracket might catch the
headliner and bend it.
B
F
F
._._+
D
(cont'd)
20-79
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
4. Remove the A-pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the
remaining clips, then pull the trim up from the
dashboard (8).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 2

B
5. Remove the grommet from the body.
NOTE: The upper grommet must be replaced with a
new one because the grommet is damaged during
removal.
6. Ifthe side curtain airbag has been deployed,
replace the A-pillar trim with a new one (see page
24-134).
20-80
7. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not been deployed,
check the A-pillar trim (A) and note the following:
To prevent the side curtain airbags from
deploying improperly and possibly causing
injury, inspect the A-pillar trim and replace it if it
has any of these types of damage:
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the A-pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip and
pin seating surfaces (8)
- Damaged guide bracket (C)
Replace the upper grommet with a new one
because it will be damaged during removal.
Check if the clips (D) are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if replace, replace them with new
ones.
D
BACK
8. Before installing the A-pillar trim (A), carefully
remove the grommet (B) from the pin (C) on the
upper clip.
9. Check the overlap between the headliner and
A-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page
24-136).
10. Carefully reinstall the grommet (A) on the pin (B)
and seat them on the A-pillar trim (C) as shown.
11. Reinstall the A-pillar trim (A).
-!J Insert the bottom of the trim into the
dashboard (B).
, "
-2 Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (0), the other clips (E) and the pin (F)
into holes (G) in the A-pillar, then lightly push
the trim into place.
NOTE:
Make sure that the side curtain airbag tether
(H) is below the clip.
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down under the clips and ribs.
Apply pressure to the aJ7eas ofthe trim on the
upper clip until these clip fittings are felt. If
you push too hard, the clip will be damaged,
and it will not hold the trim properly.
Make sure the upper clip portions of the trim
don't come off the body by tugging on the
trim.
Fastener Locations
E 1>: Clip, 2
j[J
F
12. Reinstall the front door opening seal.
20-81
BACK
Interior Trim
B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim
NOTE:
Front door sill trim (see page 20-76) .
Rear door sill trim (see page 20-77)
Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4
on page 20-77)
Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-78)
2. Slide the front seat fully forward.
20-82
3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).
-1 Detach the lower clips by pulling the middle of
the trim back by hand.
-2. While releasing the upper tabs (B), pull the
upper portion of the trim back to release the
upper hooks (e).
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
jJ
4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor (see page
24-4).
BACK
5. Pull the bottom of the B-pillar upper trim (A) back
by hand to detach the lower hooks (B).
Fastener Location
[>: Clip, 1

D
6. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the
B-pillar upper trim. Pull the trim down to release
the upper hooks (C) from the side curtain airbag
B-pillar bracket (D).
7. Pass the front seat belt (A) lower anchor out
through a hole in the slider (B), then remove the
B-pillar upper trim (C).
(cont'd)
20-83
BACK
Interio'r Trim
note these items:
o Replace any damaged clips (A) with newones.
o Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the B-pillar upper and lower trim and all clips on
the trim with new ones (see page 24-134).
o To prevent the side curtain airbags from
injury, inspect the trim and replace it if it has any
of these types of damage:
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
upper trim (B) and the upper hook (e), and any
stress-whitened areas in the upper part of the
trim
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
lower trim (D), and any ~ e k g e s in the part
(E) fitted with the B-pillaruppertrim
- Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clips
seating surface (F)
o Replace any damaged parts with newones.
o Make sure the top ofthe trim overlaps with the
headliner correctly (see page 24-136).
o Make sure the pin (G) on the front seat belt
shoulder anchor adjuster (H) and the hole (I) on
the back ofthe slider are engaged when
installing the B-pillar upper trim.
o Make sure the trim hook is installed into the side
curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely.
o Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
o Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Trim Inspection
20-84
Slider engagement with shoulder anchor adjuster
H
BACK
Equipment Program; call
Quarter Pillar Trim
NOTE:
Follow the quarter pillar trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
The upper clip in the quarter pillar trim (A) consists of
a grommet (8) and a pin (e). The grommet expanded
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the
trim is reinstalled.
Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-78)
Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page
20-199)
Second row seat belt lower anchor (see step 3 on
page 24-7)
Seat belt exit e-pillar cap (see step 4 on page
24-7)
Seat belt exit D-pillar cap (see step 3 on page
24-13)
With power tailgate: Left tailgate side trim
(see page 20-96)
2. Remove the upper portion of the rear side trim
panel, as needed (see page 20-92).
3. With power tailgate: Use a flat-tip screwdriver (A)
to pry the clip (8) downward from the power
tailgate rod (e), then release the rod from the pivot
bracket (D) and push it in the quarter pillar trim (E).
Do not remove the clip from the rod.
A
B
(cont'd)
20-85
BACK
Interior Trim
4. Hit the surface of the quarter piilar trim (A) with a
rubber mallet. The clip is located in the top of the C-
pillar near the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark (B).
Hitting the trim surface breaks the projections (C)
on the pin (D) and pushes it into the grommet (E)
and against the body (F).
when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled.
A
c
20-86
5. Hit the surface of the quarter pillar trim (A) with a
rubber mallet. The clip is located in the seat belt
exit D-pillar cap opening. Hitting the trim surface
breaks the projections (B) on the pin (C) and pushes
it into the grommet (D) and against the body (E).
when the quarter pillar is reinstalled.
B
BACK
6. While pulling the upper portion of the rear side trim
panel (A) back, detach the clips, then release the
lower portion ofthe quarter pillar trim (B) away
from the body.
NOTE: The quarter pillar is still fastened with two
upper clips located in the middle of it.
Fastener Locations
C>: Clip, 5
JiJ
7. While pulling the lower portion of the quarter pillar
trim (A) away from the body, hit the surface of the
quarter pillar trim (A) with a rubber mallet. The clip
is located in the rear of the hollow (B) in the trim.
Hitting the trim surface breaks the projections (e)
on the pin (0) and pushes it into the grommet (E)
and against the body (F).
8. Slide the upper clip portion (A) of the quarter pillar
trim (B) up at a 45
0
angle to remove the trim from
the clip. The clip can be removed once the trim is
clear.
(cont'd)
20-87
BACK
Interior Trim
9. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A). If equipped with
the premium sound.system, disconnect the O-pillar
speaker connector (8). If equipped with power
tailgate, pull the power tailgate rod (C) out of the
slit (0) in the quarter pillar trim.
D
10. Hit the remaining upper clip (A) with a rubber
mallet. Hitting the clip breaks the projections (8) on
the pin (C) and pushes it into the grommet (0) and
against the body (E).
B
20-88
11. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the quarter pillar trim and all the clips on the trim
with new ones (see page 24-134).
12. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the upper clips (A) from the removed quarter pillar
trim (8) and discard them. Then checkthe trim and
note the following:
To prevent the side curtain airbags from
injury, inspect the quarter pillar trim and replace
it if it has any of these types of damage:
- Any cracks,deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the quarter pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clip
seating surfaces (C, 0)
If any of the lower clips (E) are damaged or
stress-whitened, replace them.
Replace the upper clips (A) with new ones.
BACK
13. Before installing the quarter pillar trim (A), whether
replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove the
new clips (B).
14. Check the overlap between the headliner and
quarter pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it
(see page 24-136).
15. Carefully reinstall the clips (A) to the quarter pillar
trim (B). Make sure that the grommet (C) is nearest
to the top of the pin (0) as shown.
B
16. Reinstall the quarter pillar trim (A).
A
-1 If equipped with the premium sound system,
reconnect the O-pillar speaker connector (B).
-2 If equipped with power tailgate, pass the
power tailgate rod (C) through the slit (0) in the
quarter pillar trim.
-a Place the trim over the C-pillar/O-pillar (El, and
fit its upper clip (F), and all ofthe other clips (G)
into holes (H) in the body, then lightly push the
trim into place.
NOTE:
Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down ul"!der the clips and ribs.
Apply pressure to the areas of the trim on the
upper clips until these clip fittings are felt. If
you push too hard, the clip will be damaged,
and it will not hold the trim properly.
Make sure the upper clip portions of the trim
don't come off the body by tugging on the
trim.
Fastener Locations
G 1>: Clip,S
~
(cont'd)
20-89
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar
Areas (cont'd)
17. With power tailgate: Set the clip (A) .on the original
position, then reattach the power tailgate rod (8) on
the pivot bracket (C) by pushing the rod onto the
pivot.
C
18. Reinstall all ofthe removed parts.
2 0 ~ 9 0
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo
Area
NOTE:
1. Remove the cargo floor lid (A).
2. Detach the hooks (A) from the rear side trim panel
(8), and pull the rear trim panel (C) up by hand to
detach the clips (D, E), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D [>: Clip, 3
(Gray)
V
B
E [>: Clip, 1
~ I
C
A
B
BACK
3. Turn the lock knobs (A) 90 0, then remove the tool
set holder (8).
A
4. Remove the screws, then remove the cargo lid
hinges (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
A
5. Remove the cargo rear trim panel (A).
note these items:
20-91
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area
Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Rear door sill trim (see page 20-77)
. Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-78)
Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page
20-199)
Cargo floor lid (see step 1 on page 20-90)
Reanrim panel (see step 2 on page 20-90)
Cargo lid hinges (see step 4 on page 20-91)
Cargo rear trim panel (see step 5 on page 20-91)
2. Raise the third row seat up, and remove the clips
from under the third row seat.
Fastener Locations
20-92
3. Fold the third row seat-back forward.
4. Pry out the cover (A) and remove the bolt (8), then
remove the tie down hook (C) (two places).
B
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
5. Right side: Pry out the lid (A) and remove the screw
in the pull pocket.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~ : O I O j I
A
BACK
6. Open the cargo hook (A). Pry out the cover (B) and
remove the screw.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~ W O > I
/; L=
~ \ ~ .
7. Pull out the front upper edge of the rear side trim
panel (A) by hand to release the tabs (B) and hooks
(e) from the quarter pillar trim (0).
D
C
8. Pull out the rear upper edge of the rear side trim
panel (A) by hand to release the tabs (B) and hooks
(e) from the quarter pillar trim (0).
B C
9. Pull the rear side trim panel (A) back by hand to
detach the clips (B, e).
Left side
Fastener Locations
B [>: Clip, 7
(Gray)
C [>: Clip, 2
. , I
A
(cont'd)
20-93
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area (cont'd)
Right side
Fastener Locations
B 1>: Clip, 6
(Gray)
~
10. Pull the rear side trim panel (A) up, then remove it.
On the left side, disconnect the rear accessory
socket connector (C).
C
20-94
11. If necessary, remove the bolt (A), and on the left
side, remove the active damper unit mounting
bolts (8), then remove the rear side trim panel
support bracket (C).
Fastener Locations
A ~ Bolt, 1 B ~ B o l t
Left side, 2
note these items:
Make sure the accessory socket connector is
plugged in properly.
Push the clips, hooks and tabs into place securely.
BACK
Armrest Replacement
1. Remove the rear side trim panel.
remove the armrest (8).
Left side
Fastener Locations

Right side
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 9

B
A
A
3. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
Speaker Grille Replacement
1. Remove the rear side trim panel.
remove the speaker grille (8).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 8

\:';.
A
B
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
20-95
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area
NOTE:
1. Remove the tailgate upper trim panel (A).
B
C
-1 Detach the hooks (8) and tabs (C) from the left
tailgate side trim (D) and right tailgate side trim
(E).
-2 Pull the tailgate upper trim panel back by hand
to detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4
J
C
C
B
C
20-96
2. Remove the left tailgate side trim (A) and the right
tailgate side trim (8).
-1 Pull out the top of the side trim to detach the
clips.
-2 Detach the tabs (C) and hooks (D) from the
tailgate lower trim panel (E).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4
~
C
D
A
D
E
B
BACK
3. Remove the tailgate pull pocket (A).
-1 Pry the hooks (8) with a trim tool.
-2 Carefully pull the edge of the tailgate lower
trim panel (C) just beside the tailgate pull
pocket by hand, and push out the inside hooks
(D).
-a Pull down the upper edge of the pocket and
release the lower tabs (E).
-4 With power tailgate: Disconnect the power
tailgate close switch connector (F).
4. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (A).
-1 Detach the clips (8) beside the tailgate latch.
-2 Pull down the panel to detach all of the clips (C).
Fastener Locations
8, C 1>: Clip, 16
(Gray)

D 1>: Clip, 1
;i;1
5. Install the trim and panel in the reverse order of
o Make sure the power tailgate close switch
connector is plugged in properly.
20-97
BACK
Interior Trim
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the headliner.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
interior trim.
When using a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Using a trim tool, release the tabs (A) of the
sunvisor cap (B) from the bracket (e).
A
20-98
2. Remove the sunvisor (A).
-1 Removethe screws.
-2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder
(B).
-a Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector
(e).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2

B

----
5xO.8mm
3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (A), and
turn the holder (B) 90 0, then pull it out.
------
BACK
4. Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed (see page
24-134), replace the sunvisor with a new one.
5. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not deployed, to
preventthe side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
removed sunvisor and replace it if it has any cracks
or damage:
Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (A)
Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (8)
Any cracks in the sunvisor base (e)
Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (D)
6. Install the sunvisor in the reverse order of removal,
and make sure the vanity mirror light connector is
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the caps
(8) by prying up at the notches (e) with a small flat-
tip screwdriver.
c
B
2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (8),
then remove the grab handle (e).
(cont'd)
20-99
BACK
Interior Trim
Grab Handle Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Using a pair of pliers, remove all of the clips (A) by
pinching its hooks.
A
4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
grab handle with a new one (see page 24-134).
5. lfthe side curtain airbag has not deployed, to
prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
removed pieces and replace them if they have any
of these types of damage:
Any cracks or damage in the grab handle (A) .
Any cracks or stress-whitening in the caps (8).
B
20-100
6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (8), then
install the caps (C) fully into the clips.
c
7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (8), and
push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into
place securely.
BACK
Headliner Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner.
interior trim.
Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides (see step
7 on page 24-4)
B-pillar lower trim, both sides (see page 20-82)
B-pillar upper trim, both sides (see page 20-82)
Quarter pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-85)
Sunvisors, both sides (see page 20-98)
Grab handles, four places (see page 20-99)
Rear individual map light (see page 22-240)
Rear ceiling light (see page 22-241)
Center second row seat belt cover (see step 1 on
page 24-10)
RES display cover (for some models) (see page
23-215)
Roof console (see page 22-239)
2. Remove the screws, then remove the roof console
bezel (A).
Fastener Locations

B
3. If necessary, remove the remaining roof console
clips (A) from the body and the moonroofframe (8).
(cont'd)
20-101
BACK
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the roof wire harness connector (A).
5. With rear entertainment system: Disconnect the
rear entertainment system wire harness connectors
(A) and detach the harness clips (B) from the left A-
pillar (C).
20-102
rear entertainment wire harness connectors (A)
from the rear controller and display (B).
A
7. Lower the headliner (A). The vehicle with rear
entertainment system is shown; and without rear
entertainment system is similar.
-1 Remove the front door opening seals (B), rear
door opening seals (C), and tailgate
weatherstrip (D) from each roof portion.
-2 With the help of an assistant, detach the rear
clips by pulling the rear portion ofthe
headliner down.
-a With the help of an assistant, release the
fasteners (E) by lowering the
Fastener LQcations
I> : Clip, 6
AJ
E
B
BACK
8. With the help of an assistant, pull the headliner (A)
along with the roof wire harness and rear
entertainment system wire harness (for some
models) out through the tailgate opening. Do not
bend the liner. Bending the liner will crease and
damage it.
A
9. If necessary, detach the hooks, then remove the
roof side pad (A).
Fastener Locations
1>: Hook, 2
dbi
A
10. If necessary, remove the cushion tapes (A)
fastening the roof wire harness (B) to the headliner
(C), detach the harness clips (D) and release the
harness from the harness protector base (E), then
remove them from the headliner.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Cushion tape, 8 D 1>: Clip, 5

C
11. With rear entertainment system: If necessary,
remove the cushion tape (A) fastening the rear
entertainment system wire harness (B) to the
headliner (C), detach the harness clips (D) and
release the harness from the harness protector
base (E), then remove them from the headliner.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Cushion tape, 5 D 1>: Clip, 2

B E
(cont'd)
20-103
BACK
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
12. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,
o Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the headliner and removed trim pieces with new
ones (see page 24-134).
o To prevent the side curtain airbags from
injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them
if they have any of these types of damage:
- Any crease or tears in the headliner (A)
- Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (8)
- Any damages around the grab handle holes (C)
or sunvisor holes in the headliner
- Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (D)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft
(E)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F)
- Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror
base (G)
- Any fasteners (H) and clip bases (I) which have
come off the headliner
o When installing the grab handle, push on the
handle against the bracket (J) until the clips (K)
snap into place securely.
o Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
o Replace the removed cushion tape with new
ones.
o Check that both sides of the headliner are
securely attached to the trim.
o Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces
correctly (see page 24-136).
o When reinstalling the headliner through the
tailgate opening, be careful not to fold or bend it.
Also, be careful not to scratch the body.
20-104
Headliner
"'@
~
c
j)
Grab handle
B
Sunvisor
BACK
Carpet Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
interior trim pieces.
Front seats, both sides (see page 20-141)
Second row seats, both sides (see page 20-156)
Third row seats, both sides (see page 20-179)
Front door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-76)
Rear door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-77)
Kick panels, both sides (see step 3 on page 20-76)
20-127)
Steering joint cover (see page 17-25)
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the footrest
plate (B).
A
3. Remove the nut (A). Using a 6 mm socket wrench,
release the clip (B), then remove the footrest (e).
Fastener Locations
A : Nut, 1 B I> : Crip, 1
@ lirl
6x1.0mm
6Nm /
(O.6kgfm,
4lbfft) C
4. Remove the clips fastening both rear side trim
panels (A). Pull out the edge of the carpet (B) from
under the panels.
Fastener Locations
(cont'd)
20-105
BACK
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the clips fastening the edge of the carpet
(A) from both front door sill areas and both rear
door sill areas. Pull out the edge of the carpet from
under the B-pillar lower trim (B).
Fastener Locations
6. Pull out the middle edge of the carpet (A) from
under the center console (B), driver's/passenger's
console trim (C), and console rear trim (D).
D
20-106
7. Release the fastener (A) on the front edge of the
carpet (B), then pull back the carpet from under the
dashboard.
B
A
8. Remove the carpet.
9. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet.
Make sure the seat harnesses (A) are routed
correctly.
Slip the slits (B) in the carpet over the rear heater
duct (C) and the third row seat heater duct (D).
Slip the carpet under the center console, both B-
pillar lower trim, and both rear side trim panels
properly.
B
c
BACK
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation
KTC trim tool set SQJATP2014 *
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard,
and related parts.
audio and the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and
wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
Driver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
Passenger's dashboard trim (see page 20-123)
Console rear trim (see page 20-110)
Front seats, both sides (see page 20-141)
4. Detach the clips by pulling the console lower trim
(A) back by hand, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 2

A
5. : Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the driver's center
console trim (e), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
A [>: Clip,S

6. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the passenger's
center console trim (e) out, and pull it forward to
release.its pin (D) from the center console, then
remove it.
Fastener Locations .
A [> : Clip, 5 B [> : Clip, 2

(cont'd)
20-107
BACK
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation (cont'dl
7. From driver's side, disconnect the parking pin shift
connector (A) and shift lock solenoid connector (8).
Remove the rear blower motor relay mounting bolt
(e), second row seat heater relay mounting bolt (D)
(for some models), and ground bolt (E).
Fastener Locations
c Bolt, 1 o Bolt, 1 E ~ Bolt, 1
~

6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)
8. From passenger's side, disconnect the console
subharness connector (A).
20-108
9. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit
connector (A), and detach the harness clips (8).
A
B
10. Open the beverage holder lid. Pull the beverage
holder inner case (A) up by hand to detach the clips,
then remove it.
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
IJ
11. Shift the shift lever into the R position, then
disconnect the AfT shift cable (see step 5 on page
14-309).
BACK
12. Pull back the carpet (A) as needed, then remove the
bolts (B, C) securing the center console (D).
Fastener Locations
B : Bolt, 2 C : Bolt, 2
()m
ax 1.25 mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
C
6x 1.0mm
9.a Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
13. Pull back the carpet (A) as needed. Slide the center
console (B) backward to detach the clips and pins
(C) from the dashboard, lift the console up, then
carefully remove it.
Fastener Locations
I c
A
14. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,
Push the clips intoplace securely.
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the
dashboard wire harness is not pinched.
properly.
Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and
Set the clock.
Check for any DTCs that may have been set
during repairs, and clear them.
If necessary, adjust the shift cable (see page
14-311).
(see page 17-28).
20-109
BACK
Consoles
Center Console Rear Trim Removall
Installation
NOTE:
Use the appropriate tool from the. KTe trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components;
Take care not to scratc.h the center. console and
related parts.
1. Starting at the top, gently pull out the console rear
trim (A) to detach the clips (8), then pull out the trim
to detach the remaining clips (e), and to release the
lower tabs (D), disconnect the connectors, then
remove the trim:
Rear heater-Ale passenger's control panel-unit
connector (E)
With second row seat heater: Second row seat
heater switch connectors (F)
Without rear entertainment system: Accessory
power socket connector (G)
With rear entertainment system: Auxiliary jack
connector (G)
Fastener Locations
B, C [> : Clip, 7

o
F
E
A
note these items:
Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.
20-110
Center Console Rear Trim
Disassembly IReassembly
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the trim .
1. Remove the center console rear trim (see page
20-110).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center
console duct (A).
remove the HVAe trim (8).
Fastener Locations

A
BACK
4. Remove the screws, then remove the rear upper lid

Fastener Locations

I
5. Remove the screws (AI and detach the clips (B, el,
then remove the rear console vent/vent trim (0).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 B [> : Clip, 4
Om>
C [>:Clip, 1

B
6. Remove the screws, then remove the rear console
vent (A) from the rear console venttrim (B).
Fastener Locations

I"
7. Without rear entertainment system: Remove the
screws and release the hooks (A), then remove the
accessory power socket panel (B).
Fastener Locations

I
A
8. Reassemble the rear trim in the reverse order of
20-111
BACK
Consoles
Console Armrest Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the console.
20-110).
2. Starting at the rear, pull out the wood panel (A) to
detach the clips, then ,remove it.
Fastener Locations
20-112
3. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest (A)
from the space between the console frame (B) and
the console latch trim (e).
Fastener Locations

Om""'1 A

4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,
. replace them' with new ones .
BACK
Center Console Latch Panel
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the console.
1. Remove the center console armrests from both
sides (see page 20-112).
2. Remove the screws (A), and starting at the rear,
pull out the center console latch panel (B) to detach
the clips (e), then remove it .
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 C 1>: Clip, 8
T I B
~ C ~ /
A
3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
Center Console Panel Removal/
Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the console .
2. Remove the center console latch panel (see page
20-113).
3. Pull the center console panel (A) out to detach the
clips (B, e). Disconnect the accessory power socket
connector (D) and seat heater switch connectors (E),
then remove the panel.
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 2
T
C 1>: Clip, 7
'VI
(cont'd)
20-113
BACK
Consol'es
Center Console Panel Removall
4. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the
console pocket (A) from the console panel (8).
Fastener Locations
o Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
20-114
Center Console Beverage Holder
Replacement
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the console.
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim toll set to
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-113).
3. Remove the console beverage holder (A) and
passenger's console panel (8) as an assembly:
-1 Detach the console subharness connector (e).
-2 Remove the screws (D) securing the console
beverage holder to the AfT gear position
indicator panel (E) and console frame (F).
-3 Remove the screws (G) securing the
passenger's console panel to the console
frame.
-4 Pull out the passenger's console panel to
detach the clips (H).
Fastener Locations
D G ~ : Screw, 4 HI>: Clip, 2
~ I
BACK
4. Remove the screws, then remove the center
console beverage holder (A).
Fastener Locations

B
5. If necessary, separate both rails (A) from the outer
case (B), then remove the shutter.
Fastener Locations

B
A
6. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of
Center Console Box Replacement
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
* AVailable through the American Honda Tool and
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the center console
2. Remove the beverage holder and passenger's
console panel as an assembly (see page 20-114).
3. Remove the screw (A), and detach the clips (B, C)
by pulling the driver's console panel (D) back, then
remove if from the console frame (E).
Fastener Locations
A Screw, 1 B 1>: Clip, 2 C 1>: Clip, 2
Om>
(cont'd)
20-115
BACK
Consoles
Center Console Box Replacement
(cont'd)
4. Remove the Hands Free Link control unit (see page
23-273).
5. Remove the screws, and if equipped with rear
entertainment system, disconnect the AC power
outlet connector (A), then remove the center
console box (B) from the console frame (C).
Fastener Locations
~ ~ 4
6. Install the box in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
If equipped, make sure the AC power outlet
20-116
Center Console Side Pocket
Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's center console trim (see
2. Remove the screws, then remove the console side
pocket (A) from the passenger's center console trim
(B).
3. Separate the box (A) and rail (B), then slide the
console side lid (C) out.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 5
~
c
4. Install the pocket in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Dashboard
Driver's Outer Dashboard Trim Removal/Installation
Equipment Prowam; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts.
1. Open the front door, and remove the driver's
dashboard side cover (A).
Pull out the front door opening seal (8), as
needed.
-2 Gently pull out the front edge of the side cover,
and pry the rear edge with a trim tool to
release the hooks (e), then remove the side
cover.
2. Gently pull out the driver's outer dashboard trim
(A) to detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
D
B
3. Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (8),
VSA OFF switch connector (e), and if equipped,
headlight washer switch connector (D), then
remove the panel.
note these items:
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
20-117
BACK
Dashboard
Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the driver's inner dashboard trim (A).
-1 Gently pull out along the edge beside the audio
unit by hand to release the lower hooks (8) and
the clip (C).
-2 Detach the upper clips (D).
Fastener Locations
note these items:
Position the hooks first on installation, then move
the clips into place.
20-118
Instrument Fascia Removall
Installation
NOTE:
parts .
1. Tiltthe steering column down, and telescope it out.
2. Remove these items.
Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)
inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
3. Remove the instrument fascia (A).
-1 Gently pull out the bottom to release the clips
-2 Disconnect the select/reset switch connector
(8).
Fastener Locations
B
4. Install the instrument fascia in the reverse order of
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
BACK
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover Removal/Installation
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 .
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts.
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
1. Adjust the steering column upward.
o Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)
o Driver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).
-1 Remove the screw (8).
-2 Pull out the bottom of the driver's dashboard
lower cover to release the clips (e).
-a Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor connector (D) and the air hose (E).
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 1 C I> : Clip. 9
~ ~
E D
4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
o Make sure the humidity/in-cartemperature
sensor connector is plugged in properly, and
the air hose is connected properly.
20-119
BACK
Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Undercover
KTetrimtool setSOJATP2014 *
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A).
-1 Turn the lock knob (8) 90 0.
-2 Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the
clip.
-a Disconnect the footwelllight connector (e) and
ambient light connector (D), then detach the
harness clip (E).
-4 Pull the undercover away to release the pins (F)
from the holders (G).
Fastener Location
1>: Clip, 1

G
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of
Replace the clip if it's damaged.
Push the clip into place securely.
Make sure that each connector is plugged in
properly.
Make sure the pins on ofthe cover are securely
seated.
20-120
Center Upper Panel Removall
Installation
NOTE:
parts .
1. Hold the middle of the center upper panel (A), and
pull the panel towards the rear of the vehicle to
detach all of the clips from the dashboard, to
release the hooks (8) and pins (e) from the
dashboard, and to release the hooks (D) from the
center panel (E) and/or the display unit (F) (with
navigation system).
Without navigation system
Fastener Locations
With navigation system
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4

C
G C
2. Disconnect the center speaker connector (G), then
remove the center upper panel.
BACK
3. Install the cover in the reverse order removal, and
note these items:
o Make sure the center speaker connector is
o Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Dashboard Center Panel Removal!
Installation
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts.
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the center upper panel (see page 20-120).
2. Pull out the dashboard center panel (A) to detach
the clips (B, C, D) and to release the hooks (E)
(without navigation system), then remove the panel.
Fastener Locations
B ~ C ~ D ~ ~ 2
(cont'd)
20-121
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 4 C I> : Clip, 2
E
3. Oisconnectthe hazard warning switch/passenger's
airbag off indicator connector (F), and on the
models without navigation system, center
information display connector (G).
4. Remove the center information display from the
dashboard center panel (see page 22-343).
5. If necessary, peel three pieces of adhesive tape
(A, B), then remove the tray mat (C), from the
center tray (0).
Adhesive tape A:
Adhesive tape B:
20-122
Length 50 mm (2.0 in.)
Length 220 mm (8.66 in.)
6. If necessary, remove the screws (A) securing the
center tray (B), then separate it from the dashboard
center panel (C) by detaching the clips (0).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 3 D 1>: Clip, 2
~ ~ I c
~ ~ ~
A
If the removed tray mat is to be reinstalled,
remove all of old adhesive tape from the mat,
and clean the back of the mat with isopropyl
alcohol where the three pieces of new adhesive
tape are to be attached. Attach the tray mat to the
center tray with commercially available adhesive
tape.
Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.
Make sure the tabs located between the bottom
clips line up with the slots in the dashboard
correctly.
BACK
Center Pocket Removal/Installation
1. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90).
2. Remove the bolts (A) and screws (8), then remove
the radio brackets (e) from both sides of the audio
unit (0).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 8 B ~ Screw, 2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the center pocket
(A).
Fastener Locations
~ ; ; I
4. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of
removal.
Passenger's Dashboard Trim
NOTE:
parts .
1. Open the front door, and remove the passenger's
dashboard side cover (A) .
...!J Pull out the front door opening seal (8), as
needed.
-2 Gently pull out the front edge of the side cover,
and pry the rear edge with a trim tool to
release the hooks (e), then remove the side
cover.
2. Open the glove box.
(cont'd)
20-123
BACK
Dashboard
Passenger's Dashboard Trim
Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove the passenger's dashboard trim (A).
-1 Remove the screw (B).
-2 Gently pull out the lower edge and the outside
edge of the trim by hand to detach all of the
clips (e) and hooks (D).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Screw, 1 C [> : Clip, 10
~ ~ i
note these items:
Position the hooks first on installation, then move
the clips into place.
20-124
Glove Box Lock Cylinder
Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove .box.
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125).
2. Lift the glove box handle (A), and use a hook-
shaped tool to pull one end of the retainer (B) out of
its slot.
NOTE: Do not remove the retainer entirely. Leave
one end ofthe retainer in its original position when
removing the lock cylinder.
B __ = ~
B
B
3. Remove the glove box lock cylinder (A).
~ I
A
BACK
4. Reinstall the end of the retainer (A) in its slot, then
reinstall the lock cylinder (8). Push the cylinder into
place securely until the retainer snaps into place.
Glove Box Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its
related parts.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-127).
2. Open the glove box.
3. Remove the cap (A), then disconnect the glove box
damper (8) from the pivot (C) on the glove box.
4. Close the glove box.
5. Remove the bolts.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 2
~
5xO.8mm
5Nm
(0.5 kgfm, 4 Ibfft)
B
(cont'd)
20-125
BACK
Dashboard
Glove Box Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
6. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove
box stop (8) on each side from the dashboard by
pushing them in, then remove the glove box.
7. Remove the bolt, then remove the glove box
damper (A).
Fastener Location
~ Bolt, 1
.1
5xO.8mm
5Nm
10.5 kgf.m, 4 Ibfft)
8. Install the glove box in the reverse order of
removal.
20-126
Glove Box Striker Replacement
related parts.
2. Remove the bolts (A) and screws (8), disconnect
the glove box light bulb socket (e), and detach the
harness clip (0), then remove the glove box striker
(E).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B : Screw, 3
A ~
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the glove box light bulb socket is
connected securely.
BACK
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
related parts.
1. Remove the Passenger's dashboard undercover (A).
-1 Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the
clips.
-2 Disconnect the footwell light connector (8) and
ambient light connector (e).
-3 Pull the undercover away to release the pins
(D) from the holders (E).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip. 3
AJ
B E
Replace any damaged clips.
C
Make sure that each connector is plugged in
properly.
Make sure the pins of the undercover are
installed securely to the holders.
Dashboard Side Vent Removal/
Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scrutch the dashboard and its related
parts.
The driver's side vent is shown; the passenger's side
vent is similar.
A-pillar trim (see page 20-78).
Driver's side: Driver's dashboard outer trim
(see page 20-117).
Passenger's side: Passenger's dashboard trim
(see page 20-123).
2. Remove the screws (A).
Fastener Locations
A.-:Screw.3
3. Pull out the side vent (8) to release the clip (e), then
remove the vent.
4. Install the side vent in the reverse order of removal,
and push the clip into place securely.
20-127
BACK
Dashboard
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removall
Installation
NOTE:
parts.
The driver's side deffoger vent trim is shown; the
passenger's side deffoger vent trim is similar.
1. Insert the trim tool into a gap between the side
defogger vent trim (A) and the dashboard (8), and
release the hooks (C).
A
B
2. Install the side defogger vent trim in the reverse
order of removal, and push the hooks into place
securely.
20-128
Front Defogger Vent Trim Removall
Installation
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
2. Insert the trim tool into a gap between the front
defogger vent trim (A) and the dashboard (8), and
release all of the hooks (C).
3. Install the front defogger vent trim in the reverse
order of removal, and push the hooks into place
securely.
BACK
Column Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the column covers.
Do not pry the cover surface with any tools.
1. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position
and to the full telescopic pull position.
2. Remove the cover (A).
A
3. Release the tab (A) locating on the right side of the
upper column cover (8) with your finger.
4. Release the left tab (C) of the upper column cover
while pushing the lower column cover (D) from the
right side.
5. With the right side of the upper column cover (A)
slightly apart from the lower column cover (8),
releas\:l the tab (C) located on the left side of the
upper column cover with your finger.
F
6. Remove the cover by lightly pulling it up by
releasing the left side tab (D) and the front tabs (E)
ofthe upper column cover.
INOTICEI
Carefully release the tabs, and note the
hooks (F) may break when the upper column
cover is pulled up too hard.
(cont'd)
20-129
BACK
Dashboard
Column Cover Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
7. Remove the three screws (A, B) and disconnect the
tilt/telescopic switch connector (C), then remove
the lower column cover (D).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1 B ~ Screw, 2
~ ~ ~
c
8. Install the upper and lower column cover in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the tilt/telescopic switch connector is
plugged in properly .
. Push the hooks into place securely.
20-130
Dashboard Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body, and
other related parts.
Take care not to bend the brackets.
3. Remove these items from the dashboard:
Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)
Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-119)
20-127)
Glove box and damper (see page 20-125)
Glove box striker (see page 20-126)
Center upper panel (see page 20-120)
Center panel (see page 20-121)
Center console (see page 20-107)
Tweeter, both sides (see page 23-92)
Instrumentfascia (see page 20-118)
Gauge control module (see page 22-337)
-Sunlight sensor (see page 21-106)
Display unit, with navigation system (see page
23-180)
GPS antenna (see page 23-180)
4. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position
and to the full telescopic pull position.
BACK
5. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the driver's
dashboard lower bracket (C) and the dashboard
lower bracket (D).
Fastener Locations
LI
\
6. Remove the parking brake lever mounting bolts
(A, B), then lower the lever.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 2 B : Bolt, 1
@mmn I
5xO.8mm
6Nm
10.6 kgf.m, 4 Ibfttl
8x 1.25 mm
21 Nm
12.1 kgfm, 15lbfttl
7. From the front of the dashboard, detach the
harness clip (A).
A
8. Detach the connectors (A) from the dashboard duct
in the center upper panel opening. Tie a string to
the sunlight sensor harness connector (B), then pull
the connector out through the hole (C) in the
dashboard.
c
(cont'd)
20-131
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect and detach the passenger's airbag
connector (A) from the steering hanger beam, and
detach the dashboard wire harness clip (8).
Remove the passenger's airbag mounting bolts.
Fastener Locations
Bolt, 2

A
10. From the front of the dashboard, remove the
screws securing the dashboard (A).
Fastener Locations

0
iiiililID
I
20-132
5xO.8mm
5Nm
(0.5 kgfm, 4 Ibfft)
11. Wrap the steeri ng wheel with a shop towel to
prevent damage.
12. Lift up on the dashboard (A). With an assistant
holding the dashboard up, detach the dashboard
wire harness clips (8) from both sides of the
dashboard duct.
BACK
13. With the help of an assistant, remove the
dashboard (A).
~ Lift up on the dashboard to release it from the
guide pins (8).
-2 Lift up on the dashboard until the driver's
outside portion will be higher than the steering
column.
-a While carefully moving the driver's outside
portion ofthe dashboard over the steering
column, rotate the dashboard toward the front
passenger's door opening, and lower the
passenger's side.
-4 Remove the dashboard through the passenger's
door opening.
NOTE: Lay the dashboard on its front or back.
Do not rest it on the lower console opening or
you may damage it.
B
A
14. From the front of the dashboard, remove the
screws securing the dashboard duct (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
O:O:m> I
A
15. From the back of the dashboard, remove the
dashboard duct (A) from the dashboard (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 11
~ I
(cont'd)
20-133
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd)
16. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
o Before tightening the bolts, make sure the
dashboard wire harness is not pinched.
o Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
o Replace the passenger's airbag mounting bolts
with new ones.
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
o Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
o Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and
o Set the clock.
o Check for any DTCs that may have been set
(see page 17-28).
20-134
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
NOTE:
o Put on gloves to protect your hands.
o Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the dashboard.
o Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and
other related parts.
2. Disconnect the negative cable form the battery, and
o Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-119)
o Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-120)
o Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-127)
o Center console (see page 20-107)
Glove box (see page 20-125)
o Driver's dashboard outer trim (see page 20-117)
o Driver's dashboard lower bracket and dashboard
lower bracket (see step 5 on page 20-131)
o Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-76)
o A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-78)
o A-pillar corner trim (see page 20-206)
o Steering column covers (see page 20-129)
BACK
4. Disconnect the combination switch connectors,
ignition switch connectors, driver's airbag
connector, cable reel connector, steering angle
sensor connector, immobilizer control unit
connector, tilt/telescopic motor connectors, and tilt/
telescopic control unit connectors, detach the
harness clips and remove the mounting bolts, then
lower the steering column (see page 17-25). To
prevent damage to the steering column, wrap it
with a shop towel.
5. Remove the parking brake lever mounting bolt and
screw, then lower the lever (see step 6 on page
20-131).
Driver's side
6. Disconnect the moonroof wire harness connector
(A).
7. From under the dash, disconnectthe engine
compartment wire harness connectors (A), floor
wire harness connector (B), parking brake switch
connector (C), and dashboard wire harness
connectors (D) from the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box (E), detach the fuse connector (F), and
then release the wire harness clips (G).
NOTE: Lift the large wire harness connector locks
(H) before trying to remove the connectors from the
fuse/relay box.
c G
F
(cont'd)
20-135
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Middle portion
8. Detach the harness clips (A), and disconnect the
SRS unit connectors (8); GPS antenna connectors
(e) (with navigation system), yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor connector (D), Ale subharness
connectors (E), and floor wire harness connector (F).
B
20-136
9. Disconnect the floor wire harness connector(s) (A),
rear mode control motor connector (8), rear
evaporator temperature sensor connector (e), rear
air mix control motor connector (D), rear power
transistor connector (E), rear blower motor
connector (F). Detach the harness clips (G).
F
Passenger's side
rear entertainment system wire harness connectors
(A).
BACK
11. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's
door wire harness connectors (A), the floor wire
harness connector (B), audio amplifier connectors
(e), engine compartment wire harness connector
(0), and radio antenna connectors (E).
12. Remove the bolts (A, B) securing the dashboard (e)
and center bracket (0).
Fastener Locations
c
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
A.: Bolt,4
(Silver)
12.2 kgfm, 16Ibf.ft) D
13. Open the driver's door, and remove the bolts (A, B,
e). Remove the remaining bolts (0, E, F) securing
the dashboard (G).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B .: Bolt, 1 C : Bolt, 1
(Black) (Black) (Black)
@::@) lliiiiiiiD I
D : Bolt, 2 E .: Bolt, 2 F .: Bolt, 1
(Silver) (Silver) (Silver)
8x 1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
G
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2kgfm,
16Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-137
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
14. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it,from the
guide pins (B, C).
B A
15. Carefully remove the dashboard thrOugh either
front door opening.
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower
center cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it
on its front or back.
16. Remove the center bracket (D).
20-138
17. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
Position the center bracket on the body, then
reinstall the dashboard on the body. After
tightening the dashboard mounting bolts, tighten
the center bracket mounting bolts, and then
tighten the center frame mounting bolts.
Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire
harnesses are not pinched.
properly.
Set the clock.
(see page 17-28).
BACK
Seats
FRONT SEAT (Passenger's)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-140
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-147
Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-148
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-150
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-154
RIGHT SECOND .ROW SEAT
Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-165
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Third Row Access Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-171
THIRD ROW SEATS
page 20-179
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 20-180
Latch Replacement,
page 20-181
Pivot Replacement,
page 20-182
Seat-back Recline Lever
Seat-back Recline Cable
Seat Cover Replacement,
page 20-184
LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT
Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-165
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Armrest Replacement, page 20-168
Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement, page 20-169
Armrest Panel Replacement, page 20-170
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-171
Armrest Cover Replacement, page 20-178
FRONT SEAT (Driver's)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-140
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-146
Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-148
Lumbar Support Replacement, page 20-149
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-150
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-154
20-139
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Inspection
NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always
inspectthe active head restraint, even ifthey appear
reusable, by doing the following procedure.
Resetting Head Restraint Position
1. Push the head restraint (A) forward fully from the
locked position to return the inside inertia lock (B).
B
Locked Full stroke Normal
\
~ ~ ~
B B B
2. Slowly raise the head restraint into the normal
position.
20-140
Inspection
3. Fold the seat-back forward, then recline the seat-
back to the first lock position, and adjust the head
restraint to the highest position.
4. Apply masking tape on the top of the head restraint.
5. Make marks (A) on both sides at 285 mm (11.2 in.)
upward from the roots of the head restraint frame
(B) along the back of the head restraint (C) surface.
Make a center ofthese points as a datum point (0).
A
B
6. Push the head restraint (A) forward, and check:
With a scale, measure the level amount ofthe head
restraint movement. The head restraint should
move more than 50 mm (2.0 in.) without resistance.
If it is less than 50 mm (2.0 in.), or the head restraint
doesn't move smoothly, replace the seat-back
frame (see page 20-150).
Above 50 mm (2.0 in.)
(Level)
BACK
Front Seat Removal/Installation
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014.*
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
audio or the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Tilt the steering wheel all the way up, and telescope
it all the way in.
3. Slide the front seat all the way forward, and adjust
the seat to its maximum height. Carefully pry up on
the bottom of the anchor cover (A) to release the
tab (8) with a small flat-tip screwdriverfrom below
inside the recline cover (C), then remove it.
A
4. Adjust the seat to its minimum height, then remove
the lower anchor bolt (A).
) ,
~ U N
32Nm
5. Driver'S side with navigation system: Gently pull
the navigation unit cover (A) up to detach the clips,
then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
t>: Clip, 2
vii B
B
A
6. Driver's side with navigation system: Disconnect
the navigation unit connectors (8).
(cont'd)
20-141 BACK
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Slide the seat all the way forward and remove the
rear outer seat track end cover (A) and the rear
inner seat track end cover (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,2
-
20-142
10x 1.25 mm
9. Slide the seat all the way back, and remove the
front outer seat track 'end cover (A) and the front
inner seat track end cover (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 2
~
10x 1.25 mm
~
A
wait at least 3 minutes before removing the seat.
BACK
12. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the power
seat harness connector (A) and the side airbag
connector (8). Disconnect the ODS unit connector
(C) on the passenger's seat.
Driver's seat
8
Passenger's seat
13. Remove the head restraint.
14. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
15. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all
the way back and tighten CD and (V, then slide it
forward and tighten and 0. The driver's seat is
shown; the passenger's seat is symmetrical.
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them
to specification with a torque wrench.
Set the clock.
(see page 17-28).
Fastener Locations
~ : 801t,2
~
C D - - ~ . . . . . . .
/
10x 1.25 mm
47Nm
20-143
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly
SRS component lo.cations (see page 24-18) and the
NOTE:
Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
DTe codes will set if the ignition is turned ON (II) with
the seats removed.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-141).
2. Remove the screws and release the hook (A), tabs
(B), then remove the front cover (e).
Fastener Locations

20-144
3. Remove the recline cover (A).
-1 Remove the screw (B) and detach the clips (e)
and hooks (D).
-2 Pull up the cover, then detach the hooks (E, F).
-a Disconnect the recline switch and up-down
switch connector (G), and on the driver's seat,
lumbar support switch connector (H).
-4 Remove the wire harness (I) from the hook (J).
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 1 C I> : Clip, 1
.1
H
o
A
4. Remove the center cover (A).
-1 Release the hooks (B).
-2 Pull up the cover, then detach the hook (e).
BACK
5. From under the seat cushion, release the hook
strips (A) and pull the seat cushion cover (8) back.
Disconnect or detach the connectors, detach the
harness clips (C), release the wire ties (D), then pull
out the harness(es) out through the harness sock
(E).
o Driver's seat
- Side airbag connector (F)
- Seat-back heater harness connector (G)
- Recline motor/lumbar support motor harness
connector (H)
o Passenger's seat
- Side airbag connector (F)
- ODS unit harness connector (I)
- Recline motor harness connector (J)
Driver's seat

Passenger's seat
c
F
c
E

B
E
D
6. Remove bolts, then remove the seat-back (A).
Fastener Locations
Bolt,4

A
7. Assemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the
reverse order of disassembly, and note these
items:
o Passenger's seat: Calibrate the ODS unit
(see page 24-34).
o Check if the clips is damaged, and if necessary,
replace it with a new one.
o Push the clip and hooks on the covers into place
securely.
o Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving parts
of the seat track.
o Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
o Make sure each connector is plugged in properly .
To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,
stretch the material evenly over the pad before
securing the hook strips.
20-145
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.
Driver's Seat
Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-36):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
NOTE:
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding portions and pivot portions of the seat tracks.
SEAT CUSHION FRAME
~ /
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
~
INNER HEIGHT COVER ~
~ o
o
~
~ ~
8x 1.2Smm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
HARNESS BRACKET
20-146
FLOOR CONNECTOR
BRACKET
(Without navigation system)
SEAT CUSHION SPRING
/
POWER SEAT HARNESS
~ /
CENTER INNER COVER
\ . .. a--------HARNESS SOCK
~ SLIDE/UP-DOWN ./ RECLINE INNER COVER
ADJUSTER /..IX ~
;rANCH:RmM
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
~ ~
OUTER HEIGHT
COVER
o o ~ ~
@ NAVIGATION UNIT
BRACKET
(With navigation
system)
BACK
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions
Passenger's Seat
Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions (see page 24-34):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)
- Replacement ofthe seat weight sensors
- Replacement of the ODS unit
NOTE:
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding portions of the seat tracks.
SEAT CUSHION FRAME
\
POWER SEAT HARNESS
.
.r f!lf ./ HARNESS SOCK
V CENTER INNER COVER
RECUNE INNER COVER "" /
OUTER HEIGIff '\ SLIDE/UP-DOWN
COVER
ANCHOR WIRE

8x1.25mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl
SEAT CUSHION SPRING
/
INNER HEIGHT
COVER

HARNESS BRACKET
""/
20-147 BACK
Seats
Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement
Seat-back cover (see page 20-150)
Lumbar support motor cover (see step 5 on page
20-149)
3. Driver's seat: Disconnect the lumbar support motor
connector (A), and remove thewire ties (B).
A
20-148
4. Release the push nut (A) from the motor side end of
the connecting rod (B), gently tap on the motor side
of the connecting rod to remove itfrom the recline
motor (C) and both recline adjusters (D).
5. Remove the rod cover (E).
6. Remove the bolt, then remove the recline motor (A).
Fastener Location
~ : Bolt, 1
~ : J D - : : : : : : . - - ~ I _
7. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,
Passenger's seat: Calibrate the ODS unit
(see page 24-34).
Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
Replace the push nut with a new one. Make sure
the push nut is installed correctly.
the mounting bolt before reinstallation.
BACK
Front Seat Lumbar Support Replacement
Driver's seat
pre;autions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
NOTE:
Take care not to bend the cable.
covers.
1. Remove the back panel (see step 3 on page 20-151).
2. Release the hook of the yoke wi re (A) from the top
of the basket (8) to loosen the lumbar support cable
(e), then disconnect it.
c
3. Release both lower springs (A) from inside the
seat-back. Release the lumbar support from both
upper springs (8).
A
4. Release the hook strips (A), then turn over the seat-
back cover (8).
5. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lumbar
support motor cover (8).
A
A
(cont'd)
20-149
BACK
Seats.
Front Seat Lumbar Support
6. Disconnect the power lumbar support motor
connector (A) and remove the nuts, then remove
the lumbar support motor (B).
Fastener Locations
.:Nut,2
~
= ; ; : - - : : : : : = = ~ ~
A
6x 1.0 mm
6Nm
(0.6kgfm,
4\ffi
7. Install the lumbar support in the reverse order of
o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
and the cable is connected securely.
o To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hook strips.
o Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
20-150
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement
o Check the operation ofthe driver's seat position
sensor after any ofthese actions (see page 24-36).
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
o Calibrate the ODS unit after any ofthe these actions
(see page 24-34).
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
o Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat
covers.
o On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil.
Oil can corrode the sehsor causing it to fail.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-141 ) ..
2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-144).
BACK
3. Detach the clips, release the hooks (A) by pulling
the bottom ofthe back panel (8) back, then gently
pull down the panel to release the hooks (C) from
the seat-back frame, and remove the panel.
NOTE: Detach the clips and hooks in the numbered
sequence as shown.
Fastener Locations
A
4. Release the hooks (A), then loosen the seat-back
cover (8).
A
5. Pull the recline motor harness/lumbar support
motor harness (A) (driver's seat) or recline motor
harness (8) (passenger's seat), seat-back heater
harness (C), side airbag harness (0) and the ODS
unit harness (E) (passenger's seat) out through the
holes (F) in the seat-back cover.
Driver's seat-back
F
Passenger's seat-back
F F
E
(cont'd)
20-151
BACK
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Passenger's 'seat: Turn over the seat-back cover (A),
. detach the hooks (8), then remove the ODS unit
cover (C). Disconnect the OPDS sensor connectors
(D), then detach the harness clips (E).
E
B 0
7. Release the front hook (A) and rear hook (8) ofthe
reinforcing cloth (C) from seat-back frame (D).
A
A
20-,152
8. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) while
pinching the tabs on the end of the guides, and
remove them.
9. Remove the seat-back cover (A) and seat-back pad
(8) from the seat-back frame (C).
BACK
10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
A
Reinitialize the ODS unit (see page 24-33).
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
over the pad before securing the clips, hooks,
and hook strips.
Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (8).
Reinstall the front hook (C) and rear hook (D) of
the reinforcing cloth (E) securely.
Use only original Acura replacement seat-back
covers.
Make sure the recline motor harness/lumbar
support motor harness (driver's seat) or recline
motor harness (passenger's seat), side airbag
harness, seat-back heater harness, and ODS unit
harness (passenger's seat) are routed properly.
Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
c
E
D
c
2 o ~ 1 5 3
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Check the operation ofthe driver's seat position
sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-36):
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions
(see page 24-34):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the ~ t weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
Take care 'lot to tear the seams of damage the seat
covers.
3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the seat
cushion heater connector (A).
A
20-154
4. Remove the clips and wire tie (A) and release the
hook strips (B) from both sides of the seat cushion.
Outside
Fastener Locations
Inside
Fastener Locations
BACK
5. From under the seat cushion, release the hook
strips (A), and pull back the seat cushion cover (8).
A
6. Remove the silencer (A) and seat cushion pad (8)
from the seat cushion frame (e).
7. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
the seat cushion cover.
A
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hook strips .
Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (8).
20-155
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care notto scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Ra ise the seat-back.
2. Remove the front foot inner cover (A) and front foot
outer cover (B) from the front of the seat tracks.
A
B
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
20-156
4. Remove the rear ISO fix bracket cover cap (A) (left
second row seat), rear foot inner cover (B), and rear
foot outer cover (e) from the back of the seat tracks.
Left seconds row seat
Right seconds row seat
BACK
5. From the front of the seat tracks, remove the bolts
securing the second row seat (A).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,2
~
A
10x1.25mm
6. From the back of the seat tracks, remove the bolts
securing the second row seat (A).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,
Left secand row seat, 3
Right secand row seat, 2
~
10x 1.25mm
7. With seat heater: Lift up the front seat, then detach
the harness clip (A), and disconnect the seat-back
heater connector (8).
Left second row seat
Right second row seat
(cont'd)
20-157
BACK
Seats 7
Second Row Seat Removal!
8. With the help of an assistant; carefully remove the
second row seat through the rear door opening.
note these items:
Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Tighten CD and ,
then tighten and G), and on the left second row
seat, also tighten .
If equipped, make sure the seat heater connector
is plugged in properly.
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them
to specification with a torque wrench.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,
Left secand row seat, 5
Right secand row seat, 4
20-158
0.
10x 1.25mm
47Nm
Second Row Seat Disassembly I
Reassembly
Left Second Row Seat
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or te.ar the seat
covers.
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A)
of the back cover carpet (8) from the seat cushion
frame, then pull then carpet back.
C
B
A A
3. With seat heater: Disconnect the seat-back heater
connector (e), detach the seat heater connector (D),
and remove the wire ties (E).
BACK
, . ~
4. Gently pull out the recline outer cover (A) to detach
the clips and to release the hooks (8) of the recline
inner cover (e), then remove the cover while
releasing the inside edge of the cover from the
recline adjuster (D).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip. 2
--=tJ
D
5. Remove the screw (A), gently pull out the recline
inner cover (8) to detach the clip (e), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw. 1
A
6. Gently. pull out the ISO fix bracket outer cover (A) to
detach the clip. Releasethe hookS (8) from the ISO
fix bracket inner cover (e), and release the hook (D)
of the inner cover from the outer cover, then
remove the cover while releasing the inside edge of
it from the ISO fix bracket (E).
Fastener Location
[>: Clip. 1
--=tJ
E
J ~ ~ I \ ~
C
A
7. Remove the screw (A) gently pull out the ISO fix
bracket inner cover (8) to detach the clips (e). then
remove it.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1
A
(cont'd)
20-159
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Disassembly IReassembly (cont'd)
8. Remove the screw, gently pull out the rear center
outer cover (A) to release the hook (8) from the
center inner cover (C), and to release the hooks (D)
of the inner cover from the outer cover, the remove
it.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~
9. Gently pull out the center inner cover (A) to detach
the clip, then remove it.
Fastener Location
l>: Clip, 1
~ ~
20-160
10. Remove the seat cuhsion (A).
-1 Remove the seat belt buckles (8) and seat belt
detachable anchor (C) from the elastic straps
(D).
-2 Remove the nuts (E). Using a T30 TORX bit,
remove the bolts (F).
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 2 ~ : Bolt, 2
@)) 0-
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.,,\m. 7.2 Ib'ftl
A
B
o
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2 kgf'm, 16Ibfft)
BACK
11. Remove the screw, then remove the front center
outer cover (A).
Fastener Location
1

12. Using a T40 TORX bit, remove the bolts (A, B), then
remove the seat-back (C) and bushing (D).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 4 A : Bolt, 1
)mn (0)P
10x1.25mm C
47Nm
(4.8kgfm,
35lbfftl
\
B
10x 1.25 mm
47Nm
(4.8kgf.m,
35Ibfft)
items:
o If the bushing is damaged or stress-whitened,
replace it with a new one.
o Replace any damaged clips with newones.
o With seat heater: Replace the wire tie you
removed with a new one.
o With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
20-161
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
Right Second Row Seat
NOTE:
covers.
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hook (A)
of the back cover carpet from the seat cushion
frame, then pull the carpet (B) back.
C D
F
C
C
B
3. Release the wire ties (e) fastening the recline
cables (D).
connector (E) and detach the seat heater connector
(F).
20-162
5. Gently pull out the recline outer cover (A) to detach
the clips and to release the hooks (B) of the recline
inner cover (e), then remove the cover while
releasing the inside edge of the cover frcim the
recline adjuster (D).
Fastener Locations
6. Remove the screw (A), gently pull out the recline
inner cover (B) to detach the clip (e), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
A ~ ; : . C.' I
BACK
7. Gently pull out the center outer cover (A) to remove
the screw and to release the hooks (8) from the
center inner cover (C), then remove the cover while
releasing the inside edge of it from the recline
adjuster (D).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
@WI
D
c
8. Gently pull out the center inner cover (A) to detach
the clip, then remove it.
Fastener Location
9. Remove the nuts (A). Using a T30 TORX bit,
remove the bolts (8), then remove the seat cushion
(C).
Fastener Locations
Ae : Nut, 4
@)
B ~ Bolt, 2
Oml
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-163
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Disassembly IReassembly (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the recliner cables (A) and the third row
seat access rods (B) on both sides, then remove the
cables from the clips (C).
B
20-164
11. Using aT 40 TORX bit, remove the bolts, then
remove the seat-back (A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4

10 x 1.25 mm
47Nm
7m. "'bfft)
items:
If the cable clips and rod fasteners are damaged
or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Replace any damaged clips with new ones.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts
of the seat track.
ones.
Make sure each cable is connected securely.
With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
BACK
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
NOTE:
covers.
Take care not to kink the cables.
2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad from the seat-
back frame (see page 20-171).
3. Right second row seat: Remove these items:
Recline outer cover (see step 4 on page 20-162)
Center outer cover (see step 6 on page 20-162)
4. Remove the screws securing the recline lever (A).
Fastener Locations

5. Left second row seat: Detach the clips (A) and
disconnect the recline outer cable (B) and the
recline inner cable (C).
A A
c
B
(cont'd)
20-165
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement (cont'd)
6. Right second row seat: remove the wire ties (A) and
detach the clips (B), disconnect the recline outer
cable (C) and the recline inner cable (D), then
remove the cables from the clips (E).
20-166
7. Install the recline lever in the reverse order of
Fix at the middle groove in the end of the recline
inner cable (A) securely to obtain no clearance
between the cable end and the recline lever
fitting.
Fix at the middle groove in the end of the recline
outer cable (B) securely to obtain a clearance
between the cable end and the recline lever
fitting.
Check the seat-back fold down operation:
- Left second row seat: When operating the
recline lever, the inner recline adjuster is
unlocked first, the outer recline adjuster is
unlocked next, then the seat-back is folded
down fully.
- Right second row seat: When operating the
recline lever, the inner recline adjuster is
unlocked first, the outer recline adjuster is
unlocked next, then the seat-back is folded
down fully without any interference in
movement, but the seat doesn't slide forward.
The right second row seat is shown; the left
second row seat is similar.
BACK
Second Row Seat-back Recline
Cable Replacement
NOTE:
1. Remove the seat-back recline lever (see page
20-165).
2. Carefully pry out the cover (A) with a flat-tip
screwdriver at the gap while holding the lever fully
open. Release the tabs (B), then remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the recline cables (A).
A
4. Install the second row seat-back recline cables in
the reverse order of removal, and make sure the
cables are connected securely.
Third Row Seat Access Cable
Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands .
1. Remove the right second row seat (see page
20-156).
2. Remove the right second row seat-back cover/pad
from the seat-back frame (see page 20-171) .
3. Disconnect the third row seat access cable (A) and
detach the clips (B), then remove the cable by
pinching the hooks (C) of the holder.
A
(cont'd)
20-167
BACK
Seats
Third Row Seat Access Cable
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal,
If necessary, remove the clip (A), then adjust the
inner side end of the third row seat access cable
(A) to obtain no clearance between the cable end
and the recline lever fitting.
Fix at the middle groove in the outer side end of
the third row seat access cable to obtain a
clearance between the cable end and the recline
lever fitting.
Check the third row seat access operation: When
operating the third row seat access knob, the
inner recline adjuster is unlocked first, the outer
recline adjuster is unlocked next, then the seat-
back is tilted forward and the seat is allowed to
slide forward.
20-168
Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
seat covers.
1. Remove the ISO fix bracket outer cover (see step 6
on page 20-157).
2. Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the bolt, then
remove the washer (A) and wave washer (8).
Fastener Location
~ Bolt, 1
)
3. Remove the armrest.
-1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the left side of the
vehicle.
-2 Remove the pivot shaft (8) from the bushing
(C) on the passenger's side ofthe vehicle by
pulling up on the armrest, and remove the
pivot shaft from the bushing (D) by pulling up
on the armrest.
c
BACK
4. Remove the armrest (A) and bushings (8).
5. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,
and check if the bushing are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new
ones.
Beverage Holder Replacement
NOTE:
covers .
avoid damage when prying components.
1. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the beverage
holder cover (8).
2. Remove the screws, then pull out on the beverage
holder (A) to release the hooks (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 2
~
B
B
3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of
removal.
20-169
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Armrest Panel Replacement
NOTE:
covers.
1. Remove the armrest (see page 20-168).
2. Remove the center head restraint.
pinching the end of the guides, and remove them.
4. Remove the screws, gently pull out the rear
armrest cover (A) to release the hooks (8) of the
armrest panel (e), then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
20-170
5. Pull back the ISO fix trim (A).
6 .. Remove the armrest panel (A).
-1 Remove the screws. (8).
-2 Gently pull out the armrest panel to detach the
clip (e) and to release the hooks (D).
Fastener Locations
B : Screw. 2 C [> : Clip. 1
.'
7. Install the armrest panel in the reverse order of
Replace the clip if it's damaged .
o
Push the clip and hooks on the panel into place
securely.
BACK
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands
covers.
Seat-back Cover
2. Remove the head restraint.
of the back cover carpet (B) from the seat cushion
frame, then pull the carpet back.
o C
o
4. With seat heater; Disconnect the seat cushion
heater connector (C) and remove the wire tie (D).
5. Remove the third row seat access knob (A). Peel off
the label (B) and remove the screw (C), then
remove the third row seat access trim (D) by
detaching the clips (E).
Fastener Locations
C : Screw, 1 E [>: Clip. 2
0m- I
(cont'd)
20-171
BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Fold the seat-back forward fully, detach the clips,
and remove the back cover (A).
Left seat-back
Fastener Locations

'A
Right seat-back
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 9
~
'fj
"
'!
'1 '1
"'!"
'!
'!8'!
A
2 ~ 1 7 2
7. Release all of the hooks (A) and remove the wire
ties (B) from the back ofthe seat-back, then pull
back the seat-back cover. If equipped, detach the
seat-back heater harness clip (e) from the seat-back
frame.
Left seat-back
A A
A
A
Right seat-back
A A
A
A
A
BACK
8. While pulling the recline lever (A), gently pull out
the recliner lever upper housing (8) to release the
hooks (C), then remove it.
9. Release the hook strips (A).
10. Pull out the seat-back,pad (A) from the seat-back
frame (8), then pinch the end of the head restraint
guides (C) to remove them.
11. Pull out the head restraint guides (A).
__ c.r
A
(cont'd)
20-173
BACK
Seats
12. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat-
back frame (B) ..
Left seat-back
Right seat-back
20-174
13 .. Pull back the edge ofthe. seat-back cover all the
the seat-back cover.
A
14. Right second row seat: If necessary, remove the
seat-back damper (A) from the seat-back frame.
Fastener Locations
BACK
15. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of
over the pad before securing the hooks, hook
strips, and clips.
Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones using commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (8).
ones.
With seat heater: Make sure the seat heater
A
Seat Cushion Cover
2. Remove the recline outer cover:
Left second row seat (see step 4 on page 20-159).
Right second row seat (see step 5 on page
20-162).
of the back cover carpet (8) from the seat cushion
frame, then pull the carpet back.
c E
D
B
(cont'd)
20-175 BACK
Seats
E
D
c
B
connector (C), detach the seat heater connector (0),
and remove the wire ties (E).
5. Release all of the clips (A) and hook strips (8) from
under the seat cushion (C).
Left seat cushion
o

o
F=======Io
B
A
20-176
B
\
c
B
Right seat cushion
B
6. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the
seat cushion frame (8).
BACK
7. Pass the retainers (A) through the slots in the seat-
back pad (left seat cushion). Pull back the edge of
the seat cushion cover all the way around, and
release the clips (8), then remove the seat cushion
cover.
Left seat cushion
Right seat cushion
~
- --- =>J
'LJ
I I
I I
Ie --- -----::>:
I I
I I
B
B
o To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
over the pad before securing the hooks, hook
strips, and clips.
o Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ring pliers (8).
o Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
o With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
A
20-177 BACK
Seats
Second Row Seat Armrest Cover Replacement
seat covers.
1. Remove the armrest (see page 20-168).
2. Remove the armrest beverage holder from the
armrest (see page 20-169).
3. Unzip the armrest cover (A).
4. Release the hooks (A).
20-178
5. Pull back the armrest cover (A) all the way around,
then separate the armrest cover and pad (8).
and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
hooks.
BACK
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation
NOTE:
covers.
1. Detach the third row seat-belt from the detachable
anchor.
2. Remove the front mounting bolt covers (A) from
both front links.
3. Remove the front mounting bolts.
Fastener Locations
10x1.25mm
47Nm
(4.8 kgt.m, 35 Ibfftl
4. Lift the seat cushion up.
5. Remove the rear mounting bolts while holding the
seat cushion .
Fastener Locations
6. With the help of an assistant, remove the third row
seat through the tailgate opening.
apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
20-179 BACK
Seats
Third Row Seat Disassembly IReassembly
NOTE:
Take care notto scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-179).
2. Release the hook (A) from under the seat cushion,
and pull back the seat cushon cover (8) as needed.
Remove the screw and Release the hooks (e), then
remove the pivot bolt cover (D) from both sides of
the seat.
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

20-180
3. Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the pivot bolt
securing the seat-back (A) and sat cushion (8), then
separate them.
Fastener Locations
Bolt, 2

6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
4. If necessary, remove the front link cover (A) by
releasing the hooks (8).
5. Install the seat-back in the reverse order of removal,
To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,
make sure the material is stretched evenly over
the pad before securing the hook strip .
Push the hooks into place
BACK
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Take care notto bend the seat-back recline cable.
The left third row seat is shown, the right third row
seat is similar.
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row
seat (see page 20-179).
3. Remove the screws securing the seat-back recline
lever (see step 3 on page 20-183).
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-184),
then release the hooks from behind the seat-back,
as needed (see step 5 on page 20-185).
5. Remove the screw and release the hook (A), then
remove the outer latch cover (8).
Fastener Locations

j8
A
6. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the
inner latch cover (A).
Fastener Locations

A
7. Disconnectthe seat-back recline cable (A).
(cont'd)
20-181
BACK
Seats
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
8. Remove the bolts, then remove the latch (A).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 2
~
10x1.25mm
47Nm
note these items:
Make sure the seat-back recline cable is
connected securely .
Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
latches securely.
20-182
Third Row Seat Pivot Replacement
NOTE:
The left third row seat is shown; the right third row
seat is similar.
1. Remove the right third row seat (see page 20-179).
5. If necessary, remove the screw, then remove the
pivot cover (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~ \
6. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat pivot (A).
Fastener Locations
8x1.25mm
31Nm
7. Install the pivot in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
Equipment Program; call 888"424-6857
NOTE:
o Take care not to kink the seat-back recline cable.
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row
seat (see page 20-179).
3. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screws securing
the third row seat-back recline lever (B).
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 2
~ I
A
5. Remove the outer latch cover (see step 5 on page
20-181).
6. Disconnect the seat-back recline cable (see step 7
on page 20-181).
7. Remove the clips, then remove the seat-back
recline lever (A) with the recline cable (B).
Fastener Locations
8. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal,
o Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
o Make sure the recline cable is connected securely.
o Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
latches securely.
20-183
BACK
Seats
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable
Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to kink the cable.
1. Remove the third row seat-back recline lever
(see page 20-183).
2. While holding the lever (A) open, carefully pry out
the cover (B) with trim tool to release the tabs (C),
then remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the recline cable (A).
--------A
4. Install the third row seat-back recline cable in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the cable is connected securely .
Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
latches securely.
20-184
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
covers.
Seat-back Cover
2. Remove these items .
Seat cushion (see page 20-180)
Head restraint
4. Detach the clips (A, B), and remove the back cover
(C) from the frame, then turn the cover to pass the
recline lever (D) through a hole in the cover.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 10 B I> : Clip, 2
~ ~
C
A A
I
Y;
A
'Y:

A B
"
A

A

~
D
A
V-
A

"
A A
V V
" "
BACK
5. Release all of the hooks (A, 8) from behind the seat-
back (e). Unhook the edge of the seat-back cover
(D) from the hook (E) of the seat-back frame.
E
6. Pull the seat-back cover (A) back, and release the
hooks (8).
pinching the tabs (8) on the end of the guides, and
remove them.
8. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat-
back frame (8).
(cont'd)
20-185
BACK
Seats
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
9. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
way around, then release all ofthe clips (8).
Remove the seat-back cover.
~
B
over the pad before securing the hook and clips .
Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ring pliers (8).
A
20-186
Seat Cushion Cover
1. Remove both front mounting bolts (see page
20-179).
2. Release the hook strips (A) from under the seat
cushion (8).
A
3. Remove the pivot bolt cover from both sides (see
BACK
4. Detach the retainers (A) from both sides of the link
(B), and release all of the hook strips (C) from under
the seat cushion (D).
A
5. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the
seat cushion frame (B).
6. If necessary, release the hooks (C), then remove the
suspension mat (D).
7. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all
the way around, release all of the clips (B), under
the right seat cushion cover, then remove the seat
cushion cover.
A
B
8. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order
To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing all
the clips.
Replace all ofthe clips fastening the seat-back
cover (A) and pad wire (B) with new ones (C)
using commercially available upholstery ring
pliers (D).
c
20-187 BACK
Bu'mpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the front bumper.
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
2. Remove the bolts (A, B), screws (e), and clips (D, E,
F) securing the front bumper (G).
NOTE: To remove the clips E, pry the inner clip up
at the edge near the line (H) on its head.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 2 B : Bolt,2 C : Screw, 2

DC>: Clip, 2 E C>: Clip, 4 F C>: Clip, 5

F
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
F
H
F
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfttl
20-188
H
D
F
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgf.m, 7.2 Ibfttl
B
3. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas
to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers
(e).
B
B
4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the
wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A),
pull the front bumper to release the bumper from
the hooks (B) on the corner upper beam (e).
BACK
5. With headlight washer: While pushing the retainer
(A), pull the headlight washer tube (B) to disconnect
it from a nozzle (e) of the washer motor. Release
the washer tube from the tube clip (D).
6. With the help of an assistant, disconnect the front
fog light connectors (A), then remove the front
bumper (B).
7. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the front fog light connectors are
plugged in properly, and the headlight washer
tube is connected properly.
Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks
(of both center upper beams and side spacers) on
each side securely.
replace themwith new ones.
20-189
BACK
Bumpers
Front Bumper Skid Trim
Replacement
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857, '
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper
2. Remove all ofthe screws. Pry all ofthe hooks (A)
up with a trim tool, then remove the front bumper
skid trim (B) from the front bumper (e).
Fastener Locations

A
push the hooks into place securely.
20-190
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the rear bumper.
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
1. From the rear wheel arches on both sides, remove
the screws (A, B, e) and clips (0) securing the rear
bumper (E), and rear fender cover (F).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 4 B C Screw, 2

E
c
BACK
2. Remove the caps (A). Remove the bolts (8) and
clips (e) securing the rear bumper (D).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at
the edge near the line (E) on its head.
Fastener Locations
B ~ . C ~ J
E E
c 6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
3. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas
to release it from the hooks (8) on the side spacers
(e).
B
4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the
wheel arch portion away from the side spacers (A),
pull the rear bumper to release the bumper from
the hooks (8) on the side upper spacer (e), and
from the hooks (D) on the side bracket (E).
5. With the help of an assistant, pull out on the rear
bumper to release the bumper (A) from the hooks
(8) on both upper brackets (e).
B
(cont'd)
20-191
BACK
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks
(of both the side bracket, side spacers, and side
upper spacers) on each side securely.
20-192
Rear Bumper Skid Trim
Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-190).
2. Remove all of the bolts (A) and screws (B). Pry all of
the hooks (C) up with a trim tool, then remove the
rear bumper skid trim (D) from the rear bumper (E).
Fastener Locations
A": Bolt, 2 B .. : Screw, 7
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
BACK
Rear Bumper Air Spoiler
Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
2. Remove the bolts (A) and clips (8) then remove the
rear bumper air spoiler (0) from the rear bumper
(E). Take care notto scratch the rear bumper.
Fastener Locations
A ~ Bolt,2 B C>: Clip, 2
t-I
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal,
Rear Bumper Reflector
Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to prevent damllge .
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body .
1. Push out the clip (A), release the hook (8), then
remove the rear bumper reflector (C).
C
A

2. Reattach the hook to the rear bumper first, and
push the clip into place securely.
20-193 BACK
Hood
Hood Adjustment
Front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203)
Hood support strut, both -sides (see page 20-195)
2. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence:
Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes in the hood
hinges (8).
Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
c
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
A
6x 1.0 mm
18Nm
(1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft)
4. Adjust the hood latch (0) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
20-194
BACK
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes
securely.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
and around the hinges, and letthe paint dry.
8. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the hood latch and
hood hinges as indicated by the arrows.
Hood Support Strut Replacement
1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (8) of
the support strut (C) on the hood and body, then
release the support strut from the pivot bolts (D).
Do not remove the clips from the support strut.
NOTE: Use eye protection when doing this
procedure.
2. Apply mUltipurpose grease to each pivot.
3. Set the clips (A) on the original position, then
reattach the support strut (8) on the pivot bolts (C)
by pushing on the support strut.
20-195
BACK
Hood
Hood Seal Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove
the hood seal (A). Take care not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip,S .
Jf:J
A
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,
20-196
Hood Insulator Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the
hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (8). Take
care not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,
;. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
BACK
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment
NOTE:
1. With power tailgate: Make sure you have the anti-
theft code for the audio and the navigation system
(if equipped).
2. With power tailgate: Disconnect the negative cable
from the battery.
NOTE: Open the tailgate by using the emergency
lever while adjusting the tailgate (see page 20-229).
3. Remove the Support strut from each side (see page
20-198).
4. Remove the striker cap (A) from the rear trim panel
(8).
B
5. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).
A
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16Ibf.ft)
6. Adjust the tailgate (8) alignment in the following
sequence:
Adjust the tailgate right and left, using the
elongated holes in the tailgate hinges (e).
Turn the tailgate edge cushions (D), in or out as
necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush with the
body at the side edges.
Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate
opening by moving the striker (E), and adjust the
striker right or left until it is centered in the
tailgate latch (F).
(cont'd)
20-197
BACK
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment (cont'd)
7. Tighten each bolt securely.
8. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
9. Reinstall the support struts securely.
10. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
11. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the pivot portion of
the tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows.
13. With power tailgate: Reconnect the negative cable
to the battery.
NOTE:
Enter theanti-thett code for the audio and the
Set the clock.
Check for any OTCs that may have been set
00 the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
20-198
Tailgate Support Strut
Replacement
1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (8)
from each end of the support strut (C) at the tailgate
and body, then release the support strut from the
pivot bolt (0) and from the pivot bracket (E). 00 not
remove the clips from the support strut.
NOTE: Use eye protection when doing this
procedure.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the pivot bracket
(A).
Fastener Locations /6 x 1.0 mm
~ : Bolt. 2 9.8 Nm
~ I rrr,l- (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
~ ~ ~
A
3. Reinstall the pivot bracket.
BACK
4. Set the clips (A) on the original position, then
reattach the support strut (8) on the pivot bolt (C)
and pivot bracket (D) by pushing the support strut
onto the pivot.
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
1. With: power tailgate: Remove the left tailgate side
trim (see page 20-96).
2. With power tailgate: Use a flat-tip screwdriver (A)
to pry the clip (8) downward from the power
tailgate motor rod (C), then release the rod from the
pivot bracket (D) and push it in the quarter pillar
trim (E). Do not remove the clip from the rod.
B
c
D
(cont'd)
20-199 BACK
Tailgate
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd)
3. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling it
out.
Outside ..
4. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the
tailgate weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with
the alignment tab in the center of the tailgate
opening! and install the tailgate weatherstrip all the
way around. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
5. With power tailgate: Set the clip (A) on the original
position, then reattach the power tailgate motor rod
(B) on the pivot bracket (C) by pushing the rod onto
the pivot.
20-200
6. With power tailgate: Reinstall the left tailgate side
7. Check for water leaks.
BACK
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door I Adapter Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the fuel fill door latch (see page 20-226).
2. Remove the fuel filler cap (A) by turning it
counterclockwise.
A
3. From inside the wheelhouse, carefully push up the
adapter lip (A) around the fuel filler pipe (8), and
release the hooks (C) from the edge of the body
hole by hand.
c
4. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (A) from the body.
5. Install the fuel fill door/adapter in the reverse order
of removal, and make sure the adapter lip (A) is
fully seated on the fuel fill pipe (8).
20-201 BACK
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body .
Use the appropril'lte tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. While prying the hook (A) up with a trim tool, slide
the fuel fill door (8) back to release four wedges (C)
from the hooks (0) of the fuel fill door hinge (E),
then remove the fuel fill door.
c
2. Install the door in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure the hooks are installed securely .
Make sure there is no gap between the fuel fill
door and hinge.
20-202 BACK
Exterior Trim
Front Bulkhead Cover Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper and
body.
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (A).
-1 Remove the clips.
-2 Pass the hood latch knob (8) through the hole
in the cover.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 8

and note these items;
Front Grille Replacement
Grille Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper and
body.
2. Remove the front grille (A).
-1 Remove the bolts (8) and clips (C, D).
-2 Release the hooks (E) of the gr ille from the
front bumper (F) by pulling the grille upward.
NOTE: To remove the clips D, pry the inner clip
up at the edge near the line (G) on its head.
Fastener Locations
4
F
E
(Eight places)
G G
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
A
(cont'd)
20-203
BACK
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal;
Push the clips and hooks into place securely. , ,
20-204
Trim Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front grille.
1. Remove the front grille.
2. Remove the screw. From behind the grille, pry up
on the hooks (A) with a trim tool, then remove the
front grille trim (B), and the front grille seal (C) from
the front grille base (0). The left front grille trim is
shown; the right front grille trim is similar.
Fastener Location
c
B
BACK
Cowl Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the cowl cover and body .
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page
22-305).
2. Using a trim tool, remove the clips (A) from the
cowl cover (B).
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 3 F I> : Hook, 12
9:
j
C
3. Release the windshield wiper washer tube (C) from
the hooks (D).
4. If necessary, remove the hood rear seal (E) from all
ofthe hooks (F).
5. Pull the cowl cover (A) forward to release the hooks
(B, C) of it from the windshield (D) and body. From
both hood hinge portions, release the hooks (E, F)
of the hood hinge cover (G) from the frontfender
(H) and the roof molding (I).
H
C
B
~
/ ~
C B
6. Remove the cowl cover.
20-205
BACK
Exterior Trim
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
KTC trim toolset SOJATP2014 *
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6.857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the trim and body .
avoid damage when re!Tloving components.
1. Open the front door.
2. Using a trim tool, detach the bottom clip of the
A-pillar cornertrim (A).
Fasterier Location
1>: Clip. 1
j(J
3. Gently slide the A-pillar corner trim (A) up along
the A-pillar to release it from the clips.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 2

4. Using a trim tool, remove the clips from the body.
20-206
5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
6. Install the clips (A) on the A-pillar corner trim (B).
7. Hold the A-pillar corner trim (A) up, and fit the clips
into the holes in the body, then push on the trim
until the clips snap into place securely.
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 3
j[J
BACK
Roof Rail Replacement
For Some Models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the covers, roof rail, and the
body.
When using a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
1. Pry up on the front cover (A) with a trim tool to
detach the clips and rib (8) from the front bracket
(e), then remove the cover by pulling the cover
forward.
Fastener Locations
c
2. Pry up on the rear cover (A) with a trim tool to
detach the clips from the rear bracket (8), then
remove the cover by pulling the cover rearward.
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
~ J
3. Remove the roof rail (A) and the center bracket (8).
-4 Using a trim tool, pry the notch (e), then
remove the roof rail bar cap (0).
-2 Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the nuts (E)
from the front bracket (F) and the rear bracket
(G).
-a Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the bolts (H),
then remove the roof rail.
-4 Remove the center cover (I), and using a T30
TORX bit, remove the nuts (J), then remove the
center bracket.
Fastener Locations
E,J. :TORX Nut, 6
D
6x1.0mm
13Nm
11.3 kgfm,
9.4Ibfft)
P
-----..... E
H : TORX Bolt, 2
~
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
/
EE
H ~
6x1.0mm
13Nm
(1.3 kgfm,
9.4Ibfft)
4. Install the roof rail in the reverse order of removal,
20-207
BACK
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement
Equipment Program; call 888-424"6857
Molding Removal
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the windshield.
Do not use any metallic toolsto remove the
windshield portion of the roof molding, or you may
chip the edge of the windshield and some cracks in
the windshield will occur.
Take care not to bend the roof molding.
1. For some models: Remove the roof rail (see page
20-207).
2. Detach the bottom clip (A) at the iower corner of the
windshield.
Fastener Location
A C>: Clip, 1
(Left: Yellow, Right: Pink)
20-208
3. Remove the windshield portion ofthe roof molding
(A).
-1 Carefully insert the large trim tool (8) and
plastic spatula (C) in under the molding next to
the lower clip (D).
-2 While pulling the clip portion of the molding up
by hand, push each of the eight small hook (E)
in numbered sequence shown to release the
clip from the clip (F) on the A-pillar. Do not try
to pry up the clip if it is hard to release from the
clip on the A-pillar.
-a Gradually work your way up to release each of
the upper clips (G, H, I).
Fastener Locations
D C> : Clip (Blue)
c:; C> : Clip (Green)
H C>: Clip (Yellow)
I C>: Clip (Orange)
- 7mm
- I I (0.28 in.)
=='= 1mm
! (0.039 in.)
BACK
4. Start from the front to the rear, carefully insert a
trim tool in under the roof molding(s) (A) next to
each of the clips (8), and pry the molding(s) up to
release it with the clip from the stud bolt on the
body, then remove the roof portion of the
molding(s).
Without roof rail
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 7
(Light blue)
With roof rail
Fastener Locations
B [>: Clip, 3
(Light blue)
A
A
A
5. Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
(cont'd)
20-209
BACK
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
Molding Installation
1. Install the clips (A, 8, C, D, E, F) on the roof
molding(s) (G).
B
Without roof molding
A Clip (Left): Yellow
A Clip (Right) : Pink
BClip: Blue
C Clip: Green
D Clip: Yellow
E Clip: Orange
F Clip: Light blue
With roof molding
A Clip (Left): Yellow
A Clip (Right) : Pink
BClip: Blue
C Clip: Green
D Clip: Yellow
E Clip: Orange
F Clip: Light blue
20-210
F
B,C,D,E
F
2. Install the roof molding(s) (A).
-1 Ho.ld the roof molding(s) up on the roof, and
align each clip to the stud bolts.
-.2 From the rear to the front, fit the clips (8) to the
stud bolts (C), then push on the molding until
they snap into place.
-a From the top to the bottom, push the clips (D)
in the windshield portion of the roof molding
until they snap into place to the clip (E) on the
A-pillar.
-4 Push the bottom clip (F) to the front fender into
place.
-6 Set the hook (G) ofthe hood hinge cover (H).
Without roof rail
H
BACK
With roof rail
G
3. Push the clip portions into place securely and
reinstall the roof rail (see page 20-207), if equipped.
Body Side Clip Replacement
1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under
the clips (8) while heating it with a heat gun to 212
-248 "F (100-120 "C).
NOTE:
To prevent damage, do not heat the painted
surface around the clips too much .
To keep the exterior resin parts near the A-pillar
from being overheated by the heat gun, wrap
them with aluminum foil.
keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the
surface.
3. Install the clips (A) .
...!I Peel the adhesive backing away from the clips.
-2 Line up the clips with the alignment marks (8)
on the body, and attach the clips with adhesive
tape (C).
-a Apply two-part epoxy adhesive (D) around the
edge of the clips as shown.
Adhesive tape: Thickness 1 mm (0.04 in.)
20-211
BACK
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Panel Replacement
* Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
1. Open the front door and rear door.
2. Remove the side sill panel (A). .
I"
,-1 Remove the screws.(B, C);then remove the splash guard (D).
-2 Remove the clips (E). fastening the rear fender cover (F) and the rear strake (G).
-3 Use the trim tool to pry out the front clips (H), then release the front of the side sill panel from the body.
-4 While pulling the front portion of the side sill panel away from the body, side the panel forward and remove it.
The side clips (I) will stay in the body.
-6 Remove the side clips by turning them 45.
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 4 C ~ : Screw, 1 E [>: Clip, 1
~ ~ ~
[>: Clip, 11
~ I
D
E
F
G
3. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
4. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
5. Hold the panel up, and fit the front clip and all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until
the side clips snap into place.
6. Reinstall the front inner fender and front splash guard.
20-212
BACK
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate and body.
1. Open the tailgate. Disconnect the rear window
washer tube (A). Remove the radio antenna
connector grommet (8) from the tailgate, and
disconnect the radio antenna connector (e).
B
c
2. Remove the access cap (A) from the tailgate, and
remove the nuts (8) and bolts (e) securing the
tailgate spoiler trim.
Fastener Locations
B.:Nut,3
~
C ~ Bolt, 2
@=I
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
3. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate
spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
c
4. Remove the high mount brake light connector
grommet (8) from the tailgate, and disconnect the
high mount brake light connector (e), then remove
the tailgate spoiler trim.
note these items:
Make sure the radio antenna connector and high
mount brake light connector are plugged in
properly and the rear window washer tube is
connected properly.
Make sure the radio antenna connector grommet
and high mount brake light connector grommet
are installed securely.
20-213 BACK
Exterior Trim
Rear License Trim Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the tailgate.
1. With navigation system: Remove the tailgate lower
trim panel (see page 20-96).
2. With navigation system: From inside the tailgate,
disconnect the rear camera unit connector (A).
3. Remove the screws, and release both ends ofthe
rear license trim (A) from the inner taillights (B),
then remove the trim. If equipped, pull the rear
camera unit harness (e) out.
Fastener Locations

{)roll"1
B
A
20-214
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 7
Omn> I
c
A
4. Remove the screw grommets (A) from the tailgate.
NOTE:
If the screw grommets cracked excessively,
If the screw grommets are damaged or stress-
whitened, replace them with new.ones.
If a new rear license trim will be installed,
remove all of remaining screw grommets on the
tailgate and discard them. The screw grommets
have been installed to the new rear license trim
with screws.
=
A
BACK
note these items:
With navigation system: Make sure the rear
camera unit connector is plugged in properly .
If a new rear license trim assembly (A) is to be
installed, hold the trim up, and fit all the screw
grommets (B) into the holes in the tailgate, then
push on the trim until the grommets snap into
place.
New rear license trim installation
B
Rear Gutter Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Use a trim tool to detach the clip (A) and pins (B) of
the rear gutter cover (e).
3. If the clip and grommets (D, E) are damaged or
stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
4. Install the corer in the reverse order of removal,
and push the clip and pins into place securely.
20-215 BACK
Exterior Trim
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front "A" emblem, remove the front grille (see page 20-203).
2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water
from getting on the surface.
3. Apply the emblems where shown .
ACURA/MDX emblems: Remove the adhesive backing. Put the ACURA/MDX emblems with the application
guide foam on the tailgate as shown, then press the emblem into place. Remove the film and application guide
foam .
When installing the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the left quarter glass, align the sticker with the edge of
the black ceramic as shown, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape.
FRONT" A"EMBLEM
Unit: mm (in.)
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.'
FRONT
GRILLE
FRONT"A"
EMBLEM
APPLICATION
GUIDE FORM
APPLICATION
TAPE
ULEV
STICKER
ADHESIVE TAPE
0
ULEV STICKER
REAR" A"EMBLEM
SH-AWD EMBLEM
ACURA EMBLEM
ADHESIVE TAPE
REAR" A"EMBLEM
I
MDXEMBLEM
Body line Body line
APPLICATION
ADHESIVE TAPE
GUIDE FORM
Body line
QUARTER
PILLAR
TRIM
Edge of the
SHAWD EMBLEM black
ceramic

ALIGNMENT /
Edge of
MARK ADHESIVE TAPE
the tailgate
REAR SIDE APPLICATION TAPE
TRIM PANEL
20-216 BACK
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-.!I On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (8, C), then remove the splash guard (D).
-2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the bolt (F) and clips (G) securing the front bumper and front inner
fender.
-a From the wheel arch, remove the clips (H) securing the front splash shield (I) and front inner fender, and
remove the clip (J) securing the front inner fender on the body.
-4 Pull out the front inner fender.
NOTE: To remove the clips G and H, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (K) on its head.
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 4 C : Screw, 1 F G [> : Clip, 3 J [>: Clip, 7
..

E
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
K K
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new one .
20-217
BACK
Fenderwell
Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the splash shield (A).
-1 Remove the clips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and splash shield.
-2, From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E).
-a From under the body, remove the clips (F) that secure the front undercover (G) and splash shield, and remove
the clips (H) that secure the splash shield on the front suspension subframe (I).
-4 Pull the splash shield out.
NOTE: To remove the clips B, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (J) on its head.
Fastener Locations
B I> : caip,2 E I> : Clip, 5 F 1>: Clip, 2 HI>: Clip, 4
i

J J
E
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
20-218
BACK
Front Undercover Replacement
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the bolts (A), and clips (B), then remove
the front undercover (C) from the splash shield (D),
front suspension subframe (E), and front subframe
stiffener (F).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 3 B t> : Clip, 3
... 1
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
Front Strake Replacement
1. Remove the bolts, then remove the front strake (A)
from the front inner fender (B).
Fastener Locations
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.
20-219
BACK
Fenderwell
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body;.
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page
20-217).
2. Pull out and remove the front fender fairing (A).
3. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of
removal.
20 .. 220
Left Front Splash Guard
Reinforcement Replacement
Left front inner fender, as needed (see page
20-217)
Left side sill panel (see page 20-212)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the left front splash
guard reinforcement (A). Take care notto scratch
the body.
Fastener Locations
10x 1.25 mm
38Nm
3. Install the reinforcement in the reverse order of
removal.
BACK
Rear Fender Cover Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
1. Remove the rear fender cover (A) .
...!J Remove the clip (B) that secure the fender
cover and the rear strake (C) from the front of
the rear wheel arch.
-2 Remove the screws (0, E) and clip (F) that
secure the rear bumper (G) and fender cover
from the rear of the rear wheel arch.
-3 Remove the bolts (H) and clip(s) (I) from the
rear wheel arch.
-4 Pull out the rear fender cover.
Left
Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 1 D : Screw, 2
4f
F 1>: Clip, 1

E 1

1>: Clip, 2
41
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
Right
Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 1 D : Screw, 2

F I> : Clip, 1
aE1f

6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
E

2. Install the fender cover in the reverse order of
If the clip are damaged or stress-whitened,
20-221
BACK
Fendetwell
Rear Strake Replacement
1. Remove the clips, then remove the rear strake(A)
from the rear fender cover (B) and side sill panel (e).
Fastener Locations
~
B
A
2. Install the strakein the reverse order of removal,
20-222
Rear "Air Outlet Replacement "
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air
outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
A
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook
portions until the hooks snap into place.
BACK
Openers
. I,'
TAILGATE LATCH
FUEL FILL DOOR ACTUATOR
FUEL FILL DOOR LATCH
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
HOOD OPENER CABLE
20-223 BACK
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
Front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203)
Front inner fender, left side as needed (see page 20-217)
Kick panel, driver's;side (see page 20-76)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (8) (see page 20-225).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 6
~
D
3. Remove the hood release handle (e) (see page 20-226), and disconnect the hood opener cable.
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, and remove the grommet (D) from the body, then remove the hood opener
cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
20-224
BACK
Hood Latch Replacement
2. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A),
then remove the connector clip from the body.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)
from the body.
Fastener Locations
~ Salt, 3
J
S
4. Disconnect the hood opener cable (8) from the
hood latch. Take care not to kink the cable.
note these items:
Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch as
indicated by the arrows.
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and the hood latch switch connector is
Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you
close the hood.
Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-194).
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
20-225
BACK
"
Openers
Hood Release Handle Replacement
1. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-76).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release
handle (A).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,,2
@IlIII[1l1l) I
, .
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (8) from the
hood release handle.Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly .
Make sure the hood opens properly.
20-226'
Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
Left rear side trim panel (see page 20-92).
Left rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
2. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the actuator
rod (A) from the fuel fill door latch (8).
3. Remove the fuel door latch (A).
-1 Turn the latch 45 counterclockwise.
-2 First pull out the end ofthe latch from the
grommet (8).
-a Remove the latch from the fuel fill door adapter
(e) .
BACK
4. If necessary, remove the grommet (A) by releasing
the tabs (B) from inside the vehicle.
5. Install the fuel door latch in the reverse order of
Install the grommet with the arrow mark on the
grommet pointing up .
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
locks securely.
Fuel Fill Door Actuator Replacement
NOTE:
Take care notto scratch the rear bumper.
1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page
20-92).
2. Disconnect the actuator rod (A) and the actuator
connector (B).
B
3. Loosen the bolts, then remove the actuator (A) and
the bracket (B) together by sliding it upward.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt. 2
@m))Jl) I
A
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
4. Install the fuel door actuator in the reverse order of
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and the rod is connected securely .
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
locks securely.
20-227
BACK
Openers
Tailgate Latch Replacement
Without Power Jailgate
If the tailgate latch can't be unlocked by using the
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate
switches, or by unlocking the driver's door lock,
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate
lower trim panel, then turn the emergency lever (8)
clockwise as shown.
20-228
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
20-96) .
2. Disconnect the tailgate latch switch connector (A)
and tailgate actuator connector (8).
Fastener Locations
B
~ Bolt, 2
~
6x1.0mm
4. Pull the tailgate latch (A) out, then remove it
note these items:
properly .
Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
BACK
With Power Tailgate
If the tailgate latch can't be unlocked by using the
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate
switches, remove the maintenance lid (A) from the
tailgate lower trim panel, then turn the emergency
lever (B) clockwise as shown.
audio and the navigation system (if equipped), and
then disconnect the negative cable from the battery .
NOTE: If you remove the tailgate latch while the
negative battery cable is still connected, the vehicle
goes into the failsafe mode.
2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
20-96).
3. Disconnect the tailgate latch connector (A) and
actuator connector (B).
Fastener Locations
C : Bolt, 2 D : Bolt, 1
0)m @nnnn
A
6x 1.0 mm
4. Remove the bolts (e, D).
5. Pull the tailgate latch (E) out, then remove it.
E
(cont'd)
20-229
BACK
Openers
Tailgate Latch Replacement (cont'd)
note these items:
. properly.
Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
(see page 17-28).
Set the clock.
Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
20-230
BACK
Frame
Spare Tire Hoist Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire hoist
(A). Take care not to bend the cable (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 7
.1
8x 1.2Smm
B
3. Install the hoist in the reverse order of removal.
Spare Tire Support Bracket
Replacement
Spare Tire Support Bracket Torque
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,6
~
SPARE TIRE
SUPPORT BRACKET
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibf.tt)
20-231 BACK
Frame,
Rear Wheelhouse Gusset
Replacement
NOTE:
Rear side trim panel (see page 20-92)
Third row seat (see page 20-179)
2. Pull the carpet back as needed.
3. Remove the rear wheelhouse gusset (A).
-1 Remove the ground bolt (8) and release the
harness clip (C).
-2 Remove the bolts (D).
-a From outside the vehicle, remove the nuts (E).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Bolt, 1 D : Bolt, 2
@)TITIFJQ)mn
E .:Nut,4
~ I
9.8Nm
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
4. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal.
20-232
Cargo UdSupport Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body and related parts .
Rear side trim panel, both sides (see page 20-92)
Rear side trim panel support bracket (see step 11
on page 20-94)
Cargo rear trim panel (see page 20-90)
XM receiver (see page 23-96)
Active damper control unit (see page 18-118)
2. Remove the clips fastening the rear differential
breather box (see page 15-73).
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the cargo lid
support (A). '
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,S
~
4. Install the support in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque
After removing the subframe mounting bolts and front subframe stiffener mounting bolts, be sure to replace them
with new ones.
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
FRONT BRACKET
/
SPECIAL BOLT
14x1.5mm
103Nm
Replace.
12x1.25mm
74Nm
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME STIFFENER
12x1.25mm
117Nm
(11.9 kgfm,
86.1 Ibf.ft)
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME REAR
BRACKET
SPECIAL BOLT
14x1.5mm
103Nm
Replace.
10x1.25mm
54Nm
Replace.
(cont'd)
20-233
BACK
Frame
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Front Subframe Alignment
NOTE:
After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align all of the installation reference holes in the subframe, in the
subframe front bracket, and in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide, then tighten the bolts .
After reinstalling all removed parts, check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
REAR BRACKET
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH
20-234
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Bracket side)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
BACK
Rear Subframe Torque
NOTE:
When installing, align both installation reference hol.es in the subframe with the reference holes in the body s i n a
screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide .
After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
Reference hole alignment
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH
LOWER INSULATOR
..
SPECIAL BOLT
14x1.5mm
REFERENCE HOLE
(Body side)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
Replace.
Front
SPECIAL BOLT
14x 1.5 mm
Replace.
20-235
BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
8: Inner diameter
a For bumper beam mount 811 (0.43)
b1 For front subframEl mount 815(0.59) forward
b2 For front subframe mount 815(0.59) rearward
c For engine side mount 813(0.51)
d Front damper center hole 880 (3.15)
e Side frame gusset locating hole 828(1.1)
VERTICAL LINE
268 (10.6) d
c (" rt-,

\

-----------
----
I

CENTER
LINE
en
....

...
'"

!:1

in

i
In
;;
In
!
s:!
l::!
----
-----
I
N
iii
!:i
en
!3
'------i
..
'/

I
>1

59 (2.32)
b2
/
e
/

rMl ( If
N
iii
!!
...
m

It I l\

481 (18.9) 374 (14.7)
727 (28.6) 705 (27.76)
20-236
BACK
f For propeller shaft mount 612 (0.47)
g1 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) left side forward
g2 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) right side forward
g3 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59)right side rearward
g4 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) left side rearward
h1 For trailing arm mount 617 (0.67) outside
h2 For trailing arm mount 617 (0.67) center side
Floor frame extension locating hole 625 (0.98)
f
k1
r-
...
....
N
r--
<;
.,;
...
CD
...
..,
1530
(60.24)
1665 (65.55)
1786 (70.31)
2134 (84.02)
2166 (85.28)
2277 (89.65)
2365 (93.11)
2490 (98.03)
2514 (98.98)
k1
k2
I
m
n
0
p
2814 (110.8)
Rear frame locating hole 623 (0.91) forward
For rear subframe mount 616 (0.63) forward
For rear subframe mount 616 (0.63) rearward
For rear damper mount center
Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 611 (0.43)
Rear frame locating hole 625 (0.98) rearward
For spare tire hoist mount 69 (0.35) forward
For spare tire hoist mount 69 (0.35) rearward
n
2868 (112.9) 3055
(120.3)
3297
(129.8)
3635 (143.1)
(cant'd)
20-237 BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
8: Inner diameter
a For bumper beam mount 811 (0.43)
b1 For front subframe mount 815 (0.59) forward
b2 For front subframe mount 815 (0.59) rearward
c For engine side mount'813 (0.51)
d Front damper center hole 880 (3.15)
e Side frame gusset locating hole 828 (1.1)
c
M10x 1.25
M
co

M
..,
BASE
LINE
;:::
!i
..,

'"
b1
M14x 1.5
20-238
80
(3.15)
132 (5.20)
3-e11.5 (0.45)
[ SECTION: AA ]
N
...

;!
co
III
b2
M14x 1.5
VERTICAL LINE
e
BACK
f For propeller shaft mount 812 (0.47)
g1 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) left side forward
g2 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) right side forward
g3 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59)right side rearward
g4 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) left side rearward
h1 For trailing arm mount 817 (0.67) outside
h2 For trailing arm mount 817 (0.67) center side
Floor frame extension locating hole 825 (0.98)
Rear frame locating hole 823 (0.91) forward
k1 For rear subfrarne mount 816 (0.63) forward
k2 For rear subframe mount 816 (0.63) rearward
For rear damper mount center
m Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 811 (0.43)
n Rear frame locating hole 825 (0.98) rearward
[ SECTION: BB ]

CENTERLINE
h1
M14x 1.25
n
in
;::::

;::::
;::::
ii!

0 co
N ::f
!:.

!i !:.
co
N ... N ...
l::!
'"
In ... ... N In en ...
20-239
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
airbags in the front seat,backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual.
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
BACK
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
HVACJ Heati,n g,. Vertilation, and
Air ConditloIllng
Special Tools ............................................... 21-2
Climate Control
Component Location Index ....................... 21-3
NC Service Tips and Precautions ............. 21-6
NC Refrigerant Oil Replacement .............. 21-6
Front NC Line Replacement ...................... 21-7
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 21-8
DTCTroubleshooting Index ....................... 21-15
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 21-17
System Description .................................... 21-18
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 21-28
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 21-32
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................................... 21-91
Climate Control Unit Troubleshooting ..... 21-93
Radiator and NC Condenser Fan
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ...... 21-94
NC Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit
AlC Compressor Clutch Circuit
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor
Test ........................................................... 21-103
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement ............................................ 21-104
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test ...... 21-105
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement ............................................ 21-105
SunlightSensorTest .................................. 21-106
Sunlight Sensor Replacement ................... 21-106
Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test ........................................................... 21-107
Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Replacement ............................................ 21-107
Front Power Transistor Test ...................... 21-108
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test .......... 21-109
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement ............................................ 21-110
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Test ........................................................... 21-110
Replacement ............................................ 21-111
Front Mode Control Motor Test ................ 21-112
Front Mode Control Motor
Replacement ............................................ 21-112
Recirculation Control Motor Test .............. 21-113
Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement ............................................ 21-113
Climate Control Unit
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement .......... 21-114
Blower Unit Removal/Installation ............. 21-115
Blower Unit Component Replacement ..... 21-116
Front Evaporator Core Replacement ........ 21-117
* Heater Unit/Core Replacement ................. 21-118
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment ................ 21-122
NC Compressor Replacement .................. 21-123
NC Compressor Clutch Check .................. 21-125
NC Compressor Clutch Overhaul ............. 21-126
NC Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement ............................................ 21-127
NC Condenser Replacement ..................... 21-128
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement ... 21-129
Refrigerant Recovery ................................. 21-130
System Evacuation ..................................... 21-131
System Charging ........................................ 21-132
Refrigerant Leak Test ................................. 21-133
NC System Test ......................................... 21-134
Rear Climate Control
Rear NC Line Replacement ....................... 21-139
Rear Heater Line Replacement .................. 21-140
Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test ........................................................... 21-141
* Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Replacement ............................................ 21-141
* Rear Power Transistor Test ....................... 21-142
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test ............... 21-143
* Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement ............................................ 21-143
Rear Mode Control Motor Test .................. 21-144
* Rear Mode Control Motor
Replacement ............................................ 21-144
* Rear Climate Control Panel
* Rear Blower Motor Replacement .............. 21-145
* Rear Heater Core Replacement ................. 21-146
* Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation ...... 21-147
* Rear HVAC Unit Component
Replacement ............................................ 21-149
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion
07SAZ-001000A
CD
I
21-2
BACK
Climate Control
SERVICE VALVE .
(LQW.PRESSURE SIDE)
FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE
(Locatedin the heater unit)
Replacement, page 21117
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
Replacement, page 21129
A/C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-125
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-126
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-127
(cont'd)
21-3 BACK
Climate Control
21-4
FAN CONTROL RELAY
Test, page 22"77 '
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-77
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-77
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-77
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Test, page 22-77
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELA Y BOX
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-105
RADIATOR FAN
AIC FAN
BACK
DRIVER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-109
Replacement,
page 21-110
HEATER VALVE
CABLE
Adjustment,
page 21-122
FRONT EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-107
Replacement,
page 21-107
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-103
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, page 21-106
FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE
(Located-in the heater unit)
HEATER UNIT/CORE
Replacement, page 21-1 i8
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-112
BLOWER UNIT ,
/
page 21-115
Component Replacement,
page 21-116
DUST AND
POLLEN FILTER
Replacement,
page 21-114
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-113
PAS.SENGER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-110
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
page21-114
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-108
21-5
BACK
Climate Control
A/C Service Tips and Precautions

Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a
combustible vapor.
The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury.
Never use compressed air to pressure test
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems.

Air conditioning refr,igerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
Be careful when connecting service equipment.
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) oil,
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral
oil in this system, and do not attempt,to use R-12
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning
system or your servicing equipment will result.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work
area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
with compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacture'rs.
Always disconnect the negative cable,from the
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
When discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
Recommended PAG oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8
PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 mL (4 floz)
PIN 38899-PR7-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 floz)
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
listed if you replace any of the following parts.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
, container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately.
NC condenser
(including Dryer
................ 50 mL (1 2/3 floz)
Front Evaporator ..... 40 mL (1 1/3 floz)
Rear Evaporator ...... 30 mL (1 floz)
Line or hose ............. 10 mL (1/3 floz)
Receiver/Dryer
Desiccant ................. 10 mL (1/3 floz)
Leakage repair ......... 25 mL (5/6 floz)
NC compressor ....... For NC compressor replacement,
subtract the volume of oil drained
from the removed NC
compressor from
REMOVED
125 mL (4 2/9 floz), and drain the
calculated volume of oil from the
new NC compressor: 125 mL
(42/9 floz) - Volume of removed
NC compressor =Volume to
drain from new NC compressor.
NOTE: Even if no oil is drained
from the removed NC
compressor, don't drain more
than 50 mL (1 2/3 floz) from the
new NC compressor,
NEW
AIC COMPRESSOR AIC COMPRESSOR
gogo
6 6 66
H----i=:'}.
A: 125 mL 14 2/9 fl.G.)
BACK
Front Ale Line Replacement
FRONT SUCTION LINE

(j)
A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
A/C COMPRESSOR
CD Discharge hose to the A/C compressor 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibftt)
Discharge hose to the A/C condenser 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibftt)
Front receiver line to the AlC condenser 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm 11.0 kgf.m. 7.2 Ibftt)
CD A/C pressure sensor to the front receiver line 111 x 1.0 mm): 10.8 Nm 11.1 kgfm. 8.0 Ibftt)
Front receiver line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibftt)
Front suction line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibftt)
(j) Front suction line to the suction hose 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibftt)

Suction hose to the A/C compressor 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm. 7.2 Ibf.ft)
A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket 18 x 1.25 mml: 22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m. 16.2 Ibfttl
l A/C compressor to the engine block 110 x 1.25 mml: 45 Nm 14.6 kgfm. 33.2Ibfttl
21-7
BACK
Climate Control
How to Check for OTCs with the HOS
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
A
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If
no DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS .
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
21-8
BACK
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function with the HOS
1. Make sure the ignition.switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu.
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS .
For specific operations, refer to the u ~ e r s manual that came with the HDS.
(cont'd)
21-9
BACK
Climate Control
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
2. Press and hold the OFF button, then press the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button five times within 10 seconds.
Release the OFF and RECIRCULATION CONTROL buttons; then the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
The blower motor will run at various speeds regardless of what the panel is displaying.
Ifthere is any problem in the system, the system flashes "88 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST"or alternately
flashes "88 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST" and one or more ofthe 14 segments (A through Pl. Refer to
checking for DTCs.
If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function
AUTO INDICATOR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INDICATOR
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
21-10
BACK
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. If indicator segments A, B, C, E, G, J, M, N, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST are on at the same time, there may be an open in the common ground wire. If no DTCs are
present, the indicator remains blank.
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INDICATOR
AUTO
DTe (Driver's Detection Item
Temperature Indicator
Segment, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
AandAUTO An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-41)
BandAUTO A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
CandAUTO An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-44)
DandAUTO A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see paJ}e 21-45)
E and AUTO An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-46)
F and AUTO A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-47)
G and AUTO An open in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see paQe 21-48)
H and AUTO A short in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-50)
J and AUTO An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-51)
KandAUTO A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-52)
Land AUTO A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-55)
M and AUTO An open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-56)
N and AUTO A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-57)
PandAUTO A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-60)
(cont'd)
21-11
BACK
Climate Control
DTC (Driver's Detection Item
Temperature Indicator
Segment, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
AUTO Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (ECT message)
(see page 21-32)
A An open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see J!age 21-62)
B A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or motor circuit (see page 21-64)
C A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-65)
F An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-69)
G A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-70)
H Aproblem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-73)
J An open or short in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-36)
K A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-88)
M A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-38)
N An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-33)
p
A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-34)
A and WINDSHIELD An open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-76), a short in the humidity sensor
DEFROST circuit (see page 21-77)
B and WINDSHIELD An open in the AlC pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-81), a short in the AlC
DEFROST pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-83)
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit
The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and cheek the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
"Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
"Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
58 through 86 "F settings will use the automatic.climate control logic.
21-12
BACK
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps
2. Press and hold both the AUTO and RECIRCULATION CONTROL buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release both buttons. The display panel control unit will flash the sensor number and then
the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER button.
Sensor Item Displayed Value
1 In-car Temperature "C
2 Outside Air Temperature "C
3 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy = 1 0, Sunny = kcal/m
2
.h
65
4 Front Outlet Air "C
5 Driver's and Passenger's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air % of opening
distribution, higher value indicates warmer air distribution)
6 Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) "C
7 Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be driven to display speed) km/h
8 AlC Pressure 10kPa
9 Rear Air Mix Opening % of opening
A Rear Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) "C
B Rear Evaporator Outlet Air Temperature "C
C Humidity Sensor Value % rh
D Fog Margin "C
E Solar Radiation azimuth (With navigation system) 10
F Solar Radiation angle of elevation (With navigation system) 10
NOTE:
The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius ("C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert
the value to degrees Fahrenheit
If the sensor value displays "Er" this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs
using the HDS, or refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication.
If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor, and recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
21-13
BACK
Climate Control
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table
'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 . 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
AI h IPI anumerlc
C
onverslon a
. T bl
e
Display Reading 'C 'f %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 -1 thru -9 30 thru 16 -1 thru-9
BOthru B9 -10thru -19 14thru-2 -10thru -19
COthru C9 -20thru -29 -4thru -20 -20thru -29
DOthru D9 -30thru -39 -22thru -38 -30thru -39
EO thru E9 -40thru -49 -40thru -58 -40thru -49
FO thru F9 -- -- +100 thru +109
21-14
BACK
Ch k" h DTC b HDS ec Ing t e s )y
DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTCtype Page
81200 Communication bus line error (bus-off) Climate control Loss of (see page 22-129)
unit communication
81202 Climate control unit internal error Climate control Internal error (see page 21-32)
unit
81205 Climate control unit lost communication Climate control Loss of (see page 21-32)
with gauge control module (VSP/NE unit communication
m e s s a g ~
with gauge control module (ECr unit communication
message)
with gauge control module (lLLUMI unit communication
message)
81213 An open in the rear evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-33)
temperature sensor circuit unit
81214 A short in the rear evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-34)
81215 An open or short in the recirculation Climate control Signal error (see page 21-36)
control motor circuit unit
81223 A problem in the rear blower motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-38)
circuit unit
81225 An open in the in-car temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-41)
sensor circuit unit
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-43)
circuit unit
81227 An open in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-44)
sensor circuit unit
81228 A short in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-45)
sensor circuit unit
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-46)
unit
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-47)
unit
81231 An open in the front evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-48)
81232 A short in the front evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-50)
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-51)
motor circuit unit
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-52)
motor circuit unit
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-55)
linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-56)
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-57)
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-60)
control linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
(cont'd)
21-15
BACK
Climate Control
C heckingthe DlC b HDS 5 )y
DlC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DlCtyp_e Page
81239 An open or short in the front mode Climate control Signal error (see page 21-62)
81240 A problem in the front mode control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-64)
linkage, doors, or motor circuit unit
81241 A problem in the front blower motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-65)
circuit unit
81244 An open in the rear air mix control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-69)
circuit unit
81245 A short in the rear air mix control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-70)
circuit unit
81246 A problem in the rear air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-73)
linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
with rear climate control panel unit communication
82967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-76)
unit
82968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-77)
unit
with combination switch control unit unit communication
(WIPSW message)
with relay control module (RM message) unit communication
82979 An open in the AlC pressure sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-81)
circuit unit
82980 A short in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-83)
unit
with navigation unit unit communication
82983 A problem in the recirculation control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-88)
Iink<!Re, door, or motor circuit unit
with audio unit unit communication
21-16 BACK
SYmptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Rear mode control doors do not Rear mode control motor circuit troubleshooting HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
change between ceiling vents (see page 21-91) Blown fuse No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash
(cool) and floor vents (hot) fuse/relay box
Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Blower, heater controls, and AlC Climate control unittroubleshooting (see page HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
do not work 21-93) Blown fuse No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G506 (see page 22-67)
,Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Both fans do not run at low speed Radiator and AlC condenser fan low speed circuit HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
with the AlC on (but the AlC troubleshooting (see page 21"94) Blown fuse No. 15 (30 A) in the relay block,
compressor runs with the AlC on) and No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
Poor ground at G301 (see page 22-67)
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fan high speed circuit HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
run at high speed (but both fans troubleshooting (see page 21-98) Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
run at low speed and the AlC
compressor operates with the AlC
on)
Both fans do not run at high speed ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
with the AlC on (but both fans run voltage (see page 11-175), ECT sensor 2 circuit high Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
at low speed and the A/C voltage (see page 11-177)
compressor operates with the AlC
on)
The AlC compressor clutch does A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
not engage (but both fans run with (see page 21-100) Blown fuse No.7 (7.5 A) in the relay block,
theA/C on) and No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
Blower fan(s) runs slower than ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
expected in cold weather voltage (see page 11-175), ECT sensor 2 circuit high
voltage (see page 11-177)
NOTE: It is normal for the blower(s) to run slowly
until the angine coolant temperature begins to rise.
If the blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length oftime, continue to troubleshoot
the problem.
HDS does not communicate with Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223)
the climate control unit or the
vehicle
21-17
BACK
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air
to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat from the ambient
air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger .. compartment.
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the, evaporator)
I
FRONT BLOWER FAN
Y . FRONT EVAPORATOR
~ = ~ ~ ~ ' / (Absorption of heat)
FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
(Triple function)
When the refrigerantis below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm',
455 psi), the PCM turns the
com pressor relay off to protect
the AlC compressor. .
t
When the refrigerant is above
1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm', 213 psi), t
the AlC pressure sensor
switches the radiator and
AlC condenser fans to high speed.
AlC CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
RECEIVER/DRYER
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
RELIEF VALVE
(Relieves pressure at the A/C compressor
when the pressure is too high)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
III. LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
Eli 1 HII' LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) designed for the R-134a AlC
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in AlC
compressor failure.
All AlC system parts (AIC compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, AlC condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
AlC fitting.
21-18
BACK
Humidity /In-car Temperature Sensor
The humidity sensor consists of two sensors. One is the humidity detection part and the other is the in-car
temperature detection part. When the climate control unit receives the signals of the in-car condition from the
humidity sensor, and judges that the humidity in the vehicle is very low, the climate control unit adjusts the
compressor. Engine power loss is kept to a minimum.
HUMIDITY
INSPECTION
SECTION
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Quality
The capacitance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance
change of the humidity sensor changes the output voltage.
VOLTAGE
(V)
5
4
3
2
o
./
/V
i-""
o 20
./
./'
/
./
/'
/
V
40 60 80 100
HUMIDITY LEVEL (0/0 rh)
(cont'd)
21-19
BACK
Climate Control
Ale Pressure Sensor
The AlC pressure sensor converts AlC pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
NOTE: The pressures can be monitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List.
SENSOR UNIT
The response of the AlC pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
21-20
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
v
4.575
0.684
0.425
0.2945
-99
(-1)
[ -14]
Vcc5V
o 196
(2)
[28]
Ale PRESSURE
Vout
3.138
(32)
[455]
GND
kPa
(kgf/cm')
[psi]
BACK
Climate Control Door Positions

"
(VENTI
(HEATNENTI
(HEATI
AIR MIX
DOORS
HEATNENT
DOOR
_HOT
DEFROSTER
DOOR
(cant'd)
21-21 BACK
Climate Control
"'HOT
::=JCOOL
(HEAT/DEF)
(DEF)
21-22
BACK
Dual Air Mix Control System
Driver's side: HOT
Passenger's side: COOL
DRIVER'S AIR MIX DOOR
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX DOOR
Driver's side: COOL
Passenger's side: HOT
(cont'd)
21-23
BACK
Climate Control
i-Dual and i-Tri Climate Control System (With navigation system)
The "i-Dual" climate control system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to
the driver's and passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates
information such as date, time, longitude, and latitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of
the sun from the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each
side. The "i-Tri" climate control system is an addition of the automatic controls with the temperature and the vent
mode of the air direction to the rear section to the "i-Dual" climate control system.
IRRADIATE STRENGTH
.. .
,
,
,
SYSTEM
DATE
LONGITUDE
LATITUDE
DIRECTION OF THE VEHICLE
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL PANEL
.. .
L-______________________________
FRONT DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL
PASSENGER'S
AIR MIX DOOR
With i-Tri
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL
REAR AIR MIX DOOR
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation system cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the same as
a vehicle without a navigation system.
21-24
BACK
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
CONNECTOR A
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 WHT BACKUP INPUT
2 VEL NAVIGATION UNIT (S!)" INPUT
3 VEL IG2(Power) INPUT
4 LTGRN B-CAN INPUT/OUTPUT
5 LTBLU IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
6 GRV COMMON POTENTIAL 5V OUTPUT
8 RED SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT
9 BLU FRONT BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
10 RED FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
11 PUR DRIVER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
12 PNK DRIVER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
13 LTBLU DRIVER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
14 LTGRN PASSENGER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
15 VEL PASSENGER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
16 GRN FRONT MODE DEF OUTPUT
17 ORN FRONT MODE VENT OUTPUT
18 VEL FRESH OUTPUT
19 ORN RECIRCULATE OUTPUT
21 BLU NAVIGATION UNIT (CLK)" OUTPUT
22 RED NAVIGATION UNIT (SO)" OUTPUT
23 LTBLU ILLUMI(+) INPUT
24 BRN FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
25 PUR ACC INPUT
26 LTGRN AlC PRESSURE SENSOR OUTPUT
27 VEL HUMIDITY SENSOR OUTPUT
28 PNK OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
29 PUR SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT
30 BLU PASSENGER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
31 WHT FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 1 OUTPUT
32 LTGRN FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 2 OUTPUT
33 PUR FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 3 OUTPUT
34 BLU FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 4 OUTPUT
35 WHT RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 1 OUTPUT
36 BLK RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 2 OUTPUT
37 BLK GROUND (G506) OUTPUT
38 GRN RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 3 OUTPUT
*: With navigation system
(cont'd)
21-25
BACK
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
CONNECTORB
1 GRN REAR AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
2 PNK REAR AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
3 VEL REAR MODE HEAT INPUT
4 BLK REAR MODE VENT INPUT
5 PUR REAR AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
6 LTBLU REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
8 BLU AUDIO UNIT (HVAC BUS) INPUT/OUTPUT
11 ORN REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL (AIC BUS RX) INPUT/OUTPUT
12 GRN REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL (AIC BUS TX) INPUT/OUTPUT
13 RED REAR BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
14 BLU REAR POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
Rear Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 10P CONNECTOR
11 VI3 VI2131
7
1/191
10
1
1 VEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
3 BLK GROUND (G506) OUTPUT
7 LTBLU ILLUMI(+) INPUT
9 GRN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (AIC BUS TX) INPUT/OUTPUT
10 ORN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (AIC BUS RX) INPUT/OUTPUT
21-26
BACK
BACK
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
SAIlEIIY
+
21-28
MAIN UNDER-HOODRJSE BOX
No.21RR BlOWERI130Al
NoJIIGII50AI
no
No.4 140AI

NoJ
1R831
160 AI
No.7 RJSE
IntheRELAY
CONTHOl MODULE
?
PUR REO
No.12 140 AI
-iT'

""""
PNK
WHT
PCM
[:>--lTGRN
ISTRlY)
WHY
IG2CUTRELAY UNDER-DASHRJSE/RELAY BOX
4
A4
No.30ll0Al
N20
,
GRN VEl
0':
07
VEl
PNK
AS
NoJl 110 AI
N39
YEl PUR
--[>- TRANSMISSION
PNK RAGE SWITCH
IP,NI
85
No.lll0AI
Xl5
WHY
RELAY BlOCKIn the UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RElAYBOX
I ________ ________ -t ____ __ 1-__________ ___ 1 r.:::1 2 PUR
i
No.1S I!.:.I FIIONT
130 AI FAN NC AlC BLOWER
RADIATOR CONTROL CONDENSER COMPRESSOR MOTOR
4 FAN RElAY 1 r-'1+...:.:RE=LA:::Y__ --1..;;5., 1 FAN RElAY 4 4 ClUTCHRELAY 1 4 RELAY
I I I II g -----------:111 g---------,11
BRN
RADIATOR
M FAN
MOTOR
BlK
1
0001
PUR RED BlU
NC
CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
WHY RED
A4 A13
FANlO ACCl
CANlO
5V
CAN HI
2 3 2
PUR BLK WHT
f
1
I
REO
G202

COMPRESSOR
ClUTCH
UNDER-DASH
"!!. RED.!6. fi;:i 1
AS N22 X27
lTGRN lTGRN
A48 A12
WHT
ENGINECOOlANT
tEMPERATURE IEC1J SENSOR 2
TW2
SG r
__
A2l .....
PCM
BACK
: CANline

A4
LTG N
AlONT AIONTPOWER
BLOWER MOTOR mANSlSTOR
wm ___ @l---GRNiffrl
OUTSiDE AIR
TIMPERATIJRf
SENSOR
Ifl
BLU 1
G507
IS AID
AlONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM
7
CUMATI CONTROL UNIT
ORMNGCIRCUIT
RECIRCULAT10N CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM
RED wm RED RED
1..-
1
--I_RED-_I --

(cont'd)
21-29 BACK
Climate Control

21-30

AUDIOUNIT
c::J
: C24
BLU WHT PUR
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT : B8 Al f(JS
\
+BBACUP Ate
(
..... ;>- .....
.., ..,
A13 A12 All A6 A15 A14 AJO
LTBLU mK PUR
Gi
J J
M-HOT AMO-P M-COOL M-HOT
DRIVER'S AIR MIX PASSENGER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM S-COM
REO RED
---REO I REO I
YEL
AJ
DRMNGCIRCUIT
5V
l
A2l AS
J
GRY va LTBLU
HUMIDITY
SENSDR
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE
RED
SENSOR
I REO
!With navigation system)

I
I
I
I
I
I
i
51
A4
YEL
A2
J
SO a.K
A14 A15
RED BLU
A22 A2l
I
i
: - L..L!
l.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..
..... )-
A26
GRY
J
GRY LTGRN
IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
A/C
PRESSURE
SENSOR
WHT
RED I
GRY-----
REO-----
BACK
:Otherc:ommunlcationline

IG2
AfAR MOOE
eONlROL MOTOR
M-VENT
BlJ(
M-HEAT
VEL
BIJ(----------------,
REAR POWER
TRANSISTOR
-4ffrl
Ifl
REO BLU Bu( No22 n.5A) FUSE
in theRELAYBLOCK

PNK

G503
84 B3 ClIMATECONlROl UNIT B13 B14
iH
DRIVING CIRCUIT
AfAR AIR MIX
eONlROL MOTOR
S-COM
REO
5V
LTBLU
. AfAR
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
AS
REO
-------REO ---..... 1----REO ----__ --------.....
Bll 10
ORN Ale BUZRX
B12 9
................ GRN ...... .. .. .. .. Afe BUS TX
BIJ(
VEL
Bu(
G506
REAR
ClIMATE
CONlROL
PANEL
21-31
BACK
Climate Control
OTe Troubleshooting
DTe 81202: Climate Control Unit Internal
Error
NOTE: Check the battery condition (see page 22-76) and
the charging system (see page 4-28).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
4. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9).
5. Check for DTCs.
YES-The climate control unit is faulty, replace the
climate control unit .
NO-Intermittent failure, the climate control unit is
OK at this time .
21-32
DTe 81205: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module
(VSP/NE message)
DTe 81206 or DTe indicator AUTO: Climate
Control Unit Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (ECT message)
DTe 81207: Climate Control Unit Lost
(lLLUMI message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-can diagnosis test
mode A (see page 22-112).
4. Do the self-diagnostic with. the HDS (see page 21-9)
or climate control unit (see page 21-10).
5. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC 81205, and/or 81206 or AUTO, and/or
81207 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or
poor connections on the climate control unit
connector A (40P) .
6. Check for DTCs using the HDS.
Are any of the following DTCs indicated; 81011,

YES-Do the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-334)
NO-Do the climate control unit troubleshooting
(see page 21-93) .
BACK
OTC 81213 or OTC indicator N: An Open in
the Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is Dre 81213 or N indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear evaporator
temperature sensor circuit..
6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor
(see page 21-141), and test it (see page 21-141).
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature
sensor .
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (14P).
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector B (14P) terminal No. 6 and the rear
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
terminal No.2.
REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the rear evaporator temperature
sensor .
(cont'd)
21-33
BACK
Clilnate Control
connector A (40P) terminal No: 8 and the rear
terminal No.1.
2P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector A (40P), B (14P), and
at the rear evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.lfthe connections are good, substitute a
known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original climate control unit .
sensor .
21-34
DTC 81214 or DTC indicator P: A Short in the
Rear Evaporator Temperature. Sensor Circuit
or climate control unit(see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81214 or P indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure .
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature
sensor .
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P)
and B (14P).
BACK
connector B (14P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
between the climate control unit and the rear
evaporator temperature sensor .
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit'
connector A (40P) terminal No; 8 and climate
control unit connector B (14P) No.6.
CLIMATE CONTROl. UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate
~ M O ~ .'
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit .
21-35
BACK
Climate Control
OlC 81215 or OlC indicator J: An Open or
Short in the Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit
1. Cleat the 'OTC witl'l'the HDS.
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS(see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81215 or J indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent fail,ura, h e ~ for loose wires or
poor connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit .
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
21-113).
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-113) .
7. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
21-36
9. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.8 No.7
No. 35 No.5
No. 36 No.4
No. 38 No.3
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor .
BACK
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals
No. 35, 36, and 38 individually.
= =
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
connector A (40P) terminals as follows.
From terminal To terminals
35 36,38
36 38
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES-Repair the short in the wires .
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (11), and check the same
terminals for voltage to body ground.
=
Is there any voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
the climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit: Repair the short to power
before replacing the climate control unit .
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
recirculation control motor 7P connector. Ifthe
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit..
21-37
BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81223 or DTC indicator M: A Problem in
the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81223 or M indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear blower motor
circuit .
6. Check the No.2 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse box, and the No. 30 (10 A)fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No.2 (RR
BLOWER) (30 A) and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit .
7. Connect the rear blower motor 2P connector
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
=
21-38
Does the rear blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 9 ..
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the jumper wire.
11. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between the rear power
transistor 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G503 (see page
22-67) .
13. Connect the rear power transistor 4P connector
~
L
1 2 JUMPER WIRE
8 4 ORN
BACK
Does the rear blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the ORN wire between the rear
power transistor and the rear blower motor .
16. Disconnectthe jumper wire.
climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals
power transistor .
NO-Go to step 19.
terminals of climate control unit connector B (14P)
and the rear power transistor 4P connector.
14P: 4P:
No. 13
No.14
No.3
No.1
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
YES-Go to step 20.
climate control unit and the rear power
transistor.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) .
NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
21-39
BACK
Climate Control
22. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (14P).
23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-142).
Is the rear power transistor OK?
climate control unitconnector B (14P) and at the
rear power transistor 4P connector. If the
climate control unit; and recheck .. lf the symptom/
control unit..
NO-Replace the rear power transistor (see page
21-142) .
24. Disconnect the jumperwire.
25. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
26. Measure the voltage between the rear blower
motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page
21-145) .
NO-Go to step 27.
28. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the
dashboard wire harness, and test it (see page
22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Replace the rear blower motor relay .
21-40
motor relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body
ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
=
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.2 (RR
BLOWER) (30 A) in the under-hood fuse box and
rear blower motor relay .
motor relay 4Psocket terminal No.2 and body
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 32.
rear blower motor relay .
BACK
33. Check for continuity between the rear blower motor
relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and body ground.
YES-Repair open in the GRY wire between the
rear blower motor relay and the blower motor .
rear blower motor relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503
(see page 22-67) .
DTC 81225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An
Open in the In.,car Temperature Sensor
Circuit
3. Do the with the HDS (see page 21-9)
or climate control 'unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81225 or A and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the in-car temperature sensor
circuit .
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor .
(cont'd)
21-41
BACK
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity betWeen Climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminal No.5 and the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector
terminal No.4.
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE .SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
Q
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor .
21-42
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the
humidity/inccar temperature sensor 4P connector
terminal No.3.
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
climate control unit connector A (40P) and atthe
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
the connections are good, substitute a known-good
control unit..
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor .
BACK
OTC B1226 or OTC indicator B and AUTO: A
Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81226 or 8 and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
sensor .
connector A (40P) terminal No.5 and body ground.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI
Q
=
between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor .
NO-Go to step 9.
connector A (40P) terminals No.5 and No.8.
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor..
replace the original climate control unit..
21-43 BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: An
Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81227 or C and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the outside air temperature
sensor circuit .
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor .
21-44
connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and the outside
air temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor..
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the outside air
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.1.
Q
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
control unit..
sensor .
DTC 81228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A
Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
2. Turn the ignition switch OFFand then ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
21-45
BACK
Climate Control
connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and body ground:
=
between the climate control unit and the outside air
NO-Go to step 9.
connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 28.
sensor .
21-46
OTC 81229 or OTCindicator E and AUTO: An
Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81229 or E and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit..
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and the sunlight
sensor 5Pconnectorterminal No.4.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the sunlight sensor .
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the sunlight
sensor 5P connector terminal No.2.
YES-Go to step 10.
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106) .

DTC 81230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A
Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and body ground.
=
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor .
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-47
BACK
Climate Control
connector A (40P) No.8 and No. 29.
NO-Goto step 10.
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

21-48
OTC 81231 or OTC indicator G and AUTO: An
Open in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
3. Do the self"diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81231 or G and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the front evaporator
temperature sensor circuit..
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor
Is the front evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature
sensor..
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and the front
terminal No.2.
2P CONNECTOR .
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the front evaporator temperature
sensor .
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the front
terminal No.1.
2P CONNECTOR
front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good climate control unit, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
sensor .
21-49
BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: A
Short in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (ff).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81232 or H and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is the.tront evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
sensor .
21-50
=
between the climate control unit and the front
evaporator temperature sensor .
NO-Go to step 9.
sensor .
BACK
DTC 81233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An
Open in the Driver's Air Mix Centrel Metor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81233 or J and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the driver's.air mix control
motor circuit .
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-109).
Is. the driver's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor
(see page 21-110) .
7. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.6
No.8
No.11
No.7
No.5
No.3
CLIMATE CeNTReL UNIT CeNNECTeR A (40P)
Q
DRIVER'S AIR MIX ceNTReL MeTeR 7P CeNNECTeR
climate control unit connector A (40P) and atthe
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit .
climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor .
21-51
BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81234 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A
Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81234 or K and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; 81237 or Nand
AUTO, and/or 81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST, and/or 82980 or 8 and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
21-109).
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
(see page 21-110) .
connector.
21-52
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal
No.11.
Q
=
YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the driver's air
mix control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Repairthe short in the wires .
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the
voltage between climate control unit connector A
(40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix
climate control unit. Repair the short to power
before replacing the climate control unit. .
replace the original climate control unit ..
climate control unit.
14. Disconnect these items:
Driver's air mix control motor
Passenger's air mix control motor
Rear air mix control motor
Humidity/in-car temperature sensor
AlC pressure sensor
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire .
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
terminal for voltage to body ground.
=
YES-Repair short to power in the wire. This short
may have also damaged the climate control unit.
Repair the short to power before replacing the
climate control unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
21-53
BACK
Climate Control
18. Reconnect climate control unit connector (40P).
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure the
=
Is there about 5 volts?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Check for a loo.se wire or poor connection at
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the
connection is good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
control unit.
21-54
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to
ground, reconnect these items individually and
note the voltage reading each time:
AlC pressure sensor
=
Does the voltage remain at about 5 volts?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
NO-Replace the component that caused the
voltage drop .
BACK
DTC 81235 or ,DTC indicator L and AUTO: A
Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81235 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the driver's air mix control
motor circuit..
21-109).
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-110), or repair the driver's air mix
control linkage or door .
connector.
40P: 7P:
No. 12 No.2
No. 13 No.1
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
motor .
(cont'd)
21-55
BACK
',1
Climate Control
No. ,12 and No. 13 individually.
=
mix control motor .
21-56
OTC 81236 or OTC indicator M and AUTO: An
Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81236 or M and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the passenger's air mix
control motor circuit .
6. Test the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-110).
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-111) .
7. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor
7P connector.
BACK
and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
40P: 7P:
No.6
No.8
No. 30
No.7
No.5
No.3
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If
control unit..
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor .
OTC 81237 or OTC indicator N and AUTO: A
Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
or climate control unit(see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81237 or N and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; 81234 or K and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
(see page 21-110).
YES-Go to step 8.
(see page 21-111) .
7P connector.
(cont'd)
21-57
BACK
Climate Control
climate controlunitconnector A (40P) terminal
No. 30.
=
passenger's air mix control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12.
21-58
= =
the climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
14. Disconnectthese items:
AlC pressure sensor
BACK
15. Check for continuity between climate controi' unit
connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground:
Q
=
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire,.
NO-Go to step 16.
=
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Tumthe ignition switch OFF.
=
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Check for a loose wire or poor connection at
control unit .
(cont'd)
21-59
BACK
Climate Control
AlC pressure sensor
=
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control; unit
voltage drop .
21-60
OTC 81238 or OTCindicator P and AUTO: A
Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81238 or P and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
control motor circuit..
(see page 21-110).
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-111), or repair the passenger's air mix
7P connector.
BACK
and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
40P: 7P:
No.14 No.2
No.15 No.1
Q
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
Q
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor .
Q
Q
=
=
passenger's air mix control motor .
21-61
BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81239 or DTC indicator A: An Open or
Short in the Front Mode Control Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81239 or A indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.8 No.7
No.31 No.6
No. 32 No.5
No. 33 No.4
No. 34 No.3
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or Q
poor connections on the front mode control motor
circuit.
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page.
21-112).
Is the front mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front mode control motor
(see page 21-112) .
7. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P
connector.
21-62
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the front mode control
motor .
BACK
No. 31, 32, 33, and 34. individually.
YES-Repair short to bodygrolJnd in the wire(s)
mode control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
31 32,33,34
32 33,34
33 34
/s there continuity between any of the terminals?
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same
terminals for voltage to body ground.
- =
the climate control unit and the front mode control
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit .
front mode control motor 7P connector. If the
contrQI unit .
21-63
BACK
Climate Control
Dle B1240 or Dle indicator B: AProblem in
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
Motor Circuit
2. Turn'the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the mode control motor
circuit:.
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page
21-112).
Is the front mode control motdr OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front mode control motor
(see page 21-112), or repair the front mode control
linkage or doors .
7. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P
connector.
21-64
and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No. 16 No.2
No.17 No.1
.Q
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the front mode control
motor .
BACK
=
mode control motor .
NO-Substitute a n o w n ~ g o o climate control unit,
OTC 81241 or OTC indicator C: A Problem in
the Front Blower Motor Circuit
3. 00 the self-diagnostic with the HOS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for OTCs.
Is DTC 81241 or C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the front blower motor
circuit
6. Check the No. 12 (40 A) fuse in the relay block, and
the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. Iffuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No. 12 (40 A)
and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit
7. Connect the front blower motor 2P connector
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
GRN
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
21-65
BACK
Climate Control
Does the front blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 24.
11. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between the front power
transistor 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
Q
-=
YES-Go to step 13.
front power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G507 (see page
22-67) .
13. Connect the front power transistor 4P connector
21-66
~
B L K
JUMPER WIRE
3 4 RED
Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the GRN wire between the
front power transistor and the front blower
motor .
No.9 and No. 10 individually.
.Q
= =
power transistor .
NO-Go to step 19.
BACK
and the front power transistor 4P connector.
40P: 4P:
No.9 No.3
No. 10 No.1
BLU RED
, 2 a ~ & 8 88M U tt ~ U m _ n m 18
m.mM m.DM
YES-Go to step 20.
climate control unit and the front power
transistor .
= =
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) .
NO-Go to step 22.
23. Testthe front power transistor (see page 21-108).
Is the front power transistor OK?
front power transistor 4P connector. If the
control unit .
NO-Replace the front power transistor (see page
21-108) .
25. Disconnect the front blower motor 2P connector.
26. Measure the voltage between the front blower
motor_2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the front blower motor (see page
21-116) .
NO-Go to step 27.
28. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
relay block, and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Replace the front blower motor relay .
(cont'd)
21-67
BACK
Clim.ate Control
ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71) .
ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
YES-Go to step 32.
front blower motor relay .
21-68
33. Check for continuity between the front blower
ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RE,LAY 4P SOCKET
2
4
YES-Repair open in the WHTwire between the
front blower motor relay and the blower motor .
front blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe
(see page 22-67) .
BACK
DTC B1244or DTC indicator F: An Open in
the Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81244 or F indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit .
6. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page
21-143).
Is the rear air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor
(see page 21-143) .
7. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P
connector.
and B (14P).
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P),
B (14P), and the rear air mix control motor 7P
connector.
40P: 7P:
No.6
No.8
14P:
No.5
No.5
No.7
7P:
No.3
Q
climate control unit connector A (40P), B (14P), and
at the rear air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit .
climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor .
21-69
BACK
Climate Control
DTC 81245 or DTC indicator G: AShort in the
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (11).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81245 or G indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
AUTO, and/or 81237 or N and AUTO, and/or
82968 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST, and/or
82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
21-143).
YES-Go to step 8.
(see page 21-143) .
connector.
and B (14P).
21-70
Q
=
between the climate control unit and the rear air
mix control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and climate
control unit connector B (14P) terminal No.5.
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
voltage between climate control unit connector B
/s there any voltage?
the climate control unit and the rear air mix control
replacing the climate control unit..
14. Disconnectthese items:
AlC pressure sensor
Q
=
NO-Go to step 16.
=
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
21-71
BACK
Climate Control
=
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Check tor a loose wire or poor connection at
climate control unit and recheck.lfthe symptom/
control unit .
21-72
ground, reconnectthese items individually and
Ale pressure sensor
=
voltage drop .
BACK
DTC 81246 or DTC indicator H: A Problem in
the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81246 or H indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit.
21-143).
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-143), or repair the rear air mix control
linkage or door .
connector.
and the rear air mix control motor 7P connector.
14P: 7P:
No.1 No.2
No.2 No.1
Q
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor .
(cont'd)
21-73
BACK
Climate Control
No.1 and No.2 individually.
=
Is there, continuity?
between the climate control unit and the rear air
mix control motor .
21-74
DTCB2965: Climate Control UnitLost
Communication with Rear Climate Control
Panel
4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear climate control panel
and climate control unit circuit..
6. Disconnect the rear climate panel10P connector.
8. Measure the voltage between the rear climate
control panel10P connector terminal No.1 and
body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 9.
rear climate control panel..
BACK
10. Check for continuity between the rear climate
control panel10P connector terminal No.3 and
body ground.
.Q
=
YES-Go to step 11.
rear climate control panel and body ground. If the
(see page 22-67) .
and the rear climate control panel10P connector.
14P: 10P:
No.11 No. 10
No.12 No.9
.Q
YES,-Go to step 13.
climate control unit and the rear climate control
panel..
(cont'd)
21-75
BACK
Climate Control
= =
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire{s)
climate control panel..
NO-Go to step 14.
connector B (14P) terminals No. 11 and No. 12.
control unit and the rear climate control panel..
NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control
panel, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original rear climate control
panel..
21-76
DTC 82967 or DTC indicator A and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the
Humidity Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82967 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the humidity sensor circuit..
Is the humidity sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
sensor .
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
4P connector.
BACK
and humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
40P: 4P:
No.6 No.1
No.8 No.3
No. 27 No.2
Q
Q
HUMIDITY liN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
control unit .
climate control unit and the humidity sensor .
DTC 82968 or DTC indicator A and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A Short in the
Humidity Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82968 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
81245 or G, and/or 82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
Is the humidity sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
sensor .
8. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
4P connector.
(cont'd)
21-77
BACK
Climate Control
No. 27.
=
between the climate control unit and the humidity
sensor .
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12.
21-78
=
the climate control unit and the humidity sensor.
This short may also damage the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the
and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes away,
AlC pressure sensor
BACK
=
NO-Go to step 16.
=
NO-Goto step 17.
voltage betWeen climate control unit connector A
=
YES-Go to step 20.
climate control unit connector A (40P). Ifthe
control unit .
(cont'd)
21-79
BACK
Climate Control
AlC pressure sensor
=
voltage drop .
21-80
OTC 82969: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Combination Switch
Control Unit (WIPSW message)
sure to follow the instructions in the 8-can system
diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-112).
5. Check the DTCs.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wire or
poor connection on the climate control unit
connector A (40P) .
Are any of the fol/owing OTCs indicated; 81958,
81063, or 81156 indicated?
YES-Do the wiper/washer switch (combination
switch control unit) input test (see page 22-300) .
(see page 21-93) .
BACK
DTC B2970: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Relay Control Module
(RM message)
sure to follow the instructions in the B-can system
5. Check the DTCs.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wire or
poor connection on the climate control unit
connector A (40P) .
Are any of the following DTCs indicated; 81005,
81959,82162 or 81158 indicated?
YES-Do the relay control module input test
(see page 22-334) .
(see page 21-93) .
DTC B2979 or DTC indicator Band
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the AlC
Pressure Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82979 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the AlC pressure sensor
circuit .
5. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
(cont'd)
21-81
BACK
l ~ I'.
Climate Control
terminals of climate control unitconnector A (40P)
and the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
40P: 3P:
No.6 No.1
No.8 No.3
No. 26 No.2
Q
AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
Q
climate control unit and the AlC pressure sensor..
21-82
11. Measure the voltage between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No.8, and
between climate control unit connector A (40P)
terminals No.8 and No. 26.
YES-Replace the AlC pressure sensor .
AlC pressure sensor 3P connector. If the
control unit..
BACK
DTC 82980 or DTC indicator Band
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A short in the AlC
Pressure Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and WINDSHIELD
DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
No. 26.
=
between the climate control unit and the AlC
pressure sensor .
NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Goto step 11.
(cont'd)
21-83
BACK
Climate Control
voltage between body ground and climate control
unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 26.
=
YES-Repair.shorttopower in the w.ire between
the climate control unitand Ale pressure sensor.
This short may also damage the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the
NO-Go to step 12.
21-84
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No.8, and
between climate control unit connector A (40P)
terminals No.8 and No. 26.
YES-Replace the AlC pressure sensor .
AlC pressure sensor 3P connector. If the
control unit..
AlC pressure sensor
BACK
Q
=
YES-Repair short to body ground in thewire .
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same
=
NO-Go to step 20.
=
YES-Go to step 23.
control unit .
(cont'd)
21-85
BACK
Clinl,ate Control
AlC pressure sensor
=
YES-Substitute a known-good climate cbntrol unit
NO-Replace the,component that caused the
voltage drop .
21-86
Ole 82981: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Navigation Unit
4. Check the DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the navigation unit and
climate control unit circuit..
6. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).
BACK
and navigation unit connector A (20P).
40P: 20P:
No.2 No.4
No.21 No.15
No. 22 No.14
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)., '
YES-Go to step 9.
climate control unit and the navigation unit .
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No.4,
14, and 15 individually. '
"
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Q
=
between the climate control unit and the navigation
unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between navigation unit
4 14,15
14 15
NO-Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and
recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
original navigation unit. Ifthe symptom remains,
substitute a known-good climate control unit and
recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
21-87
BACK
Climate Control
OTC 82983 or OTC indicator ~ A problem in
the Recirculation Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor Circuit
4. Check the DTCs.
Is ore 82983 or K indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit.
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
21-113).
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-113), or repair the recirculation
7. Disconnectthe recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
21-88
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.18 No.1
No.19 No.2
Q
Q
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor .
BACK
No. 18 and 19 individually.
Q
Q
= =
recirculation control motor .
DTC 82991: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Audio Unit
4. Check for DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the rear climate control panel
and climate control unit circuit .
7. Disconnect audio unit connector C (24P).
(cont'd)
21-89
BACK
Climate Control
connector B (14P) terminal No.8 and audio unit
connector C (24P) terminal No. 24.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (24P)
YES-Go to step 9.
control unit and the audio unit..
21-90
=
'between the climate control unit and the audio
unit .
and recheck. 1ft he symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit. If the
symptom/indication remains, substitute a known-
good audio unit. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original audio unit .
BACK
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 30 (10 A)
fuse circuit .
2. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 7P
connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the rear mode
control motor 7P connector No.1 and body ground.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 5.
rear mode control motor .
6. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-144).
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor
(see page 21-144), or repair the rear mode control
linkage or door .
Q Q
= =
between the climate control unit and the rear mode
control motor .
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-91
BACK
Climate Control
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
wires for voltage to body ground.
=
the climate control unit and the rear mode control
replacing the climate control unit .
NO-Go to step 10.
21-92
and the rear mode control motor 7P connector.
14P: 7P:
No.3 No.5
No.4 No.7
Q
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
climate control unit connector B (14P) and atthe
rear mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit .
climate control unit and the rear mode control
motor .
BACK
Climate Control Unit Troubleshooting
relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 30 (10 A)
fuse circuit..
=
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Check for continuity between' climate control unit
=
YES-Go to step 6.
climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G506 (see page 22-67).
.'
7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
connector X (39P).
(cont'd)
21-93
BACK
Climate Control
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector X (39P) terminal No. 27 and climate
control unit connector A (40P) terminal No.4.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR X (39P)
Wire side of female terminals .
YES-Check for loose wires and poor connections
at climate control unit connector A (40P). If
control unit..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the MICU
and the climate control unit..
21-94
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
00 not use this troubleshooting procedure if the AlC
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index.
Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain OTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No. 15 (30 A) fuse in the relay blo(;k, and
box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If the fuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No. 15 (30 A)
and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit .
2. Remove the AlC condenser fan relay from the relay
block, and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan relay .
5. Turn on the AlC.
6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Oata List
with the HOS.
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
and retest. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-244) .
BACK
7. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
YES-Go to step 8.
8. Connect the AlC condenser fan relay 4P socket
terminals No.1 and No. 2with a jumper wire.

2 BLU
4 3
Do the Ale condenser and radiator fans run on
low?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 18.
fan relay 4P terminal No.4 and body ground.
2
3
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 36.
13. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
(cont'd)
21'-95
BACK
Climate Control
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
16. Connectthe PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.4
...---------,
WHT
JUMPER WIRE
=
Do the AlC condenser and radiator fans run on
low?
YES-Check for loose wi res or poor connections at
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.4. If the
PCM, and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).

NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC
condenser fan relay and the PCM .
19. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
20. Disconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the AlC
button and fan control button ON.
21-96
fan 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
AIC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
~
~ W
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the Ale
condenser fan relay and the AlC condenser fan .
23. Set the AlC button and fan control button OFF, then
24. Reconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector .
25. Connect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector
AIC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
RED
JUMPER WIRE
=
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the Ale
Does the AlC condenser fan run?
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan motor
(see page 10-10) .
BACK
29. Remove the fan control relay from the relay block,
and test it (see page 22-78).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Replace the fan control relay .
30. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then set the AlC
31. Measure the voltage between the fan control relay
5P socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
.----...,RED
2
=
YES-Go to step 32.
condenser fan and the fan control relay .
33. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
34. Check for continuity between the fan control relay
5P socket terminal No.4 and the radiator fan 2P
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 35.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the radiator fan .
35. Check for continuity between the radiator fan 2P
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page
10-10) .
radiator fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G301 (see page 22-67) .
(cont'd)
21-97
BACK
Climate Control
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
37. Remove AlC diode A from the relay block.
38. Using the diode setting (.,.....) on a DVOM, check
for current flow in both directions between the AlC
diode A terminals No.1 and No.2.
A/C DIODE A
~
1 2
1 0 IIIIIIII 02
Is there current flow in only one direction?
YES-Go to step 39.
NO-Replace AlC diode A..
40. Measure the voltage between the AlC diode A 2P
A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET
=
YES-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71) .
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
AlC diode A..
21-98
AIC Condenser Fan High Speed
Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the
radiator fan and/or the AlC compressor is inoperative.
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index.
Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Remove the fan control relay from the relay block,
and test it (see page 22-78).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fan control relay .
3. Measure the voltage between the fancontrol relay
2
=
YES-Go to step 4.
BACK
FAN O N T ~ O L RELAY SP SOCKET
YES-Go to step 6.
1----1SLK
2
.Q
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan
control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 (see page 22-67) .
5P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No.5.
FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET
2
. Is there continuity?
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.5. Ifthe
PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .

NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the PCM .
21-99
BACK
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
It is normal for the AlC compressor to turn off under
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, hard acceleration, or high/low
pressure.
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans
are also inoperative with the AlC on. Refer to the
symptom troubleshooting index.
Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the relay block, and
box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck. If the fuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No.7 (7.5 A)
and No. 30 (10A) fuse(s) circuit..
4. Turn on the AlC.
5. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the PGM-FI Data List with
the HDS.
Is the AlC CLUTCH on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 6.
21-100
6. Using the HDS, confirm the following-values in the
PGM-FI Data List at idle.
AlCSWITCH ON
AlC PRESSURE 196-3,138 kPa
SENSOR (2-32 kgf/cm2)
[28-455 psi]
Are all the values within specifications?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the
specifications .
7. Remove the AlC compressor clutch relay from the
relay block, and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the AlC compressor clutch relay .
8. Measure the voltage between the AlC compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body
ground.
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
YES-Go to step 9.
BACK
9. Connect the NC compressor clutch relay 4P socket
JUMPERWIRE
W
PUR 2
4 3
Does the AlC compressor clutch click?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 19.
12. Measure the voltage between the NC compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and body
ground.
2
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NC compressor clutch relay .
14. Reinstall the NC.compressor clutch relay.
17. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 13 to
RED
JUMPER WIRE
=
Does the AlC compressor click?
PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. Ifthe
original PCM (see page 11-244) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the NC
compressor clutch relay and the PCM .
(cont'd)
21-101
BACK
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Disconnect theAlC compressor clutch 1 P connector.
21. Check for continuity between the AlC compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the AlC
compressor clutch 1 P connector terminal No.1.
AlC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
PUR
2
4 3
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminal
YES-Check the AlC compressor clutch clearance,
and the compressor clutch field coil (see page
21-125). Repair as needed .
compressor clutch 'relay and the AlC compressor
clutch .
21-102
BACK
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Test
Humidity Sensor Test
(see page 21-104).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the
voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe
on the No.2 terminal and the (-) probe on the
No.3 terminal with the connector connected.
VOLTAGE
(VI
5
4
3
2
1
'"
o
,/
V
V
./
V
V
./
'"
/"
20 40 60 80 100
HUMIDITY LEVEL (% rhl
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-104).
(cont'd)
21-103
BACK
Climate Control
Humidity lin-car Temperature
Sensor Test (cont'd)
In-car Temperature Sensor Test
(see page 21-104).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
3. Test the humidity/in-car temperature sensor while
holding it in front of the dashboard center vent .
Measure the resistance with the system set to
Max Cool.
Measure the resistance with the system set to
Max Hot.
4. Compare the resistance reading between the No.4
and No.3 terminals of the humidity/in-car
temperature sensor with the specifications shown
in the graph; the resistance should be within the
specifications.
HUMIDITY liN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6
5
4
3
2
1
"-
"
'"
"-
........
.........
-
14 32 50 68 86 104 "F
-10 0 10 20 30 40 'C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-104).
21-104
Humidity lin-car Temperature
Sensor Replacement
(see page 20-119).
2. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (A)
from the driver's dashboard lower cover (B).
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
BACK
Test
(see page 21-105).
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor,
and check for a change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1
and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature
sensor with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6
5
4
3
2
1
1\
14
-10
\
\
1"\
'\.,
1""-
b.
t--
32 50 68 86 104 'F
o 10 20 30 40 'C
TEMPERATURE
outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-105).
Replacement
2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
outside air temperature sensor (8) from the back of
the front bumper. Disconnect the 2P connector (C)
from the outside air temperature sensor.
B
21-105
BACK
Climate Control
Sunlight Sensor Test
1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard
(see page 21-106).
2. Connect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the
voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe
on the No.4 terminal and the (-) probe on the
No.2 terminal with the connector connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under
the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp.
Voltage should be:
3.6-3.7 V ormore with the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct
sunlight.
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the
sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
21-106
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the
dashboard, then disconnect the 5P connector (B).
Be careful not to damage the sensor and the
dashboard.
BACK
Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test
1. Remove the evaporator front temperature sensor
(see page 21-107).
resistance between its terminals.
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for
a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
RESISTANCE
(kQ)
40
30
~
20
10
32
o
~
r-.....
50
10
68
20
-
86 "F
30 'C
TEMPERATURE
front evaporator temperature sensor (see page
21-107).
Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Replacement
(see page 20-120).
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front
evaporator temperature sensor (8), then remove
the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping
screw and the front evaporator temperature sensor.
21-107
BACK
Climate Control
Front Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-127).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the front power
transistor.
3. Measure the resistance between the No.3 and
No.4 terminals of the front power transistor. It
should be about 1.5 k Q
If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 4 .
If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the front power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the front blower motor. Front
power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective front blower motor.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR
2
3 4
'--_---(Q)--_--I
21-108
4. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal
(RED) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
A
(To 12 V Power source on vehicle)
5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the front power
transistor.
6. Make sure the RED wire is completely isolated,
then supply 12 V to the No.1 cavity with a jumper
wire.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
front blower motor runs.
If the front blower motor does not run, replace
the front power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty front blower motor can cause the
front power transistor to fail. If the front power
transistor is replaced, also check the front blower
motor for binding, and replace it if necessary .
If the front blower motor runs, the front power
transistor is OK.
BACK
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the driver's air
mix control motor.
I NOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the driver's air mix control motor will
damage it. Followthe instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the
driver's air mix control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the driver's air mix control motor should
run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the driver's air mix control motor
should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the driver's
air mix control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
~
-
Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Ifthe driver's air mix control motor did not run in
step 2, remove it, then check the driver's air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
Ifthe linkage and door move smoothly, replace
the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-110).
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
If the driver's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Reconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P
connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage
between the No.3 and No.7 terminals.
Max Cool: about 0.5 V
Max Hot: about 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not
as specified, replace the driver's air mix control
motor (see page 21-110).
21-109
BACK
Climate Control
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
(see page 20-120).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the driver's
air mix control motor (8). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the driver's air mix control motor from
the heater unit.
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
sure the motor runs smoothly.
21-110
Test
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's
air mix control motor.
I NOTICE I
the passenger's air mix control motor will
damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the
No.2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control
motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it
doesn't, reverse the connections; the passenger's
air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. When the passenger's air mix control motor
stops running, disconnect battery power
immediately.
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
-
r-L

Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run
in step 2, remove it, then check the. passenger's air
mix control linkage and door for smooth
movement.
the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
21-111).
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
If the passenger's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
BACK
No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
as specified, replace the passenger's air mix
control motor (see page 21-111).
Replacement
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
passenger's air mix control motor (8). Remove the
self-tapping screws and the passenger's air mix
control motor from the heater unit.
21-111'
BACK
Climate Control
Front Mode Control Motor Test
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the front mode
control motor.
I NOTICE I
the front mode control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.
front mode control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the front mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the front mode control motor should
run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the front
mode control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the front mode control motor did not run in step
2, remove it, then check the front mode control
linkage and doors for smooth movement.
Ifthe linkage and doors move smoothly, replace
the front mode control motor (see page 21-112).
If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
If the front mode control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or
less at the 20 k Q range. With the front mode
control motor running as in step 2, check for
continuity between the No.3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals
and the No.7 terminal individually. There should
be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the
motor moves past the switch's terminal.
5. Ifthere is no continuity for a moment at each
terminal, replace the front mode control motor
(see page 21-112).
21-112
Front Mode Control Motor
Replacement
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the front
mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the front mode control motor from the
heater unit.
BACK
Recirculation Control 'Motor Test
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
I NOTICE I
the recirculation control motor will damage it.
recirculation control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the recirculation control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Fresh. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the recircl,Jlation control motor
should run smoothly, and stop at Recirculate.
When the recirculation control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
r-- ,----
-L
'--
~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Ifthe recirculation control motor did not run in step
2, remove it, then check the recirculation control
linkage and door for smooth movement.
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace
the recirculation control motor (see page 21-113).
If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
If the recirculation control motor runs smoothly,
goto step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or
less at the 20 kQ range. With the recirculation
control motor running as in step 2, check for
continuity between the No.3, 4, and 5 terminals
and the No.7 terminal individually. There should
be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the
motor moves past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each
terminal, replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-113).
Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement
recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-
tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
from the heater unit.
21-113
BACK
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Removall
Installation
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, bolt, brackets (A),
and the climate control unit (8).
A
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that
there are no problems in the system (see page
21-10).
21-114
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on
right side, then let the glove box hang down
(see page 20-125).
2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A)
from the evaporator.
A
3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (8), and
replace the filter.
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
blower unit.
BACK
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
2. Remove the harness clips (A), the bolts, and the
glove box frame (8).
B
A
3. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box
opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown,
and discard it.
Cut here.
4. Remove the wire harness clips (A), the self-tapping
screws, and the passenger's heater duct (8).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front blower
motor. Remove the wire harness clips (8).
(cont'd)
21-115
BACK
Climate Control
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the
recirculation control motor and adaptive front
lighting control unit, then remove the harness clip
(B). Remove the self-tapping screws, the mounting
nuts, and the blower unit (C).
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
c
A
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
21-116
Blower Unit Component
Replacement
Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
The recirculation control motor (A), front blower
motor (B) and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be
replaced without removing the blower unit.
Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly without
binding.
After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly (see page 21-113).
BACK
Front Evaporator Core Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
charging station (see page 21-130).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfftl
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the front
receiver line (A) and the front suction line (8) from
the front evaporator core.
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-115).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front power
transistor, then remove the harness clip (8).
Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion
valve cover (C), and the seal (D).
/
B
J
//
.I
i
, /
/
/
i
D--h...
\.
c
6. Remove the bolts, the inlet and outlet pipes (A), and
expansion valve (8). Carefully pull out the front
evaporator core (C), then remove the plate (D).
J
A
(cont'd)
21-117
BACK
Climate Control
Front Evaporator Core Replacement
(cont'd)
7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
If you're installing a new front evaporator core,
add refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page
21-6).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to v o i leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
Charge the system (see page 21-132).
21-118
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
equipped).
2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the
negative cable from the battery.
3. Disconnect the front receiver line and front suction
line from the front evaporator core (see page
21-117).
4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
c
5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
from the radiator (see page 10-6).
BACK
6. Remove the clamp (A). Slide the hose clamps (B)
back. Remove the nut and the water valve (e), then
disconnect the inlet heater hose (D) and the outlet
heater hose (E) from the heater unit.
Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
E
D
c
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
7. Remove the mounting nuts from the heater unit.
Take carenotto damage or bendthe fuel lines or
brake lines, etc.
8x 1.25 mm
12.3Nm
8. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-130).
9, Disconnect the connector (A) from the front blower
motor. Remove the wire harness clips (B).
10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the adaptive
front lighting control unit, then remove the harness
clip (B).
A
B
(cont'd)
21-119
BACK
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front mode
control motor, the passenger's air mix control
motor, the recirculation control motor, and the
front power transistor. Remove the wire harness
clips (B).
A B
A
B
B
12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the driver's air
mix control motor and the front evaporator
temperature sensor. Remove the wire harness clips
(B) and the wire harness (C).
21-120
13. Turn over the carpet. Remove the wire harness
clips (A), the rear heater duct mounting clips (B),
and the rear heater duct (C).
14. Remove the mounting nuts. Slide the blower-
heater unit (A), then remove the drain hose (B) and
blower-heater unit.
BACK
15. Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's
heater duct (A). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the expansion valve cover (8). Remove the
self-tapping screw and the front heater core cover
ee). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater
pipe brackets (D), the grommets (E), and carefully
pull out the front heater core (F).
o
16. Install the front heater core, and the front
evaporator core in the reverse order of removal.
17. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of
Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system with engine coolant
(see page 10-6).
Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-122).
Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Refer to the front evaporator core replacement
(see page 21-117).
Reset the power window control unit (see page
22-259).
(see page 17-28).
and the navigation system (if equipped).
Set the clock.
21-121
BACK
Climate Control
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the
heater valve arm (C).
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve
cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the
driver's air mix control linkage (C).
B
3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (Lo)
with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the driver's air
mix control linkage (C) as shown step 2. Snap the
heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
NOTE: Make sure the ring-end of the cable is
pushed all the way to the base of the pin on driver's
air mix control linkage.
21-122
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heatervalve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
A
c
BACK
AIC Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not install the Ale compressor into a system
unless you are completely sure that the system is free
of contamination. Installing the Ale compressor into a
contaminated system can result in premature Ale
compressor failure.
1. If the Ale compressor is marginally operable, run
the engine at idle speed, and let the air
conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the
engine off.
4. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
5. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219).
6. Support the front subframe with the engine support.
Remove the bolts and the front subframe stiffener
(A).
NOTE: Install the new front subframe mounting
bolt (8).
14x1.5mm
103.0Nm
110.5 kgfm, 75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
7. Disconnect the Ale compressor clutch connector
(A). Remove the bolts and the nut, then disconnect
the suction hose (8) and discharge hose (e) from
the Ale compressor. Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm,
C 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
21-123
BACK
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the AlC
compressor (A). Be careful not to damage the
radiator fins when removing the compressor.
21-124
8x1.2Smm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm,
16.2Ibfft)
9. Install the AlCcompressor in the reverse order of
Inspect the AlC lines for any signs of
contamination.
If you're installing a new AlC compressor, you
must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (seepage 21-6). A new AlC
compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
for HFC-134a (R"134a) to avoid leakage.
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) for
HFC-134a DENSO piston type AlC compressor
only.
Tb avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the AlC condenser
fan shroud.
BACK
AIC Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling,
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the
clutch set (see page 21-126).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-126).
c )
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and
the pressure plate (8) all the way around. If the
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the
pressure plate (see page 21-126) and add or
remove shims as needed to increase or decrease
clearance.
Clearance: 0.30-0.60 mm (0.012-0.024 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
4. Measure the resistance of the field coil. If the
resistance is not within specifications, replace the
field coil (see page 21-126).
Field Coil Resistance: 3.9-4.3 Q at
68F (20 "C)
21-125
BACK
Climat.e Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Ale clutch holder,Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore
J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure
plate (A) with a commercially available Ale clutch
holder (B).
B
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B),
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-125).
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
B
21-126
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or
the Ale compressor.
A
B
4 .. Remove the screw from the field coil ground
terminal (A) and bracket (B). Disconnect the
connector (e) from the field coil, then remove the
wire harness clip (D). Remove the snap ring (E) with
snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (F). Be
careful not to damage the field coil or the Ale
compressor.
BACK
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the AlC compressor.
Clean the pulley and AlC compressor sliding
surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-
petroleum solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
AIC Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement
2. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
3. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219).
4. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (8). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the AlC compressor oil from
running out.
5. Clean the mating surfaces.
6. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
7. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
8. Charge the system (see page 21-132).
21-127
BACK
Climate Control
AIC Condenser'Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling
3. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the discharge
hose (A) from the Ale condenser.
A
6x 1.0mm
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the front receiver
line (A) from the Ale condenser.
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
21-128
A
5. Remove the bolts, nut, and the ATF cooler bracket
(A).
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
6. Loosen the bolts, then remove the Ale condenser
upper mount brackets (A).
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
7. Remove the hood latch (see page 20-225).
BACK
8. Remove the AlC condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be
careful not to damage the radiator and AlC
condenser fins when removing the AlC condenser.
A
9. Install the AlC condenser in the reverse order of
If you're installing a new AlC condenser, add
refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
absorption.
00 not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
Be careful not to damage the radiator or the AlC
condenser fins when installing the AlC condenser.
Adjustthe hood latch (see page 20-194).
Receiver /Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible
to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from
the air.
1. Remove the AlC condenser (see page 21-128).
2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the AlC
condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) and the
desiccant (C).
A
2.9Nm
(0.3 kgfm, 2.1 Ibf.ftl
c
3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of
Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a
thin coat of refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8)
before installing them. Be sure to use the correct
O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made
of resin and can be easily stripped.
21-129
BACK
Climate Control
Refrigerant Recovery
ACAUTION
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
NOTE:
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service .
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
21-130
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed
from the Ale system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
refrigerant oil back into the AlC system before
charging.
BACK
System Evacuation
ACAUTION
NOTE:
manufacturers.
1. When an AlC System has been .opened to the
atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system
has been open for-several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.
instructions. Evacuate the system.
3. If the does not reach more than
93.3 kPa (,700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes,
there is probably a leak in the system. Partially
charge the system, and check for leaks (see step 3
on page 21-133).
21-131
BACK
Climate Control
System Charging
ACAUTION
NOTE:
work area before resuming service.
manufacturers.
instructions.
21-132
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-131).
3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
system that was removed during recovery. Use
only OENSO NO-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
the AlC compressor will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
600to650g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.32 to 1.43 Ibs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (seepage 21-133).
6. Check the system performance (see page 21-134).
BACK
Refrigerant Leak Test
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM
or commercially available
ACAUTION
NOTE:
work area before resuming service.
manufacturers.
instructions.
./
/
\.
.-.. .,..,"
." ...
2. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system
to the specified capacity, then close the supply
valve, and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for
your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
SOOtoS50 g
O.SO to 0.S5 kg
1.32 to 1.43 Ibs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a
refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do
a recovery of the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system.
must be evacuated.
21-133
BACK
cnm:ate Control
Ale System Test
Performance Test

can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat .. '
The performance test will help determine if the AlC
system is operating within specifications.
NOTE:
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery!recycling!
charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service ,port, following the
2. Determine the relative humidity and air
temperature.
3. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on
right side, then let the glove box hang down
(see page 20-125).
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
21-134
5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's
recirculation inlet duct.
6. Test conditions:
Avoid direct sunlight
Open hood .
Open front doors.
Set the temperature control switch to Max Cool,
the mode control switch to Vent, and the
recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
Turn the AlC switch ON and the fan switch to
Max.
Run the engine at 1 ,500 rpm.
No driver or passengers in vehicle.
7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the center
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit,
and the discharge (high) and suction (low)
pressures on the AlC gauges.
BACK
8. Refer to the inspection data.
Inspection data
Example Intake temperature (dry): 86'f (30 "C) Humidity level 70 %
77.9 'f (25.5 "C) Intake temperature (wet):
Delivery temperature:
Delivery pressure:
Intake pressure:
59.9 'f (15.5 "C)
1,265 kPa (12.9 kgf/cm2) (184 psi)
280 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm2) (41 psi)
Results: Within normal range
kPa
(kgf/cm
2
)
[psi]
400 kPa
........ ............................................................................ .
INTAKE
PRESSURE 0
1,600
(16.3)
[232]
1,200
(12.2)
[174]
800
(8.2)
[116]
400
(4.1)
[58]
DELIVERY
"F INTAKE
('C) PRESSURE
86
(30)
68
(20)
50
(10)
DELIVERY
PRESSURE
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE 0 0
i
68
(20)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
i
77
(25)
86
(30)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
i
95
(35)
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
800/0
300/0
800/0
300/0
800/0
300/0
i
104
(40)
"F
('C)
(cont'd)
21-135 BACK
Climate Control
Ale System Test (cont'd)
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge After stopping AlC compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-130), and
(high) pressure drops about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) recharge with specified amount (see page
abnormally Quickly, and then falls gradually. 21-132).
high Reduced or no airflow through AlC Clogged condenser or Clean.
condenser. radiator fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
AlC condenser or radiator Check fan direction.
fan not working properly
Line to AlC condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant Restricted lines.
in sYstem
Discharge High and low-pressures are balanced soon Faulty AlC compressor Replace the AlC compressor.
pressure after stopping AlC compressor. Low side is discharge valve
abnormally hiaher than normal. Faultv AlC comoressor seal
low Outlet of expansion valve is not frosted, Faulty expansion valve Replace.
low-pressure gauge indicates vacuum. Moisture in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
soecified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is notfrosted, and low- Frozen expansion valve Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
pressure pressure line is not cold. Low-pressure (Moisture in system) specified amount.
abnormally gauge indicates vacuum. Faultv expansion valve Reolace the expansion valve.
low Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with AlC compressor off, then
airflow from vents is restricted. check evaporator temperature sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet is Clogged receiver/dryer Replace.
warmjshould be warm during operation).
Suction Low-pressure hose and service port are Expansion valve open too Repair or replace.
pressure cooler than the temperature around long
abnormally evaoorator.
high Suction pressure is lowered when AlC Excessive refrigerant in Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled bv water. svstem specified amount.
High and low-pressures are equalized as Faulty gasket Replace the AlC compressor.
soon as the AlC compressor is stopped, Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while running. Foreign particle stuck in
high-pressure valve
Suction and Reduced airflow through AlC condenser. Clogged AlC condenser or Clean.
discharge radiator fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures AlC condenser or radiator Check fan direction.
abnormally fan not working properly
high
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal fittings are Clogged or kinked low- Repair or replace.
discharge cooler than evaporator. pressure hose parts
pressures Temperature around expansion valve is Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
abnormally too low compared with that arolind
low receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant AlC compressor clutch is dirty. AlC compressor shaft seal Replace the AlC compressor.
leaks leakina
AlC compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leakina around bolt(s) Tiahten bolt(s) or reolace AlC
AlC compressor gasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Reolace the AlC comoressor.
AlC fitting is dirty. Leaking O-ring Clean the AlC fittina and reolace the O-rina.
21-136 BACK
REAR HEATER CORE
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-144
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-143
Test, page 21-141
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-142
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Test, page 22-77
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
REAR HVAC UNIT
Component Replacement, page 21-149
21-137 BACK
" :'
System Description
Rear Climate Control Door Positions
_HOT

"
REAR AIR MIX DOOR .
(VENT)
REAR HEAT/VENT DOOR
(HEAT)
21-138 BACK
Rear Ale Line Replacement
REAR SUCTION/RECEIVER LINES
CD Front receiver line to the rear receiver line (16 x 1.5 mm): 13.2 Nm (1.4 kgfm, 9.8Ibfft)
CD Rear suction/receiver lines to rear evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
Front suction line to rear suction line (24 x 1.5 mm): 31.9 Nm (3.3 kgfm, 23.5 Ibfft)
21-139
BACK
Rear Heater Line Replacement
REAR OUTLET HEATER HOSE
REAR INLET HEATER LINE
REAR OUTLET HEATER LINE
21-140
BACK
Rear Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test
(see page 21-141).
resistance between its terminals.
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for
a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
RESISTANCE
(kQ)
40
30

20

r-.....
---
10
32 50 68 86 'F
o 10 20 30 'C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the rear
evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-141).
Rear Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear
evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove
the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping
screw and the rear evaporator temperature sensor
from the rear HVAC unit.
21-141
BACK
RearClimate Control
Rear Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-141).
2. Remove the driver's center console trim (see page
20-107).
3. Disconnect the 4P connector from the rear power
transistor.
No.4 terminals of the rear power transistor. It
should be about 1.5 k Q .
o If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 5.
o If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the rear power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the rear blower motor. Rear
power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective rear blower motor.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR
2
3 4
'------{Ql---------'
21-142
5. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal
(BLU) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.,
A
JUMPER WIRE
(To 12 V Power source on vehicle)
6. Reconnect the 4P connector to the rear power
transistor.
7. Make sure the BLU wire is completely isolated,
then supply 12Vto the No.1 cavity with a jumper
wire.
rear blower motor runs.
o If the rear blower motor does not run, replace the
rear power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty rear blower motor can cause the
rear power transistor to fail. If the rear power
transistor is replaced, also check the rear blower
motor for binding, and replace it if necessary.
o If the rear blower motor runs, the rear power
transistor is OK.
BACK
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear air mix
control motor.
I NOTICE I
the rear air mix control motor will damage it.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal ofthe
rear air mix control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the rear air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the rear air mix control motor should
run, and stop at Max Cool. When the rear air mix
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the rear air mix control motor did not run in step
2, remove it, then check the rear air mix control
linkage and door for smooth movement.
the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-143).
Ifthe linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
If the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly,
goto step 4.
No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k Q.
5. Reconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P
as specified, replace the rear air mix control motor
(see page 21-143).
Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear air
mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the rear air mix control motor from the
HVAC unit.
B
21-143
BACK
Rear Mode Control Motor Test
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear mode
control motor.
I NOTICE I
the rear mode control motor will damage it.
rear mode control motor, and ground the No.5 and
No.7 terminals; the rear mode control motor
should run smqothly. To avoid damaging the rear
mode control motor, do not reverse power and
ground. Disconnect the No.5 or NO.7 terminals
from ground; the rear mode control motor should
stop at Vent (when the No.5 terminal is
disconnected) or Heat (when the No.7 terminal is
disconnected). Don't cycle the rear mode control
motor for a long time.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR
r-L
'--
Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the rear mode control motor did not run in step 2,
remove it, then check the rear mode control linkage
and door for smooth movement.
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace
the rear mode control motor (see page 21-144) .
If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
21-144
Rear Mode Control Motor
Replacement
mode control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the
rear mode control motor from the rear mode
control linkage (D). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the rear mode control motor from the rear
HVAC unit.
BACK
Rear Climate Control Panel
SRS components are located inthis area. Review the
1. Remove the HVAe trim (see page 20-110).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the rear
climate control panel (A).
3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that
there are no problems in the system (see page
21-10).
Rear Blower Motor Replacement
blower motor (8), then remove the wire harness
clips (e). Remove the self-tapping screws and the
rear blower motor from the rear HVAe unit.
.I
./
,/
'-.. _ .. -.........
c
21-145
BACK
Rear Heater Core Replacement
3. Slide the hose damps (A) back, then disconnect the
rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (C) from the rear heater core. Note the
orientation of the hose.
immediately.
c
B
21-146
4. Turn over the carpet. Remove the self-tapping
screws and the clamps (A). Carefully pull out the
rear heater core (B) without bending lines.
A
5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
(see page 10-6).
BACK
Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation
SRS component locations (seepage 24-18) and the
3. Remove the center console (see page 20 .. 107).
4 .. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (e) from the rear heater core. Note the
orientation of the hose.
immediately.
c
B
5. Turn over the carpet. Remove the bolt, then
disconnect the rear suction/receiver lines (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
A
6. Remove the harness clips (A).
A
(cont'd)
21-147
BACK
Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the rear mode
control motor, the rear air mix control motor, rear
evaporator temperature sensor, rear power
transistor, and rear blower motor, then remove the
harness clips (B) and connector clip (C).
B
B
8. Remove the mounting bolts and rear HVAC unit (A).
Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
21-148
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
9. Install the rear heater core, and the rear evaporator
core in the reverse order of removal.
10. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
(see page 10-6).
If you're installing a new rear evaporator, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) (see. page 21-6).
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap
absorption.
may damage the paint; If the refrigerant oil
BACK
Rear HVAC Unit Component Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and the precautions
NOTE: The rear blower motor (A), the rear heater core (B), the rear evaporator sensor (e), the rear power transistor (D),
the rear air mix control motor'(E),the rear mode control motor (Fl, and the rear expansion valve (G) can be replaced
without removing the rear HVAeunit.
1. Remove the screw and the rear evaporator sensor. Remove the self-tapping screw and the clamp (H),
then remove the bolts and the rear evaporator lines (J) with the rear expansion valve. If necessary, remove the
rear expansion valve. Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the rear evaporator lines won't
twist. leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you loosen the second
fitting.
2. If necessary, remove the rear blower motor (see page 21-145), the rear heater core (see page 21-146), the rear
power transistor, the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-143), and the rear mode control motor (see page
21-144).
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, and carefully separate the left housing (K) from the right housing (l). Remove the
rear evaporator core (M) and plate (N).
4. Reassemble the unit in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items;
Replace all a-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the correct a-rings for HFe-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Make sure no air is leaking from the left upper housing and the right upper housing fitting and from the upper
housings and the lower housing fitting.
Install the capillary tube (P) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (Q).
Before reassembly, make sure that the rear air mix control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
Before reassembly, make sure that the rear mode control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
After reassembly, make sure the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-143).
After reassembly, make sure the rear mode control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-144).
21-149 BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag inthe steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbagin the dashboard above
Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page i.nclude or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these. items requires special pre(fautions and tools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura dealer. .... ,.
caused by unintentional deployment oftheairbags and/or side airbags.
collision, or the airbags may deploy. .
SRS electrical connectors are identified by ye'now color coding. Related components are located in the steering
BACK
Body Electrical
Body Electrical
Special Tools ............................................... 22-2
Relay and Control Unit
Locations ................................... 22-7
Connectors and Harnesses ......... 22-14
Fuse/Relay Boxes ......................... 22-57
Power Distribution ....................... 22-61
Ground Distribution ..................... 22-67
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Removal and Installation ........................... ~ 7
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
Battery....... .................................... 22-76
Relays ............................................ 22-77
Ignition Switch
Test .............................................................. 22-79
Replacement ............................................... 22-79
Multiplex Integrated Control System
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 22-84
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A .......................... 22-112
DiagnosisTestModeB .......................... 22-113
Diagnosis Test Mode C .. ......................... 22-114
DiagnosisTestModeD .......................... 22-115
Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test
Mode2 ..................................................... 22-116
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test ................. 22-119
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-120
DTC Troubleshooting ............................... ;. 22-122
MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-134
Relay Control Module Input Test .............. 22-136
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test ... , ............... 22-137
Rear MICU Input Test ................................. 22-139
Keyless/Power Door Lock/Security
System
Manual Keyless Programming/
Deleteing .................................................. 22-147
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-148
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-156
Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-161
Door Lock Actuator Test ............................ 22-172
Door Lock Knob Switch Test ...................... 22-173
Door Lock Switch Test ................................ 22-174
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test .................. 22-174
Hood Switch Test ........................................ 22-175
Keyless Buzzer Test/Replacement ............ 22-175
Tailgate Release Actuator
Test (Without Power Tailgate) ............... 22-176
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Test/Replacement ................................... 22-176
Transmitter Test/Replacement .................. 22-177
Horns
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-180
Horn Test/Replacement ............................. 22-180
Horn Switch Test ........................................ 22-181
Exterior Lights
System Description ................................... 22-185
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-186
Combination Light Switch
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting ......... 22-202
Headlight Adjustment ................................ 22-204
Headlight Replacement .............................. 22-205
HID Unit Replacement ................................ 22-206
Bulb Replacement ...................................... 22-207
Fog Light/Daytime Running Light
Replacement ............................................ 22-210
Fog Light Adjustment ................................. 22-210
Fog Light/Daytime Running Light
Bulb Replacement ................................... 22-211
Taillight Replacement ................. , .............. 22-212
Taillight/Brake Light LED Replacement .... 22-213
License Plate Light Replacement .............. 22-213
High Mount Brake Light Replacement ...... 22-214
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test .............. 22-214
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-216
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test ........ 22-218
Hazard Warning Switch
Test/Replacement .................................. 22-220
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement ........ 22-220
~
~
Headlight Leveling System Wipers/Washers
Component Location Index ....................... 22-221 Component Location Index ....................... 22-289
System Description .................................... 22-222 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-292
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-223 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-296
Suspension Stroke Sensor Circuit Wiper/Washer Switch
Troubleshooting ...................................... 22-224 (Combination Switch Control Unit)
Headlight Leveling Control Unit Input Test ................................................. 22-300
Input Test ................................................. 22-226 Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement ......... 22-302
Headlight Leveling Motor Input Test ........ 22-228 Wiper Motor Test ........................................ 22-303
Suspension Stroke Sensor Washer Motor Test ..................................... 22-304
Replacement ............................................ 22-229 Washer Fluid Level Switch Test ................ 22-304
Headlight Leveling Motor Replacement ... 22-230 Wiper Motor Replacement ........................ 22-305
Headlight Initial Position Learning Rear Window Wiper Motor
Procedure ................................................ 22-231 Replacement ............................................ 22-306
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Washer Reservoir Replacement ................ 22-306
Headlight Washer Motor
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-232 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-307
Dash Lights Brightness Controller Headlight Washer Nozzle Replacement ... 22-307
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-233 Wiper Blade Replacement ......................... 22-308
Interior Lights
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment ................. 22-309
Washer Tube Replacement ....................... 22-311
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-236 Gauges
Interior Light Switch Component Location Index ....................... 22-313
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-239 Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 22-315
Front Individual Map Light Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-318
Replacement ............................................ 22-240 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-322
Rear Individual Map Light Gauge Control Module Input Test ............. 22-334
TesVReplacement .................................... 22-240 Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring
Rear Ceiling Light TesVReplacement ......... 22-241 Smart Maintenance on a New Gauge
Cargo Area Light TesVReplacement ......... 22-241 . Control Module ....................................... 22-336
Courtesy Light Replacement ..................... 22-242' . Gauge Control Module Replacement ....... 22-337
Glove Box Light TesVReplacement ........... 22-242 Multi-information Switch
Vanity Mirror Light TesVReplacement ..... 22-243 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-337
Ambient Light Test ..................................... 22-243 Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Footwell Light TesVReplacement .............. 22-244 Calibration ............................................... 22-338
Tailgate Latch Switch Test ................ ........ 22-244
Entry Lights Control System
Electrical Compass
Component Location Index ....................... 22-245 System Description .................................... 22-340
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-246 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-342
Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-248 Center Information Display Input Test ...... 22-343
Ignition Key Switch Test ............................ 22-254 Electrical Compass Unit Input Test ........... 22-344
Ignition Key Light Test ........ : ...................... 22-254
HomeLink Remote Control System
Reminder Systems
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-345
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-255 Input Test ..................................................... 22-347
Test .............................................................. 22-255'
Moonroof
Power Windows Component Location Index ....................... 22-351
Component Location Index ....................... 22-256 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-352
System Description .................................... 22-258 Moonroof Control Unit Input Test ............. 22-354
I
Resetting the Power Window
Control Unit ............................................. 22-259
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-261
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test ................... 22-278
Moonroof Switch TesVReplacement ........ 22-356
Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit ....... 22-357
Accessory Power Sockets
Passenger's MPCS Unit Input Test ........... 22-281 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-360
Driver's Power Window Motor Test ......... 22-284 Front Accessory Power Socket
Front Passenger's Power Window Test/Replacement ................................... 22-361
Motor Test ............................................... 22-285 Rear Accessory Power Socket
Rear Power Window Motor Test ............... 22-286 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-362
Front Passenger's Power Window Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket
Switch Test .............................................. 22-287 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-363
Rear Power Window Switch
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-287
Master Switch Replacement ...................... 22-288
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch
Replacement ............................................ 22-288
AC Power Outlet
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-365
AC Inverter Unit Input Test ........................ 22-366
Power Outlet Replacement ........................ 22-368
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror
Circuit Diagram .......................................... 22-369
Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-370
Power Mirrors
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-372
Power Mirror Switch
Power Mirror Actuator Test ....................... 22-374
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement ........ 22-375
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-379
Seat Heater Test ......................................... 22-381
Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-383
Power Lumbar Support
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-385
Motor Test ................................................... 22-386
Power Seats
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-388
Front Passenger's Power Seat Motor
Test ........................................................... 22-390
Fuel Fill Door Opener
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-392
Fuel Fill Door Opener Solenoid Test ......... 22-393
Fuel Fill Door Opener Switch
Test/Replacement .................................. 22-393
Rear Window Defogger
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-395
Function Test ............................................... 22-396
Defogger Repair .......................................... 22-397
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-400
Information ............................................. 22-403
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 22-405
System Check ............................................. 22-406
Status Log ................................................... 22-407
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-409
Immobilizer Key Registration .................... 22-410
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit
InputTest ................................................. 22-411
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit
Replacement ............................................ 22-413
Drivinjl Position Memory System
(DPMsJ
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-417
System Input Test and Function Test ....... 22-471
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test .......... 22-477
Power Mirror Circuit Input Test ................. 22-479
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control
Unit Input Test ......................................... 22-482
Driving Position Memory Switch
Driver's Power Seat Adjustment Switch
Driver's Power Seat Motor Test ................ 22-486
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Switch
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Motor
Test ........................................................... 22-488
Power Tailgate
Resetting the Power Tailgate
Control Unit ............................................. 22-493
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-494
Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-522
Power Tailgate Motor Test ........................ 22-524
Power Tailgate Inside Beeper
Driver's Door Power Tailgate Switch
Inside Tailgate Switch Test/
Replacement ............................................ 22-525
Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet
Switch Test .............................................. 22-526
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test ............. 22-526
Drive Unit Replacement ............................. 22-527
Pinch Sensor Replacement ........................ 22-527
Clock
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-529

Body Electrical
Special Tools
CD 07WAZ-001010A MPCS (MCIC) Service Connector 1
07T AZ -001 020A Back Probe Adaptor 1
CD
I
22-2
BACK
Tips and Precautions
Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay
box.
2 .. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
I NOTice I
Do not quick-charge a battery unless the
battery ground cable has been
disconnected, otherwise you will damage
the alternator diodes .
Do not attempt to crank the engine with
the battery ground cable loosely
connected or you will severely damage the
wiring. '
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no
loose wire terminals.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
A

I.!!:.I
Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless you first release the lock and remove the
connector from its mount bracket (A).
Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Always reinstall plastic covers.
Before connecting connectors, make sure the
terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
22-3
BACK
Body Electrical
Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (8).
The backs of some connectors are packed with
dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. Ifthe
grease is contaminated, replace it.

(PIN 087989001)
Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is
securely locked.
Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
22-4
Handling Wires and Harnesses
Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (8).
T
BACK
Testing and Repairs
Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape.
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or
terminals, replace the harness.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them.
When using electrical test equipment, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
this manual.
If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire
side (except waterproof connector).
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A.
e:::::=.' ========L[ ---L-_
Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for
identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Five-step Troubleshooting
1. Verify The Complaint:
r--:'I
I.!:...I
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
to verify the client complaint. Note the symptoms.
Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic:
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power feed
through the circuit components to ground. If
several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the
repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
(cont'd)
22-5
BACK
Body Electrical
Wire Color Codes
The following abbreviations are usedto identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics:
WHT ..................... ; ....... :...... White
YEL...................................... Yellow
BLK...................................... Black
BLU ..................................... Blue
GRN..................................... Green
RED...................................... Red
ORN..................................... Orange
PNK..................................... Pink
BRN .................................. ".. Brown
GRY..................................... Gray
PUR ..................................... Purple
L T BLU ................................ Light Blue
LT GRN ............................... LightGreen
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
22-6
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A)
located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle,
if it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL then select the TEST
MODE menu.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the
indicated DTC troubleshooting.
BACK
Relay and Control Unit Locations
r--:'I
L=:.I
Engine Compartment
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY
[Wire colors: BLU, WHT and L T BLU ]
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
[Wire colors: PUR, RED and PUR ]
FAN CONTROL RELAY
[
Wire colors: RED, BLK, ]
PUR, BRN and L T GRN
RELAY CONTROL MODULE
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE IRE LA Y BOX
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
[Wire colors: BRN, PUR and ORN ]
HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM RELAY
[Wire colors: L T BLU ]
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
[Wire colors: WHT, BLK and PUR]
'J.:----.:l>r-- FOG LIGHT RELAY
[Wire colors: BLU, PNK, PNK and BLU ]
INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY
[
Wire colors: PNK, LT BLU, ]
RED and PNK
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
ELDUNIT
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
22-7
BACK
Dashboard
22-8
view of
front side
POWER WINDOW RELAY
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT
(Built into the wiper/washer switch)
SRSUNIT
FRONT SEAT HEATER RELAY
MICU
(Built into the
under-dash fuse/relay box)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BACK
STARTER CUT RELAY 1
[Wire colors: WHT, BRN, PNK and L T GRN ]

l!!!!!..I
STARTER CUT RELAY 2
[Wire colors: BRN, WHT, PNK and LT GRN ] HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY
(Canada modelsl
AUXILIARY UNDER. [Wire colors: YEL, GRN, BLU and GRN ]
DASH RELAY BOX A
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY
fWire colors: ORN, WHT, ]
LYEL, L T GRN and GRN
,.ACC CUT RELAY
LWire colors: YEL, PNK, RED and L T GRN ]
AUDIO UNIT
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
AUXILIARY UNDER
DASH RELAY BOX B
JG2 CUT RELAY
LWire colors: GRN, PNK, ORN and L T GRN ]
AUXILIARY UNDER
DASH RELAY BOX C
22-9
BACK
Rear
CARGO AREA ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET RELAY
SH-AWD RELAY
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT
(Canada models without Navigation)
POWER TAILGATE DRIVE UNIT
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT
(XM RECEIVER)*'
XM RECEIVER*2
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
REARMICU
(Built into the rear
fuse/relay box)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
REAR
FUSE/RELAY BOX
*' : USA models
*2 : Canada models and USA models without Acuralink
22-10 BACK
Roof and Console
MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT/MOTOR
ROOF CONSOLE
AC INVERTER UNIT
REAR SEAT HEATER RELAY
[Wire colors: GRY, BRN, BLK and VEL ]
r:-:'I
t=:.I
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
[
Wire colors: PNK, VEL, ]
GRY and BlK
22-11
BACK
Door
DRIVER'S DOOR
\
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR
/
o
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT
22-12
BACK
Seat
NAVIGATION
UNIT
DRIVER'S SEAT
/
ODS UNIT

L::..I
22-13
BACK
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is preceded by the letter "C"
'G 'f . I "T"f d' I for connectors ' , or around termma s or or non-Qroun termma s.
Harness
Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Tailaate, and Roof)
AlC wire harness
C502 C503 (see oaQe 22-5S)
Batterv Qround cable
( ) G1 (see oaQe 22-15)
CKP sensor subharness C151
(see DaDe 22-1S)
Console subharness C901 C902 (see DaDe 22-47)
Dashboard wire harness C304, C305, C501, C510, (see page 22-26)
(View of driver's side) through C518, CS01
G501 G502
Dashboard wire harness C505 CS02,CS03 (see page 22-30)
(Center console) G503
Dashboard wire harness C201, C202, C203, C502, (see page 22-32)
(View of passenger's side) C503, C521, through
C530,CS04,CS05,CSOS,
C771, C901, C951
G504 G50S G507
Driver's door power mirror wire C753 (see page 22-48)
harness
Driver's door subharness C751 (see Da e 22-48)
Driver's door wire harness A C752 C753 (see DaDe 22-48)
Driver's door wire harness B C751 C752 (see Daae 22-48)
Driver's seat subharness C931 (see DaDe 22-54)
Driver's seat wire harness CS09 C931 (see DaDe 22-54)
ECT sensor subharness C205 (see DaDe 22-20)
Engine ground cable A T2 G2 (see DaDe 22-15)
Engine ground cable B T3 G3 (see DaDe 22-15)
Engine wire harness (Right side) C101,C103, C104, C105, (see page 22-1S)
C151,C152,T101,T102
G101
Engine wire harness (Left side) C102,C153 (see page 22-18)
T103 T104
Floor wire harness (Left branch) C303,CS01 CS02, CS03, C609, C611, (see page 22-34)
G601 CS12, C613, C781
G602 G603 G604
Floor wire harness (Right branch) C204, C604,C605, CSOS CS08, CS10, C614, CS15, (see page 22-38)
C616, C617, C791
GS05 G60S
Front passenger's door power mirror C773 (see page 22-50)
wire harness
FrontQassenaer's door subharness C772 C773 (see DaDe 22-50)
Front oassenaer's door wire harness C771 C772 (see DaDe 22-50)
Front oassenaer's seat wire harness CS10 (see DaDe 22-55)
Knocksensorsubharness C152 (see DaDe 22-1S)
Left engine compartment wire harness C102,C301 C20S, C207, C303, C304, (see page 22-24)
G302 G303 C305
Left rear door wire harness C781 (see Daae 22-52)
Left tailQate wire harness C701 C702 (see Daae 22-42)
Middle tailQate wire harness C702 C703 (see DaDe 22-42)
ODS unit harness C61S (see DaDe 22-55)
Rear wire harness CS11, CS14, C701, C704, (see page 22-40)
T701
G701 G702
Rear subframe wire harness CS13 G651 (see oaae 22-44)
RES wire harness C951 (see oaQe 22-46)
Right engine compartment wire C101,C205,C212,C301 (see page 22-20)
harness G201, G301
(Front of enQine comoartment)
Right engine compartment wire G202 C201 through C204, (see page 22-22)
harness C206 through C211
(Dash to rear of enQine comoartment) G401
Right rear door wire harness C791 (see Daae 22-53)
Right tailgate wire harness C703 C704 (see oaae 22-43)
Roof subharness C851 (see DaDe 22-45)
Roof wire harness C501 C851 C852 C853 (see DaDe 22-45)
Shift solenoid subharness C153 (see Da e 22-18)
Starter cable (+) T1 T4 (see Dace 22-15)
Shift solenoid wire harness C104 (see oaae 22-18)
22-14
BACK
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities
T1 6
T4 5
(+1 9
Battery Ground Cable
(-I 1
G1 2
Engine Ground Cable A
T2 3
G2 4
Engine Ground Cable B
T3 8
G3 7
STARTER CABLE
8
Location Connects to
Left side of engine compartment Main under-hood fuse box
Left side of enQine compartment Starter motor
Batterv Batterv positive terminal
Left side of enQine 'compartment Batterv neQative terminal
Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
ground cable
Left side of engine compartment Transmission housinQ
Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
Qround cable A
RiQht side of enQine compartment Emline mount bracket
Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
ground cable B
9
2
BATTERY GROUND CABLE
3
4

I.!!!!!..I
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes
22-15
BACK
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (Center to Right Side)
Connector or Terminal
NC compressor clutch
Alternator
CMPsensor
EGR valve and position sensor
ECTsensor 1
Front NF sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
Front secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) (Bank 2, Sensor 2)
Ignition coil No.1
Ignition coil No.2
Ignition coil No.3
Ignition coil No.4
Ignition coil No.5
Ignition coil No.6
Injector No.1
Injector No.2
Injector No.3
Injector No.4
Injector No.5
Injector No.6
Intake manifold turning (IMT) actuator
Oil pressure switch
PCM connector B
PCM connector C
Rear NF sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)
Rear secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid
Rocker arm oil pressure switch
C101
C103 (Junction connector)
C151
C152
T101
T102
G101
CKP Sensor Subharness
CKP sensor AlB
C151
Knock Sensor Subharness
Knock sensor
C152
22-16
Ref Cavities
28 1
27 4
34 3
16 6
15 2
13 2
19 6
18 4
3 3
5 3
7 3
25 3
23 3
21 3
9 2
10 2
11 2
24 2
22 2
20 2
33 5
29 1
37 49
36 49
12 6
14 4
1 1
32 1
35 12
4 24
6 24
8 24
2 6
30 1
17
26
39
Location
Right side of engine compartment
Middle of engine compartment
Right side of engine
Left side of engine compartment
Middle of engine
Left side of engine compartment
Exhaust manifold (frorit bank)
Exhaust manifold (front bank)
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
Riaht side of enaine comoartment
Right side of ellgine
Connects to Notes
Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-20)
CKP sensor subharness
Knock sensor subharness
Main under-hood fuse box
Alternator
Body ground, via engine wire
harness around cable
Connects to
ine wire harness
Connects to
ine wire harness
BACK
CKPSENSOR
SUB HARNESS
38
37
36
KNOCK SENSOR
SUBHARNESS
30
29 28
27 26 25 24 23 22
18
21 20
r--:'I
I..!!:..I
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
22-17
BACK
Engine Wire Harness (Left Side)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
AlC clutch pressure control valve A 12 2 Transmission housing
AlC clutch pressure control valve B 13 2 Transmission housing
AlC clutch pressure control valve C 10 2 Transmission housing
ATF temperature sensor 15 2 Transmission housing
Engine mount control solenoid 6 2 Left side of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 19 3 Transmission housing
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 5 3 Right side of engine compartment
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF)/Intake air 7 5 Right side of engine compartment
temperature (lAT) sensor
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 17 3 Transmission housing
sensor
Starter solenoid 21 1 Left side of engine compartment
Throttle actuator and throttle position 4 6 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Transmission range switch 16 10 Transmission housing
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure 3 1 Transmission housing
switch
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 18 1 Transmission housing
switch
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure 9 1 Transmission housing
switch
C102 8 1 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-24)
C153 20 5 On the transmission housina Shift solenoid wire harness
T103 (Thermal joint) (SG2) 1 Left side of engine compartment
T104 (Thermal joint) (LG2) 2 Left side of enaine comoartment
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Shift solenoid valve A 22 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve B 14 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve C 23 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve D 11 1 In the transmission
C153 20 5 On the transmission housina Enaine wire harness
22-18
BACK
21
20
ENGINE WIRE
HARNESS
19
17
18
r--:'I
I.!!!.I
22-19
BACK
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Front of Engine Compartment)
AlC condenser fan motor 24 2 Front of engine compartment
Headlight washer motor 5 2 Behind right side offront bumper Canada
Hood switch 23 2 Front of engine compartment
Horn (High) 26 1 Front of engine compartment
Horn (Low) 31 1 Front of engine compartment
Left daytime running light 17 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left fog light 16 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left front parking light 10 2 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 9 2 Behind left headlight
Left-front suspension stroke sensor 14 3 Left front suspension
*
Left front turn signal light 11 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high beam) 13 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight leveling motor 12 3 Behind left headlight
Left HID unit 8 2 Under left headlight
Outside air temperature sensor 20 2 Front of engine compartment
PCM 2 49 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 21 2 Front of engine compartment
Right daytime running light 27 2 Behind right side offront bumper
Rightfog light 28 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Right front initiator 30 3 Behind right side of front bumper TPMS
Right front impact sensor 29 2 Behind right side offront bumper
Right front parking light 34 2 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 36 2 Behind right.headlight
Right-front suspension stroke sensor 38 3 Right front suspension
*
Rightfrontturn signal light 32 2 Behind right headlight
Right front wheel sensor 37 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right headlight (high beam) 7 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight leveling motor 6 3 Behind right headlight
Right HID unit 33 2 Under right headlight
Washer fluid level switch 4 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Windshield washer motor 35 2 Behind right side of front bumper
C101 3 13 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-16)
C205 18 2 Front of engine compartment ECT sensor subharness
C212 (Junction connector) 1 24 Right side of engine compartment
C301 15 3 Left front of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
harness (see Daoe 22-24)
G201 25 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
compartment wire harness
G301 19 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
comoartment wire harness
*. With active damper system
ECT Sensor Subharness
ECTsensor2 22 2 Left side of engine compartment
C205 18 2 Left side of engine compartment Right engine compartment
wire harness
22-20
BACK
ECT SENSOR SUBHARNESS
1
38
36
35
25
r--:'I

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22-21
BACK
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dash to Rear of Engine Compartment)
AlC pressure sensor 1 3 Right side of engine compartment
APPsensor 9 6 Under left side of dash
Brake pedal position switch 10 4 Under left side of dash
Fog light relay 22 4 In the under-dash fuse/relay box Under-hood auxiliary relay
box (see page 22-57)
Front vertical acceleration sensor 8 3 Under left side of dash

Headlight leveling control unit 20 16 Under right side of dash
Headlight washer relay 21 4 Under right side of dash Canada
Interior light relay 22 4 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Under-hood auxiliary relay
box (see page 22-57)
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 2 2 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector A
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector B
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) , 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector C
Right front damper coil 3 2 Right side of engine compartment

TPMS control unit 11 20 Under left side of dash TPMS
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay 22 4 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector A (see page 22-57)
control module) connector B (see page 22-57)
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay , 22 2 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector C (see page 22-57)
control module) connector D
(seepage 22-57)
control module) connector E
(see page 22-57)
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay 22 1 In the under-hoodfuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector F
(see page 22-57)
control module) connector G
(see page 22-57)
control module) connector H
(see page 22-57)
Windshield wiper motor 7 5 Left side of engine compartment
C201 16 34 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-32)
C202 15 5 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
17
(see page 22-32)
C203 4 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-32)
C204 14 23 Under right side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-38)
C206 5 14 Under right side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C207 6 20
Under right side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C208 (Junction connector) 19 12 Under right side of dash
C211 (Junction connector) 4 12 Under left side of dash
G202 23 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
G401 18 Under right side of dash Body ground, via right engine
22-22
BACK
18
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
r:-:'I

22-23
BACK
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Brake fluid level switch 4 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake light relay 9 5 Under left side of dash
ELD unit 24 3 In the main under-hood fuse box
Left front damper coil 17 2 Left side of engine compartment
*
Left front impact sensor 20 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left front initiator 21 3 Behind left side of front bumper TPMS
Left front wheel sensor 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
Main under-hood fuse box 14 -- Left side of engine compartment
Starter cut relay 1 10 4 Under left side of dash
Starter cut relay 2 8 4 Under left side of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 12 6 left kick panel
B (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 13 12 Left kick panel
C (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 11 17 Left kick pa nel
D (see page 22-59)
W (see page 22-59)
VSA modulator-control unit 1 46 Left side of engine compartment
C102 5 1 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-18)
C206 2 14 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment
C301 22 3 Left front of engine compartment Right engine compartment
C303 16 7 Under left side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-26)
C304 6 14 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
C305 7 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
G302 23 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
G303 19 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
*: With active damper system
22-24
BACK
3
24
22
23
r--:'I
I.!!::.J
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
~ __ ---13
15
16
17
18
19
22-25
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Driver's Side)
ACC cut relay 44 5 Under left side of dash
Cable reel connector A 16 20 In steering column cover
Combination switch control unit 15 8 In steering column cover
Dash lights brightness controller 17 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's airbag inflator 14 4 In steering column cover
Driver's ambient light 27 3 Under left side of dash
Driver's footwelllight 26 2 Under left side of dash
Gauge control module connector A 3 12 Behind gauge
Gauge control module connector B 6 23 Behind gauge
Headlight washer switch 5 5 Under left side of dash Canada
Ignition key switch/key light 13 6 In steering column cover
Ignition switch 19 6 In steering column cover
IG2 cut relay 45 5 Under left side of dash
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 18 7 In steering column cover
Left front tweeter 47 2 Under left side of dash
Optional connector (trailer brake) 29 5 Under left side of dash
Parking brake switch 43 1 Under left side of dash
Power mirror switch 28 10 Under left side of dash
Power telescopic motor/position 25 6 In steering column cover
sensor
Power tilt motor/position sensor 24 8 In steering column cover
Power tilt/telescopic steering control 22 16 In steering column cover
unit connector A
Power tilt/telescopic steering control 21 8 In steering column cover
unit connector B
Power tilt/telescopic steering switch 23 13 Left side of steering column
Steering angle sensor 20 5 In steering column cover
Under-dash auxiliarv fuse holder 35 2 Under left side of dash
22-26
BACK
-
45
44
43
42
41
40
47
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
39--__
38
37
36/\
35 \
18
19
20
33
34
r--:'I
L:::..I
14
(cant'd)
22-27
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Driver's Side) (cont'd)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 38 6 Left kick pa nel
A (see page 22-59)
N (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P 37 30 Left kick panel
(MICU) (see page 22-59)
R (MES) (see page 22-59)
S (see page 22-59)
X (see page 22-59)
VSA OFF switch 4 5 Under left side of dash
C304 31 14 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C305 30 4 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C501 46 28 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see page
22-45)
C601 36 20 Under left side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-34)
G501 34 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G502 33 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
22-28
BACK
45
44
43
42
41
40
47
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
39--__
r:-:'I

14

16
18
19
20
33
34
22-29
BACK
Connector to Harness Index (co nt' d)
Dashboard Wire Harness (Center Console Branch)
AfT shift lock solenoid
AfT shift lever console light/park-pin
switch
Auxiliary jack assembly
Data link connector
HandsFreeLink control unit
In-car temperature sensor
Left second row seat heater switch
Rear accessory power socket
Rear blower motor
Rear blower motor relay
Rear climate control panel
Rear evaporator temperature sensor
Rear mode control motor
Rear power transistor
Right second row seat heater switch
Second row seat heater relay
SRS unit connector A
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor
C602
C603
G503
G505
* 1: With rear entertainment system
* 2: Without rear entertainment system
* 3: With second row seat heaters
22-30
Ref Cavities
6 2
7 8
15 14
2 16
16 28
3 4
14 6
15 2
11 7
8 2
10 4
13 10
20 2
17 7
9 4
12 6
22 5
1 28
5 4
24 12
23 12
18 20
19 5
21
4
Location
Under center console
Rear of center console
Under middle of dash
Under rear of center console
Under console panel
Connects to Notes
* 1
*3
*2
*3
*3
Floor wire harness (see page
22-34)
Floor wire harness (see page *3
22-34)
Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
BACK
21
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
22-31
BACK
Connector to Harness Index (co nt' d)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Passenger's Side)
AC inverter unit 36 12 Under center console
Audio unit connector A 39 17 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector B 40 32 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector C 41 24 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector D 42 16 Middle of dash
*3
Audio unit connector E (for XM 43 12 Middle of dash
*3
receiver)
Audio unit connector E 45 -- Middle of dash
*3
Center information display 11 12 Middle of dash
*2
Center speaker 8 2 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector A 1 40 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 2 14 Middle of dash
Digital audio lead connector 19 -- Under right side of dash
*3
Digital audio lead (audio unit side) 45 -- Middle of dash
*3
Front passenger's airbag inflator 17 4 Under right side of dash
Glove box light 20 2 Under right side of dash
Hazard warning switch 3 6 Middle of dash
Interface dial 44 5 Middle of dash
Navigation display unit 6 20 Middle of dash
* 1
Right front tweeter 16 2 Under right side of dash
Stereo amplifier connector A 22 28 Under right side of dash
* 1
Stereo amplifier connector A 22 20 Under right side of dash
*2
Stereo amplifier connector B 23 18 Under right side of dash
Sunlight sensor 9 5 Middle of dash
C502 32 12 Under middle of dash AlC wire harness (see page
22-56)
C503 33 16 Under middle of dash AlC wire harness (see page
22-56)
22-38)
22-38)
C606 35 24 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see page
* 1
22-38)
C771' 24 23 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire
C901 34 16 Under middle of dash Console subharness
(see page 22-47)
C951 18 20 Under right side of dash RES wire harness (see page
*3
22-46)
G504 37 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G506 38 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G507 30 Under right side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
* 1:Wlth navIgatIon
* 2: Without navigation
* 3: With rear entertainment system
22-32
BACK
43
42
41
40
39
1
38
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
37
10
30
r--:'I
t.=!..I
21
27
28
22-33
BACK
Floor Wire Harness (Left Branch)
Connector or Terminal Ref
Active damper control unit connector 29
A
Active damper control unit connector 30
B
Cargo area accessory power socket 26
Driver's door switch 46
Driver's seat belt tensioner 43
Driver's side airbag inflator 9
EVAP canister vent shut valve 17
Fuel fill door opener solenoid 23
Fuel pump control module 34
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit 41
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 18
Left rear damper coil 38
Left rear door switch 40
Left rear initiator 35
Left rear vertical acceleration sensor 36
Left side impact sensor (FIRST) 45
Left side impact sensor (SECOND) 39
Left side curtain airbag inflator 19
Left second row seat heater 21
Navigation service check connector 42
Navigation unit connector A 10
Navigation unit connector B 11
Navigation unit connector C 12
Navigation unit connector D 13
Navigation unit connector E 14
Rear fuse/relay box connector A 28
(see page 22-60)
Rear fuse/relay box connector B 27
(see page 22-60)
Rear safi ng sensor 20
SH-AWD control unit connector A 31
SH-AWD control unit connector B 32
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E 3
(see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 4
(see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 5
G (see page 22-59)
H (see page 22-59)
Q (see paQe 22-59)
* 2: With navigation or electrical compass
* 3: Without navigation and electrical compass
* 4: With active dam per system
22-34
Cavities Location
14 Left side of cargo area
1 Left B-pillar
4 Left B-pillar
2 Under driver's seat
2 Fuel tank
10 Left side cargo area
4 Fuel tank
3 Fuel tank
2 Under left rear floor
1 Left C-pillar
3 Under left rear floor
4 Left B-pillar
2 Left C-pillar
2 Left C-pillar
3 Under left second row seat
4 Middle offloor
16 Left kick panel
14 Left kick panel
6 Left kick panel
14 Left kick panel
14 Left kick panel
Connects to Notes
*4
*4
*4
TPMS
*4
* 1
Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
BACK
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
22
(cent'd)
22-35 BACK
Floor Wire Harness (Left Branch) (cont'd)
Connector or Terminal Ref
C303 7
C601 1
C602 15
C603 16
C609 8
C611 24
C611 24
C612 (Junction connector)' 33
C613 25
C781 44
G601 48
G602 47
G603 22
G604 37
* 1. With second row seat heaters
* 2: With navigation or electrical compass
* 3: Without navigation and electrical compass
* 4: With active damper system
22-36
Cavities Location
7 Under left side of dash
20 Left kick panel
20 Under center console
5 Under center console
12 Left kick panel
23 Under left rearfloor
18 Left B-pillar
Left kick panel
Under driver's seat
Left side of cargo area
Left side of cargo area
Connects to Notes
Left engine compartment wire
Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-30)
* 1
(see page 22-30)
Driver's seat wire harness
(see page 22-54)
Rear wire r n l ~ s s (see page *2
22-40)
Rear wire harness (see page
*3
22-40)
Rear subframe wire harness
(see page 22-44)
Left rear door wire harness
(see oaae 22-52)
Body ground, via floor wire
harness
harness
harness
harness
BACK
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
r:-:'I
I.!!!!:.I
22
22-37
BACK
Floor Wire Harness (Right branch)
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector A
connector B
Front passenger's door switch
Front passenger's seat belttensioner
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Right rear damper coil
Right rear door switch
Right rear initiator
Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor
Right side curtain airbag inflator
Right second row seat cushion heater
Right side impact sensor IFIRST)
Right side impact sensor (SECOND)
Roll rate sensor
SRS unit connector B
SRS unit connector C
Subwoofer
XM receiver
C204
C604
C605
C606
C610
C614
C614
C616
C617 (Male connector)
C617 (Female connector)
C791
G605
G606
* 2: With active damper system
* 3: With USA models with AcuraLink
* 4: Without AcuraLink
22-38
Ref Cavities Location
21 20 Right side of cargo area
9 1 Right B-pillar
11 4 Right B-pillar
29 2 Right B-pillar
17 2 Under right side offloor
14 1 Right C-pillar
16 3 Under right side of floor
27 4 Right C-pillar
25 3 Under right second row seat
10 4 Right B-pillar
15 2 Right C-pillar
26 2 Middle offloor
2 16 Under middle of dash
19 8 Under front passenger's seat
6 23 Right kick panel
4 12 Right kick pimel
5 18 Right kick panel
18 12 Right side of floor
12 18 Right B-pillar
7 Under front passenger's seat
13 Mounted on B-pillar
Connects to Notes
USA
USA
*2
TPMS
*2
* 1
*4
Right engine compartment
(see page 22-32)
. (see page 22-32)
Dashboard wire harness Navigation
(see page 22-32)
Front passenger's seat wire
Rear wire harness (see page Navigation
22-40)
Rear wire harness (see page Without
22-40) Navigation
ODS wire harness (see page
22-55)
*3
*3
Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-53)
Body ground, via front wire
harness
Body ground, via front wire
harness
BACK
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
30
23 22 21 20
13
r--:'I

7
22-39
BACK
Rear Wire Harness
Electrical compass unit 2 6 Left D-pillar *4
Keyless buzzer 13 2 Behind rear bumper
Left brake light/taillight 15 3 Left taillight assembly
Left rear side marker light 17 2 Left taillight assembly
Left rear turn signal light 16 2 Left taillight assembly
Left surround speaker 6 2 Left D-pillar Navigation
Power tailgate control unit connector A 23 5 Left D-pillar * 1
Power tailgate control unit connector B 21 20 Left D-pillar * 1
Power tailgate control unit connector C 22 14 Left D-pillar * 1
Power tailgate driver unit connector A 4 2 Left D-pillar * 1
Power tailgate r i ~ e r unit connector B 5 8 Left D-pillar * 1
Rear fuse/relay box connector C 19 42 Left side of cargo area
(see page 22-60)
Right brake light/taillight 11 3 Right taillight assembly
Right rear side marker light 10 2 Right taillight assembly
Right rear turn signal light 12 2 Right taillight assembly
Right surround speaker 9 2 Right D-pillar Navigation
C611 20 12 Left side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page *2
22-34)
C611 20 4 Left side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page
*3
22-34)
C614 7 13 Right side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page Navigation
22-38)
C614 7 2 Rightside of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page *4
22-38)
C701 3 18 Left D-pillar Left tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-42)
C704 8 12 Right D-pillar Right tailgate wire harness * 1
(see page 22-43)
n01 (Weldina ioint) 18 Left D-oillar * 1
G701 1 Left D-pillar Body ground. via rear wire
harness
G702 14 Center of cargo area Body ground. via rear wire
harness
* 1: WIth power tailgate
* 2: With navigation or compass
* 3: Without navigation and compass
* 4: Canada models without navigation
22-40,
BACK
1
23
14
REAR WIRE HARNESS
11
12
r--:,
L::..I
22-41
BACK
Left Tailgate Wire Harness
High mount brake light 1 2 Roof spoiler
Rear window defogger connector A 21 1 Left side of rear window
(+)
C701 22 23 Left D-pillar Rear wire harness (see page
22-40)
C702 20 18 Left side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness
Middle Tailgate Wire Harness
Left cargo area light 17 2 Left side of tailgate
Left back-up light 18 2 Left side of tailgate
Left license plate light 12 2 Center of tailgate
Left power tailgate pinch sensor 19 2 Left side of tailgate
1
Power tailgate closer motor 15 2 Center of tailgate 1
Power tailgate closer unit/latch and 16 6 Center of tailgate
* 1
ratchet switch
Power tailgate inside switch 10 5 Center of tailgate
1
Rearview camera 7 6 Center oftailgate Navigation
Rear window defogger connector B 13 1 Right side of rear window
*2
(-)
Rear window wiper motor 2 4 Center of tailgate
Right cargo area light 9 2 Right side of rear window
Right back-up light 5 2 Right side oftailgate
Right license plate light 8 2 Center of tailgate
Right power tailgate pinch sensor 6 2 Right side of tailgate
* 1
Tailgate latch switch 13 2 Center oftailgate
*2
Tailgate outer handle switch 11 3 Center oftailgate
Tailgate release actuator 14 2 Center of tailgate
*2
C702 20 18 Left side of tailgate Left tailgate wire harness
C703 4 18 Right side of tailgate Right tailgate wire harness 1
(see page 22-43)
'1. With power tailgate
2: Without power tailgate
3
6
7
22
11
21
17 16 15
LEFT TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS 20 19 18 MIDDLE TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS
22-42
BACK
Right Tailgate Wire Harness (With Power Tailgate)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to
Rear window defogger connector B 3 1 Rightside of rear window
(-)
C703 2 18 Right side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-42)
C704 1 12 Right side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page
22-40l
3
1
RIGHT TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS

1..::..1
Notes
22-43
BACK
Rear Subframe Wire Harness
Differential temperature sensor 4 2 . Reardifferential
Left clutch electromagnetic coil 5 4 Rear differential
Left rear wheel sensor . 7 2 Rear differential
Left rear suspension stroke sensor 9 3 Rear differential
Right clutch electromagnetic coil 3 4 Rear differential
Rightrear suspension stroke sensor 2 3 Rear differential
Right rear wheel sensor 1 2 Rear differential
C613 8 23 Under rear offloor Floor wire harness (see page
22-341
G651 6 Subframe Body ground, via rear
subframe wire harness
REAR SUBFRAME WIRE HARNESS
9
1
22-44
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the outside air
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.1.
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
climate control unit,and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit .
sensor .
DTC 81228 or DTC indicator 0 and AUTO: A
Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
21-45
BACK
Climate Control
connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and body r o u n ~
between the climate control unit and the outside air
NO-Go to step 9.
sensor .
21-46
DTC 81229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An
Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81229 or E and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit .
connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and the sunlight
sensor 5Pconnector terminal No.4.
YES-Go to step 9.
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the sunlight
sensor 5P connector terminal No.2.
YES-Go to step 10.
sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).

DTC 81230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A
Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
1. Clearthe Drc with the HDS.
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
=
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor .
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
21-47
BACK
Climate Control
NO-Go to step 10.

21-48
DTC 81231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: An
Open in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
3. Do the self"diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81231 or G and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the front evaporator
temperature sensor circuit .
Is the front evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
sensor .
BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and the front
terminal No.2.
2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
sensor .
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the front
terminal No.1.
Q
2P CONNECTOR
front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good climate control unit, and recheck. If the
sensor .
21-49
BACK
Climate Control
OTC 81232 or OTC indicator H and AUTO: A
Short in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81232 or H and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is therront evaporator temperature sensorOK?
YES-Goto step 7.
sensor .
21-50
=
evaporator temperature sensor..
NO-Go to step 9.
sensor .
BACK
DTC 81233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An
Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81233 or J and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the driver's.air mix control
motor circuit .
21-109).
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? .
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-110) .
connector.
40P: 7P:
No.6
No.8
No.11
No.7
No.5
No.3
Q
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit .
motor .
21-51
BACK
Climate Control
OTC 81234 or OTC indicator K and AUTO: A
Short in theDriver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81234 or K and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; 81237 or Nand
WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6.
21-109).
YES-Go to step 8.
(see page 21-110) .
connector.
21-52
No.11.
Q
=
mix control motor .
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
=
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix
AlC pressure sensor
Q
=
NO-Go to step 16.
=
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
21-53
BACK
Climate Control
=
YES-Go to step 20.
control unit..
21-54
AlC pressure sensor
=
voltage drop .
BACK
OTC 81235 or .OTC indicator L and AUTO: A
Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
4. Check for DTCs.
Is OTe 81235 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the driver's air mix control
motor circuit..
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor,(see page
21-109).
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-110), or repair the driver's air mix
connector.
9. Check for continuity between the fol/owing
40P: 7P:
No. 12 , No.2
No.13' No.1
YES-Go to step 10.
motor .
(cont'd)
21-55
BACK
Climate Control
No. '12 and No. 13 individually.
= =
. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
mix control motor .
21-56
DTC 81236 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: An
Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81236 or M and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
control motor circuit .
(see page 21-110).
YES-Go to step 7.
(see page 21-111) .
7P connector.
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Auxiliary Under-hood Relay Box part)
1
2
/
Connects to
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Ri ht en ine com artment wire harness (see a e 22-22)
o
D
~
0000
D o o o o o l ~
00 0 00 ~
[ [DDDDO ITill ~
[00000]
J
r:-:'I
L=!.I
(cont'd)
22-57
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Control Module part) .
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A 5 4. Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
B 2 5 Right e'ngine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
C 3 2 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
0 8 10 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
E 7 14 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
F 6 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
G 1 4. Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
H 4. 9 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
2 3
RELAY CONTROL
MODULE
8 7
6 5
(Viewed from bottom)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Block part)
A 9 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
AlC compressor clutch relay 2 4.
AlC condenser fan relay 3 4.
B 8 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
C 5 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Diode (for AlC condenser fan relay and 11
--
fan control relay)
Diode (for radiator fan relay) 10 --
Fan control relay 1 5
Front blower motor relay 7 4
Headlight low beam relay 6 4.
Radiator fan relav 4. 4.
9
8
(Viewed from bottom)
22-58
BACK
Socket
A
Accessory power socket relay
B
C
D
E
F
Front seat heater relay
G
H
J
K
M
N
P
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
Power window relay
Q
R (for MES connector)
S (forSRS)
Short pin (for fuel pump)
Short pin (for lumber support)
T
Turn signal/hazard relay
W
X
16---__
oL
15
14
Ref
6
8
19
18
20
25
26
9
21
24
16
15
14
2
23
13
11
22
3
5
10
12
7
4
17
1
2 3
12 11
10
Terminal
6
4
6
12
17
16
14
4
6
14
21
12
3
45
30
4
4
14
2
2
--
--
6
6
5
39
Connects to
Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-24)
Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
Driver's door subharness (see page 22-48)
Driver's door subharness (see page 22-48)
MICU service check connector
Not used
17 19 20
Not used
24

l!!:.I
22
23
22-59
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
A 6 2 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
B 5 34 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
C 4 42 Rear wire harness (see page 22-40)
Cargo area accessory power socket 1 4 Not used
relay
D (for trailer) 7 14
Rear window defogger relay 3 4
SH-AWD relay 2 4
1
2
3
7
6
22-60
BACK
Power Distribution

I..!!:..I
Fuse to Components Index
Main Under-hood Fuse Box
Fuse Number
1 (BAT)
--
2 (OP1)
(OP1)
(TRAILER)
(VSAMTR)
(RR BLOWER)
3 (lG)
(P/W)
(RR F/B)
(RB1)
(RB2)
(RB3)
(RB4)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
AmDS
120A
--
40A
40A
40A
40A
30A
50A
50A
60A
30A
40A
60A
60A
40A
30A
--
30A
7.5A
15A
15A
20A
20A
20A
20A
Wire Color or Circuitls) Protected
Batterv. Power SI!lmOC
Not used
No.1 No.2 No.3 and No.4 fuses in the
No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 and No. 17 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relaY box
No.1 No.2 No.3 and No.4 fuses in the rear trailer connectors)
VSA modulator-control unit (MTR)
Rear blower motor
Ignition switch (BAn
No. 24, No. 25, No. 26,No. 27, and No. 28 fuses inthe under-dash fuse/relay box, Power window
relay in the under-dash fuse/relay box
No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 No.9 No. 10 and No. 11 fuses (in the rear fuse/relay box)
No.7 No.8 No.9 No. 10 and No. 11 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
'No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 and No. 6 fuses (in the under-hood
No. 14 No. 15 No.16 and No. 17 fuses (in the under-hood
No. 12 No. 13 and No. 22 fuses (in the under-hood
Under-dash fuse/relay box (BACK-UP/ACC)
ActiYe damper control unit
Not used
Not used
Audio amplifier
Under-dash fuse/relay box (RES)
Under-dash fuse/relay box (HAZARD)
Brake liaht relay. Brake pedal position switch Relay control module (Horn relay circuit)
VSA modulator-control unit (FSR)
ODtional (for trailer)
Second row seat heaters
AC inverter unit
2
I
o
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
/
nnnnnnn

11 10 9 8 7 6 5
UUUUUUU
[ ]
1
[12J [ ]
[13J
[ ]
[14J
[ ]

[ ]
[15J
[]
I
3
o
(cont'd)
BACK
Power ,Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Control Module part)
Fuse Amps
',',' '. ,'I
Al'IlpsWire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 1DA Left daytime running light
2 1DA Riaht daytime runnihgliaht
3 1DA Headlight leveling control,unit Left headlight (high beam)
4 1DA . Right headlight (higtibearn)
5 7.5A Front parking lights Front side marker lights
6 3DA Headlight low beam relav. No. 18 and No. 19 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
7 7.5A AlF sensor relay. Radiator fan relay
8 15A CKP sensor AlB, CMPsensor,ETCS control relay, Ignition coil relay, Injectors, No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box PCM (lGP) PCM (MRLY) PGM"FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
9 15A Ignition coils
-,
1D .15A PCM (ETCSRLYOUn
11 15A EVAP canister vent shut valve, Front AlF sensor (bank2, sensor 1); Front SH02S (bank2, sensor 2), Rear A/F
sensor (bank1 sensor 1), Rear SH02S (bank1sensor 2)
, .-' .
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Block part)
Fuse Amps
Number
12 4DA
13 2DA
14 3DA
15 3DA
16 3DA
17 7.5A
18 15A
19 15A
22 7.5A
!.
22-62
Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Blower motor
,
Fog lights Fog light relay
Headlight washer motor
AlC condenser fan motor
Radiator fan motor
AlC compressor clutch
_.
Left HID unit
Headlight washer motor relay, Right HID unit
Active damper system switch light, AfT gear position indicator panel light, Climate control unit light, Dash lights
brightness controller light, Driver's ambient light, Driver'S seat heater switch light, Front passenger's seat heater
switch light, Glove box light, Hazard warning switch light, Headlight washer switch light, Headphone jack,
Interior light relay, Left second row seat heater switch light, Moonroof switch light, Power mirror switch light,
Rear climate control panel light, Rear controller and screen, Right second row seat heater switch light, Roof
console Steering wheel switches lights VSA OFF switch light
RELA V BLOCK Part
~ D D D D
8BGG
n n n n n 0 ~ ._-
11 10 9 8 7
LJLJLJLJLJ
- - ~ ~
RELA V CONTROL MODULE Part
D
n n n l - n ~ D
uuuuu
nn nn
1918 Q 2213 0
LJLJ U LJLJ
-I
o
BACK
~
.t=:.J
Fuse Amps Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
Number
1 7.5A TPMS control unit
2 10A Driver's lumbar support motor
3 10A Moonroof control unit/motor
4 20A Driver's seat heater Front passenger's seat heater
5 10A AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) Audio unit Navigation unit XM receiver
6 7.5A Driver's footwelilight, Driver's vanity mirror light, Front individual map light, Front passenger's footwelilight,
Front passenger's vanity mirror light, Ignition key light, Left rear door courtesy light, Rear ceiling light, Rear
individual mao liaht Riaht rear door courtesy liaht Roof console
7 10A Climate control unit, Combination switch control unit, Data link connector, Center information display Driver's
MPCS unit, Gauge control module, Immobilizer-keyless control unit, MICU (VBU), Navigation display unit,
Passenger's MPCS unit Power til1/telescopic steering control unit
8 20A MICU (+B DOOR LOCK)
9 15A Front accessory Dower socket Rear accessory Dower socket
10 15A PCM(VBSOL)
11 30A EVAP canister vent shut valve, Front A/F sensor (bank2, sensor 1), Front SH02S (bank2, sensor 2), Rear A/F
sensor (bank1, sensor 1), Rear SH02S (bank1- sensor 2), Windshield wiper motor, Wiper/washer control circuit
lin the relay control module)
12 10A Subwoofer
13 20A Front Dassenaer's Dower seat motor (Recline Rear uD-down)
14 20A Driver's power seat motor (Slide Front up-down)
15 20A Powertilt/telescopic steering control unit
16 20A Driver's power seat motor (Recline Rear up-down)
17 20A Front passenger's power seat motor (Slide Front up-down)
18 10A AlF sensor, Alternator, Brake pedal position switch, ELD unit, Engine mount control solenoid, EVAP canister
Durae valve PCM
19 20A Fuel DumD. Immobilizer-kevless control unit PCM PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
20 7.5A Active damper control unit Brake light relay, Hazard warnina switch ODS unit SH-AWD control unit SRS unit
21 7.5A AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver), Active damper system switch, Automatic dimming inside mirror, Center
information display, Combination switch control unit, Driver's MPCS unit, Electrical compass unit, Gauge control
module, MICU, Power seat control unit, Power tailgate control unit, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit,
Rear MICU (Rear fuselrelay box) Relay control module Shift lock solenoid TPMS control unit XM receiver
22 10A SRS unit
24 20A Left rear Dower window motor
25 20A Right rear power window motor
26 30A Passenger's MPCS unit
27 30A Driver's MPCS unit
28 20A Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit
29 10A Steering angle sensor VSA modulator-control unit Yaw rate-Iateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
30 10A AC inverter unit, Climate control unit, Front seat heater relay MICU, Rear climate control panel, Rear mode
control motor, Rear window defogger relay (in the rear fuse/relay box), Relay block (AiC compressor relay, A/C
condenser fan relay, Blower motor relay, Fan control relay), Second row seat heaters, Second row seat heater
relay
31 15A Headlight leveling control unit, Wiper/washer control circuit (in the relay control module), Rear MICU (Rear fuse/
r e l ~ box) Windshield wiper motor Windshield/rear window washer motor
32 15A Accessory power socket relay, AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver), Audio unit, Climate control unit, Ignition key
switch Center information display unit Interface dial MICU Navigation unit XM receiver
(cont'd)
22-63
BACK
Power Distribution
o
22-64
UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
I
D
o
CJCJo
D
ODDDD
DODD
nnnnnnnnnnn
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
uuuuuuuuuuu
BACK
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder 1
Fuse Amps Wire Color Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
Number
STS 7.5A VEL IQnition switch (Sn
LTBLU PCM(STS)
./ AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
/ FUSE HOLDER 1
[---[ ST-------"S ] )
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder 2
Fuse Amps Wire Color
Number
STRLD 7.5A PNK
BRN
Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
PCM (STRLD)
Starter cut relay 1 Starter cut relay 2
,/
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
FUSE HOLDER 2
[
. . ~
[srmoJ r
r:'I
l!!:..I
(cont'd)
22-65
BACK
Power Distribution
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps
Number
1 7.5A
2 20A
3 20A
4 7.5A
5 10A
6 20A
7 15A
8 7.5A
9 30A
10 30A
11 40A
2'2-66
Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Optional (for trailer lighting connector)
Cargo area accessorY Dower socket relav. Cargo area accessory power socket
Power tailgate control unit
RearMICU
Cargo area lights Rear MICU Tailgate inside switch (With power tailgate)
SH-AWD control unit
Rear window defoQQer
Power tailaate control unit
REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX
~ o ~ . . . . /
nnnnnnnn GJ
12345 6 7 8
uuuuuuuu
D D D ~
( )
( )
0
CJ CJ
BACK
Ground Distribution
r--:'I
.I.!::..I
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or Circuit Grounded
G1 Battery
G2 Enaine mount
G3 Transmission housina
G101 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A. B, and C, CKP sensor AlB, CMP sensor, EGR valve, Ignition coils, PCM (PG, LG),
Rocker arm.oil pressure switch Transmission range switch
G201 Hood switch, Right daytime running light, Right fog light, Right front parking light, Right front side marker light, Right front
turn signal light . Rjght headlight (hiah b e m ~ Riaht HID unit Washer fluid level switch
G202 Fan control relay, Front blower motor relay, Headlight washer motor, Power steering pressure (PSP) switch, Relay control
module Windshield wiDer motor
G301 Left daytime running light, Left fog light, Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal light, Left
headliaht (hiah beam) Left HID unit Radiator fan motor
G302 Active damper control unit Brake fluid level switch ELD unit
G303 VSA modulator-control unit (2 wires)
G401 Active damper control unit Headlight leveling control unit Relay control module TPMS control unit
G501 Dash lights brightness controller, Gauge control module (2 wires), Headlight washer switch, Memory erase signal (MES)
connector Moonroof.control unit/motor Power mirror switch VSA OFF switch
G502 MICU (BRN wire)
G503 AC inverter unit, AfT gear position indicator panel light, Data link connector (DLC) (2 wires), Left second row seat heater switch,
Park-pin switch, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit, Rear blower motor relay, Rear power transistor, Rear accessory
power socket Right second row seat heater switch Second row seat heater relay
G504 Audio amplifier Audio unit
G505 SRS unit (2 wires)
G506 Center information display/Navigation display unit, Climate control unit, Front passenger's door lock knob switch,
HandsFreeLink control unit, Interface dial, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit, Passenger's MPCS unit, Rear climate
control panel, Rear controller and screen, Right power mirror, Steering angle sensor, Steering wheel switches, Yaw rate-
lateral /Ionaitudinal acceleration sensor
G507 Driver's seat heater switch, Front accessory power socket, Front passenger's seat heater switch, Front power transistor, Glove
box light Passenger's MPCS unit Right power mirror (2 wires)
G601 Accessory power socket relay, Automatic inside dimming mirror, Combination switch control unit and combination light
switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Driver's MPCS unit (2 wires), Driver's door power tailgate switch, Driver's vanity mirror
light, Driving position memory switch, Front passenger's vanity mirror light, Fuel fill door opener switch, Ignition key switch,
Left rear door lock knob switch, Left power mirror (3 wires), MICU (PG), MICU (SG), Multiplex control inspection connector,
Roof console Turn sidnal/hazard relay
G602 Driver's lumbar support switch (2 wires), Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Left second row seat heater, Power seat control unit
(4 wires) Right second row seat heater
G603 Rear fuse/relay box SH-AWD relay (via rear fuse/relay box) SH-AWD control unit (3 wires)
G604 Cargo area accessory power socket, Fuel fill door opener solenoid, Fuel pump control module, Rear differential, Rear fuse/
relav box (Rear MICU)
G605 Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Front passenger's power seat switch (2 wires),
Naviaation unit ODS unit
G606 AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) (2 wires), AcuraLink inspection connector 5P connector, Right rear door lock knob switch,
Subwoofer XM receiver (2 wires)
G701 High mount brake light, Left back-up light, Left brake light, Left taillights, Left license plate light, Left rear side marker light, Left
rear turn signal light, Power tailgate control unit (2 wires), Power tailgate drive unit, Rear window defogger, Right back-up
liaht Riaht license plate liaht Tailaate release actuator
G702 Electrical compass unit (Without navigation), Power tailgate control unit, Keyless buzzer, Right brake light, Right taillights,
Right rear side marker light, Right rear turn signal light, Tailgate latch switch, Tailgate outer handle switch (Without power
tailaate)
22-67
BACK
Fuse/Relay Box
DTe Troubleshooting
DTe 81051: Relay Control Module Internal
(CPU) Error
DTe 81052: Relay Control Module Internal
(EEPROM) Error
1. Clear the OTCs with the HOS.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
YES-Faulty relay control module, replace the
under-hood fuse/relay box .
time .
22-68
DTe 81055: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication with MICU (MICU Message)
Communication with MICU (ALARM
Message)
Communication with MICU (DOORSW
Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple OTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
Is DTC 81055,81056, or 81057 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose or poor connection between
the relay control module and the MICU .
5. Check for OTCs with the .HOS.
Are DTCs81055, 81056, 81057, 81157, 81159, 8
1180,81255,81955,82155,82156, and 82161 all
indicated?
YES-Do the MICU inputtest (seepage 22-132\ .
NO-Do the relay control module input test
(see page 22-136) .
BACK
DTC 81060: Relay Control Module Lost
(VPS/NE Message)
(AfT Message)
Is orc 81060 and/or 81061 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the relay control module and the gauge control
module .
Are orcs 81011,81032,81060,81061,81205,8
1206,81207,81906,81956,82157, and 82160 all
indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
(see page 22-136) .

1.:..1
Control Unit (HLSW Message)
Control Unit (WIPSW Message)
Is orc 81062 and/or 81063 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the relay control module and the combination
switch control unit .
Are orcs 81007,81062,81063,81155,81156,8
1957,81958, and 82969 all indicated?
YES-Do the combination switch control unit input
test (see page 22-300) .
(see page 22-136) .
22-69
BACK
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
OTC 81065: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication with Driver's MPCS Unit
(DRLOCKSW Message)
Is DTCs 81065 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose or poor connections between
the relay control module and the driver's MPCS
unit .
Are DTCs 81013,81015,81065,81182, and 8
1905 all indicated?
YES-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test
(see page 22-137) .
(see page 22-136) .
22-70
BACK
Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio
and navigation system (if equipped).
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3
minutes.
4. Remove the cover of the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and carefully remove the relays by prying under
the base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the
relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
5. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the
bracket.
6. Remove the relay block part (A) from the under-
hood fuse/relay box.
7. Remove the relay control module part (8) from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, then disconnect the
connectors from the relay control module.
Installation
r--:'I
L:::..I
1. Install the relay control module and relays, then
connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
2. Install the cover to the bottom of the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
3. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
4. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
connect the negative cable to the battery.
5. Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft
codes, and set the clock (if equipped).
6. Confirm that all systems work properly.
22-71
BACK
U.nder-:dash Fuse/Relay Box
SRS component locations (see page 24-18). and
periormingrepairs or servicing.
Removal
,. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio
minutes.
4. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76).
5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
6. Remove the mounting bolts, and pull the fuse/relay
box away from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-
8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the
base of the relay.
start.
22-72
Installation
NOTE: The MICU which is part ofthe under-dash fuse/
relay box is a component of the immobilizer system.
Because of this construction, the MICU must be
registered when the under-dash fuse/relay box is
replaced, or the vehicle will not start.
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-
dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Connect the positive cable to battery, then connect
the negative cable to the battery.
4. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is replaced, go to
step 5. Ifthe original under-dash fuse/relay box is
installed, go to step 10.
5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
7. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL, then enter the
IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
8. Select the REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES, then
select the suitable menu from the HDS indications.
9. After registration, confirm that the vehicle will start.
codes, and setthe clock.
BACK
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 81955: Rear MICU Lost Communication
with MICU (MICU Message)
4. Check for DTCs with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 5 .
the rear fuse/relay box and the MICU .
Are DTCs 81055,81056,81057,81157,81159,8

indicated?
YES-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132) .
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139).

r--:'I
I..:!::..I
with Gauge Control Module (AfT Message)
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22,112).
YES-Go to step 5 .
the rear MICU and the gauge control module .
Are DTCs 81011,81061, and 81906 also
indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139) .

22 .. 73
BACK
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
with Combination Switch Control Unit (HLSW
Message)
with Combination Switch Control Unit
(WIPSW Message)
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
Is DTC 81957 and/or 81958 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5 ..
the rear MICU and the combination switch control
unit .
Are DTCs81007, 81062, 81063, 81155, 81156, 8
1957,81958, and/or 82969 all indicated?
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139) .

22-74
with Relay Control Module (RM Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the rear MICU and the relay control module .
Are DTCs 81005,81058,81959,82162, and/or 8
2970 all indicated?
(see page 22-136) .
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139).

BACK
SRS component locations (see page 24-18). and
performing repairs or servicing.
Removal
minutes.
4. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page
20-92).
5. Disconnect the connectors from the rear fuse/relay
box (A).
6. Remove the mounting nuts and the rear fuse/relay
box.
7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the
base of the relay.
start.
Installation
r--:'I

1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
rear fuse/relay box, then install the rear fuse/relay
box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
connectthe negative cable to the battery.
codes, and set the clock.
22-75
BACK
Battery
Battery Test
AWARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing seriQUs injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully, and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use an ED-18 Battery Tester, and follow the
manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is
between 70 "F (21 "C) and 100 "F (38 "C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
If the case is damaged, replace the battery .
If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the test indicator window.
If the test indicator window indicates the battery
is charged, go to step 4.
If the test indicator window indicates a low
charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the
surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps
for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
If voltage is above 9.6 V, the battery is OK .
If voltage is below 9.6 V, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the test
indicator window shows the battery is charged,
plus an additional 30 minutes. Ifthe battery charge
is very low, it may be necessary to bypass the
charger's polarity protection circuitry.
is charged within three hours, repeat steps 4
through 6. If the battery is still below 9.6 V,
replace the battery .
is not charged within three hours, replace the
battery .
22-76
BACK
Relays
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the
test listed for it.
Relay Test
ACC cut relay Normally-
AlC compressor clutch relay open type
AlC condenser fan relay
Accessory power socket relay
Brake light relay
Cargo area accessory power
socket relay
Front blower motor relay
Front seat heater relay
Fog light relay
IG2 cut relay
Interior light relay
Headlight low beam relay
Headlight washer relay
PGM-FI main relay 2
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear blower motor relay
Rear window defogger relay
SH-AWD relay
Starter cut relay 1, 2
Fan control relay Five-terminal
Second row seat heater relay type
Normally-open type
Check for continuity between the terminals.
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
There should be continuity between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No. 4 terminal, and battery negative
terminal is connected to the NO.3 terminal.
There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals when power is disconnected.
4 2 4 2
as
3 1 3 1
8 8
3
(cont'd)
22-77
BACK
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No.5 terminal, and battery negative
terminal is connected to the No.3 terminal.
No.4 terminals when power is disconnected.
423
e
22-78
PGM-FI main relay 1, Ignition coil relay, A/F
sensor Relay, ETCS relay
disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box
connectors C (2P), E (14P), and H (9P).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (2P)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P)
7
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (9P)
n n
2. Connect battery power to the C2 terminal.
PGM-FI main relay 1:
Connect the E5 terminal to body ground. There
should be battery voltage between the H1
Disconnect the E5 terminal from the body ground.
There should be no voltage between the H1
terminal and the body ground.
Ignition coil relay:
Connect the E5 terminal to body ground. There
should be battery voltage between the H6
A/F sensor relay:
Connect the E5 and E13 terminals to body ground.
There should be battery voltage between the H9
ETCS relay:
Connect the E5 and E14 terminals to body ground.
There should be battery voltage between the H7
BACK
Ignition Switch
Test
SRS components are located in the area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and
audio and navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-129).
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (8).
B
RED PNK

Terminal
RED WHT PNK ORN VEL
Position
'"
(ACC) (BAT) (lG1) (102) (ST)
o (LOCK)
I (ACC)
" "
- -
II (ON)
R-f-o
III (START)

6. If the continuity does not agree with the table,
replace the ignition switch (see page 22-79).
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the audio and
navigation system anti-theft codes, and set the
clock.
Replacement
r--:'I
I!:..I
SRS components are located in the area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and
audio and navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
20-129).
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (8).
5. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the audio and
navigation system anti-theft codes, and set the
clock.
22-79
BACK
'J\IIultiplex Integrated Control System
22-80
MICU
(Bui" into the under-
dash fuse/relay box)
InputTest, page 22-132
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-254
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-254
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
Test/Replacement,
page 22-240
REARMICU
(Built into the rear fuse/relay box)
Input Test, page 22-139
REAR CEILING LIGHTS
Test/Replacement,
page 22-241
BACK
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems
r--:'I
t=!..I
NOTE: Check the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of
communication errors first.
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs (see page 22-112).
2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-114) or D (see page 22c1 15).
Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test (see page 22-112).
2. Check for DTCs.
3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
-1 Battery voltage DTCs
-2 Internal error DTCs
-a Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81008 and 81011.are
retrieved, troubleshoot 81008 first). Refer to loss of communication cross reference chart (see page 2 2 - ~ 3 .
-4 Signal error DTCs .
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use 8-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure (see step
10 on page 22-116).
(cont'd)
22-81
------
BACK
How to display DTCs on the gauge control module
1. Setthe multiplex in Test Mode 1 (see page 22-116).
2. While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various 8-CAN units, will be
shown one by one on the multi-information display on the gauge control module when the communication
between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset
button.
I
I
3. T
DTC SERVICE
DlC detected (the lower four digits are
---------1..... a decimal number representing the DlC.)
------
I1Tc81150 PA50
123456
DTC SERVICE
-----------------.. NoDlCsdetected
------
DTC NO
123456
DTC SERVICE
---------1..... ALL DlCs have been displayed
------
DTC End
123456
f he unit that has stored the code can be identified ~ the number shown on the multi-in ormation d l ~ y
Unit Code (Control Unit I.D. Number)
MICU 10
Relay control module 11
Rear MICU 12
Power tailaate control unit 31
Driver's MPCS unit 35
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
Combination switch control unit 70
HANDSFREELINK control unit 94
Power seat control unit 95
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) 97
How to clear the DTC
While in DTC indication status, press and hold down the select/reset button for more than 10 seconds.
22-82
(MID)
BACK
r--:'I
i.=!..I
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart
When an engine control unit (ECU) is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of
communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
BUS OFF and Inte nal Erro Codes r r
DTCtype Related Unit
MICU RearMICU Relay Driver's Combination Gauge Climate Immobilizer- Power Power Seat Hands AcuraUnk
Control MPCSUnit Switch Control Control Unit Keyless Tailgate Control Unit FreeLink Control Unit
Module Control Unit Module Control unit .Control Unit Control Unit lXM
Receiver)
8USOFF 81000 81950 81050 82150 81250 81150 81200 81900 81350 81800 81750 82200
ECU(CPU) 81001 81051 82209
Error
ECU (EEPROM) 81002 81052 82152 81252 81152 81202 81352 81802 81792
Error
Transmitting Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC
Control Unit MICU Rear Relay Driver's Gauge Climate mmobilizer Power Power Hands AcuraLink Navigation
MICU Control MPCS ion Control Control Keyless Tailgate Seat FreeLink Control Unit
Module Unit Switch Unit Unit Control Unit Control Control Control UnitlXM
Control Unit Unit Unit Receiver)
Unit
MICU ALARM 81056
MICU 81955 81055 82155 81255 81157 81355 81806
DOORSW 81057 82161 81159 81811
MIRRORSW 82156 81810
AUTOLT 81180
RearMICU RJC 81012
Relay Control RM 81005 81959 82162 81158 82970
Module
Driver'S MPCS DRLOCKSW 81015 81065 81182 81905 81356
Unit ASLOCKSW 81013 81358
MENSW 81812
Combination HLSW 81007 81957 81062 81155
Switch Control WIPSW 81958 81063 81156 82969
Unit
Gauge Control VSP/NE 81011 81060 82160 81205 81357 81805 81408
Module AT 81956 81061 81906 81359 81808
ENGTEMP 81206
ILLUMI 82157 81207
SRS 81032
VEHINFO 81786
Power Tailgate PTG 81162
Control Unit
PCM ENG 81168
AT 81169
VSA Modulator- VSA 81170
Control Unit
TPMS Control TPMS 81173
Unit
SRSControl SRS 81187
Active Damper ACTIVE 81188
Control Unit DAMPER
SYSTEM
Navlllation Unit 82981
AcuraLink 82208 82207
Control Unit
HandsFreeLink
Control Unit
Audio Unit 82991
22-83
----------------- --
BACK
NOTE: Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting index, then troubleshoot the DTC(s)
in this order:
8attery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81005 and 81016 are retrieved,
troubleshoot 81005 first).
Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC Description DTCType Pajle
81000 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (see page 22-122)
81001 MICU internal error (CPU error) Internal error (see page 22-124)
81002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-124)
81005 MICU lost communication with relay control Loss of communication (see page 22-124)
module (RM message)
81007 MICU lost communication with combination switch Loss of communication (see page 22-125)
control unit (HLSW message)
81011 MICU lost communication with gauge control Loss of communication (see page 22-125)
module (VSP/NE message)
81012 MICU lost communication with the rear fuse/relay Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
box (RJC message)
81013 MICU lost communication with driver's MPCS unit Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
(ASLOCKSW m e s s a ~ e
81015 MICU lost communication with driver's MPCS unit Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
(DRLOCKSW message)
81032 MICU lost communication with the SRS unit (CDS Signal error (see page 22-127)
message)
81575 Automatic lighting sensor circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-198)
22-84
BACK
RIC e ay ontro 1M d I o ue
DTC Description
81050 Communication bus line error (8US-OFF)
81051 Relay control module internal (CPU) error
81052 Relay control module internal (EEPROM) error
81055 Relay control module lost communication with
MICU (MICU message)
MICU (ALARM message)
MICU (DOORSW message)
gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
gauge control module (AfT message)
combination switch control unit (HLSW message)
combination switch control unit (WIPSW message)
driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
81075 Headlight switch back-upcircuit malfunction
81076 Windshield wiper switch back-up circuit
malfunction
81077 Windshield wiper (As) auto switch circuit
malfunction
81078 Daytime running lights system error (Canada)
81079 Daytime running lights system error (USA)
81080 Power supply circuit (lG1 line) input error for relay
control module and MICU
DTCType
Loss of communication
Internal error
Internal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Loss of communication,
Signal error
r--:'I
L!::.J
Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 22-68)
(see page 22-68)
(see page 22-68)
(see page 22-69)
(see page 22-68)
(see page 22-69)
(see page 22-69)
(see page 22-69)
(see page 22-69)
(see page 22-70)
(see page 22-193)
(see page 22-296)
(seepage 22-297)
(see page 22-194)
(see page 22-194)
(see page 22-127)
(cont'd)
22-85
BACK
G auge C ontro 1M odule
DTC Description DTCType Page
81150 Communication bos line error Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
81152 Gauge control module internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-322)
81155 Gauge control module lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 22-322)
combination switch control unit (HLSW message)
combination switch control unit (WIPSW message)
MICU (MICU message)
relay control module (RM message)
81159 Gauge control module lost communication with Loss of .communication (see page 22-323)
Power tail9.-ate control unit(PTG message)
PCM (ENG messages)
PCM(A/T messages)
VSA modulator-control unit (VSA message)
TPMS control unit (TPMS message)
81175 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit Signal error (see page 22-328)
open
81176 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit Signal error (see page 22-329)
short
81177 Abnormal battery voltage 8attery voltage (see page 22-330)
81178 F-CAN communication line error Loss of communication (see page 22-325)
MICU (AUTOLT message)
driver'S MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
SRS unit (SRS message)
active damper system control unit (active damper
system message)
22-86
BACK
DTC Description
81200 Communication bus line error
81202 Climate control unit internal error
81205 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge
control module (VSP/NE massage)
control (ECT message)
control module (lLLUMI message)
81213 An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor
circuit
81214 A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor
circuit
81215 An open or short in the recirculation control motor
circuit
81223 A problem in the rear blower motor circuit
81225 An open in the in-car temperature circuit
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit
81227 An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
81228 A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit
81231 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
81232 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door,
motor or motor circuit
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix control motor
circuit
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix control motor
circuit
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage,
door, motor or motor circuit
81239 An open or short in the mode control motor circuit
81240 A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, motor,
or motor circuit
81241 A problem in the blower motor circuit
DTCtype
Internal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
SiRnal error
Signal error
SiRnal error
Signal error
SiRnal error
Signal error
SiRnal error
Signal error
SiRnal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
r--:'I

Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 21-32)
(see page 21-32)
(see page 21-32)
(see page 21-32)
(see page 21-33)
(see page 21-34)
(see page 21-36)
(see page 21-38)
(see page 21-41)
(see page 21-43)
(see page 21-44)
(see page 21-45)
(see page 21-46)
(see page 21-47)
(see page 21-48)
(see page 21-50)
(see page 21-51)
(see page 21-52)
(see page 21-55)
(see page 21-56)
(see page 21-57)
(see page 21-60)
(see page 21-62)
(see page 21-64)
(see page 21-65)
(cont'd)
22-87
BACK
DTC Description DTCtype Page
81244 An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-69)
81245 An short in the rear air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-70)
81246 A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, Signal error (see page 21-73)
motor, or motor circuit
82965 Climate control unit lost communication with rear Loss of communication (see page 21-74)
climate control panel
82967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error (see paJle 21-76)
82968 A short in the humidi!Ysensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-77)
82969 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge Loss of communication (see page 21-80)
control module (WIPSW message)
82970 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge Loss of communication (see page 21-81)
control module (RM message)
82979 An ORen in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Signal error (see Pl!ge 21-81)
82980 A short in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-83)
82981 Climate control unit lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 21-86)
navigation unit
82983 A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, Signal error (see page 21-88)
motor, or motor circuit
82991 Climate control unit lost communication with audio Loss of communication (see page 21-89)
unit
22-88 BACK
Combination Switch Control Unit
DTC Description
81250 Communication bus line error
81252 Combination switch control unit internal (EEPROM)
error
81255 Combination switch control unit lost
communication with MICU
81275 Combination light switch OFF position circuit
malfunction
81276 Combination light switch parking (SMALL) position
circuit malfunction
81277 Headlight switch AUTO position circuit malfunction
81278 . Headlight switch ON position circuit malfunction
81279 Headlight switch DIMMER position circuit
malfunction
81280 Turn signal switch circuit malfunction
81281 Windshield wiper switch MIST position circuit
malfunction
81282 Windshield wiper switch INT position circuit
malfunction
81283 Windshield wiper switch LOW position circuit
malfunction
81284 Windshield wiper switch HIGH position circuit
malfunction
DTCType
Internal error
Signal error
,
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
r:-:'I
l!!:.I
Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 22-195)
(see page 22-196)
(see page 22-196)
(see page 22-196)
(see page 22-196)
(see page 22-196)
(see page 22-197)
(see page 22-197)
(see page 22-299)
(see page 22-299)
(see page 22-299)
(see page 22-299)
(cont'd)
22-89
BACK
P ower T "I au, ate C ontro IU " mt
81350 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (seeJ)ag_e 22-129)
81352 Power tailgate control unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-496)
81355 Power tailgate control unit lost communication Loss of communication (see page 22-496)
with MICU (MICU messaQe)
with driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
with gaUQe control module (VSP/NE messaQe)
with driver's MPCS unit (ASLOCKSW message)
with gauge control module (AfT message)
81375 Driver's door power tailgate switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-498)
malfunction
81376 Power tailgate outside handle switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-499)
malfunction
81377 Inside tailgate lid switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see paQe 22-500)
81378 Power tailgate right pinch sensor circuit Signal error (see page 22-501)
malfunction
81379 Power tailgate left pinch sensor circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-502)
81380 TailQate closer unit open switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-503)
81381 Tailgate closer unit close switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-505)
81382 Tailgate closer unit full latch switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-507)
malfunction
81383 Tailgate closer unit ratchet switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-509)
malfunction
81384 Tailgate closer unit half latch switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-511)
malfunction
81386 Power tailg_ate sensor pulse A circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-513)
81387 Power tailgate sensor pulse 8 circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-514)
81388 Power tailgate motor circuit malfunction Signal error (see paQe 22-515)
81389 Power tailgate motor clutch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-518)
81390 Power tailgate closer function error Signal error ( s e e J a ~ e 22-519)
22-9.0
BACK
HandsFreeLink Control Unit
DTC Description
B1750 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF)
B1775 Microphone input/output short to power/open
B1776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open
B1779 HFL switch or HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk!
HFL back buttons) circuit open/short
B1780 HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk!HFL back
buttons) circuit short
B1785 Incorrect configuration (VEHINFO Frame)
B1786 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication
with gauge control module (VEHINFO Frame)
B1792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error
bT K I C IU . mmo Ilzer- eyless ontro nit
DTC
81905 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost
communication with driver's MPCS unit
(DRLOCKSW message)
81906 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost
communication with gauge control module (Aff
message)
RearMICU
DTC Description
81955 Rear MICU lost communication with MICU (MICU
messag_e)
81956 Rear MICU lost communication with gauge control
module (Aff message)
81957 Rear MICU lost communication with combination
switch control unit (HLSW message)
81958 Rear MICU lost communication with combination
switch control unit (WIPSW message)
81959 Rear MICU lost communication with relay control
module (RM message)
DTCType
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Internal error
DTCtype
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
DTCTYl!e
r--:'I

Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 23-262)
(see page 23-263)
(see page 23-265)
(see page 23-266)
(see page 23-267)
(see page 23-268)
(see page 23-270)
Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 22-401)
(see page 22-402)
Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 22-73)
(see page 22-73)
(see page 22-74)
(see page 22-74)
(see page 22-74)
(cont'd)
22-91
BACK
Power Seat Control Unit
81800 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
81802 Power seat control unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-424)
81805 Power seat control unit lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 22-424)
gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
MICU (MICU message)
.. gauge control module (AfT message)
MICU (MIRRORSW message)
driver's MPCS unit (MEMSW message)
81825 Power seat slide motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-426)
81826 Power seat front up-down motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-430)
81827 Power seat rear up-down motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-434)
81828 Power seat recline motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-438)
81829 AfT P signal and VSS signal mismatch Signal error (see page 22-442)
81835 Tilt/telescopic switch signal input error Signal error (see page 22-443)
81836 Power seat position sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 22-445)
81837 Driving position memory recall timeout Signal error (see page 22-447)
81840 Tilt motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-448)
81841 Telescopic motor pulse error . Signal error (see page 22-451)
81842 Power tilt/telescopic position sensor power supply Signal error (see page 22-455)
circuit (SVCC line) short
81843 Power seat control unit lost communication with Signal error (see page 22-457)
power tilt/telescopic steering control unit (UART
line)
81844 Power seat slide switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-459)
81845 Power seat recline switch circuit malfunction Signal error (seepage 22-460)
81846 Power seat front up-down switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-461)
malfunction
81847 Power seat rear up-down switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-462)
22-92
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit
DTC Description
B2150 Communication bus line error
B2152 Driver's MPCS unit internal (EEPROM) error
B2155 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with MICU
(MICU message)
(MIRRORSW message)
B2157 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with gauge
control module (lLLUMI message)
B2160 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with gauge
control module (VSP/NE message)
(DOORSW message)
B2162 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with Relay
control module (RM message)
B2175 Driver's window motor pulse A error
B2176 Driver's window motorpulse B error
B2177 Front passenger's window motor pulse A error
B2178 window motor pulse B error
B2179 Driver's door key cylinder switch LOCK/UNLOCK
signal error
B2180 Driver's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal
error
B2181 Driver's door lock knob switch LOCK/UNLOCK
signal error
B2182 Left power mirror horizontal sensor signal error
B2183 Left power mirror vertical sensor signal error
B2184 Right power mirror horizontal sensor signal error
B2185 mirror vertical sensor signal error
B2186 Front passenger's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK
signal error
B2187 Communication line (UART line) communication
error (Driver's MPCS unit from Driver's MPCS unit)
B2188 Communication line (UART line) circuit open
B2189 Driver's window position detect circuit error
B2190 Front passenger's window position detect circuit
error
B2191 Passenger's MPCS unit internal (EEPROM) error
AcuraLink Control Unit
DTC Description
B2200 Communication bus line error
B2202 AcuraLink control unit EEPROM error
B2204 B-CAN communication line error
B2205 F-CAN communication line error
B2207 Navigation unit control unit lost communication
with AcuraLink control unit
B2208 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication
with AcuraLink control unit
B2209 AcuraLink control unit internal error
B2240 XM antenna error
DTCtype
Internal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Signal error
Internal error
DTCType
Signal error

Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 22-130)
(see page 22-130)
(see page 22-130)
(see page 22-131)
(see page 22-131)
(see page 22-130)
(see page 22-131)
(see page 22-264)
(see page 22-266)
(see page 22-268)
(see page 22-270)
(see page 22-152)
(see page 22-153)
(see page 22-154)
(see page 22-463)
(see page 22-465)
(see page 22-467)
(see page 22-469)
(see page 22-155)
(see page 22-272)
(see page 22-274)
(see page 22-275)
(see page 22-276)
(see page 22-277)
Page
(see page 22-129)
(see page 23-241)
(see page 23-241)
(see page 23-242)
(see page 23-243)
(see page 23-246)
(see page 23-249)
(see page 23-250)
22-93
BACK
System Description
MICU Control Functions
The MICU b u i . l ~ into the 'under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the 8-CAN system components. The MICU controls many
systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other
8-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS.
The MICU also controls the function ofthese circuits:
Refer to each system circuit diagram for details.
Entry lights control (individual map lights and ceiling light)
Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control and back-up lights)
Interlock system
Keyless entry
Power door locks
Security alarm
Turn signal/hazard flasher
Tailgate actuator '
Automatic lighting
Impact sensing door lock release
Door mirror switch
S-NET (IMOCD)
22-94
BACK
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)

I.!!!!!..I
The body controller area network (8-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). 8-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information from 8-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to 8-CAN.
GAUGE CONTROl. MODUlE
I

[ [
: - : TRANSCEIVER
, ,
, , .
, ,
, . ,
ACURAUNX - - - -. ,

: :
---+ ----7
SRSUNIT
VSAMODUlATOR-iXlNlROL UNIT
DATAUNKCONNECTORIDLC)
S1EEIIING iWiLf SENSOR
YAWRAlE-lAmlALlLONGITUDINAL
ACCELfRA11ONSENSOR
AClIVEDAMPEllCONTROLUNIT
SH-AWD CDNIROI. UNIT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX
I
........... RELAY
CONTROL MODULf
. t ...........
...........

COMBINA11ONswm:tt
CONTROLUNIT
........... UiMOB_KEYLESS
: comOL UNIT
t
...........

l ........... I I
11' -..
r ........... l I
..................... .................... .1 ........... I 1
The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed .
Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network.
(cont'd)
22-95
BACK
Multip'lex Integrated Control System
Gateway Function
The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module
translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
CANH
i---+-'ocp-+--o-__. B-CAN
F-CAN
CANL
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function
The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip
display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-315). There are three types of messagesas follows:
Error Code List
Error code
Error 1
Error 2
Error 12
22,96
Type of communication line(s) error
F-CAN communication
8-CAN communication
F-CAN and B ~ C N communication
Example: Error 1
,- ,
,-,-,- ,-,,- ,
- -
BACK
Self-diagnostic Function
~
I.!::..I
By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via
a diagnostic BUS called the K-LiNE. The K-LiNE is different from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs.
The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HDS.
When performing a function test with the HDS; the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LiNE to the MICU. The
MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function itself.
F-CAN 1500 kbpsl
PCM
VSA MODULATOR-
CONlllOL UNIT
STEERING
ANGlE SENSOR
SH-AWD
CON11l0LUNIT
SRSUNIT
GAUGE CON11l0L MODULE
CANH CAN!. B-CAN
B-CAN 13333kbpsl
K-UNE
e-- ---
---,
r = = = ~ W
NAVIGAnON UNIT
TPMS
CON11l0LUNIT
YAWRATE-LATERALJ
LONGITUDINAl
ACCELERATION SENSOR
AcnvE DAMPER
CON11l0LUNIT
~
ACURAllNK
CON11l0LUNIT
IXM RECEIVERI
- -- ~ AUDIO UNIT
(cont'd)
22-97
BACK
Wake-up and Sleep Function
The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the
system to operate.
As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode
immediately wakes up and begins to function.
When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about
40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or ifthe ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode.
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-119).
Fail-safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
operate normally.
Hardware Fail-safe Control
Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-safe Control
When any of the data from the 8-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of
the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
22-98
BACK
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function
r:-:'I

The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not
store DTCs.
In ut o ut
Entry Lights Control System (Ceiling Lights, Ignition Key Light)
The MICU controls the ceiling light and ignition key light ON/OFF based upon the input signals from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Interior lights
Ignition key switch Ignition key light
Driver's door switch
left rear door switch
Riaht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (lOCK)
Keyless lOCK/UNLOCK signal
Tailaate latch switch
Back-up Lights
The MICU controls the back-up lights based upon the ignition switch (lG1) and the transmission range switch (R) signals.
o ut
Back-up lights
R)
The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher lights based upon the input signals from the turn signal switch and the hazard warning switch.
Input Outout
MICU Hazard warning switch Turn signal lights (left)
Turn sianalliahts (riaht)
B-CAN Turn signal switch (left)
Turn sianal switch (riaht)
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1 and the SRS signals.
Input Outout
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (lOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailaate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Front impact sensor
Side impact sensor (first)
Side impact sensor (second)
SRS unit rollover signal
Automatic Lighting System
The MICU controls the automatic lighting system based upon the IG1, IG2, automatic lighting sensor signals, and B-CAN signals.
Input Outout
MICU Ignition switch (lG1) Headlight back-up signal
Ignition switch (lG2)
Automatic lighting sensor signal
B-CAN Headlight switch (AUTO) AUTOl T messages
Vehicle speed pulse signal
Enaine soeed sianal
(confd)
22-99
BACK
Headlight Washer Operation
The MICU controls the headlight washer system based upon the headlight switch and washer switch signals.
In ut Out ut
Windshield washer switch
es
Key Interlock
The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the ignition switch (ACC), the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch
signals.
Input Output
MICU Ignition switch (ACC) Key interlock solenoid
Transmission range switch (P)
Park-Din switch
Power Door Locks (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Ignition key switch Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Left rear door switch
Rioht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Power Door Locks (Unlock only the driver's door first)
Input Outout
Driver's door switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Rioht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch(LOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailoate latch switch
Door Lock Response Operation
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
B-CAN Door lock signal Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
22-100
BACK
Keyless Entry System (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Driver's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
RiQht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Relock message
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
Keyless Entry System (Unlock only the driver's door first)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Driver's door switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
RiQht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Relock message
Front passenger's door lock switch(LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
TailQate latch switch
Answer Back Response Operation
The MICU controls the turn signal lights based upon the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Turn signal lights (left)
Turn signal lights (rightl
B-CAN Answer back signal (buzzer)
Answer back signal (hazard)
Engine soeed sianal
r--:'I

(cont'd)
22-101
BACK
Auto Power Door Locks (LOCK operation)
Input Output
Ignition key switch
Transmission range switch (P position)
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch(UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Engine speed signal
Auto Power Door Locks (UNLOCK operation)
InDut Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Transmission range switch (P position) Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch(UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based upon the tailgate outer handle switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input OutDut
MICU Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Door lock signal
Tailgate outer handle switch
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock only the driver's door first)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based upon the tailgate outer handle switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Tailgate outer handle switch
22-102
BACK
Security Alarm System
The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
InDut OutDut
MICU IG1 power supply Inclining sensor
Ignition key switch
Audio switch
Driver'S door switch
B-CAN Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) MICU (SET 1) message
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) MICU (SET 2) message
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) ALARM (ACTION) message
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) ALARM (HORN) message
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal ALARM (H/L LOW) message
Door lock signal ALARM (SMALL L T) message
Relay control module (Hood switch) ALARM (CYCLE) message
Tailgate latch switch ANSWER BACK (SMALL L T) message
ANSWER BACK (BUZZER) message
Prevention of Key Locked Inside Vehicle
InDut OutDut
MICU Ignition key switch Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Driver's door switch Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
r--:'I
t=!.I
(cont'd)
22-103
BACK
Multip,lex Integrated Control System
HOS Inputs and Commands
Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS can not update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List.
This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not
supported.
Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
Input:
System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Gauge Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC Switch) ON/OFF
Cruise Control Set Switch ON/OFF
Cruise Control Resume Switch ON/OFF
Washer Fluid Level Switch ON/OFF
VSA/TCS Off Switch ON/OFF
Parking Brake Switch
,
ON/OFF
Illumination Plus Switch ON/OFF
Illumination Minus Switch ON/OFF
Select/Reset Switch ON/OFF
INFO Previous Switch ON/OFF
INFO Next Switch ON/OFF
ACC Distance Switch ON/OFF
CMBS Cancel Switch ON/OFF
Fuel Sendina Unit Inout 1 dea
Fuel Sendina Unit Inout 2 V
VSA/TCS Active Indicator ON/OFF
VSA/TCS Indicator (Warning) ON/OFF
ABS Indicator ON/OFF
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) ON/OFF
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator ON/OFF
MIL Indicator ON/OFF
Washer Fluid Level Indicator (Canada) ON/OFF
DRL Indicator ON/OFF
CMBS Indicator ON/OFF
ACC Indicator ON/OFF
Low Oil Pressure Indicator" ON/OFF
Chargina Svstem Indicator ON/OFF
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator ON/OFF
Maintenance Minder Indicator ON/OFF
High Beam Indicator ON/OFF
Parkina Liaht ON Indicator ON/OFF
Low Fuel Warnina Indicator ON/OFF
Security Indicator ON/OFF
Foa Liaht Indicator ON/OFF
Master Warnina Indicator ON/OFF
Seatbelt Indicator ON/OFF
Low Tire Pressure Indicator ON/OFF
TPMS Indicator ON/OFF
Power Tailgate Indicator ON/OFF
SH-AWD Indicator ON/OFF
Door Open Indicator ON/OFF
Differential Oil Temp Indicator ON/OFF
Maintenance Minder Chanae Oil Indicator ON/OFF
Fuel Fill CaD Caution ON/OFF
A/T Indicator ON/OFF
SRS Indicator ON/OFF
Side Airbaa Cutoff Indicator ON/OFF
CMBS Radar Become Dirtv ON/OFF
Outside Temperarure Indicator ON/OFF
Radiator Fan Indicator ON/OFF
Starter Relay Indicator ON/OFF
NT Gear Position Switch (R) ON/OFF
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) ON/OFF
22-'04
BACK
Input:
SvstemMenu Data List
Lighting Headlight Switch (OFF)
Headlight Switch (PARKING)
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT)
Headlight Switch (AUTO)
Headlight Switch (High Beam)
Headlight Switch (PASSING)
Turn Sianal Switch (LEFT)
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHn
Fog Light Switch
Driver's Door Switch
Ignition Kev Cvlinder Light Command
Interior Light Command
Left Turn Signal Command
Right Turn Signal Command
Autolight Small Command
Autolight Headlight Command
Autolight Warning Command
Autolight Headliaht Command
Headlight Switch IBACK-UP)
Ignition Switch IIG1)
Headlight Command
Headlight High Beam Command
Parkina Light Command
Fog Light Command
DRLCommand
Interior Small Light Command
Inner Taillight Command
Rear Foa Liaht Command
Doors Driver's Door Lock Switch Illumination Command
Driver's Door Courtesv Light Command
Front Passenger's Door Courtesv Light Command
Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch Illumination
Command
Front Passenger's Door Switch
Driver'S Rear Door Switch
Passenger's Rear Door Switch
Door LOCK Command
Door UNLOCK Command
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command
Tailaate Switch
Tailaate Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Fuel Fill Door Command
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Front Passenger's Door Switch (LOCK)
Front Passenaer's Door Switch (UNLOCK)
Front Passenaer's Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Left Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
Right Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
V
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON.
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Data List Indication

(cont'd)
22-105
BACK
Multiplex Integrated C,ontrol System
Input:
8vstemMenu ['ata List Data List Indication
Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front PassenQer's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
lanition Switch (lG1) OFF/ON
Tailaate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Kevless Buzzer Command OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob ~ w i t c h (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Door SVI/itch (LOCK) OF.F/ON
Front Passenger's DoorSwitch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Left Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Power windows Power Window Main Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Driver's AUTO Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Ddver's UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Driver's DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Front Passenaer's UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Front Passenger's DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Loft Rear UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Loft Rear DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Right Rear UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Right Rear DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Passenger's AUTO Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Window Switch (UP) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Window Switch (DOWN) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Window Switch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Driver's Window Motor A-ohase Pulse Sianal NONE/DETECT
Driver's Window MotorB-ohase Pulse Sianal NONE/DETECT
Front Passenger's Window Motor A-ohase Pulse SiQnal NONE/DETECT
Front Passenger's Window Motor B-ohase Pulse Signal NONE/DETECT
Driver's Window Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Front Passenger's Window Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
22-106
BACK
Input:
SvstemMenu Data List
Power Seat/Power Power Mirror UP Switch
Mirror Power Mirror MOVE LEFT Switch
Power Mirror DOWN Switch
Power Mirror MOVE RIGHT Switch
Power Mirror LEFT Switch
Power Mirror RIGHT Switch
Slide Switch Backward
Slide Switch Forward
Recline Switch Backward
Recline Switch Forward
Front Up-Down Switch Down
Front Up-Down Switch Up
Rear Up-Down Switch Down
Rear Up-Down Switch Up
Ignition Switch for Power Seat Control
AfT Gear Position Switch (P)
Seat MEMO Switch
Driver 1 Position Switch
Driver 2 Position Switch
Headrest Switch
Column Tilt UP Switch
Column Tilt DOWN Switch
Column Telescopic Pull Switch
Column TelescoDic Push Switch
Column Auto Switch
lenition Switch (ETS)
Slide Sensor
Front UP-DOWN Sensor
Recline Sensor
Rear UP-DOWN Sensor
Column Tilt Sensor
Column Telescopic Sensor
Slide Motor Command
Recline Motor Command
Front Heieht Motor Command
Rear Heieht Motor Command
Power Seat Buzzer Command
Headrest Motor
Column Tilt Motor
Column Telescopic Motor
DPMS MEM Switch
DPMS POS1 Switch
DPMS POS2 Switch
Left Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor
Left Power Mirror Vertical Sensor
Rieht Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor
Rieht Power Mirror Vertical Sensor
Left Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command
Left Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command
Right Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command
Right Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command
Memory Switch Position 1 Indicator Command
Memory Switch Position 2 Indicator Command
Memory Switch Illumination Command
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/FWD/RWD
OFF/FWD/RWD
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
NORMAL/ABNORMAL
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
OFF/UP/DOWN
OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
r--:'I
l!:..I
(cont'd)
22-107
BACK
Input:
System Menu
"
" Ilata List Data List Indication
Wipers Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield WiDer Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Rear WiDer Switch OFF/ON
Windshild Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Intermittent WiDer Dwell Timer 1-255
Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-UP) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Window Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Window Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Rear Window WiDer Command OFF/ON
Security lenition Kev Cvlinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Radio Switch OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command, OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFELON
lenition Switch (IG1) OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
Taileate Switch OFF/ON
Taileate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Security Hazard Sie'nal Command OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
22-108
BACK
Input:.
SvstemMenu Data Ust
Power Tailgate Power Tailgate Switch
Power Tailaate Outer Handle Switch
Power Tailaate Inner Switch
AfT Shift Position Switch (P)
Latch Gear Position Switch (Neutral)
Latch Gear Position Switch (Release)
Full Latch Switch
Ratchet Switch
Half Latch Switch
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse A
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse B
Right Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor
Left Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor
Power Tailgate Motor Command
Power Tailaate Clutch Command
Closer Motor Command
Power Tailgate Buzzer
Data Ust Indication
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
NONE/DETECT
OFF/OPEN/CLOSE
OFF/ON
OFF/RELEASE/CLOSE
OFF/ON

I.!::.I
(cont'd)
22-109
BACK
Output:
SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication Operation Time
Gauge Speedometer displays value inputted Speedometer
Tachometer displays value inputted Tachometer
Fuel aauae displavs value inputted Fuel Level Gauge
Temperature aauae displavs value inputted Engine Temperature a ~ e
Turns VSA activation indicator on/off VSAf[CS Activation Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns VSA indicator on/off VSAfTCS Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns ABS indicator on/off ABS Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns EBD indicator on/off EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Displav) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns cruise indicator on/off Cruise Activation Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns MIL on/off MIL Status Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns DRL indicator on/off Daytime Runnina Liaht indicator (Canada) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns low oil pressure indicator on/off Enaine Oil Pressure Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns charging system indicator on/off Charging System Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns cruise main indicator on/off Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns maintenance reauired indicator on/off Maintenance Required Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns hiah beam indicator on/off Hiah Beam Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns liaht-on indicator on/off Liaht On Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns low fuel indicator on/off Low Fuel Level Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns security indicator on/off Security Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Display inputted value Trip Meter
Turns AfT P position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (P) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT R position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (R) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT N position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (N) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT D position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (D) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT D3 position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (D3) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT 2 position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (2) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Controls gauge illumination brightness to Illumination Brightness Control
inputted value
Turns key-in beeper on/off Key Alarm Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Turns light-on beeper on/off Headlight Alarm Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Turns seat belt reminder beeper on/off Seat belt Reminder Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Lighting Turns ignition key cylinder light on/off lanition Key Cylinder Liaht Command Illuminates for 30 sec.
Turns interior light on/off Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 sec.
Turns left turn sianallights on/off Left Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
Turns riahtturn sianalliahts on/off RiahtTurn Sianal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
Turns headliaht on/off Headliaht Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns headliaht hiah beam on/off Headliaht Hiah Beam Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns parkina liahts on/off Parkina Liaht Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns front foa liahts on/off Front Foa Liaht Operates for 15 sec.
Turns daytime runnina liahts on/off Daytime Runnina Liaht Sianal (Canada) Operates for 15 sec.
Turns automatic headliahts on/off Automatic Liahtina Headliaht Operates for 15 sec.
Turns cargo area liahts on/off Carao Area Liaht Illuminates for 30 sec.
22-110
BACK
Output:
System Menu Data List
Power window Runs driver's window uo
Runs driver's window down
Runs front oassenger's window uo
Runs front oassenger's window down
Runs left rear window uo
Runs left rear window down
Runs right rear window up
Runs right rear window down
Turns Dower window reillY on/off
Wiper Turns wiDer low soeed on/off
Turns wiDer high soeed on/off
Turns windshield washer on/off
Turns rear window washer on/off
Turns rear window wiDer on/off
Security Turn horns on/off
Power Seat Turns power seat indicator on/off
Runs power seat motors
Power Sliding Operates left power sliding door
Door
Operates right power sliding door
Door Outouts LOCK signal 1 time to all doors
Outouts LOCK signal 1 time to all doors
OutPuts UNLOCK signal 1 time to driver's door
Runs left sliding door lock actuator
Power Tailgate Runs power tailgate motor
Operates power tailgate electromagnetic clutch
Runs power tailgate release actuator
AlC Turn rear window defogger relay on/off
Driver's Window Uo
Driver's Window Down
Front Passenger's Window Uo
Front Passenger's Window Down
Left RearWindow Uo
Left Rear Window Down
Right Rear Window Up
Right Rear Window Down
Power Window Relav
Windshield WiDer Motor Low Command
Windshield WiDer Motor High Command
Windshield Washer Command
Rear Window Washer Motor Command
Rear WiDer Motor
Horn Command
Memory Seat Indicator 1
Memory Seat Indicator 2
Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Forward
Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Backward
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full Uo
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full
Down
Power Seat: Rear UP-DOWN Motor-Full Uo
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full
Down
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Forward
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Backward
Power Seat: Memory Buzzer-5 seconds
Power Slide Door Motor: Ooen (2 sec.)
Power Slide Door Motor: Close (2 sec.)
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.)
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.)
Closer Motor
Buzzer
Power Slide Door Motor: Open (2 sec.)
Power Slide Door Motor: Close (2 sec.)
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.)
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.)
Closer Motor
Buzzer
Lock All Doors
Unlock All
Unlock Driver's Side Door
Left Sliding Door Lock
Left Sliding Door Unlock
Full Open Position
Full Close Position
Operates On For 1 sec.
Open
Close
Rear Defogger
r:-:'I

Operation Time
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
Drives for 3 sec.
ODe rates for 5 sec.
Ooerates for 5 sec.
Ooerates for 5 sec.
Ooerates for 5 sec.
ODe rates for 5 sec.
Operates horn for
1 sec.
Illuminates for 3 sec.
Illuminates for 3 sec.
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Drives for 5 sec.
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 1.3 sec.
--
--
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 2 sec.
Drives for 1.3 sec.
--
--
O;Ssec.
O.Ssec.
O.Ssec.
Lock signal 1 time
Unlock signal 1 time
--
--
Operates for 1 sec.
--
--
Operates a relay for
SO sec.
22-111
BACK
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshooting PCM
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors
first, then perform this diagnosis if the symptom is
related to the 8-CAN system.
Perform this diagnosis first if the symptom is related to
the 8-CAN system.
NOTE: Always turn the ignition switch withih 3 seconds
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures
in this section.
1. Check the symptom against this list of 8-CAN
related systems:
Exterior lights
Turn signals
Entry light control
Interior lights
Safety indicators
Rear window defogger
HandsFreeLink
Horns (security and panic)
Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lightscon and parking
brake)
Power windows
Power window/moonroof timer
Wiper/washer
Security
Keyless entry
Power door locks
Climate control
Key interlock
Dash light b(ightness
Driving position memory
Power tailgate
XM radio
Immobilizer
Is the symptom related to the 8-CAN system?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the
system with the symptom .
22-112
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
3. From the 80DY ELECTRICAL system select menu,
select UNIT INFORMATION, and then select
CONNECTED UNIT listed to see if it is
communicating with the HDS.
MICU
Combination switch control unit
Relay control module
Power seat control unit
HandsFreeLink control unit
Driver's MPCS unit
Rear MICU
Power tailgate control unit
Climate control unit
Immobilizer-keyless control unit
NOTE:
If the unit is communicating with the HDS,
DETECT will be displayed.
If the unit is notcommunicating, "Not Available"
will be displayed.
Are al/ control units communicating with the HOS?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-If any of the control unit are not
communicating, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode 8 (see page 22-113). If all units are not
communicating or only the MICU is communicating,
go to DTC 81000 troubleshooting (see page 22-122).

BACK
4. Select the system that has the problem from BODY
ELECTRICAL system select menu, then select DTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-If the problem is related to one of the
following items, goto B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode C (see page 22-114), if the system does
not stop or turn off. Go to Test Mode D (see page
22-115) ifthe system does not run orturn on.
Exterior lights
Turn signals
Entry light control
Interior lights
Horns (security and panic)
Power windows
Wiper/washer
Power door locks
If the problem is related to one of the following
items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual
system .
Safety indicators
Chimes (key-in, seat belt and lights-on)
Rear window defogger (climate control)
Security
Keyless entry
Climate control
Key interlock
Dash light brightness
Audio system
Navigation
Driving position memory
HandsFreeLink
Power tailgate
Immobilizer
5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type.
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs.
Internal error DTCs.
Loss of communication DTCs. Begin
troubleshooting with the lowest number first
(Example: if DTC B1008 and B1011 are retrieved,
begin by troubleshooting B1008). Refer to loss of
communication DTC cross reference chart (see
page 22-83).
Signal error DTCs.

Diagnosis Test Mode B
Perform this diagnosis if any ofthe control units are not
communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-112).
1. Using the HDS,. select the system thathas the
symptom from BODY ELECTRICAL.
2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of
communicationDTCs. Refer to loss of
communication DTC cross reference chart.
Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the MICU .
3. Perform the input test for the unit not
communicating with the HDS.
NOTE: Troubleshoot Rear MICU loss of
communication.DTCs before troubleshooting
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) the power
tailgate control unit, and the power seat control
unit DTC.
Unit not communicating ..
MICU (see page 22-132)
Gauge control module (see page 22-334)
Relay control module (see page 22-136)
Driver's MPCS unit (see page 22-278)
Combination switch control unit (see page
22-300)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-411 )
Rear MICU (see page 22-139)
Power seat control unit (see page 22-477)
Power tailgate control unit (seepage 22-522)
Climate control unit troubleshooting (see page
21-93)
22-113
BACK
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled
by the 8-CAN system does not stop or turn off.
NOTE:
If the component does not turn ON, go to 8-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-115).
See the 8-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units
that monitor the input and controls the output devices
(see page 22-94).
Always turn the ignition switch within 3 seconds
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting
procedures in this section.
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu
from the HDS.
Are any OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-112) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn OFF the switch that controls the
malfunctioning component.
3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and
check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the HOS indicate the switch is OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In DATA LIST, check the output signal ofthe
Is the output signal OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
device that will not turn OFF .
22-114
5. Check the relay if applicable, then check for a short
in the wire between the relay and the component,
the relay and control unit, or the component and
control unit.
Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
component that will not turn OFF .
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire
harness .
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire
between the switch and the control unit that
monitors the switch.
Is the switch and wire harness OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
switch .
NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire
harness .
BACK

l=:.I
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 0
Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled
by the B-CAN system does not run or come on.
NOTE:
If the component does not turn off or stop, go to B-
CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page
22-114).
See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units
that monitor the input and controls the output devices
(see page 22-94).
Always turn the ignition switch within 3 seconds
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting
procedures in this section.
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck .
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu
from the HDS.
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-112) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the
check output signal for the malfunctioning
component.
Is there an output signal?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open
or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component.
Are the relay and circuit OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit..
6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning
component.
Does the output device pass the function test?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the component .
7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
output device and body ground on the wire that the
control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE menu,
and do the forced operation test of the
Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or
o V to 12 V)?
YES-Replace the component .
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component .
make sure the switch signal input for the
malfunctioning system indicates a change when
operated.
Does the switch input indicated ON when the
switch is ON?
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
check for an open or a short in the wire between
the switch and the control unit that monitors it.
Are the switch and the wire harness OK?
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
switch .
NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire
harness .
22-115
BACK
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
MPCS (MCIC) service connector 07WAZ-001010A
Test Mode 1
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors
first, then perform this diagnosis ifthe HDS is not
available.
1. Check the No.7 (10 A) and No. 21 (7.5 A) fuses in
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse .
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and move the
ceiling light switch to the middle (door) position.
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the
MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
B
A
(07WAZ-001 01 OA)
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling lights. When
the ceiling lights flash quickly once, and then go off,
the system is in Test Mode 1.
22-116
6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge
control module LCD display while still in Test Mode
1. Push the odometer select/reset button to display
the next code. After you get to the last code, the
display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the
display will read NO.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to Step 7.
NO-Go to Step 10.
7. Record all DTCs and sort them.
8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the
lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and
B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first).
Refer to less of communication DTC cross
reference chart (see page 22-83).
Signal error DTCs
9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the select/
reset button for about 10 seconds. You will hear a
beep to confirm the codes have been cleared.
Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for
codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector from the
under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5-10 seconds,
then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system
enters Mode 2, the ceiling light will flash two times
quickly and then go off.
NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for
too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test
Mode 1.
11. The following tables list the circuits that can be
checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
OK, the ceiling lights will blink once. If the circuit is
faulty, there will be no indication.
BACK
MICU
Item
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Audio security ground (when disconnected)
Mirror select switch (LEFT, CENTER, RIGHT)
Mirror switch (LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN)
* The front passenger's and door lock knob
switches must be in the locked position when
beginning the test.
Item
Windshield wiper switch (AUTO STOP/PARK)
Hood switch (OPEN)
Item
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Combination light switch (ON; each position)
Dimmer switch (ON)
Passing switch (ON)
Windshield wiper switch (ON)
Intermittent wiper dwell timer
Windshield washer switch (ON)
Fog light switch (ON)
Rear window wiper switch (ON)
Rear window washer switch (ON)
REARMICU
Item
Tailgate latch switch (ON)
Tailgate outer handle switch (Without power
tailgate) (ON)

I.!::..I
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
Item
Power window master switch
(Driver's window UP)
(Driver's window DOWN)
(Driver's window AUTO UP)
(Driver's window AUTO DOWN)
(Front passenger's window UP)
(Front passenger's window DOWN)
(Front passenger's window AUTO UP)
(Front passenger's window AUTO DOWN)
(Left rear window UP)
(Left rear window DOWN)
(Right rear window UP)
(Right rear window DOWN)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK)
Driving position memory switches
(1,2, memo)
Left rear power window switch (UP)
Left rear power window switch (DOWN)
Fuel fill door opener switch (ON)
* A second key IS necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs.
Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two
times to each position (lock and lock, unlock
and unlock) to ensure the door lock knob
switch is in the appropriate position.
* * The left rear door lock knob switches must be
in the locked position when beginning the test.
(cont'd)
22-117
BACK
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS) (cont'd)
Item
Parking brake switch (ON; parking brake
applied)
Cruise control main SET/RESUME/CANCEL
switch (ON; switchpressed)
Transmission range switch (P, R, N, D)
Washer fluid level switch (fluid removed)
(Canada)
Brake fluid level switch (fluid removed)
Illumination control switches (+, -)
MID switches (Select/Reset, <INFO, INFO
Item
Power seat slide switch (FORWARD,
BACKWARD)
Power seat front up-down switch (UP, DOWN)
Power seat rear up-down switch (UP, DOWN)
Power seat recline switch (FORWARD,
RECLINE)
Power tilt/telescopic steering switch (UP,
DOWN, PUSH, PULL)
Item
Front passenger's door lock knob
switch' (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch'
(UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch
(LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch
(UNLOCK)
Front passenger's power window switch
(UP, DOWN, AUTO)
Right rear power window switch
(UP, DOWN)
* The front passenger's and right rear door lock
knob switches must be in the locked position
when beginning the test.
Do the map lights indicate proper switch
operation?
YES-Go to function and input test for the system
related to the failure .
NO-Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty
switch .
22-118
BACK
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:
r--:'I

Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the key, then open and close the driver's door. If the MICU receives no
signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate closed)
Hazard warning switch (OFF)
2. Confirm the sleep mode:
Measure the voltage on the 8-CAN communication line (PNK wires); there should be battery voltage in the sleep
mode. Check the parasitic draw at the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should change from
about 200 mA to less than 35 mA.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:
When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit-
receiver, and PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each other through the communication lines.
When any switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it wakes Lip its related control unit which,
in turn, wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most
related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. In the table below, the control unit is followed by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up.
Door switches (door open)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
Right rear door lock knob switch
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate open)
Hood switch (hood open)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
Ignition kElyswitch (key inserted)
22-119
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX
BAmRY
No.l(BAT) 1120 AI
Q
A6
No2117HI
+
1
I-WHT PNK -u
IGI
No.4 140 AI
lGi HOTin ON 1111 and
No.7 110 AI START (111) B4
WHT -u
I 012
06
011
................ . .... ................................................ , ........................... . .....

: X27 )(35

X34 :N2B
N22

LTGRN

+ .
IMMOBWZER- 4
KEYLESS B-CAN LTGRN t
CONTROL UNIT
:

4 .:

YEL LTGRN CLIMATE
I
VEL LTGAN
CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN LTGRN .,
I
. . ..

I
AUD)OUNIT B-CAN LTGRN
I

I
1

J

:
I :
VEL
....
YEL LTGRN
HANDSfREEUNK
19

. B-CAN LTGRN

CONTROL UNIT

:A5 06 07 El 8 7 '4 AI A7

I I
..
B-CAN
VBU IGI B-CAN VBU IGI B-CAN TRANSCEWER
RELAV COMBINATIONSWITCH
I
CONTROL MODULE CONTROL UNIT
SG VBU IGI
POWERSUPPULV CIRCUIT/
CONTROUER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
04 UNDER-HOOD 3 WIPER/WASHER
GND
FUSE/RELAV BOX SWITCH
I
r F-CAN l

HH
B K B K
GAUGE A2 : A12 :A6
CONTROL

MODULE

B K WHT RED

V V
PCM
SRSUNIT
VSA MOOULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR IDLC)
VAWRATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCElARATION SENSOR
ACTIVE DAMPEJI
CONTROL UNIT
SH-AWDCONTROLUNIT
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT
JXMRECEIVER)
WMS CONTROL UNIT
:l..
G401 G601 G501
22-120
BACK
161
VBU
MICU
M3 Ml
.............. ................... . ......... B-CAN
I I
K5 J9 :.14 G3 Fl
:G1
I r

.

MULTIPlEX

CONTROL
INSPECTKlN
CQ/jNECTOR
WIlT VEL LTGIIN WIlT VEL LTGRN
REAR
RJSE/RELAY
Al A25 AZ8 BOX B4 823 82
VBU 161 B-CAN
...................
C32
.
VBU IG1 B-CAN
DRMR'S MPCS UNIT REARMICU
A5 B14 B18 B29 B14 C16
BLK IlK
BLK BLK LTGRN LTGRN LTGRN
.
. .
:A40 :C1 :85
B--CAN B-CAN B--CAN
ACURAUNK
POWER POWER CONTROL
SEAT TAILGATE UNIT
CONTROL CONTROL IXM .
UNIT UNIT RECEIVBII
G601 6601 G604
SG2
E!l
BLK
6601
r--:'I

: CAN One
UNDER-DASH RJSE/RElAY BOX
K-UNE j!!-
POI
PG2 SGI
119 Q4 P1
LT
K-UNE
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
BLK BLK BRN
6601 6601 G502
22-121
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81000: Communication Bus Line Error
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the communication bus
line is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections, or worn/shorted wires. If the
connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-76) and the charging system .
Are DTCs 81000,81005,81007,81011,81012,8
1013,81015 and 81032 al/ indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box .
7. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each
control unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC,
then recheck for DTCs after each unit is
disconnected.
Control unit Connector
Relay control module Under-hqod fuse/relay
box connector E (14P)
Gauge control Connector A (12P)
module
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector
control unit
Combination switch 8P connector
control unit
Driver's MPCS unit Connector A (40P)
Climate control unit 40P connector .
Audio unit Connector C (24P)
HandsFreeLink 28P connector
control unit
Power seat control Connector A (40P)
unit
Power tailgate Connector C (14P)
control unit
AcuraLink control Connector 8 (16P)
unit (XM receiver)
Rear MICU Rear fuse/relay box
connector 8 (34P)
* : Disconnect thiS one last
22-122
Is DTC 81000 indicated with each individual unit
disconnected?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the control unit that was
disconnected when 81000 did not reset (lfthe unit
is the rear MICU, go to Step 8.).
8. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connectors 8
(34P) and C (42P).
9. Check for continuity between each of the rear fuse/
relay box connector terminals listed in the table
and body ground.
Connected control Rear fuse/relay box
unit connector terminal
Power seat control 814
unit
Powertailgate C16
control unit
AcuraLink control C32
unit (XM receiver)
YES-Repair the short to ground in the wire
'between the rear fuse/relay box and the affected
control unit .
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
10. Measure the voltage between each of the rear fuse/
relay box connector terminals listed in the table
and body ground.
Connected control Rear fuse/relay box
unit connector terminal
Power seat control 814
unit
Power tailgate C16
control unit
AcuraLink control C32
unit (XM receiver)
Is there less than 1 V?
YES-Replace the rear fuse/relay box .
NO-Repair short to power in the wire between the
rear fuse/ relay box and the affected control unit .
11. Disconnect each control unit connectors in the
table.
Control unit Connector
Relay control module Under-hood fuse/relay
box connector E (1 4P)
Gauge control Connector A (12P)
module
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector
control unit
Combination switch 8P connector
control unit
Driver's MPCS unit Connector A (40P)
Climate control unit 40P connector
Audio unit Connector C (24P)
HandsFreeLink 28P connector
control unit
r--:'I
t.=:..I
12. Check for continuity between the under-dash fuse/
relay box connector N (45P) No. 22 terminal and
body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (45P)
=
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire .
NO-Go to step 13.
14. Measure the voltage between the under-dash fuse/
relay box connector N (45P) No. 22 terminal and
body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (45P)
YES-Repair short to power in the wire .
NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box .
22-123
BACK
DTC 81001: MICU Internal (CPU) Error
DTC 81002: MICU Internal (EEPROM) Error
NOTE: I{you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
Is OTC 81001 and/or 81002 indicated?
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box .
time .
22-124
DTC 81005: MICU Lost Communication with
Relay Control Module (RM Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the MICU and the relay control module .
Are OTCs 81158,81959,82162, and 82970 a/so
indicated with 81005?
YES-Do the relay control module inputtest
(see page 22-136) .
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22"132) .
BACK
Combination Switch Control Unit (HLSW.
Message)
/s orc 81007 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the MICU and the combination switch control unit.

Are orcs 81062,81155, and 81957 a/so
indicated with orc 8100l?
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22-132) .
Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be .'
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System,
Diagnosis Test ModeA (see page 22-112).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO--Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
the MICU and the gauge control module . "
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS .
Are orcs 81060,81205,81357,81408,81805,
and/or 82160 a/so indicated with orc 81011?
(see page 22-334) .
NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132) .
22-125
BACK
OTC ,81012: MICU Lost Communication with
RearMICU (RJC:Message)
NOTE: It you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in ,8-CAN System
1. Clear the DTCs with,the HDS.
2; Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5.
, NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
the MICU and the rear MICU .
Is DTC 81955 indicated with DTC 81012?
YES-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139).

NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132) .
22-126
OTC 81013: MICU Lost Communication with
Driver's MPCS Unit (ASLOCKSW Message)
OTC 81015: MICU Lost Communication with
Driver's MPCS Unit (DRLOCKSW Message)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. "
YES-Go to step 5.
the MICU and the driver's MPCS unit .
Are DTCs 81065,81082,81356,81358, and/or 8
1905 also indicated with 81013 and/or 81015?
YES-Do the driver's MPCS ,unit input test
(see page 22-278) .
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22-132) .
BACK
the SRS Unit (CDS Message),
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). -
/s DTC 81032 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose or poor connections .
/s DTC 81011 a/so indicated with DTC 81032?
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the
MICU and the gauge control module. If the circuit is
bad, repair the open .
(see page 22-334)
r--:'I

DTC 81080: Ignition Key Switch Circuit
Malfunction
4. Check for DTCswith the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box
connector D (10P).
8. Measure the voltage between the under-hood fuse!
relay box connector D (10P) No.7 terminal and
body ground.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (10P)
2
5 6
YES-Substitute a known-good under-hood fuse/
relay box and recheck .
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
22-127
BACK
10. Check for continuity between the under-hood fuse/
relay box connector D (10P) No.7 terminal and
body ground.
2 3 4
5 6 9
=
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire. After
repairing, replace the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box .
NO-Go to step 11.
connector D (17P).
12. Connectthe under-dash fuse/relay box connector D
(17P) No.6 terminal and body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (17P)
8
22-128
JUMPER
WIRE
=
13. Check for continuity between the under-hood fuse/
relay box connector D (10P)No. 7 terminal and
body ground.
2
5 6
=
YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/
relay box and recheck .
NO-Repair an open in the wire .
BACK
Are OTCs 81050,81150,81200,81250,81350,8

indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
MICU and B-CAN connected units in the table .
r:-:'I

5. Check for DTCs with theHDS.
Under-dash fusel 8-CAN connected unit
relay box connector
connector
Connector D (17P) Under-hood fuse/relay
No. 11 terminal box connector E (14P)
No.1 terminal
Connector N (45P) Gauge control module
No. 22 terminal Connector A (12P) No.5
terminal
Connector N (45P) Combination switch
No. 28 terminal control unit 8P connector
No.4 terminal
Connector J (21 P) Driver's MPCS unit
No.4 terminal connector A (40P) No. 28
terminal
Connector X (39P) Immobilizer-keyless
No. 27 terminal control unit 7P connector
No.4 terminal
Connector X (39P) Climate control unit 40P
No. 27 terminal connector No.4 terminal
Connector X (39P) Audio unit connector C
No. 27 terminal (24P) No. 23 terminal
Connector X (39P) HandsFreeLink control
No. 27 terminal unit 28P connector No. 19
terminal
Connector G (6P) Power seat control unit
No.1 terminal connector A (40P) No. 40
terminal
Connector G (6P) Power tailgate control
No.1 terminal unit connector C (14P)
No.7 terminal
Connector G (6P) AcuraLink control unit
No.1 terminal (XM receiver) connector
B (16P) No.5 terminal
Connector G (6P) Rear MICU (rear fuse/
No.1 terminal relay box connector B
(34P)
Is OTC 81000 also indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 .
MICU and B-CAN connected units in the table .
22-129
BACK
DTC 82152: Driver's MPCS Unit Internal
(EEPROM) Error
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (").
YES-Replace the driver's MPCS unit .
time .
22-130
DTC 82155: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost
Communication with MICU(MIRRORSW
Message)
Message)
Are OTCs 82155,82156, or 82161 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the driver's MPCS unit and the MICU .
Are OTCs 81055,81056,81157,81159,81255,8
1955,82156, and/or 82161also indicated?
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box (see page 22-72) .
NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page
22-137) .
BACK
(lLLUMI Message)
(VSP/NE Message)
/s DTC 82157 and/or 82160 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the driver's MPCS unit and the gauge control
module .
Are DTCs 81011,81060,81061,81205,81206,8
1207,81359,81906,81956,82157, and/or 82160
a/so indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
22-278) .
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
(RM Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the driver's MPCS unit and the relay control
module .
Are DTCs 81005,81158, 81959, 82162, and/or 8
2970 a/so indicated?
(see page 22-136) .
22-278) .
22-131
BACK
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors 0, E, F, G, H, J, N, P, 0, W, and X.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
VEL
CONNECTOR D (17P)
LTGRN
CONNECTOR E (16P)
BLK
CONNECTOR F (14P)
CONNECTOR G (6P)
LTGRN
,
~
I
WHT
CONNECTOR H (14P)
ORN
[ffi]997I<RW]
\
BLK
22-132
CONNECTOR J (21P)*
LTGRN
~ : 0 0
CONNECTOR P (30P)
CONNECTOR Q (14P)
CONNECTOR W (5P)
BACK
CONNECTOR N (45P)*
r---1 r-=:1
Vl2VVI
0ZI
I 7 I 8 I 9 1/111 1/1
1131141 115V117118V1
LTG RN

[ill
IE] l
28
vl30VVI
g
V
n

1391401411421
I!:
RN

1/1441451
LTG
....,
*Connector view shown rotated 180"from actual position in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all makin"g good contact.
CONNECTOR X (39P)* '
0
2
1
3
1 IT]
150
7
121 1
9
1
10
1
11
1
1
12
VI
r--:'I

If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
5. With the connector still disconnect, make these input tests at the connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
CavitY Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
D11 LTGRN Under all conditions (Under- Check for continuity between An open in the wire
hood fuse/relay box connector E the D1 1 terminal and the under-
(14P) disconnected) hood fuse/relay box connector E
(14P) No.1 terminal:
Check for continuity between A short to ground in the wire
the D1 1 terminal and body
ground:
G1 LTGRN Under all conditions (Rear fuse/ Check for continuity between An open in the wire
relay box connector B (34P) the G1 terminal and the rear
disconnected) fuse/relay box connector B (34P)
No.2 terminal:
the G1 terminal and body
ground:
J4 LTGRN Under all conditions (Driver's Check for continuity between An open in the wire
MPCS unit connector A (40P) the J4 terminal and the driver's
disconnected) MPCS unit connector A (40P) No.
28 terminal:
the J4 terminal and body
ground:
(cont'd)
22-133
BACK
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
P6 LTBLU Under all conditions (MICU Check for continuity between An open in the wire
connector P (30P) disconnected) the P6 terminal and the OLC
No.7 terminal:
the P6 terminal and body
ground:
N22 LTGRN Under all conditions (Gauge Check for continuity between An open in the wire
control module con,nector A (12 the N22 terminal and the gauge
P) discQnnected) control module connector A (12
P) No.5 terminal:
the N22 terminal and body
ground:
N28 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(Combination switch control the N28 terminal and the
unit 8P connector disconnected) combination switch control unit
8P connector No.4 terminal:
the N28terminal and body
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(Immobilizer-keyless control the X27 terminal and the
unit 7P connector disconnected) immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector No.4 terminal:
the X27 terminal and body
ground:
There should be no continuLty.
X27 GRY Under all conditions (Climate Check for continuity between An open in the wire
control unit 40P connector the X27 terminal and the climate
disconnected) control unit 40P connector No.4
terminal:
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions (Audio unit Check for continuity between An open in the wire
connector C) (24P) the X27 terminal and the audio
disconnected) unit connector C (24P) No. 23
terminal:
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(HandsFreeLink control unit 28P the X27 terminal and the
connector disconnected) HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector No. 19 terminal:
ground:
22-134
BACK
S. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connectors .
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-72).
E9 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (GS01)
H9 There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
Q4
P1 BRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502)
There should be less than 0.5 V. An ODen in the wire
F1 VEL Ignition switch ON (II), (Rear Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
fuse/relay box connector B (34P) There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
disconnected) Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
A short to ground in the wire between
the MICU and rear fuse/relay box
G3 WHT Under all conditions, (Rear fuse/ Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
relay box connector B (34P) There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
disconnected) Blown No.7 (10 AI fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
A short to ground in the wire between
the MICU and rear fuse/relav box
F14 ORN Under all conditions Short connection to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
The ignition key light should under-hood fuse box
come on. Blown No. S 17.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
Faulty ignition key light
An ODen in the wire
W4 lTGRN Under all conditions (Interior Short connection to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
lights switch in DOOR position) The interior lights should come under-hood fuse box
on. Blown No. S (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
Blown map lights or ceiling light bulb(s)
An ODen in the wire
22-135
BACK
:Multiplex Integrated Control System
Relay Control Module Input Test
2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-72).
3. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box connectors D (10P) andE (14P).
CONNECTOR D(10P)
CONNECTOR E (14P)
BLK LTGRN
[:1 ~ r c d :[iJ
I \
~ r
1
/
3
F=I
4 5 6
7
/
9 10 1,11 12 13 14
u L
WHT YEL
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
, If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors
If any'test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
'. If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result
E1 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the E1
conditions (Under- terminal and the under-dash fuse/
dash fuse/relaybox relay box connector D (17P) No. 11
connector D (17P) terminal:
disconnected There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the E 1
terminal and body ground:
6. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the relay control module.
D4 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground:
conditions There should be less than 0.5 V.
D6 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground:
conditions There should be battery voltage.
D7 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground:
(II) There should be battery voltage.
22-136
Possible cause if result is not obtained
An open in the wire
A short to ground in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An oeen in the wire
Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
under-hood fuse box
Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
An oeen in the wire
Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test
2. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8).
3. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit connectors A (40P) and B (14P).
r--:'I
L::::..I
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
7
14
I
VEL LTGRN BLK
Ifthe terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
Ifthe terminals look OK. go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
A28 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the A An open in the wire.
conditions (Under- 28 terminal and the under-dash fuse/
dash fuse/relay relay box connector J (21 P) No.4
box connector J terminal:
(21P) disconnected There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the A A short to ground in the wire
28 terminal and body ground:
6. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the driver's MPCS unit.
A5 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G401)
B14 conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
A7 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
dash fuse/relay box
An ODen in the wire
A25 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
(II) There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
22-138
BACK
Rear MICU Input Test
2. Remove the left rear trim (see page 20-92).
3. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connectors B (34P) and C (42P).
LTGRN
VEL
CONNECTOR B (34P)
WHT
~ ~ ~ I j
~ ~
BLK
CONNECTOR C (42P)
LTGRN
BLK
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. . ,
r:-:'I
1..::..1
(cont'd)
22-139
BACK
Rear MICU Input Test (cont'd)
Cavity Wire
B2 lTGRN
B14 lTGRN
C16" lTGRN
C32" lTGRN
1: With power tailgate
.2: With AcuraLink
Test condition
Under all
conditions (Under-
dash fuse/relay
box connector G
(6P)
Under all
conditions (Power
seat control unit
connector A (40P)
disconnected)
Under all
conditions (Power
tailgate control unit
connector C (14P)
disconnected)
Under all
conditions
(Acurc;lLink control
unit (XM receiver)
connector B (16P)
disconnected)
Test: Desired result
Check for continuity between the B2
terminal and the under-dash fuse/
relay box connector G (6P) No. 1
terminal:
Check for continuity between the B2
terminal and body ground:
Check for continuity between the B
14 terminal and the power seat
control unit connector A (40P) No. 40
terminal:
Check for continuity between the B
Check for continuity between the C
16 terminal and the power tailgate
control unit connector C (14P) No.7
terminal:
32 terminal and the (AcuraLink
control unit (XMreceiver) connector
B (16P) No.5 terminal: .
If any test indicates a problem,find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Ashort to ground in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
If all the input tests prove OK, the rear MICU must be faulty, replace the rear fuse/relay box (see page 22-75).
B18 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G603, G604)
B4 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
dash fuse/relay box
Faulty rear fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
B23 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
(II) There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
Faulty rear fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
22-140
BACK
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System
~
~
(Built into the under-
hood fuse/relay box)
Replacement,
page 22-71
HORNS
Test/Replacement,
page 22-180
HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-175
UNLOCK BUTTON
SECURITY INDICATOR
MICU
InputTest, page 22-132
LOCK BUTTON
POWER TAILGATE BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
(cant'd)
22-141
BACK
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
Input, page 22-278
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-172
Knob Switch Test, page 22-173
22-142
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-79
REARMICU
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
KEYLESS BUZZER
Test/Replacement,
page 22-175
BACK
TAILGATE OUTER HANDLE SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-176
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
r:-:'I

FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT
(Including FULL LATCH SWITCH)
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test,
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
page 22-526
TAILGATE RELEASE ACTUATOR
(Without power tailgate)
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH
Latch Switch Test, page 22-244
22-143
BACK
,.,
Door Locks/Security System
System Description
Security Alarm System
The security alarm system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. Forthe system to arm, the
ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed, and the MICU must receive signals that the doors, hood, and
tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be armed or disarmed at any time by locking or unlocking the driver's
door with the key or pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the transmitter, the alarm can also be armed by locking
(with the lock knob) then closing the driver's door.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK position), and the audio unit. In other words, all of the other switches are open, and have about 5.0 V in
sleep mode or 12 V in awake mode, including the key cylinder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
module begins to flash immediately after the doors, tailgate, and hood are closed and locked, and then, after 20
seconds, the flashing intervals of the security indicator change to indicate that the alarm is fully armed. If the security
indicator does not flash, the system is not arming. Ifthe LOCK button is pressed a second time within 5 seconds
(Keyless LOCK acknowledgement is turned ON) and the vehicle is completely closed and locked, a beep sounds and
parking lights flash one time to confirm the security alarm system is armed.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally (0 V), or there is a short in the circuit (0 V), the security
system will not arm. A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this
case, a significant change in outside air temperature, the vibration of a passing vehicle, or something bumping into
the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground signal from
that switch, the 5-12 V reference drops to 0 V, and the system sounds the alarm. If the audio unit is disconnected, the
input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 5:"-12 V, and the system sounds the alarm.
The system sounds the alarm when any of following occur while the security system is armed:
A door or the tailgate is forced open
A door is unlocked without using the key or the transmitter
The hood is opened
The audio unit (or navigation unit, rear controller and screen) is disconnected
The transmitter panic is operated
The ignition switch is turned ON (II)
When the system sounds the alarm, the horns sound and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be
stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any button on the transmitter.
22-144
BACK
Panic Mode

The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is pressed
and held for about 2 seconds, the alarm sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the remote or by turning the ignition switch
ON (II). The panic mode will notfunction ifthe ignition switch is ON (II). "
Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. Transmitters and 2 (Identified
on the back of each transmitter) are linked to the DPMS, the climate control settings, the custom memory settings (in
the MID), the audio, the navigation and the illumination settings. Depending on which transmitter unlocks the vehicle,
these settings are chosen.
Some functions of the security, keyless entry, and power door locks can be customized using the MID keyless memory
setting. They include:
AUTO DOOR LOCK: Door locking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting from Park or at a speed above
15 mph.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: Door unlocking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting to Park or turning the ignition
switch OFF.
WHENEVER UNLOCKING: Door unlocking can be set to unlock all doors or only the driver's door on the first push.
KEYLESS DOOR LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: The beep and the front parking lights can be turned on or off when
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the remote.
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER: Select the time (30, 60, or 90 sec.) that the doors relock if you unlock the doorswith the
remote, but do not open any of them.
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER: Select time (0, 15,30, or 60 sec.) to turn the headlights off after removing the key
from the ignition opening, then closing the driver's door.
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY: Automatic lighting sensor sensitivity can be adjusted five steps (MIN/LOW/MID/HIGH/
MAX).
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIMER: Select the dimming time (15, 30, or 60 sec.) of the interior lights after closing the
door with the key removed from the ignition.
(cont'd)
22-145
BACK
- METER SETUP:
Language-English/French/Espanol
Outside airtemperature-+5 +4 +3 +2 +10 -1 -2 -3 -4-5
Trip A an average Fuel Reset w/fill-ON/OFF
Adjust alarm volume-HIGH/MID/LOW
Elapsed time reset-manually only, IGN OFF, Trip A, Trip 8
Auto interior illumination-MAX MID LOW MIN OFF
- POSITION SETUP:
Memory position link ON/OFF
Auto tilt telescope steering wheel ON/OFF
NOTE: If either of these function is turned off, they will not function with a linked remote.
- LIGHTING SETUP:
Interior light dimming time (15, 30, 60 sec.)
Headlight auto OFF timer (0,15,30,60 sec.)
Auto light sensitivity MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
- DOOR WINDOW SETUP:
Auto door lock-Shift from park with vehicle speed ON or OFF-Driver's door/All doors
Auto door unlock-Shift to park with ignition ON or OFF-Driver's door/All doors
Key and remote unlock mode-Driver's door/All doors
Keyless lock acknowledgement-ON/OFF
Security relock timer (90, 60, 30, sec)
- WIPER SETUP:
Wiper action intermittent/with speed
The transmitters can be linked and unlinked to the keyless memory settings by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons at the same time for about 1 second. The LED on the transmitter blinks twice when unlinked, and once when
linked.
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the transmitter. When yo,-, press the LOCK
button, all the'doors lock (unless anyone of the doors is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition switch).
When you press the UNLOCK button first time, only the driver's door unlocks, if keyless memory setting "WHENEVER
UNLOCKING" is set to Driver's Door. The other doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button a second time. All
the doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button first time if keyless memory setting "WHENEVER UNLOCKING"
is set to All Doors.
NOTE: The doors will not lock with the transmitter if a door is not fully closed, or if the ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
Ifthe UNLOCK button is pressed, released, then pressed and held, the windows and the moonroof begin to open. The
windows and the moon roof stop if the button is released. The windows and moonroof cannot be closed with the
remote. See power windows for more information and troubleshooting.
When the interior lights switch is in the "DOOR" position, the individual map lights will come on when the UNLOCK
button is pressed. If a door is not opened, the lights will go off in about 30, 60, or 90 seconds (depending on the
keyless memory setting "SECURITY RELOCK TIMER"), and the doors will relock. If the doors are locked with the
transmitter within 30 seconds, the lights will go off immediately.
22-146
BACK
Manual Keyless Transmitter Programming/Deleting

I.!!!:...I
NOTE: The keyless transmitter attaches to the ignition key and is separate from the immobilizer transponder. It is not
necessary to use the HDS when replacing or deleting an existing keyless transmitter.
Adding a key (transponder) can only be done with the HDS. Ifthe key being added has a new remote transmitter, it
can be programmed with the HDS atthe end ofthe "ADD A KEY" function (see page 22-410).
If one or all keys (transpon(iers) are lost, the remote transmitters must be deleted manually. This will assure that all
of the old keyless transmitters have been cleared from the immobilizer/keyless control units memory.
When replacing the immobilizer keyless control unit, you must have all of the remote transmitters that need to be
programmed to the car.
The immobilizer keyless control unit can only store 5 keyless transmitter.
During programming, pushing the transmitters button more than once may push other remotes out of the memory.
In other words, pushing the same remotes button 5 times will delete all other remotes.
Adding a remote transmitter
Turn the ignition ON (II) and within 4 seconds push the lock or unlock button within 4 seconds and turn it OFF, turn it
back ON (II) within 4 seconds and back OFF (0). Repeat this 2 more times and the locks should cycle when the button is
pushed. Turn the ignition key OFF (0) and remove the key. Wait 10 seconds and verify that the all remotes function
properly.
Adding multiple remote transmitters
pushed. Push the lock or unlock button on each remote to be programmed within 4 seconds of each other. Turn the
ignition key OFF (0) and remove the key. Wait 10 seconds and verify that all remotes being programmed are
functioning properly.
Deleting remotes
pushed. Push the same button 5 more times. This will leave only the current remote programmed.
22-147
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOO FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH RISE/RELAY BOX
... ___ ________ t-____________________________________ _

BATTERY
No,1IBAlll120AI
+
22-148
IGI HOT In ON lDland
______ __ t-__ ____ ______ ______________________ __

NO.4 140 AI
-<:r'

1
iA21

ILL+ ILL-
UGHT
ILEDI
UN- lOCK
LOCK,' "
3 4
WH----"I
DRIVER'S
DOOR
LOCK
SWI1CH
RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE
jA24
UNlOCK LOCK
K5 J9 G3
WHT
9
REAR
RlSE/RELAY
BOX
WHT VEl
Al A25
VBU IGI
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK
AI A2 A21 A22 AS B14 M
DOOR DOOR
LOCK KNOB LOCKKNOB
GRN PUR
Q KEY
BlU LTBW
Q
GRN
:--c::[]
DRIVER'S
ODDRlOCK
1 6
:
8 9 ACTUATOR 1
UN- LOCK
UN-
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
DOORLOCK
LOCK
---- - - --- DOOR KEY
,
KNOB CYUNDER
SWITCH SWITCH
5 5
I I I I
G601 G601 G601 G601
..................... ,
.......... ,1,
012
:J4 : Jl

WHT
9
RfLAY
CONTROL
MODULE
LTGRN GAY
:

: AlB :AB
B-CAN UART
lEfT REAR
DOORLOCK
ACTUATOR
LEFTREAR
DOORLOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
BACK
: XI5 X35
GAY WHT
:A4 KJ.
UART VBU
UNLOCK
A26
DOOR
LOCK KNOB
Q
PUR
RlGHTREAR
DOOR LOCK
B ACTUATOR
UN-
LOCK RlGHTREAR
:. --- ----'-
DOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
10
I
G606

5
UN- LOCK
UlCIl FRONT
(
;'\ UGHT
'-' (lEDl
ni+ ni- UNLOCK LOCK
UNLOCK
All
DOOR
LOCK KNOB
Q
RED
fllOIiT
PASSENGER'S
OOORLOCK
B ACTUATOR
UN-
LOCK
fIIONT
---
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
10
PASSENGER'S
DOORLOCK
SWITCH
A7 BI4
B-CAN
VJ
: ...
B-CAN
SG2 PGI
E9 H9
r--:'I
I..!:..I
:CANline
:UARTline
UNDEII-DASH RJSEIRELAY BOX
+B VBU
DRLOCK
MICU
SGI
IGI (
PG2 IGKEYSW
PI 04 Pl3
PNK
I

, KEY SWITCH
(Closed:
2 Keylnsertedl
I I I I I I I I
G506 G507 GOO1 GOO1 G502 GOO1 G601
(cont'd)
22-149
BACK
UNDER-DASHRJSE/RBAY BOX
\
(
I
PIS
GRN

TRANSMISSION
, RANGE SWITCH
iCIosOd'
S In P posiuonl
BLK
1
Gl0l
22-150
E15
GRN
1 DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
{Closed:
Dooropenl
lB'TREARDOOR
LOCKACTUATOR

RIGHTREAR DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
..
FftONTPASSENGER'S
DOORLOCK ACTUATOR

DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
BRN BRN

-BRN GRY- GRY GRY
E2
I
H12
LTGAN
1 R!ONT
PASSENGfR'S
, DOOR SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
N1 K12
LOCK
Q8
GRN
1 lB'T
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Dooropen)
MICU
Q2
GAY
1 RIGHT
REAR
I DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
000,_)
K2
DRUNLOCK
P12
.. -
"-I
BLK
1
.. J
1W00nvliJBtlonsystam)
N9 EB
-
UNLOCK
","-I
lIED
BLK
1
.. J

entertainment system)
1","-1
RED
BLK
1
G504 J
1_ .. _ ..
1W00out navigtion systam)
(WJtboutrear
anterlafnment systam)
BACK
-"-"-'1
I!
IS
!
i
PNK i
B3
i
!
I
! C23
GAUGECONTROLMODULE
, SEQJRnY
INDlCAlOR
!LEDI
UNDER-DASH RJSE/RBAY BOX
MICIJ
I
No.1 (10AlFUSE
(UNDER-DASH
lYBDXI
WHT
184
VBU
C6
,
:N22
IMMOBILJZER-
KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
B-cAN
,
LTGRN
,
:X2T
, ,
.............................
,

B-CAN
REAR RJSE/RELAY BOX
REARMICIJ
r-"-"--,
C1
POWER
N .7110AlFUSE
(UNDER-DASH
yBOXI
WHT
OS
I B-CAN
,
,
,
: E1
,
,
:
LTGRN
,
,
,
,
,
: D11
,
......
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
: Gl
LTORN
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
'82
,
B-CAN
"-I
I
C37
'1 : WIth power tailgate
'2 : WIthOu1 pow .. tallga1e
: CANline

N 1111SAIFUSE
(MAIN UNDER-HOOD
RlSE
y
WHT
UNDER-HOOD
H3 RISE/RELAY BOX
RELAYCONTROL
MODULE

I
-
E4 D9 H4 HS
ORN GRN

HORN
SWlICH
LTGRN LTGRN
1 ,"r"-I r
'-"-, 1 TAILGATE
i
: CONTROL
ORN

2
HOOD
,
SWlICH H H
TAILGATE (Closed:
OUTER 1
Hood_I HORN HORN
HANDLE
2 .
(HighJ II.owI
SWITQt
(CIosocI:
Lover
UNIT
E .. L_TGRNt-:-
1
-==-=
T GRN
I i

TAILGATE
, LATCH
>:
1
Tailgate
openl
IBLX
:1
1-

URN 1
t.
TAILGATE 1
, OUTER
HANDLE '1'
3 SWITCH
(Cloaad:
Lava.
1 BLX puttadl 1
i1 !

BLX
1
G2il1
'2 '1 '2 '2 '1
22-151
BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
OTC 82179: Driver's Door Key Cylinder
Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then back ON (II).
3. Turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and
UNLOCK positions with the ignition key.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the driver's door key
cylinder switch system is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections .
5. With the driver's door key cylinder switch in neutral
position, select DOOR LOCK from the BODY
ELECTRICAL ~ y s t m select menu, and enter the
DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF Information ofthe Driver's Door
Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Key
Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 8.
7. Turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and
UNLOCK positions with the ignition key, and check
the ON/OFF informationofthe Driver's poor Key
Cylinder Switch (LOCK)' and Driver's Door Key
Are both Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch
(LOCK) and Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch
(UNLOCK) information indicators ON at the same
time with the door key cylinder switch in the
LOCK or UNLOCK position?
22-152
YES-Test the key cylinder switch (see page
22-174). If it is OK, repair the short between the
No.8 BLU and No.9 LT BLU wires.
NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit .
8. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
9. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door
Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Key
YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch;
replace the driver's door lock actuator assembly .
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit connector A
(40P).
driver's door' lock actuator 10P connector terminals
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR 10P CONNECTOR
Wire side of. female terminals
NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit..
BACK
DTe 82180: Driver's Door LOCK Switch LOCK
/UNLOCK Signal Error
1. Clear the orcs with the HDS.
2. Lock and unlock the driver's door with the driver's
door lock switch operation.
YES-Go to step 4.
the driver's MPCS unit and the driver's door lock
switch .
4. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral
position, select the DOOR LOCK from the BODY
ELECTRICAL system select menu, and enter the
DATA LIST.
5. Check the ON/OFF Information ofthe Driver's Door
Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Switch
(UNLOCK).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
6. Operate the driver's door lock switch in the LOCK
and UNLOCK positions, and check the ON/OFF
information ofthe Driver's Door Lock Switch
(LOCK) and Driver's Door LOCK Switch (UNLOCK).
Are both Driver's Door LOCK Switch (LOCK) and
Driver's Door LOCK Switch (UNLOCK)
information indicators ON at the same time when
the door lock switch is in the LOCK or UNLOCK
position?

I..!!:.I
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock switch 5P
connector.
Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Switch
(UNLOCK).
YES-Faulty driver's door lock switch .
NO-Go to step 9.
(40P).
driver's door lock switch 5P connector No.3 and
No.4 terminals individually.
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire .
22-153
BACK
DTC 82181: Driver's Door LOCK Knob Switch
LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error
3. Lock and unlock the driver's door with the door lock
knob switch operation.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the driver's door lock
knob switch system is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections .
5. Select DOOR LOCK from the BODY ELECTRICAL
system select menu, and enter the DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information ofthe Driver's Door
Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock
Knob Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Does the Driver's.Ooor Lock Knob Switch (LOCK)
information indicate ON and Driver's Door Lock
Knob Switch (UNLOCK) information indicate OFF
with the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK
position, and does the Driver's Door Lock Knob
Switch (LOCK) information indicate OFF and
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK)
information indicate ON with the door lock knob
switch is in the UNLOCK position?
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
22-154
Knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Knob
Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; replace
the driver's door lock actuator assembly .
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnectthe driver's MPCS unit connector A
(40P).
driver's door lock actuator 10P connector terminals
No.6 and o ~ 7 individually.
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR 10P CONNECTOR
BACK
OTC 82186: Front Passenger's Door Lock
Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error
3. Lock and unlock the front passenger's door with the
door lock switch operation.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the front passenger's
door lock switch system is OK at this time. Check
for loose or poor connections .
5. With the front passenger's door lock switch in the
neutral position, select the DOOR LOCK from the
BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu, and enter
the DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front
Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front
Passenger's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK).
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 8.
7. Operate the front passenger's door lock switch in
the LOCK and UNLOCK positions, and check the
ON/OFF information ofthe Front Passenger's Door
Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front Passenger's Door
Lock Switch (UNLOCK).
Are both the Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch
(LOCK) and Front passenger's Door Lock Switch
(UNLOCK) information indicators ON at the same
time when the door lock switch is in the LOCK or
UNLOCK position?
NO-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit .

1..::..1
8. Disconnect the front passenger's door lock switch
5P connector.
9. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front
Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front
Passenger's Door LOGk Switch (UNLOCK).
YES-Faulty front passenger's door lock switch;
replace it..
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit connector A
(28P).
front passenger's door lock switch 5P connector
terminals No.3 and No.4 individually.
LOCK SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair a shortto ground in the wire .
22-155
BACK
Power Door Locks/Keyless
1. If the door lock system works properly, but the vehicle does not start, refer to the immobilizer-keyless control unit
symptom troubleshooting information (see page 22-403).
NOTE: Only the panic function will work with the key in the ignition off position. There is no keyless function with
the ignition turned ON (II).
No. Symptom Check Items
1 The doors will not lock or unlock.' MICU inputtest (see page 22-132)
Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see page 22-174)
Door lock switch test (see page 22-17 4)
Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-173)
2 The doors will not lock . MICU inputtest (see page 22-132)
Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-173)'
Driver's door switch test (check the door switch ON/OFF
information with the HDS)
3 The doors will not unlock . MICU input test (see page 22-132)
Driver's door lock knob switch test (see page 22-173)
4 . Keyless operation does not work Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-157) .
(LOCK,UNLOCK, PANIC).
5 Doors will not unlock with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-159).
transmitter, but will unlock with the
door switch.
6 Doors will not lock with the transmitter, Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-159).
but will lock with the door switch.
7 Doors automatically relock 30, 60, or Driver's door switch test.
90 seconds after being unlocked with Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-160).
the transmitter even though a door
has been opened.
8 The horn does not sound and/or the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22c159).
headlights do not flash when PANIC
button on the transmitter pressed.
9 Keyless lock or unlock operation will Ignition key switch test (see page 22-79).
work even though the ignition key is in
the ignition switch.
*: If only one door IS not working properly, check that door's lock actuator first, then check the other Items listed
in this table.
22-156
BACK
Keyless operation does not work (LOCK,
UNLOCK, PANIC)
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any
DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
Before troubleshooting, do the keyless transmitter
Does the engine start?
YES-The immobilizer system is OK, go to step 3.
NO-Go to the immobilizer symptom
troubleshooting (see page 22-405)
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ..
5. Close all doors, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, and check the
door switch parameters.
Do all door switches indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty door switch, or shorted door switch
wire. Repair as necessary .
7. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.

8. Measure for voltage between the immobilizer-
keyless control unit 7P connector No.1 terminal
and body ground.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check the No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace the fuse
and repair a shorHo ground in the wire. Ifthe fuse
is OK, repair open in the wire .
9. Disconnectthe ignition key switch 6P connector.
10. At the ignition key switch side, check for continuity
between the ignition key switch 6P connector No.1
and No. 2terminals.
IGNITION KEY SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of male tElrminals
YES-Faulty ignition key switch or short to ground,
replace the steering lock assembly .
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
22':'157
BACK
Keyless/Power Door locks/Security System
11. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch,
12. At the ignition key switch side, check for continuity
between the ignition key switch 6P connector No.1
and No.2 terminals.
, .1,.,
YES-Go to step 13.
NO ...... Faulty ignition key switch, replace the
steering lock assembly ..
13. Disconnect the immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P
connector.
14. Check for continuity between the immobilizer-
keyless control unit 7P connectorNo; 6 terminal
and the ignition key switch 6P connector No.1
terminal.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire .
22-158,
15. Check for continuity. between the imniobilizer-
and body ground.
=
NO-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control
unit .
BACK
Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the
transmitter, but will unlock (lock) with the
door switch
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs.
If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC
first.
2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
3. Close and lock the doors.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless
transmitter.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
time .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Open the driver's door.
Does the key-in reminder chime sound?
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, or short to ground
on the ignition key switch PNK wire. Repair as
necessary .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-177).
Is the transmitter OK?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and
recheck .
NO-Replace the transmitter .
, "
The horn does not sound and/or the
headlights,do not flash when the:PAN,IC
button on the.'transmitter is pressed
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs.
If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC
first.
1. Press the PANIC button.
Does the horn sound?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Press the horn button.
Does the horn sound?
YES-Go to stap3.
NO-Check,the ,hotn circuit .
3. Turn the headlight switch ON.
Do the headlights come on?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Check the lighting circuit .
4. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-177).
Is the transmitter OK?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and
recheck .
NO-Replace the transmitter .
22-159
BACK
Doors automatically. relock 30, 60)'90 seconds
after being unlocked with the transmitter even
though a door has been opened
1. Turn the 'ceiling light swith in DOOR position ..
3. Close all doors.
4. Watch the ceiling light and the door indicator on
the gauge control module.
Does the ceiling light and door indicator go off?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair short to ground in the wire between
the MICU and door switch .
5. Open and close each door orie at a time.
6. Watch the ceiling lightandthe door indicator on
the gauge control module.
Does the ceiling light and door indicator come on
when the door is open, and go off when the door is
closed?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and recheck.
If the symptom goes away, replace the original
MICU .
NO-Check for open in the wire between the MICU
and the door switch. If the wire is,OK, replace the
door switch .
22-160
BACK
Control Unit Input Test
r--:'I
1...:=..1
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control systeln first using 8-CAN system Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-112).
MICU
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors.
CONNECTOR E (16P)
CONNECTOR N (45P)*

12lIVJ30i70
CONNECTOR F (14P)
CONNECTOR H (14P)
BlK
,
ITID 9rpj<RI]]
I I
BlK lTGRN
CONNECTOR K (12P)
GRY
1
@mKl?],:1

BRN
CONNECTOR Q (14P)
GRY BlK
, ,--'1..,......"......."
Kl : I :
I
GRN
CONNECTOR P (30P)
* Connector view shown rotated 180
o
from actual position in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Ifthe terminals look OK, go to step 5.
(cont'd)
22-161
BACK
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
If all the inputtests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
E2 BRN Connect battery Check actuator operation: Faulty left rear door lock actuator
E8 GRY power to the E2 The left and right rear door lock Faulty right rear door lock
(E8) terminal, actuators should LOCK actuator
and the E8 (E2) (UNLOCK). An open in the wire
terminal to body
Qround.
K2 GRY Connect battery Check actuator operation: Faulty driver's door lock actuator
K12 BRN power to the K12 The driver's door lock actuator An open in the wire
(K2) terminal, should LOCK (UNLOCK).
and the K2 (K12)
terminal to body
ground.
N7 BRN Connect battery Check actuator operation: Faulty front passenger's door lock
N9 GRY power to the N7 The front passenger's door lock actuator
(N9) terminal, actuator should LOCK An open in the wire
and the N9 (N7) (UNLOCK).
terminal to body
ground.
F5 PNK Connect battery Check tailgate release actuator Faulty tailgate release actuator
power to the F5 operation: Poor ground (G701)
terminal. The tailgate should open. Faulty rear fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
*: Without power tailgate
22-162
BACK
r--:'I

6. Reconnect the connectors, then turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connectors .
obtained
P1 BRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502)
conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
E9 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
H9 conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
04
E15 GRN Driver's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
open There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
closed There should be more than 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
H12 LTGRN Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door
door open There should be less than 1 V. switch
An open in the wire
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door
door closed There should be more than 5 V. switch
Q2
GRY Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
08 GRN Left rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door switch
P12 RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty connection at the audio
conditions There should be less than 1 V. unit, navigation unit, and/or rear
controller and screen
Faulty audio unit
Faulty navigation unit
Faulty rear controller and screen
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G504)
P16 GRN Transmission Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
range switch in P There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
position Poor ground (G101)
Transmission Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
range switch in There should be more than 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
any other
position than P
(cont'd)
22-163
BACK
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
9. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connectors.
CONNECTOR B (34P)
WHT
LilIlZ0

CONNECTOR C (42P)
LTGRN ORN*

'Ism 10 11 12 13 r-+---I-::t:::i'-7l---t--+--i
. 32 33
/
PNK* ORN
10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
22-164
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!.I
11. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
obtained
C23' PNK Connect battery Check tailgate release actuator Poor ground (G701)
power to the C23 operation: Faulty tailgate release actuator
terminal The tailgate should open. An open in the wire
momentarily.
C37 ORN Connect battery Check keyless buzzer operation: Faulty keyless buzzer
power to the C37 The keyless buzzer should Poor ground (G702)
terminal sound. An open in the wire
momentarily.
12. Reconnect the connectors, then turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connectors.
obtained
B4 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. main under-hood fuse box
Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
C6 LTGRN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G702)
There should be less than 1 V. Faulty tailgate latch switch
An open in the wire
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty tailgate latch switch
There should be more than 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
C7' ORN Tailgate outer Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G702)
handle pulled There should be less than 1 V. Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
An open in the wire
Tailgate outer Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
handle released There should be more than 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
(cont'd)
22-'165
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit
15. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit connectors A (40P) and B (14P).
CONNECTOR A (40P)
GRN GRV BLK WHT GRV
BLU L T BLU PNK RED VEL BRN
CONNECTOR B (14P)
7
8 14
\
BLK
22-166
BACK
r--:'I

17. With the connectors still disconnected, make these inputtests atthe connectors .
obtained
A8 GRY Under all Check for continuity between Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
conditions the A8 terminal and the An open in the wire
passenger's MPCS unit
connector A (28P) No.4
terminal:
There should be continui!'i.
Check for continuity togrol.lnd: Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be no continui!Y. A short to ground in the wire
A23 PNK Driver's door Check for continuity between Faulty driver's door lock switch

lock switch in the terminals: An open in the wire
A27 BRN UNLOCK There should be continuity.
Driver's door Check for continuity between Faulty driver'S door lock switch
lock switch in the terminals: A short to ground in the wire
neutral or LOCK There should be no continuity.
A24 RED Driver's door Check for continuity between Faulty driver's door lock switch

lock switch in the terminals: An open in the wire
A27 BRN LOCK There should be continuity __
Driver's door Check for continuity between Faulty driver's door lock switch
lock switch in the terminals: A short to ground in the wire.
neutral or There should be no continuity.
UNLOCK
A27 BRN Connect the A7 Check the driver'S door lock Faulty driver's door lock switch

andA27 switch lights: . Blown bulb(s)
A4 GRY terminals, and The switch LED should come on. An open in the wire
A4 and A5
terminals with
jumper wires
(cont'd)
22-167
BACK
Key,less/Power Door Locks/Security System
18. Reconnect the connectors, then turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make these input tests at the connectors .
. If II h . OK ate mputtests prove ,gotostep 19.
obtained
A5
::,
BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
A7 .. WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
A27 BRN conditions There should be battery voltage. main under-hood fuse box
An open in the wire
A25 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
A1 GRN Driver's door Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
"
lock knob switch There should be less than 1 V. Faulty driver's door lock knob
in UNLOCK switch
An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage toground: Faulty driver's door lock knob
lock knob switch There should be battery voltage. switch
in LOCK A short to Jlround in the wire
A2 PUR Driver's door Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
lock knob switch There should be less than 1 V. Faulty driver's door lock knob
in LOCK switch
An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock knob
lock knob switch There should be battery voltage. sWitch
in UNLOCK A short to ground in the wire
A21 BLU Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
cylinder switch There should be less than 1 V. Faulty driver's door key cylinder
in UNLOCK switch
An open in the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch There should be battery voltage. switch
in neutral or A short to ground in the wire
LOCK
A22 LTBLU Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
cylinder switch There should be less than 1 V. Faulty driver's door key cylinder
in LOCK switch
An open in the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch There should be battery voltage. switch
in UNLOCK A short to ground in the wire
A6 GRN Left rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
lock knob switch There should be less than 1 V. Faulty left rear door lock knob
in UNLOCK switch
An open in the wire
Left rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door lock knob
in LOCK A short to ground in the wire
22-168
BACK
Passenger's MPCS Unit
20. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page 20-8).
21. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit connectors.
CONNECTOR A (28PI
PNK ORN RED BRN PUR
CONNECTOR B (14PI
7
8 14
\
BlK

(cont'd)
22-169
BACK
23. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
obtained
A4 GRY Under all Check for continuity between Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
conditions the A4 terminal and the driver's An open in the wire
MPCS unit connector A (40P) No.
8 terminal:
Check for continuity to ground: Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be no continuity. A short to ground in the wire
A15 PNK Front passenger's Check for,continuity between Faulty front passenger's door lock

door lock switch the terminals: switch
A20 BRN in LOCK There should be continuity. An oJ:!en in the wire
Front passenger's Check for continuity between Faulty front passenger's door lock
in neutral or There should be no continuity. A short to ground in the wire
UNLOCK
A16 ORN Front passenger's Check for continuity between Faulty front passenger's door lock

A20 BRN in UNLOCK There should be continuJ!y. An ~ n in the wire
Front passenger's Check for continuity between Faulty front passenger's door lock
in neutral or There should be no continuity. A short to ground in the wire.
LOCK
A20 BRN Connect the A2 Check the front passenger's Faulty front passenger's door lock

andA20 door lock switch lights: switch
A1 GRY terminals, and The switch LED should come on. An open in the wire
A1 and A7
terminals with
jumper wires
22-170
BACK
r:-:'I
I.::J
obtained
A7 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G506)
B14 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G507)
A2 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
A20 BRN conditions There should be battery voltage. main under-hood fuse box
An open in the wire
A17 RED Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G506)
door lock knob There should be less than 1 V. Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch in knob switch
UNLOCK An open in the wire
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door lock
door lock knob There should be battery voltage. knob switch
switch in LOCK A short to ground in the wire
A26 PUR Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G606)
lock knob switch There should be less than 1 V. . Faulty right rear door lock knob
in UNLOCK switch
An open in the wire
Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door lock knob
in LOCK A short to ground in the wire
25. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
MICU) (see page 22-72). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
22-171
BACK
Door Lock Actuator Test
Driver's Door and Left Rear Door
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8). "
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator
(B).
NOTE: The illustration shows the driver's door.
B
A
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
\
Terminal
1 2
Position
\
LOCK ()
e
UNLOCK
e
()
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.
22-172
Front Passenger's Door and Right Rear Door
1 .. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
(B).
NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's
door ..
A
ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
1\
Terminal
3 4
Position
\
LOCK ()
e
UNLOCK
e
()
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.
BACK
Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's Door
(8).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals .
There should be continuity between the No.6
and No.5 terminals when the door lock knob
switch is inthe LOCK position and no continuity
when the switch is in the UNLOCK position.
and No.5 terminals when the door lock knob
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no
continuity when the switch is in the LOCK
position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
Passenger Doors
r--:'I
~
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page
20-8).
(8).
NOTE: The illustration shows the front passenger's
door.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
[No.7] and No. 10 [No.5] terminals when the
door lock knob switch inthe UNLOCK position and
no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK
position.
[ ] : Left rear door
4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
2 2 ~ 7 3
BACK
Keyless/Power Door locks/Security System
Door Lock Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A), remove the two
screws, then remove the door lock switch (B).
B
A
and No.4 terminals when the door lock switch is
in the LOCK position.
There should be no continuity between the No.5
in the neutral position or UNLOCK position.
in the UNLOCK position.
,There should be no continuity between the No.5
in the neutral position or LOCK position.
There should be continuity between the No.2,
No.2 (+) and No.1 (-) terminals (bulb check).
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb
or switch.
22-174
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key
cylinder switch (B).
and No.5 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in LOCK position.
switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
switch is in UNLOCK position.
switch is in the neutral or LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
key cylinder assembly (see page 20-12).
BACK
Hood Switch Test
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hood
switch (8).
B
Terminal side of
male terminals
No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (latch
released). There should be no continuity between
the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is
closed (latch pushed down).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
hood switch.

Keyless Buzzer Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the keyless
buzzer (8).
3. Test the buzzer by connecting battery power to the
No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal.
The buzzer should sound.
4. If the buzzer does not sound, replace it.
5. Install the buzzer in the reverse order of removal.
22-175
BACK
Tailgate Release Actuator Test
Without Power Tailgate
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-96).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate
release actuator (8).
B
A
cro
3. Check the actuator by connecting battery power to.
the No.2 terminal and ground to the No.1 terminal.
To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.
The actuator should work.
4. Ihhe actuator does not work, replace the tailgate
latch assembly (see page 20-228).
22-176
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Testl
Replacement
outer handle switch (8).
B
3. Check for continuity between the tailgate outer
handle switch 3P connector No.2 and No.3
terminals .
There should be continuity when the tailgate
outer handle is pulled.
There should be no continuity when the tailgate
outer handle is released.
4; If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two
bolts and the tailgate outer handle switch (A).
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Transmitter Test/Replacement
NOTE:
If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but
the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED
is faulty; replace the transmitter.
If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with
the transmitter.
If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30, 60, or 90
seconds, the doors relock automatically.
The lock or unlock does not work with the transmitter
ifthe ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
With HOS
1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to
reset the transmitter.
Ifthe locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If any of the transmitter buttons does not work,
replace the transmitter, then manually
reprogram the transmitter (see page 22-147).
If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
3. Select KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu,
then enter the KEYLESS CHECK.
4. Press lock, unlock, trunk, or panic button and check
the response on the screen of the HDS.
NOTE: The door lock actuators mayor may not
cycle when receiving input from the transmitter.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is
not registered to the vehicle, if necessary,
manually reprogram the transmitter (see page
22-147).
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
r:-:'I
~
5. Remove the transmitter cover (A) from the
transmitter (B), and check for water damage.
If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter, then manually reprogram the
transmitter (see page 22-147).
If there is no water damage, go to step 6.
~
~
B
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and press lock or unlock button and check the
receive condition on the screen ofthe HDS.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTR CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7.
(cont'd)
22-177
BACK
Transmitter Test/Replacement (cont'd)
7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter
assembly and repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be
programmed to the vehicle for this test.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the
keyless transmitter and manually reprogram the
transmitter (see page 22-147).
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, the immobilizer-keyless
control unit is faulty, replace it and do the
immobilizer system registration (see page
22-410).
Without HOS
If the engine does not start, go to the immobilizer
system troubleshooting (see page 22-408).
If the engine starts, go to step 2.
2. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to
reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If the locks don't work, go to step 3.
3. Manually program the transmitter (see page
22-147). If the transmitter does not program, go to
step 4.
4. Manually program a known-good transmitter.
If you can program the transmitter, replace the
original transmitter.
If you can not program the transmitter, replace
the original transmitter, go to step 5.
22-178
5. Remove the transmitter cover (A) from the
transmitter (8), and check for water damage.
If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter.
If there is no water damage, go to step 6.
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button
five or six times.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, the HDS will be
required for further diagnosis.
BACK
Horns
HORNS
HORN SWITCH
Test, page 22-181
r:-:'I
I..:!!:...I
CABLE REEL
(Built into the
under-hood fuse/relay box)
22-179
BACK
Horns
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
B ~ I No,'!I1SA
~ ~ I - r - - - - - - ~ I
I
~
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSmON
SWITCH
22-180
T
\IjIT
UNDER-HOOD
H3 FUSE/RELAY BOX
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE
r
-f-
E4
ORN
CABLE
REEL
H4
LTGRN
HORN
H (Hlghl
H5
LTGRN
Horn Test/Replacement
1. Remove the upper grille (see page 20-203).
2. Disconnect the 1 P connector (A) from each horn (8).
3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the
terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (8). The
horn should sound.
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
BACK
Horn Switch Test
17-25).
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P
connector (A) from the cable reel (8).
A
3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire
harness 20P connector No.2 terminal to body
ground. The horns should sound.
Ifthe horns sound, go to step 4.
If the horns do not sound, check these items:
- No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
- Horn (see page 22-180)
-MICU
- An open in the wire.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
...-----, HORN SW (ORN)
JUMPER
WIRE
=
10
20
r:-:'I

4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P
connector (A) to the cable reel (8).
A
5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
24-137), and disconnect the horn switch 1 P positive
terminal (C) from the driver's airbag.
6. Check for continuity between the dashboard wire
harness 20P connector No.2 terminal and the horn
switch 1 P positive terminal.
If there is continuity, check the installation of the
driver's airbag assembly and the steering wheel.
If the installation is correct, faulty horn switch;
replace the driver's airbag assembly.
If there is no continuity, repair an open in the
wire between the cable reel and the horn switch
1 P positive terminal, if the wire harness is OK,
replace the cable reel (see page 24-149).
HORN SWITCH 1P POSITIVE TERMINAL
7 8 9 10
17 18 19 20
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals '
22-181
BACK
Exterior Lights
HEADLIGHT
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting, page 22-202
Bulb Replacement, page 22-207
FRONT PARKING LIGHT
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
22-182
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BOX A
HID UNIT
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-77
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
FOG LIGHT/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT
BACK
r--:1

HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
(In the inner taillight)
TAILLIGHT/BRAKE LIGHT/SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Brake Light LED Replacement, page 22-213
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
(cont'd)
22-183
BACK
Exterior Lights
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLA V (MID)
(DRL indication)
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SENSOR/
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
a
____ --__ 0.
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
(LIGHTING, FOG, TURN)
Test, page 22-214
22-184
BACK
System Description
Daytime Running Lights

The daytime running lights system is composed ofthe relay control module, the combination control unit, the left and
right daytime running lights, and the DRL indication on the multi-information display (MID). The daytime running
lights operate with the ignition switch ON (II), the headlights off, and the parking brake released.
When the daytime running lights are on, the relay control module turns the left and right daytime running lights
control circuit on and off (duty cycle) which provides a reduced voltage (approximately 6-8 volts) via the No.1 and
No.2 fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Tl:le DRL comes on with reduced brightness.
The gauge control module will show the DRLindication on the multi-information display (MID) with the ignition switch
ON (II) and the parking brake released when a problem is detected with the daytime running lights circuit.
NOTE: The daytime running lights are disabled when the ignition switch is turned OFF. To keep the daytime running
lights from coming on, apply the parking brake switch while the ignition switch OFF. When you then turn the ignition
switch back ON (II), the daytime running lights will not come on until the parking brake is released.
22-185
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram
IG2CUTRElAY
: [P,NJ I
BATTERY
MAIN UNDER-HOODFUSE BOX IGNmON SWITCH 0,; I
IG2HOTlnONIlU 4 GRN-----------------
ORN No.llBAnll20AI NoJIIGII5OA)
PCM 3

NoAI40AI
IGIHOTinONtDI
.. d START mu

NoJIRB2I140AI

UNDER-HOODFUSEiRELAYBOX
IRELAYBLOCK partl
BLU
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAY BOX IRElAY CONTROL MODULE partl
FI

j-
VEL-.l!.

r
C1
f:------ fs-----
1
EIO
LTBLU

RELAY r 'I
l

NoJ
UDAl FRONT PARKING
lIGHTS
No.IS No.19
liSA) 115 A)
FRONTSIDE
MARKERlIGHTS
TAllUGHTS
REARSIDE
MARKERlIGHTS
UCENSEPLATE
lIGHTS
G3 GI
VEL RL GRN WHT
LEFT RIGHT
2 2 HEADlIGHT 2 2 HEADlIGHT
""\ /' '\
HID UNIT
I
CD HIGH
160W!
I
HID UNIT
C
DHIGH
160W!
ld
,LQ
LOWI35W!
./ ./
I I I
BLK Bu( BLK BlK
Y Y
BU( BlK
1 1
G301 G201
22-186
1 I
I
LEFTDRL
II
RlGHTDRL
I
CONTROL CONTROL
CIRCUIT CIJICUIT
I
I L..-
SG
No.1 No2
D4 110 A) IIOA)
GI G2
BLU WHT
( DLEFT (
2
D RIGHT
DAYTIME DAYTIME
I RUNNING I RUNNING
UGHT UGHT
160W! 16OW!
BLK BlK B
.L.. ..J
G301 G201 G401
BACK
-----------GRN
-------------------ml
--------------------MIT
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RElAY BOX
!RElAY CONTROL MODUlpall)
B-CAN
..
VBU
Et
L
TGR
06
01
A4
M
B4
Ott
N
Dt2
D6
IGt VEL
BACK-UP
H/L
Ett
GAUGE CONTROLMODUl
UNDER-DASH FUSEiRElAY BOX

X34
I
No2t U.5A1
No.1ltOAI
VEL
P1
IG2
......................... ... . .....
B-cAN
VBU
IGt
BACK-UP
H/I.
N22 X35 X34 N28 P3
MIT
.
HEADlIGHT
lYELING
CDUi
LTGRN LTBLU WHT YEL LTGRN MIT
,
,
,
WlPER/WASHER
:AS SWITCH 2 8 1 '4 t
,

,
I B-CAN I
,
TRANSCEIVER
I
MID
DHl
INDICATOR
I I
MAIN
I
CIRCUIT
BtO
ORN
PARKING
, BRAKE
SWUCH
IClosed:
Pedal
depressed)
VBU VBU ,lGt B-CAN
COMBINATiONSwntH
CONTROLUNIT
LOW
HIGH ", /PASSING OFF
DIMMER
COMBINATION UGHT SWUCH
Hil
I
AUTOMATIC
lIGHTING
SENSOR
.1.'
VEL 01: JR
5
VEL ORN
Pt4 PZ1 P30
SIP 510 51G
MJCU
PG2
04
3
BLK Bu(
GSOt GSOt
I
't :HlGHBEAMINDICATOR
'2: UGIIlS-ONINDICATOR
'CANIine

9 9
GAUGECONTROL
MODUl
. , " SG2
PGt r--
5Gt
Pt H9

E9
BRN BLK
G502 G60t GSOt
22-187
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Parking/Side Marker/License Plate Lights, Taillights
BATTERY
No.3 (lGl(50 AI

RELAY
CIRCUIT
D4
BLK
G401
22-188
No.3 IRB21 140 AI

SG
No.5
17.5 AI
B2
GRY
LEFT
FRONT
2 PARKING

13CPI
BLK
GaOl
BlU-
B-CAN
VBU
BACK-UPH/L
B5
GRY
LEFT
FRONT
UNDER-HOOD
FI FUSE/RELAY BOX
...................
B3
GRY
RIGHT
FRONT
BI
GRY
TGRN : .......................... L
EI
.................
D6
E11
B4
RIGHT
FRONT
I
GRY
LEFT
LICENSE
I
GRY

LlCNSE

GRY------
GRY------
I
2 PARKING
LIGHT
13CPI
I SIDE
MARKER
UGHT
13CPI
2 rltJi 2 ntJf
BLK
GaOl

13CPI
BLK BLK
G201 G201
13CPI 13CPI
BLK BLK
G701 G701
BACK
IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
--@-
A6
No.21 17.5 AI
WHT PNK
IGI
IGI HOT in ON 110 and
START IUD
B4
No.7 (10 AI
WHT
.().
*----1IGl
LTGRN .......................... .
B-CAN
012

------------WHT------,
03

GRY --------------t---+ .......
R REA
FU
BO
SE/RELAY
--GRY
X
C9
BRAKE
SIGNAL
821
C34
C15
GRY
t I
GRY GRY
2-
GRY -----tl----', HEADLIGHT I
LEVELING
CONTROL urn
GRY GRY LTB U WHT VEL LT RN
BRAKE
SIGNAL

l
;:
-;>

:

2 8 : 4

I

VBU VBU IGI B-CAN BACK-
WiPER/
WASHER
SWITCH
UP
H/L
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
r--:'I
I..!=...I
: CAN line
.... ,
MICU
BACK-UP
H/L
WHT
SG2 I---
PGl
PG2 SGI
Q4 PI H9 E9
A 71
:S\
.---+_+ ___ t---II-
l
..., BLK BLK BRNBLK BLK
TAILUGHT SIDE
ILEDI MARKER
UGHT
(3CPI
LEFT
TAIlliGHT
BLK BLK
1 1
G701 G701
TAlWGHT
(LEDI
RIGHT
TAILUGHT
BLK
1
G702
SIDE
MARKER
UGHT
13CPI
BLK
1
G702
G601 G601 G502 G601 G601
22-189
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNmON SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.1 (BATI (120 Al No.3 (1G)(50AI BAT A6
+ )-oH ...... U\.JJo .... --<f''-1.:--f- WHT . .. . PNK
BATIERY -&
No.4 140 A)
IGI
IGI HOT in ON lUI and
START 1m)
B4

Y L
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
D12
No.7 No.21
110 A) 17.SA)
t----IIGI
: CAN lin.
SG21----,
r---------+-+----1f----f VBU MICU PGl

PNK PNK LT RN
.
.
, .
E7 D6 : E1
FOG VBU B-CAN
RLY
CL-
RELAY CONTROL
MODULE
PNK PNK
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT .RIGHT
FOG FOG
1
1
LIGHT
ISSW) (SSW)
BLK BLK
1 1
G301 G201

Dll
....... .........
X35 X34 N28

LEVELING
B-CAN
BACK-UPH/L
P3
WHT
PG2 SGI
Q4 PI H9 E9
CONTROL urn
WHT LT U VEL LTGRN WHT
.
: 4
Ell
BACK-
YBU
UP
VBU IGI B-CAN
UP
H/L H/L
COMBINATION SWITCH
SG
COrmOLUNIT
D4
W1PERJ
WASHER
SWITCH
BLK
10
,...--..,...--1f-__ +-_ ..... __ -I-_+--,1 BLK BLK BRN BLK BLK
OFF
FOG ..

COMBINATION SWITCH
G401 G601 G601 G502 G601 G601
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
BATTERY
c)
No.11 (1SA)
()""-CJ
WHT
No.20 (7.5 A)
, FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELA Y BOX)
I
GRN
VEL

VSA
MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
REAR FUSE/RELA Y BOX
C3S
ORN
t I
LEFT BRAKE
ORN ORN
RIGHT BRAKE
UGHT(LED) UGHT(LED)
TAlWGHT TAILUGHT
HIGH
MOUNT
BRAKE
UGHT
(LED)
I I
G701 G701
1
-
POSITION "
, 'SWITCH
2 (Closed: Pedal pressed)
LTGRN

LTGRN
2 4
PCM
BRAKE
UGHT
RELAY
ORN

t MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
WHT
I
ORN
B19
C19
ORN
I
G702

22-191
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNmON SWITCH
No.IIBATII120AI No.3I1GII50AI. ~ BAT .
----,-v ''''----',-WHT PNK-
IGI
22-192
NAVIGATION UNIT
AUTOMATIC
DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
IGI HOT In ON lUI and
STARTIUJI
MICU
P5
A6
No.21
17.SAI
PZO
BRN PUR
BRN
I LEFT
BACK-UP
UGHT
2 118WI
BRN
I RIGHT
BACK-UP
UGHT
2 118W!
WHT
'TRANSMISSION
, RANGE
SWITCH
6 (Closad : In R posnlonl
I I I
G701 G701 GIOI
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81075: Headlight Switch Back-up Circuit
Malfunction
3. Turn the headlight switch ON for 5 seconds and
OFF.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Select BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu,
then enter the DATA LIST menu.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
BACK-UP with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for a short in the WHT wire between
the combination switch control unit and the relay
control module (H/L BACK-UP line) or between the
combination switch control unit and the MICU, if
the harness is OK, replace the combination switch
then enterthe DATA LIST menu.

I.!::.I
9. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
Is ON indicated?
YES-Go to the relay control module input test
(see page 22-136) and check for a poor ground, if
the GND line is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/
combination switch control unit and the relay
control module (H/L BACK-UP line) or between the
combination switch control unit and the MICUi if
the wire is OK, replace the combination switch
22-193
BACK
Exterior Lights
OTCB1018: Daytime Running Lights System
Error (Canada)
OTC B1079: Daytime Running Lights System
Error (USA)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting rnultiple DTCs, be
1. Turn the headlight switch OFF, and apply the
parking brake.
4. Release the parking brake.
Is DTe 81078 or 81079 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition and headlight switches OFF.
8. Check the No.1 (10 A) and No.2 (10 A) fuses in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the blown fuse and recheck. If the
fuse blows again, repair short in the wire between
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the appropriate
daytime running lights .
2 2 ~ 9 4
9. Check the daytime running light bulbs.
Are the daytime running light bulbs OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the faulty bulb .
connector G (4P).
11. Disconnect the each daytime running light 2P
connector.
12. Check for continuity between the each daytime
running light 2P connector No.2 terminal and the
under-hood fuse/relay box connector G (4P) No.1
and No.2 terminals respectively.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (4P)
LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CON.NECTOR G (4P)
RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
13. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of
each daytime running light 2P connector and body
ground.
LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR
RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT 2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Replace the relay control module .
NO-Repair open in the BLK wire or poor ground
(G201-right side, G301-left side) .
r-:'I

DTC 81252: Combination Switch Control Unit
Internal (EEPROM) Error
YES-Replace the combination switch control unit
(see page 22-302) .
time .
22-195
BACK
Exterior Lights
DTC 81255: Combination Switch Control Unit
Lost Communication with MICU (MICU
Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the combination switch control unit and the
MICU .
Are ore 81055,81157,81806,81955, and 82155
also indicated?
YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-132).

NO-Go to the combination switch control unit
inputtest (see page 22-300) .
22-196
DTC 81275: Combination Light Switch OFF
Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81276: Combination Light Switch
Parking (SMALL) Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81277: Headlight Switch AUTO Position
Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81278: Headlight Switch ON Position
Circuit Malfunction'
3. Operate each combination light switch position for
more than 2 seconds, then turn the combination
light switch OFF.
Is ore 81275,81276,81277 and/or 81278
indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the combination light switch 20P
connector from the combination light switch.
7. Do the combination light switch test (see page
22-200) and check for open or short in the
combination light switch terminals in each switch
position.
Is the combination light switch OK?
YES-Faulty combination switch control unit,
replace the wiper/washer switch .
NO-Replace the combination light switch .
BACK
OTC 81279: Headlight Switch DIMMER
1. Clea r the DTCs with the HDS.
4. Change the DIMMER switch from low beam to high
beam and wait for 2 seconds.
5. Pull and hold the combination light switch lever,
and hold the passing switch position for more than
2 seconds.
Is DTC 81279 indicated? .
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Intermittent failure, the headlight switch
DIMMER circuit is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections .
22-200) and check for open or short in the
combination light switch terminals in each switch
position.
Is the combination light switch OK?
r--:'I

OTC 81280: Turn Signal Switch Circuit
Malfunction
3. Turn the turn signal switch to left position and wait
for 2 seconds, then turn to right position and wait
for 2 seconds.
YES-Go to step.5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the turn signal switch
circuit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections .
22-200) and check for open or short in the turn
signal switch terminals in each switch position.
Is the turn Signal switch OK?
22-197
BACK
Exterior Lights
DTC 81575: Automatic Lighting Sensor
Circuit Malfunction
YES-Go to step 4.
the automatic lighting sensor and the MICU .
connector P (30P).
6. Disconnect the automatic lighting sensor 5P
connector.
(12P).
22-198
8. Check for continuity between the under-dash fuse/
relay box connector P (30P) No. 14, No. 27, and
No. 30 terminals and the automatic lighting sensor
5P connector No.1, No.3 and No.5 terminals
respectively.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P)
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
BACK
9. Check for continuity between the automatic lighting
sensor 5P connector No.1 and No.3 terminals.
SIP (VEL)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the No.1
and No.3 terminals .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Reconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
P(30P).
r--:'I
I.!!::.I
12. Measure the voltage between the automatic
lighting sensor 5P connector No.1 and No.5
terminals.
SIP (VEL) SIG(PUR)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the automatic lighting sensor .
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-72) .
22-199
BACK
Exterior Lights
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-119).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page.20-129).
3. Disconnect the combination light switch 20P connector (A) from the combination light switch (8).
B
'0
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
22'-200
BACK
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
r--:'I
~
If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
~
L h . h
.Igl t switc :
['.. Terminal
4 9 6 5 3 10
Position
"-
OFF
- -
:ar.
-

Headlight switch
LOW ~ ~
ED
~ ~
...,
HIGH
~
,
OFF
Passing switch
ON
- -
T . h
urn signa switc :
"-
Terminal
8 7 10
Position
"-
LEFT - -
Neutral
RIGHT - ...
Fog light switch:
'"
Terminal
Position
"-
1 10
OFF
ON ~
....,
6. Ifthe continuity check is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-201
BACK
Exterior Lights
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting
AWARNING
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the
bulb sockets or the high intensity discharge (HID)
lamps when the combination light switch is turned
ON, it may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if you do not observe the cautions
below.
ACAUTION
Never turn on the combination light switch
before fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets
and completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with
your bare hands and do not stain itwith any oils
and fats.
Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the
igniter unit.
Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
vehicle.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, check the No. 19 (15 A), and
No. 18 (15 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Cool down the HID bulb before checking.
After checking, the HID system requires about
5 minutes to be normal condition.
Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-
theft code for the radio and navigation system (if
equipped).
After connecting the battery cables, enter the anti-
theft code for the radio and navigation system (if
equipped), then set the clock.
2. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then enter the
HEADLIGHT COMMAND from the FUNCTIONAL
TESTS, and turn the headlights on repeatedly.
Do the headlights come on?
YES-Go to the combination light switch test and
the combination switch input test..
NO-Go to step 3.
22-202
3. Turn the headlight switch and the ignition switch
OFF.
disconnect the positive cable.
5. Remove the bulb socket from the HID bulb
(see page 22-207).
6. Check for loose or poor connections between the
bulb socket and the HID bulb.
Is the connection OK?
Y S ~ G o t o step 7.
NO,.-Install the bulb and the bulb socket correctly
and recheck .
7. Check the condition of the HID bulb socket mating
surface (A).
A
Are the terminals corroded or burnt?
YES-Replace the bulb socket, and recheck .
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK
8. Remove the bulb, and check the luminescence part
of the HID bulb.
Black Discoloration Transformation
Is there black discoloration or transformation?
YES-Replace the HID bulb(s), and recheck .
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Substitute the right and left HID bulbs.
Does the symptom change to the other side?
YES-Replace the HID bulb and recheck .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the combination light switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the HID unit 2P connector.
12. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
r--:'I
a=!..I
13. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of
the HtD unit 2P connector and body ground.
HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR

cfLO.GRN
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the HID unit
and under-hood fuse/relay box. If the wire is OK,
replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-71 ).
14. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of
the HID unit 2P connector and body ground.
HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Faulty HID unit .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the HID unit
and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor
ground (G201/G301) .
22-203
BACK
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment
ACAUTION
Headlights become very hot during use; do not
touch them or any attaching hardware immediately
after they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
(A) of the headlights.
22-204
2. Park the vehicle in front of a wall or a screen (A).
A
25ft (7.5 m)
3. Turn the low beams on.
4. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly.
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A).
Adjust the cut line (B) to the lights height.
BACK
5. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the
headlights to local requirements by turning the
vertical adjuster.
Headlight Replacement
r--:'I
1=.1
2. Remove the connectors (A) from the headlight
assembly (8).
A
3. Remove the security strap bolt (e).
4. Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the
headlight.
5. Remove the bolt (D) and the corner upper beam (E)
from the headlight.
6. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
7. After the replacement, then do the headlights
learning procedure (see page 22-231) and aim the
headlights per local requirements.
22-205
BACK
Exterior Lights
HID Unit Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio
and the navigation system (if equipped). Make sure
the ignition switch isOFF.
4. Remove the headlight assembly (see page 22-205).
5. Remove the three mounting screws and the HID
unit (A).
6. Disconnect the 4P connector (8) from the HID unit.
7. Inspectthegasketfordamage.lfdamaged, replace
it.
9. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the
navigation system, then set the clock.
22-206
BACK
HID Bulb Replacement
AWARNING
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the
bulb sockets ofthe high intensity discharge (HID)
lamps when the combination light switch is turned
ON, it may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if you do not observe the cautions
below.
ACAUTION
Never turn on the combination light switch
before fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets
and completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with
your bare hands and do not stain it with any oils
and fats.
Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the
igniter unit.
Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
vehicle.
radio and the navigation system (if equipped).

5. Turn the cover (A) 45 o counterclockwise to remove
it from the headlight assembly.
6. Turn the socket (A) 45 o counterclockwise to
remove it from the bulb (13).
Headlight: 35 W
c
7. Pull the retaining spring (C) away from the bulb
then remove the bulb.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the
tabs in the headlight.
9. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
codes for the radio and the navigation system, then
set the clock.
22-207
BACK
ExteriQr Lights
Bulb Replacement
Headlight Bulb (High Beam)
1. Remove the left or right upper fender trim
(see page 20-218).
2. For the left headlight, remove the battery cover,
remove the battery hold-down by removing the two
nuts, then slide the battery to access the bulb.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight
bulb socket (8).
Headlight Bulb: 60 W
4. Turn the bulb socket 45 counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlight housing.
5. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the
tabs in the headlight.
NOTE: Do nottouch the glass ofthe bulb with your
hands. If necessary, clean the glass area with
alcohol.
22-208
Front Parking Light Bulb
(see page 20-218).
2. For right parking light, remove the clip from
windshield washer reservoir. .
parking light bulb socket (8).
Front Parking Light Bulb: 3 CP
A
BACK
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb
(see page 20-218).
2. For the left light, remove the battery cover, remove
the battery hold-down by removing the two nuts,
then slide the battery to access the bulb.
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the bulb
socket (8).
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb: 21 W
B
A
Front Side Marker Light

I.!:..I
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front turn
signal/front parking light.
Front Side Marker Light: 3 CP
A

2. Turn the bulb socket (8) 45 counterclockwise to
22-209
BACK
Exterio,r Lights
Fog light/Daytime Running light
Replacement
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the fog light
and the daytime running light.
A
3. Remove the screw, then remove the light.
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
5. After replacement, adjust the fog lights/daytime
running lights (see page 22-210).
22-210
Fog light/Daytime Running light
Adjustment
Before adjusting the fog light/daytime running light:
Have the driver or someone who weighs the same sit
in the driver's seat.
Adjust the fog lights/daytime running lights to local
requirements by turning the adjuster (A).
A
BACK
Fog Light/Daytime Running Light Bulb Replacement
1. Remove the innerfender (see page 20-217).
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the fog
lights/daytime running lights (8).
Fog Light: 55 W
Daytime Running Light: 60 W
B
3. Turn the fog light bulb socket (C) and the daytime
running light bulb socket (D) 45 counterclockwise
to remove them from the housing.
4. Install new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Do not touch the glass of the bulb with your
hands. If necessary, clean the glass area with
alcohol.

I..!!!..I
22-211
BACK
Exterior Lights
Taillight Replacement
Taillight
1. Remove the covers (A) and two bolts from the
taillight (8).
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Rear Side Marker Light: 3 CP
c
2. Carefully pull out the taillight.
3. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the taillight.
4. Turn the bulb sockets (D) 45
0
counterclockwise to
remove the bulbs (E).
22-212
Inner Taillight
1. Remove the tailgate lid panel (see page 20-96).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the inner
taillight (8).
3. Remove the five nuts, then remove the inner
taillight.
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 0 counterclockwise to
remove the bulb (8).
Back-up Light: 21 W
BACK
Taillight/Brake Light LED
Replacement
1. Remove the taillight (see page 22-212).
2. Remove the four screws (A) and the back cover (8)
from the taillight (C).
D
E
F
3. Carefully disconnectthe connector (D) from the
taillight/brake light LED (E).
4. Remove the two screws (F) and the taillight/brake
light LED from the taillight housing.
5. Inspect the gasket, if the gasket is distorted or
compressed, replace it.
6. Install a new LED in the reverse order of removal.
r:'I
t=:.I
License Plate Light Replacement
1. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and
disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light.
License Plate Light: 3 CP
2. Separate the lens (8) and housing (C), then remove
the bulb.
22-213
BACK
Exterior Lights
High Mount Brake Light
Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate spoiler (see page 20-213).
2. Remove the two screws from the high mount brake
light (A).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the high
mount brake light.
22-214
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake
pedal position switch (B).
A
B
terminals.
There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is pressed.
There should be no continuity when the brake
pedal is released.
terminals.
There should be no continuity when the brake
pedal is pressed.
There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust
the pedal height (see page 19-6).
BACK
COMBINATION LIGHT /TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
Test, page 22-220
o
_____ --__ ,0
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

t=!.J
22-215
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE 80X IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
8AmRY
-&
A6
No.21 17.5 AI
HT . PNK
1G1
No.1IBAn (120 AI No.3I1G}(50 AI
No.4 140 AI
lG1 HOT in ON 1111 and
No.7110AI
START 11111 B4
WHT
No.10(15AI
017
lTBLU
lOS X34
............................................................................

WHT VEL lTGRN

WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH 8 7 : 4

VBU IG1 B-CAN
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
I I
BlU BRN
81 B20
3
I REAR
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
C41 C40
1 3 4
8LU 8RN
,
lEFT .. ,' RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
SWITCH
2 2
LEFT RIGHT
BlK REAR REAR
TURN TURN
COMBINATION UGHT SWITCH SIGNAL SIGNAL
UGHT UGHT
(21W) 121 WI
......... I I
G601 G701 G702
22-216
BACK
N45
: CAN line
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
1

LTBLU
MICU
N28
LTGRN
SG1
PG1 SG2
PG2
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
F10

F6
---BLU ----II-t'-----...... ---+
K8 04 N33 N27 D9
Bh
BLU BLU BLU BRN BRN
12 12
BRN
LEFT RIGHT
SIDE SIDE
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
UGHT 2
UGHT 2
ILED)
LEFT
TURN SIGNAL
ILEDI
RIGHT
FRONT
INDICATOR
FRONT
TURN TURN
13 LEFT
SIGNAL
13 RIGHT
SIGNAL
UGHT UGHT
POWER
121 WI
POWER
121W)
MIRROR MIRROR
BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 1 1 1
G601 G301 G601 G201
P28
P1
04
E9
H9
HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH
GRN
BLK BLK BLK BRN
- - -
G601 G601 G601 G502
UGHT
10.84 WI
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
lin thegougo
control modulol
22-217
BACK
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test
1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay 1 (A) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (8).
~ _ _
2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
22-218
BACK
3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box .
r--:'I

If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Teat condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
6 Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the main
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
1 Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G601)
conditions There should be continuity. Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
2 Connect the Check the turn signal lights Blown bulb
No.6 terminal to operation. Poor ground (G301, G601, G701)
the No.2 The left turn signal lights and Faulty LED
terminal with a indicator should come on. An open in the wire
jumper wire.
3 Connect the Check the turn signal lights Blown bulb
No.6 terminal to operation. Poor ground (G201, G601, G701)
the No.3 The right turn signal lights and Faulty LED
terminal with a indicator should come on. An open in the wire
jumper wire.
4 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground. Poor ground (G601)
ON (II) and turn There should be about 10 V or Faulty turn signal switch
signal switch in more. Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
Left position. An open in the wire
5 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground. . Faulty combination switch control unit'
ON (II) and turn There should be about 10 V or Faulty MICU'
signal switch in more.
Right position.
4 Hazard warning Measure the voltage to ground. Poor ground (G601)
switch ON There should be about 10 V or Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the main
more. under-hood fuse/relay box
5 Measure the voltage to ground. . Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be about 10 V or Faulty hazard warning switch
more. An open in the wire
Faulty MICU'
*: Go to the B-CAN System DiagnosIs Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
22-219
BACK
Hazard Warning Switch Test
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-121).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the hazard
warning switch (8).
A
3. Remove the hazard warning switch from behind
the center panel.
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb
(e) or the hazard warning switch.
22-220
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement
1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-43).
. 2. Remove the screw, then pull out the side turn
signal light (A).
A
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (8) from the light.
BACK
Headlight Leveling System
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
Headlight Initial Position Learning
Procedure, page 22-231
HEADLIGHT LEVELING MOTOR
HEADLIGHT
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting,
page 22-202

I.!!!.I
(Lighting/Fog/Turn Signal)
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR.
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-224 . ,
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-224
22-221
BACK
System Description
Headlight Leveling System (With HID)
The headlights leveling system is composed of the headlight leveling control unit, the left-front and left-rear
suspension stroke sensors, and the left and right headlight leveling motors.
The system uses the left-front and left-rear suspension stroke sensors to monitor the vehicle ride height. The ride
height is monitored every 3 minutes while the vehicle is running with the headlight switch ON, and 8 seconds after the
vehicles stops with the ignition and headlight switches ON.
If the control unit detects the ride height change, the control unit controls the headlight leveling motors to adjust the
headlight vertical position.
HEAI)LlGHT LEVELING
MOTOR
LEFT-FRONT
SUSPENSION.
STROKE SENSOR
Suspension Stroke Sensors
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
, ,
STROKE SENSOR
The suspension stroke sensors are also one of the active damper system components. The headlight leveling system
uses the left-front and left-rear suspension stroke sensor signals. The left-front suspension stroke sensor is located at
the left front suspension area. A short link connects the arm of the sensor to the stabilizer bar. The left-rear suspension
stroke sensor is located at the left rear suspension area. A short link connects the arm of the sensor to the damper
assembly.
The sensors detect the vehicle ride height and sends a voltage signal (about 0.4-4.6 V) to the headlight leveling
control unit.
Headlight Leveling Control Unit
The headlight leveling control unit is located under the passenger's side ofthe dashboard. The headlight leveling
control unit uses the voltage signals it receives from the left-front and left-rear suspension stroke sensors to determine
the voltage signal (about 2-11 V) it sends to control the left and right leveling motors.
Headlight Leveling Motors
The headlight leveling motors are located behind both headlights, and they adjust the headlights vertically based
upon the voltage signals (about 2-11V) they receive from the headlight leveling control unit.
22-222
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAINUNQER-HooD FUSE BOX IGNmoN SWITCH
No.lIBAnI120AI No.3 IIGI 150 AI -@-TA6XI6

IGI
IGI HOT in ON OD
and START om
r--:'I

LEFT LEVEUNG MOTOR LEVEUNGMOTOR
No.3 110 AI FUSE
lUNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOXI
I
D
H/LHI
VSPOUT
15
PCM
PCM
SRSUNIT
I
B
14
scs
GND
BLK
G401
IGI
HIL2
16
COMBINATION
SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
DRIVE CIRCUIT
GRN
LEVEUNG CONTROL UNIT
SVF
13
PNK
SSF
PUR
LEFT-FRONT
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
BLU
SGF
12
BLU
DRIVE CIRCUIT
BLU G N
BLU BRN GRN
AV
SVR
RED
AS AG
SSR
LTBLU
LEFT-REAR
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
SGR
LTGRN
22-223
BACK
Headli.ght Leveling System
Suspension Stroke Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the No. 31 (15 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Check the active
damper system for DTCs and troubleshoot those codes
first.
supported.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the left-front
stroke sensor (B).
B
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the left-rear
stroke sensor (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
B
5. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
22-224
6. Check for continuity between the left-front and left-
rear suspension stroke sensors 3P connector No.3
terminal and body ground individually.
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
~
3
SGF (BLU)
Q SGR (LT GRN)*
=
*: Left-rear suspension stroke sensor
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire or poor ground (G401),
if the wire is OK, replace the headlight leveling
control unit .
7. Measure the voltage between the left-front and left-
rear suspension stroke sensor 3P connector No.1
terminal and body ground individually.
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION
r
23
SVF (PNK)
SVR (RED)* ':Y.
=
*: Left-rear suspension stroke sensor
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check for an open or a short in the wire
between the headlight leveling control unit and the
left-front (or left-rear) suspension stroke sensor. If
the wire is OK, replace the left-front (or left-rear)
suspension stroke sensor .
BACK
8. Remove the nut (A) and the left-front suspension
stroke sensor from the suspension side.
A
~
Replace.
Do not
disassemble.
9. Remove the nut (A) and the left-rear suspension
stroke sensor from the suspension side.
Do not disassemble.
\
A
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
Replace.
10. Reconnect the 3P connector to the each suspension
stroke sensor.
r--:'I
l!!:..I
11. Measure the voltage between the headlight auto
leveling control unit 16P connector No.4 and No.7
terminals, and No.6 and No. 12 terminals while the
suspension stroke sensor arm (A) is moved.
Do not disassemble.
A _____ @
HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
SSR
(LTBLU)
Is there about 0.5-4.5 V?
the headlight leveling control unit and the left-front
(or left-rear) suspension stroke sensor, if the
connections are OK, replace the left-front (or left-
rear) suspension stroke sensor..
NO-Check for an open or a short in the wire
between the headlight leveling control unit and the
left-front (or left-rear) suspension stroke sensor, if
the wire is OK, replace the left-front (or left-rear)
22-225
BACK
Headlight Leveling Control Unit Input Test
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the glove box (see page 20-125).
2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the headlight leveling control unit (8).
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK BRN BLU PNK BRN BLU L T BLU
If the terminals are OK, go to step 4.
22-226
BACK
4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
CavitY Wire Test condition Test: Desired result
15 BlU Ignition switch ON (II), raise the Measure the voltage between
vehicle, make sure it is securely the No. 15 (+) and No.9 (-)
supported, and rotate one ofthe terminals:
front wheels slowly with the There should be 0-5 V or more
other wheel blocked. and 0-5 V or more repeatedly.
16 lTBlU Under all conditions Check for continuity between
the No. 16 terminal and the
No.2 terminal of the
combination switch control unit
8P connector:

I.!!!:..I
Faulty PCM
An open in the wire
A short to ground
An open in the wire
5. Reconnect the connector, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the headlight leveling control unit.
NOTE: After replacing the control unit, do the headlight initial position learning procedure (see page 22-231).
9 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G401)
There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
3 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G401)
4 lTGRN There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
12 BLU
8 RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage between Blown No.3 (10 A) fuse in the main
the No.8 terminal and body under-hood fuse box
ground: A short to ground
There should be battery voltaae.
1 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 31 (15 A) fuse in the under-
There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
2 BlU Ignition switch ON (II), headlight Measure the voltage between Faulty headlight leveling motor
3 GRN switch ON the No.2 and No.3 terminals: An open in the wire
There should be
11 BRN Ignition switch ON (II), headlight Measure the voltage between Faulty headlight leveling motor
3 GRN switch ON the No. 11 and No.3 terminals: An open in the wire
There should be about 2 to 12 V.
6 PUR Under all conditions Measure the voltage between Faulty left-front suspension stroke
12 BlU the No. 13 and No. 12 sensor
13 PNK terminals: An open in the wire
There should be about 5 V.
Measure the voltage between
the No.6 and No. 12
terminals:
There should be about 0.5 to
4.5V.
4 lTGRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage between Faulty left-rear suspension stroke sensor
5 RED the No.5 and No.4 terminals: An open in the wire
7 lTBlU There should be about 5 V.
Measure the voltage between
the No.7 and No.4 terminals:
There should be about 0.5 to
4.5V.
22-227
BACK
Headlight Leveling Motor Input Test
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the headlight leveling motor (B).
B
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals are OK, go to step 4. .
4. Reconnect the connector to the headlight leveling motor, and make these input tests at the connector.
If any tests indicate a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the headlight leveling motor (see page 22-230).
obtained
1 BRN Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty headlight leveling control
ON (II) There should be about 2-12 V. unit
NOTE: Depending on the An open in the wire
headlight leveling position.
2 GRN Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty headlight leveling control
ON (II) There should be less than 1 V. unit
An open in the wire
3 BLU Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty headlight leveling control
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. unit
An open in the wire
22-228
BACK
Suspension Stroke Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
Right side of suspension stroke sensor for active
damper system is the same procedure as left side
suspension stroke sensor.
After install the rear suspension stroke sensor, do the
memorizing rear suspension full rebound position
(see page 18-54).
supported.
suspension stroke sensor (B) ..
LEFT-FRONT
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
Replace.
LEFT-REAR
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
Replace,
A
B
A
B
r--:'I
I.!!!!.I
3. Remove the bolt and nut, then remove the
5. After installing, do the headlight initial position
learning procedure (see page 22-231).
22-229
BACK
Headlight Leveling Motor Replacement
Removal
2. Turn the headlight leveling motor (A) 45
0
counterclockwise.
B
3. Turn the adjuster (8) ofthe headlight leveling
motor until the headlight leveling motor shaft (C) is
removed from the headlight.
22-230
Installation
1. Insert the headlight leveling motor shaft (A) into the
headlight housing, then turn the adjuster (8) until
the shaft connects to the headlight.
2. Turn the headlight leveling motor (C) 45 clockwise
to install to the headlight.
3. Tighten the adjuster until fully it is secure, but do
not over tighten, then back it off 9 turns.
4. Insert the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
5. After installing, do the headlight leveling motor
22-231)
BACK
Headlight Initial Position Learning Procedure
Do the headlight initial position learning when any of the related parts of the headlight auto leveling system shown is replaced:
Headlight
HID unit
Left-front suspension stroke sensor
Left-rear suspension stroke sensor
Headlight leveling motor
Headlight auto leveling control unit
Learning Procedure
Before learning the headlights:
2. Remove all of the baggage from the vehicle.
3. Slide the front seats backward fully.
4. Have the driver (about 165 Ib (75 kg)) or someone who weighs the same sit in the driver's seat.
8. Within 5 seconds, turn the headlights (low beam) or passing switch ON and OFF three times repeatedly, and leave them on .
r--:'I
I..!!!..I
If the headlights aiming move down (about 2 in. at 10 feet), then return to the original position, the initial position learning is complete .
If the headlights aiming don't move, go to step 1 and repeat the procedure.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the data link connector.
10. Adjust the headlight aim to conform with the applicable requirements.
ON
SCSShort
OFF
Vehicle Speed
Okm/h
(0 mph) :
ON
,
~ n t o n
,
witch
,
OFF
,
i
,
: {Within 5 sac.J: ,
,
,"
-, ,
ON
,
, ,
Headlights
,
' oon Oil
,
(or Passing)
OFF
.,
,
Learning
RMemOry
(Within 0.2 sec.)
,
Headlights
Original
___________ U
Position
Aiming Down
22-231
BACK
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Circuit Diagram
without navigation models
'.
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGMTION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BAmRY
+
22-232
No.1 (BAT) (120 AI No.3 IIGII50 AI
---&-
A6
No.21(7.5A1
,...,
WHT PNK
IGI
No.4 (40 A)
IGI HOT In ONIIII and
No.7 (lOA)
START(ID) B4
CENTER'
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
y
GRN
B3
Fl
B13
BLK
G501
I
,...,
WHT
HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH UGHT
AUDIO UNIT
ArrGEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
PANELUGHT
POWER MIRROR
SWITCHUGHT
STEERING
SWITCHES UGHT
MOONROOF
SWITCHUGHT
y
RED
B2 GAUGE CONTRDL MODULE
=It-
I MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (MID)
I'
POWER SUPPI. Y CIRCUIT/CONTROllER
AREA NElWORK CONTROlleR

J

-YY'f"
A2 B12 Bl1
. INtERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
BLK ORN WHT
y
LTBLU
, IlllUMI
'(f)
' IlllUMI
'8
UGHT
(lEDx2)
RED
BlK

1
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
G501 G501
(lnlbegauge
conlrlll modulo)
().
I
X35 X34
WHT VEL
AI A7
n
..
....
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROlleR
BACK
r:-:'I

Dash Lights Brightness Controller Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument fascia (see page 20-118).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the dash
lights brightness controller (8).
3. Remove the two screws and the dash lights
brightness controller.
terminals.
There should be continuity when the ILLUMI (-)
button is pressed.
There should be no continuity when the ILLUMI
(-) button is released.
terminals.
There should be continuity when the ILLUMI (+)
button is pressed.
There should be no continuity when the ILLUMI
(+) button is released.
6. If the continuity is as not specified, replace the
controller.
7. Check the LED by connecting battery power to No.
1 terminal and ground to No.2 terminal. The LED
should come on.
8. If the LED does not work; replace the dash lights
brightness controller assembly.
22-233
BACK
Interior Lights
DRIVER'S FOOTWELL LIGHT
22-234
DRIVER'S VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
ROOF CONSOLE
(Has built in the interior light
switch and the ambient lights)
Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement,
page 22-239
AMBIENT LIGHTS
Test, page 22-243
PASSENGER'S VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
AMBIENT LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S FOOTWELL LIGHT
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT
BACK
MICU
Input Test,
page 22-248
Replacement,
page 22-72
DRIVER'S DOOR
COURTESY LIGHT
Replacement,
page 22-242
~
0000
100000 DID
o 00000011:
0
D
00 0 00 ~
1000001 ]
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-77
Test/Replacement,
page 22-240
FRONT PASSENGER'S
COURTESY LIGHT
Replacement,
page 22-242
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
REAR CEILING LIGHT
Test/Replacement
page 22-241
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Test/Replacement,
page 22-241
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
REARMICU
page 22-526
Latch Switch Test,
page 22-244
22-235
BACK
Interior Lights
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDSI-HOOD RISE BOX UNDBI-DASH RJ5E/RELAV BOX
BAmRV
NoAl40AI
B4
No.7110Al
WHT
..
No.llBAlll120Al NoJIRRFIBJIIIOAI

GAN
r-.
t
"e
1O
D13 WI
RED WHT
LJ
t INlERIOR
LIGHT
REAR
RaAV
FUSE/RELAV
Y
BOX
LTBLU WHT
3 1 ROOFCONSOLE
AlONT
INDIVIDUAL
MAP LIGHTS
7
(

(

....
"'
,
HOMEUNK
LIGHTS

6
IN1ERIOR
11
LIGHTS
I
AMBIENTLIGHTS SWITCH
C

(
DOl Off" ON ON
LIGHT DOOR 1'1
-
7 4 5 2
RED RED PNK BLJ(
I
I

RED

DASH LIGHTS MICU
BRIGHTNESS
CONIROLCIRCUIT
Ilnthesouge
,cm1rClmodule)
GIIOI

REAR INDIVIDUAL
MAPLIGHTS
GAY
WHT WHT WHT
BLJ(
REAR
CEWNG
LIGHT
2

WHT

CLOSE
2 DRIVER'S 2 PASSENGBI'S
VANlTVMIRROR VANnYMIRROR
LIGHT LIGHT

1 1
GIIOI G&01
BACK
X22
WHT
(

GRY
I
IN1B!IOR
lIGHT
RELAY
Y
LTBLU
I
LTBlU
DRlVER'S
FOOTWEIl
lIGHT
13.4W)
t!;,\ GlOVE
W)
i'-?PEN
CLOSE
BlX
1
G501
I I
J.N34
.J.
N3G
X7 NI5
WHT WHT
LJ
7
IGNmoN
KEYUGHT
PASSENGER'S
(

FOOTWEll
UGHT
13.4W)
GRY
I
I
LTBlU
I DRIVER'S
AMBIENT
LIGHT
RED IlEDl
I
I
LTBlU
GRY
POWER
WINDOW
MASTER
SWITCH
PASSENGER'S
AMBIENT
UGHT
RED IlEDl
I
RED
7
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CUlCUIT
llnthagauge
con1roImocIuIe)

:CAN6ne
............ ,UARTIin.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
; .................................................................. : )
! .............................................. ; i
J4 : J1 K5
GRY
....
IN

DOOR
COUImSY
lIGHT
2 13.4W)
LTGRN GRY WHT BRN PNK
: A28 : AS B8 A27 AI5
B CAN UART VBU 111+
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
A5 BI4
BlX BLK
1 1
G501 G501
BRN
7
, DRIVER'S
DOOR
POWER
TAfi.GATE
SWITCH/
FUElRll
DOOR
OPENER
SWITCH
UGHT
DRiVER'S
DOOR
LOCK
SWITCH
UGHT
: XI5 X35

2
GRY WHT BRN VEL
: A4 A2 AI9 Ail
UART VBU 111+
Al
BlX
1
G506
(cant'd)
22-237
BACK
Interior Lights
RJSE/RELAY BOX : CAN line
@ ....................................................................... 6.
1

UNDER-DASH
RJSEJRElAYBOX
E15
GRN
1 DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITQI
(Closed:
Dooropenl
22-238
H12
LTGAN
1 FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITQI
(Closed:
Dooropen)
G2
WHT
VEL
Q7
Q8
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
COURIESY
LIGHT
(3.4WJ
MICU
E4
WHT
PNK
OJ
Q2
GRN GAY
1 LEFT 1 RIGHT
REAR REAR
DOOR
,
ODOR
SwntH SWITQI
(Closed: (Closed :
Dooropenl Dooropenl
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
COURTESY
LIGHT
(3.4 WI
.
No.3(RRFIBI
160AIRJSE
7
LTGAN REO WHT
A2 C24
B-CAN

.. _-
POWER
TAiLGAlE
CONTROL
UNIT
:T-"-y
I LTGAN LTGRN
I I
LTGAN
GRN
7
POWER
TAILGAlE
CONTROL
UNIT
RJLL
LATCH
SWITCH
IWrth powertaUgatel
CLOSER
UNIT
RED
I
RED
RIGHT
CARGO
AREA
LIGHT
15W1
LTGAN

CB REAR RJSE/RELAY BOX :82
REARMICU
C6
_ ..
f-- .. _ .. ,
LTGRN
2 TAiLGAlE
LATCH
SWITCH
(aoied:
1 T,Ugate_1
BLK
1

B-CAN
B18 829
BLK BLK
.. _ .. G604
GOO3
BACK
Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully pull down the roof console (A).
B
2. Disconnect the 20P connector (B) from the roof console.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each interior light switch position according to the table.
NOTE:
Before testing, check the front individual map light bulb(s) .
r--:'I

When check for continuity across the diode, use the diode setting (-.r-) on the digital volt/ohm meter to check
the diode bias.

Terminal
'\
1 2 5 6 11
Position
OFF
0
...
-0
""
..
0

-0
OFF (Front map
""
1 light switch ON) ...
-0
--..
Middle (DOOR) position
0
..
,.....
-0
""
..
'-'
ON
0
... r'. A
D >.::./
-p
'-'
'-../
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the roof console as an assembly.
22-239
BACK
Interior Lights
Front Individual Map Light
Replacement
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
Front Map Light: 5 W x 2
B
2. Check the bulb(s) (8). If the bulb is OK, but there is a
malfunction, check the interior light switch
(see page 22-239).
22-240
Rear Individual Map Light Test/
Replacement
1. Turn the ceiling light switch OFF.
screwdriver.
Map Light: 6.2 W X 2
B
3. Remove the two mounting screws.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (8) from the housing
(C).
5. Check for continuity between the terminals .
and No.3 terminals with the left switch ON .
and No.2 terminals with the right switch ON.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the
bulb(s) (D). If the bulbs are OK, replace the light.
BACK
Rear Ceiling Light Test/
Replacement
1. Turn the light switch OFF.
screwdriver.
Ceiling Light: 8 W
3. Remove the two mounting screws.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing
(C).
switch position according to the table .
and No.3 terminals with the switch in the
MIDDLE position .
and No.1 terminals with the switch in the ON
position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb
(D). If the bulb is OK, replace the light.

I!::..I
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
2. Carefully pry out the cargo area light (A).
Cargo Area Light: 5 W
B
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.
terminals. There should be continuity. Ifthere is no
continuity, check the bulb (C). 1ft he bulb is OK,
replace the trunk light.
22-241
BACK
Interior Lights
Courtesy. Light Replacement
screwdriver.
Courtesy Light: 2 CP
2. Pry out the housing (B) from the door, then
disconnect the 2P connector (C).
3. Remove the bulb (0) from the socket.
22-242
Glove Box Light Replacement
1. Remove the glove box stops and damper (see page
20-125).
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45counterclockwise to
remove it.
Glove Box Light: 3.4 W
3. Remove the bulb (B) from the, socket.
BACK
Vanity Mirror light Test/
Replacement
1. Open the sunvisor ..
2. Remove the sunvisor (see page 20-98).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the vanity
mirror light.
Vanity Mirror Light: 2 W
B
o
c
terminals .
With the vanity mirror cover (8) opened, there
should be continuity .
With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should
be no continuity.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the lens
(C) and replace the bulb (D) or the sunvisor.
Ambient light Test
r--:'I
1.=:.1
1. Carefully pull down the roof console and
disconnect the 20P connector (A).
B
2. Connect the roof console connector terminal No.3
to battery power and terminal No.7 to body ground.
The ambient lights (8) should turn on. If they do not
turn on, replace the roof console.
22-243
BACK
Interior Lights
Footwell Light Test/Replacement
1. Carefully pry out the footweillight lens (A) and
housing (8).
Footwell Light: 5 W
1+1
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the light.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 1(+) and
No.2 (-) terminals. There should be continuity. If
there is no continuity, check the bulb (C). Ifthe bulb
is OK, replace the footwell light.
22-244
Tailgate Latch Switch Test
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the tailgate latch
switch.
CiO
terminals .
With the tailgate open, there should be continuity.
With the tailgate closed, there should be no
continuity.
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the latch
assembly.
BACK
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-254
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-254
r--:'I
I.!!!!..I
MICU
(Built into the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
Input Test,
page 22-248
Replacement,
page 22-72
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY
CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
KNOB WITCH
Test, page 22-173
Test/Replacement,
page 22-240
REARMICU
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
REAR CEILING LIGHT
Test/Replacement,
page 22-241
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
page 22-526
Latch Switch Test,
page 22-244
22-245
BACK
, .,
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNmON SWITCH
No.lIBATlIl20AI No.3 (lG1I50AI BAT A6 No.21 17.5 AI

BATIERY -@-
IGI
IGI HOT in ON 1111
No.4 140 AI
and START 11111
B4
No.7 110 AI

SG2 PGl SGI PG2
I
PI Q4
E9 H9
BlK BlK BRN BLK
GOOl GOOl G502 G601
22-246
MAP
L1Gms
CEIUNG
LIGHTS
f
lTGRN
W4
No.B 120 AI

N30 X7 N15
;fT LJT
:::moo
LIGHT
-4 ILEDI
'-+-
5
ORN
F14
+B
DRLOCK
VBU
MICU
IGKEY
SW
P13
PNK
IGNmoN
, KEY SWITCH
IClosed:
2 Key Insertedl
BLK
1
G601
I
E15
GRN
DRIVER'S'
DOOR SWITCH
IClosed:
Dooropenl
I
H12
LTGRN
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
IClosed:
Dooropenl
08
GRN
LEFT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
IClosed :
Dooroponl
IGI B-CAN
02
GRY
RIGmREAR
DOOR SWITCH
IClosed:
Door oponl
BACK
KS
WHT
A7
VBU
AS
BLK
G601
: CAN II""
.............................................................
J9
VEL LTGRN
A25 AlB
IGl B-CAN
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
LOCK UNLOCK
B14 A23 A24 A27
PNK RED BRN
4 3 S
DRIVER'S
DOOR
, .
LOCK UN-
LOCK
LOCK
SWITCH
BLK
G601
:X27
LTGRN
B-CAN
IMMOBIUZER-
KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
TRANSMITTER

REAR
G3
WHT
B4
VBU
C6
Fl Gl
YEL LT RN
B23 B2
IGl B-CAN
REARMICU
B18 829
FUSE/RELAY
POWER
TAILGATE
CONTROL
FULL
LATCH
SWITCH
CLOSER
UNIT
BOX
UNIT :
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. .J
power tang ate!
1"-
-"-"-1
i
LTGRN
1
TAILGATE
LATCH
SWITCH
(Closed:
Tangale open!
I
BLK BLK
.. _ .. j G604 G603
IWithout power tailgate!
r:'I
l.=:.I
22 .. 247
BACK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76).
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, H, P, Q, and W.
CONNECTOR E (16P)
7 BRN
CONNECTOR P (30P)
16
BLK GRN
VEL CONNECTOR F (14P)
CONNECTOR Q (14P)
5
GRV BLK
" I
ru : I : bwl%Bj
I
14
'\
ORN
CONNECTOR G (6P)
GRN

CONNECTOR W (5P)
I
WHT
CONNECTOR H (14P)
\
LTGRN
BLK LTGRN
22-248
BACK
r:'I
~
4. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connectors .
E9 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
H9 There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
04
P1 BRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502)
There should be less than 0.5 V. An ooen in the wire
P13 PNK Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
into the ianition switch There should be less than 1 V. An ooen in the wire
Ignition switch OFF and Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
the ignition key There should be more than 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
removed from the
ianition switch
E15 GRN Driver's door open Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 1 V. An ooen in the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver'S door switch
H12 LT Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door switch
GRN ooen There should be less than 1 V. An o ~ n in the wire
Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door switch
closed There should be more than 5 V. A short to around in the wire
Q2 GRY Right rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
Right rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
There should be more than 5 V. A short to around in the wire
08 GRN Left rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door switch
F14 ORN Under all conditions Attach to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
The ignition key light should come ur';der-hood fuse box
on. Blown No.6 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
An ooen in the wire
W4 LT Under all conditions Attach to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
GRN (Interior lights switch in The ignition lights should come on. under-hood fuse box
DOOR position) Blown No.6 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
Blown map lights or ceiling light
bulb(s)
An ooen in the wire
(cont'd)
22-249
BACK
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
7. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) and C (42P).
CONNECTOR B (34P)
WHT BLK
/
/

,
m
,
1 2 3 4

9 10
1/ 1/1/
18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 r32 33 34
4 4
/
/
VEL
BLK
CONNECTOR C (42P)
. LTGRN
/

V
10 111 12113
15
16 17
;/
19 20 21
32 33
34 35
36 37
i/ 39 40 41
22-250
BACK
r--:'I
.I.!!:.J
B18 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (GS03, GS04)
B29 There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
B4 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
dash fuse/relay box
An ooen in the wire
B23 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
An ooen in the wire
CS IT Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G702)
GRN There should be less than 1 V. Faulty tailgate latch switch
An ooen in the wire
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty tailgate latch switch
There should be more than 5 V. A short to Qround in the wire
: Without power tailgate
(cont'd)
22-251
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit
12. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit connections.
CONNECTOR A (40P)
PNK RED VEL
8
CONNECTOR B (14P)
7
14
\
BLK
22-252
BACK
A23 PNK Driver's door lock Check for continuity:
switch in lOCK There should be continuity.
A27 BRN Driver's door lock Check for continuity:
switch in neutral or There should be no continuity.
UNLOCK
A24 RED Driver's door lock Check for continuity:
switch in UNLOCK There should be continuity.
A27 BRN Driver's door lock Check for continuity:
switch in neutral or There should be no continuity.
lOCK
A5 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
B14 There should be less than 0.5 V.
A7 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be battery voltage.
A25 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground:
r--:'I

Faulty driver's door lock switch
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Ashort to ground in the wire
Poor ground (G601)
An ooen in the wire
Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
under-hood fuse box
. dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
dash fuse/relay box
An ooen in the wire
16. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU) (see page 22-72). If
input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
22-253
BACK
Entry. Lights Control System
Ignition Key Switch Test
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
covers (see page 20-129).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A).
A
3. Check for coptirwitybetweenthe No.1 and No.2
terminals.
There sh<;>uld be co,ntinuity with the key in the
ignition switch. .
There should be no continuity with the key
removed.'
ignition switch.
22.:254
Ignition Key Light Test
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
covers (see page 20-129).
\ ~ ~ B
A
I-I 1+1
3. The LED (8) should come on when power is
connected to the No.6 terminal and ground is
connected to No.5 terminal.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition
switch.
BACK
HomeLink Remote Control System
r:-:'I
. . ~
Circuit Diagram
No.4 (40 AI
UNDER-DASH
RISE/RELAY BOX
Xl0 D13
WIlT
ROOF CONSOLE

HOMEUNK
UNIT
G801
..
WIlT
B4
No.6
(7.5 AI
Wl
PUR'
INTERIOR
LIGHT
RELAY
Y
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
(I.thegoup
control modulel
LIGHT
Test
Turn on the front individual map lights atthe interior
light switch ON position.
o If the front individual map lights come on, the
Homelink's power and ground circuits are OK. Ifthe
Homelink will not open the client's garage door,
check that the Homelink is programmed properly
(see the owner's manual) or call Homelink at
800-355-3515. On the internet, go to www. homelink.
com.
o If the front individual map lights do not come on,
check for these problems:
- A blown No.6 (7.5 A)fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
- A faulty under-dash fuse/relay box.
- An open in the WHT wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and roof console.
- An open in the BLK wire between the roof console
and G601. ,
22-255
BACK
".
Power Windows
22-256
"1
LEFT REAR POWER
WINDOW SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-287
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-284
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-285
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-286
POWER WINDOW RELAY
Test, page 22-77
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
RIGHT REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-286
BACK
DRIVER'S DOOR
\
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Test, page 22-287

l!:=..I
22-257
BACK
Power Windows
System Description
Anti-pinch Power Window Operation
The system is composed of the driver's MPCS unit, passenger's MPCS unit, power window master switch, passenger's
switches, and power window motors.
The power window motor incorporates a pulser which generates pulses during the motor's operation and sends
pulses to the driver's and passenger's MPCS units. As soon as the power window control unit detects a change in the
pulse frequency from the pulser, the power window control unit makes the power window motor stop and reverse.
This is prevent pinching your hand or fingers during auto-up operation.
Sensor
Key Cylinder Operation
HALLICUNIT
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
~ 1 i 9
MAGNET ug--
Period of
pulses
Period of
pulses
:.- Position when something
~
; is inched
Period of :
pulses :
Threshold value for
judgment of pinching
With the key inserted in the driver's door key cylinder, turn the key a second time within 15 seconds and hold it to
operate the windows and moonroof (clockwise to open, counterclockwise to close). The windows and moonroof stop
moving when the key is released. The anti-pinch operation is not active when closing the windows and moonroof with
the key cylinder.
Keyless Operation
By pressing and holding the UNLOCK button of the keyless transmitter a second time within 15 seconds, the windows
and moonroof open. The windows and moonroof stop moving when the UNLOCK button is released. The windows do
not close with the LOCK button.
22-258
BACK
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
Resetting the power windows are required when any of the following have occurred:
Power window regulator replacement or repair Door glass replacement or repair
~
~
Power window motor replacement or repair
Window run channel replacement
- Driver's MPCS unit replacement
Power is removed from the driver's or passenger's MPCS unit
while the power window timer is ON.
- Passenger's MPCS unit replacement or repair
NOTE: If the passenger's window has lost power when the key off timer is ON, it cannot be operated from the r i v e r ~ s
switch and must be reset from the passenger's power window switch.
Using the HOS
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts.
3. Select "BODY ELECTRICAL" from the "SYSTEM SELECT' menu.
4. From the "BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT" menu, select "POWER WINDOWS" ..
5. From the "MODE" menu, select "ADJUSTMENTS".
6. From the "ADJUSTMENT" menu, select "WINDOW P RESET" for driver's side (passenger's side) window.
7. Follow the prompts on the screen.
8. Confirmthat the power window control unit is reset by using the window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN function.
(cont'd)
22-259
BACK
Power Windows
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit (cont'd)
Without the HOS
NOTE: Do each bullet in step 4 within 5 seconds of each other.
2. Move the window all the way down by using the window DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's door.
4. Do the following 3 times before going to step 5:
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Push and hold the window DOWN switch.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Release the window DOWN switch.
5. Confirm that AUTO UP no longer works. If AUTO UP still works, go back to step 1.
6. Move the window all the way down using the window DOWN switch.
7. Pull up and hold the window UP switch until the window is all the way up, then continue to hold the switch for 1
second.
8. Confirm that the power window control unit is reset by using the window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN function.
If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the
5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page
22-112).
NOTE: The passenger's window must be rest from the passenger's power window switch.
22-260
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH
TTERY
No.1 (BAT) (120A) No.3 (lG){50 A)
+
BA
---&-
A6
PNK
IGI
WHT
No.4 (40A)
IGI HOT in ON (U) and START (III)
54
WHT
No.3 (PfW) (50 A)

B5
ORN
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
UP <> DOWN <> SVCC PLSA SGNO PLSB
B14 A5 B7 Bl
BLU VEL
6 3
B3 B5 B6 54
PNK GRY WHT BRN
1 4 2 5
PULSER
No24 (20A)
FUSE
r
RED
Is
--,
r--:'I
a=.J
: CAN line
No21 (7.5A)
No.7 (lOA)
No27

{3D A)
B-CAN

K4 K5 J9 : J4

WHT WHT YEL LTGRN
B8 A7 A25 :A28
VMP VBU IGI B-CAN
RRL RRL
SUBSW SUBSW
DOWN UP
A32 A3
11': 'j:'
I
UNDER-DASH
L-.t--------+-......I. FUSE/RELAY BOX
Ell
-
B
VEL ORN LEFT REAR POWER
4 11 WINDOW SWITCH
,0-...0,
\ ,0-

DOWN:: '. UP : :
:
'- -- -------
___ J
!--
LIGHT
(LED)
\
BLK BLK
......
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR

r

GOOl GOOl
1 .... .... 1
l'"'" "l
1 7 4
BLU ORN BLK
L-I -41f--;crD----@-+ll----111
LEFT REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR GOOl
(cont'd)

BACK
Power Windows
\
@-----------------------------------------------------------
POWER WINDOW RELAY
-,.- No.25 120 A)

No.24 120 A)
_ "V no.
........................................................................................ , .............................................................................. .
GRY
GRY GRY
22-262
B9
LTGRN
RLY RLY
COIL OUT
BID B12
PUR ORN
J8
WHT
A39
P/WRLY
CL-
DRIVER'S
DOWN
El Hll
RED PUR
t
LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
POWER WINDOW POWER WINDOW
UPSW
B2
GRN
SWITCH
DRIVER'S MPCS UNrr
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOWN UP AUTO
CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MASTER swrrCH
LEFT
REAR
DOWN UP
RIGHT
REAR
DOWN UP
MAIN
SwrrCH
SG
B13
RED
BACK
UNDER-DASH FUSI:/RELAY BOX
1
,
~
~ .
No.2&
(lOA)
G
UGHT
(LED)
1111 ......................................................
: X15 X37 X35 10
GRY
: .. .... GRY .. GRN 111 IT
1111""
VL
. .
. .
V
,
GRY
MOONROOF
: A4 B8 A2 A24 B9
UART VBU
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
AUTO UP
: :
,
,
8 5
.............. :UARTline
14
DOWN
,
-------.
12 7 3
~
I.!:!..I
LTaW
\'lin'
aN a;K GRN 110
B2 a13 all A22 a12 al0
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT RRR RRR
UP <> OOWN <> SVCC PLSA SGND PLSB
a14 A7 a7 al B3 B5 B6 B4
BW lIED GRN LT RN GRY ORN
1 4 6 3 5 ' 2
~ - - - - - - PULSER
BLK 8LK
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WlNOOW MOTOR
-'
I.... ....!o.t...
G507 G506
suasw suasw
DOWN UP
A3 A28
No.25(20A)
FUSE
r
VEL ORN
pre RIGHT REAR POWER
4 11 WINDOW SWITCH
,Ir
,o-k:>. .,0-
~ r-
DOWN,',' \
UP " "
G

, ,
,
,
,
,--- -------
___ J
11
-
UGHT
(LEDI
~ , ~ - - - -
~ - - - ~ . ) A A ~
1
1
lIED
I
3
1 .1

cfO.-..@
RIGHT REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
7 14
BLU 8LK
6
I
1
G606
22-263
BACK
P,ower Windows
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 82175: Driver's Power Window Motor
Pulse A Error
3. Open and close the driver's power window by
using the power window master switch manually.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Open and close tl:1e driver's power window by
Does the window motor operate?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Test the driver'S power window motor
(see page 22-284) .
6. Select the POWER WINDOWS from the BODY
ELECTRICAL system select menu and enter the
DATA LIST.
7. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the Driver's
window motor A-phase pulse signal in the DATA
LIST.
Does the information indicator' display DETECT
while the window is moving, and display NONE
when the window is stopped?
NO-Go to step 8.
22-264
/s DTC 82176 a/so indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9 .
10. Disconnect the 14P connector from the driver's
MPCS unit.
power window motor.
12. Check for continuity between driver's MPCS unit
connector B (14P) No.5 terminal and driver's
power window motor 6P connector No.4 terminal.
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
2 3
456
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire.
BACK
13. Check for continuity between driver's power
window motor 6P connector No.4 terminal and
body ground.
2 3
456
PLSA(GRY)
=
YES-:-Repair short in the wire ..
NO-Replace the driver's power window .
14. Testthe driver's power window motor (see page
22-284).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the driver's MPCS unit..
NO-Replace the driver's power window motor .
15. Check for continuity between the driver's MPCS
unit connector B (14P) No.3 and No.6 terminals
and the driver's power window motor 6P connector
No.1 and No.2 terminals respectively.
SVCC (PNK) SGND (WHTJ
YES-Go to step 16.
r--:'I

16. Check for continuity between the driver's power'
body ground.
.Q
=
SVCC(PNK)
2 3
456
22-265
BACK
Power Windows
DTC 82176: Driver's Power Window Motor
Pulse B Error
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Test the driver's power window motor
(see page 22-284) .
DATA LIST.
7. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the Driver's
window motor B-phase pulse signal in the DATA
LIST.
Does the information indicator display DETECT
NO-Go to step 8.
22-266
Is DTC 82175 also indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
MPCS unit.
power window motor.
connector B (14P) No.4 terminal and driver's
power window motor 6P connector No.5 terminal.
2 3
456
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
13. Check for continuity between driver's power
body ground.
YES-Repair short in the wire .
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Test the driver's power window motor (see page
22-284).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the driver's MPCS unit..
unit connector B (14P) No.3 and No.6 terminals
and the driver's power window motor 6P connector
SVCC (PNK) SGND (WHT)
YES-Go to step 16.

t=:..I
16. Check for continuity between the driver's power
body ground.
SVCCIPNKj
2 3
456
=
22-267
BACK
Power Windows
DTC,B2177: Front Passenger's Power
Window Motor Pulse A Error
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, ,and then back ON (II).
3. Open and close the front passenger's power
window by using the front passenger's power
window switch manually.
YES-Go to step 5.
5., Open and close the driver's power window by
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Test the front passenger's power window
motor (see page 22-285) .
DATA LIST.
7. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the Front
passenger's window motor A-phase pulse signal in
the DATA LIST.
NO-Go to step 8.
22-268
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit connector B
(14P).
power windoV\( motor.
12. Check for continuity between front passenger's
MPCS unit connector B (14P) No.5 terminal and
front passenger's power window motor 6P
connector No.3 terminal.
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P
CONNECTOR
4
8 9 10 11 12 13
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B 114P)
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
power window motor 6P connector No.3 terminal
and body ground.
CONNECTOR
PLSA (L T GRN)
2 3
456
Q
=
NO-Goto step 14.
14. Test the front passenger's power window motor
(see page 22-285).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit .
NO-Replace the front passenger's power window
motor .

I.!!:.I
15. Check for continuity between the passenger's
MPCS unit connectorS (14P) No.3 and No.6
terminals and the front passenger's power window
motor 6P connector No.5 and No.6 terminals
respectively.
CONNECTOR
2 3
456
l--..Q:t:::;:::;:::::::;t:ll..r 7
8 14
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-Go to step 16.
16. Check for continuity between the front passenger's
and body ground.
CONNECTOR
2 3
456
=
motor .
22-269
BACK
Power, Windows
DTC B2178:Front Passenger's Power
Window Motor Pulse B Error
NOTE: If you aretroubleshooting ."ultiple DTCs, be
Diagnosis Test o d ~ A (see page 22-112).
1. Clear the DTC!:I with the HDS.
4. Check for OTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Test the front passenger's power window
motor (see page 22-285) .
ELECTRICAL system sel,ect menu and enter the
DATA LIST.
7. Check the DETECT/NONE information of the Front
passenger's window motor B-phase pulse signal in
the DATA LIST.
NO-Go to step 8.
22-270
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit connector B
(14P).
power window motor.
MPCS unit connector B (14P) No.4 terminal and
front passenger's power window motor 6P
CONNECTOR
PLSB(ORN)
,---P=t---...
2 3
456
7
8
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
and body ground.
CONNECTOR
PLSB (ORN)
2 3
456
Q
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Test the front passenger's power window motor
(see page 22-285).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit..
motor .
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
15. Check for continuity between the passenger's
MPCS unit connector B (14P) No.3 and No.6
terminals and the front passenger's power window
motor 6P connector No.5 and No.6 terminals
respectively.
CONNECTOR
2 3
456
YES-Go to step 16.
and body ground.
CONNECTOR
2 3
456
SVCC(GRN)
=
motor .
22-271
BACK
Power Windows
DTC 82187: Communication Line (UART Line)
Driver's MPCS Unit cannot send UART
messages.
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
(28P).
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Do the passenger's MPCS unit input test, step
No.6. If OK, replace the passenger's MPCS unit .
22-272
11. Disconnect the moon roof control unit/motor 10P
connector.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the moonroof control unit/motor .
(40P).
unit connector A (40P) No.8 terminal and body
ground.
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI
NO-Go to step 19.
BACK
20. Measure the voltage between the driver's MPCS
unit connector A (40P) No.8 terminal and body
ground.
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECrOR A 140P)
=
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire .
r--:'I
l!!::..I
22-273
BACK
Power Windows
OTC 82188: Communication Line (UART Line)
Driver's MPCS Unit cannot receive UART
messages from Pasenger's MPCS Unit.
3. Open and close the driver's and front passenger's
windows by operating the power window master
switch.
YES-Go to step 5.
time .
(40P).
(28P).
22-274
unit connector A (40P) No.8 terminal and the
passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P) No.4
terminal.
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
UART(GRY)
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
YES-Substitute a known-good driver's MPCS unit
and recheck. If the DTC goes away, replace the
original driver's MPCS unit. Ifthe DTC is still
present, replace the passenger's MPCS unit.
BACK
DTC 82189: Driver's Power Window Position
Detect Circuit Error
/5 DTC 82175 or 82176 a/so indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s) first..
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Reset the power window control unit (see page
22-259).
/5 DTC 82189 indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
r--:'I
L!!!:.I
11. Substitute a known-good driver's MPCS unit.
YES-Replace the driver's power window motor .
22-275
BACK
Po,wer Windows
DTC 82190: Front Passenger's Power
Window Position Detect Circuit Error
3. Open and close the front passenger's window by
using the front passenger's power window switch
manually.
/s DTC 82177 or 82178 a/so indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s) first .
NO-Go to step 5.
22-259).
YES-Go to step 10.
22-276
11. Substitute a known-good passenger's MPCS unit.
YES-Replace the front passenger's window motor.

BACK
DTC 82191: Passenger's MPCS Unit Internal
(EEPROM) Error
YES-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit .
time .
r--:'I
I..!!:.J
22-277
BACK
Power Windows
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test
3. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit (A) connectors A (40P) and B (14P).
CONNECTOR B (14P)
VEL GRN BRN WHT BLU
VEL VEL WHT
Wire side of
female terminals
Ifthe terminals look OK, Go to step 5.
22-278
BACK
5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector .
If all the input tests prove OK, Go to step 6.
A8 GRV Under-dash fuse/relay box Check for continuity between the A8
connector J (21 P) and power terminal and under-dash fuse/relay
window master switch connector box connector J (12P) No.1 terminal,
B (14P) disconnected and A8 terminal and power window
master switch connector B (14P)
No. 13terminal:
Check for continuity to ground:
There should be no continu_ity.
A3 ORN Connect the A39 terminal to body Check the left rear power window
ground, and connect the A3 and B motor operation:
8 terminals with a jumper wire. The motor should run (the power
window should ao up).
A32 VEL Connect the A39 terminal to body Check the left rear power window
ground, and connect the A32 and motor operation:
B8 terminals with a jumper wire. The motor should run (the power
window should go down).
B1 VEL Connect the B8.and B1. terminals, Check the driver's power window
and the B7 and B14 terminals with motor operation:
jumper wires. The motor should run (the power
window should go down).
B7 BLU Connect the B8 and B7terminals, Check the driver's power window
and.theB1 and B14 terminals with motor operation:
window should ao up).
B9 LTGRN Driver's power window switch in Check for continuity between the

UP position terminals:
B2 GRN There should be continuity.
Driver's power window switch Check for continuity between the
released terminals:
B10 PUR Under all condition (except Check for continuity between the

pressing the driver's power terminals:
B12 ORN window switch DOWN position) There should be continuffii.
Driver's power window switch in Check for continuity between the
DOWN position terminals:
B10 PUR Driver's power window switch in Check for continuity between the

DOWN position terminals:
B13 RED There should be continuity.
Driver's power window switch Check for continuity between the
released terminals:

Possible cause if result is not
obtained
An open in the wire
Short to ground in the wire
Blown No.3 (P/W) (50 A) fuse in
the main under-hood fuse box
Faulty power window relay
An oeen in the wire
Blown No. 24 (20 A) fuse in the
Poor ground (G601)
Faulty power window relay
Faulty left rear power window
switch
Faulty left rear power window
motor
An open in the wire
Faulty driver's power window
motor
An open in the wire
Faulty power window master
switch
An open in the wire
switch
switch
An oeen in the wire
switch
A short to around in the wire
switch
An open in the wire
switch
(cont'd)
22-279
BACK
Power Windows
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test (cont'd)
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
o If all the input tests prove OK, replace the driver's MPCS unit, then go to step 7.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result, is not
obtained
A5 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G601)
B14 There should be less than 0.5 V. o An ooen in the wire
A7 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: o Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. main under-hood fuse box
o Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
o Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
o An ooen in the wire
B8 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: o Blown No.3 (P/W) (50 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the main under-hood fuse box
o Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the
o An open in the wire
A25 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: o Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
B3 PNK
,
Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's MPCS unit
There should be battery_voltaae. o An ooen in the wire
B4 BRN Ignition switch ON (II), and driver's Measure the voltage between the B4 o Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the
power window motor runs by and B6 terminals: under-dash fuse/relay box
connecting the B8 and B1 There should be O-about 5 V - 0- o Faulty driver's MPCS unit
terminals and the B7 and B14 about 5 V repeatedly o Faulty driver's power window
terminals with jumper wires. (a digital voltmeter reads about 2.5 V motor
while the oower window moves). o An open in the wire
B5 GRV Ignition switch ON (II), and driver's Measure the voltage between the B5 o Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the
power window motor runs by and B6 terminals: under-dash fuse/relay box
connecting the B8 and B1 There should be O-about 5 V - 0- o Faulty driver's MPCS unit
terminals and the B7 and B14 about 5 V repeatedly o Faulty driver's power window
terminals with jumper wires. (a digital voltmeter reads about 2.5 V motor
while the power window moves). o An ooen in the wire
B6 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (G601)
There should be continuity. o Faulty driver's MPCS unit
.
o An ooen in the wire
B9 lTGRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's MPCS unit
There should be battery voltage. o Faulty power window master
switch
o A short to ground in the wire
7. Reset the power window control unit (see page 22-259).
22-280
BACK
Passenger's MPCS Unit Input Test
2. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page 20-8).
3. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit (A) connectors A (28P) and B (14P).
A
CONNECTOR A (28P)
WHT VEL GRV BLK
GRN RED BRN GRN WHT BLK
CONNECTOR B (14P)
r--:'I

Wire side of
female terminals
(cont'd)
22-281
BACK
Power Windows
Passenger's MPCS Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector .
obtained
A4 GRY Under-dash fuse/relay box Check for continuity between the A4 An open in the wire
connector X (39P) and moonroof terminal and under-dash fuse/relay
control unit/motor 10P connector box connector X (39P) No. 15
disconnected terminal:
Check for continuity to ground: Short to ground in the wire
A3 YEL Ignition switch ON (II), connect the Check the right rear power window Blown No. 26 (30 A) fuse in the
A3 and B8 terminals with a jumper motor operation: under-dash fuse/relay box
wire. The motor should run (the power Poor ground (G606)
window should ao down). Faulty power window relay
A28 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), connect the Check the right rear power window Faulty right rear power window
A28 and B8 terminals with a motor operation: switch
jumper wire. The motor should run (the power Faulty right rear power window
window should go up). motor
An ooen in the wire
B1 RED Connectthe B8 and B1 terminals, Check the front passenger's power Blown No. 26 (30 A) fuse in the
and the B7 and B14 terminals with window motor operation: under-dash fuse/relay box
jumper wires. The motor should run (the power Faulty front passenger's power
window should ao down). window motor
B7 BLU Connect the B8 and B7 terminals, Check the front passenger's power An open in the wire
and the B1 and B14 terminals with window motor operation:
window should go up).
A24 WHT Front passenger's power window Check for continuity between the Faulty passenger's power window

switch in AUTO position terminals: switch
B2 LTBLU There should be continuity. An open in the wire
Front passenger's power window Check for continuity between the Faulty passenger's power window
switch released terminals: switch
There should be no continuity. A short to around in the wire

switch in DOWN position terminals: switch
B11 BRN There should be continuity. An open in the wire

switch in UP position terminals: switch
B13 WHT There should be continuity. An open in the wire
There should be no continuity. A short to around in the wire
A22 BLK Front passenger's power window Check for continuity between the Faulty passenger's power window

B10 RED There should be continuity. An open in the wire
B10 RED Under all condition (except Check for continuity between the Faulty passenger's power window

pressing the front passenger's terminals: switch
B12 GRN power window switch DOWN There should be continuity. An open in the wire
position)
Front passenger's. power window Check for continuity between the Faulty passenger's power window
22-282
BACK
6. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector .
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the passenger's MPCS unit, then go to step 7.
A7 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be less than 0.5 V.
B14 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
B8 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground:
B3 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground:
There should be battery voltaQe.
B4 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), and front Measure the voltage between the B4
passenger's power window motor and B6terminals:
runs by connecting the B8 and B1 There should be O-about 5 V - 0-
terminals and the B7 and B14 about 5 V repeatedly (a digital
terminals with jumper wires. voltmeter reads about 2.5 V while
the power window moves).
B5 LTGRN Ignition switch ON (II), and front Measure the voltage between the B5
passenger's power window motor and B6 terminals:
runs by connecting the B8 and B1 There should be O-about 5 V - 0-
terminals and the B7 and B14 about 5 V repeatedly (a digital
terminals with jumper wires. voltmeter reads about 2.5 V while
the power window moves).
B6 GRY Ignition switch ON (II) Check for continuity to ground:
7. Reset the power window control unit (see page 22-259).
~
I..!!!!..I
Possible cause if result is not
obtained
Poor ground (G506)
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G507)
An open in the wir.e
main under-hood fuse box
An ~ n in the wire
Blown No.3 (P/W) (50 A) fuse in
the main under-hood fuse box
An open in the wire
Faulty passenger's MPCS unit
An open in the wire
Faulty front passenger's power
window motor
An open in the wire
Faulty front passenger's power
window motor
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G506, G507)
An open in the wire
22-283
BACK
Power Windows
Driver's Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8), and
disconnect the driver's door wire harness B 28P
connector (A) from the driver's door wire harness A.
A
2. At the driver's door wire harness B 28P connector,
test the power window motor in each direction by
connecting battery power and ground according to
the table.When the motOr stops running,
disconnect one lead immediately.

Terminal
'"
15 16
Direction
UP
EEl e
DOWN
e EEl
3. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the driver's
power window motor (B).
22-284
5. Check for continuity between the driver's power
window motor 6P connector No.3 and No.6
terminals and the driver's door wire harness B 28P
connector No. 15 and No. 16 terminals respectively.
There should be continuity .
If there is no continuity, repair open in the wire .
If there is continuity, replace the power window
motor.
1 2 3 DOWN (YEll
4 5 61-----,
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS B 28P CONNECTOR
6. After replacing the power window motor, reset the
power window control unit (see page 22-259).
BACK

I.!!!:..I
Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8), and
disconnect the front passenger's door wire harness
20P connector (A) from the front passenger's door
subharness.
2. At the front passenger's door wire harness 20P
connector, test the power window motor in each
direction by connecting battery power and ground
according to the table.When the motor stops
running, disconnect one lead immediately.
1\ Terminal
2 12
Direction
\
UP
e
()
DOWN ()
e
goto step 4.
passenger's power window motor (B).
A
power window motor 6P connector No.1 and No.4
terminals and the front passenger's door wire
harness 20P connector No.2 and No. 12 terminals
respectively. There should be continuity .
If there is no continuity, repair open in the wire .
Ifthere is continuity, replace the power window
motor.
CONNECTOR
UPIBLU)
r-L--F====!---..
1 2 3
456
DOWN IRED)
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS 20P
CONNECTOR
22-285
BACK
I,'.
',/
Power Windows
Rear Power Window Motor Test
Remove the door panel (see page 20-8), and"
disconnect the rear powerwindow switch 14P
connector (A).
Wire side terminals
2. Test the power wh'ldow motor in each direction by
connecting battery power and ground according to
the table. When the motor stops running,
disconnect one lead immediately.
1\ Terminal'
.,
1 [6] 4 [3]
Direction
\
UP Et)
e
DOWN
e
Et)
[] : Right rear power window
Goto step 4.
power window motor (B).
The illustration shows the right
rear door. the left rear door is
symmetrical,
22-286
5. Check for continuity between the rear power
,window motor6P connector No.1 [No.3J and
No.4. [No.6] terminals arid the front rear power
window switch 14P connector No.1 and No.7
terminals respectively. There should be continuity.
[] : Right rear power window
.
If there is no continuity, repair open inthe wire .
If there is continuity, replace the power window
motor.
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH 14P CONNECTOR
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH 14P CONNECTOR
BACK
Front Passenger's Power Window
Switch Test
1. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20-8), and disconnect the 14P connector from the
front passenger's power window switch.
switch position according tothe table.
Terminal
Position
UP
DOWN
AUTO
switch (see page 22-288).
r--:'I

Rear Power Window,Switch Testl
Replacement
1. Remove the rear.door panel (see page 20-22), and
disconnect the 14P connector frqm the rear power
window switch.
2. Remove the power window switch panel (see page
20-22).
3. Remove the three mounting screws and the rear
power window switch (A).
4. Swap the rear power window switch with another
known-good power window switch and test. If the
original power window switch is faulty; replace it.
22-259).
22-287
BACK
Power Windows
Power Wind<fw Master Switch
Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8),
and disconnectthe 14P connector from the power
window master switch.
20-8).
3. Remove the four mounting screws and the power
window master switch (A).
22-259).
22-288
Front Passenger's Power Window
Switch Replacement
1. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20-8), and disconnect the 14P connector from the
front passenger's power window switch.
20-8).
3. Remove the three mounting screws and the front
passenger's power window switch (A).
22-259).
BACK
Wipers/Washers
r--:'I
I.!!:.I
HEADLIGHT WASHER RELA Y(Canada models)
Test, page 22-72
hood fuse/relay box)
WIND SHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Test, page 22-303
WIPER ARMS and LINKAGE
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BOX C
(Canada models)
WIPER BLADES
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
(Combination Switch Control Unit)
(cont'd)
22-289
BACK
Wipers/Washers
22-290
WINDSHIELD WIPER NOZZLE
WASHER
RESERVOIR
HEADLIGHT
WASHER NOZZLE
(Canada models)
Replacement,
page 22-307
HEADLIGHT WASHER TUBE
(Canada models)
HEADLIGHT WASHER MOTOR
(Canada models)
WINDSHIELD/REAR WINDOW WASHER MOTOR
Test, page 22-304
Repla,cement, page 22-306
BACK
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
Test, page 22-303
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
REAR WINDOW WASHER NOZZLE
Replacement, page 2 ~ 3
Ajustment, page 22-309
r:-:'I
~
REAR WINDOW WIPER ARM
Ajustment, page 22-309
REARMICU
(Has built-in rear window
intermittent wiper relay circuit)
22-291
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Circuit Diagram - Windshield, Headlight Washer
BAmRY
No.3I1G) (50 A)

22-292

No.3 (RB2) (40 A)
BLU---,
No .3 (RB3) (60 A)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELA
(RELAY BLOCK part)
YBOX
RJD
Ail
CI CI
YEL--
2
HEADLIGHT
LOW BEAM :-
RELAY

.. ,
No.14
(30 A)
I
No.19
(15A)
4
3
EIO
YEL G
n. '---LTBLU
E9

RIGHT
HEADLIGHT
.. _ .. _.
n
4
HEADLIGHT
WASHER
I
RELAY
t
I
BLK
: G202
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _
(Canada)
FI UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX (RELAY CONTROL MODULE part)
No.6
(30 A)
r-
i - - - --
)1
f- --j'
WINDSHIELD G) REAR WINDOWG)
D3 DI D2
No.l1 (30 A)
AI A3 A4 A2
FUSE
7
OAN VEL WHT BLU GRN RED
t----J
WHT
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
5

3
: LO
WINDSHIELD/
REAR WINDOW , As 4
WASHER MOTOR

I
BLK
I
G202
G202
D4
BLK
G401
BACK
IGNITION SWITCH
W H T ~
~
IRELAY CONTROL MODULE part)
IGl HOT in ON III) a
START 11111
05
El
nd
B-CAN LT GRN
06
VBU 1--+---WHT
07
IGl 1--+--- VEL
Ell
BACK-UPH/L I--+---WHT
E12
A6
PNK
B4
WHT
X16
RED
C2
WHT
011
.. ......
012
OS
No.7 110 A)
'\...D--
No.31115A)
No.11130A)
No.21
17.5 A)
............. ..... .........
B-CAN
VBU
IGl
X35 X34 N28
MICU
BACK-UP
H/L
.!P3
WHT
r--:'I
I.!!!!:J
CANlin.
SG2 f---
PGl
PG2 SGl
Q4 Pl H9 E9
BACK-UP WIPER I--+---PNK
-
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
I
BLU
BLK
G201
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
ICiosed:
Aoatdown)
WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH
COMBINATION
UGHTSWITCH
5
~
WHT VEL LT RN WHT
:
.
.
:
8 7 : 4 1
:
:
BACK-UP WIPER
VBU 1G1 B-CAN
BACK-UPH/L
t--
J
I
MIST
INT
WASHER
SWITCH
,
,
:
INTERMITTENT
WIPER DWELL
TIME
..... - .... --...;... ....... CONTROLLER
3
BLK BLK BRN BLK BLK
G601 G601 G502 G601 G601
22-293
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Circuit Diagram - Rear Window
MAIN UNDER-HDDD FUSE BOX IGNmDN SWITCH
JTERY

No.lIBATIII20AI No.3I1GII50A]
+
WHT
IGI
PNK------
IGI HDT in DN (III and
No.4 (40 AI
START (1111
.....(1""\
WHT------
UNDER-HDDD FUSE/RELAY BOX
RELAY CDNTRDL MDDULE
___ _________ _____ _
D3
I
G202
22-294
WINDSHIELD () ,
Dl
WINDSHIELD/
REARWINDDW
WASHER MDTDR
D2
El
B-CAN LTGRN
D7
IGI VEL
DB
VBU WHT
BACK-UP
E11
H/L
WHT
BACK-UP
E12
WIPER
PNK
D4
I
G401
BACK
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BDX
AS No.2117.5A1

r--:'I
t.=!..I
:CANDn.
SG2
M1CU PG1
B4 No.7 110 AI

VBU
B-CAN
.
:- ... + ... ,
PG2 SG1
X16 D6 X34 F1 D12 X35 G3 : D11 N2B G1 Q4 P1 H9 E9
.
D
--------------RED-----------------------------t
LTGRN .................................................................. J

.................... .............. . ...................... .

r

PNK WHT mff LTGRN RED W LTGRN BLK BRN BLK BLK

REAR WINDOW

REAR

WIPER/WASHER

5 1 7 8 : 4 SWITCH

FUSE/RELAY
825 823 B4 :12 BOX

BACK-UPH/L VBU B-CAN IG1 VBU B-CAN
... BACK-UP COMBINATION SWITCH
r-
WIPER CONTROL UNIT
WASHER
REARMICU
As
RR RR
B17 829
WIP OFF WlP OFF
RR
V:ASH
RR RR
WASH WASH WASH
a.
o
a.
-
.0
-

-
0
-
3
I II
G601 G702 G603 G603 GOO1 G502 GOO1 GOO1
22-295
BACK
Wipers/Washers
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81076: Windshield Wiper Switch Back-
up Circuit Malfunction
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON for 5 seconds
and OFF.
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Select !;IODY ELECTRICAL system select menu,
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the FR WIPER
Is OFF indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for a short in the wire between the
combination swi.tch control unit and the relay
control module (WIPER BACK-UP line), ifthe
harness is OK, replace the combination switch
7. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON.
22296
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the FR WIPER
Is ON indicated?
YES-Go to the relay control module input test
(see page 22-136) and check for a poor ground, if
the GND line is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/
combination switch control unit and the relay
control module (WIPER BACK-UP line), ifthe wire is
OK, replace the combination switch control unit
(see page 22-302) .
BACK
OTe 81077: Windshield Wiper Auto Switch
Circuit Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and the windshield
wiper switch ON.
2. Check the windshield wiper operation.
Does the wiper work?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 13.
5. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON, and then OFF.
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the FR WIPER AS
with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated when the motor stopped, and ON
intermittently indicated when the motor runs?
under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-71) .
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P
connector.
connector A (4P).
r:-:'I

12. Check for continuity between the windshield wiper
motor 5P connector No.4 terminal and the under-
hood fuse/relay box connector A (4P) No.2
terminal.
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (4P)
13. Check the No. 11 (30 A) and No. 31 (15 A) fuses in
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck the system .
(cont'd)
22-297
BACK
Wipers/Washers
15. Check the No.11 (30 A) and No. 31 (15A)fuses in
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck the system .
16. Do the wiper motor test (see page 22-303).
Does the wiper motor run normally?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor and
recheck .
17. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P
connector.
connector A (4P).
motor 5P connector No.3 and No.5 terminals and
the under-hood fuse/relay box connector A (4P)
No.3 and No. 4terminals.
WIPLO
L--_---' (BLU)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (4P)
YES-Go to step 20.
22-298
motor 5P connector No.2 terminal and body
ground.
.----,GND
(BLK)
Q
=
NO-Repair open in the wire or poor ground
(G401) .
BACK
DTC 81281: Windshield Wiper Switch MIST
DTC 81282: Windshield Wiper Switch INT
(AUTO) Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC 81283: Windshield Wiper Switch LOW
DTC 81284: Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to MIST, and wait
for 2 seconds.
4. Turn the windshield wiper switch OFF, and wait for
2 seconds.
5. Turn the windshield wiper switch to INT (AUTO),
and wait for 2 seconds.
6. Turn the windshield wiper switch to LOW, and wait
for 2 seconds.
7. Turn the windshield wiper switch in HIGH, and wait
for 2 seconds.
Is DTC 81281,81282,81283, and/or 81284
indicated?
YES-Replace the wiper/washer switch .
NO-Intermittent failure, the wiper/washer switch
and the combination switch control unit are OK at
this time. Check for loose or poor connections .
r:-:'I
i.=!..I
22-299
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Wiper/Washer Switch (Combination Switch Control Unit) Input Test
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-119).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-129).
3. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
A
L ~
Ir--
1 2 3 4
5
/
7 8
..
/
I
22-300
BACK
1 WHT Under all conditions Check for continuity between the No.1
terminal and the under-hood fuse/relay
box connector E (14P) No. 11 terminal:
Disconnect the under- Check for continuity between the No.1
hood fuse/relay box terminal and body ground:
connectorE (14P) and the There should be no continuity.
connector P (30P)
2 LTBLU Under all conditions Check for continuity between the No.2
terminal of the combination switch
control unit and the headlight leveling
control unit No. 16 terminal:
4 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between the No.4
terminal and under-dash fuse/relay box
connector N (45P) No. 28 terminal:
Disconnect the under-dash Check for continuity between the No.4
fuse/relay box connector N terminal and body ground:
(45P) There should be no continuity.
5 PNK Under all conditions Check for continuity between the No.5
terminal and the under-hood fuse/relay
box connector E (14P) No. 12 terminal:
Disconnect the under-hood Check for continuity between the No.5
fuse/relay box connector E terminal and body ground:
(14P) There should be no continuity.

I.!!:..I
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
6. Reconnect the 8P connector to the wiper/washer switch, and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit).
3 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
There should be less than 0.5 V. An ooen in the wire
8 WHT Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
dash fuse/relay box
An ooen in the wire
7 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
An open in the wire
22-301
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement
NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the
combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer
test, refer to the combination switch control unit input
1. Remove the dastlboard lower cover (see page
20-119).
20-129).
connector (A), and dashboard wire harness 8P
connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (e).
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the
wiper/washer switch.
22-302
BACK
Wiper Motor Test
Windshield
1. Open the hood, arid remove the wiper arms
(see page 22-305).
NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms so that
they do not touch the hood.
2. Remove the cowl covers (see page 20-205).
windshield wiper motor (8).
A
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the
windshield wiper motor 5P connector No.3
terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal. The
motor should run at low speed. If the motor does
not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor.
windshield wiper motor 5P connector No.5
motor should run at high speed. If the motor does
not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor
(see page 22-305).
6. Connect an analog ohmmeter between the
windshield wiper motor 5P connector No.1 and No.
4 terminals, and run the motor at low or high speed.
The ohmmeter should indicate continuity and no
continuity alternately. If it does not, replace the
motor.
Rear Window

L:..I
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower
window wiper motor (8).
A
rear window wiper motor 4P connector No.1'
motor should run. If the motor does not run or fails
to run smoothly, replace the motor (see page
22-306).
4. Connect an analog ohmmeter between the rear
window wiper motor 4P connector No.2 and No.3
terminals. The ohmmeter should indicate
continuity and no continuity alternately. If it does
not, replace the motor.
22-303
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Washer Motor Test
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-217).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
motor (8).
A B
No.2 (No.1) terminal and ground the No.1 (No.2)
terminal of the washer motor. The motor should
run.
( ): Rear window washer direction.
o If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
o If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no
washedluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer
motor outlet.
22-304
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
fluid level switch.
A
3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the
washer reservoir.
NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
terminals in each float position.
o There should be continuity when the float is
down.
o There should be no continuity when the float is
up.
switch.
BACK
Wiper Motor Replacement
1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the
windshield wiper arms (B).
A
30Nm
2. Remove the cowl covers (see page 20-205).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper
motor.
B
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfft)
A
4. Remove the three bolts (B) and the wiper linkage
assembly (C).
r--:'I
I..:U
5. Make sure the mark of the link to show the original
adjustment. Separate the windshield wiper linkage
(B) from the wiper motor (C).
31 Nm
(3.1 kgfm. 22.8 Ibfft)
6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note
these items:
Align the marks of the link and the linkage to
install the linkage with the original adjustment.
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving parts.
Before installing the wiper arms, turn the wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the shafts to the
park position.
If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
7. After installation, adjust the wiper arms (see page
22-309).
22-305
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Rear Window Wiper Motor
Replacement
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower
trim panel (see page 20-96).
2. Remove the mounting nut (A), the wiper arm (8)
and the special nut (C).
A

3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and remove the
mounting bolts (8), then remove the rear
window wiper motor (C).
A
B
9.8Nm
22-306
Washer Reservoir Replacement
motor(s) (8) and the washer fluid level switch (C).
A
B c
3. Disconnect the washer tubes.
4. Remove the bolts and the washer reservoir.
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Check the
washer motor operation.
BACK
Headlight Washer Motor Test/
Replacement
Canada models
1. Remove the light inner fender (see page 20-217).
motor (8).
headlight washer motor 2P connector No.1
motor should run ..
o If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
o If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no
washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer
motor outlet.
4. Install the washer motor in the reverse order of
removal.
Headlight Washer Nozzle
Replacement
Canada models
r--:'I
--=:.J
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-188), and
disconnect the headlight washer tubes from the
washer motor.
2. Disconnect the headlight washer tube (A) from the
headlight washer nozzle (8).
B
5Nm
3. Remove the headlight washer nozzle cover (e).
4. Remove the bolt and two screws, then remove the
headlight washer nozzle.
5. Install the nozzle in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, check the headlight washer
operation.
22-307
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield
1. Lift the wiper arms from the windshield.
NOTE: Lift the driver's side first.
2. Press and hold the tab (A) and slide the wiper blade
(8) toward the tab to release it from the wiper arm.
3. Slide the rubber (A) out from the wiper blade (8).
4. Install a new rubber to the wiper blade in the
5. Install the wiper blades onto the wiper arms in the
6. Check the wiper operation, if the blades slip, turn
the wiper switch OFF, and reinstall the wiper blades
securely.
22-308
Rear Window
1. Lift the wiper arm from the rear window.
2. Turn the rear wiper blade (A), release the lock, and
then remove the wiper blade from the rear wiper
arm (8).
B
3. Raise the old rubber (A), and remove it from the
wiper blade (8).
A
4. Insatall the new rubber and the wiper blade in the
NOTE: After installation, confirm that the wiper arm
works smoothly.
BACK
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment
Windshield
Wiper arms park position
r:'I
.l!::..I
1. When the wiper arms stop at the park (automatic stop) position, confirm that they are at the standard position.
a: Position at about 1.6 in. (40.7 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A)
b: Position at about 2.1 in. (54.3 mm) from the top of cowl cover (A)
Washer nozzle position
2. When you turn on the washers, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray
area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
c: Position at about 6.2 in. (157.3 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (8) at the lower windshield
d: Position at about 6.2 in. (157.3 mm) from the top of the black ceramic area (8) at the lower windshield
e: Position at about 11.8 in. (300 mm) from the windshield center line (C)
f: Position at about 11.8 in. (300 mm) from the windshield center line (C)
c
d
A
e f
B
(cont'd)
22-309
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment (cont'd)
Rear Window
Wiper arm park position
1. When the wiper arm stops at the park position, confirm that it is at the standard position.
a: Position at about 0.4 in. (11.2 mm) from the black ceramic area (A)
Washer nozzle position
2. When you turn on the washers, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray
area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
b: Position at about 5.1 in. (130.2 mm) from the rear washer nozzle (8)
b
a
A
":'" ,,'I "
22 .. 310
BACK
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the washer tubes.
Windshield/Rear Window Washers

(cont'd)
22-311
BACK
Wipers/Washers
Washer Tube Replacement (cont'd)
Headlight Washer (Canada models)
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the washer
operation.
22-312
BACK
Gauges

I!!!!!..I
Self-diagnostic Function, page 22-315
Rewriting the 000 Data on a New
Gauge Control Module, page 22-336
Outside Air Temperature
Indicator Calibration, page 22-338
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNITS
Test, page 11-350
Test, page 19-11
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
Test, page 19-11
MULTI-INFORMATION SWITCH
(cont'd)
22-313
BACK
Gauges
TACHOMETER MULTIINFORMATION
DISPLAY (MID)
SPEEDOMETER
COOLANT SMODE INDICATOR AfT GEAR POSITION FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
GAUGE
CONNECTOR B (24P) CONNECTOR A (12P)
o ~ ~
o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ @
6 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
o
00 o 0
22-314
BACK
r--:'I

Before troubleshooting the gauge system, refer to multiplex integrated control system B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function.
The beeper drive circuit check.
The indicator drive circuit check.
The switch input test.
The LCD segments check.
The gauges drive ci rcuit check (speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, coolant temperature gauge).
The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line and the fast-
controller area network (F-CAN) communication line between the gauges).
NOTE: Indicators are also controlled via the communication line.
Entering the self-diagnostic function
Before doing the self-diagnostic function, check the No.7 (10 A) fuse and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse
/relay box.
1. Push and hold the SEL RESET button.
2. Turn the headlights ON.
4. Within 5 sec., turn the headlights OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the SELECT button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedly.
NOTE:
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller operates normally.
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SELECT button is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the Gauge
Drive Circuit Check.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the self-diagnostic mode ends.
Ignition
Switch
Lighting
Switch
Select
Switch

OFF ,

-------:.--;UlJUlI----------__________________ _
1 Move to self-diagnostic mode.

5 sec. 5 sec.
(cont'd)
22-315
BACK
Gauges
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, these indicators blink:
ABS indicator, active damper system indicator, AfT gear position indicator, brake system indicator, charging system
indicator, cruise control indicator, cruise main indicator, DRL indicator, fog light indicator, high beam indicator,
immobilizer indicator, lights-on indicator, low fuel indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), message indicator, oil
pressure indicator, seat belt indicator, security indicator, SH-AWD indicator, Side airbag indicator, tire pressure
indicator, VSA activation indicator, and VSA indicator.
Switch Input Check
After the intermittent beeper sounds at the initial stage of self-diagnosis, a beeper sounds continuously while any of
the following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON:
Parking brake switch, VSA OFF switch, comfort switch, cruise control master, SET, RESUME, CANCEL switches, select,
previous, next switches, and dash lights brightness controller (VOL (+), VOL (-)).
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.
The LCD [Sport shift and multi-information display (MID)] Segment Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the word "Checking Now" shows on the MID.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the coolant
temperature gauge needles sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum
position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return tothe minimum position, pushing the select/reset
button starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the minimum position.
Self-diagnostic
ON

mode
OFF
SEL/RESET
ON
switch
OFF
ON

Gauge needles
OFF
Beeper
ON
OFF
n
n
n
W'
5 sec.
n
Lj
L
The needles sweep from the
minimum position to the
maximum position, then return
to the minimum position.
If any needle fails to sweep or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
22-316
BACK
The Communication Line Check
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segment Check.
CHECKING
NOW

L:!!.I
If the communication line is OK, the word "OK" will be indicated on the multi-information display (MID). If there is a
communication line error, the word "NG;' will be indicated on the MID.
Indication pattern
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the F-CAN and gauge control module. The 8-CAN is OK at
this time. Check for DTCs inthe PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found. If no DTCs are found, go to 8-CAN System
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN .. ERROR
B-CAN .... OK
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the 8-CAN and gauge control module. The F-CAN line is OK
at this time. Go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN .... OK
B-CAN .... ERROR
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and F-CAN and 8-CAN. Check for
DTCs in the PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found. If no DTCs are found, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-112).
COMMUNICATION CHECK
F-CAN .... ERROR
B-CAN .... ERROR
Ending the self-diagnostic function
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function ends.
22-317
BACK
Gauges
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
MAIN UNDER-HOODRJSE BOX IGNI110NSWITCH RJSE/RELAY BOX
BATIERY
No21 ".sAi . No.lIBAn1120Al NoJIIGII50AI
-&-
AS
+
WIlT PNK
IGI
IGI HOT In ON110 and
No.4 140 AI
STARTIBII
B4
No.711Q'A1
WIlT
GAUGE CONTROLMOOULE
, '
TACHOMmR SPfEooMETEJi . RJEL GAUGE '
: A6 : AI2 :AS
RED WIlT LTGRN
V
V V
MICU
PCM RELAYCONTROLMODULE
SRSUNIT COMBlNAnONSWlTCHCONTROLUNIT'
VSA MODULATGR-;;ONTROL UNIT
REARMICU
DATALlNKCONNECTORIDLCI
DRiVER'S MPCS UNIT
YAWLATE-LATERAULONG!IUDINAL CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
IMMOBWZER-KYLESS CONTROL UNIT
AUOIOUNIT
UNIT HANDSFREELINK CONTROLUNIT
POWER SEATCONTROL UNIT
IXMRECEIVERI
:
lPMSCONTROLUNIT [XMRECEIVERI
22-318
AS AIO
ORN

MK:u
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
ILEDI
AI1
ORN
RJEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
RJEL
TANK
UNIT
5V
LTGRN
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
BACK
814
14 MUL1HNFORMAllONSWITCIt
IN1B!IOR
LIGHT
RELAY
G501
ACI1VE DAMPER
SYmMSWITCH
r:-:'I

, :CANIino
GAUG CONTROL MODUli
(cont'd)
22-319
BACK
Gauges
A/TGEAR INDICATORS
POSmON
INDICATOR
POWER SUPPULY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLlfR AREA NEtWORK CONTROLLER
824 816 B17 821 B22 B8
BW
~ ~ ~
VSA NAVIGATION
CRUISE CONTROL
OFF DISPLAY UNIT
MAIN SWITCH,
SWITCH
SET/RESUME/
WASHER
CANCEL SWITCH
A.UID
LEVEL
1 SWITCH
BI.K
G2Gl
22-320
BACK

d

C d
SH-AWD SlDEAlRBAG LOW A/TR.UID LOWO[
INDICATOR
PRESSURE
arrOFF RIEL TEMPERATURE PRESSURE
fLED)
INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR

ILED) ILED) fLEDI fLEDI
WARNINGDRIVE CIRCUIT
GREEN
INDfCATOR
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
L
C
CRUISE CRUISE UGHTS-DN FOGUGHT
CONTROL MAIN INDICATOR fNDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR [EDI fLED)
ILEDI [ED)
I
WARNINGDRIVE CIRCUIT
I
A2
BIJ(
GSaI
C
GAUGE CONlROL MOOULE
C
tTBELT C
BRAKE

INDICATOR
CHARGING
fLED)
SYmM
INDICATOR
fLEOI
B9
ORN
REMINDER
INDICATOR
fLED)
BRAKE
R.UlD
LEVEL
SWITCH
.
I IClosed:
Bu(
G30l
Roatdown)
fOpen:
Roatupl
BID
ORN
I PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH
fCiosed:
Pedaldupressedl
'1 : With active damper system
'2:W1thTPMS
TURN SIGNALJ
HAZARDRElAY
y y
! U BRN
B4 B5
of-
o

C
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
r--:'I

SIGNAL SIGNAL
INDICATOR INDICATOR
fLEDI fLEDI
r---
I TURN SIGNAL/ I '
HAZARDRBAY
l--
22-321
BACK
Gauges
DTC Troubleshooting
OTC 81152: Gauge Control Module Internal
(EEPROM) Error
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-337) .
time .
22-322
OTC 81155: Gauge Control Module Lost
Control Unit (HLSW Message)
Control Unit (WIPSW Message)
/s orc 81155 and/or 81156 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the combination
switch control unit .
Are orcs 81007,81062,81063,81957,81958,
and/or 82969 a/so indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
BACK
DTC 81157: Gauge Control Module Lost
Message)
Communication with MICU (AUTOL T
Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the MICU .
Are DTCs 81055,81056,81057,81255,81955,8
2155,82156, and/or 82161 also indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
r--:'I
t.=:..I
(RM Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the relay control
module .
Are DTCs 81005,81959,82162, and/or 82970
also indicated?
(see page 22-136) .
(see page 22-334) .
22-323
BACK
Gauges
Communication with Power Tailgate (PTG
Message)
sure to follow the instructions inS-CAN System
YES-Go to step 5.
the power tailgate control unit and the gauge
control module .
AreDTCs81155, 81156, 81157, 81158, 81180,
and/or 81182 a/so indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
NO-Do the power tailgate control unit input test
(see page 22-522) .
22-324
BACK
Communication with PCM (ENG Message)
Communication with the PCM (AfT Message)
DTC 81178: F-CAN Communication Error
Is DrC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the PCM .
5. Check for Fuel and Emissions Systems DTCs with
the HDS.
Are there any DrCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs, then recheck .
NO-Go to step 6.
(12P).
8. Jump the SCS with the HDS.
r:-:'I
t.=:..I
10. Connect the gauge control module connector A (12
P) connector No.6 and No. 12 terminals and body
ground with jumper wires.
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
11. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A
(49P) No. 48 and No. 49 terminals and body ground
individually.
=
YES- Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-8), and recheck. If the
indication goes away, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-244). Ifthe DTC is still present, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-334) .
22-325
BACK
Gauges
Ole B1170:.Gauge Control Module Lost
Communication with the VSA Modulator-
Control Unit (VSA Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the VSA modulator-
control unit .
5. Check for VSA System DTCs with the HDS
(see page 19-43).
Are there any OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs, then recheck.
NO-Go to step 6.
(12P).
connector.
22-326
9. Connectthe gauge control module connector A (12
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
control unit 46P connector No. 38 and No. 39
terminals and body ground individually.
8 8 1D 11 12
JBS8D M
control unit (see page 19-102), and recheck. If the
indication goes away, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102). Ifthe
DTC is still present, replace the gauge control
module (see page 22-334) .
NO-Repair"open in the wire .
BACK
Communication with the TPMS Control Unit
(TPMS Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the TPMS control
unit .
5. Check for TPMS DTCs with the HDS (see page
18-125).
Are there any DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 6.
(12P).

9. Connectthe gauge control module connector A (12
JUMPER
WIRE
=
JUMPER
WIRE
10. Check for continuity between the adaptive cruise
control (ACC) unit 20P connector No.1 and No. 11
terminals and body ground individually.
CANH
(WHT)
=
YES-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-162), and recheck. Ifthe indication
goes away, replace the original TPMS control unit
(see page 18-162).lfthe DTC is still present, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-334) .
22-327
BACK
Gauges
DTC 81175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Open
NOTE: Ifyeu are treublesheeting mUltiple DTCs, be
sure to' fellew,.the instructiens in B-CAN System
Diagnesis Test Mede A (see page 22-112).
2. Turn the ignitien switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
3. Wait fer 30 secends er mere.
4. Check fer DTCs with the HDS.
Is orcs 81175 indicated?
YES-Go. to' step 5.
time. Check fer leese er peer cennectiens between
the gauge centrel medule and the fuel tank unit .
5. Turn the ignitien switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P cennecter.
7. Discennect the gauge centrel medule cennecters A
(12P) and B (24P).
8. Cennect the fuel tank unit 4P cennecter No.. 1 and
No.. 3 terminals and bedy greund with jumper wires.
FUEL UNIT
lORN)
JUMPER WIRE
" - -=-
GNDILTGRN)
JUMPERWIRE
22-328
9. Check fer centinuity between the gauge centrel
medule cennecter A (12P) No., 11 terminal and
bedy ground, and cennecter B (24P) No.. 15
terminal and bedy greund respectively.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A 112P)
=
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B 124P)
=
YES-Go. to' step 10.
NO-Repair epen in the wire between the gauge
centrel medule and the fuel tank unit .
10. De the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
11-350).
Is the fuel tank unit OK?
YES-Replace the gauge centrol medule .
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit .
BACK
DTC 81176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit Short
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the fuel tank unit .
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit..
(12P).
r--:'I
t=!..I
12. Check for continuity between the gauge control
module connector A (12P) No. 11 terminal and
body ground.
=
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
the gauge control module and the fuel tank unit .
NO-Replace the gauge control module .
22-329
BACK
Gauges
OTC B1177: Battery Voltage Abnormal
Is OTCs 81177 indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 4.
6. Crank the engine.
Is OTCs 81177 indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Intermittent failure, the gauge control module
and power supply voltage (IG1) that is supplied to
the gauge control module are OK at this time. The
battery may have been discharged, and
recovered .
8. Check the battery (see page 22-76) and the
charging system.
Are the battery condition normal and the charging
system OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-The battery needs a recharge or replacement,
or the charging system needs to repair .
22-330
10. With the gauge control module connector A (12P)
still connected, measure the voltage between the
gauge control module connector A (12P) No.7
=
Is the voltage above 7.5 V?
YES-Replace the gauge control module .
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the IG1 line
between the ignition switch and the gauge control
module .
BACK
(DRLOCKSW Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the driver's MPCS
unit .
Are OTCs 81013,81015,81065, and 81905
indicated with OTC 81182?
(see page 22-137) .
(see page 22-334) .
r--:'I

22-331
BACK
Gauge's
Communication with SRS Unit (SRS
Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the SRS unit .
5. Check for SRS DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 6.
(12P).
8. Disconnect the SRS unit connector A (see page
24-152).
22-332
9. Check for continuity between the gauge control
module connector A (12P) No.6 and the SRS unit
connector A (28P) No. 12 terminal, and between the
gauge control module connector A (12P) No. 12
terminal and the SRS unit connector A (28P) No. 11
terminal.
CANH
(WHT)
CANL(RED)
YES-Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page
24-152), and recheck. Ifthe indication goes away,
replace the original SRS unit (see page 24-152). If
the DTC is still present, replace the gauge control
module (see page 22-334) .
BACK
Communication with Active Damper System
Control Unit (Active Damper System Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the gauge control module and the active damper
control unit .
5. Check for active damper system DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 6.
(12P).
8. Disconnect the active damper control unit
connector B (14P).
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
9. Connect the gauge control module connector A
(12P) connector No.6 and No. 12 terminals to body
CANH(WHT)
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
control unit connector B (14P) No.1 and No.8
terminals and body ground respectively.
7
14
control unit (see page 18-118), and recheck.lfthe
indication goes away, replace the original active
damper control unit (see page 18-118). If the DTC is
still present, replace the gauge control module
(see page 22-334) .
22-333
BACK
Gauges
Gauge Control Module Input Test
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, remove the gauge control module (see page 22-337).
2. Disconnect the gauge control module connectors A (12P) and B (24P).
VEL WHT BLK BLU
obtained
A5 BLK Under-dash fuse Check for continuity between An open in the wire
/relay box the A5 and the under-dash
connector N (45 fuse/relay box connector N
P) disconnected (45P) No. 22 terminal:
A6 RED PCM connector Check for continuity between An open in the wire
A (49P) . A6 and the PCM connector A
disconnect (49P) No.1 terminal:
A12 WHT PCM connector Check for continuity between An open in the wire
A (49P) A12 and the PCM connector A
disconnected (49P) No. 36 terminal:
22-334
BACK

I..:!:..I
5. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connectors .
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module.
obtained
A2 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
B13 conditions ground: An open in the wire
There should be less than
0.5V.
A1 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: main under-hood fuse box
There should be battery Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
A7 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) ground: main under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. An open in the wire
B9 ORN Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Faulty brake fluid level switch
ON (II), brake ground: A short to ground in the wire
fluid is full level There should be 5 V or more.
in the reservoir
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G302)
ON (II), brake ground: An open in the wire
fluid is lower There should be less than 1 V. Faulty brake fluid level switch
level inthe
reservoir
ON (II), parking ground: An open in the wire
brake pedal There should be less than 1 V.
pressed
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Faulty brake fluid level switch
ON (II), parking ground: A short to ground in the wire
brake pedal There should be 5 V or more.
released
B24 BLU Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G201)
ON (II), washer ground: Faulty washer fluid level switch
fluid is half or There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
more inthe
washer reservoir
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Faulty washer fluid level switch
ON (II), washer ground: A short to ground in the wire
fluid is half or There should be 5 V or more.
more inthe
washer reservoir
22-335
BACK
Gau.ges
Rewriting the 000 Data and Transferring Smart Maintenance on a New
NOTE:
o Obtain a new gauge control module before starting
the rewriting process.
o Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module
that will not communicate with the HDS.
o Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the
car you are working on.
o Once you have started this procedure, you must
complete it before removing the HDS from the DLC.
o Connect a battery jumper box (not a battery charger)
to insure that correct battery voltage will be
maintained.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module,
connect the HDS.
2. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRICAL
system select menu with the HDS.
3. Select "Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO
Rewrite)" from the ADJUSTMENT menu, and
follow the instructions on the display to retrieve the
ODO value and the Smart Maintenance Information.
4. Replace the gauge control module.
5. Follow the instructions on the display to write the
new ODO value and Smart Maintenance to the new
gauge control module. If the data transfer fails,
refer to the instructions below to release the locked
ODOvalue.
Release Locked odometer mileage to the
original gauge control module.
If after you attempt to transfer mileage, the new
odometer has dashes (---), garbled, or an incorrect
value displayed, do the following:
Start over. The original gauge control module is going
to be unlocked and restored to its original state.
1. Confirm that you have the latest HDS version of
software.
2. Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for
the car you are working on.
22-336
3. With the ignition switch OFF, reconnect the original
gauge control module.
4. Completely re-boot the HDS.
5. Clear any stored DTCs.
6. Navigate to Body Electric/Gauges/Adjustment!
Instrument Panel Replacement.
7. Select "3. Releasing Locked ODO Value."
8. Follow the prompts and the Odometer mileage will
be restored.
9. Start over and make sure the screen prompts are
followed.
BACK
Replacement
NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, do
the "Rewriting the 000 DATA and Transferring the
Smart Maintenance on a NEW Gauges (see page
22-336).
1. Remove the parts shown:
Driver's switch panel (see page 20-117) .
Instrument fascia (see page 20-118).
2. Remove the screws from the gauge control module
(A).
B
3. Disconnect the connectors (B), and remove the
gauge control module.
4. Install the gauge in the reverse order of removal.

Multi-information Switch Test/
Replacement
24-137).
2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the cable
reel.
3. Measure the resistance between the cable reel 20P
connector No. 13 and No. 14 terminals,in each
multi-inf()rmation switch position according to the
table.
Position Resistance
Previous (.A.) About 33 Q
SELJRESET About 1043 Q
Next ( .... ) About 363 Q
steering switch assembly.
NOTE: If the switch is OK, but there is a problem
with the switch function, check the cable reel.
22-337
BACK
Gauges
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration
NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor
(see page 21-105).
Description
The outside temperature sensor is located behind the
center ofthe front bumper. The gauge control module
uses measurements from this sensor to display the
outside air temperature.
Because of the location of the sensor, it may be affected
by heat reflection from the road, engine and radiator
heat, or hot exhaust from surrounding traffic.
These conditions can heat soak the outside air
temperature sensor and cause inaccurate readings.
Logic has been written into the gauge control module to
help prevent abnormal offluctuating outside air
temperature indicator readings.
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Logic
Initial outside air temperature indication after the
ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Ifthe engine coolant temperature is 140 "F (60 "C) or
higher when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
outside air temperature indicated the last time the key
was turned off will be displayed regardless of the
current temperature measured by the outside air
temperature sensor.
If the engine coolant temperature is 139 "F (59 "C) or
lowerwhen the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
current temperature measured by the outside air
temperature sensor will be indicated.
22-338
Update to the outside air temperature
indicator while driving
If the temperature measured by the outside air
temperature sensor is greater than the temperature on
the outside air temperature indicator, the outside
temperature indicator will increase by 1 "F (1 "C) per
minute after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph
(30 km/h) for more than 30 seconds. It will continue to
increase until the current outside air temperature is
indicated. So, the first change to the outside air
temperature indicator is 1 minute and 30 seconds after
the vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). If
the vehicle speed drops below 19 mph (30 km/h), the
indicator will not update again until the vehicle speed is
increased to 19 mph (30 km/h) or more for more than
1 minute and 30 seconds again.
If the outside air temperature is less than 140 "F (60 "C),
the temperature increases 1 "F (1 "C) every 2 seconds
until the current outside air temperature.
If the outside air temperature is less than the indicated
temperature, the temperature will decrease 1 "F (1 "C)
every 2 seconds until the current outside air
temperature is indicated regardless of vehicle speed.
Troubleshooting
If the indicator displays "-....,.. -" for more than
2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature
display mode, check the.climate control system or
multiplex integrated control system for DTCs (see B-
CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A) (see page 22-112).
Calibration
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed
temperature can be recalibrated 5 "F or 3 "C to
meet the customer's expectations.
Calibrate the outside air temperature with the HDS or
by custom memory setting.
BACK
Electrical Compass
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT
(Canada models, without navigation)
CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY
r--:'I

22-339
BACK
Electrical Compass
System Description
Compass Operation (Canada models, without navigation)
The electrical compass unit shows the direction of the vehicle on the center information display. Compass operation
can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. If you see "--" in the direction
display, the compass is self-calibrating.
The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field. If the compass seems to
be continually showing the wrong direction, and is not self-calibrating, complete the compass calibration procedure,
on the next page. In most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone setting is required
so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone set into the compass, complete the
compass zone setting procedure on the next page:
Self-diagnosis Function
1. Press and hold the "SET" button, the"." arrow up button, and the """,," arrow down button, then turn the ignition
switch ON (II).
2. Release all buttons after a second.
3. Press and release the "SET" button and press and release the """,," arrow button. Do steps 1 through 3 within 4
seconds to enter the self-diagnosis mode.
4. Press the "."arrow up button to make all segments go OFF and ON.
5. Press the "SET" button to exit the self-diagnosis function.
Compass Adjustment Mode menu
The compass calibration and the compass zone setting can be done in the compass adjustment mode. To enter the
compass adjustment mode menu, press and hold the "SET" button for at least 5 seconds.
NOTE: If there is no operation of the "SET" button, the"." arrow up button, or the """,," arrow down button during
the compass adjustment mode for more than 10 seconds, the compass adjustment mode will cancel and the display
will return to the normal display.
22-340
BACK
Compass Zone Setting
NOTE: You should do this procedure in an open area away from buildings, power line, and other vehicles.

l=!..I
6. Select the "ZON" and press the "SET" button on the center information display during the compass adjustment
mode, the directional display on the center information display will show the "Zone set display" shown, and zone
set request is transmitted .
The display shows the "Zone set display" for 1.5 seconds and until the data from the Compass corresponds to
the requested data. After 1.5 seconds and the received data corresponds, the display changes to the "CAL
request display" .
The zone number displayed on the center information display during a compass adjustment mode will
correspond with the last received Compass data. If zone data is not receive yet, display will be blinking "--"
for zone number. .
Zone Set Display (Directional display is off, and "--" blinks.)
( ::IZDN 12
I:DO AM J.
Compass Calibration
NOTE: You should do this procedure in an open area away from buildings, power line, and other vehicles.
7. Select the "CAL" and press the "SET" button on the center information display during the compass adjustment
mode, the directional display on the center information display will show the "Calibration display" shown, and
calibration request is transmitted.
When the display goes from "--" to an actual heading, the compass unit has been calibrated.
Calibration Display (Directional display is off, "--" blinks, and an animation is displayed to show that the
calibration is in progress.)
I:DD AM J
22-341
BACK
Electrical Compass
Circuit Diagram
Canada models without navigation
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH . UNDER-DASH FUSE/REALY BOX
B ATIERY
No.lIBATIII20AI No.3 UGI 150 Al
+
, ....

A6.
No.21 17.5 Al
,
PNK
IGI
WHT
IGI HOT In ON Ulland
No.4 14D AI
START 11111
B4
No.7 110 AI
n--- ....
WHT
Fl X35 X34
VEL
REAR
FUSE/RELAY BOX
C33 B23
WHT YEL
CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY 12
VBU IGI
TX- TXt RX- RXt ILLUMI-
11
VEL GRY ORN BLU RED

6 5 4 3
IGI
GAUGE
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT CONTROL
MODULE
2
BLK BLK
G702 G506
22-342
BACK
Center Information Display Input Test
1. Remove the dashboard upper visor (see page 20-120).
2. Remove the center panel (see page 20-121).
3. Remove the four screws, and the center information display (A).
4. Disconnect the 12P connector (B) from the center information display.
GRN YEL
r:-:'I

Wire side of
female terminals
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
Ifthe terminals look OK, go to step 4
6. Reconnect the connector to the electrical compass unit, turn the ignition switch ON (II) and perform the following
input tests at the connector.
If all input tests prove OK, the center information display must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not .
obtained
11 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
conditions ground: An open in the wire
0.5V.
12 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery An open in the wire
voltage.
6 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage.
22-343
BACK
Electrical Compass
Electrical Compass Unit Input Test
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the electrical compass unit (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
RED BLU ORN
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Reconnect the connector to the electrical compass unit, turn the ignition switch ON (II) and perform the following
input tests at the connector.
If all input tests prove OK, the electrical compass unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
2 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
conditions There should be 1 less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
1 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
3 RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty center information display
conditions There should be about4 V. An open in the wire
4 BLU Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty center information display
conditions There should be about 4 V. An open in the wire
5 ORN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty center information display
6 GRV Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty center information display
22-344
BACK
Reminder Systems
Circuit Diagram
BAmRY
No.1 IBATIII20AJ NoJ 11G1150 AI
,..
No.4 140!
UNDER-DASH RJSE/RElAYBOX
SG2 PGI SGI
I
PI
E9 119
BLK BLK BRN
IGNITION SWITCH
-Q-
A6
No2IU.5AJ
WHT PNK
IGI
IGI HOT in ON 1111
,nd START 11111
No.7110AI
B4
WHT
IGI
MICU
IGKFI BACK-UP
PGZ SW H/L
Q4 PI3
L
J
P3
BLK PNK
IGNITION
KFlSWITCH
ICIosed:
2 Kayinsertscll
BLK
1.
GRN
ORIVEII'S
, ODOR SWITCH
ICIosed:
Dooropenl
WHT
I
6601 G601 G502 6601 G601
VBU
B-CAN
....
N28
LTGRN
WIPSII

WASHER
: 4 SWITCH

B-CAN
X34
X35
N22

--=:.J
.......... :CANlme
YEL---
WHT---@
.o ... TGRN - L
WHT VEL
8 J
I
VBU IGI

3
I
COMBINATIONSWITCHCONTROL UNIT
I
J 8 2 I
>XII
.IiUTO
Off

BLK
COMBINATION LlGHTSWrTCH
1
G601
(cont'd)
22-345
BACK
Reminder Systems
:---+---,
: CAN line
YL ~ I
GAUGE CONlROL MODULE A7 Al
CHIME
PARKING
lIl-?:= I
BRAKE
r- REMINDER
,

,

SEAT
GREEN-
BELT
REMINDER
f+I-
1
10V
I
IND1CATORI
KEY-IN STABILIZING
A/TGEAR
I ' ~
SEAT BELT BRAKE
REMINDER CIRCUIT
POsmON REMINDER SYSTEM
LiGHTS-ON
INDICATOR INDICATOR IND1CATOR
REMINDER
I ~ " I ~ G
ILED) ILED)
LiGHTS-ON
II
INDICATOR
~
ILED)
POWER SUPPULYCIRCUITI
II
WARNING DRIVE CIRCUIT
I
CONlROLLER AREA NETWDRK CONTROLLER
. ............ ... 1 B-CAN TRANSCEIVER I
1 HAN TRANSCEIVER 1
CANL CANH
- . LTGRN
. .
+---vY\-+
I 2.SkQ
: A6 : A12 />2 BID
:
RED WH7 BLK ORN
A12 All
SRSUNIT
B12
LT RN
ON:
ON:
UN-
BUCKLED
BUCKLED
LEFT SIDE
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
BLK
1
G602
22-346
' j' :-- .
BLK
1
G605
ON:
UN-
BUCKLED
RIGHTSIDE
SEATBELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
G501
PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH
(Closed:
Pedal depressed)
BACK
NOTE:
Before testing, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112) .
r--:'I
I.!::.I
Before testing, troubleshoot the F-CAN System using the gauge control module self-diagnosis function (see page
22-315).
MICU (Common Test)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76).
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, H, P and Q.
CONNECTOR E (16P)
8 16
BLK
CONNECTOR F (14P)
5
14

ORN
CONNECTOR H (14P)
BRN ,WHT PNK
, I ;
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (14P)
BLK
(cont'd)
22-347
BACK
Reminder Systems
4. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the connectors.
E9 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G601)
H9 conditions .' ground: There should be less An open in the wire
Q4 than 0.5 V.
P1 BRN Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
conditions ground: There should be less An open in the wire
than 0.5 V.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (Common Test)
5. Disconnect the gauge control module connectors A (12P) and B (24P).
VEL BlK
22-348
BACK
r--:'I

7. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make these input tests at the connectors .
If all the input tests prove OK, go to the appropriate input test.
- Key-in reminder, go to step 8.
- Parking brake reminder, go to step 9. , '
- Lights-on reminder, do the combination switch control unit input test (see page 22-300) and the combination
light switch test (see page 22-200).
- Seat belt reminder, do the seat belt buckle switch test;
B13 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
A2 conditions ground: An open in the wire
There should be less than 0.5
v.
A1 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery Blown No.7 (10A)fuse in the
An open in the wire
A7 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II). ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
(cont'd)
BACK
Reminder Systems
Key-in reminder '
8. Reconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make these input tests at
the connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system:
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-72).
I ~
P13 PNK Ignition key Measure the voltage to Faulty ignition key switch,
inserted into the ground: An open in the wire
- ...
J ,
ignition :switch There should be less than 1 V.
Ignition'switch Measure the voltage to Faulty ignition key switch
OFF and the ground: A short to ground in the wire
ignition key There should be 5 V or more.
removed from
the ignition
',' switch
E15 GRN Driver's door Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door switch
open ground: An open in the wire
There should be less than 1 V.
; ,Driver's door Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door switch
!
closed ground: A short ,to ground in the wire
,
There should be more than
;
5V.
F14 ORN Under all Attach to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions The ignition key light should main under-hood fuse box
come on. Blown No.6 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
Parking Brake Reminder
9. Reconnect the gauge control module connectors, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at the
connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module (see page 22-337).
ON (11), parking ground: An open in the wire
brake pedal There should be less than 1 V.
pressed
,Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Faulty brake fluid level switch
ON (II), parking ground: A short to ground in the wire
brake pedal There should be more than
released 5V.
22-350
BACK
Moonroof
Component location Index
MICU

I...!!!!..I
Moonroof Calibration, page 22-357
MOONROOF SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
Test/Replacement, page 22-278 .
(Built into the
22-351
BACK
Moonroof
Circuit Diagram
BA TTERY
+
22--352
No.l1BAn 1120 A) No.3I1GII50 Al
r..
NoAI40A)
No.210Pl)140 A)
10
BLK
G501
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
Y
LTBLU
UGHT
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
lin the gauge
control module)
IGNITIDN SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BDX

---&-
WHT
IGI
IGI HDT in ON IU)and
START 1111)
CPU
LT GRN LTBLU PNK
AUTO
A6 No2117.5Al
PNK --+----<r\...G----I IGI
B4
No.7 (10 A)
VBU
B2
PUR--t-.,
No.3
(10 A)
XII
GRN
Xl0 : X15
GRN
MICU
................... :
CLOSE
,
" 7------
ORN
GRY
4
UART ................... .
WHT
MOONROOF
SWITCH
GRY
UART
PASSENGER'S
MPCSUNIT
BACK
B-CAN
J1 J4
GRY LTGRN
UART B-CAN
DRIVER'S MPCS UNlIT
A21 An
BLU
KEY
LTBLU
~
, . I ~ ~
UNLOCK LOCK
L-____ ~
I
G601
MICU
DRIVER'S
DOORKEV
CYUNDER
SWITCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR
LOCK
ACTUATOR
E15
GRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
IClosed :
Door open)
: CAN line
............... :UARTline
H12
LTGRN
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
IClosed :
Door open)
~
I.!!!:..I
22-353
BACK
Moonroof
Moonroof Control Unit Input Test
Before troubleshooting the moonroof circuit, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
If the moonroof works OK manually, but will not work in AUTO, or reverses frequently (pinch detection) do the
moonroof calibration (see page 22-357) before proceeding with the input test.
3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B).
LTGRN PNK
22-354
BACK

I..!!:..I
If any test indicates problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
obtained
4 GRY Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the No.4 terminal and the
c,onnector X (39P) No. 15
terminal, and the No.4
terminal and the passenger's
MPCS unit connector A (28P)
No.4 terminal:
obtained
10 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
0.5V.
1 GRN Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No.2 (OP1) (40 A) fuse in
conditions ground: the main under-hood fuse box
There should be battery Blown No.3 (10 A) fuse in the
An <m.en in the wire
6 lTGRN Moonroof switch Measure the voltage to Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the
in AUTO OPEN ground: main under-hood fuse box
or AUTO CLOSE There should be battery Blown No.6 (7.5 A) fuse in the
position voltalle. under-dash fuse/relay box
7 ORN Moonroof switch Measure the voltage to Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
in TilT position ground: Faulty moonroof switch
voltage.
8 PNK Moonroof switch Measure the voltage to
inCLOSE ground:
position There should be battery
voltage.
9 lTBLU Moonroof switch Measure the voltage to
in OPEN position ground:
There should be battery
voltage.
7. If all the input tests are OK and multiple failures are found, replace the moonroof control unit/motor assembly. If
the problem is related to the key-off operation, go to the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-278), and
passenger's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-281).
22-355
BACK
Moonroof
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement
Special Tools required
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
NOTE:
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim toolset to
avoid damaging components.
Take care not to scratch the roof console and related
parts.
The moonroof can still be operated for about
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the
"II" to the "I" or "0" positions, as long as none of the
doors have been opened. This provides a
convenience to parked occupants while offering a
degree of security against unwanted or accidental
moonroof operation.
1. Carefully pry the moonroof switch (A) out of the
roof console.
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (B) from the moonroof
switch.
22-356
\
Terminal
Position
\
1 2 3 6 7 4 5
OPEN
IC
')
CLOSE h--{) .
TILT (
HO 0
i8" ro
-0 -0
CLOSE+AUTO (} I--
.OPEN+AUTO
0 -0
illumination bulb (C) or the switch.
BACK
Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit
NOTE: Do the moonroof control unit reset with all the doors and tailgate closed.
Resetting the moonroof is required when any ofthe following have occurred.
The moonroof was moved manually with the battery dead or disconnected.
The moonroof motor was replaced with a new one.
Any of components related to the moonroof were replaced.
- Wind deflector
- Moonroof glass
- Moonroof seal
- Moonroof glass bracket
- Moonroof cables, etc.
To reset the moonroof control unit, do these steps
2. Press and hold the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Release the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times.
5. Press and hold the moonroof open switch an additional 3 seconds after the moonroof is fully opened.

6. Press and hold the moonroof close switch an additional until 3 seconds after the moonroof is fully closed (tilted).
7. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the moonroof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function.
22-357
BACK
*: Without Rear Entertainment System
22-358
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY
Test, page 22-77
FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
REAR ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET*
BACK
POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET RELAY
Test, page 22-77
REAR
FUSE/RELAY BOX

22-359
BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDElI-HOOO RISE BOX
BATIElIY
NoA 140 AI
WHY
B4
NoS
115AI
IGNmONSWITCH
Ace HOT in Ace IQ
"dONlm
REO
VEL
AS
No.32
110AI
PCM
Y
LTGRN
PNK
'7
Ace
CUT
RELAY
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
IPorN!
UNOElI-OASH
RlSE/RElAY BOX
I
GRN
t
REO

(10AI
:CANline
I
REAR
FUSE/RElAY BOX
1 1 1,--....:...:.;;:.;;;,... ........ 1
1
.jCARGOAREA
__________________
L..t-------If-' RELAY
22-360
1---
WHY
BLK
1
-------,
REAR
ACCESSORY
POWEll
SOCKET
______
IWrthout rearentertainmantsysteml
N8
WHY
WHY
BLK
1
G507
FRONT
ACCESSORY
POWEll
SOCKET
112
.
LTGRN
: II! . B-CAN REARMICU 1
B18 B29
BLK BLK BLK
G601 G604 G603
B34
WHY
BLK
1
G604
CARGO AREA
ACCESSORY
POWEll
SOCKET
BACK

t.=:.I
Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-107).
accessory power socket (B).
A
WHT BlK
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are
all making good contact.
o If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded,
repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
o If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I).
5. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal
and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
o If there is battery voltage, go to step 6.
o If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
- Blown No.9 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
- Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box.
- Poor ground (G 601).
6. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal
and body ground. There should be continuity.
o If there is continuity, go to step 7.
o If there is no continuity, check for:
7. Remove the socket (A).
8. Remove the housing (A).
9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
removal.
22-361
BACK
Rear Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
Without Rear Entertainment System
20-110).
WHT BlK
Wire side of
female terminals
A
fuse/relay box.
- Blown No.9 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
22-362
o If there is continuity, go to step 7.
8. ,Remove the housing (A).
removal.
BACK
r--:'I

Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: Before testing the cargo area accessory power
socket, do the multiplex integrated control system
troubleshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-112)
1. Remove the left side rear trim (see page 20-92).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the center
WHT BLK
'/
Wire side of
female terminals
fuse/relay box.
- Blown No.5 (10 A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay
box.
- Faulty cargo area accessory power socket relay.
- Faulty rear fuse/relay box (including rear
MICU).
o Ifthere is continuity, go to step 7.
8. Remove the housing (B).
removal.
22-363
BACK
AC Power Outlet
Component Location Index.
22-364
AC INVERTER UNIT
POWER OUTLET
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BAnERY MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
IGNmoN SWITCH
+
No.1 (BAn (120 A) No.3 (lGII50A)
WHT
1G2 HOTi. ON (II)
AC INVERTER UNIT
BLK
G503
GRN
1G2
CUT
~ I _____ SJ RELAY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
_-+-__ I BOX
VEL
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWlrCH
(PorN)
22-365
BACK
ACPower Outlet
AC Inverter Unit Input Test
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio and navigation system (if equipped).
3. Disconnect the. battery negative cable.
4. Remove the driver's console side trim (see page 20-107).
5. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the AC inverter unit (8).
Wire side of
female terminals
22-366
BACK
r:-:,
I..!!!!:I
7. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
obtained
5 ORN Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the No.5 terminal and power
outlet 3P connector No.3
terminal:
12 WHT Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the No. 12 terminal and
power outlet 3P connector
No.1 terminal:
8. Reconnect the connector, turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the AC inverter unit.
obtained
6 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G503)
0.5V.
1 GRN Under all Measure the voltage to Blown No. 15 (20 A) fuse in the
voltage.
3 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the
ON (II) ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
22-367
BACK
AC Power Outlet
Power Outlet Replacement
2. Remove the power outlet (A), and disconnect the
3P connector (8).
A
3. Install the power outlet in the reverse order of
removal.
22-368
BACK
Circuit Diagram
Canada models
No.lIBATi 1120 AI No.3 1161150 AI
PCM
Y
LTGRN
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
IPorNI
ORN
14
-___
162
CUT

RELAY
1
GRN
A4
No.30
110AI
X34
VEL
AUTOMATIC DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
IHas control
G601
IGNITION SWITCH
IGl HOT In ON 101
and START 1101
162 HOT in ON 101
MICU

P5
BACK-UP UGHTS
NAVIGATION UNIT
PNK
A6
No.21
17.5 AI
r
P20
1"
WHT
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
5 IClosad : In R
BLK
Gl0l
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
22-369
BACK
System Description
Canada models
The automatic dimming inside mirror has a front-facing
lux level sensor (A), a rear-facing lux level sensors (B),
and a control unit. The control unit receives signals
from each sensor. Based on the difference between the
two lux levels (the light outside the vehicle and the light
from the headlights of the other vehicle, etc.), the
control unit controls the electro-chromic gel to reduce
the glare. This dimming function is canceled when the
transmission is in reverse, or when the automatic
dimming off switch (e) is turned OFF.
A
B c
22-370
Test/Replacement
Canada models
1. Remove the roof console (see page 22-239).
3. Measure the voltage between No.2 terminal and
body ground.
o If there is less than 0.5 V, go to step 4.
o If there is more than 0.5 V, check for:
body ground.
o If there is no voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
body ground with the transmission range switch in
R position.
o If there is battery voltage, replace the mirror
assembly.
o If there is no voltage, check for:
- Faulty transmission range switch.
BACK
Power Mirrors
POWER MIRROR SWITCH
POWER MIRRORS
Mirror Actuator Test,
page 22-374
r:-:'I
t=!!..I
Mirror Actuator Replacement,
page 22-375
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERI
POWER MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH
(Built into the climate control unit)
22-371
BACK
Power Mirrors
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
120A)
INT1:RIOR
LlG
RELA
HT
Y
I
LTBLU
6
r-
No.4 140 A)
NoJIIG))50A)
P9
7
G C
~ LIGHTS
ILEM)
?Iup
'---
5
RED
7
DASHLIGIITS
BRiGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUli
Ilnthegauga
control module)
22-372
UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAY BOX
54
No.7 110 A)
X35
WHT WHT--------------
IGNmONSWITCH
~
AS
Noll 0.5 A)
K5
WHT PNK ~ - . . f > -
IGI
WHT------
IGI HOTIn ON III) and
STARTIW) X15 IUARTJ
...................................
GRY .. ........ .. ....
.....
Jl IUARTJ
................................... GAY
;"1
~ . ~

J4
L TGRN

t
X27
......................
:
IGI VBU B-CAN
MICU
P10 P25 P26 Pl1 P22
NolO 11 0 A) FUSE
lUNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOXI
I
PNK GRN BLU PUR GRY VEL LTGRN
:

4 8 3 2 1 3 .4
B-CAN
L"f'R.
! REAR WINDOW
?IDOWN
?ILEFT
: IRIGHT
I DEFOGGER}
' POWER MIRROR CLIMATE CONTROL UNII
f DEFOGGER
SWITCH
10 POWER MIRROR SWITCH 37
BLK BLK
1 1
G501 0506
BACK
LTGRN GRY GRV
.
:A28 Al
B-CAN UART VBU UART
DRIVER'S MPCSUNIT
RSEH SVCC
AS Al AS A13
I I I
GSOl GSOl G506
VBU
PASSENGER'S MPCSUNIT
RSEV
AS All A25
r--:'I

:CANline
............. :UARTHne
A10 A14
G N
UP
e RIGHT
0
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
I
G506
22-373
BACK
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Switch Test/
Replacement
1. Carefully pry the switch panel out from the
dashboard.
2. Disconnect the 1 OP connector (A) from the power
mirror switch (B).
A
Mirror Switch:
\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10
Position \
UP
C
)
DOWN
C
)
LEFT
0
I--K
RIGHT
G
L (
R ('
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the
screws and replace the power mirror switch.
22-374
Power Mirror Actuator Test
NOTE: The power mirror actuator can be tested by
using the HDS and following these steps:
Select BODY ELECTRICAL from the SYSTEM SELECT
menu .
Select FUNCTION TEST, and then the appropriate
power mirror function test.
2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the power
mirror actuator (B).
ground according to the table.
LEFT
Terminal
9
Position
10 11
TILT UP e
Ef)
TILT DOWN
E0 e
SWING LEFT cJ)
e
SWING RIGHT
e EB
RIGHT
Terminal
9
Position
10 11
TILT UP
e
Ef)
TILT DOWN Ef)
e
SWING LEFT
8
(-B
SWING RIGHT (-B e
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the
mirror actuator.
Defogger Test
No.2 terminals ofthe 16P connector. There should
be about 8 Q or less. If there is no continuity, check
for an open circuit.
BACK
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement
Actuator Replacement
2. Remove the three TORX screws using a
tamperproof T1 0 TORX bit.
3. Remove the connectors (A) and the actuator (8).
A
4. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.
Actuator Harness Replacement
r--:'I
t.=:..I
2. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-43).
3. Remove the three TORX screws from the actuator
(A) using a tamperproof T1 0 TORX bit.
4. Remove the three TORX screws from the housing
(8) using a tamperproofT10 TORX bit.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator and
the side turn signal light.
6. Remove the gasket (e) and the harness (D) from the
power mirror.
(cont'd)
22-375
BACK
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement (cont'd)
7. Route the wire harness ofthe new actuator through
the hole in the bracket and the gasket in the reverse
order of removal.
8. Connect the connectors to the actuator and the side
turn signal light securely.
9. Install the actuator, housing and the gasket in the
10. Install the power mirror on the door, and make sure
the actuator, mirror defogger, and side turn signal
light operation.
22-376
BACK
Seat Heaters
DRIVER'S SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-381
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-381
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-381
r--:'I
.l!!:..I
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
SEAT HEATER RELAY
Test, page 22-77
(cont'd)
22-377
BACK
Seat Heaters
Component Location Index (co nt' d)
RIGHT SECOND ROW
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-382
SECOND ROW
SEAT HEATER RELAY
Test, page 22-77
22-378
RIGHT SECOND ROW
SEATBACK HEATER
Test, page 22-382
LEFT SECOND ROW
SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-382
LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT
CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-382
RIGHT SECOND ROW
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test, page 22-383
LEFT SECOND ROW
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test, page 22-383
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Front Seat
B AmRY
No.1 (BATI 1120 AI No.3 (161 (SO AI
PCM [>-LTGRN
IGNmON SWITCK
,
,

i..=:..I
-t>
TRANSMISSION
PNK RANGE SWITCK .(P or NI
Q : A4 No.30110AI D7

+ ow---@--
--------4-Ci
No2 (0P11 (40 AI
IG2 HOT in ON lUI
UNDER-DASH
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
Y
LTBLU
2
C D
UGHT
(O.84WI
1
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
TIt : THERMOSTAT
BR:BREAKER
HI : High
LO:Low
-
I-
, ,
LO HI
3

[ON: 77-95 'F (25-35 'tIl
[OFF: 97-111 'f 136--44 'tIl
[ON: 77-95'FI25-35'tll
[OFF: 115-130 'f 146-54 'tIl
I
BRN
DRIVER'S SEAT
5 HEATER swrrCK
, , , ,
LO HI LOO HI
C DC D
INDICATORS
(0.98Wx21
4 6
GRY
lin the gauge r--- VEL -
con1rol modulel A2 AI A3 Bl
CUSHION BACK
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER B2
I I
G602 GS07
PUR -------. B2 FUSE/RELAY BOX
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT HEATER SWITCK
-
I-
, ,
LO
3
GRN
CUSHION
AlONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT HEATER
HI
4
BLK
I

LO
(
1
G605
No.4
(20 AI
SEAT HEATER RELAY
X36
BRN
t
BRN
5
, , , ,
HI LOO
D C

INDICATORS
(O.98Wx21
INTERIOR UGHT
RELAY
Y
LTBLU
2
HI
6
VEL
g)
UGHT
10.84 WI
1
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
lin the gauge
corilrolmodulel
YEL
016
X2
1
6501
22-379
BACK
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram - Second Row Seat
IG2 CUT RELAY
5 3
,PCM V-lTGRN
--[>
TRANSMISSION
PNK RANGE SWITCH IP or NI
MAIN UNOER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH
0:
AmRY
No.lIBATII120 AI No.3I1GII50AI
---@-
-':;-';...()-+--GRN
+
INTERIOR
LIGHT
RELAY
Y
lTBLU
UGHT
10.84W)

S
RCUIT
DASHUGHT
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROlCi
lin the geug
control mod
e
ule)
TH: THERMOSTAT
BR:BREAKER
HI : High
lO:low
lO HI
lTGRN
A2 A3
?-
TH
.-

BR
-
CUSHION
LEFT SECOND ROW AI
SEAT HEATER
1
G602
22-380
IG2
ORN----+'O
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.14 120 AI
1G2 HOT In ON 101
B2
[ON: 77-95 'f 125-35 'tIl
[OFF: 97-111 'f 136--44 'tIl
[ON: 77-95 'f125-35 't) 1
[OFF: 115-130 'f 146-54 'tIl
I
BRN
LEFT SECOND ROW
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
BlK
1
GRY
f-VEl

Bl
f-BlK - f--
BACK
1
G507
GRY-----,
RIGHT SECOND ROW
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
lO HI
GRN BlK
T
A2 A3
,
?- J
:TH
,
.--
1>-
,

:BR
,
-
CUSHION
RIGHT SECOND ROW AI
SEAT HEATER
1
G602
B2
-YEl
Bl
-BlK
SECOND ROW SEAT HEATER RELAY

T
BRN
VEL

-
BACK
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
Y
lTBLU
UGHT
10.84W)

DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
lin the geuge
conlrol module)
1
G503
BACK
Seat Heater Test
Driver's Seat
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector
(B) from the seat heater.
B
Seat-back
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
4P CONNECTOR
SEAT-BACK HEATER
2P CONNECTOR
3. Check for continuity between the seat-back heater
2P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals. There
should be continuity.
Seat Cushion
4. Check for continuity between the seat cushion
heater 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals, and
the No.1 and No.3 terminals. There should be
continuity.
appropriate seat heater.
Front Passenger's Seat

1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-141).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat
heater.
3. Check for continuity between the seat heater 4P
connector No.1 and No.3 terminals, and No.2 and
No.3 terminals. There should be continuity.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat
heater.
(cont'd)
22-381
BACK
Seat Heaters
Seat Heater Test (cont'd)
Second Row Seat
(8) from the seat heater.
Terminal side
of male terminals
Seat-back
3. Check for continuity between the seat-back heater
2P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals. There
should be continuity.
Seat Cushion
4. Check for continuity between the seat cushion
heater 3P connector No.2 and No.3 terminals.
5. Connect the 2P connector, and check for continuity
between the seat cushion heater 3P connector
No.1 and No.2 terminals. There should be
continuity.
appropriate seat heater.
22-382
BACK
Switch Test/Replacement
Front Seat Heater
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-107).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater
switch (A).
3. Remove the two screws and the switch.
1\
Terminal
Position \
1 2 3 4 5 6
HIGH

-0
C'

')
()... ...()
""
ON
0
()
0
:g
LOW "'" () "'"
OFF 0 "" 0
illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.
Second Row Seat Heater
r--:'I
t=:.I
20-110).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater
switch (A).
3. Remove the two screws and the switch.
\
Terminal
Position \
1 2 3 4 5 6
HIGH
C'

')
()... ...()
""
R-
r-o
ON
0
()
0
8
LOW "'"
0
"'"
OFF
""
"'"
illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.
22-383
BACK
22-384
LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR
Test, page 22-386
DRIVER'S SEAT
/
LUMBAR SUPPORT SWITCH
BACK
Circuit Diagram
PUR
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
DRIVER'S LUMBAR
SUPPORT SWITCH
BlK
BLK
G602
22-385
BACK
1. Separate the lumbar support switch cover (A) from
the switch (8).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) from the switch.
Terminal
Position
Forward
Backward
switch.
22-386
Motor Test
1. Remove the front seat-back cover (see page 20-150).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the lumbar
support motor.
A
Terminal side
of male terminals
3. Test the motor by applying battery voltage and
body ground to the terminals.
\
Terminal
1 2
Position
\
Forward
<>
e
Backward
e
<>
replace it (see page 20-149).
BACK
Power Seats
For the driver's power seat, refer to the Driving Position Memory System (DPMS)
page 22-414
POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
/
RECLINE MOTOR
Test, page 22-390
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
Test, page 22-390

I.!!!:..I
BACK
Power Seats
Circuit Diagram - Front Passenger's Power Seat
FRONT PASSENGER'S
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT 8Wn'CH
.. )
.. )
... )
DOWN '
UP ,
BACKWARD
10 9 3 7
BRN PNK WHT
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
G605
22-388
BLU
B6
No.17 No.13
120 AI 120 AI
F4 F7
GRN BRN
8 2
.. ) .. )
FORWARD' DOWN,
11 5
PUR
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
w) __ )_)
1 6 12
LTGRN
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR
4
BRN
G605
BACK
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement.
Passenger's Switch
r--:'I
l!!!!..I
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recli ne cover from the passenger's seat, then remove the
power seat switch (see page 20-144).
2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A).
1 2 3 4 5
,...---,
6 7
al9
10 11 12
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
1\
Terminal
\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Position
Forward
0
().
0
0
SLIDE
SWITCH
Backward
0-
0-r-O
0 0
RECLINE
Forward
0
()
SWITCH
0 0
Backward
0 0
FRONT UP
0
.)
()...- --f)
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN
0
V-
IV
()
REAR
UP
u-
IV ()...-

UP-DOWN
0 0
SWITCH
DOWN
,...
.()
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-389
BACK
Power', Seats
Front Passenger's Power Seat Motor Test
1. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page
20-141 ).
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch
(see page 22-239) and disconnectthe 12P
connector (A) from the switch.
-,....-
1 2

3 4 5
6 7
81 9 10 11 12
22-390
3. At the power seat adjustment switch 12P connector,
test the motor by applying battery power and
ground to the terminals according to the table.
Slide motor:
1\
Terminal
\
7 11
Position
Forward
e
(f)
Backward (f)
e
Recline motor:
1\
Terminal
\
6 12
Position
Forward
e
(f)
Backward (f)
e
Front up-down motor:
1\
Terminal
\
3 9
Position
UP (f)
e
DOWN
e
(f)
Rear up-down motor:
1\
Terminal
\
1 5
Position
UP (f)
e
DOWN
e
(f)
check for an open in the front passenger's seat wire
harness between the power seat adjustment switch
and each motor. If the wire harness is OK, replace
the appropriate motor (see page 20-144).
NOTE: The motors are not available separately. The
slide and up-down motors are part of the slide/up-
down adjuster. The recline motor is part ofthe
recline adjuster.
BACK
MICU
(Built into the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
Replacement,
page 22-72
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
Input Test,
page 22-278
FUEL FILL DOOR
OPENER SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-393
FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER SOLENOID
Test, page 22-393
REARMICU

22-391
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
22-392
No.lIBATI1120 AI No.311G1150 AI
n.
No.4 (40 A)
().
r
A7
W
v BU
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
B-CAN
All A27 A33
PNK BRN LTBLU
[1]:1
[]:2
[1]:2
[1]:1
I
G601
[1] :7
[]:5
IGNITION SWITCH
--Q-
A6
WHT PNK
IGI
IGI HOT in ON III) and
START lin)
B4
WHT
K5
J4
...........................
:
LTGRN

A28 :
FUEL
FILL
DOOR
OPENER
SWITCH
No.7
110 AI
VBU IGI
....... B-CAN
MICU

: G1

LTGRN

:
: B2

B-CAN
REARMICU
B18 B29
No.21
(7.5 A)
[1] : Wrth power tellgete
[] : Without power tailgate
: CAN line
G3
WHT
B4
VBU
REAR
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
FUEL LID ()
828
LTBLU
1
FUEL ALL
DOOROPENE R
SOLENOID
2
I I I
G604 G603 G604
BACK
Fuel Fill Door Opener Solenoid Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the B-CAN System
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the left side trim
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the fuel fill
door opener solenoid (B).
B
A
3. Check solenoid operation by connecting power to
the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal.
To prevent damage to the solenoid, apply battery
voltage only momentarily. The solenoid should
work.
4. If the solenoid does not work as specified, replace it.
r--:'I
. t=:..I
Fuel Fill Door Opener Switch Testl
Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, check the B-CAN System
2. Disconnect the 5P (or 7P)' connector (A) from the
fuel fill door opener switch (B).
* : With power tailgate
Without Power Tailgate {}
terminals .
There should be continuity with the switch
pressed
There should be no continuity with the switch
released.
switch.
22-393
BACK
22-394
MICU
(Built into the
REAR
FUSE/RELA V BOX
(With built in rear MICU)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH*
*: Rear window defogger switch is built
into the climate control unit.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Function Test, page 22-396
Defogger Wire Repair, page 22-397
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELA V
Test, page 22-77
BACK
Circuit Diagram
r:-:'I
~
: CAN line
PCM
~ ~ ~ + }-+-N._.l-cIBJA,n..J.(120)-A} ........ N_.3-c(rlG'-}(5JJO... A}_+ ___ WHT ___ BAT +-----ORN ___ .,......_., Y
LTGRN
N .3
(RRF/B)
(&GA)
A2
Na.l0
(30 A}
REAR
RlSE/RElAY BOX
~ C -- - ---- ~
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
_ ......

B-CAN
REARMICU
C22 B18 B29
RED
()
BlJ( BLK
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
8
BLK
1
G701 G604 G603
IGZ
IG2 HOT In ON III}
824 H6
VEL
B2 Gl
JGRN
l
- UNDER DASH
GRN
FUSE/RElAY BOX A4
~ Na.30
110 A}
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(PorN)
[;J
B-CAN

.................. -/

:X27 N20

LTGRN
~ = tREAR
CONTROL UNIT WINDOW
!The rear window defogger DEFOGGER
switdund deIoggertimer SWITCH
d ... it built into the INDICATOR
climate control unit} (LED)
37
BLK
G506
22-395
BACK
Function Test
Before troubleshooting the rear window defogger
circuit, perform multiplex integrated control system
troubleshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
NOTE:
Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger
wires with the tester probe.
Before testing, check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the No. 10 (30 A) fuse
in the rear fuse/relay box.
1. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal
(A) and body ground with the ignition switch and
defogger switch ON.
There shoulc;f be battery voltage.
If there is no voltage, check for:
- Faulty rear window defogger relay.
- Faulty rear MICU.
- Faulty climate control unit. "
- An open in the RED wire to the positive
terminal.
If there is voltage, go to step 2.
\
About'2.0V About6V\ About11V
About 4.2 V About 8.5 V
22-396
2. Disconnect the negative terminal (B) from the rear
window defogger.
3. Check for continuity between the negative terminal
and body ground.
If there is no continuity, check for an open in the
wire or poor ground (G701). If there is continuity,
go to step 4.
4. Reconnect the negative terminal to the rear
window defogger.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and the rear
window defogger switch ON.
6. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the each
points on each defogger wire, and the negative
probe to the negative terminal.
If the,voltage is as specified, the defogger wire
up to that point is OK .
If the voltage is not as specified, repair the
defogger wire.
BACK
Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the brokensection
must be no longer than 1 inch (25 mm).
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
c
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
of the defogger wire (8) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver
conductive paint (commercially available)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break.
Allow 25 minutes to dry.
4. Perform the function test to confirm that the wire is
repaired.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
r--:'I
t=:..I
22-397
BACK
"oJ.:
Immobilizer System
22-398
TRANSMITTER
\
KEY (TRANSPONDER)
Registration, page 22-410
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-254
PCM
Substitute known-good for testing,
page 11-8
BACK
System Description

, I.!!!!:.I
The vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless a programmed ignition key is
used.
This system consists of a transponder, a keyless transmitter, immobilizer-keyless control unit, immobilizer indicator,
IMOES unit (built into the MICU), and the PCM.
When the immobilizer key (programmed by the HDS) is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II)
position, the immobilizer-keyless control unit sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder
then sends a coded signal back to the immobilizer-keyless control unit which then sends a coded signal to the IMOES
unit, which confirms the code,and signals the PCM to continue to supply power to the fuel pump circuit.
Immobilizer key
(With keyless transmitter)
MICU
(lmoes circuit)
Steering lock assembly
Immobilizer-keyless
control unit

Key ....

Mechanical key
(Including transponder)
PCM
If the wrong key has been used or the code was not received or recognized by the unit, the vehicle will not start, then
shut off, and the indicator will quickly flash once, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the
ignition switch is turned OFF, the indicator will blink ten times to signal that the unit has reset correctly, then the
indicator will go off.
22-399
BACK
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram
: CAN line
BAmRY
+
No.1 (BAn (120 AI No.3 (lGI (50 AI
No.4 (40 AI

IGNmON SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
B
WHT
&
T A6 No21 17.5 AI
PNK--+-r:J"\""O--...... --,
IGI
IGIH OTin ON (III
START (1111 and
B4
No.7 (10AI

X38
PGM-Fi
MAIN RELAY 2
IFUELPUMPI

X4
1:1

X35 : X27

PCM
vv
RED WHT
GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE
LTGRN LTGRN
BLK YEL
B42
IGI
PGl
Cl
22-400
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IMOESUNIT
(Buikinlo
theMICUI
1
09
BRN WHT
+- ........................ ;
LTGRN
IGI VBU B-CAN
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
IGKEYSW K-UNE
LTGrRN . LTGRN ----t
LG3

LT RN
A46
IMOCD
(S-'NETJ
PGl PG2
B40 Bl
Gl0l
PCM
BRN
A41
LG3
LG2 LGI CANL CANH
B41 C41: A49 : A48
. .
RED WHT
,
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
PNK
UNDER-DASH
F E RELAY BOX
P13
PNK MICU
PNK
llGNmON
, KEY SWITCH
2 IClosed: Key insertedl
I
GOOl
LTBLU
K-UNE
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
KEY
--c[]
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTe 81905: Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Lost Communication with Driver's MPCS Unit
(DRLOCKSW Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the immobilizer-keyless control unit and the driver's
MPCS unit..
Are DTCs 81013,81065,81182, and/or 81356
a/so indicated?
(see page 22-137) .
NO-Do the immobilizer-keyless control unit input

22-401
BACK
Immobilizer System
DTC 81906: Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Lost Communication with Gauge Control
Module (AfT Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the immobilizer-keyless control unit and the gauge
control module .
Are DTCs 81061,81359,81808, and 81956 a/so
indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
22-402
BACK
Symptom Troubleshooting Information
General Check before Troubleshooting

Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items to minimize troubleshooting time:
If the battery is low; fully charge the battery, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
The ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use the Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then troubleshoot
the immobilizer system.
Check to see if a key ring, keys, or a key case is used; remove the key from it,and troubleshoot the immobilizer
system with a key only.
Check to see if an aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using the Immobilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern
The blinking pattern of the immobilizer indicator light can help troubleshoot the condition of the immobilizer system.
Following are descriptions of the four possible patterns.
Normal operation
If the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on for a maximum of 2 seconds, then goes off
after turning the ignition switch ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Immobilizer code is not identified
If the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on for a maximum of 2 seconds, then blinks
after turning the ignition switch ON (II). The immobilizer indicator blinks ten times, then goes off when the ignition
switch is turned OFF.
The state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD line can be checked by doing a SYSTEM CHECK with the
HDS (see page 22-406).
Immobilizer indicator does not come on
If the immobilizer indicator does not come on after turning the ignition switch ON (II), an open or short in the F-CAN
lines between the PCM and the gauge control module. Watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). If the MIL stays on,
go to the PGM-FI system troubleshooting (see page 11-3).
Immobilizer indicator does not go off
If the immobilizer indicator does not go off after turning the ignition switch ON (II), do the gauge control module self-
diagnostic function (see page 22-315). 1ft he indicator drive circuit is OK, do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
(cont'd)
22-403
BACK
Immobilizer System
Symptom Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Using Malfunctioning Circuit Functions
If a malfunction occurs in the immobilizer circuit, use the table to cross-reference the malfunctioning function to the
line(s) that should be checked table:

Function
Line Error
"'"
Immobilizer Key Tester
Indicator
Engine Start
Registration Communication
Keyless Operation
lTerminal Cause of
No. Malfunction
1
VBU line open Comes on,
Possible Impossible Possible Impossible
or short then goes off.
2
IG1lineopen
Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible
or short
IMOCD
3 IS-NET) line
Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible
open or short
Immobilizer:
4
B-CANline Comes on,
Possible Impossible
Possible
Impossible
open or short then goes off.
Keyless:
Impossible
5
K-LINE line Comes on,
Possible Impossible Impossible Possible
open or short then goes off.
KEYSWline
Possible
(in spite of the key is
open
Comes on,
in the ignition switch)
6
then goes off.
Possible Possible Possible
Impossible
KEYSWline
short to ground
(panic only works with
ignition switch OFF)
7
GND(LG) line
Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Impossible
open
System Check and Status Log
NOTE: The HDS can be used to:
Check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD (S-NET) line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK .
Check the number of times the immobilizer control unit-receiver doesn't permit the engine to run by checking the
STATUS LOG.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II) and follow the prompts to the
MAIN MENU.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
2. At the MAIN MENU, enter IMMOBILIZER, then selectthe IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
3. Do the SYSTEM CHECK. If there is a system check number, do the troubleshooting for the item indicated.
4. Check the status log using the HDS. Troubleshoot the line with the highest counts. If all the lines are "0" zero, the
problem may not be caused by the immobilizer system, check for ignition or fuel problems.
NOTE: Once repaired, clear the status log by removing the No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box or
disconnecting the battery.
22-404
BACK

I.!!!:..I
1. Troubleshoot the immobilizer system by the order of the priority shown:
Order of Symptom Possible cause
Priority
1 Immobilizer indicator blinks after the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-408).
ignition switch is turned OFF.
2 Engine does not start with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-409).
immobilizer key.
3 Immobilizer indicator does not come Check the MIL indication.
on. If the MIL comes on, go to the PGM-FI System MIL
circuittroubleshooting (see page 11-222) .
If the MIL does not come on, replace the gauge
control module.
4 Immobilizer indicator does not gO off. Symptom troubleshooting (see pa1Je 22-409).
22-405
BACK
Immobilizer System
System Check
1. Connect the HOS to the data link connector.
3. Monitor the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HOS.
4. If the HOS displays the "Immobilizer system is normal", the immobilizer system is OK. If the HOS displays any other messages, check as
follows:
Status Log No. System Check Possible Failures
A-1 Immobilizer system This key is not registered in the control unit. Try to register keys by
is not normal ' using "KEYS".
The communication was not good between the antenna and the immobilizer key by
influence of metal such as key chains.
battery voltaae low.
A-2 Immobilizer system Intermittent interruption between transponder and immobilizer-keyless control unit.
is not normal The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle but for another one or for
other company's one.
Key failure (transponder failure)
batterv voltaae low.
A-3 Immobilizer system The ignition switch was turned ON (II) with a non-immobilizer key.
is not normal The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle but for another one or for
other company's one.
Key failure (transponder failure)
battery voltage low.
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
B-1 Immobilizer system The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM by using "REPLACE PCM".
is not normal The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer-keyless control
unit by battery voltage low.
The communication was not good between the immobilizer-keyless control unit and the
PCM bv influence of some noise.
B-2 Immobilizer system The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM by using "REPLACE PCM".
is not normal The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer-keyless control
PCM bv influence of some noise.
0-1 Immobilizer system Harness short from the PCM to the immobilizer-keyless control unit. (lMOCO/S-NET line
is not normal short)
The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer-keyless control
PCM by influence of some noise.
PCM failure
0-3 Immobilizer system Blownfuse
is not normal Harness open from the PCM to the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer-keyless control
PCM by influence of some noise.
PCM failure
22-406
BACK
Status Log
~
t=:.I
If you suspect there is a immobilizer system problem, check the status log.
3. On the HDS screen, select Honda systems, select immobilizer set-up, select immobilizer information, then select
status log.
4. Check the Status log count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed, the
immobilizer system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.'
Status ~ ~ No. Detected Item Probable Cause
A-1 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. The key was not registered
(Code format normal, but code 2. Interference from metal such as key chains
data.is mismatch) 3. Low battery voltage
A-2 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. Ignition switch was turned ON (II) with another
(Code format failure) type of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
2. Interference from metal such as key chains
3. Low battery voltage
A-3 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. Ignition switch was turned ON (II) with another
(No key code or non-immobilizer type of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
key) 2. Interference from metal such as key chains
4. Key failure
5. Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
B-1 PCM CODE MISMATCH 1. PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format normal, but code 2. Low battery voltage
data is mismatch) 3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer-keyless control unit
4. Communication line electrical noise
B-2 PCM MISMATCH 1. PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format failure) 2. Low battery voltage
3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer-keyless control unit
D-1 IMOCD/S-NET LINE PROBLEM 1. Low battery voltage
(Short to ground) 2. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer-keyless control unit and the PCM
D-3 IMOCD/S-NET LINE PROBLEM 1. Open or short in the harness from the PCM to
(Open line or PCM failure) the immobilizer-keyless control unit
3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer-keyless control unit and the PCM
22-407
BACK
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer indicator blinks
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in
"General Check before Troubleshooting".
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
3. Enter the IMMOBILIZER, then select the
IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
4. Check the SYSTEM CHECK and STATUS LOG
information.
Is the SYSTEM CHECK indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the immobilizer system
according to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK!
STATUS LOG (see page 22-406) .
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key from
the ignition switch, then close the all doors.
7. Operate the keyless transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK
several times in the vehicle.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check for a poor ground (G101) and/or an
open in the wire between the immobilizer-keyless
control unit 7P connector No.7 terminal and PCM
connector A (49P) No. 41 terminal..
22-408
9. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer-
and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Check fuse No. 21 (7.5 A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box or for an open in the BRN wire
between the under-dash fuse-relay box and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit .
10. Measure the voltage atthe immobilizer-keyless
control unit 7P connector No.7 terminal and body
ground.
=
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control
unit..
NO-Check for a poor ground (G101) and/or repair
poor connection or open between the immobilizer-
and PCM connector A (49P) No. 41 terminal..
BACK
Engine does not start with the immobilizer
key
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in
"General Check before Troubleshooting" and "How to
Troubleshoot" (see page 22-403).
YES-Intermittent failure, the vehicle is OK at this
time. Check status log (see page 22-407) .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the
immobilizer indicator indication.
Does the indicator quickly flash twice and turn
off?
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter crank?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to Starting System troubleshooting and
check the starter motor circuit .
5. Try to start the engine with a different known-good
immobilizer key.
YES-Replace the immobilizer key .
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
Troubleshooting .
r--:'I

Immobilizer indicator does not go off
4. Enter the IMMOBILIZER, then select the
IMMOBILIZER INFORMATION.
5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
Is N-1 OK indicated?
YES-Do the gauge control module self-test. If the
gauge control module is faulty, replace it..
NO-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless
control unit, then register it and recheck. Ifthe
symptom goes away, replace the original
immobilizer-keyless control unit..
22-409
BACK
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer Key Registration
NOTE:
o The HDS is required for registration of the
immobilizer keys.
o Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can
cause problems with transponder operation.
o The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up to
six immobilizer Keys.
Add one new key
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and
the first password from the iN system.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM
SELECT" menu.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "Add 1 key".
6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by the newly
registered key. Check the keyless remote operation
to make sure that it functions properly.
Delete or add multiple keys
NOTE:
o If any of the registered keys were lost, do the
following procedure to delete the lost registered key.
o When deleting keys, it is necessary to delete all
stored remote transmitters. Refer to the keyless
transmitter programming to delete and reprogram
the remotes (see page 22-177).
1. Have all registered keys, all new keys, and the first
password.
SELECT" menu.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", or "Delete or Add
Multiple Keys".
22-410
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of
HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by all the
registered keys.
All keys are lost
NOTE: When deleting keys, it is necessary to delete all
stored remote transmitters. Refer to the keyless
transmitter programming to delete and reprogram the
remotes (see page 22-177).
1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer
PCM code.
SELECT" menu.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "ALL KEYS
LOST".
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of
HDS screen.
7. Check ifthe engine can be started by all the
registered keys.
BACK
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Input Test
r--:'I

NOTE: Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-112) and check the No. 21 (7.5 A) and No.7 (10 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-129).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
B
BRN LTGRN LTGRN PNK
(cont'd)
22-411
BACK
Immobilizer System
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
obtained
3 LTGRN Immobilizer- Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal An open in the wire
keyless control unit and the PCM connector A (49P) No. 46 terminal:
7P, the PCM There should be continuity.
connector A (49P), Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal
and the MICU 14P and under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (14P)
connector No.9'terminal:
disconnected. There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal A short in the wire
and body ground:
4 LTGRN Immobilizer- Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal An open in the wire
keyless control unit and under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (39P)
7P, the under-dash No. 27 terminal:
fuse/relay box There should be continuity.
connector X (39P) Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal A short in the wire
disconnected. and body ground:
5 LTBLU Immobilizer- Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal An open in the wire
keyless control unit and the data link connector (16P) No.7 terminal:
7P disconnected. There should be continuity.
and body ground:
5. Reconnect the connectors to the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and make these input tests at the connector.
If all the input tests prove OK, the immobilizer-keyless control unit must be faulty; replace it.
obtained
1 WHT Under all Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
conditions and body ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery voltage. An open in the wire
2 BRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
(II) There should be battery voltage. the under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
7 BRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G101)
Faulty PCM
6 PNK Ignition key Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
inserted into the There should be less than 0.5 V. Faulty ignition key switch
ignition switch An open in the wire
22-412
BACK
Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: All registered keys (with built in remote
transmitter) are necessary for replacement of the
immobilizer-keyless control unit.
(see page 20-119).
2. Remove the steering column 'covers (see page
20-129).
immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer-
keyless control unit from the ignition key cylinder.
5. Install the immobilizer-keyless control unit in the
6. After replacement, turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Select "IMMOBI" from the "System Select" menu.
9. Select "immobilizer Setup" from the "Mode Menu".
10. Select "Replace Imm Unit".
11. Operate according to instructions of a screen of
HDS.
12. After HDS operation, check the immobilizer system.
13. Verify the operation of every key and remote
transmitter.
2 2 ~ 4 3
BACK
f),riving Position Memory System (DPMS)
, !.
MICU
"I"
. ';
POWER MIRRORS
,Syst,em Input Test and ,
, Function Test, page 2 2 ~ 4 7
Actuator Replacement, page 22-375
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SWITCH
(Built into th. under-
BACK
POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC
STEERING SWITCH
Test, page 22-488 .'. ,
POWER TILT/TE!-ESCOPIC
STEERING COI\ITROL UNIT
. Input Test, page 22-482
POWER MIRROR SWITCH POWER TILT MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR
Test/Replacement, page 22-374 Test, page 22-488
page 17-2.5
POWER TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR
Test, page 22-488
r:-:'I
I.!!!!!..I
(cont'd)
BACK
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS)
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
Test, page 22-486
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR
. P ) W ~ R SEAT CONTROL UNIT
SLIDE MOTOR :
Test, page 22-486
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR
22-416
RECLINE MOTOR
Test, page 22-487
RECLINE POSITION SENSOR
POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR
Test, page 22-486
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR
BACK
r--:'I
I.!::..I
Circuit Diagram - Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering
BA mRY
+
MAIN UNDER-HDOD FUSE BOX
No.1 (BATI (120 AI No.3 (IGI
No.3 (P/WI (50 AI
-=n.
No.4 (40 AI
............... :UARTline
IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

---&-
AT AS No.21(7.5A1
POWER
SEAT
CONTROL
UNIT
V
1G1
1G1 HDT in ON (UI
and START (011
as No.15 (20 AI
mK
B4 No.7 (10 AI

POWER Tn.T/lELESCOPIC SlEERlNG SWITCH

I
6 .. :
"
UP
6 1
LTGRN
A15 A7
SW L3
BAr
TIM+ TIM-
B8 B7
LTBLU
POWER nLT MOTOR!
POSmON SENSOR
I
.. :6
('DOWN
Tn.T
7
GRN
A6
L1
TISB SVCC
PNK
I I I
b .. : b .. :b
"
RETRACT EXlEND
TELESCOPIC
10 3
PUR LTBLU
A14 Al0
L2 SWG
POWER nLT/lELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL UNIT
nsA SEG TESB TESA
A13 A5
LTBLU
mK
GRN----GRN
X35 X14 X12 X34
VEL PUR
Al B3 as AS All
VBU VMPl VMPZ
TEM+ TEM-
B6 B4
PNK
POWER TELESCOPIC
MOTOR/posmaN
SENSOR
1G1 UART
PG SG
Bl AS
I I
G503 G506
22-417
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Power Seat
BAmRY
+
22'-418
No.1(BATII120AI
BRN
A26
ILL+
No.3 JlGII50 AI
No.4 140 AI
NO.210P21140 AI
10
GRY
A4
ILL-
UGHTS
ILED.31
BRN
GRN
IGNITION SWITCH
W ~ ~ ~ ~ P N K
~
IGI HOT in ON 1111 and
START 11111
W ~
INDICATOR I
ILEDI
BLU-----------------------------------------------------
BLU
INDICATOR 2
ILEDI
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY swrrCH
ORN GRN RED BLK
1
-
-
G601
w ~ LTGRN

A35 A34 A31 A29 A30 A7 :A28
VBU B-CAN
DRIVER'S MPCS UNrr
SG
A5
BLK
G601
BACK
A6
No.21(7.5AI
-----PNK IGI
B4
No.7 (10AI
----WHT VBU
----BLU
B6
No.14120 AJ
B-CAN
~ 2 A I

............
K5 Fll F13 G3 Fl J4 Gl
----WHT
LTGRN ............................ ........ ....... ....... . ......
WHT
f
LTBLU ORN BW VEL LTGRN

Bl B8 A37 A35 :A40
VMPZ VMPI VBU IGI B-CAN
PG2 PGl SG
B4 B18 A9
Bu( Bu( Bu(
BLK
1
G&02
~
I.!!:..I
: CAN lina
............... :UARTlina
MICU
_ 1 1
.
.
.

PUR
PNK
POWERnLT/
TELESCOPIC
STEERING
: A39
CONTROL UNIT
UART
(
A31
GRN
I
l
7 TRANSMISSION
, ~
6 (Closed:
In Ppositionl
BLK
1
G101
(cont'd)
22-419
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Power Seat (cont'd)
BLU BLU
8 2 DRIVER'S POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
FRONT SLIDE REAR RECUNE
UP-DOWN UP-DOWN
"
,
,
,
"
UP
DOWN "
FOR-
"
BACK-
,
UP "
DOWN" FOR- BACK-
" WARD WARD WARD WARD
3 9 11 7 1 5 12 6
BLU ORN RED GRV LTGRN PNK WHT LTBLU GRN
Al AS A4 A7 A27 A23 A3 A6 A25
(
SCOM FHUp FHDN SLFW SLRW RHUP RHDN REFW RERW
FHM+ FHM-
SLFR+ SLRR- RHM+ RHM- REC+ REC-
B16 B6 B17 B7 B2 Bl0 B9 BI1
PUR BRN BLU GRV GRN PNK VEL
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR RECUNE MOTOR
22-420
BACK
FHSE
RED
FRONT
UP-DOWN
POsmON
SENSOR
SVCC
AI5
BRN
BR
r
l
T,
SLSE
All
WHT
B N
2 I
SUOE
POSmoN
SENSOR
/3
PUR
RHSE
AI3
VEL
B /II
2 8
REAR
UP-DOWN
POsmON
SENSOR
/3
PUR
RESE
GRN
3
RECUNE
POSmON
SENSOR
/2
PUR

t=!.I
SEG
A29
PUR
22-421
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Power Mirror
BATTERV
NoAI40AI
+
No.lIBAT) 1120 AI
l....-.o---.
No.3 IIGI 150 AI
WHT
RED
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAV
IGNmON SWITCH
---&-
IGI
161 HOT In ON (II)
and START (lUI
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX
B4
No.7 110 AI
A6
No.2117.S AI
PNK
'\",.0--
IGI VBU
MICU
X35
WHT-----
KS
WHT-----
X15
..... .......
GRV .......... .... ....
H4
IIIIII .1111.' GRV .................... ..
: ..
J4

L TGRN

B-CAN
Y
P9 Pl0 P25 P26 Pll P22
22-422
LTBLU

UGHTS
ILEDx21
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
lin the gauge
control modulel
WHT PNK GRN BLU
10
BLK
G501
PUR GRV
POWER
MIRROR
SWITCH
BACK
, II . , II ' II II
............. -.

WHT
A7
B-CAN UART VBU
RIGHT
G
G
LEFT
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
LEFT MIRROR
LSEH
SWING
(HDRIZONTAL)
svcc LSEV
A9
TIlT
(VERTICALI
5 LEFT MIRROR
POSITION
BLK SENSOR
SG
A5
BLK
I
GOO!
SG
A7
BLK
GRY
UART
RSEH
SWING
(HORIZONTAL)
WHT
A2
VBU
SVCC
RSEV
TILT
(VERTICAU
5 RIGHT MIRROR
POSITION
BLK SENSOR
I
G506
r--:'I
I..!!:..I
: CAN line
.. .. .. .. .. ... : UART line
UP
G
G
RIGHT MIRROR
22-423
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 81802: Power Seat Control Unit Internal
(EEPROM) Error
YES-Replace the power seat control unit .
time .
22-424
DTC 81805: Power Seat Control Unit Lost
(VSP/NE Message)
(AfT Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the power seat control unit and the gauge control
module .
Are DTCs 81011,81060,81061,81205,81357,
81359,81408,81805,81806,81906, and 82160
also indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
NO-Replace the power seat control unit..
BACK
OTC 81806: Power Seat Control Unit Lost
Communication with MICU (MIRRORSW
Message)
Message)
/s OTC 81806,81810, and/or 81811 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the power seat control unit and the MICU .
Are OTCs 81055,81057,81157,81159,81255,
81355,81955,82155,82156, and 82161 a/so
indicated?
NO-Do the power seat control unit input test
(see page 22-477) .

t.=:..I
(MEMSW Message)
/s OTC 81812 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
the power seat control unit and the driver's MPCS
unit..
Are OTCs 81013,81015,81065,81182,81356,
81358, and 81905 a/so indicated?
(see page 22-278) .
NO-Do the power seat control unit input test
(see page 22-477) .
22-425
BACK
" ','
DTC 81825: Power Seat Slide Motor Pulse.
Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting mUltiple DTCs, be
DTC 81825 is stored when the slide switch is operated
more than 1 second after the seat slides to the most
forward or most backward position, even when the
system is OK.
3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch in all
directions for more than 1 second each.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the slide position sensor
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the power seat control unit
connector .
YES-Troubleshoot 81836 first .
NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs 81826,81827 and/or 81828 also
indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
22-426
8. Operate the slide switch for 2 seconds, and check
the slide motor operation.
Does the slide motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
10. Disconnect the power seat control unit connector A
(40P).
11. Disconnect the slide position sensor 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between the power seat
control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 11 and
No. 29 and the slide position sensor 4P connector
Q
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
power seat control unit connector A (40P) No. 11
terminal.
SLSE(WHT)
=
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Reconnect power seat control unit connector A
(40P).
16. Measure the voltage between the slide position
sensor 4P connector No.2 (+) and No.3 (-)
terminals.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty slide position sensor, replace the slide
motor .
NO-If there is no voltage, replace the power seat
control unit. If there is battery voltage, repair a
short in the wire (sensor line) .
r--:'I
.I.!!:J
18. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A
(40P).
19. Disconnect the slide position sensor 4P connector.
control unit connector A (40P) No. 15 and No. 29
terminals and the slide position sensor 4P
connector No.1 and No.3 terminals respectively.
YES-Go to step 21.
NO,:-Repair open in the wire .
21. Disconnect the 4P connector from the front up-
down position sensor and the rear up-down
position sensor, then disconnect the recline motor/
lumbar support motor 8P connector.
(cont'd)
22-427
BACK
slide position sensor 4P connector No.1 terminal.
=
N O ~ o to Step 23.
23. Reconnect the power seat control unit connector A
(40P).
25. Measure the voltage the between power seat
terminals.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI
Is there battery voltage when the slide switch is
operated?
YES-Replace the slide motor/position sensor .
NO-Replace the power seat control unit .
22-428
27. Disconnect the power seat control unit connector B
(18P).
28. Disconnect the slide motor 2P connector.
control unit connector B (18P) No.7 and No. 17
terminals and the slide motor 2P connector No.1
and No.2 terminals respectively.
SLIDE MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18PI
YES-Go to step 30.
BACK
slide motor 2P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals
individually.
SLIDE MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the slide motor (see page 22-486).
Is the motor OK?
NO-Replace the slide motor/position sensor .

I.!!:.I
22-429
BACK
Ole 81826: Power Seat Front Up-down
Motor Pulse Error
DTC 81826 is stored when the front up-down switch is
operated more than 1 second after the seat moves to
the most up or most down position, even when the
system is OK.
4. Check for the DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the front up-down motor/
position sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections at the power seat control unit
connectors .
NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs 81825,81827 and/or 81828 also
indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
22-430
8. Operate the front upcdown switch for 2 seconds,
and check the front up-down motor operation.
Does the front up-down motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
(40P).
11. Disconnect the front up-down position sensor 4P
connector.
terminals and the front up-down position sensor 4P
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
control unit connector A (40P) No. 12 terminal and
body ground.
FHSE (RED)
Q
=
NO-Go to step 14.
(40P).
r:-:'I
u=..I
(40P).
19. Disconnect the front up-down position sensor 4P
connector.
terminals and the front up-down position sensor 4P
16. Measure the voltage between the front up-down Is there continuity?
position sensor 4P connector No.2 (+) and No.3
(-) terminals. YES-Go to step 21.
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR NO-Repair p ~ in the wire .
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty front up-down position sensor,
replace the front up-down motor .
21. Disconnect the 4P connector from the slide position
sensor and the rear up-down position sensor, then
disconnect the recline motor/lumbar support motor
8P connector.
(cont'd)
22-431
BACK
Drivi.ng Position Memory System (DPMS)
front up-down position sensor 4P connector No.1
terminal.
=
NO-Go to step 23.
(40P).
25. Measure the voltage between the power seat
terminals.
SVCC(BRN)
Is there battery voltage when the front up-down
switch is operated?
YES-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor .
22-432
(18P).
28. Disconnect the front up-down motor 2P connector.
terminals and the front up-down motc;>r 2P
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18P)
YES-Go to step 30.
BACK
front up-down motor 2P connector No.1 and No.2
terminals individually.
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
=
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the front up-down motor (see page 22-486).
Is the motor OK?
NO-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor .

t.=.J
22-433
BACK
DTC 81827: Power Seat Rear Up-down Motor
Pulse Error
DTC 81827 is stored when the rear up-down switch is
operated more than 1 second after the seat moves to
the most up or most down position, even when the
system is OK.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the rear up-down motor/
position sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections at the power seat control unit
connectors .
NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs 81825,81826, and/or 81828 also
indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
22-434
8. Operate the rear up-down switch for 2 seconds,
and check the rear up-down motor operation.
Does the rear up-down motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
(40P).
11. Disconnect the rear up-down position sensor 4P
connector.
terminals and the rear up-down position sensor 4P
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
body ground.
RHSE (VEL)
Q
=
NO-Go to step 14.
(40P).
r--:'I

(40P).
19. Disconnectthe rear up-down position sensor 4P
connector.
terminals and the rear up-dovyn position sensor 4P
REAR UPDOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
16. Measure the voltage between the rear up-down Is there continuity?
position sensor 4P connector No.2 (+) and No.3
(-) terminals. YES-Go to step 21.
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR NO-Repair open in the wire .
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty rear up-down position sensor, replace
the rear up-down motor .
NO-Ifthere is no voltage, replace the power seat
sensor and the front up-down position sensor, then
disconnectthe recline motor/lumbar support motor
8P connector.
(cont'd)
22-435
BACK
rear up-down position sensor 4P connector No.1
terminal.
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
=
NO-Go to step 23.
(40P).
terminals.
SVCC(BRN)
SEG (PUR)
Is there battery voltage when the rear up-down
switch is operated?
YES-Replace the rear up-down motor/position
sensor .
22-436
(18P).
28. Disconnect the rear up-down motor 2P connector.
terminals and the rear up-down motor 2P
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18P)
YES-Go to step 30.
BACK
rear up-down motor 2P connector No.1 and No.2
terminals individually.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the rear up-down motor (see page 22-486).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit..
NO-Replace the rear up-down motor/position
sensor .

22-437
BACK
DTC 81828: Power Seat Recline Motor Pulse
Error
DTC 81828 is stored when the recline switch is operated
more than 1 second after the seat back reclines to the
most forward or most backward position, even when
the system is OK.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the recline motor/position
sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the power seat control unit
connector .
NO-Go to step 6.
Are DTCs 81825,81826, and/or 81827 also
indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
22-438
8. Operate the recline switch for 2 seconds, and check
the recline motor operation.
Does the recline motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
(40P).
11. Disconnect the recline motor/lumbar support motor
subharness. 8P connector.
terminals and the recline motor/lumbar support
motor subharness 8P connector No.2 and No.3
terminals respectively.
RECLINE MOTOR/LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR
SUBHARNESS8PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
BACK
body ground.
RESE (GRNI
=
NO-Go to step 14.
(40P).
16. Measure the voltage between the recline motor/
lumbar support motor subharness 8P connector No.
3 (+) and No.2 (-) terminals.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Check for an open/short in the wire of the
recline motor/lumbar support motor subharness. If
the harness is OK, replace the recline motor/
position sensor .
control unit. If there is battery voltage, repair short
in the wire (sensor line) .
r--:'I
~
(40P).
19. Disconnect the recline motor/lumbar support motor
subharness 8P connector.
terminals and the recline motor/lumbar support
SEG(PUR)
YES-Go to step 21.
sensor, the front up-down position sensor, and the
rear u p ~ o w n position sensor.
(cont'd)
22-439
BACK
recline motor/lumbar support subharness 8P
=
NO-Go to step 23.
(40P).
24. Turn the i n i ~ i o n switch ON (II).
control unit connector A (40P). No .. 15 and No. 29
terminals.
Is there battery voltage when the recline switch is
operated?
YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor .
22-440
(18P).
28. Disconnectthe recline motor/lumbar support motor
subharness 8P connector.
terminals and the reclirie motor/lumbar support
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18PI
YES-Go to step 30.
BACK
recline motor/lumbar support motor subharness 8P
connector No.4 and No.5 terminals individually.
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the recline motor (see page 22-486).
Is the motor OK?
NO-Replace the recline motor/position sensor .

I.!!:..I
22-441
BACK
Ole 81829: AfT P Signal and VSS Signal
Mismatch
3. Test drive at 6 mph (10 km/h) for 10 seconds.
4. Check for the DTCs with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 5.
power seat control unit connector .
5. Check the P indicator of the shift position indicator
and the MIL.
Does the P indicator and MIL come on?
YES-Troubleshoot the automatic transmission
system .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check for the gauge control module OTCs with the
HDS.
Are there any DTCs indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the gauge control module .
22-442
BACK
DTC 81835: Tilt/Telescopic Switch Signal
Input Error
su re to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
3. Operate the tilt/telescopic switch in each direction
for more than 3 seconds each.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure. The power tilt/telescopic
steering system is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections at the tilt/telescopic switch
connector and at the power tilt/telescopic control
unit connector .
6. Test the tilt/telescopic switch (see page 22-488).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the switch .
7. Disconnect power tilt/telescopic steering control
unit connector A (16P).
8. Disconnect the tilt/telescopic switch 13P connector.

I..!!!:.I
9. Check for continuity between body ground and tilt/
telescopic switch 13P connector terminals No.1,
No.3, No.6, No.7, and No. 10 individually.
TILT/TELESCOPIC SWITCH 13P CONNECTOR
L3
(L T GRN) (BRN)
Q
= =
NO-Go to step 10.
SWG
(LT BLU)
Q
=
(cont'd)
22-443
BACK
10. Check for continuity between power tilt/telescopic
steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals
No.7,' No.6, No.1 0, No. 14, and No. 15 and the tilt/
telescopic switch 13P connector terminals No.1,
No.7, No .. 3, No.1p, n No.6 respectively.
TILT/TELESCOPIC SWITCH 13P CONNECTOR
L3
(LTGRN)
POWER TILT /TELESCOPIC STEERING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (16P)
I.s there continuity?
YES-Replace the power tilt/telescopic steering
control unit .
22-444.
BACK
DTC 81836: Power Seat Position Sensor
Circuit Short
1. Clear the DTC with the HOS.
direction for more than 1 second each.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the driving position
memory system is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections at the power sear control unit
connectors .
(40P).
7. Disconnect the 4P connectors from the slide
position sensor, the front up-down position sensor,
and the rear up-down position sensor, and
disconnect the SP connector from the recline
motor/lumber support motor subharness.
~
I.!!!:..I
S. Check for continuity between power seat control
unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 15 and body
ground.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 140P)
j ~
SVCCIBRN)
=
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between body ground (motor
body) and the No.1 terminal of the slide position
sensor, the front up-down position sensor, and the
rear up-down position sensor.
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR 13P)
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR 13P)
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR 13P)
YES-Replace the motor/position sensor that has
continuity .
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
22-445
BACK
Ddving Position Memory System (DPMS)
10. Check for continuity between body ground (seat
frame) and the No. 8 terminal ofthe recline motor/
lumber support motor subharness .
. RECLINE MOTOR/LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR
8P CONNECTOR
.Wire side of female terminals
yES .... Check fora short to ground in the wire of the
recline motor/lumber support motor subharness. If
the harness is bad, repair it, if the harness is OK,
replace the recline motor/position sensor .
~ .
22-446
': .
BACK
DTC 81837: Driving Position Memory Recall
Timeout
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs,-be
3. Move the'steering position to the full tilt up and full
telescopic out positions with the power tilt/
telescopic steering switch.
4. Move both power mirrors to the full up and full left
positions with the power mirror switch.
5. Move the power. seat to the full front up and full
rear up positions, then slide the seat all the way
back and completely recline the seat-back
backward with the power ~ t adjustfylent switch.
6. Put this seating position into memory with the
driving position memory switch.
7. Manually move the seat away from the positions
just memorized.
8. Recall the memory positions with the driving
position memory switch.
9. Wait for 3 minutes.
10. Check for DTCs with the, HDS.
Are any orcs indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.
Are any orcs other than 81837 indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 12.
r--:'I
~
12. Clear the DTCswiththe HDS;and waitfor
6 seconds.
13. Move:the motors shown one at a time, and check
the operation time. ,
Steering tilt motor up and down
Steering telescopic motor pulled and pushed
Power mirror actuator (up, down, left, right)
Power seat (slide forward/backward, recline
.forward/backward, front up-down, rear up-dawn)
Does any motor fail to run smoothly?
YES-Go to the failed motor test:
Power tilt/telescopic motor test (see page 22-488).
Power mirror actuator test (see page 22-374).
Power seat motor test (see page 22-486).
If the motor is OK, check the engagement of the
motor gear .
NO-Go to the each input test:
Power seat control unit input test (see page
22-477) .
Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit input
Driver's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-278).

22-447
BACK
DTC B1840:Tilt Motor Pulse Error
2. Turn the. ignition switch OFF, and then baok ON (II).
3. Operate the tilt switch in each direction for more
than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 6.
s. Operate the tilt switch for 2 seconds, and check the
tilt motor operation.
Does the tilt motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
10. Disconnect power tilt/telescopic control unit
connector A (16P).
11. Disconnect the tilt motor/position sensor SP
connector.
22-448.
control unit connector A (16P) terminals No.4,
No. 12, and No.16 and tilt motor/position sensor SP
connector terminals No.6, No.7, and No. S
respectively.
TILT MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR
TISB
(BLUI
TISB (BLUI SEG (GRNI
POWER TILT /TELESCOPIC CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR A (16PI
YES-Go to step 13.
power tilt/telescopic control unit connector A (16P)
POWER T1LT/TELESCOPIC CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (16P)
TISA(ORN)
Q
=
=
Is there continuity? .
NO-Go to step 14.
BACK
14. Reconnect power tilt/telescopic control unit
connector A (16P).
16. Measure the voltage between tilt motor/position
sensor 8P connector terminals No.6 and No.8 and
between terminals No.7 and No.8.
TILT MOTOR/POsmON SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR
SEG(GRN)
TlSA(ORN)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty tilt motor/position sensor, replace the
tilt motor assembly .
NO-Ifthere is no voltage, replace the power tilt/
telescopic control unit. If there is battery voltage,
repair short in the wire .
connector A (16P).
19. Disconnect the tilt motor/position sensor 8P
connector.

l!!!..I
control unit connector A (16P) terminals No.2 and
No. 16 and tilt motor/position sensor 8P connector
terminals No.5 and No.8 respectively.
SEG(GRN)
POWER TlLT/TELESCOPIC CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR A (16P)
YES-Go to step 21.
21. Disconnect the telescopic motor/position sensor 6P
connector.
22. Check for continuity between tilt motor/position
ground.
TILT MOTOR/PosmON SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR
=
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
22-449
BACK
connector A (16P).
24. Turn the ignition switch ON '(II).
25. Measure the voltage between power tilt/telescopic
No. 16.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC CONTROL
SVCC(PNKI
SEG(GRNI
Wire, side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage when the tilt switch is
operated?
YES-Faulty tilt motor/position sensor, replace the
tilt motor assembly .
NO-Replace the power tilt/telescopic control
unit .
connector B (8P).
connector.
2 2 ~ 4 5
control unit connector B (8P) terminals No.7 and
No.8 and tilt motor/position sensor 8P connector
terminals No.2 and No.3 respectively.
UNIT CONNECTOR A 116P)
TIM+ ILT BLU)
YES-Go to step 30.
30. Check for continuity between body ground and tilt
motor/position sensor 8P connector terminals No.2
and No.3 individually.
TIM-lORN) TIM+ILTBLU)
= =
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the tilt motor (see page 22-488).
Is the motor OK?
YES- Replace the power tilt/telescopic control
unit .
NO-Replace the tilt motor/position sensor .
BACK
DTC 81841: Telescopic Motor Pulse Error
3. Operate the telescopic switch in each direction for
more than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 6.
8. Operate the telescopic switch for 2 seconds, and
check the telescopic motor operation.
Does the tilt motor run smoothly?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 26.
r--:'I

control unit connector A (16P) terminals No.5,
No. 13, and No.16 and telescopic motor/position
sensor 6P connect.or terminals No.4, No.5, and
No.6 respectively.
TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
TESB
(YELl
TESB(YELI SEG(GRNI
POWER TIL T/TELESCOPIC CONTROL
YES-Go to step 13.
power tilt/telescopic control unit connector A (16P)
Q
10. Disconnect power tilt/telescopic control unit Wire side offemale terminals
connector A (16P).
connector.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
22-451
BACK
connector A (16P) ..
16. Measure the voltage between telescopic motorl
position sensor 6f' connector termilials No.4 and
No.6 and between terminals No.5 and No.6.
TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION
SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female termilials
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty telescopic motor/position sensor,
replace the telescopic motor assembly .
NO-If there is no voltage, replace the power'tilt/
telescopic control unit. If there is battery voltage,
repair a short inthe wire .
connector A (16P).
connector.
22-452
No. 16 and telescopic motor/positioh sensor 6P
connector terminals No.3 and No.6 respectively.
SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
POWER TlLT/TELESCOPIC CONTROL
YES-Go to step 21.
connector.
22. Check for continuity between telescopic motor/
position sensor 6P connector terminal No.3 and
body ground.
SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
=
NO-Go to step 23.
BACK
connector A (16P).
No. 16.
POWER TILT /TELESCOPIC CONTROL
SVCC(PNK)
SEG(GRN)
Is there battery voltage when the telescopic
switch is operated?
YES-Faulty telescopic motor/position sensor,
replace the telescopic motor assembly .
NO-Replace the power tilt/telescopic
control unit .
connector B (8P).
connector.

L.::...I
control unit connector B (8P) terminals No.4 and
No.6 and telescopic motor/position sensor 6P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2 respectively.
SENSOR6PCONNECTOR
Wire side of female ter.minals
YES-Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
22-453
BACK
Drivi,o:g Position Memory System (DPMS)
30. h ~ c k for continuity between body ground and
telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 1 and No.2 individually;
SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
TEM-(LT'GRN) TEM+ (PNK)
= =
Wire side 'of female terminals
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Test the telescopic motor (see page 22-488).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Replace the power tilt/telescopic control
unit..
NO-Replace the telescopic motor/position
sensor .
BACK
DTC 81842: Power Tilt/Telescopic Position
Sensor Power Supply Circuit (SVCC Line)
Short
3. Operate the tilt/telescopic switch in each direction
for more than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
connector A (16P).
connector.
connector.
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
control unit connector A (16P) terminal No.2 and
body ground.
Q
NO-Go to step 10.
10. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector
terminal No.3 and body ground (motor body).
SENSOR6PCONNECTOR
=
YES-Replace the telescopic motor/position
sensor .
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
22-455
BACK
11. At the sensorside,check for continuity between tilt
motor/position sensor 8P connector terminal No.5
and body ground (motor body).
=
YES-Replace the tilt motor/position sensor .
NO-Replace the power tilt/telescopic control
unit .
22-456
BACK
Communication with Power Tilt/Telescopic
Steering Control Unit (UART line)
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Move the tilt/telescopic steering in each direction
with the tilt/telescopic switch.
Does the tilt/telescopic steering move in each
direction smoothly?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 10.
(40P).
connector A (16P).
r--:'I
I.!!:.I
8. Check for continuity between power seat control
unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 39 and power
tilt/telescopic control unit connector A (16P)
terminal No. 11.
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (16PI
YES-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between power seat control
unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 39 and body
ground.
=
NO-Substitute a known-good power tilt/telescopic
control unit and recheck. If DTC 81843 is still
indicated, replace the power seat control unit .
(cont'd)
22-457
BACK
connectors A (16P) and B (8P).
control unit connector A (16P) terminal No.9 and
connector B (8P) terminal No.1, and between
connector A (16P) terminal No.1 and connector B
(8P) terminal No.1.
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (16P)
POWER TILT ITELESCOPIC STEERING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
YES-Replace the power tilt/telescopic control
unit..
NO,..... Do the power tilt/telescopic control unit input
22-458
BACK
OTC 81844: Power Seat Slide Switch Circuit
Malfunction
3. Operate the slide switch in each direction for more
than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
(40P).
7. Disconnect the power seat adjustment switch 12P
connector.
power seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals
NO.1, No.7, and No. 27 individually.
= = =
NO-Go to step 9.
r--:'I

9. Check for continuity between these power seat
control unit connector A (40P) terminals:
No.1 and No.7
No.1 and No. 27
No.7 and No. 27
SCOM
(BLU)
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Test the power seat adjustment switch (see page
22-485).
Is the switch OK?
NO-Replace the power seat adjustment switch .
22-459
BACK
DTC 81845: Power Seat Recline Switch
Circuit Malfunction
sure to follow the instructions in B"CAN System
3. Operate the recline switch in each direction for
more than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
(40P).
connector.
No.1, No.6, and No. 25 individually.
= = =
NO-Go to step 9.
22-460
No.1 and No.6
No.1 and No. 25
No.6 and No. 25
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Testthe power seat adjustment switch (see page
22-485).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit..
BACK
DTC 81846: Power Seat Front Up-Down
Switch Circuit Malfunction
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF,. and then back ON (II).
3. Operate the front up-down switch in each direction
for more than 1 second.
Is Dre 81846 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
(40P).
7. Disconnectthe power seat adjustment switch 12P
connector.
No.1, NO.4, and No.5 individually.
NO-Go to step 9.

I.!!!:.I
No.1 and No.'4
No.1 and No.5
No.4 and No.5
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Test the power seat adjustment switch (see page
22-485).
Is the switch OK?
22-461
BACK
DTCB1847: PowerSeat Rear Up-Down.
3. Operate the rear up-down switch in each direction
for more thEm 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
(40P).
connector.
NO.1, No.3, and No. 23 individually.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A I40P)
RHDNIWHT)
NO-Go to step 9.
22-462
No.1 and No.3
No.1 and No. 23
No.3 and No. 23
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Testthe power seat adjustment switch (see page
22-485).
Is the switch OK?
BACK
Ole 82182: Left Power Mirror Horizontal
Sensor Signal Error
3. Move the left power mirror in each direction with
the power mirror switch.
Is DTC B2182 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Select POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR from the
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, and
enter the DATA LIST.
6. Check the NORMAL/ABNORMAL information of the
DRIVER DOOR MIRROR HORIZONTAL SENSOR in
the DATA LIST.
Is the information indicator ABNORMAL?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit..
8. Disconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P).
9. Disconnect the left power mirror 16P connector.
r:-:'I
i..=:..I
connector A (40P) terminal No. 10 and left power
mirror 16P connector terminal No.4.
LEFT POWER MIRROR 16P CONNECTOR
r--------,------, LSEH (PUR)
'-----------, LSEH (PUR)
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between left power mirror 16P
Q
=
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
22-463
BACK
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P).
15. Measure the voltage between left power mirror 16P
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the left power mirror .
22-464
BACK
DTC 82183: Left Power Mirror Vertical Sensor
Signal Error
3. Move the left power mirror in each direction with
Is DTe B2183 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Check the NORMALJABNORMAL information of the
DRIVER DOOR MIRROR VERTICAL SENSOR in the
DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 7.
9. Disconnect the left power mirror 16P connector.
r--:'I

connector A (40P) terminal No.9 and left power
mirror 16P connectorterminal No.3.
r--------, LSEV ILT BLUI
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A 140PI
YES-Go to step 11.
r------, LSEV IL T BLUI
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
22-465
BACK
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P).
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (I\).
15. Measure the voltage between left power mirror 16P
,------, LSEV (L T BLU)
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the left power mirror..
NO-Replace the driver'S MPCS unit .
22-466
BACK
DTC 82184: Right Power Mirror Horizontal
Sensor Signal Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting mUltiple DTCs, be
3. Move the right power mirror in each direction with
YES-Go to step 5.
ASSISTANT DOOR MIRROR HORIZONTAL
SENSOR in the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect passenger's MPCS unit connector A
(28P).
9. Disconnect the right power mirror 16P connector.

--=:J
10. Check for continuity between passenger's MPCS
unit connector A (28P) terminal No.6 and right
power mirror 16P connector terminal No.3.
RIGHT POWER MIRROR 16P CONNECTOR
'----------,RSEH (PNK)
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between right power mirror
16P connectorterminal No.3 and body ground.
....---..., RSEH (PNK)
Q
=
NO-Gotostep 12.
(cont'd)
22-467
BACK
12. Check for continuity between right power mirror 16
P connector terminals No.3 and No.6.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect passenger's MPCS unit connector A
(28P).
15. Measure the voltage between right power mirror
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the right power mirror .
NO-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit..
22-468
BACK
DTC 82185: Right Power Mirror Vertical
Sensor Signal Error
3. Move the right power mirror in each direction with
Is DTe B2185 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
ASSISTANT DOOR MIRROR VERTICAL SENSOR in
the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the passenger's MPCS unit..
8. Disconnect passenger's MPCS unit connector A
(28P).
9. Disconnect the right power mirror 16P connector.
r--:'I
l=!.J
10. Check for continuity between passenger's MPCS
unit connector A (28P) terminal No.5 and right
power mirror 16P connector terminal No.4.
,---------, RSEV (PUR)
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between right power mirror
,-----, RSEV (PUR)
.Q
=
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
22-469
BACK
12. Check for continuity between right power mirror 16
P connector terminals No.4 and No.6.
Terminal side.of male terminals
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect passenger's MPCS unit connector A
(28P).
15. Measure the voltage between right power mirror
,-------, RSEV (PUR)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the right power mirror .
22-470
BACK
System Input Test and Function Test
~
I.!!:..I
3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECTION menu, select POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR, then DTCs ..
If DTCs are found, troubleshootthe DTCs using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
If no DTCs are found, go to step 4.
4. Exit the DTC mode, and select DATA LIST from the POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR TEST MODE MENU.
5. Test each input and monitor each output under the condition shown below:
If the data list indication is correct, continue to the next switch. If all switches are OK, go to step 6.
If the data list indication is not correct, do the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in the
table.
- Voltage drop tests should be done with the ignition switch ON (II) and all connectors connected and the meter
negative test lead attached to a good body ground, unless specified otherwise.
- Continuity tests should be done with the ignition switch OFF and indicated terminals disconnected.
Data List Inputl Condition: Data List Control UnitITerminal Numberl Possible cause if result is
Command Indication Test (If applicable) not obtained
Door Mirror UP Mirror select switch in LEFT, MICU/P9 (WHT) Faulty switch (see page
switch then RIGHT Mirror select switch UP: 0 V 22-374)
Mirror up switch pressed: Center or DOWN: 5 V An open in the wire
ON A short in the wire
Mirror up switch released: Faulty control unit.
OFF
Door Mirror Mirror select switch in LEFT MICU/P11 (PUR) Faulty switch (see page
Select in LEFT position: ON Mirror select switch LEFT: 0 V 22-374)
selection Select switch in CENTER or Center or RIGHT: 5 V An open in the wire
RIGHT position: OFF A short in the wire
Fault')' control unit
Door Mirror Mirror select switchin LEFT, MICU/P10 (PNK) Faulty switch (see page
DOWN switch then RIGHT Mirror select switch DOWN: 0 V 22-374)
Mirror down switch Center or UP: 5 V An open in the wire
pressed: ON A short in the wire
Mirror switch released: OFF Faulty control unit
Door Mirror Mirror select switch in MICU/P22 (GRY) Faulty switch (see page
Select in RIGHT RIGHT position: ON Mirror select switch RIGHT: 0 V 22-374)
selection Select switch in CENTER or Center or LEFT: 5 V An open in the wire
LEFT position: OFF A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
Door Mirror Mirror select switch in LEFT, MICU/P25 (GRN) Faulty switch (see page
LEFT switch then RIGHT Mirror select switch LEFT: 0 V 22-374)
Mirror left switch pressed: Center or RIGHT: 5 V An open in the wire
Door Mirror Mirror select switch in LEFT, MICU/P26 (BLU) Faulty switch (see page
RIGHT switch then RIGHT Mirror select switch RIGHT: 0 V 22-374)
Mirror right switch pressed: Center or LEFT: 5 V An open in the wire
(cont'd)
2 2 ~ 4 7
BACK
System Input Test and Function Test (cont'd)
Data List Input/ Condition: Data List Control Unit/Terminal Number/ Possible cause if result is not obtained
Command Indication Test (If aDDlicable)
Slide Switch Forward Slide switch forward: ON Power seat control unit/A1, A7 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Switch released: OFF (GRY) An open in the wire
Slide switch forward: 0 V A short in the wire
Switch released: 5 V Faulty control unit
Slide Switch Slide switch backward: ON Power seat control unit/A1,A27 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Backward Switch released: OFF (LTGRN) An open in the wire
Slide switch backward: 0 V A short in the wire
Recline Switch Recline switch forward: ON Power seat control unit/A 1, A6 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Forward Switch released: OFF (LTBLU) An open in the wire
Recline switch forward: 0 V A short in the wire
Switch released: 5 V Faultv control unit
Recline Switch Recline switch backward: ON Power seat control unit/A1, A25 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Backward Switch released: OFF (GRN) An open in the wire
Recline switch backward: 0 V A short in the wire
Front Up-Down Front up-down switch up: ON Power seat control unit/ A 1, A5 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Switch Up Switch released: OFF (ORN) An open in the wire
Front up-down switch up: 0 V A short in the wire
Front Up-Down Front up-down switch down: ON Power seat control unit/ A 1, A4 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Switch Down Switch released: OFF (RED) An open in the wire
Front up-down switch down: 0 V A short in the wire
Switch released:. 5 V Faulty control unit
Rear Up-Down Rear up-down switch up: ON Power seat control unit/A1, A23 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Switch Up Switch released: OFF (PNK) An open in the wire
Rear up-down switch up: 0 V A short in the wire
Rear Up-Down Rear up-down switch down: ON Power seat control unit/A1, A3 Faulty switch (see page 22-485)
Switch Down Switch released: OFF (WHT) An open in the wire
Rear up-down switch up: 0 V A short in the wire
Ignition Switch for Ignition switch ON (II): ON Power seat control unit/A35 Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
Power Seat Control Ignition switch OFF: OFF (YEL) dash fuse/relay box
Ignition switch ON (II): 12 V .. An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
AfT Gear Position Transmission range switch P Power seat control unit/A31 Faulty transmission range switch
Switch (P) position: ON (GRN) An open in the wire
Any other position than P: OFF Transmission range switch P: Faulty control unit
OV
Seat MEMO Switch Seat MEMO switch pressed: ON Driver's MPCS unit/A31 (ORN) Faulty switch (see page 22-484)
Switch released: OFF Seat MEMO switch pressed: 0 V An open in the wire
Switch released: 5 V more A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
Poor ground (G601)
Driver 1 Position Driver position 1 switch Driver's MPCS unit/A29 (GRN) Faulty switch (see page 22-484)
Switch pressed: ON Driver's position 1 switch An open in the wire
Switch released: OFF pressed: 0 V A short in the wire
Switch released: 5 V more Faulty control unit
Poor ground (G601)
Driver 2 Position Driver position 2 switch Driver's MPCS unit/A30 (RED) Faulty switch (see page 22-484)
Switch pressed: ON Driver's position 2 switch An open in the wire
Switch released: OFF pressed: 0 V A short in the wire
Switch released: 5 V more Faulty control unit
Poor ground (G601)
22-472
BACK
Data List Inputl Condition: Data List
Command Indication
Column Tilt Up Steering tilt switch up: ON
Switch Switch released: OFF
Column Tilt Down Steering tilt switch down: ON
Switch Switch released: OFF
Column Telescopic Steering telescopic switch
Extend Switch extend: ON
Switch released: OFF
Column Telescopic Steering telescopic switch
Retract Switch retract: ON
Switch released: OFF
Ignition Switch (lG1) Ignition switch ON (II): ON
Ignition switch OFF: OFF
Slide Sensor Seat moving forward or
backward: ON
Seat not moving: OFF
Front Up-Down Seat front moving up/down: ON
Sensor Seat not moving: OFF
Recline Sensor Seat back moving forward or
backward: ON
Seat not moving: OFF
Rear Up-Down Seat rear moving up/down: ON
Sensor Seat not moving: OFF
Column Tilt Sensor Steering tilting up/down: ON
Up/Down Steering not moving: OFF
Column Telescopic Steering telescopic extend/
Sensor Extend/ retract: ON
Retract Steering not moving: OFF
Control UnitlTerminal Numberl
Test IN applicable)
Power tilt/telescopic steering
control unit/A15 (BRN), A7 (LT
GRN)
Switch in TILT UP: 0 V
Switch released: Batterv voltaae
control unit/A 15 (BRN), A6
(GRN)
Switch in TILT DOWN: 0 V
control unit/A15 (BRN), A14
(PUR)
Switch in TELESCOPIC
EXTEND:OV
Switch released: Battery voltage
control unit/A15 (BRN), A6
(GRN)
Switch in TELESCOPIC
RETRACT:OV
control unit/A9 (VEL)
Ignition switch ON (II): 12 V
Power seat control unit/A 11
(WHn
Pulses as seat moves: 2.5 V
average
Power seat control unit/A 12
(RED)
averaae
Power seat control unit/Al0
(GRN)
average
Power seat control unit/A13
(YEL)
average
control unit/A2 (PNK)to A 16
(GRN) as steering moves: 12 V
A16 (GRN)to A13 (YEL), A5 (LT
BLU)
Pulses as steering moves: 2.5 V
averaae
control unit/A2 (PNK) to A 16
(GRN) as steering moves: 12 V
A16 (GRN) toA12 (BLU), A4
(ORN)
Pulses as steering moves: 2.5 V
average
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
Faulty switch (see page 22-488)
An open in the wire
A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
An open in the wire
A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
An open in the wire
A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
An open in the wire
A short in the wire
Faulty control unit
dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire(s)
Faulty control unit
Faulty sensor
An open in the wire(s)
Faulty control unit
(cont'd)
22-473
BACK
Data List Inputl Condition: Data List Control UnitITerminal Numberl Possible cause if result is not obtained
Command Indication Test I" applicable)
Left mirror horizontal Left mirror moves left/right: Driver's MPCS unit/A 10 (PUR), Faulty sensor
sensor NORMAL A19 (ORN) An open in the wire
Left mirror does not move: Left mirror moving from full left Faulty control unit
ABNORMAL to full right: A 10 (about 0.5 V to
4.5 V) A 19 (5 V or more)
Left mirror vertical Left mirror moves up/down: ON Driver's MPCS unit/A9 (L T BLU), Faulty sensor
sensor Left mirror stopped: OFF A19(ORN) An open in the wire
Left mirror moving from full left Faulty control unit
to full right: A9 (about 0.5 V to
4.5 V) A 19(5 V or more)
Right door mirror Right mirror moves left/right: Passenger's MPCS unit/A6 Faulty sensor
horizontal sensor ON (PNK),A13 (YEL) An open in the wire
Right mirror stopped: OFF Right mirror moving from full Faulty control unit
left to full right: A6 (about 0.5 V
to 4.5 V) A 13 (5 V or more)
Right door mirror Right mirror moves up/down: Passenger's MPCS unit/A5 Faulty sensor
vertical sensor ON (PUR),A13 (YEL) An open in the wire
Right mirror stopped: OFF Right mirror moving from full Faulty control unit
left to full up: A5 (about 0.5 V to
4.5 V) A13 (5 Vor more)
DPMS MEM switch Driving position memory switch Driver's MPCS unit/A31 (ORN) Faulty switch
MEMO button pushed: ON Driving position memory switch An open in the wire
Switch released: OFF MEMO button pushed: A31 A short in the wire
(about 1 V or less) Faulty control unit
MEMO button released: A31
(5 Vormore)
DPMS POS1 switch Driving position memory switch Driver's MPCS unit/A29 (GRN) Faulty switch
POS1 button pushed: ON Driving position memory switch An open in the wire
(about 1 V or more) Faulty control unit
(5Vor more)
DPMS POS2 switch Driving position memory switch Driver's MPCS unit/A30 (RED) Faulty switch
POS2 button pushed: ON Driving position memory switch An open in the wire
(about 1 V or more) Faulty control unit
(5 Vormore)
22-474
BACK
6. Exit the DATA LIST and select FU NCTION TEST.
7. Do each of the function tests listed in the table shown. The appropriate output should occur.
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
o If the function operates normally, go to the next function test. If all function tests operate normally, the system is OK.
o Ifthe function does not occur, do the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in the table.
- Voltage drop tests should be done with the ignition switch ON and all connectors connected.
- Continuity tests should be done with the ignition switch OFF and indicated terminals disconnected.
- Jumper tests should be done according to the instructions indicated.
o If the test indicates thatthe component operates normally, butthe function will not operate by doing the function test or the normal use
of the component, the control unit that operates that function must be faulty; replace it.
o If the test indicates that the component does not operate normally, check for an open or short in the harnesses between the component
and the control unit. If the harness is OK, replace the component.
Function Test Component and Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test Ilf applicable) Possible cause if result is not
Operation obtained
Power Seat: Slide Seat slides forward Power seat control unit/B8 (ORN), AS (BlK), B7 (GRY), o Faulty motor
Motor-Full Forward B17(BlU) o An open in the wire
Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A . o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B8 to B17 and B7 to AS; driver's seat
should slide forward.
Power Seat: Slide Seat slides backward Power seat control unit/B8 (ORN), AS (BlK), B7 (GRY), o Faulty motor
Motor-Full B17 (BLU) o An open in the wire
Backward Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B8 to B7 and B17 to AS; driver's seat
should slide forward.
Power Seat: Front Front of seat moves Power seat control unit/B8 (ORN), AS (BlK), B6 (BRN), o Faulty motor
UP-DOWN Motor- up B16 (PUR) o An open in the wire
Full Up Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B8 to B16 and B6 to AS; front of driver's
seat should. move up.
Power Seat: Front Front of seat moves Power seat control unit/B8 (ORN), AS (BlK), B6 (BRN), o Faulty motor
UP-DOWN Motor- down B16 (PUR) o An open in the wire
Full Down Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B8 to B6 and B16 to AS; front of driver's
seat should move down.
Power Seat: Rear Rear of seat moves Power seat control unit/B1 (IT BlU), AS (BlK), B2 o Faulty motor
Up-Down Motor- up (GRN), B10 (PNK) o An open in the wire
Full Up Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B1 to B2 and B10 to A9; rear of driver's
seat should move up.
Power Seat: Rear Rear of seat moves Power seat control unit/B1 (IT BLU), A9 (BlK), B2 o Faulty motor
Up-Down Motor- down (GRN), B10 (PNK) o An open in the wire
Full Down Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A o A short in the wire
and B. Connect B1 to B10 and B2 to AS; rear of driver'S
seat should move down.
(cont'd)
22-475
BACK
Function Test Component and Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test (If applicable) Possible cause if result is not
Operation obtained
Power Seat: Seat back moves Power seat control unit/B1 (l T BLU), A9 (BlK), B9 Faulty motor
Recline Motor-Full forward (YEl), B11 (l T GRN) An open in the wire
Forward Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A A short in the wire
and B. Connect B1 to B11 and B9 to A9; driver's seat
back should move forward.
Power Seat: Seat back moves Power seat control unit/B1 (IT BlU), A9 (BlK), B9 Faulty motor
Recline Motor-Full backward (YEl), B11 (lTGRN) An open in the wire
Backward Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors A A short in the wire
and B. Connect B1 to B9 and B11 to A9; driver's seat
back should move backward.
Column Tilt Up Power tilt/telescopic Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit/B1 (BlK), B3 Faulty motor
steering tilts up (WHT), B7 (ORN), B8 (IT BlU) An open in the wire
Disconnect the tilt/telescopic steering control unit A short in the wire
connectors A and B. Connect B3 to B7 and B1 to B8;
steerina tilts UP.
Column Tilt Down Power tilt/telescopic Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit/B1 (BlK), B3 Faulty motor
steering tilts down (WHT), B7 (ORN), B8 (l T BlU) An open in the wire
Disconnect the tilt/telescopic steering control unit A short in the wire
connectors A and B. Connect B3 to B8 and B 1 to B7;
steering tilts down.
Column Telescopic Power tilt/telescopic Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit/B 1 (BlK), B3 Faulty motor
Extend steering telescopic (WHT), B6 (PNK), B4 (l T GRN) An open in the wire
extend Disconnect the tilt/telescopic steering control unit A short in the wire
connectors A and B. Connect B3 to B4 and B1 to B6;
steerina telescopic extend.
Column Telescopic Power tilt/telescopic Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit/B1 (BlK), B3 Faulty motor
Retract steering telescopic (WHT), B6 (PNK), B4 (l T GRN) An open in the wire
retract Disconnect the tilt/telescopic steering control unit A short in the wire
connectors A and B. Connect B3 to B6 and B 1 to B4;
steerina telescopic retract.
22-476
BACK
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test
r:-:'I
L=lJ
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior trim.
3. Disconnect the 40P connector (A) and 18P connector (B) from the power seat control unit (C).
L T BLU GRN BLK
CONNECTOR B (18PI
VEL PNK LTGRN
CONNECTOR A (40PI
BRN GRV ORN
PUR BLU BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
PNK GRN LT GRN PUR GRN VEL BLU PNK LT GRN
(cont'd)
22-477
BACK
D.riving Position Memory System (DPMS)
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make the input test at the connectors.
obtained
A37 BLU Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
"
main under-hood fuse box
An open in the wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the power seat control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors.
If all the input tests prove OK, the. controll!nit must be faulty; replace it.
obtained
A9 BLK Under all Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G602)
B4 BLK conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
B18 BLK
A35 VEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
B1 LTBLU Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in
conditions There should be battery voltage. the main under-hood fuse box
An open in the wire
B8 ORN Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in
An open in the wire
A31 GRN Shift lever in P Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
position There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
Shift lever out Check for voltage to ground: A short to ground in the wire
of P position There should be about 10 V.
22-478
BACK
Power Mirror Circuit Input Test

I.!!!'..I
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-U2).
MICU
2. Remove the left side kick panel (see page 20-76).
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (30P).
WHT PNK
2 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 25 26 27 28 30
GRY GRN BLU
Wire side of'female terminals
5. Reconnect the connector to the under-dash fuse/relay box.
P9 WHT Power mirror switch in UP Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
There should be less than 1 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An open in the wire
Power mirror switch released Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty power mirror switch
There should'be5 Vor more. A short to ground in the wire
P10 PNK Power mirr,or switch in Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
DOWN There should be less than 1 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An ODen in the wire
There should be 5 V or more. A short to Qro.und in the wire
P25 GRN Power mirror switch in LEFT Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
An ODen in the wire
There should be 5V or more. A short to Qround in the wire
P26 BLU Power mirror switch in RIGHT Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
An ODen in the wire
There should be 5 V or more. A short to Qround in the wire
P11 PUR Power mirror switch in L Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
position There should be less than 1 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An ODen in the wire
There should be 5 V or more. A short to Qround in the wire
P22 GRY Power mirror switch in R Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
position There should be less than 1 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An open in the wire
There should be 5 V or more. A short to around in the wire
(cont'd)
22-479
BACK
Power Mirror Circuit Input Test (cont'd)
Driver's MPCS Unit
PNK
A5' BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G601)
There should be less than 0.5 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An ODen in the wire
AT WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-
There should be battery voltage. hood fuse box
Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
An oDen in the wire
A8 GRY Under all conditions Check for continuity between Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
the A8 terminal and passenger's An open in the wire
MPCS unitconnector A (28P)
No.4 terminal:
A16 YEL Under all conditions Connect the A7 and A16 Faulty left power mirror actuator
A38 PNK terminals, and A5 and A38 An open in the wire
terminals:
The mirror moves UP.
A17 RED Under all conditions Connect the A7 and A 17 Faulty left power mirror actuator
A38 PNK' terminals, and A5"and A38 An open in the wire
'terminals:
The left power mirror swings
LEFT.
,
*: Reconnect the connector to the dnver s MPCS Unit.

BACK
Passenger's MPCS Unit
10. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-8).
11. Disconnect the passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P).
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
BLU
12. Inspectthe connector and socketterminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if rasult is not obtainad
AT BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G506)
There should be less than 0.5 V. Faulty power mirror switch
An ODen in the wire
A2' WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-
There should be battery voltage. hood fuse box
Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
An ODen in the wire
A4 GRY Under all conditions Check for continuity between the A4 Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
terminal and driver's MPCS unit An open in the wire
connector A (40P) No.8 terminal:
A10 lTGRN Under all conditions Connect the A2 and A 10 terminals, Faulty right power mirror actuator
A25 BlU and A7 and A25 terminals: An open in the wire
The right power mirror moves UP.
A11 lTBlU Under all conditions Connect the A2 and A 11 terminals, Faulty right power mirror actuator
A25 BlU and A7 and A25 terminals: An open in the wire
The left Dower mirror swinos RIGHT.
*: Reconnect the connector to the passenger's MPCS Unit.
14. If multiple failures are found on the more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If inputfailures
are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
22-481
BACK
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test
2. Remove the steering column cover (see page 20-129).
3. Disconnected the 16P connector (A) and 8P connector (8) from the power tilt/telescopic steering control unit (C).
B
CONNECTOR B (8P)
ORN GRN
CONNECTOR A (16P)
LTBLU VEL BRN
Wire side of
female terminals
22-482
BACK
r--:'I
l=:.I
5. Reconnect the connectors to the power tilt/telescopic steering control unit, and make these input tests at the
connectors .
If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
A8 BlK Under all Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G503, G506)
A1 WHT Under all Check for voltage to ground: No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
An open in the wire
A9 VEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
B3 WHT Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in
An open in the wire
B5 GRN Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.3 (P/W) (50 A) fuse in
An open in the wire
22-483
BACK
Driving Position Memory Switch Test/Replacement
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the memory switch (B).
3. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch from the door panel.
I'-...
Terminal
"'-...
8 1 2 4 5 6 7
Position
OFF
MEMO
button
ON
OFF
Position 1
button
ON
0--0
OFF
Position 2
button
0-
ro
ON
Indicator 1

Indicator 2

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-484
BACK
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement

I.!!:..I
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat (see page
20-144), then remove the two screws and the power seat adjustment switch.
Wire sidmof female ter inals
GRN -+----i*!
A
BLK
2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (8).
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
\
Terminal
\
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
Position
SLIDE
FORWARD
SWITCH
BACKWARD 0-f--o
RECLINE
FORWARD
SWITCH
BACKWARD -0
FRONT UP
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN
0-

REAR
UP 0-
f---o
UP-DOWN
SWITCH
DOWN
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-485
BACK
Driver's Power Seat Motor Test
Slide motor, Front up-down motor, Rear up-
down motor
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from each power seat
motor.
NOTE: All connectors are terminal side of male
terminals.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR SUDE MOTOR
22-486
GRY
PUR
FRONT UpDOWN MOTOR
3. Test each motor by connecting power and ground
according to the table. When the motor stops
running, disconnect battery power immediately.
'"
Terminal
"
1 2
Position
SUDE
FORWARD
e
Ef)
MOTOR
BACKWARD Ef)
e
'"
Terminal
"
1 2
Position
FRONT UP
e
Ef)
UpDOWN
Ef)
e
MOTOR DOWN
'"
Terminal
"
1 2
Position
REAR UP
e
Ef)
UpDOWN
Ef)
e
MOTOR DOWN
4. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it:
Slide motor (see page 20-144)
Front up-down motor (see page 20-144)
Rear up-down motor (see page 20-144)
BACK
Recline motor
2. Disconnect the power seat wire harness 8P
connector from the recline motor/lumbar support
motor subharness.
VEL/GRN WHT IRED
r--:'I

3. Test motor by connecting power and ground
according to the table. When the motor stops
running, disconnect battery power immediately.
'"
Terminal
"
4 5
Position
RECLINE
FORWARD (f)
e
MOTOR
BACKWARD
e
(f)
*: With ventilated seats
check for an open in the wire between the 8P
connector and recline motor. Ifthe harness is OK,
replace the recline motor (see page 20-148).
22-487
BACK
Drivin'g Position Memory System (DPMS)
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering
20-129).
tilt/telescopic steering switch (8).
B
"'-
Terminal
'"
1 3 6 7
Position
TILT UP
0
C-
D ,...
TILT DOWN
'-' '-'
()....- ---{)
TELESCOPIC PUSH
C'
()....- ---{)
TELESCOPIC PULL
,... V ,...
switch.
22-488
10
')
'-'
Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Motor Test
20-129).
(8) from the power tilt/telescopic steering motors.
TILT MOTOR
8P CONNECTOR
Terminal side
of male terminals
3. Check each motor by connecting power and
ground according to the table. When the motor
stops running, disconnect battery power
immediately.
TILT MOTOR:
"'-
Terminal
"
2 3
Position
TILT UP
e EB
TILT DOWN
EB e
TELESCOPIC MOTOR:
"'-
Terminal
'"
1 2
Position
TELESCOPIC IN
e EB
TELESCOPIC OUT
EB e
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly;
replace the steering column assembly (see page
17-25).
BACK
Power Tailgate
DRIVER'S DOOR
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
~
I..!!:.I
POWER TAILGATE DRIVE UNIT
Power Tailgate Motor Test, page 22-524
POWER TAILGATE INSIDE BEEPER
TAILGATE OUTER
HANDLE SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-176
KEYLESS BUZZER
(Used as a power tailgate
outside buzzer)
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH SENSOR
Test, page 22-177
Programming, page 22-177 /
TRANSMITTER
__ r ~ _
KEY (transponder)
Registration, page 22-410
POWER TAILGATE BUTTON
(cont'd)
22-489
BACK
Power Tailgate
22-490
D
INSIDE TAILGATE SWITCH
TAILGATE LATCH ASSEMBLY (CLOSER UNIT)
(Including closer motor and latch/ratchet switch)
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-526
Closer Motor Test, page 22-526
TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH SENSOR
BACK
System Description

a=:J
The power tailgate can be opened and closed automatically by operating the dashboard switch, outside handle switch
(for open), inside switch (for close) or the keyless transmitter. The power tailgate has two safety functions for
safeguarding passengers: obstruction detection, and fall-down detection.
Basic Operation
OPEN: The power tailgate can be opened by operating the driver's switch, outside handle, or the keyless transmitter
under the following conditions:
Tailgate is fully closed (full-latched position is detected.).
Driver's door or Passenger's door lock knob switch is in UNLOCKED.
The remote unlock button is pressed twice, and then the tailgate button is pressed and held for 2 seconds (unless
customized setting are set to unlock all doors).
Shift lever is in Park position.
Vehicle speed is less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
Closer unit detects the neutral position.
Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11 V.
System is not in fail-safe mode.
CLOSE: The power tailgate can be closed by operating the driver's door tailgate switch, inside tailgate switch, or the
keyless transmitter under the following conditions:
Tailgate is fully open.
Pinch sensor detects no obstruction.
Closer unit detects the neutral position.
Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11 V.
System is not in fail-safe mode.
Obstruction Detection Function
If any obstruction is detected while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the tailgate will stop and the
reverse operation is activated. An obstruction is detected by the tailgate pinch sensor and the pulser in the drive unit. If
the obstruction is detected when the shift lever is in any other position than P, or the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph
(2 km/h), the tailgate stops moving immediately.
(cont'd)
22-491
BACK
Power Tailgate
Fall-down Detection Function
This function prevents the tailgate from suddenly falling down because of an accumulation of snow, or other causes. If
the pulser in the drive unit detects abnormal pulses, the tailgate starts to open. If this operation is activated twice, the
tailgate will close automatically. Ifthe obstruction detection function detects any obstruction several times during this
fall-down detection function, the tailgate stops moving.
NOTE: If the tailgate falls repeatedly, !replace the tailgate support strut (see page 20-198).
A: Auto open action completed
B: Tailgate falling is detected
C: Clutch reconnect when falling is detected
D: Auto open action (power tailgate motor reverse action)
E: Close function activated from fully open position
Power Tailgate Buzzer Beep Pattern
Condition
When the tailgate starts to open automatically
When the tailQate starts to close automatically
When the reverse operation is started after the tailgate
has detected any obstruction
When the reverse operation is started by switch
operation
When the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) while
the tailgate is opening automatically
When the operating time is over
When the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) while
the tailgate is closing automatically
When the tailgate is not fully-latched, and the following
condition is met: The shift lever is any position other
than P, and Brake pedal position switch and parking
brake switch is OFF, and the vehicle speed exceeds
1.2 mph (2 km/h).
When the tailgate fall-down detection function is
activated
22-492
FULL V OPEN AREA
e e ~ Pattern
Beeps 1 time
e e ~ s 1 time
Beeps 3 times
Beeps 3 times
Beeps intermittently until the condition is corrected
Beej!S 3 times
Beeps continuously
BACK
Resetting the Power Tailgate Control Unit
Ifthe battery terminal is disconnected or No.7 (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is removed while
the power tailgate is operating, the power tailgate will
not be able to open or close automatically until it is
reset. To reset the system, fully close the tailgate
manually. Once the battery terminals are reconnected
or No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is
replaced, the power tailgate system will automatically
reset. Make sure the power tailgate operates properly.

22-493
BACK
Power Tailgate
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
-0
A6
No21 (7.5 AI
FI
WHT PNK
IGI
BAITERY
No. I (BAn 1120 AI No.3 (lGI ISO AI
+
no
IGI HOT in ON (III
No.4 140 AI and START 11111
84
No.7 (10 AI
G3
no
WHT
No.3
IRRF/BI
t 160 AI
J4
LTGRN
A2a DRIVER'S
B-CAN MPCS
UNIT

.................. .
RED
UNDER-HOOD
LTGRN WHT YEL LTGRN FUSE/RELAY BOX
:82
: El
IRELA Y CONTROL
A2 REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX 84 B23 MODULEpartl
T TAilliGHT
No.8 No.6
VBU
RELAY CIRCUIT
No.ll

REARMICU

(7.5 AI (40 AI 120 AI
B-CAN
..........................

22-494
C24 C42 e21 C37 C16 C20 C39

;

2 BUZZER
LIGHTS
IBLK
SIDE MAKER
LIGHTS
INSIDE
TAIlliGHTS
TAILGATE
BRN PNK LTGRN WHT YEL
LICENSE PLATE
SWITCH -
LIGHTS
G702

A2 B12 :C7 BID C14
VMPI VMP2 B-CAN VBU IGI

CLU+ CLU- PTG+ PTG- SVCC SENA SENB SEGI
B20 A5
BLU RED
Bl B3 AI A2 B4 B5 B6 B8
POWER

M TAILGATE
TAILGATE
MOTOR
POWER TAILGATE SENSOR
CLUTCH
DRIVE UNIT
BUZ
B2
,/
--
POWER
TAILGATE
INSIDE
r- BEEPER
'-,
B7
I
G701
ATP
B6
T
BLU BLK
I
Gl0l
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(ON: In P positionl
BACK
PUR PUR
POWER POWER
TAILGATE TAILGATE
LEFT RIGHT
PINCH PINCH
SENSOR SENSOR
GRY WHT PUR
B16 B13 B17
TSEL TSER SEG2
SG PGl PG2 CLM+ CLM-
B19 AI A4 B2 Bl
PUR VEL
I I
BRN BLK RED/GRN
2 1
III

MOTOR
TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT
G702 G701 G701
DRIVER'S
MPCSUNIT
I
BRN
UGHT
- - - - - -:CANline
No.8 11.5 Al FUSE
(REAR
FUSE/RELAY BOXI
r------1-WHT-lt-----.1
r
W T WHT WHT
1 3
WHT
I? C
D UGHT
(O.84W(
DRIVER'S
DOOR
2 4
CARGO
2 POWER
(O.56W( POWER
TAILGATE
OUTER
HANDLE
AREA
UGHTS
TAILGATE
SWITCH
3 SWITCH
LTBLU
7
- BRN WHT VEL
DRIVER'S
MPCSUNIT
C5 B5 C9
DRSW SCOM OHSW
NTL RS RACT
C3 C4 Cl0
WHT RED ORN
5 6 4
l- I- l-
y
y
y
r--
ReLEASE NEUTRAL
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FULL
C2
PUR
C17
I I

C6 REAR
FUSE/RELAY
LTGRN BOX
2
I-
y
FULL
LATCH
SWITCH
HALF
C1
LTBLU
3
I-
y

LATCH
SWITCH
BLU RED
C8
GTSW
RED
SEG3
Cll
GRN
1
REAR
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
I
RED
r--:'I
I.!:...I
INSIDE
TAILGATE
SWITCH
22-495
BACK
Power Tailgate
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81352: Power Tailgate Control Unit
Internal (EEPROM) Error
3. Remove the No.7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
4. Wait for 1 minute, then reinstall the No.7 (10 A)
fuse to the under-dash fuse/relay box.
5. Close the tailgate manually (not with the power
tailgate switch).
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit..
NO-Intermittent failure, the power tailgate control
unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections between the power tailgate control
unit and the MICU .
22-496
DTC 81355: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost
YES-Go to Step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the power tailgate control
unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections between the power tailgate control
unit and the MICU .
Are OTCs 81055,81157,81160,81255,81955,
82155, and/or 81806 also indicated?
(see page 22-522) .
BACK
Communication with Driver's MPCS Unit -
(DRLOCKSW Message)
(ASLOCKSW Message)
4. Check for DTCs with the HD,S.
YES-Go to step 5.
the power tailgate control unit and the driver'S
MPCS unit .
Are orcs 81013,81015,81065,81182, and
81905 a/so indicated?
YES-Do the driver's MPCS unit inputtest
(see page 22-278) .
(see page 22-522) .

t.=:..I
(VSP/NE Message)
(AfT Message)
YES-Go to step 5.
the power tailgate control unit and the gauge
control module .
Are orcs 81011,81060,81061,81205,81206,
81207,81906,81956, and/or 82160 a/so
indicated?
(see page 22-334) .
(see page 22-522) .
22-497
BACK
PovverTailgate
OTC 81375: Driver's Door Power Tailgate
NOTE: If the power tailgate motor does not operate, test
the motor first.
2. Clear the DTCs with theHDS.
3. Operate the dashboard power tailgate switch for
more than 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
the power tailgate control unit and the driver's door
power tailgate switch .
6. Disconnect the 5P connector from the driver's door
power tailgate switch.
7. Disconnect the power tailgate control unit
connector C (14P).
8. Check for continuity between the power tailgate
control unit connector C (14P) No.5 terminal and
body ground.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
NO-Go to step 9.
22-498
connector 8 (20P).
control unit connector 8 (20P) No.5 terminal and
body ground.
1
V
Q
=
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
ISCOMIWHT)
c;--;>
2 3
V
5
V V
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
NO-Go to step 11.
10
20
11. Do the driver's door power tailgate switch test
(see page 22-525).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit .
NO-Replace the driver's door power tailgate
switch .
BACK
DTC 81376: Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If the power tailgate motor does not operate, test
the motor first.
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS, and wait for
2 seconds.
3. Pull the tailgate outer handle for more than
2 seconds.
YES-Go to step 5.
power tailgate control unit and at the tailgate outer
handle switch .
6. Open the power tailgate with the keyless
transmitter.
7. Disconnect the 3P connector from the tailgate outer
handle switch.
connector C (14P).
body ground.
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P1
NO-Goto Step 10.
r--:'I

connector B (20P).
control unit connector B (20P) No.5 terminal and
body ground.
.Q
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Test the tailgate outer handle switch (see page
22-176).
Is the switch OK?
NO-Replace the tailgate outer handle switch .
22-499
BACK
Power Tailgate
DTC 81377: Inside Tailgate Switch Circuit
Malfunction
3. Open the tailgate with the keyless transmitter.
4. Push the inside tailgate switch for more than
2 seconds.
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the inside
tailgate switch .
7. Disconnectthe 5P connectorfrom the inside
tailgate switch.
connector C (14P).
body ground.
7
13 14
=
NO-Go to step 10.
22-500
connector B (20P).
body ground.
Q
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Test the inside tailgate switch (see page 22-525).
Is the switch OK?
NO-Replace the inside tailgate switch .
BACK
OTC 81378: Power Tailgate Right Pinch
Sensor Circuit Malfunction
1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless
transmitter.
2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transmitter or
driver's door power tailgate switch.
/s DTe 81378 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check forloose or poor connections between
the power tailgate control unit and the power
tailgate right pinch sensor .
7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power
tailgate right pinch sensor.
9. Measure the voltage between the harness side of
the power tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector
No.2 (+) and No.1 (-) terminals.
POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
~
1 2
SEG2 TSER
(PUR) (WHT)
YES-Replace the power tailgate right pinch
sensor .
NO-Goto step 10.
~
I.!!:..I
connector B (20P).
control unit connector B (20P) No. 13 terminal and
No.2 terminal.
POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
L = = ~ SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
No.1 terminal.
2 3 5 9 10
12 13 14 15 19 20
POWER
TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR '-==::::::J
22-501
BACK
Power Tailgate
DTC 81379: Power Tailgate Left Pinch Sensor
Circuit Malfunction
1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless
transmitter.
2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transmitter or
driver's door power tailgate switch.
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Checkforloose or poor connections between
tailgate left pinch sensor .
tailgate left pinch sensor.
9. Measurethe voltage between the harness side of
the power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector
No.2 (+) and No.1 (-) terminals.
POWER TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
~
1 2
SEG2 TSEL
(PUR) (GRY)
YES-Replace the power tailgate left pinch
sensor .
NO-Go to step 10.
22-502
connector B (20P).
No.2 terminal.
8 9 10
18 19 20
r;==;:::::i::;"( POWER
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
~ = = = I SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
No.1 terminal.
POWER
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR '-====.J
BACK
OTC 81380: Power Tailgate Closer Unit
Neutral Switch Circuit Malfunction
1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.
2. Close the tailgate manually.
YES-Go to step 6.
tailgate closer unit .
6. Open the tailgate with the power tailgate outer
handle.
tailgate closer unit.
closer unit 6P connector No.1 and No.5 terminals.
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Faulty neutral switch, replace the power
NO-Go to step 10.

i..=:..I
closer unit 6P connector No.5 terminal and body
ground.
side of male terminals
YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit .
NO-Go to step 11.
connector C (14P).
body ground.
=
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
22-503
BACK
Power Tailgate
13. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed
position using a screwdriver.
tailgate control unit connector B (20P).
15. Connect battery power to the power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) No.2 terminal and ground
the No.1 terminal momentarily; (The motor should
run in the release direction.)
22-504
8 9 10
18 19 20
CLM- (VEl)
control unit connector C (14P) No.3 and No. 11
terminals.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate
closer unit.
SEG3 NTL
Q
YES-Repair open in the wire between the power
tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control
unit..
NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit .
BACK
OTC 81381: Power Tailgate Closer Unit
Release Switch Circuit Malfunction
1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle
switch.
3. Turn the ignition slIVitch OFF, and then back ON (II).
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the tailgate
closer unit .
SEG3 RS
YES-Faulty release switch, replace the power
NO-Go to step 10.
~
~
ground.
=
YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit..
NO-Go to Step 11.
connector C (14P).
body ground.
~ S R E D )
( ,
1 2 3 4 5
/
7
8 9 10 11
/
13 14
Q
=
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
22-505
BACK
Power Tailgate
14. Disconnectthe power tailgate control unit
connector B (20P).
the No.1 terminal momentarily. (The motor should
run in the release direction.)
22-506
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20PI
8 9 10
18 19 20
CLM- (VELI
terminals.
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14PI
8 9
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate
closer unit.
. , .
SEG3 RS
unit .
NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit. .
BACK
Ole 81382: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Full
Latch Switch Circuit Malfunction
YES-Go to step 6.
8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed.
YES-Faulty full latch switch, replace the power
NO-Go to step 11.
r--:'I

ground.
=
YES-Replace the tailgate closer unit .
NO-Go to Step 12.
connector C (14P).
body ground.
7
8 9 10 11 13 14
Q
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
the power tailgate control unit and the rear fuse/
relay box or between the rear fuse/relay box and
the power tailgate closer unit.lfthe wire harness
are OK, replace the MICU-rear junction box .
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
22-507
BACK
Power Tailgate
14. Turn the tailgate emergency leveno release the
tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position to
release position.
terminals.
Wire side of fema,e terminals
YES-Replace the power. tailgate control unit .
NO-Go to step 16.
22-508
unit..
BACK
DTe 81383: Power Tailgate Closer Unit
Ratchet Switch Circuit Malfunction
YES-Go to step 6.
SEG3 RACT
Q
YES-Faulty ratchet switch, replace the power
NO-Go to step 10.
~
~
ground.
YES-Replace the tailgate closer unit .
NO-Go to Step 11.
connectorC (14P).
control unit connector C (14P) No. 10 terminal and
body ground.
7
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
22-509
BACK

13. Turh the:tailgate lock latch to the fully-locked'
position using ascrewdr'iver. .
14. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the
tailgate-lock latchfrom the,fully-Iocked position to
release position.
control unit connectorC (14P). No. 10 and No. 11
terminals.
YES":"'Replace the power tailgate control unit . '
NO-Go to step 16.
22-510
17. Check for continuity between'the power tailgate
SEG3 RACT
YES-Re'pair opel'! in the wire between the power
unit .
NO-"Replace the powertailgate closer unit.
BACK
OTe B1aS4: Power Cleser Unit Half
Latch Switch Circuit Malfunction
1. Open the tailgate w,th the tailgate outer handle.
2. Close the tailgate manually .
..
3. Turn the ignition switch OfF, and then back ON (II).
YES-Go to step S.
NO-Intermittent failure, the is OK at this
the power control unit and the tailgate
closer unit..
S. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.
9. Disconnect the SP connector from the power
closer unit SP connector No.1 and No.3 terminals.
SEG3 HALF
YES-Faulty half latch switch, replace the power
tailgate closer unit. III
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between the powert;;lilgate
closer unit SP connector No.3 terminal and body
ground.
POWEFfTAILGATECLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit .
NO-Go to Step 12.
connector C (14P).
control unit connector C (14P) No. 1 and
body ground.
HALF
(LTBLUI
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14PI
7
8 9 10 14
.Q
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
22-511
BACK
PGwer Tailgate
14. Turn the emergency lever oftM tailgate and
release the tailgate lock latch from the fully-Idcked
position.
15. Check for continuity between the I?ower tailgate
terminals.
HALF
(LTBLU)
NO-Go to step 16.
16, Disconnect the 6P connector from the power
22-512
17. Check for continuity between the power tailgate'
unit .
BACK
DTC 81386: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse A
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If the motor does not operate, do the power
tailgate motor test (see page 22-524).
2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless
transmitter or inside tailgate switch.
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the drive unit .
7. Connect the voltmeter to the power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) No. 14 and No. 18 terminals.
8. Measure the voltage between the power tailgate
control unit connector B (20P) No. 14 and No. 18
terminals while the tailgate is opening and closing
with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate
switch.
Does it alternate between about 0 V and 5 V?
NOTE: Digital voltmeter will read about 2.5 V.
NO-Go to step 9.
r--:'I
I..:!!!..I
connector B (20P).
10. Disconnect the 8P connector from the drive unit.
body ground.
UNIT CONNECTOR B 120PI
NO-Go to step 12.
terminals and drive unit connector B (8P) No.5 and
No.8 terminals respectively.
UNIT CONNECTOR B 120PI
9 10
20 Wire side of
female terminals
SEG1
ILTGRNI
.Q
DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor A, replace the
drive unit .
22-513
BACK
Power: Tailgate
DTC 81387: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse B
Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If the motor does not operate, do the power
tailgate motor test (see page 22-524).
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit andthe drive unit .
6. Turn the ignition. switch OFF.
7. Connectthe voltmeter to the power tai Igate control
unit B connector (20P) No. 15 and No. 18 terminals.
8. Measure the voltage. between the power tailgate
terminals while the tailgate is opening and closing
with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate
switch. .
B (20P)
Does it alternate between about 0 V and 5 V?
NOTE: Digital voltmeter will read about 2.5 V.
NO-Go to step 9.
22-514
connector B (20P).
body ground.
123 89 10
12 13 18 19 20
NO-Go to step 12.
cQntrol unit connector B (20P). No. 15 and No. 18
terminals and drive unit connector B (8P) No.6 and
No.8 terminals.
9 10
20 Wire side of
"'--..L..--n-....L.---L...,--JL.....-.l.--'-"""'--L--I female term ina Is
SEG1
(LTGRN)
.Q
DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor B, replace the
drive unit .
BACK
DTC 81388: Power Tailgate Motor Circuit
Malfunction
Is DTe B13BB indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the drive unit .
control unit connector A (5P) No.3 and No.5
CONNECTOR A (5P)
NO-Go to step 9.
r--:'I

unit connector A (5P) No.3 (or No.5) terminal and
ground the No.5 or (No.3) terminal.
CONNECTOR A (5P)
PTG- PTG+
(WHT) (RED)
345
10. Check the power tailgate motor operation.
Does the motor run normally?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Faulty power tailgate motor, replace the drive
unit .
tailgate control unit connector B (20P).
(cont'd)
22-515
BACK
Power Tailgate
control unit connector A (5P) No.2 terminal and
body ground.
CONNECTOR A (5P)
3
=
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short in the wire.. YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 13.
the No. 20 terminal. Check for clutch operation.
Can you hear the clutch operate?
YES-Go to step 14.
10
20
JUMPER
WIRE
NO-Faulty power tailgate clutch, replace the drive
unit .
22-516
NO-Check the No. 11 (40 A) fuse in the rear fuse/
relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open in the
wire between the rear fuse/relay box and the power
tailgate control unit .
BACK
control unit connector B (20P) No. 12terminal and
body ground.
8 9 10
18 19 20
=
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Check the No.6 (20 A) fuse in the rear fuse/
control unit connector A (5P) No.1 and No.4
CONNECTOR A (5P)
PG1 (BRN)
Q
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit. II
(G701, G702) .
r--:'I
I.!!:I
22-517
BACK
Power Tailgate
DTC 81389: Power Tailgate Motor Clutch
Circuit Malfunction
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the drive unit..
connector B (20P).
2 3 5
12 13 14 15
YES-Repair short in the wire. Ifthe wire is OK,
replace the drive unit .
NO-Go to step 10.
2 2 ~ 5 1 8
body ground.
123 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
VMP2(BRN)
=
NO-Check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the rear fuse/
BACK
DTC 81390: Power Tailgate Closer Function
Error
1. With the tailgate closed, pull the tailgate outer
handle and wait for 10 seconds;
4. Listen for the sound of the latch releasing.
Is there sound?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to Step 7.
YES-Go to step 6.
the power tailgate control unit and the closer motor.

Are orcs 81380,81381,81382,81383, and/or
81384 also indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTCs .
NO-Replace the power tailgate control unit and
recheck the system .
r:-:'I

tailgate closer motor.
connector B (20P).
terminals and the power tailgate closer motor 2P
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
CLM- (YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
CLM+ (PUR)
CLM-
(YEl) r-'-""""+-.,---;or--'t-::f-..",-----'l""""
8 9 10
18 19 20
YES-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
22-519
BACK
Power Tailgate
body ground.
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Check for No.6 (20 A) fuse in the rear fuse/
wire between the rear fuse/relay box and power
connector A (5P).
control unit connector A (5P) No.4 terminal and
body ground.
CONNECTOR A (5P)
=
YES-Go to step 15.
(G701) .
22-520
16. Reconnect the power tailgate closer motor 2P
connector.
unit connector B (20P) No.2 (or No.1) terminal and
ground the No.1 (or No.2) terminal momentarily.
CLM-(YEL)
'----{- ) E9
'-------1:-r. ) 8
Does the motor run smoothly?
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power tailgate
closer unit.
terminals.and body ground respectively.
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 22.
BACK
8 9 10
18 19 20
body ground.
20
Q
=
NO-Check for No.6 (20 A) fuse in the rear fuse/
wire between the rear fuse/relay box and power
r:-:'I
I..!:..I
22-521
BACK
Power Tailgate
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
A (see page 22-112).
2. Remove the left rear pillar trim (see page 20-92).
3. Disconnect the 20P, 14P, and 5P connectors (A) from the power tailgate control unit (B).
CONNECTOR A
Iild21
ITEDJ
1
V
2 3
12 13
A
CONNECTOR ,B
c----;J
1/
5
1/ 1/
8 9 10
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B
. CONNECTOR C

1 2 3 4 5
1/
8 9 10 11
1/
13
4. Inspect all the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
7
14
22-522
BACK
r--:'I

If the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
B3 RED Under all Connect B10 terminal to B3 Blown No.7 (10A) fuse in the
conditions terminal with a jumper wire: under-dash fuse/relay box
The beeper should sound. Faulty beeper
Poor ground (G701)
An open in the wire
6. Reconnect all connectors to the power tailgate control unit, and make these input tests at the appropriate
connector.
If the test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If the input test proves OK, replace the power tailgate control unit.
A2 BRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 11 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. raer fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
B12 PNK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.6 (20 A) fuse in the rear
conditions There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
B10 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
C14 VEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
A1 BRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G701)
A4 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G701, G702)
B8 GRN Shift lever in P Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
position There should be less than 1 V. Poor ground (G101, G102)
An open in the wire
22-523
BACK

Power Tailgate Motor Test
1. Open the tailgate and remove the left rear pillar
tailgate motor (B).
A
Terminal side of
male terminals
4. Check the motor operation by connecting battery
power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2
terminal. The motor should run (tailgate open).
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch your hands.
5. After opening the tailgate, connect battery power to
the No.2 terminal and ground the No.1 terminal.
The motor should run (tailgate closed).
replace the drive unit assembly (see page 22-527).
22-524
Power Tailgate Inside Beeper Test/
Replacement
1. Open the tailgate and remove the left rear pillar
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) form the power
tailgate drive unit (B).
B
3. Test the beeper by connecting battery power to the
No.2 terminal and ground to the No.7 terminal.
The beeper should sound.
4. if the beeper does not sound, disconnect the 2P
connector (A) and check for an open in the wire
between the 2P connector and the 8P connector. If
the wire harness is OK, replace the beeper (B).
BACK
Driver's Door Power Tailgate
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the fuel fill
door opener/driver's door power tailgate switch (B),
then push the switch out from behind the door
panel.
A
111 1
2
1
3
ITT 51
6
1
7
11
"-
Terminal
"-
5 6 4 7
Position
ON
" "
0

-0
v:.I'
OFF
bulbs (C) or the switch.
Inside Tailgate Switch Test/
Replacement

1. Carefully pry out the inside tailgate switch (A), and
disconnect the 5P connector (B) from switch.
""-
Terminal
"-
1 2 3 4
Position
ON 0-

" "
OFF
-.;;,/
bulbs (C) or the switch.
22-525
BACK
Power Tailgate
Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet
Switch Test
closer unit (B).
A
crLJ
.Terminal side of
male terminals
B
latch position according to the table.

Terminal
"-
1 4 2 3
Position
Full latched
,....
{)
-
Between the fully-
'" '" '"
latched position to
'"
'"
'"
released position
Released
,.... ,....
0
- -
tailgate latch assembly (see page 20-228).
22-526
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the closer
motor (B).
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Check motor operation by connecting battery
power to the tailgate closer unit 2P connector No.2
terminal and ground to the No.1 terminal. To
prevent damage to the motor, apply battery voltage
only momentarily. The motor should run.
replace the tailgate latch assembly (see page
20-228).
BACK
Drive Unit Replacement
1. Remove the rear pillar trim (see page 20-85).
2. Disconnect the 2P and 8P connectors (A) from the
drive unit (8).
3. Carefully remove the bolts and support strut (C)
from the tailgate.
4. Remove the mounting bolts and drive unit.
Pinch Sensor Replacement

I...!!!:.I
2. Remove the clips, screws and nuts from the pinch
sensor (A).
NOTE: The illustration shows left side pinch sensor,
right side is symmetrical.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (8) from the pinch
sensor.
22-527
BACK
Clock
22-528
CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
No.1 (BAl} (120 AI No.3 (lG1150 AI
+

WHT
--Q-
IG1
IG1 HOT in ON lUI and
No.4 140 AI
STARTIUlI

WHT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/REALY BOX
A6
No.2117.5AI
PNK
B4
No.7 (10 AI
X35 X34
WHT VEL
CENTER INFORMA nON
DISPLAY 12 6
VBU IG1
ILLUMI-
11 5

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
BLK
G506
r--:'I
I..!!:..I
22-529
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT.SYSTEM (SRS) (If Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and
Telematics maintenance is required)
BACK
Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and Telematics
Audio, Navigation, and Telematics
Special Tools ............................................... 23-2
Rear Entertainment System
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 23-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 23-185
Audio System
System Description ................................... 23-186
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 2 3 ~ 9 2
Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 23-196
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 23-6 Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 23-201
System Description .................................... 23-8 Rear Controller and Screen
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 23-28 Removal/Installation ............................... 23-215
Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 23-32 Auxiliary Jack Assembly
Error Codes ................................................. 23-37 Replacement .......................................... 23-217
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 23-38 Wireless Headphone Battery
Sound Quality Diagnosis ........................... 23-84 Replacement ............................................ 23-217
Audio Unit Removal/Installation ............... 23-90 Wireless Remoto Control
Speaker Test/Replacement ........................ 23-91 Battery Replacement .............................. 23-218
Stereo Amplifier Removal/Installation ..... 23-95
XM Receiver Removal/Installation ............ 23-96 AcuraLink
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Component Location Index ....................... 23-219
Replacement ................................... ......... 23-98 General Troubleshooting Information ...... 23-220
Audio Remote Switch Test ........................ 23-97 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 23-221
AM/FM Antenna Replacement .................. 23-97 System Description .................................... 23-222
XM Antenna Replacement ......................... 23-98 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 23-224
Navigation System
Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 23-227
Component Location Index ....................... 23-99 Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 23-252
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 23-104 HandsFreeLink System
System Description .................................... 23-107 Component Location Index ....................... 23-253
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 23-129 General Troubleshooting Information ...... 23-254
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 23-134 HFL System Troubleshooting .................... 23-258
System Diagnostic Mode ........................... 23-157 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 23-259
Voice Control Switch Test .......................... 23-178 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 23-260
Forced Starting of Display ......................... 23-179 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 23-262
DVD-ROM Replacement ............................. 23-179 HFL-Voice Control Switch Test .................. 23-272
Navigation Unit Removal/Installation ...... 23-180 Control Unit Input Test/Replacement ....... 23-273
GPS Antenna Removal/Installation .......... 23-180 HFL-Navigation Microphone
Display Unit Removal/Installation ............. 23-181 Removal/Installation ............................... 23-274
Interface Dial Removal/Installation ........... 23-181
Rearview Camera Removal/Installation ... 23-182
Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and Telematics
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qtv
Q)
Diagnostics CD 1
07 AAZ-SDBA200 Skip Test CD 1
@
07 AAZ -SDBA300 Skip Test CD 1
07PAZ-0010100 SCS Service Connector 1
Q),,@
I
23-2
BACK
HandsFreeLink Control Unit
81750 Communication bus line error Loss of (see page 22-129)
communication
81775 Microphone input/output short to power/open Signal error (see page 23-262)
81776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open Signal error (see page 23-263)
81779 HFL switch or HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk/HFL back Signal error (see page 23-265)
buttons) circuit open/short
81780 HFL-voice control switch (HFL TALK/HFL 8ACK buttons) Signal error (see page 23-266)
circuit short
81785 Incorrect configuration (VEHINFO frame) Signal error (see page 23-267)
81786 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication with Signal error (see page 23-268)
gauge control module (VEHINFO frame)
81792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error Internal error (see page 23-270)
AcuraLink Control Unit
82200 Communication bus line error Loss of (see page 22-129)
communication
82202 AcuraLink control unit EEPROM error Internal error (see page 23-241)
82204 8-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 23-241)
communication
82205 F-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 23-242)
communication
82207 Navigation unit lost communication with AcuraLink Loss of (see page 23-243)
control unit communication
82208 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication with Loss of (see page 23-246)
AcuraLink control unit communication
82209 AcuraLink control unit internal error internal error (see page 23-249)
82240 XM antenna error Signal error (see page 23-250)
23-3
BACK
Audio System
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH
Test, page 3 9 7
23-4
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
INTERFACE DIAL
AUDIO UNIT
Connector Inputs and Outputs,
page 23-14
page 23-90
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
page 23-26
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
(without rear entertainment)
page 23-27
page 23-181
BACK
AM/FM ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
Replacement,
page 23-97
AM/FM ANTENNA
LEFT SATELLITE SPEAKER
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
LEFT FRONT DOOR TWEETER
FRONT CENTER SPEAKER
Test/Replacement; page 23-91
RIGHT FRONT
DOOR TWEETER
Test/Replacement,
page 23-92
STEREO AMPLIFIER
page 23-20
page 23-95
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
SUBWOOFER
(XM RECEIVER) (with AcuraLink)
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-23
XM RECEIVER (without AcuraLink)
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-25
23-5
BACK
Audio System
Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Antenna lead short or open in
interference 23-38) the wire
Power switch will not turn ON (No Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
information display and no sound) 23-41)
Power will not turn OFF Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-42)
No sound is heard from speaker(s) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
(display is normal) (with navigation) 23-43)
No sound is heard from speaker(s) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
(display is normal) (without navig_ation) 23-50)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
(display is normal) 23-55)
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-55)
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-56)
Volume does not increase with speed Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-57)
Volume is too high or too low when Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
driving at freeway speeds 23-58)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-59)
Display does not dim or brighten with Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
dimmer 23-59)
Audio unit button illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
work 23-62)
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-62)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-63)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-63)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Tire pressure (over-inflated)
23-64)
Audio disc changer does not load all six Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
discs 23-65)
Audio disc changer does not move Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
between discs 23-65)
23-6
BACK
Symptom
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM
ANTENNA is displayed
XM radio display is blank and no station
information is displayed (with
AcuraLink)
information is displayed (without
AcuraLink)
XM radio preset memory is lost (with
AcuraLink)
XM radio preset memory is lost (without
AcuraLink)
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio
unit does display XM channels)
Audio remote switch does not work
properly
Audio unit button does not work
Audio unit disc indicator does not work
Security indicator does not work
properly
Diagnostic procedure
Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-66)
23-68)
23-72)
23-75)
23-76)
23-77)
23-80)
23-82)
23-83)
23-83)
IJlID

Also check for
23-7
BACK
Audio System
System Description
Overview
The audio unit acts as the processor for all audio functions. You can select the audio functions from the audio panel,
the audio remote (on steering wheel), or by using the navigation voice control system. The audio display provides the
current front and rear audio status. For vehicles with the navigation option, additional audio information is available
by touching the audio button. (See the owner's manual for more details.)
Each audio component passes its audio or audio signal to the audio unit. In addition, it communicates with the audio
unit via the GA-Net bus. Any open connection in this circuit will cause audio and navigation functions to appear
inoperative.
With the ELS and the premium sound system, an audio amplifier unit powers the speakers.
The 6 DVD-A (6 CD) changer output can be directed to the audio unit.
The XM can be output to either the front or the RES (rear entertainment system). However, if the XM is playing in the
front, the CD changer cannot be used for the RES. The RES (built into the audio unit) can be used to playa CD in the
rear.
A security signal is daisy-chained between the audio, RES and navigation components for integration into the vehicle's
alarm system.
Speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC)
Some audio systems are equipped with speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC). The navigation or audio unit
receives the vehicle speed pulse (VSP) from the PCM. The system processes the speed input and increases the
navigation or audio system volume level as the vehicle speed increases to compensate for the various interior noise
that occurs at higher speeds. When the vehicle slows down, the volume returns to its normal level. The SVC has four
settings: SVC OFF, LOW MID and HIGH that can be adjusted using the navigation or audio unit. The SVC comes from
the factory with the MID set as the default.
To change the audio unit SVC setting, press the "tune folder sound" knob repeatedly until the SVC is displayed, Rotate
the knob to adjust the SVC to the desired setting (SVC OFF, LOW MID, or HIGH).
To change the navigation unit SVC setting, press the AUDIO button, and then select the SOUND icon on the navigation
display. Press the navigation display to select the desired setting (OFF, LOW, MID, HI).
23-8
BACK
Overview
The optional navigation system provides voice control for radio, XM, CD player and RES functions. The GA-Net (audio
unit) communicates the voice control commands. When using the talk back or route guidance (RG), only the center
speaker is muted and the front speakers give the navigation instructions. When using HFLJAcuraLink, the center
speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer are muted and the front speakers give the.telephone sound. When
using HFLJAcuraLink and RG or talk back, the center speaker, the rear speakers, and the subwoofer are muted and the
front speakers give the telephone sound and the navigation instructions, but notthe RES headphones. GA-Net bus
passes the muting commands. For more information, see the navigation section. The outline of the audio interruption
f . . h . h f II bl
unction IS S own In t e 0 oWlngta e.
Contents Audio output
CenterCH Left front Right front Right rear Left rear Subwoofer
CH CH CH CH CH
Talk back MUTE Navigation Navigation Audio Audio Audio
sound sound
Route guidance MUTE Navigation Navigation Audio "Audio Audio
sound sound
OnStar/HFLJAcuraLink MUTE Telephone Telephone MUTE MUTE MUTE
sound sound
OnStar/HFLJAcuraLink MUTE Telephone Telephone MUTE MUTE MUTE
and RG or talk back sound and sound and
navigation navigation
sound sound
(cont'd)
23-9
BACK
Audio System
System Diagram
I
SPEAKERS
I
AUXIUARY
HANDSFREEUNK
STEREO
AM/FM AUDIO
JACK ASSEMBLY
CONTROL UNIT
I------
AMPUFIER
ANTENNA REMOTE
(RES) AMPUFIER SWITCH
AUDIO
j j
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO/VIDEO
FACTORY AUDIO
I I
ACCESSORY
AUDIO/VIDEO
AUDIO DISPLAY
rAUDIO
REAR ACURAUNK
CONTROLLER CONTROL UNIT
AND SCREEN HIP
(RES) (XM RECEIVER)
(USA)
AUDIO
NAViVOICE
I
XMANTENNA
SAT/LAND
HEADPHONES
NAVIGATION UNIT
COLOR
SIGNAL
(RGB)
CUMATE
Outputs
NAVIGATION
CONTROL
--
l.Audio voice prompts/guidance
DISPLAY UNIT
2.Volce control (Climate audio
UNIT
AM-FM-XM on GA-Net bus)
3.Color signal for display unft
23-10
BACK
NOTE: All items may not apply to this vehicle. See the Owner's Manual for more information.
Ad GI U 10 ossary
Item Definition
Active noise control The active noise control system cancels some ofthe vehicle noise. This occurs
in the 1,500-2,400 rpm range. Microphones detect the low frequency sound,
and the system outputs a cancelling sound from the audio speaker.
AM (Amplitude Modulation) The type of transmission used in the standard radio broadcast band from 530 to
1705 kHz.
Amplifier A device that increases the level of a sianal by increasina the current or voltaae.
Antenna A device used to send or receive electromagnetic waves through the air.
ATA (PC Card) A type of card that has been tested for use in playing WMA, and MP3 music
files in the PC Card slot. Sizes of up to 1 GB have been tested.
Audio remote switch The switches on the steering wheel that control the audio system.
Auxiliary jack Allows the customer to use a portable audio device to input music recordings.
Balance A control that changes the relative volume of the left and right channels.
Band A range of frequencies between two definite limits. Bands are assigned by the
Federal Communications Commission for specific uses.
Bass An adjustment for the low frequency sounds of around 160 Hz and below.
Byte A unit of storage for computer files and memory. A CD holds approximately
700 million bytes.
Cassette Audio or video magnetic tape container having two reels. Customers can insert
it for recording or play back.
Compact flash A standard for small-size (3 x 4 cm) , memory cards used in mobile computers,
PDAs, digital cameras. Compact flash memory cards are available in size of
32 Mb up to 4 GB or more and can be played in the audio PC slot. Sizes above
1 GB has not been tested.
CD (Compact Disc) A 4.5-inch plastic disc containing digital audio recording that is played optically
on a laser equipped player. Never use discs with a paper label. In a hot car,
labels can curl up and jam the unit.
CD (audio disc) changer CD player that can store and play more than one CD. Two types are available.
Some units accept CDs fed into the changer one at a time, and others accept a
magazine (with CD's stacked in a container).
CD player A component designed to play compact disc CD recording using a laser optical
pickup. The signal from a CD player usually requires amplification.
Distortion Inexact reproduction of an audio signal caused by playing music at levels the
audio-system cannot handle.
Dolby (noise reduction) A processing system developed by Dolby Laboratories that reduce the
background noise on recording media. The result is a cleaner playback from the
audio s.ystem.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) A 4.5-inch CD-like format used for storing movies with digital audio and video
features. The DVD-A format is a DVD format designed for DVD audio systems.
Some vehicles can play DVD and DVD-A formats.
Equalizer A device that changes the relative volume of individual frequency bands to suit
personal tasted of the listener.
Fader The control that adjusts the relative volume levels of front and rear speakers in
a four-speaker system.
Format To prepare a PC Card to receive files this function is performed on a PC. Always
choose either FAT or FAT32 as the NTSF format is not accepted by the system.
Pick the default sectors for the format method selected.
FM (Frequency Modulation) The modulation used for radio and television sound transmission in most of the
world. Less prone to interference than AM. The FM broad cast band covers
rouahly 87 to 108 MHz.
(cont'd)
23-11
BACK
Audio" System
Ad" GI U 10 ossarv
Item Definition
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and
navigation components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net,
components orthe entire audio and navigation system may appear inoperative.
GB (Gigabyte) A unit of memorvOF disk storage eQual to billion bytes (1000 million bytes).
HOD Abbreviation for hard disc drive. They are sensitive to heat and it is not
,
recommended that they be used in the PC card slot for playing audio files. '
Hertz (HZ) The unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second (cps). One kilohertz (kHz)
,
'eQuals 1,000cps;:one megahertz '(MHz) eQuals 1 million cps.
Integrated amplifier A component that combines a pre amp and c:lpower amp into a single unit. A
receiver combines an integrated amp and a tuner into a single unit.
Jewel case
,- ,-,
, ' "
The hard plastic case:thal contains a compact disc or DVD. Always use a jewel
case to prevent scratches on the underside of a CD or DVD.
..
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A type of digitardisplay that changes reflectance or transmittance when an
electrical field is applied to it.
MB (Megabyte) A unit of niemory or disc storage eciual to 1 million bytes.
Memory Circuitry or devicas that hold information in electrical or magnetic form, such
astheAM/FM radio presets.
Megabyte (M byte) One million bytes;Written as 1 MB. Megabytes are used as a measure of digital
storage space. For example, a CD can hold 650 MB.
Mic An abbreviation for- microphone. For vehicles with navigation, the microphone
accepts navigation voice commands to control audio and navigation functions.
MP3 music files MP3 is an audio coding format. MP3 is a poplar audio compression format on
'the Internet and computers. CDs, and PC Card with these files can be played on
,some vehiCle's audio system.
Mute When the navigation gives guidance, thafrorit speakers are muted (no music).
When you use the voice 'control system, all ofthe speakers are muted.
Noise
" ;,
Unwanted random sOUhds like buzZing, hiss,. pops, static, whine, etc.
PC card The slot used for playing MP3 and WMA music files. The PC Card is usually a
combination of a small flash card in a PCMCIA adaptor that slides into the slot.
The ATA, SO, and compact flash types ofcards have been tested up to 1 GB.
PCMCIA A computer standard for the slot that the PC card slides into. Another term for
the PC card slot.
Processor The part of an audio device that performs task/calculations. In the audio unit the
processor handles muting to allow the naVi to speak voice commands, and the
decoding/playback of the sound files etc. '
'Radio
,,,
,A head unit that combines a tuner, a preamplifier, and often a power-amplifier.
SCF(Cold Start Fix) scr-eens These screens are displayed ifthe system requires a GPS initialization. The
vehicle should be moved outside into an open area away from buildings/power
,
lines.
Stereo A recording 'of at leasttwo channels where'You can hear sound or music from
the left or right i e ~ ,
SO (Secure Digital) card " This compact tYpe of memorY card allows for fast data transfer and has built-in
security functions. SO cards have a small write-protection switch on the side.
Shield A metallic foil or braided wire layer sU'I'Founding conductors which are
designed to prevent electrostatic or electromagnetic interference (noise) from
; external sources such as buzzing, or popping sounds heard on the speakers.
Speaker (Loudspeaker) A device that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy (sound).
Speed-sensitive volume The SVC increases the audio volume to compensate for increased interior noise
compensation (SVC)
, '
when the vehicle drivers at freeway speeds.
Subwoofe'j- A loudspeaker made to reproduce the lowest audio frequencies, approx 25 Hz
to 125 Hz.
23 .. 12
BACK
Ad GI U 10 ossary
Item Definition
Track A sound recording ona CD, tape, or PC Card.
Treble An adjustment to control the "volume" of the high frequency sounds.
Tuner A component (or part of a component) that receives .radio signals and selects
one broadcast from many.
Tweeter A speaker designed to reproduce the higher frequencies (treble) only.
Voice coil A coil of wire wrapped around a tube and then attached to the speaker cone or
diaphragm. When an audio signal is applied, the coil becomes an
electromagnet and interacts with the permanent magnet causing the come or
diaphragm to vibrate. We interpret this vibrations as sound.
Volume control Allows you to control the loudness of the music.
WMA music file Windows Media Audio File. This is an accepted format for music files to be
played on either a CD or a PC Card.
Woofer A speaker that is designed to reproduce bass frequencies only.
XM radio Satellite based radio transmission, which also uses a ground based repeater
network to ensure seamless reception. The channels originate from XM's
broadcast center, in Washington, DC, and uplink to two satellites. These
satellites transmit the signal across the entire continental United States.
XM receiver The external component that receives and processes . .the XM signals from the
XM satellites, and terrestrial (land) stations. The audio unit communicates to
the XM receiver over the GA-Net bus.
(cont'd)
23-13
BACK
Audio System
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following tables.
With navigation/With rear entertainment system
CONNECTOR E (16P)
CONNECTOR A I17P)
~
CONNECTOR D (14P)
CONNECTOR C (24P)
With navigation/Without rear entertainment system
CONNECTOR A I17P)
~
CONNECTOR C (24P)
23-14
BACK
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following tables.
Without navigation/Without rear entertainment system
CONNECTOR A I17P)
~
CONNECTOR D (14P)
CONNECTOR B (32P) CONNECTOR C (24P)
(cont'd)
23-15
BACK
Audio System
CONNECTOR A (17P) CONNECTORB (32P)
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Cavity Wire Connects to Cavity Wire Connects to
A4 LTGRN Rear controller and screen B3 BRN Audio remote ground
'1
(SCTY4) B5 GRN' Stereo amplifier (RS485+)
REO'2 MICU (SCTY1) B6 BLU' Stereo amplifier (RS485-)
A6 LTBLU MICU (K-UNE) B8 REO Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN-)
A9 BLK Ground (G504) B10 PNK Stereo amplifier (FR PRE IN-)
A14 PUR ACC (audio power supply) B11 PUR Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN-)
A17 WHT Constant power B13 VEL Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN-)
* 1: With navigation B14 REO Stereo amplifier (SW PRE IN-)
* 2: Without navigation B16 PNK Stereo amplifier (CTR PRE IN-)
B19 DRN Audio remote
B20 PNK' Stereo amplifier (RS 485 GNO)
B22 BRN' Stereo amplifier (RS 485 SH)
B23 LTGRN Stereo amplifier (+B)
B24 GRN Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN+)
B26 BLU Stereo amplifier (FR PRE IN+)
B27 LTBLU Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN+)
B29 BRN Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN+)
B30 GRN Stereo amp_lifier (SW PRE IN+)
B32 BLU Stereo amplifier (CTR PRE IN+)
*: With navigation
23-16
BACK
CONNECTOR C (24P) (With rear
entertainment)

Cavity Wire Connects to
C1 PNK Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUX AUDIO R/L GND)
C2 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUX AUDIO R/L SH)
C5 PUR XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
control unit (LINE OUT-)
C6 BRN XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
control unit (LINE OUT+)
C13 BLU Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUX AUDIO R)
C14 GRN Auxiliary jack assembly
(AU X AUDIO L)
C15 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly
(CONNCHK)
C17 LTBLU XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
control unit (LINE OUT +)
C23 LTGRN XM receiver (B-CAN)
C24 BLU Climate control unit
(HVAC BUS)
CONNECTOR C (24P) (Without rear
entertainment)
C1 RED Auxiliary jack assembly
,(AUX SIG GND)
C2 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly
(SHAUX)
C5 PUR XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
control unit (LINE OUT-)
C6 BRN XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
control unit (LINE OUT+)
C13 BLK Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUXRCH)
C14 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUX LCH)
C15 LTBLU Auxiliary jack assembly
(AUXDET)
C17 LTBLU XM receiver, HandsFreeLink
cOntrol unit (LINE OUT +)
C23 LTGRN XM receiver (B-CAN)
C24 BLU Climate control unit
(HVAC BUS)
(cont'd)
23-17
BACK
Audio System
CONNECTOR 0 (14P) CONNECTOR E (16P)
02' RED XM receiver (ACC) E1 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly
03 BRN XM receiver, Navigation unit, (AU X VIDEO IN SH)
Navigation display unit E2 LTBLU Auxiliary jack assembly
(GANET BUS SH) (AUX VIDEO IN GND)
04 BRN XM receiver E3 BRN Rear controller and screen
(GANET AUDIO SH) (RR NTSCSH)
05 RED XM receiver E4 YEL Rear controller and screen
(GANET AUDIO R+) (SYSTEM ACC)
06 BLK XM receiver E6 BRN Rear controller and screen
(GANETAUDIO L+) (RR BUS SH)
09 GRN XM receiver, Navigation unit, E7 PUR Rear controller and screen
Navigation display unit (RR BUS-)
(GANET BUS +) E8 PUR Auxiliary jack assembly
010 'RED XM receiver, Navigation unit, (AU X VIDEO IN)
Navigation display unit E9 PNK Rear controller and screen
(GANET BUS -) (RR NTSC GND)
013 WHT XM receiver E10 BLU Rear controller and screen
(GANET AUDIO R-) (RR NTSC)
014 GRN XM receiver E12 BLK Rear controller and screen
(GANET AUDIO L-) (RES AUDIO OUT R)
*: Without AcuraLink E13 BRN Rear controller and screen
(RES AUDIO OUT SH)
E14 RED Rear controller and screen
(RES AUDIO OUT L)
E15 WHT Rear controller and screen
(RES AUDIO OUT GND)
E16 LTBLU Rear controller and screen
(RRBUS+)
23-18
BACK
CONNECTOR F (2P) CONNECTOR H (3P)
F1 -- Rear controller and screen H1 -- Antenna module unit (SIG)
(DIG AUDIO SIG) H2
--
Antenna module unit
F2 -- Rear controller and screen (SH (AM/FM))
(DIG AUDIO SH) H3 -- Antenna module unit
(ANT+B)
(cont'd)
23-19
BACK
Audio System
Stereo Amplifier Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing a stereo amplifier connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following tables.
With navigation
CONNECTOR B (18P)
Without navigation
CONNECTOR B (18P)
23-20
BACK
CONNECTOR A (28P) (With navigation) CONNECTOR A (20P) (Without navigation)
A1 BLU Audio unit (RS 485-) A1 LTGRN Audio unit (+B)
A2 PNK Audio unit(RS 485 GND) A3 BLU Audio unit (CTR PRE IN+)
A3 LTGRN Audio unit (+B) A4 GRN Audio unit (SW PRE IN+)
A4 BLU Audio unit (CTR PRE IN+) A6 GRN Audio unit (FL PRE IN+)
A6 GRN Audio unit (SW PRE IN+) A7 BLU Audio unit (FR PRE IN+)
A8 BRN Navigation unit (RG SH) A9 LTBLU Audio unit (RL PRE IN+)
A9 LTBLU Navigation unit (RG GND) A10 BRN Audio unit (RR PRE IN+)
A10 GRN Audio unit (FL PRE IN+) A13 PNK Audio unit (CTR PRE IN-)
A11 BLU Audio unit (FL PRE IN+) A14 RED Audio unit (SW PRE IN-)
A13 LTBLU Audio unit (RL PRE IN+) A16 RED Audio unit (FL PRE IN-)
A14 BRN Audio unit (RR PRE IN+) A17 PNK . Audio unit (FR PRE IN-)
A15 GRN Audio unit (RS 485+) A19 PUR Audio unit (RL PRE IN-)
A16 BRN Audio unit (RS 485 SH) A20 YEL Audio unit (RR PRE IN-)
A18 PNK Audio unit (CTR PRE IN-)
A19 RED Audio unit (SW PRE IN-)
A20 WHT Audio unit (GANET AUDIO R-)
A21 PUR Navigation unit (RG L +)
A24 RED Audio unit (FL PRE IN-)
A25 PNK Audio unit (FR PRE IN-)
A27 PUR Audio unit (RL PRE IN-)
A28 YEL Audio unit (RR PRE IN-)
(cont'd)
23-21
BACK
Audio System
CONNECTOR B (18P) (With navigation) CONNECTOR B (18P) (Without navigation)
B1 PNK Subwoofer B1 PUR Left rear door speaker
(WOOFER PRE-)
;
(RR L SPKR-)
B2 PNK Front center speaker B2 GRN Driver's door speaker, Left
(CTR SPKR-) tweeter (FR L DR SPKR-)
B3 ORN Right rear door speaker B3 GRY Subwoofer
(RR R SPKR-) (L D-PLR SPKR-)
B4 PUR Left rear door speaker B5 ORN Right rear door speaker
(RR LSPKR-) (RR R SPKR-)
B5 BLK Right satellite speaker B6 BRN Front passenger's door speaker,
(R D-PLR SPKR-) Right tweeter
B6 BRN Front passenger's door speaker (FR R SPKR-)
(FR RSPKR-) B7 PNK Front center speaker
87 GRN Driver's door speaker (CTR SPKR-)
(FR L DR SPKR-) B8 BLK Subwoofer
B8 GRY Left satellite speaker (R D-PLR SPKR-)
(D-PLR SPKR-) B9 BLK Ground (G504)
B9 BLK Ground (G504) B10 PNK Left rear door speaker
B10 BLU Subwoofer (RR LSPKR+)
(WOOFER PRE+) B11 WHT Driver's door speaker, Left
B11 BLK Front center speaker tweeter (FR L DR SPKR+)
(CTR SPKR+) B12 BLU Subwoofer
B12 BLU Right rear door speaker (L D-PLR SPKR+)
(RR R SPKR+) B14 8LU Right rear door speaker
B13 PNK Left rear door speaker (RR R SPKR+)
(RR L SPKR+) B15 RED Front passenger's door speaker,
B14 RED Right satellite speaker Right tweeter
(R D-PLR SPKR+) (FR R SPKR+)
B15 RED Front passenger's door speaker B16 BLK Front center speaker
(FR R SPKR+) (CTR SPKR+)
816 WHT Driver's door speaker B17 RED Subwoofer
(FR L DR SPKR+) (R D-PLR SPKR+)
B17 BLU Left satellite speaker B18 PUR Stereo amplifier (+B)
(L D-PLR SPKR+)
B18 PUR Stereo amplifier (+B)
23-22
BACK
AcuraLink Control Unit (XM Receiver) Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With AcuraLink)
When replacing an AcuraLink Control Unit (XM receiver) connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the
following tables.
With AcuraLink
CONNECTOR A (20P) CONNECTOR B n6P)
CONNECTOR C(2P)
(cont'd)
23-23
BACK
Audio System
CONNECTOR A (20P) (With navigation) CONNECTOR B(16P) (With navigation)
A1 WHT XM receiver (+B) B2 BRN Audio unit, HandsFreeLink
A2 PUR XM receiver/ACC) control unit (LINE OUT SH)
A3 WHT Navigation unit (NV RX+) B3 LTBLU Audio unit, HandsFreeLink
A4 GRN Navigation unit (NV TX+) control unit (LINE OUT+)
A6 WHT Gauge control module (CAN HI) B5 LTGRN Audio unit, HandsFreeLink
A7 GRN Audio unit, Navigation unit, control unit, Multiplex
Navigation display unit integrated control unit (B-CAN)
(GANET BUS+) B6 BRN HandsFreeLink control unit,
A9 BLK Audio unit (GANET AUDIO L +) Navigation unit (HFT COMM
A10 RED Audio unit (GANET AUDIO R+) SH)
A11 BLK Ground (G606) B7 GRN HandsFreeLink control unit,
A12 VEL XM receiver (IG1) Navigation unit (HFT COMM 3)
A13 RED Navigation unit (NV RX-) B8 RED Handsfreelink control unit,
A14 BLK Navigation unit (NV TX-) Navigation unit (HFT COMM 1)
A15 BRN Navigation unit (NV SH) B11 PUR Audio unit, HandsFreeLink
A16 RED Gauge contro,1 module control unit (LINE OUT-)
(CAN LO) B15 BLK HandsFreeLink control unit,
A17 RED Audio unit, Navigation unit, Navigation unit (HFT COMM 4)
Navigation display unit B16 WHT HandsFreeLink control unit,
(GANET BUS-) Navigation unit (HFT COMM 2)
A18 BRN Audio unit, Navigation unit,
Navigation display unit
(GANET BUS SH)
A19 GRN Audio unit (GANET AUDIO L-)
A20 WHT Audio unit (GANET AUDIO R+)
23-24
BACK
XM Receiver Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With out AcuraLink)
When replacing an XM receiver connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following tables.
CONNECTOR A (14P)
CONNECTOR B (2P)
A1 WHT XM receiver (+B)
A2 RED XM receiver (ACC)
A3 BRN Audio unit, Navigation unit,
(GANET BUS SH)
A5 RED Audio unit (GANET AUDIO R+)
A6 BlK Audio unit (GANET AUDIO l +)
A9 GRN Audio unit, Navigation unit,
(GANET BUS+)
A10 RED Audio unit, Navigation unit,
(GANET BUS-)
A11 BlK Ground (G606)
A13 WHT Audio unit (GANET AUDIO R-)
A14 GRN Audio unit (GANET AUDIO l-)
(cont'd)
23-25
BACK
Audio .System
Interface Dial Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing an interface dial connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
1 WHT Navigation unit (JOG)
2 BRN Navigation unit (Shield)
3 BlK Ground (G506)
4 PUR ACC (interface dial power supply)
23-26
BACK
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs (Without rear entertainment)
When replacing an auxiliary jack assembly c.onnector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
1 LTBLU Audio unit (AUX DET)
2 GRY Audio unit (SH AUX)
3 RED Audio unit (AUX'SIG GND)
4 WHT Audio unit (AUX LCH)
5 BLK Audio unit (AUX RCH)
23-27
BACK
,Audio System
Circuit Diagram
MAlNUNDBI-HOODRISE BOX
BATtERY
No.1 IBATlI120Al No315OAI

NoAI40AI
-u'

a18
t8
GND
B9
JC
1 Jrr
M
lEfT TWEElER
G504
23-28
IGNmoN SWITCH
AS

:T ACCCUTIlElAY
m
ACCIQ.ndONIDI RED : va
,
5 '3 TRANSMISSION
PCM [:>-lTGRN PNK--{:;> RANGESWITCH
IPonNI
84
WItT
B6
BlU
PURl ClIMAtE
CONlRDl
UNIT
UNDER-DASH
FUSEJIIElAY BOX
No.21110Al
No.32 110 AI
NoS 110 AI

L
N .. 12 110 AI
K-UNE
MICU
)(34
va
N39
PUR
E5
WItT
Nll

N40
X5
II
r:"- pnl E
G:> XM RECBVER
C IACURALINK
CONI1IOl UNm
XMRECBVER
B IACURAUNK
CONI1IOl UNm
yin'
A
P R
Y
i
U
C24
l
. . . ..., I
SU8WOOFER XM
SW
PRE
t8 IN-
B23 814
IT RN I
A3" AlP'

ta sw
PRE
IN-
11Il0R fRlOR
SPKR- SPKRt
87" B1.'

G IN V fir
M
DRIVEA'S
DOORSPEAKER
SW R.
PRE PRE
INt IN-
B30 B8
GiN RED
AS" A24"

sw R.
PRE PRE
INt IN-
g
RlGllTTWEElER
HVAC
BUS
AUDIOUNIT
Fl fR fR Rl Rl
PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE
lilt IN- INt IN- INt
B24 al0 B2S all B21
GRN , K

IT U
Al0" A25" A1'" A27" A13"

Fl fR fR Rl Rl
PRE PRE PRE PRE PRE
INt 'N- INt IN- INt
S1ERED AMPUFIER
fRR fRR
SPKR- SPKRt
B6 815
UI
M
fRONT
PASSENGER'S
DDOR SPEAKER
RRl IIRl
SPKR- SPKRt
84" B13"
81" 810"
P R
, K
1 2
LEFTREAR
DDORSPEAKER
M. AS
K-UNE
IWIthout
,navlg_1
IIR IIR
PRE
m. IN-
813 B29
IjN
A2B" A14"

IIR IIR
PRE PRE
'N- INt
RRR RRR
SPKR- SPKRt
83" 812"
85" 814"
iN i.ll
/
1 2

RIGHTREAR
DOOR SPEAKER
CTR CTR
PRE PRE
IN- INt
816 B32
PNK BlU
A18" M"

CTR CTR
PRE PRE
'N- INt
CTR CTR
SPKR- SPKRt
82" all"

PII<

1 2

fRONT
CENTER SPEAKER
RECEIVER
A14 AU
ACC t8
BACK
I!!IlU

INTERIOR
LlGHTRfLAV
" : WIth navigation
'2: WIthout navigation
:Shleldlng
IWrthnavigatlonl

llJR
I 4
ACe
I
UNIT
U
h
JOG
BUS
INTERfACE DIAL
JOG
SH
I I
I r
i ll11ll i
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ...J
Y
REDPU<
v AUDIORfMOTE SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROL
SWITCH
HFLSWlTCH
NAVIGATION
RfMOTE SWITCH
looQ
210 Q
10kQ
4102 12kQ 33kQ
MULlI-
INFORMATION
SWITCH
I

1
111
' 11-1 1
1
+
1
1
9

0
CABLE
RfEL
DASHl.IG!fIS
4
BRlGHlNESS
CONTROLLER
ON
lin Ihe gauge
c:ontrolmodulel 819
AUDIO
_OTE
AUDIOUNlT
IWIthnavigatlonl

:::D:-:+ i
! B22 B20 116
B5
........ - .... ..
BRN ,..-:. .. ___ .... _ ':."11
U
:PNK BLU GiN:
rt .... .... .j
NAVIGAlION
UNIT
,{Y.1

: LTBLU PUR I
f ....... 1
I
TA16 A2 Al A1S I AS AS A21
L.: .. :- __ __ J
!
HFLSWITCH
NAVIGATION
_yWITCH
(b
0
o CABI
REEL
3

B3
AUDIO
_OTE
GND

PRE+ PRE- +8 SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+' SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+
No.12110Al
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/lIB.AVBOX
810 B1 A20 B8 811 B5 81' I: B3 812 B8 811
T
WHT B U PNK WHT
5
SUBWOOFER I
.. __ .. __ .. __ .. __ .. __ .. __ .. .. .. ..J
lW.hnavlgatlonl
I
I
GRV BLU RED
2 8 3
-L}-___ -'"" IlL=---... RL-____ -\/i".'R
SU8WOOFER
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .........
IWIthoutna,;gationl
(cant'd)
23-29
BACK
Audio System
GND
A9
A2
ACC
I
lINE
UNE UNE OUT
OUTt OUT- SH
C17 C5 C6
B2
HFT
COMM HFT HFT
AM/FM AN1ENNA
AtNrt
ANTENNA SUBioo
,
,
.'
H3 HI
ANT tB SHIELD SIG
IAM/FM)
AUDIO UNIT
B--i:AN
MICU
LTGRN
: B5 G606
B--i:AN
XM RECfIVER IACURAUNKCONTROL UNm
HFT HFT NV NV NV
SH OOMM4 COMM3 COMM2 COMMI SH TX-, TXt
BS BI5 B7 BI6 B8 AI5 A14 A4
BRN BRN
l
"
Lr
NV
RX-
AI3
No,S110 AI
UNDER-DASH GAUGE CONTROL

NV
RXt
A3
"
li
BLK
i
GRN
i
WHT
1 1 i
BLK
i
GRN
iRED 1
I I I I
I I I I
t ........... j f ........ .i
. ,
HANDSFREEUNKCONTROLUNIT NAVIGATION
NAVIGATIONUNIT UNIT UNIT
GANEY GANEY GANEY GANEY GANEY
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
SH R- Rt L- Lt
D4 DI3 D5 DI4 os
.... - ...... oO ..........
"
,
,
,
L .. _oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_oo_
(W'JthAcuraUnkl
23-30
BACK
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ,
GANEf
SAtEllITE

I

1

,
XMRECEIVER
IACURALINKCONTROL UNm
GANEf
GANEf GANEf BUS
BUSt BUS- SH
A7 All AI8
BRN
I
'r- BRN
.... -f'.:...RED- RED
, ' ,
, ' ,
..... GRN

GANEf GANEf
BUS- BUSt
! D3 DID OS
8RN
8RN
I
I
I
i
!
I
BRN

.. - .....

, ........ ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,
RED GRN' ,
,
,
,
..
- ......
.. -:.-
--- ..
, ........
,
,
NAVIGATION
UNIT
,
,
,
.J

,
,
BIIN
(Wlthoutrearentertafnmentl
: I
AUXIlIARY JACK ASSEMBlY
1
AUX
SH AUX AUX SIG AUX
AUX LCH GND DEf
t
4 5 3 1
I
... - .... - ..
--- ..
"
.........
- .. --
..,
:
I
, ,
,
I

B R
T
ri
i
i
N
C2
.... _-
----
.... _ .. J
C14 C13 C1 CIS
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. :-1
! SH AUX AUX AUX AUX
AUX LCH RCH SIG DEf
L .. _ .. _ .. .. _ .. _
:CANHne
:ShIeldlng
AUDIOUNIT
..-:."

, .. --- .
, ,
, ,
NAVIGATION
DISPlAY UNIT
: .. --.. -;;;;:.;;; .. ;;;;-_-_-_-----1
I AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO i
I
I
I
:
:
I
i
I
SH R- Rt L- Lt ACC

04 013 05 014 D6 DZ
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/RELAY
BOX
I
BRN .. -=.
.. --" ---- -- ....
"

"'- .... - .... - ..'
,
,
" ,
,
,
I
WHT BLK : RED
Al
t
XMRECEIVER
GANEf
BUS GANEf GANEf
SH BUS- BUSt GND
AJ AID A9 All
..
"

RED-':"'-""
,
,
,
,
'&. ....
GRN-+----""
1
GSDS
SA1BJJIE
SIGNAL ANtENNA
Z 1
.:

,

SHIEUD SIG
IXMI
"
Bl
,
,
-_ .. __ .. __ .. _-.. __ .. __ .. _-.. __ .. __ .. __ .. __ .. -'
IWithout ACluaLlnkl
23-31
BACK
Audio System
The audio system has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
How to check for audio system condition
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) or ON (II) position.
2. Turn on the audio unit.
3. Push and hold the "No.1" and "No.6" buttons. While holding the buttons, push the "VOL push PWR" knob to ON.
Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function with begin.
Except rear entertainment system
6 DISC button
No.4 button
No.5 button
6 DISC button
DISC button
A.SEL/RDM button
No. 6 button
No. 4 button
No.5 button
23-32
BACK
4. By pressing a preset button, the input will trigger the diagnostic mode that is assigned to that preset switch.
"No.3" button
Entire LCD lighting/light-out mode: Turns on/off the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD failure.
"No.4" button
Duty (for the Illumination dim) indication mode: Indicates the duty for the Illumination dim.
"No. 5" button
Vehicle speed pulse indication mode: Indicates the vehicle speed pulse.
"6 Disc" or "DVD" button (Push and hold 5 sec.)
DRAM residual quantity indication mode: Indicates the DRAM residual quantity.
"AM" or "FM" button (Push and hold 5 sec.)
Reception level check mode: Indicates the reception level. When entering the reception level check mode, the
AM/FM or FM button is used to change the S-METER, OFFSET, MP and USN (All).
"A.SEL/ROM" button
Bus line check mode: The audio communication line is checked between the DSP, EEPROM, and TUNER.
(cont'd)
23-33
BACK
Audio System
Display Specifications
NOTE: Any other diagnostic screens shown are for audio manufactures purpose only.
Entry LCD Lighting INo. 3 button) Entry LCD Light-outs INo. 3 button)
Duty Ifor the illumination) indication INo. 4 button) Vehicle speed pulse indication INo. 5 button)
BOA/cON 12 3Y 9 ~ ; ~ BD BOA/cON
,0 1 U1 OFF
--STEP
,,) V5P
DRAM residual quantity indication 16 DISC or DVD button) Reception level indication IAM/FM or FM button)
BDAICON BDAICON
01 23YSbl
,0 5/f'1
00 ]]
Bus line indication IA.SEL/ROM button)
DSP communication OK DSP communication NG
BOA/CON BD AlCON
,,) ]5P
OK
,,) ]5P
EEPROM communication OK EEPROM communication NG
,,, EEP
OK
,0 EEP
TUNNER communication OK TUNNER communication NG
BOA/CON
TNR
,,)
TNR
23-34
BACK
Speaker check mode
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) or ON (II) position.
IIJlIDI

2. Push and hold the "No. 1" and "No. 3" buttons. While holding the buttons, push the "VOL push PWR" knob to ON.
Release the buttons and the speaker check mode will begin. A tone or low-frequency hum should sound from one
speaker.
3. Each time you press the "SEEK" or "CH" button, the speaker outputs a beep sound in the listed order.
With rear entertainment system
SEEK I-I button
SEEK 1+1 button
SEEK 1+1 button
SEEK I-I button
Except rear entertainment syst,em
SEEK 1+1 button
SEEK I-I button
CH 1+1 I-I button
(cont'd)
23-35
BACK
Audio System
Display Specifications
(+) is pressed:
(-) is pressed:
m ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Speaker Displayed Segments
Driver's door speaker and left LEFT FRONT
tweeter
Center speaker CENTER
Front Passenger's door speaker RIGHT FRONT
and left tweeter
Right rear door speaker RIGHT REAR
Right satellite speaker RIGHT SURROUND
Subwoofer SUBWOOFER
0 Left rear door speaker LEFT SURROUND
Left satellite speaker LEFT REAR
All Speakers ALL SPEAKERS
NOTE: Any other diagnostic screens shown are for the audio manufactures purpose only.
Remarks
4. The speaker check mode will ends when you turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch off.
23-36
BACK
Error Codes

The audio system displays error codes when a problem is detected with the CD disc changer, the audio disc, the XM
radio, or the anti-theft code.
CD Error Codes
Error Code Possible Cause Solution
Displayed
DISC READ Cannot read disc. Eject the disc and try another one, or the disc is
installed up side down.
DISC ERROR There is a problem with the disc player. Try to eject the disc and try another one. If there
A common problem is disc labels is still a problem, replace the navigation unit or
coming off the disc while in the player. audio unit.
.
HEAT ERROR Disc player is hot. This can happen if the Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a while and
vehicle is parked out in the hot sun all try the disc player again. If the error code is still
day. present, try another disc. If the error code is still
present, replace the navigation unit or audio unit.
Focus Error Possibly DVD inserted in unit, or CD EjecteD and try a known"good CD.
installed up side down.
File Error Audio unit cannot read the files on the Verify that CD/CD-R file names end in "CDA" or
CD or CD-R. "WMA."
Verify that CD-R discs with compressed music
formats end in "MP3" or "WMA."
Other file formats like I-tunes or "Ogg" are not
recognized.
WMA files may have (DRM) copy protection
and cannot be read.
Mech Error CD label jammed in the mechanism. Press the EJECT button and hold it for 5 seconds.
CD eject mechanism or motor is If the CD does not eject, try again. If the CD still
inoperative. won't eject, replace the unit.
CD spindle motor won't spin up the CD.
XM Error Codes
Displayed
LOADING XM radio is acquiring audio or program Wait until the radio receives the information.
information.
OFF AIR XM channel not in service. Try another XM channel.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal. Both terrestrial and satellite antennas have lost
signal. Park the vehicle outside with a clear view
of the southern horizon.
UPDATING XM radio is receiving information This message will disappear once the update
update from the network. finishes.
CHECK ANTENNA XM antenna error. Repair open or short in the satellite antenna.
ANTENNA ERROR Substitute the XM antenna with a known-good
one, and recheck. If the error is gone, replace the
original XM antenna. If the error is still present,
replace the antenna lead.
--- No signal from XM. Check a known-good vehicle with XM radio. If the
known-good vehicle has the same symptoms,
contact XM satellite radio at (800) 852-9696.
AudiO Umt Error Codes
Displayed
CODE ERROR E Anti-theft code mismatch (1
st
try). Enter the correct anti-theft code.
CODE ERROR 1 Anti-theft code mismatch (10" try). Remove fuse No.5 (10 A) in the under-dash fusel
relay box, then reinsert it. You will have 10 more
tries to enter the correct anti-theft code.
23-37
BACK
Audio System
Poor AM or FM radio reception or
interference
NOTE: Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by the following:
The radio station is far away .
Tall buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power
lines are nearby.
1. Do the seek stop test (see page 23-88).
Is the test vehicle within 10 % of the known-good
vehicle?
YES-Multi path interference or weak station.
Operation is normal..
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check if the radio reception/interference is the
same in several locations.
Is the reception/interference the same?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Multipath interference or weak station.
Operation is normal..
3. Check the reception/interference while the engine
is running.
Is there noise (static or whine) only with the
engine running?
YES-Check the antenna and radio grounds. If OK,
check the charging system and the ignition
system .
NO-Go to step 4.
23-38
4. Remove the tailgate spoiler trim (see page 20-213).
5. Touch one tester probe to the antenna element 1 P
connector No.1 terminal, and the other tester
probe at the antenna element to check for
continuity. Repair if there is continuity .
6. Go into the self-diagnostic mode and use the
"Tuner communication check mode" (see page
23-32).
Is the tuner communication OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit..
7. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90). Check that
the AM/FM antenna lead and sub-lead are properly
connected.
Are they connected properly?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the
function .
BACK
8. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P
connector.
9. With the radio turned ON, measure the voltage
between AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P connector
No.3 terminal and body ground.
AM/FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
N T ~ B
C J ~
'Y.
=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect audio unit connector H (3P).
12. Check for continuity between the audio unit
connector H (3P) No.3 terminal and AM/FM
antenna amplifier 3P connector No.3 terminal.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (3P)
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between audio unit
and the AM/FM antenna amplifier. Also check the
antenna lead/sublead connector .
connector H (3P) No.3 terminal and body ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (3P)
N ~ T B
C J ~
.Q
=
between audio unit and the AM/FM antenna
amplifier .
NO-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit .
(cont'd)
23-39
BACK
Audio System
15. Disconnect audio unit connector H (3P).
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H 13P)
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead is faulty,
replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead .
23-40
connector H (3P) No.1 terminal and body ground.
=
YES-AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead is faulty,
NO-Go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 19.
BACK
connector H (3P) terminal No.1 and No.2.
YES-Replace the AM/FM antenna and recheck. If
the reception is still poor, replace the audio unit .
~
~
Power switch will not turn ON
(No information display and no sound)
NOTE: Always check the connectors for poor
connections or loose terminals.
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the power
switch ON to see if audio unit turns ON.
Does the audio unit display operate properly, and
the audio unit sound normal?
time .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Check the No.5 (10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck .
the audio unit connectors are properly connected.
Is it connected properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair poor connections and reconnect the
connector, and recheck the function .
5. Disconnect the audio unit connector A (17P).
(cont'd)
23-41
BACK
Audio System
7. Measure the voltage between No. 14 and 17
terminals of audio unit connector A (17P) and body
ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the No.5
(10 A) and No. 32(10 A) fuses in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the audio unit..
8. Reconnectthe audio unit connector A (17P).
9. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector
A (UP) terminal No.9 and body ground.
=
YES-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the audio
unit connector A (17P) terminal No.9 and body
ground (G504) (see page 22-32) .
23-42
Power will not turn OFF
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the power
switch OFF or turn the ignition switch OFF to see if
the audio unit turns OFF.
Does the audio unit turn OFF?
YES-Operation is normal .
NO-Go to step 2.
Disconnect the audio unit connector A (17P).
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 14 terminal
of audio unit connector A (17P) and body ground.
=
Is there voltage?
YES-Check for short to power on the PUR wire .
BACK
No sound is heard from speaker(s)
(display is normal) (with navigation)
NOTE:
o Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
o Before doing troubleshooting, do the power switch
will not turn ON troubleshooting (see page 23-41) .
On vehicles equipped with navigation and
HandsFreeLink, verify the voice systems are not
activated. Press each system's back button to return
the audio unit to the normal operating mode.
o Always check the connectors for poor connections or
loose terminals.
1. Check that the volume button is not set to the min
level.
Is it at the MIN level?
YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the NAVIGATION VOICE MUTE COMMAND
and HANDSFREELINK MUTE COMMAND.
Are the NAVIGATION VOICE MUTE COMMAND
and HANDSFREELINK MUTE COMMAND set?
YES-Cancel the NAVIGATION VOICE MUTE
COMMAND by depressing the voice command and
HANDSFREELINK MUTE COMMAND back button,
then recheck the function.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Do the speaker check mode with the self-diagnostic
function (see page 23-35).
Did a/l speakers produce a tone?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the subwoofer for tone.
Did the sub woofer make a tone?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 28.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ,
6. Check the faulty speaker{s) for damage.
Is there any damage?
YES-Replace the speaker and recheck .
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Remove the faulty speaker{s) that has no sound
(see page 23-91), and disconnect its connector.
8. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor
connection.
Reconnect the speaker connector, and recheck the
symptom; is the condition still present?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Intermittentfailure. Operation is normal..
9. Test the speaker{s) (see page 23-91).
Is the speaker OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the speaker{s) .
10. Do the audio unit self-diagnostic function DSP unit
communication check (see page 23-32).
Is the DSP communication OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
23-43
BACK
Audio System
11. Disconnect stereo amplifier connectorB (18P), .
12. Turn the ignitionslivitchON (II).
13. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier.
connector B (18P) No. 18 terminal and body ground.
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (18P)
=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No. 8(30 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and stereo
amplifier connector B (18P) No. 18 terminal..
14. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A(28P).
15. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier
connector A (28P) No. 3 terminal and body ground.
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (28P)
=
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the stereo
amplifier connector A (28P) No.3 terminal and
audio unit connector B (32P) No. 23 terminal. ..
23-44
16. Reconnect the stereo amplifier connector B (18P).
connector B (18P) No.9 terminal and body ground.
STEREO AIVIPLIFIER CONNECTOR. B (18P)
=
Less than 0.1 V?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair open to the body ground in the wire
between the stereo amplifier connector B (18P)
No.9 terminal and body ground (G504) (see page
22-32) .
BACK
18. Disconnect stereo. amplifier connector 8 (18P) and
speaker connector.
stereo amplifier connector 8. (18P) according to the
table.
Speaker Stereo Wire color
amplifier
connector
Front center speaker 811 (+) 8LK
82 (-) PNK
Driver's door speaker, 816 (+) WHT
Left tweeter 87(-) GRN
Front passenger's 815 (+) RED
door speaker, 86(-) 8RN
Right tweeter
Left rear door 813 (+) PNK
speaker 84(-) PUR
Right rear door 812 (+) 8LU
speaker 83(-) ORN
Left satellite 817 (+) 8LU
speaker 88 (-) , GRY
Right satellite 814 (+) RED
speaker 85 (-) 8LK
Subwoofer 810 (+) .8LU
81 (:-) PNK
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTORB (18P)
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between the
stereo amplifier and the speaker(s) .
NO-Go to step 20.
IIJlID

20. Measure the resistance betweej;! stereo amplifier
connector 8 (18P) according to the table.
Speaker ' Stereo Wire color
amplifier
connector
Front center speaker 811 (+) 8LK
82 (-) PNK
Driver's door speaker, 816 (+) WHT
Left tweeter 87 (-) GRN
F.ront passenger's 815 (+) RED
door speaker, 86 (-) 8RN
Right tweeter
Left rear door 813 (+) PNK
speaker 84 (-) PUR
Right rear door 812(+) 8LU
speaker 83 (-) ORN
Left satellite 817 (+) 8LU
speaker 88 (-) GRY
Right satellite 81'4 (+) RED
speaker 85 (-) 8LK
Subwoofer 810 (+) 8LU
" 81 (-) PNK
Resistance
Front center speaker: 4 Q
Driver's door speaker, Left tweeter: 2 Q
Front passenger's door speaker,
Right tweeter: 2 Q
Left rear door speaker: 2 Q
Right rear door speaker: 2 Q
Left satellite speaker: 4 Q
Right satellite speaker: 4 Q
Subwoofer: 2 Q
Is the resistance the same as indicated?
YES-Go to step 21.
amplifier and the speaker(s) .
(cont'd)
23-45
BACK
Audio System
21. Disconnect audio unit connector 8 (32P).
terminals of the stereo amplifier connector A (28P)
and audio unit connector A (32P).
Stereo amplifier Audio unit Wire color
connector connector
A1 86 LT8LU
A2 820 PNK
A15 85 GRN
AUDIO. UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P)
YES-Go to step 23.
amplifier and audio unit .
23-46
23. Check for continuity between the terminals of
stereo amplifier connector A (28P) according to the
table.
From terminal To terminal
A1 A2,A15,A16
A2 A15,A16
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between audio
unit and stereo amplifier (replace appropriate
shield harness) .
NO-Go to step 24.
BACK
stereo amplifier connector A (28P) terminal NO.1, 2
and 15 individually. Then check for continuity
between the same terminals listed in the table and
the audio unit connector A (25P) No. 15 terminal
(the harness shield).
RS485 GND+ (PNK)
.Q .Q
= =
between stereo amplifier and audio unit or short
between the shield wires (replace the appropriate
shielded harness) .
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
B (32P) and stereo amplifier connector A (28P)
Audio Stereo Wire color
unit amplifier
connector connector
B32 A4 BLU
B16 A18 PNK
B24' A10 GRN
B8 A24 RED
B26 A11 BLU
B10 A25 PNK
B27 A13 LTBLU
B11 A27 PUR
B29 A14 BRN
B13 A28 VEL
B14 A19 RED
B30 A6 GRN
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P)
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair open in the appropriate wire(s)
between the audio unit and stereo amplifier .
(cont'd)
23-47
BACK
AudioSystem
26. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier
connector A (28P) and body ground according to
the table.
stereo amplifier Wire color
connector
A4 BLU
A18 PNK
A10 GRN
A24 RED
A11 BLU
A25 PNK
A13 LTBLU
A27 PUR
A14 BRN
A28 VEL
A19 RED
A6 GRN
YES-Repair short body ground in the wire(s)
NO-Go to step 27.
23-48
table.
A4 A18, A10, A24, A11,
A25, A13, A27, A14,
A28
A18 A10, A24, A11, A25,
A13, A27,A14, A28
A10 A24, A11, A25, A13,
A27, A14, A28
A24 A 11, A25, A 13, A27,
A14, A28
A11 A25, A13, A27, A14,
A28
A25 A13, A17, A14, A28
A13 A27, A14, A28
A27 A14, A28
A14 A28
shield harness) .
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit and
recheck. If the symptom/indicated goes away,
replace the original audio unit. Ifthe symptom is
still present, substitute a known-good stereo
amplifier and recheck. Ifthe symptom indicated
goes away, replace the original stereo amplifier..
BACK
28. Disconnect the subwoofer8P connector.
29. Measure the voltage between subwoofer 8P
connector No.5 terminal and body ground.
SUBWOOFER 8P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Repair open in the between the subwoofer 8P
connector No.5 terminal and No. 12 (10 A) fuse in
31. Measure the voltage between subwoofer 8P
YES-Go to step 31.
NO-Repair open in the between the stereo
amplifier connector A (28P) No. 20 terminal and
subwoofer 8P connector No.6 terminal..
subwoofer 8P connector No.6 terminal.
between the stereo amplifier and subwoofer
NO-Go to step 33.
34. Check for continuity between subwoofer 8P
YES-Go to step 5.
between the subwoofer 8P connector No.4
terminal and body ground (G606) (see page 22-38).

23-49
BACK
Audio System
No sound is heard from speaker(s)
(display is normal) (without navigation)
NOTE:
o Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
o Before doing troubleshooting, do the power switch
will not turn ON troubleshooting (see page 23-41).
o Always check the connectors for poor connections or
loose terminals.
1. Check that the volume button is not set to the min
level.
Is it at the MIN level?
YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Do the speaker check mode with the self-diagnostic
Did aI/ speakers produce a tone?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check the faulty speaker(s) for damage.
Is there any damage?
YES-Replace the speaker and recheck .
NO-Go to step 5.
23-50
5. Remove the speaker(s) that has no sound (see page
23-91), and disconnect its connector.
6. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor
connection.
Reconnect the speaker connector, and recheck the
symptom; is the condition still present?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Intermittent failure. Operation is normal..
7. Test the speaker(s) (see page 23-91).
Is the speaker OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the speaker(s) .
8. Do the audio unit self-diagnostic function DSP unit
communication check (see page 23-32).
Is the DSP communication OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit
(see page 23-90) .
BACK
9. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector B (18P).
connector B (18P) No. 18 terminal and body ground.
10
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the between No.8 (30 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box and stereo
amplifier connector B (18P) No. 18 terminal.
12. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A (20P).
connector A (20P) No.1 terminal and body ground.
SW +B (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the between the stereo
amplifier connector A (20P) No.1 terminal and
audio unit connector B (32P) No. 23 terminal..
(cont'd)
23-51
BACK
Audio System
14. Reconnect the stereo amplifier connector B (18P).
connector B (18P),No. 9 terminal and body ground.
10
=
YES-Go to step 16.
between the stereo amplifier connector B(18P)
No.9 terminal and body ground (G504) (see page
22-32) .
23-52
B (32P) and stereo amplifier connector A (20P)
Audio unit Stereo Wire color
connector amplifier
connector
B32 A3 BLU
B16 A13 PNK
B24 A6 GRN
B8 A16 RED
B26 A7 BLU
B10 A17 PNK
B27 A9 LTBLU
B11 A19 PUR
B29 A10 BRN
B13 A20 VEL
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR (32P)
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the appropriate wire(s)
BACK
17. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector B (18P) and
speaker connector.
stereo amplifier connector B (18P) according to the
table.
amplifier
connector
Front center speaker B16 (+) BLK
B7 (-) PNK
Driver's door speaker, B11 (+) WHT
Left tweeter B2(-) GRN
Front passenger's B15 (+) RED
door speaker, B6(-) BRN
Right tweeter
Left rear door B10 (+) PNK
speaker B1 (-) PUR
Right rear door B14 (+) BLU
speaker B5 (-) ORN
Subwoofer B12 (+) BLU
B3(-) GRY
B17 (+) RED
B8 (-) BLK
stereo amplifier and the speaker(s) .
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Measure the resistance between stereo amplifier
connector B (18P) according to the table.
amplifier
connector
Front center speaker B16 (+) BLK
B7 (-) PNK
Driver's door speaker, B11 (+) WHT
Left tweeter B2 (-) GRN
Front passenger's B15 (+) RED
door speaker, B6(-) BRN
Right tweeter
Left rear door B10 (+) PNK
speaker B1 (-) PUR
Right rear door B14 (+) BLU
speaker B5 (-) ORN
Subwoofer B12 (+) BLU
B3 (-) GRY
B17(+) RED
B8 (-) BLK
Resistance
Front center speaker: 4 Q
Driver's door speaker, Left tweeter: 2 Q
Front passenger's door speaker,
Right tweeter: 2 Q
Left rear door speaker: 2 Q
Right rear door speaker: 2 Q
Subwoofer: 2 Q
Is the resistance the same as indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.
amplifier and the speaker(s) .
(conrd)
23-53
BACK
Audio'System
20. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier
connector A (20P) and body ground according to
the table.
stereo amplifier Wire color
connector
A3 BLU
A13 PNK
A6 GRN
A16 RED
A7 BLU
A17 PNK
A9 LTBLU
A19 PUR
A10 BRN
A20 VEL
A14 RED
A4 GRN
NO-Go to step 21.
23-54
table.
A3 A13, A6, A16, A7, A17, A9,
A19,A10,A20
A13 A6, A16, A7, A17, A9, A19,
A10,A20
A6 A16, A7, A17, A9, A19, A10,
A20
. ,
A16 A7, A17, A9, A19, A10, A20
A7 A17, A9, A19, A10, A20
A17 A9, A19, A10, A20
A9 A19,A10,A20
A19 A10, A20
A10 A20
shield harness) .
replace the original audio unit. If the symptom is
still present, substitute a known-good stereo
amplifier and recheck. If the symptom indicated
goes away, replace the original stereo amplifier .
BACK
Audio system sound is weak or distorted
(display is normal)
1. Check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and
disc).
Is there sound from the speakers, and is the sound
quality normal in each mode?
YES-Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this
time. Check for loose connections at the audio unit,
the amplifier, and each speaker .
NO-Speakers all work, sound quality is poor..
If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM
radio does not function, go to poor or no sound
with XM radio (see page 23-77).
If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to
poor radio reception or interference (see page
23-38).
If the sound is poor in all modes, go to sound
quality diagnosis (see page 23-84).
Radio preset memory is lost
NOTE: If only XM stations are lost, go to XM radio
preset memQry is lost (with AcuraLink) (see page 23-75)
or XM radio preset memory is lost (without AcuraLink)
(see page 23-76).
1. Set each of the radio station preset buttons.
Do each of the preset buttons set properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 4.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF for 1 minute, then turn
it back to ON (II).
3. Test all the preset buttons for proper recall
operation.
Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations?
YES-System is normal atthis time. Check
connections at the audio unit..
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Inspect the under-dash fuse/relay box No.5 (10 A)
fuse.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the fuse and reset. If it fails again,
repairthe short to ground in the harness .
(cont'd)
23-55
BACK
Audio System
7. Measure the voltage between the audio unit
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A(17P)
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-An open wire between the under-dash fuse/
relay box and audio unit A 17 terminal..
8. Measure the voltage between the audio unit
=
YES-Replace the audio unit..
NO-An open wire between the audio unit
connector A (17P) terminal No.9 and body ground
(G504) .
23-56
Volume does not change
NOTE: Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
1. Listen for sound from the speakers.
Is the sound normal?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to audio system sound is weak or
distorted (see page 23-55), or no sound is heard
from speakers (see page 23-43) .
2. Operate the volume knob to see if the volume
changes.
Does the volume change?
YES-Operation is normal..
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
still present, substitute a known-good audio panel
replace the original audio panel..
BACK
Volume does not increase with speed
1. Verify the (SVC) mode setting in the navigation or
audio unit sound set-up.
Is the (SVC) set to off?
YES-Change the setting to "Mid" and reset
(see page 23-8) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Do the self-diagnostic function for the vehicle
speed pulse indication (see page 23-32).
Does the self-diagnostic function indicate a VSP
signal?
YES-Substitute a known-good navigation or audio
unit and retest. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original navigation or audio
unit..
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for 8-CAN codes with the HDS.
Are there any gauge module 8-CAN codes?
YES-Go to test mode A (see page 22-112) .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Inspect the VSP signal in the navigation system
(see page 23-165) .
Does the VSP change from 0 to 1 when the vehicle
is moving?
YES-Substitute a known-good audio unit, then
retest the VSP signal in the audio self-diagnostic
test. If the speed is shown, replace the original
audio unit. If so speed is shown, substitute a
k n o w n ~ g o o navigation unit..
NO-Inspect the VSP circuit (see page 23-123) .
23-57
BACK
Audio System
Volume is too high or too low when driving
at freeway speeds
1. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds, and
monitor volume level.
Is the volume level too high or too low?
YES-Go to step 2.
time .
2. Change the (SVC) mode setting in sound set-up to
"Mid" (see page 23-8).
Is the volume level still too high, or too low?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-90) .
NO-Improper (SVC) setting for clients sound
taste .
23-58
BACK
Radio tuner does not change stations
1. Check the audio information on the display panel.
Does the audio information display properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to power switch will not turn ON (see page
23-41) .
2. Operate the tuning knob to see if the radio station
changes.
Does the radio station change?
YES-Intermittent failure, the turning knob is OK at
~ ~ t i m ~ .
NO-Replace the audio unit .
Display does not dim or brighten with
dimmer
2. Turn the headlight switch to the parking or
headlight on position.
3. Check the display of the climate control unit.
Does the climate control illumination change with
dimmer?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to climate control power and ground
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-93) .
4. Check the No.7 (10 A) fuse and the No. 32 (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
the audio unit and climate control unit connectors
are properly connected.
Are they connected properly?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair poor connections and reconnect the
connector, and recheck the function .
(cont'd)
23-59
BACK
Audio,System
7. Disconnect audio unit connector C (24P) and
climate control unit connector B (14P).
connector C (24P) No. 24 terminal and climate
control unit connector B (14P) No.8 terminal.
YES-Go to step 9.
unit connector C (24P) No. 24 terminal and climate
control unit connector B (14P) No.8 terminal .
23-60
9. Check for continuity between the body ground and
audio unit connector C (24P) No. 24 terminal.
between the audio unit and climate control unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
11. Measure the voltage between No.1 terminal of
climate control unit connector A (40P) and body
ground.
+B(WHT)
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between No.7
13. Measure the voltage between No. 25 terminal of
climate control unit connector A (40P) and body
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the 32
15. Reconnect the audio unit connector A (17P).
=
and recheck. If the symptom/indicated goes away,
replace the original climate control unit. If the
symptom is still present, substitute a known-good
audio unit and recheck. If the symptom/indicated
goes away, replace the original audio unit..
control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 37 and
body ground (G506) (see page 22-32) .
23-61
BACK
AudioSystem
Audio unit button illumination does not
work
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Turn the combination lighting switch to the parking
light position.
3. Check the illumination of the audio unit buttons.
Are the buttons illuminated?
YES-All buttons illuminated: lritermittent problem:
the audio unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor connections at the audio unit connector C
(24P) .
Some button(s) illuminated: Audio panel is faulty,
replace the audio panel..
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the illumination of several other buttons not
related to the aUdio system.
YES-:Go to the B-CAN line troubleshooting
(see page 23-227). Ifthe ~ C N line is OK,
substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck. If
the symptom/indicated goes away, replace the
original audio unit. Ifthe symptom is still present,
substitute a known-good audio panel and recheck.
If the symptom/indicated goes away, replace the
original audio panel..
NO-Troubleshoot the interior lights. Start by
checking the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check the interior
light relay.
23-62.
Audio disc does not load
NOTE:
Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may damage the player mechanism .
Make sure the CD disc is compatible with the system
(see the owner's manual for more information).
1. Insert a known-good disc to see if the symptom can
be duplicated.
Does the disc load?
YES-Operation is normal. If the disc loads
normally, but will not play, go to audio disc does
not play (see page 23-63) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Insert another disc.
Does the disc load?
YES-The original disc is faulty .
BACK
Audio disc does not eject
NOTE: Disc labels should not be' used in the audio unit.
They may damage the player mechanism.
1. Turn on the audio system.
Does the system turn on?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to power switch will not turn ON (see page
23-41) .
2. Check to see if the disc ejects correctly with no
binding by pushing the EJECT button.
Is it normal?
Special tools required
Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
Audio disc does not play
1. Try loading a disc.
Does the disc load?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to disc does not load (see page 23-62) .
2. Insert another audio disc to see if the symptom can
be duplicated.
Does the disc play?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Insert audio diagnostic CD (TIN 07AAZ-SDBA100)
in the audio unit.
Does the disc play?
YES-The original disc is faulty or has an
unreadable format .
23-63
BACK
Audio System
Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-S DBA 1 00
Skip test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200
Skip test CD 07 AAZ-SDBA300
Audio disc skips
1. Confirm the vehicles tires are properly inflated.
2. Check the client's CD for scratches and fingerprints.
NOTE: The following test should be done with the
audio unit bass and treble set to the client's
listening settings. When comparing to known-good
vehicles, do the comparison on the same model
and trim level.
3. Test-drive to identify when the client's CD skips.
The audio diagnostic CD (TIN 07AAZ-SDBA100) can
be used if the client's CD is not available; use tracks
10-12.
Does the CD skip?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Operation is normal..
4. Compare the client's skipping CDto a known-good
vehicle under the same conditions.
Does the CD skip in the known-good vehicle under
the same conditions?
YES-The CD player operation is normal, the
problem is with the client's CD .
NO-Go to step 5.
NOTE: Do the following test with vehicle parked
and the engine running.
23-64
5. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (TIN 07 AAZ-
SDBA300). Play tracks 2-11, and note on which
number track(s) the CD starts skipping. Do the
same test on a known-good vehicle.
Does the CD skip on same track(s) as the known-
good vehicle?
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (TIN 07 AAZ-
SDBA200). Play tracks 7-11 and tracks 13-15 and
note on which number track(s) the CD starts
skipping. Do the same test on a known-good
vehicle.
Does the CD skip on same track( s) as the known-
good vehicle?
BACK
Audio disc changer does not load all six discs
NOTE: Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit.
1. Try loading six discs into the audio unit.
Does the audio unit accept all six disks?
YES-Intermittent failure, the audio unit is OK at
this time .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Try loading the disc player with six known-good
discs.
Does the audio unit accept all six disks?
YES-At least one ofthe original discs is faulty .
NO-Replace the audio unit..
IIJlID

Audio disc changer does not move between
discs
NOTE: Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit.
1. Insert six discs into the audio unit and see if the
changer moves between discs.
Does the changer operate normally?
YES-Intermittent failure, the disc changer is OK at
this time .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Insert six known-good disks into the audio unit.
Does the changer operate normally?
YES-At least one of the original discs is faulty .
23-65
BACK
Audio System
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM ANTENNA
is displayed
NOTE:
Check XM radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by tall buildings,
mountains, or high-voltage power lines.
If you can only tune to channel 000,001,174 and 247,
make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode (see
owner's manual), if it is set to channel mode, call XM
radio customer support and check the account
activation status.
If you replace the XM receiver, the Acuralink must be
reactivated by Acura Client Services.
1. Park vehicle outside with a clear view of the
southern horizon.
Does the XM radio receive a signal?
YES-Reception interference operation is
normal..
NO-With AcuraLink: Go to step 2.
2. Check XM antenna 2P connector and XM receiver
(AcuraLink control unit) connector C (2P).
Are the connectors connected?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reconnect XM antenna 2P connector and XM
receiver (AcuraLink control unit) connector C (2P),
recheck XM radio operation. If the signal is restored,
operation is normal. If signal is not restored go to
step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0).
23-66
4 .. Measure the voltage betweenXM receiver
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P) No.1
XM RECEIVER (ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No.5 (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and XM
receiver (AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P)
No.1 terminal..
BACK
5. Reconnect the XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
connector A (20P).
6. Check the voltage between XM receiver (AcuraLink
control unit) connector A (20P) No. 11 terminal and
body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between XM receiver
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P) No. 11
terminal and body ground (G606) (see page 22-38) .

7. Substitute known-good XM antenna.
Does the XM radio receiver a signal?
YES-Replace XM antenna (see page 23-98) .
NO-Substitute a known-good XM antenna lead. If
the XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) receives a
signal, replace the original XM antenna lead. If the
XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) does not
receive a signal, substitute a known-good XM
receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
8. Check XM antenna 2P connector and XM receiver
connector B (2P).
Are the connectors connected?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Reconnect XM antenna 2P connector and XM
receiver connector B (2P), recheck XM radio
operation. If the signal restored, operation is
normal. If signal not restored go to step 3.
9. Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0).
10. Measure the voltage between XM receiver
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
=
YES-Go to step 11.
receiver connector A (14P) No.1 terminal..
(cont'd)
23-67
BACK
AudioSystem
11. Reconnect the XM receiver connector A (14P).
=
YES-Go to step 13.
connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and body ground
(G606) (see page 22-38) .
13. Substitute known-good XM antenna.
Does the XM radio receiver a signal?
YES-Replace XM antenna (see page 23-98) .
NO-Substitute a known-good XM antenna lead. If
the XM receiver receives a signal, replace the
original XM antenna lead. If the XM receiver does
not receive a signal, substitute a known-good XM
receiver unit .
23-68
information is displayed (with AcuraLink)
NOTE:
Always check the connectors for poor connections or
loose terminals.
If you replace the XM receiver, the Acuralink must be
reactiveted by Acura Client Services.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Disconnect the XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
connector A (20P).
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the between No.5 (10 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box and XM receiver
terminal..
BACK
XM RECEIVER (ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No. 32 (10 A)
No.2 terminal..
XM RECEIVER (ACURAUNKCONTROL UNIT)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No. 21 (10 A)
No. 12 terminal..
(cont'd)
23-69
BACK
Audio System
7. Reconnect the XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
connector A (20P).
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Go to step 9.
terminal and body ground (G606) (see page 22-38).

9. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P), XM
receiver (AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P),
navigation unit connector A (20P), and navigation
display unit 20P connector.
23-70
terminals ofthe audio unit connector D (14P) and
XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) connector A
(20P).
Audio unit XM receiver Wire color
connector (AcuraLink control
unit) connector
D3 A18 BRN
D9 A7 GRN
D10 A17 RED
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to step 11 .
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between audio unit
and XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
BACK
11. Check for continuity between body ground and XM
terminals No.7 and 17 individually.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
Q
=
=
between the audio unit and XM receiver (AcuraLink
control unit) or between the shield wires (replace
the applicable shield harness) .
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for continuity between the terminal of XM
according to the cable.
A7 A17, A18
A17 A18
CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between the audio
unit and XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
(replace the appropriate shield harness) .
still present, substitute a known-good XM receiver
(AcuraLink control unit) and recheck. Ifthe
symptom indicated goes away, replace the original
XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
23-71
BACK
Audio System
information is displayed (Without AcuraLink)
NOTE: If you can only tune to. channel 000, 001, 174,
and 247, make sure the audio unit is set to channel
mode (see the owner's manual). If it is set to channel
mode, call XM radio customer support and check the
account activation status.
2. Disconnect XM receiver connector A(14P).
=
YES-Go to Step 4.
receiver connector A (14P) No.1 terminal..
23-72
=
Is there less than O.tV?
YES-Go to Step 5.
connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and body ground
(G606) (see page 22-38) .
6. Reconnect XM receiver connector A (14P).
=
Is there 10 volts or more present?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Substitute a known- good XM receiver and
recheck. If 10 volts or more are present, replace the
original XM receiver (see page 23-96) .
BACK
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14PI
Is there less than O.5V?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Substitute a known- good audio unit and
recheck. If 0.5 volts or less are present, replace the
original audio unit (see page 23-90) .
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O).
11. Disconnect audio unit connector D(14P), XM
receiver connector A (14P), navigation unit
connector A (20P), and navigation display unit 20P
connector.
terminals of the audio unit connector D (14P) and
XM receiver A (14P).
Audio XMReceiver Wire color
unit connector
connector
D3 A3 BRN
D9 ,. A9 GRN
D10 A10 RED
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14PI
,Wire side of female terminals
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14PI'
f>l3ls fW]11 1,8 [21: 11: I,'
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between audio unit
and XM receiver .
(cont'd)
23-73
BACK
Audio System
receiver connector A (14P) terminals No. 98'nd 10
individually.
between the audio unit and XM receiver or a short
between the shield wires (replace the applicable
shielded harnass) .
NO-Go to Step 14.
23-74
14. Check for continuity between the terminals of XM
receiver connector A(14P) according to the cable.
03 A9,A10
A9 A10
unit and XM receiver (replace the appropriate
shield harness) .
and recheck.lfthe symptom/indicated goes away,
replace the original XM receiver .
BACK
XM radio preset memory is lost (with
AcuraLink)
NOTE:
loose terminals.
If you can only tune to channel 000, 001,174, and 247,
make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode (see
owners manual), if it is set to channel mode, call XM
Satellite Radio customer support and check the
If you replace the XM receiver, the AcuraLink must be
1. Set each of the XM radio channel preset buttons.
Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons
set properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to Step 6.
it back to ON (II).
3. Test all of the XM radio channel preset buttonsfor
proper recall operation.
YES-System is .normal at this time. Check
connections atthe audio unit .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
connector A (20P).
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P) terminal
XM RECEIVER (ACURAUNK CONTROL UNm
CONNECTOR A (20P)
+BfWHTJ
128467910
11 12 13 14 16 16 17 18 19 20
YES-Go to Step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and XM receiver (AcuraLink
control unit) connector A (20P) terminal No.1 .
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P)
terminalsNo. 2, and No. 12 and body ground
individually.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to Step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-
dash fuse-relay box and XM receiver (AcuraLink
control unit) connector A (20P) terminals No.2 and
No. 12 .
9. Reconnect XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit)
connector A (20P).
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P) terminal
No. 11 and body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-Replace the XM receiver (AcuraLink control
unit) .
(AcuraLink control unit) connector A (20P)
terminals No. 11 and,body ground (G606) (see page
22-38) .
23-75
BACK
'I'; "I,
'" ;,t,;

XM radio preset memory is lost (without
AcuraLink)
. ,'I:
NOTE:
.,'j'
loose terminals. .,
If you can only tune to channel 000,001, 174, and 247,
make sure the audio uiiitis to chan.nel. mode (see
account activation status.';
If you replace die XM receiver, the AcuraLink must be
reactivated byAcu ra Client!;)ervices.
1. Set each of the XM radio preset buttons.
Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons
set properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to Step S.
'it back to ON (II). .
3. Test all' of the XM radio channel presetbuttons for
proper recall operation.
YES-System is normal atthistime. CheclQ
connections at the audio unit .
NO-'Go to step 4.
I'
5. Disconnect XM A (14P).
S. Measure the voltage between XM receiver
connector A.(14P) 1 and body ground.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR (4 (14P)
. Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to Step 7.
NO-'Repair open inthe wire' between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and XM receiver connector A
(14P) terminal No.1 .
23-76
connector A (14P) terminal No.2, and body ground
individually. .
XM RECEIVER CONN!=CTOR A (14P)
=
YES-Go to Step 9.
:NO-Repairopen in the wire betweenthe under-
dash fuse-relay box and XM receiver connector A
(14P) terminal No.2
9. Reconnect XM receiver connector A (14P).
YES-Replace the XM receiver .
connector A (14P) terniinals No. 11 and body
ground (GSOS) (see page .
BACK
Poor orno sound withXM .. adio (Audio. unit
does display XMchannels)
NOTE:
Check the XM radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by nearby tall
buildings, mountains; or high-voltage power lines.
loose terminals.
If you can only tune to channel OQO, 001,174, and 247,
make sure the audio unit is setto channel mode (see
If you replace the XM receiver, the AcuraLink must be
2. Turn on the audio unit and select XM radio.
3. Check for an error message on display,.
Are there any messages displayed?
YES-Go to error code list (see page 23-37) .
NO-
4. Disconnect audio unit co(!nector D (14P) and the
XM receiver;.(AcuraUokcontfol.unit) connector A
. (20P).
5. Check for continuity between audio .unit conn.ector
D (14P.) and XM receiver (Acuralink control unit)
connector A (20P) according to the table.
Al,Idio XM '.
unit (AcurilLink ;
connector control unit)
connector
D6 A9 BLK
D14 A19 GRN
D5 A10 RED
D13 A20 ." WHT
AUDIO UNIT CONNEcToR D (14P) .
9 rwtd aW,:I,:1
.. - -
Wire side of
CONNECTOR A(20P)
., Wire side
YES-Go to Step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the audio
unit and XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) or
replace the appropriate shielded harness .
(cont'd)
23-77
BACK
Audio ' System
6. Check for continuity to body ground between the
, termin'alsofXM receiver (Acuralink control unit)
connector A(20P) and body ground according to the
table. Then check for continuity between the same
terminals listed in the table and the audio unit
connector D (14P) No.4 terminal (the harness
shield).
~ M Receiver (AcuraiLink Wire color
control unit) connector
A9 BlK
A10 ' RED
A19 GRN
A20 WHT
CONNECTOR A (20P)
AUPIQ UNIT CONNECTOR D.{14P)
YES-Replace the shielded wires between the audio
unit and XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
NO-Go to Step 7.
23-78
7.' Check for continuity between the terminals of XM
receiver (AcuraLink control unit) connector A(20P)
according to the cable.
. "
A9 A10, A19, A20
A10 A19,A20
A19 A20
CONNECTOR A (20P) .
unit and XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
(AcuraLink control unit) and recheck. Ifthe
original XM receiver (AcuraLink control unit) .
BACK
o (14P) and XM receiver connector A (14P)
Audio unit XM receiver Wire color
connector connector
06 A6 BlK
014 A14 GRN
05 A5 RED
013 A13 WHT
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
YES-Go to Step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the audio
unit and XM receiver
9. Check for continuity between XM receiver
connector A(14P) and body ground according to the
table. Then check for continuity between the same
terminals.listed in the table and the audio unit
connector 0 (14P) No.4 terminal (the harness
shield).
XM receiver Wire color
connector
A5 RED
A6 BlK
A13 WHT
A14 GRN
between the audio unit and XM receiver or a short
between the shield wires (replace the applicable
shielded harness) .
NO-Go to Step 10.
(cont'd)
23-79
BACK
Audio System
10. Check for continuity between the terminals of XM
receiver connector A(14P) accordingto the cable.
A5 A6,A13,A14
A6 A13,A14
A13 A14
unit and XM receiver .
replace the original XM receiver .
23-80
Audio remote switch does not work properly
1. Test the audio remote switch (see page 23-97).
/s the audio remote switch OK?
YES-Intermittent failure, the audio remote switch
and audio unit are OK at this time .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the audio unit operation (volume up, volume
down, CH (-), CH (+), MODE).
/s the audio unit operation OK?
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the audio unit connector B (32P).
BACK
5. Reconnect the audio remote switch. While moving
the steering wheel about 3/4 turn left and right,
measure the resistance between the audio unit
connector B (32P) No.3 and No. 19 terminals as
specified in the table.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B(32P)
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH TABLE
Button held down VOL VOL UP CH(-) CH(+) MODE (NONE)
DOWN
Resistance about about about about about 10kQ
100 Q 370 Q 840 Q 2kQ 4kQ
Is the resistance OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the circuit
between the audio unit and the audio remote
switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel
(see page 24-154) .
No.3 and No. 19 terminals of audio unit connector
B (32P) individually.
.Q
YES-Repair the short to body ground in the circuit
between the audio unit and the audio remote
switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel
(see page 24-149) .
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-90) .
23-81
BACK
Audio'System
Audio unit button does not work'
NOTE: In order to troubleshoot the main power switch,
go to "Power switch will not turn on" (see page 23-41).
1. Refer to the following switch list, and find the
appropriate switch fQr e,ach button. Then perform
the following exercise to identify the switch that
does not work by'operating various buttons which
only belong to that switch.
Switch list
Switch A:
Switch B:
AM/FM, XM, 6DDISC, AUX, DISP,
SCAN, RPT, ASELJRDM, SEEK, DVD,
REAR PWR, FRONT SOURCE, REAR
SOURCE, REAR CTRL, ELECT, ROAD,
PWR, SOUND, 1-6
INFO, MAP/GUIDE, MENU, CANCEL,
SET UP, AUDIO, interface dial, display
2. Check to see ifthe buttons that do notfunctionall
belong to switch A.
Are they all switch A's?
YES-Substitute a known-good audio unit and
NO-Go to Step 3.
23-82
3. Check to see if the buttons that do not function
belong to switch B.
Are they switch 8' s?
YES-Faulty audio-HVAC display panel and audio
unit. Replace the audio-HVAC display module .
NO-Check the connections between the interface
dial and audio panel, and recheck the function. If
the symptom is, still present, substitute a known-
good audio unit and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original audio
unit. If the symptom is stjll , present, substitute a
known-good audio panel and recheck. Ifthe
original audio panel .
BACK
Audio unit disc indicator does not work
NOTE: Disc with labels should not be used in the audio
unit.They may damage the player mechanism.
2. Insert a known-good disc or press the EJECT button.
Is the DISC indicator (LED) indicated?
YES-The audio unit is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at audio unit and audio
panel .
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
Security indicator does not work properly
NOTE:
The system will not operate without the 4-digit
security (anti-theft) code .
Before troubleshooting, confirm that a 4-digit security
(anti-theft) code is recorded.
1. Turn off the audio system.
Is the security indicator (LED) light on (blink)?
YES-Go to Step 2.
Is the security indicator (LED) light out?
YES-The audio unit is OK at this time, Check for
loose or poor connections at audio unit and audio
panel .
23-83
BACK
Audio System
Sound Quality Diagnosis
Diagnostics CD 07 AAZ-SDBA 100
Use the following tests to check sound quality.
NOTE: Before beginning the following tests,write down
the client's bass, treble, fader and balance settings,
then set them to their center positions for the testing.
Left/Right ChannellD
Do this test to confirm proper channel routing.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (TIN 07 AAZ-
SDBA100) intothe audio unit.
2. Play track No.1 (left, both, right channel 10) at a
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume
level.
3. The voice should be audible only from the channel
or channels when indicated .
If the channel 10 is correct for each side, go to
phase test .
. If the channel 10 is not correct, check for
- Shorted speaker wire
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
23-84
Use the following tests to check sound quality.
NOTE: Before beginning the following tests, write down
the client's bass, treble, fader and balance settings,
then set them to their center positions for the testing.
Phase Test
Do this test to confirm proper speaker phasing.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (TIN 07AAZ-
SDBA 100) into the audio unit.
2. Play track No.2 (phase) at a normal, or slightly
higher than normal, volume level.
3. The voice should sound centered and forcused
when it is in-phase.
4. The voice should sound diffused, and have "Iess
base" when it is out of phase.
If the voice changes from in-phase to out of
phase as indicated by the prompt, the phasing is
correct. Go to electrical noise test (see page
23-85) .
If the voice always sounds out of phase, phasing
is not correct. Check for
- Crossed speaker wire
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
BACK
Electrical Noise Test
Do this test to check for electrical noise being induced
into the audio system.
NOTE: Electrical noise may be caused by outside
sources that cannot be handled by the audio system.
Make sure you remove any cell phones and/or turn off
any aftermarket devices before beginning this test.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N07AAZ-
2. Play track No.4 (digital zero) at a normal, or slightly
3. Operate any electrical device that may create
electrical noise in the audio system, including
starting the engine.
4. Play track No.5 (near digital zero) at a normal, or
slightly higher than normal, volume level.
6. Play track No.6 (SNR)at a normal, or slightly
IIRm

If no abnormal noise is heard, go to the
individual speaker test (see page 23-86).
If the noise is present only during the SNR track,
replace the audio unit.
If the noise is heard during the digital zero or
near digital zero track, check for
- Poor ground atthe audio unit, amplifier,
engine, or battery cable
- Pinched or shorted speaker or amplifier wire
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
- Other faulty components causing excessive
electrical noise (ignition coils, alternator, door
lock actuators, etc.). Disconnect any suspect
components, and then replay the tracks that
were originally noisy. If the noise is gone,
check the component's circuit and the
component.
23-85
BACK
Audio System
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Diagnostics CD 07AAZ"SDBA100
Individual Speaker Test
Do this test to identify a faulty speaker.
SDBA100) into the audio unit.
2. Play track No. 30 (steady 300 Hz tone) at a normal,
or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound compared to
the other channels. Use the audio unit's fader and
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the
problem.
. Ifthesound quality produced by a specific
speaker is poor, substitute it with a known-good
speaker. If the poor sound quality continues, go
to the sound balance test (see page 23-86).
If the sound quality is OK, go to the sound
balance test (see page 23-86).
23-86
Sound Balance Test
Perform this test to identify a faulty channel or speaker.
2. Confirm the bass and treble are set to the center
positions.
3. Play track No.3 (pink noise) at a normal, or slightly
4. A "static" type sound should be heard through all
speakers .
SDBA100) into the audio unit of a known-good
vehicle .
6. Set the bass and treble to the center positions.
7. Play track No.3 (pink noise) all the same level as
was played in step 3.
8. Compare the sounds made by the two vehicles .
If the sound does not have as much bass, check
the subwoofer and circuit.
Ifthe sound does not have enough "hiss," check
the tweeters and their circuits.
BACK
Frequency Sweep
Do this test to find rattles or reverberations that may
cause a perception of poor sound quality.
2. Play track No. 13 (sweep from 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a
level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound quality or
reverberations caused by specific frequencies. Use
the voice-over to estimate the frequency that
causes the vibration. Use the audio unit's fader and
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the
problem.
If vibrations or poor sound quality are heard, go
to step 4 .
If no vibrations or poor sound quality are heard,
go to sound judging (see page 23-87).
4. Choose the appropriate track from No. 14 to 25
(small range frequency sweep) or 26 to 53 (single
frequencies) to recreate the frequency that caused
the poor sound quality or vibration witnessed in
step 3; this aids in diagnosis ofthe cause.
NOTE: When you get to the track that recreates the
problem, select the repeat function on the audio
unit, this will help you isolate the cause.
5. Replace or insulate the source of the vibration or, if
the speaker is the source of the poor sound quality,
replace it.
Sound Judging
Do this test to compare overall sound quality, imaging,
and dynamics between the client's vehicle and a
known-good vehicle. Only use a vehicle ofthe same
model and trim level for this test.
1. In the client's vehicle, set the bass, treble, fader,
and balance settings to the client's normal settings
that were written down before beginning the test.
3. Play tracks No.7 to 12 (sound quality, midland,
dynamics, and imaging demonstration tracks) at a
level. Write down the volume setting being used .
4. Listen to areas of the track that stand out as being
either very clear or poorer than other areas of the
track.
5. In a known-good vehicle, insert the audio
diagnostic CD (TIN 07AAZ-SDBA100) into the audio
unit.
6. Play the tracks at the same volume level and the
same bass, treble, balance, and fader settings as
used in step 3 in the client's vehicle.
7. Listen to the same area of the track that stood out
as being either very clear or poorer than other
areas of the track.
(cont'd)
23-87
BACK
Audio System
Sound auality Diagnosis (cont'd)
8. Compare the client's vehicle's sound quality results
the known-good vehicle'.s results.
If the sound quality in the client's vehicle is
comparable to the sound quality in the known-
good vehicle, then the client's vehicle is
operating as designed .
If the sound quality is not comparable, check
these items in order.
- Loose or improperly installed speakers or
other hardware thatmay create interference
from the vibrations generated by the speakers
- Poor power or ground to the stereo amplifier
- Damaged speaker(s)
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
23-88
Seek Stop Test
Do this test to check the performance of the audio unit's
AM and FM reception. Refer to SYmptom
troubleshooting: audio sound weak or distorted, or no
sound is heard frorn speakers (display is normal)
(see page 23-43) before continuing with this test.
NOTE:
Window tint, aftermarket theft-recovery devices and
other aftermarket devices may affect reception.
Changes in cloud cover and other atmospheric
conditions will affect the ability of the audio unit to
receive radio signals.
1. Park the client's vehicle in an open area away from
buildings or other obstructions.
2. Park a known-good vehicle (same year, model, and
trim level) next to the client's vehicle, facing the
same direction.
3. Start the engine in the client's vehicle, and turn on
the radio.
4. Set the FM receiver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Press the "Seek +" button, and record the first
station that the audio unit locks onto.
6. Press the "Seek +" button repeatedly, and write
down each station that the audio unit locks onto
until the station recorded in step 5 is reached again.
7. Set the AM receiver to 530 kHz.
8. Press the "Seek +" button, and record the first
station that the audio unit locks onto.
9. Press the "Seek +" button repeatedly, and write
down each station that the audio unit locks onto
until the station recorded in step 8 is reached again.
BACK
11. Start the engine in the known-good vehicle, and
then perform steps 4 thru 10 on the known-good
vehicle.
12. Compare the number of stations received in steps 6
and 9 in the client's vehicle with the number of
stations received in the known-good vehicle .
If the number of stations received is the same, or
within 10 %, the audio unit's tuner performance
is OK. The problem may be atmospheric
conditions, mUlti-path interference, or other
obstructions to the radio signal.
If the client's vehicle receives fewer stations by at
least 10 %, go to step 2 of poor radio reception or
interference (see page 23-38).
23-89
BACK
Audio System
Audio Unit Removal/Installation
SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and the
performing repairs or service.
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working
on them to protect the face panel from scratches or
other damage.
system.
2. Remove the driver's inner dashboard trim
(see page 20-118), and front passenger's
dashboard trim (see page 20-123).
3. Remove the console lower trim panel (A) and the
self tapping screws, then pull out the audio unit (8).
c c
4. Disconnect the connectors (C), then remove the
audio unit.
5. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-114).
23-90
6. Remove the screws and the audio unit (A) from the
audio panel (8).
7. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of
Make sure all the connectors and the antenna
lead are secure.
Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system,
and set the clock.
If necessary, enter the navigation system code.
BACK
Speaker Test/Replacement
Door Speaker
1. Remove the door panel.
Front: (see page 20-8)
Rear: (see page 20-22)
2. Remove the three mounting screws from the
speaker (A).
B
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (8), and remove the
speaker.
4. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.
2 terminals there should be about 2 Q.
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the door
speaker.
Center Speaker
NOTE:
Take care not scratch the dashboard.
1. Remove the dashboard upper visor (A).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (8).
3. Remove the screws and the speaker (A).
4. Measure the resistance between No.1 and No.2
terminals there should be about 4 Q.
front center speaker.
(cont'd)
23-91
BACK
AudioSystem
Speaker Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Tweeter
1. Carefully pry the tweeter grille (A) out of the
dashboard. Be careful not to damage the tweeter
grille and the dashboard.
A
B
-
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the tweeter.
3. Remove the tweeter speaker from the speaker grille.
A
4. Check the capacitor (A) condition. If any
malfunction is found, replace the tweeter.
23-92
5. Measure the resistance between the. tweeter (A)
terminal No.2 and the outside terminal of the
capacitor.
There should be about 6 Q.
tweeter.
BACK
Satellite Speaker
2. Remove the speaker grille (A) and connector clip
(8).
3. Remove the screws and the satellite speaker (C).
2 terminals there should be about 4 Q.
satellite speaker.
(cont'd)
23-93
BACK
Audio System
Speaker Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Subwoofer/amplifier unit (With navigation)
1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
20-92).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A), then remove the
bolts, nuts and pull out the subwoofer (8).
23-94
Input Test
1. With the connector still disconnected, make the
input tests at the connector according to the table.
Terminal Test
5 Measure the voltage to ground
with all conditions: There
should be battery voltage.
with audio power switch ON:
2. Reconnect the connector to the subwoofer/
amplifier unit, and make the input test at the
connector according to the table.
Terminal Test
with all conditions: There
should be less than 1 V.
3. If the input test proves OK and the subwoofer has
no sound, replace the faulty subwoofer/amplifier
unit.
BACK
Subwoofer (Without navigation)
20-92).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A), then remove the
bolts, nuts and pull out thesubwoofer (B).
7 terminals and No.3 and No.8 there should be
about 2 Q.
subwoofer.
Stereo Amplifier Removall
Installation
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125) and
passenger's dashboard under cover (see page
20-127).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A).
3. Loosen the bolts, then pull out the stereo amplifier
(B).
4. Install the stereo amplifier in the reverse order of
removal.
23-95
BACK
Audio System
AcuraLink Control Unit (XM
Receiver) Removal/Installation
With AcuraLink:
NOTE: The AcuraLink must be reactivated by Acura
Client Services when:
The AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) is replaced.
DATA RESET was selected while in the self-
diagnostic function.
Vehicle ownership changes.
20-92).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A), then remove the
bolts and pull out the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) (B).
3. Install the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) in
the reverse order of removal.
23-96
XM Receiver Removal/Installation
20-92).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the
bolts and pull out the XM receiver (B).
3. Install the XM receiver in the reverse order of
removal.
BACK
Audio Remote Switch Test
24-137).
2. Remove the 20P connector from the cable reel.
No. 10 terminals in each switch position according
to the table.
Position Resistance
OFF About 10 kQ
MODE About 4 kQ
CH(+) About 2 kQ
CH(-) About 840 Q
A About 370 Q
(VOL. UP)
....
About 100 Q
(VOL. DOWN)
audio remote switch (see page 17-22).
5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each
Terminal
I I I I
6. If the diode test is not as specified, replace the
audio remote switch (see page 17-22).
AM/FM Antenna Amplifier
Replacement
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the AM/FM
antenna amplifier (8).
3. Remove the bolt and AM/FM antenna amplifier.
23-97
BACK
Audio'System
XM Antenna Replacement
2. Remove the nut (A) from the XM antenna (8).
A
3. Disconnect the connector (C) and remove the XM
antenna.
4. Install the XM antenna in the reverse order of
removal.
23-98
Auxiliary Jack Assembly
Replacement
Without Rear Entertainment
1. Open the center console.
2. Carefully pull out the auxiliary jack assembly (A),
then disconnect the 5P connector (8).
3. Install the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Navigation System
GPSANTENNA
page 23-180
NAVIGATION UNIT
page 23-180
page 23-181
ROOF CONSOLE
HFL/NAVIGATION
MICROPHONE
(Built in the roof console)
page 23-274
INTERFACE DIAL
page 23-181
NAVIGATION SERVICE CHECK CONNECTOR
Forced starting of the display, page 23-179
23-99
BACK
Navigation System
General Operation
Refer to the Navigation System Manual for the
navigation system operating procedures.
Anti-theft Feature
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded
theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the client's anti-
theft security codes number before;
Disconnecting the battery.
Disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector.
Removing the No.7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit,
and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Enter the 4-digit
anti-theft security code, then select "Done".
If the code cannot be found, use the Interactive Network
(iN) to look it up. You can view the serial number in the
Navi ECU diagnostic screen (see page 23-161). Also,
you can find the serial number on the navigation unit
that is stored under the driver's seat. The serial number
is on a label on the bottom of the unit.
When replacing the navigation unit, be sure to give the
client's the new anti-theft security code.
Symptom Diagnosis
Certain circumstances and system limitations will result
in occasional vehicle positioning errors. Some client's
may think this indicates a problem with the navigation
system when, in fact, the system is normal. Keep the
following items in mind when interviewing client's
about symptoms ofthe navigation system.
Self-Inertial Navigation Limitations
The limitations of the self-inertial portion of the
navigation system (the yaw rate sensor and the vehicle
speed signal) can cause some discrepancies between
the vehicle'S actual position and the indicated vehicle
position (GPS vehicle position).
The following circumstances may cause vehicle
positioning errors:
Moving the vehicle with the engine stopped and the
vehicle stopped, such as by ferry or tow truck, or if
the vehicle is spun on a turn table.
23-100
Tire slippage, changes in tire rolling diameters, and
some driving situations may cause discrepancies in
travel distances. Examples of this include:
- Continuous tire slippage on a slippery surface
- Driving with snow chains mounted
- Abnormal tire pressure
-Incorrecttire size
- Frequent lane changes across a wide highway
- Continuous driving on a straight or gently curving
highway
- Very bumpy roads
Tolerances in the system and map inaccuracies
sometimes limit how precisely the vehicle position is
indicated. Examples of this include:
- Driving on roads not shown on the map (map
matching is not possible)
- Driving on a road that winds in one direction, such
as a loop bridge, an interchange, or a spiral parking
garage
- Driving on a road with a series of sharp hair-pin
turns
- Driving near a gradual highway exit or transition
- Driving on one of two close parallel roads
- Making many 90 degree turns
Global Positioning System (GPS) Limitations
The GPS cannot detect the vehicle's position or
elevation during the following instances:
For the first 5 to 10 minutes after reconnecting the
battery (This can take as long as 45 minutes).
When the satellite signals are blocked by tall
buildings, mountains, tunnels, large trees, inside
parking structures or large trucks.
When the GPS antenna is blocked by metallic
window tinting or by an object placed above it in the
vehicle. The GPS antenna requires a clear
unobstructed view of the sky.
When the satellite signals are blocked by the
operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited, to non-OEM in-dash
entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers,
radar detectors, and theft recovery systems), and cell
phones placed near the navigation system.
BACK
The accuracy of GPS is reduced during these instances:
Metallic window tinting above the GPS antenna
When only three or less satellite signals can be
received (Four satellite signals are required for
accurate positioning).
When the satellite control centers are experiencing
problems.
When driving near high tension power lines.
When the satellite signals are blocked by the
operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited, to non-OEM .in-dash
entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers,
radar detectors, and theft recovery systems), and cell
phones placed near the navigation system.
Muting Logic
Whenever the navigation system is giving guidance,
only the front speakers are muted. When the voice
control system is being used, all of the speakers are
muted. If the HandsFreeLink is in use, the voice control
system is unavailable to the navigation System.
LCD Display Unit Limitations
NOTE: The screen is not touch sensitive. Use the
interface dial and buttons to select items on the screen.
In cold temperatures, the display may stay dark for
the first 2 or 3 minutes until it warms up.
When the display is too hot because of direct summer
sunlight, it will remain dark until the temperature
drops (you may see an error message displayed
stating this fact).
When the humidity is high and the interior
temperature is low, the display may appear cloudy.
The display will clear up after some use.
Fingerprints on the screen may sometimes be
noticeable because ofthe panel's low-reflection
coating. Clean the screen with a soft, damp cloth. You
may use a mild cleaner intended for eye glasses or
computer screens.
Symptom Duplication
When the symptom can be duplicated, verify that it is
not a characteristic of the system. Review the
navigation manual and compare it to a known-good
vehicle (with the same software and database), under
the same conditions. If the symptom is not the same
as the known-good vehicle, follow the self-diagnostic
procedures and the appropriate troubleshooting
procedures.
When the symptom does not reappear or only
reappears intermittently, ask the client about the
conditions when the symptom occured.
- Always ask the client to demonstrate the problem.
- Try to establish possible. user error or
misunderstanding of the system.
- Try to establish if outside interference may have
been the cause.
- Try to duplicate the symptom under the same
conditions the client experienced.
- Vibration, temperature extremes, and moisture
(dew, humidity) are factors that are difficult to
duplicate.
-Inspect the vehicle for after-market electronic
devices (vehicle locators, amps, radar detectors,
etc) that may be hidden.
Service Precautions
If the navigaition unit needs to be replaced, you can
back-up the navigation data and transfer it to a new
navigation unit. See save users memory (see page
23-174).
Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you
have the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
navigation system. Audio remembers presets even if
the battery is disconnected. Also obtain any PGM-FI
or transmission DTCs and freeze frame data (which
will be lost when the PCM loses power).
When the battery is disconnected, the internal GPS.
clock is reset to "0:00". The clock will reset to the
correct time after the system finishes GPS
initialization.
After reconnecting the battery, you have to wait to get
the initial signal from the satellite. It will take from 10
to 45 minutes.
Verify map matching.
Before returning the vehicle, enter the audio and
navigation anti-theft security code. The audio system
remembers the audio presets, even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjust the time zone and daylight savings in the
setup clock settings found inthe navigation system.
(cont'd)
23-101
BACK
Navigation System
System Initialization
If for any reason, you lose power to the navigation
system (like the battery was disconnected), the
navigation system requires initialization. Once
completed, your system is ready to use.
This initialization requires the following:
Entering the 4-digit anti-theft security code to
"unlock" the system
GPS initialization (may not be needed depending of
the length of time the system was without power)
Map matching to align theGPS to a location on the
map
Entering Security Code
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded
theft protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-
theft security codes number before;
Disconnecting the battery
Disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector
Removing the No.7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit,
and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Enter the 4-digit
navigation security code, then select "Done".
Enter the 5-digit audio anti-theft security code.
When replacing the navigation unit or audio unit, be
sure to give the client the new anti-theft security codes.
GPS initialization
NOTE: You must park the vehicle outside with a clear
view ofthesouthern sky.
Depending on the length of time the battery was
disconnected, your system may require GPS
initialization. If it does, the following screen appears:
***Wait***
The system is acquiring its GPS signal.
23-102
This could take up to 10 minutes .
Engine must be running
Vehicle must be parked outside,
away from buildings
Do not move the vehicle at this time
Ifthis procedure is not necessary, the system proceeds
directly to the Disclaimer screen. During initialization,
the system searches for all available GPS satellites, and
obtains their orbital information. During this procedure,
park the vehicle out in the open with a clear view of the
sky.
If the navigation system finds the satellites properly,
this box clears, and changes to the Disclaimer screen. If
within 10 minutes the system fails to locate a sufficient
number of satellites to locate your position, the
following screen appears.
Navigation system is unable acquire a
proper GPS signal.
Move vehicle to another location
Turn the ignition switch off
Disconnect the battery for 30
minutes to clear the GPS receiver's
memory
Reconnect the battery and follow
the screen prompts
If this is displayed, turn off the engine, then restart the
vehicle and move it to a different location. If you now
see the Disclaimer screen, the GPS initialization is
complete.
NOTE:
The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes,
but it can take as long as 45 minutes .
If the system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow
the instructions on the screen. Ifthis screen appears
again, go to troubleshooting for the GPS icon is white
or not shown (see page 23-141).
BACK
Map Matching
This part of the initialization matches the GPS
coordinates with a road on the map screen. To perform
this part of the procedure, ensure that the navigation
system is displaying a map. Check the "GPS" icon in
the upper left corner ofthe screen, it should be "Green"
when the vehicle is parked outside, with the correct
color labeled DVD installed in the navigation unit. Drive
the vehicle on a mapped road shown on the map screen.
Do not enter a destination at this time. When the name
of the current road you are driving on, appears at the
bottom of the screen, the entire procedure is complete.
Your system is now ready to use.
Obtaining A Navigation DVD
If the navigation DVD is lost or damaged, or you need a
yearly updated DVD, you have two ways to purchase
one. You can either call (888) 549-3798, or order on-line
at www.acura.com "ORDER NAVIGATION DVD" link.
Both methods require a credit card. The DVD for this
model has a white label, and cannot be ordered through
the parts system. The following DVDs will not work in
this navigation system:
Earlier model navigation DVDs (black or orange label)
Map software programs manufactured by other
companies
DVD movies, or DVDs containing audio recordings
Update DVDs are available for purchase usually in the
fall of each year. They may contain the following:
Enhanced maps and points of interest (POI) coverage
Fixes for minor software bugs
Additional features
NOTE:
Updating is optional, and there is no program to
provide free DVDs containing yearly mapping
updates.
Map matching must be done any time the DVD is
removed or replaced.
23-103
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation system stays on the GPS System Initialization (see page 23-102) Navigation unit
initialization screen GPS antenna/cable is
disconnected or
damaged
Harness/fuses/switches
Vehicle position icon constantly Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-136) Navigation unit
leaves road, moves erratically, or is GPS antenna/cable
very far from actual position PCM (speed and fuel
pulses)
System always comes up in in-line Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-157)
diagnostic mode
Navigation system will not accept Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-147) Wrong color DVD
security code
Navigation frequently asks for Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-151) Loss of voltage or poor
anti-theft code and needs GPS ground (G605)
initialization Navigation unit
Low battery voltage
GPS icon is white or not shown Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-141) Navigation unit
Aftermarket accessories
connected to the system
GPS antenna/cable
Vehicle icon wanders across the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-146) Navigation unit
map when driving (does not follow a GPS antenna/cable
displayed road) or map or vehicle PCM (speed signal)
ICON sQins
No picture is displayed Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-134) Navigation unit
Display unit
Picture has lines/rolls/other issues Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-138) Navigation unit
or is an odd color Aftermarket accessories
Display unit
Picture is missing a color or tone or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-137) Navigation unit
is an odd color Wrong color DVD
installed
Display unit
Aftermarket accessories
Traffic information is not being Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-152) Client account status
shown on map screen Area outage
Area not covered
Traffic icons are turned
OFF
AcuraLink (XM receiver)
Navigation unit
No real time traffic on the display Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-155)
screen
23-104
BACK
Symptom Djagnostic procedure
Display day/night mode does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-145)
work
System locks up or freezes Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-146)
constantly
Voice guidance cannot be heard, is Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-141)
broken up, or there is static
Voice control does not work! Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-143)
respond
Navigation cannot control AlC by Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-145)
voice
Navigation cannot control XM radio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-151)
Navigation cannot control audio/ Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-148)
disc/rear entertainment
,.
Interface dial buttons do not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-139)
Today's Destinations button is dim The client has not entered a group of
and not selectable in the Enter locations for Today's Destinations. This is
destination by screen (grayed-out) normal. The button is only selectable if the
client is using this function.
Some set-up and information
functions of the navigation system
are grayed-out and do not work
Previous Destinations button is dim The vehicle may be new, or the client deleted
and not selectable in the Enter the destination. Enter a destination, and
destination by screen (grayed-out) allow the system to route to it. After the trip,
the Previous Destinations button will be
selectable.
Address cannot be found or system Verify proper operation and system
gives poor routi ng limitations using the owner's manual

Also check for
Display brightness set to
"High"
Display unit
(CAN)
Navigation unit,
Wrong color DVD
installed
Damage DVD
Volume or voice
feedback setting (see
Owner's manual)
Navigation unit
Audio unit/amplifier
Navigation unit
microphone harness/
switches HandsFreeLink
control unit
Wrong color DVD
installed
Wrong navigation unit
(model code)
Wrong color DVD
Navigation unit
Display unit
Interface dial
See Owner's Manual
Client did not select "OK"
from Disclaimer screen.
Refer to System Function
Diagram (see page 23-118).
Database limitations
(address not in database)
Wrong color DVD
installed
(cont'd)
23-105
BACK
Navigation System
Symptom Diagnostic ID'ocedure Also check for
Rearview camera does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-149) Software for the latest
or work properly updates
No backup signal
Wrong disc installed in
navigation unit
Harness
The map will not display the North American coverage is different for See Owner's Manual
Southern portion ofthe U.S. or the USA/Canada markets. See the "Version"
Northern parts of Canada Diagnostic Screen (see page 23-172) for
details on coverage differences.
Navigation stays on with ignition Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-148) Harness/fuses/switches
switch off Aftermarket accessories
DVD screen error messages Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-144) Navigation unit
Wrong color DVD
installed
Display unit
Damaged DVD
Navigation system will not go Wrong color DVD
beyond the disclaimer screen and installed
displays the OK button Scratched or damaged
DVD
Navigation unit
The navigation code card See anti-theft feature (see page 23-100)
is lost or missing
The vehicle icon lags behind when See self-inertial navigation limitations Aftermarket accessories
the vehicle turns (see page 23-100) connected to the system
GPS anttenna/cable
Navigation screen is darker than See LCD unit limitations (see page 23-101)
normal or takes timeto start up
when it is cold
The navigation clock is off by 1 to 3 See service precautions (see page 23-101) Perform map matching
hours after replacing the navigation (see page 23-103)
unit GPS antenna/cable
Check and adjust the
clock settings
A new navigation DVD is needed See obtaining a navigation DVD (see page
23-103)

BACK
System Description
Overview
The navigation system is a highly-sophisticated, hybrid locating system that uses satellites and a map database to
show you where you are and to help guide you to a desired destination.
The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), a network of 24 satellites in orbit
around the earth. By receiving signals from several of these satellites, the navigation system can determine the
latitude, longitude, and elevation of the vehicle. In addition, signals from the system's yaw rate sensor and the PCM
(vehicle speed pulse) enable the system to keep track of the vehicle's direction and speed of travel.
This hybrid system has advantages over a system that is either entirely self-contained or one that relies totally on the
GPS. For example, the self-contained portion of the system can keep track of vehicle position even when satellite
signals cannot be received. When the navigation system is on, the GPS can keep track of the vehicle position even
when the vehicle is transported by ferry.
The navigation system applies all location, direction, and speed information to maps and calculates a route to the
destination entered. As you drive to that destination, the system provides both visual and audio guidance.
This navigation system also has voice recognition that allows voice control of most of the navigation functions. The
Navigation TALK and BACK buttons on the steering wheel activate the voice control. The voice control also allows
control ofthe audio and climate functions.
The illumination signal (headlights ON) is used by the navigation unit to automatically switch the display between
"Night" and "Day" brightness modes. When the instrument panel brightness control is set to full brightness (hold
both "+" and "-" key at the same time), the navigation system stays in the day mode, even with the headlights on.
The GA-NET II communication bus passes information back and forth between the display panel control unit, the
navigaition unit and the RES/audio system. The information passed on this bus is audio climate control settings
directed by the navigaition unit.
The "Comm. Bus" connects the HFL, XM (HIP) (AcuraLink), and navigation units. This bus supports these functions:
The navigation control unit receives traffic and AcuraLink message information from the AcuraLink Control unit.
The navigation control unit sends a POI phone number (on the "Calculate route to" screen) to the HandsFreeLink
control unit for dialing.
If vehicle problems are detected, and the client's cellular contract includes data service, then the AcuraLink control
unit can send vehicle data to the HFL unit for transmitting back to the AcuraLink servers.
The AcuraLink server can pass additional problem details back through the AcuraLink Control unit, to the navigation
unit for display.
(cont'd)
23-107
BACK
N'avlgation System
System Diagram
COLOR
SIGNAL
VIDEO
AUDIO
GANET
BUS
AUDIO UNIT
HR.
VOICE
& MUTE
XM/HIP
AUDIO,
VOICE
AND
MUTE
GANET
BUS
NAVI "
VOICE
NAVIGATION UNIT
L.1__
23-108
APPROVED
BLUETOOTH
ENABLED
CELL PHONE .
HANDSFREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT
MICSIGNAL
, --1---------,
XMRECEIVER
IACURAUNK
CONTROLUNm
NAVI MIC SIGNAL
BACK
Navigation Function

The navigation system is composed of the navigation unit, the PCM (vehicle speed signal), the GPS antenna, the
microphone, the voice control switch, the audio unit, the display unit, and the interface dial.
Function Diagram
GPSANmINA
NAVIGATION UNIT
NAViVOICE
CONlROl.SWlTCH MICROPHONE AUOIOUNIT
Audio
guide ...
.. - .. -. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. -. _.. .._ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..
GPS RECEIVER
Oetectlonol
vehldepositlon
YAWRATESENSOR
Oetectlonol
directionchenge
VOICE
PROMPTS
Guide
processing
1.._ .. _ .. _ .. - .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. - .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..
GA-Net Bus Configration
NAVIGATION
DISPlAY UNIT
: .. _ .. ,
I
i
i
i
I
i
i
LCD
L .. _ .. ...i
The GA-Net bus passes audio and navigation commands throughout the navigation and RES/audio components.
These commands include navigation audio/XM selections by voice, and XM station and music title names. Because
the entire bus is interconnected between components, an open or short in the GA-Net bus harness may cause any or
all of these functions to become inoperative.
Rear Controller
end Screen IRESI
Aud"JOUnit
N.vigationUnR
Navigation
Display Unit
XMReceiver
IAcureUnk Control UnRI
(cont'd)
23,109
BACK
Na"igation System
Vehicle Speed Pulse
The vehicle speed pulse is sent by the PCM. The PCM receives a signal from the countershaft speed sensor, then
processes the signal and transmits it to the speedometer and other systems.
PCM
23-110
NAVIGATION UNIT
DISTANCE
DETECTION
CIRCUIT
BACK
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor
The yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor (located in the navigation unit) detects the direction change (angular speed) of
the vehicle. The sensor is an oscillation gyro built into the navigation unit.
Sensor Element Structure
The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block, and the
support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: one to drive the oscillators, one to monitor and maintain the oscillation
at a regular frequency, and two to detect angular velocity. The two oscillators, which have a SO-degree twist in the
center, are connected at the bottom by the metal block and supported by the support pin. A detection piezoelectric part
is attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of one oscillator, and
the monitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles
The piezoelectric parts have "electric/mechanical transfer characteristics. " They bend vertically when voltage is
applied to both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectric parts when they are
bent by an external force. The oscillation gyro functions by utilizing this characteristic of the piezoelectric parts and
"Coriolis force. " (Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the earth's rotation.) In the oscillation gyro, this
force moves the sensor element when angular velocity is applied.
Operation
1. The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an AC voltage of
6 kHz is applied to the part. The monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is connected to the driving-side
oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric part bends in proportion to the oscillation and outputs voltage (the monitor signal).
The navigation unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left with the oscillators, but no
signal is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right oscillator
bending forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward bend varies according
to the angular velocity of the vehicle.
5. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the yaw rate signal) according to the amount of bend. The
amount of vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Enlarged view of sensor element
SUPPORT PIN
DETECTING PIEZOELECTRIC
PARTS
OSCILLATORS
Sensor element top view
right

Coriolis force
_.+. . .-;+_.---$._. _._._. .. ---.. Oscillation

METAL BLOCK
Bend
MONITORING PIEZOELECTRIC
PART
(cont'd)
23-111
BACK
Navigation System
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The global positioning system (GPS) enables the navigation system to determine the current position of the vehicle by
using the signals transmitted from the satellites in orbit around the earth. The satellites transmit the satellite
identification signal, orbit information, transmission time signal, and other information. When the GPS receiver
receives a signal from four or more satellites simultaneously, it calculates the current position of the vehicle based on
the distance to each satellite and the satellite's position in its respective orbit.
Position detection Image with GPS satellite
9tD
~
~
~
~
~
. ~ ~
~
NOTE: Four satellites on each of 6 orbits.
Precision of GPS
~
~ ~
4
, ~
,
"
,

~

.
I

The precision of the GPS varies according to the number of satellites from which signals are received and the view of
the sky. The precision is indicated by the color and shape of the GPS icon shown on the display .
..
GPSICON NUMBER OF CONDITION DESCRIPTION
SATELLITES
No GPS icon 2 or less Impossible to detect vehicle GPS function is normal. The satellite
shown position signals received by the GPS are too few to
detect the vehicle position.
Square GPS icon 3 Vehicle position detectable in The longitude and latitude of the vehicle
shown with 2 dimensions (longitude and position can be detected. (Less precise
white "GPS" latitude) than detection in three dimensions)
Cube GPS icon 4 or more Vehicle position detectable in The longitude, latitude and the altitude of
shown with 3 dimensions (longitude, the vehicle position can be detected. (More
Qreen "GPS" latitude and elevation) precise than detection in two dimensions)
GPS Antenna and clock
The GPS antenna amplifies and transmits the signals received from the satellites to the GPS receiver.
GPS Receiver
The GPS receiver is built into the navigation unit. It calculates the vehicle position by receiving the signal from the GPS
antenna. The current time vehicle position and signal reception condition are transmitted from the GPS receiver to the
navigation control unit to adjust the vehicle position and clock.
23-112
BACK
Navigation Unit
..

The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position and guides you to the destination. The unit performs map matching
correction, GPS correction, and distance tuning. It also controls the menu functions and the DVD-ROM drive, and
interprets voice commands. With control of all these items, the navigation unit makes the navigation picture signal,
then it transmits the signal to the display panel control unit and audio driving instructions to the audio unit.
Calculation of Vehicle Position
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position (the driving direction and the current position) by receiving the
directional change signals from the yaw rate sensor and the travel distance signals from vehicle speed pulse (VSP)
signal of the PCM.
Map Matching Tuning
The map matching occurs when you drive the vehicle along a mapped road until the road name appears of the bottom
of the screen. The map data transmitted from the DVD-ROM is checked against the vehicle position data, and the
vehicle position is indicated on the nearest road. Map matching tuning does not occur when the vehicle travels on a
road not shown on the map, or when the vehicle position is far away from a road on the map.
GPSTuning
The GPS tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position as the GPS's vehicle position. The navigation unit
compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. Ifthere is large difference between
the two, the indicated vehicle position is adjusted to the GPS vehicle position.
Distance Tuning
The distance tuning reduces the difference between the travel distance signal from the VSP and the distance data on
the map. The navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. The
navigation unit then decreases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always ahead of the GPS vehicle position,
and it increases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always behind the GPS vehicle position.
Route Guidance
The navigation unit can calculate different routes to a selected destination. You have five options:
Direct Route-Calculate a route that is the most direct.
Easy Route-Calculate a route that minimizes the number of turns needed.
Minimize Freeways-Calculate a route that avoids freeway travel. If that is not possible, keep the amount of freeway
travel to a minimum.
Minimize Toll Roads-Calculate a route that avoids or minimizes travel on toll roads.
Maximize Freeways-Calculate a route that uses freeways as much as possible.
Audio Guidance
The navigation unit transmits audio driving instructions before entering an intersection or passing a junction. The
audio instructions come through the audio unit to the center speaker.
NOTE: The front speakers are muted whenever the navigation system is giving guidance commands, and all of the
speakers are muted when the voice control system is being used.
Solar Angle
The climate control unit uses the sun's angle, along with the sunlight sensor, to control the driver/passenger AlC air
flow.
Off Road Tracking (breadcrumbsl
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a mapped (digitized) road.
Clock and Time Zone
The clock set up allows you to set daylight savings time, auto time zone and time adjustment.
(cont'd)
23-113
BACK
Navigation System
Muting Signal Logic
The audio muting logic is orchestrated by the audio unit. The audio unit determines what audio source has priority to
use the speakers.
The priority of the audio sources is as follows:
HandsFreeLink has the highest priority, followed by, AcuraLink, navigation, and finally the radio/CD-DVD player. The
priority is passed by HandsFreeLink and AcuraLink to the audio unit by dedicated mute wires. The navigation mute
signal is passed to the stereo amplifier.
The navigation unit temporarily disables the voice control buttons, but allows guidance to be heard. In addition, the
audio unit suppresses the output from the audio unit, XM receiver, disc player, or other audio accessories.
When the navigation system sends out a voice route guidance command, the door speakers are muted, and the
navigation voice is heard in the center speaker.
When the navigation voice control system is in use, all of the speakers are muted, and the navigation voice prompts
are heard from the center speaker.
DVD-ROM
The DVD includes:
Map Data
Point of interest (POI)
Navigation software
Audio Unit
The audio unit receives the voice guidance instructions from the navigation unit, and transmits the instructions
through the center speaker even when the audio system is in use.
NOTE: Ifthe navigation volume is turned OFF, this feature is disabled.
Display Unit
The display unit uses a liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is a 8-inch-diagonal, thin film transistor (TFT), stripe type
with 336,960 picture elements. The colorfilm and fluorescent light are laid out on the back ofthe liquid crystal film.
DISPLAY UNIT
23-114
BACK
Microphone (Mic)
Receives voice commands and transmits them to the navigation unit or HandsFreeLink unit for interpretation.
Both system share the same microphone.
TALK Button
Activates the voice control system in the navigation unit to accept voice commands.
BACK Button
Returns the display to the previous screen (similar function as the CANCEL button).
HFL BACK BUTTON
_
L ~ r NAVIGATIONNOICE CONTROL
TALK BUTTON
NAVIGATIONNOICE CONTROL
BACK. BUTTON
(cont'd)
23-115
BACK
Navi,gation System
Glossary
Th f II e 0 oWing IS a glossary 0 terms pertaining to t e olce' ecognltlon f h V R aVlllatlon )Vstem.
N .
S
Item Definition
AcuraLink This device receives information from the XM satellites and passes XM audio information to the
audio unit. In addition, traffic information is sent to the navigation unit.
B-CAN Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
Breadcrumbs Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a mapped
(White dots) (digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off in Setup screen 1.
CAN Controller Area Network. This communication network allows processors in the vehicle to send/
receive information. The fuel pulses used by the MID trip computer are received from the PCM
using the F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) bus.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The main device within the navigation unit that coordinates the rest of
the electronic functions.
CSS Countershaft (Output) Speed Sensor. This sensor reads the output shaft speed at the
transmission and provides a speed pulse to the PCM.
Database This consists ofthe Map data, and the POI (Points Of Interest) data stored on the DVD.
DBW Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the throttle without the need of a mechanicallinkalle.
DCA Detailed Coverage Area. Main metropolitan areas in the Lower 48 states, and Canada are
mapped to this level. See the, navillation system manual for a list of these areas.
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the PGM Tester, or HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot the
cause of these codes.
Dead The use of the speed signal, and yaw rate sensor to position the vehicle on the map even when
reckoning tall buildings, or driving in a tunnel obscures the GPS signal
Digitized road A road that appears on the navigation screen. The road name will appear at the bottom of the
navigation screen. If the user drives "off road" the navigation system will display "Not on a
digitized road", and after 1/2 mile, the "breadcrumbs" will appear.
Disclaimer Screen containing cautionary information. It is meant to be read carefully, and acknowledged by
screen the customer when using the navigation system.
DVDor Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program and database resides on this disk. See the
DVD-ROM Navigation Owner's Manual for information on how to order a replacement or an update DVD.
ECM Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as the ECM.
FAQ Frequency Asked Questions. See the navigation system manual for a list of the customer FAQs,
and troubleshooting information.
F-CAN Fast CAN Bus (see CAN)
GPS Global Positioning System. A network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. The navigation
system can simultaneously receive signals from up to 12 satellites to accurately position the
vehicle on the map.
HDS Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC used for diagnosing vehicle problems. This
device can be used to obtain DTC codes for diagnosis of the navigation system and CAN related
problems.
HFL HandsFreeLink uses Bluetooth technology as a wireless link between it and an approved
Bluetooth compatible cell phone. See the vehicle Owner's manual or Quick Start Guide for more
information.
HIP Honda Information Platform (see AcuraLink)
(AcuraLink)
H/U Head Unit. The audio unit in the dash.
Initialization This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the GPS satellite orbital information whenever the
navigation system power has been disconnected. This can take from 10 to 45 minutes.
Interface Dial This control device consists of a rotating knob and the buttons surrounding it. This device allows
control of the navigation, audio, and climate functions displayed on the screen.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
Map matching The received GPS information allows the navigation system to position the vehicle on the map.
Map matching has occurred ifthe map screen is displaying the current street name in the
bottom-shaded area.
23-116
BACK
Item Definition
Mic Abbreviation for the microphone used for receiving voice commands. It is located near the map
light in the ceiling.
.
MID Display
MW Maneuver Window. While on-route to a destination, this window displays information about the
next maneuver.
Navi Abbreviation for the Navigation System.
Off-road See "Breadcrumbs"
tracking
Off route This occurs when the user leaves mapped. Off road tracking dots (breadcrumbs) are
displayed if the option is enabled in the setup menu. The user can use them to return to a
mapped road. The bottom ofthe navigation screen will say "Not on a digitized road"
Outlying areas These are rural areas that typically have only their main roads mapped. All other roads are
shown in light brown for reference only, since they have not been verified.
Paired Linking your cell phone to the HFL
PC card slot The PC Card (PCMCIA, type II) slot is for factory use only. Make sure that the sliding door is
closed at all times, if an error message is displayed on the screen.
PCM PowertrainControl Module. This unit supplies the navigation system speed signal, Also refered
to as PCM.
PCMCIA A computer industry defined term referring to the PC Card slot standard.
PIN Personal Identification Number, a random 4 digit number created by the customer to protect
personal information.
POI Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools, etc. found under the "places" option on the
main menu.
Polygon Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks, schools, etc. See the Navigation System
Manual "Driving to Your Destination" for a list of the assigned colors.
QWERTY Keyboard layout resembling the typewriter keys. The keyboard layout can be changed to an
alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
SCS connector The "service check signal" 2-pin connector used to put the navigation system into the diagnostic
mode.
Security code Code needed to activate the navigation system. You can get the security code from the "iN" by
entering the navigation unit serial number. You can find the serial number on the diagnostic
screens (unit check, Navi ECU),or on the underside of the navigation unit.
Tuning A continual update of internal navigation system scaling factors. See the individual sensor
tuning discussions under either "System Description", or "System Diagnosis Mode" (see page
23-157) in this manual.
Unverified These streets have not been verified for turn restrictions, one-way, etc. They are shown in light
streets brown on the map. You can enter address destinations in these areas, but depending on your
"Unverified Routing" choice in setup, voice guidance may end at the last verified street closest
to your destination.
Verified These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan coverage areas, and all other inter-town
streets connection roads. These roads are shown in black or red on the map. (interstates are red)
VP Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular icon shows the vehicle position on the map.
VR Voice Recognition. This allows voice control of many of the navigation functions. The hardware
consists ofthe microphone, voice control switch (TALK/BACK buttons), and the center speaker.
See the overview for more information.
VSP Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming from the PCM (via the CSS) is used to update the
Vehicle position on the map. These pulses do not indicate direction (forward or backward). When
in reverse, the navigation receives a signal and directs the VP to move backwards on the map.
XM This device receives information from the XM satellites and passes XM audio information to the
audio unit. In addition, traffic information is sent to the navigation unit.
Yaw sensor This device is located in the navigation system control unit and senses the side-to-side twisting
force generated when the vehicle turns. See a detailed description of how this sensor works in
this manual.
(cont'd)
23-117
BACK
Navigation System
System Function Diagram
This diagram shows the features of the navigation system starting at the center and working outward in layers. The
navigation program starts at "Key ON", and then displays the globe screen. Once the disclaimer screen is
acknowledged, the next shaded portions ofthe diagram become active. However, some functions of the INFO and SET
UP buttons, and all functionsofthe AUDIO and Ale buttons can be accessed immediately after the globe screen
(white).
The items above the map screen show various ways to set a destination, such as "Go Home." Once you begin driving
to your destination, you are provided with map/voice guidance, routing cautions (in unverified areas), and a directions
list. While driving to your destination, use the voice control system as much as possible to interact with the navigation,
audio, and climate control systems.
23-118
D
D
D
Functions accessible at any time
Disclaimer screen
Map screen/Voice commands to enter a destination
Driving to your destination
Voice commands while driving to your destination
Globe screen
BACK
Diagnostic System Diagram
This diagram represents the diagnostic "slice" in the Navigation Functional diagram. The diagram shows an overview
ofthe navigation diagnostic features starting at the center and working outward in layers. The diagram starts with
"Key on". The diagram shows two ways to getto the diagnostic main menu:
By starting the vehicle with the SCS connector plugged in, you will enter the diagnostic "System Links" screen.
select "Return" to get to the main diagnostic menu .
From any of the navigation Map or Menu screens, press and simultaneously hold the keys Menu + Map + Cancel.
The diagram shows the available diagnostic menu choices, starting at the bottom left, and moving clockwise. In most
cases, do not clear or change settings in any diagnostic screen unless instructed to do so in the explanation, or by the
factory.
If the factory asks you to insert a PCMCIA memory card into the "PC Slot," then the features specified on the diagram
as "(Card)" are available.
@
EY
ON
(cont'd)
23-119
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (20P)
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom
Number
1 WHT RSIG Red color signal 0-1V If open: Red color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Red signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see "RGB
Color" diaanostic).
2 RED GSIG Green color signal 0-1V If open: Green color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Green signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see "RGB
Color" diaanostic).
3 BLK SHSIG Shield for terminal OV If open: No change to display.
(Shield sianal) No.1 2 11 12 13 If short to around: No chanae to display.
4 VEL AlC-SI Communication -- If open: HVAC cannot be controlled by the
(Air conditioner signal for climate navigation system. If short to ground: HVAC cannot
serial in) control unit be controlled by the naviaation sYstem.
5 VEL ILL(+) Parking light on Lights on: If open: When brightness="Auto," night mode for
(Illumination signal battery voltage, the display is inoperative when lights on.
positive) Lights off: 0 V If short to ground: daytime mode regardless of the
condition of a light switch.
9 BLK GANETBUSSH Shield for display OV If open: No change to display.
(GA-NETbus bus terminal If short to ground: No change to display.
shield) No. 10 20
10 GRN GANETBUS+ Date bus 1+) 0-5V pulses If open: Navigation buttons do not work.
(GA-NETbus GA-Net average 2.5 V If short to ground: Navigation buttons do not work.
positive) depends on bus
traffic
23-120
BACK
Number
11 YEl BSIG Blue color signal 0-1VAC If open: Blue color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Blue signa/) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
12 GRN CSIG Composite video 0.3VAC If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors still visible.
(Composite (verticaVhorizonta/) If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
signa/) Synchronizing still visible.
signal
13 BlK GNDSIG Ground for color OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground signal) signal If short to ground: No change to displav.
14 RED NC-SO Communication -- If open: HVAC cannot be controlled by the
(Air conditioner signal for climate navigation system.
serial out) control unit If short to ground: HVAC cannot be controlled by
the naviaation svstem.
15 BlU NC-ClK Check signal for -- If open: HVAC cannot be controlled by the
(Air conditioner climate control unit navigation system.
clock) If short to ground: HVAC cannot be controlled by
the navigation sYstem.
17 WHT JOG BUS Interface dial
.-
0-5Vpulses If open: You cannot operate navigation system
(Jog bus) operation signal If short to ground: You cannot operate navigation
system
19 BlK JOGSH Shield for interface -- ----
. (Jog shield) dial signal
20 RED DISP BUS (-) Date bus (-) 0-5Vpulses If open: Navigation buttons do not work.
(Display bus GA-Net nominally 2.5 V If short to ground: Hard buttons work OK.
neaative)
(cont'd)
23-121
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (14P)

Number
,
5 PUR RGLH) Left audio signal of Audio signal If open: If voice activated, radio speakers buzz; if
(Route guidance voice guidance, 0.004-0.04 V voice off, no effect.
voice left and Voice If short to ground: If voice activated, radio speakers
positive) Recognition (VR) buzz; if voice off, no effect.
prompts
6 PUR HFLMICOUT+ Microphone output 4 5V(TALK If open: microphone signal shown as red in
(HFL mic signal signal positive button pressed) diagnostic screens: "Navi System Link" and
positive) Functional Setup "Mic Level."
If short to ground: microphone signal shown as red
in diagnostic screens: "Navi System Link" and
Functional Setup "Mic Level."
10 PUR NAVI REMOTE Steering switch 4-5 V (TALK If open: Steering wheel TALK and BACK buttons do
SW output button pressed) not work.
(Navigation 2.5-3 V (BACK Ifshortto ground: Steering wheel TALK, and BACK
remote button pressed) buttons do not work.
switches)
11 BLK RGSH Shield for terminal OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Route guidance No.5,12 If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
shield)
12 LTBLU RGGND Ground for voice OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Route guidance guidance, and If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
ground) Voice Recognition
(VR) prompts
13 BLK HFL MIC OUT SH Shield for terminal OV If open: No effect on voice control.
(HFL mic signal No.6,14 If short to ground: No effect on voice control.
shield)
14 LTBLU HFLMICOUT- Ground for OV If open: microphone signal shown as red in
(HFL mic signal microphone signal diagnostics: "Navi System Link" and Functional
negative) Setup "Mic Level."
If short to around: No effect on voice recoanition.
23-122
BACK
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C(8P)
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name
Number
1 WHT +B
(+BPower
source)
2 PUR ACC
..
(Accessory)
4 BlK, GND
(Ground)
(G605)
5 BRN BACKlT
(Back light or
reverse signal)
6 BlU VSP
(Vehicle speed
pulse)
7 GRY DIAG+
(Diagnostic
positive)
a VEL DIAG-
(Diagnostic
neaative)

tillIillJ
Description .Voltage (about)
Continuous power Bilttery voltage
source
Power source for Battery voltage
accessories atACC (I)
Ground for OV
navigation unit
Reverse signal of In reverse,
select lever from battery voltage:
"Multiplex Otherwise 0 V
Integrated Control
Unit" (A/TI or
backup light switch
(MfT)
Vehicle speed Pulses 0 5V:
pulse signal from Average 2.5 V,
PCM when moving
Service check 5 6V
signal for
navigation system
Ground for service OV
check signal
Symptom
If open: Display picture goes out (display back.Jight
still on).
NOTE: System will reboot to "enter code" screen.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No.5 (10A) in the
under-dash fuse/relav box.
If open: Display picture goes out (display back light
still on).
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 32 (10 A) in the
If open: No effect on system.
If short to ground: No effect on system.
If open: Navigation never sees reverse.
Diagnostic screen "Car Status," "Back"=O.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 21 (7.5 AI in the
driver's .under-dash fuse/relay box.
If open: No vehicle speed pulses.
Diagnostic screen "Car Status," VSP Navi=O.
If short to ground: No vehicle speed pulses.
Diagnostic screen "Car Status" VSP Navi=O.
If open: No effect on system.
If short to ground: System goes into diagnostic
mode at kev ON (I) and (II).
If open: The system will not go into diagnostic
mode when using the SCS jumper.
If short to around: No effect on system.
(cont'd)
23-123
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector D (7P)
Terminal Wire Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom
Number Color
01 WHT CAMERAVCC Power source for 7V If open: No rearview camera image.
(VCC supply) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight still
operative).
05 BlK VIOEO Video signal for O.3V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video camera) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight still
operative).
06 BlK CAMERASH Shield for terminal OV If open: No rearview camera image.
(Shield and
" ,
No.1 to No.7 If short to ground: No change to rearview
ground for camera image.
camera)
07 REO CAMERAAOPT Control signal for OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Adaptive camera) rearview camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera imaae.
23-124
BACK
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector E (2P)
Number
1 -- GPS GPSsignal 5V If open: GPS icon on screen is white, system links
screen ANT shows "NG."
If short to body around: Same as ODen.
2 -- GNDGPS Ground for GPS OV If open: GPS icon on screen is white, system links
signal screen ANT shows "NG."
If short to body around: No effect on system.
(cont'd)
23-125
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector F (5P)
With AcuraLink
Number
1 WHT HFL COMM3 (HFL Communication -- Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
communication 3) signal for HFL
2 RED HFL COMM4 (HFL Communication -- Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
3 GRN HFL COMM1 (HFL Communication -- HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
communication 1) signal for HFL red and green
4 BLK HFL COMM2 (HFL Communication -- HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
5 BLK SH HFL (Shield Shield for terminal -- --
HFL) No.1 2 3 4
Without AcuraLink
Number
1 RED HFL COMM3 (HFL Communication -- Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
2 WHT HFL COMM4 (HFL Communication -- Solid red HFL icon in Navi System Link
3 GRN HFL COMM1 (HFL Communication -- HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
4 BLK HFL COMM2 (HFL Communication -- HFL icon in Navi System Link changes between
5 BRN SH HFL (Shield Shield for terminal
HFL) No.1 23 4
23-126
BACK
IIIJlIIlmI

Navigation Display Unit Inputs and Outputs for 20P Connector
Number
1 WHT +B Continuous power Battery voltage If open: Screen completely off (no backlight visible).
(+B power source Ifshortto ground: Blows fuse No.7 (10 A) in the
source) under-dash fuse/relay box.
2 PUR ACC Power source for Battery voltage If open: Display and buttons do not work.
(Accessory) accessory atACC (I) If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 32 (10 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relav box.
5 GRN GANETBUS+ Data bus (+) 0-5Vpulses If open: Navigation hard buttons do not work.
(GA-NETbus GA-Net average 2.5 V If short to ground: Navigation hard buttons XM/
positive) depends on bus AcuraLink and RES do not work.
traffic
6 RED SCTY(1) Security signal OV If open: If security system set, it will not trip when
(Security screen is removed.
positive) If short: If security system set, it will not trip when
screen is removed.
8 WHT RSIG Red color signal 0-1V If open: Red color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Red signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
9 RED GSIG Green color signal 0-1V If open: Green color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Green signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
10 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for display OV If open: No change to display.
unit If short to around: No chanae to disolav.
11 YEL ILL(+) Parking light on Lights on: If open: When brightness "Auto," night mode for
(Illumination signal from dash battery voltage, the display is inoperative when lights on.
positive) and console light Lights off: 0 V If short to ground: Blows small light relay in under-
hood fuselrelav box.
14 GRY GANETBUSSH Shield for display OV If open: No change to display.
(GA-NET bus bus terminal No.5, If short to ground: No change to display.
16)
15 RED GANETBUS- Date bus (-) 0-5 V pulses If open: Navigation hard buttons do not work.
(GA-NETbus GA-Net average 2.5 V If short to ground: Navigation hard buttons work OK.
negative) depends on bus
traffic
16 PNK' SCTY(3,4) Security signal OV If open: If security system set, it will not trip when
LTGRN' (Security screen is removed.
negative) If short: If security system set, it will not trip when
screen is removed.
17 BLK GNDSIG Ground for color OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground signal) signal If short to around: No chanae to disolav.
18 YEL BSIG Blue color signal 0-:-1 V If open: Blue color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Blue signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
19 GRN CSIG Composite video 0.3V If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors still visible.
(Composite (vertical/horizontal) If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
signal) synchronizing still visible.
sianal
20 GRY SIGSH Shield for terminal OV If open: No change to display.
shieldl No.8 9 17 18 19 If short to ground: No change to disolav .
1. With rear entertainment system
2: Without rear entertainment system
(conrd)
23-127
BACK
Navigation System
Rearview Camera Inputs and Outputs for 6P Connector
Number "
1 RED CAMERAADPT Control signal for OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Adaptive rearview camera If short to ground: No change to rearview camera
camera) image.
2 BlK CAMERASH Shield for terminal OV If open: No rearview camera image.
(Shield and No.5 If short to ground: No change to rearview camera
ground for image.
camera)
3 BlK CAMERA VIDEO Video signal for O.3V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video camera) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
navigation screen goes black (display backlight still
ooerative).
6 WHT CAMERAVCC Power source for 8V If open: No rearview camera image.
(VCC supply) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
navigation screen goes black (display backlight still
ooerative).
23-128
BACK
Circuit Diagram
Navigation display unit connector
20P CONNECTOR
o
20P CONNECTOR
Navigation unit connector
CONNECTOR D (7P) CONNECTOR F (5P)
CONNECTOR E (2P) /
I g DO oVOOOUNGFAN
_____ = D = [ \ J CJ, JJ
\ ~
CONNECTOR C (8P) CONNECTOR G (N/A) CONNECTOR B (14P)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
CONNECTOR D (7P)
11171&1516171
CONNECTOR B (14P) CONNECTOR C (8P)
ffiiliffi
"
1 2 4
5 6 7 8
CONNECTOR E (2P) CONNECTOR F (5P)
Q
INTERFACE DIAL
5P CONNECTOR
REARVIEW CAMERA
6P CONNECTOR
~
~
(cont'd)
23 .. 129
BACK
-Navigation System
With AcuraLink
MICU [:>--- BRN-----------------------------------
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
.. , [:>--- PUR--+-----------------PUR ---------------
! No.5 110 A} FUSE i [:>--- WHT-.....,.-f-----------------WHT---------------
L. FUSE .. j [:>--- WHT
GAUGE L-1++---------------------------------
CONTROL MODULE v-- YE
23-130
PUR
WHT
YEL
MICU C>------RED
I
REAR CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
r-
BLK
G506
II = -PNK
2
-
ACC
I
-
tB
11
-
ILLt
6
-
scm
10
-
GND
.. _ .. --'
I
16
I
-
SCTY3
:
I
L.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _
B
'I
I AUDIO UNIT
.. --'
II
r...;.A..;.4----LTGRNI6 SCTY4
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _
'2
R-SIGI
G-SIGI
B-SlGI
C-SIGI
SIGI-GND
SIGI-SH
GANETBUSt
GANETBUS-
GANETBUSSH
8
... --
.'
.'
WHT---------------------
9 '
'
,

,
18
,
,
RED----------------
YEL---------------

,
19
,

,

GRN----------------
.
17 ' '
"
BLK----------------
"
20 ....l-
-GRY
5 "'--
"
, ,
GRN-1-------.--------
15
,

, ,
"
RED .... -----+____1p_-----
14 .....::t-
-GRY
---- ----1--------- ---- ---1--------
r:: : .. -................. "! BRN r:: .. -.. -.. -.. - ........ BRN
: W W
: GRN RED : : GRN RED :
.
h

,
, ,
!l
,

,

'--
........ ---'Br '--
.. ......
---' Br
A7 A17. AI8 D9 010 03
GANET GANET GANET GANET GANET GANET
BUSt BUS- BUSSH BUSt BUS- BUSSH
XMRECEIVER
AUDIO
IACURAUNK
CONTROL UNIT}
UNIT
BACK
_____________ BRN-----=C5:.,.

__________________________ WHT _______

AI
--------------WHT-- ...

___________________________
__________________________
..
L BLK
A3
........ _ ...................... ':' ................................................ -, A10
GRN--;""'--":':':;:..,j

------------- RED --.;..
BlK A9
BACK

AMPUFIER
RGl+
RG
GND
RGSH
AlSI
CUMATE
CONTROL Al SO
UNIT
AlCK

PUR
10kQ
10
BRN
_____ :;.:" .... ._. '_'_":,.' ______ ..:B5::..j
A9 B12
I-------.!-.;.. IT BLU ..... :------...;.,;;;...
....::r ... "'f"'
BRN L..- BlK
A8 Bll
_____
_____
NAVIGATION UNIT
BACK IT DIAG+
Ace
+B
Illt
R-SIG1
G-SIGI
B-SIGI
C-SIGI
SIG1-
GND
SIG1-SH
GANET
BUSt
GANET
BUS-
GANET
BUSSH
RGl+
RGGND
RGSH
ACSI
ACSO
ACCK
DIAG-
GND
VSP
OUT
HFTMIC
OUT+
HFTMIC
OUT-
HFTMIC
OUTSH
NVRX+
NVRX-
NVTXt
NVTX-
NVSH
GPS
GNDGPS
CAMERA
vce
CAMERA
VIDEO
CAMERA
ADPT
CAMERA
SH
JOG
BUS
JOGSH
..

'I : rear entertainment system
C7 '2 : rear entertainment system
GRY NAVIGATION
C8 1 SERVICE
'--___ CHECK
r CONNECTOR
C4
1---- BlK ----;::====:::::;------,
1-
C6;.;..,..___ BlU _---:.:::...j PCM 1.
BlU------l

(VEHICLE
SPEED SIGNAll
G605
( .....

BlK--.... 1.
..... GRY ___ 1;:2-1
.' 13
PNK---..;,;,..j
'.
BLU ___ 1:.:,4-1
j-:.:.B6_,;...":,.:_" _ '_":,.' ....:;'lI-l
B14 : : IT BLU .: 28
.,r
BLK BRN
Fl {......... A3
WHT,-'I---l
1--
F3
F2
-: ....... : _
A4
- GRN --.;.. "';';';-1
I-
F_4_.r.-:-' _ A 14
BlK
.., ...... ,..
F5
BLK BRN A15
El
HANDSFREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT
MICIN
SH
MlClNt
MICIN-
HFTMIC
OUTt
HFTMIC
OUT-
HFTMIC
OUTSH
HFT
COMM
SH
HFT
COMM4
HFT
COMM3
HFT
COMM2
HFT
COMMI

(ACURAUNK)
CONTROL UNIT
NVRX+
NVRX-
NVTX+
NVTX-
NVSH
HFT
COMMI
HFT
COMM2
HFT
COMM3
HFT
COMM4
HFT
COMM
SH
24
23
22
,r.
.
.
BRN
: RED GRN
: WHT
'.
B6
BI6
B7
B15
B6
BRN
t-
E
-
2
-------- GPS
1----------------1 GNDGPS
GPS
ANTENNA
1-- 01_ .... <:,..:_ ..... -..I-....;...,j
D5 '.
07 :: BlK --.----1
-:'-- RED
.., ...... ,..
BLK GRY
A17
A19
G506
CAMERA
vce
CAMERA
VIDEO
CAMERA
ADPT
CAMERA
SH
JOG
BUS
JOGSH
Ace
GND
REARVIEW
CAMERA
INTERFACE
DIAL
'..,
.
.'
G601
(cant'd)
23-131
BACK
Navigation System
Without AcuraLink
MICU [:> BRN-------------....... -----------------
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
.. 1 [:>---PUR.....;.---+------------------PUR--------
! No.5 (10AI FUSE I [:>---WHT----+------------------WHT--------
L. FUSE .. J [:>---WHT
GAUGECONTROLMODULE [:>--- VEL-..... +-+---------------------------
23-132
MICU
[:>
I
REAR CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
1
G50&
PUR
WHT
VEL
RED
BU<
: I = --PNK
ACC
+B
11
ILL+
SCTY1
10
GND
'_001
16
SCTY3
1.._"_"_"_'0_"_"_"_"_"_"_
D
*1
-,,_,,_,,_0'_0'_"_"_,,-"- '-"1
! AUDIO UNIT . i
I I 'h A4 16:
I SCTY4 LTGRN SCTY4 I
1.._"_"_'0_"_"_,,_' ,,_"_'0_"_
*2
R-SIG1
G-SIG1
B-SIG1
C-SIG1
SIG1-GND
SlG1-SH
,oo_ .. ---- ___ .. _ .. _._ ........ ______ .. _ .. ___ _

, '
. '
RED--------
18

19
1--""''';''''- GRN--------
, ,
17 I.: ________ _
, "BLK
20 '9-------------------------------
BRN---J
,,--""" -- --_ ................ -_ .... -- -_ .. - ........ ..
GANETBUS+ 1-_.....;.:..:,.,_ GRN-..... ------
, ,
, ,
GANETBUS- 1--""""': ....... - RED -t-...... -----
GANET BUS SH 14 BRN -_-_-_-_- -----T---------
:"-- ----
:
: GRN RED :
, !l
'-- 00--
GANET GANET GANET
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
AUDIO
UNIT
BACK
C5
------------------------BR N
C2
--------------------- PU R
C1
--------------------mrr
AS
---------------------
L
---'\
Al
---------------------mrr
,
,
A2
---------------------RE 0

All
---------------------
L

A12

A13
-------------------- BLJ(

Al0

,
,
,
A20
--------------------- RED

VOICE CONTROL SWITCH
BACK
10kQ
680Q
2.2kQ
10
CABLEREE L
0- S I-- PUR
3
I
AUDIO
UNIT GND W
I
A21
,..---
RGLt
"

,
---I
B5
,
PUR
STEREO A9

RG

.
AMPLIRER
GND
'.
AS ....::t--
RGSH I-- BRN
.
B12 .
U

-L Bll
BRN-
LTBL
A2 A4
ALSI YEL
CUMATE A22 A14
CONTROL
ALSO RED
UNIT
A21 A15
ALCK BLU
NAVIGATION UNIT
BACKLT DlAGt
DIAG-
GND
Ace
VSP
OUT
tB
Illt
R-SIGl
G-SlGl
B-SIGl
C-SIGl
HFTMIC
OUTt
S1G1- HFTMIC
GND OUT-
SIG1-SH
GANET
HFTMIC
BUSt
OUTSH
GANET
BUS-
GANET
BUSSH
NVRXt
NAVI NVRX-
REMOTE
NVTXt
NVTX-
NVSH
GPS
"1 : With rea, enta rtalnment system
ntertainment system "2 : Without ,ea, e
C7
=4
GRY NAVIGATION
C8
SERVICE
1 CHECK
m CONNECTOR
C4
BLK
C6
A30 rl VSP
PCM
BLU iVEHICLE
OUT
SPEED SIGNAL)
ROOF CONSOLE
10

r---- BLU
NAVIGATION
S

9
MlrHONE
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
t. _ j-GRY
12
MIC IN SH
13
PNK MICINt

G601
14
B6 27
MICIN-
PUR HFTMIC
B14 : : : 28 OUTt
'. LTBLU-f---
HFTMIC
1------r
OUT-

HFTMIC
OUTSH
HANDSFREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT
Fl

22 . .
,
RED NVRXt
F2
.
:
23

WHT NVRX-
F3

:

9

,
NVTXt , . ,
F4 ' .

8
BLK

NVTX-

NVSH
hEl
GPS
E2
GPS
GNDGPS IJ I GNDGPS
ANTENNA
CAMERA
01
,.. ........ -----,
6
CAMERA
" WHT '
vce
D5 ,
,
3
vce
.

CAMERA
.
BLJ( CAMERA
VIDEO 07
RGLt .

1 VIDEO
CAMERA '.
RED
.
REARVIEW
CAMERA CAMERA
ADPT
't------,...
ADPT
RGGND
GL!.
CAMERA CAMERA
RGSH
SH SH
JOG
A17
,""'----_ ...... - ..
1
ACSI " WHT '
JOG
BUS
"------r'
BUS
ACSO
BRN
Bl.......2. .!!!...,]-
INTERFACE
ACCK
JOGSH JOGSH
DIAL
G>--- PUR--+
Ace
BLK- GND
GS06
23-133
BACK
Navigation System
No picture is displayed
Diagnostic Test: Navi System Link
NOTE:
Check the navigation volume level (see owner's
manual for more information).
loose terminals.
Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the
navigation system anti-theft code.
Confirm the correct DVD color and version disc is
installed in the navigation unit (see page 23-172).
1. Check the No.5 (10A), No.7 (10A) fuse and No. 32
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse relay box, and
reinstall the fuses if they are OK.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck .
3. Operate the radio and listen to the audio.
Can you hear the audio?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Check the ACC circuit .
navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No.1
and No.2 individually.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
=
23-134
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lfthe+B wire does not have voltage, repair
open in the wire between the under-dash fuse relay
box and the navigation unit. If the ACC wire does
not have voltage, repair open in the wire between
the under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation
unit..
6. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
connector C (8P) terminal No.4 and body ground.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
=
YES-Go to step 7.
navigation unit and body ground (G605) (see page
22-38) .
BACK
7. Perform the forced starting of the display (see page
23-179).
Is the diagnosis menu of the picture diagnosis
displayed?
YES-Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the
"Navi System Link" diagnostic (see page 23-159) to
check the links .
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Shield the display unit from the sun with your hand,
and check that the display is back lit (only back light
isON.)
Can you see the back light?
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180)
and retest. Ifthe problem is still present, replace
the navigation display unit (see page 23-181) .
NO-Go to step 9.

navigation display unit 20P connector terminal No.
1 and No.2 individually.
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
+8 (WHT) ACC (PUR)
r--------------------,
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-If the +8 wire does not have voltage, repair
open in the wire between the under-dash fuse relay
box and the navigation display unit 20P connector.
If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair open
in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the navigation display unit 20P connector .
10. Measure the voltage between the navigation
display 20P connector terminal No. 10 and body
ground.
=
YES-Replace the navigation display unit..
NO-Repair open or poor connections between the
navigation display and body ground (G506)
(see page 22-32) .
23 .. 135
BACK
Navigation System
Vehicle position icon constantly leaves road,
moves erratically, or is very far from actual
position
NOTE:
Check for aftermarket accessories that could interfere
with the GPS signal.
Check that the GPS antenna is plugged in.
1. Check the GPS icon on the navigation picture.
Is the GPS icon white?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for GPS icon is white
or not shown (see page 23-141) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Yaw
Rate" test (see page 23-167) to check the yaw rate
sensor.
23-136
3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Car
Status" test (see page 23-165) to check the vehicle
speed pulse.
Are the yaw rate sensor and vehicle speed pulse
OK?
YES-The problem may be normal. Check to see if
the problem occurs in the same place. If it does, the
problem could be in the database. Go to step 4.
NO-If the problem is the yaw rate sensor, replace
the navigation unit (see page 23-180). Ifthe
problem is the vehicle speed pulse, check for an
open in the wire between the navigation unit and
the PCM. If the wire is OK, troubleshoot the vehicle
speed signal circuit .
4. Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and
check to see if the problem occurs in the same
place.
Does the problem occur in the same place?
YES-The problem is in the database. Report the
problem according to the Navigation System
Manual under "Reporting Errors.".
NO-Replace the original navigation unit (see page
23-180) .
BACK
Picture is missing a color or tone or is an odd
color
NOTE:
loose terminals.
Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system
anti-theft codes.
After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system
anti-theft codes.
Check for aftermarket accessories that may interfere
with the navigation system.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use "RGB Color"
test under Monitor Check (see page 23-160).
Are the red, green, and blue colored circles
shown?
YES-The system is OK at this time ...
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P) and
the navigation display unit 20P connector.
4. Check for loose terminals at navigation unit
connector A (20P) and the navigation display unit
20P connector.
Are there/oose terminals? .
YES-Repair the terminal..
NO-Go to step 5.
terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) and
the navigation display unit 20P connector based on
the missing color(s).
Missing Navigqtion Navigation Wire
color unit display unit color
connector A 20P
(20P) connector
Blue A11 18 VEL
Green A2 9 RED
Red A1 8 WHT
NAVIGATION DISPLA V UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-There is an open in the circuit between the
navigation display unit and the navigation unit.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the navigation display unit and navigation units. If a
poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace
the affected shielded harness .
(cont'd)
23-137
BACK
Navigation System
terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) and
the navigation display unit 20P connector based on
the missing color(s).
Missing Navigation Navigation
color unit connector display unit
A (12P) 20P connector
Blue A11 10,20
Green A2 10,20
Red A1 10,20
YES-There is a short to body ground in the circuit
between the navigation display unit and the
navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness .
NO-Replace the navigation unit. If the problem is
still unresolved, replace the navigation display unit.

23-138
Picture has lines/rolls/other issues or is an
odd color
Diagnostic Test: Monitor Check
NOTE:
Always compare the screen image to a known-good
vehicle. If the screen looks the same, inform the client
that it is characteristic of the system.
loose terminals.
Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-
theft codes for the audio system and navigation
system.
1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories
(possibly hidden) mounted near the navigation
display unit or the navigation unit.
Are there any electronic accessories?
YES-Disable the accessories, and recheck .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Start up the navigation picture.
Is the picture scrolling horizontally (left to right or
right to left)?
YES-Check for an open or short to ground in the
C SIG wire from navigation unit connector A (20P)
terminal No. 12 to navigation display unit 20P
connector terminal No. 19. Also check for a short to
ground between navigation display unit 20P
connector terminal No. 19 and terminal No. 20 .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use "RGB Color"
diagnostic under Monitor Check (see page 23-160).
Is the picture missing a red, green or blue color?
YES-Do troubleshooting for the picture is missing
a color or tone or is an odd color (see page 23-137).

NO-Go to step 4.
BACK
5. Substitute a known-good navigation display unit
(see page 23-180), and recheck.
Is the picture OK?
YES-Check for loose connections, then replace the
original navigation display unit (see page 23-181).

NO-Check for loose connections and recheck. If a
poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace
the shielded harness. If no poor or loose terminals
are found, substitute a known-good navigation unit
(see page 23-180) and recheck.lfthe problem is
gone, replace the original navigation unit (see page
23-180) .
Interface dial buttons do not work
NOTE:
loose terminals.
anti-theft codes.
After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for
the audio system and navigation system.
2. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use "Hard Key"
test under Unit Check (see page 23-161).
Do the buttons work properly?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Try all the buttons on the navigation system.
Is there a specific row or columns of buttons, set
of buttons, or a certain button that does not
respond properly (i.e. pressing a button in the
lower left corner causes a button in the right lower
corner to respond.)?
YES-Replace the interface dial (see page 23-181) .

NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
23-139
BACK
Navigation System
4. Turn the ignition switch ON ,(II),..
5. Measure the voltage between the interface dial5P
INTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTq,R
=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair 'open in the wire between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and the interface dial..
6. Measure the voltage betweeni'nterface dial'5P
connector terminal No.3 and' body ground.'
INTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the interface
dial and body ground (G506) (see page 22-32) .
23-140'
8. Disconnect the interface dial 5P connector and the
navigation unit connector A (20P).
connector A (20P) terminal No. 17 and interface dial
5P connector terminal No.1.
INTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 19
and the interface dial 5P connector terminal No.2.
If the wire is OK, go to step 10. If the wire is open,
repair the wire .
interface dial and the navigation unit. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the interface
dial and navigation unit. If a poor connection or
loose terminals is found, replace the affected
shielded harness .
10. Substitute a known-good interface dial (see page
23-181 ), a nd recheck.
Is the system OK?
YES-Replace the original interface dial (see page
23-181) .
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180).

BACK
GPS icon is white or not:shown ",f.
NOTE: "
With proper reception, theiconilC)rrrially appears
green. ',i.:
Make sure the GPS antenna is plugged in.
Check for any aftermarket accessories that may be
interfering with the GPSsignal.
Make sure the vehicle is parktld outside and away
from buildings. -
Refer to GPS Information (see page 23-; 166) ,for real-
time satellite reception display. .
1. Check for metallic wi ndo\/lHi nt on the windshield
and electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly
hidden) mounted near the GPS antenna orthe
navigation unit.
Is there metallic window tint or electronic,-
accessories?
YES-Remove tint or the acces.sQriesand
recheck.. "
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the "Navi
System Link" diagnostic (see page 23-159) to check
the GPS antenna.
Is the "GPS Ant" icon red?
YES-Check for a kinked, crushed, or disconnected
GPS antenna wire. If icon is still red, replace the
GPS antenna .
NO-Check that nothing is blocking the GPS
antenna located under the rear shelf and recheck.
Substitute a known-good GPS antenna, and
recheck .
If the symptom is gone, replace the GPS antenna .
If the symptom is still present, substitute a
known-good navigation unit and recheck. If the
symptom is gone, replace the original navigation
Voice:guidancecannot be heard, is broken
up, or there is too much static '".
NOTE:
Check the navigation volume level (see Owner's
Manual). .
Always check the connectors poo.r connections or
loose terminals. . .,
Before get the audio system and the
navigationsystem,anti-theft codes.
After tro'ubleshootiilg, enter the anti-theft codes for
1. Press the display butt.on.
2. Check the volume and voice feedback setting for
the navigation system in set-up.
Is either OFF? "
YES-Set the voice feedback to ON and select an
audible level for the volume
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the radio operation.
Can you hear the radio?
YES"':'" Go to step 4.
NO-Troubleshoot audio system .
I' ..
4. Go into the Diagnostic-mode, and use the "Navi
System Link" diagnostic (see page 23-159) to check
the radio.
i,.,
Is the "Radio" id.on red?
YES- th,e audio system .
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect navigation unitconnector B (14P) and
thestere9 amplifi!3r A (28P).
,'"
(cont'd)

BACK
Na'vigation System
7.' Check for continuity between body and
navigation unitconnectorB(14P)te'rminals No.5'
and No. 12 individually.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
=
between the navigation unit and stereo amplifier
Replace the affected shielded harness .
NO-Go to step 8.
connector B (14P) ter-minal No. 11and terminals
',,;
NAVIGATION UNIT B (14P)
between the navigation unitand stereo amplifier
units. Replace the affected shielded harness .
NO-Go to step 9.
23-142
connector B (14P) terminal No.5 and the stereo
amplifier unit connector A (28P) terminal No: 21.
RG L (+) (PUR)
STEREO AMPLIFIER UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
'. Wire side of female terminals
YES--Go to step 10.
navigation unit and stereo amplifier. Check, for poor
connections or loose terminals at the stereo
amplifier and navigation unit. If a poor connection
or loose terminal is found, replace the affected
shielded harness .
BACK
connector B (14P) terminal No. 12 and the stereo
amplifier unit connector A (28P) terminal No.9.
STEREO AMPUFIER UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
YES-Go to step 11.
navigation unit and the stereo amplifier. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the stereo
amplifier and navigation unit. If a poor connection
or loose terminal is found, replace the affected
shielded harness
11. Substitute a known-good stereo amplifier, and
recheck.
Is the system OK?
YES-Replace the stereo amplifier .
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180).

Voice control does not work/respond
Diagnostic Test:. Mic Level
NOTE:
Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware
related, ensure that the voice control system is being
operated correctly.
- Make sure you are on the correct screen when
trying to issue a voice command. For instance, the
command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant"
only works on Map screen. (See the Navigation
System manual for a complete list of allowed voice
commands for the information being displayed).
- Close the windows and moonroof.
- Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2).
- Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents
so that they do not blow against the microphone on
the ceiling. Pay particular attention to the
passenger's side air vent adjustment. The
microphone will pick up noise if the passenger's
side vent is pointed directly at it, potentially
rendering the Navi and HFL Voice Recognition
inoperative.
- Pause after pressing the TALK button then give a
voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice.
Ifthe system cannot recognize your command,
speak louder.
- If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the system may not interpret your voice commands
correctly.
- If you speak a command with something in your
mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may
misunderstand your command.
loose terminals.
Check for a loose roof console microphone; if it's
loose, tighten it .
Before troubleshooting, get the audio and navigation
system anti-theft codes.
(cont'd)
23-143
BACK
Navigation System
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Mic
Level" test the under Functional Setup (see page
23-169) to check the operation of the TALK and
BACK buttons.
Are the TALK and BACK buttons operational?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Check for an open or short to ground on
navigation unit connector B (14P) terminal
No. 10 .
2. Use the "Mic Level" diagnostic under Functional
Setup (see page 23-169) to check the operation of
the microphone.
Is the microphone operational?
YES-Check the operation of the voice control
system (see the Navigation System Manual) .
e,
NO-Check for a loose front map light
(microphone) assembly. If OK, check for an open or
short to ground on' navigation unit connector B
(14P) terminals No.6 and No. 14 .
23-144
DVD screen error messages
Diagnostic Test: Car Status
NOTE:
o Confirm the correct DVD color and version disc is
installed inthe navigation unit (see page 23-179).
o Refer to General Troubleshooting for a list of
comr;non DVD screen error messages and the
probable causes (see page 23-177).
o Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the "Car
Status" diagnostic (see page 23-165) to check the
status of the DVD lid.
o Inspect th-e navigation DVD for scratches 'f)r damage.
o The following troubleshooting is for the error
messages shown on the error message table
(see page 23-177).
1. Check the DVD-ROM reading surface for scratches
and finger prints.
Are there any scratches or finger prints on the
DVD-ROM reading surface?
YES-Clean or replace the DVD-ROM (see page
23-179) . '
NO-If the problem occurs occasionally when the
system is cold, this is normal. If the problem occurs
frequently when driving, replace the navigation
BACK
Navigation cannot control A/e by voice
NOTE:
Always check and repair all CAN DTCs before
troubleshooting the navigation system.
loose terminals.
Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the
navigation system anti-theft codes.
Verify that the correct navigation unit is installed for
this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use
"Version" (see page 23-172).
1. Go into the Diagnostic Mode, and use the "Navi
System Link" check (see page 23-159).
Is the "Air-con" icon red?
YES-Do the climate control system
troubleshooting .
NO-Check for an open or short to ground between
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No.4,
No. 14, and No. 15, and climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No.2, No. 21, and
No. 22. If OK, check the climate control system for
normal operation. If the climate control system
works properly, substitute a known-good
navigation unit and recheck .
Display day/night mode does not work
NOTE:
Check that the dash brightness setting is not set to
high.
loose terminals.
anti-theft codes.
1. Turn the headlights on, and adjust the dash
brightness to the middle range.
Does the display change to day and night modes
when turning the headlights on and off?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Mode, and use the "Car
Status" diagnostic to check for an ILL signal
(see page 23-165).
Is the "ILL" signal OK?
NO-Check the ILL + circuit for an open or short to
ground between the navigation unit and gauge
control module. If OK, substitute a known-good
navigation unit and recheck .
23-145
BACK
Navigation System
System locks up. or freezes constantly
NOTE: Check the GPS and VSP signals in the GPS
information check (see page 23-166) and car status
(see page 23-165).
1. Start the engine, turn the ignition switch OFF, then
turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the system reboot?
NO-Check the DVD for the correct color, software
version, scratches or damage and the navigation
unit for water damage. If OK, gO into the Diagnostic
mode and do all of the "Unit Check" diagnostics
(see page 23-161) .
23-146
Vehicle icon wanders across the map when
driving (does not follow a displayed road) or
map vehicle ICON spins
NOTE:
This is not the same condition as when driving
off-road (or on a fire or logging road).
This condition is caused by a loss of map matching
from a bad sensor input. Check for aftermarket or
other objects that can block the GPS signal. Always
perform Map matching (see page 23-103) before
proceeding with the troubleshooting.
1. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and do the Navi
System Link diagnostic (see page 23-159), the Navi
ECU diagnostic under "Unit Check" (see page
23-161), the Car Status check (see page 23-165), the
GPS Information check (see page 23-166), the GPS
Detail check (see page 23-166), and the Yaw Rate
check (see page 23-167).
Are a/l the tests OK?
YES-The system is OK atthis time .
NO-Repair the affected system. If the problem
persists, substitute a known-good navigation unit,
and monitor the condition .
BACK
Navigation system will not accept security
code
NOTE:
The system will not operate without the 4-digit
security (anti-theft) code. Follow the this procedure.
(After 10 consecutive tries, you must cycle the key to
continue trying)
The "Navigation System Diagnosis and Core Return
Form" is available online, under "Job aids" and can
be printed out for recording this information. This
information will help the Reman facility determine
what caused the failure.
1. Go into the "System diagnosis menu" (see page
23-158), select "Unit check," and then "Navi ECU."
A brief diagnostic will run for 20 seconds, and the
serial number is then displayed.
Is the serial number displayed?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180) .

2. Obtain the Serial Number (3 letters followed by
8 numbers) from the label on the underside ofthe
navigation unit (not the display unit). Using the
Serial Number, look up the navigation security
code in the Interactive Network. (click: Service,
Vehicle Information, Anti-Theft code Inquiry, and
then select "Navigation" from the "product"
dropdown box). Enter the serial number.
Is a 4-digit code displayed?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Call the Warranty Department, the telephone
number is listed in the PDI{fQI bulletin, to obtain
the code. Then go to step 4.
3. Check the obtained code work to bypass the code
screen.
Does the code work?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Try entering four zeros (0000) in place for the code.
Do the four zeros work to bypass the code screen?
YES-Replace the control unit, and enter in the
"problem description field" of the core return form:
"Security code is 0000.".
NO-Replace the control unit, and enter in the
"problem description field" of the core return form:
"Won't take security code" (as proof, enclose the
sticker that contains the Serial number and the
Code) .
23-147
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation stays on with ignition switch off
NOTE:
Check for aftermarket accessories that may interfere
with the navigation system.
loose terminals.
anti-theft codes.
After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code,
and re-initialize the navigation system.
The vehicle may have been used for a show event.
Check for a short jumper harness in-line with the
navigation unit "c" connector. If a jumper harness is
present, remove it and return it to Tech Line.
1. Take the key out of the ignition switch.
Does the navigation ;screen stay on?
YES-Go to step 2.
2. Check for a short to power on navigation unit
connector C (8P) terminal No.2.
Is there a short?
YES-Troubleshoot the ACC circuit..
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180) .

23-148
Navigation cannot control audio/disc/rear
entertainment
1. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system
is entered.
System Link" diagnostic (see page 23-159).
Is the "Radio" icon red?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for the voice
guidance cannot be heard (see page 23-141) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
23-180), and recheck.
Can the navi control audio/disc?
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180).

NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting .
BACK
Rearview camera does not come on or work
properly
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and start the engine.
Does the Navigation screen come on and show an
image when the vehicle is started?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to troubleshooting for "No picture is
displayed" (see page 23-134) .
2. Go into the diagnostic menu and use the "Navi
System Link" test (see page 23-159) to check the
connection between the navigation unit and the
rearview camera.
Is the II R-camera" link on the screen?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 12.
3. Confirm the system connection;
Is the "R-camera" link red on the screen?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to "Car Status" and check the BACK-
Reverse indication status (see page 23-165) .
4. Check the connections between navigation unit
connector D (7P) and the rearview camera
connector (6P).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect the connectors .
5. Disconnect navigation unit connector D (7P) and
rearview camera connector (6P).
6. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
connector D (7P) and the rearview camera
connector (6P) according to the table.
Navigation Rearview Wire color
unit connector camera
D1 6 WHT
D5 3 BLK
D7 1 RED
D6 2 GRY
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between navigation
unit connector D (7P) and rearview camera
connector (6P) .
connector D (7P) and body ground according to the
table. Then check for continuity between the
navigation unit connector D (7P) terminal No.6,
rearview camera 6P connector terminal No.2 and
same terminals.
Navigation unit connector Wire color
D1 WHT
D5 BLK
D7 RED
YES-Repair short in the wire between navigation
unit and the rearview camera, or replace the
appropriate shielded harness .
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
23-149
BACK
Navigation System
voltage between navigation unit connector D (7P)
and body ground according to the table.
Navigation unit connector Wire color
D1 WHT
D5 BLK
D7 RED
D6 GRY
navigation unit and the rearview camera, or replace
the appropriate shielded harness .
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Reconnect the rearview camera connector,(6P).
11. Substitute and connect a known-good navigation
unit and check the rearview camera image in
reverse.
Is the rear view image OK?
YES-Replace the original navigation unit .
NO-Replace the rearview camera .
23-150
12. Press the "Return" in the upper light corner of the
screen to return the main menu, then go to
"Version" (see page 23-172).
13. Check the model code that is displayed.
Is the correct navigation unit model code
displayed for this vehicle?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-The wrong navigation unit is installed.
Replace the navigation unit with the correct part .
14. Remove the .DVD disc from the navigation unit and
check the label color of the DVD disc.
Is the DVD disc label white (or possibly gray for
Canada)?
YES-Reinsert the DVD disc, and go to step ~
NO-Replace the DVD disc with the correct color.
See the Obtaining a Navigation DVD in the
"General Troubleshooting Information" (see page
23-100) .
BACK
Navigation cannot control XM radio
1. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system
is entered.
System Link" diagnostic (see page 23-159).
Is the "XM" icon red?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for the voice
guidance cannot be heard (see page 23-141) .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
23-180).
Can the navi control XM radio?
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-180) .

NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting .
Navigation frequently asks for anti-theft
code and needs GPS initialization
NOTE: This is often caused by a loss of battery power or
a poor ground.
1. Check for an open on navigation unit connector C
(8P) terminals No.1 and No.2.
Are the circuits OK?
YES-Replace the navigation unit .
NO-Repair the circuits .
23-151
BACK
Navigation System
Traffic information is not being shown on
map screen
If your client complains thattraffic is not being
displayed, it could be because a traffic setting is not
correct.
NOTE:
The client's account must be active. Call XM
customer care to verify the account status before
troubleshooting.
Currently, real-time traffic (display of traffic flow and/
or incidents) is available in over 30 metropolitan
areas, and it is likely to grow. The current list can be
found at www.acura.com/realtimetraffic. The site also
contains a traffic demo and FAQs.
Traffic flow speed is displayed as bands of red,
orange, and green alongside of the freeway. Some or
all freeways in a covered city may not have traffic
coverage. The link above shows the freeways
covered for each city.
Incident icons (yellow or red diamonds) point put
accidents, construction areas, or weather conditions.
Not all areas have "traffic flow" and "traffic icons." It
is possible that an area may have one or the other.
Even if your area does not receive real-time traffic,
complete the steps below to make sure the system is
set up correctly.
23-152
1. Check if your area has real-time traffic coverage.
From an iN workstation, go to www acura.com.
2. Make sure the keyless access remote is linked.
When you turn the ignition switch ON (II) with a
linked remote, you will see WELCOME DRIVER 1 or
WELCOME DRIVER 2 on the multi-informaion
display (MID).
If you see WELCOME DRIVER 1 or WELCOME
DRIVER 2 on the MID, go to step 4.
If you do not see WELCOME DRIVER 1 or
WELCOME DRIVER 2 on the MID, go to step 3.
3. Link the remote
Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons
on the remote until its LED blinks once.
Lock and unlock the driver's door once with the
remote.
NOTE: It's important to use the same remote
(Driver 1 or Driver 2) that your client's used when
they noticed problems with the real-time traffic
monitor. This is because each remote will recall the
customized settings and the data for that driver,
including real-time traffic settings. Ideallv, check
both remotes to make sure the real-time traffic
settings are correct.
BACK
4. Park the vehicle outside where you have a clear
view of the southern sky. Turn on the XM radio,
and make sure it receives at least channels 000,
001,174, and 247 (XM's preview mode).
o If the XM radio gets at least channels 000, 001,
174, and 247, go to step 5.
o If the XM radio does not get at least channels
000,001,174, and 247, troubleshoot the XM radio,
repair as needed then go to step 5.
5. In the lower left corner of the navi map screen
make sure the scale is set to 1/2, 1, 2,or 5 miles.
(The scale must be set to one ofthese values to see
real-time traffic). To change the scale, turn the
interface knob left or right as needed.
NOTE: Many AcuraLink functions are selected
using the interface dial at the center of the
dashboard. The interface dial has two parts a gray
knob behind a silver selector. The knob turns left
and right. The selector can be pushed left, right, up,
down, and in.
SELECTCR
KNOB
6. Check if the navi screen shows real-time traffic.
o If you do not see real-time traffic, go to step 7.
o If you see real-time traffic, or if you are not in an
area that receives it, return the vehicle to your
client.
7. Go into the map menu:
o If you were using the interface selector to scroll
on the map screen, press the MAP/GUIDE button.
o Press the interface selection in.
8. In the map menu. turn the interface knob to show
icon on map, then press the interface selector in.
The traffic icon on the far left should be solid blue.
If it is not blue, turn the interface knob until the
traffic icon is outlined in blue, then press the
selector in, and go to step 10.
If the traffic icon does not change to solid blue, do
the AcuraLink self-diagnostic function (see page
9. Reset the AcuraLink control unit, then repeat step 8:
o With the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) position,
pull the No.5 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box. Wait 20 seconds, then reinstall
the fuse.
o Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft
codes.
10. From the "map menu," go into icon options by
pressing the interface selector to the right.
11. Turn the interface knob to traffic, then press the
selector in.
12. Press the interface selector in to selecttraffic
speeds. Turn the knob to traffic icons, and press the
selector in again. Both traffic speeds and traffic
icons must be solid blue. When both are solid blue,
select done by pushing the selector to the right.
13. Check ifthe map screen shows real-time traffic.
o If you do not see real-time traffic, go to step 14.
o If you see real-time traffic, or if you are not in an
client.
14. See if real-time traffic is currently being broadcast
by checking real-time traffic on another real-time
traffic equipped vehicle with a known-good
navigation system. Wait about 5 minutes for the
display screen to refresh.
o If the other real-time traffic equipped vehicle
displays real-time traffic, go to step 15.
o If the other real-time traffic equipped vehicle
does not display real-time traffic, call Acura
Client Service at 800-382-2238 and ask about any
known traffic system outages or blackouts in
your area.
(cont'd)
23-153
BACK
Navigation System
15. Reset the AcuraLink control unit
With the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) position,
pull the No.5 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box. Wait 20 seconds, then reinstall
the fuse.
Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft
codes.
16. Check ifthe map screen shows real-time traffic.
If you still do not see real-time traffic, go to step
17.
If you see real-time traffic, or if you are not in an
. area that receives it, return the vehicle to your
client.
17. Make sure the vehicle's XM Navi Traffic account
status is active.
Call XM at 800-852-9696.
From the automated menu, select 1 (dealers and
retailers) and from the next menu, select 3
(technical support).
Ask the agent to check the XM Navi Traffic
account status.
-Ifthe account is active and there are no known
outages or blackouts, go to step 18.
- If the account is inactive, get it activated, then
ask for a rapid refresh. (A rapid refresh takes 15
to 30 minutes.)
23-154
18. Check if the map screen shows real-time traffic.
If you still do not see real-time traffic, go to step
19 .
If you see real-time traffic, or if you are not in an
client.
19. Install a known-good AcuraLink control unit, and
check the real-time traffic.
Does the map screen show rea/-time traffic?
YES-Replace the AcuraLinkcontrol unit (XM
receiver) and register it with XM radio and Acura
client service .
NO-Replace the navigation control unit (see page
23-180) .
BACK
No real-time traffic on the display screen
1. Do a VIN status inquiry, and check ifthe vehicle has
any outstanding product updates for the AcuraLink
control unit.
Ifthere are no outstanding product updates, go
to step 2.
Ifthereare any outstanding product updates,
complete them as appropriate.
2. Check if your area has Real-Time Traffic coverage.
From an iN workstation, go to www.acura.coml
realtime traffic.
NOTE: At this time, Real-Time Traffic covers many
metropolitan areas. Check the website often; more
coverage areas are continually being added.
3. Make sure the keyless access remote is linked.
When you turn the ignition switch ON (II) with a
linked remote, you should see WELCOME DRIVER 1
or WELCOME DRIVER 2 on the multi-information
display (MID).
If you see WELCOME DRIVER 1 or WELCOME
DRIVER 2 on the MID, go to step 5.
If you do not see WELCOME DRIVER 1 or
WELCOME DRIVER 2 on the MID, go to step 4.
NOTE: Make sure you are using the same remote
(Driver 1 or Driver 2) that your client was using
when problems were noticed with Real-Time
Traffic. This is because each remote will recall the
customized settings and data for that driver,
including Real-Time Traffic settings. Ideally, check
both remotes to make sure the Real-Time Traffic
settings are correct.
4. Link the remote:
Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons
on the remote until its LED blinks once.
Lock and unlock the driver's door once with the
remote.
5. Park the vehicle outside where you have a clear
view ofthe southern sky. Turn on the XM radio,
and make sure it gets at least channels 000, 001,
174,247 (XM's preview mode).
If the XM radio gets at least channels 000, 001,
174, 247 go to step 6 .
If the XM radio does not get at least channels
000,001,174,247 troubleshootthe XM radio,
repair as needed, then go to step 6.
6. In the lower left corner of the display screen, make
sure the scale is set to 1/2, 1, 2,or 5 miles. (If the
scale is not set to one ofthese values, you cannot
see Real-Time Traffic.) To change the scale, turn
the knob on the interface dial to the left or the right,
as needed.
NOTE: Many AcuraLink functions are selected
using the interface dial at the center of the
dashboard. The interface dial consists of a gray
knob with a silver selector over it. The knob turns
left and right; the selector moves right, left, up,
down, and in.
(cont'd)
23-155
BACK
Navigation System
7. Check ifthe display screen shows Real-Time Traffic.
If you do not see Real-Time Traffic, go to step 8.
If you see Real-Time Traffic, return the vehicle to
your client.
8. Selectthe map menu, and press in the selector.
NOTE: If you were using the selector to manually
scroll the map, the map menu is not available.
Press the MAP/GUIDE button instead.
9. Turn the knob to select Show Icon on. Map, then
press in the selector.
10. From the icon selection bar at the bottom of the
display screen, select the Traffic icon; The icon
should turn solid blue when you select it.
Ifthe icon turns solid blue, go to step 13.
Ifthe icon does notturn solid blue, go to step 11.
11. Turn the knob until the Traffic icon is outlined in
blue, then press in the selector.
If the icon turns solid blue, go to step 13.
If the icon does not turn solid blue, do the
AcuraLink self-diagnostic procedure (see page
12. Reset ~ AcuraLink control unit;
Make sure you have the antI-theft codes for the
audio system and navigation system.
With the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0), pull
the No.5 (7.5 A) fuse from the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box. Wait 20 seconds, then
reinstall the fuse.
and navigation system.
23-156
13. Select Icon Options by pushing the selector to the
right.
14. From the Select category for icon settings: screen,
turn the knob to Traffic, then press in the selector.
15. From the Select traffic info: screen, press in the
selector to select Traffic Speeds. Turn the knob to
Traffic Icons, and pressin the selector again. Both
Traffic Speeds and Traffic Icons must be solid blue.
When both are solid blue, select DONE by pushing
the selector to the right.
16. Check if the display screen shows Real-Time Traffic.
If you do not see Real-Time Traffic, go to step 17.
If you see Real-Time Traffic, return the vehicle to
your client.
17. Check the display screen on a!1other RL with a
known-good navigation system, to make sure the
XM NavTraffic signal is currently being broadcast.
Wait about 5 minutes for the display screen to
refresh.
If you see Real-Time Traffic on the other MDXs
display screen, go to step 18.
If you do not see Real-Time Traffic on the other
MDX display screen, call Acura Client Services at
800-382-2238, and ask about any known traffic
system outages or blackouts in your area.
BACK
18. Make sure your client's XM NavTraffic account
status is active. This account must be active to get
Real-Time Traffic:
o Call XM at 800-852-9696.
o From the automated menu, select 1 (dealers and
retailers), and from the next menu, select 3
(technical support).
o Ask the agent to check the XM NavTraffic
account status:
-Ifthe account is active and there are no known
outages or blackouts, go to step 0 ~
-If the account is inactive, get it activated, and
ask for a rapid refresh. (A rapid refresh takes
about 15 to 30 minutes.). Then go to step 19.
19. Check if the display screen shows Real-Time Traffic.
o If you still do not see Real-Time Traffic, go to step
20.
o If you see Real-Time Traffic, return the vehicle to
your client.
20. Substitute the AcuraLink control unit with a known-
good unit, and check ifthe display screen shows
Real-Time Traffic.
o If you still do not see Real-Time Traffic, replace
the navigation unit..
o If you see Real-Time Traffic, replace the control
unit..
System Diagnostic Mode
System always comes up in in-line
diagnostic mode
NOTE: If the vehicle left the factory in the factory
diagnostic mode, you will see this screen every time
you turn on the ignition.
When a navigation control unit is powered up for the
first time at the factory or after replacement with a new
or remanufactured navigation unit, the "factory
diagnosis" screen (In Line Diag) shows up. Normally
the factory performs the steps necessary to verify
proper operation and terminate the "factory diagnostic
"
Until the proper confirmation sequence is performed,
the screen will show up every time the vehicle is started.
In Line Diag
I StartDlag I I ExitDiag
I
r-I NaviECU 1 D I XXXXCorrect PIN
H GPS Ant .. nna
1 2 3
H Di .... lav
~ Alc 1 I ~ < i II..:cK I
4 5 6
H Radio
I DDDD[)DDDDD I
H Rear Camera
7 8 9
L.f XMHIP
KA
1
Delate 0
Done
HFL
Follow the steps below to prevent the screen from
showing up in the future:
I
o Press and hold the buttons (Menu + Map/Guide +
Cancel) for about 5 seconds (the "Select Diagnosis
items" screen will appear).
o Press and hold the Map/Guide button for 5-10
seconds (A screen with a "Complete" button, will
appear).
o Select "Complete", then "Return", and then turn the
key off for 5 seconds. Do not disconnect the battery
during this period as the unit is saving the setting to
the SRAM memory. The InLine Diag should not
appear again.
o Restart the vehicle, and confirm normal operation by
completing the "TO I of the Navigation System"
Service Bulletin.
(cont'd)
23-157
BACK
Navigation System
System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
Start-up procedure and Diagnostic Menu
There are two ways to enter the diagnostic mode:
1. Connectthe SCS connector (see page 23-179) to
the navigation service connector located in the
trunk. Then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II).
The display will go directly to the diagnostic menu
screen shown below.
NOTE: When finished troubleshooting, make sure
to remove the SCS connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Use the navigation
display hard buttons as described below:
Make sure the battery is connected then press and
hold the three buttons (Menu, Map/Guide, and
Cancel), and keep them pressed for approximately
5 seconds. The display screen will go directly to the
"Select Diagnosis Items" menu shown below.
Select Diagnosis Items I Return
NaviSystem GPS Information
Monitor Check Yaw Rate
Unit Check Tire Calibrate
C Functional Setup
XM(HIP) Version
23-158
3. After the display changes to the Select Diagnosis
Items menu, select the item you want to check and
the diagnostic will start. To return to the previous
screen, select "Return".
Navi System (Link)
Monitor Check
Unit Check
Car Status
XM (HIP)
GPS Information
Yaw Rate
Tire Calibrate
Functional Setup
Version
BACK
Navi System Link
This diagnostic tests the cables connecting the
navigation components. Ensure that the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. When the diagnostic
begins, you hear a "bong" sound. The system is in a
"Detecting" mode, and is waiting for all items in
white to be tested. This includes the navigation voice
control (TALK/BACK) buttons, and microphone. Press
the navigation TALK button on the steering wheel,
and in a normal voice, say "testing." The TALK
indicator on the screen should turn green, and the
voice level indicator should move to at least the 6th
bar to pass. Next, press the navigation BACK button.
The "Back" indicator should turn green.
If all ofthe communication lines connecting the
system components, and the navigation TALK/BACK
buttons/microphone check out OK (all block diagram
items green), then the "OK" indicator turns green.
If there is a problem with the system, the faulty
system component item turns red, and the screen will
show "NG" in red. Use the troubleshooting index,
and other diagnostic screens to help locate the
problem.
The indication on the screen may not change until
you cycle the ignition switch. After repairing the
affected cable or system, repeat this diagnostic.
NOTE:
Green boxes and green "OK" indicate that the
communications lines (cables) are intact. This
diagnostic does not necessarily imply that the
individual components are functioning properly. For
instance, the GPS antenna wire may be crushed, but
still show as "green." A road test, or other diagnostic
may be necessary to find the problem.
A green box and link to the AcuraLink control unit
(XM receiver) does not mean that the unit is receiving
traffic information. Always verify that the client's
account status is active, and compare to a known-
good vehicle to ensure that there isn't local coverage
problem.
Select "Return" to return to the Diagnosis Menu.
USA model
,r
Navi System Link ) I Return I
I I
[ Meter ]
OK
l'
AlC R-Camera j I (] 11M llll ij R!i II I
Navi.ECU
Display XM(HlP) ]
[,{l [sACK]
G
.1
[
HFl
J
I ExitDiag I
Canada model
[ Navi System Link
I
I Return 1
[ Meter J
1
OK
1
l'
A/C R-Camera ] I i 0 IU H 0 II I
Navi.ECU
Display HFL
J ~ ] ~ ]
[ Radio XM
J
1 Exit Dlao 1
NOTE:
The mic level indicator must reach the 6th bar or
greater to pass the test.
If the XM link is red or flashing red, go to audio
system symptom troubleshooting (see page 23-32),
or see XM (HIP) diagnostic screen.
(cont'd)
23-159
BACK
Navigation System
Monitor Check
Overview of display unit
The display unit communicates with th/e navigation
unit over its own GA-Net bus. Information sent by the
navigation unit to the display unit includes
commands to control the LCD back light.
The security system protects the navigation display
unit by daisy-chaining the security signal through it,
and then passing the signal to the audio unit.
The illumination input from the gauge brightness
control provides back lighting forthe buttons
surrounding the screen.
These screens allow you to troubleshoot the display
unit. Select the item you want to troubleshoot, and
follow the diagnostic instructions.
RGB color
GrayTone
White Raster
Black Raster
Color Pattern
Monitor Adjustment
Monitor Check I Return I
RGB Color I I Color Pattern I
Gray Tone I I Monitor Adjustment I
White Raster I
Black Raster I
23-160
RGBColor
This screen verifies that the display unit is receiving the
video (R, G, B and Composite sync) signals properly.
The three primary colors should all be shown without
distortion. The combination of all three should produce
a central white section. If any of the colors are missing,
troubleshoot for the color signal (see page 23-137). If
the picture has lines in it or scrolls horizontally, or
vertically, troubleshoot for a Composite sync problem
(see page 23-138).
Gray Tone
This screen diagnoses problems with contrast. You
should be able to see the changes from bar to bar
across the scale. It is normal for the two bars on either
side to appear the same.
Gray Tone I Return
White Raster
The entire display must be white.
White Raster ) I Return I
~ ~
BACK
Black Raster
The entire display must be black.
Color Pattern
The chart below shows the colors being used for the
map and menu screens. This is for factory use only. To
check the color signal use the "RGB Color" diagnostic
found under the Monitor Check.
Color Pattern I Return I
Monitor Adjustment
This allows you to center the navigation display. Use
the joystick to move the picture up/down or left/right. It
is unlikely that you will ever need to adjust the monitor
position. The "Default" button will reset the display
position to factory specifications.
[ Monitor Adjustment
J
I Return I
Setti" II (0,0)
Defau t (0,0)
I Default II Tuning I
Unit Check
To start the test, select the item you want to check starts.
Display
Radio
Navi ECU
PC Card Info
HardKey
Smart Card
Select Check Units Return
Display PC Card Info
Radio Hard Key
NaviECU Smart Card
(cont'd)
23-161
BACK
Navigation System
Display
This diagnostic performs additional checks on the
communication bus between the control unit and the
display. In addition, the internal electronics
functionality are confirmed.
When the connection is NG, first check for loose
terminals at the navigation unit and the display unit
connections. Next check for an open or short in the
communication line between the navigation unit and
the display unit. If you find the line has an open or
short, replace the affected shielded harness.
If the ROM or RAM is NG, replace the display unit.
The version represents the software version in the
display.
Display
I Return I
Connection OK
OK
ROM OK
RAM OK
Version 030611
23-162
Radio
Ifthe NG is indicated, check for loose audio unit
connector.
NOTE: If the XM link was displayed red, but the radio
link was displayed green in the navigation system link,
refer to audio system symptom troubleshooting.
Radio
)1 e t u ~ n I
Connection OK OK )
BACK
Navi ECU
This screen looks for problems with the navigation unit.
When you initiate this diagnosis, the navigation unit
may delay up to a minute while the diagnosis runs.
NOTE: Do not try to end this diagnostic by pressing
"OK" or "Mem clear" before it finishes, otherwise the
system may reboot.
If "V-RAM" or "D-RAM" is NG, then replace the
navigation unit.
If "GPS" indicates "NG (ANT)," then check the entire
GPS antenna wire from the navigation unit to the
antenna. If the wire is crushed or damaged, try a
known good antenna. If this diagnostic reads OK,
then order a new GPS antenna. Ifthe diagnostic still
reads NG (ANT), then replace the navigation unit.
"DVD ROM" represents the database version on the
DVD. You can find this information in either the Setup
Screen "Version," or in the Diagnostic Screen
"Version."
"Serial No." should be the same as the serial number
found on the underside of the navigation unit. You
need this number to obtain the security code from the
Interactive Network (iN) system.
The Mem Clr is for factory use and should not be
used unless instructed by the factory.
Selecting this will erase the client's settings, personal
information, GPS orbital data, and anything else
stored in memory.
NaviECU I Return
I
V-RAM OK
OK
I
D-RAM OK
GPS OK
DVD-ROM
Serial No.
IMemClear
PC Card info.
There is no PC Card in the PC slot, and the screen
should say, "PC Card is not inserted."
NOTE: Do not insert any card or object into the slot.
PC Card Info. ) I Return
PC Card is not inserted.
Ifthe factory provides a PC card and instructs you to
insert a card, then the screen displays the Manufacturer,
and Product Name as shown in the following screen.
PC Card Info.
Manufacturer
xxxxxx
Product Name
xxxxxxx
) I Return I
(cont'd)
23-163
BACK
Navigation System
Hard Key
This diagnostic tests the interface dial, and the buttons
that surround it. For this model, the interface dial and
buttons do not use the GA-Net bus for communications.
To complete the test, touch each button on the vehicle's
control panel, and move the interface dial to each
indicated position. As each function is tested, the
corresponding button on the display should highlight.
To exit, push in and hold the selector knob.
NOTE: You cannot use the onscreen return button to
exit this function.
Hard Key I Return I
[i]
Keep Pushing to Return.
1 MAP/GUIDE 1 D D 'I -M-E-NU---'
1 AUDIO 1 D 0 D 1F===IN==F0===l
.1 CANCEL. I. .' 1 SETUP
1 DAY/NIGHT 1 D D
III
23-164
Smart Card
Ifthe smart card is being used, you can check the card
condition.
Smart Card I Return I
USER1 ON
USER2 OFF
GUEST OFF
BACK
Car Status
Use this screen to confirm that the navigation unit is
properly receiving inputsignals. Signals equal to (0) are
OFF, and signals equal to (1) are ON. Ifthe value on the
display does not match the actual vehicle status, then
check the wire carrying the signal.
VSP-Vehicle Speed Pulse from PCM
(Pin 6 of C-connector)
a) OFF (0) when vehicle is not moving
b) ON (1) when vehicle is moving
The VSP comes from the PCM as a dedicated signal.
Internally, the navigation unit compares the actual VP
on the map against street data to adjust the pulse to
speed scaling factor. As this scaling factor becomes
more accurate, the "Level" gradually increases from 0
to 10 (see the Tire Calibrate diagnostic screen).
BACK-Reverse indication from taillight relay
(Pin 5 of C-connector)
a) OFF (0) when the shift lever is in any position other
than reverse
b) ON (1) when the shift lever is in reverse
The Back signal is used by the navigation unit to allow
the map screen to show the VP moving backwards
when in reverse. This signal is needed because the
Speed Pulse has no direction indication.
VSP
BACK
Car Status
[0]
[0]
ILL CANCEL [0]
ILL
DVD Lid
I Return
[0]
[Close ]
ILL CANCEL
This function is not applied to this model.
ILL-Illumination Indication
(Pin 5 of navigation unit A-connector)
a) OFF (0) when parking lights, or headlights are off
b) ON (1) when parking lights; or headlights are on
The navigation uses the signal to determine whether to
put the navigation screen into the Day or Night
brightness mode. (Setup screen 1)
DVD Lid-senses if the DVD door is open
a) (Close) when the door is closed
b) (Open) when the door is open
The navigation unit has a micro switch to detectthis. If
open is indicated when the door is closed, replace the
navigation unit .
(cont'd)
23-165
BACK
')
'I!;/
N'avigation System
GPS Information
This screen shows the current status of GPS reception.
The circular diagram shows the current location ofthe
GPS satellites (yellow numbers) as they would appear
in the sky. The outer circle represents the horizon (0
degrees elevation).The middle and inner circles
represents 30 and 60 degrees respectively. The very
center of the diagram (90 degrees elevation) is directly
overhead. Nearby pbstructions, like tall,buildingswill
block satellites in that direction. That is why,it is
necessary to be in an open area to effectively
troubleshoot GPS reception issues. The satellite
numbers shown on the diagram.correspond to the
"PRN" number in the Details" screen. There are
always at least 24 "active" GPS satellites in orbit.
Because satellites fail, and have to be removed from
service, spares are always parked in orbit, ready to be
activated. This is why the PRN (satellite IDnumber)can
be greater than 24.
NOTE: To use this screen for troubleshooting, the
vehicle should be outside away from buildings, tall
trees, and high-tension wires for at least 10 minutes
with the engine running.
The "Number of Satellites" box shows the number of
acquired satellites (maximum of 12). It should contain
four or more icons. If not troubleshoot for "GPS icon
is white or not shown" (see page 23-141).
The "Current Position" shows latitude, longitude, and
elevation (in feet). If there are less than four satellites,
the elevation can be grossly inaccurate.
The Date!Time field shows the current date, and also
GMltime.
[ GPS Information ) I Return
I
Number of Satellites
I(@
IJf Jf Jf Jf Jf Jf Jf Jf Jf Jf
Current Position
Latitude: Nxx"xx'xx"
Longitude: Wxxx"xx'xx"
Elevation: xxx feet
o In Use
XXXX.XX.XX xx:xx:xx o Search
NOTE: Pressing the "map guide" button displays the
satellite number on each circle.
23-166
GPS Detail
By pressing and holding the MENU button for
10 seconds, aGPS Detail screenappears. This screen
displays real time incoming satellite positional data
when the vehicle is outside in the open. The
information shown on this screen is for factory use.
( GPS Detail
JjReturn I
(TS:XX Speed:x.xKm/h IDate:xxxx.xx.xx J
AS:xx VDop:xx.x Direction: x Time:xx:xx:xx
;=;
3D PRN ST AZI EL C/N ACe
00
0 xx xx xxx xx xxx xx
1/2
[!]

xx xx xxx xx xxx xx
'---'
The box TS/AS and H DopN Dop is for factory use.
The Speed and Direction information is updated in
real time when driving.
The Date!Time Information is the same as in Setup
screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock."
If the "3D" icon is shown above the yellow dots, this
implies that at least four.siltellites are available for
map positioning, and the "GPS" indicator on the map
screen will be green. See the "Global Positioning
System" detailed explanation in the "System
Description".
If the row of data in the table below begins with a
"yellow dot", the All and EL fields can be used to
locate each satellite on the circular GPS diagram (see
prior screen).
BACK
NOTE: The data shown in the GPS Detail screen is an
example only.
The table of values shown on the screen below has the
following columns:
Column Description Problem indication
Active Active satellites If "3D" or "2D" is
(Yellow Dot) missing when ,the
vehicle is parked
outside, do the
GPS icon is white
or not shown
troubleshooting
(see page 23-141).
PRN The satellite ID
number
ST The status: If all 0, then, do the
0= cannot view GPS icon is white
or searching, or not shown
2 = acquiring troubleshooting
(see page 23-141).
AZI Azimuth, the angle
(0-360) clockwise
from north
EL Elevation from the
horizon (90 deg is
overhead)
C/N N/A Healthy signal is
49-52, no signal:
27-33
ACC N/A
Shows view of all .
1/2 satellites in two
or screen views 1/2 or
2/2 2/2
V'
VawRate
This diagnostic checks the yaw rate sensor in the
control unit. This device detects when the vehicle turns,
and repositions the vehicle position icon on the map
screen. For more detailed information, see the yaw rate
sensor theory of operation under "System Description"
(see page 23-111).
"Sensor" indicates the voltage output from the yaw
rate sensor. It should indicate about 2.500 volts when
stopped.
"Offset" is the reference voltage or standard within
the yaw rate sensor. It also should indicate about
2.500 volts when stopped.
A "sensor" output voltage LOWER than the "Offset"
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the
right.
A "sensor" output voltage HIGHER than the "Offset"
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the left.
The yaw rate offset, and sensor should both indicate
about 2.500 volts when stopped. If either reads zero,
or 5.000 volts, replace the navigation unit.
The yaw rate offset and sensor should be within
+/-0.01 V of each other when stopped. The sensor
value should change relative to the offset as the car is
turned while driving. If not, replace the navigation
unit.
Example: Car stopped
Abnormal Normal
Offset
Sensor
2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
2.516-2.536 V Sensor 2.623 V
Example: Car turning
Normal
Offset
Sensor
2.526 V
2.678 V
(left turn)
2.478 V
(right turn)
Abnormal
Offset 2.526 V
Sensor 2.623 V
(no change on
turns)
(cont'd)
23-167
BACK
Navigation System
"Sensitivity study" represents the status of the
internal tuning function. At initialization, this value
starts at 6 and increases to :If 10 as the internal
correction values become more accurate.
The settings "CCW Cal Factor," "CW Cal Factor," and
"Set" are for factory use only. THIS SHOULD NEVER
BE ADJUSTED.
For detailed analysis of the yaw rate select "tuning."
Sensor
Offset
Yaw Rate
x.xxxV
x.xxxV
CCWFactor x.x%
CWFactor x.x%
23-168
I Return
Yaw Rate Tuning
This diagnostic allows you to graphically display
problems with the yaw rate sensor.
The "ANG-Disp" value accumulates any differences
between the "offset," and "sensor" voltages (see
Yaw Rate diagnostic). When the sensor is functioning
normally, the random changes in these two voltages
generally cancels out, so the value is o. However if
one voltage is consistently higher than the other, then
the "ANG-Disp" value accumulates the constant
change.
The "Reset" button temporarily clears the angular
accumulation (ANG-Disp), and clears the display dots.
Do not touch the "CCW," "CW," or "Set" buttons.
These are used for factory setup only ..
Two tests are explained below. For gross problems with
the sensor, the stationary test usually confirms whether
the sensor is defective. For yaw rate issues related to
driving, perform the road test described below.
1. Stationary test: Ifthe "VP" icon spins in place and
the "ANG-Disp" value slowly increases or
decreases in value, the yaw rate sensor is defective.
Replace the navigation control unit.
2. Road test: Drive the vehicle on a very straight road.
Enter the diagnostic mode, select "Yaw rate," and
touch the "Tuning" button. While driving down a
straight road, the white "dots" should trace a
straight line across the screen. However, if you are
driving on a straight road, and you notice the dots
constantly dropping down or heading up as you
drive, the navigation control unit's yaw sensor is
defective. You can touch "Reset" to clear "ANG-
Disp," and dotted lines.
If either test above fails, please enter "Yaw rate
sensor defective" for the problem description, on
the "Navigation core return form."
[ Tuning
~
BACK
Tire Calibrate
As the veh icle moves, the navigation system receives
speed pulses from the PCM. These pulses are
converted using a conversion factor to amph speed
that moves the vehicle position (VP) on the map. The
navigation system has an internal tuning function that
generates and refines this factor based on actual
driving. The "Study" indicates the status of the tuning.
At navigation initialization, it begins at 0, and increases
to 10 as the navigation system is used.
The "Auto Tuning" is factory set to "ON," and should
remain on.
The "Study" indicates the tuning status. If it is less
than 10, the unit is stfll calibrating.
The "Tire-Cal. Tuning" and Set should not be used. It
is for factory use only.
Tire-Calibrate I Return
Auto Tuning OFF
Study
Tire-Cal.Tuning -x.xx%
Functional Setup
Select the item you want to check.
,Log Data
GPS Send Time
Demo Mode
Mic Level
Solar Angle
Save Users Data
Functional Setup Return
Log Data Mic Level
GPS Send Time Solar Angle
Demo Mode Save Users Data
(cont'd)
23-169
BACK
Navigation System
Solar Angle
This screen graphically displays the sun's position as
determined by GPS. The HVAC system uses the
navigation systems sun's angle, along with the sunlight
sensor to control the driver/passenger AlC air flow. The
heat that the climate control unit removes varies,
depending on the angle ofthe sun entering the vehicle.
This screen is for factory use only, and should not be
adjusted.
The screen shows a circular diagram of the sky
oriented in the direction that the vehicle is pointing.
During daylight hours a red dot is shown,
representing the direction and elevation of the sun.
The outer circle represents the horizon (0 degrees
elevation). The middle circle is 30 degrees, the center
circle is 60 degrees, and the very center is directly
overhead (90 degrees).
The "manual tuning" button should always be "OFF."
The "Angle" is the angle thatthe sun (shown with red
"dot") is above the horizon.
The "vehicle" value represents the angle, clockwise
from North, to the direction that the vehicle position
(VP) icon is pointing (always points straight up).
The "direction" value is the angle, measured
clockwise from the VP (straight up) to the suns
position.
The reliability ranges from 1 to 3, and represents the
accuracy of the Vehicle Position relative to the sun.
( Solar Angle
1
I Return
I
Manual Tuning

OFF
10FF I

Angle

Direction

xx.x
[YJ
xxx.x
[YJ

Vehicle Reliability

x.x
[YJ x
[YJ
23-170
Log Data
This screen allows the factory to select log data to
troubleshoot navigation system issues.
Normally there is no card in the "PC Card Slot," and
the PC slot door should always be closed. The screen
should look like below.
Log Data ) I Return
PC Card is not inserted.
However, if the factory provides a PC card and
instructs you to insert it into the card slot (label side
up). If instructed by the factory, select "Gyro. Sensor
Logs ON." Follow the factory procedure for gathering
test data, and properly ending the test.
Log Data
I Return
Logging VP Data OFF
BACK
Send GPS Time
This screen is for factory use only. It allows adjustment
of the GPS time. This display updates in real time.
"GPS Time" is the time as received from the GPS
satellites. It is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Date, Hour, Minute, and "Set" should not be used.
Send GPS Time
IReturn I
GPS Time xxxx.xx.xx x:xx:xx
~
Year xxxx
~
Hour x
~
[Y] [Y]
Month
~
Minute xx
~
x [Y]
[Y]
Day
~
Second
~
x [Y]
xx
[Y]
Demo Mode
This screen is for factory use only, and should always
be set to "OFF." Occasionally "DEMO" setting is turned
"ON" when vehicles are being used at Auto Shows or
similar events. Turning this feature on, allows the
navigation system to automatically follow a route to a
destination when the vehicle is stationary. The "Speed"
can change the speed of the demo mode.
Demo Mode I Return
Demo OFF
Speed 150 ms ~ ~
Mic Level
This diagnostic allows you to independently test the
microphone and the NAVI TALK and BACK buttons.
They are used to activate the voice control system. The
microphone is located near the map light in the roof
console. It is directional, and works best with the voice
coming from the drivers seat .
Press the TALK button on the steering wheel, and in a
normal voice say "testing." The TALK indicator on
the screen should momentarily turn green, and the
text "Now Recording ... " should appear in yellow. If
the TALK indicator on the screen does not briefly turn
green, then check the wiring from the steering wheel
TALK button to the navigation unit. Ifthere is no "Mic
Level" movement when you speak, then you should
check the wires running from the microphone in the
roof console to the HFL unit and the navigation unit. If
the wires are OK, the microphone must be faulty;
replace the roof console (see page 20-101) .
Press the BACK button on the steering wheel. This
should cause the BACK indicator on the screen to
momentarily turn green. If it does not briefly turn to
green, then check the wiring from the steering wheel
BACK button to the navigation unit.
MicLevel I Return
MicLevel
Steering Switch
[ ( ( I ~ 1 [r--SA":""C-K-'
(cont'd)
23-171
BACK
Navigation System
Version
This screen displays. the current version information for
the navigation system software. In addition, this screen
.allows the loading of updated software if requested by
the factory, or instructed by a Service Bulletin. Software
may be loaded from a CD or a PC card.
Program Flash:.Displays the version ofthe navi
software in memory.
Program Disc: If displayed, this value represents the
version of the navi software on thenavi DVD.
NOTE: The last two letters ofthe Program "Flash" or
DVDfields indicate which DVD is installed in the unit.
The letters "KA" imply that a "United States" DVD is
installed. Iftheletters are KC, then a "Canada" DVD is
installed. (See coverage discussion below.)
IPL, APL, DBOOT, and System uCom, are all for
factory use.
Model: For this model, the field should begin with
"STX." ,
Download: Do not touch, unless instructed by the
factory.
Version Return I
Program Flash x.xx.xxKA
Program Disc
IPL x.xxx.xxx
APL
OB001 x.x.xxx
System uCom x.xxx.
Model STXA I Download I
There are two navigation DVDs produced for this model.
The white DVD labeled "United States" is forthe US
market and contains maps for the contiguous 48 US
states, and some southern portions of Canada.
Clients wanting additional northern coverage in
Canada, can purchase a "Canada," DVD by
contacting the DVD fulfillment desk.
The gray DVD labeled "Canada," is for the Canada
market, and contains maps for all of Canada, plus
some of the northern US states. If clients with this
DVD require full US coverage (including states like
Florida and Texas), they may purchase a "United
States" DVD by contacting the DVD fulfillment desk.
23-172
XM (HIP)
These screens allow troubleshooting of XM or HIP
(AcuraLink) problems. Select the item you want to
troubleshoot, and follow the diagnostic instructions .
XM(HIP) 1 Return
I XM (HIP) System Link
I XMI,HIP) ECU
BACK
XM (HIP) System Link
This diagnostic tests the cables connecting the XM (HIP)
components.
XM(HIP)System Lii'!k
I Return I
OK
XM(HIP)ECU
Select the .item you want to troubleshoot, and follow
the diagnostic instructions.
Note: Only select "DATA RESET" when instructed,
Selecting "DATA RESET" will-clear the AcuraLink
registration, and the AcuraLink service willresettothe
factory default.lfthe vehicle was already registered for
the AcuraLink service, it will have to be reactivated by
calling Acura Client Services before all featur.es will be
available. The reactivation will cause the-Feature Guide
to start over at the first message, which will result in the
client getting repeated messages.
Select Telematics diagnosis item
1\
Telematics seN diagnosis
\
2\ DTClogdata \
0
3 Diagnostic Info
4 Recalls I Campaigns
""
6} Data reset
J DOWN
~
Telematics Self-Diagnosis
This screen used to do self-diagnosis for the XM (HIP).
Telematics ECU
Camelot: xxXxxx.xx.xxxx
V850: xxxxxxxx.xx.xx
IPL: xxxxxxxX.xx
PLD:xx
Voltage: x x
Hours: XXXXX::IQ(
DTC Log Data
You can check the DTC log data in this screen.
Select the DTC logdatii
1 \ DTC logdata # 1
\
r
.6.
2\ DTC logdata # 2 \
UP
0;
DTC logdata # 3
DTC logdata # 4
DOWN
""
6/ DTC logdata # 5
}
~ II
NOTE: When DTC 82200-82249 is displayed. It is in
engineering mode and is not for trouble diagnosis.
(cont'd)
23-173
BACK
Navigation System
Save users Memory
When replacing the navigation unit, this function allows
the dealer to transfer the client's personal data to the
new navigation unit
This is similar to saving and entering the client's audio
presets when replacing an audio core. The transferred
information includes their Setup settings, and personal
addresses. The dealer inserts a PC card (like the PC card
in the HDS), and then selects the "Save users Memory"
function. The two functions in this diagnostic screen are
Export and Import saves the client's data to the PC card,
and Import moves the PC card files to the new core.
See the FAOs below for information regarding PC cards,
and the use of this function.
Save Users Memory I I Return
EXPORT
Export
Select this button to move the client's data from the
original navigation unit to the PC card. Select "YES" on
the "Export User Data" Confirmation screen. The
process takes only a couple of seconds. The system
stores two small files on the card.
Save Users Memory I Return
[
0
Export User Data?
I
Yes
I
I
No
I
23-174
Import
After installing the client's original DVD in the new core,
allow the system to boot up. Insert the PC card in the
new core and enter the navigation diagnostic mode.
Save Users Memory I Return
EXPORT IMPORT
Select "YES" on the "Import Confirmation" screen.
Import moves the two files stored by the Export process
from the PC card to the new navigation unit. When the
transfer is finished (a few seconds) the system will
automatically reboot. After the system reboots, remove
the PC card from the PC slot.
Ifthe Import button is grayed out, follow the
troubleshooting in the FAOs below. The client's files
can only be transferred to a new core if the "Model"
and the "Program Flash" shown on the "Version"
screen are the same. These files cannot be transferred
from TSX to MDX, or from a MDX with version 1.07.00
to a MDX with version 1.32.00.
BACK
PC Card FAQs
Question Answer
Where do we buy the flash memory or You needs a "PCMCIA type II" adaptor and a flash memory chip (see
adaptors, and what do we ask for? below for memory chip types). They can be purchased at a computer,
or office supply store. The card will have the same size and shape as
the PC card in the HDS. Adaptors that accept multiple flash types are
not recommended.
What memory flash chips will work with The flash memory devices that have been tested include Compact
what adaptors? Flash (CF), and ATA style (like the card in the HDS). Other card types
and flash memory chips may work, but have not been tested.
What capacity card do I need for this A memory chip with capacity of 64 MB to 2 GB will work. The two
function? files moved to the card during "export" are less than a Megabyte in
size. An adaptor and flash memory can be obtained for less than 50
dollars.
Should the dealer have a dedicated card Yes, treat the card as a dedicated "special tool" that should be used
for the Export and Import navigation anytime your '07 or later client needs their navi personal files
function? transferred to a new ECU core.
What device can I use to maintain the card, Any computer store sells USB style PC card readers that accept the
and delete files card, and allow you to perform file maintenance on your card. Most
~ t o p s will also accept the card.
Can we move the client's data to different No, the files are model specific and will only load into a navi ECU
models (like moving TSX navi data to a with the same part number.
MDX)?
Can we move the client's data to the same The client's files can only be transferred to a new core, if the
vehicle with a different software version? "Model" and the "Program Flash" shown on the "Version" screen
(Like moving version 4.51) are the same. Files cannot be transferred from TSX to MDX (different
model code), or '07 MDX to '08 MDX (different versions)
The "Export" button is "grayed out" Why? A PC card with its media memory chip is not inserted properly.
Check the card's edge connector, and the pins inside the
navigation unit (with a flashlight) for damage
The "Import" button is "grayed out". Why A PC card with it's media memory chip is not inserted
is this? The model code of the files stored during export do not match the
model code of the new navi ECU
The version of the files from the original navi ECU are not the
same as the version in the new ECU
Will other files on the card like images or No, the system simply adds two small files that are recognized by
music files prevent the Export/Import the new core when performing the Import function. However, if the
function from working? card is full, the Export function won't work correctly.
Do I have to delete the files on the card After the transfer of client data to the new core, the files remain on
after each transfer ofthe client's data? the card. Since this is confidential information, we recommend that
you delete these files after each use. Please note that each time you
export navi files of the same model and version, the files are
overwritten. If you do not delete the files after use, over time the
card will accumulate two files for each version of the 5 or so Acura
navi models.
What format should be used if the card It is unlikely that the card will ever need formatting, however the FAT
needs reformatting? file system should be used
I can't enter the navi diagnostic mode to Some internal navi ECU failures may make it impossible to use the
do the Export/Import function. How can I Export/Import function.
transfer the client's data?
(cont'd)
23-175
BACK
Navigation System
Question Answer
Why won't the Export or Import functions The card may not be fully inserted into the slot. Eject the card, and
work? What do I check as part of inspect for warping or damage to the edge connector. Never use
troubleshooting? excessive force to insert a card. This can result in damage to the
. pins in the rear of the slot.
The card may not contain files that are recognized by the new core.
Navi date can only be transferred between cores with the same
"Model code", and with the same navi "Program flash" version.
The flash memory chip type may not be accepted by the system.
Only Compact Flash, and ATA cards have been tested.
The card's PCMCIA adaptor may be preventing a known good card
from being recognize. Avoid multi slot type PCMCIA adaptors that
accept several different flash memory types
The card may be full and as a result the files are stored, but
without any data. Export and import appear to function, but move
nothing. Delete unused files from-the card.
There may not be any files on the card. If the card has a "write
protection" switch, make sure it is turned off before attempting to
use the Export function.
Although flash memory chips are reliable, occasionally they
develop bad sectors or other formatting errors that prevents them
from accepting files. The card should be reformatted using the
FATformat.
The card may have been formatted using the format "NTFS". Only
. the "FAT" format is accepted by the system.
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) cards may not work properly in the system
and can overheat or quit functioning, particularly in a hot vehicle.
They are not recommended.
Before performing the import function, ensure that the client's
original DVD is loaded into the new core and workiQflProperly.
Are there any error messages to tell me There are no error message associated with the Import/Export
what is wrong? feature. Followthe troubleshootil'!9. t ~ s above.
23-176
BACK
Error Message Table
Screen Error Message Solution
Navigation system is unable to acquire a Make sure there is nothing on the dashboard blocking the GPS
proper GPS signal. antenna.
If not, move the vehicle to an open space away from tall buildings,
trees, etc.
Window tinting and after-market devices can affect the GPS
reception.
Navigation unit door is open or No DVD Make sure the navigation DVD is the correct color and is not
disc installed. Please check system. scratched or damaged. Make sure it is installed with the label side up
and the navigation unit door is snapped fully closed.
No DVD disc, please check system. Check that the navigation DVD is installed with the label side up.
Display temp is too high. System will shut This message will appear briefly when the display temperature is
down until display cools down. too high, and then the display will turn off until the temperature
cools down. The system will turn back on when the display cools
down.
Outside temperature is low, system will The temperature is below -30 'C and the navigation unit has
take a while to start up. difficulties reading the DVD. The system will start up when the
temperate warms up.
DVD disc reading error (unformatted), Check the DVD for the correct color and software version. Also check
please consult your dealer. for deep scratches or other damage. Make sure you are using an
official Honda navigation DVD (white in color). The system cannot
read other mapping databases or video DVDs. If the problem
persists, see your dealer.
Route has not been completed. Please try Routing to or from a place (new area) that is not in the database. Try
again from a different location. planning a different route to or from a different location that is
clearly displayed on the map (map matched).
No alternate route found. Original route No alternate route method was found. The original route method will
will be guided. be used.
This destination cannot be found in The destination was not found in the database. Try another
database. destination nearby, or select the destination with the joystick.
23-177
BACK
Navigation System
Voice Control Switch Test
24-137).
2. Remove the 20P connector from the cable reel.
18 terminals in each switch position according to
the table.
Position Resistance
OFF About 10 kQ
Talk button pressed About 2.2 kQ
Back button pressed About 640 Q
voice control switch (see page 17-23).
5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each
Terminal
I I I I
6. If the diode test is not as specified, replace the
voice control switch (see page 17-23).
23-178
BACK
Forced Starting of Display
SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-0010100
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the
navigation service connector (8) located behind the
navigation unit.
B
4. Check that the diagnosis menu for the picture
diagnosis starts up, and then changes to the
system link menu.
NOTE: If the display fails to display the system link
screen, refer to no picture is displayed (see page
23-134).
DVD-ROM Replacement
NOTE: When the DVD-ROM is re-inserted or replaced, a
map match must be done (see page 23-103).
2. Push the open button (A) of the navigation unit
located under the driver's seat.
I
B
3. Press the EJECT button (S).
4. Remove the DVD-ROM.
5. Insert the new DVD-ROM with the white label
facing up.
A
6. Close the front cover. Do not turn the ignition
switch OFF; watch the navigation screen until the
data is downloaded to the navigation unit.
BACK
Navigation System
Navigation Unit Removall
Installation
NOTE:
If possible, have the client record any personal
information from the navigation system that will be
lost.
Ifthe navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a
Map Match must be done (see page 23-103).
Dealer should do save users memory (see page
23-174) if replacing unit.
1. Remove the DVD-ROM (see page 23-179).
2. Remove the Driver's seat (see page 20-141).
3. Remove the two mounting nuts (A) from the
navigation unit (B).
D
.A
4. Remove the cover (G), then disconnect the
navigation unit connectors (D).
5. Remove the bolts, and the brackets (A).
7. Install the DVD-ROM, then enter the 4-digit security
code.
8. Do the system initialization (see page 23-102).
9. Give the new security code to the client.
23-180
GPS Antenna Removal/Installation
1. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90). ,
2. Remove the display unit (see page 23-181).
3. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector (A), and
remove the bolt (B).
B
c
A
4. Remove the GPS antenna (G).
5. Install the antenna in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Display Unit Removal/Installation
1. Remove the dashboard upper visor (see page
23-91).
2. Remove the two screws (A) and bolt (B), then
remove the display unit (e).
c
3. Disconnect the navigation display connector (D).
4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Be
careful not to drop the forward bolt behind the
dashboard.
Interface Dial Removai/installation
1: Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90).
2. Remove the harness cover (A).
A
3. Disconnect the interface dial connecter (A), then
remove the interface dial (B).
A
4. Install the dial in reverse order of removal.
23-181
BACK
Navigation System
Rearview Camera Removal/Installation
1. Remove the rear license trim (see page 20-214) and
tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-96).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the
screws and the rearview camera (8).
A
23-182
BACK
AUDIO UNIT (Built into the DVD player)
page 23-14
page 23-90
ANTENNA SUBLEAD
/
DIGITAL AUDIO LEAD
~ ; ; ; ~ ~ ; ; ; ~ REAR CONTROLLER and SCREEN
page 23-190
INTERFACE DIAL
page 23-26
page 23-181
page 23-215
DIGITAL AUDIO
SUBLEAD
(With rear entertainment)
page 23-191
Replacement,
page 23-217
(cont'd)
23-183
BACK
AM/FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
AM/FM ANTENNA
LEFT SATELLITE SPEAKER
Test/Replacement,
page 23-93
XMANTENNA
Replacement,
page 23-98
(XM RECEIVER)
page 23-23
SUBWOOFER
23-184
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
LEFT FRONT DOOR TWEETER
FRONT CENTER SPEAKER
RIGHT FRONT
DOOR TWEETER
Test/Replacement,
page 23-92
STEREO AMPLIFIER
page 23-20
page 23-95
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
BACK
RES disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-201)
RES disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-201)
RES disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-202)
RES disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-202)
Black picture is shown on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-203)
display
White picture is shown on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-204)
display/display lock
Display area picture has lines or has Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-204)
shifted
Display does not go off when screen Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-205)
is closed
No display appears on the rear Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-205)
controller indicator
No sound/no display with auxiliary Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-206)
video unit inputs
Wired headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-207)
distorted, volume does not change,
or there is no sound
Wireless headphones do not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-208)
or there is static in DVD mode
Wireless headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-210)
sound is distorted, there is static,
volume does not change, orthere is
no sound in all modes
Wireless remote control does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-211)
work (all buttons)
work (source select buttons)
work (rear power button)
Screen backlight does not dim/ Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-212)
remains dim
An error code is displayed Enter the self-diagnostic function with the
wireless remote control (see page 23-196),
then scroll to function 3.
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-214)
DISC DISTINCTION indicator does
not come on/does not go off
Wireless remote control Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-214)
illumination does not come on
IIJIlID

Also check for
Peeled label stuck in
player
Wrong type disc
player
Wrong type disc
player
Wrong type disc
player
Wrong type disc
Poor connections or
disconnect device
Low batteries in
accessory device, or
disconnected from power
source
Wireless headphone
batteries (see page 23-217)
Wireless remote control
23-185
BACK
System Description
The rear entertainment system is composed of a special DVD player unit built into the audio unit, a rear controller, and
screen wireless headphones, wireless remote control, and auxiliary jack assembly.
System Components
Audio Unit
Provides rear system power
Provides control for the rear functions
Allows the rear display to show information about the rear system status
Provides a method to stop the rear passenger's from having control of the rear system
Built into the DVD player
Rear Screen
Has a flip down 9" display
Allows information on the LCD
Display does not work when pushed beyond the detent
Provides output for infrared (lR) headphones
Wireless Headphone
Has automatic ON/OFF control
Has volume control
Works only in the second and third row seats, not outside the vehicle or in the front seats
Wireless Remote Control
Allows remote operation of the audio functions.
Allows input from standard video game and video equipment using RCA connectors
Provides three headphone connectors and separate volume controls
Audio Remote Switch
Allows operation of the audio functions from the steering wheel.
Voice Control Switch
Allows operation of the audio functions through the navigation system.
Navigation Display
Allows operation of the audio functions through the navigation system.
23-186
BACK
Operating Method
NOTE: Refer to the Owner's Manual for full operation details.
Audio Unit
1. Turn the rear entertainment system ON .
After the main power switch "VOL PUSH PWR" (A) is turned ON, push "REAR PWR" switch (8) to turn the rear
system ON. To turn the rear system OFF, push "REAR PWR", and to turn the whole system OFF, push "VOL
PUSH PWR". .
A
(cont'd)
23-187
BACK
2. Using the select button.
Front source button, indicator light ON: control of front source from audio unit.
Rear source button, indicator light ON: control of rear source from audio unit.
The rear source will automatically revert back to front source after 10 seconds if no operation is done.
FRONT SOURCE BUTTON
REAR CONTROL OFF BUTTON
3. Rear Control Enable/Disable.
By pushing the "REAR CTRL OFF" button the LED indicator will be ON and the rear seat passenger's will not be
able to control the system from the remote. The rear display will show rear control OFF. Press button again to
enable.
23-188
BACK
4. Viewing the display .
The display (A) (built into the climate control unit) indicates the status of the front and rear systems.
A
5. Rear speaker automatic OFF Function .
By turning the rear speaker OFF you can reduce the interference between the front source and the rear source
(Headphone). The speaker will be turned ON/OFF automatically when the front and rear have different sources
selected. When the rear speaker is in the OFF mode, the LCD display on the audio unit displays the rear speaker
icon shown.
RRSPOFF:
Wireless Remote Control
Remote control switch use and function .
With "Rear Power ON" and rear control enabled, the rear passengers can control the functions with the remote,
except volume .
Rear passenger can control the functions, unless the rear control has been turned off by the front user.
Source selection
Selection (menu) Rear power
Selection (music, station)
play, pause, etc.
(cont'd)
23-189
BACK
Rear Controller and Screen Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing a rear controller and screen connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
CONNECTOR B (2P)
CONNECTOR A (24P)
CONNECTOR A (24P) Cavity Wire Connect to
Cavity Wire Connect to A13 BRN Audio unit (RR BUS SH)
A1 GRN Rear controller and A14 PUR Audio unit (RR BUS-)
screen (+B) A16 BLU Audio unit (RR NTCS)
A3 LTBLU Audio unit (RR BUS+) A17 BRN Audio unit (RR NTSC SH)
A5 PNK Audio unit (RR NTSC A18 RED Audio unit (RES AUDIO
GND) OUTL)
A6 WHT Audio unit (RES AUDIO A19 BLK Audio unit (RES AUDIO
OUTGND) OUTR)
A7 BRN Audio unit (RES AUDIO A20 BLU Auxiliary jack assembly
OUTSH) (HPR OUT)
A8 PNK Auxiliary jack assembly A21 GRN Auxiliary jack assembly
(HP R/L OUT GND) (HP LOUT)
A9 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly A22 PNK Navigation (SCTY3)
(HP R/L OUT SH) A23 RED Dash lights brightness
A10 LTGRN Audio unit (SCTY 4) controller
A11 LTBLU Lights-on signal A24 BLK Ground (G506)
A12 YEL Audio unit (SYSTEM
ACC)
CONNECTOR B (2P)
Cavity Wire Connect to
B1
--
Audio unit (DIG AUDIO
SIG)
B2
--
Audio unit (DIG AUDIO
SH)
23-190
BACK
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With rear entertainment)
When replacing an auxiliary jack assembly connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
Cavity Wire Connect to
1 RED Dash lights brightness
controller
2 LTBLU Lights-on signal
3 BRN Rear controller and
screen
(HP R/L OUT SH)
4 LTBLU Audio unit
(AUX VIDEO IN
5 BRN Audio unit
(AUX AUDIO R/L SH)
6 WHT Audio unit (COMN CHK)
7 PNK Audio unit
(HP R/L OUT GND)
8 BRN Audio unit
(AUX VIDEO IN SH)
9 PUR Audio unit (AUX VIDEO
IN)
10 GRN Audio unit (AUX VIDEO L)
11 PNK Audio unit
(AUX AUDIO R/L GND)
12 BLU Audio unit (AUX AUDIO
R)
13 GRN Audio unit (HP LOUT)
14 BLU Audio unit (HP ROUT)

BACK
Circuit Diagram
BA1TERY
N . 1{BAl) 1120 AI NoJI5OAJ
IGNmON SWITCH
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
+ +-+ ...... -cru:>---cJ"".'-"--WHT
IGI
BAT
PNK ____________ ______
v CONlROLUNm
ACC ACCCUTRELAY
23-192
n
ACC lIJ'nd ON lUI RED . i VEL
[>-
5 3 TRANSMISSION
PCM LT GRN . PNK RANGE SWITCH
IPooNI
N 32110AI
N39

H?
XMRECEIVER
c IACURALlNK
CONlROLUNITJ
N.4140AJ B4 N.5I1DAJ E5

L !!!.WHT------.---.,

N . 8130AJ
r -
y SUB:OOFER
N . 813DAI
MAIN
UNGER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
T
P R
B18
tB
GND
BS
B
g
..l
LEFTTWEETER
G504
REAR STEREO
CONlROLLER AMPLIfIER
,ndSCREfN
tC24
XM
RECEIVER
SW
PRE
tB IN-
SW
PRE
INt
B23 B14 830
GN
A3 A19 A6
tB SW SW
PRE PRE
IN- INt
FRLOR FRLDR
SPKR- SPKRt
B7 B16
G N lilT
R.
PRE
IN-
B8
FL
PRE
INt
824
HVAC
BUS
FR
PRE
IN-
BID
AUDIO UNIT
FR
PRE
INt
826
RL
PRE
IN-
B11
RL
PRE
INt
827
G N P K BU P R LT U
A24 AID A25 All
R. FL FR FR
PRE PRE PRE PRE
IN- INt IN- INt
RL
PRE
IN-
A27
RL
PRE
INt
STEIIEOAMPURER
FRR FRR RRL RRL
SPKR- SPKRt SPKR- SPKRt
B6 B15 B4 B13
B 1'1 R D P K
AU
g
M M
1 2 1 2 1 2
\
DRIVER'S RlGHTTWEmII
FRONT LEFTREAR
DOOR SPEAKER PASSENGER'S OQORSPEAKER
DOOR SPEAKER
K-LINE
RR
PRE
IN-
B13
Y
A28
RR
PRE
IN-
RRR
SPKR-
B3
ON
1
RR
PRE
INt
BiN
A14
RR
PRE
INt
RRR
SPKRt
B12
B U
2
RIGIITREAR
OOORSPEAKER
CTR
PRE
IN-
B16
CTR
PRE
IN-
A18
CTR
SPKR-
CTR
PRE
INt
B32
BU
CTR
PRE
INt
A4
CTR
SPKRt
B2 B11
P K B
1 2
I \
FRONT

P R
A14 A17
ACC tB
BACK
I
R
NAVIGATION
UNIT
Ate JOG JOG
IIOA! BUS SH
INTERFACE DIAL
GND
r
G506
LIGHT
ILED!
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
IlntOOgoUD'
control modul.1
RS RS
BI9
AUDIO
REMOTE
4i5 4i5 RS RS
SH GND 485- 48St
B22 B20 B6 B5
BAN ,.':.
W
I PNK BLU GRN I
art- ---- ---- -j
TA'S A2 AI AI5
RS RS RS RS
4i5 4i5 485- 4S5-t
SH GND
AUDIO UNIT
STEREOAMPLIRER
WOOFER WOOFER SUBWSW
PREt PRE- tB
BID BI A20
No.12110AJ
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/RELAYBOX
L
D-PUI
SPKR-
B8
NAVIGATION
UNIT
RG RG
SH GND
L R
D-PLR D-PUI
SPKRt SPKR-
BI1 as
RG
Lt
R
D-PLJI
SPKRt
B14
,...--
Y Bi<
G606
BLU P K
WIT llRY U llD
4538 S 12 12

LEFT
SA1ELL1TE
SPEAKER
RIGIIT
SATELLITE
SPEAKER
B3
AUDIO
REMOlE
GND
--------- :Shleldlng
(cant'd)
23-193
BACK
AUXILIARYJACK ASSEMBLY
AUX AUX AUX AUX
VIDEO VIDEO AUX AUOIO AUOIO
No3a5AJ
HPR/L HPRIL
MAIN NAVIGAllON
UNDER-HOOD DISPLAY
IllUMI-
iSW/RES1
IllUMft HP L HP R OUT OUT IN IN VIDEO RIL RIL AUX AUX CONN
FUSE BOX UNIT
IINTI OUT OUT GND SH SH GND IN SH GND AUDIOR AUDIO L CHK
10
T T
INTERIOR 2 13 14 7 3
UGVLAY LTrf'G .:::: .:::'
V I LLTGRN-1: . h
G P K LT W .. I N Bu L
______ __ ______ ____________ __ __ ____ -, f:,'
HPR HPR/L HPRIL
OUT OUT OUT
GND SH
11 12
:1' n" w ' n' ....... '.
B B N
.--
E15 E14 E12 E3 E9 El0 El E2 E9 C2 Cl C13 C14 C15
RES RES RES DIG RR RR RR AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX CONN
AUDIO AUOIO AUDIO AUDIO NTSC NTSC NTSC VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIOR AUDIOL CHK
OUT OUTL OUTR SH SH GNO IN IN IN RIL RIL
GND SH GND SH GND
AUDIOUNIT
liNE
UNE LINE OUT
GANEY GANEY GANEY GANEY GANEY
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDID AUDIO
GND OUTt OUT- SH B-CAN SH R- Rt L- Lt
os C17 C6 C5
No.32110AJ No21110A)
UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
FUSEjRELAY FUSE/RELAY
BOX BOX
T T
PUR VEL
No5)10AJ
UNDER-DASH GAUGE CONTRDL
FUSE/RELAY MODULE
BmBOy YY'
1
1 IIJl \5 \4 \3
1
BLK WHY WHY RED
MICU
:, BRN \7 LTGRN
: Y.
T l .... t
.... -1 V \J LTjRN
HANDSFREEUNK ;
LTBLU PUR BRN CONTROLUNIT :
D4 D13
BRN ,.-::.
Lt
WHY
os
RED
D14
GRN BLK
.
: B5 G606
B-CAN
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT IXM RECEIVER)
HFT
COMM HFT HFT HFT HFT NY NY NY NY NY
SH COMM4 COMM3 C0MM2 COMMl SH TX- TXt RX- RXt
110 B15 B7 B16 B8 A15 A14 A4 A13 A3
BRN BRN
L
"
L
"
1
ti-lll) tlll-i)
HANDSFREEUNKCONTROLUNIT NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION UNIT UNIT
G504 L _________________________________________________________________ _
)W"IIhAcuraUnIc)
23-194
BACK
:CANfine
------ ...... :Shielding
AM/FM ANTENNA
AlirENr LiAo
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,
H3 Hl
ANTtB SIG
AUDIOUNIT
------------------..,
GANET
--"--"------1
BUS GANET GANET AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
SH BUS- BUSt SH Rt L- Lt ACC
SATELLITE
SlGNALANTENNA

,
,
.'
Cl
D3 Dl0 D9
BRN ",:

GRN
,
.1
BRN
No5110AJ
D4 013 D5 D14 D6 D2
UNDSi-DASH
RJS/RElAY
BOX
r
BRN .. -:.
.. --- ----
"
Lt
WHT WHT GRN BLK RED
ACURAUNKCONTROL UNIT
IXM REC8VER) ACURAUNK CONTROLUNIT IXMRECEI'IEftJ
GANET GANET
GANET GANET BUS BUS GANEf GANET
BUSt BUS- SH SH BUS- BUSt
Al All AlB A3 Al0 A9
__-__ __
'-_+' RED t , ' RED ---'0:----'
, , I I I ,
I I I I I I
L-______ __ ./ __
IVflthACU1IILinid
NAVIGATION
UNIT
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY UNIT
GNO
All
I
G606
SATELLITE
SIGNAL ANTENNA

"'1
. .

;
.
Bl
(Without AcuraUnkl
23-195
BACK
The rear entertainment system has a self-diagnostic function that shows on the display. To run the self-diagnostic
function, do the following:
How to Enter the Self-diagnostic Function with the Audio Unit
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) position.
2. To run the self-diagnostic, press the REAR PWR button four times within 3 seconds and hold the REAR PWR
button in on the fourth time until the diagnostic screen appears.
REAR PWR BUTTON
Continue to hold button Continue to hold b.utton
down for 1 second down for 1 second
O N - - - - - ~
Audio unit
REAR PWR button
OF
Within 5 seconds
23-196
BACK
How to Enter for Self-diagnostic Function with the Wireless Remote Control
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) position.
2. To run the self-diagnostic, press the DVD/AUX button, the AM/FM button, the ~ b u t t o n and then the AM/FM
button again. The buttons must be pressed in that order, and within 2 seconds of each other (see table), and the
self-diagnostic will begin.
~ BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON DVD/AUX BUTTON
DVDI AMI AMI
AUX FM ~ FM
::F=n=rr -rr=rr--
~ ~ ~
Within 2 seconds
Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
(cont'd)
23-197
BACK
R'earEntertainment System
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Select
Use the wireless, remote control to navigate within the self-diagnostic function.
LEFT/RIGHT button: Change the function mode
UP/DOWN button: Change the detection
ENTER button: Select the detection point
UP BUlTON
LEFT BUlTON
DOWN BUlTON
Function Category Check item or information Judge display
No.
1 CONNECT RR DISP Rear controller and screen connection check OK or NG
with GRN or RED
H/U Audio unit connection check OK or NG
with GRN or RED
AUX Auxiliary jack assembly connection check OKor NG
with GRN or RED
XM XM receiver connection check OKor NG
with GRN or RED
DIGITAL LINE Digital line connection check OK or NG
with GRN or RED
2 UNIT CHECK DISPLAYVER Rear controller and screen version and soft --
release day information
SUB-M VER Rear controller and screen sub u-com version --
and soft release day information
COSDVER Rear controller and screen COSD version and --
soft release day information
OSDVER Rear controller and screen COSD version and
--
soft release day information
RAM CHECK Rear controller and screen RAM check OKorNG
DISPPANEL Screen open or close condition OPEN or NG
+BVOLT +Bvoltage
* * V or Err
TEMP. Screen temperature
* * h or Err
23-198
BACK
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Display
1. CONNECT
I(IlID

The screen will display connection check status for each device while in this self-diagnostic mode.
If the RAM condition for the "RR DISP" (rear controller and screen) is faulty, the screen will display NG (red
color).
If the connection for the "H/U" (audio unit) is "XM" (XM receiver), or "AUX" (auxiliary jack assembly) is faulty,
the screen will display NG (red color).
If the digital line connection between the rear controller and screen and audio unit is faulty, the screen will
display NG (red color).
RAM check
Connection OK: Green color
Connection NG: Red color
Digital line connection check
Connection check
(cont'd)
23-199
BACK
2. UNIT CHECK
The screen will display device version, self-diagnostic status and screen status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
o If a connection to a device is no-good, the screen will display " __ ".
o If there is a change (analog to digital) of signal error for the categories "+8 VOLT" or "TEMP", the screen will
display "Err".
o The screen indicates open or closed condition of the screen.
23-200
Screen open/close condition
OPEN: Green color
CLOSE: Red color
RAM CHECKING: White color
Ram OK:.Green color
Ram NG: Red COLOR
Device version
Normal: Green color
Error: Red color
BACK
RES disc does not load
NOTE:
Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD
player unit (built into the audio unit). They may
damage the player mechanism.
Make sure the CD or DVD disc is compatible with the
system (refer to the Owner's Manual for more
information).
1. Try loading a disc.
Does the disc load?
YES-Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK
at this time .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Insert a known-good disc.
Does the disc load?
YES-The original disc is faulty .
RES disc does not eject
NOTE: Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD
player unit (built into the audio unit). They may damage
the player mechanism.
2. Try ejecting a disc.
Does the disc eject?
YES-Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit (built
into the audio unit) is OK at this time .
23-201
BACK
RES disc does not play
NOTE:
CD-R/RWs and' DVD-R/RWs will not work in the DVD
player unit (built into the audio unit).
Damaged or contaminated discs may not always play
properly.
Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD
player unit (built into the audio unit). They may
damage the player mechanism.
1. Try loading a DVD.
Does the DVD play (display and sound)?
YES-Intermittent failure; the DVD player unit (built
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Insert a known-good DVD.
Does the DVD play (display and sound)?
YES-The original DVD is faulty or is an unreadable
format .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the "CON NECT" of the rear entertainment
system self-diagnostic (see page 23-197).
Is the audio unit connect condition OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair the poor connection in the audio unit
connectors .
4. Substitute a known-good audio unit, then test the
audio unit.
Is the sound normal?
YES-Replace the original audio unit .
audio unit connectors, and recheck .
23-202
RES disc skips
NOTE:
Copy protected material on a CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW
disc will skip or not play.
Check for scratches, smudges, and fingerprints on the
disc.
1. Try playing a disc.
Does the disc skip?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit (built
2. Clean the disc, and recheck.
Does the disc play properly?
YES-The original disc was dirty .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Insert a known-good disc.
Does the disc play properly?
YES-The original disc is dirty or the wrong type .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Compare the disc skipping to a known-good vehicle
under the same conditions.
Does the known-good vehicle's disc skip under the
same conditions (over the same bumps and on the
same rough roads)?
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original audio unit .
BACK
Black picture is shown on the display
NOTE: If the navigation system, or XM radio do not
function properly, troubleshoot and resolve those
problems first.
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the rear
power switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
Does the screen come ON?
YES-Operation is normal at this time .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check for brightness settings in the display set up
(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
Are the display setting set properly?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Adjust the display setting and recheck the
function .
3. Check the No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Remove the display cover (see page 23-91). Then
check that the rear controller and screen is properly
connected.
Is the rear controller and screen connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
function .
5. Disconnect the rear controller and screen
connector A (24P).
the rear controller and screen connector A (24P)
and body ground.
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN CONNECTOR A (24P)
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the No.9
(7.5 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and
the rear controller and screen .
7. Reconnect the rear controller and screen connector
A (24P).
8. Measure the voltage between the rear controller
and screen connector A (24P) terminal No. 24 and
body ground.
=
YES-Replace the rear controller and screen .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the rear
controller and screen connector A (24P) terminal
No. 24 and body ground (G506) .
23-203
BACK
White picture is shown on the displayl
display lock
1. With the ignition switch ON (11), push the rear
power switch. ON to see ifthe screen turns ON.
Is it normal?
YES-Operation is normal .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Run the rear entertainment system self-diagnostic
(see page 23-196).
Is it normal?
NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original rear controller and
screen .
23-204
Display area picture has'lines or has shifted
power switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
Does the screen come have lines or has the image
shifted?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Operation is normal at this time .
2. Check the screen mode set up (refer to the Owner's
Manual for more information).
Are the settings set properly?
YES-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen, and r e c h ~ c k Ifthe symptom/indication'
goes away, replace the original rear controller and
screen .
NO-Adjust the display settings and recheck the
function .
BACK
Display does not go off when screen is
closed
1. With the ignition switch ON (II) and screen open,
push the rear power switch ON. Then close the
screen by pivoting it up.
Does the screen go off?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the lock switch.
Does the screen close securely?
YES-If the screen securely closes and the screen
does not go off, replace it..
NO-Relock the screen, and recheck. If the screen
will not securely lock into position, replace it..
No display appears on the rear controller
indicator
power switch ON to see ifthe screen turns ON.
Does the screen come on?
YES-Operation is normal at this i m e ~
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the operation and display of the screen, the
wireless remote control and the wireless
headphone.
Are the operation and display normal?
YES-Faulty rear indicator .
NO-
Screen faulty: Go to the "Black picture is shown
on the display" troubleshooting (see page
23-203) .
Wireless remote control faulty: Go to the
"Wireless remote control does not work (all
buttons)" troubleshooting (see page 23-211) .
Wireless headphone faulty: Go to the "Wireless
headphone sound is weak, distorted, volume
does not change, or there is no sound in all
modes" troubleshooting (see page 23-210) .
23-205
BACK
No sound/no display with auxiliary video
unit inputs
NOTE:
Check that the auxiliary device is properly connected,
and has fresh batteries or power source connected.
Do not connect an RCA type shorting plug with the
auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector, or system
damage may occur.
1. Connect an auxiliary video source, and check the
volume/display operation.
Is the display operate properly and does the audio
shound normal?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good auxiliary video unit and
recheck.
Does the auxiliary video unit operate properly?
YES-Original auxiliary video unit faulty .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the "CONNECT" of the rear entertainment
system self-diagnostic (see page 23-197).
Is the auxiliary jack assembly connect condition
OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page
23-217). Check that the auxiliary jack assembly is
properly connected.
Is the auxiliary jack assembly connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 5.
function .
23-206
6. Disconnect the audio unit connector C (24P), E (16P),
and the auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector.
C (24P), E (16P) and body ground according to the
table. Then check same terminals for continuity to
the harness shield terminals C2 and E1.
Audio unit connector Wire color
E8 PUR
C14 GRN
C13 BLU
C1 PNK
E21 LTBLU
YES-Short in the wire between the audio unit and
the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the
NO-Go to step 8.
connector C (24P), E (16P) and auxiliary jack
assembly 14P connector according to the table.
Audio unit Auxiliary jack Wire color
connector assembly
connector
E8 9 PUR
C14 10 GRN
C13 12 BLU
E2 4 LTBLU
C1 11 PNK
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open in the wire between the audio unit and
the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the
9. Connect an RCA type shorting plug to each audio
input (R and L).
NOTE: Do not connect the RCA type shorting plug
with the auxiliary jack assembly 14P connected, or
system damage may occur.
BACK
terminals ofthe auxiliary jack assembly.
No.10 H
No.12 H
No.1
No.1
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly .
11. Remove the RCA type shorting plug(s) and check
the same terminals again for continuity.
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly .
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indicated goes away,
still present, substitute a known-good rear
controller and screen and recheck. If the symptom/
indicated goes away, replace the original rear
controller and screen .
Wired headphone sound is weak, distorted,
volume does not change, or there is no
sound
1. Substitute a known-good wired headphone set and
recheck.
Does the symptom go away?
YES-Original wired headphone set is faulty .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Plug the wired headphones into the other ports of
the auxiliary jack assembly to check their condition.
Do all the ports have the same symptom?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly .
3. Check. that the wired headphone jack is properly
connected.
Is the headphone properly?
YES'"""Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnect the wired headphone connector,
and recheck the function .
4. Disconnect the auxiliary jack assembly 14P
connector and rear controller and screen 24P
connector.
(cont'd)
23-207
BACK
5. Check for continuity between rear controller and
screen connector A (24P) and body ground
according to the table. Then check same terminals
for continuity to the harness shield terminal A9.
Rear controller and screen Wire color
connector
A20 BLU
A21 GRN
YES-Short in the wire between the rear controller
and screen unit and the auxiliary jack assembly.
Replace the appropriate shielded harness .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check for continuity between the rear controller
and screen connector A (24P) and auxiliary jack
assembly 14P connector according to the table.
Audio unit Auxiliary jack Wire color
connector assembly
connector
A21 13 GRN
A20 14 BLU
A8 7 PNK
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly .
NO-Open in the wire between the rear controller
and screen and the auxiliary jack assembly.
Replace the appropriate shielded harness .
23-208
Wireless headphones do not work or there is
static in DVD mode
NOTE: Check the battery condition first.
1. Check the "CONNECT" and "UNIT CHECK" of the
rear entertainment system self-diagnostic
(see page 23-196).
If the self-diagnostic status indicator OK (Green
color)?
YES-Go to the "Wireless headphone sound is
weak, distorted, volume does not change, or there
is no sound in all modes (see page 23-210).".
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Check that the audio unit connector F (2P) is
properly connected to the audio unit.
Is the digital audio unit connector F (2P)
connected properly?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnect the audio unit connector F (2P) and
recheck the wireless headphone function .
4. Remove the rear controller and screen (see page
23-215).
5. Check that the rear controller and screen connector
B (2P) is properly connected to the rear controller
and screen.
Is the audio unit connector F (2P) connected
properly?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect the audio unit connector F (2P) and
recheck the wireless headphone function .
6. Disconnect the audio unit connector F (2P) from the
audio unit and the rear controller and screen.
BACK
connector F (2P) No.1 terminal and the rear
controller and screen connector B (2P) No. 1
terminal.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (2P)
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN CONNECTOR B (2P)
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the digital audio lead .
connector F (2P) No.1 terminal and body ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (2P)
YES-Replace the digital audio lead .
NO-Go to step 9.
connector F (2P) No.1 terminal No.2 terminal.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F {2P}
YES-Replace the digital audio lead .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck
the wireless headphone function.
Do the wireless headphones work in DVD mode?
NO-Replace the rear controller and screen .
23-209
BACK
Rear, .Entertainment System
Wireless headphone sound is weak, sound
distorted, there is t t i c ~ volume does not
change, or there is no sound in all modes
NOTE: Check battery condition first.
1. Substitute a known-good wireless headphone and
recheck.
Does the symptom gp away?
YES-Replace the original wireless headphones .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the lens on the rear edge of the rear screen
for dirt or damage.
Does the rear screen appear to be in good
condition? .
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen and recheck .
3. Substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck.
Does the symptom go away?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the audio unit connector E (16P), and
the rear controller and screen connector A (24P).
23-210
E (16P) and body ground according to the table.
Then check the same terminals for continuity to the
harness shield terminal E13.
Audio unit connector Wire color
E12 BLK
E14 RED
E15 WHT
YES-Short in the wire between the audio unit and
the rear controller and screen. Replace the
NO-Go to step 6.
,
connector E (16P) and rear controller and screen
connector A (24P) according to the table.
Audio unit Rear controller Wire color
connector and screen
E12 A19 BLK
E14 A18 RED
E15 A6 WHT
YES-Rear controller and screen faulty .
unit and rear controller and screen
BACK
Wireless remote control does not work (all .
buttons)
NOTE:
Check the wireless remote control battery condition
first.
Make sure that the rear power and rear control are on
(refer to the Owner's .Manual for more information).
1. Check the wireless remote control operation.
Does the wireless remote control operate
normally?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good wireless remote control
and recheck.
Does the wireless remote control operate
normally?
YES-Replace the original wireless remote
control..
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the audio unit operation.
Does the audio unit operate normally?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to the "Power switch will not turn ON (No
information display and no sound)"
4. Check the rear controller display.
Does the display operate normally?
YES-Replace the rear indicator sub-printed circuit
board (see page 23-215) .
NO-Go to the "No display appears on the rear
indicator" troubleshooting (see page 23-205). III
Wireless remote control does. not work
(source select buttons)
NOTE: Check the wireless remote control battery
condition first.
Does the source select button operate?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the "CONNECT" status ofthe rear
entertainment system self-diagnostic (see page
23-197).
Is the device connect condition OK?
YES-Replace the wireless remote control..
NO-Repair the connection for the device that has
a connection error indicated .
23-211
BACK
"
..,"
Wireless remote control does not' work (rear
power button) -
NOTE:"
Check the wireless remote control battery condition
first .
The audio 'unit main and rear pwr must be ON before
the wireless remote control power button will operate.
Does the audio unit indicate "REAR PWR"?
YES-Replace the wireless remote control..
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Press the "REAR PWR" button on the audio unit.
Is the rear power button on?
NO-Replace the wireless remote control..
23-212
Screen backlight does not dim/remains dim
2. Turn the combination light switch ON and OFF .
Does the screen backlight dim with the
combination light switch in the ON position?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the backlight settings in the display set up
(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
Are the display settings set properly?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Adjust the display settings and recheck the
function .
5. Check that the rear controller and screen and audio
unit are properly connected.
YES-Go to step 6.
function .
6. Disconnect the rear controller and screen
connector A (24P).
BACK
and screen connector A (24P) No. 11 terminal and
body ground. Turn the combination light switch on
and off to see if the voltage changes.
=
Is there battery voltage with the combination light
switch ON?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check the illumination of several other unit!
switches not related to the rear entertainment
system.
YES-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
interior light relay in the auxiliary under-hood relay
box and the rear controller and screen .
NO-Troubleshoot the interior lights. Start by
checking the interior light relay in the auxiliary
under-hood. relay box. If the relay is OK, check the
No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
If there is OK, check for open in the wire between
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the interior light
relay .
10. Reconnect the rear controller and screen connector
A (24P).
and screen connector A (24P) terminal No. 24 and
body ground.
=
YES-Replace the rear controller and screen .
NO-Repair open in the wire between rear
controller and screen connector A (24P) terminal
No. 24 and body ground (G506) .
23-213
BACK
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or DISC
DISTINCTION indicator does not come on/
does not go off
1. Check the DVD player unit operation.
Does the DVD player unit operate normally?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good disc and recheck.
Is it normal?
YES-Original disc is faulty .
replace the original audio unit .
23-214
Wireless remote control illumination does
not come on
Does the illumination for all the buttons come on
(10 seconds)?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Replace the batteries in the wireless remote control
and recheck (see page 23-218).
Does the wireless control illumination come on?
YES-The original batteries were faulty .
NO-Replace the wireless remote control..
BACK
Rear Controller and Screen Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
cover.
1. Remove the display cover.
2. Remove the mounting bolts, disconnect the
connector (A) from the rear controller and screen.
3. Remove the wireless remote control (A).
4. Remove the screws from the rear indicator (8).
5. Disconnect the cable (e) from the rear indicator.
6. Remove the screws, then remove the rear indicator
sub printed circuit board (A).
(cont'd)
23-215
BACK
Rear Controller and Screen Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the screws, then remove the screen (A)
and base (8). Disconnect the cable (C).
B
8. Remove the screws and lock switches (A).
23-216
9. Disconnect the cable (A), then remove the screws
and the rear control main printed circuit board (8).
B
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal,
and make sure the rear controller and screen
BACK
Replacement
With Rear Entertainment
1. Gently pull outthe console rear trim (A).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B), and remove the
auxiliary jack assembly (C).
3. Carefully pry out the auxiliary jack assembly.
Wireless Headphone Battery'
Replacement
1. Remove the battery cover (A) from the wireless
headphone and lift the cover.
2. Remove the battery (B) from the wireless
headphone.
Replacement Battery Size: AAA
3. Turn the left earpiece (A), and confirm that the
indicator (B) comes on after the battery is replaced.
B
23-217
BACK
Wireless Remote Control Battery Replacement
1. Remove the cover (A) from the remote control.
2. Remove the batteries (B).
Replacement Battery: BR3032
3. Confirm that each operation works normally after
replacing the batteries.
23-218
BACK
AcuraLink
Self-diagnostic Function, page.22-315
Rewriting the 000 Data on a new
Gauge control Module, page 22-336
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration,
page 22-338
AUDIO UNIT
page 23-14
page 23-90
STEREO AMPLIFIER
page 23-20
page 23-95
XMANTENNA
Replacement,
page 23-98
(XM RECEIVER)
page 23-23
page 23-96
Self-diagnostic Function, page 23-257
23-219
BACK
AcuraJ,.ink
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
A
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver). If it doesn't,
5. Select Telematics in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the Telematics menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If anyDTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If
no DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
23-220
BACK
AcuraLink service application does Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-252) Blown fuse No. 21 (7.5 A)
not work a'nd No. 32 (10 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G606
AcuraLink services do not work after Navigation system symptom Call Acura Client Services
replacing the AcuraLink control unit troubleshooting (see page 23-134) and request an activation.
(XM receiver) Call XM client care and
register the replacement
AcuraLink control unit
(XM receiver).
23-221
BACK
AcuraLink
System Description
The AcuraLink uses the client's cell phone or XM radioto and receive information about the vehicle. In
addition, the AcuraLink system has a Text-To-Speech engine, and will also have the capability to initiate voice or data
calls with the HandsFreeLink control unit.
The AcuraLink control unit (HIP) is very similar in design to an XM receiver that has additional communication features.
The main functions include:
Receiving and playing XM stations. Displaying station, song title and other information on the audio unit using the
GA-Netbus.
Receiving XM traffic channel data.
Gives "Feature tips.
Receiving AcuraLink messages and displaying then in the navigation display.
Processing DTC (diagnostic trouble code) error messages from the PCM, the SRS and other systems and displaying
them on the navigation display.
Sending DTC information to the AcuraLink servers using the client's cell phone (only if client has set up and enabled
this option).
DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
SERVER DIAGNOSIS
MESSAGE
23-222
ctJr
XMRADIO
BROADCASTING
______________ SYSTEM
BACK
Service Application
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) explanation (from server message and vehicle message)
Service information message
Recall Information
Quicktips
Place to provide feedback/view cautions that were not available when vehicle was initially sold
Correction of address and full name that is registered
Real time traffic information
Maintenance information message
Feature guide (90 days)
23-223
BACK
AcuraLink
Circuit Diagram
No.32110AI
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No. 2117.5 AI
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
IGI
L
I A12
VEL
YJ
No.5110AI
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
ACC GND
1A2
JAIl
BLK
I
1
-
-
G606
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT IXM RECEIVERI
CAN CAN NV
B-CAN +B HI LO RX+
:85 AI : A6 : A16 A3

. '

'"

LTGRN WHT WHT RED
1 5 4 3
HFT HFT HFT HFT HFT
NV NV NV NV COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM
RX- TX+ TX- SH 1 2 3 4 SH
A13 A4
A14 J.A15
BB B16 B7
B15 J.B6
.'
--- .. ......... .-",,", -.......
BRN BRN
.. '
W
,
........ ...........
w
.. .. -........ ,
-...... -
,
,
,
, ,
:
,
: RED WHT GRN BLK :
,
:
,
n
,
,
,
,
'.
.' BRN ". .
--_ ..
. ..'
8 "'f 24 22 23 9
HFT HFT HFT HFT HFT
COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM
1 2 3 4 SH
Y
,WHT RED GRN BLK HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT
,
HFT HFT HFT
WHT
MIC MIC MIC
B-CAN OUT + OUT- OUTSH
: 19 27
28 J.26

.. ---

.
t
"
.... __ ..
,
, , ,
: '

,
,
,
: :
WHT RED LTGRN : PUR LTBLU :

,
,

, ,

, ,
,
,
,
,

,
,

,
1 ::
:l--.. " .......

,
,

,

,
, ........
. ...... . ....

'" .. '
.. ... .
----
.
. ...........
.. .. __ ..
.... .......... .... .... .....

BRN
Fl F2 F3 F4 B6 B141B13
PCM ACTIVE DAMPER
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT
TPMSCONTROLUNIT YAW RATE-LATERAL/
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT LONGITUDINAL
SRS UNIT ACCELERATION SENSOR
DATA UNK CONNECTOR " STEERINGANGLESENSOR
, \
VV
.
WHT RED
.................. ........... ..
........ ! ........ .............. -...................... J, ........... : .......... .
. .
. ,
WHT RED LTGRN
CAN CAN B-CAN NV NV NV NV NV HFT HFT HFT
HI LO RX+ RX- TX+ TX- SH MIC MIC MIC
BLK
G606
23-224
, MICU
.
,
DOORMPCS
REARMICU
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
, IMMOBIUZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
oult OUT- OUT
SH
NA VlGA TlON UNIT
BACK
UNE
UNE UNE alIT
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT IXM RECEIVER)
alIT t 0l1T - SH
B3 Bll B2

----
T .. mUi
: \ .. " lTBLU :
LTBLU PURnt h
'" BRN ' ' BRN
11 25 10 C17 C5 C6 ____________________ -L __ ____ -.
UNE UNE UNE
OllTt OllT- alIT
SH

HFT HFT HFT
MIC MIC MIC
INSH INt IN-
12 13 14
BRN
W'
'"
. ,
......... I
,
,
,
MICROPHONE
11n1h.
roof console)
AUDIO UNIT
B-CAN
:C23
LTGRN
GPS
ANTENNA
NAVIGATION UNIT
SPEAKERS
,
l
"
RG RG
GND RG-Lt SH
A9 A21 AS
n
, BRN
.
B12 B5 Bll
RG RG-Lt RG
GND SH
: CAN line
:Shielding
(cant'd)
23-225
BACK
AcuraLink
ANTENNA LEAD
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT IXM RECEIVER) GANET
GANET GANET GANET GANET GANET GANET BUS
Lt L- Rt R- BUSt BUS- SH
SHIELDIXMI
Cl (';---------\
SIG ..... ---.... --1
C2 "4; ... __ .. __ -'
t--_ .....
A9 A19 AID A2D A7 A17 A18
" ' -- -
':
-- - " '

t' -" BRN
,
GRN RED:
BLK GRN RED WHT:
......--1 -,_-----.'' I
r:
23-226
.
GRN RED:
h
"
" BRN
AID A2D A9
GANET GANET GANET
BUSt BUS- BUS SH
NAVIGATION UNIT
R- G- B- C- SIGI SIGI
SIGI SIGI SIGI SIGI GND SH
.
: GRN RED
GRN RED
n
.. BRN
15 14
GANET GANET GANET
BUSt BUS- BUS SH
SIGI SIGI C- B- G- R-
SH GND SIGI SIGI SIGI SIGI
III T T l r I
" . 'Ic. _______ ...... _-I
---------- :Shielding
SATEULITE
SIGNAL ANTENNA
BACK
Note: Only select"DATA RESET" from the "XM (HIP) ECU" screen when instructed. Selecting "DATA RESET" will
clear the AcuraLink registration, and the AcuraLink service will reset to the factory default. If the vehicle was already
registered for the AcuraLink service, it will have to be reactivated by calling Acura Client Services before all features
will be available.
The AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the
following:
How to Enter the Self-diagnostic Function
NOTE: Always check for and repair any 8-CAN or F"CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the AcuraLink system.
2. Press the interface dial.
3. Press and hold the MAP/GUIDE, CANCEL, and MENU buttons at the same time for 3 seconds more, and the self-
diagnosis will begin.
MAP/GUIDE
button
CANCEL button INTERFACE DIAL
Select Diagnosis Items I Return
Car Status Functional Setup
XM (HIP) Version
4. Using interface dial, select the "NAVI System" from the "Select Diagnosis Items". Press the interface dial. The
display indicates "NAVI System Link", and will perform a Navi connection check for each device. If a connection is
faulty, the place where it is faulty will be indicated with "NG" (red color). If "XM (HIP)" indicator is "NG" (red
color), go to step 5.
Ale
Display
Navi System Link I Return I
I OK
'--_-' I I i iii I!O WI I
Acura Link indicator
5. Using the interface dial, select the "Return" from the "Navi System Link". Press the interface dial.
(cont'd)
23-227
BACK
AcuraLink
6. Using the interface dial, select the "XM (HIP)" from the "Select Diagnosis Items". Press the interface dial.
Select Diagnosis Items
I Return
Car Status Functional Setup
XM (HIP) Version
7. Using the interface dial, select the "XM (HIP) System Link" from the "XM (HIP)". Press the interface dial. The
display indicates "XM (HIP) System Link", and will perform an AcuraLink connection check for each device. If a
connection is faulty; the place where it is faulty will be indicated with "NG" (red color).
23-228
XM (HIP)
I XM (HIPI System Link . I
I XM (HIP) ECU I
( XM(HIP)System Link
l
F-CAN J l B-CAN r
T T
Navt
XM(HIP)ECU J
J. I
L
HFI. J [ Aud;o I
I Return
l
I Return I
I
OK
I
B
BACK
8. When a red color is indicated, check the continuity between the XM receiver unit and the device indicated in red.
Red color indicate Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if
device result is not obtained
F-CAN XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and Gauge control module of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector A (12P) disconnected No. 12 terminal of the Gauge control module
connector A (12P): There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal An open in the wire
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
No. 6terminal of the Gauge control module
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and PCM connector A (49P) of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
disconnected No. 48 terminal of the PCM connector A (49P):
No. 49 terminal of the PCM connector A (49P):
(20P) and VSA control unit 46P of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector disconnected No. 18 terminal of the VSA control unit 46P
connector: There should be continuity.
No. 17 terminal of the VSA control unit 46P
(20P) and TPMS control unit 20P of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector disconnected No.1 terminal of the TPMS control unit 20P
connector: There should be continui!Y,
No. 11 terminal of the TPMS control unit 20P
connector): There should be continuity.
(20P) and SH-AWD control unit of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector A (20P) disconnected No.10 terminal of the SH-AWD control unit
No. 20 terminal ofthe SH-AWD control unit
(20P) and SRS unit connector A (27P) of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
disconnected No. 11 terminal of the SRS unit connector A (27P):
No. 12 terminal ofthe SRS unit connector A (27P):
(cont'd)
23-229
BACK
AcuraLink
Red color indicate Test condition Test: Desired result . Possible cause if
F-CAN XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and active damper control unit of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector B (14P) disconnected No.1 terminal of the active damper control unit
connector B (14P): There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the No; 16 terminal An open in the wire
of XM,receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
No.8 terminal of the active damper control unit
XM receiver control unit connector A CheckJor continuity between the No.6 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and Yaw rate-Iateral/ of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P No.3 terminal of the Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
connector disconnected acceleration sensor 4P connector: There should
be continuity.
No.2 terminal ofthe Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector: There should
. be continuity.
(20P) and Steering angle sensor5P of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
connector disconnected No.4 terminal of the Steering angle sensor 5P
No.2 terminal of the Steering angle sensor 5P
,
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16 A short in the wire
(20P), Gauge control module terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P)
connector A (12P), PCM connector A and bodv around: There should be no continuity.
(49P), VSA control. unit .46P Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.6 A short in the wire
connector, TPMS control unit 20P terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P):
connector, SH-AWD control unit There should be no continuity.
connector A (20P), SRS unit Check for continuity between the No.1 and A short in the wire
connectorA (27P), active damper No. 16 terminals of XM receiver unit connector A
control unit connector B (14P),Yaw (20P): There should be no continuity.
rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
sensor 4P connector, Steering angle
sensor 5P connector disconnected
Gauge control module connector A Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16 A short in the XM
(12P), PCM connector A (49P), VSA terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) receiver unit
control unit 46P connector, TPMS and body ground: There should be no continuity.
control unit 20P connector, SH-AWD
control unit connector A (20P), SRS
unit connector A (27P), active
damper control unit connector B
(14P), Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector,
Steering angle sensor 5P connector
disconnected
BACK
Red color indicate Test condition
device
F-CAN XM receiver control unit connector A
(20P), PCM connector A (49P), VSA
control unit 46P connector, TPMS
control unit 20P connector, SH-AWD
control unit connector A (20P), SRS
unit connector A (27P), active
damper control unit connector B
(14P), Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor 4P connector,
disconnected
XM receiver control unit connectorA
(20P), Gauge control module
connector A (12P), VSA control unit
46P connector, TPMS control unit
20P connector, SH-AWD control unit
connector A (20P), SRS unit
connector A (27P), active damper
control unit connector B (14P), Yaw
XM receiver control A
connector A (12P), PCM connector A
(49P), TPMS control unit 20P
connector, SH-AWD control unit
XM receiver control unit connector A
(49P), VSA control unit 46P
connector A (12P), PCM connectorA
connector, TPMS control unit 20P
connector, SRS unit connector A
(27P), active damper control unit
connector B (14P), Yaw rate-lateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor4P
connector, Steering angle sensor 5P
connector disconnected
Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16
terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P)
and body ground: There should be no continuity.
Checkfor continuity between the No.6, No. 16
Check for continuity betweenth,e No.6, No. 16
IIJlID

Possible cause if
result is not obtained
A short in the Gauge
control module
A short in the PCM
A short in the VSA
control unit
A short in the TPMS
control unit
A short in the SH-
AWD control unit
A short in the SRS
unit
(cont'd)
23-231
BACK
AcuraLink
F-CAN XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16 A short in the active
(20P), Gauge control module terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) damper control unit
connector A (12P), PCM connector A and body ground: There should be no continuity.
connector A (27P), Yaw rate-lateral!
longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P
connector, Steering angle sensor 5P
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16 A short in the Yaw
(20P), Gauge control module terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) rate-Iateral/longitudi
connector A (12P), PCM connector A and body ground: There should be no continuity. nal acceleration
(49P), VSA control unit 46P sensor
control unit connector B (14P),
disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.6, No. 16 A short in the
(20P), Gauge control module terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) Steering angle
connector A (12P), PCMconnector A and body ground: There should be no continuity. sensor
B-CAN XM receiVer control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal An open in the wire
(16P) and MICU connector G (6P) of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
disconnected No.1 terminal ofthe MICU connector G (6P):
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal An open in the wire
(16P) and door MPCS connector A of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
(40P) disconnected No. 28 terminal of the door MPCS connector A (40
P): There should be continuity.
(16P) and rear MICU connector B of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
(34P) disconnected No.2 terminal of the rear MICU connector B
(34P): There should be continuity.
(16P) and combination switch 8P of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
connector disconnected No.4 terminal of the combination switch 8P
(16P) and relay control module of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
connector E (14P) disconnected No.1 terminal of the relay control module
connector E (14P): There should be continuity.
(16P) and power seat control unit ofXM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
connector B (40P) disconnected No. 40 terminal of the power seat control unit
23-232
BACK
Red color indicate Test condition
device
B-CAN XM receiver control unit connector B
(16P) and immobilizer-keyless
control unit 7P connector
disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B
(16P) and power tailgate control unit
connector C (14P) disconnected
(16P) and gauge control module
connector A (12P) disconnected
(16P) and HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector disconnected
(16P) and audio unit connector C
(24P) disconnected
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU
connector B (34P), combination
switch 8P connector, relay control
module connector (14P), power seat
immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P
connector, power tailgate control
unit connector C (14P), gauge
control module connector A (12P),
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector, audio unit connector C
(24P) disconnected
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU
(24P) disconnected
Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal
of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
No. 4 terminal of the immobilizer-keyless control
unit 7P connector: There should be continuity.
No.7 terminal of the power tailgate control unit
connector C (14P): There should be continuity.
No.5 terminal of the gauge control module
No. 19 terminal ofthe HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector: There should be continuity.
No. 23 terminal of the audio unit connector C
of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body
ground: There should be no continuity.
No.1 terminal of XM receiver unit connector A
(20P) body ground: There should be no continuity.
IIJIlID

Possible cause if
result is not obtained
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
A short in the wire
A short in the wire
(cont'd)
23-233
BACK
AcuraLink
Self-diagnostic Fu nction (co nt' d)
device . result is not obtained
B-CAN MICU connector G (6P), door MPCS Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal A short in the XM
connector A (40P), rear MICU of XM receiver unit connector B (l6P) and body receiver control unit
connector B (34P), combination ground: There should be no continuity.
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal A short in the MICU
(16P), door MPCS connector A (40P), of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body
rear MICU connector B (34P), ground: There should be no continuity.
combination switch 8P connector,
relay control module connector
(14P), power seat control unit
connector B (40P), immobilizer-
keyless control unit 7P connector,
power tailgate control unit
connector C (14P), gauge control
module connector A (12P),
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No .. 5 terminals A short in the door
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), rear of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body MPCS
MICU connector B (34P), ground: There should be no continuity.
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the rear
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body MICU
MPCS connector A (40P), ground: There should be no continuity.
(24P) disconnected
23-234
BACK
B-CAN XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the
(16P), MICU connector G (6P); door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body combination switch
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU ground: There should be no continuity. control unit
connector B (34P), relay control
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the relay
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body control module
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU ground: There should be no continuity.
switch 8P connector, power seat
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the power
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body seat control unit
module connector (14P),
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body immobilizer keyless
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU ground: There should be no continuity. control unit
connector C (14P)"gauge control
(24P) disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the power
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body tailgate control unit
connector, gauge control module
connector A (12P), HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector, audio
unit connector C (24P) disconnected
(cont'd)
23-235
BACK
AcuraLink
Red color indicate Testi:ondition Test: Desired result Possible cause if
B-CAN XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the gauge
(16P), MICUconnector G (6P), dodr of XM receive'r unit connector B (16P) and body control module
unit connector C (14P),
(24P) disconnected
'.
XM receiver control unitconnector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the
(16P), MICU connector G (6P), door of XMreceiver unit connector B (16P) and body HandsFreeLink
MPCS connector A (40P), rear MICU ' ground: There should be no continuity. control unit
control unit 7P
.'
audio unit connector C (24P)
disconnected
XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.5 terminals A short in the audio
(16P),MICU connector G (6P), door of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body unit
Navi XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and navigation unit connector ofXM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
F (5P) disconnected No. ,'terminal of the navigation unit connector F
(5P): There should be' continuity.
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the'
No.2 terminal of the navigation unit connector F
(5P): There should be continuity. ..
Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal An open in the wire
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body
around: There should be no continuity. '
23-236
BACK
Red color indicate Test: Desired result
"
Possible cause if
Navi XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.3 A short in the wire
(20P) and navigation unit connector terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P):
F .(5P) disconnected There.should be no continuity.
Checkfor continuity between the No. 13 terminal A short in the wire
of XMreceiver unit connector A (20P) and body
around: There should be no continuity.
, Check for continuity between the No.1 and A short in the wire
No. 13 terminals of XM receiver unit connector A
(20P): There should be no continuity.
Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.4 A short in the wire
terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P):
. ,
There should be no continuity .
Check for continuity between the No. 14 terminal A short in the wire
Nound: There should be no continuity.
Check for continuity between the No.1 and No. A short in the wire
14 terminals of XM receiver unit connector A
Navigation.unit connector F(5P) Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal A short in the XM
disconnected of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body receiver unit
"
Check for continuity between the No. 13 terminal A short in the XM
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body receiver unit
Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal A short in the XM
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal A short in the
(20P) disconnected of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body navigation unit
Check for continuity between the No. 13 terminal A short in the
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body navigation unit
!Hound: There should be no continuity.
Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal A short in the
around: There should be no continuih'-
(cont'd)
23-237
BACK
AcuraLink
HFL XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No.8 terminal An open in the wire
(16P) and HandsFreeLink control unit of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
28P connector disconnected No. 22 terminal of the HandsFreeLink control unit
No. 23 terminal of the HandsFreeLink control unit
Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal An open in the wire
No.9 terminal of the HandsFreeLink control unit
ofXM receiver unit connector B (16P) and the
No.8 terminal of the HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector: There should be continulli.
No.8 terminal of the XM receiver unit connector
B (16P): There should be no continuity.
of XMreceiver unit connector B (16P) and body
No. 16 terminal of the XM receiver unit connector
B(16P): There should be no continuity.
~ o u n d There should be no continuity.
of XMreceiver unit connector A (20P) and the
No.7 terminal of the XM receiver unit connector
23-238
BACK
HFL XM receiver control unit connector B Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal A short in the wire
(16P) and HandsFreeLink control unit of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body
28P connector disconnected' !:Iround: There should be no continuity.
No. 15 terminal of the XM receiver unit connector
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P Check for continuity between the No.8 terminal A short in the XM
connector disconnected ofXM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body receiver unit
of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body receiver unit
Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal A short in the XM
!:Iround: There should be no continuity.
!:Iround: There should be no continuity.
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.8 terminal A short in the
(20P) disconnected of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body HandsFreeLink
!:Iround: There should be no continuity. control unit
ofXM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body HandsFreeLink
ground: There should be no continuity. control unit
Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal A short in the
of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body HandsFreeLink
ground: There should be no continuity. control unit
of XM receiver unit connector B (16P) and body HandsFreeLink
!:Iround: There should be no continuity. control unit
Audio XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal An open in the wire
(20P) and audio unit connector D of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and the
(14P) disconnected No.9 terminal of the audio unit connector D (14P):
No. 10 terminal of the audio unit connector D
(cont'd)
23-239
BACK
AcuraLink
device. result is not obtained
Audio XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.7 A short in the wire
(20P) and audio unit connector D terminals of XM receiver unit connector A (20P):
(14P) disconnected There should be no continuity.
Check for continuity between the No.1 and A short in the wire
No. 17 terminals of XM receiver unit connector A
Audio unit connector D (14P) Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal A short in the XM
disconnected of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body receiver unit
XM receiver control unit connector A Check for continuity between the No.7 terminal A short in the audio
(20P) disconnected of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body unit
_ground: There should be no continuity.
Check for continuity between the No. 17 terminal A short in the audio
of XM receiver unit connector A (20P) and body unit
around: There should be no continuit}t.
NOTE: Ifthe XM antenna connection condition is faulty, "XM ANTENNA" will be indicated on the audio-HVAC subdisplay-clock.
9. If the indication does not go away, confirm DTCs, and refer to the relevant system troubleshooting and input tests.
1. Use the interface dial, select the "Exit Diag". Press the interface dial to cancel the self-diagnostic function.
23-240
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTCB2202: AcuraLink Control Unit EEPROM
Error
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS and DTC log data in
the navigation system diagnostic mode (see page
23-158).
Is OTC 82202 indicated with HOS and on the
navigation display?
YES-Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this
at the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) .
at the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver). If all
connections are OK, replace the AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-96) .
DTC B2204: 8-CAN Communication Line
Error
23-158).
Is OTC 82204 indicated with HOS and on the
navigation display?
YES-Intermittent failure. B-CAN communication
line is OK at this time. Check for poor connections
or loose terminals at the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector B (16P) and gauge control module
connector A (12P).
(cont'd)
23-241
BACK
AcuraLink
6. Check for continuity between the AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector B (16P) No.5 terminal
and gauge control module connector A (12P) No.5
terminal.
CONNECTOR B (16P)
terminals at the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver). If all connections are OK, replace the
23-96) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between AcuraLink
control unit (XM receiver) and the gauge control
module .
23-242
OTC 82205: F-CAN Communication Line Error
23-158).
Is DTe 82205 indicated with HDS and on the
navigation display?
YES-Intermittentfailure. F-CAN communication
line is OK at this time. Check for poor connections
or loose terminals at the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .
NO-Go to step 4.
connector B (16P) and gauge control module
connector A (12P).
BACK
6. Check for continuity between the AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector 8 (16P) No.6, No. 16
terminals and gauge control module connector A
(12P) No.6, No. 12 terminals.
CONNECTOR B (16P)
Q
terminals at the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver). If all connections are OK, replace the
23-96) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between AcuraLink
control unit (XM receiver) and the gauge control
module .
DTC 82207: Navigation Unit Lost
Communication With AcuraLink Control Unit
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) and
wait 30 seconds or more.
4. Check for DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC 82207, 82208 indicated?
YES-Check the battery condition (see page 22-76).
If the system OK, replace the AcuraLink control unit
(XM receiver) .
NO-
o Ifthe 82207 is not indicated, Intermittent failure,
system OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the AcuraLink
control unit (XM receiver) .
o If the 82208 is not indicated, go to Step 5.
connector A (20P) and navigation unit connector F
(5P).
(cont'd)
23-243
BACK
AcuraLink
terminals olthe AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) connector A (20P) and navigation unit F
(5P).
20P 5P
No.3 No.1
No.4 No.3
No.13 No.2
No.14 No.4
No.15 No.5
CONNECTOR A (20P)
NV RX+ (WHT) NVTX+(GRN)
.Q .Q
NVSHLD
(BRN)
NV RX + L..-..L..-......,....L--....I-....I
(WHT)
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (5P)
YES-Go to Step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between AcuraLink
control unit (XM receiver) and the navigation unit.

23-244
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A
(20P) terminals No.3, 4, 13 and 14 individually.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
NVRX+(WHT) NVTX+(GRN)
.Q
=
= = =
Is there continuity? ,
between the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
and the navigation unit..
NO-Go to Step 9.
(20P) as follows.
A3 A4, A13, A14, A15
A4 A13, A14, A15
A13 A14, A15
A14 A15
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and the
navigation unit (replace the appropriate shield
harness) .
NO-Go to Step 10.
BACK
10. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
(20P) terminals No.3, 4,13 and 14 individually.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
NVRX+ (WHT) NVTX+ (GRN)
=
the AcuraLink control unit(XM receiver) and the
navigation unit .
NO-Go to Step 12.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF;
13. Reconnect the Acuralink control unit (XM receiver)
connector A (20P).
14. Measure the resistance between AcuraLink control
unit(XM receiver) connector A (20P) terminals
No.3; No. ;4,and No. 13, No. 14 ..
CONNECTOR A (20P)
NVRX+(WHTI NVTX+(GRN)
NVRX- (RED)
Is there less than about 100kQ ?
YES-AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) is faulty,
replace the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) .
NO-Go to Step 15.
15. Reconnect the navigation unit connector F (5P).
16. Turn the ignition switch ON(lI).
(cont'd)
23-245
BACK
Acura.Link
17. Measure the voltage between the body ground and
the Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector
A (20P) terminals No. 3, No.4 individually.
CONNECTOR A (20P) .'
NV RX + (WHT) NV TX + (GRN)
= =
Is there less than about 3.5V?
YES-Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) is faulty,
replace the Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) .
NO-Navigation unit is faulty, replace the
navigation unit..
23-246
DTC 82208: HandsFreeLink Control Unit Lost
Communication With AcuraLink Control Unit
Is OTe 82207, 82208 indicated?
YES-Check the battery condition (see page 22-76).
If the system OK, replace the Acuralink control unit
(XM receiver) .
NO-
If the 82208 is not indicated, Intermittent failure,
system OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the Aculalink
control unit (XM receiver) .
If the 82207 is not indicated, go to Step 5.
6. Disconnect the Acuralink control unit (XM receiver)
connector 8 (16P) and HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector.
BACK
terminals of the AcuraLinkcontrol unit(XM .
receiver) connector B,(16P) and HandsFreetink
16P 28P
No.6 No. 24
No.7 No.9
No.8 No. 22
No.15 No.8
No.16 No. 23
ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR B (16P)
Wire side of female
.----------, HFT
COM1
(RED)
HFT COM1 (RED) HFT COM SHLD (BRN)
HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to Step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between AcuraLink
control unit (XM receiver) and the HandsFreeLink
control unit .
" "
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector B
(16P) terminals No.7, 8,15 and 16 individually:
CONNECTORB (16P)
. HFT COM3 (GRN) . HFT COM1 IRED)
Q
= =
between the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
and the HandsFreeLink control unit..
NO-Go to Step 9.
9. Check for continuity between the terminals of ...
(16P) as follows.
Frbm terminal To terminals
B7 B8, B15,B16; B6
B8 B15,B16,B6
B15 B16,B6
B16 B6
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and the
HandsFreeLink control unit (replace the appropriate
shield harness) .
NO-Go to Step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK
AcuraLink
10. Turn the ignition switch ONUI).
(16P) terminals No: 7, 8,15 and 16 individually.
CONNECTOR B (16P)
HFT COM3 (GRN) HFT COM1 (RED)
=
=
HFTCOM2
(WHT)
'::L '::L
=
YES-Repair short to .power in the wire(s) between
the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and the
HandsFreeLink control unit .
NO-Goto Step 12.
13. Reconnect the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector B (16P).
23-248
14. Measure the resistance between AcuraLink control
unit (XM receiver) connector B (16P) terminals No.
7, No.8, and No. 15, No. 16.
CONNECTOR B (16P)
HFT COM3 (GRN) HFT COM1 (RED)
HFT COM4 (BlK)
Is there less than about 100kQ ?
NO-Go to Step 15.
15. Reconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 22P
connector.
16. Turn the ignition switch ONUI).
BACK
the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector
B (16P) terminals No.7, No.8 individually.
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT IXM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR B 116P)
HFT COM3 IGRN) HFT COM1 IRED)
= =
Is there less than about 3.SV?
NO-HandsFreeLink control unit is faulty, replace
the HandsFreeLink control unit..
DTC 82209: AcuraLink Control Unit Internal
Error
4. Check for OTC with the HOS.
YES- AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) is faulty,
NO,.....lntermittent failure, system OK at this time .
3 ~ 4 9
BACK
AcuraLink
OTe 82240: XM Antenna Error
YES-Go to Step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, XM antenna is OK atthis
at the AculaLink control unit(XM receiver) and XM
antenna .
5. Check the XM antenna lead connection at the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and at the XM
antenna.
Is it connected properly?
YES-Go to Step 6.
DTC .
connector C (1 Pl.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON(lI).
23-250
the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) terminal C
(1P) No.1 terminal.
TERMINALC (1P)
=
Is there about 4.5 V?
YES-Go to Step 9.
NO-AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) is faulty,
10. Disconnect the XM antenna 1 P connector.
BACK
antenna 1 P connector No.1 terminal.
XM ANTENNA 1P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the antenna lead between the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and XM
antenna .
NO-Go to Step 12.
12. Check for continuity between the core and the
outside of the feeder antenna at XM antenna 1 P
YES-Replace the antenna lead between the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and XM
antenna .
NO-Go to Step 13.
13. Reconnect the Acuralink control unit C (1 P)
connector.
14. Turn the ignition switch ONOI).
'the XM antenna 1P connector No.1 terminal.
Is there about 4.SV?
YES-XM antenna is faulty, replace the XM
antenna .
NO-Replace the antenna lead between the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and the XM
antenna .
23-251
BACK
AcuraLink
AcuraLink service application does not work
NOTE: In order for the AcuraLink service to work, the
client must have an activated account with XM '
(receives all channels).
1. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .
the AcuraLink controluilit (XM receiver) connector
A (20P) and body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to step 4.
AcuraLink control unit and the No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ofthe AcuraLinkcontrol unit (XM receiver)
connector A (20P) and body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to step 6.
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and the No. 21
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box .
ofthe AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
connector'A (20P) and body ground.
CONNECTOR A (20P)
the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector
A (20P). If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver),
and recheck. Ifthe symptom goes away, replace
the original AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) .
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) and body
ground. Ifthe wire is OK, check for poor ground at
G606 (see page 22-38) .
BACK
HandsFreeLink System
HFL/NAVIGATION
MICROPHONE
(Built into the roof console)
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (MID)
DISPLAY UNIT
_) Replacement, page 23-181
NAVIGATION UNIT
HFLvOLUME
(Using audio unit volume knob)
HFL-VOICE
CONTROL SWITCH
Test, page 23-272
(Under the driver's seat)
Symptom Troubleshooting, page 23-134
AUDIO UNIT
page 23-14
o
_--_--':-0
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
Self-diagnostic Function,
page 23-257
Input Test/Replacement,
page 23-273
23-253
BACK
1. Make sure the ignition ,switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HOS to the data link connector (OLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
A
4. Make sure the HOS communicates with the vehicle and the HandsFreeLink control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
5. Select HandsFreeLink in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select OTCs in the HandsFreeLink menu.
7. Check for OTCs. If any OTCs are indicated, write down the OTCs, then go to the indicated OTC troubleshooting. If
no OTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, cleafthe OTCs with the HOS .
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HOS.
23-254
BACK
General Operation
The HandsFreeLink (HFL) works only with an approved Bluetooth enabled cell phones with the Hands Free Profile. If
you are not sure if your cell phone is compatible with the HFL - and not all phones are - Acura has a dedicated call
center and web-site to answer your questions. On the web, goto www.handsfreelink.com . or dial 888-528-7876 for
further assistance. The call center is open Monday thru Friday from 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CST, Saturday from 7:00 a.m.
to 6:00 p.m. CST, and Sunday from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CST.
The HFL gives the user the convenience of hands-free operation. It can't control the phone's performance (call quality
and signal strength). To avoid performance problems, don't put the phone in a metal briefcase or in a purse under the
seat.
This guide shows you just a few of the HFL's many features. You will see how to pair your phone to the HFL and then
make and receive calls, all using simple voice commands. If you want a complete description of this system, please
refer to the owner's manual and quick start guide.
Voice Control Tips
To give any voice command, press and release the TALK button. Always wait for the beep, then give your command in
a clear, natural voice. The HFL microphone is on the ceiling, by the front spotlights.
If the HFL doesn't recognize your voice command, you'll hear "Pardon." If after repeating your command, it still
doesn't recognize it, you'll hear "Please repeat." If after repeating your command again, it still doesn't recognize it, the
HFL sends you to the Help menu.
To hear a list of available options at any time, say "Hands free help."
You can give many voice commands together. For example, you can say "DiaI123-456-7890."
To give a string of numbers in a call or dial voice command, you can say them all at once, or separate them into blocks
of 3, 4,7,10, or 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press and release the TALK button while the HFL is speaking. The HFL begins listening for your
next voice command.
To go back a step in a voice command sequence, press and release the Back button, or say "Go back."
If you don't say anything while the HFL is listening for your voice command, it will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you press and release the TALK button, the HFL begins listening from the point where it
timed out.
To stop a voice command sequence at anytime, press and hold the Back button, or press and release the TALK button,
wait for the beep, and say "Cancel." The next time you press and release the TALK button, the HFL begins, from its
main menu. You'll see MAIN on the multi-information display (MID) in the instrument panel.
When you're done with a voice command sequence, the HFL goes back to its main menu. The next time you press and
release the TALK button, you'll be at the main menu and you'll see MAIN on the MID.
Remember to press and hold the Back button until you exit the main menu, otherwise, the audio system stays muted.
The HFL may have problems with some voices. To improve voice recognition:
Close the windows and moonroof.
Set the fan speed to low (1 to 2).
Adjust the air flow vents so that they do not blow against the microphone on the ceiling.
Speak in a clear and natural voice. If the system cannot recognize your command, speak louder.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly.
If you speak with something in your mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may misunderstand your
command.
(cont'd)
23-255
BACK
',:,
Pairing Your Cell Phone (A One Time Procedure)
You must pair an approved Bluetooth compatible phone to the HFL before you can make and receive calls. The
following steps show you what you need to do. For a current list of approved phones and specific phone pairing
instructions, go to www.acura.com. You can also refer to the phone's operating manual. or call the phone retailer.
Make sure the vehicle is stationary when you pair the phone;
NOTE:
You cannot pair a phone ifthe vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in its Discovery mode.
Up to six Bluetooth compatible phones can be paired by the HFL.
Not all Bluetooth phones are compatible with the HFL. For a current list of approved Bluetooth phones, visit www.
acura.com.
1. Turn on your phone, and follow the prompts to activate Bluetooth.
2. Give these voice commands to the HFL by pressing the TALK button.
You say You'll hear
"Phone setup" "Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list."
"Pair" "The pairing process requires operation of your mobile phone.
For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is
stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note this code, it will
be requested
"1. 2. 3. 4." (This can be any four-digit "1. 2. 3. 4. is this correct?"
code you want.)
"Yes" "Searching for a Bluetooth phone. Make sure the phone you are
tryil!g topair is in Discovery mode! "
3. Follow the cell phone manufucturer's instructions to put the phone in its Discovery mode. The phone will search
for the HFL. When you see HANDSFREELlNKin the device list on the phone, select it.
4. When prompted, enter the four-digit PIN from step 2 into the phone. You will hear the HFL say "A new phone has
been found. Would you like to name this phone?"
5. Press and release the TALK button, and say what the phone name will be. For example, say "John's phone".
You'll hear "John's phone has been successfully paired, returning to the main menu".
6. To pair another phone, repeat steps 1 thru 5.
23-256 BACK
Clearing the system
NOTE:
This operation clears the HFL system of all passcode(s), any paired phone, and all names in the HFL phonebook.
Clearing the HFL system is recommend before selling the vehicle.
1. Turn on your phone, and follow the prompts to activate Bluetooth.
2. Press and release the TALK button. After the beep, say "Clear" and the HFL will respond, "This process will clear
all paired phones, clear all entries in the phonebook, and clear the passcode. Is this what you would like to do?"
3. Press and release the TALK button. After the beep, say "Yes" and the HFL respond. "Preparing to clear all paired
phones, all phonebook entries, and the passcode. This may take up to 2 minutes to complete".
4. Press and release the TALK button. After the beep, say "OK" to proceed, or say "Go back" or "Cancel".
5. If you said "OK" after a short period of time, the HFL respond, "System has been cleared. Returning to the main
menu", and the clearing HFL system is complete.
NOTE: This procedure should be used only if HDS is unavailable.
To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I).
2. Press and hold the HFL BACK button for more than 5 seconds.
3. When the HandsFreeLink system enters the self-diagnostic function, the following will occur.
If the system has not completed testing for DTCs, the HandsFreeLink control unit audibly outputs "The hands
free system test is in progress".
If there is no DTC, the HandsFreeLink control unit audibly outputs ''The hands free system is OK".
If there is any DTC, the HandsFreeLink control unit audibly outputs "The hands free system needs to be
serviced".
NOTE:
The self-diagnostic function can only be initiated while the HFL is in its idle state.
The self-diagnostic function is considered to start once the 5 seconds press and hold is detected, and ends when the
unit returns to its idle state.
23-257
BACK
HahdsFreeLink System
S--'imptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
The MID displays an HFL message Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-271) Check and repair all CAN
that does not go away after pressing related DTCs
the HFL button
"
;
" .'
The phone icon in the navigation There is no HFL-compatible phone paired to The phone must be on
route to screen is grayed-out the vehicle. Pair an approved HFL- the list of approved
compatible phone toethe vehicle Bluetooth phones and
configured correctly. For
a current list of approved
phones, go to www.acura.
com, or call 888-528-7876
for further assistance .
Check the Diagnostic
Menu and use the "Navi
.'
; System Link"
The approved Bluetooth phone is HFL Diagnostic mode A The phone must be on the
having problems pairing to the '; list of approved Bluetooth
vehicle phones and configured
correctly. For a current list
of approved phones, go to
www.acura.com, or call
888-528-7876 for further
assistance.
The Bluetooth phone cannot use all HFL Diagnostic mode A The phone must be on the
its functions list of approved Bluetooth
phones and configured
assistance.
The Bluetooth phone does not place HFL Diagnostic mode A The phone must be on the
or receive calls using the HFL list of approved Bluetooth
system
.. ,"I
phones and configured
assistance.
The client wants the HFL system Clearing the system (see page 23-257) See the Owner's Manual for
reset (all phones and address additional information.
information cleared from the HFL
s'lstem)
The HFL system is locked and the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-272)
pass code has been lost or forgotten
The HFL system does not recognize Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-271) Also see "Voice control
all voice prompts tips" (see page 23-255).
The HFL system speaks in French See the HFL section in the Owner's Manual
for "Changing Language"
23-258 BACK
HFL System Troubleshooting
NOTE:
You must be able to duplicate the client's concern to successfully diagnose the problem.
Always use the client's phone.
Make sure the phone is approved and configured correctly. Online, go to www.acura.com. ~ call the HFL support
desk at 888-528-7876 for further assistance.
3. Check for DTCs.
YES-Repair the indicated DTCs and recheck .
NO-Go to Step 4.
4. Try to duplicate the problem.
Can you duplicate the problem?
YES-Go to Step 5.
5. Pair the phone to a known-good vehicle (same model, year, and trim), and try duplicate the problem.
Does the phone have the same problem on the known-good vehicle?
YES-Call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7876 to make sure the phone is configured correctly and has the
correct software. If the phone is configured correctly, it is either a characteristic of the HFL system, or a
characteristic ofthe particular approved phone being used. Explain to your client that this is a system
characteristic. Another phonelrom the approved phone list may give more favorable results .
NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit and recheck. If the problem goes away, replace the
original HandsFreeLink control unit..
23-259
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BAmRY
+
23-26:0
No.lIBATi 1120 A) No.3 IIG) 150 A)
No.4 140 A)
IWrth navigation)
r____l
NAVIGATION UNIT
MIC
MIC MIC OUT
OUlt OUT- SH
B6 B14 B13
~ .."
.... .. .. I
.. ' ....... """J
I ............. I
.
.
.

l
"""
R LT LU
21 28 26
; MlC MlC MIC
L .. OUlt ~ ~ _ ~ ~ T S H .j
GND B-CAN
K
G506
: 19

LTGRN
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
CONTROL
UNIT
IGNITION SWITCH
~
A T
WHT RED
Ace
Ace HOT in Ace II) and ON 1111
WHT-------,
Y
B4 A5
No.5 No.32
110A) 110A)
Nll N39
16
+B ACC
HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT
HFL
REMOTE
SW
BU
18 CABLE REEL
HFL -VOICE CONTROL SWITCH
;
Ace
CUT
RELAY
mANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
!porN)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
INTERIOR
UGHT
RELAY
Y
RED BLK
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
lin tho gaugo conlrol modulo)
BACK
DRMR'S FRONT PASSENGER'S
LFTTWEETER DOOR SPEAKER RIGHT TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER
)t----f( )l-----f( )l-----f( )l------I(
I I I I I I I I
WHT GRN T GRN RED BRN RED BRN
I I i t I Itt
WHT GRN RED BRN
FRL
SPKRt
82
FRL
SPKR-
STEREO AMPURER
FL PRE INt FL PRE IN-
[j] :A10
m :A6
G N
B6
FRR
SPKR-
FR PRE IN-
[j]:A25
m :A17
(With navigation) 824 B10
XM RECEIVER"
FLPREINt FLPREIN- FR PRE IN-
NAVIGA1l0N UNIT'"
AUDIO UNIT
UNE OUT SH UNEOUTt UNEOUT-
...... - :...... I
I .. -....... ............. .
C5
'1 : With AcuraUnk
'2 : Without AcuraUnk
[j] : WHh navigation
m : Without navigation
: CAN line
----------- :Shielding
t
..... f--.. -.f--.-.-f V
-- .. ----- ... --- UN
__ ... ... ..... __ i .... ':_4-+-___________ .... ..... ..... U:_.;...,! ,::.'
!
HFT HFT HFT . HFT HFT UNE UNE UNE ' ,
: COMM1 COMM2 COMMa COMM4 COMM OUTSH OUTt OUT-: LTBLU PUR ,.....,
S HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT t _ . _ . : I
1.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. 2 .. _ ___ --tj"7'"
_.-_' ,
"-'--- -l XMRECEIVER
, ,
, .
PNK BLU

.

.
Br.
,
,
- ....... - ....
.. '
8 10
H
HR./NAViGAll0N

ROOF CONSOL
BLK
G601
23-261
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
OTC 81775: Microphone Input/Output Short
to Power/Open
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN system
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
5. Remove the roof console (see page 20-101) and the
console rear trim (see page 20-110).
6. Disconnect the 20P connector from the roof
console and the 28P connector from the
HandsFreeLink control unit.
8. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink
control unit the 28P connector terminal No. 13 and
body ground.
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
MIC IN+ (PNK)
=
YES-Replace the faulty harness between the
HandsFreeLink control unit and the roof console .
NO-Go to step 9.
23-262
10. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector terminal No. 13 and roof
console 20P connector terminal No.8.
MIC IN+ (PNK)
ROOF CONSOLE 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink
control unit, then recheck. If the symptom goes
away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control
unit..
NO-Replace the faulty harness between the
HandsFreeLink control unit and the roof console .
BACK
DTC 81776: Microphone Input/Output Short
to Ground/Open
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
5. Remove the roof console (see page 20-101) and the
glove box (see page 20-125).
6. Disconnect the 20P connector from the roof
console and the 28P connector from the

7. Checkfor.continuity between body ground and the
No. 13 and No. 14 terminals of the HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector individually, then
between terminals No. 12 and No. 13.
MICIN(+)
(PNK) .
MICIN-
(BLU)
HandsFreeLinks control unit and the roof
console .
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
23-263
BACK
terminals of the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector and the roof console 20P connector.
28P:
No. 13
No.14
20P:
No.8
No. 10
MIC IN+ (PNK)
MICIN-
(BLU)
ROOF CONSOLE 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
HandsFreeLinks control unit and the roof
console .
9. Disconnect the 14P connector from the navigation
unit.
23-264
No. 27 and No. 28 terminals ofthe HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector individually, then
between terminals No. 26 and No. 27.
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (28P)
= =
HandsFreeLinks control unit and the navigation
unit .
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
terminals of the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector and the navigation unit connector B
(14P).
28P:
No. 27
No. 28
14P:
No.6
No. 14
YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink
control unit, then recheck. If the symptom goes
away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control
unit. If the symptom does not go away, replace the
faulty navigation unit .
HandsFreeLink control unit and the navigation
unit .
Ole 81779: HFL Switch or HFL-Voice Control
Switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK Buttons) Circuit
Open/Short
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then start the vehicle
and turn the steering wheel back and forth several
times.
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
5. Do the HFL voice control switch test (see page
23-272).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the cable reel subharness (see page
17-23) .
7. Disconnect the 28P connector from the
8. Disconnect the 20P connector from the cable reel
subharness.
10. Check for voltage on the cable reel subharness 20P
connector terminal No. 18.
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power on BLU wire.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
23-265
BACK
11. Check for continuity between the HandsFreeLink'
control unit28P connector terminal No.2 and cable
reel subharness 20P connector termin'al No. 18.
HANDSFREELINK .CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals'
HFL REMOTE SW (BLU)
CABLE REEL SUBHARI'lIESS 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the GRY wire between the
switch, cable reel, and HandsFreeLink control
unit .
12. Check for continuity between the cable reel
subharness 20P connector terminal No.1 0 and the
audio unit connector 8 (32P) terminal No.3.
AUDIO REMOTE GND (BRN)
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose or poor connections at the
audio unit, HandsFreeLink control unit, and HFL-
voice control switch.lfthe connections are OK,
substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control
unit. If the problem is gone, replace the original
control unit .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the switch,
cable reel, and the audio unit..
DTC 81780: HFL-Voice Control Switch (HFL
TALK/HFL BACK Buttons) Circuit Short
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN system
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then start the vehicle
and turn the steering wheel back and forth several
times.
YES-Go to step 4.
time .
5. Do the HFL-voice control switch test (see page
23-272).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO,..-Replace the cable reel subharness(see page
17-23):.
8. Disconnect the 28P connector from the
9. Disconnect the 20P connector from the cable reel
subharness.
BACK
10. Check for continuity the HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector, terminal and body
ground.
HANDSFREELINK COMTROL UMT 28P CONNECTOR
.Q
=
NO-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit .
I " : '. .
.L
DTC 81785: Incorrect Configuration'
(VEHINFO Frame)
4. Check for DTC with the HDS .
YES-Gauge control module is faulty, replace the
NO-Intermittent failure. VEHINFO frame is OK at
this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the HandsFreeLink control unit )
23-267
BACK
H's:ndsFreeLink System
OTe 81786: HandsFreeLink Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module'
(VEHINFO Frame)
sure to follow the instructions inB-CAN System
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS:
YES-'Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure. VEHINFO frame is OK at
this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the HandsFreeLink control unit..
Is DTC B1011, B1032, B1060, B1061, B1205,

indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-HandsFreeLink control unit is faulty, replace
the HandsFreeLink control unit .
6. Select the UNIT INFORMATION MENU from the
HDS, and do the CONNECTED UNIT.
23-268
7. Check the AVAILABLE/NOT AVAILABLE
information of the gauge control module inthe
CONNECTED UNIT.
Is the information indicator NOT AVAILABLE?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Gauge control module is faulty, replace the
gauge control module ..
(12P).
gauge control module connector A (12P) terminals
No.7.
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse are good, repair
open in the wire between the No. 21 fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control
module .
BACK
13. Disconnect the gauge control module connector B
(24P).
gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal
No.2 and gauge control module connector B (24P)
terminal No. 13 individually.
=
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (24P)
=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between body
ground and the gauge control module .
15. Disconnectthe power tailgate control unit
connector C (14P).
control unit connector C (14P) terminal No.7 and
gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal
No.5.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
. Wire side of female terminals .
YES-Gauge control module is faulty, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between power
tailgate control unit and the gauge control module .

23-269
BACK
,." 'r ,
System
DTC 8,1792: HandsFreeLink'Control' Unit,
Internal Error i'
2. Turn the 'ignition switch OFF, and thenbackhN (II).
,,;
3. Check for OTCswith the HOS.
Is DTC 817'92 indicated?
YES-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit..
NO-Intermittent faifure, the system is OK at this
time.. '
23-270
BACK
The MID displays an HFL message that does
not go away after pressing the HFL button
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II).
3. Check for OTCs.
Are there any DTCs indicate?
YES-Repair the indicated OTCs .
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control
unit, then turn the ignition 8witchON (II) and
recheck the MIO.
Are the messages cleared?
YES-Replace the original HandsFreeLink control
unit .
NO-Replace the gauge control module .
The HFL system does not recognize allvoice
prompts
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II).
3. Check for OTCs.
Are there any DTCs indicate?
YES-Repair the indicated OTCs .
NO-:-Go to step 4.
4. Check if the problem is duplicated.
Can the client's problem be duplicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time. Ask the client to
demonstrate the problem .
5. Check ifthe navigation system can recognize for
voice prompts.
Can the voice prompts be recognized?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Refer to the navigation system
troubleshooting .
6. Pair the client's phone to a known-good vehicle and
try to duplicate the problem.
Can you duplicate the problem?
YES-Call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7876,
and inquire if there are any known issues for the
problem. If there are no known issues, explain to
the client this is a system characteristic and cannot
be improved at this time .
NO-Substitute a known-good HFLJnavigation
microphone. Ifthe problems still present, substitute
a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit. Ifthe
problem goes away, replace the original HFLJ
navigation microphone .
23-271.
BACK
The HFL system is locked and the pass code
has been lost or forgotten
3. From the "Body Electrical menu", then select
"HandsFreeLink" .
4. Select "Miscellaneous Tests", then select "Pass
code reset".
5. Follow the HDS system prompts to reset the pass
code.
23-272
HFL-Voice Control Switch Test
A
3. Measure the resistance between the No. 18 and
No. 10 terminals in each switch position according
to the table.
HFL-Voice Control Switch
Position Resistance
OFF About 1 kQ
HFL TALK button pressed About 185 Q
HFL BACK button pressed About 45 Q
switch (see page 17-23).
BACK
Control Unit Input Test/Replacement
1. Remove the console rear trim (see page 20-110).
2. Disconect the 28P connector (A) from the HandsFreeLink control unit (B).
A

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals for a good pinfit to be sure they are all making good contact.
1 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G506)
There should be less than 0.5 V. An open in the wire
15 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No.5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
16 PUR Ignition switch ACC (I) or ON Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An ooen in the wire
5. Disconnect the 28P connector again, and make this input test atthe connector.
If the test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If the input test proves OK, the HandsFreeLink control unit must be faulty, replace it.
19 lTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between No. 19 An open in the wire
terminal and the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector X (39P)
terminal No. 27:
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay Check for continuity to ground: Short to ground
box connector X (39P) There should be no continuity.
disconnected
23-273
BACK
HFL/Navigation Microphone Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working
on them to protect the face panel from scratches or
other damage.
1. Remove the roof console (see page 20-101).
2. Remove the screws and the printed circuit board
(A).
3. Disconnect the cQnnectors (8) from the printed
circuit board.
23-274
4. Remove the screws and the microphone (A).
5. Install the microphone in the reverse order of
removal.
BACK
Restraints
Restraints
Special Tools ................................................................. 24-2
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement ....................................... 24-4
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement .......................... 24-7
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement .............................. 24-13
Inspection ...................................................................... 24-15
Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor Replacement ... 24-17
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Precautions and Procedures ....................................... 24-20
ODS Unit Initialization .................................................. 24-33
ODS Unit Calibration .................................................... 24-34
ODS Unit Operation Check .......................................... 24-35
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check ........ 24-36
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 24-51
Component Replacement/Inspection After
Deployment ............................................................... 24-134
Driver's Airbag Replacement ...................................... 24-137
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement ..................... 24-138
Side Airbag Replacement ............................................ 24-140
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement ............................... 24-141
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal ................................... 24-145
Cable Reel Replacement .............................................. 24-149
SRS Unit Replacement ................................................. 24-152
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement .................... 24-153
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement .............. 24-154
Roll Rate Sensor Replacement .................................... 24-155
Satellite Safing Sensor Replacement ......................... 24-156
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement ....... 24-157
ODS Unit Replacement ................................................ 24-158
Front Impact Sensor Replacement ............................. 24-159
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement .............. 24-160
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator
Illumination Bulb Test .............................................. 24-161
Restraints
Special Tools
CD 07HAZ-SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
07SAZ-TB4011A SRS Inflator Simulator 1
070AZ-SNAA 100 SRS Simulator Lead J 1
0' 07TAZ-001020A Backprobe Adapter, 17 mm 2
070AZ-SNAA200 SRS Simulator Lead K 1
@
070AZ-SNAA300 SRS Simulator LeadL 1
(j)
070AZ-SAA0100 SRS Short Canceller 2
07 PAZ-OO 1 01 00 SCS Service Connector 1
* : Use with the stacking patch cords from TIN 07SAZ-001000A, Backprobe Set.
CD
@

24-2
BACK
Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELT
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES
Replacement,
page 24-6
THIRD ROW CHILD SEAT
TETHER ANCHOR
CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT
THIRD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
THIRD ROW SEAT BELT
SECOND ROW SEAT BELT
THIRD ROW SEAT BELT
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
RIGHT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
24-3
BACK
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement
NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage (see page
24-15), and replace them if necessary.
Front Seat Belt
2. Slide the front seat all the way forward, and adjust
the seat to its maximum height. Carefully pry up on
the bottom of the anchor cover (A) to release the
tab (B) with a small flat-tip screwdriver from below
inside the recline cover (C), then remove it.
B
A
3. Adjust the seat to its minimum height, then remove
the lower anchor bolt (.tX).
24-4

7/16-20 UNF
47Nm
wait at least 3 minutes before removing the front
seat belt.
5. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-82).
6. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-82).
7. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A).
Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B) and
the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front
seat belt (D) and retractor (E).
F
C
B
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
7/16-20 UNF
9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt
protector (F).
BACK
10. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
8x1:25 inm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
11. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal,
o Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
the anchor bolts before reinstallation.
o Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten .to the
specified torque.
o Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions as described (see page 24-15).
o Assemble the washer, collar, and bushing on the
upper anchor bolt as shown.
o If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed,
replace the front seat belt protector with a new
one.
o Before installing the.anchor bolts, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
o Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is
properly plugged in.
o Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
o Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
o Set the clock.
o Check for any DTCs that may have been set
(see page 17-28).
Upper anchor bolt installation
UPPER ANCHOR UPPER ANCHOR
B\T . \
~ l ~ r ~ 9
BUSHING
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
(cont'd)
24-5
BACK
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
Seat Belt Buckle
equipped).
4. Remove the center cover (see step 4 on page
20-144).
5. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the seat belt
buckle switch connector (A) and detach the harness
clip (8). The driver's seat is shown; the passenger's
seat is similar.
6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A) and detach the
harness clips (8), then remove the seat belt buckle
(C).
c
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
7. Pull the seat belt buckle switch harness (D) out
through the space between the seat cushion and the
seat linkage.
24-6
8. Install the buckle inthe reverse order of removal,
Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt
as shown.
the center anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to
specification with a torque wrench.
Make sure the seat belt buckle switch connector is
Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
Setthe clock.
(see page 17-28).
Center anchor bolt installation
CENTER ANCHOR
SPRING WASHER
CENTER ANCHOR
BACK
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement
NOTE: Check the second row seat belts for damage
(see page 24-15), and replace them if necessary.
Second Row Seat Belt
1. Slide the second row seatforward fully.
2. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-92).
3. Pull the carpet (A) back, and remove the lower
anchor bolt (8).
B
7/16-20UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgf.m, 24Ibfft)
4. Remove the seat belt exit C-pillar cap (A).
-1 Pull out the rear upper corner of the cap to
release the upper hook (8) and the rear hook
(C).
Release the front hook (D) and lower hook (E)
together by pulling the cap upward and
rearward.
-a Take the cap off the second row seat belt (F).
B
'----0
E
5. Remove the upper anchor bolt (8).
A
7/16-20 UNF
6. Detach the clip (A) by pulling the bottom ofthe
quarter pillar trim (8) back. While holding the trim
away from the C-pillar, pull the second row seat
belt, upper anchor (C), tongue plate (D), and the
lower anchor (E) into the trim, and pull the entire
second row seat belt down.
D
(cont'd)
24-7
BACK
Seat Belts
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (A) and
the lower retractor bolt (B), then remove the front
seat belt (C) and retractor (D). The left second row
seat belt is shown; the right second row seat belt is
similar.
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to the
specified torque.
Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 24-15).
Assemble the washers, collar, and bushing on
the upper anchor bolt as shown.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
UPPER ANCHOR
TH"Eleo \ TOoL
BUSHING LOCK WASHER
24-8
Left Seat Belt Buckle
seat covers.
1. Remove the left second row seat (see page 20-156).
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks of
the back cover carpet from the seat cusion frame,
then pull the carpet back (see step 2 on page
20-158).
3. With seat heater: Disconnect the seat cushion
heater connector, and remove the wire ties (see
Recline outer cover (see step 4 on page 20-162) .
ISO fix bracket outer cover (see step 6 on page
20-159).
5. Remove the seat cushion from the left second row
seat (see step 10 on page 20-160).
6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the
seat belt buckle (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
13.3 kgfm, 24lbfftl
BACK
7. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal,
the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the
center anchor bolt as shown.
WASHER CENTER ANCHOR
Right Seat Belt Buckle
seat-covers'.
1. Remove the right second row seat (see page
20-156).
Recline outer cover (see step 5 on page 20-162) .
Center outer o ~ e r (see step 7 on page 20-163).
3. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the pivot bolt (A),
then carefully lift the seat cushion (B) up as needed.
A
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfttl
B
seat belt buckle (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
(cont'd)
24-9
BACK
Se.at Belts
the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Assemble the washers, collar, and bushing on
the center anchor bolt as shown.
WASHER
24-10
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
THREAD LOCK
CENTER ANCHOR
Center Second Row Seat !Belt
1. Detach the clips and remove the seat belt cover (A) .
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4

3. Remove the upper anchor mounting bolt (A) and
upper anchor bolts (8), then remove the upper
anchor (C).
B
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
(3.3 kgfm,24Ibfft)
A
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
BACK
4. Remove the retractor mounting bolt (A) and
retractor bolt (B), then remove the retractor (C).
B
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
5. Install the center second row seat belt and retractor
in the reverse order of removal, and note these
items:
o Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
o Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 24-15).
o Before installing the upper anchor bolt, make
sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Center Second Row Seat Belt Buckle
seat covers.
1. Slide the right second row seat fully forward.
2. Remove the ISO fix bracket outer cover (see step 6
, on page 20-159).
seat belt buckle (B) from the elastic strap (C), then
remove it through the space between the link
bracket and seat cushion.
A
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
(3.3 kgfm, 24Ibfft)
4. Install the buckle inthe reverse order of removal,
and apply medium strength type liquid thread lock
to the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
(cont'd)
24-11
BACK
Seat Belts
Center Second Row Seat Belt Detachable
Anchor
seat covers.
1. Remove the left second row seat (see page 20-156).
2. Remove the seat belt detachable anchor (A) from
the elastic strap (8).
A
3. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgfm, 24lbfftl
24-12,
4. Remove the seat belt detachable anchor (A).
5. Install the detachable anchor in the reverse order of
. removal, and apply medium strength type liquid
thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
BACK
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement
Third Row Seat Belt
NOTE: Check the third row seat belts for damage
(see page 24-15), and replace them if necessary.
1. Detach the third row seat belt lower anchor.
3. Remove the seat belt exit D-pillar cap (A).
Pull out the top of the cap to release the hooks
(8).
-2 Release the lower hook (C) by pu lIing the cap
upward.
-a Take the cap off the second row seat belt (E).
E
5. Remove the bolts (A) and the seat belt guide (8).
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
6. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
7. Remove the retractor mounting bolt (A) and the
retractor bolt (8), then remove the third row seat
belt (C) and retractor (D).
A
7/16-20 UNF
(cont'd)
24-13
BACK
Seat Belts
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to the
specified torque.
Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions as described (see page 24-15).
Assemble the washers and bushing on the upper
anchor bolt as shown.
Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT UPPER ANCHOR
\ \
~ ~ ~ 0
THREAD LOCK I
BUSHING
24-14
TOOTHED
")CK \ASHER
@@
\
SPRING
WASHER
Seat Belt Buckle/Seat Belt Detachable
Anchor
NOTE: The seat belt buckle is shown, and the seat belt
detachable anchor is similar.
2. Remove the screw (A), and release the hook (B),
then remove the bracket cover (C).
3. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), then remove
the seat belt buckle (B).
A/
7/16-20 UNF
34Nm
BACK
Assemble the washers, spring, bushing, bracket,
and collar on the center anchor bolt as shown.
the center anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Center anchor bolt construction
CENTER ANCHOR SPRING BRACKET
BOLT \ SPRING
\
RETURN SPRING WASHER
WAS\," / /,( cor I

/
THREAD LOCK
7
BUSHING TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
CENTER ANCHORI
LOWER ANCHOR
Inspection
Out of Vehicle
For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner,
review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18)
and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20)
before doing repairs or service.
Retractor
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat
belt can be pulled out freely.
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the
retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 from the
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when
the retractor is leaned over 40 0. Do not attempt to
disassemble the retractor.
Front
40' 40'
Inside
b
Second row
Inside
b
Driver's side: 8
Passenger's side: 10.5
I
Front
b
Front
b
(cont'd)
24-15
BACK
Seat Belts
Inspection (cont'd)
Center Second row
Inside
..
Third row
Inside
...
Front
..
I
40' i 40'
I
15 '\;f::/ 15
Front
...
3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there
is any.abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.
In-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on
anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free
movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary,
remove the anchor bolts and check that the
washers and other parts are not damaged or
improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration .
Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only
soap and waterto clean.
NOTE: Dirt build up in the loops of the upper
anchdrs can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled
out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only
during a sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract
automatically when released.
6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt
retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic
locking retractor). This function is for securing child
seats.
-1 Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the
ALR. The seat belt should retract, but not
extend. This is normal.
-2 To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and
allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt
out part-way. The seat belt should retract and
extend normally.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there
is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.
BACK
Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor Replacement
1. Remove the rear trim panel (see step 2 on page
20-90).
2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the third row
child seat tether anchors (B).
A
8x1.2Smm
3. Install the anchor in the reverse order of removal,
and apply medium strength type liquid thread lock
to the threads of the child seat tether anchor screws.
24-17
BACK
SRS
MEMORY ERASE
SIGNAL (MES)
CONNECTOR (2P)
(YELLOW)
SRSUNIT
Replacement,
page 24-152
DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
Disposal, page 24-145
24-18
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
Replacement,
page 24-153
SRS INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
CABLE REEL
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
Bulb test, page 24-161
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
ODS UNIT
Initialization, page 24-33
Calibration, page 24-34
Operation check, page 24-35
OPDS SENSOR/SEAT-BACK
Replacement,
page 20-144
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSORS
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
Operation, page 24-36
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER
BACK
LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
SATELLITE SAFING SENSOR
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(SECOND)
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(SECOND)
ROLL RATE SENSOR
24-19
BACK
SRS
Precautions and Procedures
General Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before
servicing the airbag system. Observe the instructions
described in this manual, orthe airbags could
accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Except when doing electrical inspections, always turn
the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS line with the
HDS to take the PCM out of active status, disconnect
the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least
3 minutes before beginning work.
NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the
ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are
disconnected from the battery.
Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the
same standards and quality as the original parts. Do
not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when
making SRS repairs.
Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it.
Do not install any part that shows signs of being
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks
or deformation.

.
........... ......................................... .... , .... , ..., ... " ............' ......, .. ' ..........., ..

:::.)q:
'
I
Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the
disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect
the SRS connector.
Use only a digital multi meter to check the system. If it
is not a Honda multi meter, make sure its output is
10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest
value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher
output could cause accidental deployment and
possible injury.
Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.
24-20
The original audio system has a coded theft
protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-theft
codes for the audio system and the navigation
system (if equipped)
Before returning the vehicle to the client, enter the
anti-theft codes for the audio system and the
navigation system (if equipped)
If you disconnects the battery cable, the power tilt
and telescopic steering wheel system needs to be
reset when you reconnect the battery cable. Do the
Steering Column Position Memorization (see page
17-28).
Steering-Related Precautions
Cable Reel Alignment
Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in
the wiring, making the SRS system, remote steering
wheel controls, and the horn inoperative. Center the
cable reel whenever the following is performed (see
- Installation of the steering wheel
-Installation of the cable reel
-Installation of the steering column
- Other steering-related adjustment or installation
Do not disassemble the cable reel. .
Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
Ifthe cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace
itwith a new one. For example, if it does not rotate
smoothly, replace the cable reel.
BACK
Airbag Handling and Storage
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service,
observe the following precautions.
Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
Never put anything on the airbag.
To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from
any oil, grease, detergent, or water.
Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface
away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 "F/
93 "C).
Never do electrical tests on the airbags, such as
measuring resistance.
Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during
removal, inspection, or replacement.
For proper disposal of a damaged airbag, refer to
airbag disposal (see page 24-145).
The side curtain airbag inflator assembly is a long,
jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag
(B), and brackets (e).
When removing or installing the side curtain airbag
inflator assembly, never handle the flexible bag (B).
(cont'd)
24-21
BACK
SRS
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
SRS Unit, Front and Side Impact Sensors,
Driver's Seat Position Sensor, Front
Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit and Front
Passenger's Weight Sensors
Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative
cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning installation or replacement ofthe
SRS unit or disconnecting the connectors from the
SRS unit.
Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front
impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the
ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned OFF.
During installation or replacement, be careful not to
bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area
around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side
impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally
deploy and cause damage or injury.
After a collision in which a front airbag, side curtain
airbags, or a seat belt tensioner deployed, go to
Component Replacement/Inspection after
Deployment (see page 24-134). After a collision in
which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy,
inspect for any damage or any deformation on the
SRS unit, front impact sensors, rear safing sensor,
and side impact sensors. Replace all damaged parts.
24-22
Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors, driver's seat position
sensor, front passenger's weight sensor unit, and
front passenger's weight sensors.
Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side
impact sensors are installed securely with the
mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft).
Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side
impact sensors, and keep them away from dust.
Store the SRS unit, front impact sensors and side
impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 "F/40 "C) and
dry (less than 80 % relative humidity, no moisture)
area.
BACK
Wiring Precautions
Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by special
yellow outer covering, and the SRS connectors can be
identified by their yellow color. Observe the
instructions.
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace
the harness.
Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get
pinched or interfere with other parts.
Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and
grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-
metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent
problems that are difficult to diagnose.
Do not use any silicone based cleaners or lubricants
on any SRS connectors or terminals.
Precautions for Electrical Inspections
When using electrical test equipment, insert the
probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal
side of the connector, and do not tamper with the
connector.
Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe
forcibly.
Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.
Using improper tools could cause an error in
inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
(cont'd)
24-23
BACK
SRS
Spring-Loaded Lock Connector
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded
lock.
Front Airbag Connectors
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
A
Connecting
To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press
on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction
shown. As the two connector halves are pressed
together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C).
Do not touch the sleeve.
24-24
Side Airbag Connector
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
A
Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly
together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side
connector clicks.
BACK
Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors
for Diagnosis
SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
NOTE:
To prevent damaging the connector cavity, insert the
short canceller straight into the cavity from the
terminal side.
Before installing the short canceller, wash it with
neutral detergent, then dry it with compressed air.
Do not use the short canceller if it is damaged.
Make sure to remove the short canceller before
reconnection.
When SRS unit connectors A or B are disconnected, a
short circuit is created in the connector by its own
function to prevent an airbag deployment. The circuit
may need to be open sometimes when diagnosis is
done on the system. Insert the short canceller
(No. 070AZ-SAA0100) in the specified cavities when it is
necessary to keep the circuit open for diagnosis.
Terminal side of
connector /
SRS Short Canceller
(070AZ-SAA0100)
SRSUNIT
CONNECTORC
/
SRSUNIT
CONNECTORB
Terminal numbers are shown from the wire side of the
female terminals. Insert the short canceller(s) into the
cavities on the terminal side of the connector.
Insert short canceller(s) here.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
Insert short canceller(s) here ..
(cont'd)
24-25
BACK
SRS'
Seats with Side Airbags
Seats with side airbags have'a"SIDE AIRBAG" label on
the seat-back.
SIDEAIRBAG
LABEL
When cleaning, use a damp cloth to clean the seat.
Do not soak the seat with liquid. Do not spray steam
on the seat.
Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover.
Replace the seat-back cover.
After a collision where the side airbag was deployed,
replace the side airbag and seat frame with new parts.
If the seat-back cushion. is split, it must be replaced.
Never put aftermarket accessories on the seat (covers,
pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
BACK
Disconnecting System Connectors
Turn the ignition switch OFF disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning the following procedures .
Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2) .
Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B from the SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectOJS
~ ~ . .
SRS
UNIT
A
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT
ENGlNE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
LEFT
ENGlNE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
24-27
BACK
SRS
wait at least 3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering
wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P
connector (B) from the cable reel.
Front Passenger's Airbag
3. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125), then
disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P
connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness.
24 .. 28
Side Airbag
4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from
the floor wire harness.
Side Curtain Airbag
6. Disconnect both floor wire harness 2P connectors
(A) from the side curtain airbags.!
A
BACK
Seat Belt Tensioner
7. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-82),
then disconnect both floor wire harness 4P
connectors (A) from the seat belt tensioners.
A
SRS Unit
on page 20-107), SRS unit connector A, SRS unit
connector B, and SRS unit connector C from the
SRS unit.
A
24-29
BACK
SRS
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it
to locate the causes of system problems and then store
this information in memory. For easier troubleshooting,
this data can be retrieved via a data link circuit.
When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS
indicator comes on. If it goes off after 6 seconds, the
system is normal, and is not currently detecting any
abnormality.
Ifthere is an abnormality, the system locates and
defines the problem, stores this information in
memory, and turns the SRS indicator on. The data
remains in the memory even when the ignition switch
is turned off or if the battery is disconnected.
The data is stored in memory as a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC).
DTCs are either latching or resetting depending on
the malfunction. With resetting DTCs, the SRS
indicator goes off the next time the ignition switch is
turned ON and the system is normal, but the DTC is
still stored. With latching DTCs, the SRS indicator
does not turn OFF until the malfunction is repaired
and the DTC is cleared.
When you connect the HDS to the 16P data link
connector (DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed
DTC in the Honda Systems "SRS" menu.
After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with
the troubleshooting procedure for that code.
Precautions
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If
it's not a Honda multi meter, make sure its output is
10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the smallest
value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher
output could damage the airbag circuit or cause
accidental airbag deployment and possible injury.
Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been
turned OFF for less than 3 minutes, be careful not to
bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally
deploy and cause damage or injuries.
24-30
Before you remove the SRS harness, disconnect the
driver's airbag connector, the front passenger's
airbag connector, both side airbag connectors, both
side curtain airbag connectors, and both seat belt
tensioner connectors.
Make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. If the
battery is dead or low, measuring values may not be
correct.
Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the
SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect
the terminals with a jumper wire. Use only the
backprobe set and the multimeter. Backprobe spring-
loaded lock type connectors correctly.
Reading the DTC
A
and the SRS unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
5. Use the HDS to check for DTCs.
6. Read and record the DTC.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for
10 seconds.
9. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.
BACK
Erasing the DTC Memory With the HDS
NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before
you begin.
A
5. In the SRS MENU ofthe HDS, select SRS, then DTC
to erase DTC(s).
10 seconds.
Erasing the DTC Memory.using MES
Connector Without the HDS
SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-001010A
NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before
you begin.
To erase the DTC(s) from the SRS unit, use the HDS or
the following procedure.
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the
yellow MES 2P connector (B). Do not use a jumper
wire.
4. The SRS indicator will come on for about 6 seconds,
and then go off. Remove the SCS service connector
from the MES connector (2P) within 4 seconds after
the indicator goes off.
5. The SRS indicator will come on again. Reconnect
the SCS service connector to the MES connector
(2P) within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on.
6. When the SRS indicator goes off, remove the SCS
service connector from the MES connector (2P)
within 4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator blinks two times, indicating that
the memory has been erased.
10 seconds.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) again. If the SRS
indicator comes on for 6 seconds, and then goes off,
the system is OK.
(cont'd)
24-31
BACK
SRS
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
If there was a malfunction that sets a DTC, but it does
not recur, it will be stored in the memory as an
intermittent failure, and the SRS indicator may come on
depending on the malfunction detected.
NOTE: Check the condition of the battery (see page
22-76), and the charging system (see page 4-30). Low
battery voltage may cause some intermittent failures.
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
1. Read the DTC (see "Reading the DTC").
2. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC
Memory").
3. Set the parking brake, then start the engine, and let
it idle.
4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
5. Shake the related wire harnesses and the
connectors, and look for loose connections, poor
pinfits, and poor grounds.
6. Take a test-drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
and cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left
and right, and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If
the problem recurs, the SRS indicator will come on.
NOTE: A faulty cable reel can cause intermittent
connections related to the driver's airbag inflator
DTCs.
7. If you cannot duplicate the concern, ask the
customer about the conditions when it occured, or
ask the client to demonstrate the concern.
8. If you cannot duplicate the intermittent failure, the
system is OK at this time.
24-32
Checking Seat Weight Sensors After a
Vehicle Collision
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rea r most
position, adjust the recliner to the most forward
position. Do not move it from this position.
2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h),
then stop on level ground.
(A).
A
4. From the SRS inspection menu, select Seat Weight
Sensor, then Misc test, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK"
and follow the prompts until the ODS operation
check has been completed.
BACK
ODS Unit Initialization
When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS
unit is replaced, initialize the ODS by following the
procedure.
NOTE: A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a
faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 24-31).
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the
seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there
is nothing on the seat.
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES
connector is not shorted.
A
7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then SRS,
then Calibration. In the Calibration Menu, select
ODS INITIALIZATION. Follow the screen prompts to
initialize the ODS.
NOTE: If the ODS system fails to initialize after
several attempts, replace the OPDS sensorlseat-
back and retry. If the ODS system continues to fail
to initialize, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158).
24-33
BACK
SRS
ODS Unit Calibration
When you replace the SRS unit, front passenger's
weight sensors, or the ODS unit, calibrate the ODS unit.
While calibrating the ODS unit, observe these
precautions:
Make sure all components of the front passenger's
seat are correctly installed.
Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's
seat.
Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
Do the windows closed.
Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
the service bay.
Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
Keep the AlC and the heater off.
Do not touch the front passenger's seat while you
drive the vehicle.
Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
temperature changes.
24-34
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost
position, and adjust the reclinerto the most'
forward position. Do not move the seat from these
positions.
(A).
A
3. Make surethe HDS communicates with the vehicle
4. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph
(36 km/h), then stop on level ground.
5. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Calibration,
then Misc Test, then select "SWS INITIALIZATION,"
and follow the prompts until the initialization
operation has been completed.
BACK
ODS Unit Operation Check
Check the ODS operation after any of these actions.
o Replacement offront passenger's seat component(s)
(except.ODS unit and/or weight sensors)
o After a vehicle collision
o SRS unit replacement
Pre-Operation Check Set-up
o Make sure all the components of the front passenger's
seat are correctly installed.
o Position the front passenger's seat to. the rearmost
position. Adjust the seat recline to the forward most
position. Do not move the seat from this position.
o Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's
seat.
o Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
o Keep the windows closed.
o Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
the service bay.
o Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
o Turn the heater and the AlC off.
o Do not touch the passenger's seat during the
calibration.
o Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
temperature changes.
o Make sure all aftermarket devices such as amplifiers,
fluorescent light, air purifiers, CB or HAM radios, etc.
are turned off.
After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s)
(A).
A
3. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h),
then stop on level ground.
4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then
Inspection. In the HDS Inspection Menu, select
"SEAT OUTPUT CHK" and follow the prompts until
the ODS operation check has been completed.
24-35
BACK
SRS'
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
Check the driver's seat position after any ofthese,
actions .
Driver's seat position sensor replacement
Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
1. Make sure the driver's seat is at its full forward
position.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0).
24-36
5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then
Parameter Information, then Buckle Switch, Seat
Position Sensor.
6. Using a piece oftape (A), markthe location on the
seat's outer cover (B) where the front riser cover
meets the seat riser (C). The drivers seat position
sensor should read "NEAR."
B
7. Move the seat back in small increments (about
0.2 in., 5 mm) until the driver's seat position sensor
reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) from the front.
NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display
changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each
move.
If the driver's seat position sensor data does not
work as described above, check the driver's seat
position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and
replace parts as needed.
HDS from the DLC.
BACK
DTC Latch" Reset" Detection Item Notes
11-1x X Ooen in driver's airbaa first inflator (see page 24-55)
11-2x Increased resistance in driver's airbaa first inflator
11-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag first (see page 24-56)
inflator
11-4x Open in driver's airbag second inflator (see page 24-55)
11-5x Increased resistance in driver's airbag second inflator
11-6x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag (see page 24-56)
second inflator
11-8x X Short to power in driver's inflator (see cage 24-58)
11-9x Short to around in driver's airbaa first inflator (see cage 24-59)
11-Ax Short to Dower in driver's airbaa second inflator (see oaae 24-58)
11-Bx Short to around in driver'S airbaa second inflator (see oage 24-59)
12-1x X Ooen in front oassenger's airbag first inflator (see page 24-61)
12-2x Increased resistance in front oassenger's airbag first inflator
12-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's (see page 24-62)
airbaa first inflator
12-4x Ooen in front oassenger's airbag second inflator (see page 24-61)
12-5x Increased resistance in front oassenger's airbag second inflator
airbag second inflator
12-8x X Short to power in front passenger's airbag first inflator (see page 24-6;n
12-9x Short to ground in front passenger's airbag first inflator (see page 24-64)
12-Ax Short to power in front oassenaer's airbaa second inflator (see cage 24-63)
12-Bx Short to around in front oassenaer's airbaa second inflator (see cage 24-64)
21-1 x X Ooen in driver's seat belttensioner (see page 24-65)
21-2x Increased resistance in driver's seat belt tensioner
21-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's seat belt (see page 24-66)
tensioner
21-8x X Short to oower in driver's seat belt tensioner (see oage 24-67)
21-9x Short to around in driver's seat belt tensioner (see cage 24-68)
22-1x X Ooen in front oassenger's seat belt tensioner (see page 24-69)
22-2x Increased resistance in front passenger's seat belttensioner
seat belttensioner
22-8x X Short to power in front passenger's seat belttensioner (see page 24-71)
22-9x Short in front oassenaer's seat belttensioner (seepage 24-72)
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each OTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HOS
display. The character is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product
analysis.
* 1: The SRS indicator turns on and stays on whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, or until the code is cleared.
* 2: The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator will not turn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to
OFF (0), but the OTC will be stored in the SRS unit.
(confd)
24-37
BACK
SRS
DTC Latch' Reset' Detection Item Notes
31-1x X Open in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 24-73)
31-2x Increased resistance in driver's side airbtmjnflator
31-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's side airbag (see page 24-74)
inflator
31-8x X Short to power in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 24-75)
31-9x Short to ground in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 24-76)
32-1x X Open in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 24-77)
32-2x Increased resistance in side airbagJnflator
32-3x Short.to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's (see page 24-7a)
side. airbag inflator
32-8x X Short to P9wer in airbaginflator (see page 24-79)
32-9x Short to ground in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 24-80)
33-1x X Open in left side curtain airbag inflator (see page 24-81)
33-2x Increased resistance in left side cutain airbag inflator
33-3x Short to another wire 0r decreased resistance in left side curtain (see page 24-82)
airbag inflator
33-ax X Short to power in left side curtain airbag inflator (see page 24-83)
33-9x Short to ground in left side curtain airbag inflator (see page 24-84)
34-1x X Open or in right side curtainairbag inflator (see page 24-85)
34-2x Increased resistance in right side curtain airbag inflator
34-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in right side curtain (see page 24-86)
airbag inflator
34-8x X Short to power in right side curtain airbag inflator (see page 24-87)
34-9x Short to ground in right side curtain airbag inflator (see page 24-88)
41-1x X No signal from the left front impact sensor (see paae 24-89)
41-2x Internal failure of the left front impact sensor (see page 24-94)
41-8x X
41-9x
41-Ax
41-Bx
42-1x X No signal from the right front impact sensor (see page 24-91)
42-2x Internal failure of the right front impact sensor (see page 24-94)
42-8x X
42-9x
42-Ax .
42-Bx
24-38
BACK
DTe Latch" Reset'
z
Detection Item Notes
43-1x X No signal from the left side impact sensor (first) (see palle 24-94)
43-2x Internal failure ofthe left side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-103)
43-8x X
43-9x
43-Ax
43-Bx
44-1x X No signal from the right side im--'Lact sensor (first) (see palle 24-99)
44-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-103)
44-8x X
44-9x
44-Ax
44-Bx
45-1x X No sillnal from left side impact sensor (second) (see oaoe 24-94)
45-2x Internal failure of left side impact sensor (second) (see page 24-104)
45-8x X
45-9x
45-Ax
45-Bx
46-1x X No signal from right side i m ~ c t sensor (second) (see palle 24-99)
46-2x Internal failure of right side impact sensor (second) (see page 24-104)
46-8x X
46-9x
46-Ax
46-Bx
B1-1x X No sillnal from roll rate sensor (see paoe 24-104)
B1-2x Internal failure of roll rate sensor (see page 24-109)
B1-8x X
B1-9x
B1-Ax
B1-Bx
B2-1x X No signal from satellite safing sensor (see Daile 24-104)
B2-2x Internal failure of satellite safing sensor (see page 24-109)
B2-8x X
B2-9x
B2-Ax
B2-Bx
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each OTe denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HOS
analysis.
* 2: The SRS indicator turns on when the OTe is set. The SRS indicator will notturn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to
OFF (0), but the OTe will be stored in the SRS unit.
(cont'd)
24-39
BACK
SRS
DTC Latch' Reset
2
Detection Item Notes
51-xx X Internal failure of the SRS unit (see page 24-110)
52-xx X
53-xx X
54-xx
55-xx
57-xx X
61-1x X Ooen in driver's seat belt buckle switch (see page 24-111)
61-2x Short in driver's seat belt buckle switch (see oaoe 24-112)
621x Ooen in front oassenger's seat belt buckle switch (see p ~ e 24-113)
62-2x Short in front passenoer's seat belt buckle switch (see page 24-114)
71-1x Open in driver's seat position sensor (see paoe 24-115)
71-2x Short in driver's seat position sensor (see paoe 24-116)
24-40
BACK
DTC Latch" Reset" Detection Item Notes
81-4x X FaultyODS unit (see page 24-121)
81-61 No s1gnal from ODS unit (see page 24-118)
81-62 Non-stipulated response data
81-63 ModellD code or variation inconsistent (see page 24-121)
81-64 ECU seriallD code inconsistent
81-71 ODS unit does not calibrate (see page 24-120)
81-78
81-79 Front passenger's weight sensors drift check failure (see page 24-122)
82-1x No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor
83-2x No signal from the outer side front passenller's wejght sensor (see page 24-123)
85-4x Faulty ODS unit
85-61 No signal from the ODS unit (see page 24-118)
85-62 Non-st&ulated data
85-63 ModellD code or variation code inconsistent (see page 24-123)
85-64 ECU seriallD code inconsistent
85-71 ODS unit not initialized (see page 24-121)
85-78
85-79 ODS drift check failure (see page 24-124)
86-1x Faulty seat-back OPDS sensor.
86-2x Faulty seat support OPDS sensor
92-1x Short to power in the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (see 24-125)
92-2x Open or short to ground in the front passenger's airbag cutoff (see page 24-126)
indicator
A1-1x Faulty power supply (VA line) (see 24-128)
A2-1x Faulty power supply (VB line)' , .... (see paae 24-129)
E2-11 Front passenger's airbag does not QP_eration (see page 24-110)
E4-11 Front passenger's side does not IrL OPDS
F1-11 Driver's airb!!Q and/or driver's seat belt tensioner
F2-11 Front passenger's airbag and/or front passenger's seat belt tensioner

F3-11 Driver's side airbag, left side curtain airbag, and/or driver's seat belt
tensioner deployed
F4-11 Front passenger's side airbag, right side curtain airbag, and/or front
seat belttensioner deployed
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS
analysis.
2: The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator will not turn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to
OFF (0), butthe DTC will be stored in the SRS unit.
(cont'd)
24-41
BACK
SRS
ODS Unit DTC Index
SRSUnitDTC ODS Unit DTC Detection Item Notes
81-42 42-11 Internal failure of the ODS unit (see page 24-121)
42-12
42-13
42-14
42-15
42-16
42-18
42-21
42-23
42-25
81-43 43-31 Internal failure of the ODS unit
43-32
43-33
43-34
43-36
43-41
81-71 71-41 ODS unit does not calibrate Calibrate the front
71-42 Inner side front passenger-'s weight sensor serial 10 code inconsistent passenger's weight
71-43 Outer side front passenger's weight sensor serial 10 code inconsistent sensor (see page 24-120)
71-51 Faulty power supply of the ODS unit Failure of battery voltage
(see page 22-76)
71-53 Communication error between ODS unit and front passenger's weight Calibrate the front
sensor
,
passel'1ger's weight
71-55 Unsuccessful ODS unit calibration sensor (see page 24-120)
71-56
71-57
71-58
24-42
BACK
ODS Unit DTC Index
SRSUnitDTC ODSUnitDTC Detection Item Notes
82-11 11-11 Short to power in the inner side front passenger's weight sensor power (see page 24-122)
line
11-12 Short to ground in the inner side front passenger's weight sensor
power line
82-12 12-21 Open in the inner side front passenger's weight sensor signal line
82-13 13-31 No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor
13-32
13-33
13-34
13-35
83-21 21-11 Short to power in the outer side front passenger's weight sensor power (see page 24-123)
line
21-12 Short to ground in the outer side front passenger's weight sensor

83-22 22-21 Open in the outer side front passenger's weight sensor signal line
23-31 No signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor
23-32
23-33
23-34
23-35
42-02
42-03
42-04
42-05
42-06
42-07
43-02
43-03
43-04
43-05
43-06
85-71 71-00 ODS unit does not initialize (see page 24-121)
71-02 Internal failure of the ODS unit
24-43
BACK
SRS
SRS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-131) COmmunication with HDS
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-131) Charging system for under
are stored or overcharging
Side airbag cutoff indicator is Check the DTC. If DTC indicated, go to the ODS Initialization
flashing DTC troubleshooting Communication with
HDS
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-132) Communication with HDS
Side airbag cutoff indicator does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-132) ODS Initialization
come on Communication with
HDS
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator Check the DTC. If DTC indicated, go to the Communication with HDS
is flashing DTC troubleshooting
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator ... Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-133) Communication with HDS
stays on or comes on suddenly
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator Check the DTC. If DTC indicated, go to the Communication with HDS
does not come on DTC troubleshooting
HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page Communication with HDS
SRS unit or the vehicle 11-223)
24-44
BACK
System Description
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front
passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing
sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (8), the driver's airbag (e), the front passenger's airbag (D), side airbags
(E), side curtain airbags (F), seat belt tensioners (G), side impact sensors (first) (H), front impact sensors (I), roll rate
sensor (J), satellite safing sensor (K)and side impact sensors (second) (L).
Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensorsl both normally inflate at the same time.
However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that the SRS unit determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
Front Passenger's Weight Sensors
The ODS unit (M) is in the front passenger's seat-back along with the weight sensors (N). The weight sensors detect
the weight on the seat, and send the information to the ODS unit. If the total weight is about 65 Ibs (30 kg) or less, the
ODS unit sends a signal to the SRS unit to prevent the passenger's airbag from deploying. When the passenger's
airbag is disabled, the passenger airbag cutoff indicator on the center panel comes on to alert the driver that the front
passenger's airbag will not deploy in a front-end collision.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
The driver's seat position sensor (0) is under the driver's seat on the left side. When the driver's seat is moved to its
full forward position, the deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease its force of impact during a front-
end collision.
F
(cont'd)
24-45
BACK
SRS.
Roll Rate Sensor
The roll rate sensor is located under the second row seat. It detects the amount of roll of the vehicle and sends the
information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses this information to determine if a vehicle rollover is imminent. If so, it
deploys both side curtain airbags and the front seat belt tensioners.
Satellite Safing Sensor
The satellite safing sensor is located under the second row seat. The satellite safing sensor performs the same basic
function as the safing sensor in the SRS unit. It measures sideways G force, such asthe force the vehicle would
receive in a side collision in the rear, and sends that information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses that information,
and the information from the second side impact sensors to determine the side that is impaoted and the force. If the
threshold is met, the SRS unit deploys the side airbag, the side curtain airbag and the seat belt tensioner on that side. '
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator/ODS Operation
The indicator comes on if the front passenger's seat is occupied by a small adult or child who is leaning into the
deployment path, or an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the passenger's side
airbag is off and will not deploy; there is no problem with the side airbag. If the passenger sits upright or moves to
another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the light should go off. There will be some delay between the
occupant's repositioning, and when the indicator will turn on or off.
Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator
The indicator comes on if the weight of the front passenger is about 65 Ibs (30 kg) or less. This indicates the passenger's
front airbag is off and will not deploy. The front airbag is shut off to reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries.
SRS Operation
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuit will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate
Seat Belt Tensioners
(1) A front impact sensor, side impact sensor, or the satellite safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to
the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners.
(3) The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)
(1) A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals, and send them to the airbaginflator(s).
(3) The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(s)
(1) A side impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the
microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front
passenger's head is in the deployment path ofthe side airbag.
(3) The inflator that receives the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag.
Side Curtain Airbag(s)
(1) Side impact sensor, roll rate sensor, or the rear safing sensor must activate, and send electrical signals to the
microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side curtain airbag and side airbag inflator(s).
(3) The inflator that receives the signals must ignite and deploy the side curtain airbag and side airbag at the same
time.
24-46
BACK
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/RElAV
BOX
,---------'---,
Self-diagnostic System
MialOPROCESSOR and DIAGNOSTICCIRCUIT
MES
I I
GAUGECONTROl MODULE
DRMJrS
SIDEAlRBAG
INRATOR
FRDNT
PASSENGER'S
SIDEAlRBAG
INFlATOR
DRIVER'S
AlRBAG
FIRST
INRATOR
TRIGGER CIRCUIT
DRIVER'S
AlRBAG
SECOND
INRATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AlRBAG
SECOND
INRATOR
A self-diagnostic circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes
on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an
abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a OTe that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is
connected to the data link connector (OLe). This information can be read with the HOS when it is connected to the OLe
(16P) (see page 24-30).
NOTE: Before you disconnect the negative cable from the battery for troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-
theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped).
(cont'd)
24-47
BACK
SRS
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (28P)
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description
Number
1 GRN LA2+ Power source for driver's airbag second inflator
2 PUR LA2- Ground for driver's airbag second inflator
3 LTGRN RA2+ Power source for passenger's airbag second inflator
4 LTBLU RA2- Ground for passenger's airbag second inflator
5 LTGRN MES Memo_ry delete signal input
6 BRN SCS Service check signal input
7 LTBLU LA1+ Power source for driver's airbag first inflator
8 BRN LA1- Ground for driver's airbag first inflator
9 VEL RA1+ Power source for passenger's airbag first inflator
10 BLU RA1- Ground for passenger's airbag first inflator
11 WHT CAN HI Sends and receives communication signal with the gauge
control module
12 RED CANLO Sends and receives communication signal with the gauge
control module
13 BLU PTT Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator output line
14 GRN ODS Sends and receives communication signal with the ODS unit
15 BRN LFS- Ground for left front impact sensor (G505)
16 LTBLU RFS- Ground for right front impact sensor (G505)
17 GRN VA SRS system sub power (common with ODS)
18 RED VB SRS dedicated power (dedicated booster circuit)
22 BLK SRS GND(1) Ground circuitforthe SRS
23 BLK SRS GND(2) Ground circuit for the SRS
24 LTBLU K-LiNE Sends and receives scan tool signal (serial data)
27 RED LFS+ Power source for leftfront impact sensor
28 GRN RFS+ Power source for right front impact sensor
NOTE: BLU or BRN wires may be substituted for the wire colors In this table.
24-48
BACK
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (28P)
Number
1 RED LRP+ Power source for driver's seat belt tensioner
2 BRN LRP- . Ground for driver's seat belt tensioner
3 GRN RRP+ Power source for front passenger's seat belt tensioner
4 LTBLU RRP- Ground for front passenger's seat belt tensioner
5 GRN SS- Ground for driver's seat position sensor
6 BLU SS+ Power source for driver's seat position sensor
11 VEL LBSC Driver's seat belt buckle switch unbuckled signal
12 LTGRN LBSO Driver's seat belt buckle switch buckled signal
15 BLU RBSC Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch unbuckled signal
16 ORN RBSO Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch buckled sianal
17 GRN LSA+ Power source for driver's side airbag inflator
18 RED LSA- Ground for driver's side airbag inflator
19 WHT RSA+ Power source for front passenger's side airbag inflator
20 BLU RSA- Ground for front passenger's side
21 BRN LCA1+ Power source for left side curtain airbag inflator
22 BLU LCA1- Ground for left side curtain
23 GRV RCA1+ Power source for right side curtain airbag inflator
24 RED RCA1- Ground for right side curtain airbag inflator
25 PNK LBS1+ Power source for left side impact sensor (first), left side impact
sensor (second)
26 GRV LBS1- Ground for left side impact sensor (first), left side impact sensor
(second)
27 BRN RBS1+ Power source for right side impact sensor (first), right side
impact sensor (second)
28 LTGRN RBS1- Ground for right side impact sensor (first), right side impact
sensor (second)
NOTE: BLU or BRN wires may be substituted for the wire colors In this table.
(cont'd)
24-49
BACK
SRS
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (16P)
Number
4 BLU 555- .. Ground for satellite safing sensor
8 RED 555-+ Power source for satellite safing sensor
24-50
BACK
Circuit Diagram
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
GAUGE CON1llOLMODULE
JUNcnON
CONNECTOR
VEL ..Cl..

VEL
BlUE or BROWN wire color
can be used for the SRS cln:ults
thathaveaman:
JUNcnON
CONNECTOR
...c:I:L
[!J : WIth
[!l:Wrthoutnaviga1lon
C514

y
:CAN6ne
, : Othar communication line
S 2
No.22
110A)
DASHBOAfI!J
WIRE
HARNESS
GRN LTBLU GRN' RED'
SAS
UNIT
t
GRN GRN
INNERSIDf
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
MIGHT
SENSOR
12
OUTERSIDE
FRONT
A 2
OASHBOARO
WIRE
HARNESS
PASSENGER'S
MIGHT
SENSOR
WHT
6 :
,
,
,
JUNcnON
CONNECTOR
: .............. -.
. ........ .
I I
REO REO WHT
, ,
A 11: 12:
r C52B
C522 r;;1
, ....
.............. .
C52'
LTBlU'
:U"; .......
JUNCTION :
CONNECTOR U :
:1 ".r
.. . .. -
C510
LTBLU
BRN'

JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
BRN
U
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
1161'1
ODS UNIT
[!J:1T'
[!l:18
T
C606

GIIN'
13 17 18 14
VA VB
SRSUNIT
BlJ(' BU(' LTGRN'
MEMORY
ERASE
SIGNAL
iMESl
CONNECTOR
I2PI
BlX'
1
GSOS GSOI
(cont'd)
24-51
BACK
SRS
LEFI
ENGINE
COMPARlMENT
WIRE
HARNESS
C05
DASHBOARO
WIRE
HARNESS
24-52
2P
RIGHT
BAN' RED'
ENGINE
U
COMPARlMENT
WIRE .
HARNESS
rr
C203
BAN' RED'
LTBLU' GRN'
U
rr
LTBLU' GRN'
16
12
mONT
PASSfNGER'S
AlRBAG
ARST
INFLATOR
SRSUNIT
FlOOR WIRE
moNT
PASSfNGER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
BLU' C60S
JUNCTION
gJ CONNECTOR

GRN' BLUt
22 J 1S J
DRIVER'S
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
GRN BlU
DRIVER'S
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
LTGRN' VEL'
121 171
n
w 13=19=1-
1
I
LEFT
SIDE
SEAT
88.T
BUCKLE
SWITCH
L---t-
oN
: GRN BLK BLKlJBLK
BUCKLED ..

CABlf
REEl.
DRIVER'S
AlRBAG
FIRST
15
ORN' C608
JUNCTION
gJ CONNECTOR
BLK RED
mONT
PASSENGfR'S
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
.------i,..--+-...., RIGHT
ON:
UN-
BUCKLED
SIDE
SEAT
88.T
BUCKLE
L.::====t--...... SWIltH
BACK
LEFT SIDE
IMPACTSENSOR IFIRST)
4P 2
PNK' GRY'
B 25
B 1
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
26
2
DRIVER'S
SEATBELT
TENSIONER
SRSUNIT
3
2P
ORN'
~
4
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEATBELT
TENSIDNER
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
r
LEFTSIDE
ClJRTAJN AlADAG
INRATOR
'n
BRN' , BlU'
21 22
BLUE orBROWNwlrecoJor
canbeusedfor1he SRS c/mlits
that have a' mark
;
(cont'd)
24-53
BACK
SRS
RIGHTSIOE
, IMPACTSENSORIFIlISTI
4P 2 2P 2
BRN' LTGRN' PUR'
LJ
B 27 28
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
LTr
RIGHTSIDE
CURTAlNAlllBAG
INFlATOR
p n ~
DRY' RED'
23 24
BLUE or BROWN wire color
can beusedfortheSRSclrcuits
that haves 'mark
l
SRSUNIT
J
24-54
B1)
18 19 20
flOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
GRN' RED' WHT' BLU'
.y.y
DRIVER'S
SIDEAlRBAG
INFlATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDEAlRBAG
INFlATOR
C 4
8
SLU' RED'
SATElUTE
SAflNGSENSOR
I
LTlu,
RED'
BACK
OTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-1x (Ux" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in Driver's Airbag First Inflator
Increased Resistance in Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
Open in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
Increased Resistance in Driver's Airbag
Second Inflator
SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
'SRS simulator lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
24-20).
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-1x,
11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
(see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, go to
the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
negative cable from the battery, and wait for
3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A)
from the cable reel.
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q
connectors) and simulator lead J to the cable reel.
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
7. Erase the DTC memory.
8. Read the DTC (see page 24-30).
Is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the driver's
airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's
airbag (see page 24-137) .
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnectthe
3 minutes.
connector (A) from the cable reel.
070AZ-SNAA 100
connectors) and the simulator lead J to the
dashboard wire harness.
12. Reconnect the negative cableto the battery.
(cont'd)
24-55
BACK
SRS
14. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the cable reel;
replace the cable reel (see page 24-149) .
3 minutes.
16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the
SRS unit (see step 8 on page 24-29).
17. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
lead from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
18. Measure the resistance between the terminals of
both SRS simulator leads. There should be 1 Q or
less.
4P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance as specified?
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS
unit connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection between the connector and the SRS
unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Open or increased resistance in the
dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard
wire harness .
24-56
DTC 11-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Another Wire or Decreased
Resistance in Driver's Airbag First Inflator
Resistance in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
SRS inflator siiTIulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
SRS simulator lead J 070AZ-SNAA 100
24-20).
1. r ~ s e the DTC memory (see page 24-31).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-3x
or 11-6x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
BACK
Is DTC 11-3x or 1.1-6x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO...,..Short in the driver'sairbag first or second
inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
24-137) .
9. Turn the ignition switch OfF. DisconnecUhe
3 minutes.
070AZ-SNAA 100
A
connectors) and simulator lead J to the dashboard
wire harness.
14. Read the DTG.
Is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel
(see page 24-149) .
3 minutes.
16. Disconnect SRS unit connectorA (28P) from the
17. Disconn.ect the SRS inflator simulatbtfrom the SRS
18. Connect a SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to
No.7 and No.8 terminals and No.1 and No.2
terminals of the SRS unit connector A (28P)
(see page 24-25).
both SRS simulator leads. There should be an open
circuit (ohmmeter reads Ol) Qr at least 1 M Q.
4P CONNECTOR .
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Short in the dashboard wire harness; replace
the dashboard wire harness .
24-57
BACK
SRS
Short to Power in Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
DTC 11-Ax (11-AOto 11-A9, 11-AA to 11-AF):
Short to Power in Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check that the
then goes off.
Does theSRS indicator stay on, and isDTC 11-8x
or 11-Ax indicated?
YES.,...Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, g6 to
3. Turn the ignition sWitch OFF. Disconnect the
3 minutes.
24-58
6. Reconnectthe negative cable to the battery.
Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
YES-Go to step 9 .
NO-Short to power in the driver's airbagfirst or
second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
(see page 24-137) .
3 minutes.
070AZ-SNAA 100
A
r.SAZ"TB4011A
'/
::0
connectors) and the simulator lead J to the
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Short to power in the cable reel; replace the
cable reel (see page 24-.149) .
3 minutes.
20. Measure the for voltage between each terminal of
the SRS simulator lead and body ground. There
should be 0.5 V or less.
4P CONNECTOR
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Short to power in the dashboard wire
harness; replace the dashboard wire harness .
DTC 11-9x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thruF): .
Short to Ground in Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
DTC 11-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):.
Short to Ground in Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check thatthe
then goes off.
or 11-8x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittentfaiJure, the system is OK at this
time. Go toTroubleshooting Intermittent Failures
3 minutes. .
A
07SAZTB4011A
070AZSNAA100
::0/
(cont'd)
4 ~ 5 9
BACK
S8.S
8. Read the DTC (see 'page 24-30).
Is OTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's airbag first or
second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
(see page 24-137) .
3 minutes.
1 ~ Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P
f ~
A
/ 07SAZ-TB4011A
::m( 070AZ-SNAA 100
wire harness.
24-60
14. Read the DTC.
IsOTC 11-9xor11-Bxindicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the
cable reel (see page.24-149) .. '
3 minutes.
SRS unit (see step 8 on page 24-29) ..
18. Measure the resistancebetwe'&n each terminal of
should be an open circuit (ohmmeter reads Ol) or
at least 1 M Q .
~ ~ ~ ~ : ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ R E HARNESS
070AZ-SNAA 100
unit connector A (28P) and theSRS unit. Check the
unit IUhe connection is OK, replace the SRSunit
(see page 24-152)".
NO":"Short to ground in the dashboard wire .
BACK
DTC 12-1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open or Increased Resistance in Front
Passenger's Airbag First Inflator
Increased Resistance in Front Passenger's
Airbag First Inflator
Open or Increased Resistance in Front
Passenger's Airbag Second Inflator
Airbag Second Inflator
SRS simulator lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is OTC 12-1x,
12-2x, 12-4x, or 12-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P
wire harness.
Is OTC 12-1x, 12-2x, 12-4x, or 12-5x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the fronf
passenger's airbag first or second inflator; replace
the front passenger's airbag (see page 24-138) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) trom the
both SRS simulator leads. There should be 1 Q or
less.
4P CONNECTOR
unit connector A (28P). Check the connection; if the
connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-152) .
NO-Open or increased resistance in the
dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard
wire harness .
24-61
BACK
SRS
OTC 12-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag First
Inflator
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA01 00
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is OTC 12-3x
or 12-6xindicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
wire harness.
24-62
Is OTC 12-3x or 12-6x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the front passenger's airbag first or
second inflator; replace the front passenger's
3 minutes.
lead from the dashboard wire harness4P connector.
12. Connect a SRSshort canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to
No.9 and No. 10 terminals, and the No.3 and No.4
terminals of the SRS unit connector A (28P)
(see page 24-25).
both SRS simulator leads. There should be an open
circuit (ohmmeter reads Ol) or at least 1 M Q.
4P CONNECTOR
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Short in the dashboard wire harness; replace
BACK
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Airbag
First Inflator
DTC 12-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
or 12-Ax indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2Q
wire harness.
7. Erase the DTC memory ..
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
first or second inflator; replace the front passenger's
3 minutes.
14. Measure the voltage between each terminal of the
SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should
be 0.5 V or less.
4P CONNECTOR
(see page 24-152) .
24-63
BACK
SRS
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag
First Inflator
DTC 12-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
SRS simulator lead J070AZ-SNAA100
24-20).
then goes off.
or 12-8x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
negative cable from the.battery, and wait for
3 minutes.
wire harness.
24-64
Is OTC 2 ~ 9 x or 12-8x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's
airbag first or second inflator; replace the front
passenger's airbag (see page 24-138) .
3 minutes.
12. Measure the resistance between each terminal of
at least 1 M Q .
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Faulty SRS. unit or poor connection at SRS
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire
BACK
Open in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
Increased Resistance in Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
SRS simulator lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
24-20).
SRSindicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off.
or 21-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
4. Disconnectthe floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
from the driver's seat belt tensioner.

ft .. :'SAZ>mo".

connectors) and simulator lead K to the floor wire
harness.
YES-Go to step 9 .
seat belt tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt
(see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt
tensioner 4P connector (see step 7 on page 24-29).
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the
12. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and the
No.2 terminals of SRS unit connector B{28P).
There should be 2.0-3.0 Q.
Is resistance as specified?
unit connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection; if the connection is OK, replace the
SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
NO-Open or increased resistance in the floor wire
harness; replace the floor wire harness .
24-65
BACK
SRS
DTC 21-3x (#IX" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Resistance in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
07SAZ-TB4011A .
070AZ-SNAA200
::0/
harness.
24-66
6 .. Reconnect thEfnegative cable to the battery.
Is DTC 21-3x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the driver's seat belt tensioner;
replace the driver's seat belt (see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
12. Disconnect the simulator lead from the floor wire
harness.
13, Measure the resistance between the No.1 and the
No.2 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28P).
There should be an open circuit (ohmmeter reads
Ol) or at least 1 M Q .
NO-Short in the floor wire harness; replace the
floor wire harness .
BACK
Short to Power in Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.

ft :"AH"'''A

connectors) and simulator lead K to the floor, wire
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the driver's seat belt
tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see page
24-4) . ' ,
3 minutes.
tensioner 4P connector (see step 7 on,page 24-29).
harness.
13. Reconnect the negative cable to, the battery.
14, Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
between the No.2 terminal and body ground.
There should be 0.5 V or less.
SRS UNrr CONNECTOR B (28P)
NO-Short to power in the floor wire harness;
replace the floor wire harness .
24-67
BACK
SRS
Short to Ground in Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK aHhis
3 minutes.
~
~
A ,
/ ' 07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA200 ::6/"
harness.
24-68
Is OTC 21-9x indicated?
YES-Go to step'9. '
NO-Short to ground in the driver's seat belt
tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see page
24-4) .
3 minutes.
harness.
13. Measure the resistance between the No.1 terminal
of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground,
and between the No.2 terminal and body ground.
Ol) or at least 1 M Q
NO-Short to ground in the floor wire harness;
BACK
Open in Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Tensioner
Seat Belt Tensioner
24-20).
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 24-31'.
then goes off.
or 22-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
from the front passenger's seat belt tensioner.
, "" . I'"
~
A
/ 07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA200 ::U
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the front
passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front
passenger's seat belt (see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P
connector (see step 7 on page 24-29).
There should be 2.0-3.0 Q.
connection; ifthe connection is OK, replace the
24-69
BACK
SRS
Resistance in Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Tensioner
review SRS Precautions.and Procedures (see page
24-20).
then goes off.
Ooes the SRS indicator stay on, and is OTC 22-3x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
time. Go to Troubleshooting, Intermittent Failures
3 minutes.
07SAZ-TB4011A
070AZ-SNAA200
::U/
harness.
24-70
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the front passenger's seat belt
tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat belt
(see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
harness.
NO-Short in the floor wire harnessi replace the
BACK
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Tensioner
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's seat
belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat
belt (see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
10, Disconnect the driver'S seat belt tensioner 4P
harness.
SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
between the No.4 terminal and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (2ap)
24-71
BACK
SRS
OTC 22-9x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Tensioner
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
~ t ~
~
A
/ 07SAZTB4011A
070AZSNAA200 ::U/
harness.
24-72
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's seat
belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat
belt (see page 24-4) .
3 minutes.
harness.
of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground,
There should be an open circuit(ohmmeter reads
BACK
DTC 31-1x ("x" can be Othru 9 or A thru F):
Open in Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
SRS simulator lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
24-20).
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page
then goes off.
or 31-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
negative cable from the battery, and wait fOI"
3 minutes.
.,
from the driver's side airbag (B).
070AZSNAA300
connectors) and simulator lead L to the floor wire
harness.
Is OTC 31-1x or indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag
(see page 24-140) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors
12. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from SRS
lead from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
.' the black SRS simulator lead (A).There should be
1.0 Qor less.
24-73
BACK
SRS
OTe 31-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Resistance in Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
SRS simulator lead l070AZ-SNAA300
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (fI), and check that the
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
A
070AZSNAA300
connectors) and simulator lead l to the floor wire
harness.
24-74
8. Read the DTC ~ e e page 24-30).
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to another wire in the driver'S side
airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag
(see page 24-140) .
3 minutes.
13.> Connect the SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100)
to the No. 17 and No. 18 terminals of SRS unit
connector B (28P) (see page 24-25).
the black SRS simulator lead (A). There should be
an open circuit (ohmmeter reads Ol) or at least
1 MQ.
unit connector; B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
BACK
Short to Power in Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is orc 31-8x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
070AZSNAA300
harness.
Is orc 31-8x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver'S side airbag (see page
24-140) .
3 minutes.
(see step7 on page 24-29).
black SRS simulator lead (A) and body ground.
24-75
BACK
SRS
Short to Ground in Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedurf;:l,
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
negative cable from the battery, andwait for
3 minutes.
070AZ-SNAA300
harness.
24-76
YES-Go to step 9 .
NO-Short to ground in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see page
24-140) .
3 minutes.
the black.SRS simulator lead (A) and body ground.
BACK
Open in Front Passenger's Side Airbag
Inflator
Side Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
or 32-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
from the front passenger's side airbag (B).
B
07SAZ-TB4011A

A
070AZ-SNAA300
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the front
passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's side airbag (seepage 24-140) .
3 minutes.
1.0 Q or less.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
unit connector B.(28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
24-77
BACK
SRS
DTe 32-3x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Resistance in Front Passenger's Side Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OKatthis
negative cable from the battery, and waitfor
3 minutes.
harness.
24-78
YES-Goto step 9.
NO-Short to another wire in the front passenger's
side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's
side airbag (see page 24-140) .
3 minutes.
SRS unit (see step 8 on page 24-29) ..
simulator lead. Do not disconnectthe simulator
13. Connect the SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100)
1 MQ.
BACK
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Side
Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
B
A
07SAZTB4011A
~ v
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect both se'a'tbelt tensioner 4P connectors
24-79
BACK
SRS.
DTC 32-9x (#IX" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Side
Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

harness.
24-80
YES-Go to step 9 .
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
simulator lead. Do not disconnectthe simulator
the black SRS simulator lead (A) and body ground.
BACK
DTC 33-1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thruF):
Open in Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in Left Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
Ooes the SRS indicator stay on, and is orc 33-1x
or 33-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32); If another DTC is indicated, go to
3 minutes.
4. Remove the left side quarter pillar trim (sf;le page
20-85), then disconnect the floor wire harness 2P
connector (A) from the left side curtain airbag
connector (B).
harness.
8. Readthe DTC (see page 24-30).
Is orc 33-1x or 33-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the left side
curtain airbag; replace the left side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
1.0 Q or less.
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at the
SRS unit connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check
the connection; if the connection is OK, replace the
SRS unit (see page 24-152).. .
'harness; replace the floor wire harness .
24-81
BACK
SRS
Resistance in Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
3 minutes.
4. Remove the left side quarter pillar trim (see page
connector (B).
07SAZ-TB4011A
harness.
24-82
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to another wire in the left side curtain
airbag inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
1 MQ.
NO-Short to another wire in the floor wire
BACK
Short to Power in Left Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
4. Remove the left side quarter pillar trim (see page
connector (B).

=

07SAZ-TB4011A
harness.
8. Readthe DTC (see page 24-30).
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the left side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
11. Disconnect the SRS unit connector B (28P) from the
SRSunit (see step 8 on page 24-29).
15. Measure the for voltage between each terminal of
24-83
BACK
OTe 33-9x ("X" can be 0 thru9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in Left Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
the DlC Troubleshooting Index;
3 minutes.
4. Remove the left side quarter pillartrim (see page
connector (B).

B I /
0-
/
07SAZ-TB4011A
harness.
24-84
YES-Go to step 9 .
NO-Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag
(see page 24.141) .
3 minutes.
BACK
Open in Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Increased Resistance in Right Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
or 34-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures.
3 minutes.
4. Remove the right side quarter pillar trim (see page
connector (A) from the right side curtain airbag
connector (B).
07SAZ-TB4011A
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the right side
curtain airbag inflator, replace the right side curtain
negative cable from the battery, and.wait for
3 minutes.
1.0 Q or less.
24-85
BACK
SRS
DTC 34-3x (IIXII can be 0 thru 9 orA thru F):
Resistance in Right Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
SRS simulator lead l070AZ-SNAA300 .
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
connector (B).
07SAZTB4011A
harness.
24-86
8. Read the DTC (see page 24-30) ..
Is DTC'34-3x indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to another wire in the right side curtain
airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector 8 (28P) from the
1 MQ.
unit connector 8 (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
BACK
Short to Power in Right Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
connector (B).
~
7 ~ ~ N ~ ~ B
~
07SAZ-TB4011A
harness.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the right side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
24-87
BACK
SRS
OTe 34-9x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in Right Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON ("), and check that the
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3 minutes.
connector (B).

"
-
\

07SAZTB4011A
harness.
24-88
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the right side curtain
airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141) .
3 minutes.
BACK
OTC 41-1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or Athru F):
No Signal From the Left Front Impact Sensor
SRS simulator lead l
review SRS Precautiol)s and (see page
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator st'ay on, and is OTe 41-1x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If another DTC is ind,icated, go to
the DTC Troubleshooting Index ..
3. Turn the ignition switch.OFF.
wait for 3 minutes.
5. Check the connections between SRS unit connector
A (28P) and the SRS unit, between the left engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the
left front impactsensor(see page 24-18), and at
connector C305 (see page 22-24).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the poor connections and retest. If DTC
41-1x is still present, go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the left engine compartment wire
harness 2P c.onnector (A) from the left frpnt impact
,serasor.
A
8. Measure the resistance between the No. 15 and No.
27 terminals of SRS unit connector A(28P). There
at 1 M Q
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the left engine compartment wire
harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness .
(cont'd)
24-89
BACK
SRS
9. Measure the resistance between the No. 15
terminal of SRS unit connector A(28P) and body
ground, and between the No. 27 terminal and body
ground. There should be an open circuit (ohmmeter
reads OL) or at least 1 M Q.
= =
YES-Go to step 10.
harness or the left engine compartment wire
harness; replace the faulty harness .
24-90
12. Measure the voltage betweeh the No. 15 terminal
of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground,
and between the No. 27 terminal and body ground.
"
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Short to power in the left engine
compartment wire harness or the dashboard wire
14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper
connector) and the black lead (A) of simulator lead
L to the left engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (8).
BACK
27 terminals of SRS lInit connector A (28P). There
should be 0-1.0 Q.
YES-Faulty left front impact sensor or SRS unit;
replace the left front impact sensor (see page
24-159). If the problem is still present, replace the
NO-Poor connection at C305, open in left engine
compartment wire harness, or open in dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C305 (see page 22-24). If it is
OK, replace the faulty harness .
DTC 42-1x (Ux" can be 0 thru 9 or A thruF):
No Signal From the Right Front Impact
Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is Dre 42-1x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3. .
time. Go to Troubleshooting Failures
wait for 3 minutes.
5. Check the connections between SRS unit connector
A (28P) and the SRS unit, between the right engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the
right front impact sensor (see page 24-18), and at
connector C203 (see page 22-22).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the poor connections and retest. If DTC
42c1x is still present, go to step 6.
(cont'd)
24-91
BACK
SRS
6. Disconnect the right engine compartment wire
harness 2P conilector(A) from the right front
impact sensor.
A
28 terminals of SRS unit connector A (28P). There
should be an open circuit (ohmmeter reads Ollor
at least 1 M Q .
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)'
Wire side of female terminals'
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the right engine compartment wire
harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness .
24-92,
terminal ofSRS unitcoilMctor A (28P) and body
ground, and between the No. 28 terminal'and body
reads Ol) or at least1 M Q
YES-Go to step 10.
harness or the right engine compartment wire
BACK
of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground,
and between the No. 28 terminal and body ground.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Short to power in the right engine
compartment wire harness or dashboard wire
L to the right engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (8).
15. Measure the resistance between the No. 16 and
No. 28 terminals of SRS unit connector A (28P).
There should be 0-1.0 Q.
YES-Faulty right front impact sensor or SRS unit;
replace the right front impact sensor (see page
24-159). If the problem is still present, replace the
NO-Poor connection at C203, open in right engine
compartment wire harness, or open in dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C203 (see page 22-22). If it is
OK, replace the faulty harness .
24-93
BACK
SRS
DTC 41-2x, 41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx ("x"
can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Internal Failure of the Left Front Impact
Sensor
DTC 42-2x, 42-8x, 42-9x, 42-Ax, 42-Bx ("x"
Internal Failure of the Right Front Impact
Sensor
24-20).
1. Erase the DTe memory (see page 24-31).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 41-2x,
41-8x, 41-9x, 41-Ax, 41-Bx, 42-2x, 42-8x, 42-9x,
42-Ax,or 42-Bx indicated?
YES-Replace the left or right front impact sensor
(see page 24-159). Ifthe DTe returns, replace the
(see page 24-32). If another DTe is indicated, go to
the DTe Troubleshooting Index.
24-94
No Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
(first) )
No Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
(second)
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 10
seconds.
3. Read the DTe (see page 24-30).
Is DTC 45-1x (except 45-11) indicated?
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (second);
replace the left side impact sensor (second)
(see page 24-154) .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Read the DTe.
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace
the left side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-153) .

NO-Go to step 5.
BACK
5. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 6.
time.
7. Check for a damaged to the floor wire harness
between SRS unit and left side impact sensor (first),
left side impact sensor (first), and left side impact
sensor (second).
Is the floor wire harness OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the floor wire harness .
wait for 3 minutes.
9. Replace the left side impact sensor (first) with a
known-good part (see page 24-153).
10 .. Erase the DTC memory (see page 24-31).
seconds.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Faulty left side impact sensor (first); replace
the original left side impact sensor (first) (see page
24-153) .
wait for 3 minutes.
15. Replace the left side impact sensor (second) with a
known-good part (see page 24-154).
16. Erase the DTC (see page 24-31).
seconds.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Faulty left side impact sensor (second);
replace the original left side impact sensor (second)
(see page 24-154) .
wait for 3 minutes.
22. Disconnect SRSunit connector B (28P) from the
(cont'd)
24-95
BACK
SRS
from the left side impact sensor (second) (see step
4 on page 24-154).
24. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4Pconnector (A)
from the left side impact sensor (first) (see step 5
on page 24-153).
24-96
3 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 26.
26. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.4
terminal of the floor wire harness 4P connector.
YES-Go to step 27.
BACK
of floor wire harness 4P connector and body
ground, and between the No.3 terminal and body
reads Ol) or at least 1 M Q
YES-Go to step 28.
Terminal side of female terminals'
YES-Go to step 29.
floor wire harness 4P connector and body ground,
YES-Go to step.32.
(cont'd)
24-97
BACK
SRS
33. Install a jumper wire between the No. 25 terminal
and No. 26 terminal of the SRS unit connector 8
(28P).
There should be 0-10 Q.
YES-Go to step 35.
NO-Open in the floor wire harness; replace the
24-98
L to the floor wire harness 2P connector (8).
07SAZ-TB4011A ~
~
070AZ-SNAA300
YES-Reconnect the floor wire harness 4P
connector to the left side impact sensor (first) and
left side impact sensor (second). If the DTCs are still
indicated, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
BACK
DTC 44-1x ("X" can be Othru 9 or A thru F):
No Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor
(first)
No Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor
(second)
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and waitfor 10
seconds.
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (second);
replace the right side impact sensor (second)
(see page 24-154) .
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Read the DTC.
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace
the right side impact sensor (first) (see page
24-153) .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 6.
time.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF .
7. Check for damage to the floor wire harness
between the SRS unit and right side impact sensor
(first), right side impact sensor (first), and right side
impact sensor (second).
Is the floor wire harness OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO...,...Replace the floor wire harness ...
wait for 3 minutes.
9. Replace the right side impactsensor (first) with a
known-good part (see page
seconds.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Faulty right side impact sensor (first); replace
the original right side impact sensor (first)
(see page 24-153) .
(cont'd)
24-99
BACK
SRS
wait for 3 minutes.
15. Replace the right side impact sensor (second) with
a known-good part (see page 24-154).
seconds.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Faulty right side impact sensor (second);
replace the original right side impact sensor
(second) (see page 24-154) .
wait for 3 minutes.
24-100
from the right side impact sensor (second) (see
from the right side impact sensor (first) (see step 5
on page 24-153).
BACK
YES-Go to step 26.
terminal of the right side wire harness 4P connector.
Ol) or at least 1M Q.
YES-Go to step 27.
Terminal side offamale terminals
YES-Go to step 28.
28. Measurethe resistance between the No.1 terminal
YES-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
24-101
BACK
SRS
floor wire harness 4P connector and body ground.
YES-Go to step 32.
replace the floor wire harness . ;
24-102
and No. 28 terminal of the SRS unit connector B
(28P).
YES-Go to step 35.
BACK
35. Connect the SRSinflator simulator.(jumper
L to the floor wire harness 2P connector (B).
070AZ-SNAA300
connector to the right side impact sensor (first) and
right side impact sensor (second). If the DTCs are
still indicated, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-152) .
DTC 43-2x, 43-8x,43-9x, 43-Ax, 43-Bx ("X"
can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal Failure of
the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
DTC 44-2x, 44-8x;.44-9x, 44-Ax,44-Bx ("X"
the Right Side Impact Sensor (first)
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is Dre 43-2x,
43-8x, 43-9x, 43-Ax, 4 3 ~ B x 44-2x, 44-8x, 4 4 ~ 9 x
44-Ax, 44-Bx indicated? .
YES-Replace the left or right side impact sensor
(first) (see page 24-153). Ifthe DTC returns, replace
the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
time. Goto Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
24-103
BACK
SRS
DTC45-2x, 45-8x, 45-9x, 45-Ax, 45-Bx ("x"
can be Othru 9 or A thru F): Internal Failure of
the Left Side Impact Sensor (second)
DTC 46-2x, 46-8x, 46-9x, 46-Ax, 46-Bx ("x"
the Right Side Impact Sensor (second)
24-20).
SRS indicator-comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is OTe 4S-2x,
4S-8x, 4S-9x, 4S-Ax, 4S-Bx, 46-2x, 46-8x, 46-9x,
46-Ax, 46-Bx indicated?
YES-Replace the left or right side impact sensor
(second) (see page 24-154). Ifthe DTC returns,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
24-104
DTC B1-1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
No Signal From the Roll Rate Sensor
DTC B2-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
No Signal From the Satellite Safing Sensor
24-20).
seconds.
Is OTe B1-1x (except B1-11) indicated?
YES-Faulty roll rate sensor; replace the roll rate
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Read the DTC.
Is OTe B2-1x(except B2-11) indicated?
YES-Faulty satellite safing sensor; replace the
satellite safing sensor (see page 24-156) .
NO-Go to step 5.
BACK
5. Read the DTC.
Is OTC82-11 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time.
7. Check for damage to the floor wire harness
between the SRS unit and satellite safing sensor,
satellite safing sensor, and roll rate sensor.
Is the floor harness OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the floor wire harness .
8. Disconnectthe negative cable from the battery, and
wait for 3 minutes.
9. Replace the satellite safing sensor with a known-
good part (see page 24-156).
seconds.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Faulty satellite safing sensor; replace the
original satellite safing sensor (see page 24-156) .
13. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the negative cable from the batterY, and
wait for 3 minutes.
15. Replace the roll rate sensor with a known-good part
(see page 24-155).
seconds.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Faulty roll rate sensor; replace the original roll
. rate sensor (see page 24-155) .
wait for 3 minutes.
21. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the
(cont'd)
24-105
BACK
SRS
from the roll rate sensor (see step 4 on page
24-155).
from the satellite safing sensor (see step 4 on page
24-156).
24-106
No.3 terminal of the floor wire harness 4P
connector. There should be an open cireuit
(ohmmeter reads Ol) or at least 1 M Q .
YES-Go to step 26.
terminal ofthe right side wire harness 4P connector.
YES-Go to step 27.
BACK
ground; and between the No.3 terminal and body
reads Ol) or at least 1 M Q .
YES-Go to step 28.
ground, and betweenthe No: 4 terminal and body
reads Ol) or at least 1 M Q .
YES-Go to step 29.
floor wire harness 4P connector and body ground,
YES-Go to step 32.
(cont'd)
24-107
BACK
SRS
and No. 28 terminal of the SRS unit connector C
(16P).
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
h = ; ; E ; ; = ; ; ~ ~ ~ ; I JUMPER
WIRE
YES-Go to step 35.
24-108
connector) and the brack lead (A) of simulator lead
L to the floor wire harness 2P connector (B).
070AZ-SNAA300
/ 07SAZ-TB4011A
1J(
connector to the satellite safing sensor and roll rate
sensor. If the OTCs are still indicated, replace the
BACK
DTC B1-2x, B1-8x, B1-9x, B1-Ax, B1-Bx ("x"
the Roll Rate Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC B1-2x,
B1-8x, B1-9x, B1-Ax, or B1-Bx indicated?
YES-Replace the roll rate sensor (see page
24-155).lfthe DTC returns, replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
DTC B2-2x, B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax, B2-Bx ("x"
the Satellite Safing Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC B2-2x,
B2-8x, B2-9x, B2-Ax,or B2-Bx indicated?
YES-Replace the satellite safing sensor (see page
24-156). If the DTC returns, replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
24-109
BACK
. I,'.
SRS
DTC 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx, 57-xx
(IIX" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal
Failure of the SRS Unit
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check the
battery/system voltage and battery cable corrections.
If the voltage is low, repair the charging system or
replace the battery before troubleshooting the SRS. If
the battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the client if
the battery ever went dead or if the engine was
started and run with the battery in a low state of ....
charge. A dead battery may trigger one or more of
these DTCs.
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 51-xx,
52-xx, 53-xx, 54-xx, 55-xx, or 57-xx indicated?
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
NO-Intermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this
24-110
DTC E2-11, E4-11, F1-11, F2-11, F3-11, F4-11:
Airbags, Side Airbags, Side Curtain Airbags
and/or Seat Belt Tensioners
The SRS unit must be replaced after any airbags and/or
tensioners have deployed (see page 24-134) .
NOTE:
DTC E2-1" is set ifthe system triggered airbag
deployment but the front passenger's airbag was
prevented from deploying because of the seat weight
sensor.
DTC E4-11 is set if the system triggered a passenger's
side airbag deployment but the airbag was prevented
from deploying by the ODS. Replace the right side
impact sensor (first) (see page 24-153).
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20).
BACK
Open in Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then buckle and
unbuckle the driver's seat belt several times.
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the driver's seat harness 3P connector
from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector (A).
5. From the system selection menu on the HDS, select
SRS, then select SRS again, then select
PARAMETER INFORMATION, then Buckle Switch.
Seat Position Sensor, and check the status on the
HDS screen for FRONT LEFT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH when the seat belt is buckled, and
unbuckled .
If UNBUCKLE, BUCKLE, or SHORT is indicated
replace the driver's seat wire harness, or floor
wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
If OPEN is indicated, go to step 6.
of the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector and
body ground. There should be 0-1 Q.
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Open in the driver's seat wire harness or floor
wire harness or poor ground connection at G602
(see page 22-34). If G602 is OK, replace the faulty
harness .
7. Alternatery connect the No.2 and No.3 terminals
of the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector to
body ground with a jumper wire, and check the
status on the HDS screen.
Does the status alternate from UNBUCKLE to
BUCKLE?
YES-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-6), then clear the DTC .
NO-Open in the driver's seat wire harness or floor
24-111
BACK
SRS
Short in Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then buckle and
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 3P
connector from the driver's seat belt buckle switch
3P connector (A).
24-112
PARAMETER INFORMATION, then Buckle Switch,
Seat Position Sensor, and Check the status on the
HDS screen for FRONT LEFT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH.
Is OPEN indicated on the HOB?
YES-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-6), then clear the DTC .
NO-Short to ground in the driver's seat wire
harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty
wire harness .
BACK
DTC 62-1x ("x" can be 0 thru9 or A thru F):
Open in Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness
3P connector from the front passenger's seat belt
buckle switch 3P connector (A).
PARAMETER INFROMATION, then Buckle Switch.
HDS screen for FRONT RIGHT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH when the seat belt is buckled, and
unbuckled .
If UNBUCKLE, BUCKLE, or SHORT is indicated
open in the front passenger's seat wire harness,
or floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
If OPEN is indicated, go to step 6.
of the front passenger's seat wire harness 3P
connector and body ground. There should be
0-1 Q.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE
HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Open in the front passenger's seat wire
harness or floor wire harness or poor ground
connection at G602 (see page 22-34). If G602 is OK,
replace the faulty harness .
7. Alternatery connect the No.2 and No.3 terminals
of the front passenger's seat wire harness 3P
connector to body ground with a jumper wire, and
check the status on the HDS screen.
Does the status alternate from UNBUCKLE to
BUCKLE?
YES-Replace the front passenger's seat belt
buckle assembly (see page 24-6), then clear the
DTC .
NO-Open in the front passenger's seat wire
harness .
24-113
BACK
SRS
Short in Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and
unbuckle the front passenger's seat belt several
times.
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness
3P connector from the front passenger's seat belt
buckle switch 3P connector (A).
24-114
PARAMETER INFORMATION, then Buckle Switch,
HDS screen for FRONTRIGHT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH.
Is OPEN indicated on the HDS?
YES-Replace the front passenger's seat belt
buckle assembly (see page 24-6), then clear the
DTC
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's seat
wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the
faulty harness .
BACK
DTC 71-1x (Ux"'can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in Driver's Seat Position Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3. Check the connection between the driver's seat
wire harness 2P connector and the driver's seat
position sensor (see page 24-18).
YES-Go to step 6.
negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
minutes.
7. Disconnect the driver'sseatwire harness 2P
connector from the driver's seat position sensor (A).
8. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the driver's
seat wire harness 2P connector with a jumper wire.
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
w
U JUMPER WIRE
9. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see
(cont'd)
24-115
BACK
SRS
YES-Faulty driver's seat position sensor or SRS
unit; replace the driver's seat position sensor
(see page 24-160). If the problem is still present,
NO-Open in the floor wire harness or the driver's
seat wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
24-116
DTC71-2x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short in Driver's Seat Position Sensor
24-20).
1. Erase the DTC memory (see. page 24-31).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
minutes.
BACK
4. Disconnect the driver's seat wire.harness 2P
connector from the driver's seat position sensor (A)
(see page 24-18).
Is OTe 71-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Faulty driver's seat position sensor; replace
the driver's seat position sensor (see page 24-160).

negative cable fromthe battery, and wait for 3
minutes.
10. Disconnect SRS unit connector 8 (28P) from the
No.6 terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (28P).
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M Q.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Short in the floor wire harness orthe driver's
of SRS unit connector 8 (28P) and body ground,
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M Q.
=
YES-Faulty driver's seat position sensor or the
SRS unit; replace the driver's seat position sensor
(see page 24-160).lfthe problem is still present,
NO-Short in the floor wire harness or the driver's
24-117
BACK
SRS:
DTC 81-61, 85-61: No Signal From ODS Unit
DTC 81-62, 85-62:, Non-Stipulated Response
Data
24-20).
1. Make sure nothing is on,the front passenger's seat.
2. Erase the DTC memory (see page 2 4 ~ 3 1 .
Is OTe 81-61,85-61,81-62, or 85-62 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
4. Check the connection between the ODS unit
harness 18P connector and the ODS unit.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the poor connection and retest. If DTC
85-61 or 85-62 is still present, go to step 5.
24-118
/relaybox.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the 'ignition switch
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in
the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (floor wire harness, or
ODS unit harness) .
7. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (A)
from the ODS unit.'
A
the ODS unit harness 18P connector and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.
ODS UNIT HARNESS18P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Open in the floor wire harness, or ODS unit
BACK
terminal of the ODS unit harness 18P connector
and body ground. There should be 0-1.0 Q.
ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Open in the ODS unit harness, floor wire
harness, or poor ground connection at G605
(see page 22-38). If G605 is OK, replace the faulty
harness .
3 minutes.
terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body
ground. There should be an open circuit or at least
1 MQ.
=
YES-Go to step 15.
harness .
voltage between the No. 14 terminal of SRS unit
connector A (28P) and body ground. There should
be 0.5 V or less.
=
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Short to power in the dashboard wire harness
or floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
(cont'd)
24-119
BACK
SRS
terminal ofSRS unit connector A (28P) and the
No.7 terminal of the ODS unit harness 18P
connector. There should be 0-1.0 Q.
ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
YES-Faulty ODS unit or SRS unit; replace the ODS
unit (see page 24-158). Ifthe problem is still present,
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness or floor
24-120
OTe 81-71, 81-78: ODS Unit does not
Calibrate
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on,and is 81-71 or
81-78 indicated?
YES-Calibrate the ODS unit (see page 24-34) .
BACK
OTC 85-71, 85-78: ODS Unit does not
Initialized
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (1\), and check that the
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is 85-71 or
85-78 indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If another DTC is.indicated, go to
the DTC Troubleshooting.lndex .. '
3. Initialize the ODS unit (see page 24-33).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (1\), and check that the
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go off?
NO-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158) .
OTC 81-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thruF),
81-63,81-64: Internal Failure of the ODS Unit
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC.B1-4x,
81-63, or 81-64 indicated? "
YES-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158). If
the DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see page

NO-::lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

BACK
SRS
OTC 81-79:' Front Passenger's Weight
Sensors Drift Check Failure
review SRS Precautions and Procedures '(see page
24-20}.
2.' Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 81-79
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If anotherDTC is indicated, go to
4. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
then goes off.
NO-Remove the front passenger's seat assembly
(see page 20-141) and the front passenger's weight
sensors (see page 24-157), then reinstall them.
Calibrate the ODS unit (see page 24-34). Retry the
troubleshooting. If DTC 81-79 is still present,
replace the front passenger's weight sensors .
24-122
OTC 82-1x("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): '
No Signal From the Inner Side Front
Passenger's Weight Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Replace the inner side front passenger's
,weight sensor (see page 24-157) .
BACK
DTC 83-2x ("X
U
No Signal From the Outer Side Front
Passenger's Weight Sensor
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Replace the outer side front passenger's
weight sensor (see page 24-157) .
DTC 85-4x ("x" can beO thru 9 or A thru ~
85-63,85-64: Internal Failure of the ODS Unit
NOTE:
An incorrect ODS unit can cause DTC 85-63.
Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20).
1. Erase the DTC r,nemory (see page 24-31).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC85-4x,
85-5x, 85-63, or 85-64 indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
time. Go to Troubleshooting IntermittentFailures
3. Initializethe ODSunit(see page 24-33).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go oft?
NO-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158) and
retest .
24-123.
BACK
OTC 85-79: OPOS Sensor Drift Check Failure'
24-20).
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DIG 85-79
indicated?
YES-Turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If another DTCis indicated, go to
the DTOTroubleshooting Index.
thengoes off.
NO-Go to step 5.
then goes off.
NO-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158) and
retest. If the problem is still present, replace the
OPDS sensor/seat-back (see page 20-150) .
24-124
OTC 86-1x (IIXII can beOthru 9 or A thru F)
Faulty OPDS Seat-Back Sensor
OTC 86-2x (IIX" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Faulty OPOS Seat Support Sensor
, , ~
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and checkthat the
then goes off;
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTG 86-1x
or 86-2x indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
. NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
time.; Goto Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
NOTE: Aftermarket devices (fluorescent lights,
laptop computers, etc.) used near the front
passenger's seat-back can interfere with the seat-
back sensors and cause a false DTC 86-1x or 86-2x.
If one of these devices was used, erase the DTC,
operate the device near the seat-back, and recheck
for DTCs. If DTC 86-1x or 86-2x is set, erase it, and
do not use the device near the seat-back.
BACK
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness
connector (A) and the ODS unit connector (B).
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair the poor connection, and clear the
DTC .
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back foam (see page
20-150), and initialize the ODS (see page 24-33).
5. Erase the DTC memory, then check for DTC 86-1x
or 86-2x.
YES-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-158) .
NO-The system is OK .
DTC 92-1x ( .. x .. can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Power in the Passenger's Airbag
Cutoff Indicator
24-20).
then goes off.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
(see page 24-32). If another DTCis indicated, go to
3. Disconnectthe passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
6P connector (see page 24-161).
3 minutes.
(cont'd)
24-125
BACK
SRS
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (1.1).
of SRSunit'connector A (28P) and body ground.
=
YES-Faulty SRS unit or passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator; replace the passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator. If the problem is still present, replace the
24-126
Open or Short to Ground in the Passenger's
Airbag Cutoff Indicator
24-20).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (!I), and check that the
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and OTe 92-2x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system isOKatthis
(see page 24-32). If another DTeis indicated, go to
the DTe Troubleshooting Index.
3. Disconnect the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
6P connector (see page 24-161).
3 minutes.
BACK
of the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 6P
connector and the No. 13 terminal of SRS unit
connector A (28P). There should be 0-1.0 Q.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A {28P)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace
terminal ofthe SRS unit connector A (28P) and
body ground. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 MQ.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A {Z8P)
=
YES-Replace the passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator. If the problem is still present, replace the
24-127
BACK
SRS
OTe A1"1x ("X" can be 0 thru 9 orA thru F):
Faulty Power supply (VA Line)
24-20).
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 24-31 ).
then goes off.
Is DTC A 1-1x indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
the DTC Troubleshbotinglndex.
/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in
the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire
harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit
harness) .
wait for 3 minutes.
7. Disconnect the SRS unit connector A (28P) from the
2 4 ~ 2 8
9. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 17 terminal of
SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground. Turn
the ignition switch ON (II), and'measure the voltage.
There should be battery voltage when the ignition
is on.
=
unit connector (A) 28P and the SRS unit. Check the
unit. Ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
11. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector X
(39P).
x
terminal of under-dash fuse/relay box connector X
(39P) and the No. 17 terminal of SRS unit connector
A (28P). There should be 0-1.0 Q.
Q
CONNECTOR X (39P)
YES-Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
poor contact between connector X (39P) and the
under-dash fuse/relay box; check the connection. If
the connection is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/
DTC A2-1x (Ux" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Faulty Power Supply (VB Line)
24-20).
relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Replace the No. 22 (10 A) fuse.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and wait for 30
seconds. Then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Check the No. 22 (10 A) fuse.
Is the fuse OK?
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Replace the No. 22 (10 A) fuse.
3 minutes.
30 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
24-129
BACK
SRS
10. Check the No. 22 (10A) fuse.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Short to ground in the SRS unit; replace the
harness or in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 22
(10 A) fuse line; replace the dashboard wire
harness. If the problem is still there, replace the
under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-72) .
minutes.
14. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 18 terminal of
SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground. Turn
the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the voltage.
There should be battery voltage with the ignition
on.
=
unit connector A (28P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. If the connection is OK, replace the
NO-Go to step 15.
24-13'0
16. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector S
(2P).
ofthe under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (2P)
and the No. 18 terminal of SRS unit connector A
(28P). There should be 0-1.0 Q.
UNDERDASH SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR S (2P)
YES-Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
poor connection between connector S (2P) and the
under-dash fuse/relay box; check the connection. If
the connection is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box (see page 2272) .
BACK
SRS indicator does not come on
and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate,
4. Check for PGM-FI, Body Electrical, and SRS DTCs
with the HDS.
Are there anyPGM-FI, Body Electrical, or SRS
DTCs?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 5.
Does the SRS indicator come on?
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
NO-Faulty gauge control module; replace the
gauge control module (see page 22-337) .
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are
stored
1. Connect the HDS to the DLe (see page 24-30).
4. Select Body Electrical ststus with the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs in the Gauge Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to the DTC B1187 troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check that the HDS communicate with the SRS unit.
Does the HDScommunicate with the SRS unit?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-If the HDS does not communicate with the
SRS unit, check for power and ground at SRS unit
. connector A (28P). If power and ground are still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .
7. From the HDS System Menu, select SRS, then SRS
in Mode Menu, PARAMETER INFORMATION, then
SCS, MES, Indicator. Read the current status of the
SRS indicator.
Is the status ON?
(see page 24-152) .
24-131
BACK
SRS
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on
2. Make sure the seat-back is dry.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and see if the SRS
indicator comes on.
Does the SRS indicator come on?
YES-Go to the Symptom Troubleshooting "SRS .
indicator stay on".
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Connect the HOS to the OLC (see page 24-30).
5. Make sure the HOS communicates with the vehicle
6. From the Main Menu on the HOS, select SRS, then
PARAMETER INFORMATION. In the PARAMETER
INFORMATION Menu, select "scs, MES, Indicator,"
and read what is screen on the HOS.
Is OFF indicated on the HDS?
YES-Faulty gauge contorol module; replace the
SRS unit; replace the SRS unit
(see page 24-152) .
24-132
Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come
on
NOTE: If the SRS indicator also stays on, go to SRS
indicator stays on, but no OTCs are stored (see page
24-131).
side airbag cutoff indicator comes on for about6
seconds.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
YES-Go to the Symptom Troubleshooting "SRS
indicator stay on."
NO-Go to step 2.
and the SRS unit. If it does not troubleshoot the
OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Do the self diagnostic function with the HOS.
Does the side airbag cutoff indicator come on?
(see page 24-152) .
BACK
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stays on
or comes on suddenly
NOTE: Under the following conditions, the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator stays on or comes on suddenly.
o No one is sitting the front passenger's seat, but there
is an object on the seat more than 5 kg (11 Ibs).
o The seat belt is buckled, but no one is sitting on the
front passenger's seat.
o Someone who is less than 30 kg (66Ibs) is sitting on
the front passenger's seat.
1. Check for these items, then recheck the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator.
o The front passenger's seat is installed correctly.
o Nothing is/was on the front passenger's seat.
o Nothing is/was under the front paseenger's seat.
o Nothing is/was in the front paseenger's seat-back
pocket.
o Whoever was sitting on the front passenger's
seat was sitting in the proper sitting position.
o Someone who is more than 30 kg (66 Ibs) but is
supporting some of their body weight on their
legs, feet, arms, or hands.
Does the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stay
on?
YES-Go to step 2.
5. Select the INSPECTION menu on the HOS, then
select AFTER REPLACING FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT COMPONENT(S),and follows the problems.
on?
YES-Go to step 6.
6. Selectthe INSPECTION menu on the HOS, then
select AFTER A VEHICLE COLLISION, and follows
the prompts.
on?
(see page 24-152) .
24-133
BACK
SRS
Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment
NOTE:
Before doing any SRS repairs, .use the HDS SRS.
menu method to check for DTCs; refer tathe DTC
Troubleshooting Index for the less obvious deployed
parts (seat belt tensioners, front impact sensors, side
airbag sensors, etc.)
Do not replace the ODS unit unless it is physically
damaged or a specific fault was found during DTC
troubleshooting.
After a collision where the seat belt tensioners
deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
Seat belt tensioners
Front impact sensors
After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed,
replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed airbag(s)
Seat belt tensioners
Front impact sensors
After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed,
replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed side airbag(s)
Reinforcing cloth rear hooks
Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that
deployed
Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that
deployed
B-pillar lower trim
Complete seat frame
After a collision where the side curtain airbag(s)
deployed, replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed side curtain airbag(s)
Seat belt tensioner(s) for the side(s) that deployed
Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that
deployed
Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that
deployed
Satellite safing sensor
Roll rate sensor
Roof trim
A-pillar trim
B-pillar upper trim
Quarter pillar trim
Front grab handle
Rear grab handle
All related trim clips
Sunvisor
24-134
After a moderate to. severe side or rear collision, inspect
for any damage on the side curtain airbag or other
related components. Replace components as needed.
A-pillar trim
B-pillar trim
BACK
C-Pillar trim During the repair process, inspect thesa areas:
Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, do not
repair, any damaged harnesses .
Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any
damage, replace the cable reel.
After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for
about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS is OK .. lfthe
indicator does not function properly, use the HDS SRS
Menu Method to read the DTC (see page 24-30). If you
cannot retrieve a code, go to SRS Symptom
Troubleshooting.
(cont'd)
24-135
BACK
SRS
Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (cont'd)
Checking and Adjusting the Headliner IPiliar
Trim Overlap
To preventthe side curtain airbag from deploying and
damaging the pillar trim, the overlap between the
headliner and pillar trim must be less then 0.3 in.
(8 mm). To check the overlap, do this:
1. Install the headliner (A) and the pillar trim (B).
2. Using masking tape on the headliner, mark the
upper edge of each pillar trim.
24-136
3. Remove the pillar trim, and measure the headliner
overlap .
If the overlap is less than 0.3 in. (8 mm), remove
the tape, and install the pillar trim.
If the overlap is more than 0.3 in. (8 mm), go to
step 4.
4. Carefully trim the headliner with a utility knife,
reducing the overlap to less than 0.3 in. (8 mm).
5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar trim.
BACK
Driver's Airbag Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery and
wheel, then disconnectthe driver's airbag 4P
connector (B) and horn switch 1 P connector (C)
3. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the two TORX bolts
(A).
4. Remove the driver's airbag (B).
Installation
1. Connect the horn switch connector (1P) (A) to the
driver's airbag (B).
C
9.8Nm
(1.0
B
2. Place the driver's airbag in the steering wheel, and
secure it with new TORX bolts (C).
3. Connect the cable reel 4P connector (A) to the
driver's airbag 4P connector and horn switch 1 P
connector (B), then install the access panel (C) on
the steering wheel.
A
4. Connect the negative cable from the battery.
5. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation:
off.
o Make sure the horn works.
24-137
BACK
SRS
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement
Removal
NOTE: If the front passenger's airbag has been
deployed, refer to the install for after a collision where
the front passenger's airbag deployed.
connector (A) from dashboard wire harness.
4. Remove the bracket (A).
A
24-138
.' .. '
5. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and mounting bolts
(8) from the bracket. Remove the front passenger's
airbag (C).
c
BACK
Installation
1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the
bracket. Tighten the front passenger's airbag
mounting nuts (B) and mounting bolts (C).
2. Reinstall the bracket (0).
3. Connect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector
(A) to dashboard wire harness, then reinstall the
glove box (see page 20-125).
5. Connect the HOS and clear the OTCs.
6. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
24-139
BACK
SRS
Side Airbag Replacement
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before
performing repairs orservice (see page 20-141).
Removal
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P
connector (A).
3. Remove the seat assembly (see page 20-141) and
seat-back cover (see page 20-150).
NOTE: If you are replacing a deployed airbag,
replace the reinforcing cloth rear hooks.
4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side
airbag (B).
A
24-140
Installation
NOTE:
If the side airbag lid iss.ecuredwith tape, remove the
tape.
Do not open the lid on the side airbag cover.
Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified
torque.
Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed
properly. Improper installation may prevent proper
deployment.
Be sure to install the harne.ss wires so that they are
not pinched or interfering with other parts ..
1. Place the new side airbag on the s,eat-back frame
(A). Tighten the new side airbag mounting nut (B).
B
6.3Nm
(0.64 kgf.m,
4.65 Ibf ft)
removal (see page 20-150).
NOTE: If you are replacing a deployed airbag,
replace the reinforcing cloth rear hooks.
3. Install the seat assembly (see page 20-141), then
connect the side airbag harness 2P connector.
4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their
full ranges of movement, making sure the harness
wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
6. Connect the HDS, and clear the DTCs (see page
24-31).
7. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II);
the SRS indicator should come on for about 6
seconds and then go off.
BACK
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement
Removal
NOTE:
Review the interior trim replacement procedure before performing repair or service (see page 20-85).
Removal of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the
beginning of the SRS section (see page 24-20).
The side curtain airbag system consists ofthe side curtain airbag module, including the rooftrim, front grab handle,
rear grab handle, all grab handle brackets and shielding protector. After the side curtain airbag has been deployed,
replace these parts s e ~ page 20-134).
1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Disconnect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
A ~ O ~
~
Left side shown; right side is similar ..
(cont'd)
24-141
BACK
SRS
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the mounting bolts (A) and mounting bois (8) from the bracket. Detach the clips (e), then remove the side
curtain airbag (D).
D
Left side shown; right side similar.
24-142
A
Discard.
A B

B
BACK
Installation
NOTE:
Installation of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described at the
beginning ofthe SRS section (see page 24-20). .
If the airbag is frayed, or has any other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an airbag.
When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and that it is not caught between the inflator bracket by the
bracket bolts.
Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly. Otherwise the airbag could accidentally
deploy and cause damage or injuries.
1. Place the new side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof. Tighten the side curtain airbag mounting bolts
(A) and mounting bolts (8).
A
9.8Nm
B

.; (0.6 kgfm, 4.0 Ibfftl
A
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
Left side shown; right side similar.
B
6.0Nm
---A
9.8Nm
(cont'd)
24-143
BACK
SRS
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd)
2. Connect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) to the floor wire harness.
Left side shown; right side is similar.
4. Connect the HDS, and erase the DTCs (see page 24-31).
5. After installing the side curtain airbag,confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. Install all removed parts.
7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar trim overlap (see page 24-136).
24-144
BACK
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal
Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500
Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, side curtain
airbags, seat belt tensioners, or lap belt tensioner
(including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the
part(s) must be deployed. Ifthe vehicle is still within the
warranty period, the Acura District Parts and Service
Manager must give approval and/or special instruction
before deploying the part(s). Only after the part(s) have
been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for
example), can they be scrapped.
If the parts appear intact (not deployed), treat them with
extreme caution. Follow this procedure.
Deploying Airbags in the Vehicle
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its
airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, seat belt
tensioners, and lap belt tensioner should be deployed
while still in the vehicle. These parts should not be
considered as salvageable parts and should never be
installed in another vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, side curtain
airbag, seat belt tensioner, or lap belt tensioner is
securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning
properly by following the check procedure on the
tool label.
Driver's Airbag
wheel then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P
connector (B) from the cable reel.
Front Passenger's Airbag
5. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front
passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the
Side Airbag
6. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from
the floor wire harness.
(cont'd)
24-145
BACK
SRS
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd)
Side Curtain Airbag
from the side curtain airbag.
A
Seat Belt Tensioner
from the seat belt tensioner. Pull the seat belt out
all the way and cut it.
A
24-146
9. Cut off each connector, and strip the ends of the
wires. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires
together, and clip an alligator clip (A) from the
deployment tool to each pair. Place the deployment
tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the
vehicle.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags
have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike
colored wires together, and clip an -alligator clip to
each pair.
BACK
10. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool.
If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter
circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
component. Go to Disposal of Damaged
Components.
If the red light on the tool comes on, the
component is ready to be deployed.
11. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and
tensioners should deploy (deployment is both
highly audible and visible: A loud noise and rapid
inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the components deploy and the green light on
the tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
If a component does not deploy, and the green
light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to
Disposal of Damaged Components.
During deployment, the airbags can become hot
enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbags.
12. Dispose ofthe complete airbag. No part of it can be
reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal
it securely. Dispose ofthe deployed airbag
according to your local regulations.
Deploying Components Out of the Vehicle
If an intact airbag ortensioner has been removed from
a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or
damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be
deployed as follows:
1. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning
properly by following the check procedure
Deploying Airbags in the Vehicle on the tool label.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat
ground, at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any
obstacles or people.
3. Follow steps 9 through 12 ofthe in-vehicle
deployment procedure.
have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike
colored wires together, and clip an alligator clip to
each pair.
(cont'd)
24-147
BACK
SRS
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd)
Disposal of Damaged Components
1. If installed in a vehicle, followthe removal
procedure for the driver's airbag (see page 24-137),
front passenger's airbag (see page 24-138), side
airbag (see page 24-140), side curtain airbag
(see page 24-141), and seat belt tensioner (see page
24-4).
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting,
stripping, and twisting together the two inflator
wires.
have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the
individual inflators; Twist the like colored wires
together.
3. Package the component in exactly the same
packaging that the new replacement part came in.
4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG
NOT DEPLOYED," "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED," "DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
NOT DEPLOYED;" "DAMAGED SEAT BELT
TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get
confused with your parts stock.
5. Contact your Acura District Parts and Service
Manager for instructions on how and where to
return it for disposal.
Deployment Tool Check
1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector on
to a vehicle battery.
2. Then connect the red lead to the positive battery
post and the black lead to the negative battery post.
3. Push the operation switch: The green light should
come on, indicating that the tool is operating
properly and is ready for use. If the red light stays
on, the tool is faulty, and another one must be used
for the procedure.
4. Disconnect the tool and connectors from the
protector handles and the battery.
BACK
Cable Reel Replacement
Removal
1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight
ahead.
wait at least 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cable reel,
then remove the steering wheel bolt (8).
A
5. Confirm that the front wheels point straight ahead,
then remove the steering wheel with a steering
wheel puller (see step 6 on page 17-22).
Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
6. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove
the column covers (8, C).
(cont'd)
24-149
BACK
',<
SRS
Cable Reel Replacement (cont'd)
connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B),
then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P
connector (C) from the cable reel (D).
A
B
8. Release the lo<:k tab (A) under the cable reel
connector with a 90 0 hook shaped tool (B). Slide
the tool below the cable reel connector just above
the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and
slide the cable reel off the column.
B
24-150
Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front
wheels straight ahead.
2. If not already done, disconnect the negative cable
from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes.
3. Set the turn signal canceling sleeve (A) so that the
projections (B) are aligned vertically.
t
B
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering
column shaft. Then connect 13P or 5P connector (B)
to the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C)
to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D).
D
c
BACK
5. Install the steering column covers.
6. If necessary, center the cable reel (New
replacement cable reels come centered.). Do this
by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it
stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about three
turns) until the arrow mark (A) on the cable reel
label points straight up.
A
7. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal
canceling sleeve (8) as shown, and install the
steering wheel on to the steering column shaft,
making sure the steering wheel hub (e) engages
the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the turn
signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering
wheel or steering column shaft when installing the
steering wheel.
c
A
B D
8. Install a new steering wheel bolt (A), then
reconnect the connectors.
A
39Nm
(4.0 kgfm, 29,lbfttl
9. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-137).
11. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper
system operation:
off.
o After ,the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the
steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the
SRS indicator does not come on.
o Make sure the horn works.
o Make sure the cruise control buttons work.
o Make sure the steering wheel audio controls
works.
o Make sure the INFO/SEL buttons works.
24-151
BACK
SRS
SRS Unit Replacement
Removal
NOTE: If you are only disconnecting SRS unit connector
A, skip step 2.
step 7 on page 24-29) ..
on page 20-107) and passenger's center console
trim (see step 6 on page 20-107).
4. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, connector B,
connector C, and remove the TORX bolts (D), then
pull out the SRS unit.
o
24-152
Installation
1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with new TORX bolts
(B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit;
push them into position until they click.
NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely
against it's bracket before torquing the TORX bolt.
B
9.8Nm
2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see
4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system
operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
5. Reinstall all removed parts.
BACK
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement.; ""t
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procequre
(see page 20-141) before doing repairs or service.
Removal
wait at least 3 minutes before' beginning work.
2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P
3. Remove the front seat assembly (see page 20-141).
4. Remove the lower B-pillarlower trim panel
(see page 20-82).
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector.
from the side impact sensor (first).
6. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORXbolt(A),
then remove the side impact sensor (first) (B).
Installation
1. Install the new side impact sensor (fin"t) with toe
TORX bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness
2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (first).
9.8Nm
3. After installing the side impact sensor (first)
confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition
switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on
for about 6 seconds and then go off.
BACK
SRS
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement
Removal
wait at least 3 minutes before beginningwork.
2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector
from the side impact sensor (second).
5. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (A)
then remove the side impact sensor (second) (8).
24-154
Installation
1. Install the new side impact sensor (second) with the
TORX bolt (A) then connect floor wire harness 2P
connector (8) to the side impact sensor (second).
A
9.8Nm
3. After installing the side impact sensor (second),
confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition
switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on
for about 6 seconds and then go off.
BACK
Roll Rate Sensor Replacement
Removal
2. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors
from the roll rate sensor.
5. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt(B)
then remove the roll rate sensor (C).
Installation
1. Install the new roll rate sensor with the TORK
bolts (A) then connect the floor wire harness ~
connector (B) to the roll rate sensor (C).
B
A
9.8Nm
11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfftl
4. After installing the roll rate sensor, confirm proper
the SRS indicator should come on for about
6 seconds and then go off.
2 4 ~ 5 5
BACK
Satellite Safing Sensor Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnectthe negative cable from the battery, and
wait'atleast 3 minutes before beginning work.
2. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors
3. Remove the second row seat (see pag(;l20-156).
from the satellite safing sensor.
5. Remove the TORX bolt (B) 'using a TOTX T30 bit,
then remove the satellite safing sensor (C).
2 4 ~ 5 6
Installation
1. Install the new satellite safing sensor with the
TORX bolt (A) then connect the floor wire harness
4P connector (B) to the satellite safing sensor (C).
B
\
A
9.8 Nm' ,
3. After installing the satellite safing sensor, confirm
proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about
4. 'Install all removed parts.
BACK
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement
Removal
NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors
must be performed according to the precautions/
procedures described atthe beginning ofthe SRS
section (see page 24-20).
2. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly
(see page 20-141).
3. Remove the front cover, recline cover, and center
cover (see page 20-144).
4. Disconnect the sensor connector's (A) from the
ODS unit harness, then remove the mounting nuts
(B) and mounting bolts (C) from weight sensors (D).
A c
B
c
5. Disconnect the sensOr connectors (D) from the ODS
unit harness, then remove the front passenger's
weight sensors.
Installation
NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are
not pinched or interfere with other parts.
1. Install the new front passenger's weight sensors
with mounting nuts (A) and neW mounting bolts (B)
under the seat cushion.
B
A
2. Reinstall the front passenger's seat (see page
20-141 ).
4. Calibrate the ODS unit (see page 24-34).
5. After installing the front passenger's weight
sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the
ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should
come ON for about 6 seconds and then go off.
24-157
BACK
SRS
ODS Unit Replacement
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure'
(see page 20-141) before doing repairs or service.
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative cablefrOrri the battery, and
2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag harness 2P
3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly (see page
20-141) and seat-back cover (see page 20-150).
4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the ODS
unit 18P connector (8) and sensor connectors (C)
from the ODS unit (D).
D
c B
5. Remove the two screws (E) and the ODS unit.
24-158
Installation
1. Place the new ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame.
Tighten the two screws (8), and connect the ODS
unit harness 18P connector (C) and sensor
connectors (D) to the ODS unit. Reinstall the cover
(E).
A
D C
removal (see page 20-150).
3. Install the seat assembly (see page 20-141), then
connect the side airbag harness 2P connector.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make
sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
7. After installing the ODS unit, confirm proper
the SRS indicator should come on for about
BACK
Front Impact Sensor Replacement
Removal
2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (see
step 2 on page 24-28), the front passenger's airbag
4P connector (see step 3 on page 24-28), and both
seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (see step 7 on
page 24-29).
4. Disconnect the left or right engine compartment
wire harness 2P connector (A). Using aTORX T30
bit, remove the TORX bolts (B), then remove the
front impact sensor (C).
Installation
1. Install the new front impact sensor with a new
TORX bolts. (At then connect the left or right engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the
front impact sensor (C).
9.8Nm
3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm
proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about
24-159
BACK
, ..
SRS
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement
Removal
NOTE:
Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be
performed according to the precautions/procedures
described at the beginning of SRS section (see page
24-20).
Do not turn the ignition switch oN (II), and do not
connect the battery cable while removing the driver's
seat position sensor.
2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (see
3. Remove the driver's seat assembly (see page
20-141).
4. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P
connector (A)from the driver's seat position sensor.
A
5. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the TORX bolt (B),
then remove the driver's seat position sensor.
24-160
Installation
NOTE:
Be sure to install the harness so it does not pinched
or interfere with other parts.
Do not turn the ignition switch,ON (II), and do not
connect the battery cable while installing the driver's
seat position sensor;
After installing the driver's seat position sensor,
make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust.
1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a
TORX bolt (A), then connect the driver's seat wire
harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position
sensor (B).
A
9.8Nm
B
2. Install the driver's seat assembly (see page 20-141 ).
4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position
sensor with the HDS (see page 24-36).
BACK
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test
1. Remove the dashboard center panel (see page
20-121).
passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B).
B
3. Push out the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
from behind the center panel (C).
terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity,
replace the bulbs (D).
NOTE: Both illumination bulbs are connected in
parallel. If there is continuity, remove the lower,
hazard switch illumination bulb, and recheck for
continuity. If there is no continuity, replace the
upper, passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
illumination bulb.
5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.
24-161
BACK

Byfa (MDX)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Byfa (MDX)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

@

kgfm. 8.7 Ibfft)

SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION

Вам также может понравиться